*· COPIOUS GREEK GRAMMAR BY AUGUSTUS MATTHIAS f' DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY, DIRECTOR OF THE GYMNASIUM, AND LIBRARIAN OF THE DUCAL LIBRARY AT ALTENBURG ; HONORARY MEMBER OF THE ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AT ERFURT, OF THE LATIN SOCIETY AT JENA, AND OF THE SOCIETE DES SCIENCES ET ARTS, AT MENTZ. TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN v J BY EDWARD VALENTINE BLOMFIELD, M. A LATE FELLOW OF EMMANUEL COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. IN TWO VOLUMES. .OS To* ,i li,J , ·) YOL. I. ‘ τ< * ' ΤίηΤί·' sb & SECOND EDITION. *%■ ■■ <-y '··· /."-av ’·'.W-\V'.\ OlinP CAMBRIDGE: * * ■*’ V. Printed by J. Smith, Printer to the University; FOR JOHN MURRAY, A LBEM A RLE-8TREET, LONDON. 1820 I ' i v / < < i* f I - » * \ 4 · · 132995 j il; . S* I ■ I ■ s' . J*V rl j HIS REVERED FRIEND, PROFESSOR WYTTENBACH OF LEYDEN, mi# affitorfc, IS DEDICATED » WITH A GRATEFUL RECOLLECTION OF HIS INSTRUCTIVE INTERCOURSE WITH HIM, BY THE AUTHOR. . . .oiiV . (. t ι · > **· ;iai . I ,.· ·' . ■ • ^ I ■ ,'J *« ■ φ ·* y\ t: ."! t k «*?l • · ■ m, ‘ I - .·· I - ** ■····:*'’''- Λ I - ** τ ■'·. * L -4 , ii / <>. ,*T*s» ■V C . . ι % * ' • · . :%>4 : - ' — · ,. Τ' I- - / - . · T ■ : ■' ■ . ·>^ > I ■ - 4 * . » * » · «► ; ti /. /, v '•u- • i i * 1 THE EDITOR’S PREFACE. The Greek Grammar, of which a Translation is here presented to the public, enjoys a high and deserved reputation amongst the Scholars of the Continent. In perspicuity of arrangement, in ful¬ ness of exemplification, and in philosophical views of general grammar, it is far superior to all publi¬ cations of the same nature which had preceded it. More especially in the Second Part, which treats of Syntax, the deficiencies of former treatises are supplied, in the most learned and satisfactory manner. Indeed, the Second Volume forms a complete manual of Greek philology, which will be found eminently serviceable to the learner, who has made some progress in the study of this noble language, and not without its use, even to the finished scholar. The various lights, which the erudition and sagacity of modern philologists have scattered upon the difficulties, or the beauties of the Greek tongue, are there concentrated, and * · a I ii editor's preface. brought to bear with their united force upon the illustration of it’s syntax. I am far from belie¬ ving, that the genius of this noble and copious lan¬ guage is even yet perfectly understood. We are still obliged to have recourse, in the way of expla¬ nation, to many gratuitous suppositions, and un- philosophical shifts, for which grammarians have invented fine names, that serve as circumlocutions to express our ignorance of the real causes and reasons of the peculiarities which we would ex¬ plain* We meet with .a dative case, where the laws of construction require a genitive, and it is considered to be a sufficient account of the matter. if we say, that it is per schema Colophonium . A word is used in a way which violates the analogy of language; we satisfy ourselves with remarking a catachresis. For unaccountable changes in the forms of words, rnetaplasmus is the panacea. It is scarcely possible to calculate the mischief, which has been done to knowledge of all kinds, by the invention of technical terms. In the first instance, they facilitate the acquisition of a science; but afterwards they have a natural tendency to stop the progress of research and improvement; because men are generally disposed to acquiesce in an established nomenclature, without considering the principles upon which it was originally formed. Thus even the necessary terms of grammar, which t editor’s preface. Ill we imbibe almost with our mother’s milk, be¬ come so familiar to our ears, that we are seldom led to investigate, by the philosophy of language, their precise signification, 6r the justice of that classification of which they are the generic ex¬ pressions* In this respect, however, a great improvement has taken place, during the last hun¬ dred years. Philosophy, in that period, has taken rapid strides. The operations of the human mind have been examined with an accuracy as great, perhaps, as the present state of our faculties permits. And consequently the principles of language, which are intimately connected with metaphysical researches, have been laid down with a degree of precision altogether unknown to the ancients. As to the grammarians, the further we go back, the more unreasonable and absurd we find them to be. They had no fixed princi¬ ples to guide them ; and they are in consequence perpetually differing from one another, and from P " a ' 1 ^ # themselves. The oldest complete grammar is that of Dionysius, called the Thracian; and that is contained in twenty-five short sections, occu¬ pying no more than fourteen octavo pages; un¬ less, indeed, that which Mr. Bekker has published from the MS. be only the epitome of a much larger work. Small as it is, however, it abounds TV editor’s preface. with minute and perplexing distinctions. The Scholia upon this treatise occupy more than 300 pages; and are a precious specimen of gramma¬ tical trifling, interspersed here and there with useful remarks. The remains which we have of Apollonius Dyscolus, the most subtle and learned of the old grammarians, of Choeroboscus, Joannes Philoponus, Moschopulus, and others, are all, in a greater or less degree, of the same character. The Grammar of Constantinus Lascaris is a col¬ lection of bare rules. The first persons, who made any material improvement in the mode of treating the subject, were Henry Stephens, and his pupil, Γ. Sylburgius, whose remarks on the Greek Gram¬ mar of Clenardus are full of learning, especially his Syntaxews Compendium. But although Syl¬ burgius did much towards the classification of the language, he did not materially simplify the grammar. Angelus Caninius, in his Hellenismus a. 1555, gave the first accurate account of the dialects. It was Laurentius Rhodomannus, who first reduced all Greek nouns under three declen¬ sions. This improvement, which is mentioned, says Morhof, in the Philomusus of Rhodomannus, was afterwards claimed by Weller, who intro¬ duced it in his Grammar, first published in 1β30, as also the reduction of ^11 the conjugations into editor’s preface. V one. The merit of having first simplified the de¬ clensions was likewise arrogated by Claude Lance¬ lot, the author of the Greek Grammar, commonly called. The Port Royal. He borrowed it, no doubt, from Wellers book, which had been published but a few years before. The Port Royal Grammar is divided into nine books, and these books into a multiplicity of detached rules, abound¬ ing in mistakes, and illustrated by examples taken from writers of inferior authority. Weller and Verwey made considerable progress towards sim¬ plification ; but much remained to be done. A great accession was made to grammatical know¬ ledge in the remarks of Fischer upon Wellers treatise, in three volumes octavo; in which the author has collected, with great industry, a vast variety of examples, adding many new observa¬ tions of his own. Much light was thrown upon the structure and origin of the language by the mm· v , λ i sagacity and erudition of Hemsterhuys, who sup¬ posed that the primary verbs consisted of two or three letters, from which all the other forms and inflexions were derived. So much, indeed, was he thought by some to have effected in this way, that his pupil Ruhnken says of him, denique tene - bras lingucc per tot scecula offusas ita discus sit, tit y qua lingua nulla ‘ est neque verbis, neque VI editor’s preface. for mis, copiosior, eadein jam nulla repeviatur ad discendum facilior * That there is considerable truth in the etymological theory of Hemsterhuys, it is impossible to deny. But that it has been pursued to too great an extent, is no less certain. One obvious and unanswerable objection to it’s universality is the undoubted fact, that much of the Greek language, together with it’s written characters, was borrowed from some Asiatic na¬ tions. This theory, the first intimations of which had been given long before, by Scaliger and Is. Vossiusf, (and of which the old grammarians seem to have had some notion), was never ex¬ plained by Hemsterhuys in a distinct work; but it was generally received by that tribe of eminent scholars, of whom the most distinguished were Valckenaer, Ruhnken, Lennep : and it was applied to the Hebrew language by the celebrated Albert Schultens. The principles of the theory were laid down by Valckenaer, in his Observationes ad Origines Grcecas, a treatise which, like the Ana - logia of Lennep, was for many years well known in manuscript, before it’s publication, which did not take place till after his death, in the year } 790. * Elog. T. Hemster/iusii. p. 41. f De Natura Rhythmi , p. 44. See Morhof’s Poly hist or I. p. 775. editor’s preface. Vll Valckenaer was the scholar of Hemsterhuys, and the tutor of John Daniel von Lennep, who prose¬ cuted the notions of his illustrious predecessors, in his Prcelectiones Academicce de Analogia Linguce Grcecoe, and in his Observationes ad Origines Lin - guce Grcecce. In the last mentioned work, his notions are often very fanciful, and afford an ex¬ ample of the abuse of a useful instrument. He is, however, far outdone by his editor, Everard Scheide, whose absurdities are only matched by the senseless trifling of the ancient etymologists. The plausibility of this theory has also misled the present learned and excellent Bishop of St. Davids, who, in his Appendix to the Miscel¬ lanea Critica of Dawes, has pushed the sim¬ plification of etymology much too far. In fact there can be no doubt, but that the theory of Hemsterhuys has been perverted in a man¬ ner which he never dreamt of. Lord Bacon ob¬ serves ; “ Primo autem minime probamus curio- sam illam inquisitionem, quam tamen Plato, vir eximius non contempsit; nimirum de impositione et originali etymologia nominum; supponendo ac si ilia jam a principio ad placitum indita minime fuissent, sed ratione quadam et significanter deri- vata et deducta: materiam certe elegantem, et quasi ceream, quag apte firigi et flecti possit; quoniam vero editor’s preface. • ♦ · via antiquitatum penetralia perscrutari videtur, etiam quodammodo yenerabilem; sed nihilominus parce veram, et fructu cassam*.” This remark is in great measure true of the etymological systems above-mentioned. ♦ A philosophical view of Greek Grammar was taken by the celebrated Godfrey Hermann, in his treatise de emendanda ratione Greece Grammatics, in which, however, he may be thought to have trusted too much to metaphysical principles, and the universa sermonis natura. For it is to be remembered, that the Greek language grew up by degrees, and was drawn from various sources ; and that it had acquired a high degree of consistency and polish, before any attention was paid to the language itself, as a language. In how great a degree of uncertainty the Greeks themselves were, about the origin and genius of their own tongue, we may perceive from the Cratylus of Plato. The natural consequence of this order of proceeding was, that many anomalies continued to subsist in that language, for which it is very difficult to account upon any principles of universal grammar. Still less are they to be explained, according to the * De Augm. Scient. VI. I. j editor's preface, ix \ established rules of Greek Grammar, which have themselves been drawn from the national usage, as it is to be collected from the surviving works of the authors who wrote in it. The following is a sen¬ sible observation of the Scholiast on Dionysius Thrax; “ The producing cause of grammar is indi¬ stinctness. For men, meeting with poems and prose compositions, themselves no longer preserving the ancient and polished language, sought for some art which might explain this language to them/’ * There are two kinds of Grammar, according to the distinction laid down by Lord Bacon, the literary, and the philosophical; the former treating of the analogy of words to one another; the latter, of the analogy between words and things. Now if we set out in our researches, by laying down a certain number of general principles, drawn from a consideration of philosophical grammar alone; and then proceed to explain any individual lan- * Αίτιον ούυ της γραμματικής ή άσάφεια. και yap οι άνθρωποι εντυγχάνοντες ποιήμασι και πεζοίς συγγράμμασι, την άρχαίαν και άπεζεσμενην φωνήν ούκ άποσωζοντες, επεζή- τησαν τέχνην την σαφηνίσαι ταύτην $νι/αμενην. p. '6o6 f 1 ο· ed. Bekker. / X EDITOR S PREFACE. guage by them, we soon find, that we must either desert our guide, or have recourse to very unnatural expedients, to make the literaria agree with the philosophica. Some devices of this na¬ ture have been resorted to, even by the learned author of this grammar; but rarely, and always with ingenuity. That the generalizing processes of philosophical grammar, unless they be applied with great judgment and caution, serve rather to obscure and perplex, than to clear up and simplify, is a truth which the reader has seen exemplified in Harris's Hermes. It appears to me that several anomalies subsist in the fireek language, of which no good account can be given, except that they are the remains of an age, in which the poets, for the sake of euphony, or from inattention, neg¬ lected the laws of analogy which ought to regulate the construction of words. This was very likely to happen amongst a people, who had no written works; if indeed it be true, which after all is very doubtful, that writing was not in use till after Homer’s time. / · H * ■ ’ At _ In order that the young student may not be perplexed by some expressions which he will meet with in the present work, it seems necessary to editor's preface. XI premise a few observations. Every complex idea, which admits of definition, consists of three parts ; the subject, the predicate, and that which con¬ nects them; e. g. man is mortal. Man is the » subject, mortal that which is predicated of him, • is the connecting link. Every proposition, ap¬ parently bipartite, may be resolved into a triple / ' enunciation, as man breathes , i. e. man is brea¬ thing . These three parts are called, subject , predi¬ cate , and copula. And hence words, which are the symbols of ideas, should be reducible to three classes, corresponding to the triple division of ideas. Some of the ancients, and amongst them Theodectes,* taught that there were three parts • . of speech, nouns , verbs , and connecting particles , which last Quintilian calls convinctiones. I under¬ stand them to have meant by this last term, those particles of condition, which must necessarily be coupled with some subject; and if so, their ac¬ count of the matter will coincide with that of * Quintilian 1. 4. says Aristotle ; but in his Poetics, c. 20. (34. ed. Tyrwhitt), he seems to make four parts of speech; unless, as I am inclined to think, the σύνδεσμός and the άρθρον may both be included under the συμπλοκή , which he speaks of in the Categories, as connecting subject and predicate. See Harris’s Hermes, p. 34. i χϋ . editor’s preface. Hermann,* viz. that the parts of speech are three ; first the noun, which is the symbol of the subject; secondly the particle, or sign of the predicate, which expresses a condition that exists not independently, but only as belonging to a thing; and thirdly, the verb, which denotes the copula , and connects the predicate with the subject. According to this account, adjectives belong to the noun, or sign of the subject: adverbs, interjections, preposi¬ tions, and conjunctions, belong to the particle, or sign of the predicate. Adjectives properly serve for definitions of the subject, and do not, strictly speaking, enter into the predicate. Thus when we say the man is good , it is a short ex¬ pression for the man is a good man , where two subjects are coupled together by the verb substan¬ tive; but if we say, the man is well , we have a complete proposition, man the subject, well the predicate, is the copula. This is a different ac¬ count from that given in the common books of logic and grammar. Hermann is of opinion, that we must attribute it to a defect of language, that an adjective so frequently occurs in the predicate. Our own language furnishes us with several in¬ stances, where the predicate is expressed by an * De Em. Gr. Gr. p. 127. editor’s preface. x»n adverb. He is finely. The horse is well enough. So in Greek κατΰπερθε yevecdai, &c. See §. 308 . This division, however, is not followed in the present Grammar. I have now only to give a short account of the translation here offered to the public. It was nearly finished about three years ago, by the Rev. E. V. Blomfield, M. A. Fellow of Em¬ manuel College, Cambridge. Had he lived to carry it through the press, it might have been in some respects a work of more finished execu¬ tion than it may now, perhaps, be found to be. I mean with regard to the language of the transla¬ tion. But he was called away from his career of promise at an early age ; and those who knew him well, can estimate the loss which classical literature has suffered by his death. To an extensive familia¬ rity with the languages of modern Europe, he joined a critical knowledge of those of Greece and Rome. The distinguished success which attended his classical studies at the University, was a suffi¬ cient attestation of his scholarship as a young man; and the Greek and English Lexicon, which he was preparing for the press, would, if he had lived to complete his undertaking, have established his I editor’s preface. xiv reputation at a maturer age. The reader will forgive the affectionate regret which prompts this tribute to the memory of a brother, whose intel- \ iectual attainments, although eminent, were yet surpassed by the excellent qualities of his heart; in whom the accomplishments of the scholar and the artist were heightened and improved by all the gentler feelings of humanity, and by the gifts and graces of a Christian life. nunquam ego te, vita frater amabilior, Aspiciam posthac ? at certe semper amabo. He did not live to revise his translation,' which had been chiefly performed in the spring of 1816, and which he intended to complete and correct, after his return from the Continent, in the autumn of that year. But he was seized, immediately upon his return, with a fever, which carried him off in a few days. If he had been permitted to resume his task, the work would have been more perfect, than I have been able to make it, with a slender knowledge of the original language. Any inaccuracies which may be found in the Indexes, Notes, and Addenda, which last I have incorporated m their proper places, are to be attributed to me. I have subjoined to the Preface such remarks. editor’s preface. I XV as I judged it expedient to make upon several points in this Grammar; for some of which I am indebted to a Review, published in a foreign journal, and written, as I suppose, by Prosessor , Hermann. Chesterfordy April , 1819 - C. J. B. f t κ \ i / \ I F' . r , * > \ "· *· · · · · ' >’ . ' ?. Γ. ■· ■ ■■ 4 < ■ ■ ’ Λ ■ ■ /■'·* ” ’ i i · \ ; . v : ■ ;·': r : · .Λ· r i"; ■ ^ '■· r . :·'■■;· P ‘ *■ :i .· ·: ·, . : J r * . ; \’ · • -s, · 4 * v * · . . :7't ■ *· . ...-••Vi s : K I • ill * 1 hw >i . : If it Hi r > / ' ♦ • ncI ft j {JO 0 . ’< W J I') . ; ; f PREFACE. v I At a period when philosophy aspires to approach the standard of Plato, and the literature of Germany is emulating the models which Greece has left to us ; when too the knowledge of the Greek language has been so materially advanced by the efforts of the Scho¬ lars of Holland, England, and Germany, I conceived that a Grammar of Greek, more copious, and more adapted to practice than any that have yet appeared, would be a work of no small utility; and that such a Grammar would be calculated to effect, for the Greek language, what the Grammar of Scheller has done for the Latin. We have not, indeed, of late years been deficient in Greek Grammars; but they are chiefly employed in treating of the elementary parts. More especially, since the method of Lennep has found fol¬ lowers in Germany, and every one has laid claim to the praise of a philosophical genius, in proportion as he deviated from the old method, and attached himself to the new one, the department of Syntax has been neg¬ lected, and eonfined entirely to the eommon rules. b xvm PREFA CE. Even the Grammar of Buttmann, which undoubtedly claims the first rank amongst those which have ap¬ peared more recently, is but meagre in the department of Syntax, and although it contains many excellent observations upon the common rules, and many philoso¬ phical views, yet it embraces too small a proportion of those philological remarks, which are necessary to a grammatical acquaintance, even with the authors, who are-on the confines of school learning. The Grammar of Weckherlin is more complete in this respect; but the rules are given confusedly, without any regard to their natural connexion, and delivered without sufficient pre¬ cision, and very rarely proceed from an acquaintance with the spirit of the language: the elementary part also is treated of in a very unsatisfactory manner. I intended this Grammar not so much for beginners in Greek (for whom, as well as for the use of schools in general, a smaller Grammar, being an abridgement of the greater one, will shortly be published*), as for those who study the classical Greek authors critically and grammatically, and are desirous of gaining a more intimate knowledge of the several parts, together with a general view of the language. It was intended to be a manual, which should contain the result of philolo¬ gical researches up to the present time, in a manner as complete as my abilities might permit, and as precise and clear as possible. Hence it was my endeavour to * This Grammar has already appeared. XIX PREFACE. render both parts of the Grammar equally perfect, and hence both have the same degree of fulness: but in the second part I was obliged to add considerably more i / of my own observations, than in the first, in which so much had already been effected by others. In a Greek Grammar the same things are requisite, in my opinion, as in a Latin one: that it should contain, on the one hand, full directions for the explanation of the authors in that language, as far as this depends upon the knowledge of the materials of the language; and on the other hand also, an introduction to writing Greek; an exercise, which, in modern times, has been so often recommended as useful for every learner of Greek, and as indispensable for the Philologist, that I think it cannot be necessary for me to add any obser¬ vation on the subject. My first object was, therefore, to render the remarks on the language as perfect as possible; as well those which belong to the grammatical rules, as those which concern the Syntax : and of this at least I am certain, that I have brought together more than has been done in any other grammatical work whatever; although I fear that here and there much has been omitted, which would be required for absolute perfection. However, the chapters on the particles, I have compressed into a shorter space than the rest, be¬ cause I thought, that in a Grammar it was only neces¬ sary to explain what concerns construction ; although in the mean time I could not resist the temptation of adding much that properly belongs to distinct treatises on the particles, but which lay directly in my way. * b <2 XX PREFACE. The rules of the language can be rendered clear only by suitable examples to each rule, taken from classical authors. Such examples, in the Grammars which have hitherto appeared, have generally been wanting ; or the collection has been deficient, scanty, or partial. This deficiency may, indeed, be supplied in some respects by Fischer’s very valuable Animad - versiones ad Welleri Gr. But even this estimable work is neither perfect in the department of Syntax, nor convenient for the use even of the real scholar. I perused, therefore, the classical Greek authors again; and formed for myself a collection of examples, from which I made a selection for the purposes of this Gram¬ mar. By these means many observations occurred to me, during the perusal, which I had not seen before ; or which at least were not anywhere distinctly stated; together with combinations, which threw light upon a whole class of rules, or confirmed individual, doubtful, or suspicious cases. It was only when 1 found, in the I . compilation of the Grammar itself, that I had over¬ looked a peculiarity of language or expression, or, be- » * cause it was a well-known form or turn, had neglected to mention an instance of it, that I permitted myself to supply the requisite examples from Fischer’s work, or from the remarks of the editors of single authors. But Ϊ made a selection of the authors themselves. As in v . N ' ' . a Latin Grammar it is not usual to accompany each observation with quotations from every author indiscri¬ minately, but from the Classics only, so I judged that this Grammar ought to be made an illustration of the o PREFACE. XXI usage of Greek, in the period of its vigour and purity, before the time of Alexander: 1 therefore thought it right to depart from the custom of most editors, who are too ready to take their instances from the later Sophists and Poets, from Philostratus, Themistius, Libanius, Alciphron, Aristaenetus; from the Antho- logia, &c. although the necessary examples can only bear the stamp of genuineness, when they are drawn from the models which those authors copied. The circle of writers whom I read and collected from for this purpose, closes with the age of Alexander*. In the Syntax I have designedly avoided quoting examples from Aristotle, or from Apollonius Rhodius, Callima¬ chus, Lucian, &c. except when a passage in them was capable of being illustrated by its connexion with a passage in another writer. Theocritus, however, as the model of the Doric dialect, and as an original author, and Apollonius Rhodius, afforded many remains of Epic forms, which were of importance to the elementary part. In a manual like this, together with the examples from the authors themselves, there ought to be found refer¬ ences to those passages in the works or remarks of later philologists, where single rules are explained. * The learned author, however, quotes the προς Δ ημόνικον Παραίκ- σα > which is commonly attributed to Isocrates the elder; but which, in my opinion, Muretus (v. L. I. 1.) has rightly considered to be the pro¬ duction of a much later writer. Ruhnken, upon the authority of Harpo- cratio and Suidas, assigns it to Isocrates of Apollonia, the disciple and successor of Isocrates of Athens. It seems to me, both in style and construction, to bear the marks of a more recent age. C, J. B. I XXII PREFACE. and sometimes more in detail. Such passages often contain the ground, or the confirmation of my views. Frequently, however, I thought it necessary to dissent from the representation of other philologists. The reason of such deviation is, for the most part, easily discovered in the instances which are subjoined. I sel¬ dom thought it expedient to discuss at full length the several reasons which determined me; or to refute the various modes of explanation pursued by others; wish¬ ing to avoid the reproach of having indulged too much in controversy· In delivering* the rules themselves, I have endea¬ voured to be as precise as possible; taking, as my standard, the wants of the very earliest beginners. From my practice during many years of explaining the chief rules of Greek Syntax, not merely in the occa¬ sional illustration of Herodotus, Thucydides, Xenophon, and other authors, but in the exercises of my scholars in Greek composition, I succeeded by degrees, in com¬ prising the rules in such terms, that for the most part no doubt should remain about the application of them. One principal object was, to detail all those remarks on the Greek language in their natural connexion, and, according to fundamental and leading principles ; as far as these may be settled and established by a general view of the language, as matter of historical fact; not as a matter of speculation deduced from practice ; . at the same time paying regard to the gradual developement of • · · r PREFACE, XXlll the language. The simplification of variety is not merely a product of philosophising reason, but is the foundation of all the operations of the understanding, even in the vulffar and unscientific of mankind : an endeavour after simplicity is the original and innate tendency of the Understanding, although the way by which this simpli¬ city is sought, and the specific mode of simplifying this variety, depend upon the determining causes, which proceed from the nature of the formation, and the peculiar disposition of a nation ; and hence they are not always consonant with a pure philosophical mode of retracing the aforesaid variety on one principle. In no nation does this endeavour after simplification ap¬ pear more evident than in the Greek, because no nation was more free and independent of foreign influence, or more favourably situated for improvement, with regard to external circumstances, in its constitution, religious sentiments, and extensive cultivation of know- 9 ledge; in which latter respect, its advancement was commensurate with the powers of the mind. In the study of Greek it is particularly incumbent on the philological inquirer, to arrange the different individual appearances themselves, with reference to the leading principles which are their common foundation; and to simplify them, without permitting to himself any other conjectures, than such as are to be deduced from facts, or those which derive confirmation from facts. This, therefore, was my object; as it is more or less that of every author of a Grammar. I have pro- * XXIV PREFACE. , / ceeded upon a perpetual analog} 7 of the language, especially as exhibited in what is called the etymologi¬ cal part, by Hemsterhuys and Valckenaer, with a philo¬ sophical mind, of which scarcely a trace is to be found in the more extended works of Lennep and his German followers. Whether I have been true to this idea generally and throughout, and how far I have succeeded in thus reducing the several peculiarities of the lan¬ guage to this principle, and in explaining and deducing them from each other, must be left to the judgment of those, who possess an accurate knowledge of the several \ parts* and are able to take a comprehensive view of the whole language, and of its genius. This explanation and deduction could not be drawn from principles, which the man of science, or the philosopher, who sets about inventing a language, would lay down; but it was to be accomplished in a language already existing, which gradually developed itself from the genius of the Greeks, and from their mutual intercourse, under all the external relations and circumstances of seve¬ ral nations, belonging to one stock ; and this could only \ be effected by comparing together the several pecu¬ liarities. both of forms and modes of construction ; and ·■ · 1 · * either reducing them to a common original (e. g. in the dative plural of the third declension §. 75. in the second fut. §. 173. in the genitive §. 315. 322, &c. in the use of the relatives, instead of various conjunctions §. 479· in the distinction of the infinitive and participle §. 530, &c.) or in finding in one a cause, often merely acci¬ dental, of the others. The Attic dialect exhibited . \ PREFACE. XXV i the Greek language in its finest bloom and highest perfection ; and hence, as well as from the greater num¬ ber and value of authors in it, this dialect demands the chief consideration; this dialect, however, itself arose from the Ionic, and took from others many forms and inflexions, which can hardly be illustrated without reference to their source or their cause in other dialects. I have . * j f · J / ^ · i , y f . · tJ t * therefore endeavoured to conceive the language as a whole, which is determined within itself, and whose se¬ veral parts again mutually determine each other. The various forms of the words, and their inflexions, as well as the various modes of construction, were to be consi¬ dered, in their relation with the oldest forms and in¬ flexions which occur in the oldest authors ; and if any of them appeared to be different branches of one root, this common root was to be investigated. This indeed for the most part can be supplied only by hypothesis; for instance, in the case of Valckenaer’s enumeration of the radical forms, the deviation of the various forms of verbs from the original §. 217 — 221 . and in Hermann’s illustra¬ tion of the origin of the two futures, which 1 have adopted entire 173. Hypotheses, however, are sufficient for our purpose, if they serve to fix any point upon certain data, without any other assumption; especially if they assist simplification. Thus it is not an erro¬ neous mode of proceeding, if, in aid of derivation, we make use of forms which never occur, which perhaps were never in use; but which yet are in perfect analogy with other acknowledged forms; if, as I have carefully done, we state accurately what was really in use, and what is merely assumed. Thus many compa- I XXVi PREFACE. ratives are explained §. isi. Rem. and forms of verbs ; for instance, in the derivations from σκάλλω , σκηλω> p. 363. Frequently the Greeks appear merely to have assumed a form, in order to derive from it another, from an analogy which it bore to others ; without giving any reason to conclude that the imaginary form was ever in actual use at all. I have attempted many explana¬ tions on this plan : in most cases I have thus consi¬ dered the fut. 2. as merely an imaginary basis for the aorist 2. and perfect 2. in common use; and thus the verbals άφεκτεος or others from εκτεος, necessarily sup¬ pose a form εΐκται (perfect, p. from εχω), although I am far from supposing that such a form was ever in use. Frequently also a form, or an idiomatic usage, appears to have an accidental or arbitrary origin. Thus Her¬ mann has explained the forms εχω, εσγον, σχεΓι/, βττομαι, σπεσθαι. See §. 219 · IV. 36. §. 233. 234. and in the same manner I have endeavoured to explain the forms είρηκα, ερρεθην, ρητωρ (§. 231. under ειττεΐν) the impera¬ tives τεθναθι, εσταθι , and others (§. 219· IV. 3. a.) and some in the Syntax. I have, however, throughout gone upon the principle, that all peculiarities of the Greek language have their origin only in the language itself, and are to be illustrated from it, without suf¬ fering a comparison with any other language (the Latin for instance) to have any influence in this respect. The preponderance which the Latin has maintained over the Greek, among the learned of modern Europe, has not been without a disadvantageous influence upon the elu¬ cidation of both languages: on the one hand it was thought necessary to bring the Greek Syntax nearer to PREFACE. XXVll that of the Latin; and hence modes of illustration were invented for the one, which at best were suited only to the other; hence the adoption of so many, and for the most part, groundless, ellipses and other aids: but on the other hand, the Latin was considered as an original language, and as those, who laboured at the Grammar of it, seldom possessed a fundamental and comprehen¬ sive knowledge of Greek, in endeavouring to illustrate the various peculiarities of Latin composition, they had recourse to the strangest expedients, instead of seeking for the cause of them in the Greek. I cannot expect that my method of illustration will meet with equal approba¬ tion from every one, or in all its several parts ; depend¬ ing as it does, upon the combination of individual parts under one point of view, and on their reduction to one uniform system, each of which parts is first to be found by successive observations, and not to be grounded on the original principles of reason; it must happen that different individuals will take dif¬ ferent views of the subject. Indeed on various points, I am myself yet doubtful; and on others, as in the dis¬ position of the manifold references which the genitive expresses, I am still distant from the most general point of view, which should unite the four principal classes und'er which I have comprehended those references. But still I preferred reducing the different remarks to some degree of uniformity, imperfect and incor¬ rectly founded as it might be, to producing them in a random and promiscuous manner^ as has hitherto been the case in most instances. 4 i xxviii PREFACE. In consequence of this notion of a perpetual ana¬ logy of the Greek, in both its parts, which 1 intended to pursue in this Grammar, and which I have here endeavoured to illustrate, I could not follow the analogy, as it is called, of Lennep or Trendelenburg, a theory which is neither founded on philosophical views, nor facilitates in any degree the learning of the Greek lan¬ guage. I at least cannot possibly consider it as a philosophical mode of proceeding, when, for instance, the various tenses of the verb τύπτω are derived not in any way from one, but from nine roots, as they are called, without its being even considered that all these forms have to each other a certain analogy and relation; and without showing how, for instance, τυφθβω , τύφθημι , τβτύπω, are derived from the simplest form τύπω. Had this been tried, it would have been found, that the method, by which we would derive these various forms of present tenses from one radical form, entirely coin¬ cides with that, by which all the tenses of the verb (without supposing these forms of present tenses) are derived from one root; and that this method renders unnecessary several other round-about contrivances. Nor can it be called an assistance to the learner, if he is to keep before him a number of forms, whose rela¬ tionship to each other is not demonstrated; and if to this is added another difficulty, that the derivation is fre¬ quently at variance with the signification of the tenses ; not to mention the superficial and shallow method which is by these means introduced into the study of Greek. It is, however, superfluous to say more upon this method, i PREFACE. XXIX * after what Primisser, Hermann, and Buttmann have remarked upon it; its greatest merit, perhaps, consists in having produced such researches and works as Her¬ mann’s treatise De Emendanda Ratione Grcecce Gram¬ matics. I have, however, departed still farther from * this method, and approached nearer to the ancients ■ #< v · *» than Buttmann. When Buttmann derives the aor. ]. pass, immediately from* the present (τύπτω ί-τυφθην), and Hermann from the future in — έσω ( τυπεσω , βτυπβ- θην, ετυφθην), I can find no substantial reason for pre¬ ferring this to the ancient method, which derives the tense from the third person perf. pass, especially as Buttmann §. 137. himself allows, that the aor. l. pass, is chiefly regulated by the perf. pass, and §. 115. derives the fut. 3. from the second person perf. pass. Doubtless a society of philosophical philologists in our times, who should meet to decide upon the mechanical composition of a language, would hardly adopt this method; but our views differ also materially in other grammatical and ety¬ mological questions from those of the ancients, and even of the Grecian philosophers; and who can blame the Greeks, if they, with whom the objects chiefly aimed at were euphony, and the most expressive and significant forms, thought that they could not mark the idea of a time completely past more clearly and determinately by any form, than by taking the perf. pass, as the basis of it ? Thus I have considered the second aorist and the second perfect, in the same manner as the authors of older grammars; as if the second form of the fut. was the basis of its formation §. 187. without, however. XXX PREFACE. assuming this second form of the fut. or all the aorists to have been ever actually in use. ,»· V# * * » * In a work of this compass it was unavoidable, that even during the printing many additions, corrections, and alterations should appear necessary. Other cor¬ rections and additions I hope to receive from those who are acquainted with the Greek language, who will find opportunities to impart their remarks to me by public criticism. Every admonition will be welcome to me, as tending to bring this Grammar nearer to that point which I proposed to myself in the composition of it. Perhaps I may one day be able to produce this Gram¬ mar under the title of a perfect one; which will then take not merely a complete view of the writers of the age before Alexander, but of all, even of the latest, and those who are called the Hellenistic writers, as well as the remarks of the old grammarians, and will contain a perfect history of the language in its mechanical con¬ struction, its Syntax, and grammatical inflexions, of which this Grammar contains only the foundation. fW i - Γ *; s“ #y· f * "* I ■ · 1 « I | V f , |4 i / V ''( ff Γ T ■ « Altenburg , May 26 , 1807 . t . i ^ » » REMARKS. DIALECT. The Author observes, that in early times there were but two dia¬ lects. He should have said that originally there was but one com¬ mon language, and this was the Doric: not indeed the Doric of later times, but a language spoken by the Dorians, from which were derived the iEolic and Ionic varieties, after the colonization of the coasts of Asia Minor. Perhaps I should say the JEolo-Tonic variety; for it is reasonable to believe that the iEolians and Ionians, for some time after that settlement, spoke the same language. The following brief historical account may be acceptable to the student. Hellen, the son of Deucalion, reigned in Pythia, between the Peneus and the Asopus. His younger sons went to seek for settlements elsewhere. Dorus fixed himself near Parnasus; Xuthus went to Attica, and mar¬ ried the daughter of Erectheus, by whom he had two sons, Achaeus and Ion. Achaeus, having committed an accidental homicide, passed into Laconia ; and the inhabitants of that country were called, from him, Achcei , till the return of the Heraclidae. Ion led an Attic colony into the Peloponnese, where they settled, between Elis and Sicyonia. He was afterwards recalled to Attica, routed the Thracians under Eumolpus, was invested with a part of the government, and gave his name to the Athenians. He did not, however, succeed Erectheus, whose crown devolved upon Cecrops. The Ionians from the Pelo¬ ponnese returned to Attica in the reign of Melanthus; and after the death of Codrus, Nileus led them into Asia Minor*. At that period, therefore, it seems probable that the Doric and Ionic were the same as the Hellenic, and as the iEolic; for iEolus was a son of Hellen. It was not till the Greeks colonized Asia Minor, that their lan- * See Larcher on Herodotus I. p. 432. I XXXI l REMARKS. guage began to assume both consistency and polish. The Ionians were the first who softened it’s asperities, and by attention to euphony, laid aside, by degrees, the broadness and harshness, which, were retained by their Aiolian neighbours on one hand, and the Dorians on the other. The rich soil of Ionia, and the harmonious temperature of it’s climate, combined with the more proximate causes of it’s vicinity to Lydia, and it’s commercial prosperity, will account for this change of language*. And it w as from the colonies, that the mother country first adopted any improvements in her own dialects. I observed that, at first, all the Greek colonists in Asia Minor probably spoke a common language, and that the Ionians first began to change. They were the first to lay aside the digamma, which the Dorians disused at a later period, and the iEolians not at all. The iEolians deviated less from the original language than the Ionians ; perhaps even less than the Dorians themselves. The first change which the inhabitants of Attica naturally made, was to modify their old Doric to the more elegant dialect of their richer and more polished colonists. So that if we recur to the date of about 1000 years B. C. w'e may conclude that the language of Attica was nearly the same as that in which the Iliad was composed ; that is to say, a dialect more soft and copious than the early Doric, but yet comprising most of it’s peculiarities, or rather of those forms and inflexions, which in after times became peculiarities. Subse¬ quently, however, as the people of Attica embarked in a more extended commerce, the form of their dialect was materially altered, and many changes were introduced from foreign idioms f. P. 3. §. 3. The differences between the Doric and jEolic dialects are by no means trifling; and what the author calls the chief distinc¬ tion, was no distinction at all, originally; moreover the digamma w'as not a breathing , but a letter. only wlien he was writing for Doric employers. 1 * ■ ' . · 1 > ‘ r i T J .* ■>· t ; ^ * P. 4. §. 5. With regard to the three models of the New Ionic, §. 4. Simonides of Ceos in all probability, used the Doric dialect * See Hermann’s Observatiojies de Grcecce Linguce Dialect is; p. v. •χρώνται. Αθηναίοι όε κεκραμενρ εξ απάντων ρων. See Pierson on Moeris p. 34p. * RE M ARILS. ΧΧΧΠΙ 4 _ 0 the student will take notice, 1 st, that he is to attribute to Anacreon only the fragments which were collected by F, Ursinus, and a few additional ones; and not those poems which commonly go under his name, a few only excepted ; and that as Anacreon lived more than 100 years before Herodotus, his dialect was probably different. 2dly, that Herodotus adopted the Ionic dialect for his History, being him¬ self a Dorian; consequently he is not always consistent in his usages; and perhaps he is more Ionic than a real Ionian would have been. His dialect is certainly different from that of Hippocrates. P. 7 . §. 7. In Aristophanes , &c. This observation is not very accurate. He should have said, that Aristophanes, writing comedy, used the familiar phraseology of common life, and consequently the most idiomatic form of his native dialect. Plato wrote in easy dialogue, and has more of idiom than Xenophon, who lived a consi¬ derable part of his life away from Athens, and had formed his style to the standard of simple narrative. Aristotle’s writings, being purely philosophical, had, of course, still less of idiomatic peculiarity ; for the idioms of a dialect are, for the most part, confined to the lan¬ guage of common life. P. 12. §. 11. Ιντμενητ, &c. This is merely an arbitrary improve- ment of the German scholars, which is perhaps not very material. The distinction is not observed in the oldest MSS., nor in any of the early editions; nor have I followed it in printing this translation; partly, I confess, from inattention. §. 12, y ράμματα Φοινικικά. A very curious enumeration of the fanciful speculations of the old grammarians on this appellation is given by the Scholiast on Dionysius Thrax p. 782. ed. Bekker. It may perhaps be advisable to set before the reader the oldest form of the Greek characters, with which we are acquainted. A A λ t € E 1 N P * £ x K 2* ζ Ξ cc^t X A H V o T V A 0 M Γ Y Ώ * Auson. Id. p. 202. Mceandrumflexusque vagos imitata vagor ξ. t Ptolem. Hephaestioin Photii Bibl. L.v. fin. relates that Apollonius the Mathematician, who lived under Ptolemy Philopator, was called ’Έψιλον, VOL. I. c xxxiv REMARKS. P. 13. Note x. See Diornedes Scllol. ad Dionys. Tbrac. p. 780. ed. Bekker. Villoison. Anecd. Gr. II. p. 122. Prolegom. p. v. not. Valckenaer. ad Iliad. X. p. 55. P. 14. §. 15. The dispute about pronunciation is interminable. The student may consult Havercamp's Sylloge Scriptoium qui de lingua Gracce vera et recta pronuntiatione commentaries reliquerunt, et Joh. Rodolf. Wetstenii Orationes Apologeticre, Amstelced. 1681. Morhof. Polyhistor. I. p. 787. Scaliger. Opusc. p. 130. Baro a Locella ad Xenoph. Ephes . Index v. Iotacismus. P. 19 . §. 19· The spiritus lenis was an invention of the gramma¬ rians. It denotes nothing more than the absence of the spiritus asper. The ancients used this latter, but not the former. In the Sigeau marble, which is as old as the Peloponnesian war, we have H€ PMOKPATOC and ΗΟΙΔΕ. When the Ionic letters came into use at Athens, the H was divided, and the first half (h) was used, to denote the rough breathing. The other half was adopted at a later period, by the grammarians, to denote the spiritus lenis . The mark I- was prefixed by the Dorians to words which do not usually take the rough breathing, as hOKTil. (See Taylor. Marm. Sandv. p. 45.) The Greek character H is obviously the same as the Hebrew both in form and properties. P. 20. §. 20. The digamma was not interposed between two vowels, to avoid a hiatus , as Matthiae supposes ; but it was a regular constituent letter of the word, omitted in a later age, for the sake of smoothness; as in French the s, which used to be written and pro¬ nounced in prestre , coste and the like, is now neither written nor pronounced. P. 22. penult, όρη re, όρη are not contracted from opdere, opae, but from όρεετε , opeei. "Εψιλον, because the figure of that letter resembled that of the Moon, whose motions had been his particular study. Montfaucon thinks, that C and C were both later forms than Σ, having been invented ταχυγρα¬ φία χόριν. But see Ruhnken on Longinus §. 3, Facciolati Lex. v. Sigma . Photium V. "Ορχήστρα. Lex. Seguier. V. Κατατομή, p. 270 , 21. On the ancient form of the Greek letters see J. Lascaris Epistola ad Petrum Medici. Maittair. Annul. Typogr. I. p. 2 77- Scaliger de Litteris Ionicis ad Euseb. p. 110. Bouherii Dissert, ad fin. Montfaucon. Palceogr. Fischer, ad Weller. I. p. 239. Auctores citatos a Belin. de Ballu ad Oppiau. I; 172. REMARKS. XXXV - P. 23·. Obs. There is no conversion at all in these instances, which are not dialectic variations, but parts of distinct verbs. §. 23. E, H, El were all anciently expressed by one character, as were Ο, Ω, OY. See Kidd on Dawes M. C. p. 32. and hence Homer varied the quantity of these vowels, according as the ictus fell upon them or not, e. g. Iliad. I. 406. Λ€ ICTOI M€ N ΓΑΡ T€ BOG C KAI FinHIA ΜΕΛΑ. 408. ANAPOC ΔΕ nCVKHE ΠΑΛΙΝ €ΛΤΗ€ N OT€ A€ ICT€ . So 0 >rmoc for άρτιπουτ II. I. 405. P. 26 . βίνβκα. This is not an Attic form. P. 28. We have no proof whatever that the Ionians pronounced ωϋ distinctly. The two points usually put over the v are owing to the MSS. where ϋ and V are usually so marked. It is most probable that they pronounced θωυμα, much as we should pronounce thooma. P. 34. §. 32. The student will distinguish οκκα, with the last syl¬ lable short, from οκκα with the last syllable long, which is for οκα κα (οτε κε) Theocr. IV. 68. οΰ τι καμεΐσθ ’, οκκα πάλιν aBe φυηται. Ρ. 44. It is quite surprising, that so learned a man, as the Author of this Grammar, should have written so inconsiderately on the sub¬ ject of the digamma ; the use of which, in the poems of Homer, is ascertained beyond all doubt. As to the assertion, that the old gram¬ marians knew nothing of the use of it by the Ionians, Trypho (Mus. Crit. Cantab. I.) expressly asserts, προστίθεται Be το Ζιγαμμα παρά τε ΑΙολευσι, καί Τ ωσι, κα\ Αάκωσιν. The digamma is found in the Delian marble, and the coins of Velia; now Delos and Velia were both colonized from Ionia. Mr. Knight, in his learned Prolegomena in Homerum , §. lxxxiv. thinks that Bentley has done wrong in attempting to restore the digamma to Homer, without endeavouring to bring the whole orthography of his poems to the original form, without which, he observes, the digamma, replaced only at the be¬ ginning of words, will corrupt more passages than it will cure. A singular assertion; and no less singular is that which follows, that although the language of Homer’s poems has been changed, yet the numbers and measures of the verses remain uninjured ; than which nothing can be further from the real matter of fact. There are many anomalies in the Homeric metre, which the insertion of the digamma removes. It helps us to get rid of numberless unmeaning particles 7 e, Be, re, which the gammarians foisted into the verse to stop a chasm. The reader will find some excellent information on this sub¬ ject, together with a copious list of those words which received the C 2 XXXVI REMARKS. digamma in the older poets, in Mr. Kidd's valuable notes on Dawes's Misc. Grit. pp. 234. seqq. Ϊ*. 4fi. The datives ημΤν, νμΐν have the N εφελκυστικόν, for they are contracted from ημεσιν, ύμεσιν. P. 48. §. 43. It is strange that nothing is said of the apostrophus in prose writers. It is indeed a very doubtful question ; and no general rule can be given. The Attic writers used il more than the Ionic, and the later Attic more frequently than the old ; all of them chiefly in the monosyllable particles Be', ye, -re, in the adverbs πότε, Tore, &c. in αλλά, avr/ka, &c. and always in the prepositions which end with a or o; more rarely in other words. In Thucydides II. 71· we find ούτε υμών, but Dionysius of Halicarnassus cites the passage οΰθ' υμών. The Monumentum Adulitanum, has ΥΦ6Ν, MG0A. An ancient treaty in the Oxford marbles has ΑΦΟΥ and ΑΦΑΣ, without any distinction between the words. An ancient Cyzicene inscription has ΥΦ6ΑΥΤΩ. Many other instances are given by Wasse, in his note on the passage of Thucydides. Not that any Examples are wanting to prove that the ancients did use the apostrophus in prose; for it was scarcely possible for them not to do so in many instances; the question is, whether there was the same uniformity of usage amongst them, as amongst the poets. And this question must be answered in the negative. Γ. It depends in some measure upon the sense of a passage, whether the apostrophus is to be used or not: if the sense requires that any pause, however short, should be made after a word ending in a short vowel, and preceding another which begins with a vowel, the first vowel is not dropped, e. g. αύτίκα, εφη , ε’Ισγ. So in Plato Phaedr. p. 293. ed. Heindi we should read Xeyerai Be, ως 7 tot ησαν ♦ l II. A short vowel is not cut off before another, when such elision would injure the harmony of the sentence. III. Nor when the particle is emphatic, as in Plato Cfiarmid. p. 154. B. ού yap τοι φαύλος ουδέ τότε ην Phaedr. ρ. 254. A. IV. άρα is apostrophized before ού and ου v, but not before other words. V. The elision of nouns is rarer, as φίλ’ άττα, Plato Lys. p. 221. C. αύτόματ οιόμενοι, Demosth. ΟΙ. I. VI. If a particle closely adheres in sense to a preceding word, it does not generally suffer apostrophus; for apostrophus connects two words together, which here cannot happen, e. g. 6 Be' γε Ικανός REMARKS. XXXV Η — φίλοι he ye ούκ av eJev — dpa ye ολω. Plato Lys. p. 215. B. But we have irayyeXoiov y αν ε’ίη, Phaedr. p. 260 . C. because y av may be taken as one word. VII. τούτο and ταυτα are commonly apostrophized. Demosth. ΟΙ. I. τοΰθ’ ούτως εχει, τουθ\ ό δι»σ/Ααχωτατοι/, ταΰτ ουν ; yet in the same page we have μ€τά ταυτα av. It is to be observed, in gene¬ ral, that the apostrophus is very frequent in Demosthenes, whose orations were written to be spoken, and a leading feature of whose style is rapidity. Upon the whole, it seems reasonable to say, re¬ specting the prose writers, that, within certain limits, they used or neglected the apostrophus, as they judged it most conducive to har¬ mony : and this must generally be the guide by which an experienced editor will determine himself, where the MSS. differ; for the autho¬ rity of the MSS. on these points, is, in itself, very small. When the author says that nrept does not suffer apostrophus, he should except the iEolic dialect. See Pindar ΟΙ. VI. 65. Pyth. IV. .462, 0 ' / The dramatic poets did not elide the 1 in the dative plural. Other r poets did, as Theognis, ουθ ’ ΰων πάντεσσ' avhcivei. See the Index to Toup’s Emend, in Suid. v. Vocalem. Whether they elided it in the dative singular, is a doubtful point. The negative is maintained by Lobeck. ad Sophocl. Aj. 801. Elmsley ad Eurip. Heracl. 693. on is elided in the older Epic poets; but not by the comic writers. Diphthongs are not indiscriminately elided, e. g. not in the infi¬ nitives of the perfectum pass, or active, the aorists pass, nor in ihe third pers. sing, of the optative, nor the qomin. plural of nouns. /AOi, in Attic writers, is elided only before ω, as οΊμ\ ως εοικεν. Soph. Ajac. ?J54. 588. Diphthongs are not elided by the Attic poets before short vowels. P. 49 . The spiritus lenis is improperly retained in the instances adduced, which should be written προυξενεΊς, προυκείμεθα , &c. P. 50. The words here quoted ωυριπβη, ωζνρε, &c. are not in¬ stances of elision, but of crasis. P. 56. υι — ττληθυι is a disyllable in II. χ. 458. But in this and in other cases, where v seems to coalesce with a vowel following, as in yevvwv Pindar Pyth. IV. 401. Έρινυων in Euripides, &c. it may be supposed to have taken the power of a consonant, like our V. XXXV1U REMARKS. P. 62 . These marks of reading were invented by the Alexandrian grammarians. They do not occur in inscriptions. Some of them are rendered nearly useless by the art of printing, especially the dia¬ stole. The author ought to have given the Greek denominations of the points. 1. τελεία στιγμή, a full stop, which denotes that the sense is complete. 2. μέση στιγμή , points out where breath is to be taken. 3. υποστιγμή , a short pause, indicating that the sense is not com¬ plete*. Nicanor, the grammarian, imagined eight στιγμαί·\. The ancients having used no. points, a considerable part of the duty of an editor consists in determining, from the sense, what kind of stop to insert, and where; for here the MSS. are but of slight authority. P. 65. §. 63. See this derivation of the genders pursued more at large in Harris’s Hermes, cli. IV. P. 66. Cases. Πταίσει? λέγονται, επειΰη η φωνή άπ ’ άλλον είς άλλον μεταπίπτει? Schol. in Dion. Thrac. p. 860 , 25. Ibid, i subscr. We are not to conclude that the 1 was wanting in the dative case in the old Greek, because it is omitted in several inscriptions. In the case of those words, where it was not pro¬ nounced separately, it was omitted by the Dorians and ^olians; and by the stone-cutters in all dialects. It is consonant with analogy to suppose, that the termination of the dative case was originally uni¬ form. The very ancient datives οίκοι, πείοΐ, were retained even in the Doric dialect. Adverbs in t were also compounded of datives, αμαγί, ανοικτί, and the like, ενταυθοΐ, and ποΐ are old datives. Upon the whole I cannot but think, in opposition to Fabricius, Koen, and others, that the 1 was the most ancient termination of this case. P. 82. 3. He should not have said that the form ος without r is more common; for he adduces two words κνεφας and γήρας, which never had the τ'. P. 88. 5. αίγαν is only a wrong reading. P. 105. Obs. The lonians did not decline κεράς, κερεος, but took the oblique cases from κερος. This appears from the compounds κεροτυπεω, κεροβάτης, and the like. See Porson Prcef. ad Hecub. p. viii. P. 106 . The Attics made κέρας, κέρατος as they did φρέαρ φρεά- τος. See Maltby’s Thesaurus Greece Poeseos v. φρέαρ . and Observ. * Dionys. Thrax p. 630. t Schol. in Dionys. Thrac. p. 758 , 763 . REMARKS. XXXIX p. Ixxx. but from φρεΐαρ came φρειάτος. In a verse of Eratosthenes ap. Valcken. Diatr. p. 218. η σιρον , η κοίλου φρεατος ευρύ κύτος, read φρείατος. Where κεραος and κεράων occur in Homer, we should proba¬ bly read κερεος and κερεων. P. 106 . 3. γούνυ occurs nowhere. Ibid. lopi. Also Ζόρει. Etymol. M. p. 284, 31. Seidler. de Vers. Dochm. p. 24. P. 112. ουείρατος was formed from ΰνειραρ , not from ονειρας. See my notes on Callimachus Epig. L. 1. P. 115. 1. Έτεοκλω in ALschylus is from Έτεοκλο?, a different person from Έτ εοκλεης. P. 126 . ης. These feminines in τρία were sometimes, but rarely, formed from masculines in τηρ, as ίητρια , Alexis ap. ML Dionys. in Eustath. ad II. A. p. 859> 51. πενθητρια Eurip. Hipp. 816. ττρομνη- στρια Aristoph. Nub. 42. Ibid. ult. So K ρης, Kprj σ<τα. P. 140.— ιμος. He should have distinguished between two sorts of adjectives with this termination, one in — ιμος from nouns, of which kind are the instances given ; the other in— σιμός , from verbs, of which he does not give an example. This last kind have some¬ times an active, sometimes a passive signification; e. g. άρώσιμος, arabilis, βρώσιμος , edibilis — φύξιμος qui fugit , Soph. Antig. 788. αλώσιμός ad capturam pertinens, iEsch. Agam. 9· ubi vide. Ibid. The reader will observe that the terminations in ινος and εινος are in fact one; formed from the genitives of the nouns ; ξύλ¬ ινος, όρε-ινός, σκοτε-ινός. Ρ. 147. §· 117· But it is to be observed, that of adjectives, which commonly have only the masculine and neuter terminations, we find the feminine form only in the Poets . Yet καιρίη occurs in Herodotus; and this termination was no doubt general in the an¬ cient language. P. 159· Eustathius and the Etymol. M. say that νεαίτερου is very Attic; yet Thucydides I. 7 . has νεώτατα. We have also πεπαίτερος Theocr. VII. 120. άσμεναίτατα Phrynich. App. Soph. p. 12, 11. •ηρουρ^ιαίτερα Aristoph. Lys. 20. Thucyd. III. 109· πρωιαίτερον, (reponendum in Theophr. Η. P. III. 2 . vid. Valcken. Nott. in Thom . Mag. p. 174.) οψιαίτερον Plato Cratyl. p. 433. A. P. l 6 l, 162 . He has not observed that comparatives in — ίωι /make the penultima long in the Attic Poets, but short in all the others. P. l63. ηκιων from an unknown positive. We have a nearer approximation to this positive in the Homeric adverb ήκα, gently, in a very small degree. P. 170. The later Attics wrote ov'le els. not eliding the e before the ei, but ovdels, in two syllables, according to Phrynichus, as cor¬ rected by Koen. ad Gregor, p. 23. But we find this hiatus in much older poets, e. g. Hipponax ap. Stob. XXIX. p. 129· Grot, χρόνο* $e φευγετω 7. where see Schaefer. P. 805. b. II. /, 442. τοννεκά με προόηκε όιΰασκεμεναι τάϊε πάν¬ τα. So in Latin Virgil. A En. I. 527. Ibid. c. vEsch. Eumen. 6'74. 730. μένω δ’ άκουσαι. Comp Horat I. XV. 27 . P. 818. Hermann (ad Soph. Aj. 114.) observes that this account of the use of the article before the infinitive is not sufficiently distinct. For it is not the same thing, whether the article be used, or omitted. An infinitive with an article (except where it is put simply for a sub¬ stantive) is used in two ways. The first is explanatory, where it is referred to τοίτο, expressed, or understood, as το' Ιράν, τοότο λόγω or τοΰτο λόγω το' Βράν. Soph. Antig. 79. το' γα'ρ βίοι πολιτών Ιράν 'όφυν αμήχανο,. This is stronger than it would be without the article. It is equivalent to TO γάρ βία πολιτών Ιράν, τούτο αμήχανο, el μι. phi- l°Ct. 1241. εστιυ τι,, εστιν, ο, σε κωλυσει τό Ιράν. The Second usage is, when an article is joined with the infinitive, with the same power as in other cases ώστε. But this differs from the former only in appearance. Here also we may recur to the explanation τοϊτο, το ΰραν, but in the absolute sense of, as to what concerns. Soph. Antig. 2b4. η μεν δ’ έτοιμοι κα'ι μΰΐρου, α'ίρειυ χεροΐν, κα'ι πυρ Ζ,ιερπειν, και θεού, όρκωμοτειν, Το μήτε }ράσαι, μήτε τω ξυνεώόναι, &C. Phi¬ loct. 118, μαθων γάρ ουκ άν άρνοιμην τό ΰράν. xlviii REMARKS. The infinitive by itself, without an article, is often used for a noun. Aristoph. Nub. 482. Wri ϋήτά ™ iv τ p φύσα, ‘ elo¬ quence,’ JEsch. Pers. 726. Se' καί στρατό, τοσάσίβ «£& ήνοσ» nepfv, ‘effected a passage.’ Agam. ISO. καί reap'd κοκταν ^ «- ώρονόν. ibid. 250. Δίκα Se tow με'* ιταβοΟβ·. μαβαν empperrei. With a negation, Soph. Antig. 1051. μη φρονό v πλάστη βλαβή. The luhni- tive is sometimes, but rarely, used for a noun in Latin. Her. Ep. VII. 27. Reddes dulce loqui; reddes ridere decorum. Pers. Scire tuum nihil est f nisi te scire hoc scidt alter. P. 824. §. 544. This idiom was common in Ionic; see especially the Aphorisms of Hippocrates. An infinitive and imperative some¬ times are coupled together in the same sentence, as in the prayer cited by Plato Alcib. II. ZeS βασ,λε 5, τα μϊν ίσθλά καί αίχομένοκ καί ανοικτοί, "Αμμ. iibow τά οε λυγρα καί άχομάων άπαλεξαν. See Bast and Schaefer ad Gregor, p. 424. P. 842.1. 3. 6 . This appears to me to be a wrong explanation. The interrogation has no place in either of these passages. The true meaning of ονκ άν φθάνο ic ποιων τούτο, is * you cannot be too quick in doing this/ φθάνειν is ‘ to be sooner’. Hippocr. de A. et A. p. 98 . ου 7 dp φθάνουσι παρά avhpa άπικνευμεναι, και ev γαστρι t σχουσι. they no sooner—than they, &c. properly, coming to—they are riot before-hand with what I am going tojnention, viz. they conceive. Compare paragr. c. P. 843. τύγχαναν. Phrynichus Eel. p. 121. observes that, ac¬ cording to ancient usage, τύγχαναν in the sense of ‘ to be, requires a participle to be joined with it. And so Porson ad Hecub. 7 88 , whose opinion is called in question by Erfurdt, in his Epistle to Schaefer, Schaefer himself ad L. Bos. p. 785. Elmsley Mus. Crit. Cantab. I. p. 351. Hermann, ad Soph . Ajac. 9· P. 847. 3· A singular instance of this disagreement is Msch. Agam. 544. ΰρόσυι—τιθεντες. P. 853. b. φερων in these instances denotes nothing more than ‘tending to,’ ‘having a bearing towards/ Thucyd. I. 79- γνωμαι εφερον iEsch. Suppl. 607 . φερει φρην , fert animus. Something of the same sense belongs to the imperative in the phrase φερ είπε. ‘ come tell me/ φερόμενο ? in the middle or passive, is clearly a different idiom. The reference in the note to Hemsterhuys on Lucian ought to be Τ. I. p. 349· REMARKS. xlix P. 875. §. 570. Some instances deserve particular notice: e. g. Thucyd. I. 143. εν τω μη μελετώντι III. 10. έν τω Βια\\άσσοντι της γνώμης. II. 6ΐ. τω τιμώ μένω Τ ης ττόλεως α’ττο του αρχειν, ‘ the ho¬ nour which the city has by means of her command/ VII. 83. to ήσνχάζον της ννκτός. Eurip. Hec. 303. το' θυμού μεν ον ‘ anger/ Cf. Schaefer, ad Dionys. Hal. p. 20.5. Tn general the participles thus employed, conveys a kind of indefinite meaning. P. 887. With numerals, &c. Sometimes with αριθμός. Sophocl. Acris. fr. 11. eh αριθμόν εξήκοντα δίς. See Glossar. in iEsch. Pers. 345. ^ So Theocrit. I. 20. ττοταμελξεται eh δυο ττελλας , not ‘into two pails, but ‘as much as two pails/ iW. Frequently , &c. Especially with the names of deities, tepov being understood, as eh ’Αρτέμιος. So in Latin, ventum est ad Cereris. P. 890. s,a τρίτου erovs, &c. In general cid expresses an inter¬ val, as in Ιόστασβα., < to stand at certain distances’, ’ύ,αβαίυι,υ, < to stand with the legs asunder,’ &«' ώ™, θεητέοι in Herodotus, longo tnterval/o spectatu dignissimus. Hence ο,ά τρίτου Ztous ‘ at intervals of every third yearV p. 9 12. β. ττρός ταύτα, ‘ this being the case*. See the Glossary to JEsch. Prometh. 1065. Theb. 56. P. 918. Tmesis is not rare in Attic writers, as the author seems »to su PP ose > i° the case of the preposition σύν. See the Glossary on -Esch. Again. 569 . P. 932. ούτε ουδέ, &c. See Elmsley ad Eurip. Heracl. 6Ί5. Ibid.%. 60 S. Many of the adverbs, which are joined with a geni¬ tive case, were originally nouns, which will account for this con¬ struction. Thus οίγχι is the dative of όίγξ, the bend of the arm; which etymology was suggested to me by the present learned Master of Gonville and Caius College, εγγύς is contracted from έν γύ>], in the hand, or perhaps from iv and γύης, as έμι τοδωυ from εν and ττοδώυ. So μεσσηγύς from μέσση γύης. Of the adverbs in θε and θεν some are manifestly genitive cases of nouns, and the others follow their analogy. P. 941. elT olu—ebe Soph. CEd. T. 1050. ebe—ebe καί iEsch. Agam. 844. Suppl. 185. Cf. Elmsl. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 92. (be is onutted ^Esch. Agam. 1405. Odyss. Δ. 109- ov’Se t, Flipcv Z«ei °γ η τεθνηκε v. d t 1 REMARKS. P. 948. It is not very accurate to say, that the contrary to the ellipse is the pleonasm. The instances here given are of very dif¬ ferent kinds; nor are they all to the purpose, εφη λέγων is not a pleonasm at all. On the question of pleonasm and ellipse the stu¬ dent must consult the valuable treatise of Hermann, before quoted. P. 953. Whether this musical diagram may accord with the inflexions of a German voice in common conversation, I cannot say; but we have nothing akin to it. Ibid, μικρός has the first syllable long not only in Aristophanes, but in all the Greek poets. The i is long by nature; and in all probability the word was anciently written μεικρός, from με ιός, whence μείων. The diminutive μικκύλος should be written μικυλος , with a single k. P. 954 . ’ΐίλεκτρυων may have been contracted into three sylla¬ bles, by synizesis or synecphonesis of the u and ω. So ’ Αμφιτρΰων. P. 955. The inceptive p had this power only when the ictus fell on the preceding short syllable, as Prof. Monk has observed. P. 959 . oJfcoi»/ should always be accented on the last syllable; nor has it, as the Grammarians pretend, two senses. It gives a different sense to the sentence in which it stands, according as it is used interrogatively, or not. In fact it should be written as two distinct words, ουκ ουν. This is Mr. Elmsley's observation. ψΗλ : : / i u·. • > A : h, , ; ' · · .> i ■ GREEK AND IT’S DIALECTS • . , ^ * GENERALLY. '§ fWft t <»··/'.''*/ » , f Λ ", i e * I The Greek Language, like every modern one, was not §· in ancient times spoken in the same manner in all parts of Greece ; but almost every place had its peculiarities of dialect, both with respect to the use of single letters and of single words, forms of words, inflexions, and expressions. But the Greeks were accustomed to express the peculiarities of their dialects in writing also ; they wrote as they spoke; and if, for instance, the Dorians pronounced the ου differently from the rest of the Greeks, they expressed this also in writing, as &oXos for SovXos; instead of which we, (notwithstanding the very various pronunciations^ and the different modes of speaking, and expressions used in particular neighbourhoods,) yet have a general orthography, and one form of language in writing. ~ Of these dialects there are four principal ones, the iEolic, the Doric, the Ionic, the Attic. But these four dialects were not originally distinguished from one another by certain peculiarities ; in early times vol. i. b I OF THE ■t · ^ ξ > t ; -1 ···. .*-■ \\ ,, ,·. '· ’.· ".· - ·· ;·> . ·· **-'*/■ ■. ··.■ -Ϊ >- > l >’ £V ifr . .,·£·- ΐί.-· : . ; ' ·*·75 -ΤΑ?' ---. 4SS V· .' - -' - ■» r . LANGUAGE, I 2 Of the Greek Language, V · · there were but two dialects (r), the iEolic, (of which the Doric was a branch, but became distinct from it in process of time,) and the Ionic, from which the Attic proceeded. When the Ionians and Athenians separated, the latter, coming in contact with people who were not Ionic, in various degrees of .intercourse, acquired a peculiar character of speech\ Each of these dialects had, according to the different places where it was used, different deviations, which were called local dialects, διάλβκτοι ι-οΊπκαί. In the Ionic, for instance, were reckoned four peculiar dialects’ 5 . The Spartans, the Messenians, Argives, Cretans, Syra¬ cusans, Tarentines, all spoke the Doric dialect; but each nation with certain deviations 0 . Each of the principal dialects also in time underwent some changes and modi¬ fications in its general character, according as it was further improved by writing, or as the people which spoke it, became connected with others. The jEolic dialect prevailed on the Northern side of the Isthmus, except in Megara, Attica, and Doris, as well as in the iEolic colonies in Asia Minor, and in some northern islands of the iEgean Sea, and was chiefly cul¬ tivated by the Lyric Poets in Lesbos, as Alcaeus and Sappho, and in Boeotia, by Corinna. It retained the most numerous traces of the ancient Greek; hence also the Latin coincides more with this than with the other Greek dialects d . It is distinguished from the Doric by some trifling differences, some of which will be mentioned ». / T * * r * (r) This letter refers to the Remarks which are subjoined to the preface. * Strabo, vm. p. 513. sq. Fischer i, p. 33. b Herod, i, 142. c Salmas, de Ling. Hellenist, p. 46'0. Of the Ionic and Doric dialects see Sext. Emp. p. 235. ed. Fabric. Gregor, p. 135. Fisch. i, p.36. ύ Burgess ad Daw. Misc. Grit. Praef. p, 3. et p. 397. sqq. and its Dialects. 3 I _ hereafter; chiefly, however, by the breathing before words which begin with a vowel, which is called the JSolic digamma (r). The grammarians remarked three principal varieties of this dialect, which, however, can¬ not now be ascertained for want of information. Alcaeus is considered as the model of it e . The Doric dialect, as being the language of men who were mostly original mountaineers, was hard, rough, and broad, particularly from the frequent use of « for η and ω; for instance, « λάθα, tSv κόραν, for ή λήθη, των κορών 1 ; and rom the use of two consonants, where the other Greeks employed the double consonant; for instance, aS for Γ, as μνΧίσοεται, &c. It was.sp.oken in Peloponnesus, in the Uonca Tetrapolis, in the Doric colonies of Lower Italy (Tarentum for instance), and Sicily, as in Syracuse, and Agrigentum, and in Asia Minor; but in the greatest purity by the Messenians». The grammarians notice two epochas m it, according to which they divide it into the old and new Doric dialects. In the old, the Comic writer Epichar- mus, and Sophron, author of the Mimes, were the principal authors; the latter, however, chiefly took the peculiarities of the Syracusan dialect. In the new, which approached nearer to the softness of the Ionic h , Theocritus is the chief writer. Besides these, the first Pythagorean philosophers wrote Doric, fragments of whose works are still remain¬ ing; for instance, Timajus, Archytas, who is considered as the standard of this dialect, and Archimedes. Pindar Stesichorus, Simonides of Ceos (r), Bacchylides, use in ge- ' Gregor, p. 2. Fisch. i, p. 43. sqq. f Koen. ad Gregor, p. l6'5. I ε πλατααο-μός. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 152. l6\5. h Paus. iv, 27. p. 346. sq. 4 4 Of the Greek Language , neral the Doric dialect; but softened it by an approxima¬ tion to the others, and to the common one. Many instances Of the dialect of the Lacedaemonians and Megarensians occur in Aristophanes k . Besides these the Doric dialect is found in decrees and treaties in the historians and orators, and in inscriptions. The Ionic was the softest of the dialects, on account of the frequent meeting of vowels and the deficiency of aspirate letters. It was spoken chiefly in the colonies of Asia Minor, and in the islands of the Archipelago. It was divided into old and new. In the former Homer and Hesiod wrote, and it was originally very little or not at all different from the ancient Attic. The New arose when the Ionians began to mix with other nations in commerce, and to send out colonies 1 . The writers in this were (r) Anacreon, Herodotus, and Hippocrates”. *· * * - ' ' ' Λ| , . N I . The Attic dialect underwent three changes. The ancient one was scarcely different from the Ionic u , for the Ionians had inhabited Attica ; and in Homer the Attics were still called ’laoves; and hence we find in Homer many forms of words which were otherwise peculiar to the Attics. In this dialect Solon wrote his laws. Through the proximity of the original iEolic and Doric in Bceotia and Megara, the frequent intercourse with the Dorians in Peloponnesus, and with other Greeks and foreign nations, it was gradually intermixed with words l ---- k A collection of Laconian expressions is given by Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 257—300. Ruhnk. Ep. Crit. p. 214. sqq. 1 Gregor, p. 233. et Koen. Of the difference of the Ionic dialect in Homer, and that iri Herodo¬ tus, see Heyne Obss. ad Iliad, vm, 226 . sqq. and Fisch. i, p. 38. * Bentl. Opusc. Philol. p. 375. sqq. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 176. and its Dialects.+ 5 which were not Ionian 0 ., and departed farther from the Ionic, in many respects, and particularly in using the long a where the Ionians employed the η after a vowel, or the letter p; in avoiding the collision of several vowels in two different words, by contract¬ ing them into a diphthong or long vowel p ; in pre¬ ferring the consonants with an aspirate, whilst the Ionians used the tenues , &c. q Thus arose the middle Attic, in which Gorgias of Leontium was the first who wrote. The writers in this dialect are Thucyr dides, the tragedians r , Aristophanes, and others. The new Attic is dated from Demosthenes and JEschines, although Plato, Xenophon, Aristophanes 3 , Lysias, Iso¬ crates, have many of its peculiarities. It differed chiefly from the foregoing, in preferring the softer forms ; for instance, the Aor. 2. avWeyels, απαλλαγεί?, instead of the ancient Attic and Ionic συΧλβχθβίς, απαλ- λαχθε/? 4 , the double pp instead of the old ρσ, which the old Attic had in common with the Ionic, Doric, and iEolic u ; the double ττ instead of the hissing σσ Χ . They ® Xenopb. R. A. 2, 8. Piers, ad Moer. p. 349. p Piers, ad Moer. p. 274. Gregor, p. 72. q Valck. ad Phoen. 1422. Piers, ad Moer. p. 245. 36l. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 185. Fisch. p. 153. 176. 218. r Nieephor. ad Synes. p. 411. vid. Bern, ad Thom. M. p. 579· Hence o\ μβσοι Moer. p. 404. ubi v. P. * e. g. θάλαττα Hemsterh. ad Plut. v. 396. μνμρινη Id. ad Lucian. 1 , p. 317. 1 Valck. ad Phoen. p.356\ sq. Eustath. ad Horn. p. 519,41. u Fisch. 1, p. 194. Valckn. ad Phoen. p. 22. Hemsterh. ad Lucian T. 1. p. 317. ad Thom. M. App. p. 535. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 66. x Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. 1, p. 309- sq. 312. Valcken. ad Phoen. p. 149. Fisch. 1, p. 203. 6 Of ike Greek Language , said also πΧβνμων, yvafpevSy for πνευμαιν, Kvafpevs* , σΰν $ instead of the old ξύν\ 6. It is easily seen, that these changes in particular dialects cannot be determined with sufficient accuracy, with respect to their date ; but that they were introduced gradually, and especially by the example of the most emi¬ nent writers, orators, &c. as Pericles is said to have in¬ troduced the use of the tt instead of the σσ. These four principal dialects also, in process of time, departed from one another, in such a manner, that their differences in these respects could be determined, which has been done by the grammarians. In old times they differed from each other far less. In Homer and Hesiod forms of words and expressions occur, which are considered by the gram¬ marians as -ZEolic, Doric, Attic, or merely as peculiarities of a local dialect. But they could hardly have been such in the age of those poets, who would no more allow themselves such a mixture than a poet of these days would adopt the provincial dialects of his ow r n country. It is much more probable that the language of Homer was, in all respects, that of the Ionians of his time, although his fine perception of sound and harmony, and the polish and richness of his expression as to phrases and inflexions, might lead one to sup¬ pose, that he preferred that which appeared to him the most harmonious, and was received in the lan¬ guage of the most polished amongst his countrymen. Of these forms of words used in Homer, all did not remain in the Ionic dialect; but some were retained only in the JEolo-Doric : and of these, some only in single tribes, y Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. i, p. 301. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Plut. 166. z Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. i, p. 317. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 10. Fiscli. i, p. 199 . and its Dialects. 7 amongst the Cretans, Tarentines, &c.; other peculiari¬ ties were retained only in the Attic\ The grammarians, in speaking of Homer, call that Attic, ^Eolic, Doric, Cre¬ tan, &c. which had become so in thepr time b . The writers in a dialect, however, seem not to have §. taken the language of their own nation, with all its pecu¬ liarities ; but to have adopted, in a greater or less de¬ gree, the general language of the people, abstracted from all peculiarities of single subdivisions. If Sophron wrote in the popular dialect of the Syracusans, and Corinna in that of the Thebans, Theocritus, on the con¬ trary, and Pindar, chose that which was not found merely in the local language of one single nation, but in the general Doric dialect of that age.N Hence, per¬ haps, may be explained what is said of Pindar, that he wrote in the dialectus communis , κοινή 0 , an expression, however, which in the grammarians is founded surely not on the received sense of κοινή, but on the remark that all the forms are not found in him which occur in other Doric writers. Each writer modified his language accordingly as it seemed acceptable to the public, for whom he destined it, or as it corresponded to his own taste and habit. In Aristophanes (r) many more peculiarities of the Attic dialect are found, than in Plato; in Plato more a As many words formerly in general use in the ancient language of Germany, are now left only in a few single dialects; for instance, the High-German, or rather Swiss word lugen, i. e. to see , which must have been used also in Low-German, since it remains in English in ίο look. b On the Homeric dialect see Burgess. Praef. ad Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. xix. Heyne Obss. ad Horn. T. vn, p. 712 sq. c κοινή Be, p πάντες χρωμεθα και tj εχρησατο ΪΙίνΒαρος, ηη/ουν η εκ των δ* σνν€<ττω<τα. Gregor, ρ. 5. ubi ν, Koen, Salmus. de Hellen. p. 28 sqq. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 171· 8 Of the Greek Language, than in Xenophon, and in him more than in Aristotle; and hence it appears a hazardous attempt to ascribe to a writer a certain dialect, because he uses forms, which oc¬ cur in other writers in the same dialect, or only in the remarks of the grammarians. These, however, call that only pure Attic, which was peculiar to the Attic dialect alone: common (κοινόν), and Hellenic, on the contrary, that which was found in other dialects also, although it was equally received in the Attic d ; and they regarded as the principal models of the Attic language, Aristophanes, and the poets of the old comedy 6 , Thucydides and De¬ mosthenes f ; Herodotus and Hippocrates are the standards of the Ionic, not Anacreon; of the Doric, Archytas and Theocritus, not Pindar. : . . · · - v % Now as each dialect in this respect, as we observe it in the writings of the ancients, is not so much a true copy of the national tongue, as a species of w r ritten language, the choice also of his dialect would, in each writer, be regulated by the models which used it in an earlier period. Because Homer had written his poems in the old Ionic dialect, all succeeding epic poets chose it for their compositions, even at a time when the Ionic dialect no longer passed cur¬ rent as a language of writing. The lyric chorusses in the tragedies of the Athenians approached in expres¬ sion to the Doric g , because the most eminent lyric poets had written in this dialect. In prose, the Ionic dialect was used for a long time, because psose had first been d Piers. Praef. ad Moerid. ° Hemsterh. ad Thom. M. p. 179 . f Gregor, p. 2 . * B«t only in the use of a for η, and a few forms, e. g. viv, 0 $ and linguals S ζ θ λ ι> ρ σ τ ; the application of which is explained §. 64. When two vowels are pronounced with one sound, they constitute a diphthong, SicpOoyyos. Diphthongs are, 1. Such as have both vowels short, αι, ει, ευ, οι, ον, < proper ( proprice). 2 . Such as have the first vowel long, a, y, ην, ω, ων, (impropricef. 3. Such as according to their derivation have either both vowels short, or the first long, av and vP. ' Of the Pronunciation, In Germany there are two modes of pronouncing the vowels and diphthongs in Greek (it). One was introduced by Reuchlin, and coincides with the pronunciation of the modern Greeks, according to which η ει οι are pro¬ nounced like i* *, av like af ai like εν like ef. The other was introduced by Erasmus, and gives to η the sound of e long, nearly that of a , and to the diphthongs z The ι subscription is written by the ancients, who used capital letters, as a regular letter, ΤΩΙ ΛΗΙΣΤΗΙ, τώλγστγ. * See Herm. de em. Gr. Gramm, p. 49 sqq. * In English pronunciation c. t In English a in a/e. 15 Of the Pronunciation i a double sound,, so that ei is pronounced like ei, oi like oi, av like au*, ev like eu +. The latter is preferable on account of its perspicuity. In some vowels, the mode in which the Romans expressed them, leads us to form a tolerably accurate judgment of the pronunciation of the Greeks : e. g. In Latin η is always expressed by a long e. ΣείΧηνός Sile- nus, Άθηναι Athena, as in Greek the long e of the Romans is expressed by η, e.g. Pint. Rom . 21. to arepeaOat o\ * Ρωμαίοι κάρηρε {carere) ονομάζουσιν. The a also, which was used in Doric for η, and the ee or e, which occurs in the ancient mode of writing for η, is more nearly related to the long e than to i [£. It cannot be con¬ cluded, from the pronunciation of some nations, as the Boeotians, who said ei for η, as appears from some inscrip¬ tions b , that η had the sound of «, since the ancients would not have noticed the Boeotian pronunciation of the η or ei as any thing particular, had they themselves pro¬ nounced it so. In other cases, where η and ei are inter¬ changed, η arose out of rji, and this from ei ei. At least from Xeiros came the Ionic Χηΐτος ; hence the Attic XrjTovpyeiv, which is commonly written XeiTovpyeiv 0 . The pronunciation of the diphthongs ai, et, and 01 is §· 16. more dubious. Not only do the Latins express cu by ae , e. g. Movcrat Musae , as the Greeks write Α’/λιο? for the Latin Mlius ; but in an Epigram of Callimachus, n. 30 , Echo answers the word ναιχί by βχα, and it would ap- • pear also that ai was sounded like ae ||. But since the pronunciation of the Boeotians expressed the at in the partic. pres. pass. Xeyo^evai, ποιουμεναι by η , Xeyόμevη, * In Engl. ou. X In Engl. c. b Mattaire, p. l6'8. C. f In Engl. e\j . i| In Engl. ay. c Piers, ad Moerid. p. 252. 16 Of the Pronunciation . ποιούμενη (according; to Eustathius p. 365 , 28 .) it follows, that they who expressed it thus, wished to shew by it the difference between the Boeotian pronunciation and their own, and that ai was certainly pronounced by the Boeo¬ tians as η , or ce , but not by all the Greeks d . The same will hold good with respect to the iEolic pronuncia¬ tion θναίσκω, μιμναίσκω, for θνήσκω , μιμνησκω ; and the Ionic pronunciation θεγς for θεαΊς, arose chiefly from the preference which the Ionians gave to the η over the a. 2 . If the Greeks had pronounced at like ae (the English ay ), the contraction or change into a or a would have been more remote, e. g. κλ^ειν, αδης, <*el. Hence we may conclude, that in at, a had the principal sound, and that it was sounded also like at, but in one syllable, which is clear from the diaeresis πάΐς (see §. 27.), and is shewn by Quintilian I. 7 , 18 . The ancient Latin mode of writing was Ailius, Caisar , aulai e . The Latins express et sometimes by e long, as M^eta Medea , Μουσείο»' Museum; sometimes by i long, as Ιφιγένεια, εϊκων, Iphigenia , icon. By the ancient Greeks it was pronounced separately, which mode is retained by poets and Ionians, όρεί , ’Ατρείδας (see §. 27 .) These deviations, as well as the differences in the dialects, be¬ come clear, if we assume that ει was pronounced like εί separately, yet in one syllable, so that according to the different dialects, sometimes e 3 ' sometimes i had the leading sound. §.17. Ot might seem to have the same sound as t, from the interchange of λοιμός and λιμός in Thucydides II. 54 . But this interchange appears to have arisen not so much from the similar sound of 01 and 1 , as from the remaining —. M - Hermann draws different conclusions, de em. Gr. Gr. p. 52. e See Gesner and Spalding, on Quint. 1. c. 5, - - - /'«Τ» ' ' I * * I / _ Of the Pronunciation. . 17 resemblance of the two words, and the corruption so easily introduced by tradition. Had oi been pronounced like i, the two words which occur in Hesiod. E py. 241. λοιμόν όμου και λιμόν could not have been distinguished, at least so long as the poems did not exist in writing, but only in recitation, oi was mostly formed from oi, as oh, οιστός, from oh, οίστός, and the Latins expressed oi by oe .—Av and ev probably had the sound of ou and ey , in out, and eye, both because they are often separated, and because ef and af would be pronounced with a harshness, of which there is not another instance in Greek, e. g. nafs, Orphefs, pepaidevntai, for νανς, Ορφβνς, πετταίόευνται, and because in Latin, where the two diphthongs when followed by a vowel, are written av, ev, the a and e are always long, S’ Evander E νανόρος, Agave *Ayavf which could not happen had av and ei/ not been diphthongs. The fol¬ lowing is the order of the vowels and diphthongs, pro¬ ceeding gradually from the greatest opening of the mouth to the smallest. Vowels. Diphthongs. V a ι oi a av m * et ov 1 eu and ην ο ω • .* · * » v Obs. The difference between ev and ην cannot be accurately determined. It seems to have been very small, since όντνχει and ηύτυχει were both written, though the fine pronunciation of the Attics seems to have made the difference distinguishable. Here follow some remarks on the pronunciation of §. 18 the consonants. I _ l. The modern Greeks pronounce β like b with an aspirate bh or rather like a v with a hissing VOL· I· c ■ ■ - ·. - 1* ,. I • % ' 18 Of the Pronunciation. ✓ / through the teeth, which was probably the pro¬ nunciation of the ancients, since they expressed the Latin v either by β or ov y e. g. Servius Σερβω $ : the Dorians expressed the digamma by /3, and often interchanged ψ and β. / 2. y before another y, and before the rest of the con¬ sonants, was pronounced like n or ng , e. g. ayyeXos, eyKctprepeiv, ey^piu). Sometimes it was so written, / / V / * f συνκΧητον, συνχωρήσώΟΊ, Χανχανοντων , evTVvyavwcri, Marm. Oxon. iv. 1. io. clxxiv. 1. Β. πι. 1. 54. • ■ · l < · , L clvi. 1. 7. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 317- 3. $ and Θ are pronounced by the modern Greeks with an aspirate, yet so that it is less in S, and more strong in Θ, which latter is exactly expressed by the pronunciation of th in English. That the ancients pronounced Θ in this manner, is evinced by the substitution of σ for it in the iEolo-Doric dialect, e. g. σιος for θεός. Probably also they pronounced £ like the modern Greeks, with a slight hissing , whence it came, that $ of the pre¬ sent tense was changed into σ in the future. 4. ζ had the sound of a soft s, being compounded of like s in the French words aise , Muse. 5. l is merely a vowel, never the consonant j, although in Latin, when between two vowels, it becomes j. Αϊας, Ajax> Τροία , Troja. I * \ ' « Λ . t i ^ 6. κ always had the sound of k , e. g. Κικερων , τ that of t . 7. σχ was pronounced like sch, or sc, since σκ is some¬ times substituted for it. I Spirits, or Breathings , To the written characters belong also the spirits, spiri- $· iwSj or breathings, of which there are two, the lene ( spiritus lems, πνεύμα ψιλόν) and the rough ( spiritus asper , πνεύμα δασύ, or h). All words which begin with a vowel, but are not pronounced with the rough breathing, have the spiritus lenis over their initial letter, because every word that begins with a vowel can be distinguished in the pronunciation by no other means from the preceding letters, than by drawing the breath from the lungs with a moderate effort. (The same is the case in German, in compound words, e. g. ent-erben, which sounds very dif¬ ferently from en-terben). The ancients also, like us/ sepa¬ rated compound words, and used the spiritus lenis { in the middle (r). The spiritus asper is placed over every v at the beginning of a word, and over every p at the beginning. If two p stand together, the first receives the spiritus lenis, the latter the spiritus asper, e. g. άρρητος, Πύρρος. In diphthongs the spirit is placed over the second vowel: Έύριπίόης, οΐος. In the middle of a word also the ancients place the spiritus asper before that part of the compound which had it before com¬ position, e. g. προς€λ€ΐν ? . Obs. The ancient mark for the spiritus asper was H. This was afterwards divided, and l· used as the spiritus asper, q as the spiritus lenis . Fisch. p. 238. sq. It occurs in this form in * i. e. the Germans. In English we make no such distinction. f Fisch. p. 242 sq. 8 Burgess. Praef. ad Daw. Misc. Cr. p. xiv. Brunck. ad iEsch. Prom. 438. Aristoph. Lys. 551. Villois. Proleg. ad II. p. 2. Scwheigh. ad Ath. T. v. p. 195. sqq. 20 Spirits. the most ancient editions of the Greek authors. The spirit up were introduced by the Alexandrian grammarians 200 years before Christ. 20 . The ancient Greek language appears to have had no spiritus asper, at least the ZEolians were without it , and in the Ionic dialect, like all other aspirates, it rarely occurs. Hence aXro from αλλομαι, Ίκμενος, from ικνε o- μαι, ηελιος for ήλιος. But the ancients pronounced every word which began with a vowel, with an aspirate which had the sound of our w , and was often expressed by β, or v, and also y\ For this the figure of a double Γ was invented, F, whence the name digamma, which was called ZEolic, because the ZEolians, of all the tribes, retained the greatest traces of their original language. Thus the ZEolians wrote or pronounced FoTi/os, FeXe'a, Velia, (for the Latins expressed this digamma by a V). It was also placed between two vowels, in order to avoid a hiatus (r), as vavs , mFos, navis , oFts, ovis , αιΡων, cevum , αϊορνος, avernus, βοϊος, bovis. Sometimes it was ex¬ pressed by v ; whence arose ναυός, αύηρ , αυως , for ναός , άηρ> άως, ί. e. ηως, χεω χεϊω, χευω (henc efut. χευσω), θεω, θεΡω, θενω, (futur. θενσομαι ), and from the original form ελάω came eXaFo), ελαύω , and ελαύνω. Thus also καω, καϊω, καυω , whence futur. καυσω ; 7 τλεω, 7 r\eFw, ττλεύω futur. ττλεύσω^ ). Amongst the Dorians a β supplied the place of the F, as in θάβακος for Θάακος, θάκος, The seat/ βαδύς, βεδος, φάβος, for ά$ύς, e^os, φάος ] . This mark was used also by the ZEolians, the Lacedaemonians, and h Fisch. p. 153. 24b. i That this is the old Greek pronunciation is asserted by Dionysius Halic. Antiq. R. T. 1. p. 1 6 , 22. See Interp. ad Hesych. i. p. 818, 2 6 . k See Dawes Misc. Crit. Praef. p. xxn. and passim. Koen. ad Greg, p. l62. Heyne Obss. ad Horn. T. vn. 708 sqq. Fisch. p. 239 sqq. 1 See Hemsterh. ad Hesych. T. 1 , p. 1670 . Varieties of the Dialects, fyc. 21 others, before the p ; hence βρόίον, βρυτηρ, βράκος, have been noticed in iiEolic for ρά$ον, ρυτηρ, ράκος αο . Variations of the Dialects in Single Letters. The Dialects are distinguished from one another in the use of single letters, and in the mode of joining seve¬ ral letters, in the forms of nouns and verbs, in peculiar words, in construction and phrases, and in general style. Here follow some of the principal differences with respect to single letters, in which, however, it must be observed, that these changes are not universal, but occur only under certain circumstances in single words, which must be learned by use. l. The vowels a and e are frequently changed, e. g, the lonians said τεσσερε? and ερσην, the Attics τεσσαρες and άρσην. The Ionic and Doric dialects were particularly fond of ε before and after λ and p, where other dialects had a, e. g. Ion. Dor. νελος, Att. υαλος ρ . The same is the case with the Attic dialect in many instances, e. g. in \εως (Ion. Herodot. i, 22. Doric Pind. 9, lOO, and Attic.) which is commonly Xaos q . Instead of the verbal termi¬ nation άω, the lonians and Dorians, in many cases, had εω, e. g. 6pew, φοιτεα ), θηεομαι , which in Attic Were οράω, φοιτάω, θεάομαι τ . Again, the lonians and Dorians, in many cases, put a , where the Attic dialect had ε, e. g. τάμνειν, n Gregor, p. 270. et Koen. Valck. ad Theocr. Adon. p. 317. 0 Whether the ancient lonians, and particularly Homer and Hesiod, used the digamma, see §. 50." p Hemsterh. ad Thom. M. p. S(>2. Koen. ad Greg. p. 17 . r Fiscli. p. 56'. sq. Koen. ad Greg. p. 183, 7. . 21 . 22 ' Varieties of the Dialects, μεγαθος, (which, according to analogy, is more proper as from μεγας,) Attic τεμνειν, μεγεθος ; Doric οκα, τόκα ; Attic ore, Totg\ So the iEolians said \εγόμεθεν } τυπτόμεθεν, instead of Χεγόμεθα,τυπτόμεθα,&ηά the Latin pellex is fornv- ed from the iEolic pronunciation of the word πάλλαξ. §. 22. A and η. It has been already observed, that the Doric dialect is chiefly distinguished from the Ionic and Attic by the frequent use of a, where the other dialects had η , (v. §. 4), Yet this is not to be understood, as if the Dorians had used a for η universally. They always said τίθημι, not τίθαμι * 1 : they left also unchanged η in the conjunctives of the same tenses, Aor. l, act. pass. mid. of verbs in εω, aw, e. g. δάλησατο Theocr. 9· 36. σιτηθην , ib. 26 ; but τίμασε , Pind. 01. 9. 105, &c. u ; and in the second and third persons of the passive terminations in all cases. On the other hand, the use of η was Ionic. The Attics held the mean between the two ; where a vowel or a p pre¬ ceded the Ionic η, they used a, with a few exceptions, e. g. αίθρη , άθάρη, γεωμετρης : instead of the diphthong ηυ , they had the diphthong av, except in case of the augment, &c. e. g. Ion. σοφίη, 'Ήρη, ττρηγμα, νηυς; Attic σοφία, 'Ήρα, πράγμα, ναΰς. So the forms κυναγός, οπαδός, are from the Doric dialect, instead of κυνηγός, όπηδός x . On the other hand, they retained the Ionic η in the Aor. 1 . of verbs in αινώ, εσημηνα, εμιηνα, ερρυπηνα*. In Other Cases the Ionic and Doric dialects coincided, where the Attic deviated, as in the contraction of ae and αει into η and rj, e. g. όρητε, όρη, for όράτε, opa (r) ; and this the Attics retain in Xftv, πεινγν, Sixj/rjv, χρησθαι. V. 5. 52. * Fisch. p. 71. Koen. ad Greg. p. 138. 1 Koen. ad Gregor, p. 101. u Schol. Theocr. 1 , 11*2. et Valck. x Valck. ad Eurip. Phoen. p. 8. ad Hippol. p. 282. Comp. Dorvill. ad Charit. p. 240. y Fisch. 1 , p. 6l. 23 in some. Letters. A and o. The iEolians said instead of στρατός, παϊς, ττραυς, στροτός , iroip ( puer ), π ρους (ττροΡυς, probus). So the Dorians said τεττορες for τετταρες, which occurs also in Hesiod epy. 696. In some words the Attics did the same, e. g. οσταφίς for άσταφίς z . Obs. This conversion of a and o remained also, in some forms, common to all the dialects, e. g. κτειν a* *, Jut. κτενώ 9 Aor. εκτανον, PerJ εκτονα. στελλω, στελω. Aor. εσταλον 9 εσταλην, Perf. βστολα, whence στόλος (it), , / A and v are interchanged in 7 λάφω and γλύφω. Thus the AEolians said ττεσσυρες and ητίσυρες instead of τεσσαρες, by changing the r into tv, which occur also ir> Homer. Od . e. 70 a . -* β t ■ 4 I \ A and ω. The Ionics instead of ζάω, όβάω, use the §. 23, forms ζωιο, ηβωω. So also τωντω Dor. for ταυτον, i. e. του auTov b . Instead of κράζω the Attics said κρωζω. The ASolians and Dorians chiefly used a instead of ω in the genit. plur. of substant. fem. gen. τάν Μοισάν and Μωσάν, instead of των Μι ονσων 0 · Thus also, φνσαντες 3 όιαττεινάμεςρ πράτος, instead of φυσωντες, όιαττεινώμεν , 7 τρωτός. Ε and η (r). Instead of βασιλόος, or βασιλόως, βασιλεϊ, βασΐλεες , and the same terminations in similar forms, the w Ionians and Dorians said βασιληος , βασιληί, βασιληες, το- κηες, which last the Attics retained, but with the rejection of the e, βασιλης , τοκης Α . In like manner άηόων was formed from αειόων . Instead of λεγειν 3 φίλειν p ")(ειρος 3 κείνος , the ζ I isch. ρ. 6 2 sq. Koen. ad Greg. p. 215. a Fisch. p. 54. b Koen. ad Greg. p. 108. c Fisch. p. 106'. Koen. ad Gre^. p. 85, 40. d Brunck. ad Soph. Ο. T. 18. Fisch. p. Ill, * Fisch. p. 111. 24 Varieties of the Dialects , \ iEolians and Dorians said Xeyw, φίλη v, χηρός, κηνος, (τηνοςΥ. Nevertheless,, the Ionians said ίσσων, when the ' ' * *s I rest Used ησσων, and εσαν for ησαν g . I I t ‘ §. 24. E and t. εστία Attic, ίστ^ Ion. Hence the old forms Ίσχω, ίσπω, for ίχω, επω. ΊΓΙΐβ enclitics $e, ye, which were affixed to the article and pronoun, were in Attic Si, yi, e. g. oS'i, raSl, ravrayi, Touroyi h , Instead of deos the iEolians and Dorians said σιός, by changing Q into σ. This use of t for e remained particularly in the jEolic dialect, which instead of εν said \v, Lat. in. So the Latin intus was formed from εντός'. The Dorians, parti¬ cularly the Lacedaemonians, and the Sicilian and Italian Greeks, changed the e in verbs in εω into £: thus they used ιω contracted from ιάω instead of εω. Hence επαινιώ * f * ■ Aristopll. Lysistr. 198. μoyιώμες, Χνχνοφοριώντες , ib. 1001, 2. for μoyεoμevy λυχνοφορεοντες. Hence also the forms which occur in other dialects, κατηφιώ, ακηόιώ, yeiToviw, instead of κατηφεω , άκηόεω, yetTovew k . E and o (as in the old Latin vorsus and vortex , for versus and vertex). The IEolians and Dorians said ορπετον for ερπετόν, πρες for προς * 1 , eSovTas, εόυνας, for όΰόντας, όΰόνας™. So the Latins formed from yow genu n . Obs. This conversion of e and o appears most com¬ mon in derivatives, e. g. from Xeyw comes XeXoya and λό^ο?, from εχω, the compounds aiy ίοχος, άστυοχος. f Fisch. p. 112. 5 Fisch. p. 84. h Koen. ad Greg. p. 55, 94- 1 Voss, ad Catull. p. 331. Fisch. p. 73 sq. k Koen. ad Greg. p. 104 sq. 1 Koen. ad Greg. p. 274. Koen. ad Greg. p. 281. n Fisch. p. 75. 97. ' in some Letters . / 25 H and i. Instead of ημέρα the ancients said [μέρα, according to Plato Cratyl. 3 1. Thus ηδέ in Homer has yet another form ίδέ. H and ω. The sea Mseotis, Μ αιωτις, is called by Herodotus after the Ionic form Mmi/Tt?. So πτωσσω and πτησσω 0 . H and ai were interchanged by the iEolians, who said θναίσκω, μιμναίσκω, for θνήσκω, μιμνησκω 9 . Η, «, and εο. The Boeotians, a branch of the iEolians, said τίθειμι, ( ίστειμι, άδικειμένος, θειβαι, instead of τιθημι, ΐστημι, αδικημένος, θήβ at, whence also the perfectum τέθεικα from τιθημι for τέθηκα, είμι for ημι (whence also the imperf. η) are received in the common dialect,, and μεις for μην, which occurs in Homer and others. In the same manner the Doric-iEolic forms €7T όεισεν, Seeiarj, for έποίησεν, δεησ^. The .ZEolianS changed the termination ης in proper names into εος\ H and o in composition, e. g. % τορηφόρος for τη /ρο¬ φόρος, θεητόκος , κραναηπεδος, ΐloληyevης, for Θεοτόκος , κρα- ναόπεδος, Π νΧο'γενης 9 . Ο and υ, e. g. άνομα, -ZEol. for ονομα, ομοίως Theocv . 29, 20. ed. Valck. Brunch, στόματος, ib. 25. Hence also the Compounds επώνυμος, σονωνομία * 1 . So ayopw in Homer and others is another form for ayopa. In proper names ending in αος, the Dorians omit the o. e. g. Μβι/ελα?, Eur . Troad. 212 . 0 Fisch. p. 85. p Fisch. ib. * Koen. ad Greg. p. 30. r Fisch. p. 85. * Fisch. p. 97 . sq. 1 Koen. ad Greg. p. 2/4. Fisch. p. 98. / 26 Varieties of the Dialects , Q and id, which latter the JEolians used, e. g. τυίόε for τώδε, i. e. ώδε, μεσυι for μεσιρ η . 26. 2. Instead of short vowels the Ionians, JEolians, and Dorians used diphthongs, e. g. at for a used by the ^Eolians, in the termination άς, in the accus. plur. and where it is formed from ανς, e. g. ταϊς τιμαϊς , καΧαις, μεΧαις, τάλαις, τυψαις, for τάς τιμάς, καλάς, μελά?, ταλα?, τυφας χ . Et for e. ξεινος, κείνος , ειρωτάω, for ξένος, κενός, ερω- ταω. Hence εΊνεκα, εΊσω in Attic also (r). Eiy for 6. ευκηλος, όευομαι , in the Ionic dialect, for εκηΧος , όεομαι. Ου for ο. νουσος 9 μουνος , ουνομα, ουόός, ούρος, in Ho¬ mer, Herodotus, Pindar, &c. for νόσος , μόνος, όνομα , oSo?, O| 0 os\ But this took place only in nouns which are not derived from verbs, not in ττόνος, στόνος, φόνος, στόΧος ν . Ου for υ was peculiar to the iEolians and Dorians, particularly the Lacedaemonians and Boeotians, κουνες, κουμα , Χι^γουρός, θουρά (whence άμττίθουρος in Hesychius), without the syllable being thereby made long 2 . Hence αττεσσουα for άττεσσυη in the epistle of the Lacedaemo¬ nian general in Xenophon Hist. Gr . I. i. 23 \ Hence in Homer είΧηΧουθα for εΧηΧυθα. Οι for o, e. g. 7Γ οίη 9 ροιη, χροιη , for 7τόα, ρόα 9 χρόα . The same took place in the Attic dialect in poia h , χροιά u Valcken. Ep. ad Rover, p. 32. Koen. ad Greg. p. 169 . x Koen. ad Gregor, p. 9Φ. 282. Fisch. p. 92. y Gregor, p. 1 79. 1 Koen. ad Gregor, p. 179 . Interpr. ad Hesych. v. Γελοντρον. Ka- ρουνα. Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 7 . ' A Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 265. b Oudend. ad Thom. M. p. 786 . in some Letters. 27 A . % {Aristoph. Nub. 718. 1012. 1016. 1171 .) στοιά (Aristoph. Eccl. 672. 680°). Obs. This mode of lengthening the syllable was used by the Poets, on account of the metre, in many other cases, e. g. eyueio, σείο, for εμεο, σεο, rjyi >οίησε, for η^νόησε, άλοιαν for a\oqv A . It has been before remarked (§. 20.), that by the Eolic digamma between two vowels, which was ex¬ pressed by υ , ev instead of ε is often formed in the other dialects also. So from λαω Horn. Hymn . Merc. 360. arose λε'ω (§. 21.) l. λεΤω, λευω, fut. λειίσω, and hence a new verb λεΰσσω. On the other hand, short vowels were often substituted for the diphthong composed of a vowel and t, e. g. εταρος, in the Ionic, Doric, and Eolic e , for εταίρος. The Eolians in particular always rejected 1 from the diphthong ai, when followed by a vowel, άρχάος , !A λκάος, for άρχάΐος, Ά\καως { . The Attics did the same in κλάω, κάω, ελαα, with a long, for κλαίω , καίω , i\aia s . The Ionians in particular rejected the 1 from the diphthong εί, e.g.'ai τόδεξις, διεδεξατο, μεζων , and from the adject, in ειος , and the feminine of adjectives in νς, επιτηδεος , επετεος, ιθεη, ευρεη, δασεη, for επιτήδειος, επέ¬ τειος, ιθεια, εύρεϊα, δασεία 11 . The Eolians and Dorians did the same particularly in infinitives in ειν , βόσκεν, ελκεν , for βόσκειν, ελκειν. Instead of οι the Eolians and Dorians said o, as ποώ , ευνόα for 7Γ0ίώ, εύνοια 1 ; for ου also o, e. g. c Piers, ad Moer. p. 338, and on the other hand Brunck. ad Aristoph. Eccl. 676 . -o d Koen. ad Gregor, p. 133, 29 . e Gregor, p. 30. 201.28 6. Fisch. i, p. 94 . f Gregor, p. 280. g Piers, ad Mcerid. p. 321. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 30. h Giegor. p. 205. 224. ubi v. Koen. Fisch. 1 , p. 94 . 1 Koen. ad Greg. p. 30. I 28 Varieties of the Dialects , I · * ’ r · . tos θεός, Χυκος, αμπεΧος, Theocr. ΙΥ. 11. V. 109* The Ionians said βόΧομαι ( Od . a, 234. 7r', 387·), τρίπος, i ro- λι/7Γθ9, for βουΧομαι, τρίττους , 7roXv7rov9 k . 27 . The iEolians pronounced each vowel of the diph¬ thongs separately, as the Italians of this day, τταϊ?, ίάίς, όίοα, Άτρειόας, Find. Pytll. 11 , 47 1 . So from Γ ραιος Γ ραίος; the Latin Grajus. Probably this was origi¬ nally a feature of the Ionic dialect, and of the ancient Greek in general. At least with them the dative of the substantives in 09, εος, ends in εί , not ει , and the Ionic poets have όίομαι, οίω, πάίς, yet only When a short syllable precedes, which must be followed by another short syllable, in order to complete the dactyl, e. g. των ηρχ Ay καίοιο 7 rat? κρείων Ayamivwp, II. β\ 6 θ 9 · (also in Herodot. vi. 127 . 136.), and in the same case εί for ευ, when v is followed by two consonants, which make it long, e. g. οίς κεν ευ yi /οίην, II. y , 233. ευθρονος™ . The Ionians in particular separated the diphthong ει, origi¬ nally εί, into ηί, e. g. στρατηίη , μνημηιον for στρατέ ία, μνημείου ; ΤΙηΧήίόης for ΥίηΧείίης Ώ . The new Attic 0 retained this, but put the 1 underneath, κΧίίίες, κΧρθρα, for κΧείίες, κΧειθρα. Hence XyToopyeiv for Xειτoυpyείv, vid. §. 13. So also the Dorians, but without the 1 subscript, vid. §. 27. The Ionic prose writers also separated the av, where the a had a duller sound, and became changed into ω, e. g. θωϋμα, θωϋμαζω (r) ; hence εωϋτου , which however may have arisen from the contraction of o and a in eo αυτοί , as εμεωϋτου from εμεο αυτοί. So τωϋτω was Doric, for k Fisch. 1 , p. 105. 1 Koen. ad Gregor, p. 273. Fisch. p. 108. m Wolf. Praef. ad II. ed. 1804. p. lxv. Ernesti ad II. v. 612 . n Koen. ad Gregor, p. 173. • Koen. ad Gregor, p. 42. I in some Letters. 29 / · •ravTou p j i. e. του αυτου ρ . The Attics on the other hand contracted all separate vowels into diphthongs. The diphthongs also were interchanged with simple vowels,, and with one another. Av and ω by the Ionians and Dorians, e. g. τρώμα and τρων μα for τραύμα , ώΧκα, for αυΧακα. So also εωϋτου, θωϋμα, which was also θωμά q . A or a, and «, by the Dorians, e. g. κΧάξ, άπόκΧαξον , for κΧείς, άττοκΧεισον 1 . Et and e, η or y. The iEolians and Ddrians pro¬ nounced the infinitive in eiv or eiv, ev and ήν; e. g. aueX- yev Theocr. V. 27· evevSev id. V. 10. for άμβΧ^γειν, ενεύ^ειν ; εΧθην, Χαβήν, καΧην , for εΧθειν, ΧαβεΊν, καΧεΊν ; the JSiO- lians εΧθην , Χάβην, κάχ-ην s . This is probably the original pronunciation 1 . In other cases also they used η for ei , e. g. κηνος (Dor. τηνος) for κείνος, χήρο 9 for χειρός, τεΧηος, οίκηος, θηος for τεΧειος, οικείος, θειος ; ής, πΧηων for eh , 7rXeiW u . Hence ημεν for είναι in Thucyd. v. 77 . instead of which είμεν is written by Timaeus. The TEolians changed ei before X μ v p σ into e, and doubled the following consonant, e. g. ωτεΧΧά, εμμί, εμμα , (hence •γβμματα, * *γημα, i. e. F εμματα, Ρήμα, in Hesychilis), κτεννω, φθερρω, σπερρω , (not φθερρω), for ωτειΧη , ε’ιμί, εϊμα, κτείνω , φθείρω, σ7τείρω χ . The Attic βασιΧ^ς, 'narys have eith er ρ Koen. ad Gregor, p. 108. • . * H Fischer, p. 110 . Koen. ad Gregor, p. 196 . r Valck. ad Theocr. Id. vi, 22 . s Gregor, p. 293 sq. 1 Salmas, de 1. Hellen. p. 66 . Koen. ad Gregor, p. 136 . 142. It is doubtful whether ην was used as well as eiv. Valck. ad Theocr. xi. 71 . (x. Id.) u Koen. ad Gregor, p. 129 . 137. Fisch. p. Ill sq. x Koen. ad Gregor, p. 275. 280. 30 Varieties of the Dialects , the same origin, or have arisen from the Ionic βασιληες^ \τητηες, in which case they should be written βασιλης , ιττττης. El and ai in Ionic and Doric, αί, αίθβ , for ει, είθε, in Homer and Theocritus. So the Doric forms φθαίρω, κλάις, for φθείρω, κλείς γ . Ου and ω in Doric and Ionic, ων, ουκων in Herodotus and Theocritus, for ουν, ουκουν, βωλα , τως νόμως, τώ εφάβω, Μώσα, τταιύύωαν, in Doric writers, for βουλή , τούς , νόμους, τού έφηβου , Μονσα, 7 ται ζουσων ζ . The JEolians retained the o, which alone was used in old times, e. g. βοΧά, όρανός a . Ου and οι, e. g. ύττάκοισον for ύπάκουσον 'Theocr. VII. 95. ΧίΊτοισα, κατθανοισα, ύίύοι for SiSoo b . Ου for v was chiefly Laconian, μουσίσΰεν, for μυθί - *28. 3. Consonants also were interchanged with one another, especially those which belonged to one organ, or in different organs had a similar pronunciation, (vid. §. 4.) Here follow the principal changes. • - Q B and y. What was called by the rest of the Greeks yXfywv, was in Attic βλη-χων. The -ZEolians and Do¬ rians instead of βλέφαρου said y\^apov d , which is used by Pindar. So yά\avoς, whence the Latin g/ans , for βαλαυος . y ‘Koen. ad Gregor, p. 115, a. z Fischer, p. 115, sq. / a Koen. ad Gregor, p. 82, sq. h Fischer, p. 117, sq. Gregor, p. 94, sq. c Valck. ad Theocr. Ad. p. 279, c. A Koen. ad Gregor, p. l6. Fisch. p. 155. • * 1 . * · ' * # , > *Vi some letters. 31 Γ and δ. Instead of yfj the zEolians said δά ; whence also in the Attic dialect Αημητηρ. So the Lacedaemo¬ nians said διφουρα for yecpvpa*. Γ and ac, as κναφεύς and yvatyevs: See Hemsterh . ad Lucian . T. i. p. 312. Δ and β. The JEolians said instead of δελφί v, Δελ¬ φοί , βελφίν, Βελφοί . So arose the Latin bis from δίς*. Δ and ζ. ζ was iEolic, but Ionic also, e. g. ζορκάδες for δορκάδες, in Herodotus: for διά the ancients said ζά , which the iEolians retained. Hence the compounds of ζά, e. g. ζάκορος , ζάπλουτος , in Ionic So from Ζειί?, iEol. Δει^, Hesych. s. y. might have arisen the geni¬ tive Αως , and from εξω the substant. εδος> In other cases the iEolians used σδ, σκ , σπ , for £ h . Instead of £ the Dorians said σδ, the Lacedaemo¬ nians and Boeotians δδ, e. g. 7 υμνάδδομαι, μάδδα, δδδει , 7ταίδδωαι^, for 7 νμνάζομαι, μάζα, όζει , παί^οι/σωμ * 1 . Δ and τ. The Lacedaemonians changed the termi¬ nation έδο? into tro? k . σσ and tt. Instead of συρίζειν some of the iEolian §· 29 . tribes συρίσσειν ; the Boeotians and Attics συρίττειν. So άρμόζειν, Att. άρμόττειν ; οπλίζω, Bceot. όπλίττω 1 . Simi- * Hesych. 1 , p. 1010 . f Fisch. p. l63. g Fisch. p. 104, sqq. h Greg. p. 281. et K. 1 Fisch. p. 169 . Valck. epist. ad Rover, p. 72. sq. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 289. Maitt. p. 213. .. k Koen. ad Gregor, p. 141. b. 1 Fisch. p. 169 sq. Gregor, p. 67 . ubi v. Koen. 32 Varieties of the Dialects, \ Jarly εΧίσσω, εΧεΧίττω and εΧεΧίζω are different forms of one word. Θ and σ. Instead of Θ, when followed by a vowel,, the Dorians, and particularly the Lacedaemonians, used σ 3 g*. σιος for θεός , μουσί$$ειν for μυθίζειν, ’Ασαναία for Αθηναία. The Ionians also often used σσ for Θ , e. g. βυσσός for βυθός” 1 . Hence the Doric and Ionic form εσΧός for εσθΧός. \ Θ and φ , e. g. φηρ in the iEolic dialect for θηρ ; also in Homer, as also φΧίφεται Od. p, 221. ουφαρ ( uber ) for ουθαρ ; also in Attic φΧ^ν for θΧαν \ Θ and χ, in the Doric, forms όρνιχος^ εζεχα, εζευχω, ίχμα, for όρνιθος , εξωθεν, εξεΧθω, Ίθμα°. Λ and ν. The Dorians put ν for X before r and 0 p, and said ηνθον , φίντατος, βεντιστος, for ηΧθον, φίΧτατος , βεΧτιστος <ι . The Attics πΧευμων , Χίτρον , which others pronounce τνευμων, νίτρον ν . §. 3ο. Μ and 7Γ. ο7Γ7τατα, ττεόα were iLolic forms for ομματα , μετά*. ν · Ν and σ. σ was peculiar to the iEolians : 1. in the first person of the plur. indie, act. τυτττομες for τυτττομεν i 2. in the infin. in αειν , οειν , after rejecting’ e, mV, ois·, e. g. yeXak, χρυσόίς, for yeXaeiv (yeXav), χρυσυειν (χρο- m Fisch. p. 171 . Valck. epist. acl Rover, p. 73 . Koen. ad Gregor, p. 136, 33. n Fisch. p. 172 . Greg. p. 289. et K. Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. P. S71. J# 0 Hemsterh. ad Hes. ν. εζεχεμει /at. p Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 412. 3 Fischer p. 178. r Fisch. p. 182. * Fisch. p. 180. sq. in some Letter. 33 o-ovv) : 3. in some other words, e. g. αίες for αίεν ( ά uets, pis, Sis, for μν)ν (§. 25.), ρίν, θίν ; and vice versa εντί for εστί 1 . Π and κ . The iEolians and Ionians put κ for 7 r in words of interrogation and relatives,, e. g. κότε, κώς, κοίος, οκοτερος, οκόσοι, for 7 τότε, 7 τως, ποιος, οπότερος, όπόσοι 11 . v Πτ and σσ . Instead of θ7ττα> (οπτομαι) , πεπτω, πίπτω) in the .ZEolic and Ionic dialect οσσω {όσσομαι), πεσσω, ( πίσσω x ). ~ ' The Lacedaemonians and others changed Σ into the following consonant, unless it was a liquid ; e. g. εττω for έστω, διδάκκη for δίδασκα, εττάν, εττόν, for ες τάν, ες τδν, Decret. Laced. c. Timoth. in Salmas, de Hell. p. 82 y . When between two vowels, the Lacedaemonians and other Dorian tribes frequently rejected σ, putting instead of it the spiritus asper, πάα or παά, Arist. Lysistr. 994. μώα for μώσα ib. 1297· παιδδωά v for παιζουσών. ib. 1313 z * * Σ was often changed into δ * e. g. οδμη for οσμή , zce- καδμβνον Pind. 01. I, 42. for κεκασμενον ; so according to some Ίδμεν in Homer and Herodotus is instead of ίσμεν Λ . Σ and p. The τΈοΙο -Doric tribes were found of p , as §. 31 the Lacedaemonians, who said Ίππορ , πόρ, σιορ , for 'ίππος, πους, θεός, ποίρ for παίς (hence the Latin puer). Hence in 1 Fisch. p. 184. sq. 119· " Fisch. p. 190 . Gregor, p. 197. * Greg. p. 290 . Maitt. p. 212 . sq. Fisch. p. 214. Valck. ad Herodot. 685, 99· ad Thom. M. p. 311. y Valcken. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 287- ad Phcen. p. 56l. Koen. ad Greg. p. 214. 1 v. ad Hesych. T. II. p. 1294, 19 . Valck. ad Theocr. Adon. p. 274. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 137· / * a Koen. ad Gregor, p. 2 76. Fisch. p. 196 . VOL. I. D Λλ I 34 ' n Varieties of the Dialects, the Deer. Laced, c. Timoth. T ιμόσεορ 6 Μ ιΧησιορ παρα- •γινόμςνορ. τάρ άκόαρ. τωρ νεωρ. So also in Latin honor and honos h . » Σ and ξ ; in ξνν for συν in Homer,, and the old Attic writers c . Σ and r. The iEolians and Dorians said οσα, σοσα . The Attics introduced T in άνυσω, άρυσω, for άνυω. b Interpr. ad Hesych. v. σιορ. Fisch. p. 200 sq. Casaub. ad Athen. vm. p. 352. c Koen. ad Greg. p. 10. Hemst. ad Lucian. T. i. p. 317· Bip. d Piers, ad Moer. p. 256. Fisch. p. 201. Hemst. ad Lucian. T. 1. p. 314. c Koen. ad Gregor, p. 83. sqq. f Koen. ad Gregor, p. 109 . g Gregor, p. 288. et Koen. Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. 1 . p. 312. h Koen. ad Greg. p. 203. Fisch. p. 203 sq. i Koen. ad Greg. p. 116. k Koen. ad Gregor, p. 80 sq. Fisch.·p. 212 sq. V in some Letters* ' 35 αρύωΚ Ιιι other cases the insertion of r after a consonant served also to lengthen the present tense of the verb, e. g. τύπτω, for τύπω . T and 7 Γ. e. g. &πά§ιον, σπαλείς Doric and iEolic for σταδίου, σταλείς* Hence also σπάλας in the Attic dialect for στο\άς ιη ί Φ β and 7Γ. For φ the Dorians used π, e. g. άμπίθουρος, άμπιστατηρ , for άμφίθυρος, άμφίστατηρ, (hence the Latins ambidexter and Poenus from ΦοΊνιζ) whence in the rest of the dialects αμπεχειν, αμπέχονου, άμπίσχειν, &C. are » ! left n ; the Macedonians β , e. g. Β ρύ Ύ ες, Βίλιππος, Βερε- νικη, for Φρνγες, Φίλιππος, Φερενίκη 0 . So also in tile aritient Latin Bruges for Pliryges. Quint. 1 , 4 , 1 5 . 1 y r ( * . .,/ * . X and JC. μονκορ Doric for μυχός, δεκομαι, κιθων, in §, 33 . ' I Doric and Ionic for δέχομαι, χιτωυ ρ * On the other hand άτρεχες Doric for άτρεκες q . - / ^ «' Besides these, the iEolians, Dorians and Ionians, frequently doubled the consonants in Jthe middle of words, e. g. τόσσον, όσσον, μέσσον, for τόσον, όσον, μέσον, ij which was principally done by the Poets. The aspi¬ rates were doubled by prefixing the lenes, e. g. 6k X os, 0 K X iew in Pindar r . Yet this reduplication takes place only in certain words, e. g. not in έπεώη, ετερ 0ί . The 1 Greg. p. 28. m Koen. ad Gregor, p. 167. n ad Hesych. T. 1 . p. 284. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 159 . 0 Valck · ad Herod, p. 457, 99. ad Callim. fr. p. 39. p Koen. ad Greg. p. 158. * i Koen. ad Greg. p. 167. a. r Koen. ad Greg, p, 88. 136. 287.' D <2 36 « Of the Change and Omission / Attic Poets permitted themselves the use of it only in the Chorusses. The iEolians, Dorians and lonians, and the Attic Poets, in the Chorusses, frequently omit the final sylla¬ ble ; e. g. δώ for δώμα, μα for ματεμ, AZsch. Suppl. 903. ώ βά (for βασιλεύ) yds τταΊ 7. ευ, lb. 914 *. \ * On the Change and Omission of Letters for the sake of Euphony . * The Greeks in the formation of their words had particular regard to Euphony, and endeavoured to avoid the concurrence of consonants, which were difficult to be pronounced together, or of different kinds, as well as the meeting of two vowels of separate pronunciation. In the concurrence of two or more consonants the rule was observed : “ that of the consonants, those only which belonged to one class were put together.” Hence ah aspirated consonant is joined to an aspirate, a lene to a lene, a middle to a middle; if also two dissimilar consonants come together, the first assumes the pro¬ perties of the second. So from yey ραπται comes ey /Μφθην, from τέτυτΓΤ at, (τΰφθην, in €7rra and όκτω, if instead of the lene x the middle δ is put, ir and κ are changed into the middle consonants β and y, in ίβΖομος, oy&oos. So emy ράβοην from eiriyeypairTat. s. The spiritus asper has the same effect in composi¬ tion, since it changes the preceding lene into an 8 Koen. ad Gregor, p. 142. 37 of Letters . aspirate ; e. g. from 67τί and ήμερα after rejecting i in the preposition Comes Εφήμερος, from δέκα and ήμερα δεχημέρος, from κατά and ευ$ω> καθεύδω. If a lene pre¬ cedes the aspirate, that also is changed into an aspirate, e. g. εφθημερος from € 7 ττά and ήμερα. But εκ remains unchanged, e. g. εκθΧίβω not εχθΧίβω ; before a vowel only it is changed into εξ, e. g. εξαίρετος from εκ and / · αιρεω. Ohs. 1. The same takes place, if two words stand together, the second of which begins with an aspirated vowel and the first ends with a lene, or if the final vowel of the first word is rejected, and the second begins with an aspirated vowel; e. g. ούχ ' ίνα, ούχ οπως, άφ’ οι), άνθ' ών. §.43. Also in the crasis θοιμάτιον for το \ ιμάτιον , θάτερον for το ετερον. Hence also the lene before the aspirate thus introduced becomes an aspirate, e. g. ννχυ v7ro τήνο οΧοην tor νύκτα νπο. Ohs. 2. Sometimes also in words contracted together, the lene of the first, on account of a spiritus asper at the beginning of the first part of the compound, is changed into an aspirate, if another letter, generally a p, stands between the two, e. g. φροί - μιον from ττροοίμιον from οίμη for οίμη, φρούδος from Ίτρδ and οδός, τεθριτπΓος from τετταρα and ίππος . Obs. 3. This change of the consonants occurs in Homer and all the old Poets without exception ; in Herodotus, on the contrary, and the other Ionic prose authors, it is indeed, in the change of one and the same word, e. g. ky ράφθην , απηΧλάχθην ; but not in composition; and they write άπικόμην, επημερος , κατενδω , ονκ ομοίως , ονκ οΐδς τε είμί, &c. Έπιάλτης for ΈφιάΧτης ι . Whether this difference between the Homeric and the later Ionic dialect arose from the Rhapsodists, who, in the delivery of these compositions before the other Greeks, were afraid to offend the ear, by the union of a lene with an aspirate, or whether the Homeric pronunciation was actually that of the ‘Fisch. I. p. 153. Ruhnk, ad H. in Cerer. 88. Koen. ad Greg. p. 185. SB Of the Change and Omission y lonians, who had just then emigrated from Attica, and after¬ wards, in a softer climate, preferred the more easy pronun¬ ciation which required no aspiration, cannot with certainty be determined. Yet in the Attic dialect several deviations from the foregoing rules occur in Χενκιππος, κράτιππος,' άντηΧιος , which words compounded of 'ίππος, ηΧιος should be properly λενχί7Γ7Γθ9, κράθιππος, άνθηΧιος. The above-mentioned rule obtains only : l. When the aspirate and the lene would stand immediately to¬ gether; 2. When by the change of a lene into the aspirate the same aspirate does not stand twice together. For, l. if two syllables, immediately following, would according to their peculiar derivation begin with two aspirates, then the first is changed into a lene; e. g. θρίξ, τριχός, not θριχός, and by reduplication πεφίΧηκα, not φβφίΧηκα. Sometimes this change takes place in the original form of the word, e. g. τρέχω, τρέφω, for θρεχω, θρέφω ; in which verbs in the future, where the second aspirate is lost, the aspirate enters again in the first syllable, θρεξω. θρέφω. The spiritus asper under¬ goes this change in εχω, as this verb has εξω in the future, and should also properly have εχω in the present. In other words the aspirate following the spiritus asper has no effect, e. g. οθε v, άφη. Sometimes if the second aspirate becomes a lene, the aspiration is thrown back upon the first lene, e. g. τάφω, θάπτω, Obs. 1. This rule again does not obtain : 1. In compound words, e. g. ορνιθοθηρας , άνθοφόρος, Yet sometimes in this case also the first aspirate is changed, e. g. εκεχειρία from εχω and χειρ, επαφή, άπεφθος, for εφαφη, άφεφθος, from άφη , εφθος. 2. In the Aor. 1. pass, before the termination θην , which requires only the change of the preceding t, e. g. ετνθην , ετεθην, from θυω, θεϊναι. Yet ορθωθείς occurs. On the other hand άφεθην, εχύθην , are written, not άπεθην, εκνθην . 3. If a consonant, whether an aspirate or lene, immediately precede of Letters . 39 the second aspirate, e.g. θρεφθεις, θαλφθεις, θαφθείς, εθελχθην, τίθεσθαι. 4. If the second, by changing the lene before a spiritus asper becomes an aspirate, e. g. εθηχ 6 άνθρωπος. 5. By the affixing of the adverbial terminations θεν and θι, e. g. πανταχόθεν . Obs. 2. In the imperatives in θι, when the preceding syllable is an aspirate, τι is put, e. g. τυφθητι for τυφθηθι, τίθετι for τίθεθι. On the other hand τυπηθι, Ίσταθι, Obs. 3. The Ionians often change the second aspirate, e. g. κιθων, ενθαΰτα , for χιτων , ενταύθα". Q. The same aspirate cannot stand twice together. Hence not Άθθις, ΜαθθαΊος, but Άτθις, Ματθαίος, Βάκχος , ΊΖαπφω. ’· **'#{* * ^* ϊ , ) r · ν I »"* .· ■* Besides the above mentioned cases, if one or more §. 37 . consonants come together, which by their collision would be difficult to pronounce, changes take place in one of them. In the case of three, independently of composi¬ tion, the rule obtains, that so many cannot stand together except the first or last be a liquid, or y arising from v , e. g. σκληρός , πεμφθείς. In all other cases, a letter is either changed or rejected. * I. The following are changed : 1. β -π- Ί k e f ore σ i n to 2. y /c xJ 3. v before the labials β μ π φ φ into μ , e. g. Εμ¬ βάλλω, συμμί'γνυμι, εμπίπτω, εμφνω, εμφυχος. Thus the iEolians said for πεντε , changing τ into π , πεμπε*. Before y Κ ξ χ into y, e. g. εyyίvoμaι y avyK :όπτω, avy^a'^, σvyχωpεω. Before λ p σ into those letters, e. g*. σuλ\εyω, συρρέω , σνσσκευά'ζω , πα- Ψ ξ except έκ. §. 4. Obs. « Fisch. ρ. 154. Koen. ad Gregor, ρ. 158. * Fisch. ρ. 183 sq. 40 Of the Change and Omission / ’ Χιρροος, except in 7 νεφανσαι, εΧμιν$, πεττανσις. Blit the preposition εν before p σ and ζ remains un¬ changed, εν ρυθμός, ενριζόω, ενσείω, ένζεομαι, and 111 συν, when followed by two consonants or ζ, the v is thrown out, e. g. σύστημα in πάΧιν in the same case the v is retained, τταΧίνσκιος, or also 7ταΧίσκιος. 4, Before μ the labials β μ π φ φ are changed into e,g. ΧεΧειμμαι for ΧεΧεπτμαι, τετυμμαι for τετυπμαΓ, κ, χ into y, e* g. XεXεyμaι for ΧεΧεχμαι, SeSoyμaι for $€$οκμαι ; the lingual letters δ θ τ ζ into σ. Ex¬ cept the following I ακμή , αυχμός, ϊ&μων, κεκορυθμενος, 7 τότμος. * J \ ΜΜ'ΜΦ j*y > | §. 38. Obs. 1. The Ionic Doric and Attic poets often reject the last vowel before the preposition in composition, and change the remaining consonant at the termination according to the above rules, ei g, άμβαίνειν for αναβαινειν, άμμενω for αναμένω, άμτταυεσθαι, άμφυω , ^κρισις, άΧΧυειν for άναΧυειν. τ in this case is always changed into the following consonant, or when this is an aspirate into its corresponding lene, e. g. καββάΧΧειν for καταβάΧΧειν, κατθανων Soph. Antig.46’4. 555. Brunck. ad Phcehiss. 1420. ύββάΧΧειν for ιητοβάΧΧειν. ( *· , i «ί· \ S % In the same manner they contract the preposition with its case into one word, e. g. άμφόνον, άννεκυας II. /c. 298. καό- δυναμιν for κατά όυναμιν, καττφαΧαρα for κατά φάΧαρα , κα /c- κεφαΧης for κατά κεφαΧης , which however is rather oftener written as two words, am φόνον , /caV φάΧαρα , άμ βωμο 7 σι γ . This is done by the Dorians particularly. Hence καττάΰε, 7 Γοττως, καττά. Thuc. v. 77. 79· Obs. 2. According to the same rules, the ancients changed also the final consonants of words and wrote, e. g. τημ μητέρα , Toy χρόνον , κατά rroXiy και, for την μ., τον χρ., κατά 7τόΧιν και , in the Parian Inscription. So Koen . ad Greg . p. 83. quotes from an inscription: ύτταρχειν όε τφ $ικαστ$ καί y Wolf. Praef. ad Odyss. ed. 1794. p. xxxi. I of Letters . 41 II. The following letters are rejected : §. 39 . Obs. εν remains unchanged, as was observed, §. 37· If after the rejection of v before σ, only e or o re¬ mains, the syllable remaining long, es is changed into ας, 09 into ous, and the short a becomes long. Hence the Partic. Aor. i. Act. τυψας, στάς. That they are properly however τυψανς, στάνς, is shewn by this, that the syllable as is long, and the genitive ends in αντος. The partic. pres, from τίθημι is properly τιθενς, which the .dGolians retained, and whence comes the genitive Ti0€i/Tos a , (hence the partic. in Latin docens, &c.) Prom hence came τιθεί s, as well as from ό$όν s, oSovtos^ 6Sov s, from ε κοντές , €κοντ€σι, εκουσι. Similarly from σπενδω the fut. σπείσω b . Thus the iEolians and Dorians said instead of τνψανς, ποίησαν s, having rejected the v, τνψαις, ποιησαις . . + '■ · III. Sometimes also between two consonants, which §. 40. cannot be pronounced without difficulty, other softening z Fisch. p. 140. 184. Levesque on Thucyd. French Transl. Hermann, de em. rat. Gr. Gr. p. 10 sq. Maitt. p. 16'3 sqq. a Koen. ad Greg. p. 163. b Herm. de em. rat. Gr. Gr. p. 294. 42 Of the Change and Omission of Letters. consonants are inserted. This takes place before λ and p, to which after μ, β is prefixed, e. g. μεσημβρία from μέσος and ήμερα , μεμβληκα ; after v on the other hand a S, e. g. ανδρό 9. β and S stand in the place of ε which is lost in the rapid pronunciation, μεσημέρια , μεμεληκα , άνερος . Sometimes also μ is inserted in composition, without a vowel having been omitted, e. g. αμβροτος , φαεσίμβρο- τος, όμβριμος, άμττλακεω c , for αβροτος , &C. Λ * I ('V.V . / .“•jI ρ in the beginning of a word is doubled, whenever it is preceded by a vowel, in composition or declension, C. g. ερρεθην from ρεω } άρρητος , περίρροος. IV. The Ionians and Dorians had besides a fourth method of avoiding harshness in composition, viz. transposition. Thus they said τετρατος for τέταρτος, κραδίη for καρδία, κίρκος for κρίκος ά . Instead of ττνυκδς , the old AttlCS said ττνκνος^ . So also βαρδιστος, κάρτιστος for βράδιστος, κράτιστος, επραθον from περθω. Trans¬ position and insertion are both employed in ημβροτον for ημαρτον (ημρατον ) and in the Doric εμβράμενη for ειμαρμένη. In the old language two consonants frequently came together, one of which afterwards was omitted, but was often retained by the Poets on account of the metre, e. g. τττολεμος, τττοΧις , 'χθαμαλός from χαμαί . c Hermann, de em. Gr. Gr. p. 18 sqq. d Fisch. p. 157. More transpositions of p may be seen in Koen. ad Greg. p. 156. cf. ib. 232. € Kiister. ad Aristoph. Thesm. 665. / 43 ' Of the Hiatus . A word which ends with a vowels followed by §. 41 another which begins with a vowel, produces a Hiatus. The Attics endeavoured to avoid this much more anxiously than the other Greek nations, and amongst the Attics the Poets were much more attentive to this than the Prose writers, who allow themselves the frequent occurrence of the most aukward hiatus f . Yet some cases are to be noticed, which even in the Attic Poets are not considered as hiatus, e. g. τί eVrt ff , ώ Έράκλας. In order to avoid these hiatus, the Attics employed three modes; the v εφβΧκνστίκόν the apos- trophus, and the contraction. * The Ionians, who were not offended at the concur¬ rence of two Qr more vowels, did not make use of these means, or very seldom, and only in Poetry. In Homer the v e(pe\K. occurs nearly regularly ; in Herodotus not at all. But nevertheless many hiatus occur in Homer. To remove .the most offensive instances, Bentley, and after him Dawes and Heyne, advanced the hypothesis, that many words beginning with a vowel, had been pro¬ nounced by the Ionians in the time of Homer and He¬ siod with what was called the .dEolic Digamma * * (§. 29 .) f Wasse ad Thuc. 11 . 2, 71 . ε Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 733. * Upon reperusing the well known Review of Heyne’s Homer’s Iliad, in the Univ. Liter. Journal, sometime after this sheet was printed, I observed that the greater part of what I have here advanced against the Digamma, had been anticipated there. In compiling this paragraph, indeed, I did not actually make use of that Review; but perhaps it was merely I s 44 Of the Hiatus (e. g. τον §e F&ev) which was considered as a consonant, and so removed the hiatus, which they would other¬ wise have made with a vowel preceding. Hence per¬ haps it may be explained, how it happens, that many short syllables ending with a consonant or a diphthong, before others in words beginning with a vowel, are ' made long, even independently of the commencement of a new foot (Caesura), e. g. A7roXXowo? F έκάτοιο, e’/ τϊ?| Foi ycuewv, and that και, which otherwise before a vowel is always short, before the same words becomes a long merely the indistinct reminiscence of an early perusal of it. Upon the whole, I am still of the opinion here advanced ; but now I would advance my remembrances rather as a doubt, since a continued study of Homer has shewn me how much the reception of the Digamma is supported by these Poems. If the Digamma be considered only a harshness in the rough dialect of ancient Greece, not as an intentional softening of the rpeeting of two vowels, it is no longer a retrogression in the improve¬ ment of the language, that the Ionians in the time of Herodotus took no offence at the hiatus, though it rarely occurred in the time of Homer, because the ancient pronunciation happened to remove it. The Ionians in Homer’s time thought as little of avoiding the hiatus as those in the time of Herodotus. But the use of the Digamma could not cease at „ once; between the time when it prevailed in the ancient rough pro¬ nunciation, and that, in which it was no longer found in softer dialect*, there must have been a time, in which the first pronunciation was gradually passing to the second, in which also the use of the Digamma was fluctuating, and was entirely omitted, in some words or forms of a word, whilst it was yet pronounced with some, though perhaps less roughly. This might have been the case in the age of Homer, and hence the fluctuation noticed in p. 42. may be explained. By these means, however, the advantage of this hypothesis in criticism is cer¬ tainly very much confined. Thus much I thought it necessary to say, in order to shew that the reasons adduced in this section are no longer con¬ vincing to myself; but still the hypothesis does not seem to me to stand on sufficient ground to be firmly established. The whole matter desires a more minute enquiry, in which probably we should now have been advanced farther, if the great Bentley had carried it on himself (n). I 45 Of the Hiatus. Syllable, e. g. /U^ye | θος και | Fellas όμοίη. But in the first place, there is no historical ground whatever for this opinion, Even the most learned of the old Gram¬ marians, who attribute the use of the digamma chiefly to the ancient Greeks, and particularly to the iEolians, and had found it in the Poems of Alcaeus and of Sappho, knew r nothing of the use of it by the Ionians in the time of Homer. In the second place, according to this opinion, the language of the Ionians in the time of Herodotus, would have retrograded some steps in culti¬ vation, since they tolerated the hiatus which Homer had so carefully avoided; and this contradicts the natural progress of the cultivation of a language, which in its mechanical construction, (not in grammatical accuracy) always proceeds from roughness to polish and harmony. It seems more probable, that the final v in Homer, had been inserted by the Attic usage and by the Grammarians, which the advocates of the digamma assert in places where the final v precedes a word with the digamma. In the third place, in the Ionic dialect many vowels frequently meet together in the middle of words, without its being found requi¬ site to soften the collision by means of the digamma, e. g. ιχθνόεις , ei}os, eaa, €πΐ€ΐκτόν , uVoet/ce 11 ; and since this was not offensive to the Ionians, why should the concurrence of these vowels at the end of the first, and the beginning of another word, have been so * 1 ? Fourthly, the hiatus, and the lengthening of syllables naturally short, frequently occur before vowels, to which the digamma is not prefixed, as also such syllables frequentl y remain short before words with the digamma, and bo th h Hevne T. vn, p. 742. 1 Comp. Heyne ib. p. 734 738 εάφθη , εηκε. 46 Of the N εφεΧκυστικόν . v r ~ * * in places which can only be accommodated to it by forced changes, and such too as can have their founda¬ tion only on this hypothesis. A more full enumeration of these passages would perhaps shew, that there are as many of the one as of the other, with which that hypothesis would accidentally accord. Hence comes the fluctuating and arbitrary application of it, as e. g. €οικα is sometimes FeF οικα, and at others only eFof/ca k ; so the words which are derived from words with a di¬ gamma, yet have not the digamma, e. g. ειΧίποδες without the digamma from F βλ/σσω * 1 , or receive a reduplication before them, as εΧεΧίσσω, from ΡεΧίσσω ; and finally, sometimes in compound words, the digamma is sometimes retained, sometimes neglected" 1 . It is an objection too, that many words, which according to the testi¬ mony of the ancients had the digamma, in Homer never occur with this sign, e. g. 'Ελένη, &ηρ 3 'έζω, εκατόν. Ν βφεΧκυστικόν. Ν εφεΧκνστικον (i. e. by which the second vowel is attached to the first, opposed to the hiatus ) is annexed to datives plural ίησί (μησΙ,Χόγοισι) (r) and consequently in ξι and ψι ; and to the third persons of verbs which end in e or t, (έτυπτε, τίθησι), to the word είκοσι (twenty), k Heyne 1. c. p. 741. Comp. p. 744. 745 εολττα, 749 e'o'?, 751 6 / 060 ). A 1 Heyne ib. Comp. 749 eWo,·. 750 έί'ργω. M Heyne ib. 76’6‘. Of the N εφεΧκυστικόν. 47 and the adverbs ττε'ρυσι , τταντάττασι , νόσφι, πρόσθε, όπισθε, κ€, νυ, when the following word begins with a vowel, e. g. εν μησιν oXiyois, πάσιν είπεν εκείνος, ετυφεν αυτόν, ε’ικοσιν ετη yεyovως 9 εις ό κεν η Τ ροίην αίρησετε, &C. It is also inserted in the composition of a word beginning with a privative after the a, αναίτιος . ' The Ionians and Attics also affixed a v to the diphthong et in the third person plusq. perf. act. See Conjugation. Obs. 1. Σ was inserted for the same end in ούτως εϊπεν, otherwise ουτω \ε* *γει, and κ in ούκ εφη 9 otherwise ου φημι. In αχρι and μέχρι the Ioniatis and some of the Attics took a final s*, but not Thucydides 11 . Obs . 2. This final v was also employed for other reasons. a. In verse, in order to lengthen a short final syllable, which was followed by a word beginning with a* consonant; e. g. τοΊσιν $ ϊκμενον ούρον ϊει εκάερ·γος ΆπόΧλων. ΥΙάν- τεσσιν πο\εσιν $ε και αΧΧοισιν κακόν εσται. Also when the following word begins with two consonants, which do not produce the foregoing syllables, (this happens when the second of these consonants is a liquid X μ v p) a v is annexed to the preceding, e. g. παρεόωκεν τρεφειν. Or on. account of softness in pronunciation : Ούκ αν εττειτ Όόυ- σηί y ερίσσειεν βροτός άλλο? 0 . % b. Probably the ancients set this v also at the end of a sen¬ tence, before a pause, in prose, as well as in poetry p . Obs, 3. In Homer the final v occurs regularly in the above-mentioned circumstances; but not in Herodotus and other Ionic writers q . n Moeris p. 34. Herod. Piers, p. 451. Thom. M. p. 135 sq. 0 Porson. ad. Eur. Or. p. 64. r Upon the whole section, see Herm. de emend, rat. Gr. Gr. p. 13 sqq. * Fisch. p. 143. 48 I Of the Apostrophus. §. 43. Another method of avoiding the meeting of two vowels, at the end and at the beginning of words stand¬ ing together, is the rejection of the final vowel of the first word, in the place of which the apostrophus (') is put over the consonant which is left, e. g. πάντ eXeyeu , St ών. If the first vowel of the second word be aspirated, the lene which remains in the first word is changed into an aspirate, and in that case the lene also which precedes this aspirate in the first word must become an aspirate. Yid. §. 35. Obs. l. Generaljy the short final vowels e o and a are cut off. Yet the o in προ is not cut off, but in certain cases coalesces with the following e or o. (vid. §. 56.) t also is cut off, (a) but not in irep\ (for the passages where 7 rep with an apostrophe stood, are now read otherwise or explained * 1 ;) (b) not in on, because otherwise or might be confounded with ore and οθ' with οθι s ; (c) very rarely in the dat. sing, and plur. of the third declension. Yet Homer says γβίρβσσ άμφοτεραις and άστβρ οττωρινιβ evaXiyKiov, II. e, 5. γρυσεω, Sewa, Od . κ , 316. j VheoCT. 26, 17 · 67r tyvv άνβιρύσασαι l .) Least of all do the ancients appear to have rejected the t from the dat. plur. when the preceding syllable was long. Amongst the Attic writers this elision occurs for the most par t only in suspected passages (r ). r See Schneider ad Demetr. Phal. p. 156'. * Brunck. ad Aristoph. Lysistr. 6ll. 1 Vid. Herm. ad Eurip. Hec. p. 150. t Of the Apostrophus. 49 Obs. According to the MSS. the apostrophized word is often contracted into one with the following word, Sio, ανθότου , καθό¬ δου, which, however, are more correctly written Si o, dvff orou. On the other hand, it takes place properly in compound words, where the preposition does not retain it’s signification as a pre¬ position, and governs no case, e. g. επαχθής, κατάντης , κατέρ¬ χομαι, απηΧθον. On the contrary, in words compounded with προ, when the o of the preposition is united with the e or o of the following part u , care is taken to put the sign (’) over the contracted syllable, which, however, in this case, is not the apostrophus, but the spiritus lenis , e. g. προύξενεΊς, προνκείμεθα, προυτυψαν, προυπεμ^εν, προνπτος, although this sign does not stand over the original form προεξενεΊς, προεκείμεθα, προέ- τυψαν, προεπεμψεν, πρόοπτος (ιι). Not only short vowels, but diphthong’s also are ^ elided, yet only by the Poets,· e. g. βονΧομ’ dyo) Xadv σόον εμμεναι η άττοΧεσθαι : for the diphthongs before a vowel are used as short, as in έμμεναι ή. This is more rare amongst the Attic Poets x . In the oldest Poets long- vowels also are elided, e. g. in the ode of Sappho, Πυκνά δινυντες πτέρ άττ ωράν αιθέρος Sid μέσσω for ωρανω , i. e. ούρανοΰ. Those passages in the Attic Poets, where this eli¬ sion of a long vowel occurred, are now corrected, e. g. Aristoph. Acharn. 816. Soph. Antig. 384. Obs . 1 . The Attics and Dorians, on the other hand, use the apostrophus in final long syllables, on the short vowel of the fol¬ lowing words, e. g. ποΰ ’ στιν, cJ 7 αθέ, Ερμή ’ μποΧαΓιε , ή ’ ξειρ- 'γασμενη, for που εστιν , ω ayaOe, Έρμη έμπολ. ή e^eipy.; also in Homer, $ή \ειτα y , and in the Attic prose writers, although J - * . > * i t , , , u Piers, ad Moer. p. 302. See Dawes. Mise. Cr. p. 266 , who is entirely wrong, (comp. Porson ad Eur. Or. 1338.), and on the other hand, Burgess, p. 471 . sq. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 72 . Herm. ad Hec. p. 147 . Brunck. ad Arist. Thesm. 916 '. 217 . Nub. 988. r ^ y Heyne ad II. 1^3. VOL. I. E . 44 50 Of the Apostrophus. but seldom, e. g. a 'yw Plato Phileb. p. £14. ώ yaOe id. Euthy- phr. p. £O z . The Poets reject also from the diphthongs with which a word begins, the first short vowel, when the preceding word ends with a vowel, e. g. η ’υσεβεια Eurip. Iph. T. 1£0£. for η ευσεβεια, ω ’υριπίδη, Aristoph. for ώ Ευριπίδη (r). So also Theocr. II. 66. ά τώ ’υβουΧοίο for του Ευβ ουΧοιο α . Aristo¬ phanes also elides the diphthong ot after ώ entirely, the i being subscribed, φ ζνρα Lysistr. 948. ω ζορε Nub. 655 b . In cases where the final v also might be put, except in the dative, the Attic Poets prefer the apostrophus, and say έξεστ εμοί , not >ir * t c εςεστιν εμοι . Obs . £. The old Poets, as well as the Dorians d , omit also the a in παρά, άνά } before a consonant, e. g. πάρ Z ηνί IL ]. αν στόμα Od. e, 456. (compare §. 38. Obs.) but the apostro¬ phus is not employed. Obs. 3. The apostrophu^can only be used, when the word apostrophized is followed by another beginning with a vowel. If, on the contrary, there be a pause between the word ending with ή vowel, and the one beginning with a vowel, e. g. a comma, colon, or point, then the apostrophus is used only by the Poets, not in prose, e. g. Eurip. Hec. 514 . ημείς S* άτεκνοι τουπί σ · ω τάΧαιν eyw. Orest. 1338 . in the edition of Porson, σωθηθ , όσο v ye τουπ εμ. HA. ώ κατά στεγα?, &c. in others, τουπ εμοί. At the end even of an hexameter an apostrophus is found, which, however, in recent editions is transferred, together with it’s accompanying consonant, to the following verse: IL Θ , £06. f, £65. Of th& Contractions . 45. A third method of avoiding the concurrence of many vowels, which is used, as well as the preceding, chiefly 35 Valck. ad Ph. v. 408. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 13. Mattaire p. 11. sq. a Valck. 1. c. b Mattaire, p. 13. c Dorvill. Vann. Crit. p. 248. Fisch. p. 143. ά Gregor, p. 92. 116. t 1 of Contractions. 51 by the Attics, is the contraction of two or more vowels of separate pronunciation into. one sound. This is proper, when two single vowels are contracted, with¬ out change, into one diphthong, e. g. T el X ei, τείχβι, alool, <ΰύ,η : improper, when, in the contraction, a vowel or a diphthong of different sound is substituted, e. g·. ,, for ea, ω for oa and or,. In general, the following rules are observed: , 1 - 1. 3. t ·> m/ The long vowels „ and ω absorb all the rest of the simple vowels. 2. a absorbs all vowels following it, except o and ω. «ίβϊ,'ΐΓΓ .· Ί ; , : . , ,j, 6 unites in the diphthong €t , or the long vowel η, with all vowels following· it, except o and ω. 1 and v absorb all vowels following, and are con¬ tracted into one syllable with a vowel preced¬ ing. < is generally subscribed under a η and unites in one syllable with e and 0 , e. g·. K ipa'i icepf, opei opei, ok oig. When i makes a diph¬ thong with a vowel, and this is to be contracted with another vowel, the two other vowels are to be contracted according to the preceding- rules, and the i is either subscribed, when from the contraction arises a long a, ω , e. g, τύ- ■n-Teai ti/Vtj/, τιμάοιμι τιμωμι, τιμάει Τιμά, ΟΓ if this IS not the case, it is omitted, χρνσόβιι, χρυσόν,’. 5. O coalesces with all vowels, preceding or follow¬ ing; in the diphthong ou , or, if an ( be under them, in oi or the long vowel w. The following paragraphs contain the accurate ' distinctions of these general rules. t 52 Of Contractions. §. 46. Ao becomes a. But the accus. plur. of vads is vads instead of mm. So also τα? y pads'■ Ae becomes a, e. g. γελάετε γελάτε, eyeXae eyeXa. Aei becomes single vowels. See below. §. 47. Ao, Aov, Αω become ω, e. g. βοάονσι βοωσι, οράω ορω, ΤΙοσε^ών for UoaeiSawv. The Dorians, on the contrary, contract ao αω into a, as τάων τάν, κοράων κόραν, Ποσειδαι/ and ΐίοσει^άν, Αμνθάν for Αμυθαων Pind. Pyth. IV. -23. and 'Αλκμάν for Άλκμαίων Pind . Pyth. νπι. 66 . 80. φυ- σάντες, χαλά σι, in AlcSBUS, yeKciv, for φνσάοντες, χαλάονσι, ^ * \ •γελαων · The Dorians also changed the termination of the nouns in aos, into as, e. g. Άρκεσιλα? a a Pind. e Piers, ad Moerid. p. 112. f Fisch. p. 60 . g Fiseh. p. 6l. 127· Koen. ad Gregor, p. 104. sq. 121. Fisch. p. 127- sq. Piers, ad Moerid. p. 2 66 . 1 Piers, ad Moerid. p. 123. k Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. p. 65 . Koen. ad Gregor, p. 86. 93. 145. 53 Of Contractions. pyth. IV. 3. 116. 444. 531. Nem. XI. 13. Mei/eXct, gen. from Mei/eXas Pind. Nem. vn. 41. Mere'Xa Eurip. Pro ad. 212 . N ικόλας Herod, vn. 137. is called in Thuc. ii. 67 . Νικόλαος. So Aristophanes Equ. 164. has άρχελας for άρχόλαος, to create an ambiguity, as if it came from λα?, a stone. Obs. tjyd7T€vu Theocr . Epigr. 19. 4. έρευσα for όράουσα id. Id. 11 . 69 . are not from ay aw αω, όράω, but from the form ayawiw, $ρεω. §.21. Αοι becomes ω. οράοι, οράοιτο , opw, όρωτο , aoi$r} ? ωόη. Αη becomes a. yc\a ητε, yελdτε. Ap becomes ct. έ ' ' r r * *· # * * ' I J * * ‘ ! * * J Ea becomes, 1 . a, if a vowel or p precedes, e. g. εύκλεα, §· 48. Iletpata for ΤΙειραιεα , apyvp^a, apyvpa. 2. η , When a consonant precedes, e. g. άληθεα, αληθη*. Yet in contracted substantives of the second declension εα becomes a, e. g. οστεα, οστά. Thus from εαρι ηρι , from yaia yea yrj. Eai becomes > 7 , e. g. τυιττεαι τύπτρ. Eas becomes εις, αληθεας αληθείς. Ee becomes, 1 . ει } e. g. άληθεες αληθείς, εποιεε εποίει, 2. η in nouns, if no consonant follows ee, e. g. άληθεε άληθη. Obs. The Attic nom. plur. βασιλης is not a contraction from βασιλέες βασιλείς , but arises from the Ionic βασιληες. Eo and Eou in Attic, make ου, e. g. φιλεον φι- §. 49 . λονν, φιλεόμενος φιλουμενος. In Ionic and Doric ευ, e. g. wλευv, wλευvες for wλεovες in Herodotus f , φιλεόμενος. e Fisch. p. 129 . Valck. ad Phoen. 1297. Brunck. ad Soph. Oed. T. I 6 l. , · * Fisch. p. 117 . 128. sq. Koen. ad Greg. 76 \ 223. 51 Of Contractions) χειλενς for χείλεος Theocr. 7. 20. ποιευσι for ποιεονσι, νμνευσαι for υμνονσαι, CVCn θευν CctlllTtl. H. ill CeV6V. for θεόν·, θενκυόίΰης for θονκνόίόη^ . ·> Eoi becomes οι, e. g. ποιεοι, ποιο!. .* * >'.«»·!* ■ · 'i n :· ··',\. · . · ; - ' . ·. η Λ MMVJCVnf’W ...Αν) Εω becomes ω, e. g. Π ειραιεως Π ειραιως, but only when a vowel precedes εω, thus they do not say βασιλώς for βασιλεως 1 . Obs. In dissyllable verbs, which become monosyllabic, by contraction, βω, εη, εο, εον, are not contracted, but only ee and εει, e. g. πλέω, 7rXels*, πλεΊ, πλεομεν , πλεονσι. So also όεω. Yet we find Sovv, Sovvti for όεον, όεοντι, in Plato Cratyl . p. 302. όυυσαν for δέουσαν Dinarch. ap. Polluc. vm. 72 . $ών, όονσι, for §εων, §εουσι in Hesychius, Mceris, and in composition, αναόουμεν , avaSovcri, περιεόονμεθα Plat. Leg . viii. p.40\. ενεόονν Plat. Tim . 329. ζυνΰουνται id. Polit. p. 51. lib, ενΰοννται id. Plied, p. 186. The Ionic form προσόεεται is still left in Xenophon Mem. Socr. in. 6. 13. and ΰεεσθαι Anab , vit. 7 . 31. Mem. s. 1 . 6. 10. Isocr. Busir. p. 222. B. I, preceded by another vowel, suffers only the pro¬ per contraction §. 45. e. g. όρεΐ, όρει alSo’i alSoi. In a long· and η and ω, it is subscribed, e. g. κεραί κερ^. Obs. In this manner the Attics contracted the disyllable and trisyllable words oh, οιζυς, οισπος, Οικλής, βοιοιον, and the like, into the monosyllables and dissyllables oh, οιζυς, οίστό?, Ο ικλής, /3ot5ion k . A and t also are thus contracted; so that both make either a proper or an improper diphthong; ypaiSiov > *■·%«/ Λ r ε Koen, ad Greg. p. 164. h Gregor, p. 136'. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 59. Pierson ad Moerid. P- 2p4. . . ; ; /. / . . * Pierson, ad Moerid. p. 314. sq. k See Pierson, ad Moerid. p. 275. sq. % Λ Of Contractions ; 55 for ypa&ov 1 , άίύης αόης, α'ίσσω, ασσω, $ττφ, for αίσσω. Yet not without exceptions. So ράίιος from prjioiog. From ήίθεος, ϋρηικιος παρηΐδες, Ni iprjihg, κληιθρα came ϊβεος, θρήκιος, παρέες, NvprjSes, κΧηθρα'" . In τιμής for τιμηεις the i is not subscribed, because eis is formed from evg (§. 31.). Instead of ττρωι, σφωιν, νωιν, λώιστος, they wrote and said ττρώ, σώων, νφν. Χωστός", ηρφ fo r ϊφ ωι occurs in Homer II. 7, 453 Od. 8. 488°. Ο α Οω I become ω, as βοάω, βοώ. Οη becomes also ω, yet only in Ionic and Doric ; e. p *. $ ωσαί for β°^αι, ββώθβε for ββοηθεε, όγδωκοντα for 6ySon- κοντα p . l · C * τ * * ‘ * · - · \ ■ ·-* * *» i « ·. · * * ' ’ , J % I Obs. Oa becomes ου in βίας βοίς, μείζοεας μείζους. In the adject, the termination ία is contracted into a ίη into ». ■ > # 4 * * f * ' · .· * ... ' · Oo} ,JeCOme ov > e · ο- πτεροΰσσα for τ ττερίεσσα, ττροί- Trror for πρίοτττος, and in composition προίτρεφεν for ττροίτρεφεν, κακοί pyog for κακίερ Ύ ος. άθρίος, ίντίξοος and other words, compounded with ξοος, are not con¬ tracted conformably to the rule. Yet Aristoph. Pac. 1213. ΰορυξου. , * · | 4 ·. . . · ( >4 Obs. I. In words compounded of ίμοΰ, when υ is omitted oe remains unchanged, e. g. ίμοεθνή g. If o follows, it is con- tracted into ω, ομωρόφιος from ομοορόφιος. 1 Hemsterh. ad Aristoph. Pint. 674. Valck. ad PI, «η. n. 467. Pierson, ad Moerid. p. 301. Porson. ad Eurip. Hee. 31. m v alck. ad Phcen. p. 95 . 348. ' 1 n Pierson, ad Moerid. p. 300. sq. 0 Hermann de emend. Gr. Gr. p. 36’. sqq. p Pisch. p. 134. sq. / .56 Of Contractions * \. 0 1. O GL ) ■? / /* >/ / 1 > become oi, e. g. ευνοι , kokovol , tor βυνοοι 3 καΚο~ O Ol) vooi, ΙηΧοΊς, δηλοΐ, for δηλόεις, ΰηλόει, φροίμιον for προοι¬ μίου.' In words compounded with ειδής aei remains un¬ changed, e. g. κερατοειδης, μονοειδης ; yet from θεοειδής is made θεούλης, by throwing v out the t q . Obs. 2 . oet in the infin. praes. and in adject, in οεις is not contracted into ot, but ov , e. g. δηΧόειν δηΧονν, χρυσοειν χρυσόν v y πΧακόεις πΧακους. In Doric ων , e. g. piywv tor piyovv r . Οη becomes oi y in the second and third pers. pres, conj. where η has the iota subscriptum ; e. g. δηΧόγς, £»;λόρ, δηΧοϊς, &?Xot ; Otherwise ω, C. g. δηΧόητον δηΧώτον. vi is not contracted, if these vowels are in two sylla¬ bles, βότρυί. Yet νεκύί is used as a dissyllable. II. xvi. 526. 565. XXIV. 108 (r). • ' * *. *·■ ·.- t §.52. The Ionians, on the contrary, are fond of the con¬ currence of two vowels; hence, 1. they often reject the consonants v κ σ τ, when they stand between two vowels, and thus frequently change the long vowel which pre¬ cedes into a short one, βεβηκως, βεβαως, εστηκως εσταως , £τύπτεσαι j τνπτεαι, £ ετνπτεσο j ετυπτεο , []βτι/>|/ασο]] ετυφαο , κερατος κεραος, κερατι κεραί. Note 1. The Attics do the same, only that they ge¬ nerally contract the vowels which thus meet, e. g. τυπτγ for τνπτεαι, έτυπταν, ετνψω, κερά ., βεβως, εστως. Note 2 . The forms which are between brackets are not in use, and are only conjectured from ana- logy. 9 Fisch. p. J32. r Brunck. ad Aristoph. Av. 935. Of Contractions. 57 2. In many contractions they put before the long- vowel, which arises by the contraction, the correspond¬ ing short one, e. g. οράεις όράς , Ion. οράας, οράουσι όρώσι , όρόωσ t q . And even without the contraction, they repeat the long or the short vowel, e. g. ίδεειν, εηκεν for ίδείν, ηκεν. They insert also e, e. g. συλλεχθεωσι, ενρε- θεωσι for συλλεχθώσι, ενρεθώσι τ , ηε, ηελιος, εείκοσι, άδελφεός, τουτεων for η , ήλιος, είκοσι, αδελφός, τούτων. 3. They reduplicate the vowel, e. g. φάανθεν, κρηηνον εελδωρ for φάνθεν , i. e. εφάνθησαν , κρτρνον, ελδωρ. 4. The Ionic Poets separate the diphthong (as do the iEolians and Dorians), vid. §. 27. frequently also (particularly in Attic), a word that §· 53* ends with a diphthong or a vowel, is contracted into one with the following word that begins with a vowel or diphthong. If an t be amongst these vowels, it is sub¬ scribed ; but more properly it is only subscribed when it is the last of the two contracted vowels 8 . The rules are the same as those above : only a few particular ones occur. A with a, ταΰικα for τα άδικα. But only when the second a is short, thus not τάθλα but τα άθλα * l . So Sv or av for a av , which is used long. Soph. Aj. 1085. sq. At with a, κάττό for και αττό, καν for καί av ( thlipsis, the i is rejected and aa contracted). A with e, τάμά for rd εμά (properly κράσις , a mixing). Dor. τημά , τάνδικα for τά ένδικα. At with e. Kayo) (Dor. Krjyco. καί εφη Dor. κηφα u ) κάτι Fisch. p. 63. 67 . See below the Obs. on the Conjugations. r Fisch. p. 76. s Viger. p. 526. 1 Valck. Porson. ad Phoen. 1277. u Koen. ad Greg. p. 88. 108. 58 Of Contractions, for καί €τι, καστι for καί £στι (thlipsis of the i and κρασιά of a and e). , Ai with € i , κατα for και βίτα, (θλίχ/ας of the first i 3 κρασιά of a and e 3 συναίρεσή of a and the latter t). Obs. a and ei, make no crasis in καί ei?, from which, after the elision of at, comes Keis ; so also και ei, Kei x . In like man¬ ner at and ev never make a crasis according to Porson. ad Eurip . Pham. 1422. except in compounds κ€ν$αίμονα. ai also is elided when η follows καί, χήξβι Ear . Hec. 81 . ed. Hermann, At and η become η 3 e. g. χη. χη Αχούσα for και η ay χουσα Aristoph. Lys. 48. At with Ο, χωσα , χωπότβ, χω, χωπως, χωστις, for και οσα 3 και οποτβ, και ο, και όπως, και οστις. The χ arises from κ, on account of the spiritus asper in the following· J ' 1 & word. • > ■ > * t>> I, ’ Ί' The same sort of contraction is used by the Dorians, when o is followed by a, e. g. for καί ό’Άίωνπ, or by an e 3 e. g. χωτβρος for καί o eTepos. When i follows o, it is subscribed; κφνον for καί οίνον , . χω ξνμπόται for και οι ξ. When υ follows ο, αι preceding is elided, e. g. κ 0V7T07~6. > -g. , # t 1 O with a. ωνη p for ο ανηρ 3 τ^αλμα. Herodot. II. 46. for to ay αλμα 3 τωμπεχονον for το άμπβχονον in Theocritus, ωρι- στος II. λ. 288. ττ. 521. but doubtful. Wolf Pr. ed. 1804. P· lv. τωπο τούτον 3 Herod. I. 199. / Oi with a, e.g. ώνδρβς for 01 avSpes, άνθρωποι for οι άνθρω¬ ποι, ω\\οι γ . But only in the later Ionic and Doric writers * 2 . x Valck. ad Phcen. p. 217 . sq. y Wess · ad Herod, p. 110. Schol. Ap. Rh. 1 . 1081. 2 Koen · ad Greg, p.,87. 196 . Fiscli. p. 133. sq. 65 . / Of Contractions, 59 These contract oi ai into ω, with i subscript; φπόλοι for oi αίττόΧοι Theocr. i. 80. Ohs. Instead of ωνηρ, Dawes Misc. Crit. p. 123. prefers *άνη p; ''άνθρακες for οι άνθρακες Avistoph. Acharn, 348. αγαθοί , Eurip. Hec . 1216 . ed. Porson. because the article coalesces with a short, and becomes a long, Porson. ad Phoen. 903. in others, ωυτός II. ε, 396 a . Thus in the Sigean Inscription it is written ΗΑΔΕΛΦΟΙ, e. g. o\ άόελφοί. O with e, e. g. ουμός τουμόν , τουνόικον, for το ενόικον, §· 56 . ουφόρει for ο εφόρει, Soph. El. 421 b . Obs. The Dorians made from this ω, e. g. ως for ο ες Theocr. I. 65. ωτερ'ος for d ετερος, vii. 36 c . O with ol becomes thus the words έβδομος , ογ$οο$, are not divided εβ-δομος, oy -δοος, but ε-βδομος , o -y δοος . Exceptions: a. When a consonant is doubled, the Gregor, p. 138. Also Heniochus in Stob. Floril. p. lfip. See Brunck. ad Eurip. Hippol. 905. Valck. ad Phoen. 896 ’. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Nub. extr. et ad Soph. Trachin. 1243. s Brunck. Ind. Aristoph. h Brunck. ad Aristoph. Equ. 340. - Division of Syllables. 61 first belongs to the preceding, the second to the following syllable, e. g. άΧ-Χος, ay-yeXoς, άμ¬ μος· \ b. The lene which precedes an aspirate, is annexed to the preceding syllable, e. g. Σατ τ-φω, κάτ- 6ave . r . \ i c. The liquid which precedes another consonant, belongs always to the preceding, not to the following syllable, except μ followed by v. Thus άΧ-κη, άμ-ττυξ, άν-δάνω, άρ-μα , but ά-μνός, 2 . Regard is had in the division to the composition, β. g. συν·€Κ-δέχομαι, e^ -ηΧθον, ΊΧυ-νός-ουρα. So also e-arpe - φου 'from στρέφω, n τρο-στατέω ; but ως -re, ττρος-τιθημι, ττρος-τάττω. ' , * η - ί - J : 1 ’ ί Exception. When in the composition the last vowel of the first word is omitted, on account of a vowel following, the last remaining consonant is annexed to the following syllable ; e. g. τ ra¬ pe -χω, ά-φορ-μη, e -μαυ-τόν. This takes place independently of composition, when the last vowel of the first word is omitted, on account of a vowel following, e. g. υ-ττ’ "I -Χίον, ά-φ' ου , not νττ-ΐΧ. άφ*-ου. For the apostrophus con¬ tracts two vowels into one. | , Ψ v 3. All the consonants which may stand together at the beginning of a word, remain also together in the middle, and are not divided between the preceding and following syllables, except when the composition requires it. The following consonants may stand together at the beginning of a word : (βδ, βλ , βρ , 7 λ, yv, yp, δμ, δν, ip, θλ, θν, θρ, κλ, κμ, κν, κρ, κτ, μν, πΧ, τνν, πρ, τττ, σβ, σδ, σθ, σκ , σκλ, σμ, σττ, στ, στλ, στρ, σφ, σφρ, σχ, • 58 ι I > ^ / 62 Division of Syllables. τ\, τρ, τμ, φθ, φλ, φρ, χθ, χλ, χν, χρ), Κ ά-$μος, ίχι-$να, e -θνος , α-κμη, e -κτος , τύ-πτω, ·γνω-σθ€ίς, &C, are thus divided. / ' * Obs. 1. Whatever is usual in some letters of an organ (§. 4.3.), the same happens also in the other kindred letters, although no word begin with them, e. g. y κ χ are related to each other, as palatic letters; as in words beginning with σχ and σκ , these are left together; so ay are left together, although no word begins with ay. Thus the following remain undivided : TV φά - τνη φν Δά - φνις yμ αμυ - y μος χμ λί -χμάζω αρι - θμος θμ yS ο - ySooς ) ' Θν and Sv πν because * ^ κμ > κμ $μ and τμ J 1 _ κτ and χ θ ■ remain undivided < \ 1 Obs. 2, Three consonants, although they never begin a word, may yet stand at the beginning of a syllable, if the middle one of them is followed arid preceded by these letters, e. g. Θ may have a before it (αθβνω), and λ after it (θλίβω) ; then αθλ may stand together at the beginning of a syllable. Hence we divide e— άθλο?. For the same reason a — αθμα, 'A— σκρα, ο σπριον, l αχνός, al σχρος, Αβν—^-κτρα, κάτο — πτρον, e —χθρός. Marks of Reading. -l. "‘ii ',. 1 i _ , ■ _ §. 60. (Of the apostrophus and the spiritus, see above §. IQ; 43.). When two vowels are separated in pronunciation, and do not constitute a diphthong*, the latter has two points over it, puncta diaereseos , e. g. προϋπάρχω, ά&ης, άϋτη, to distinguish it from αντη (n). \ * O r, > *· Diastole or Hypodiastole is a comma, which is put at the end of the compound in compound words, to distin- t Marks of Reading. 63 guish it from other words consisting of the same letters, e. g. o, re the neuter os* and re, to distinguish it from ore (since), to, re and ro're, o, ri and or*. Many, instead of the diastole, only leave a small space between the parts of the compound, as is the case in old MSS. and editions o re, to re, 6 τι. ' I The marks of distinction or punctuation in Greek are for the most part the same as those in Latin, except the colon and mark of interrogation. The colon is put at the upper part of the last word, e. g. et7re* .K pit ία tout €στω τω καλώ. / 1' /I / A #■ ·, * i I <. * t ‘ r * - , j j The mark of interrogation is (;). The colon and semicolon are not distinguished from each other. Besides these, there is a mark which shews that two words belong to each other. Hyphen ( ύφ’ ev), which con¬ sists in a cross line, e. g. η ον-$ιάλνσις. Yet this no longer occurs in editions. The mark of exclamation is also used in modern editions. 0/ the Parts of Speech , and their Inflexion. The parts of speech in Greek are: §. 6l. \ I. Words which indicate the ideas of corporal sub¬ stances found in space. Nouns. These are: l. Either substantive,' ,inasmuch as they convey a perfect substantial idea; N. substantive. They express things or persons: >·/... * 0 a. Either certain individual things ; (proper names), i N J \ 64 ^ Parts of Speech and their Inflexion. fl ' 1 b. Or merely in general, with respect to kind or species ( Substantives ). 2. Or unsubstantive, which convey no perfect sub¬ stantial idea, but must always be considered in connection with a substantive thing with which they are found; N. adjective. They express properties and qualities of things or persons. To these belong, as auxiliary or representative words : • l .· 3. The article, a word which by and for itself, con¬ veys no idea, but serves to determine more accurately, or to render substantive the noun with which it stands. 4. The pronoun, a word which is used instead of the substantive. §. 62. II. Words, which express a determinate relation or action, with respect to time ; Verbs. , % f * ·* , ~ Λ III. Words which express the distinct properties, or minor significations of verbs ; Adverbs. These are attached to verbs, as adjectives to sub¬ stantives. IV. Words which indicate the relation between two words standing together; Prepositions. V. Words which serve to connect two or more words or propositions, or to determine the relation be¬ tween two propositions ; Conjunctions. VI. Words which serve to express an affection or sensation; Interjections. §. 63. The words of the first and second class may be in¬ flected in their terminations, to shew the different modi¬ fications of which the ideas received from them are f Parts of Speech and their Inflexion. 65 capable. The inflexion of words of the first class is called declension ; that of the second, conjugation. Be¬ sides this, every word of the first class has a gender, genus, according to which it is either masculine oy femi¬ nine, or belonging to neither of the two genders; neuter . Generally, every substantive has it’s determinate gender. The adjectives, the article and the pronoun are capable of shewing all the three genders. This deter¬ mination of the gender of a substantive is founded pro¬ bably in accidental resemblances, which certain ideas seem to bear to one of the two genders in nature. Thus the circumstance of the earth producing plants and fruits was found to afford a resemblance between it and female animals, and in consequence the feminine gender was arbitrarily assigned to the earth. Thus in German, the masculine gender was assigned to trees, on account of their independent strength : in Latin, on ac¬ count of their bearing and producing fruit, or the power of rendering themselves fruitful, the union of both genders, according to which they do not belong entirely either to the masculine or feminine gender, as in Greek to SevSpov, although some minor species are feminine, e · g- v wtTuSj η βΧάτη. That which seemed to unite in itself the properties of both genders, or could be com¬ pared with no gender in nature, was assigned to sub¬ stantives of the neuter gender (r). Of the Declensions < There are three principal kinds of inflexion in Greek, according as a noun is to signify either a single thing or person, or two of this kind or more. These kinds of inflexion are called numbers , and a word may be used vol. i. F 66 . Of Declensions. _ * in the singular , dual, or plural numbers. Each of these kinds of inflexion has five cases, which have the following arbitrary denominations : Nominative , which serves chiefly to give the name of a thing without it’s reference; Genitive , which shews the relation of the mutual reference and subordination ; Dative, by which the reference is expressed, which a substantive has to an action ; Accusative, which shews that a substantive un¬ dergoes a change from an action ; and Vocative, which is used in addressing. The nominative and vocative are called also casus recti, ευθεΊαι πτώσεις. For the ablative of the Latins the Greeks have no distinct form, but it's relation is expressed by the dative or genitive, or by prepositions (r). Obs . 1 . In the oldest state of the Greek language there was no dual; nor had the JEolic dialect this number any njore than the Latin, which was derived from it 1 . It is used most frequently by the Attics, who, however, often employ the plural instead of it. .71; · · - * * V " · J Obs. 2» The Attics in particular often put the article, the pronouns, and participles, in the masculine , before feminine nouns of the dual number (v. Syntax), from whence we may conclude, that the dual of those parts of speech, and of the adjective, had once only one form, the masculine. General Remarks. \ K * 1. In all declensions, the dative singular ends in i , which is either expressed as in the third declension, or subscribed, as in the first and second. The iEolians, however, and others, do not use the i subscript , whence we conclude, that it was not admitted in the old Greek k (r). The dative plural also in the old language ended in i , which, however, in the more modern dialects was -----—— v 1 Koen. ad Greg. p. .285. k Koen. ad Gregor, p, 285. Strabo xiv. p. 648. C. ed. Casaub. Of Declensions. 67 omitted, except in the third declension. 2. The genitive plural IS in ων throughout; the more ancient form was em and am · but not in all words. 3. In the dual, the nominative and accusa¬ tive, and the genitive and dative, are exactly alike. 4. Neuter nouns have three cases alike in the singular and plural, the nomi¬ native, the accusative, and the vocative, in the plural, ending Declension of the Article. Singular. Masc. Fem. ■^ om · ° η (Doric a) Gen. τοΰ (Dor. τώ της (Dor. τάς ) Ionic τοΊο) Neut. ft f TO του (τώ, τοιο) Dativ. τώ Accus* τόι> N. A. G. D. I . !' f Norn. Gen. τη (Dor. τα) 1 την (Dor. τάν) Dual* Tip r TO τω TO tv τα τα Ίν τω το? ν. Plural. οι τώι > at τα των τα τών (Ionic τάων Doric ταν) Dat. το?ν ( τοΓσι) ταΓν ( τη σι , ταΊσι) τοΓν (τοΓσ,) AccUS. τους ( Dor.) τάς τός, τώς) Obs. 1. There is no form of the article for the vocative ror ω is an interjection 1 . J Obs. 2. If the particle ye and Se are annexed to the article it has the signification of the pronoun 4 this’ m . The declension . y 1 Fisch. i, p. 317, sq. F 2 m Fisch. p. 318. §. 65 . I §. 66 . / 68 Of Declensions . remains tlie same, e. g. oSe (Att. o'tSt), (η$ 0 > roSe (roHiJp TovSe, τησ&€, τοί /Se, &c. vid. Pronoun. Obs. 3. In the old language the article was το?, τη, το η ; hence the plural tol in Doric 0 and Ionic, and the τ in the neuter and the oblique cases. The same form served to indicate the article, or rather the pronoun ουτος , ‘this", and the relative pronoun, * which’, for which the form 09, arising from to?, after the general rejection of τ, was afterwards used. Hence in the Doric and Ionic writers, the article often occurs with the signification of the relative pronoun. Declension of the Su bstantive. 1. View of the Three Declensions. First Declension. Second Dec. Third SINGULAR. Nom. a η ας ης 09 Neut. ov a 1 υ ω Gen. άς ης ου ου ος Dat. a η q η V ι AcC. αν ην αν ην ov a v DUAL. • N. A. a ω € G. D. aiv οιν οιν PLURAL. Nom. ai OL es Gen. o)i/ 0)1/ ων Dat. αις οις σι , eai Acc. ας ους w 09 i » L '·.» rj: J. .* ‘ ' * -i n Eustath. ad Od. • Gregor, p. 110. a. - Apollon, de Synt. 1 Maitt. p. 172. * Jr , if ! f First Declension. 69 Obs. 1. In the two first declensions the termination only of the nominative case is changed in the remaining cases, so that the number of syllables remains the same. In the third, on the con¬ trary, the terminations of the other cases are affixed to the nomi¬ native, yet with some change. The first are called parisyllabic , the others imparisyliable. Obs. 2. The old Grammarians reckoned ten declensions, five simple, and five contracted. According to this division, the I. declension was as, ης; II. a, η\ III. os, ον; IV. a>s, wv ; these four are parisyllabic; the following i/nparisyllabic: V. a ιννζρσψ; Decl. contracted. I. ης, es, os neutr II. is, i; III. et/s; IV. ω, ως ; V. as. The new division originates with J. Weller, or, according to others, with Laurentius Rhodo- mannus. 2. First Declension . , Singular. First Terrain. Second Term. Third Term. Fourth Term. Nom. *« V t] s as Gen. as ης (Doric as) ου (old, βω and ao Aeol. Doric a) Dat. ct ? (Doric ?) v et AcCUS. αν ην (Doric αν) ην αν Voc. a V a (Ionic η) OuJ .^nOVi . Dual. Nom Acc. * ( *V J * / ' a Gen. Dat. * i ·' 7 f H * . » - ' Si ■ f j >' -1 · J + t t . ■ * J . kj atv ί )'k 1 > Plural. Nom. at Gen. f · · } 1 » ων (old, ewv αων , Dor. av) Dat. ■ ’ .· ·! i . «iJlii ai s (old, αισι , ησι } *7s p ) Acc. as (iEoI. ats q ). , - -- — «*■— §. 67 - p Koen. ad Gregor, ρ. 175. Ί Koen. ad Greg. p. 95. 70 First Declension* Observations. I ' · · ; 1 . The Ionic dialect has η universally, e. g. σοφιη, ημερη, Μουση, Αρχίης, Mitts'. The Doric α. The Attic regularly retains a in words in which a vowel (a pure), or p precedes the termina¬ tion, e. g. σοφία , as* *, q. νεανίας, ον, cl. αλήθεια, as, q. ήμερα, as, a. όρνιθοθηρας. In some proper names also Αηδα, Φιλο¬ μήλα, ’Ανδρομέδα*. Yet in iEschyl. Prom. Vinct . 201. εδρης, according to Brunck and Schutz. Note. A few words only are excepted, which have η in the nominative; άθάρη, ης% ‘ husked wheat/ άίθρη , ‘fair weather’, κόρη Thuc. vi. 56 ι . 'γεωμετρης , and all words compounded of μετρεω. The other words which have a in the nominative, have in Attic ης and η in the geni¬ tive and dative, but in the accusative av , not ην, e. g. *r λ ® ε'χιονα. 2 . The vocative in words of the third and fourth termination VS and as, is formed by rejecting s. The following, however, in VS have the vocative in a . 1 . Those which have τ before the ter¬ mination ης, e. g. προφήτης προφητα, εργάτης ipyara, ΘερσΊτα, Όρεστα, Ύιθρανστα ( Xenoph . Ages. 4 , 6 U ). 2. Those ending in πης, κυνωπής κννωπα. 3 . Words compounded with μετρεω , πωλεω, τρίβω, ^εωμετρης, γεωμετρα, βιβλιοπώλης, βιβλιοπώλα, παιδοτρίβης παιδοτρίβα. 4 . Names of nations and people, e. g. Σκνθης Σκυθα, Τίερσης ΤΙερσα. Also some proper names, Αάγνης Αάχι/α, ΥΙυραίγ^μης Π υραΊγμα. ο. With respect to the dialects, the form within brackets is the most ancient, which, then remained in the Ionic and Doric. Of the genitive plural, both forms, εων and αων, occur in Homer; from whence it appears, that they were once both used in Ionic, Μονσεων and Μουσάων Χ . The first remained in the Ionic, the latter in the iEolo-Doric dialect; from the first arose the contraction in the 1 ^ · <«v r i, r Herodian. Herm. p. 303. s Brunck. ad Aristopb, Plut. 673. Valck. ad Theocr. Adon. p. 205. * Pierson, ad Moerid. p. 184. where also more words are adduced, in which η was used by the Attics. > ^ · . u Fischer p. 358. ’ ‘ 1 Fisch. p. 67. 76. 36*2. Koen. ad Greg. p. 174. 271. X 71 J First Declension. Attic form ων (hence the circumflex), from the latter the new Doric av y . 4. The forms βω and ao from words in ης occur in Homer, e. g. II.

8 to ·*« 8 2 to *** • ro <2 So Co β «•w 2 cs to 2» O »-o Λ δ to 2k < 2 O b- 2k « to 2k 2k δ »·ο λ δ to 2k , ■ 2k δ til 2k <3- -ο b- Ι¬ Α ο £» Κ Ρ h Ο. ό “δ 9- δ <2 ο ο b- fc. l· δ t* h ©. ^© ■s 3— » ! <3- -© b> Ι¬ ο, *δ ’ Pi < P P o l-k til ^S* =t *»·* b- V R* Co 2 δ to , o> © b ο δ »Ό 2 δ to 2 Co '2 Ο b 2 δ ~§~ *δ *« .§■ Co Co .ο <3 ( ο b b Ο b Ρ < Pi 2 <3 ^ο Ο 2 2· 3- b- b * <3 δ b .2 -ΗΝώ •5 δ So to so j£< to ·< SO % ><υ Q P Co S δ δ- ο. Q. e ^O ?S iS ,l " Co ^ δ -§■ •to «·» « J- Q. ^ d>Q t to tto ( P-l «a δ 4- tto 2 ( 3 - Cy 2 (S' ci Q 5 B 6 O . xn 5 S3 s -ί o o © 0) ctf o o £ O Q 74 First Declension. i §· 68. As words in j?? are declined partly according* to the first declension, and partly according to the third, the following rules serve to distinguish them : 1 . All names in δης, which are derived from the names of the fathers (Patronymics), follow the first de¬ clension, e. g. Άτρβίδης, Ώηλείδης. Even those which have merely the form without the signifi¬ cation, as Μίλτίαέ^ Αριστείδης, Σιμωνίδης, Θου¬ κυδίδης. 9 2. Substantives, which are derived from the third person of the perf. pass, and end in της or στης, δοτής c the giver’ (from δδδοται ), ττοιητης 'the poet’ ( 7 Γ 67 Γ οίηται), &C. 3. Words compounded with derivatives from verbs, φαρμακοπωλης, 'apothecary’, βιβλιοπώλης , 'book¬ seller.’ ► · * - · ,7^ ’ 4. Words which are compounded with derivatives from words of the first declension, Ό λυμπιονίκης, 'a conqueror in the Olympic games’, from νίκη { . Yet many of these are often declined after the third declension, e. g. Στρεφίαδες, vocative of ΣτρεψιάδηςΖ . This declension has also some words contracted, e. g. It n (from ye a, hence yeωμeτpης) } λβοντη from λεοντεη, μνα/Αθήνα (from μνάα, Άθηνάα Theocr. 281. Ion. Αθηναίη). ' Ερμης (from Έ ρμεας). They are declined exactly like the foregoing examples : those in a like the pure nouns. In those in δη the η absorbs the vowel preceding, άπλδη , άττλη 1ϊ . ■*s > '► - ■*. · .j ;S 1 . j ■ s ·»■ „ \ f Herodian. Herm. p. 305 xi. s See below, §.8/. h Fisch. 1 , p. 355. Fragm. Lex. Gr. ap. Herm. p. 320, 70. I \ S’ Second Declension. 75 4 · • „. 5 · ! Λ ■ ? t . 4 f ' Second Declension . §* 69 , - V . i■' ' * ■ ’ ’ < i - . f r ( Singular. First Termination . Second Termination. Nom. . os ■ . . * ov Gen. ου (Ion. 010 , Dor. ω * 1 ), Dat. ω L ' Accus. t ωτ . J ; . 7 i .<· ·■ ■·· ..· τ .4 i 1 ·λ /·.'·"* ■· OF Voc. 6 or Dual. Nom. Acc. ω Gen. Dat. OlV Plural. Nom. 1 01 / a Gen. r t t . - ’ f / ων Dat. OLS Accus. ovs (in old & Dor. os & ω? κ ) a Voc. Ol r a >/. . ιί Observations. 1. The form of the genitive oio for ου for the most part occurs in the Poets only. Yet in Herodotus iii. 97. two MSS. have K αυκάσοιο. • I 2. Instead of the vocative in e the form of the nominative is used, particularly in Attic, e. g. φίλος ω MeveXae , II. I', 189. 3. In the genitive and dative of the dual, the Poets insert an i, e. g. 'ίτπτοιιν, ωμοιίν, σταθμοιίν II. ζ', 19 1 . 4. The genitive of nouns feminine in os is formed also by Callimachus in αων, νησάων , ψηφάων™. 1 Fischer ρ. 375. Maitt. 177. k Koen. ad Gregor, p. 147 sq. Fisch. i, p. 3 76 sq. 1 Fisch. p. 376. m Ernest, ad Callim. in Del. 66. Suid. v. κολωνάω v. So αι/λαι/ stands for αύ\ων Pind. Pyth. xii . 34. ' ■ 76 Second Declension. o. The old form of the dative occurs also in Attic, e. sr. κακοΐσιν , Plato Gorg. p. 110. τούτοισι , ib. p. 28. οΐκοισιυ, Soph. (Ed. T. 249. τοίσιν καινοϊσι θβοΊς, Aristoph. Αν. 847 n . 6. The iEolians and Dorians insert an i after the o in the accus. plur. as well as in the first declension after the a (v.66.) €. g. καττοις νόμοις for κατά τούς νόμους 0 . The Poets use ος when a short syllable is necessary, Theocr. v. 112. τάς $ασυ- Κ€ρκος αλωπεκας , 114. τα)? κάνθαρος, ιν. 11. τως λύκος. . : % , > \ *\( \ . J · /ν,Λ » EXAMPLE. Singular. Nom. d ayy έλος, ‘the messenger'. το ξύλου/ the wood'. Gen. του ayy όλου τού ξύλου Dat. tm ayyόλφ τω ξύλω ACCUS. τον ayy βλον το ξύλου V OC. άyyeλ€ ξύλου ' Dual. \ 4 Nom. Acc. τω άyyόλω τω ξύλω Οβη. Dat. τοίν ayy όλοιν . 9 · τοίν ξύλοιυ r Plural. ’ vi dt· · Nom. 01 άyy€λoL τα ξύλα . Gen. των ayy όλων των ξύλων Dat. τοΊς άyyόλoίς τοϊς ξύλοις ACCUS. τούς ayy όλους τά ξύλα Voc. άyyeλot ξύλα. Obs. When e or o precedes the termination ος or ov, both vowels are contracted in all the cases., so that ea becomes a, e. g. n Fisch. i, p. 37b. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 343. 0 Koen. ad Gregor, p. 292. J t Second Declension. 77 Singular. Norn. νόος, νους <·λ\ \ · f το οστεον οστού ν , r Gen. νόου, νου του οστεον, οστού Dat. r νοω. νω ,,ΛΛη/ τω όστειρ, οστω Accus. νόον νουν το οστεον, όστουν Voc. νόε, νου Dual οστεον, οστού ν Nom. Acc. νόω, νω \ * / τω οστεω, όστω Gen. Dat. νόοιν, volv τοιν όστεοιν } , όστοιν Plural. « ι ί I < > '/ί Nom. νόοι ,, vdi \ * ' τα οστεα, οστά Gen. νόων , νων των όστεων , οστών Dat. νόοις, νοις ^ > / τοις οστεοις , όστοίι ς Accus. νόους , νους \ » ' τα οστεα, οστά Voc. 1 νόοι , νοΊ ρ . οστεα, οστά. Yet in Xen. Cyrop. ν. 2. 8. τω νόω. οστεα, Menand . fr. inc. 688. όσχεων, Eurip. Or. 403. Piers, ad ]\Ioer. p. 284. Oi vdi, occurs in Philemon Etym. M. p . 606, 23. So Π ειρίθοος ΐίειρίθους, ΥΙειρίθου, Π ειριθιρ, Isocr. p. 211. ε. 212. Λ. To this declension also is assigned what is called the § 70. Attic form in ως, in words which have an equal number of syllables in all cases, e. g. ’Ά0ω9, Τε'ω?, Κως, Xay ως, άλως, in which case the a long and η before ω? is changed into e, e. g. λεω$, νεως, Μενελεω?, ίλεως, άνωγεων, for Χάος, ναός, Μει ιεΧαος, ΪΧαος, avcoyaiov, εως, for ηως, which, how¬ ever, occur also in the Ionic and Doric writers. The a short remains unchanged, e. g. ταως, καλώς, Χαγως, or is contracted with o into ω?, e. g. ά·γηρως for άγηραος. The following is the declension: p The plural and dual do not occur, and are only formed, by analogy, from oo?. In the same manner are declined άΙεΚφώου?, dvexj/iadov?, θνγατρώοΰς. 78 Second Declension . Singular. Nom. ό νεως Gen. τον νεω Dat. τω veto Accus. TOV V€(OV ο λαγών to avwyewv το χρεως του λαγω του avioyew του χρεω &C. τιρ Kay ιρ τιρ avwyeip τον Xaywv το avwyewv Dual. Nom. Accus. τω vew τω λαγω τω avciyew Gen. Dat. τοιν νειρν tolv Xayipv τοιν avioyewv Plural. Nom. οι νεω Gen. των νεών Dat. τοϊς νεως Acc. TOV VGCOS* 1 oi λαγω τα άι/ωγβω των Xaywv των avivyewv τοΓν λαγών τοΓν avcoyeips τους λαγών τα avcoyew. ! Observations . * V T r \ t t -* 1 . The genitive Πετεώο in Homer, II. β', 552, according to the opinion of some Grammarians, arose from the form Πίτεω'ν ; a „ C , c ° rdin S h» others from ΠβτεοΓο, Ποτ6,0ο Γ . Instead ' of Αθω from Αθως, Homer says ’Λθόω from Άθάων. II. Apoll. i. 33. So comes a genitive toS f . : SsV ' iy f . '/■ * , t» · p fy · , ?»>/*% *} ~ \ 2 . In the accusative the Attics often omit the i», e. g. \ayw, Xenoph. Cyrop. i. 6 . 19 . vew, Lucian, v. p. 77 . T d„ eai Xenoph. Cyrop. 1 . 1 . 5. So Κώ, Μω/Αθω’. This is regu¬ lar in proper names; in other substantives the form in ων often occurs, e. g. Xaydv, Athen. ix. 14. from Aristophanes 1 . The neuter also of some adjectives of this form has often ω, instead of ων, e. g. ayrjpw for ayijpwv. q Fisch. p. 372 . r Heyne ad II. β\ 552. Fisch. i, p. 100 sq. J| s ad Thuc. v. 3. Grasv. ad Lucian. Sol. p. 451. 453. t Fisch. i, p, 378 sq, Koen. ad Greg. p. 71 . / Λ Third Declension. 79 N 3. The Attics often declined, after this form, words which otherwise belong to the third declension, e. g. MtW from Mtw, for Μί'ι/ωα, Xen. Mem. iv. 2. 33. Plat. Min. p. 137. Also in the genitive Μίνω, ib. p. 135. 139. instead of which Mtiwos is used, p. 136. See Pierson ad Moer. p. 439. Wyttenb . ad Pint, de S. N. V. p. 24. yeXwv, Pur. Ion . 1191 · from yeXws, 'yeXwros, for yeXwra u , ήρω v> in Sophron ap Priscian . 6. p. 197, and η ρω. Plat. Min. p. 136; and the later Greeks declined words in cos, which belong to the second, according to the third declen¬ sion, e. g. αΧωα in some fragments of Callimachus, N. 51. from άΧως for αλω χ . Thus were declined κάΧως, κάλωος, Apollon. Rh. II. 727, and κάΧω, Thuc . IV. 25. yaXws, y(xXωoς } and yaXw y . The Third Declension. §. 71 . ** i 111 .» > . \· i > * * v'-* \ 4$ < y * j i \ % The third declension is distinguished from the two preceding, in making the rest of the cases, except the nominative, longer by one syllable. Thence it is called imparisyllabic. Singular. Norn. a. i, v, ω, v, p, (ξ, Gen. 09 Dat. l Accus. a and v Voc. Nom. Dual. Nom. Accus. € Gen. Dat. . :ίΊ = · . ( OlV Plural. Nom. €9 Gen. wv Dat. €σι Accus. «9 a Moeris, p. 108. et Piers. x Fisch. i, p. 374 sq. 1 Fisch. i, p. 400 sq. 80 Third Declension. The inflexion of words of this declension depends chiefly upon the consonants which precede the termi¬ nation 09 of the genitive, and are retained through all the other cases, except some deviations in the accus. sing. In general the terminations of the third declen¬ sion are 09, 1, a, 1 ), either annexed immediately to the termination of the nominative, as in words chiefly in v and p, e. g. μην μην-ος, ΕΧΧην 'ΈΧΧην-ος, φάρ φαρ-ός, σωτηρ σωτηρ-ος. In the greater part also the long vowel of the termination of the nominative is changed into the corre¬ sponding short VOWel, e. g. Χιμην Χιμεν-ος 9 μητηρ μητερ-ος, χεΧιίων χεΧι$όν-ος. In the same manner words in ω, ηγω ηχό-ος, πείθω ό-ος, and these terminations are con¬ tracted, by the Attics, into 009, ήχους, πειθους. Ohs. 1. In some the e which comes from η is rejected in the genitive and dative (syncope), e. g. αρην αρενος αρνός ζ 9 κύων κνόνος κννος , πατήρ πατερος πατρος, θυ^ατηρ θνγατερος θυ*γατρός. Ohs. 2. Many words, particularly monosyllables, retain the long vowel, e. g. μην, σπΧην, χην, κΧων, αιών , χειμων, μεΧε$ων, ΙΊοσβί^ωι/, ΑποΧΧων, IV Ιαραθων , κω^ων, κωθων, πω^γων, ανΧων , *γΧηχων, μηκών , ίχωρ, &c. In Homer the forms ωνος and ονος are interchanged in the same word. The word which is other¬ wise Κρονίωνος is in II. ξ , 247. Od. , 619, K ρονίονος. Or 2 . when the nominative has an 9, this in the geni¬ tive is changed into 09 ; in which case the long vowel in the termination of the nominative case is also changed into its corresponding short one, e. g. τριηρης , τριηρεος . * When the nominative ends in a double consonant, £(79, /cs, χς), or φ (/^9, 7Γ9, φς ), this is separated, and 9 changed into 09; ξ is changed into 709, κος , χος, φ into βος , πος , 009, e. g. αιί~ αΐ'γος, αΧωπηζ αΧωπεκος , θριζ τριχός, φΧεφ φΧεβός , ωφ ωπός , κατηΧιφ κατηΧιφος. Thus also φαΧαΊ^Μ * Fisch. ι, ρ. 382. a Fisch. i, p. 384. Of Declensions . 81 tyahayyos, \apvy£ Xdpvyyos; yet instead of these regular forms, they were sometimes written with one 7 , Pind. 01. 10. 29. This form appears also to have been the origin of the Homeric θέμιστος , θέμιστι^ II. ό, 8 7 f * Obs. 2. Adjectives compounded with substantives in ις, have,^in the genitive, t^os, although the substantive have εως 3 e. g. αποΧις άι roXiSos. 8. ης makes a) in masculines εος, Attic ους §. 70 . 2 . Αημοσθένης — σθένεος — σθένους ; also in adj ec- tives masculine and feminine, η τριηρης — ρ € ος SC. ναυς. b) ητος , e. g. φιλότης φιΧότητος, Κρης Κ ρητός, πενης πένητος, άβλης άβλητος. c) ήθος in Πόρνης Π άρνηθος, a mountain on the confines of Attica. / I 9 . Neuters in ος make εος, and, according* to the Attic contraction, ους , e. g. τείχος τειχεος τεί - χους. 10. Words in οι /s make a) 009 , e. g. βους βοός, χροΰς χροός, χρους χοό^. b) οντος, when ους arises from ονς, e. g. $ι$ους SiSovtov §. 70. 3. c) ουντος, when ους arises, by contraction, from όεις, όεντος §. 7 1 .5. e. g. Οπούς, Ανθεμους , Ύραπεζους, μελιτους. f Fisch. 1 , p. 394 sq. 410. G 2 P Fisch. 1 , p. 399. 84 Of Declensions. Obs. The genitive 0 S 0 W 09 is derived from οδών,' Herod, νϊ» 107 . (οδόν? dens) h . πους makes in the genitive ποδος; words, however, compounded with 7 τους, make in Attic 7rov, and in the accus. πουν, as ποΧυπους — ·που, Οίδιπους, τρίπους. The ge¬ nitive plural πουΧύπων also occurs. These forms refer to a nominative π os, as τρίπος, άεΧΧόπος, to which also the iEolic accus. ποΧύπον * 1 is to be attributed. 01)9 ωτον is contracted from ούας ουατος. 11. υς makes 1 , J 09 , as όσφυς όσφυος, όφρυς όφρυος , δρυς δρυό 9 , &c. 2, νδος, particularly feminines, with a short termination, χΧαμυς χΧαμυδος. 3. υ$ος, κόρυς κόρυθος , κωμυς κωμΰθος, Theocr. IV . 18 k . 12. α )9 makes 1 , ωο 9 , e. g. δμως δμωός, θως θωός , Τρως Ύρωός, κάΧως κάΧωος, ηρως ηρωος, Μ«/ω9 Μ«/ωο9· 2, o)T09, as φως φωτός , ίερως έρωτος, -χρως γρωτος, , 3, the feminines make 009 contr . ους, η αιδώς — * _ - \ όο 9 — ου 9 . 4. The partic. perf. act. makes 0 V 09 , τετυφως τετυφότος. Obs . ί. In some substantives the genitive is formed from an obsolete form of the nominative, as yaXa ·γάΧακτος from yaXa£, *γυνη y υνάικός from yoi >αιζ 9 ύδωρ ύδατος from υδας, σκωρ σκατός from σκάς ι , Ζευς Αως from Δ/ 9 , Ζ ηνος from Ζην. » . ' , ·|*1 ίΟ 1 Obs. 2. The following remarks serve to assist in finding the form of the nominative, the form of the genitive, or of another case being given. h Fisch. r, p. 400. 1 Athen. vii. 316. Schweigh. Anim. T. iv. p. 360 sqq. Fisch. i* p. 411. 11 , 182. k , Fisch. 1 , p. 398. I 1 Fisch. 1 , p. 391 . / Of Declensions , In general the genitive in $os Λ θος > comes from the nominative in s TOSJ 7 09 KOS Χ ος KTOS. 77 os — - - - y£ β os i ■7ros > from the nominative in ψ ψοί 3 85 - ? I/TOS | * with the last syllable long. Especially: €VOS ) €|/TOs) 60S epos €WS 10S ITOS ivos VOS ovos QVTOS oos opos os as, av avs, e. g. vaos, ypaos, from vavs, ypavs, _ in* lets — evs, ys, os, v, vs — Ψ *- b V, VS, 60 S - b V, IS — t * * — is, IV s — V — ων * ι . K / ' *' 1 — wv 3 ovs ' t — ω, cos, ovs — wp, op — s, Ύρωός, Τρως, ά\ός άλ s 4 86 Of Declensions . ους — — — ySy ος 3 cos ρος — — — ρ τρος — — —* τηρ - νντος ) vos — — υς vSos ι ~ νθος ) \ ωνος 1 - — — ων ωντος S . ; ωος \ - - - 0 )? ωτος §.73. l. In the dative case the i, which, after the rejection' of $ or t, is preceded by a vowel, is often written under the preceding vowel, or contracted with it, e. g. μη τι for μητΐί , II. ■*//, 316. θετι, II. σ , 407* 'Ισι for ’Ισί^ί, or 'Ισίι, Herodot. π. 59. Δί for Δ«, Pind. 01. 13. 149. yyp Ionic genitive plural often ends in εων , μυριά¬ δων, Herod, vm. 71 . The Doric in dv, e. g. aiya v, Theocr. v. 148 (r). Yet in Id. 1 . 22 . Pind. Isthm. iv. 78. Eurip. Hel. 348. we now read κρανιάδων, Θηρών. 75.- The dative plural appears to have been formed ori¬ ginally from the nominative plural, by annexing the syllable σι, or the vowel t; so that in the neuter, instead of a, es was considered the termination. At least this form remained in use in Ionic, Doric, and iEolic y , e. g. , κυων κύνες κννεσ-σιν, 11. d, 4. παιδς παιδσ-σι, X^ipes χειρεσ-σι, άντρες αν^ρεσ-σι, ποΧιες ποΧίεσ-σι, ιππηες, ιππηεσ- σι, πρα^μάτεσιν, &c. Archyt. αρ. Gale, ρ. 701 . When two ce come together before σσι , a triple form arose, in n Fisch. 1 , p. 413 sq. y Gregor, de dial. p. 287, ubi K. * Fisch. 1 , p. 414. I Of Declensions. 89 εεσσι, εσσι and εσι> e. g. βεΧεα (βεΧεες) βεΧεεσσι, II. e, 622, &C. βεΧεσ-σι, II. a, 42, &C. βεΧεσι, Od. π , 277. εττεα (επεες) εττεεσσι , II. S', 137, &C. Theocr. I, 35. επεσσι , ΟίΖ. ^, 597, &C. ετνεσι, iZ. ct, 77, &C. βεΧεσι and επεσι remained in the later dialects. In other words also, i only was annexed to the nominative, instead of σι, e. g. άνάκτεσι , Od. 0, 556. from αναζ , αι 'ακτές. 7ται$εσι, Orph. Argotl. Ill 5. •χείρεσι, II. ν', 468. ττ ', 704. μηνεσι , Herod. VIII. 51. ττοΧίεσι, Thuc. V. 77. 79 z . l. In this form, the e preceding the single σ was omitted, e. g. S εττάεσσιν S εττάεσιν S^i τασιν, θηρεσσι θηρεσι θηρ- σι, σωτηρσι, γ αστηρσι , except in words in ης and OS· (vid. Obs.) and the consonant immediately before σι was changed, according to the rule of euphony §. 39 . viz. S θ τ v vt were omitted before σ, πόΰεσσι, II. ε, 599. 7 roSeai ττοσί , ορνιθεσσι , /Ζ. 757- (ορνίθεσι ορνιθσι ) ορνϊσι , II. η, 59. with ι long, φρενεσσι , PmtZ. Isthm. 3. 9 . (φ /oe- vecn φρενσί ) φρεσί. ττάντεσσι (ττάντεσι ττάντσι) ττάσι. κύνεσσι, II. a , 4. ( κυνεσι κυνσί) κυσι , /Ζ. //, 303. The quantity in the dative plur. was regulated by the quantity in the rest of the oblique cases, and the nominative plural. Hence κτείς, in the dative plur. does not make κτβίσ/, but κτεσί , from nomin. plur. κτενες, 7 roys, not 7 τοσί, but 7 ro$es, δα/- Μωι> δαίμονες ΰαίμοσι, Spvs Spve ς ΰρυσί. If, after the rejection of the consonants vt before σι, the foregoing syllable is short, the doubtful vowels a, 1 , and v, become long, e. g. 7 τάσι, IVyacrt, ζευ·γινυσι, ΟΓ as is changed in words in aus into ay, ·γραες ypavs •γραυσί , ναυσί , and from e and o are made the diphthongs ει (in words in εύς ευ ), and ου , e. g. τυφθεντε s ( τυφθεντεσσι τυφθεντεσι τυφθεντσι) τυφθεισι , ιππεες 'ιτπτεεσι ιτπτεσι τ Maittaire de Dial. jj. 368. B. The Dorians used the* double σ. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 154· sq. 90 Of Declensions. ιτητευσι, Αωριεες Αωριεεσσι, Theocr. XV. 93. Αωριεσι Δωτ ριευσι, εκόντεσι εκόντσι εκοΰσι. χ*ρσί for χείρεσσι, arises from the Ionic-Attic form χειρ χερός, v. §. io6 a . 2. The Dorians declined the dative plural of substantives in ευς in €(?l 3 e. g. βασΐΧεσι, Αωριεσι*. In the common language also όρομευς όρομεσι, not όρομευσι. 3. When β ττ φ, or y κ χ, precede the termination σι , they are contracted with the σ which follows,, into the double consonants ψ and ζ, e. g. *! Αραβες Αράβεσι 'A ράφι, cuyes aiyeai αίζί, με~ ροττες μεροττβσι μερόφι, κόρακες κοράκεσι κόραζι , τρίχες τρί- χεσι θριξί . 4. Of those which reject e before σι, some change the e mute into the more sonorous a, e. g. πατερες (πα- τερεσι per syncopen ττατρεσι) 7 νατράσι, ανόρες ανόρεσσι ( άν$ρεσι) αι;$ρασι. So also μητράσι, 0vyaTp^i, αστράσι, υιάσι, 11. 6, 463. and elsewhere. Soph. Antig. 571. from υΐς, νιος, for ν'ιεσι, not from υιενς . “ · . · Obs . Words in ης and ος, which have in the nominative plural εες, or its equivalent in declension εα, reject only an ε, e. g. αληθεες αΧηθεσι, τείχεα τειχεεσσι (— εεσι) τείχεσι. §.76. EXAMPLE. 1. Simplest Declension. Singular. Norn, ό θψ, ‘ the. wild beast’. Gen. του θηρ —09 Dat. τω θηρ — ι AcCUS. τον Θηρ — a VoC. θηρ Dual. Nom. Acc. τω θηρ —e Gen. Dat. τοιν θηρ — οιν Plural. Nom. οι Θηρ - ες • * ■ b Gregor, p. 154 sq. a Herodian. Herm. 300. xv. 91 Of Declensions, / Gen. των θηρ — ών , Dat. Tois {θηρεσσι, θηρ — εσι) θηρσί ACC. τούς θηρ—ας * ' * · · . «. * 2. Declensions with the rejection of the consonant before σι, in the dative plural. a) termination a i v. Singular 1 Nom. το σώμα, ς the body’. το μέλι, ‘ the honey*. Gen. του σώμα — τος του μβ\ t — τος Dat. τιρ σώμα — τι τψ μέλι—τι το μέλι Acc. \ ^ το σώμα Voc. λ σώμα μέλι 1 Dual. : Μ ι \ 1 Nom. Acc. τω σώμα — re τω μέλι — Τ€ ' Gen. Dat. τοιν σώμα — τοιν τοιν μελί—τοιν * Plural. ι ^ ^ yi : 1 τα μέλι —τα Nom. \ t τα σώμα — τα Gen. των σωμά — των των μελί - των Dat. τοις σώμα — σι τοις μέλι — σι • (from σωμάτεσι, σωματσι) Acc. τα σώμα —τα τα μέλι—^τα Voc. σώμα —τα. μέλι —τα. Singular. *· · · ' : Nom. < / το yovv Gen. του yov — ατος ; ' .· ^ ‘· · ,ν ·> h / Dat. τω yov — ατι > - 1 · 5 * * .* V .... Acc. » / το yovv • ν Voc. yovv \ .·*> ·**■ Dual. * ^ Nom. Acc. τω you — are Gen. Dat. tolv you— άτοιν • ■ Plural. , w ■ ' - ^ * ι | Nom. ·, c « * * ■' * . ■ \ r τα yov — ατα % Gen. των yov— ατών » / 92 Of Declensions. Dat. τοις you — aai c Acc. τα yov— ατα Voc. yov— ατα b) termination v p ς ψ) Singular. Nom . 6 μην, c the mouth*. ο ττοιμην Gen. του μην — ός του 7Γ οιμ—ενός Dat. τω μην—ί • T(p ττ οιμ—ενι Acc. τον μην —α ^ / τον Ίτοιμ—ενα Voc. μην ττοιμην Dual. # * ^ Nom . Acc. τω μην — e \ / τω τΓοιμ—ενε Gen. Dat. τοιν μην—οιν *■* / τοιν ττοιμ — εν οιν Plural. β Nom . οι μην - 69 οι ττοιμ — ενες Gen. των μην — ων των ττοιμ — ενων Dat. τοις ( μηνεσι ) μη — σί τοις ττοιμ — εσι Acc. % τους μην — ας τούς ττοιμ — ένας Voc. μην — 69 . ττόιμ — ενες. / Singular. Nom. η χειρ, f the hand'. Gen. της χειρός Dat. τ rj χειρί (χερί, IL O', 2S9, &c. Eur. Or. 271.)' Acc. την χειρα (χέρα, Eurip. Ion. 132 .) Voc. χειρ· Dual. Nom. Acc. τα χειρε Gen. Dat. ταίν (χειρόιν, Soph . El. 1394 . Solon. El. v. 50 .) χεροΊν. Plural. Nom. ai χεϊρες Gen. των χειρων ( χερών , Eur. He C. 226.) # c γονάτεσσι. Theocr. 16. 11. t Dat. Of Declensions. * 93 ταις (χείρεσσι, II. y, 217, &C. χείρεσι, 11. v, 468. Od. o, 461 . χερεσσι, Hesiod. ΎΚ. 247·) χερσί. Acc. τάς χειρας ( χέρας , Eur. Hec. 50 .) Voc. χε7ρες. Singular. Nom. 6 λέων, ‘ the lion’. o yiy ας, c the giant.’ Gen. του Χεον —ros Dat. τω Χεον — τι Acc. του Χεον — τα Voc. Χεο v Dual. Nom. Acc. τω Χεον —re τω yiy— άντε Gen. Dat. το7ν Χεον — τοιν το7ν yiy — αι >τοιν. Plural. του yiy— αντος τω yiy —αντί \ t τον yiy —αντα yiyav. Nom. οι Χεοντες Gen. των Χεόντων Dat. τόις Χε—ον σι Acc. τούς Χε—όντας Voc. Χεοντες. οι yiy —αντες των yiy —άντων το7ς ( yiy — άντεσι, yi- yavTci) yiy —ασι τούς yiy —αντας yiy — αντες. Singular. Nom. 6 παΐς, ‘ the boy’. Gen. του 7rat — §ός Dat. Tip 7 rat— Si Acc. τον 7rai—Sa \ · Voc. 7Γ at Dual. Nom. ACC. τω πάι —So Gen. Dat. τοιν τταί —Soiv % v / i Plural. Nom. ot 7 Γa7Sες Gen. των τταί —Sωv > _ * Dat. το7ς (τ raiSeaai, TraiSeai) τταισί Acc. rod? 7rat —Saς Voc. ίγοΧ — Sες. I 94 Ο /’ Declensions, ■ 1 Singular. Nom. κόραζ Gen. too zeo^oa——/Co? 1 · Dat. τφ κόρα — κι Acc. τον κόρα—κα Voc. κόραζ, ’ Dual. Nom. Acc. τω κόρα — zee Gen. Dat. τοιν κόρά — κοιν . Plural. Nom. οι κόρα — zees' Gen. τωιζ κόρά—κων Dat. τοις κόρα—ζι Acc. τους κόρα—κας Voc. κόρα — zees*. " \ <ι i ’ , ί §. 77. 3. Declension, in which the e originating from η, is rejected. (Syncope.) Singular. Nom. 6 7 τατηρ Gen. του πατερος (Od. 500 .) πατρός Dat. τω πάτε pi (II. i, 156 .) 7 τατρ’ι Acc. roV πατέρα Voc. πάτερ. " *'*·’· Λ' · 5 . Dual. Nom. Acc. τω 7 τατερε Gen. Dat. τοπζ πατεροιν. Plural. Nom. ol πατερες Gen. τωιζ πάτερων (rarely πατρών, Od. ό', 687 . 0 ', 245 .) Dat. Tots (πάτε pea σι) πατράσι §. 74. 3. Acc. toos* πατέρας Voc. πατόρες. Singular. Nom. o ato/jo Gen. too άνερος (II. y, 6l, &C.) άνορός, §. 72 . 95 Of Declensiojis. Dat. τφ άνερι (//. π , 516, &C.) avSpi Acc. τον άνερα (II. v, 131.) avSpa Yoc. avep. .·· - . , Dual. « . Nom. Acc. τω άνερε (iZ. \' } 328.) αν$ρε Gen. Dat. τοίν άνεροιν, avSpolv. Plural. Nom. o\ άνερες (//. e, 86 1, &C.) avSpes Gen. των ανερων, άντρων Dat. rots* (ανερεσσι αν§ρεσσι, II. e, 874, &C. avSpacrai, II. p, 308.) αν$ράσι Acc. to os' άνερας (II. a, 262, &C.) avdpas Voc. ανερες, άντρες. After πατήρ are declined η μητηρ , η <γαστηρ (which, in the dative plural, makes yacrTrjpcri, not *γα<ττρα<τί), Δη- μητηρ, θυγάτηρ. The two latter often occur with the syncope, e. g. Δημητρος for Δημητερος, II. β' , 696 , &c. Eurip. Ale. 359· Suppl. 1 73, &c. Δη μήτρα, Hymn. Horn, in Cer. Eurip. Suppl. 362. This accusative afterwards served for a new form of the nominative Δ ημητρα, Δήμη¬ τρας, Δήμητραν , Plat. Cratyl. Apollod. 1 , 5, 1 , 2 d . θν ya- τρα foi OwyaTepa , II. a , 13. 95. 372, &C. θυγατρες, II. 238. t, 144. 286. χ, 15ο. θνγατρων , II. β', 715. y, 124. ζ', 252. ν, 365, &C. 4. Irregular Declension. §. 78 . Singular. Ionic. Attic. Nom. η νηνς ναυς * Gen. τη s* ι ;>/09 ( νέος ) νεως* - Dat Λ L/dl · τη νηι. Acc. την νηα (via) νανν Voc. νηυ — e vav. d Van Staveren ad Hygin. f. 147. e Gregor, p. 27 . 96 I Nom. Acc. wanting. Gen* Dat. I * Nom. Of Declensions, Dual. tcuv veoiv. Plural. νέων ναυσί ναυς. αι νηες Ion. i/ee? Gen rwv νηων Dat τάις νηυσί Ace τάς νηας (i/eas) Obs. 1. The form here considered as Attic is the only one which occurs in the Prose writers of that dialect. ' The Poets sometimes use also the proper Ionic, e. g. νηός, JEsch . S. c. Th. 62. Eurip. Med. 523. In the dative sing, and nominat. plur. the Ionians and Attics have a common form νή'ί, νηες (νανς only in later writers ). On the contrary, in the accus. plur. νανς, νηας only in the Poets. Eurip. Iph. A. 248. The Doric form was νας ε , the oblique cases of which occur in the Attic poets also, and not only in the chorusses, e. g. i >αός, Eurip. Hec. 1253. vai y Iphig. T. 891. in the chorus, ai νάες, Iphig. A. 242. in the chorus. The accus. ναας occurs in Theocr. vii. 152. xxii. 17 h . / The Hellenistic writers use vaa in the accus. sing., and ναας accus. plur. A rarer Ionic form of the accusative is νηνν, Apollon . Rh. i. 1358. Obs. 2. In the same manner is declined η ypavs(Lon. γρηυς), της ypaos, rrj ypa'i , and ypf, την ypavv, ypav (Ion. ypηv), ai ypaes, and yprf €9 (not ai y ραυς'), των ypawv, τάις ypavai. f Wesseling. ad Diod. Sic. i. 130. Moeris, p. 110. 266 . c. n. Piers. Fisch. i. p. 127. 8 Koen. ad Gregor, p. 145. h Valck. ad Theocr. x. Id. p. 122 sq. 1 Piers, ad Moer. p. 110, Heindorf. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 276. On the other side, Thom. M. p. 195. 4 - Of Declensions. 97 τα$ ypavs. Yet of this in general only the nom. sing, accus. sin«·. ^nd plur. and the genitive plur. Plato Theoc. p. 12. 1. Luc. D. M. vi. 3. occur; in the rfest of the cases ypaia is more common. , So a,s ° i βοΰϊ, τη, βοό,, rij βοί, την βουν (not βία), α\ βον (not βουβ), τών βοών, rah βονσΐ, τά, βοί,, and βία,. 5. Contracted declension. a. The termination ης and 09 . Singular. 0 Contr. Nom. η τριηρης Gen. της τριηρεος Trj τριηρεϊ την τριηρε a τοίηρε ς Dat. Acc. Voc. Nom. Acc. τα τριηρεε Gen. D. tcliv τριηρεοιν Nom. at τριηρεες Gen. των τριηρεων Gat. rat9 τριηρεσι Acc. τα9 τριηρε as το τείχος τριηροΰς του τείχεος, τείχους τριηρει τω τείχει } τείχει τριηρη το τείχος τείχος. Dual. ο * V τριηρη τω τειχεε, τείχη (as τω γένη, Plato Rep. νιιι. 190 . τω σκέλη , Arist. Pac. 820.) «% ^ ' τοιν τειχεοιν } τειχοιν. τριηροιν Plural. τριηρέις τριηρων τριηρεις τα τείχεα, τείχη . λ ^ ^ των τειχεων , τειχών τοις τείχεσι, τά τείχεα, τείχη. Obs. 1. Like τριηρη,, are declined also proper names , which are not patronymics, e. g. ί Σωκράτη,, Αημοσθίνη,. e hese have sometimes the accusative, according to the first eclension, τον Σωκράτην, τον Άντισθίνην, τον Άριττοφάνην. k Thom. Μ. ρ. 169. sq. Η VOL. I. 98 Of Declensions. Obs. 2. The Dorians and Ionian s, in the genitive, use the contraction ευς for ους ; from θάρσος Homer has II. p, 573. θάρσευς for θάρσεος, θάρσους, Od. ω, 393. θάμβευς for θάμ - βεος, Od. o', 533 . So Άριστοφάνευς, Pind. Nem. in. 35. Εύμηδευς, Theocr. ν. 134. χειλευς, νιι. 20. ορευς , ib. 46. θερευς , ιχ. 12. Obs. 3. The iEolians in the genitive and vocative, omit e, e. g. Σωκρατου, Σωκρατε. Obs. 4. The contracted form is Attic: yet the Attics fre¬ quently do not use the contraction in the genitive plural. Thus τριηρεων, Xen. H. Gr. 1. 4. 11. but τριηρών, Thuc. vi. 46. ορεων, Xen. Anab. iv. 3. 1. Cyrop. 111. 2. 1. όρων, Plato Leg. viii. p. 407. In particular they did not say ανθών from άνθος, but άνθεων, because ανθών might easily have been confounded with the participle from άνθεω, or with άνθ’ ών ι . Obs. 5. The dative of σπεος is σπήι, II. σ', 4 ; the dative plural σττεσσι, Od. a', 15, 73, &c. and σττηεσσι , Od. 1 , 141. the gen. sing, σπείους, Od. 1 , 141, from the form σπεΊος, Od. ε , 194. The η has arisen from the double 6, as Ήρακληος. Obs. 6. Like τριηρης, are also declined the proper names, compounded with κλεης, Ήρακλεης, Ηρακλής, Θεμιστοκλής, Π ερικλης, Νεοκλης. κλεης is the Ionic ; κλης the Attic form. We find, however, Ήρακλεης, Ear. Here. f. 924. Ion. 1144. Brunch. ad. Arist. Thesm. 169. Nom. — κλεης, κλης. Gen. — κλέος Ion. (Ήρακλεος, Herod. YU. 200. 204. θεμι- στοκλεος , id. VII. 143. Ήρα/τλ^ο?, II. ο', 25. ζ', 266. υ, 145. θεμιστοκληος, Herod. VIII. 63.) Attic κλέους (from κλεεος, Orph. Arg. 224. Θεμιστοκλέους, Herod. VIII. 6l.) Dat. — /cXeitj Ion. (( )i- μιστοκ\(ί i, 1 Ifvod . VII. 144. Η ρακ\ηι. Od. θ' , 224.) Att. κλει and κλεει. 1 Heredian. Herm. p. 304, Piers, p. 456. Koen. ad Greg. p. 175. DorvilJ. ad Charit. p. 399· 99 Of Declensions. -^ cc ·' λλεα (Ion. /eXjJa, as θεμιστοκλήα, Herod. VIII. 57. 6 J. 79. rarely κλή, e. g. Ηρακλή, Plato Phce- don. p. 205.) not Ήρακλήν™. Voe.— κλεες ( θεμιστόκΧεες, Herod. VIII. 59. Ή ρά κλεες, Eur. Here./. 175.)— κλεις*. The genitive— κλους, which is found in the common grammars,, does not occur. 4. If a vowel precedes ea, it is contracted only into a, not into η , e. g. τα χρόα from χρέος, κλεα, from κλέος 0 . Terminations ις and i. §. 80. Singular. Ion. Att. Nom. ή πόλις, ‘The city*. Gen. τής 7Γθλί09 7Γθλ€09, TroXews Dat. τη L πόλιϊ (πόλι) π όλα, πόλβι Acc. την πόλιν. Dual. Nom. Acc. τα πόλιε 7 roXee, as Plato . Rep. in. p. 311 . φυσεε. Gen. Dat. ταιν πολίοιν πολεοιν. πόλεων Plural. Nom. cu πόλιες, πόλεες, πόλεις Gen. των πολίων, πόλεων, πόλεων Dat. ταις πόλισι πόλεσι, A c. τας πόλιας 7Γθλεα9 5 πόλεις. m Thom. M. p. 423. Phryn. p. 60. H Porson. ad Eurip. Med. p. 409. Thom. M. p. 864. H 2 o 100 Of Declensions , Singular. Ion. At t. Nom. το σινηττι , f the mustard’. 1 ’ Gen. Λ / t τον σινηττιος σινηττεος. „ v t W .' * * / σινηττεως Dat. τίρ σινηττίί σινηττει. σινηττει. Acc. το σινηττι . Dual. Nom. Acc. ™ σινηττιε σινηττεε Geii. ' Dat. τοιν σινηττιοιν σινηττεοιν. σινηττεωϊ. Plural. Nom. χ / t τα σινήττια σινηττεα Gen. των σινηττιων σινηττεων. σινηττεων Dat. τοΓν σινηττισι σινηττεσι Acc. τα σινήττια σινηττεα. Obs. 1. In the same manner are declined 6 μάντις i ο όφις, η SJi/ayuts, η στάσι s, η φύσις , η νβρις, η ττράζις, &c. Accord¬ ing to the old grammarians 1 *, ττόΧιος πόλη is the common dialect (κοινόν), but ττόΧεος τ roXet, with e Ionic. But in the Ionic and Doric writers the declension in i q in the genitive, nominative, accusative plural is mostly found ; sometimes also with e, e. g* ττόΧεος , IL S', 244. e, 59?. ψ', 475. 521. 562 . ττολεω*/, 77. ε', 744. In the dative el is more frequent. The termination ηο$ also occurs in the genitive, and other cases, e. g. ττόΧηος 9 Od . <^,40. a, 185. IL β', 811. ττόΧηί, IL y, 50. The form ews occurs in Homer, e. g. ττόΧεώς, IL X' r 178. v , 52. and in the Attic writers the form εο$ is found, though seldom, as νβρεος, Aristoph. Pint. 1045. πολεο s, Eurip. Hec. 860. όφεο$, Suppl. 703. 1329 r · From εος comes the Doric ενς 9 ττοΧευς? Theogn. 754. Br . Obs. 2. The Dative very frequently occurs in Ionic writers, with a single i , e. g. μητι for μητιί , 7/. \J/, 315. 7roXt, Herod. p Gregor, p. 186. * Fisch. i, p. 405 sq. Fisch. i, p. 406. 101 Of Declensions. I. 105. II. 30. Si >νάμι, Herod, n. 102 . οφι, Herod, n. 141.' στασι, Herod, vn. 153. άνακρίσι , vin. 69· Besides these the form €i is used by the Ionians, more rarely that in ii, iro&ei, 7 roXei', &c. s In Homer and others the contracted form e i is very common. Obs. 3. Instead of the accusative in iv, the form a also occurs, e. g. 7 τό\ηα, Hes. Sc. 105. Obs. 4. The contracted form in the plural is frequent in Homer. In the accusative he has the contraction in ϊς, e.g. oh for bias. Od. i, 244. Theocritus also, 9· 17 . άκοίτις for άκοι- Tiasy Od. κ , 7 · So also nroXts for πόλιας, Herod, n. 41. vn. 109· Σάρδις, id. 1 . 15. όφις, id. II. 75. 7 τίστις, id. ill. 7· ττα- νη^γυρις, id. η. 58 t . This contraction was regular in Attic, in the words oh (Ion. oh), and φθοΐς, a\ oh, τάς oh u , τους φθοις for φθοίδας, Arist. Pint. 677· We find also opvis, for όρνιθας. Soph. CEd. T. 966 · opveis, Athen. ix. p. 373. D. E. The da¬ tive was also TToXieai in Doric, Find. P. 7, 8. Thuc. v. 77· and 7 Γ oXleaai, Od. φ', 252. 7 τολίσι is in Herodot. 1 . 151. otherwise 7 τόλ€σ£ is more common. φ c. The termination evs. §· 31. Singular. Ion. Att. Nom. 0 βασιΧβυς r Gen. του βασιΧβος βασιΧηος βασιΧβως Dat. τω βασιΧίι , βασιΧηι βασιΧα Acc. τον βασιΧεα , βασιΧηα V OC. βασιΧβυ. βασΐΧςα and — σιΧη Dual. • Nom. Acc. τω βασιΧββ, βασιΧηε Gen. Dat. τοιν βασϊΧέοιν. ' ί ■ .. .4 ι/ 8 Eusth. in Fisch. 1 , p. 407. 1 Koen. ad Greg. p. 225. u Pierson, ad Moerid. p. 274. For φθοΐς see Suid. s. v. 1 102 Of Declensions . Plural. Nom. o\ βασιλέες , βασιλήες βασιλείς , &C . —σιλης Gen. των βασιλέων Dat. τοΊς ( βασιληεσσι ) βασιλευσι Acc. τονς βασιλέας , βασΐληας βασιλείς , &C. — σιλεας. Voc. βασιλέες. Note. Words which have a vowel before the termination ευς, in the genitive, contract εως into ώς, and in the acc. sing, and plur. ea into a, e. g. neqoateay, ΐίειραιέως (Plato Rep. iv. p. 368.) Παραίώ? ( Xen. Hist. G. u. 2, 3. Thuc. ii. 93.) Accus. ΤΙειραια. 'χοευς. Gen. χοών ( Anstoph. Thesm. 347.) Accus. yoci [Aristoph. Equ . 9 o\) . * * §. 82 . Observations . 1. vlei /9 and ΰρομευς make, in the genitive, νιεος ( Plato Rep. ii. p. 264. Time. i. 13. where υιεως is corruptly read), and ΰρομεος* . For OSvaeos we find Όδυσευς, Oc?. a/, 397. The form ηος was also used in the Attic dialect, in the time of Solon. Vid. Lysias. p> 362. ed. R. J2. The accusative sing, in η, βασιλη, is rare. Tac^, II , o84. which, according to Eustathius , is not contracted from TvSea, but from by Apocope**. Βασιλη, Herod, vn. 220. ιερή, Eurip. Ale. 25. %vyy ραφή, Aristoph. Ach. 1150. Όδνσση, Eurip. Rhes. 708. Άχιλλη , Id. El. 439. 3· ^The nominative plural βασιλης is either formed from βασιλείς, by changing ει into η, or from the Ionic βασιλήες, which is a trisyllable 2 . The complete Ionic form βασιλέες occurs in Plato, Theaet. p. 106. 4. νιενς and δρομευς have, in the dative plur. υιεσι (which. * Pierson, ad Moerin, p. 6. 314 sq. 412. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 70. Fisch. i, p. 129. 409. y Thom. M. p. 865. On the genitive eos, see Gregor, p. 28. yy Fisch. i, p. 121. 129 sq. 2 Brunck. kd Soph. Od. T. 18. Interpp, ad Thucyd. i. 67 . 103 Of Declensions. however, may come from vh, νϊος), and δρομβσι a . A ω pie us makes Αωριεσσι in Theocr. xv. 93. 5. The accus. plur. according to the observations of the old grammarians, was in the genuine Attic dialect— εας, not — εις, e. g. βασιλέας, Xen. Cyrop. i. 1, 2. Hier. 3. 7. Agesil. 2. 30. ιππέας, id. Ages. 2. 28. Where the form εις occurs, some MSS. frequently have εας, in which case this is preferred. Yet the form—e ?9 also in the accus. is very frequent, e. g. βασιλείς, Xen. Mem . S. jii. 9, 30. Plato Alcib. i. p. 38. νιείς, Plato Gorg. p . 34. Protag . p. 115, 116. 121, 122. Thuc. vi. 30. ιππείς, Xen. Ages. 2. 13. ης also occurs in the accus. Soph. Aj. 390, where, however, Brunck gives βασιλείς 0 . Thuc. 11 . 76. Π λαταιης for Π λαταιεας. If a vowel precede the termination, the Attics contracted εας into ας, e. g. ayi ιιάς for ά^νιεας, χοάς, Aristoph. Peel. 44. Nub. 1238. Acharn. 1000. 1068. 'E στιαιας, Thuc. 1 . 114 d . 6. To this belongs also the declension of ’Άρης, of which the old nominative, retained in the iEolic dialect, was ’Άρενς (in Alceeus ap. Eustath. p. 518. 36. Valcken. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 303). * Άρης and ’Άρενς were interchanged, as Ύηρης and T ηρεύς. ΤτοιηΆρενς comes gen. ’Άρεος and ’Άρηος, II. S', 441. Attic. Άρεως dat. ’Άρει and Άρηί, II. /3'. 479- Att. ’Άρει, acc. Άρηα. From ’Άρης, on the other hand, comes the Attic accusa¬ tive Άρη ζηά’Άρην, ( Hemsterh. ad Aristoph. Plut.p. 103. Valck. ad Phan. 1013. Porson. ad Phan. 134. 950.) as 'Σωκράτη and Σωκράτη v, §. 79· Obs. 1. of which the latter form occurs in Homer; also the vocative ’Άρες, never A pev, and the old geni¬ tive Άρεω, in Archilochus. Ύ\ι-άίΆρεος,Άρει come from Άρενς, and not from Άρης, is proved by the secondary forms ’Άρηος, Άρηί, which have no place in nouns in ης ( Fisch . 11 . p. 179.) d. The termination ω and ως, gen. άος. The sin_ §. 83 a Thom. M. p. 865. b Thom. M. v. ipi χηνεαζ. Fisch. I, p. 122. 414 sq. c See Lex. Soph. p. 723. d Harpocr. v. ’Aymds, Duk. ad Thuc. p. 107- Pierson, ad Moer. I>, 6. Hemsterh. ad Luc. 1 . p. 472. Bip. See Not. x. p. 97· 104 Of Declensions. gular only of this is used; the dual and plural are taken from the form 09, according· to the second declension ; but for the most part these substantives, from their sig¬ nification, admit of no plural. Nom. Gen. % Dat. < Acc. Voc. v ct’Ms, c shame \ • ; ·· · · - ~ > $ * * > ft ^ της αιόοος, αιόους ~ > η /·. » ft Trj cucoi , αιοοί την α’ι$όα, αί$ω > ft αιόοι « * f η ηχω της ηχόος, ήχους T V VX 0L την ηχόα, ηχω. ηχοϊ. 1· Ι η the same manner are declined η ηως , "the dawn’, η πείθω, c persuasion/ and the proper names, Αητω, Σαπφω. The Attics decline, in a similar manner, the comparative in ων, leaving out v in the accus. sing·, nominative and accus. plur. e. g. μείζων, acc. (μείζονα, μείζοα ), μείζω. The Ionians made the accusative in ow, e. g. την Ιουν, Herod, ΪΙ. 41. Αητουν, id. II. 15β. κακεστουν , αειε-τ στουν in Hesychius e . 3. In the genitive, Pindar Pyth. iv. 182. has ΧαρικλοΊς for Χαρικλοΰς. Compare §· 27. 4. In the same manner are declined the Attic forms in ω for ων, ονος, e. g. lopyw, Γοργούς, αη$ω, αηβους, Soph. Aj. 636. χελιέ'ω, εικω for Γοργών , άη$ων , γε\ι$ων, εικων / f Ο r Λ ^ 1 . < χ —ονος . bee §. 38. e. The termination ας , ατος. ί *■ J . % · '· * ' I' : 1 Singular. Nom. το κρέας , f the flesh*. το κεράς, c the horn*. Valck. ad Herod, p. 181. 8. Gregor, p. 200. ‘ Fisch. i, p. 411. Schaef. (Melet. in Dion. p. 93 .) * Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. p. 168 . Fisch. 11 , p. 174 . Of Declensions, ] 05 Gen. του κρέατος, κρέαος του κέρατος, κέραος Dat. ' * κρεως r κερως τω κρέατι, κρέάί τω κέρατι, κέραι κρεαι κέρα Acc. το κρέας το κέρας Voc. κρέας κέρας. • |» * ' * * Dual. I Nom. Acc. τω κρέατε, κρέαε • 1 l · 1 . · ’ ' 1 1 ■ κρέα < ; ν .· Gen. Dat. τοιν κρεάτοιν, κρεάοιν ψ ·''· κρεέρν. Plural. Nom. f f t τα κρέατα, κρεαα τα κέρατα, κέραα κρέα κέρα Gen. των κρεάτων, κρεάων των κεράτων, κεράων § . κρεών κερων Dat. τοις κρέασι τοις κεράεσσι ]Λ . κέρασι, &C. Acc. τα κρέατα, κρέαα κρέα Voc. κρέατα, κρέαα κρέα, Observations. 1. The Ionians declined το κεράς, κερεος, Herod, νι. 111.; hence κερεα,ιά. ιι. 38. ιν. 191. κερέων, id. ιν. 183 (r). So also κερεεσσι, id. ι. 47. y έρεα from yέpaς, νι. 56. τερεος and τερεα, id. νιιι. 37* ού$ας, ου^εος, οΰ$εϊ, and ου$ει, κώας, plur. κωεα. Hence το βρετας, of which the dative βρέτάί occurs in Hesychius, has βρέττ ), in the plur. 5 genitive βρετέων in iEschylus, Theb. 98. ε II. p. 521. Od. y , 439- τ', 566. h II. v\ 705. Od. τ', 563. 106 Of Declensions. 2. The form— ατο? — ατι — ara is rare; τ is generally omitted. Yet Xen. Hist. Gr. vu. 5. 24. has κερατος, and Homer οίατος from ούας and ονατα * 1 . So also τέρατα , Od. μ r 33 4. but τεράων , II. μ , 229· τεράεσσι, //. 398. 408. ζ', 183. y ηρα, Cyrop. ιν. 2. 8. The nominative plur. is most com¬ monly a, either short, by apocope, from — ατα as §επα, Od. o, 465. /cepa, IZ. tf·, 109· σκέτα, Hesiod, tpy, 530. ( Ruhnk. ad H. inCer. 12.), and generally in the Epic Poets (but in τέρα , Apoll. Rhod. iv. 1410. the a is long, on account of στ follow¬ ing), or long, by reason of the contraction from αα, as in the Attic Poets. (Piers, ad Moer. p. 369- Brunch . ad Ear. Bacch. 921. Soph. El. 443. See Moer. p. 366. Thom. M. p. 840). There is still another form — άατος, but it occurs only in the later poets, e. g. κεράατος, Arat. Ph. 174. κεράατα , Opp. Cyneg. n. 494. τεράατα , Dionys. Perieg. 603. This form, however, must be ancient, for the following are contracted from it: κέρατα, with the penultima long, Anacr. Od. n. Eurip. Bacch. 919* φρβατι , Arist. Pac.578. φρεάτω v, id. Bccl. 1004. (elsewhere φρεατι , Horn. H. in Cer. 99· See Brunch, ad Eurip. Bacch. 1. c.) ( r ). 3. According to the above examples, the Ionians declined also the substantives to yovv, or yovvv (r) and Sopv, gen. του yovvaTos (II. φ', 591·) and yovvos (II. 546. Od. τ', 450.) dat. τφ yovvaTi , plur. nom. rd yovvaTa (II. ε, 176. and frequently), or yovva (II. ζ', 511, &c. Eurip. Phccn. 866, Porson), yovvaTwv, y ουνων (II. a, 407. and more frequently Eurip. Med. 325. ed. Porson) youvaai , and yovvaaai (II. v, 484. p t 451. 569 η ·) $όρυ, gen. Πουρός (II. y' 9 6\, &c.), $ορός (Eur. Hec. 699· Or. 1603, &c.) dat. δουρί II. a, 303, &c.) Sopl (Eurip. Hec. 5. 9· 18, &c.) (r) dual. Sovpe (II. k, 76, &c.) plur. nom. Sovpa (II. λ', 570.) also Sovpt / (Eur. Rhes. 274.) gen. Κουρών (II. 243.) dat. δουρασι, and δονρεσσι (II. μ , 303.) Od. θ', 528°. * See Seberi Index. k Ruhnk. ad H. in Cerer. 12. n Fisch. n, lp5. 0 Fisch. 11 , 194 sq. The Etym. M. adduces also a dative lopti, I— · / M % |' from Aristophanes, from το όόρος, ΰόρεος. 107 Of Declensions . 4. In the same manner is declined Xdas, a stone, gen. \aaos, contr. \aos (J/* /a', 462.) dat. Χάαι, contr. Xai (II. π', 739 .) acc. \aav (II. /3', 319- &c.) plur. nom. Χάαες, λαβ 9 , gen. λαάων, Χάων, dat. Χάεσσι (II. y, 80.) 5. Adjectives compounded with neuters in a 9) are often declined entirely according to the declension of the simple nouns, e. g. υψίκβρας, — ατος, νψικερατα πέτραν, Aristoph. Nub. 597. Pindar, v. Fragm. Find. ed. H. p. 139. and πνρ·γοκερατα , in Bacchylides, v. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 208. otherwise the form of this adjective νψικερατος is νψικερω s, by rejecting r and contracting it. /· The termination vs and v gen. eos, εω$, and vos. Singular. 1. VS) eos Nom. o 7 rrjyys . \ >r το αστν Gen. τον πηχεos Att. r πηχεωs τον aστεos, atfTews Dat. tm πηχει πη'χει τω αστει, αστει Acc. τον πηχνν \ yf το αστν Voc. πηχν yf αστν. Dual. Κ · · \ > N\)m. Acc, τω πηχεε τω αστεε Gen. Dat. τοιι> πηχεοιν τοιν άστεοιν. Plural. • · . » · · ί , J » ,1 , J Nom. o\ πηχεεs πηχεπ \ yf if τα αστεα, αστη Gen. των πήξεων των άστεων Dat. tois πηχεσι ^ if το is αστεσι Acc. tovs πηχεas t πηχεπ \ yf yf τα αστεα , αστη Voc. πηχεε$ / πηχεις >f yf αστεα , αστη. Obs. 1 . The forms of the genitive of αστν occur in Attic »/ ^ a \ νστεος, Xen. Hist. Gr. n. 4. 7 * Ear ip. Her. 719 . 791 . and passim, αστεως, Eurip. Or. 751. Phccn. 856 . Thuc. vm. 92 . Obs. 2 . The accus. plur. of nouns in vs is not always con- r Moeris., p. 327. ubi, v. Pierson. §. 86 . §. 87 . 108 Of Declensions. \ tracted by the Attics, ττηχεας occurs in Aristoph. R(in. 811. The genitive plur. also is not contracted in Attic, Singular. 2 . vs, νος Nom. ο ιχθύς, e the fish’. του ιχθύος τω ιχθύι τον ίγθύν Ιχθύ. Dual. Nom. ACC. τω ιχθύε Gen. Dat. τοιν Ιχθύοιν. Plural. Gen. Dat. Acc. Voc. Nom. οι ιχθύες, ιχθύς Gen. των ιχθύων Dat. τοις ιχθύσι Acc. τούς ιχθύ ας, ιχθύς Voc. ιχθύες, ιχθύς. Obs. 1. The contraction vs is used by the Attics in the accusative, not in the nominative. So ιχθύς , Od . e, 53. κ , 124. μ, 331. τ', 113. §ρνς for $ρύα$, II. λ', 494. ψ', 118. ϊτνς, Herod, νιιι. 89 q · I Obs. 2. In the same manner are declined 6 νεκνς, 6 the dead person’; η χελνς, 6 the tortoise’; η Spvs, ‘ the oak’; ό μυς, 4 the mouse’; ο, η σύς , c the hog’; η πίτνς, * the pine’. The dative νεκυϊ is a disyllable. The dative plur. νεκύεσσι, II. e, 397* and passim, νεκνσσιν , Od. λ', 56 8. So also ^εννσσιν, Il,\ r , 416. 7Γ ίτνσσιν, Od. I, 186. General Remarks. In the genitive and dative sing, and plur. the poets annex the syllable φι , or with v εφεΧκνστικόν , φιν ( φι paragogicum), in which case, in substantives in η the s of the genitive is omitted, in those in ος, ον , o only remains before φι, and in those in os 1 1 ' —. ■■ 11 ■■■■■ . " ■■ 1 ■' " 1 * ■■*· Fisch. i, p. 416. Redundance. 109 4 . I gen. €ος, οΟς, in the gen. e? or eu$ (the Ioriic contraction front eosy §. 79· Obs. 2.) enters, e. g. εύνήφι, Od. β', 2. for 4 (ϊξ €υνης. Dat. φρητργφιν, II. β', 363. anro στρατόφιν, H. κ* 347. Dat. θβόφιν, II. η, 366. βξ ζρβββοσφιν, II. ί, 568. an το <ττηθεσφι , II. X , 374. Plur. anr οστεόφιν , Od. ξ, 134. Dat. κλισίρσφι, II. ν 9 168 . συν ό'χεσφι, II. S', 297. 7 rapa ναυφιν, II. θ, 474. Also in the accus. enrl ^ε^ιόφιν, enr άριστερόφιν , II. ν, 308 sq r . Note. Oev appears to be an appendage of a similar nature; but is found only in the genitive, e. g. εξ Αισυμηθεν , II. Θ , 304. εξ αΧοθεν, It. to, 492. εξ ονρανόθεν, II. θ', 19· anro κρηθεν, Hes. Sc. H. 7. and κατά κρηθεν, Horn. H. in Cerer. 182. εξ ApyoOev, Soph. Antig. 106. In the same manner the syllable Oev is annexed to the genitive of the pronoun eyco, συ 3 ου, εμεθεν (from eyueo), σεθεν, εθεν (eo). Afterwards those forms of nouns were used as adverbs, Άθηνηθεν, θηβηθεν. Redundance. §. 88. Greek words have frequently two forms, which commonly follow different declensions, but frequently also different kinds of the same declension, and some¬ times have the same, sometimes different genders. If these double forms are used together in one case, such a word is said to abound ( abundans ). Generally, however, these double forms are not both peculiar to ope dialect, but each to a different one. They are often found in the nominative, e. g. d ταός, ‘ the peacock', ( Athen. xiv. p. 655. A.) Attic, ταως , ταω, and •tawvy ταώνος; whence ταωσι , Aristoph. Ach. 63. r Heyne Obss. ad II. T. v. p. 522 sq. Maitt. p. 366. Fisch, i, p. 364. 110 Redundance. (Athen. ix. p. 397 . 22.) \ In the same manner λαγό?, in Sophocles, ap. Athen. p. 400 . λαγωο?, Ion. and λαγοί?, Attic fc . ναός, and νεως, Χαός, and λεω?, and with a dif¬ ferent gender 6 σίεΧος, Attic το σίάΧον*. So also δάκρυον and δάκρυ, both in Homer; from the first δακρυοις , Eurip. Iphig. A. Π7 5; from the latter δάκρυσι, id. Troad, 3i5 x . From βρως, — ωτος, γελώ?, — ωτος, came another iEolic form ερος, epov (also in Homer II. ξ, 315.) and γε'λο?, ov y . Instead of δενδρον, ου, another form occurs δεν- $ρος, εος, το, Herod, vi. 79. whence come δένδρα, δενδρεα, δενδρεων, δενδρεσι*, όνειρα and όνειρος, Hemst. ad Lucian. T. ι. p . 376. The Attics particularly declined nouns in ών, όνος, in ω , e · S' — ους, for χεΧιδων, — όνος, άηδω, Topyw, εΙκω\ This also happened in the Ionic dialect; εικω occurs in Herodotus vn. 69 . A word which is almost universally f abundans’, is χρως, χρωτός, of which another form χρους occurs, which is declined like βοός (§. 78.). Hence the forms gen. χρωτός (Eurip. Ale. 172. Androm. 148.) and χροός (II. X, 130. Eurip. Hec. 548.) Dat. χρωτί (Eurip. Or. 42. An- drom. 258.) Xen. Symp. iv. 55. and χρόί (Horn. Eurip· Med. 787. 1175.) Acc .χρωτα (Eurip. Hec. 406.) and^poa (Horn. Eunp. Hec. 718 . ii26 b ) The dative has yet a 3 Fisch. 11 , p. 189 . Lex. Gr. Herm. p. 329. 9» Thom. M. p. 564 . et Interpr, u Moeris, p. 347. Thom. M. p. 791 . x Thom. M. p. 198 . y Greg. p. 286. v. K. z Valck. ad Herod, p. 474. Moeris, p. 132. Thom. M. p. 204. Koen. ad Greg. p. 24. Fisch. 11 , p. 173 . 185. a Valck. ad Phcen. p. 168 . Thom. M. p. 194 . Fisch. n, p. 174 . Herodian. Pierson, p. 459· Suid. v. εν χρω κεκαρμενηυ. Moeris, p. 252. Thom. M. p. 575. Valck. ad Eurip. Phoen. 140. Redundance. III third form χρφ, which is most used in prose. Adjectives compounded with χρούς have usually, amongst the Attics, the termination χρως, Χευκόχρως. Some words in the plural are derived from other forms different from those of the singular, as πρεσβευτής, which has οι πρέσβεις in the plural, from πρε'σβυς, or πρεσβις 0 . t Frequently a new form of the nominative arises from an oblique case of the old form, e. g. φυΧαξ, φυΧακος , and φυΧακος, — ου. μάρτυς ( J μάρτυρ ) μάρτυρος, and μάρτυ - ρος, μαρτυρου, 11. ά, 338. Od. π', 423. ΰιάκτωρ, — ορος , and ίιάκτορος, — όρου, όμως, όμωός, and όμωός, όμωου*. θυ~ Χαζ, θυΧακος, and θυΧάκου. So from the acCUS. Αημητέρα, Αημητρα , a new nominative Αημητρα , —ας has arisen. §.77· Others have only one form of nominative in use, 89 but in other cases, together with their derivatives, other forms, which presuppose a form different from the usual form of the nominative, e. g. υιός is regularly declined υ\ου, υιω, υιόν, plur. υιοί, &c.; but in the genitive and dative sing, and the nom. genitive, dative, and accus. plur. amongst the Attics the forms υϊεος , i /lei, υιεΐς, υιεων, υιεσι, υιεας, (and υιεϊς. Plat. Rep. VIII. p. 195. 322. Gorg. §. 38. Thuc. vi. 30. §.8l. Obs. 4 .) from the obsolete νιευς, are more used. In Homer, besides these, mea occurs, II. v , 350. In Homer also we find the forms . υιός, υΐϊ, υΐα, dual υϊε, plur. υϊες, υϊάσι, υΐας, of which c Thom. M. p. 734. Ammon, p. 120. Valck. ad Theocr. Adon. p. 319. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 6*38. d Koen. ad Gregor, p. 278. Fisch. it, p. 197 sq. Ruhnken. ad Longin. p. 26*4, Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. 1 , p.. 527· Brunck, ad Soph. Antig. 974. e Thom. M. p. 86*5 sq. \ US Heteroclites. vh must have been the nominative. So in the Attid dialect, σεων, aeas, from the obsolete σευς, which in other dialects was αης, αητός ^. Thus also to ονειρον, τού ονείρου and ονείρατος, from ονειρας (r) ; whence ονείράί in Quint. Cal. xii. 106 . «I < §. 90 . The Anomalous Nouns have a similar origin. Those nouns are called anomala , or irregular, whose oblique cases presuppose a nominative different from that in use, without having double forms in the rest of the cases. To these belong the abovementioned ywtj, •γυναικος, as from yi>vcu%, yovv , yovaros, §όρυ, Αόρατος, as from y όνας, δόρας (see §. 84. Obs. 3 .) Zeus, Am, or Ζηνός, as from Δ /s or Ζην, from Ζευς, the acc. Ζευν, in an epi¬ gram of ^Eschrio, Anal. T. i. p. 189 . See Schioeig - . hceuser. ad Athen. T. iy. p. 504. Obs. From yvvr η came the accus. sing, yvvrjv, in Pherecrates, and accus. piur. yυvάς, and nom. plur. yvval , in Philippides g . §•91. Heteroclites. Some double forms of cases presuppose only one form of the nominative, which however are declined, accord¬ ing to two different declensions, or different kinds of one declension. These are called Heteroclita. In this man¬ ner are declined, l. after the first and third declension substantives in * 7 s, yet only in the accus. and vocative, e. g. Σωκράτης (third declension) makes Σωκράτην , after the first, Xen. Mem. I. i. l, 2. 18 , fyc. and Σωκράτη after the third, Plat6. Sj/mp. p. 224. So Άριατοφάνην, Plato , ib. p. 192 . f Thom. M. p. 790 . et Interpr. Moeris, p. 33 9 . g Fisch. 11 , p. 177 sqq. Heteroclites. 113 199. 'Αριστοφάνη, ib. p. 200. and in the vocative Στρε- φίαοη, after the first, and Στρεφίαδες after the third h . The Ionians especially declined different nouns of the first declension after the third, e. g·. Um, δεσπότεας, Αεντυχίδεα, Herod. VIII. 114. κνβερνητεα, VIII. 118. Πάρ- σεα, VIII. 3. for δεσπότην, δέσποτας, Λευτνχίδην (Αεωτ.) κυβερνήτην. Πάρτη ν'. So Θαλής, after the third declen¬ sion, θάλητος, θάλητα (Diog. L. ι. . 39 . 34 ), and in Attic particularly after the first θάλεια, (Herod, i, 170 . Plato Rep. x. p. m), θ«Χο5 (Diog. L. 1 , 40 , &c) θαλήν, Anstoph. Nub. 180.), as μύκης, μόκου, and μΰκητος k . 2. After the second and third, χάος, χο άς has pro¬ perly χόου, χοό, but it was also declined after the third, *** W*’ x°\ Athen - n.p.m. B. χόες. Plat. Theaet. p. 116 .; as βοΰς, βοο s. Hence πρόχουσιν, Aristoph. Nub. 270. Eurip. Ion. 434. for προχοάισιν. Νόο ? , νοΰε was inflected in this manner by the later ecclesiastical writers, νοός, voi, νόα, whilst the Attics declined it νοΰ, νψ, vodv'. "Οσσε in Homer was considered by the Grammarians as the dual of το Άσσος, όσσεος, for ίσσεε, of which Eusta¬ thius produces the dative Άσσε,, according to whom it followed the third declension. But we have 'άσσων, άσσοις, οσσοισι, in II. ξ, 94 . Hes. Scut. Here. 426. Msch. Prom. 144, &'C. as from ’άσσος, άσσου. So from το οχος, _ εος, comes οχεα, II. € , 745 . άχεσι, όχάεσσι , ib. 722.; but the dat. sing, οχ,,,, Is in JEsch. Prom. 135. Herod, vm. 124. '■ Wesseling ad Herod, p. 232, 21. Moeris, p. 134, et Pierson. Fisch. n, p. 183 sq. Brunck. ad Arist. Eccl. 366. Nub. 182. 106* WCSSeL ad Her ° d · p · 56 ‘ 46 · Fisch · P· 84· 36l. Maitt. p. 11 I P ' 183 ’ et PierS0 "· Mena §' ad Dl0 S· L· 1 , 34.' Fisch. P· a/ y. 1 Herodian. Herm. p. 303. Fisch. n, p. 181. vot. I. I m HeterocliUs. plur. οχοις, JEsch. ib. 716 . Soph. El. 727 . as from οχος, όχου, αδίκους, and all words compounded with ποΰς have — 7 roSos, acc. — TroSa, but also, and especially in Attic - — 7 τον, —wow m . Compare §. 71. 10 . Another form of the genitive is Οί&7π>§εω, Herod, iv. 149. from OitWo&ft. Nouns in ως are declined partly after the second declension, particularly amongst the Attics, in ως, gen. ω, and partly after the third, ως, ωος , e. g. Μ/νω?, MiVajos*. Od. p, 523. and Μίνω, Herod, i, 171 . Thuc. 1 , 8. Isocr. Panath.p. 241. C. ed. Steph n . In the same manner γάλω?, *γά\ωος and — ω, κά\ως, — ωος, and — ω, άλω?, — ωος, and —ω, ηρω, and ηρως for· ηρώα and ηρωας°. Compare §. 72 . Obs. 3. Sometimes a noun is declined after different forms of the same declension, e. g. εγχβλυ? was declined by the Attics, in the singular, like Ιχθύς, in the plural like πηχυς , e. g. «τ/χελεωι/, Arist. Nub. 559- τάς ey χε'λει?, id. Equ. 864. The dative ^χελεσ* is quoted by Athenaeus from Aristoph. Vesp. 570. where now, however, εγχελυ- σιν is read p . Metaplasmus. Other changes are not founded upon the circum¬ stance of the form of the nominative being capable of a double inflexion. The number also of obsolete m Moeris, p. 282. - Fisch. n. p. 181 sq. n Herodian. Piers, p. 439- Fisch. n, p. 180. ° Thom. M. p. 424, et Interpr. Moeris, p. 176. et Piers. p Athen. vii, p. 299 sq. Eustath. ad II. ιρννς . Observations. I 1 . The following are excepted : a) names of towns in ους , d ΣεΧινους , d ΣκϊΧΧους, d’EXeoov, d Π βσσινους, &;c. b) names of towns in ων , o Medea^y, d Μ αραθων, except η ΕαβυΧων. Ήίαραθων is masculine in Herod, vi. 107. 111. & fc. feminine in Hind. 01. xiii. 157. Demosth. p. 342. E. ed . W c . In like manner Σικυων is masculine and feminine, c) Those in ης, ητος, 6 Μασ^, Strabo , νιι. 376. d) Names of towns which have only the plural, are masculine when they end in oi, feminine when in at; neuter when in a, τα Αβυκτρα. e) Names of towns in as, e. g. ο’Ακράγας, ‘the city of Agrigentum’,' *Thuc. vii. 46. 50. also η A κρ. Hind. Hyth. vi. 6. d Ύάρας, ‘the city of Tarentum’, Thuc . vi. 104. also η Ύάρας , Dionys . Herieg . 376. v. Steph. Hyz. s . υ. * Άργος , eo?, is of the neuter gender. 2. Many names of islands and cities are of both genders, υΧηοσσα Ζάκυνθος, Od. θ', 24. ev υΧηευτι Ζακυνθφ, Od. a, 246. π 3 123. Επίδαυρος occurs in Homer, II. β '. 56l. as masculine , άμπβΧόβντ * Επίδαυρον : in other writers, e. g. Strabo, it is feminine. Ώρωπάς occurs as masculine in Thuc. vm. 60. 95. and ndXos, Od. a', 93. The usual name το Άλιον is in Homer η*1 Χίος, except in the suspected passage, II. o, 71. 3. Names of animals, which are of the common gender , are frequently used in Greek in the feminine, when there is no refer¬ ence to the sex, but to the name of the animal generally. When there is a determinate reference to the sex, the proper gender is used; frequently, however, not d . §· 94. The following rules are observed in the terminations: Words in a, which have a vowel or ζ, δ, θ, X, v, p , σ. b Eustath. ad Od. 7 ', 30. r , s t i 9 - t ' c Thom. M. p. 5p7- et Interpr. Wessel. ad Herod, p. 485, 73 . Schweigh. ad Ath. T. vn. p. 425. d Fisch. 1 , p. 369 sq. 119 Gender of Substantives. before the termination, are feminine, and follow the first declension,, e. g. y τράπεζα, ‘ the table/ y διφθερα, "the parchment’, η άμιλλα , "the contest’, η εχι$να, ‘the viper’, &c. Those which have μ before their termina¬ tion, are neuter , and follow the third declension, e. g. to σώμα, το λημα , "the will’, το λήμμα , ‘ the gain’. They are mostly derived from verbs, and, indeed, from the first person, perf. pass, also το γάλα, γάλακτος. αις of these 7 tois is common, 6 and y παις, $άϊς, femi¬ nine, and στοάς neuter. They all follow the third declension. av are all mascidine, except that this is also the termi¬ nation of the neuter of adjectives in ας. The third declension. ap mostly neuter, το $μαρ, ‘the day’, to εϊδαρ, ‘the victuals’, το φρέαρ , ‘the well’, &c. But y $άμαρ, and y oap, ‘the wife’, take their gender from their signification. ας i. part masculine, which have the genitive in αντος, e. g. 6 ιμάς , \ ιμάντος , 6 άνΰριάς, άνΰριάντος . So also o Ύάρας, αντος, ‘ the city of Tarentum’, and Άκράγας, ‘the city of Agrigentum’, are masculine, §. 93 . and feminine, κλεινάν Άκράγ, Pind 01. 3, 3. Pyth. 6. 6. Strabo vi. p. 417 , C. < 2 . part feminine, which have the genitive in ά$ος, e. g. y λαμπας, άδος, y 7 τελείάς, παστάς. φνγάς , ά$ος, ‘ the fugitive ’, is of the common gender. 3. neuter, only disyllables c , which make ατος in the genitive, το' γήρας, το κρέας, το κεράς. αυς in the genitive αός, are feminine, η γραύς, γραός, ναυς. e Etym. Μ, p. 49i. 120 Gender of Substantives. ctp concerning φθειρ, see 95. \eip is feminine, but the compounds άντίχειρ, &c. masculine f . €i? mostly feminine , except 6 κτβίς, κτενός, 1 the comb/ In adjectives €£$ is the masculine termination. J i · · ' :· · · · · ενς genitive ew, are all masculine. / · tjv genitive ηνο 9 and ενο 9 are masculine, e. g. 6 λιμηυ, 6 αχτχτιν, ο σπλην, ό ττοιμην, except η Σειρην, η φρην, ‘ the intellect’, and 6, ή χην, c the goose*, common . . ·. · : ,..y. ηρ are chiefly masculine, except η y αστηρ, ‘the belly’; η κηρ, ‘the fate’; and those which from their signi¬ fication are feminine, e. g. η μητηρ « η θν^άτηρ. *Αηρ, ‘the mist’, and ‘the air’, is masc . and femin s . So also 6, η αιθήρ h . κηρ for κεαρ, ‘ the heart’; rjp for €ap, the spring’; στψ for στεαρ , ‘the tallow’, are neuter. • \ ης in the first declension masculine, e. g. 6 άκινάκης, 6 $εσπότη$, &c. In the third declension also, mostly masculine, except those in ης, ητος, as η εσθης , and substantives in ότη% and ντης, which are feminine. In adjectives this is the termination of the mascu¬ line and feminine. i are all neuter, e. g. σίνηπι, μέλι. w are mostly feminine, e. g. η ρίν, η ώ$ίν, η άκτίν, η θίν, (or Θίή, ‘the shore’, (θίν, ‘the heap’, is masculine and feminine 1 ), $ελφί v is masculine. \ % , i 9 feminine, except 6 κι?, c the weovil’; 6 XT?, ‘the lion’; , 6 δελφίς* Others, from their signification, are mas - f Fisch. i, p. 3S8. b Fisch, i, p. 390. s Fisch. 1 , p. 389. i Fisch. 1 , p. 382. Gender of Substantives. 121 culine and feminine , e. g. 6 , η όφις, 6 , η πρόμαντις, * « ·' k ί ο, η ορνις · ξ are, 1. masculine , ό πίναξ, ό μυρμηξ, ό ιέραξ, ό θωραξ, ο φοΊνιξ, ‘ the palm-tree’ 1 . 2. feminine, as η ννξ, η βωλαξ, η διασφάξ, η διωρυξ, η θρίδαξ, η κάλυξ, η κλάξ, η κλιμαξ, η κυλιξ, η λάρναξ, η ττηληξ, η πτερυξ, η τττυξ, η σηρα'γξ, η φλόξ, η \vy%, η σμώδιξ, η άλωπηξ, η φόρ - μιγζ, η σύρ^ξ, η χοινιξ, η θρίξ, η φάραγξ, η άντυξ, η στίξ, η κάμαξ, η μάστιξ, η ττρο'ιξ™. 3. Others are common, a) names of men and animals, 6, η αίξ, ο , η θράξ. ο, η δελφαξ. ο, η μείραξ. ό, η φυλαξ. 6 , η σκυλαξ. ό, η περδιξ. b) ό, η ανλαξ. ο, η βηξ . ο, η φάρυγξ, ό, η λάρυγξ. Μ, η στυραξ. 6 , η φάλayξ n . ον are neuter, except the names of women, η Δόρκιον, η Γλι ικεριον, η Λεόντων. op are neuter , as το άορ. ος are mostly masculine. The following are feminine, l. the names of islands and cities, as well as η νήσος, ‘the island’. 2. the names of trees, plants, flowers, η κέδρος, η φηyός, η κυπάρισσος , η άμμος, and ψάμμος, ‘the sand’; άσάμινθος, ‘the bathing-tub’; άσβολος, ‘the soot’; άσφαλτος , ‘asphaltus’; ατραπός, or άταρ- 7 rds, ‘the way’; βάλανος, ‘the acorn’; βάσανος, ‘the touchstone, the proof’; y νόθος, ‘thejaw-bone’; γύψος, ‘the gypsum’; δελτος , ‘ the writing tablet’; δοκός, ‘the beam’; δρόσος, ‘ the dew’; κάμινος , ‘ the baking oven’; κάπετος, ‘the pit’; κάρδοπος, ‘the kneading-trough’; κελενθος, ‘the path’; κέρκος, ‘the tail’; κιβωτός, ‘the k Fisch. I, p. 394 . sqq. 397. '* Brunck. ad poet. Gnom. p. 2 75. Fisch. 1 , p. 385. m Fisch. 1 , p. 386 sq. n Fisch. 1 , p. 386 sq. 122 Gender of Substantives. chest'; κόπρος, The manure'; λέκιθος , The yolk of an λ» 7 κυθος, ‘ the oil-flask'; μίλτος, ‘ a red colour'; η νόσος, f the disease'; η οδός c the way, and it's com¬ pounds'; πλίνθος , The tile'; πρόχοος ,— χονς, Thewater- pot'; πύελος, "the trough'; ράβδος, The staff'; σορός, The coffin'; σποδός, ‘ the ashes, dust’; ύαλος, ‘ amber, glass'; χηλός, The chest'; ψήφος, The pebble'. The following are common: l. denominations of persons, which may be either male or female, e. g. άyyeλoς 9 ‘ the messenger', male or female; άμφίπολος, The servant, the maid-servant'. 2. Names of ani¬ mals, e. g. ο, η y έρανος, ό, η άρκτος. Again, ο, η άτρακτος, ‘ the spindle'; ο, η βάρβιτίς, ‘ the lyre'; ό, η Θάμνος, ( the bush'; ό, η Θεός, ‘ the god, the goddess’; ο, η λίθος, c the stone’, &c. The greater number are adjectives of two terminations. Substantives in ος, which follow the third declen¬ sion, are all neuter. ονς are masculine, except το οίς, which comes from ούας. βους is common, since it signifies ( a bull' and ‘a cow’. v are neuter πώΰ, νάπυ , yovo, δόρυ, άστυ. υν are masculine . νρ are masculine, except το πυρ, ο, η μάρτυρ . υς are feminine, except ό βότρυς, The bunch of grapes’; ό Θρηνυς, ‘ the stool'; ό ιχθύς, The fish'; ό μυς, The mouse'; ο' νεκυς, The corpse’; ό στάχυς, The ear of corn'; ό πηχυς , The ell’. The arm'; υς and συς are common. ψ are masculine, except η λαίλαψ, The storm'; φλεψ, _ Fisch, i, p. 365. O r Fisch. 1 , p. 36Y sqq. 123 Gender of Substantives. c the rain*; η χόρνιφ, 6 the water for washing’; η όψ, c the voice’; η καλαυροφ, 6 the shepherd’s crook’. ω are feminine, e. g. η πείθω, η ηχω. ων are masculine, l. those which make οντος in the geni¬ tive^ e. g. δράκων, δράκοντος, 2. the greater part of those which have ωνος in the genitive : except η άλων , f the threshing-floor’; η γληχων, c penny-royal’; η μηκών, 6 the poppy’; [η τρηρων, c the shy dove’] αιών, * life’., is also feminine. So also 6, η κωδων, ό, η αυλών q . Those which have ονος in the genitive are feminine, e. g. η χελιδων, 4 the swallow’; except ό ακμών, c the anvil’. Many are common, as 6, η ήρεμων, c the guide’, male or female; 6, η άλεκτρυων, 6 the cock’, c the hen ’ r ; 6, η αηδών, ‘ the nightingale’; ό, η δαίμων, c the god’, f the goddess’; 6, η κνων*. The Attic termination ων for ov in the second de¬ clension is of the neuter gender, e. g. το άνω^εων, τον — Γ γεω. ωρ are masculine , except η αλέκτωρ, c the unmarried vir¬ gin’ ; η αωρ, 4 the bride’, and the neuter ; τό ελωρ, ‘ the capture’, f game’, f spoil’; το ελδωρ or εελδωρ, c the wish’ ; το νδωρ, e the water’ ; το τεκμωρ , i the object’, f aim’, ως are, in the third declension, l. ως, όος feminine, e. g. η αιδώς, η ηως. 2 . ως, ωτος and ωος masculine, e. g. ο ερως, 4 the love’ ; ό 7 ελως, ωτος, 4 the laughter’ ; ό φως, φωτός, 6 the man’ ; ό χρως, χρωτός, ί the skin’; ό κάλως, ωός, * the rope’; ο θως, θωός, ‘ the jackall’ ; ό δμως, ωος, 4 the slave’ ; ο ηρως, ωος. Except το φως, φωτός, k the light’. 3. In the second declension the Attic termination ως, ω is of the masculine gender. q Fisch. 1 , p. 384 sq. r Athen. ix, p. 373 sq. 3 Fisch. 1 , p. 383 sq. 1 24 Gender of Substantives. The following are feminine, η y άλως, yaXw, and ya~ λωος, and η άλως, άλω, and άλωος. χρόως, gen. του Xpews, is neuter. The dialect varies also the gender of the sub¬ stantives, e. g. βάτος, is masculine in Attic, otherwise feminine i . βώλος, is feminine in Attic, in the others ?nasc u . fyvs, which otherwise is fem. was used as ?nasc. by the Peloponnesians x . ϊπος, ‘ the press’, * * the mouse-trap’, is masc. (Arts- toph. Plut. 815. Pollux p. 1317.); but in Pindar, Olymp. 4, ll. in the sense of f bur¬ den’, ‘ weight’, it is fem. κιων, ‘ the column’, is masc. in the Attic dialect, • * but fem. in Ionic and Doric*. κόρις, f the bug’, is masc. in the old authors; in the modern fem 1 . λιμός, which otherwise is masc. was feminine a in Doric. It is used so by the Megarensian in Aristoph. Apharn. 743. όμφαξ, ‘ an unripe grape’, was fem. in Attic ; other¬ wise i?iasc h . 4 Thom. M. p. 148. Moeris, p. 99· u Thom. M. p. 176 . Moeris, p. 95. Phrynich. p. 16 . Jiem- sterh. ad Lucian. Tim. 1 , p. 400 ed. Bip. Fisch. 1 , p. 368 . x Schol. Aristoph. Nub. 401. y Porphyr. Quaest. Horn. p. 290 . Fisch. 1 , p. 383. z Thom. M. p. 549. Phryn. p. 134. * Fisch. 1 , p. 368. b Phrynich. p. 16 . et ibi Nunnes. Eustath. ad Od. a, p. 1390. lin. 54. ed. Rom. \ Gender of Substantives. % * I σκότος, also masculine in Attic ; in other dialects neuter c . στάμνος, c a wine vessel’, used as fern, by the Attics, as masc. by the Peloponnesians d . Yet Aristo¬ phanes uses it as masc. Pint. 5 45. See the Scholiasts. τάριχος, e salted meat* *, was used as masc. by the Do¬ rians, lonians, and others; by the Attics alone as neuter also e . ύαλος, or νβλος, was also fem. in Attic ; in other dialects only masc { . φθ€'φ, c the louse’, was used as masculine by the Attics; by the others only as feminine s . The difference in the meaning of a word has also §. 96 . sometimes an influence in varying the gender. o £ 1 / 70 ?, e the yoke’; το ζιτγόν, e the balance’ 11 . ο θόλος, c the dirt’; η βόλος , f the hot-house’, f the coved roof’ 1 ; (according to Sext. Empir. p. 248. η βόλος is Attic, ό βόλος Doric.) ό ίττίΓος , ‘ the horse’, ή ίππος (the mare) cavalry. ό λέκιθος, ‘ broth made of pulse’; v λέκιθος, ' the yolk of an egg’. ό λίθος, f the stone’; η λίθος, < the precious stone’ k . c Schol. Eurip. Hec. 1. ad Moer. p. 354 sq. d Sext. Empir. adv. Gr. p. 247. 256. • Pollux vi, 48. Thom. M. p. 834. Moeris p. 369. et Interpr. f Eustath. ad Od. a, p. 19· 3>d Moer. p. 373 sq. s Thom. M. p. 894. Moer. p. 392. Phrynich. p. 54. Fisch. 1 , p. 388. h Valck. ad Amm. p. 65. ‘ Steph. Thes. L. Gr. T. 1 , p. 1571 sqq. k Steph. Thes. L. Gr. T. 11 , p. 705. Gender of Substantives, the back of an animal*; τό νώτον , e the back of a man* 1 * * * . Ο στύραξ, < the shaft of the javelin’; ή στΰραξ, c the storax* m . ° χαραξ, ‘ the palisade 5 ; η χάραξ , ‘ the stake to which the vine is fastened 511 . 126 o vt tiro 9, In some substantives, which are not common, the feminine gender is indicated by a peculiar termination, so that either the termination ις is annexed to the mas¬ culine, as 'ΕΚΚην, Ελληνίς, or the termination of the masculine is changed. In the latter case the following are chan σ ed: o A * into ις, e. g. δεσπότης, ‘ the master 5 ; δεσπότις, ‘ the mistress 5 ; πολίτης , c the citizen 5 ; ποΧίτις, the female citizen 5 ; αρτοπωλης, c the sel¬ ler of bread 5 ; άρτόπωλις, 6 the female seller of bread 50 . ης into T put, ποιητης, c the poet’; ποιητρια, κιθαριστής, κιθαρίστρια*. This takes place in substan¬ tives which are formed from the third person perf. pass, of verbs (r). into τρις, , as άλετης, άλετρίς, ορχηστής, όρχηστρίς, αυλητης , ανλητρ'ις. Obs. The form τρις was more frequently, used by the Attics in some words than τρια νν . From πενης and θης come the forms . πενησσα and θησσα <ι (r). 1 Piers, ad Moer. p. 267 . Schweigh. Anim. ad Athen. T. vn. p. 135 . Ammon, p. 132. et Valck. Thom. M. p. 811. Moeris, p. 357, , n Thom. M. p. pll. Phryn. p. 20. Fisch. 11 , p. 68 . Valck. ad Eurip. Hippol. p. 285. b. A. p Fisch. 11 , p. 69 . pp Moeris, p. 2 79. et Piers. q Fisch. 11, p. 70 . ' Gender of Substantives. 127 j r into d, when a vowel or a p precedes the termina- j tion, e. g. εκυρός, eicvpdy in Attic. I into η , in the rest of the cases, e. g. δούλος, δούλη. into is, e. g. στρατηγός, στρατη^ίς, αιχμάλωτος , αίχ- μαλωτίς, κάπηλος , καττηλίς, ζύμμαχος, ζνμ- μαχίς, as an adjective, τύραννος , τνραννίς , &c. r into αινα only in some, e. g. θεός, θεαινα , λύκος, λύ¬ καινα. In the Alexandrian dialect the form ^ ισσα was used διάκονος , διακόνισσα. αζ and a\js into ασσα, e. g. άναζ, ανασσα ; φάφ, φάσσα ; yet from κόλαζ, κολακίς, from 7Γ ροφύλαζ, Ίτροφυλακίς. βυς into eia, e. g. ιερεύ s, ιερεια, βασιλεύς , βασίλεια. into ις and ισσα , βαλανεύς, βαλανίς, βασιλεύς , βασιλίς , and βασίλισσα ; the latter, however, rarely in Attic 8 . So also βαλάι/ισσα, πανδόκισσα, Αίθιόττισσα. They said also η ^γραμματεύς 1 . The Doric or Macedonic dialect had, besides, the form βασίλιννα , which Menan¬ der has once used". ηρ into ειρα , e. g. σωτηρ, σωτειρα , δοτηρ , δότειρα χ . σημαν- τρίς as an adjective, e. g. σημαντρις yrj, comes from σημαντηρ. ιζ into ισσα , e. g. Φο7νιζ , Φοίι/ισσα, Κίλι£, Κίλισσα. νς into νσσα , β. g. Λίβνς, Αίβνσσα. * Fisch. π, ρ. 71. s Moeris, ρ. 96 '. Thom. Μ. ρ. 144* Hemsterh. ad Lucian. Τ. ι, ρ. 313. Bip. Dorv. ad Charit. ρ. 471. ed. L. 4 Hemsterh. Add. ad Thom. M. p. 144* Brunck. ad Arist. Eccl. 870. u Hemsterh. 1, c. Fisch, ii, p. 72. X *23 . Heterovenea. Ο wp into eipa, e. g. πανδαμάτωρ,. πανδαμάτειρα. The fem. of σύΧΚηπτωρ is συΧΚηπτρια . Yet probably the basis of them is in the obsolete forms πανδαματηρ (as ολετηρ, II. σ , 114. οΧετειρα) and σνΧΧηπτης (as συμπαίστωρ and σνμπαίστης, σνμπαίστρια). # » * ων into αινα, λέων, λέαινα , δράκων, δράκαινα , Λακών, Λάκαινα, θεράπων, θεράπαινα , άΧεκτρυων, άλεκτρύαινα γ . Note. For θεράπαινα also occurs θεράπνη 1 . % • into ft/ts, οήι^, e. g*. δμωίς, ηρως, ηρωίς, and ηρωί¬ νη, ΟΓ ηρωνη. Also ηρωίσσα ( Apollon . Rfl. ω? < IV, 1309. Anal. Br. ι, ρ. 416. Valcken. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p . 321.) . into as*, e. g. Ύρως , TpwaV. 98. Heterogenea. /* ) . % Several substantives have, in the plural, a different gender and termination from those in the singular. This is called μεταπΧασμδς ye νους, transformation of the gen¬ der, and the word itself erepoyevtjs. This metaplasmus is founded probably on different forms of the same sub¬ stantive, of which one remains in use in the singular, the other in the plural". The following are of this nature : 6 δεσμός , in plural, τα δεσμά, which was used chiefly in the Attic dialect, the plural δεσμοί was the common y Fisch. n, p. 73. z See my Animadv. in H. Horn. p. 141. Eurip. Hec. 482. a These words are treated of by Eustath. ad II. a, p. 108. 17. Etym. Μ. V. κελευθος, p. 502. Schol. Yen. ad II. a, 312. Heterogenea. Greek. Yet we find δεσμούς also Od. θ', 724. and Mschyl. Prom. 524 b . - ο δίφρος, in the plural rd δίφρα, Callim. H. in Dian. 1 35. δ θεσμός, ‘ the decree* *, plur. rd θεσμό, Soph . Fragm. p . 595. ed . Brunch c . KeXei/flos·, ‘ the Way *, pliir. τα /cdXeufla, as ο 7 ρα κελευ* θα, in Homer. d κύκλος, c the circle*, plur. rd κυκλα, ‘the wheels ’ d ; also κύκλοι, II. v , 280. ό λύχνος, f the lamp*, plur. τα λυχνα , Herod . II, 62. 133. Eurip. Cycl . 5l2 e . . • 0 d σίτος, f corn/ plur. τα σίτα*. d σταβμο?, plur. τα σταθμά, Soph. (Ed. F. 1139· Demosth. i, p. 784, &c. d T όρταρος, plur. τα Ύόρταρα < In these substantives the singular does not occur as neuter. But, the following, which are considered as belonging to this class, are found neuter in the singular : τα νώτα from το νωτον . See §. 96. τα ερετμά from το ερετμόν, Od. λ', 77. μ , 15. φ', 268. τα ζν ( γό from το ζνγόν, Plato Cratyl. 3i g . The following neuter in the plural are more rare : τα δρνμά from ο δρυμός, II. λ', 118. &C. τα δάκτυλα from b Fisch. ii, p. 170. Thom. M. p. 204. c Porson. ad Eurip. Med. 494. d Fisch. 11 , p. 170 . .·'·■** * Wess. ad Hero. ■ ■ ■■■ Μ . ■“ ' 132 Classes of Substantives . from the obsolete nominative Πελο-π-βυν (as in Homer II. a, 422. Αιθιοπηαϊ from Αίθιοπενς for Αιθίοπας from A ϊθιοφ 0 )* Obs. 2. The forms — ιδης, — ιονίδης, and — ιωνιάδης, are often interchanged, instead of Ίαττετί^ν from Ίαπετός we find Ίαπετιονίδης, Hes/Epy.54i. Theog.5 28. for ’E Χατίδης front Ελατόν, Έ\ατιονί$ης, Hymn. Horn . n. 32. for ΎαΧάίδης from Ταλαον, ΎαΧάιονίδης, II. β\ f>66. 678. Pind. 01. 6, 24. Instead oi 'Ανθεμίωνιάδης from Ανθεμίων, we find in Homer, II. δ', 483 .' Ανθεμιδης. for Ήετιωνιάδης , in Herod, v. 92,5. Ήετίδης for ΑευκαΧιωνιάδης, ΑενκαΧίδης, Π. μ\ 117. The reason is, that of the proper names in ov, another form in ιων was used, which properly is the patronymic of the first p . Obs. 3. Instead of the form — ιάδης the form ίδης also is used, particularly in Attic, e. g. Αίαντίδαι, ' ΑΧκμαιωνίδαι, Αεον- τίδαι, Άφαρητίδαι^. Obs. 4. A Doric form of patronymics was — ωνδας, e. g. Ρπαμινωνδας. See Hemsterli. ad Callim. p. 590. ed. Ernesti Valcken. ad Schol. Eurip. Phan. p. 764. - 1 ■ ) _ · . , . , Patronymics of the female sex have the following terminations : l. ids and ίς. Αητωίάς, Callim. in Dian. 83. and Αητωίς, ib. 45. B ρισήις, Νηρήίς, from the genitives Βρισηος, N ηρηος, from Βρισευς, N ηρενς, ΆτΧαντίς from ■ ’'Ατλαν, -— αντος. 2. in ίνη and ιωνη ; the latter, when the primitive! has i or υ before the termination —ov or ων, e. g. Ακρίσιος, Ακρισιωνη, ΗΧεκτρυων , ΉΧεκτρυωνη, the former, when the primitive has a consonant before the termination ov, e. g. Αδρηστος , ' Αδρηστίνη, N ηρενς, N ηρίνη, Ωκεανός, Ώκεανίνη τ . One kind of patronymics sire the names of the young ° Valcken. ad Adoniaz, p. 414. p Hemsterh. ad Aristoph. Plut. p. 207. Valck. ad Schol. Eurip. Phoen. p. 625. ad Herod, p. 421. s Fisch. n, p. 6. ! Fisch. ii, p. 7. Classes of Substantives. i 33 of animals in ιδεύς, e. g. άηδονιδευς, ‘ a young nightingale', 1 Theocr . 1 5, 121. Χυκιδευς, id. 5, 38 s . Obs. Some names have the form only of patronymics, with¬ out Ihe signification, e. g. Μιλτιάδη, Αριστείδης, Ευριπίδης, Σιμωνίδης . Patronymics also are often interchanged with their primitives. Thus sometimes ΑΧεξανδρίδης for *ΑΧεξανδρος, Σιμωνίδης for Σιμών, Άμφιτρυων for * Αμφιτρυων ιάδης* . Ί 4 ' 9ΐ ' \%if _ r r f V t ■ ’ fCt ' ' * ! · II. Diminutives . Diminutives ( υποκοριστικά ) are words which express an absolute diminishing or lessening of the primitive. They do not occur in Homer and the old Poets. Their terminations are as follows : 1. — άδιον from substantives in as·, e. g. Χαμπάδων, κρεάδων, στιβάδων , from Χαμπάς, κρέας, στιβάς, 2. — αων from substantives in η , e. g. 7 όναων from yuvrj. 3. — αξ from substantives in ος, e. g. Χίθαξ, βώΧαξ, βωμαξ, from Χίθος, βώΧος, βωμός u , .’ - ... 1 \ «. · « 4. — άρων from substantives of all terminations, e. g. δοξαρων, φυχάρων, from δόξα, φνχη. ανθρωπάριου, ιππαρων , from άνθρωπος, ίππος, 'χιτωνάρων , κυνάρων, yOvai- κάρων, άνδράρων, παίδαρων, from the genitive of the sub¬ stantive \ιτω v, κυων, yiwrj, άνηρ, παΊς. .5. —^ιον and — ίδων from substantives of all termi¬ nations, e. g. y^iov, δικίδων , οίκίδων , νησίδων, κυνίδων. 8 Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 401. ad Herod, p. 252, 87. Fisch. 11, p. 26, 9. f Hemsterh. ad Luc. Tim. p. 414. Bip. ad Aristoph. Plut. p. 325. Toup. Emend, in Suid. T. 11 . Praef. p. 10 sq. Ruhnken. Hist. Crit. Or. p. 90. 100. u Schweigh. Anim. ad Athen. T. vn, p. 35. 102 . 134 Classes of Substantives* σαρκικόν, βοίδιον, Σωκρατίδιον, from ytj, δίκη, οίκος, νήσος, κύων, σαρξ, βοΰς, Σωκράτης, When the genitive of a word after the rejection of the termination ends in e, e is contracted wjth — ίδιον into — είδιον, e. g. άμφορέίδιον (from άμφορεύς, άμφορβως ), βασιΧείδιον. The same takes place often after o, e. g. βοίδιον, ροίδιον ηη . Wlien the primitive has a long vowel before its termination in the nominative or genitive case, the t in — ίδιον is either entirely rejected, or subscribed, as *γηδιον, Χα'γωδιον, which are also written yr /διον, XaytpStov· With v and i the i in — ίδιον coalesces, and the antepenultima becomes long, e, g. ίχθμδ ιον, βοτρόδιον, for ’ϊχθνιδιον, βοτρνίδιον, ιματϊδιον for Ιματιιδιον Χ . Obs. To these belong also the diminutives σπηΧ^διον, προσ- κεφαλαδιον , εΧαδιον, from σπηλαίου, προσκέφαλα ιον, ελαιον , for σπηλάίδιον, which elsewhere are without the i subscriptum. 6. — ιον from all terminations. Words of the third declension annex the termination — ιον to the last con¬ sonant; of the genitive case, θύριον, μα'χαίριον, εηηστολιον, ανθρωπιον , δενδριον, Ε υριπίδιον, ανδρίον, ορνίθιον, πpayμάτιov, πινακίου, from θυρα, μα-χαιρα, επιστολή , άνθρωπος , δένδρου, Ευριπίδης, άνηρ, ορνις, π pay μα, πίναξ. 7. —ις from all terminations, e. g. άμαξίς , κεραμίς, νησίς, άΧωπεκίς, πινακίς , from άμαξα, κέραμος, νήσος , άλωπηξ, πίναξ. 8. — ίσκος , ίσκη. (The latter termination is used where the primitive is feminine), e. g. νεανίσκος , άνθρω- πισκος , στεφανισκος, σατνρισκος , κνΧίσκη . μειρακίσκη , μα- ζίσκη. uu Fisch · ad Anacr. Epigr. v, 2. ad Well, ii, p. 28. x Dawes. Mise. Crit. p. 213 sq. Classes of Substantives * 135 9. — ίων, particularly in proper names . .Αττικίων, Her ίων. 10. — υδρων, 6. g. νησυδρων, ζενυδρων. 11. — vWiov, e. g. ζεννλλίον, μειρακνΧΧων, εττυΧΧιον, είδνΧΧων. 12 . — νΧΧίς, άκανθυΧΧίς, θρναΧΧίς , from άκανθα, θρύον. Obs . 1. From many diminutives new diminutives are formed, e. g. ρηματίσκων from ρημάτων, χιτωνισκάριον from χιτωνί- σκος, ποΧίχνη, ποΧίχνων, νησίς, νησίδων. Obs. 2. The iEolians and Dorians had a peculiar form of diminutives in — e -g· πύρριχος, from π ορρός, κάδδιχος from κάδος, particularly in proper names, * Αμυντιχος, θυωνιχος, y. v ;; . Another form of diminutives, originally Doric, in ■— νΧος, e. g. μικκυΧος, βρωτύΧος, occurs also in other dialects, in proper names , e. g. A ίσχυΧος, from αίσχος, 'iioL /λο? from ηδύς, Xp.e* μυΧος from χρεμος*. Obs. 3. Many diminutives are formed by abbreviations, as ΑΧεζάς for ΑΧεζανδρος Αρττοκρας Αρποκράτης Δη μάς Αημητρως ’ Ετταφράς ’ Επαφρόδιτος < ρ Λ Ιΐ,ρμας Ερμοδωρος θευδας Θεόδωρος Μήτρας Μ ητροδωρος ΦιΧάς ■ Φ ιΧόδημος* *Αμψις Αμφιάραος Τ Ι φις Ιφιάνασσα y Koen. ad Gregor, p. 133 sqq. z Hemsterh. ad Aristoph. Plut. p. 6. Fisch. ii, p. 33. 23. a Bentl. Epist. ad Mill. p. 521. ed. Lips. Fisch. ii, p. 26\ Dprv. ad Charit. p. 278. Λ εοντιχος 136 αστρις ’Ay άθυΧΧος ΆρίστυΧΧος Β (ίθυ\\ο$ 'ΉρυΧΧος θράσυΧΧος Αιονυς άπφυς πάσσαζ στρατηΧαζ 10 3. * ' To Diminutives are opposed Amplificatiyes, in which, by a peculiar termination, it is signified, that the sense of the primitive is in a very high degree, as the property or quality of a person or thing, e. g. yaaTpiav, γείΧων, κεφάΧω v, Πλατωι/, ' a person who has a great belly, lips, head’; 'a broad forehead’. πΧουταξ, 'who is very rich’. μετωπίας, ‘ with a broad forehead’. These are properly adjectives. IV. Gentilia * t signify the country or place of residence, as Αθηναίος, K ορίνθιος, Ιθακήσιος, Ιταλό?, Ίταλιωτ^?, ΑΧεζανορΊνος, ΑίοΧευς , Αωριεύς^ Σπαρτιάτης. In Ίταλιωτ^? and ΣικεΧιωτης, it is to be observed, that they signify the Greeks residing in Italy and Sicily, ’Ιταλοί and ΣικεΧοί, on the contrary, signify the native inhabitants f . Classes of Substantives. for άστpάyaXoς b ’Aya0oKXrjs from nouns in κΧης, ΉρακΧής, Βα^ι/κλί/?, &C. c Αιόνυσος / d παππα πάσσαΧος στατηΧάτης e . III. Amplificatives. b Fisch. ii, p. 30. c Fisch. n, p. 32. d Fisch. ii, p. 33. * e Fisch. n, p. 25. f See Ammon, v. ’Ιταλοί. Diod. Sic. v, 6 . On the names of nations, see Fisch. n, p. 16—23. 137 Classes of Substantives . There are besides peculiar terminations in Greek, 104. by which the place of residence of a man or a deity, and others, by which feasts are signified (περιεκτικά). They are mostly in — ων, — αιον , — eiov , and — ων. — ων, e. g. άνδρεων and άντρων (also άνδρωνιτις,), ‘ dwell·· ing or chamber for the men’, γυναικών (and *γυναικων7τις ), f chamber for the women’, παρθένων, ‘ chamber for the young women’, and the temple of Minerva, at Athens. So also ελαίων, δαφνών, μελισσών, ίππων, f olive-grove’, * laurel-grove’, f bee-hive’, f stall for horses’. — aiov, e.g. τδ'ϊ\ρα7ον, Άθηναιον, e the temple of Juno, Minerva’. —eiov , e.g. ' Ασκληπειον, Ήφαιστε7ον, Mob&tetop, ΤΙόσύί-^ Seiov, BevSiSeiov, 6 the temple of iEsculapius, of Vulcan,* of the Muses, of Neptune, of Diana Bendis*. So χα\κε7ον ^ and 'χαλκοτυπβ'ίον, c the smithy’; διδασκαλείου, e the school’; τροφείον, e place of education’; also the pric&of education. —tov is often interchanged with eiov in thr——— σιον e. g. ’ Ασκληπιόν, ΤΙοσεΙδιον, διδασκαλίον 3 . So alsT y Ισων, Ολυμπιον, Απολλώνων (ThllC. II. 91·) Αημητριον, ’ Αρτεμισιον, Αιοσκούρων, or Αιοσκουρειον * 1 . Of Adjectives . Adjectives, or words by which the property of a sub- 105. stantive is signified, are either derivatives or compounds in Greek. The modes of derivation and composition will be explained afterwards. Our present concern is only with the signification of the different terminations. 8 Dorvill. ad Charit. p. 249 sq. h Suid. v. ’Απολλώνιοι/. Alberti ad Hesych. T. I, p. 326. n. 27. 138 Of Adjectives. I. Adjectives in — αίος signify mostly the place from which any thing is., and to which any thing belongs, e. g. πηγαίος, κηπάίος, κρηναίος, 'χερσαίος, λιμναίος, αγοραίος. Similarly βους άγελαίη, ‘ a heifer from the herd'. θυραΊος, c external, without’. κορυφαίος , f at the top, or head’, kn Γΐστολιμαίος, c in a let¬ ter, or contained in a letter’; but εϊρηναίος is the same as ειρηνικός , 'peacefully disposed*. 3 ‘ - i ^ ill ^ ,' lV V. . u > V £ Γ; 3 V Τ' . * » χ , } \ ' :k\ ( II. Adjectives in — άλεος express mostly a fulness, e. g. θαρραλέος, δειμαλεος , rap- βάλεος, ψωραλέος, κερ$αλεος , ρωγάλεος, c full of courage’, f fear’, ‘ itch*, f craft*, ‘ full of chinks or crevices’. In others as αργάλεος, c hard, difficult’: this signification is not perceptible. III. Adjectives in — ανος signify mostly the possession of the quality which the primitive expresses, e. g. πευκεδανός, εχεπενκης, c bitter’; ριγείανός from ρίγος, c shuddering’. IV. Adjectives in — εινος. Vid. §. 109. * * .· V. Adjectives in — ειος express commonly an origin or source, e. g. θηρεως, χηυειος, βόειος, ίππειος, ημιόνειος , μηλειος, μελίσσειος , &C. consisting of, or taken from * geese, cattle, horses, mules, sheep, bees’, e.g. κρέας θηρειον , ‘game’, f venison’; κόπρος ιππεία, ημιονεία, μηλεια, f horse-dung*’, &C. So also adjectives derived from proper names, Όμηρειος , Έ,νριπβειος, Άναζαγόρειος. Others express rather an agreement with, or rescm- Of Adjectives. 139 blance to, e. g. ανδρείο?, ywcuKeios, ‘ becoming a man*, ‘a woman’; ' manly', ‘ womanly or effeminate’. Instead of — ειο? the Ionians said —ηιο?,*\&άνθρωπηιο?, φοινικηίο?. ·* ··'.·■. .■-· VI. Adjectives in — εο? contr . — -ου? express the material, e. g. χρύσεο?, — ου?, apyvpeo?, — ου?, λίνεο?, — ου ?, ερεεο?, — οί/$; also ειρίνεο?, ' golden’, 'silver’, 'linen’, * woollen’. Hence the subst. παρδαλεη, — ή, Χεαντεη, ~~rj, ‘the panther’s or lion’s hide’. χιόνεος means rather ' snow-white’; φλόyεo?, II. β\ 745. ‘ shining like fire’; Theocr. 22 , 211 , 'fiery, of fire’. VII. Adjectives in — ερο? and — ηρο? signify chiefly quality, e.g. δολερό?, τρυφερό ?, σκιερό ?, αιματηρό ?, καματηρό ?, λυπηρό?, 'crafty’, 'luxurious’, 'steady’, 'bloody’, ‘troublesome’, ‘painful’. Some express a propensity, οινηρό?, ' given to wine’; καματηρό ?, 'laborious’, 'prone to labour’, which sense belongs to all adjectives which come from substantives expressing a suffering or affection. Others have an active signifi¬ cation, as νοσερό? ΟΓ νοσηρό ?, οχληρό?, καματηρό ?, πονηρό?, vyw ρό?, ' causing sickness, unhealthy’, of a district · ‘causing disquiet, trouble, burden’; 'contributing to health, healthy’, ' , VIII. Adjectives in - ηει? signify fulness, as δενδρηει?, ποιηει?, υληει?, ' full of trees’, 'grass’, 'wood’. pw · ■"·'■·. t O*to ; r··. ■> -I if I IX. Adjectives in — ηλό? signify a propensity to, and capability or fitness for any tiling, C.g. σ^ηλο?, σιωπηλό?, απατηλό?, α’ισχυντηλό?, νπνη- ■ I ' · ί . * * * UKt, jM ί i 107. 108 . 109. 110 . 140 Of Adjectives . λός, ‘prone to silence, deceit, shame, sleep'. To this the idea of fulness is nearly allied: hence υδρηλός ‘ watery’. X. Adjectives in — ικός signify, 1. belonging to any thing, as σωματικός, ψυχικός, ‘ corporeal, spiritual·. 2. qualified for any thing, ηγεμο¬ νικός, διδασκαλικός, ωδικός, γραφικός, κυβερνητικός'. 3. Com¬ ing from any thing*, as πατρικός, βόΐκός, and βοεικός. 4. becoming to any thing, adapted to, or fit for any thing, ανδρικός, φιλικός, ‘becoming a man’, * a friend’. * " " ' · ' ·' · 4 * f ' ^ 1 y . l t· 49 XI. Adjectives in —ιμος (r) express chiefly fitness, passive and active, e. g7 εδώδιμος, αοίδιμος, μάχιμος , πλωίμος, πότιμος, ■ eatable’, ‘ adapted to song’, ‘warlike’, ‘ navigable’, ‘ potable’ k . Others, how¬ ever, express merely a quality, as πένθιμος , δόκιμος , προσ¬ δόκιμος, κάλλιμος. ‘ mournful*, ‘celebrated’, ‘expected’, ‘beautiful’. ' 1 <■ /.·.· · , · * · f ^ V rv XII. Adjectives in — ινος and — εινος (r) * signify, l. a material of which any thing is made, e. g. •γήινος, καλάμινος, πλίνθινος, ζυλινος, λαινος, &C. ‘ made of earth, of reeds, of tiles, wood, stone’. 2. a quality, which arises from the magnitude or quantity of the thing expressed by the derivation, πεδινός, ορεινός, σκοτεινός , ελεεινός, ‘even’, ‘mountainous’, ‘dark’, ‘pitiable’. 3. these serve to derive adjectives from adverbs or substantives of time, e. g*. χθεσινός, θερινός, όπωρινός, εαρινός. 4 Λ» .? . r -- 7 ---f i Piers, ad Moer. p. 24 9. cf. p. 273. Thoin. M. p. 147. k Ad Herod, p. 533, 11. · 141 Of Adjectives. belonging to evening’, θαλάσσιος, ‘marine*-, ξένιος, ‘be- 4 longing to the guest’, πηχυίος, ‘an ell long’, σωτήριος , c saving, or contributing to safety’, άνέμιος, ‘windy’. If two adjectives are derived from one substantive, one in ος, and the other in ιος , the latter generally signifies a proneness, a tendency to any thing which the first expresses generally as a quality, e. g. καθαρός , ‘ pure*, καθάριος , ‘loving purity’ * 1 . XIV. Adjectives in — όεις signify a fulness, e. g. μητιόεις , ‘ full of prudent coun¬ sels’, τειχιόεις, άμητελόεις, ημαθόεις, ηερόεις, νιφόεις, άνθε- μόεις. ' XV. Adjectives in - όλης express a quality, and are derived from verbs, as μαινό- λης, fem. μαινολίς , οιφόλης, fem. οιφολις in Hesych. 07 Γυιόλης (also όπυιωλης ), ibid, φαινολίς , Hom. Η ’ Cer. 31. XVI. Adjectives in - ωδής express sometimes l. a fulness, e.g. τ τοιωδης, άνθεμωδης, πετρώδης, ιχθνωδής. 2. a resemblance, σφηκωδης, Arist. Plut. 561 . ‘wasp-like’, φλoyωδης, ‘like fire, shining like fire’, άνδρωδης, ‘manly’” 1 . In this sense these adjectives coincide with those in — οειδης , and probably are formed from them, as αστεροειδής ουρανός signifies also * the starry heaven’. XV11. Adjectives in — ωλός , signify a propensity, a tendency to any thing, e.g. άμαρ- τωλός, φενδωλός, φειδωλός, ‘prone to sin’, ‘lying’, ‘penu- riousness’. * /■SOS S * " 7 ” ---- - -- —— ___ 1 Valcken. ad Xen. M. S. n, 1. 22. m Salmas. Exerc. Plin. p. 725. b. M2 Of Adjectives. f r XVIII. Adjectives in — ωος, properly — ωίος, and -— Ot 09 signify an origin, e. g. πατρώος" , μητρωος , in Homer πα- τρω Ιος, * springing from the father or mother’., ηγος, in Homer ηοϊος, f belonging to the morning’. As adjectives serve to determine the properties attri¬ buted to substantives, they can also be made to determine the three genders of the substantives. All adjectives, however, have not the three genders. Some are not capable of this modification, on account of their termi¬ nation, but express the three genders under one form only : others have one form only for the masculine and feminine, and another for the neuter ; others again have three terminations. I. Adjectives of one termination, which express the masculine, feminine, and neuter, by one termination, are the cardinal numbers from five, 7reWe, upwards. Others have, indeed, only one termination, but for the mascu¬ line and feminine only, since they are not used with substantives of the neuter gender , at least in the nom. accus. sing, plur . They are properly of the common gender, wanting the neuter^ Such are 1. Adjectives compounded with substantives which remain unchanged, as μακρόχειρ. αντόχειρ, evppv, (ei/a/r- τιν), μακραίων, μακραύχην, from χειρ, ρίν, ακτιν, αιών , αύχην, except those compounded with πους and πόλις. 2. Those derived from πατήρ and μητηρ, as άπάτωρ , άμητωρ, όμομητωρ. > 3. Adjectives in — ης, ητος , and — ως, ωτος , as άδμης, ημιθνης, αρωγής, ά*γνως. η Of the true distinction between πατρικός, §. 108. x, and πατρώος , see Graev. ad Lucian. T. ιχ, p. 46Ό. Of Adjectives. 143 Note. 7Γ€νης is only masculine. For the feminine the form τνενησσα was used (in Hesychius) §. 97. 4. Adjectives in ζ and ψ, μωννζ^ aiyiXtxjs, αιθίοφ *- / r ti.d . 5. At^ectives in — as, aSos, — ts, i$os , e.g. 6, η φνγάς, 6, η άναλκις. The greater number, however, are formed only with substantives af the feminine gender. Note. Some were used also with neuter substantives. In all the cases, except the nom. and accus. sing, and plur. e.g. φοιτάσι πτεροΊς, Eurip, Phocn. 1052. μανιάσιν Χυσ- σημασιν, Or. 264 nn . Some were used only as masculine, as yepwu» and adjectives in — as and- ης of the first declension, yevvaSas, eOeXovTtjs. The feminine forms of 7rpeafivs and μάκαρ were 7 τρεσβειρα 0 and μάκαιρα. The neuter, which is deficient, is supplied when ne¬ cessary by derivative or kindred forms, e. g. βΧακικόν, αρττακτικον, μωννχον, ομομητριον, ay νόστον, μαι - νομενον, δρομαίου, &c. So the feminine of yepwv is supplied by yepaia. II. Adjectives of two terminations are 1. Those in tjs, gen. eos, contr. ovs, neut'. €s. Declension. Singular. m. Ν. Nom. 0, η αΧηθης, το αΧηθες Gen. τον, της, τον άλ ηθεος, — OVS Dat. τψ, τη, τω αΧηθεϊ, * - €1 Acc. τον , την αΧηθέα - η , το άΧηθες. Dual. Nom. Acc. V. Gen. Dat. τω, τα, τω αΧηθεε, τοιν, τάιν, τοιν άΧηθεοιν, η OLV. ““ Poison ad Eurip. Or. 264. 0 Fisch. p. 74. 144 Of Adjectives. Plural. Nom. oi, αί, αΧηθβες, — ety, τα αΧηθβα, η Gen. των άΧηθεων, — ών • Dat. TO?y, Ta?y, ToTy αΧηθβσι ACC. τούς , τάς αΧηθεας, — €ΐς , τα αΧηθεει, η. U «■** .««ΓΜ # i i -i « ' > · » · ■ * ·. r J.. j ) J ·>’· 4 \k f ■ 9 ' { Observations. > * . / 1. Those which have a vowel before the termination in Attic contract—ea into—a, not— rj. e. g. a/cXeea, άκΧεά, vyiea, vyia . §. 81 p . In Ionic and Doric the e which precedes the termination —ea is omitted, e. g. Si /σκλβα, 11. β', 115. for Sva- fcXeea from δυσκΧεης. Pind. 01. 2, 163. ewcXeay ο ιστούς, for ei/fcXeeay. 2. From μoυvoyevης comes the feminine μoυvoyeveιa in the Poets, e. g. Orph. Hym . 28, 2. So also npiyeveia, an epithet of Aurora ; Κι>7τ/οογει/€«α, Venus ; TpiToyeveia, Minerva. Hpi- yevfc, as feminine , occurs in Apollon. Rh. ii. 450. 3. Adjectives compounded with eroy have, in the feminine, often a peculiar form in eny, e. g. ύτττετις, Aristoph. Thesm. 487* τριακονταετίας σ^ΓovSάς, Herod, vn. 149· κ Gen. η$εος, ηόείας, η$εο$ η$εων, ηχείων, ηόεων Dat. « η /·. ηόει, ει ηδε'ιψ, « Λ Λ· ηοει ει ηόεσι ηΰείαις, η^εσι * f t ■ χ '· 1 ·· ^ \' · Acc. ν$νν, «Λ ^ ηόβια ν, ηόν. η$εας, εις. η^είας, η^εα Dual. Nom. ACC. η$€€> ηόεια, η$εε Gen. Dat. η^εοιν , tjSelatv, ηδεοιν. Observations. 1 . The termination of the feminine — eta is, in Ionic, ~—ea, η$εα, θηΧεη, for η$εια, ΘηΧεια*. βαθεης II. 0,213. ταχέων Αρπνιών Theogn. 535. Br. 2 . Some adjectives of this termination have, in the accus. sing. —ea for — vv f e. g. ενθεα Scol . in Brunch. Anal, i, p. 157. xiv. εν ρεα πόντον II. ζ , 291. εν pea κνκΧον ay ωνος Apoll. Rh. iv, ld04. . 3 . In the accus. plur. the uncontracted form -—ea? is as much used in Attic as the contracted, e. g. τονς ημισεας Xen. Cyrop. ii, 1 , 2 f . Later Greek writers contract the genitive also, e. g. Dio Chrysost. vn. p. 99. ημίσονς. The neuter plural is very rarely contracted; but in Theophrast. Charact. n. * t rr η μίση*. r * Koen. ad Gregor, p. 205. Maitt. p. 112. f V. ad Thuc. vm, 64. 5 Herod. Herm. p. 302. Piers, p. 455. Thom. M. p. 420 sq. Fisch. i, p. 122 sqq. 120 152 Of Adjectives. • · ^ 4. These adjectives also are sometimes used as common, e. g. θήΧυς εερση Od. ε, 467. Od . μ, 369· τας ήμισεας (for ήμισείας) των νεών Thuc. vni, 8. 64. ήμίσεος ημέρας id. ιν, 104. ήμίσεος τροφής id. iv, 83. 5. In πρεσβυς, instead of the obsolete πρεσβεία, the femi¬ nine in use is πρεσβειρα ( Horn. H. inVen. 32. Eurip, Iphig. T. 963. Aristoph. Acharn. 883.) and πρεσβα (II. ε , 721, fyc.) 3. Adjectives and participles in a?. Adjectives have — a?, — aiva, — av, e. g. μεΧας, μεΧαινα, μεΧαν, ταΧας, τάΧαινα, τάΧαν, which appears to have arisen from the iEolic termination — αις for — ας, e. g. τάΧαις for τάΧας. Participles have — ας, — ασα, — αν. Adjectives. Declension of Participles. Sing. Sing. M. F. N. N. μεΧας, μεΧαινα, μεΧαν G. μεΧανος, μεΧαίνης, μεΧα- νος D. μεΧανι, μεΧαίνρ, μεΧανι ' " ■""· ;·'· ''··'■■ , ; ·· Λ. μεΧανα, μεΧαιναν, μεΧαν. Dual. Ν. Α. μεΧανε, μεΧαινα, μεΧανε . * » <( G.D. μεΧανοιν , μεΧαίναιν, με- Χάνοιν. Plur. Ν. μεΧανες, μεΧαιναι, μεΧανα G. μεΧανων,μεΧαινων, μεΧάνων Μ. F. Ν. Ν. τυφας, τίιφασα , τυφαν G. τυφαντός, τυφάσης, τυ- φαντος D. τνφαντι, τυφάσμ, τύ~ φαντι Α. τυφαντα,τυφασαν,τυφαν. Dual. Ν. Α. τυφαντε, τυφάσα, τυ~ φαντέ G.D. τυφάντοιν, τυφάσαιν, τ νφαντοιν. Plur. Ν. τυφαντες, τυφασαι, τυ- φαντα G. τυφαντων, τνφασών, τ ν-* Φαντών 4 1 Of Adjectives. Plur. ^ ' ’ D. μεΧασι, μεΧαίναις, μεΧασι A. μεΧανας, μεΧαίνας, μεΧανα. 153 Plur. D. τυφασι, τυψάσαις, τυφασι Α. τυψαντα*, τυφάσας, τυ- ψαντα. Obs. με^α*, με^άΧη, με^γα is irregularly declined, see §. 123. ττα?, πάσα, πάν, is declined like the participle. 4. Adjectives and participles in — eis. Adjectives 121 make —ets·, — εσσα, — ev. Participles ει*, εισα, ev. Declension of Adjectives. Participles. Sing. Sing. m. f. n. N. χαρίει*, χαρίεσσα, χαρίεν G. χαρίεντο*, χαριεσση*, χα- ρίεντος D. χαρίεντι, χαριεσσγ, χα- ρίεντι Α. χαρίεντα, χαρίεσσαν, χα- ρίε ν. Dual. Ν. Α. χαρίεντε, χαριεσσα, χα¬ ρίεντε G. D. χαριεντοιν, χαριεσσαιν, χαριεντοιν. Plur. * Ν. χαρίεντε*, χαρίεσσαι, •χαρίεντα G. χαριεντων, χαριεσσων. χαριεντων D. χαρίεισι, χαρίεσσαι*, % χαρίεισι ' Α. χαρίεντα*, χαριεσσα*, I χαρίεντα. Μ. F. Ν. Ν. τυφθεί*, τυφθείσα, τυφθεν G. τυφθεντο*, τνφθείση*, τυ¬ φθεντο* D . τυφθεντι , τυφθείσγ, τυ- φθεντι Α. τυφθεντα, τυφθείσαν, τυ¬ φθεν. Dual. Ν. Α. τυφθεντε, τυφθείσμ, τυφθε ντε G. D. τυφθεντοιν, τυφθείσαιν, τυφθεντοιν, Plur. .· Ν. τυφθεντε*, τυφθ είσαι, τυφθεντα G. τυφθεντων, τυφθεισών, τ υφθεντων D: τυφθείσι, τυφθείσαι*, τ υφθεισι Α. τυφθεντα*, τυφθείσα*, τυφθεντα . 154 m. Of Adjectives. \ Obs. 1 . Most of the adjectives of this termination have, in the penultima, the vowels η, 0) ^w, e. g. τιμ^ις,αιματόβις, κητωβις- Even χαρίας must have arisen from χαριτοας 11 . The terminations ηβις and — oei^ are also contracted, viz. — ηας, —ηεσσα, —rjev into ης, ησσα, ην, e. g. τιμηντα II. σ', 475. (by the Dorians into ας, κνισσάντι Pind. Isthm. 4, 112 . alyXav- τα id. Pyth. 2 , IQ. φωναντι id. 01. 2 , 152. αλκάντας id. 1J °). — όβις, —όβσσα —6ev into — ους, ουσσα, — ουν, e. g. μελιτοϋς, μβΧιτοϊσσα. (in the new Attic μεΧιτοϊττα) μβΧιτοϊν, for μεΧιτόεις, μβΧιτόβσσα (Herod, vm, 41.) So τττιροΖσσα Eurip. Phan. 1026 1 . αιθαλονσσα φλόξ JEsch. Prom. 1000 . Obs. 2 . The neuter —oev is sometimes, on account of the metre, oeiv, σκιόαν Apoll. Rh. ii, 406 . όακρυόαν iv, 1291 . 5. The terminations of participles in — ων and — ως. Declension. Singular. Ν · M. F: N. N. τετυφως,τετυφυια,τετνφός G. τ€τυφότος, τετυφυίας , re- τυφότος D· τ βτυφοτι, Τ€τυφυίφ, τετν- φότι Α. Τ€τυφοτα, τετυφυιαν , τβ- τυφός. Μ. F. f t / τυτττων, τυτττουσα, τυτττον Ν. G. τυτττοντος, τυπτουσης, f τυτττοντος D. τυτττοντι, τυτττουσρ, τυ- τττοντι A ' r • τυτττοντα, τυτττονσαν, / τυτττον. τυτττοντ€ G. D. τυτττόντοιν, τυτττου- σαιν, τυτττόντοιν. Dual. Ν. A. τύπτοντε, τυτττουσα, | Ν. Α. τετυφότε, τετυφυία, τετυφότε G. D. τετυφοτοιν, τετυφυίαιν. τετυφοτοιν. I. I , 1 h Etym. Μ. ρ. 34. Valck. ad Phan. 1. c. Obss. Misc. vi, p. 0g6. Brunck. ad Soph. Trach. 308. ad Aristoph. Nub. 507. * i Anomalies of Adjectives. 155 Plural. N. τυπτοντες, τυπτουσαι , Ν. τετυφότες , τετυφυιαι, τυπτοντα τετυφότα G. τυπτόντων, τυπτουσων. G. τετυφότων, τετνφυιών, τυπτόντων τετυφότων D. τυπτονσι, τυπτούσαις, D. τετυφόσι, τετυφυίαις, τυπτονσι τετυφόςτι A. τύπτοντας, τυπτούσας, Α. τετυφότας, τετυφυίας. τυπτοντα. τετυφότα . Anomalies. Originally some adjectives had two forms, of both 123. which certain cases have been retained in use, so that the cases which are wanting in one form may be supplied by those of the other. Of this kind are με'γα? or μεγάλο?, and π ολυς or ττολλο?. From μεγάλο? we find ώ μεγάλε Ζεο, in JEschylus Sept. c. Th. 824 . The feminine of this, μεγάλη has remained in use universally, as well as the entire dual and plural, and the genitive and dative masc. and neut. in the singular . The remaining cases the nom. sing, masc. and neut. are taken from μεγα? 1 ". From πολύς η. ττολά, besides the nominative the fol¬ lowing cases occur : gen. sing. m. and η. ητόλεος II. S', 244. ε', 597. Accus. sing. m. and n . throughout. Nom. pi. m. 7 τολεε? 11. β', 6 10, &c. and πόλεις II. λ', 707. gen. pi. πόλεων II. s', 691· o, 680, &c. Euvip. Hel. 1352. Hat. 7Γ όλεσι II. S' , 388. Eurip. Ipkig. T. 1272, in a choral song; also πολεσσιν II. p , 236. 308. and πόλεεσσι II. i, 73. Acc. πολεας II. a , 559· also ττολεΐ? II. o', 66. πόλεα neut. AEsch. Ag. 732. The feminine, the dual, and * Fisch. ii, p. 177. 1 124. Η 156 Anomalies of Adjectives, plural numbers are entirely taken from ττολλό?. The nominative πολλο9 occurs in II. η , 156, &c. Herod,. I, 75. 102. πολλοί/ II. d, 91 . ε', 636,, &C. Herod . I, 8. Sophocl. Antig. 86. Acc. πολλοί/ II. κ, 572. The form πολι/?, n. ττο\ύ is used only in the nom. and accus. sing. The following is the declension of both adjectives used by the Attics. Singular. m. F. N. N. μεγα9, μεγάλη μεγα G μεγάλοι/, μεγάλη μ€ Γ γά,Χον D. μεγαλω, μεγάλη μεγαλω Α. μεγαν, μεγάλων, μεγα. Μ. F. Ν. Ν. ττοΧυς, ποΧΧη, πολι/ G. 7 toWoV) iroWrjs, 7roXXou D. πολλω, πολλ» 7 , πολλω Α. πολι/ν, πολλών, πολι/. Dual. Nom. Acc. μεγαλω, μεγαλα, μεγαλω Gen. Dat. μεγαΑοιν, μεγαλαιν, μεγαλοιν. Plural. Ν. πολλοί, πολλαί, πολλά G. πολλών D. πολλοΐ9, πολλαί9, πολλοΓς Α. πολλοί/9^ πολλά9 5 πολλά. Ν · μεγάλοι, μεγαλαι, μεγαλα G. μεγάλων D. μεγάλοι9> μεγ αΧαις, μεγάλος Α. μεγάλοι/9, μεγάλα9, μεγάλα. αλλο9 is anomalous only in this, that it has άλλο in the neuter, instead of άλλον. As these adjectives borrow their feminine, and some cases from another form ; so π/ων, n. π?ον takes its femi¬ nine πίειρα from the obsolete form πίηρ, πίε^ο, which is found in Hesychius, Π iepa, λιπαρά, εν^αίμονα, ττΧονσια , and πιηρη , and to which the Homeric ττΊαρ ov$a 9 , Od. /, 135. is nearly allied 1 . From εί/9, w. ev comes gen. <^09 for εε'ο9“:> in Homer, e. g. //. t, 342, though otherwise the termination — εο 9 is never changed into —>709 in any adjective in 09“. A Fisch. ii, p, 58. m Heyne ad 11. d, 393. 11 Greg. p. 204. t 157 Anomalies of Adjectives . \ form ecus also must have been made use of. In the gen. Jem. g. pi. n. eawv, occurs, as from eo$, εα, eon. Accord¬ ing to some the fem. είση belongs also to εύς. Yet this is, perhaps, more properly for 'ίση from ίσος, f sufficiente. g. είση, νηες είσαι , f a perfect meal·, f ships of due size’ 0 . . 2. The figure metaplasmus takes place in adjectives, so that some cases are formed according to another declension than that to which the adjective belongs. Such are, ερίηρες εταίροι , in Homer, e. g. II· y, 378 t Although in the nominative ερίηρος only occurs, ερυσαρ- ματες ίπποι , II ττ', 370. Hence probably also είι w for ευνοι, in Lysias , p. 315 P . To these may be added σώς, which is formed by con¬ traction from σάος or σόος Her. n. 181. v. 96 . yiii, 39. The contracted word, formed after the third declension, had σώος in the genitive, and this was again considered as a new adjective. Some cases of both forms remained in use : Of σώς the nominative masc. and fem. Aristoph. j πόλις σώς αν είη, in Brunck. T. in, p. 288. cxxvn, Eurip. Cycl. 293. In the nom. plur. σώ, in Thucydides, after the second declension, as νέω, ίλεω, σώες after the third declension is read in a M S. of Arrian, Indie . 35, p. 351. ed Gronov. The nom.^Z. masc. σώς , in Demosth. p. 61, 13. and the accus. pi. masc. σώς , ib. p. 93, 24, 364, 25. 500, 20 , appear to have come from σώες and σώας, σώς in the accus. was the most in use, both masc. and fem. The neut. sing. σών, Aristoph. Lys. 688 . Thesmoph. 821. Soph. Philoct. 21 . Demosth. p. 500, 20 . ° Heyne Obss. ad Iliad. T. iv, p. 125. 185. p Koen. ad Gregor, p. 207. On λιτί, λΐτας, see Heyne ad II. 0\ 441. On Fisch. ii ? p. 187· 125 Degrees of Comparison . tlie acctie. sing, σων, Time. hi. 34 . may be regularly derived from σώ?, or by contraction from σωον. Οί σώος the nom. pi. masc. σώοι, and the neut. pi. σ«,α remained in use. The accus. σώους also occurs in Lucian, T. I. p. 714. σ ώος, σώου were not used. The fem. and neut. σώα were contracted into σΰ' 1 . Of the Degrees of Comparison. Since adjectives shew the properties or qualities of objects, they may also be so changed, as to exhibit by their inflexion, a higher, or the highest degree, in which an object possesses those properties. These inflexions are called degrees of comparison, of which there are two, the comparative and the superlative. The positive is the proper termination of the adjective, and cannot properly be considered as a degree of comparison, since it expresses no comparison. I. The most usual forms of comparison are the ter¬ mination Tepos for the comparative,, and — τατοΓ for the superlative. 1 . Adjectives in onorin ώτερος with the syllable preceding long (except where another long syllable preceded), as would have been admitted into the hexameter. This rule, however could not have been observed in κακοξεινωτερος, since by its observance, this measure 'would have been pro¬ duced ^ So also οίζυρωτερον, II. p , 446. VJ I-I -ww· Obs . 1. In some adjectives o or ω is rejected before the termination of the comparative, e.g. φίΧτερος, φίΧτατος, for φΐΧωτερος, which does not occur. yepaiTepos, παΧαΐτερος, σχοΧαίτερος, for y εραιότερος, Antiphon 687· R- ττάΧαιοτερος , Tyrt. El. ii, 19. Find. Nem. 9, 91· σχοΧαιότερος * . Obs. 2. As in some adjectives ai was first introduced before 127. the termination, and the same took place in the Ionic, Attic, and Doric dialects ; in others also there hardly existed a form —a7os as in these, φΐΧαίτατος Xen. Hist. Gr. vn, 3,7, Theocr. vn, 98. ισαίτερος Thuc. vm, 89. μεσαίτατος Herod, iv. 17. ήσυχαίτερος Thuc. in, 82. for which ησνχωτερος occurs in Soph. Antig. 1205. ττΧησιαίτατος Xen. Anab. vn, 3, 29 s (r)· 2. Adjectives in vs only reject s, e. g. εύρυς, εύρυτε- 128. ρος, θρασύς, θρασυτερος, ττρεσβυς, ττρεσβύτερος, ηδύς, ηδύτε- pos, more commonly ηδίων 1 . 3. Adjectives in as and ης annex — τερος and — τατος to the termination of the neuter, e. g. μεΧας, μεΧάντερος, ταλ as, ταΧάντατος, άηδψ, αηδέστερος, αναιδής , αναιδέστερος , vyi -ης, ^ιεστερος, αΧηθης , αληθέστερος* . According 1 to the same analogy πενεστερος Lysias , p. 709 . Demosth. p. 555. Isocr. Areop. p. 146. A. Plutarch, vm, p. 85. τ τοδωκηε- στατος Apollon. Rh . 1 , 180. is irregular. Observations. 1. This termination — εστερος — -εστατος w r as regularly used in adjectives in 00 s contr. ους for —— οωτερος. So ευνοε - στερος, Herod, v. 24. contr. εύνούστερος, —ουστατος, Aris- r Fisch. 11 , p. 89 . 4 Fiscb. ii, p. 76. s Fisch. 11 , p. 87. u Fisch. 11 , p. 75. 129 . 160 Degrees of Comparison. toph. Pac. 601. and similarly κακονουστερος, an τλουστερος. αθρουστερος. 2 . By the same analogy other adjectives also in the Attic, Ionic, and Doric dialects, ending in —— os*, made the comp, and superl. in — εστερος, — εστατος , for — ωτερος , — ωτατος, e. g. σητου^αιεστατα Herod· τ, 133. from σπουδαίος. άμορφε - στατος Herod , ι, 196 . from άμορφος, ερρωμενεστερος Herod· ιχ, 70. Xew. Cyrop. hi, 3,31. άφθονεστερος Plato Rep. v y p. 25. Pip. Pind . O/. 2 , 172. ακρατεστερος for άκρατωτερος is noticed by Moeris as Attic, ραόιεστερον Herodes Att. p. 37 . ed . J£m/c. Γ. vni. Polyb. T. hi, p. 64. Athen. x, j 9 . 424. D. fiom Hyperides for ρα$ιωτερος in Pollux v, 107 . άσμενεστατα , Plato Rep. x y p.326. άητονεστερον βΙον Pind· 01.2, lll x . υτΓεροττληεστατος Apoll. Rh. ii. 4. as if from υηΓεροητληεις. S. As adjectives in — 09, take the forms of comparison from those in ης ; sometimes adjectives in — ης assume the forms of those in 09, e. g. ύβριστότερος , Herod, in, 81. Xen. Cyrop. v. 5, 41. Anab. v, 8 , 3. 22 . from υβριστής, νγιωτερος, in Sophron, for υ Γ γιεστερος γ . Similarly Herodotus uses both vy ιε¬ ρότατος η, 187· and υyιηpεστaτoς n, 78. 4. The Attics also frequently use the form — ίστερος , ιστατος in adjectives in 09, ης, e. g. from Χαλθ9 comes only the form λαλίστερος, λαλίστατος , not λαλωτερος. όφο- φayιστατος Xen. Μ. S. in, 13, 4. ηττατχίστερος Aristoph. Acharn. 424. for oφoφayωτaτoςy πτωχότερος, λayvίστaτoς may come from λayvης and λayvoς. The examples of adjec¬ tives in ης are πλεονεκτίστατος , Xen. M. S. 1 , 2 , 12 . κλεηττί- στατός , φευ^ιστατος, from πλεονεκτης , κλεηττης , φευ$ης. τολμιστατος Soph. Phil. 984. is formed probably from τολμρς from τολμηεις (vid. §. 121 . Obs.) Of adjectives in ?, see §. 128. 6 \ 4 1 . Adjectives in ~^—εις change — εις into — εστερος , εστατος , e. g\ -χαριεις , γαριεστερος , τικηεις, τιμηεστερος. Fisch. η, ρ. 86. Pierson, ad Moerid. ρ. 25. Valck. ad Herod, p. 142, 29. 305, 79. y Fisch. 11 , p. 76 . Wesseling. ad Herod. 239, 53. 55 Fisch. 11, p. 87. I Degrees of Comparison. 161 . , * I t \ The rest are changed as before the terminations of the cases. • » · t . r · V A, 5. Adjectives in — ων change ων into ov, and annex ύστερος, άστατος to the termination, e. g. σωφρων, σωφρο- νεστερος. ευδαίμων, εύδαιμονύστέρος } τΧημων, τΧημονύστε- ρος Λ . πεπων makes, in the comparative, πεπαίτερος Theocr. νπ, 120 ., πίων, πίοτερος Hymn. Horn, ι, 48. Xenoph. Epist. 2 . ed. Z. πιοτατος II.t, 573. from the old word 7 Tios·, which still remains in Orph. Arg. 504. Epi - charm . in Pollux, ix, 79 * 6 . Adjectives in £ make — ίστερος, — ίστατος , e. g. άρπαζ (apfrays) αρπα^/ίστερος, βΧάζ (βΧάκς) βΧακίστερος. But Xen. Μ. S. Ill, 13, 4. IV, 2 , 40. has βΧακωτερος, as if from the genitive βΧακός a new adjective had been formed. άφηΧιζ makes άφηΧικεστερος ϊ) . μάκαρ makes, in the superlative, μακάρτατος. ’ / II. Another form of the comparative is ίων , neut. 130 . iov; superl. ιστός , η 3 ov (r). These forms are used 1. In some adjectives in — νς (with the others in — ντερος), e. g. jXvk'mv II. a , 249. Od. t', 34. (also yXv- κντερος Pind. 01. i, 175 . Aristoph. Av. 1342. Acharfi. 474.) ταχιών, τάχιστος Od. a, 85. Xen. Cyrop. Y, 4, 5. ( ταχύτερος Herod. IV, 127 . IX, 101.) βαθιών , βάθιστός Tyrt. 3, 6. II. Θ ', 14. (βαθύτερος Herod, ιν, 95. Xen. (Econ. 19 , 3. 5.) βραδιών Hes. epy. 528. βάρδιστος for βράδιστος II. ψ', 530. Theocr. 15, 104. However the form βραδύτερος , βραδύτατος, was more Attic d . βράχι - στο 9 Aristoph. Lys. 716 . SfopA. Antig. 1435 . ( βραχύτατος ThllC. Ill, 4β. βραχύτερος Herod. VII, 211.) ηδίων, ήδιστος , more usually as ηδύτερος, παχιών Arat. 53. πάχιστος • ,ι V· 1 ·■ 11 v / · j . . ij -;--— ---—— 7 — I . ‘ · . . ; . 4 " 1 · · ■ · » I . a Fisch. 11 , p. 77 sq< ' b Thom. M. p. 42. d Graevius ad Lucian. T. ix, p. 482 sq. Bip. Thom. Μ. p. 171. VOL. I. M 162 Degrees of Comparison. II. π, 314. more commonly παχύτερος, 7 ταχιίτατον. From ωκνς, πρεσβυς, come, in the comparative only , ωκυτερος, πρεσβντερος ; but in the superlative ω κίστος II. ψ, 253. EEsch. S. C. T/l. 65. πρεσβιστος 2Esch. S. c. Th . 39 6. Hom. Hymn. 30, 2. πρεσβύστα Tim. L. p. 13. 28. ed. Bip e . 131. 2. In some ending in — pos, in which case p is left Out, e. g. αισχρός, αισχιων (less frequently αισχρότερος ) f , άίσχιστος, εχθρός, εχθιων, εχθιστος , (also εχθρότατος. Soph. (Ed. Τ. 1246. Demosth. ρ. 237.) κυδρός, κυίιστος. μακρός, μηκιστος, for μάκιστος ; also οικτρός , οίκτιστος^. Here the form —ιστός is more usual than that in ότατος. * · , » * * » ·· / 3. In some also ending in — ος, — ης, and —as, e. g. τερπνός , τερπνίων , τερπνιστος. κακός, κακιών (also κατώτε¬ ροί Ι1· χ , 106. τ, 321.) κάκιστος. ΧάΧος, Χάλιστος. φίΧος, φιΧίων Od. τ, 350. ω, 272. φίΧιστος Soph . Aj. 842 h . όΧί'γιστος II. τ, 223. Aristoph . Ran. 115. Plut. 628 1 . μό -y ας, μέγιστος. εΧεγχης (whence II. cT, 242. ω, 239. εXεyχεες) eXiy χιστος' ί . Obs . In some t is changed, together with the foregoing con¬ sonant or consonants, into σσ ; in the new Attic dialect, into rr, as εΧαχυς (whence Hymn. Hom. u, 19· th e femin. εΧάχεια) εΧα- χίων, εΧάσσων, εΧόχιστος. μ^ας [μελιών] μεσσων and (ac¬ cording to the iEolic dialect, vid. §. 29 ) μεζων in Herodotus and μειζων in Attic, μέγιστος. όΧί·γος , (oXtyiwv, οΧίσσων) οΧίζων., oX/'y ιστοί™, μακρός [ μακίων (vid. Ob. 2.)] μό,σσων (μάσσον i. q. μειζον, Msch. Prom. 634. Brunch, ad Soph. (Ed. T. 1301.) μηκιστος. Μα’σσωι/, however, may be related to the old word e Fisch. n, p. 78—80. f Thom. M. p. 19 . s Piers, ad Moer. p. 135. Fisch. n, p. 102—105. h Valck. ep. ad Rcever. p. 52. Interpr. ad Hesych. T. n, p. 1508, 20. * Fisch. ii, p. 105. k Fisch. ii, p. 107. Fisch. ii, p. 82. 101. m Fisch. n, p. 105. 163 Degrees of Comparison . μάσι in Hesychius. Vid. Schneider’s Lexicon, κρατύς II. π' , 181, fyc, [κρατίω v, κράσσων (in iEolic and Ionic)] κρε&σων in Herodotus and Att. κρεισσων , ( κρειττων ) κράτιστος. (Dor. καρρων Timaus L. p, 5. 10 . for κάρσων Ώ , as κάρτιστος II. θ', 17. ζ, 98, fyc. for κράτιστος) 0 . ταχύς, ταχιών, θάσσων, (since it should properly be θαχύς), and θάττων, which was more Attic than ταχύτερος^ . So βράσσων II. κ , 226. for βραχίων , from βραχύς, βάσσων in Epicharmus, in Etym. M. for βαθιών, y λυσσών in Aristophanes, in Etym. M. for y\i ικίων. πασσων for παχύτερος, Od. , 230, fyc. 'Ίίσσων or ήττων must have been formed from ημισίων from ημισυς* 1 . Yet the super¬ lative ήκιστα seems to indicate, that it is properly ηκίων, from an unknown positive (r). Comparatives also are formed from adverbs and pre- 132. positions, of which some are in fact adjectives, e. g. άνω , ανωτέρω , άνωτάτω Herod. I, 190. VII, 23. AriStopk. Pac. 206 ; also with the form of the adjective, ανώτατα Herod . II, 125. κάτω , κατωτέρω , κατωτάτω, and κατωτατα. εσω , εσωτερω. όζω, εζωτερω. οπίσω, όπίστατος in Homer. άφάρτεροι II ψ', 311. of which the positive άφαρ occurs as an adjective in Theogn. 536. των άφαρ εισΐ (not Ισι) πό$ες. πόρρω, πορρωτερω , πορρωτάτω. The comparative πόρσιον occurs in Pindar, Ot. i, 183. from the Doric πόρσω, and the superlative πόρσιστα Nem. 9, 70. From πρόσω , which differs from the former only in dialect, comes the comparative προσωτερω , and the superla¬ tive προσωτάτω, both very frequent; as an adjective also προσωτατος , Soph. Aj. 743. από , απωτερω , άπωτατω. εyyυς, eyyvT^pa*, and kyyvTepov, εyyυτάτω, and the less Attic forms eyyiov , £yy ιστα, which, however, is in Isocr. AEgin. p. 393 . A. ed. Stepll. άγχου, ay χοτερω, and \_άyχ}ov~\ άσσον, n Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 303. ° Fisch. ii, p. 95. p Fisch. ii, p, 80. Graev. ad Lucian. Tom, ix, p. 483. Bip. ί Fisch. ii, p. 80 sqq. I » 164 Degrees of Comparison. αγχιστα ( άσσιστα in ^schylus. Vld. Hesych. T. I, p* 580.) and άyχoτάτω; also the adjective ay^pTepo^j Herod VII, 175. αγχιστο?, Soph. (Ed. T. 919· em?, €/ca- \ are pay, εκαστάτω. μάλα , μάλλον, μάλιστα, προ, πρότερος [πρότατος~\ πρώτος, νπερ, υπέρτερος , υπέρτατος and ύπατος, πάρος, παροίτερος\ We find also comparatives from adverbs in the form — αίτερος , §. 127. Obs. 2 . e. g. πρωί , πρώιαίτερον* , for which πρώίτερος occurs, ThllC. VIII, 101. όψε, oyj /ιαίτερον and άψίτερον, which, however, may also come from the adjective όψιος 1 . 133. Other comparatives and superlatives have no positive adjective from which they can be regularly derived; but appear to be formed after the substantives which correspond to those positive adjectives. Thus κερλίων, neutr. κερ^ιον, κερλιστος, in the Poets, from κέρδος, βασι - λεύτερος II. ί, Ϊ60. Od. o', 532. βασϊλευτατος II. ι, 69* from βασιλεύς , άλ·γιον, αλόγιστος in Homer and Attic writers, from το άλyoς, καλλιών , κάλλιστος from το' κάλ¬ λος , άρείων, άριστος from ο Άρης. Again, ρινιών neutri piyiov , piyiTTa. κηλ ιστός II. ι , 638. Od. κ , 225. κυλι¬ στός. άοίλότατος Theocr. 12, 7· Eurip. Hel. 1115. from το ρ'^ος, το κηλος > το κυλος , ο άοιλός. υετώτατος from υετός Herod. II, 25. μυχοίτατος Od. φ !, 146. μυχαίτατος τ -■* ■ ’ - * Aristot. de mundo , and μυχατος Apollon. Rh. ι, 170. from μυχός, υβριστότερος, and υβριστότατος Aristoph. Vesp 1294. from υβριστής u . υφίτερος Theocr. VIII, 46. υφισ- τος and υψοτάτω in Bacchylides, may be derived from the adverbs υφι and υψοΰ , or το ύψος*, πpoύpyιa , ιτepoς -_--------— ■ . ■ — ■ ... - ■. . , - i r Fisch. it, p. 113—120. s Ruhnk. ad Tim. p> 227· ad Thom. M. p. 763 εφ' * Fisch. ii, p. 88. u Jensius ad Lucian. T. i, p. 214. ’ * Fisch. ii, p. 106—110. Degrees of Comparison. ' 165 % ' i cannot be derived either from a substantive or an adjective; but is formed after a word compounded of a preposition and the case of a substantive, προυργον for προ epyou. Note. όρεστερος, ayporepos appear not to be compara¬ tives, but simple adjectives, as they have not the sense of comparatives. Observations. 1. Some, amongst whom is Fischer, derive these compara¬ tives and superlatives §§. 131, 132. not from prepositions or adverbs, or substantives; but from obsolete adjectives, e. g. from ενδος, οπισος, άγχος, ύπερος, κερδυς, a\yvs or aXytjs, καΧ- Χνς or καΧΧής. But not a trace of such adjectives is to be found, either in the writers themselves, or in the old grammarians; and as prepositions, with their case, and adverbs, by prefixing the article, are made to answer the signification of adjectives, there is no contradiction in supposing, that forms of comparison are derived from these adverbs and prepositions, which are used as adjectives. And as in many verbs tenses occur, although the verbs from which they must have been more immediately derived never existed, so comparatives and Superlatives, of which the positive had no existence, were formed after the analogy of the substan¬ tive. In Latin also superlatives of substantives occur, as oculis- $imus Plaut. Cure, i, 2, 28. 2. Comparatives and superlatives of substantives, which are taken in an adjective sense, and which, for the most part, are properly adjectives, are more common, as κυριωτερος, κνριωτα- τος. αιτιωτερος , αιτιωτατος. δονΧότερος Herod, νιι, 7. διαβο- Χωτατος, Aristoph. Equ. 45. εταιρότατος Plato Gorg . ρ. 89. Bip. Phcedo, ρ. 204 y . βαρβαρότατος Aristoph. Αν. 1572. δημότερος from the adjective δήμος, or δημός. vid. Hesxfch . s. v. Λήμον εόντα II. μ , 213. 3. There is a superlative also of μόνος , μονωτατος Lycurg. in Leocr. ρ. 197 - Theocr. 15, 137. Aristoph. Pint. 182. Equ. y Thom. M. p. 377. I 134. \ 166 Degrees of Comparison. 3,51 z . of αυτός, ^ self’; the comp, αυτότερος, in Epicharmus, and αύτότατος , in Aristoph. Plut. 83.; the latter in a comic $ense a . . As adjectives are very frequently derived from verbs, so also are comparatives and superlatives, whose positive is only imaginary, and never actually existed; as they said απηΧΚα^ην, 7 τεπρα^α, 7 νεφραΰα, ε\ιπον, and merely invented according to analogy, the tenses from which they were immediately derived, without ever employing them. Such comparatives and superlatives are λώίων, λψων, Χωϊστα, Χωστά, f desirable', f better’, from the verb λώ, f I will·, ‘ I wish'. This comparative, however, may have been formed from Χωίος, which occurs in Theocritus 26, 32. 29 , ll. Ep. 13, 4. for Χωίίων, whence also comes λωί- τερος Od. β', 141. for \wicoT€pos b . φερτερος, φερτατος from φέρω , in the sense which otherwise belongs to προφέρω , ‘to excel·. Hence προφερης , f preferable’. If we imagine a positive φερ>ίς analogous to this, the comparative from it would be: 1 . φερεστερος , φερεστατος and by syncope, φερτερος , φερτατος . 2. ^φερίων^, φεριστος c . ' Fischer derives the latter from φερτός [Eur . Hec. 159 .] for φερ- τότερος, φερτότατος . Δεύτερος, όευτατος Od. a , 286. ψ', 342. Pind . ΟΙ. ι, 80. must come frorn δένομαι, ‘to stand after’ d ; and it has in every respect, like ύστερος and ύστα¬ τος, not merely the form, but also the construction of a comparative. Obs. Some comparatives suffer syncope. Those which lose merely o are mentioned above §. 127. In others, a whole syl¬ lable is lost, e. g. υπέρτατος, ύπατος, πρότατος , πρώτος §. 131· --1 - -—— ■ - --* ζ Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 410. a Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz;. p. 207. Fisch. n, p. 110 sq. b Fisch. 11 , p. 94. c Fisch. n, p. 112 sq. d Fisch. 11 , p. Ill sq. 4 Degrees of Comparison. 167 - · · ’* v ' s # So also μεσσατος II. Θ' , 223. for μεσαίτατος Herod. iv, 17. μυγατος for μνχωτατος ; vid. §. 132. There are yet some comparatives and superlatives, 13 5 of which no positive is left, and which, on account of their signification, are assigned to positives entirely dif¬ ferent. Such are: αμβίνων, ο, η, without a superlative, belongs, from its signification, to αγαθός ; according to Fischer, n, 93 . it is for άμενίων, from άμενος, i. q. amcenus. βελτερος, superl. βέλτατος 1 from the signification as- βελτίων 3 βέλτιστος) signed to ayctOos. βελτίων and βέλτιστος are the usual Attic forms. βέλτερος II. ξ, 81. ο, 511 . Mschyl. Suppl. 1077. & c. Th. 343. and in the Poets passim, βόλτα- τος JEsch. Suppl . 1062. Eum. 490. It is pro¬ perly f more sagacious". The proper compar, and superl. of αγαθός, α'γαθωτερος and άτγαθωτατος , OCCUr only in later · writers, and such as are not Attic, e. g. Diod . Sic. 16. 85®. ησσων neutr. ησσον, new Attic ήττων (superl. ηκιστος II. λ//, 531. doubtf.) ήκιστα as an adverb, im¬ properly assigned to μικρός , from which it de¬ viates in its signification ; it means f weaker ,f . Comp. §. 130. Obs. Ion. εσσων. μείων , UCUtr. μεϊον, Superl. μεϊστος, assigned to μικρός. The superl. μεϊστος occurs only in Bion. Id. 5, 10. Dor. μγων> fr. Pythagor. Gal. p. 18. Ac¬ cording to analogy it must come from μεος , as πλείων , ττλεϊστος from 7rXeos s . The regular com¬ par. μικρότερος occurs in Aristoph. Equ. 786. e Fisch. ii, p. 95. 1 Fisch. n, p. 80. 100. s Fisch. ii, p. 98 sq. 168 Degrees of. Comparison. i‘ t- } όπλότερος, ‘ younger*, superl. όπλοτατος, appears to come from the obsolete word όχλο?, which still remains , / in ύπεροπλος, υπεροπλία 11 . πλείων, Ueutr. πλέον, superl. πλείστος, assigned to πολύς, appears to come from πλεος, comp, πλέίων or πλείων. The lonians and Attics more usually say πλεων, except in the contracted cases, in which the Attics use πλείους , πλείω, (the lonians πλευνες, πλεύνων, πλεννας) ΟΓ πλεονες ( Thuc . IV, 85.) πλεονας, π λεονα, not πλεονς , πλέω (He- * f rodotus, however, has this, vm, 66.) Instead of πλεονες we have also πλεες, II. λ', 395. and πλεας for πλέον ας, II. β' , 129 . πλείων Plato Plicedr . ρ. 289. 291. πλείονος, Xen. Μ. S. 4, 2, 7. πλειονων ib. 3, 13,4. Cyrop. VIII, 1, 1. πλείονας Thuc.ll , 37. and πλείονα . The neut. πλέον is the most common; but πλεΊον also occurs Plat. Rep. i, ' p. 192. ix, p. 244. 273. Euthyd. p , 24.. Thuc. vn, 63. Aristoph. Eccl. 1132. Lysias p. 296 . R . Instead of this the lonians said also πλεύν Herod, ix, 41. The Attics πλείν\ The Dorians said πλγων^. ρ^ων, neut. pyov, superl. ρέστος, assigned to ρόδιος, appears to have cbme from the old word ρηίος, (in Hesychius v. ρεία, Ion. for ρεΊος , whence ρεία , II. β', 475, and passim , and ρεα, II. ε , 304, &c.) of which the Ionic ρήίδιος, Dor. ραίδιος. Att. ρόδιος, is only a lengthened form. From ρηίος comes \_ρηίότερός~\ ρηίτερος , II. σ\ 258. ω, 243. Dor . ράίτερος, ραίτερος Pind . 01 . 8. 78. h Fisch. 11 , ρ. 109 . Schneider's Greek Lex. vnepovXos. * Piers, ad Moer. p. 294. k Fisch. 11 , p. 102. I Degrees of Comparison . 4 W and, according to the other form 129 . [_ρηιιων, ρηίων] ραίων, in Hesychius. Att. ράων, superl. ρηίτατοί, Od. τ', 577. ψ, 75. ρηίστοί, Dor. ραίσ- τ os, Theocr. 11 , 7. Att. pharos'. χείρων, neutr. χείρον, superl. χείριστος, appears to he altered from χερείων. From the old positive χίρηε, (probably the same originally as χερνης), which has the sense of a comparative, II. a, 80. χερψ II. o, 400. χίρηα, χερηεί Od. ό, 323. σ', 228., a comparative χερείων was derived, II. d, 114. 576, &c. Timceus L. p. 18. superl. χόριστος, as from αρης, άρείων, μριστος. From this, by transposition, χείρων, χειριστή. From χερείων and χείρων again, new comparatives arise, χβρειότερος, II. fi, 248. μ, 270. and χειρότεροί, II. ό, 513. ύ, 436“. Sometimes, particularly in the Poets, new compara- 136 tives and superlatives are derived from comparatives and superlatives already in use, e. g. χερειότερος χειρότερος, 134. καΧΚιωτερος Thuc. IV, 118. όρειότερος Theogn. 548. άσσοτερω Od. ρ, 572. προτεραίτερος Aristoph. Equ. 1165. μειότεροί Apoll. Rhod. II. 368. Similarly, εσχατω- τατα Xen. Hist. Gv. 11 , 3, 49 · 1 Fisch. II, p. 104 sq. m Fisch. 11 , p. 97 sq. Heyne ad II. δ', 400. n Phrynich. p. 54. Thom. M. p. 372. Fisch. 11 , 89 sqq. Grsev. ad Lucian. Soloec. (T. ix,) p. 468. [ ·. ' ;·.>)'< ' ·.·.■' V 1 170 »· -·.. » . f , Ί ' · t , Γ · . Of Numerals . 137. Numbers are either cardinal, which answer to the question ‘ how many’? or ordinal, answering to the ques¬ tion, ‘ which of the number’? The cardinal numbers are 1 ' eii ’ ,iul ’ ev ’ Gen. «ros·, /«as, eroy, Dat. evl, μία, €i/l, one, &c. * j- r j ■ 1 · · 1 ■ * * *' * The feminine is derived from ίο?, ? a , Ίον, of which ia or h still occurs. II. «Τ, 437 . 319 . λ', 174 . V 173 . 0', 569. Od. f, 435°. Prom the composition of this word with oiSi and μηέ,Ι arise the negative adjectives ovU and which are declined in the same manner, oi$ e ’ K , ο^εμία, dUv, &c. 1 he later Greek writers, e. g. Aristotle, write ούθε'κ, μηθείς from οντε, μήτε, which, however, is not genuine Attic?. Μ ηύείζ and oitek are often separated, and this separation increases the negative signification, e. g. Xenoph. Hellen. v. 4, 1 . of the Lacedaemonians oho if ενο^των πάποτε άνθ'ρύπων κρατηθίντες, ‘not by one, by no mie’. Plato Rep. 1 , p. 202 . 11 , p. 210 . Symp. p. 208. Xen. Lyrop. iv, 1 , 14 . μελετάτε ^ μ [ αν $ ον ή ν ατ Ληστών € &, μία, tv, from their nature can have no plural; but oi$ e l s and have οΆ'νεί and μηόενες' (r). 0 Fisch. II, p. 67 . 155 . Hesych. v, la. with <Ξ°λ M ' r 661 ' A Phrynich ’ p · 76 · The '“se is quite different i llf I t, ” °;., Ammon · P· oire makes a word by ■tself. In Thuc. vi, 60 . 66. Many MSS. have ov’Sew for ούθεκ. ’ Koen ' ad Gre 8· P· 22 sq. Wasse ad Thuc. n, 13. r Thom. M. p. 662 . 1 Of Numerals. l?l t 2. $vo and $ύ(ϋ (nom. ace.) Svelv and Svolv (gen. dat.) 138 *two\ Svo is the Attic mode of writing 8 . In Homer and Herodotus it is indeclinable. Od.K, 515. II. v, 407. ^ 253. Herod, ii, 122. i. 54. and in Thucyd. i, 82. hi, 89. Damox. ap. Ath. iii , p . 102. A. Avoiv is the form for the gen. and dat. e. g. Plato Rep. ix, 271. τριών ηΐονων, ως εοικεν , ούσων , μιας μεν γνήσιας, Svolv $ε νόθοιν. Cf. Symp. ρ. 207, 208. JEschin. Socr. 2, 3. dy ρος άξιος Svolv ταλάντοιν, the reading of all the MSS. Thuc. vm, 25. ναυσΐ Ιυοίν §εούσαις ττεντηκοντα. Cf. VII. 53. Xen. Hell. I, l, 5. ΑυεΊν is more rare, and is used only in the geni¬ tive. Eurip. Hel. 652. Sveiv yap οντοιν ονχ ο μεν τλημων , ο $ ου 1 . Δνε7ν is in the dative Thucyd. i, 20, 22. where, however, other MSS. give Svoiv. The dative $υσί is rare in Thucyd. vm, 101. Plu¬ tarch. Marc. 29, &c u . For $vo7v the Ionians said $ υφν, Herod, i, 14. 94. 130. iii, 31. iv, 1. 89, 90. Other old forms were tWs, of which $ύω apparently is merely the dual, and 9 , the same as Κισσός, which were used also in the plural. Herod, i, 32. 6 μεγα πλούσιος δυοϊσι προεχει του εύτυχεος μοννοισι. Cf. VII, 104. Soiol II. μ, 455. Pind. Ρ. 4. 30β. 3οιω II. y , 236. σ', 604. Od. δ', 18. $οιοϊς, $οιοισι II. 194. π , 326. e, 206. λ', 431. Ποιους II. ν', 126. Hence the substantive Soirj, c doubt*, Μοιάζω, $οαζω, ενΰοιάζω. s Dawes Misc. Crit. p. 347- Valcken. ad Eurip. Phcen. p. 220. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Ran. 1405. On the other side, Fisch. it, p. 156. t Duker ad Thucyd. iv, 8, 23. Reitz, ad Lucian. T. V. p. 395. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 527. Fisch. ii, p. 159. Heindorf. ad Plat. Crat. p. 117. ® Fisch. ii, t>. l60. 172 Of Numerals. Obs. Άμφια accords with $ύω. In the old Poets it is frequently indeclinable. Hymn. Horn, in Cer. 15. χερσϊναμ’.άμφω καλόν άθυρμα λαβείν. So also Apollon. Rh. i. 165. τώνάμφω yvioros προγενέστεροί . Ctes. Exc. Pers. 58. p. 823. ed. Hess. 2i/ewe° ν τι οίμαι ίμε ττλείω χρήματα e ipya- Fisch. it, p. 162. ; c Fisch · u > P· l63 · '· I -4?β · , •Qy Numerals. * * . # \ * - ordinal numbers also, connected by και , are used; e. g*; πέμπτος και δέκατος, TllUC. V, 83. έκτος και δέκατος. Id. VI, 7. ο·γδοος και δέκατος, Id. νπ, 18. In composition the rule §. 139, obtains. 20. εικοστός. 21. εΐς και εικοστός , μία και εικοστή, and εικοστός πρώτος, &C . 30. τριακοστός. 40. τεσσαρακοστός. 50. πεντηκοστός. 6θ. εξηκοστός. 70. εβδομηκοστός. 80. ο^δοηκοστος. 90. εννενηκοστός. 100. εκατοστός, &C. \ 143. The Greeks, in order to express half, or fractional numbers, in money, measures, and weights, used words compounded of the name of the weight, e.g. μνά, οβολός, τάλαντου, with the adjective termination ον, ιον, άίου, and ημι, c half’ ; and placed before them the ordinal num¬ ber of which the half is taken, τέταρτον ημιτάλαντον , * talents’; c half a fourth talent’. Herod, i. 50. έβδομον ημι- , · τάλαντου, ib. ζ 6ι talents’ ; εννατον ημιτάλαντον, c 8± talents’ ; τρίτον ημίδραχμον, in Dinarchus ; αί δυο και ημισυ δραχμαί, ‘ 2i drachmas’. Pollux ιχ, 62. Harpocr. s.v. τρίτον ημί- μναιον, δυο καί ημίσεια μνά, e two miriee and a half’, id. IX, 56. (r). · ‘ [ ■ ** ■ *«. e ,. · - V ■ From this must be distinguished another phrase, when those words are in the plural, and joined with the * cardinal number, e. g. τρία ημιτάλαντα, Herod, i, 50. does not mean 2i talents, but three half talents, one talent and a half; Demosth. in Androt. p. 598, 23. pro Phorm.956, 18. πόντε ημιτάλαντα, f five half talents’, i. e. 2 i talents ; id. in Nicostr. p. 1246, 7 . πόντε ημιμνάία, f 2| mines . id. in Theocr. p. 1333, ll, τρία ημιμνάία , c ιέ mines’. Aristot. Hist. Anim. IX, 40. βλίττεται δε σμήνος χοα, η τρία ημίχοα (ΐί), τα δε εύθηνονντα δυο χοάς η πενθ’ ημίχοα (2ί), τρείς δε χοάς ολίγα d . ά Casaub. ad Theophr. Char. C. 6. Wesseling ad Herod. 1 , 50. 0/ Numerals Prom the ordinal numbers are derived, 1. Numerals in αίος (r), which answer to the question *on what day?’ and in other languages can only be rendered by several words. Herod. νι, ιοβ. ο Φειδιππίδης δευτεραΊος εκ του Αθηναίων αστεος ην εν Σπαρτή, Oil the second day’. So also τριταΊος άφίκετο. Xen. Hist. Gr. ii, 30. f on the third day". Xenoph. Cyrop. v, 3, l. τεταρ¬ ταίοι 67Γ I τοίς ορίοις ε , γενοντο ) c on the fourth day . Od. % , 257· πεμπτάιοι δ* Α'ί'γνπτον \κόμεσθα, e on the fifth day . So also εκταιος, εβδομαιος , ο'γδοαιος, ενναταιος, δεκαταιος. TflUC. II. 49. διεφθείροντο ot πλειστοι ενναταιοι και εβδομαιοι. Cf. Plato. Rep . X, p. 322. ενδεκατοίιος, δωδεκαταϊος, εικοσταιος* . Obs.' There is no such numeral from πρώτος , as instead of it αύθημαρ may be used, 4 on the first day’. From ιερότερος comes προτεραίος, which, however, is not referred to the per¬ son, but joined with ήμερα , e. g. τρ προτεραίοι ήμερα, as τη υστεραίοι sc; ήμεροι., postridie*. ενιαυσιαιος , μηνιαίος are similar. As they said Trj προτεραίος , Trj υστεραίος sc. ήμερα, so Euripides says, Hippol. Q75. τριταίαν ημέραν for τριτην , and Hec . 32. τριταϊον φε^γ^ος for τρίτον. For the rest, these numerals answer to the interrogative ποσταιος, on what day’? . . ✓ 2. Adverbs, δίς from δύο , τρίς from τρεΊς. In the rest the termination — κις, — άκις; — τάκις, is annexed to the cardinal number, τεσσαράκις, εξάκις, εκατοντάκις. 3. Multiple numbers, a) in — πλόος, — πλους (r), διπλούς, c double’; τριπλούς, c treble’ ; τετραπλούς, b) in — φάσιος, διφάσιος, τριφάσιος. 4. Proportionals, shewing a relation or proportion. Their termination is — πλάσιος, which is annexed to the adverbs. No. 2. after rejecting —s, — κις, &c. διπλοίσιος, «•Fisch. ii, p. l64sqq. , f Ad Thuc. v, 75. VOL. I. N 144 Pronouns . 178 τριπλάσιος, τετραπλάσιος, * twice, thrice, four times as much’. There is no peculiar form in Greek for distributives . To express their meaning sometimes the cardinal num¬ bers compounded with a^Vare used (vid. §. 141. Obs. 2.). Sometimes the prepositions κατά, άνά, &c. / . Of Pronouns. • I_ The pronouns, or words which are put for the pro¬ per substantives, are : 1. Pronouns personal, eyw, συ, to which belong also the pronoun reflective oZ, and the indefinite pro¬ noun, τις . Prom these the pronouns possessive are derived, e/Uos·, σο9, eos, ημετερος , &C. 2. Pronouns demonstrative , ουτος, oSe, εκεΊνος, αυτός . 3. The pronoun relative ός, ή, 6. * , 4. The pronoun interrogative, τίς. I. Pronouns personal . 1. For the first person. 2. For the second person. Sing* Sing* Nom. eyw, I Nom. συ, thou Gen. εμεο, εμού, μου Gen. σεο, σου Dat. εμο'ι, μ οι Dat. σοι Acc. εμε, με Acc. σε. Dual. Dual. Ν1 Α. νώϊ, νω ' N. A. σψωι, σψω G. D. νώϊν νων G. D. σφώϊν, σφίρν Pronouns 179 Pl/UR. Nom. ημείς, W6 Gen. ημεων, ημών Dat. ημΐν ACC. ημεας, ημάς. Plur. Nom. υμείς, yOU Gen. ύμεων, ύμώι Dat. ύμΊν Acc. ύμεας, υμάς. Note, μου, μοι, με are enclitics, which the oblique cases of σν may also be. Observations. 1. The old dialect and the Eolo-Doric had eywv in the nominative, II. y, 188, &c. In Aristoph. Lysistr. 982. Acharn. 748. it is used by the Lacedaemonians and Megarensians; in the Doric dialect also eywv, with the accent transposed. Instead of συ the JEolians and Dorians said tv, and changed σ into r. In order to give more expression to the pronouns, the Dorians and Eolians annex to the termination through all the cases — η, as in Latin — met. e. g. egomet, or — νη, e. g. ey ωνη , εμευνη, εμινη , or εμίννη^ . So also τυνη (Lacon. τυννη ) which occurs also in the Homeric dialect II. e' , 485. Hes. epy. 10. τίνη for σοΡ. The Attics annex — ye, throwing back the accent, εyωyε, avye‘, instead of which the iEolians and Dorians used —*ya, Titya. eywvya. ,r \wya and ta)vya, Boeotian for eywye occur in a fragment of Corinna * 1 . 2. In the genitive the Poets use εμεϊο and σειο, lengthened from εμεο and σεο. As the Attic dialect contracted —eo into — ου, the Ionic, -Eolic, and Doric contracted the same into —- ευ, εμευ, σευ (Herod. I, 45.), Dor. τεο, τεΰ. The Doric dialect had also another form, τεΰς Theocr. n, 126. v, 39. xi> 52. and τεους Theocr. xi, 25. ubi. v. Valck. xvm, 41 k . A s Ad Hesych. T. i, p. 1290, 15. Koen. ad Greg. p. 124. 11 Koen. ad Greg. p. 123. Valck. ad Adoniaz. p. 285. 1 Fisch. n, p. 203. Apollon. Dysc. ap. Maitt. p. 422. k Valck. ad Theocr. x. Id. p. 62. See other Doric forms in Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 301 sq. N 2 Pronoun?. genitive peculiar to the Poets is εμεθεν, μεθεν (r), σεθεν, ift the Tragedians also, Eurip. Ale. 52. 284 1 . 4 Note. In Homer II. θ' , 37· 468. the form of the geiiitive < reo7o from σι/ occurs, probably corrupted from reeio” 1 . * \ % - . « 3. In the dative the ZEolians and Dorians said also τιν , εμίν .( Theocr. ii, 11.), whence τίνη η and εμίνη arose; τέίν, also, which is used by Homer Od. λ', 559. II. X', 201°. In the accus. the Dorians said also τυ for σε. 4. In the dual the form νψ , νφν, σφψ, σφφν^ is Attic. Others omit the i subscriptum, because i is cut off by apocbpe v . 5. In the plural ημείς and υμείς appear to have come from ημεες and νμεες. Instead of ημείς the .ZEolians and Dorians said a μες or άμες , and αμμες , which is also Homeric II. ψ', 432, &c. and for υμείς , υμες , and ύμμες. The latter occurs also II. *,Z76*. , , 9lfj > . , .. ; | ; *:,· . 6. The genitive pliir. is lengthened by the Poets into ημείων , υμΡιων. The ZEolians and Dorians changed as usual the η into α, άμών and άμμων*. * ‘ · .* r * / · " ' · .» 7. In the dative plur. they used also ημιν Od. υ , 272. η μ iv Brunch. ad Eur. Phocn. 777. and ύμιν, ύμίν , where the last syllable is short, e. g. II. p, 415, Soph. (Ed. T. 921. 103&. Antig. 308 s . In the old dialect, and in ZEolic and Doric, it was 1 Koen. ad Gregor, p. 92. Hemsterh. ad Hesych. T. i, p. 1290, 15 . ] , m Heyne, Obss. v, p. 419. _ n > Valck. ad Theoc. Adon. p. 285. > ° Koen. ad Greg. p. 122 sq. Fisch. ii, p. 205. 209 . p Piers, ad Moer. p. 265 sq. Beck, ad Aristoph. Av. 15. Fisch.it, p. 201. . v Λ 4 q Pisch. p. 206. 210. Schweigh. ad Athen. ii, p. 72. r Fisch. ii, p. 206. s Valck. ad Eurip. Phoen. v. 773. Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 78 sqq. ad Hec. 109. Fisch. 11, p. 207. Pronouns. m 4 k ο άμιν, άμιν, άμίν, άμμι, υμιν, υμμι, and υμμι, and, εφεΧκυστικόν, άμμιν, υμμιν. Od. a, 123. 376‘. with ν 8 . In the accus. plur. the Dorians said άμε, άμε, and άμμε, άμμε ; the last II. a , 59· V 5 292, &c. Byzant. deer, in Demosth. pro cor. p. 256, 3. άμμες Theocr. 29, 2. Brunck, however, gives άμμε , which some consider as the dual. 2. Αύτός, η, ό was used for the third person ; yet it has the proper signification of a pronoun, and of the English f he, she, it', only in the oblique cases: in the no¬ minative it signifies not simply f he’, but f he himself, ipse. If the article precedes, 6 αυτός (r), η αυτή, τό αυτό, it signifies The same*. This is frequently contracted by Crasis, ωυτός, ταυτου, ταυτω, ταυτόν, ταυτό (Ion. τωϋτου, τωϋτόν), for ό αυτός, του αυτοΰ, τφ αυτφ, τον αυτόν, το αυτό. For ταυτό, neut. we find also ταυτόν Eur. Hec. 299, &c x . The Ionians, in the oblique cases, insert in the last syl¬ lable an e before the termination, e. g. αύτεψ, αύτεην, ^ s αυτεων, αυτεοισι? . " Instead of the accus. sing, we find also, particularly in the Poets, μιν, in all three genders, e. g. for αυτόν II. a, 100 , &C. Herod. I, 10 . II, 102 . for αυτήν II. a', 29 , &c. Herod. 11 , 100 . Another form is viv , which occurs in Pindar, and the Tragedians. Eur. Phcen. 39· 41. &sch. Prom. 333 . for αυτόν. Eurip. Troad. 435. Ale. 834. Hec. 519 - Theocr. iv, 30. 54. for αυτήν. Theocr. I, 150. for αυτό. Also for αύτους, αύτάς , αυτά. t Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 236. Fisch. n, p. 207. 210. u Valck. ad Herod, p. 662, 79· Koen. ad Greg. p. 110. Fiscli. 11 p. 206, 207. x Thom. M. p. 834. Maitt. p. 37. y Fisch. 1, p. 77- 146. 1 147* -» Pronouns · Soph· (Ed. T. 878. Col. 42. Eurip. Iphig. T. 330. 333. JEsch. Prom . 55. In Homer only occurs*. 06s. No; appears to stand for αυτφ Orph. Argon . 776. Theocr. 6, 29 a . . In the dative there was also the form \v for αντφ, avTrjy Pind. Pytk. iv, 63. ού$ άττίθησεν iv. Nem. I, 99. τον ε'χθροτατον φασεν iv δωσειν μόρον , according to the emen¬ dation of Hermann 5 . The Pronoun Reflexive οΰ> ol, e. Sing. Gen. eo, ov Dat. of j Acc. e. Dual. N. A. σφωε , σφω G. D. σφ ω/ι/. Plural. Nom. σφεες, σφεΊ 9 Gen. σφεων 9 σφων Dat. σφί (*/), σφίσι Acc. σφεας, σφα$. Neut. σφεα. Note, This pronoun is generally reflexive in the Attic prose writers, i. e. it refers itself to the subject of the propo¬ sition in which it stands, or of the foregoing, if the second be sufficiently connected with it. ov Plato Rep. x, 322. 330. Symp. p. 169, 170. of Thuc. ii, 13. iv, 28. e Plato Rep. x, p. 330. σφω Id. Putfiyd. p. 9 . σφωϊν ib. p. 10. σφεις Id. Rep. x. z Heyne ad II. 480. a Fisch · IJ > p· 212 · 214. Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 212. b Apollon. Dysc. ap. Maitt. p. 427. B. Ruhnken. ep. crit. 114. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. C. 421. Pronouns· 183 p, # 94 . Thuc. v, 46 . σφων Thuc. n, 72 . Xen· R· A. 1 , 16 . σφίσι Xen. ib. 4. Hist. Gr. v, 4, 11 . σφάς Pint. Symp.p. 169 . 171. Xen. R. A. 2 , 1 . In Homer and Herodotus, on the contrary, it is more frequently ^the pronoun of the third person, for αυτός. So also in the Attic Poets, e. g. JEsch. Prom. 43, 457- Observations. 1 . The lonians and Dorians contracted eo into ev. II. v , 464. * 0 , 293 . Herod, in, 135. The Poets lengthened also the first syllable, el ο II. 400. as εμειο, σεϊο. iEol. εονς in Corinna c . They also use εθεν, as εμεθεν^ σεθε v. But οίο It. *y , 333. is the genitive of the pronoun possessive ος for eo?, as eoio from ,. f . 1 λ ; fx « t )€o?, whence ov also comes, e. g. ον φι\ον υιόν. 2 . For oi Homer says also εοι II. v, 495. Od. S, 66 . for e, ee, II. w, 134. o', 171 . So also eeTo for el o, i. e. eo, 00 , Apollon. Rh. 1 , 1032. ubi. v. Br. 3. According to some, σφώε is the pom. and <τφωε the accusative d . σφεων in the same manner as ημεων, ύμεων, was lengthened foy the Poets into σφείων II. e, 626. Instead of σφιν the Laconians said φιν, which occurs also in Callimachus, H. in Dian. 125. 213. Schweigh. ad Ath. T. V. p. 179. The neut. σφεα is in Herodotus 1 , 89· in» 111· iv, 25. vin, 36 . probably also hi, 53. Comp. Euseb . Pr&p. Ευ. ix, 41. p. 457. C. 4. In the Poets too the form σφε (Dor. ψε Theocr. iv, 3.) e occurs, which is sometimes as the accus. plur. in all genders for αυτούς, αύτάς, αυτά, II, λ', 111 . Theocr. iv, 3.; sometimes as the accus. sing, instead of αυτόν , αυτήν, αύτο , JEsch. Prom. 9· Sept, ad Th, 617 . Soph. (Ed. R. 780 . Antig. 44 . Eurip. Phocn. 1671. Med. 33 . also as a pronoun reflexive for εαυτόν, JEsch, " r a poll. Dysc. Maitt. p. 425. Valck. ad Theocr. Adoniaz. p. 2 79· c. d Fisch. 11 , p. 202. e Gregor, p. 116 . Pronouns. I 84 Sept, ad Th. 6 19· Valck. ad Eur. Hipp. 1253. Brunch, ad Soph. (Ed. C. 48. . 1 · > < σφι occur? in the Poets as a dative sing. Also Horn. H. in Pan. xix, 1<>. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1490 f . 4 - * » The genitive εμεο, σεο, εο of the pronouns βγω, ον, ον is compounded with the pronoun ai/To's, and in all the cases, except the nominative. ·. < · c · εμαυτού, ης σεαυτου, ης, ου εαυτόν, ης ον εμαντω, rj - σεαντω, η, ω εαυτφ , η, ώ εμαντον, ην σεαυτην , ην, ο εαυτόν, ην, ο, for εμε αυτόν, &c. in the sense c of myself, thyself, him¬ self'. For σεαυτου, εαυτόν, &C. they say also σαυτού, ης, σαυτώ, rj, &C. αυτόν, ης, αύτώ, rj. In the plural the two first are declined as two words, each by itself: ημείς, υμείς αυτοί, — αί, ημών, υμών αυτών, ημιν, υμιν αυτοις , — αίς, ημάς, υμάς αυτούς, — as. The thiid is declined throughout as one word : εαυτών , εαυτοίς, εαυτούς — ας, e. g. Herod. I, 93. Plato Pllced. C. 25. Yet they say also σφοον αυτών, σφίσιν αυτοις, ■— α7ς, σφας αυτούς, — as. 'Σφών εαυτών would be wrong s . We find, however, ημάς Εαυτού ς (r) Herod. ff, 12. Plat. Phced . c. 25. ' .. ^,· · •~ * r ' τ . '\ Obs. 1. These pronouns never occur in Homer as one word, but separate εμε αυτόν, σε αυτόν, ε αυτόν, εμεθεν αύτης Od. φ’, 78. of αύτψ Od. S', 667. of aorr? II. ύ , 124. Hymn. Horn. ' ii, 97· and transposed in Herodotus, n, 10. iv, 134. vii, 38. αυτού εμεύ, αύτψ μοι. The Attics and others separate or trans¬ pose the pronouns, when they are reflexive. Lysias, p. 7. rods παΊόας τούς εμού ς γσγυνε και εμε αύτόν ύβρισε, c myself. Plato f Thom. M. p. 825 sq. 2 Thom. M. p. 826 sq. Reiz. ap. Wolf, ad Hes. Theog. p. 106. Pronouns. 185 Alcib . I, p . 7· 7 ΐγ)θ 9 αιίτο»' σ€ κατηγορήσω. Demosth. ρ. 1291· « * » <"» « h υττ αυτού σου . Obs· 2. Properly, according to the composition, only the genitive of this pronoun should have been in use. It is owing, however, to an arbitrary usage, that e/xeo is compounded with the dative also, and accus. sing, and the plur. of αυτο9. From e/xeo αυτού came, by crasis of the oa, the later Ionic εμεωϋτου, as σβωυτοχ \ βωυτου , Herod . I, 35· 42. 45. 87· 108. II, 17· III, 36, &c. - ... , From the oblique cases of the personal pronoun ey ημετβρος, pa, pov , ours . Note, Instead of which, άμός also was used in the Doric dia¬ lect IL ζ, 414. θ', 178 . ττ', 830. Pind. 01. x, 10 . Theocr . v, 108. Enrip. Androm. 582. Soph . El. 279 . 588. in the dialogue. It was used also for εμός, as ? 7 Me 79 for eyw. Pind. P. 3, 72 . Others distinguish αμος as Doric for η με repos, from άμός ; Attic for k . νμετερος, pa, pov, ‘ y0UFs\ Note. Also ύμός, η, ον, II. ε, 489. Od. a, 37 5 . Pind. Pyth. vii, 15. Theocr . xxii, 173. only in the Ionic and Doric Poets. σφός, η, όν, and> ‘your', in the plural; the first II. a, σφεrepos, pa, pov, } 534. S', 162 . \', 90 . ξ, 202 . 303. Od. a, 34. β' , 237. Σφε repos is also Attic, Phuc. I, 5. it, 12 , vii, 75. It is also used by the Poets for the pronoun possessive of the third person sing, ‘his’*. ISO. II. Pronouns demonstrative. The demonstrative pronouns in Greek are oSe, i}Se f roSe, and ovros, avn 7 , rovro , ‘ this", hie, arid εκείνος, εκείνη, εκείνο, * 1 that*, Hie. * Brunck. ad Apoll. Rh. 1, 643. Heyne ad II. a , 21 6. k Brunck. ad Eurip. Androtn. 1175. Fisch. 11, p. 227. 1 Thom. M. p. 827. Brunck. ad yEsch. Prom. 9. 187 Pronouns. 1 , 0Se is declined like the article, to which the enclitic Se is annexed in all the cases only to give greater force. Instead of this Se the Attics also annex the syllable Si, 6$l, η$ί 3 τοδί 3 which is analogous to the Latin hicce m . Obs. Homer annexes the termination of the case to the Se. TolaSeat Od . φ' 9 93. Tola’Seacrt II. κ , 462. Od. β , 47. 165. κ, 268. v 3 258. 2 . ouros is declined in the following manner : Sing. m. f. n. N. ουτος, αυτή , ςτουτο G. τούτον, ταυτης, τουτου Plur. Μ. F. Ν. ουτρι, αύται , ταΰτα G. τούτων Η. τοντψ 9 ταυτη, τοντφ D. τοντοις, ταυταις , τοντοις Α. τούτον , ταντην, τούτο ' A. τουτους, ταυτας, ταυτα. Dual. μ. F. ν. Ν. Α. τουτω, ταυτα 3 τουτω G. D. τοντοιν, ταυταιν, τουτοιν Note. This declension has some analogy to that of the arti¬ cle, inasmuch as both have the spiritus asper , and the τ in the same place; and in the pronouns the ov in the first syllable stands where the article has o or ω 9 and av where, in the other, a or η is, e. g. o, ουτος. to 3 τούτο, του , τουτου. τφ, τουτω, οι 3 ουτοι , &C. and again η 9 αυτή. της, ταυτης. αι 9 αυται. ταις, ταυταις. Yet the Dorians said for ταύτας τοντας , jud for ταντη ταυτα, or tovtcl as an adverb in the oblique cases* 1 · Obs. 1. The Ionians in the final syllable frequently insert € before the termination of the case, as in αυτός, e. g. τουτόρ, τουτόων , τουτόους, in Hippocrates . m Fisch. i, p. 345. ii, 217· n Koen. ad Greg. p. lfi7· Fisch. n, p. 214. σ Fisch. i, p. 77- 188 Pronouns. Obs. 2. The Attics annex i to this pronoun in all case» and genders to give a stronger emphasis, in which case it receives an accent; as they said, for o<5e so ουτοσί , αύτήι ,. τουτουΐ, ταυτηΐ , ου toll, Plat . Lack. p. l6l. In the neuter this i took the place of o and a. τουτί Aristoph. Vesp. 183. TavTif id. Lys. 602.; but also τούτοι , id. Equ. 621. instead of which, Arist. Thesm. 880. now TovToyi is read. For the same reasons the Latins annexed — met , —£e, — pte y — ce> e * * S* egomety tute , meapte y hicce p . Hence ουτοσί is used only an absolute designation, ουτος , with reference also to a pro¬ noun relative following it q . Instead of i, yi and Si are annexed to the cases which end in a short vowel, for the same purpose, e. g. Tovroyl Arist. Lys . 147. 941. TavTayi Id. Av. 171. 445. τοντοδί Id. Pac. 330 r . This appears only to have been used in familiar discourse, as it oc¬ curs in the comic writers only 8 . OS* also does not occur in the tra¬ gedians. From this we must distinguish the t, which the Attics and Ionians frequently annex to the dative plural, τούτοισι , ταύταισι. % Obs. 3. Some adjectives compounded with ovtos follow its declension, but reject the r throughout, e. g. τοσου - τ os, τοσαυτη, τοσουτο , from τόσος. τοιουτος, τοιαυτη, τοιουτο from τοΊος. τηλικουτος from τη\ίκος. I paragogicum is annexed to these also, e. g. τοιουτονί Aristoph. Vesp. 831. Demosth. p. 833. τοιουτοΐί Arist. Lys. 1089. τοιαυταά Mschin. p. 278. τοιαντί Arist. Vesp. 668 fc . 3. E/e εινος is declined like αυτός , εκείνος , εκείνη, εκείνο, and receives also i paragogicum , e. g. εκεινοσί Anstoph. Av. 297. Demosth. p. 129 . Ueivom Arist. Pac. 546. e/e«- νονί Id. Pac. 544. Nub. 1096 . ■Note. For εκείνος the Ionians said κείνος (r), the Dorians τηνος , a, o. p Fisch. 1, p. 93. 11, p. 216. *1 Ammon, p. 106. r Koen. ad Greg. p. 56. Fisch. i, p. 93 . ii, p. 217. 5 Porson ad Eurip. Med. 157. 4 Fisch. 11, p. 217. I Pronouns. * / · .· ·, ' ψΛ ■ ·· ■ 5 ‘ ·; * : 1 1 '* ' III. Pronouns indefinite. That is, pronouns, by which no particular person is designated; but only a person or thing generally. These are in Greek ό, η, το Sel να, ‘ a certain person’, * when one does not wish to name one, or does not know his appellation ; and τις, c any one, some one’. 1. ό, η, TO Selva, Gen. του, της, τον Κείνος Demosth . ρ. 38, 20. Ddt. τφ Trj, τίρ Seivi Id. p. 488, 23. ACCUS. 'Toy, την, TO Selva Id. p. 167· Plur. Nom. o\ Selveς Id. p. 616, 4. Gen. των Seivwv Id. p. 489· 11. It is sometimes also indeclinable, Aristoph. Thesm. 622. τον Selva, τον τον Selva. • 2. Τί9, neut. τι , Gen. τινός , Dat. τινί, Acc. τινά, neut. τι. /· l ι - ' i Dual. N. A. τινε, G. D. τινοίν. r • Plur. N. τινός, n. τινά, Gen. τινων. D. τισί, Acc. τινάς, n. τινά. « Note. This pronoun is mostly enclitic, and is written with¬ out an accent. Obs. 1. The Ionians said for τινός, τινί, fyc. τεο Od. π, 305. and contracted, τεν Herod, i, 19· 39· Hat. τόφ Herod. I, 181. ii, 129· Plural . Gen. τεων Herod. 11, 175. Oat. τεοις, τεοισι Herod, vin, 118 u . The Attics contracted του, τφ, in all the genders, which were written without an accent. In the plural they use only τινων, τισί. There existed also dif¬ ferent forms of the pronouns τις and τεος. The Grammarians say, that from τινός a new nominative τίος, τίου, τίω was formed; and from this came του, by the Ionians resolved into τεο and τεω χ . • . · * · * · Gronov. ad Herod, p. 63. n. 21. 31. ed. Wessel. Fisch. 1, p. 26l. 11, p. 220. \ X / 151 . X Μ* 4 * 152. ϊ» 190 Pronouns . 05ί. 2. Instead of ri the Dorians must have sai(J τα and σα. Hence 79 , ov. Dai. ω, > 7 , &c. In the masc. Homer often puts o for 09 , e. g. Od. f, 3, S oi c , particu¬ larly with the enclitic re, ore, 4 and this*, for f who ,(i . He uses also, as well as the Ionic writers in general, the article for this pronoun. In the genitive he has oov for ov II. P, 325. and in the fem. 6*79 II. 7 /, 208. This pronoun, when it does not refer to any parti¬ cular person, hut is used as a general designation, quisquiSy quicunque , is compounded with the indefinite pronoun to. Each part of the compound is then declined separately : οστι 9 , ήτις, o ti (or o, rt to distin¬ guish it from on, c that’), Gen . ούτινος, ήστινος , ούτινος. Dat . ψτινι , YJTIVI, ψτινι , &C. V ''' Γ ν . ' > 05s. 1. Homer says ο τις, e. g. 77. */, 279· and retains, with the rest of the Ionic writers, the 6 unchanged in all the cases, e. g. οτευ Od. p 424. and οττεο, οττευ Od. a , 124. χ', 377· p ) 121. for ούτινος , ήστινος. οτεψ II. d, 664. οτινα Od. Θ', 204. Nom. Plur. οτινα II. χ, 450. Gera, οτεων Od. κ, 39· οτεοισι (trisyllable), 27. o', 491. in the feminine, ότεφσι, in Herodotus. The Attics retained this in the gen. and dat. sing. otov, οτψ for ούτινος , ψτινι , and οτωι; Xen. Anab. vii. 6, 24. Sophocles and Aristophanes have also οτοισι Equ. 758, Obs. 2. Instead of the neut. plur. ατινα Homer, II. a', 554. κ , 206. v , 127. and Herodotus 1 , 138. 197, #c. have ασσα, from the Doric σα for τινά. vid. §. 151. Obs. The Attics instead of this say άττα. * Heyne ad 11, a , 73· d Fisch. 11, p. 3IS. 153. 192 • Verb. iM. The Reciprocal Pronoun. % * Gen. αΧΧηΧων Dat. αΧΧηΧοις , aWrfkcus Acc. αΧΧηΧονς , ctXXtjXaVj αΧΧηΧα ■ Dual. Gen. Dat. αΧΧηΧοιν, —aiv Acc. άΧΧηΧω, αΧΧηΧα. e One another^ e. g. βτυψαρ άΧΧηΧους . It is derived from αΧΧος. The genitive is in Homer and other Poets άΧΧηΧοιϊν II κ, 65. v, 708. 7r, 7 65, &C. # Of the Verb. • - % 155 . The Greek verb is much more varied and rich in its forms than the Latin, or any other language. Not only has it, at least in a form, one relation more, viz.' the middle; but it has also in the other two voices, the active and passive, two forms differing in significa¬ tion for the perfectum of the Latin, viz. what is called the praeteritum perfectum and the aorist; two forms of the futurum, preteritum perfectum, plusquam perfectum and the aorist: lastly, not only all the moods for each tense which are complete only in the present tense of Latin, but also two distinct forms, differing in signifi¬ cation, for the conjunctive in Latin; and in every mood a dual, besides the singular and plural, as in nouns. Again, there is only one principal conjugation, the tenses of which are in complete analogy to each other; so that one may be derived from another, according to certain rules; but from the different dialects which at first formed 193 Division of the Verbs and Tenses . themselves together, though without mutual influence, and from the constant endeavour of the Greeks after harmony, several forms were invented for one verb, or for one notion of a verb, which were not all carried through the whole of the tenses, but which mutually supply the deficiences of each other. Division of the Verbs and Tenses. With regard to the signification, the most general 156. division of verbs is that, according to which they designate either an action, capable of determining the different relations which the subject, to whom the action belongs, has to an object or person ; or such as merely designate a certain situation of the subject. In these the relation is either active, which consists in the effect of an action upon another person or object ( active or transitive ); or passive, by which the subject of an ac¬ tion is under the influence of an object independent of himself, or of a different person ( passive ); or reflective, when the subject of the action inflicts it on himself; and thus, at the same time, is active and passive from himself, e. g. ‘1 struck another, I was struck, I struck myself', έτυψα, έτνφθην, βτνψαμην. Verbs of the second kind designate only a general situation of the subject, which neither passes on to an object, nor is affected by any thing beyond the subject: these are called verbs neuter , e. g. f I stand, I go', &c. This division finds its proper application in the Syntax. We may also reckon amongst these the verbs deponent, which have the form of passive, but the signification of active verbs, and which are likewise treated of in the Syntax. VOL. i. o 194 Division of the Verbs and Tenses. With regard to the form, verbs are divided into two classes, of verbs in — ω, and verbs in —μι. The lat¬ ter, however, differ from the former only in the present, and some in the construction of the aoristand perfectum. Verbs in ω are either such as have a consonant before ω, or such as have a vowel «, e, o before ω. These are called verba barytona , barytone verbs; because they have the accent {acute) on the penultima, and the last syllable necessarily has the grave accent, not expressed in writing (ό βαρύς τόνος) : the second are called verba pura , contracta , because ω is contracted by the Attics into one syllable with the vowel preceding; also circum - fiexa (ττβρισττωμενα) because, after contraction, the ω receives a circumflex, φιλεω, φΐΧώ. These, however, are not at all different from the first, since it is merely re¬ quired to contract according to the foregoing rules in the present and imperfect. ‘ 1 ’ll I# Jhfij) Obs. The older Grammarians, and the earlier modern ones, reckoned fourteen conjugations, seven of baryton verbs , accord¬ ing to the characteristic consonant of the present tense, and the formation of the future; three of verbs circumflex , and four of verbs in μι. I. Baryton verbs , 1. in β ττ φ τττ. Put. φ. 2. in y κχκτ. Fut. ξ. 3. in $ θ τ. Fut . σ. 4. in ζ σσ ττ. Fut. ξ or σ. 5. m λ μ ν ρ. Fut. ω. 6. ω purum , e. g. ανω. Fut . σ. 7. in ζ and φ. Fut. ησω. II. Verbs circumflex , 1. in όω. 2. in αω. S. m όω. III. Verbs in μι. 1. in — ημι, ης. Inf όναι. “ Til· 11 } * * Ί $“· Inf\ aval. 3. in — ωμι. Inf. όναι. 4. in — νμι. Inf. υναι. The modern and more simple division takes its ori¬ gin from Verwey (nova via docendi Greca) and Weller 6 . Since in determining an action two things are to be regarded, first the time in which it takes place, and secondly it’s relation to the intention and object of the — ^ / * Fisch. ii, p. 244 sq. 195 Division of the Verbs and Tenses. person ; hence each verb is capable of two principal vari¬ ations in it’s form, of which the one serves to determine the time, (hence the name tempora tenses), and the second expresses the subordinate relations of it {modi). l. The time in which an action can take place is either present, past, or future. There are thus in Greek, as in every language, three principal tenses, the present, the preterite, and the future. Of the present there is only one simple form in Greek; but for the praeterite there are more than in any other language. An action, for instance, is either, with relation to itself, entirely passed, or, as relative, passed with respect to another time expressed or understood. The aorist serves to de¬ signate the time entirely passed; the imperfectum, the praeteritum perfectum, and the plusquam perfectum, the relative time. The imperfectum represents a past action as continuing during another past action and accom¬ panying it; the perfectum {χρόνος παρακείμενος τω παρόντι) and plusquam perfectum, designate a perfect action, but continuing to another time ; the perfectum to the present; the plusquam perfectum to a time past. —The future time is understood under three modifica¬ tions, either with respect merely to its future begin¬ ning ( Fut . l. 2. Act . and Fut. Med.), or as future and complete {Fut. l. 2. Pass.), or as future and finished, with respect to an action to take place hereafter {Fut. 3. Pass.). An action is considered with reference to the sub- 159 . ject of the speaker, 1 . either as subsisting by itself, determined by no relation (infinitive). 2. or as a gene¬ ral quality and condition of an object or person (parti- \ 196 Division of the Verbs and Tenses. ciple). 3. or as a determinate proposition ; and in this respect, a) as actual (indicative), b) as potential and intentional (optative and conjunctive f ). c) as necessary, at least subjective for the speaker (imperative). t λ The following is a table of the Tenses and Moods: f of the more exact difference of these two moods, vid. Syntax. ' .._Γ! *, li^ni λ ·· * · -;·:: “to i ’ ΠΙ \ J I V. i 4 i i \ <5 § S 3 Η Division oj the Verbs and lenses. m QJ s .a ( o n-> -a «0 =b^ 5 .5 03 r* fee 5 ^ a? .5 * 3 d JS D w 42 ^ £ ϋ Λ / C.* S-4 0) Ph cr cu 3 s NO 05 a Oh oi / tn 3 0,1 > o _3 "3 io U <υ Ph si «*-. t- o> On s > . o <υ 3 NO a NO r S NO /, eayws, to distinguish them from ήζα, νχ α from ayw , * * I carry’ 1 , εάΧωκα, εάΧω (and ήΧω, Herod . vn, 137. Plat. Hipp. Maj. p . 15. Xen. Anah. iv, 4, 21. ήλωκα Xen. Anah . iv, 2. 13 k ). eot/ca, έολττα, eopya , in which the characteristic of the Perf. 2. oi and o could not be effaced 1 , particularly in verbs which begin with a vowel, not capable of being lengthened, εωθονν, εωσμαι, εωνουμψ, » / ’ ' m εωι >ημαι, εουρουν .. Obs. Homer sometimes makes the ε long, according as the verse requires it, e. g. είοικυιαι II. σ, 418. evaSey II. ζ, 340, fyc. which latter probably arose from the digumma anciently in h That the augment is not omitted, is maintained by Porson. Vid. Ind. ed. Pors. Lips, particularly ad Med. 1138. The contrary is asserted by Brunck. ad Eurip. Androm. $62. ad Soph. (Ed. Col. 1624. (where Porson ad Eurip. Ph. 5. reads θεών e6wg). Markl. ad Suppl. 728. Herm. Praef. ad Hec. xxix. sqq (r). * Fisch. hi, a. p. 17. Maitt. p. 53. k Piers, ad Moer. p. 178. Fisch. hi, a. p. 27 sq. 1 Fisch. ii, p. 285. in, a. p. 88. * Thom. M. p. 403. 162 . ^00 Augment, use, eFatten 11 . It appears, however, to be very doubtful, whether the prefixing e to verbs wdiich begin with a vowel, is to be explained by the digamma. Afterwards the usage was thus far determined, that € was only prefixed to verbs· that began with a conso¬ nant ; but in others, beginning with a vowel, it coalesced either w T ith a long vowel, or a diphthong. The prefixing of e is called the syllabic augment , because the verb is thereby lengthened one syllable; the lengthening of the short vowel, the temporal augment, because the time (χρόνος, tempus), or the quantity of the initial vowel is thereby increased. 163. 1. The Syllabic Augment. In verbs beginning with p, after the augment p is doubled, g. ρ[πτω, eppnrrov, pew, eppeov. Obs, 1. The Poets, on account of the verse, often retained the single p, e. g. βρβξας II, ψ, 570. ερβζβ II. β', 400. epa\]se ν, Horn. Η. in Merc . 79°. Obs. 2. The Ionic and Doric Poets sometimes repeat the initial consonant of the verb, after this augment, e. g. βλλαθε II. e, 83. eSSeiae II. a, 33 (r). ' *' * . t ; \ ; ' » 1 Tfl · *·»·■ V · M Obs. 3. The Attics prefix the temporal instead of the sylla¬ bic augment, to the verbs ηβούλόμην, ηόυνάμην, ημβΧλον. He¬ rodotus also has ηόννατο I, 20 p . ηφβρες, Arist. Pac. 6, for ecpepes, is doubtful. > ' . ,. . . . ' r d In the perfectum, plusquam. perf. and the fut. 3. pass, the first consonant of the verb is repeated before the syllabic augment. This is called the ' u Fisch. hi, a. p. 21 . , ° Fisch. ii, p. 2 p 0 . p Thom. p. 258. Maitt. p. 58. Fisch. it, p. 299 sq. i 201 Augment* Ο I Γ ' ’ Reduplication. διπλασιασμός. Thus TV7TTft) has in the perfect, τετνφα. τετυιτα. λείπω, Χελοιπα, &c. The plusquam perf. receives the syllabic augment also before the reduplication, ετετυφειν, εΧελοί- Treiv* In which the following rules are observed : l If the verb begins with an aspirated consonant, in the reduplication the corresponding lene is put §.35. θάπτω , τεθαπται, χρυσόω, κεχρύσωκα, φιλεω , πεφιληκα. 2. Verbs which begin with p, retain only the aug¬ ment ep. §. i6i q . Homer, however, has ρερυπωμενα. Od. ζ', 59. 3. Verbs which begin with a double consonant ζ, ξ 3 φ, or with two consonants, the latter of which is not a liquid, do not receive the reduplication, but only the augment, e. g. εζητηκα, εξεσμαι, εφαλκα, εσπορα, εφθορα, ίσταλκα, and yv, εγνωκα, ky νωρικα. The following are excepted: l. Those which begin with 7ΓΤ, 7Γ ίπταμαι, πεπτηως, regularly in Homer and Herodot. πεπτωκα, &c. Agaiq, from πτερόω is regularly- formed επτερωκα , ανεπτερωμένος, from πτύσσω επτυ^/μαι Eurip. El. 357. from πτησσω επτηχα*. 2. The verb κτάομαι , of which the perfect κεκτημαι is more. used by the Attics, and εκτημαι by the Ionians 8 . In verbs which begin with a mute and a liquid, or two liquids, in some cases, the reduplication is regu- q Fisch. II, p. 289 sq. r Taylor ad Lyeurg. p. 166. ed Ileiske T. iv . s Moeris p. 225. Fisch. n, p. 287 sq. Augment. Idr, in others, it is not admitted. Me/uy»/juat, however, has no other form εμνημαι. Besides these, verbs begin¬ ning* * with δρ } θρ , rp and ττλ, πρ, receive the regular reduplication, e. g. δεδρομα, δεδράμηκα from δρεμω, re- θραυσται from θραύω, τετραμμαι, τεθραμμαι from τρεπω, τρέφω, τΓεττΧψ/α, ττεπρωται, all which forms OCCUr in Homer. Those also beginning with χρ , and those chiefly, whose second initial consonant is p , χράομαι, χργζω, κεχρηται, κεχρτισμενος. On the other hand, the reduplication is generally wanting in verbs which begin with 7 X, and others whose second initial consonant is λ. Hence κaτεyXωττισμεvos\ f-yXvwTai u , εβΧάστηκα Eunp. Iphig, A. 594 \ It is very doubtful, however, whether the Attics omitted the reduplication in other verbs beginning with a single consonant. In Aristoph. Vesp. 1475. is now read ε’ισκεκυκληκεν* . In Homer, on the contrary, and other Ionic Poets, the omission of the reduplication is frequent, €. g. εδεκτο Od. ε , 353. Pind. 01, 2, 88. δεκτό II, β', 420. for εδεδεκτο. δεξο II, τ', 10. δεμένος for δεδεγμενο* II, β', 794. Horn. Η in Merc. 47 5. in Cer. 29 . βΧησθαι II, δ', 115. βΧημενος for βΧημενος, βεβΧημενος II, X', 191. g\et- 7 Γτο, Apollon. Argon, ι, 45 ζ . 1 Kiister ad Aristoph. Equ. 351. u Casaub. ad Athen. n. 15 (i, p. 3?5. Schw.) * Hemsterh. in Obss. Misc. iv, p. 289 sqq. Dorville ad Charit. p. 553. Lips. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Lysistr. 291. Fisch. n, p. 287 son 306. 44 y Brunck. Dorv. 11. cc. z Fisch. ii, p. 313. \ i Augment. Observations. 203 1. The second augment in the plusquam perf. is sometimes omitted by the Attics, e. g. πεττόνθεσαν, Ms chin, in Ctes. p. S3 4. κατα$ε$ραμηκεσαν Thuc. vm, 92. Xen. Cyrop. vii, 2, 5. $eSiei Plato Phadr. p. 330. ed. Bip. yeyei >ητο Thuc. v, 14. ^ιαττεττόμφει Xen. Cyrop. vm, 4, 7. τετεΧευτηκει Anal) . vi. 4, 11. ct7 Γοδεδράκει vi, 4, 13. ΰιαβεβηκει νιτ, 3, 20. ΰιαβε- βΧηκει νιι, 5, 8. Trapayeyovei Plat, Symp, p. l66 a . 2. In verbs beginning with λ and μ, the Ionians, Attics, and 1 65. others, are accustomed to put ei for λε, με, e. g. είΧηφα , εί- λ^χα (έλαχα Theocr. 16, 84.) utey μένος, εΐμαρμαι, which the Grammarians call lengthening e after rejecting the reduplication of the consonant b . This, however, does not take place in all words; it is always, for instance, ΧεΧειμμαι , not ειΧειμμαι. 3, The Ionian and Doric Poets sometimes lengthen the redu¬ plication as well as the augment, e. g. δείδεκτο 11. /, 224. $et$e- χαται Od. η, 72. from Ιέκω, Ιεικω, for δέδεικτο, $ε$είγαται, (r) $εί$ια, $εί$οικα for $έ$οικα. (ν. ίείκνυμι under the defect, verbs.) They also transpose the letters of the reduplication, εμμορε, έσ- συμαι in Homer for μέμορε , σέσυμαι , by the same analogy as έρριφα for ρέριφα . 4. Besides the perfectum, derivative verbs also receive a species of reduplication, e. g. τίθημι , 8ι$ωμι 3 ίστημι. (v. verbs in μι.) Many new verbs also are derived from the perfectum, particularly in Ionic and Doric, which in that case have the reduplication in the present, and whose present tense thus retains the signification of the perfectum, and the plusquam perf. that of the imperf. of the radical verbs, except that the past tense is lost in the present. ' (See below for the derivation of the verbs). Moreover, in Homer and Hesiod aorists also often receive the re¬ duplication. Aorist. 2. κεκάμω II. a , 168. κεκάμωσιν II. η ,3. λελαχωσ* 17. */, 80. φ', 76. ΧεΧαβέσθαι Odtf, 388. (κεκορεσ- a Hemsterh. l.c. ad Lucian. T. i, p. 308. Fisch. n, p. 317* Jun- germ. ad Polluc. in, 102. n. 27 . b Fisch. n, p. 304 sq. I 204 v Augment. σαμεθα II. χ, 427· and κεκορεσσάμενος Hes. ep f y. 33. are now read /ce κορεσσ . since the sense also requires κε, i. e. αι/) . Other words of a similar nature, in which the peculiar form and signifi¬ cation of the aorist has not remained unchanged, and which have the signification of the plusquam perf. in the form of the imperf. or aorist. e. g. τετύκοντο , (r) i. q. ετετευχεσα v, or of which a future occurs different from that of the radical verb, e. g. ττετηθε , ττετηθειν j ττιθησω, κεκάδοντο, κεκαδησω, are more correctly reckoned as new present tenses, derived from the perfectum c . * But παρπεττιθόντες II. ψ' } 37. is the aorist. The futures δεδε- ξομαι II. e, 238. τετενξεται II. μ, 34 5. μεμίξεται Hes. ipy. 177. are regularly formed Fat. 3. Pass, from δέχομαι , δεδεyμaι, δεδεξαι. τευχω, τετευyμaι ί τετενξαι , niyw, μεμ^μαι, μεμι- ξαι. The Temporal Augment. ϊ66. By the contraction of the augment ε with the initial vowel of the verb, according to §. 48. e« becomes — η , ee —ει and 7j. As in this case, by means of the augment, the short vowel was changed into its corresponding long one, it soon became a rule, that the" short vowel in the con¬ traction was always changed into it's corresponding long- one, without regard to the practice otherwise observed. Thus, in the following words, , !· « was changed into η ( εα ) by the augment, e. g. ανντω , ηνντον , ανδανω , ηνδανον , ακούω , ηκονον , ηκονσα. Obs . 1 . Jn άηδίζομαι , * I have an unpleasant sensation", and the poetic word άηθεσσω, < I am, unaccustomed*; άίω, c I hear; «ω, f I blow : this change does not take place; the reason as¬ signed for which is; that ηηδιζόμη v, ηηθεσσον would have had too inharmonious a sound, and that ηιεν , might have been easily confounded with ηϊεν, ‘ he went", and ήεν , 4 he was ,d . We must, however, seek for the reason in the Ionic dialect, where c Fisch. n, p. 314. Koen. ad Greg. p. 202. d Fisch. ii, p. 284 sq. 205 Augment. the omission of the augment was customary, as Herodotus has IX, 93 . επηίσε, Apoll. Rh . i, 1023. επηίσαν from επα'ίω, 6 they have perceived* *. m Obs. 2 . The long a also remains unchanged in the old Attic in άναλό ω, commonly αναλίσκω , αναλουν, αναλωκα, αναλωμαι, ανάλωσα , for which, in modern Attic, we find άνηλωκα , ηνάλωκα, ηνηλωκα* . « 2 . at into y, e. g. αίτεω, yreov, γτησα. 3 . αν into > 71 /, e. g. αυΐάω, ηνδων, ανχεω, ηνχουν. 4. € becomes a) ει in εάω, ‘ I suffer or permit* ; εθω, ‘ 1 accustom* ; είωθα. εθίζω, ελω, ‘ I take’ ; εϊλον. ελίττω, ' I twirl*; έλκω, ελκύω , f I draw*; ερύω, ‘ I draw*; έπομαι, c I follow*; έρπω , ερπύζω , c I creep’; εστιάω, c I entertain*; ύρ^γάζομαι, ‘ I make, or do*; εχω, ‘ I have*; εω, (com¬ monly εζω, ενννμι) ‘1 seat, I put on*. In the same man¬ ner from επω (whence έπος) came first the aor. l. είπα, 2 . είπον, and from this a new present tense είπω, είπε , είποιμι , είπεϊν was formed. (See in the anomalous verbs.) b) η in all other verbs : εγείρω, ήπειρον, ερωτάω, ηπωτων. είρωτα in Herodotus ϊ, 11. 88. has not the augment, but comes from the Ionic form είρωτάω, — εω, whence the participle έίρωτεωμενονς, επειρωτωσι and the infin. ειρωτεε- σθαι Herod II, 32. IV, 3. VII, 148. E remains unchanged in ερμηνεύω . In the forms of the pres, and perf. in εο , the o receives the augment εορτάζω, εωρταζον, εολπα, εωλπειν , eopya, εωρ^ειν, εοικα , » ' f εωκειν . 4 5. Et is changed into y, at least in the old (middle) Attic, ηκαζον, ηκασα from εικάζω. Yet we find also e Valck. ad Phcen. p. 222. Thom. M. p. 55. Fisch. ad Well, ii, * p. 3l6\ 3, a. p. 32 sqq. f Fisch. ii, p. 284 sq. 167. Augment . είκασα Plat . p. 259 g . In the perf. and plusquam peif. of eiKU) in Horner the ei is resolved, τμκτο , ηιζαι } ηίκται , as ωϊξε from ο’/γω 11. ζ, 298. 6. €ν is often changed into ηυ in the editions, e. g. καθφί&β Plat . p. 262. 266. Eurip. Hec. 18. ed. Porson. coll, v, 1198 . 1218 . ηντυχηκόσιν Isocr. Panath. p. 554. JPolf. although the readings in this respect are very fluctuating; frequently one or more MSS. have ην where the editions give ευ, e. g. Thuc. iv, 79. εύτύχει, Cod . Reg. ηύτύχα. ηυ is, for the most part, condemned by the Grammarians 11 . As η did not exist in the ancient alphabet, it appears that ηυτύχει was first received into the new Attic dialect, and adhered to by the moderns. tjv is never found in ευρίσκω ; yet in Arist . Pac. 129 . εζηυρεθη. 7. o into ω and 01 into e. g. ωνόμαζον, ψκουν, from ονομάζω, οικεω. Obs, Some verbs beginning with 01 seldom or never receive the augment. Such are οίνόω ( οϊνωμενος Soph. Track. 271. Plato Leg. vi, p. 298. vn, p. 37 6. Pollux vi, 21. Yet Homer has II. S', 3. εωνοχόει and a , 598. Od. o', 141. φνοχόει) and words compounded with οιωνος and ο’ίαΡ. οίωνοσκοττω , 7τολω, οιακονομώ, οίακοστροφώ . So also οΊγωκα Msch. Pers. 13. Soph . Aj. 896. Others, as οίόω, οίμεω, occur only in Ionic writers, and on that account have no augment 11 h . The rest of the initial vowels remain unchanged, 1 and v short become long. s Yalck. ad Phcen. p. 54. b. Pierson, ad Moer. p. 182. Fisch. 11 , p. 279. h Herodian. Herm. p. 314. xxxvm. Suid. v. ευλόγησα Etym. M. p. 400. 32. Fisch. ad Well. 2, p. 280. who is of another opinion, ad Theophr. p. 20. b. Brunck. ad Eurip. Hec. 18. Aristoph. Thesm. 479. Av. 495. hh Fisch. 11, p. 285. 207 Augment. Obs. 1 . It has been before remarked, §. l6l. that the Attics in some words prefix e instead of the temporal augment , parti¬ cularly in verbs which begin with an immutable vowel, e. g. εαζα for ηζα, εάΧωκα for ηΧωκα. They also prefix the syllabic augment to the temporal, e. g. εωρων, εφρακα from οράω, instead of which the Ionic ωρων, ωρακα rarely occurs in their works. In the same manner the compound avoiyw, άνεωζα, aveyypm, aveipya, not άνφζα, avwypeu 1 . Obs. 2. In verbs also which begin with a vowel, the Ionians, and still more the Attics, use a sort of reduplication, repeating the two first letters ; but instead of the long vowel taking the corresponding short one, e. g. ayqyeparo for rjyeppevoi ησαν II. S', 211. from ayeipa), rjyepica, ayriyepKa. εyηyεpμεvoς Thuc. vii, 51. from eyeipu). άΧηΧεσμενος Herod, vn, 23. Time . iv, 26. from αΧεω , ηΧεκα , αΧηΧεκα. Thus also ωμοκα , όμω- μοκα from ομόω. ώpυyμat, όpωpυyμcu from ορύσσω, ηΧακα , η Χαμαί, εΧηΧακα Herod . νιιι, 126. Arist. Nub. 828. εΧηΧαμαι from εΧάο). ηΧιμμαι, αΧηΧιμμαι from άΧείφω. εΧηΧυθα for ηΧνθα from εΧεύθω. άκηκοα from άκουω. ενηνοθεν from ευόθω . In Sypr/yopa a ρ is added, probably from the abbreviation of the present tense e ever is divided a — 7 reομαι, συyyίyvoμaι, avyicepav νυμι, συΧλ^ω, εμμένω, έρράπτω , συ¬ σκευάζω, make εVεyιyvόμηv, συvεyιyvόμηv, συνεκράθην , συνέλε - 7 <>r, ενέμενον , ένέρρατττον , σΐΊ/βσκει/αξον. Cbs. Verbs compounded with the particle / 7 Γ ροεφητευσα, ενεχειρουν. The imperf. of άφίημι is gene- mliy ηφιουν Thuc. 11 , 49 . because t admits of no in¬ crease q , and Herodotus, in a similar manner, prefixes the reduplication to the perfect, of μετίημι. μεμετιμενος V, 108. VI, 1* VII, 229· for μεθειμενος. The following verbs in particular receive a double f ■ I J ^ augment; ανορθοω , ηνωρθονν, €7Γηνωρθωται Dent. p. 329 , 2 . ϊνοχλεω, ηνωχΧουν Isocr. ad Phil. p. 92 . E. Demosth. p. 242, 16 . άνεχω, ηνειχόμην Thuc. V, 45. and ηνεσχόμην Id. Ill, 28. Herod. VII, 159 r . 7ταροινεω, επαρφνησεν Xen. Anab. V, 8, 4. ετταρωνηθην, ττεπαρωνηκα*. So We find δεδιρτηκα, εξεδεδήτητο Thuc. I, 132. εδ^τησα from διαιτάω. δεδιφκηκα, εδιωκησα from διοικεω. ηυτεβόλησε in Aristoph. Brunch. T. Ill, p. 219. XVII 1 (r). Η^λωσα from αναλίσκω, and δεδιηκόνηκα from διακονεω belongs to the style of the modern Attics and Atticists. The ancients wrote άναλωσα and δεδιακόνηκα, because a is long by nature, which is clear in διάκονο 9 from the Ionic διηκονος. V. §. 165 . Obs. 2 U . ✓ Obs. Sometimes in such words as these η is put for e, e. g. παρηνομησαν Thuc. hi, 67. Mschin. Ctesiph. p. 469. from ττα- ρανομεω , which ^ should be ετταρανόμησαν , since there is no simple form νομεω, or at least τταρενδμησαν. άττηλανε Isocr. ad Demonic, p. 3. E. Steph. q Fisch. II, p. 282. 478. r Piers, ad Moer. p. 176'. s Piers, ad Moer. p. 332. 1 Comp. Fisch. 11, p. 297· 300. u Valcken. Diatr. p. 278. Piers, ad Moerid. p. 122. Brunck. ad Arist. Ach. 1170. 1 an Of the Characteristic of the Tenses. The characteristic of the verb is the letter which precedes — ω in the present. Thus in λέγω, 7 is the characteristic, in τιμάω, φΐλεω, a and e. In verbs, how¬ ever, iii 7 ττίο and κτω , only the first consonant π or κ is considered as the characteristic of the verb. This is changed in the different tenses of the verb, and thus each tense has it's distinct characteristic, which is found in the termination. The characteristic, however, of the present tense in use does not appear to be always the foundation of the formation ; but frequently the more simple one, from which that in use was first formed for the sake of euphony. Thus the forms εβλάβην, εβάφη v, πράξω, ttc- rrpaya , φράσω, πεφρα^α, appear to come from the ob¬ solete present tenses βλάβω (II. r, 82. 166 .) βάφω , πρά^ω, φράΰω, instead of which only βλάπτω , βάπτω, πράσσω, φράζω have remained in use. Generally speak¬ ing, the primitive forms of the Greek verbs are probably very simple, only monosyllables and disyllables , and consisting, at the most, of four letters (it). At a very early period of the language, however, the propensity to lengthen the form of the present appeared, either in changing the short vowel of the radical syllable into the long one, or by inserting’ a consonant, or taking a double consonant instead of the simple one, e. g. φράζω, βλάπτω, άπτω, for φράΐω, βλάβω, άφω, or by lengthen¬ ing the termination ω into άω, εω, οω, είνω, ανω, &c. Some¬ times by prefixing a syllable, ΰάάσκω, from οάω, $αίω, and more frequently by uniting several sorts of this exten¬ sion. Thus from λάβω, ληβω (hence ληφομαι ) λάμβω (hence Ion. ελάμφθψ) and λαμβάνω. Many of these new forms were used only in the present and imperf. p 2 171 \ 212 Characteristic of the Tenses . whilst the rest of the tenses were taken from the radi¬ cal verb., and from verbs quite different, agreeing only in signification, as φέρω, fut. οίσω, perf. evrjvoya, clot. rjveyKa and tjveyKov. Such are properly the defective or anomalous verbs. Others, although their futures cannot be derived from the present in use, yet agree in the characteristic of the future, and in it's relation to the present; and in the formation of the rest of the tenses with many others, so that this agreement or ana¬ logy seems to constitute a rule. Thus, e. g. all verbs in — σσω or — Xp) } which have in futur. ] . — ξω , in the aor. 2. have 7 . Again, in the aor. 2. S, when the fut. 1 . has σ. These, as well as the above-mentioned βλάπτω , βάπτω, πράσσω , φράζω are assigned to the regular verbs. Such primitive but obsolete verbs, however, must be assumed only when the formation of certain tenses cannot be otherwise explained, as is the case in the above-mentioned verbs, and some others, particularly those in — σσω ( — ττω) and ζω. We should, for instance, misapply the observation, if we derived such futures as τνφω , κτ€νώ, βάλω , ΟΓ aorists, as ετάκην , ελιπον , ελαθον , from obsolete forms τυπω, φανώ , κτενω, βάλω, τάκω, λιπω, λάθω. Since φανώ , κτενω, βάλω are derived, according to the regular formation of verbs with λ μ v p. The future τυφω could have no other form, even if it came imme¬ diately from τύπτω , not τνπω. For the r is always omitted before σ in the future . The aorists ετάκην , ελιπον, ελαθον are formed according to the general rule, that the aor. 2. as it is called, always changes the radical syllable into a short one; and, where this is not practica¬ ble, abbreviates the form by another method, as in verbs in μι imperf. ετίθην 3 aor. 2. εθην. The supposition of obsolete forms is therefore necessary only in verbs in — σσω ( — ττω) and —ζω, and in some in — πτω, of which we shall speak in the futur. 1 . and 2 . I 213 \ Characteristic of the Tenses . The change of the characteristic letter in the for¬ mation of the tenses is as follows. Those which have in the present, have in the fut. perf. aor. 1. pass. βπφ(πτ) Ψ Φ Φ Θτ > ν Ύ κ X ( κηΓ > Ύ κ > σκ ) ? X χθ*ΐ ν · Ohs . If κ is accompanied by a consonant, both consonants are considered only as a simple κ. Verbs in - σκω have, there¬ fore, in the fut. — ξω, e. g. θνήσκω, διδάσκω, άΚυσκω, fut. θνηξω, διδάξω, άλνξω . evrji 'οχα from eveyw is similar. •δ θ τ ζ σσ ττ % verba pura βω, άω, όω λ μ V Ρ σ κ σθην l x } χθην σ κ I σθην σ κ θην, σθην ω κ θην. i ϊ :* αοιΙΤ V Λ\ Λ I Formation of the Tenses. The characteristic of the present is retained with- 172 . I ■’. Ί ,· 9 , ' 1 1 , 1 Λ j * · 3 * · ■ v ( out change in the Imperfection, which is formed by changing the active termination — ω into — ov, and the passive — ομαι into —and pre¬ fixing the augment, τύπτω, τύπτομαι, βτνπτον, βτνπτ ο- μην, τ'ικτω, — ομαι, βτικτον, —ο μην. Obs. 1. The Ionians and Dorians use a peculiar augment, which consists in the termination, in which case the propei augment is omitted,— σκον, e. g. βασκβ, είασκβ II. λ, 330. δάμνασκβ Horn . Η. in Ven. 25 1. πβμπεσκε Her . νιι, 106. μβ- τβΐίβαίνεσθε ib. 41. ω becomes o, e. g. δόσκβν II. σ , 546. So I 214 Formation of the Tenses . \ also in the passive, ττοιεεσκετο Herod . yn, 119 . βαΧλεσκετο, ix, 74. It is used also by Sophocles Antig . 963. TretiWe*. 05s. 2. A modern writers 21 y . (R) form of the third person plur. occurs in the — οσα v for ov. e. g. εετχάζοσα v Lycophr. Alex, The Future . The termination of the future appears originally to have been the same throughout, — εσω from — ω. Thus we find yet ο’λεσω from ο\ω, αρέσω from άρω ζ . If we were to derive these futures from verbs in eo», ολεω, άρεω, we must, at the same time, assume, that these more extended forms of the present tenses were afterwards expressed by the shorter forms άρω , οΧω ; which is con¬ trary to analogy, as the forms in — εω first arose from those in — ω , and gradually supplanted the shorter ones. There is, indeed, another form of μάχομαι , viz. μαχεομαι IL a', 272. 344. But μαχεσομαι is probably from μάχομαι , as αιΰεσομαι from αίρομαι IL a, 331. e, 531. κ , 234. not from the more recent word αίρομαι. The primitive form — εσω underwent a double change; partly on account of euphony, and partly to distinguish by different forms two senses of a word, in some words e, in others σ was rejected. In words whose character¬ istic is p, Homer usually observes the first form, άρσω } αρσαι IL a, 136. διαφθερσει IL v y 625. but Herodotus VIII, x Fisch. ii, p. 340. * Fisch. n, p. 336 . z apeacu II. i , 120. τ', 138. άρεσομαι and on account of the verse αρεσσομαι II. δ , 36 2. 526. Od. Θ' , 402. signifies, ί to make a friend of any one, to conciliate\ Again, άρω , ‘ to adapt, to join together’, makes αρσω, αρσαι . But that the two are only different forms of the same word, is shewn not only by their kindred sense, but by the word αρθμός , derived from apca and α^εσω, as also eVl rjpa Χεσ a, ολεσε Od. v , 431. οΧεσειε, οΧεσαι, οΧεσας) is also used by him and Herodotus under another form όΧεω, Herod, vhi, 138. lx, 18. particularly in the middle, οΧεομαι II. o , 700. <£', 133. 278. and contracted, as in Attic, οΧεϊται 11 . β' , 325. >/, 91. Od ω', 195. In the same manner yάμω (y ημω) makes in the future yaμεσσετaι II. i, 394. for yaμεσετaι, and y αμεεσθαι Od. d, 275. as in the active y αμεειν. Od. d, 521. in Attic yaμeiσθaι. See Ind. Eurip. Prom άρω we find the proper form of the future with the derivative form άρεσω, in the sense, ' to conciliate’, and αρσω , ' to annex, to fit’. The traces also of the other derivative forms άρεω, αρω, are left in αρηρε, αραρε , ηραρε. Verbs, whose characteristic is μ v , have regularly the other form, which also latterly became peculiar to the Ionians. μενεο>, νεμεω, whence άνανεμεεται Herod. I, 173. Yet κενσαι occurs in II. ψ', 337- and θερμάνσει is found in Hippocrates T. i, p. 599. unless it should rather be 216 Formation of the Tenses . Θβρμανββι, as πημανβει Horn. H. Apoll. n, 84. which might have arisen from the confusion of C and e\ The first form remained peculiar to the ZEolians, and hence the Grammarians call αρσαι, κνρσαι in Homer, .ZEolic ; the seconds which rejects the σ, was chiefly pe¬ culiar to the Ionians and Attics, both of whom, the latter regularly, contract εω into ώ. The Attics do this ex¬ clusively in verbs whose characteristic is λ μ v p; in the rest they have for the most part σ, but in the futures in εσω, ασω, όσω, ίσω, they very frequently reject σ and contract the remainder, e. g. καλώ, ελώσι, 6μοΰμαι, οίκτιώ, for καλεσω, ελάσουσι, ομόσομαι, οίκτίσω. See §. 178. In the last form — ιώ for — ίσω the contraction could > not take place if the future had not originally been ιεσω ; but οίκτίζω , οικτιζβσω after rejecting the which is too nearly related to the σ, gives οίκτιεσω, οίκτιεω , οίκτιώ . In the same manner μάχομαι makes in the fut. μαχεσομαι and ( μαχεομαι ) μαχονμαι. The change of the original form — εσω is yet more evident in άμφιεσω, άμφιώ Art - stoph. Equ. 891. In this manner, from the original form of the future ~εσω, which remained only in some verbs, two new forms in — σω and εω, ώ, arose; the latter of which was used chiefly in verbs whose characteristic was λμνρ, the former in the rest. The former is generally deno¬ minated th efutur. 1 . the other also is the fut . 1 . in verbs, whose characteristic is λ μ v p, in the rest, th efutur. 2(r). Futurum 1 . . S * _ ? · \ >. . , In changing the termination of the fut. — εσω into — σω, the consonants immediately preceding are changed according to the common rule: viz. a Valcken. ad Herod, p, 621 , 58 extr. Formation of the Tenses. Hl'i S θ τ ζ are omitted before σ according to §. 39 * and the remaining consonants β π φ y κ χ are united with the σ following in the double consonants ψ and ξ, e. g. κρύπτω , κρυπτεσω , κρύψω, α·γω, άξω, πλέκω, πλέξω, yy makes y%, e. g. λiyyω, λίγξω. If v precedes $ θ τ ζ it is thrown out, but that the syllable may remain long, i is inserted after ε (§. * 39 .) e. g. σπενίω, σπείσω, πενθώ (hence πεπονθα) πείσω — ομαι. In this, however, particularly in the characteristic ζ, σσ, TT, usage must be attended to; since many verbs of this kind are formed in a different manner in the fu¬ ture, e.g. 1 . £ becomes a) ξ in αίάζω , άλαλάζω , άλαπαζω, βρίζω, y ρύζω, ΰάίζω II. β ', 416. εyyvaλίζω, εναρίζω II. α, / 191. κράζω, οίμωζω, ολολύζω, πολεμίζω, στάζω, στενάζω , στηρίζω, στίζω, στυφελίζω, σφύζω, τρίζω. Note. The original form of many of these verbs was proba¬ bly — yω, — κω, — γω, e. g. κρά^γω, o\μωyω, ολο- λύyω, στάyω, as we may conclude from the aor. £. eKpayov , and from the derivative forms oιμωyt 7, ολο- λυyη, στατ/ων . From στενάζω comes another form στενάχω , which occurs II. ω , 639 * Aristoph . Ach. 549. In others, probably — ξω in the Doric, or rather the old Greek form, which afterwards was softened into — σω in some verbs only: for the use of ξω for σω remained peculiar to the Doric dialect. V. §. 178. b) The following have ξ and σ: αρπάζω, in the Poets αρπάξω, in Attic άρπάσω. παίζω , παίξω, in Attic παίσω* > and some others, in which — ξω is the ancient, — σω the later softened form, συρίζω or σνρίττω make συρίσω in Lucian Harmon . p . 140 . commonly σνρίξω. In the formation of the rest of the tenses of αρπάζω sometimes * Ad Phryn. p* 47 . Timaei Lex. Plat. p. 222. 218 Formation of the Tenses. one form, sometimes the other is the basis, e. g. perf. ηρπακα , ηρπασμαι. aor. 1 . ηρπάσθην, more rarely ηρπά- χθην^. Fut. άρπαχθησομαι, more rarely άρπασθησομαι. aor. 2 P. rjpirayrjv, but rarely in Attic. Note.' Many forms in ζω are probably only those in αω, βω, οω, lengthened, e. g. βιάζω from βιάω, of which βιη- σεται, βιησατο, occur in Homer, βιηθβί 9 in Herodo¬ tus, vii, 83. c τωζω from σωω, σαόω in Homer. c) The following have 7 ξ: πλάζω, κλάζω, σαλπίζω, which last, however, has more frequently σαλπίσω. In these ζ is put instead of 77, which again is made long, as appears from the aor. 2 . of κλάζω, eicXayov Eurip. Iphig. A. 1062 . Theocr. xvii, 71 . 175. 2. σσ and tt are considered a) as 7 κ χ, and have usually ξ in the future. The greater number are derived from verbs in — κω or — χω, e. g. φρίσσω from φρίκω , whence φρίκη, σφάττω or σφάζω aor. 2. βσφάyηv. ταράσσω from ταράχω. b) Verbs in — σσω ( — ττω) are considered merely as lengthened forms of verbs pure, and hence they make in the fut. σω , e.g. άρμοττω ΟΓ αρμόζω , αρμόσω, πλάσ¬ σω, πλασω. 'ιμασσω, ιμάσω. πάσσω, πάσω. Thus βρβσσω appears to come from ύρβω, βρω (whence ύρύθω, ύρβθίζω), and has in the fut. βπβσω Od. μ , 444 c . λίσσομαι comes from λίτομαι Horn. H. xvi, 5 . and has also in the fut. λίσομαι Od. K, 526. ■ ■·» 4 I » ; 1 , m ^ » * ·' rjt 176 . 3 · Verbs pure, vyhose final syllable — ω is preceded by a diphthong, undergo no change in the future, besides the assumption of σ. ακούω, ακούσω, σβίω, σβίσω. παύω, παυσω. Those in βω, άω, όω, ύω receive the long vowel bb Moeris, p. 1S2. Thom. M. p. 424. et Hemst. . e Fisch. 11 , p. 329 sq. I ' Formation of the Tenses. <4iy / \ instead of the short one, before the σ, or rather «σω, — εάσω, — εόσω are changed, as in the augment, into _ ησω and ωσω. Hence φιλεω, φιλήσω, τιμάω, τιμήσω, χρυσοω, χρνσωσω . The following, however, are excep- tions: εω makes a) εσω in τελεω, αρκεω , ζεω, ακεομαι, άλεω, εμίω, νεικεω. Fut. τελεσω, άρκεσω, ξεσω, άκεσομαι , άλεσω, ίμέσω, immaw. Some, which are comprehended under this head, come from verbs in — ω, as όλεσω, αρέσω, aiSe- σομαι, from ολω, αρω, αίρομαι. See §. 173. and probably these futures are from the primitive forms τελώ, αρκώ (from the perf. act. ηρκα of the verb αρω) ακομαι, α\ω, ίμω, velKw, instead of which the long forms afterwards came into use. b) Some have — εσω and —ησω, because there were two forms in the present tense, each of which had it s future; one of the forms, however, is always more used than the other, κάλεω, αινεω in Attic, have commonly καλεσω, αϊνεσω. ( Schaefer . ad Long . P . 395.), $εω, ποθεω, πονεω, have more commonly Ιησω, ποθήσω (ποθεσω II. d, 219 . Herod. IX, £2. Lysias , p. 314. R.) πονησω ; ησω is generally the Attic form of futures, from ω. Vid. §. 173. Obs. 2. c) Some in — εω have in the future — ευσω. θεω, ‘Inin*; i/ew/Iswim’; (Hemst. ad Luc. T. 11 , p.368.) πλέω, ‘ I sail·; πνέω, ‘I blow’; ρεω, ‘ I flow’; χεω, ‘ I pour’. These futures are probably from the -ZEolo-Doric dialect, in which the digamma was often expressed by v, to distin¬ guish them from θησω, fut. from τίθημι , νησω from νεω , νηθω, ‘ I spin’; πληθω, ‘ I fill’; πλησω. ρεω, I speak’, ρησω. χ^ζω, χεσω. άω has a) άσω in verbs whose final syllable is pre- 177. ceded by the vowels e and 1 , or the consonants λ and p, 78. '220 Formation of the Tenses . which rule was laid down also for substantives of the first declension, §. 87. Thus εάσω, μειδιάσω, γελάσω, δρά¬ σω, θλασω, κλασω, from εάω, μειδιάω, γελάω, δράω, θλάω, κλαω. Also κρεμάω, κρεμάσω. The following are excepted: χράω, χράόμαι, χρήσω, ομαι, ταλάω, τλάω, τλησω. Verbs which have ο before the final —άω, are generally formed in —ησω, as βοήσω, ά\οήσω (although Thorn. Mag. p. 35. prefers άλοάσω) . άκροαομαι, however, has άκροάσομαι on account of the P " V. 4 _* · t . . i . , Note. The Ionians often put η, e. g. 7 τερησω, as the Do¬ rians universally put a, e.g. βοάσω, τιμάσω; b) καίω, κλαίω. Att. κάω, κλάω . have — αυσω. ;r (1 j j * (< > {■ ■ όω makes o'™ in verbs which are not derivative, όμόω (ομυυμϊ) όμοσω, άροω , αρόσω, όνοω (όνότω, όνοτάζω) όί'όσω. — ομαΤ. * ‘ " . , ■?*'*. y { 1 *' <*·. j / ; /V * . ,Χ - , , / Abie. The α of the fut. is long after a vowel, and p ; but shoiit after λ, e. g. εγελασε. ασω, ίσω , ύσω from verbs m άζω, ίζω, νζω are short. The Poets, in order to make a, i, v, long, double the < 7 , ε*γελασσε. Observations. 1. The Dorians regularly made the vowel long before the final — σα>, but instead of σσ they put ξ, εγελαξε Theocr. xx, 1. εφθαζα, id. 11 , 115. where 114. εφθάσε used to be read, tva/ife Find. P. 10, 94. instead of which we find ib. II, 36.' ε κνίσε ; for δνυμαξεν Find . Pyth. 11, 10. in ταντιάξαισα ibid . 8, 13. εκομίξαν ib. 2, 3l f . Where the vowel is already long by nature, this does not take place. In Hesiod . Άσττ. 202. κιθά- ριζεν is a corrupt reading tor κιθάρΐζεν · ) ' d Fisch. 11 , p. 320 sq. e Fig^ TI> p. ; f Koen. ad Greg. p. 151. Maitt. p. 215 sq. Fisch. 1 , }. 32 6 . , 32 i 221 Formation of the Tenses. 2. The lonians, and especially the Attics, contract the futures in α<χω with a short, ε(τω, ktu), οοίο } by throwing out σ', and making the vowels which meet together coalesce. a) — dcco. ε£ελω for ε^ελαο"ω Aristoph· Nub. 123. ελαν Eurip. Bacch. 1332. Med. 326. έλα Soph . Aj. 505. ελωσι for έχάσουσι Herod. I, 207 . Eurip. Ale. 951. έξελώι> for έξελασωε Herod lv, 148. Thus σκεϋά JEsch. Prom. 25. 124. ύιασκΐόφ Herod, viii, 68 g . > k I . · . i ' 1 ■ *· ' f - ■ * - ■ * v — βσω. kclXw for KaXecrco Aristopli . Ach. 968. Hence ira ρακαΧουντας for — KciXecrovTcis Xen. Hist · Gv, vi, 3, 2. μαχρισθαι for μαχέ<τεσ0αι Thuc. v, 66 h . c) — ' σω . κομιευμβθα Herod, viii, 62. άτρβμιβιν ib . 68. kcltclttXovticiv id. vi, 132. acKprivLU) JEsch. Prom,· 227. yew- Tepiovvrwv Thuc. in, 4, 11. αιη-οίκτιουνταν. χαριεισθβ id. iii 5 40. α*γωι ιιονμενοι id, HI, 104. κατακοντιβι Herod, ix, 17* / LCLKCtpieiv ib. 93. προΧοχιοοντας Thuc. ill. 110. 7τρο7Π?λακίωι/ id. vi, 54. παραχορδιβΐς Arist. Feel . 295 1 . d) — ό<χω. ομονμαι , ομ€ΐ> ομβιται for ομοσομαι . ωσω also is contracted in a similar manner, e. g. eXeuOepovcri Thuc . n, 8 . eXevOcpov ι/τβ 9 id.»iv, 85. βρημοντβ id. m, 58. οικαονντας id. vi, 23. 3. Many barytone verbs (§. 194.) are frequently formed by the Attics and Ionians, like contracted verbs , by changing — ω into ησω. βαΧΧησομ€ v Aristoph. Vesp. 222. ΰεησομαι from δέομαι, διΰασκη- (tcu Hesiod, epy. 64 . Horn. H. in Cer. 143. Pind. Pyth. iv, 086 · Acaflei^VoMei/ Xen. Cyrop. v, 3, 35. κΧαιησβι, κΧαιησαν Be - rwos^. p. 440. 546. 980. Of μέλλω the only tense in use is μεΧΧησω. Thus also μελώσει from μέλει, c it concerns', νβμησω from 1 /εμ.ω in Thom. M. p. 624. Phryn. p. 202. See Schaef. ad § Brunck. ad Arist. Ran. 298. Soph. (Ed. T. 138. Piers, ad Moer. p. 124 sq. Maitt. p. 47 sq. Thom. M. p. 293. Fiseh. n, p. 357 sq. h Brunck. ad Arist. Ran. 298. Dawes Misc. Cr. p. 77* Piers, ad Moer. p. 17. 2l6\ 276 . Fisch. 1. c. 4 Piers, ad Moer. p. 106’. Fisch. 1 , p, 208. 11 , p. 354. Maitt. p. 46 sq. Formation of the Tenses. Long. p. 36 B. οζησει Arist. Vesp. 1059. οίησομαι is the only future in use from οιομαι. So also οιχησομαι. παθησω Flat. Rep. i, p. 189· τταιησω Arist. Nub. 1125. 7 ταρακαθιζησόμένος Plat. Lys. p. 219· Euthyd. p. 18. τυτττησω Arist. Plut . 21. χαιρησω It. v, 363. Arist. Plut. 64. Plat. Phil. p. 229 k . Hence also βονΧησομαι, άΧεξησω, εψησω * 1 ; and then the long vowel or diphthong in the penultimate was often changed into the short vowel, as Χηθω Χαθησω, re υχω τυχησω. Probably this foim was occasioned by the custom of the lonians, of lengthening many verbs in ω , by substituting the termination εω. The lonians for instance, said μαχεομαι, ο"νμβαΧΧεομαι , ριτττεω (which re¬ mained also in the Attic dialect) πιεζεω (whence Ίτιεζευμενοι. Wessel. ad Herod, vm, 142.). What might regularly take place in some verbs, was afterwards transferred by custom to others also, with¬ out implying the necessity or utility of considering every future in j /σω, as having for its basis a present in — -εω. In the same manner there are many aorists and perf. in —— YjOvjv, —yjkcl from verbs whose future is in ·— εσω or co m . 179- In verbs whose characteristic is λ μ v p, the lonians generally, and the Attics exclusively, use the other form eo>, contr. ώ. In this case, however, the penultima, which was long in the present, is always made short, probably because the tone then rested chiefly on the last syllable; thus η was changed into «, cu, ei , ov into a, e, o, ev, into v. If the penultima be long by position , i. e. by two consonants following the short vowel, the latter of them is rejected. Thus στελλω, ψάΧΧω, fut. στελεω, yjsaXea), στελώ, \jsaXaj. τβμνω , τε/χω. αίρω , άρώ. κτβίνω, κτει/ω. σπείρω, σττερώ. In the same manner the doubtful vowels which were long in the present, become short in the future, κρϊνω 3 κρίνω , άμΰνω, άμυνω. Obs. 1. The ε which thus arises from the abbreviation is often changed into a in disyllables, because ε in the rapidity k Brunck. ad Arist. Lysistr. 459. 1 Herm. de em. Gr. p. 2 67 sq. 272. Herod. Herm, p. 315. sq. m Primisser p. 27 f. Formation of the Tenses. 223 of pronunciation becomes more indistinct, and approaches nearer in sound to a or o. Thus κτείνω besides κτενώ makes also κτανεω , — ώ, Ιί· σ , 309. τέμνω , τεμώ Flat. Cratyl. ρ. 237. and ταμώ. ΰιαφθείρω makes διαφθερώ Eurip. Med. 1051, fyc. and $ ιαφθαρεω Herod, vm, 108. ix, 42. This is com¬ monly called th efuturum secundum. Comp. §. 188. 2. Ohs. 2. The form σω occurs sometimes in the Attic Poets, in the Chorusses, e. g. κεΧσω Eurip. Hec. 1048. (hence εισεκεΧ- σαμεν Arist. Thesm. 877.) ορσεις Soph. Antig. 1060. The Dorians used the circumflex in the future, in 180 — σω ( — £α>, — φω), in the active and middle, άσώ Theocr. i, 145. καρυξώ Aristoph, Ach. 748. φασώ ih. 739. πειρασειθε 743. ΎρυΧΧιζειτε 746. ησειτε 747 D . That this circumflexed termination implied a contraction, is pro¬ bable from the other form κεισευμαι Theocr. 111 , 53. %σευ- μαι ih. 38. and still more from the Ionic πεσεομαι, πεσεεται, πεσεεσθαι II. λ', 823. ι', 235. μ , 107. Herod.y ir, 163. vm, 130, $c. This Doric form moreover is used by the Attics in some verbs, as 7 τεσεϊσθαι AEsch. Agam. 334. Choeph. 884. Soph . Aj. 641. Eurip. Med. 986 . Bacch. 611 . πΧευ- σουμαι Demosth. p. 1222. πΧευσουμενους Thuc. IV, 13. VII, 64 . Plat. Hipp. Min. p. 213. 214. γεσοΰμαι from χεζω, νευσοίνμαι from νεω Xenoph. Anab. IV, 3, 12. κΧαυσονμεθα from κΧαίω Arist. Pac. 1081. φευξεΊται Arist. Plut. 496°. On the other hand, the Attics said έπομαι, πίομαι , instead of εδουμαι from e$co, e l eat"; Ίτιονμα i from 7 ταυ, πίνω, c \ drink". But these are more probably present tenses, which were used in a future sense, like εΊμι , since the first syllable of πίομαι is usually long p . Under n Maitt. p. 219 sq. Fisch. Π, ρ. 36o. 0 Btunck. ad Eurip. Hipp. 1104. Arist. Ran. 1221. Fisch. 11 , p. 428. p Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 2 76 . Schweigh. ad Athen. v, p. 497· cf. Moeris p. 322. Thom. M. p. 265. 716. Brunck. ad Arist. Eel. 595. Valck. ad Theocr. 111 , 53. Formation of the Tenses,- this head may also be reckoned φάγομαι , used by later - writers. 181 . From the future active is derived immediately t » · ' ■ l ' . ·. ''···. . 4 ’ . : * ; f * · ·* , . · # t » ’·*· ; ' > · · * \ . jf 1. The Future Middle, ' by changing the termination —to into — ομαι , — ώ into ουμαι, e. g. τυψω, τυψομαι, νεμώ, νεμουμαι. Obs. this form of the future in — ομαι and ουμαι is used by the Attics in some verbs, instead of the fut. act. as dy νοησο- μαι, Ζζομαι, άττολαυσομαι , ασομαί, βοησομαι, ^ραμουμαι Xen. Anab. νιι, 3, 45. ακουσομαι, θηρασομαι, κλαυσομαι, κλεψομαι Xen. Cyr . νιι, 4, 13. οιμώζομαι, ομουμαι, fyc. the fut. act. of which seldom or never occurs* 1 . \ It is frequently used also by the Attics for the fut. pass. e. g. τιμησεται for τιμηθησεται. v. Syntax. 182. From the future act. is also derived, / > l . s f r Γ f f * · ft * i Jj \\ i 211 a *v> · *. f 2. The Aoristus l. Active , • . * v by changing ω into a, and prefixing the augment, e. g. τυψω, ίτυψα. ’ . · , β . ...... . <>/·’. 1\τ$ϊ: Λ· In verbs in λω, — μω, — ιό >,—ρω the short vowel of the penultima is again made long, by changing e into the diphthong ei, as στελώ, εστειλα, νεμώ, ενειμα, μενώ, €μεινα, σττερώ, εσττειρα. at and a of the present, which are made short in the future, are changed into η, ψάλλω, ψαλώ, εψηλα, φανώ, ίφηνα, except αίρω, which makes ηρα (on account of the augment) άραι , άρας, i and υ also are again made long in the aorist; ετΐλα, ημϋνα* . Verbs in αίνω for the most part receive in the aorist η instead of the a of the future, in the Ionic and Attic q rhom · Μ · P· 7. Moeris p. 184. Fisch. n, p. 321. r Fisch. ii, p. 3 75 . Formation of the Tenses. 225 dialect,, e. g. ονομηνω H. /3', 488. ®. 141. εκάθηρε Herod. I, 35. Thus also εσημηνα , ερρύπηνα, 8$C. S a , how¬ ever, is sometimes found also in Attic, e. g. εκοίλαναν Thuc. iv, 100. εσημανε Xenoph. Hist . Gr. π, l, 28. And the verbs which have p before — αίνω, retain the a, at least amongst the Attics, e. g. εΰφράυαιμι Soph. Aj. 469. εΰυσχερανα Plato Epist. VII, p. 95. Isocr. p. 27 5. A. cWe- TTpCL'yCLTO Plat. Phcedr. p. 357. Prot. p. 95. See Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. 856. Also amongst the Ionians, e. g. ζηράντι II. φ , 347. εμαρανε H. ΐϊΐ MeVC. 140. But these have also frequently the η, as κρηηυου, τετρηνε II. χ, 39β. εύφρηνε II. ω , 102. Note. This η is more correctly written without the i sub - scriptum , because it comes from a in the future, not from cu in the present tense. Obs. 1. Some verbs, which had σ in the future, lose it in the aor. 1. e. g. χεω , χευσω , εχευα, II. y , 270. e, 314. Θ, 50. and εχεα (to distinguish it from εχεσα from χ^ω) II £ j> 419* σ, 347. particularly in Attic. To this we must refer εσενα in Homer II. ε\ 208. λ, 147. ήΚενατο II. v, 184. 404 fyc. from αΚεομαι αΚευομα t II. n r, 711 1 · Obs. 2. The Dorians and Ionians annex also to the aor. 1. — σκον, instead of the proper augment, e. g. αύδήσασκε II. ε , 786. $ασάσκετο II. t, 333 u . Obs. 3. Some verbs in —assume in the aor. 1. a mode of formation different from that of the future, as βασταζω, fut. β αστασω, aor . εβαστάχθην as if from βασταζω. From the aorist. l. act. is derived, The Aorist. l. Middle , by adding — μην, ενειμα, ενειμάμη v } ετνφα , ^τνψαμην. ' s Thom. Mag. p. 367. Moeris p. 137- Phrynich. p. 10. Fisch. ii, p. 377. t Fisch. ii, p. 377. u Fisch · ll > P· 341 · 3 ? 4 · VOL. I. Q 226 Formation of the Tenses . Prom the Future is derived, . 11 c ' f t k fiA ' ; ·* l t 3. The Perfect l. or Active, which receives the reduplication, and the proper termi¬ nation of which is — κα from — σω, e. g. όλεσω, ο\ω\εκα ; this termination remains in all verbs, which have άσω, εσω, ησιο, ωσω and όσω in the future, e. g. σεσωκα Xen . Anah. V, 6, 18. ττεττεικα lb. VI, 4, 14. 7 τεφρακα ISOCV · ad Phil.p. ιοί A. Also for the most part in verbs in λω and ρω. If, however, the future ends in — ξω or — ψω, the perfectum ends in — χα and — φα (properly fut. ·γσω, κσω, χσω, perf. 7 /ca, χκα, fut. βσω, ττσω, φσω, perf. βκα , Ίτκα } φκα , in which, however, κ had the force of an aspi¬ rate, and was omitted after changing the preceding lene. This is evident from the conjugation of the perf. pass. §. 184.), and verbs in — μω and — νω in forming the perf. presuppose either a fut. in — ησω and make ηκα, or change the v before κ , or reject it. The following are more precise rules. 1 Disyllable verbs in — \ω and — ρω change ω into κα, and e of the fut. into a. στεΧΧω, στεΧώ, εσταΧκα. / *» , i ... * σπείρω, σττερω, εσπαρκα. ίΓ είρω, περώ, πεπαρκα. Polysylla¬ bles, on the contrary, retain e, e. g. ά 77 ε'λλω, « 77 εΧώ, $77 ελκα. 2. Verbs in — ίνω, — ννω and — είνω throw away v before κ, and retain the short vowel of the fut. which, however, in verbs in εινω is changed into α. κρίνω, κρίνω , κεκρικα , τείνω, τενώ, τετακα, κτείνω, κτενω , εκτακα, πλννω, 7τλ ννω, πεπΧνκα*. According to this analogy also χεω changes εν of the fut. χενσω into v , κεχνκα Polyb . v, 84 (r). In other verbs εν — -*-- —ft _ . — Π- ! x Fisch. n, p. 36 J. Formation of the Tenses. 227 . 7 Γ €Tr\evK€ Xen. An. vu, 6, l. from πλέω, remains,, e. g 7 Γλει/σω. Verbs in α/ι/ω change before /c into γ. φαίνω, φανώ, 7 Γ€φαγκα, Dinarch. Ρ> 40. 44. Reisk. μιαίνω , μιανω, με- μ lay κ a Plutarch . Τ. Gracch. 21 . 3 . In some few verbs the original form of the fut. βσω appears to be the basis, in which case the ε before /c is changed into ο. αγω, αγεσω (α£ω), >/γεκα, ayijyeKa , and after changing κ into the aspirate χ, αγ^γοχα, Dor. αγαγοχα. Plusc]. p. Gwayayo^eia' in the inscription in Gruter ccxvi. col. 2. 1 . 9 · ccxvii. col. 1 . 1 . 12 . Hence the form άγ^οχα Demosth. pro. coron. p. 238. ult. 249, 18. for which ηχα is the more common Attic form y . Thus also εδα>, ε$εσω, ηδεκα, ε$η$εκα ( Pass . ε$η$εσμαι Vld. §. 223.) and eStj&oica 1 . This change of e into o takes place also in ενηυοχα from ει/εγκω, ει/εγξω, (jiveyxa and ηνεχα) Isocr. Arch. p. 128. D. 132. E \ So agafn κλεπτω, κλεφω, κΕκλοφα. τρέπω , τρέψω, τετροφα Arist. Nub. 858. De¬ mosth. pro. cor. p. 324, 27 . JEschin. in Tim. p. 179. Ctesiph. p. 545 . ( τετροφα from τρέφω Od. ψ', 237- in a middle sense) λέγω, λε£ω, λελοχα or είλοχα Demosth. p. 328, 11 . 522, l2 b , and even before two consonants. πέμπω , πεμψω , πεπομφα. Note. For τετροφα from τρεπω we find also τετραφα D inarch, in Demosth. p. 23. 73. 93 c . y Thom. M. p. 274. Moeris p. 147- Fisch. n, p. 311. z Piers. ad Moerid. p. 221. Fisch. 1. c. hi, a. p. 78. a Fisch. in, a. p. 69. 190. Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 275. b Thom. M. p. 322. et ibi Hemsterh. Fisch. n, p. 368 sq. c On τέτρυφα and τετραφα from τρέπω v. Toup. ad Longin. p. 339- Cf. Sluiter Lect. Andoc. p. 157· who is not acquainted with'these forms: Q 2 ·*£& Formation of the Tenses . A similar change appears to have taken place in the Iono-Doric ΧεΧο·γχα from (λ^χω) Χά^γχω, ( Χα*γχάνω ) ana¬ logous to Χηβω, Χάμβω, Χαμβάνω. Thus πεποσχε for πόπασχε in Etym. M. p. 662, 11. from Epicharmus. In the same manner ετραπον and τροπή, εστάΧην, and στόΧος , €$ραμον and $ρόμος are related to one another. In some nearly obsolete forms e in the radical sylla¬ ble of the verbs is changed into o and ω, e. g. from εχω comes όχεύς, όχη, and instead of this with the Attic re¬ duplication (§. 168. Obs. 2.) όκωχη, which refers to the form of the perf. οκωχα from εχω, εζω, εχα, οχα, ώχα, οκωχα. Hence apparently is derived σννοκωχότε or συνο - χωκότε in Homer II. β', 218. for συνεχοντε d . Comp, άωτο §. 185., 1. and είωθα §. 189- Obs. 3. · - . · · J ·. . t . ·; 'v, i;.· |·; In the same manner et is changed into ot in δεδοικα from δίω, δείω, δείσω* . * “ In some the diphthong is made short, e. g. άΧηΧιφα from αΧειφω (Pass. αΧηΧιμμαι). I % · 4. As the perfect, in some verbs presupposes a fut. έσω, so verbs in — μω and — νω particularly pre¬ suppose a fut. — ησω, and change ώ into ηκα, e. g. νέμω, νενεμηκα, μένω, μεμενη /ca. δραμώ Herod. VIII, 55. δεδράμηκα id. νιιι, 102. to which the Grammarians add also βρεμώ , βεβρεμηκα , τρέμω, τετρεμηκα. So from δαίω ΟΓ δάω comes the perf. δεδάηκα , as from the fut. δαησω; (v. §. 178. Obs. 3.) from ρύω (another form for ρεύω, as σεύω, σύω) ερρνηκα Plat. Rep . VI, p. 72 f , from χαίρω, κεχάρηκα II. η, 312 . κεχαρημενοι, κεχάρητο Hes. Scut. 65. Some suffer syn- d Valck. ad Ammon, p. 23. .- e Herrn. de em. Qr, Gr. p. 275. Fisch. in, a. p. 6'9. f Fisch. hi, a. p. 166. / Formation of the Tenses. &AJ cope, as βα\ω, βεβληκα for βεβάληκα. δεμώ, δεδμ^κα, δε- δμημαι II. ζ, 245. (which must not be confounded with δεδμ^μαι from δαμάω or δα'μι/ω) κάμνω, καμώ, κεκμηκα (κεκά- μηκα). τέμνω , τεμω, τετμηκα. Of the same kind is yeypa- φηκα. (See Bast. Lettre Crit. p. 200 g . In these perfects the futures in — ησω, βάλησω, ΰραμησω, μενησω are presup¬ posed, which, however, were hardly in use, any more than the forms of the present μευεω, ΰραμεω, which some assume. 5. Generally, η and ε in the fut. and perf. are fre¬ quently interchanged, δε'ω has in the fut. δησω, aor. l. ε$ησα, but perf. δε'δεκα 11 . Again κάλεω has commonly in the fut. καλεσω ; but in the perf. κεκληκα by syncope for κεκάληκα. In the same manner αινεω, αινεσω , ηνέκα, perf . pass, γνημαι, and μενβτεος ThllC. II, 88. from μεμενηται. ενρεθην from ευρηται. 6 . Some verbs take ω before κ , instead of > 7 , e. g. μεμβλωκε for μεμό\ηκε, where β is put between μ and λ, as in μεσημβρία §. 43. Οίχωκα in Herodotus and Soph. Aj. 896 . from οίχομαι, οιχησομαι , for όιχηκα. In the same manner Zppwya in the perf. 2. §. 189^ 3. 7. In some verbs pure and in φύω the Ionians, and iEolians also, reject /c in the perf. in which case η either remains unchanged, or becomes a or ε, accord¬ ing as it was derived from a or ε in the present. Both take place in the particip. εστηως Hesiod. Theog. 519. and ύσταως II. β\ 170. from στάω, ίστημι, 'ίσταμαι. In κεκαφηως, τετιηως, τετΧηως , τεθνηως , κεκμηως Thuc. Ill, 59· η remains, but in βεβαως (βεβηκως from /3αω, βαίνω) μεμαως , δεδαω§ (δεδο ιηκως) a only is used. —— αως, αος, e Fisch. i, p. 88. n, p. 366. Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 274, 275. 290. t Thom. M. p. 200. 230 Formation of the Tenses. and — ηως, — ηός are then often contracted into ώ ?, fie- βως Eurip. Pheen. 2. έστω? Thuc. hi, 9· iv, 10. Soph. (Ed. T. 633. in which case the Ionians and Attics often insert e before ω , e. g. iarews, εστεώτο? 8$c. Herod, v, 92 . b 102. τεθνεως, ώτο? Herod. 1 , 112 . Aristoph. Nub. 780. > Thuc. m, 104. 109 . iv, 38. Xen Anab. vi, 1 , 6. Isocr. Archid. p. 120 . C. Except in the participle, η is always changed into a, and when two a come together, one is rejected, not contracted with the other, except in the third person plur. perf. ind. βεβ ασ< Eurip. Rh. 689 . τεθ- νάσι Thuc. hi, 113 . What verbs suffer this change must be learnt by practice * 1 . Obs. The feminine of the participle, which is otherwise— v7a, takes the form — ώσα, by reason of these changes, e. g. βεβώσα , εστώσα. In the Poets alone the proper form is preserved, e. g. fie β am a Horn. Epigr. xv, 9 . με μανία II. 440. ττεφυυΐα It. ξ , 288. τετΧηυια Od. υ , 23 ; the genitive and the rest of the cases take — ώτος for -— ότος , as τεθνεωτος for τεθνηκότο ?. ·' r From the Perf. Act. is derived, a) The Plusquam Perfectum Active, which takes the syllabic augment before the reduplica¬ tion, and changes the termination a into eiv. τετνφα, ετετυφειν, ομωμοκα , ωμωμόκειν. Obs. The original termination appears to have been ea , which occurs in Homer and Herodotus, e. g. in the perf. med. ΤΓ67Γ οίθεα Od. /, 44. έτεθηττεα Od. ζ\ l67 k . This ea was changed, as in the augment, sometimes into η , (whence the Attic and Doric form η$η 3 κεχηνη γ \ sometimes into e*, with the addi¬ tion of v . Comp. §. 193 . 4. * Wasse ad Thuc. hi, 59 . Ernest, ad Callim. H. in Dian. 177 . k Wessel. ad Herod. 1 , p. 59 , 80. 1 Fisch. 11 , p. 371 sq. Formation of the Tenses, w.I b) The Perfect Passive. 1 . κα is changed into a) μαι, when a long vowel, e. g. a pure or pa precedes the final syllable m . σπεφάσω, εσπεί- ρακα, εσπβίραμαι, δράσω, δεδρακα, δεδράμαι. (Yet Thucyd. Ill, 54 . βρασμένων. V. Thom. Μ. ρ . 201 .) πεφίληκα πεφΐλη- μαι. εσφαλκα, εσφαλμαι. So also εωρακα, εωραμύι, as if from οράσω . b) σμαι, when a lingual δ Θ ζ τ has been omitted before the termination of the future — σω, or when a short VOWel precedes it. $.δω, γσμαι, πείθω, πεπεισμαι , φράζω, πεφρασμαι, 'χρίω* κεγρισμαι, τελεω, τετελεσμαι. This takes place also in some,, whose characteristic is a diphthong, since the diphthong consists of the short vowel made long, in those in — αίω, — αύω (from — άω) — είω, ευω (from €ω) —ούω (from ο'ω) ; as 7 τταίω, επταισμαι, θραύω, τεθραυ- <τμαι, κλείω, κεκλεισμαι, κελευω, κεκελενσμαι, ακούω, ηκουσμαι . We must notice, however, a peculiarity in the usage. δεω makes δεδεμαι. άροω, ηρομαι. λύω, λελυμαι. ελαω, εληλαμαι &}C. For κεκλασμαι we find κεκλέιμαι Herod. II, 121 , 2. σώζω has σεσωσμαι , but also σεσωμαι, whence ύσωθην. παύω has πεπαυμαι. λονω, λελουμαι. *γνωω (7*" γνωσκω) ε^νωσμαι Xetl. Cyv. VIII, 8 , 3 · Verbs also in — αινώ, which made —7 κα in the perf. act. make, after rejecting 7, — σμαι. πεφα·γκα , πεφασμαι. λελυμασμενος from λυμαίνομαι . μεμιασμενος from μιαίνω, νφασμαι from υφαίνω 0 . Verbs in —ύνω, which would have—1/7 κα in the perf. act. take νμαι with υ long, e. g. $σχυ μένος II. σ , 180 . Obs. Verbs in αίνω , — *ύνω retain the v, which was changed m Thom. M. p.;295. 0 Fisch. ii, n. 406. n Fisch, 11 , p. 402 sqq. 232 185 . Formation of the Tenses . in the active into y before k 3 in the remaining persons of the singular, as well as in the imperat. and inf. ττβφανσαι, πέφανται II. β , 122. e, 531. ττεφανθαι. Χέλάμπρυνται Aristoph. Pint. 635. ΧβΧνμανται Bemosth. ρ. 570, 20. παρωξυνται id. ρ. 70, - 14. Hence αμυντβες from ημυνται. € Χ αΧ€ 7 τάνθη Xen. Anab. ιν, 6, 2. from κβχαΧεττανται, X aXe παίνω. Properly the first person should be - νμαι , and the v being changed according to §. 38. 1. μμαι , πβφαμμαι, γσχνμμαι. But in verbs in — αινώ the basis of the first person perf. was corfsidered to be properly the form αω 3 as φαω 3 Χνμαω, νφάω 3 and in verbs in ύνο) 3 v is already long by nature. 2. φα ( βκ 3 7Γ Κ 3 φκ) is changed into — μμαι instead of $uat, 7 τμαι, φμαι 3 and X a (ytca 3 κκα 3 Χ κα) into — ·γμαι (§· 39.)· But in άκαχμενος 3 from άκάζω 3 x remains p . If before these terminations another consonant of the same kind should occur, it is omitted, e. g. from y X a should be formed — yyμaι 3 from μ φ α — μ μμα ι ; but they say iXtjXey μαι 3 κεκαμμαι from iXjXey X a 3 κέκαμφα*. How¬ ever, this consonant again appears in the other persons, as €ΧηΧ€ 7 μαι 3 iXjXey ξαι ( — ^Χεγχσαι) eXjXeyKTai. κβκαμ - φαι 3 κβκαμπται. Besides the termination, the vowels e , ev , o in the penultima also of the perf. act. are changed. 1. o in the perf. act', which was formed from « §. 183 3 is again changed into «, e. g. eSJSe^a, Platon. Phasd. 59 . Ινήνοχα, Ινήν^μαι Demosth. p. 565. (the Ionic € 1 >ψε~ιχθαι, evqveiy μένος in Herodotus, comes from the form ίνείκω, ηνειχα) κέκΧοφα, κέκ\$μμαι Aristoph. Vesp.oT. βίλονα, €ιXeyμaι. ’Άωρτο or αορτο II. y , 272 τ', 253. from aeipco (perf. pass. η€ρμαι, αβρμαι, hence ήέρθην άέρθην) for ηορτο is a ρ Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p.| 267 . 3 Jens, ad Lucian. T. i, p. 231. 233 Formation of the Tenses. peculiar deviation. From this form come αορ, άορτηρ, αιωρεω, μετέωρος ΟΓ μετηορος , παρηορος. ε is changed into ω in συνοκωχότε §. 183, 3. είωθα §. 189· Obs. 3. But if p with another consonant precede the o, which is formed from e , ε and o become a in the perf. pass, e. g. στρέφω, εστροφα, εστραμμαι. τρέπω, τετροφα, τε~ τραμμαι . τρέφω, τετροφα, τεθραμμαι. βεβ pey μένος from βρεχω is excepted. 2 . α of the perf. act. which was formed from e of the future, §. 183, l. remains also in the passive, εσταΧκα, εστάΧμαι, εφθαρκα, εφθαρμαι. 3 . €17 before —^μαι and — σμαι is mostly changed into v, e. g. τετευχα, τετυ Γ γμαι, πεπυσμαι, πεφυγμαι, πε- πνΰμαι, from πενθώ, φεύ^γω, πνέω, flit, πνενσω. Except εζεωγμαι. 4. As some verbs which have η in the fut. receive ε in the perf. act. §. 183, 5. some again which had e in the fut. and perf. act. take η in the perf. pass. e. g. γνημαι from ρνεκα, αινεσω . The case is nearly the same in βάω, βαίνω , which makes βεβηκα in the perf. act.; but in the perf. pass, βεβαμαι for βεβημαι. Xenoph. Hipparch . 3, 4. l, 4. Thuc. I, 123. Obs. In order to assist the formation of the perf. pass, an analogous perf. act. is often assumed, although it may never occur, e. g. in ΧεΧειμμαι the perf. act. ΧεΧειφα is invent¬ ed, as an intermediate link between ΧεΧειμμαι and Χείφω: in πεπυσμαι , πεφυ^μαι the perf. πεπευκα, πεφευχα , in πεπόρευ- μαι πεπορευκα. From εικω I resemble , comes a peif. ^and plusq. p. pass, ηικτο Od . b, 796* v > 288. π , 157* προσηιζαι Eurip. Ale. 1084. προσηίκται in Hesychius, from ηί^μην, n'iy- μαι, which presupposes a perf. act. ηίχα or είχα. From the Perf. Passive comes, a. The Plusquam Perfection Passive, 234 Formation of the Tenses. by changing the termination — μαι of the first person of the perf. into— μην, and prefixing a new augment, re- τυμμαι , ετβτνμμη v. | · r · . ♦ β. the 3 d Future Pass. which is formed by changing the termination of the second person of the perf. — σαί into — σομαί , and re¬ taining the reduplication, λέλβξα,, λελέξομν. τίτν^αι, τετυφομαι. τετίμησαι, τετιμησομαι. 7· the Aoristus ι. Pass. by changing* the termination of the third person of the P erf * Tai **jto —and therefore the preceding lene into an aspirate , and prefixing the simple augment, without repeating the initial consonant, τετυπται, ετύ- φθην 3 λελεκται, ελεχθην. τετίμηται, ετιμηθη v. πεφανται, βφάνθην. With respect, however, to the termination, the following rule is to be observed: · ~. j : 'i · .,·.·■■ f.,·. ■ 1. Some few verbs take σ before the termination — θην in the aor. i. pass, although it is not in the third person perf. pass, μεμνηται , εμνησθην. κεχρηται, βχρη- σθην. ερρωται , ερρωσθην. On the contrary, σωζω, makes εσωθην , in the perf. σεσωσται. But here the form σωω Od. Λ 430. (from σαόω 3 whence εσαωθην Od. 7, 185.) is the basis of the aoi. according to which σεσωμαι is sometimes Used. Suid. V. Σεσωσται. 2. Some which have η in the perf. pass, receive an € in the aor. 1. e. g. εύρηται, εύρεθην. επηνηται, επρνε- θην> αφγρηται, άφγρεθην. From είρηται (ερεω) the aor. is ερρηθην and ερρεθην\ r Fisch. ιι, ρ. 411 * 235 Formation of the Tenses . Obs. Some verbs in νω 9 which rejected v in the perf. (_§. 180, 2.) receive it again in the aor. 1. in the older Poets, e.g. Sia- κρινθητβ , βκΚίνθη μάχη, Xhe aor. 1. of ι$ρυνω in Attic is ιΰρνθη and ιδρύνθη, e.g. Xen . Cyrop. vm, 4, 10 s . With regard to the penultima, it is only to be ob¬ served, that verbs which change e of the fut. into o in the perf. act. (§. 183, 3.) and into a in the perf. pass. (§. 185, l.), take € again in the aor. l. e.g. εστραπται, εστρβφθη v. τετραιτται, βτρέφθην. τεθραπται , εθρεφθην (§. 36 4 ). Obs. It follows naturally, that the Dorians who made the fut. in '— ζω instead of — σω (§. 178, 1.) formed the tenses which were derived from the future accordingly: — ξώ , — χα, — y^ai } — κται , — χΟην, for — σω, — κα , — σμαι , — σται, (μαι, ται) - σθην (Θην), e. g. αρμόζω, ηρμοχα , ηρμο^μαι, ηρμοκται, ηρμόχθην. Diog. Laert . vm, 85. Thus ε\vyίχθη from \vy%w for e\vyίσθη Theocr. 23, 54 u . Hence the substan¬ tives derived from the third pers. perf. pass, of verbs in — ζω, which usually end in— στης, are formed by the Dorians in— κτης χ . j {^ , I ./ fi JOVrirf · . ‘ *'·’*·· tO ■ >'>■■■ J> h f" From the Aor. l. Pass, is derived, the 1 st Future Pass. by rejecting the augment, and changing — θην — θη- σομαι into ετυφθην, τυφθησομαι. Besides the tenses thus derived, there are yet some 18 others, which agree completely with one another, but dif¬ fer essentially from the foregoing. It follows from hence, that one common form must be the basis of them all, which is essentially different from the radical form of — ■■ ■ — --—- — - . - —-—- s Thorn. M. p. 469 . Fisch. in, a. p. 108 sq. 1 Fisch. 1. c. u Valck. ad Theocr. x. Id. p. 114. a. x Valck. ep. ad Rov, p. 66. Koen. ad Greg. p. 152. 236 Formation of the Tenses. f v r · the above-mentioned tenses, viz. the fut 1 . but which at the same time, since they belong, together with this fut. l. to the same verb, have a determinate and regular analogy to this verb and its fut. l. Some of the tenses which have not yet been derived, may be formed immediately from the common present tense of the verb, e. g. e\eyw from λέγω, the greater part, however, agree only with the primitive form of the verb, which no longer exists, and is first recognized in the tenses which are to be derived from; so that it can afford no certain form for the derivation of these tenses: others have in the penultima vowels or a collection of . letters, which could hardly have existed in the original form of the verb. 1 4 » X * * \ *' , ' ··»*■* -it'* ‘ ' ' * 4 f « t k i \ · * If, on the other hand, we change the terminations of the aor. 2. Act, Pass. Med. ον 3 ην, όμην into ω, and reject the augment, we obtain forms which quite agree with the / second form of the fut. given above, §. 173 . Although this form of the fut. occurs only in verbs in λ μ v p, it is allowable to presuppose it in aid of the derivation in other verbs also, as some perf. pass, occur, to which there is no perf. act.; but for which w r e use an imagi¬ nary one. In this manner the two principal classes of tenses, the aor. 1 . act. perf. 1 . or act. perf. pass., and aor. 1 . pass, on the one hand, and on the other the aor. 2 . act. pass. mid. perf. 2 ., or mid. are derived from two different forms of the future, which, however, have a regular analogy to each other, and to the present tense of the verb ; and by these means the different tenses of the verb are reduced to uniformity, and a systematic connection. From ολω according to §. 173 . comes the fut. όλεσω, and όλεω, ο\ώ. The first form gives ώλεσα and όλωλε /ca, the second ωλόμην , ολωλα. t Formation of the Tenses. 237 Since the three second aorists agree with one another in the penultima, and this, according* to analogy, is the same in the second form of the fut. i the second form of the future will be exhibited here at the same time with the aor. 2. act. pass, and middle. Aorist. 2. Act. Pass. Med. The second form of the future is made by rejecting σ in the termination — βσω, and contracting — εω into — ώ. §. 173. 179. As the tone rests upon the last syllable, ' * · \ , - V ' : 1. The penultima, when long, is made short, by changing η and a> into a, rejecting t from the diphthong ai, and e from ei apd ev, resolving the double consonants, and omitting the last of them, as well as in the case of two consonants. Thus Χηθω fut . 1 . Χηθεσω , Χησω. fut. 2. [ Χηθεω , Χα0ώ,] εΧαθον , εΧαθόμην, τμωγω fut. 1. τρωγεσω, τρωξω. fut. 2. [ τρω^εω , rpayui^ eTpayov. Καίω [καίεω, καώ,] εκάην. Μαίνομαι \_μανουμαΐ\ εμάνην. Χείπω fut. 1. Χεπτεσω^ Χείψω. 2. [[Xft7rea?, Xi7Tii>,J εΧιττον. Κενθω {jceu- θεσω , κευθεω, κυθώ^ εκυθον. Od. y , 16. Κοτττω. 1. κοττ- τεσω, κόψω. 2. [κοτττεω^ κο7τω,] εκοττην. V erbs with λ μ ν ρ for the characteristic, have only one form of the fu¬ ture, the second; the derivation of the aor. l. perf. &c. from this takes place with many changes, according to the preceding rules; in the aor. 2. act. pass. med. — ω is only changed into — ov, — ην , — όμην. κάμνω, κάμω, εκαμον , εκάμην , εκαμόμην. ά^τayyεXXω, — ayyεXώ, r\y- y^iXov Thuc. νπι, 86. Xenoph. Anab. in, 4, 14. Except εττΧ^ην from πΧησσω , which, however, in compounds signifying, 'to frighten’, makes €7 rXayijv, e^eTrXayw, κaτε^τXάyηv. 2. E in the penultima, which is short, receives from 188 238 Formation of the Tenses. this change a lower or duller tone, and is therefore in di¬ syllable verbs often changed into a. §. 179. Obs. 1 . In the aor. 2. act. pass, and ined. this form alone, which takes a instead of e, is the basis, whilst in verbs with X μ v p the aor. J. is taken from the form with e. σπείρω, l. σπερώ, έσπειρα. 2.. στταρω, έσττάρη v. στέΧΧω, 1. στεΧώ, εστείΧα. 2. σταλώ, εσταΧην. κτείνω, ]. κτει/ώ, εκτεινα. 2. κταυώ. εκτανον. τέμνω, 1. τεμώ, ( ετειμα ) τετεμηκα, τετμηκα. 2. ταμω, 'εταμον. φθείρω, 1. φθερω, εφθειρα. 2. φθαρώ, εφθάρην» Note. Polysyllable words, and \eyco, φΧ^ωάο not change the e; eXeyrfv, avWeyeis. (pXeyeh. Also τεκω ( τίκτω ) retains ετεκον. This change of e into a takes place also-in verbs which have already e short in the present, e. g. τρέφω, ετραφον, ετραφην. ΰρεττω, Spa ττών Pind . P.4. 231. ΰρεμω, εδραμον. Obs. 1. Verbs, which in the present have σσ, ττ, or Ϊ, receive, according to §. 174, 175. in the first form of the future, either ξω (in which case -σσ, ττ, and ζ are considered as equi¬ valent to y [κ χ] ) or σ. Hence, when the first form of the fut. ls . > ω from — yeaw>' y enters into the second form after rejecting σ, e. g. ττράσσω, τ τράξω, {wpayeaw, irpayew, 7 τρα Ύ ω) ' 7r € 7rpaya. άΧΧάσσω, άΧΧάξω, (dXXayS) άττ —ηΧ- λατγην, ρησσω, ρηξω, (payto) eppcty ην. κράζω , κράξω, ( κρα - -/έσω, κρα Ί εω, κρα Ί ω) εκρα Ί ον. όρνσσω, Spvyfjvat Xenophl Anab. ν, 8, 11. φρίσσω , φρίξω (φρικεσω , φρικεω, φρικω) πεφρικα. If again, the first form of the fut. has —- αω, in verbs in ζω, where σ has rejected the lingual S , as Θ in Χηθω, Χησω, ( Χηθεσω , Χηθεω, Χαθώ) εΧαθον , S necessarily enters again into the second form, φράζω, φράσω ( φpaSεσω , φpaSεω 3 φpaSώ) 7τ εφρaSa. οζω (ο^εσω, 6Seo), oSco-) oSωSa. Obs. 2. The χ seems to have been considered by*the Greeks as inconsistent with the short penultima; hence it is changed into y 239 Formation of the Tenses. e. g. ψύχω, φν£ω 9 [\[svy(x)] ε'ψυ'γην* * . Hence ''j/vyews, i. q. φυκτηρ. From σμν'χω we find in Lucian, D. M. 6, 3. α 7 Γοσμυ·γ€ντ€ς, winch, however, should rather be (πΓομν Γ γ6ντ£§ ) although σμνγβρός justifies the analogy 2 . Obs . 3. Some verbs change 7 rr of the present into φ , others into β. The following change it into φ, θάπτω (ταφώ) era- φην, ταφείην Xen. Anab. v, 7> 20. ενταφεις. (also ϊη θηπω, εταφον, ταφών)· ρίπτω ( ριφώ) ερριφην. ράπτω , ερραφη Eurip. Bacch. 243. θρύπτω , ετρύφην , whence διατρυφεν Ιί· y, 363. from which have been imagined old radical forms τάφω, ριφω , ράφω 9 τρνφω . Yet these appear themselves to have been originally derivative forms, instead of ταπω, ριπω (whence ριπή)} &c. The aspirate φ appears rather to have been selected on account of the preceding aspirate*, κρύπτω makes in aor. 2. pass, κρνβείς. fut. 2. pass, κρνβησονται Eurip. Suppl. 543. whence κρύβ^α, βΧαπτω makes εβΧαβην from βΧαβω. II. τ', 82. 166 . Od. v\ 34. Obs. 4. From the necessity of a short penultima, it fre¬ quently happens, that when two consonants come together, they are transposed, e. g. ε^ρακον II. ζ, 344. ω, 223. JEsch. Ag. 614. fyxiKeis Find. Pyth . 2, 38. -for Μάρκον from δερκω, δερκο- μαι. επραθον II. σ', 454. from περθω. εδραθεν Od. ν , 143. from $άρθω, $αρθάνω. Thus ημβροτον is formed by tiansposi- tion from ημαρτον, in which case β is introduced. 40. These forms, however, occur only in the Ionic and other old Poets. . *»'·· ··,.·■ · v“ Obs. 5. Verbs pure have not these tenses, (aor. 2. perf. 2.), and the forms which do occur, come from barytone verbs , which aie sometimes met within the present, e.g. (jTepevTa Eurip. Ale. 622. from στερώ , στερομαι Xenoph. Anab. hi, 2, 2. not στερεω' . ε&ον- πον, δεδουπα II. φ', 679· from Soi /πω. εΧακον , ΧεΧηκα , ΧεΧα- y Thom. Μ. ρ. 929· Comp. ρ. 63. Moer. ρ. 421. 2 Hemsterh. ρ. 430. Bip. . * In the common Grammars άπτω, βάπτω, σκάπτω, Ζρΰπτω are also added, of which I have never found any undoubted aor. 2. a Brunck. ad Eurip. Ilec. 623. calls it a syncope for στερηθίντα. 240 Formation of the Tenses. Kmd Od. μ , 85. from ληκω. μακών II. π, 469. μεμακυίαι II. ό, 435. from μηκω. εμυκε and μεμνκως II. σ', 580. from μυκω, whence afterwards μυκάομαι, as from μηκω, μηκάομαι · Others, as εκτυπεν, βχραισμε, may be also imperfects. II. a' 28. y, 54. λ', 387. o,-3 2. O^s. 6. In many verbs only the aor. 2. pass, occurs, if the aor. 2. act. and the imperf. would have had the same form, e. g. γραφήν, συνελ^ην, εφλ^ην. Obs. 7. It seldom happens that a tense formed entirely by this analogy has the termination of the aor. 1. act. —a, e. g. €i7ra in Herodotus and Homer, and Xenoph. Cyrop. vi, 3, 20. JEschyl. Suppl. 346. Mschin. in Ctes.p. 551 (r). Thus in Plato and -Aristophanes the imperat. ειπόν, eti τατω occurs for enre, from €7rw b . Έπεσα Eurip. Troad. 293, and πεσειε id. Ale. 47K Orph. Arg. 5\Q. particularly in the Greek version of the Old Testament. ^Hvey κα from kveyw ( φέρω ) for rjveyKov Soph. EL 13. Xen . Cyrop. \u, \ } i c . Ευραμην ά , ειλάμην*, ήλθαν, eφvyav, έλαβαν, ελιπαν, είδα are very rare f . Under this head, however, those cases are not to be reckoned, in which the fut. has merely σ. §. 182. Obs. 1. i * Y · λ v. / V I 7 i ■ · ’ ■ i Fut. 2. Pass. is derived from aor. 2 pass, by changing the termination —ην into, ησομαι and rejecting the augment, e. g. εκρύ- βην, κρνβησομαι. By the same analogy is formed the ·■ b Valck. ad Herod, p. 649, 91. Gregor, p. 228. Fisch. in, a p. 89. c Gregor, p. 65. Fisch. in, a. p. 188. Fisch. n, p. 435. in, a. p. 95. Wolf, ad Demosth. Lept. p. 216. But see fr. Hesiod, ap. Ruhnk. Ep. Crit. p. 108. Timocl. ap. Athen vi p. 223. B. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 402 sq. Lips. Fisch. in, a. p. 24. f Valck. 1. c. 241 j Formation of the Tenses . * ■ f ' ' . f '. * f . . Perfectum 2. or Middle, by changing only ω into a , and prefixing the reduplica¬ tion, e. g. πεπρίνγα, ολωλα. With regard to the penul- tima, the following rules are observed : 1. a arising from e or ει, and e of the aor. 2. becomes o, e. g. σπείρω, εσπάρην, εσπορα. στελλω (σταλώ) εστα- λην, εστολα. κτείνω, κτανω, εκτάνην εκτονα., τέμνω (ταμω) εταμον, τετομα. λέγω, ελεγην, λελογα. μένω, μένω, με - μονά. ί Ύ χόζω (χε&5) ίγάχο&α Λπβί. Rati. 482. Tesp. 624. 7 Γ€^ ω , xapfe, xexopSa, Arist. Pac. 334. στεργω, erropyw. $epKo>, tiedoptm. epyω, eopya. ε\χω, eo\xa g . χεχοεθα from or πάσχω ; in the same manner as, ‘ break, brake, broken*. In polysyllable verbs also, as εγ είρω, iky ερώ, vy ερον) jjyopa and eyptiyopa. 2. In the rest of the verbs the long vowel is put in the penultima for the short one, either as it stood in the present, or changed. * a) a, which came from at or η, or was long by posi¬ tion in the present, is changed into η, e. g. μαίνομαι , εμάνην, με μήνα. $αίω, εδάην, $ε$ηα. θάλλω (θαλώ) τεθηλα. κλάζω (κλαγώ) εκλαγ ον, κεκλ*/γα. ληθω (λαθω) ελαθον, λεληθα. πλήττω (ττλαγώ) επλάyηv,. πεπληya. φαίνω , φανώ , πεφψα . χαίνω, χάνω , κεχηνα. Except : κράζω, ieKpayov , ^Kpaya. πρασσω , πεπpάya^ φράζω, πεφρΆ". ά$ω, Ά. ayw (Zym,u) eaya. (In the aor. eaSov, iay^) λίλάκα comes from the old λάκω. Ion. ληκεω, b) t, which came from ει, is changed into oi (con¬ st Fisch. ii, p. 432. h Fisch. 11 , p. 430 sq. VOL. I. R Formation of the Tenses. nexion of t in the fut. with Rule l.) rre'Sw (*££) USov, πέπο,θα. λάττω (λ.ττώ) XJXotwa. οίκω, ίοικα. Α, οΊ L·'. ' Instead of iW a more Attic form was elxa, in ties. c. 206 , which is like the common word eiL's from oioa. . f / , I . If ‘ was already in the present, it is merely made long, τρίζω, Terpiya. φρισσω, πεφρϊκα. » / v / er ^ s penultima remains shorty e. g. ακηκοα from ακούω, εΧηλνθα from ίΧβνθω. On the other hand ™evya from φον 7 ω, although this may also be the perfect. 1. in w ich case, on account of the aspirate φ, the second v would be changed into y. /V Ofo. 2. The Poets frequently make the penultima < short again, particularly in the feminine of the participle, because the proper form would be inadmissible in a verse, e. g. μομακυΐα, II. from Vv°“ ηΓ Κ ™ 11 K ’ 362 · ™ θαλ "“ Λ ΐ, 208, &c. TC ηΧως Od. μ, 103. XeXdicvia Od. μ', 85. from XeXqxwg , *’ > 41 · ^σαρυΐα Hesiod. Sc. Η. 268. from σό σψα , σ(ση . ° ά · *' 555 · from from 0 *'' ' 3 ’ '**·■» α0Τ ' 2 · ' S Cha "g ed int0 * in ίρρω Ύ α from ρησσω. Comp. §. 25. 183, 6. In οίωθα the characteristic o in the perf. 2. is changed into ·, perhaps for the sake of phony, *Γ M ° rder ‘° S ’ Ve ‘° 8 tense which has the signifi- * he SenSe ° f dur8tion ^ “ of ithe form Jt 1 88 ‘ he Ioni88s (Herod, u, 91. t, 133. iv, Thn’r j j 27 '/ 3 ' 8nd Donans also according to Suidas and Σζτ&ΐ T“· *"·*— ”» **- c-». ω Χ α $· 3. αωρτο §. 185,, 1. * Hi JX ft 4 · Plato Apol. Socr. p. 88. Xenoph. * f 3j 8 · 8 PP ears «° be an extension of the perf. 2. It seems have originated in the custom of forming new verbs from a — ■ ~ - - c -- --- \ * Fisch. II, p. 43 3> " Pierson, ad Moer. p. us. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Nub. 185. * ΚΓ UlA a . \η*Ί \ /*, AO >. .‘\vjemt v, » ** 4f * 1 » Λ / * * ' . ♦ To face page 1243 , Present. Act. Pass. Med, οΧω 7 Γ€ΐθω κτείνω / τύπτω ομαι Fut. l. Med. οΧεσομαι πείσομαι /-Ν κτενονμαί τνψομαι ( Imp erf. Fut. l. Fut. 2. (ώΧον') ( ωΧομην ) οΧεσω οΧω εττειθον - Ο/Λ^Ρ 7 τείσω [p τιθώ) e κτεινον - OyU>yy κτενω κτο.νω ετυπτον - τνφω ( τυπω ) A 1. Act. Perf. Act. —) (~ Fut. 2. Med. Aor ωΧεσα >/ 67 Γβισα >/ €KT€LVa 6TU\JsCt ( } Aor. ι. Med. αμήν ωΧεκα, οΧωΧ. / 7T67T6LKCC >/ ζκτακα τετυφα —Λ,_ οΧονμαι \_7ηθουμαφ κτανου μαι [τυττονμαφ "1 Plusq. Act. Perf. Pass. ωΧωΧεκ Λ £oX / εκτακ. ( ώΧον ) 67 ηθον >/ βκτανον ( ετυττον ) _Λ^._ Aor. 2. Med. Aor. 2. Pass - ειν 7Γ67 τεισμαι >/ εκταμαι ετετυφ J τετυμμαι ^_ ωΧομην εττιθόμην * t εκτανομην > . / ‘ετυττυμην Plusq. Ρ. ωΧωΧε,α ^ επεπείσμ ( * > >·«ι/ εκταμ I ετετνμμ J Fut. 3. Pass. [oXcoXeVoyuatJ 7Γ67 τείσομαι [εκτάσομαφ τετυφομαι Aor. ι. Pass ( ωΧεθην ) 67 τείσθην εκτάθην ετυφθην - -Λ_ (ωΧην) (εττίθην) ( εκτάνην ) » / ετυττην _^_ Perf. 2. Med. οΧωλα 7Γ67 ΤΟίθα if εκτονα / τβτυττα < ^ ί PIusq.2. eVeTUTrea' Ί Fut. 2. Pass, [όλ^σο/χαί 7 Γίθησομαι κτανησομαι τυπησομαι~\ Fut. ι. Pass. οΧεθησομαι 7τ εισθησομαι κταθησομαι τνφθησομαί. Formation of the Tenses. 1 perf. 2. either actually in use, or at least imagined according to analogy, e. g. from eyprjyopu a present tense eypriyopeu), of which the imperfect eyptjyopovu occurs in Aristophanes Feel. 32. and the aor. 1. eypr}y6pr](Tav Xenoph. Anah . iv, 6, 22. From ayeipw perf. med· rjyopci come ctyopeu) (hence ayoprj- της) and ayopevu). φορ€(ο appears to have arisen from ττβφορα, a perf. 2. φέρω, invented according to analogy. Ohs . 5. The Attic elf α, έίξασι from βίκω, for el/ca or eoiica, is quite different; in which f instead of κ is taken from the Boeotian dialect 1 . I Ohs . 6. Some perfects appear to be formed immediately from the present, by changing only — ω into —a, and prefixing the reduplication, e. g. Άνττα, SeSia, from Sou πω, Si ω. Thus also avcoya for rjvioya. I ' *· I . - . '■· A - * · * · '· Verbs which have this perf. 2. form from it also a plusquam i perf. 2. after the same rules as those by which the plusq. 1 * was i formed from the perf. 1. ολωΧα, (oXoiKav· oSwSa^ wSwSciv. I . ; . ) » '?> 5··,*;. t. The opposite table serves to give a view of their formation: I ' ' 1 Ruhnk. ad Timaei Lex. PL p. 9»· Piers, ad Moer. p. 147* Musgr. ad Eurip. Iphig. A. 853. Fisch. i, p. 175. v it 2 244 Formation of the Tenses , Obs, There is no single verb, which has all these tenses, that can regularly be derived from it. It is very seldom that a verb has the two tenses, aor. 1. and aor. 2. act. as airriyyeikcL and amjyyeXov Thuc . viii, 86 . Xenoph. Anab.ui, 4, 14. the aor. T. and 2. pass. perf. 1. and 2. at the same time (r). When it has these tenses, they commonly belong to two different dialects, or two different ages of a dialect, as εττιθον only in the old Ionic, 67Γ eicra in Attic and the rest, αττηΧΚά'χθην, σννεΧε'χθην in the older Attic dialect, airyWayw, συνε\^ην in the new, or they have different significations, as 7 τεττ^αχα in an active sense, Aristoph. Equ. 683. Xenoph . H, Gr . v, 2, 32. Cyrop . vii, 5,42. Anab. v, 7, 29. 7re7 rpaya in a neuter sense. Many forms occur only in single authors, and are not used by others, e. g. εσεφθην from σεβω , ·— ομαι, in Sophocles ap. Hesych . s. v. and Plato Ph&d.p. 337. and perhaps many tenses occurred in the lost works of the Greeks, which we now consider as never having been in use. In the foregoing table, the tenses not in use are in brackets. Those tenses in each verb which are in use, are best learnt by observing the writings of the best authors. Conjugation . The proper conjugation may first be learnt perfectly from the following examples; at the same time, how¬ ever, all these different tenses have something amongst each other in common, which may be comprehended under the following general heads: . 1 ‘ There are in .the active and passive voices two principal classes with reference to the termination, one of which we shall call the class of the Principal tenses (the present, future, and perfectum), the other the class of the Historical tenses (imperfect, plusquam perf. and V Conjugation. 245 the aorists). The tenses of each class agree with one another in certain points, as the following table shews : Principal Tenses. i. P. 2. P. fSing. —s I D. wanting -TOP (pi. — μεν -T€ rS. — μαι — σαι J D. — μεθον — σθον V.P1. — μέθα — σθε s.P. —€ 61 -TOP — σι —rat — σθον *—νται Historical Tenses. «5 i. P.. 2. P fSing.— -5 < D. wanting -TOP vP. — μεν - T6 fS. — μην — σο 1 ^ D.— μεθον — σθον ^P. — μέθα — σθε 3. P. -€ — την (ft) — V — TO — σθην — ντο · This table serves also for the verbs in μι, and on that account the first person is left indefinite. The third person sing. act. is ei in the present and future of verbs in _in the perf. e; in verbs in μι it is σι. Obs. If we assume that the termination of the third pers. plur. of the principal tenses in Doric— ντι for— σι was the primitive form, and that the Doric τ was afterwards changed into σ, the p before σ rejected (§. 39·), and then the short vowel changed into a diphthong, or made long (τότττορτι, τύπτονσι, τυπτουσι, τετνφαντι, τετυφανσι, τετυφασι, τιθεντι, τιθενσι, τιθεΐσι, and τ ιθεασι), the agreement becomes still clearer, not only between all kinds of verbs in — o>, as well as in— μι, but also between the principal and historical tenses, for 1. The third pers. plur. of verbs in— ω, and of those m 192. 246 Conjugation. ουσι, εισι , — ασι , — ουσι , —υσι have one prin¬ ciple since they are derived according to the common rule §. 39. from — οντί 9 — εντι, — αντί , — οντι , — υντι . 2. The active and passive voices accord in the third person of the present and future, οντι, ονται, εντι, €νται, αντί, ανται , <5fc. τυπτοντι ( — ουσι ) τύπτονται . τιθεντι ( τιθεΐσι ) Ti'0ei/- rcu, 4?fc. " “ ' 1 > ' .t ' . · I j 3. It becomes clear how in verbs in — -μι the terminations — εασι, — όασι, — νασι could come from — εισι , — ουσι , υσι ; viz. the a before the termination comes from v 3 accord- ing to the Ionic dialect, as πεφιΧηαται , τ ιθεαται for πβφιΧην ται y τίθενται. See §. 198. 4. The reason appears why a before the termination ——σι of the perfectum is long, viz. because the syllable in which v before σ is omitted, remains long. §. 39. / 5. In the same manner the analogy between — οντι and — ον, — αντί and —av is shewn. In some dialects, much of which afterwards remained in the dialect of the Alexandrian writers, the perf. in the third pers. plur. had also av for ασι . See 194. 3. Obs. * With respect to the Moods it is to be observed, that a) In the imperative, except the second person, the dual of the indicative is throughout the basis. Act. sing, third pers. ?— τω. Dual. — τον , — των. Plur. —re, — τωσαν. Pass. sing, third pers. — σθω. Dual. — σθον , σθων. Plur. — σ0ε, — σθωσαν . b) In the optative i is always added to the principal vowel, either short or made short, of the same tense in the indicative, τύπτω , τυπτοιμι . ετυψα> τυφαιμι . In the perfect, the principal vowel of the present indie, τετνφα, τετύφοιμι. If the long vowel be the characteristic, as in the perf. pass, of verbs pure , t is subscribed, τετίμημαι, τετιμγμην. ηκρίβωμαι , ηκριβιρμην. If ι cannot be United with the principal vowel, this vowel becomes long, e. g. XeXvTOy SaivvTOy for \ε\υιτο } $αινύιτο· / Conjugation . c) The conjugation of the optative is always analo¬ gous to that of the historical tenses, that of the con¬ junctive with the conjugation of the principal tenses. Thus the optative has in the third person dual — την, _ σ θη ν , in the third person plur. — v, —ντο. The con¬ junctive in the dual third pers. — τον, — σθον. Plur. third pers. — σί, —pt ; -r · ; »* / · . · ... Ργ Indicative. . ■ . · . 1 .. . Imperative. Present. Sing, τύπτω, ‘I strike’ ω, — εις, — Ci Dual. -€T Ον, — ετον Plur. — o/xev , *■— €Τ£, — ουσι (v) Sing, τυ'πτβ, ‘strike’ τνπτετω, ‘ let him (her, it) strike.’ j Dual, τύπτετον, ‘ strike ye (both)’ τυπτετων, ‘they (both) may or must strike’ Plur. τύπτετε, ‘ strike ye’ τυπτετωσαν, (1) ‘ they may, must, shall strike’ Imperf. j *' i .» » · y Sing, βτυπτον, ‘ I did strike’ — ov, — £?, — e (f*/) Dual. — ετου, — ετην Plur. — ομεν, — ετε, τ-ον (3) Perf. 1. Sing, τετυφα, ‘ I have struck’ — a, —— e (ei/) Dual. — ατον , — - ατού Plur. — αμευ, — ατε, — ασι (υ) τετυφε, as the present. . * · . Plusq. 1. / Sing, ετετύφειν τ-ειν, — εις, —6i (4) Dual. — είτου, — ειτι/υ Plur. — ειμεν, — 6ΐτ6, — εισαν (εσαν (5) \ Perf. 2. / ·* / τετυπα as the perf. 1. in all the moods. Plusq. 2. ετετύπειν aslm^the plusquam perf. 1. Aor. 1. ! Sing, έτυψα — a, — ας, —e (εν) Dual. — ατον, — άτην Plur. — αμευ, — ατε, — αν ' ^ i Sing, τύψον •—ov, — ατω Dual. — ατού, — άτων Plur. — ατε, — α'τωσαυ(Ι) Aor. 2. Sing, ετυπον as the imperfectum. as the present. Future 1. Sing, τιίψω as the present. wanting. Future 2. Sing, τυπω — ώ, — ε?ς, —- εΐ Dual. —εϊτου, —εϊτου Plur. — ούμεν, — εΐτε, — ούσι ( ν ) wanting. t \ ' if JVoie. The numbers refer to the following Observations, §. 193. ** 1 1 I Conjugation . Active . Optative. Conjunctive. I ·»· nfinit. Participle. rvirToi/At, I might strike, n were I to strike’ — OlfXl) — ot?, — Oi — oitov,— οιτην — οιμεν,— οιτε, — oie v (2) > Γΐίπτω ‘(that) I may strike — ω, — »7?, — rf — ητ ον, — ητον — ωμευ, — ητε> —ωσι W' 1. , ί 1 njTTTCiv hjtttwv, — ουσα, — ον (Gen. — οντος, — ουση?, — οι/το? &C.) τ€τ ΰφοιμι as the present. τετ υφω as the present. τετυφεναι τετυφως , —υΐα , — ο? (G. — οτ ο?, — υία?, — οτο?, &C.) mr ·' > 1 t ■ . . ; · · Γ Γ ·» \ • τι ίψαιμι — αιμι, — at?, —at — atTOv t — αίτην — αιμεν , — atre, — ate ι/(6' τΰ\φω — ω, — yc, — ri — ητον ,— ητον — ωμεν, — ητε, — ωσι {ν Tv\jsai τυψας, τύψασα^ τυ- \Jsav (G. — αντ ο?, — άσης, &C.) as the present. as the present. τνπνεΐν τΐ/ττίοι/,—- ουσα,— οι/ (G. τνττόντ ο?, &C.) τ ύ\[/οιμι as the present. wanting. TV\[/€lV |τυψωι/,—οι/σα/— οι/ τνττοΐμι — ο?μι, — οι?, — ot — οΐτον, — οίτη — oTfj i€v t — olre, — οΐεν ‘ l . wanting. V τνττε^ν τυττωι/, — ουσα } — ου ν (G.— OUI/TO?, &0.) • < | / 250 Conjugation Verbs l. in B. —V“- Indicative. 1 J i · % ---—-. Imperative. ; ‘ Present * , ill i vTm : ί , - «·» ; ' Jl ' S. φιλεω, ‘ I love’ — ε«ο, —eet?, —eei —to, —e?9, —e? D. — έετου, — εετον - £lTOV, €ITOV P. — εομε v, — εετε, — εουσι ——ουμεν, — είτε, <— ουσι (y) S. φίΧεε . .... r — ee, —εετω . , — ει, —είτω D. — εετον,—εετων —εΤτον, —είτων Ρ. —εετε, —εετωσαν — εΐτε, —είτωσαν (1) Imperf. ‘ 1 ** * t ί ψ * S. εφίΧ-εον — €qv, — εε?, —ee - OVV, — Ci?, - £i D. — εετον, — εετην — εΓ του, — είτην * n / r. — εομε v, — εετε, — εον —ουμεν,—είτε, —ουν ' . I ·> · V • · , Present. S. τιμ-άω, 1 1 honour’ — άω, — άεις, —άει * A ** ,* — ω, —α?_ — a 7 1 7 i D. — άετον, — άετον —άτον, — ατον Ρ. — άομεν, — άετε, — άουσι '—ωμεν, —άτε, — ωσι (ν) -Γ- - ■ .- 2. ιη S. τίμ-αε — αε, —αετίο —α, — ατω D. — αετόν, — αετών — ατον, —άτων Ρ. — άετε, — αετωσαν — άτε, — άτωσαν (]) Imperf. t S. ετίμ-αον, — αες, — αε D. —αετό»/, —αετην -ων, — ac, — a — ατον, — άτην ι * Present. 0 . Λ . « J S. δ»/λ-ο'ω, ‘I show’ II / —οω, — ocjc, — οει —to, —oic, —oil D. —οετον —όετον *> - OVTOV. OVTOV * ■> / / ! r. —οομεν,—οετε, —οουσι — ουμεν, — ούτε, — ουσι (»/) ί ' 3. in. S. δηΧοε — οε, — οε τω — ου, — ου τω D. — οετον,—οετων - / — ουτοι/,— Οί/ΤΟ) V Ρ. — οετε, —οετωσαν —ούτε, —οΰτωσαν (1) • C · ' Imperf. ί i. εόηΧ-οον, — oes, — οε D; — όετον, —οετην ■ / -ου ν, —οι/?, —ου — ουτον, —ου την * ζάω, πεινάω, ΰιψάω, χράομαι, contract ae and act into Conjugation * • 251 contracted \ ' * > ! . » ί - , ,τ , \ . 0 ■>·. A ^ ■ * Sif t ? - €ύ). >' ' · - - \ Optative, ■ : · f> Conjunctive. ■ i · Infinite Participle. *■' '■ ' ■ · φιλεοιμι $ f r * 9 φιλ-εω / 9 φιλ - εειν I * φιλεων 9 9 9 — εοιμι, —εοις, — eoi —ew, -εης, —εη - ειν — εων, — εουσα,—εον - OljXlf —ore. *N — οι λ ^ — ω, —»?9, — — ων, — ου&α , —ουν -—εοιτον,- — εοιτη v — εητο ν, — εητον G. φιλ-εοντος. — οίτον, - — οιτην — ητον, —ητ ον —ουντος ι —εοιμεν, — εοιτε, - — εοιεν — εωμεν,- —εητε, —έωσι &C. —οΐμεν, - — οΐτε, —o?ei\2) — ωμεν, - —ητε, -ωσι ( ν ) *■ . Λ Π ί> 'Λ ·■**'· 4 ' ' " ' / · ‘ \ ' . • : Vi ·' ; · I •ι Λ \»νί « * ,! V 5. ' > ’ η . · ν -.ν ·:.) / Ί '■ — αα). τιμ-άοιμι τιμ- άω τιμ *· (ίειν τιμ - αων / 9 9 — άοιμι, —αο*9. — αοι —αω, —«»/?, — aj; - αν ι — αων, - αονσα , - αο«/ —< it*·* —ft* -(0 L —ω, — ft* —a — ων, , — ωσα, —ων — αοιτον,-αοιτην — άητον, - αητόν (j. — aoi'TOC — ωτον, — ωτην — ατον, —άτ ον — ωντο<: — αοιμεν ,—αοίτβ, — άοιεν — άωμεν, — άητε, —άωσι — ωμεν, —ωτε. -ft v (2) —ωμεν. —are, - ώσ/ (ν) # 4 . « « >·. — άομεν, — acre, Λ —aov ' ... \ 4 . S 1 ■J .. . * .J · ι> 4 11 ■ — ωμεν, — ατε, — ων • , 4 - ·.. ·} f ^ —οω. 0 ' . '■ , Λ • ’ . ! .· • S ΰηλ-όοιμι — άοιμι , — οοιςτ. 9 - OOL ΰηλ - οω —οω, —άης, — or] ΰηλ - άειν - ουν δ»7λ - άων, — όουσμ, — oot> — υΐμι, — ο?9, — οΐ —ω, -0?9, -Ο? —ω^, —ουσα, -οοιτοι». — οοιτην — οητον, -οητον — ουί'. -οΐτον, -^—οίτην — ωτον, —ωτον 1 ■ ’/1 1 i J J Ν -όοιμεν, -άοιτε, —όοιε ν — άωμεν, — οητε, —οωσι ... .. . „ -.- -οΐμε ν, -οΐτε, — o1ev(2) — ωμεν, — ωτε, — ιοσι(ν) Γ 'ϋ ^ . ι ' * i / . ■ ν ϊ — οομ€ν, — -οετε, —oov — οΰμεν, —ούτε , — ου ν r- * a ν » · ’ : · η and >7. See §. 194. 1. 1 j ·, ■: , /'r i '· I ' ' '. · : * 252 Conjugation. Observations. 1. In the third person plur. of the imperative in Attic the termination — όντων is more usual than ετωσαυ. The same also occurs in the Ionic writers. ayyeWovrwv II. θ', 517. ττινοντων Od. d } 340. Xey όντων Herod. J, 89 . σωζόντων Soph. Aj. 660. μετεχόντων Plato Protag. p. 111 . φερόν- των Xen. Symp. 5, 8 . In the contracted verbs also κυρούντων JEschyl. Choeph. 712 . Χυττουντωυ Xenoph. Cyr . in, 3 , 50. €κ$€ΐματονντων Plato Rep . li, p. 256. ed. Bip. yeXwvrwv Soph. Aj. 961 . In the aor. 1 . εκκοφάντων Aristoph, Av. 583. ττεμψαντων Xen. Cyr op. iv, 5, 17 . The same form was also used by the Dorians, e. g. κοινα- νεοντων, in the treaty of alliance between the Argives and Lace¬ daemonians Thuc. v. 79· according to Valcknaer’s emendation ad Eurip. Phcen. p. 75. for κοινωνονντων, i. e. κοινωνείτωσαν. Some Doric roots omit the v in this form, e. g. ποιούντο), aVo- στβίλαι/τω" 1 . Hence the Latin imperative in the third person amanto, docento n . 2. The optative in — οιμι, particularly in the contracted verbs, has also in Attic the termination — οίην, ποιοίην, φΐΧοίην, αττοστεροίη Isocr. Enc. Hel. p. 21 6 . A. Steph. φρονοίης , διατε- Χοίης Isocr. ad. Phil. p. 96 . B. C. εττιτιμωημεν Isbcr. Areop , p. 149. E. € 7 τερωτωη Xenoph. M. S. 1 , 1, 9· ΰιερωτιρην Plat. Gorg. p. 27. ayampriv Plat. Cratyl. p. 245. Lys. p. 235. νικψη Demosth. Phil. 1, extr. τοΧμιρη, Isocr. 7r. άντι$. p. 310. B. διακυβερνωη Plat. Rep. ix, p. 243. δριρης Soph. Antig. 70. The third person plur. is, as in the common form, φιΧοιεν , τιμιρεν. Yet the Attics often use the form οΊμι , ίρμι 0 . This form οίην is found also in Ionic and Doric writers, e. g. ενορωη Herod 1, 89* οικοίητε Theocr. Id. 12, 28. As verbs in αω were, by the Ionians, conjugated in εω (§. 21.), we find in their writers §ιαττη&οίη, ερωτοίη for — ττηδίρη, ερωτωη. m Maitt. p. 227 . n Pierson, ad Moerid. p. 15. Koen. ad Greg. p. 74. p. 922 . Maitt. p. 66. sq. Fisch. n, p. 343. Valck. ad Hippol. v. 469 . Fisch. 11 , p. 346. 385. Thom. M. A o Conjugation 2oS The optative also of barytone verbs is sometimes, though rarely, conjugated in the same manner, not merely in the present, but also in the perfectum, aor. 2. and future, e. g. διαβαΧΚοίην Plat. Epist. vii, p. 125. extr. εκττεφβυ^οίην Soph. (Ed. T. 840. ττεπειθοίη Aristoph. Acharn. 940. ττροεληλνθοίης Xen. Cyrop. ii, 4, 17· σγοίη id. Cyrop. vii, 1, 36. Plat. Rep. vii, p. 131. Phcedon. p. 163. φανοίην Soph. Aj. 313. εύροίης Hip - poor. T. i, p. 22. in the future circumflexed εροίη Xen. Cyr. hi, 1, 14. where Schneider reads epoi ? . 3 . Of the Ionic form τιπττεσκον , which occurs also in Attic writers, see §. 172. Obs. 1. 4. The primitive form of the plusquam perf. which occurs in Homer and Herodotus, was — ea, in the third person —ee, e. g. eyeyovee, άττοβεβηκεε, v. 184. Hence arose, on the one hand, the Doric form — eta , e. g. avvayayoyeia, εττιτετεΧε- K€ta q ; on the other, by contraction, the Attic form — η in the first person, e. g. εκεγηνη Aristoph. Ach. 10. for εκε^ηνειν. η$η Aristoph. Av. 511. Soph. Antig. 448. Eurip. Hippol. 405. € 7 T εττόνθη Arist. Eccl. 650. ηκηκόη id. Pac. 6l6. in the second person — ης for et? in Homer II. χ, 280. ηε&ης. Aristoph. Nub. 329* Soph. Antig. 447. for Arist. Eccl. 551. Od. τ , 93. γ$ησθα. (Heind. ad Plat. Euthyd. p. 321.) ελεληθης Arist. Equ . 822. 1044. in the third person — η for εε or et, II. a', 70. Od. i , 189· os for and in the new Attic and Doric, e. g. όπωπη Theocr. i v, 7 r ; in the old Attic, however, chiefly with the v εφελκυστ. —eiv, e. g. ησκειν II. y\ 387. ε'ιστηκειν II. ψ', 691. Od. σ , 342. ηκηκόειν Plat . Cratyl. p. 231. ϊβειν Aristoph. Vesp. 635. πεττοιθειν id. Nub. 1347 s . y, however, is only used when a vowel follows. p Maitt. p. 60 . 6l. Piers, ad Moerid, p. 325 sq. Fiseh. ii, p. 345 sq. 384. Gruter Inscr. p. 216. i, 25. 27 . r Gregor, p. 117. et Keen. s Valck. ad II. 280., ad Hippol. v, 405. ad N. T. p. 399· Piers, ad Moerid. p. 173 sq. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 50. Hemsterh. ad Arist. Plut. v. 696 . Brunck. ibid, et ad Aristoph. Nub. 329· Eccl. 650. ad Soph. CEd. T. 433. Dawes Misc. Cr. p. 230 sq. Fisch. 11 , p. 372. 194. ^«*4 Conjugation. / ’ 5 · Instead of the termination — εισαν, the form — εσαν is more common in Ionic and Attic, e. g. άκηκόεσαν Herod, n, 52. eyeyoveaav I, 67· eypηy άρεσαν Arist. Pint. 744. είληώε- σαυ Xen. Cyrop. viii, 4, 30. άττεττλευκεσαν Thuc. viii, 99*. . 6. Instead of the form —αιμι in the optat. aor. 1, the Attics chiefly use the primitive ^olic form eza, eta?, eie, after the example of the Ionians and Dorians, but only in the second and third pers. sing, and the third plur. άναβλεψειας Arist. Pint. 95. μείνειας II. y 3 52. άττοστησειε Thuc . viii, 6 . yηΘησειεv Od. μ } 88. ψαύσειε Pind. Pyth. ix. 213. ayyelXeiev Theocr. xn, 19- φθασειαν, ej^avayKaaeiav Thuc. viii, 95. ακουσειάν II. β , 98. Ilerod. ιν, 129· The iEolians also use the first, per¬ son . ^ But the form αις — at also occurs in the Attic writers, e. g. άκούσαις Plat. Rep. viii, p. 221. άττοκτείναιεν id. Symp. p. 202. See Schaef. Mel. Crit. in Dion. H. 1 , p . 185. , . . ' ' j\ \ ' ·, ·■ .' <· *“' ,j V ' ■·'- ·'·'"’·· J 5 n Dialects. ' · · - * · ♦ ' ··',■ . . ~ . 1· The termination -ei?, —ei, ( 2 . 3« pers. singf. pres.), and civ (infin.) was in Doric sometimes a. c, ev, as συρίσοβς Theocr. i, 3 (r). ά μ ίλ γ€ ς id. iv, s x ; some¬ times »;?, η, ψ, as τ νπτη, οιΐίάκκη, (ύιίίάσκβι) in the decret. Laced, c. Tim. p. 82. ίθίΚησα for <&\ € < s Theocr. xxix, 4. In Doric, particularly, verbs pure in —άω have after contraction η for a., e. g. φοιτάς Theocr. xi, 22. τόλμη* V. 35. iaopn* I, 90. and the third person ipvj for i P a Theocr. vii, 97- opij Timceus L. p. io. virepmSqre for ϋττερπηοατβ Theocr. v. 108. Hence also the Attic con- * Fisch. ii, p. 373. u Gregor, p. 284. Fisch. n, p. 386’. x Fisch. ii, p. 350. . κ Conjugation . Dialect: , 255 . traction of —ae, —aet into >/, y, in the words & tv Te > ζην. Imperf. εζων, εζης, εζη, where the first person was also from ζημί γ ,) πεινάω, διψάω, χρησθαι, χρηται. Thus also περιψϊ}ν Aristoph. Equ. 909· ψγ Soph. Tr. 678. v. Brunch. κνησθαι z , επισμγ Arist. Thesm. 389· In verbs pure in άω the iEolians pronounce se¬ parately the t subscr. in the second and third pers. sing. pres. e. g. τιμάίς, *y εΧάίς (in an ode of Sappho), τιμαΐ, yeXai, for τιμμς, ye\as, 8$C. a / 2. The Dorians conjugate the first, pers. plur. of all tenses in — μες instead of — μεν, e. g. ερίσδομες Theocr. V, 67- άδικον μες AristopL· Ll/S. 1150. Imperf. ειρπομες Theocr . VII, 2. Perf. δεδοίκαμες Theocr, I, 16. πεπόνθαμες Aristoph. Lysistr . 1307. Aor. ευρομες Theocr, vn, 12. ηνθομες II, 143. Fut. ερψουμες id. XVIII, 40. Conj. φρου - ρώμες id. VII, .122. καΧεσωμες VIII, 26 b . 3. The third person plur. in — σι in Doric ends in — τι, and before this final syllable, instead of the long vowel or diphthong in the barytones, the short vowel with v is placed, in a manner analogous to the dat. plur. of the third declension, and to the participles in — ας, §· 39· 74. e. g. άναπΧεκοντι Pind, 01, II, 136. μογθ'ιζοντι Theocr,!, 38. τηρεωντι Pind. Pyth. II, l6l. ε-χωντι, ε'ίκωντι in the Dorian treaty Thuc. v, 77- φδηκαντι Theocr, i, 42. εστάκαντι id, XV, 82. δειπνησευντι Callim, in Lav, Pall, 115. μενευντι lb. 120 c . ■ > y Thom. M. p. 2 66. Piers, ad Moerid. p. 148. Fisch. i, p. 125. z Buttmann ad Plat. Gorg. p. 521. ed. Heind. a Gregor, p. 2 77. ubi v. K. t b Maitt. p. 222 sq. Gregor, p. 77· Fisch. n, p. 350. c Maitt. p. 223 sq. Gregor, p. 90. 97· 147. 150. et K. Fisch. ir, p. 333. 335. 339. 351. Conjugation. Dialect. Obs. From this termination came the Latin termination in nt. In the common dialect, afterwards in the Alexandrian, from αντί in the perf. arose the termination — av } e. g. eopyav Batrachom. 178. ire φρίκαν Lycophr. 252 d . Instead of ——ονσι the Doric dialect has —— ·οισι also, e. g. φϊΧεοισι Bind. P. in, 31. φυΧάσσοισι Nem. xi, 6. Pyth. ix, 110. φορεοισι Theocr. xxviii, 11. (r) Note, In contraction the Dorians make ευ from eo, e. g. TeXei )vtl Theocr . vn, 37. and from ου circumflexed, μενευντι, from αο, αω, aov comes a, e. g. χαλασ* in Alcaeus for ναΧαοι/σί. ; * . · ' · '. rt* h. i '· if i ,L* 195. 4. In the imperf. the Dorians instead of ae, a, in the third pers. sing, use the contraction η, as Theocr . n, 155 . εφο'ιτη, V, 42. ετρύττη, XIX, 3. εφυση , for εον 1. pers. sing. 3 pers. plur. ew, with the Ionians, only that they use this kind of contraction also in verbs in — άω, which, however, were formed in — έω, e. g. ανηρωτευν Theocr . I. 81. ^άπευν id Epigr. 19 . from άνερωτεω, ayairew, for — aw. * * * t y · • ( r · . 1 · 1 / 4 ' * ( . . . l . I The termination — ov of the third pers. imperf. and aor. 2. was in some of the common dialects — οσα v, and remained also in the Alexandrian dialect, as εσχάζοσαν Lycophr. 21 . particularly in the Greek Old Testament, and in the New Testament. Analogous to this are εδοσαν and eSou Hesiod Theog. 30 e * Of the termination — σκον of the historical tenses (imperf. aor. 1 . 2 .) vid. §. 172 . Obs. 1 . 5. In the perf. and plusquam perf. the vowel or diphthong sometimes suffers syncope in the Poets, e. g. ειΧηΧουθμεν for εϊΧηΧουθαμεν 3 εΧηΧύθαμεν 11. ij 49 . Od. d Sext. Empir. p. 261 . Fisch, 11 , p. 370. Maitt. p* 22 7. e Fisch. 11 , p. 33d sq. Maitt. p, 226 . 257 Conjugation. Dia/ect. 1 I y , 81. εο^μεν Soph. Aj. 1239- for εοίκαμεν (comp. §. 37- 4.) CIKTOV Od. S', 27· for εοίκατον. εικτην 11 . a , 104. for ειοκείτην. Of the same kind is εττετηθμεν for επεποίθειμειτ II. β j 341. S', 159. f, 55. According to some, the poetic word ϊ$μεν is an abbreviation of οϊδαμεν* *. In Attic γσμεν, γστε, of the same nature are commonly used for 1 > f § φοειμε v, rjcetre. 6. The imperative present of verbs in —dw is in Doric contracted into η instead of a, e. g. ορη Theocr. VII, 50. XV, 2. 12. ερωτη AristopJl. Ach. 800 g . The imperative in — ε, particularly in the aor. 2. had, in the Doric, and afterwards in the Alexandrian dialect also, the termination of the aor. l . — ov. e. g. enrov Theocr. xiv, n. αειρον id. xxii, 65 h . The form ειπον is the foundation of the Attic είπάτω. See §. 188. Obs. 7. , i Note. The Alexandrian dialect had in the optative — οισαν, j — αισαν for — οιεν, — -αιεν 1 . 7. The second person in — ης, both in the conjunc¬ tive and indicative of verbs in — μι , and the Doric form of verbs in ω, was often lengthened in the old language by the addition of the syllable — 9a , which has remained in the iEolic, Doric, Ionic, and in some words in the Attic dialect, εθελ^σθα II. aj 554. in the conjunctive Theocr . xxix, 4. in the indicative είπ^σθα 11. vj 250. ττοθόρησθα Theocr. VI, 8. ϊ}§ησθα Od. τ', 93. ·Ιη Attic particularly occur ησθα for ης from ειμί, εφησθα for f Buttmanns Gr. Gr. p. 204. ε Koen. ad Greg. p. 79· Brunck. ad Aristoph. Lys. 990. h Koen. ad Gregor, p. 157- Fisch. ii, p. 382. * Maitt. p. 22 6. Fisch. ii, p. 337. VOL. I. * S " ♦ s 258 Conjugation. Dialect. €φης from φημι. τίβησθα^ , and especially οϊσθα, instead of which the proper form olSas is very rarely found in Attic writers, όϊσθας also was used 1 . The third person sing·, of the conjunctive in Ionic., received the addition of the syllable — σι, e. g. εΧθγσι, Χάβγσι, φεργσι, &c. in Homer and Hesiod, which the Dorians pronounced —re, εθεΧητι Theocr vi, 28. Verbs i n mg have the same termination τίθησι , ίστησι. Hence in the dialect of the inhabitants of Rhegium φίΧησι , Xe- Ύ*Ι σ *9 φερησι, from φίΧημι , Xeyrfpi, φερημι™. In the old poets the conjunctive act. if the penultima be long, has for the most part in the first and second persons plur. the short vowel, instead of the long one, o for ω. II. β 9 72. θωρηξομεν. ο, 297. στείομεν, ε’ί κεν πρώτον ερύξομεν άντιάσαντες. θ', 18. Od. ι, 17. ' έίδετε Pind. ΟΙ. 6, 40. οφρα βάσομεν, ίκωμαί τε. In ί ομεν for ΐωμεν , however, the first syllable is short. II. ζ , 526 . κ, 126. 251, &c. as in φθίεται II. v\ 173. That in this case the indicative is not put for the conjunctive, but that these forms are real conjunctive forms, is clear from l. the passages in which the common conjunctive form is used alternately with them, e. g. II. K \ 449. el μεν yap κε σε νυν άποΧυσομεν τηε μεθώμεν. 2. The forms which stand for conjunctives, but do not occur in the present indicative, as ε&ομε v, ωμεν, of which no indie, pres. e&, ’/ω is found. Instead also of —— η> — ωσι the termination — εις, — ει , —ονσι is either entirely obso¬ lete or very rare, as II. d , 215. dl κεν — εθεΧησει. These k Piers, ad Moerid. p. 17 1. Piers, ad Moer. 1. c. and p. 175. 283. Kocn. ad Gregor, p. 273 . Fisch. ii, p. 339. Thom. M. p. 397. w Fisch. 11 , p. 3Φ7. Heyne Obss. ad 11. e', 6‘. I Conjugation. Dialect. 259 forms arose probably from the exigencies of the metre, before the language was settled by writing, as the com¬ parative and superlative in wrepos and ότερος η . 8. Infinitives in —eiy in the barytone verbs , were formed by the Dorians in — εν, the contracted or metely circumflexed infinitive in — -rjv, e. g. yapvev Find. 01. i, 5 . βόσκεν Theocr. IV, 2 . cteiSe v VIII, 4 . ^eXyev V, 27 . κο&μην Theocr. XV, 24 . οΐκήν XXIY, 80 . εύρηνΧ I, 4 . κυβερνην v Crit. ap. Galep. 698. The iEolians besides this, accen¬ tuated these infinitives, like the infinitives of the bary¬ tone Verbs , e. g. φ'ΐΧην, καΧηυ, φρόνην 0 . \|* *> t ξ v \ «· . · * t Y. v -k % η t *■£ Note. Sometimes infinitives of barytone verbs also are found in — ην, e. g. χαίρην Theocr.x iv, 1. and circumflexed infinitives in-—ey, e. g. ayayev Pind . Pyth. tv, 98. τνχεν, εν^αιμονεν Euryph. ap. Gale p. 667. ττοιεν Arckyt. ib. p. 680. eveynev ibid. Ilkcliott payer, ετπ- τεΧεν Theag. ib. p. 683. θεωρεν, κρατε v Metop. ib. p. 685. 699. άδικεν Clin. ib. p. 687. κακοΰαιμονεν Arch. ib. p. 695. ομονοεν Crit. ib. p. 699· εζευρεν, Χαθεν Arch. ib. p. 702 p . K ρατευν, α^ικενν Theag. ap. Gale p. 682 sq. is a pecu¬ liar Doric form of the infinitive. t*. r ' . T \ > X ^ ·* o> Another form of the infinitive, peculiar to the iEolians, was used in the contracted verbs , in which the final v was changed into $, and the improper diphthongs y, 9 , into the proper at, oet into ot, e. g. yeXatg, πειναις, ύψοΊς, dp9ois q . 196 . n Herm. de Metris, p. 85. Heyne Obss. ad II. a , p. 174. Buttmann Gr. p. 167. H. * Gregor, p. 136. 142. et Koen. 293 sq. Fisch. 11 , p. 392 sqq. Maitt. p. 230. · p Valck. ad Theocr. x, 48. xi, 71. xv, 28 &c., q Gregor, p. 294. Fisch. 1 , p. 185. n, p. 393 sq. 260 Conjugation. Dialect. - λ The Dorians changed the contracted infinitive * *— 0 vv of verbs ift 6ω, into ών, e. g. $ι$ώ v Theocr. xxix, 9 . for SiSoOi/ y i. e. SiSouai. In some cases the Attics also used this, as piywv for ptyovv Aristoph . Fety. 446. Av. 935 r . Thus also in the participle piydUvn Amst. Ack. 1145. Moeris p. 336. and probably in the conjunctive piyip for piyoi'. \ · 1 ... » JV. y\\ \ I n HT'O' b) Instead of the form —eiv and — elv, the termina¬ tion — μεναι, and short — μεν was frequently used in the old language (in Homer and Hesiod), and in the JEolic and Doric dialect, e. g. ελθεμεναι II. a, 151. and ελθεαεν II. S', 247 &C. 7 ηνεμεναι II. 345. and ττινεμεν Od. β ' , 305. κτεινεμεναι Hesiod. Sc. H. 414. άρόμμεναι in Hesiod epy. 22 . is the only instance of this form in a verb pure ; the double μ, with a short penultima, is found in εμμεναι. Note. Of — μεναι and — μεν also for —vat in the inf. aor. pass, see §. 199 . 6. 9. In the participle, the Dorians used in the feminine instead of ovcra a) οισα (as —oktl for overt n. 3.) e. g. καχλάζοισαν Pind. 01 VII, 3. εχοισα Theocr. VI, 30. τ τταίοι- σα VII, 26 l . b) — ευσα in verbs pure for — εουσα ( — άουσα) β. g. ζατεΰσαι ( ζητοϊσαι ) Theocr. i, 85. yeXewa for ye\w- na I, 36. ττοθορευσα (τ τροσορωσα) V, 85. εσορευσα VI, 31. In verbs in εω this form was used also by the Ionians, ύμνεΰ- σαι Hesiod. Theog. 11. c) for the circumflexed — ονσα also— ώσα, Χπτωσαι 11 . Hence arose the Laconic form —«Sa, e. g. τται^ωαν for 7ταιζουσών. See §. 30. 05.9. ao was contracted by the Dorians into a, e. g. 7 ret- T Brunck. ad Arist. Av. 1. c. Moeris p. 339. 8 Buttmann ad Plat. Gorg. p, 527 sq. ed. Heind. * Fisch. ir, p. 395. u Fisch. 11 , p. 396 '. V D. VERBS contracted. [. in — βω. Passive. To face page tifjl. Present. lmperf. Indicative. -εεται ε'ιται Sillg·. φιλ -έομαι, φιλ -etj, (') φιΧ οΰμαι, ή, ειται Dual, φιλ -εόμεθον, φιλ -εεσθον, φιλ -εεσθον οΰμεθον, εισθον, εισθον Plur. φι\ -εόμεθα (*) φι\ -εεσθε, φιλ -έονται οΰμεθα είσθε οΰνται Imperative. Sing·. φιλ -έου, (') φιλ - οΰ, Dual, φιλ -έεσθοι’, φιλ εισθον, Plur. φι\ -εεσθε, φιλ είσθε εέσθω είσθω -εέσθων -είσθων -εέσθωσαν ( 3 ) ε'ισθωσαν Optative. Sing, φιλ -εοιμην, φιλ -έοιο, φι\ -έοιτο οίμι/ν, οιο, οιτο Dual. φι\ -εοίμεθον, φιλ -εοισθον, φι\ -εοίσθην οίμ&ον, οισθον, οίσθην Plur. φιλ -εοίμεθα, φιλ -έοισθε, φιλ -έοιντο οίμιθα, οΊσθε, οΊντο ( 6 ) Conjunctive. Sing, φιλ -έωμαι, φιλ -er/,j (') φιλ -έηται ωμαι, ή, ηται Dual, φιλ -εώμεθον, φιΧ -έηηθον, φιλ -έησθον ωμεθον, ήσ^ον, ησθον Plur. φιλ -εώμεθα, φιλ -εηαθε, φιλ -έωνται ωμεθα, ησθε, ώνται Infinitive. φιλ -έεσθαι εισθαι Participle. φιλ -εόμένος, -εομένη, -εό μενού ούμένος, -θυμένη, -θυμένου Sing, έφιλ -έομην, έφιλ -εου, έφιλ -εετο ονμην, ου , Dual, έφιλ -εόμεθον, έφιλ -εέσθον, έφιλ -εέσθην οΰμεθον, εέσθον, εισθην, Plur. έφιλ -εόμεθα, έφιλ -εεσθε, έφιλ -εοντο ( 6 ) ουμεθα, είσθε, ου ντο Present. lmperf. ωμαι, -αόμεθον, ωμεθον, -αόμεθα,( -ωμεθα, -ά ν 0 α. / τιμ -αβται Sing. τιμ -άου, (’) τιμ -αέσθω αται ώ. άσθω ι -άεσθον. τιμ -άεσθον Dual. τιμ -άεσθον, τιμ -αέσθων άσθον, άσθον άσθον. άσθων -άεσθε. τιμ -άονται Plur. τιμ -άεσθε, τιμ -αέσθωσαν( 3 ) άσθε, ώνται άσθε, άσθωσαν II. in — 0 ( 1 ). Sing, τιμ -αο'ιμην, τιμ -άοιο, τιμ -άοιτο -ιό μη ι, (ΐιο, ωτο Dual. τιμ -αοίμιθον, τιμ -άοισθον, τιμ -αοίσθην ιρμείον, φσθον, ώσθην Plur. τιμ -αομεθα, τιμ -άοισθε, τιμ -άοιντο <ιί/Λ<Ρ« ^ ωσθε, ωντο ( 6 ) Sing, τιμ -άωμαι, τιμ -άη, (') τιμ -άηται ωμαι, , α, αται Dual. τιμ -αώμεθον , τίμ -άησθον, τιμ -άησθον' ωμεθον, άσθον, άσθον Plur. τιμ -αώμεθα,(^) τιμ -άησθε, τιμ -άωνται -ωμεθα, άσθε, ώνται τιμ -άεσθαι τιμ -αο μένος, - αομενη ? -ααμενοι άσθαι ωμενος , ωμενη^ ωμενον - ^ SilVS 1 ·. 6 τιμ -ηόιιην ετιμ -αου, ετιμ -αετό ωμήν, ω, V." ~ Ζλλΐι. ετιμ -αομεθον, έτιμ -άεσθον, έτιμ -αέσθην ωμεθον, άσθον, άσθην, Plur. έτιμ -άομεθα, έτιμ -άεσθε, ετιμ -αοντο ( 6 ) ωμεθα, ασθε, ωντο i III. ιη — όω. - -οέσθω Sing, χρυσ -οοίμην, χρνσ -ooiOj / χρνσ -οοιτο Sing', χρυσ -όωμαι, χρυσ -°ν> 0 / χρνσ -οηται χρυσ -άεσθαι χρνσ -οάμενος, οομενη, t -οομενου ονσθω οίμην, οιο, οιτο ωμαι , οί, ωται ουσθαι ονμενος ονμενη, ουμενον -οέσθων Dual, χρυσ -οοίμεθον, χρυσ -όοισθον. χρυσ -οοίσθην Dual, χρνσ -οωμεθον , χρνσ -οησθον, χρνσ -άησθον < οΰσθων οίμεθον. οισθον, οίσθην ωμεθον, ωσθον, ωσθον -οέσθωσα ν Plur. χρυσ -οοίμεθα. χρυσ -άοισθε. χρνσ -άοιντο Plur. χρυσ -οώμεθα > ΧΡ υσ -οησθε, f χρνσ -οωνται ουσθωσανΟ οίμεθα, οισθε, οιντοζ 6 ) ώμεθα, ωσθε. ώνται -Μ _ ' -οόμεθον. έχρυσ -όεσθον, εχρυσ -οέσθην Plur. έχρυσ -οόμεθα, έχρυσ -όεσθε Τ εχρνσ -όοντο (°) οΰμεθον, οΰσθον, οΰσθην ουμεθα. οΰσθε ονντο Present. Sing, χρυσ -όομαι, χρ υσ ~°y> (') ΧΡ υσ ~ <€TCU ονμαι, ° 1 ) ουται Dual, χρυσ -οόμεθον, χρνσ -όεσθον, χρνσ -οεσθον οΰμεθον, οΰσθον, οΰσθον Plur. χρνσ -οΰμεθα,Ο χρνσ -όεσθε, χρυσ-όονται οΰμεθα, οΰσθε, οΰνται οΰσθον -όεσθε, οΰσθε, lmperf. Sing, έχρνσ -οόμην, έχρυσ -οου, έχρ<σ -οετο ονμην, ον, ου το Perfect. 7 τεφίλ -ημαι, τετίμ -ημαι, κεχρυ<^-ωμαι Sing\ -ημαι, -ησαι, -ηται -ωμαι, -ωσαι, -ωται ^ ) Dual, -ήμεθον, -ησθον, -ησθον -ωμεθον, -ωσθον, -ωσθον Plur. -ήμεθα, -ησθε, -ηνται -ώμεθα, -ωσθε, -ώνται ( 5 ) 7 νεώιλ-Ί ι τ > ησο, κεχρυσ -ωσο τετιμ -) -ησθω -ώσθω Sing, -ησο -ωσο, Dual, -ησθον, -ωσθον, Plur. -ησθε, -ωσθε. -ησθων -ώσθων -ήσθωσαν -ώσθωσαν ( 3 ) πεφιλ-'Ι / < Ύ I η μην, κεχρυσ -ωμήν Sing, -r /μην, -rjo, -ήτο -ιό μην, -ώο, -ωτο Dual, -ήμεθον, -ήσθον, -γσθην -ιρμεθα, -ωσθον, -φσθην Plur. -ήμεθα, -ησθε, -ηντο •ωμεθα, -ωσθε, -ωντο πεφιλ-ί ~ τετιμ -J ωμαί> κ£ ΧΡ υσ ~ νμαί Sing, -ωμαι, -rj, -ίηται Dual. -ωμεθον, -ησθον, -ησθον Plur. -ώμεθα, -ησθε, -ώνται ττεφιλ -ησθαι τετιμ -ησθαι κεχρυσ -ωσθαι τεφιλ-) , , , τε-~ιμ - j τ,μ6νος ι -ημενη, -ημενον κεχρυσ -ώμενος, -ωμένη, -ώμενον Pluscjuam perf. έττεφιλ -ήμην, έτετιμ -ήμην, εκεχρυσ -ωμήν Sing, -ημην, -ησο, -ητο. -ώμην, &C. , "'•'r-'. ; . . Dual, -ήμεθον, -ησθον, ησθην. Plur. -ήμεθα, -ησθε, -νητο. ( 5 ) Indicative. Imperative. Optative. Conjunctive. Infinitive. Participle. Present. Sing·, τύπτομαι, ‘ 1 am struck', i — ομαι, ( — eat) —(’)— *ται Dual. — όμεθον, — εσθον, — εσθον Plur· - όμεθα, ( a ) -εσ&τ, — ονται / τυτττου Sing. (eo) —oi/(')—e σθω Dual. — εσθον, — εσθων Plur. — εσθε, — εσθωσαν ( 3 ) τυπτοίμηυ Sing. — οιμην, — οιο, —οιτο Dual. — οίμεθον, — οισθον, —■ οίσθην Plur. — οίμεθα, — οισθε, — oirro ( 6 ) τυ π τωμαι Sing. — ωμαι (ηαι) η (‘) —ηται Dual. — ωμεθον, — ησθον,—ησθον Plur. —ώμε θα, — ιγτθε, —ωνται τΰτττ εσθαι τυπτόμενος, — ενη, — ενον. • lniperf. Sing, έτυπτόμην, ‘ 1 was struck’. — όμ-ην, (— eo) — OV, — ero Dual. — όμεθον, — εσθον, — εσθον Plur. — όμεθα, — εσθε, —οι το ( 6 ) ‘ Perfect. a) τετνμμαι, — υφαι, - υπται - ΰμμεθοι·, — υφθον, - νφθοι· - υμμεθα, — υφθε, —υμμενοι εισί 1») Sing. — μαι, — -σαι, —ται ( 4 ) Dual. — μεθον, — θον, (— σθον )— θον (— σθον) Plur. —μέθα, —θε (— σθε) —νται ( 5 ) --- . τετυφο τετύφθω τετυφθον, τετΰφθων τετνφθε, τετΰφθωσαν Sing. — σο —θω ( σ 0 ω ) — θον (σθον) — θων (ο-θων) θε (σθε) — θωσαν (σθωσαν) ' τετυμμενος, η, ον είην, ε’ίης, είη τετυμμενω, α, ω είητον, ε’ιητην τετνμ,μενοι αι, a ειημεν, ε’ίητε, είησαυ τβτνμμένος, η> ον ώ, fis, y τετνμμςνω, α 3 ω ητον, ητον τετυμμενοι, at a ώμεν, ητ€ 3 ώσι τετύφθαι τετυμμενος, — η, — ον . Plusquam perf. ετετυμμ ijv , — — νφο, - υπτο - ΰμμεθοι·, — νφθοι·, - ΰφθην ~ νμμεθα, — νφθε, τετνμμένοι ή σαν \ Sing. - μην — σο, -το Dual. μεθον, — θον ( σθον) — θην ( σθην) Plur. — μέθα, —θε (—σθε) —ντο ( 5 ) -- Aor. l. Aor. 2. έτΰφθην * Τ €τνττην Sing. ην, - ης, - η Dual. — ητον, — η την Plur. - η μεν, - ητε, - ησαν τυφθητι τυττηθι Sing, —ηΤΙ (ηθι)~ύ,τω ητον — ητών ητε — ητωσαν τνφθβίην τυπβίην Sing. - ε'ιην, — ε'ιης, — είη Dual. — είητον, — ειητην Ρ1«Γ· ειημεν, - είητε, — είησαν ( 7 ) τυφθώ τνττω Sing. ω, - ρς, - rj Dual. — ρτον, —ητον Plur. — ώμεν, — ητε, —ώσι (ν) χνφθηναι τνττηναι τυφθείς \ ττυπείς S ~ 6 *’ ~ (ίσα > —**■ Fut. l. Fut. 2. Fut. 3. τυφθησομαι ψ τνπήσομαι > as the present. τετΰφομαι j wanting. τυφθησ οιμην) τυπησοίμην > as the present. τετυφοίμην J wanting. τυφθησεσθαι τυπησεσθαι τετύφεσθαι τυφθησΛ τυττησ 1 — όμενος, — η, — ον. τετυφ J Conjugation. Dialect. * 261 , i tavn Theocr. xv^ 148. όπτάντες Epicharm. ap. Athen. vir, i 310. jE. The iEolians formed the terminations of the partici¬ ples — ών, — ων in είς, because they formed the verbs in —ecu, —aco, in — ημι, e. g. ό /oeis, στοιχείς, from opiy/m, I στοίχημι*. , ill 'Tn/i * * *, Instead of the termination —cos·, — via, —os· the iEolians used that of the present — ων, — ουσα, — ον 1 , e. g. μεμενακουσα Archim. p. 47- άνεστακουσα id. p. 53*. In the same manner τέτανων II. a, 591* κεκληγοντες II. μ > 125. 5 Od. ζ', 30. πεφρίκοντας Pind. Pyth. IV, 325. κεχ\ά$οντας i Pind. Pyth. iv, 319.; but 01. ix, 3. κεχλαίώς. Probably, however, these are participles of the present tenses formed from the perfect. τετάγω, κεκλ^γω, πεφρίκω . See i §. 165. Obs. 4. §.218. IV, l a . . · . . ..'if-» The termination of the aor. 1 . act. —as, — ασα, —ar, i Was in Doric —ats,—acaa, e. g. ταννσαις Pind. 01. II, l65. ρίψαις id. Pyth. 1, 86. τελεσαις lb. 154. άποφ\αυ· ρίζαισα id. Pyth. Ill, 23. θρεφαισα id. Pyth. VIII, 37. καρυ - > ξαισα id. Isthm. IV, 43. διαπλεζακτα id. Pyth. XII, 14. Com- i pare §. 39 b . t * , · · j · ; ( * ' ; * ‘ Note. Of the resolution of the contracted termination, e. g- opau) for opq., see §. 197. Passive Voice. See Table C. D. • ·:**·· » , ’ · ‘ ■ · · · > v · , ί,« , τ , ί . ’ 1 f j . \ · \ r " ■' ■ 1 ' ' . ..— ' * Koen. ad Greg. p. 171. a. 294. n. 50. Fisch. ri, p. 396 . y Gregor, p. 294. * Maitt. p. 239. iO I A- ■ T rl * f I r ·* 4 V rt T / * Koen. ad Greg. p. 81. Fisch. 1 , p. 198 sq. ■ b Maitt. p. 239. Koen. ad Greg. p. 94 . Fisch. 1 , p. 92. 11 , p. 397. Conjugation. Dialect. Observations. > The original termination of the second person sing. pres, in the indie, imperat. and conjunct, and of the imperf. appears to have teen — εσαι, -—ecro ,— ησαι from the analogy of the perf. pass, and of vefbs in μι , in which the termination —erai in the second person always corresponds with those of — μαι, — ται in the first and third. This primitive form, however, occurs only in the New Testament, as many old forms were retained in the po¬ pular language, and unformed dialects. In the same manner in the common Greek language the second person of άκροάομαι , was άκροασαι (for ακρόάεσαι ) which in Attic was ακροα c . From this, by rejecting σ came — eai , —eo, — ηαι, which is the regular form in the Ionic and Doric writers, particularly the Poets; and hence, by contraction, r/, ου in Homer, and regularly in Attic. Similarly from μεμνησαι in the perf. (17. ψ , 648.) μεμνηαι II. ψ', 442. and ρεμνη II· ό, 18. υ 9 188. &c. d The Attics, however, contracted also —ecu (but not —ηαι) into ei instead of η , which arose from the old mode of writing e for η. This form remained unchanged in the Poets particularly, or was introduced again, e. g. μά-χει Aristoph. Av. 758. Χοι^ορεϊ Pint. 456. c rrpecpei Acharn. 384. Thesm. 237. κατο'ψει Eurip. Ale . 836. It remained in common use in three verbs alone, βουΧει, diet , οψει, but only in the indicative®. , mi 2. The termination — εθα in the first person plur. was — εσθα in the Doric and Ionic, and often also in the Attic Poets, e. g. ε^ινεόμεσθα Od. i r , 153. τετιμημεσθα II. μ , 310. ικομεσθα II. β' } 138, &c. τ τεΧόμεσθα Theocr . χιπ, 4. Χασευμεσθα (Χη- σόμεθα) id. ιν, 39. μαγεσσαιμεσθα id. χχιι, 74. αργωμεσθα id. χνιι, 1. εζόμεσθα Aristoph. Plut. 101. βονΧομεσθα Equ. 562. ηΰόμεσθα ib. 460. 565. εισόμεσθ a Soph. (Ed. C . 1037- εζόμεσθα id. (Ed. T. 32. άργόμεσθα id. Antig. 63 f . c Moeris p. l6\ d Koen. ad Greg. p. 191· Fisch. n, p. 399· e Valck. ad Phoen. p. 2l6 sq. Maitt. p. 63. Fisch. i, p. 119· p. 399· Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. C. 336'. Aj. 195. f Fisch. i, p. 206 , ii, p. 400. I Conjugation. Dialect. 263 3. Instead of the termination — ωσάν in the third pers. plur. imperf. the form — ων is very much used in Ionic, Doric, and particularly Attic, εττεσθων II. i,, 170* Χεζάσθων II. i, 67· μαγεσθων Herod, ix, 48. κτεινεσθων νπ, 10, *8. χρησθων Aristoph. Nub. 438. Thuc. v, 18, instead of which χράσθων occurs in Herodotus in, 81. άφαιρείσθων Soph.Aj. 100. βπαι- ρεσθων Lucian. T. ill, p. 51. Bip. Also in the perf. ττάρακε- κΧησθων Plato Leg. x, p. 83. εζρρησθων, ερρωσθων in Philo- stratus, a7 τερρίφθων Lucian. D. M. 10, 2 s . in the aor. διανβμη- θητων Plat. Leg. v, p. 226. according to the MSS* of Voss, as αιτιαθητων Leg. x, p. 69· 4. The perf. pass, has properly the terminations marked b in the Table C. viz. — μαι ,— σαι 3 — rat, &c. a. If the verb be pure , these terminations remain unchanged, and in the dual 2. 3. p. and plur. 2. p. they make — σθον, — σθε. See Table B. In the imperative also the terminations — σο , — σθω , 3fC. are annexed to the characteristic vowel of this tense— η or— ω , ττεφίΧησο, κεχρυσωσο. In the optative the terminations are the same as in the pre¬ sent. optat. — μην , —o, — to, fyc. which are annexed to the characteristic vowel η or ω . The t, which is also a characteristic in this tense, is subscribed under the η or ω, e. g. τετιμρμην , τε- τιμρο, τετιμρτο, fyc. See Table B.% μεμνρμην II. ω, 745. με- μνρτο Aristoph. Pint. 992. Plato Rep. vn, p. 134. κεκΧρο Soph. Phil. 119· κεκΧρμεθα Aristoph. Lys. 253. Thus also ΧεΧντο as optat. Od. σ', 237· μεμνεφτο II. \js , 361. and μεμνωτο Xen. Cyrop. i, 6, 3. appear to be the pres, optat. from μεμνάο - μαι ]ι . The conjunctive is exactly like the conj. pres. — ωμαι, — p, — ηται , ττεφιΧώμαι , ττεφΐΧρ, ττεφιΧηται: yet it seldom occurs, e. g. Plat. Polit. p. 63. μεμνωμεθα id. Rep . vm, p. 225. ε Thom. M. p. 922 . Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. I. p. 445. Bip. Valck. ad Herod, p. 514. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 73, 27. Fisch. ii, p. 344. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Nub. 439- h Heyne ad II. ψ·', 361. Fisch. n, p. 419 sq· Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 1. . 19S 264 Conjugation. Dialed. εκτετμησθον. Isocr. ad Nicol. p. 37. A. "iva — κεκτησθε. XeiU Symp. i # 8. $ 1 / κεκτηται ( vulg. κεκτηται) : instead of it the cir¬ cumlocution πεφιΧημενος w is used. » ^ > . ' “ . . 11 v ■ l '\viv V' ‘)V b. In barytone verbs the consonant preceding these termina¬ tions is changed according to the rules of euphony §.34. Thus τετυμμαι , τετυψαι, τετυπται is changed from τετνφμαι, τε- τυφσαι , τετυφται, ΧεΧεγμαι, ΧεΧεζαι, ΧεΧεκται from λε\ε- χμαι, ΧεΧεχσαι, λελεχται,· Sfc, The difference between this flexion and that of verbs pure is thus only apparent. On account of the collision of several consonants, the second and third per¬ sons dual, and the second plur. end in - -θον, —0ε, not in — σθον, — σθε. * * . ’,·■ , ’ ' — _ 9 , f * | { I : ■ 4 Λ ·“ f ^ · — - ■ -f - J » ? # | In the optative and conjunct, of these verbs, the circumlo¬ cutory form is used, which consists of the participle perf. pass, with the optat. and conj. pres, of the verb ειμι. It is used also in these verbs in the third pers. perf. and plusquam perf. in the common dialect, which in verbs pure are in — ηνται , — ηντο 9 — ωνται , —ωι/το, τετυμμενοι , — αι, —α είσί and ησαν; πεφίΧηνται, επεφίΧηντο, κεγρΰσωνται , εκεγρνσωντο . The reason of this is, that in barytone verbs a third consonant would enter before the termination — νται> — ντο , τετνφνται , λελε- •χνται. See, however, Ν. 5. * , * ■ ο. In the third pers. plur. perf. and plusquam perf. the Ionians and Dorians change the v before rat and to into a, in which case the original aspirated consonant again enters before the a, e. g. τεθάφαται from τεθαμμαι, θάπτω , for τεθαμμενοι ε’ισί, Herod . νι, 10 3. κεκρνφαται Hesiod. Theog. 730. επιτετράφαται for επιτετραμμένοι ε’ισί II. β ’, 25. 62. * ( τεθαφνται , κεκρυφν - ται, επιτετραφνται) κατειΧί'χατο for κατειΧιγμενοι ησαν Herod, vn, 76. 90. εσεσάγατο for σεσαγμενοι ησαν from σαττω id. ιι, 63. άποδεδεχαται for αποδεδειγμένοι εισί id. ιι, 43, εσταΧατο Hesiod. Sc. Η. 288. Herod, vu, 89. from στεΧ- λω for εσταΧμενοι ησαν. Instead of the aspirate the lene remains in άπίκαται and άπίκατο Herod. I, 2 . iv, 200 . vi, 118. vn, 153. 157'. r I ■ ·. ’■ . ·' L 1 Wessel. ad Herod, p. 342. 52. Conjugation, Hiultct. 265 If a tr arising from the lingua]s $ θ τ ζ precedes the ter- initiation of the perf. pass. — μαι, — σαι, τα t it is changed into S before the termination (— νται, —ντο,) αται, —a το v e . cr. βτκευάδατο Herod, vn, 62. 67.. for ίσκευασμενοι ησαν from σκευάζω. εστοΧίοατο Herod, vn, 89. with the note of Valckenaer, from στολίζω. άγωνίδαται Herod ix, 26. 49- from dywviU. ’ερψίδαται II. ψ, ,284. 529- from ερείδω, ίρράδαται Od. o', 354. ίρραδατο II. μ, 431. from ραζω {ραίνω) ερρασνται. ίληλαδατο Od. η, 86. for Ιλήλαντο, is quite ano¬ malous, ύ being inserted apparently to avoid the collision of two α. άκν,χ^αται, is similar, which is found II. p, 637. in some editions. The third persons also of verbs pure are, formed in this manner, e. g. -πεφοβηατο for ττεφόβηντο II. , 206 . In this case the long vowel or diphthong η and ei is usually changed into the short e, e. g. ever τεττορντέατο Herod, vn, 77. from έμττορπάω. δκεκοσμεατο Herod, lx, 131. δρμέατο id. II. 218. vni, 25. άποκεκλεατο id. ix, 50. for άπεκεκλειντο from απο¬ κλείω. οίκεαται for ψκηνται. εΐρέαται Herod.xn,8l. ίονείρηντα,. Thus άκηχίαται II. p , 637. (where others read εκηχεδατ ) and with e made long, άκαχείατο II. μ, 179. for άκήχηνται. Similarly the termination — ανται of the perf. is changed into — εαται, e. g. άναπεπτεαται Herod, ix, 9. for avanre- ■πταντα from αναιτεταω. εττεττειρεατο id. vn, 125. for errerret ραντο from ττειράομαι, ττεττειραμαι, Obs. 1. This form is also found in some Attic writers, e. g. τβτάχαται Thuc. in, 13. which Mceris notices as Attic, p. 154. βτεταχατο id. vn, 4. διβτετάχατο id. iv. 31. εφθαραται id, ill, 13. τετράφαται Plat. Republ. vij, p· 165. άντιτβτα- yaTCLi Xenoph, Anab. iv, 8, 5 * 05s. 2. In some places this form is found where the sing, is required, e. g. παρβσκΕυα^ατο Herod, ix, 100.: but these passages are doubtful * 1 . 6 . In the same manner v in the third person of the pres, aor. opt. pass, and middle, of the imperf. pass, and mid. and of the present, is changed in some words into a. k Greg. p. 22y. Fisch. n, 407 sqq. Maitt. p. 128 sqq. 1 Wessel. ad Herod, p. 428. 45. Conjugation. Dialed . a) In the optative this is very frequent, and in the Attic Poets, e. g. 7 τευθοιατο Od. a, 157. αποφεροίατο Herod. VII, 152. αισθανοιατο Jristoph Pac . 209. Eurip. Hel. 159. avn- νωρησαίατο™ . in the imperf. εττειρωατο for εττειρωντο Herod, i, 68. 'ιέρίατο id. II, 182. τταρετιθέατο id. i, 119. The termination eero in this case is used in those verbs which have otherwise - ovto , αντο, e. g. aireypaepearo Herod, v, 29 . vi, 25. εσινεατο id. vii, 147. ε Ί ινεατο i, 67. Thus in the aorist. 2 ! also απικεατο id. 1 , 152. (« 7 Ακατο iv, 140, %c. is the plus- quam perf. for an tlkvto, i. e. αφημένοι ήσαν. See No. 5.) &e- φθαρεατο vm, 90. for διεφθάροντο. Again, εΰυνεατο ix, 103. ηττιστεΟτο vm, 5. 25. κατιστεατο νίπ, 12. for εΰύναντο, §c. εκεατο for εκειντο νιπ, 25. c) In the present κεαται, δυνεαται in Herodotus®. '"-*·* ' ·· **·· · ··· ·····'“ i Λ r .-r : · .'.'9 mv J 7. The plur. of the optative of the aorists in the Attic Poets has commonly, and always in the third pers. plur. in the prose writers too, the form — εΊμεν, — elre, —ε7εν, which is also used by Homer, 7 τειρηθείμεν Od. tt, 305. διακρινθεΐτε II. 7, 102. εκσωθεΊμεν Eurip. Iphig. T. 1025. Hel. 821. λυττηθεΊ- μεν Eurip. Helen . 77. δυναθεϊεν Xen. Mem. S. iv, 4, 19°. Dialect. * 1. The termination — eo , which in the Attic dialect was contracted into — ov, is in Doric, and sometimes in Ionic, contracted into — ev, e. g·. εττλευ II. 54. V, eg. SfC. μάχβυ Theocr. I, 113. ece'Xew III, 11 ; i -.----- m Fisch. 11 , p. 418. n Maitt. p. 128 sqq. Fisch. n, p. 401. ° Da,wes Misc. Crit. p. 243 sq. who did wrong in rejecting altogether the other form. Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 1046. ad Arist. Ran. 1448. Toup. ad Suid. T. I. p. 68. Thom. M. p. 153. Fisch. ii, p. 422. p Fisch. i, p. 116 . n, p. 416. / 267 Conjugation. Dialect. 2. Instead of the termination of the first person plur. — μέθα, the iEolians said — μεθεν, e. g. twto- μεθεν. 3. In the form of the imperat— eo (— εσο) the Poets sometimes make the e long, by inserting after it i, e. g. epeio II. λ', 610. σι reio II. k, 28 5. for σιτεο, i. e. εττου. aiSeio II. ω\ 503. for αιϋεο II. φ' } 74. μειΧίσσειο Apoll. Rh. Ill, 1035 q . 4. In the first pers. plur. of the aorists, the Dorians said — ημε$ for — ημεν, e. g. εκλίνθημες Theocr. VII, 133. Comp. §. 194. 2. 5. In the third pers. plur. of the aorists the iEolians and Dorians said —ev for — ησαν , as was the case also in the old Ionic. εφίληθε v II. β , 668. Theocr. yn, 60. (pdvev Find . 01. 10, 101 . εκόρεσθε v Aristoph. Pac. 1283. in a Homeric Hexameter 1 . In AEsch. Pers. 995. ίταφεν, and Eurip. Hipp . 1247. εκρυφθε V, which forms no where else occur in Attic 8 . Of the same kind is the Attic termination —elev for — είησαν, in the optat. of the aorist. §. 198 . 7. ·* . .'Q O ‘ 1 6. The infinitive of the aorists is in Doric — ημεν for — ηναι , C. g. Χασθημε v for Χασθηιιαι Theocr. II, 46. διακριθήμεν in the treaty of the Lacedaemonians and Argives in Thucydides v, 79- αποΧειφθήμεν Tim. L. p. 7. άφανισθήμεν id. p. 11. άντικαταθημεν id. p. 22. εύρεθημεν Archyt. ap. Diog. L. vm, 80 . άποτραπημεν Euryph. ap . Gale, p. 666. βονΧηθημε v ib. p. 668. y εναθημεν Archyt. ib. p. 674 1 . q Brunck. ad Apoll. 1. c. r Fisch. II, p. 337 sq. 412. Si s Valck. ad E. Hipp. 1. c. t Valck. ad Theocr. x. id. p. 49· Maitt. p. 232. 1200. * 868 Conjugation. Dialect. Also — ημεναι, as φανη μεναι Mosck. II, 152. which form is frequent, particularly in Homer, αριθμηθη μεναι II. β', 124. (άριθμημεναι Tim. L. p. 8. from άρίθμημι) ομοιωθημεναι II. a , 187* μι^ημεναι 11. ζ, 161. αναβη μεναι 0(1. ά , 210 . αεικισθ ημεναι Od. σ', 22 l u . In some branches of Doric — ην was used for ηναι, e. g. στεφανωθην for στεφανωθήναι* . The Ionians and Dorians lengthen all circumflex terminations, by the insertion of another vowel, whether the termination be contracted or not. a) In contracted terminations the long vowel, which arises from the contraction, is extended, by the repeti¬ tion of itself, or of the corresponding short vowel, e. g. οράφ II. η, 448. eact II. θ ', 414. instead of ορας, ect. ye- λωων Od. υ, 347- ηβωωσα Od. ε , 69* for yeXwv, (·γελάων) ηβωσα, ( ηβάουσα ), and with a short VOWel ορόω II. ε', 244. βοοωσι II. pi, 265. αιτιοωο Od. ν', 135. Tpoyouw II. σ', 566. οροωσα Od. τ, 514. for ορώ, βοωσι, αιτιωο ( αιτιάοιο ), τρυ- yujev, ορώσα. The short vowel is made long, by being changed into a diphthong*, e. g. yeXolwvres Od. ν' , 390. for ye~ λοα wTes ib. 374. > f · ' * ,11 · l| .( II * ’ f' It L The first vowel also of the contraction is again pre¬ fixed to the contraction, as ναιεταωσης Od. a, 404. vate - ταωστι II. y , 387, §C. from ναιεταούσης, ναιεταούσφ, CQTfltV. ναιετωσης, — ωσιρ. * Note. This occurs only in the Ionic poets. b) Without the contraction, as εμβηρ II. ic, 94. φηη Od. X', 127. Φ', 275. φθηη II. it', 86l. ΪΟΥεμβη (—β α ' ιν ω) 4 \ \ w u Keen, ad Greg. p. 143. Fisch. ii, p. 348 sq. x Koen. 1. c. . «* »m- ·ι· ■* '· S ,t .·;-.. - > ·■"·; ’ : >' ··· ' ■ .!·,!· ... > :: / Γ • s \ J , .. - - e \ »r «10··.... . v jp > ·:>·>- T * . ; . · · · ' - * - - , .. - ,/ ...w« ^ . ■ > 1 E. To face page 2(39. Indicative. Imperative. Optative. Conjunctive. Infinitive. Participle. Aor. l. V * 1 f ετυγαμην Sing'. — αμήν, (— ασο, — ao ) — ω, (') — ατο Dual. — άμεθον, — ασθον, —άσθηυ ΡΙΐΙΓ. αμεθα, — ασθε, — u ντο τυψαι Sing. — at, — άσθω Dual. — ασθον, —άσθων Plur. — ασθε, — άσθωσαν ( 4 ) τυψαίμην Sillg. - αίμην, — αιο, — αιτο Dual. — αίμεθον, — αισθον, — αίσθην Plur. — αίμεθα, — αισθε, — αιντο( 3 ) τνψωμαι Sing, -ωμαι, ( -ησαι, -ηαι) ->/, -ηται Dual, -ωμεθον, -ησθον, -ήσθην Plur, -ωμεθα, -ησθε, -ωνται τνψασθαι τυψάμ€ΐΌξ - άμενος, - αμ€ν>μ - άμβνον. Aor. 2. • / €Τν7Γθμ.ην it proceeds exactly like the imperf. pass. τυττου ( — εσο, — εο) τυπ οίμην, 8gC. ( 3 ) as in the present τύττωμαι of the passive. τνττ€σθ(α / τνττομ€νο$. Fut. l. τνψομαι — &c. like the pres. pass. wanting. τυψοίμην, 8ζ0. ( 3 ) as the opt. pres. pass. wanting. τνψεσθαι τνψόμβί'ος, - ομβνη, - ομενον. Fut. 2. τυπονμαι Sing. - ονμαι, - rj (-et) ( 5 ) — ειται Dual. - ονμεθον, - ε'ισθον, - ε'ισθον Plur. —ουμεθα, '·— εκτθε, — οννται wanting. τυποίμην Sing. οίμην, — ο'ιο, —oito Dual. οίμεθον, — ο'ισθον, - ο'ισθον Plur. οίμεθα, — ο'ισθε, — ο'ιντο wanting. τνττε'ισθαι τνπουμενος, -ουμενη . - ούμβνον. I .Conjugation. Dialect. 269 φτ}, φθη (φθάνω). The short vowel is sometimes added here, e. g. τταρστηετον Od. σ', 182 y . The Ionic prose writers oftly prefix an e to the cir- cumflexed termination, ΰιαφνγεειν Herod . i, 10. for $ιαφν- yeiv, σνΧΧε'χθεωσι id. II, 62. ορμηθεωσι id. I, 47. for σνΧΧε'χθώσι , όρμηθώσι. τιμεωσι id. II, 50. for τιμώσι , Tt- μαονσι . Thus also in Doric άποτμηθεωντι, λα φθεωντι, ραφεωντι in Archimedes p. 67. 83* 137. (ed. Basil. 1544.) for άττοτμηθώσι , Χηφθωσι, εγγραφώσιν. The same takes place in the Ionic Poets, ineeiv for πιειν II. S\ 263. 481. Hesiod. Sc. Here. 252. They also lengthen e by changing it into the diphthong a, e. g. Saμeίω Od. σ', 54. for δαμεω, $αμώ, βειω II. ζ', 113. for βεω , βώ. θειω Π. ί τ, 4 83» for θώ ζ . ,, ^ 1 Note. From these must be distinguished the forms in which the contraction actually takes place, e. g. in the fut. μηκυνεων Herod. II, 35. Sieve ρινεει II. β ', 387. I . \v\ o-Tv.’}')··;) #U ' ■■<·'···■■:*■· ' ·■·;■· . . · · .!·" ,·■ ■ ■■ > ■ * The Middle Voice. 20 ί * .. ; ■ ·: - ■■ · v In the middle voice, the aor. 1. and fut. 2. alone have a peculiar conjugation ; the present and imperf. are the same as the present and imperf. pass. The fut. l. is con¬ jugated like the present, and the aor. 2 . like the imperf. and what are called the perf. and plusquam perf. mid. have already occurred in the active voice. The fut. l. H however, and the aor. 2. have somewhat peculiar in the rest of the moods, on which account they are given fully with the aor. i. and fut. l. See Table E. - ----- : -——-——- y Maitt. p. 313. z Maitt. p. 122. Fisch. i, p. 76· i?, p. 423. 270 Conjugation. Dialect. Observations. The form —ao of the second person sing. aor. 1. mid. occurs frequently in the Ionic and Doric writers, e. g. eyeivao. 11. e , 880. V 7 T ε\ύσαο II. a , 401. εθηκαο Theocr. xxix, 18. Thus in some editions εείσαο, II. i> 641. is given, whilst others have the contracted form εείσω, εκρεμω II. ο , 18. In the Syracusan dialect the form — a was used, o being omitted as φνσάντες for φυσάοντες §. 196. Obs. 8. But there is no instance of this, except in the doubtful passage of Theocr . iv, 28. and the Scholiast on the passage. Instead of the termination — άμην the Ionic dialect had also the form — ασκόμην, e. g. S ασσάσκετο II. t , 333. * : * *1 ■■*.·> r #\ /Ί 2. The termination — άσθωσαν was also — άσθων , e. g. Χεξάσθων II. i, 67. Comp. §. 197· 3. 3. In the third person opt. aor. 1. mid. — aiaro for — αιντο is very frequent in the Ionic and Attic Poets, e. g. αρησαίατο Od. d, 164. άνακτησαίατο , τισαίατο Herod, hi, 75. εκσωαίατο JEschyl. Pers. 360. ^εζαίατο Soph. CEd. Col . 44, ερ Γ γασαίατο Aristoph. Lys. 42. Thus also in the opt. aor. 2. mid. yevoiaro II. β ', 340. 7ΓΙ 'θο'ιατο Soph. CEd. Col. 962. in the fut. όψοίατο , yvaiaoiaTo id. CEd. T. 1274. Comp. §. 198. 6 db . 4. The third person plur. aor. 2. mid. is frequently in Ionic — εατο for —ovro, as in the imperf. §. 198. 6 b . e. g*. περιε- βαΧεατο Herod. VI, 25. επυθεατο vn, 172. kyevearo i, 214. ii, 166 ! ί 1 c J) v 5. It has been before observed, that this form of the fut. arises from contraction. Herodotus has also in the second person άττοθανεε at, εύφρανεεαι. The Dorians instead of — ονμαι said — ευμαι , e. g. μαθευμαι Theocr. ii, 60. In the third person they used η also for ει, e. g. καρπευσηται , εpyaζητaι . Jr V» ;‘)K .. r ; :i .. · t (■/'·. . . ίΠ:· Γ ·’ a Valck. ad Theocr. X. Id. p. 84. b Fisch. ii, p. 418 sq. c Fisch. ii, p. 436*. d Koen. ad Gregor, p. 127 sq. Fisch. n, p. 428. i 271 Of Verbs in — μι. The number of verbs in — μι in the Attic and com¬ mon dialect is but very small, and in these few there are only some which have in the greater part of the tenses a form peculiar to themselves, and different from the con¬ jugation in — ω, and which accord with each other in the formation and termination of the tenses, e. g. τίθημι , «Vi, ΐστημι (φημί), $ί$ωμι. Others again have a pecu¬ liar inflexion, in many points differing from the conju¬ gation of the verbs in the examples, as € ίμί, € Ίμι, and others again, as all verbs in — υμι, occur only in the pre¬ sent and imperfect, deriving the rest of their tenses from the radical form. There are thus, in this conjugation, more anomalous verbs than in that of verbs in — ω, — βω, besides the verbs which are improperly classed under verbs in — μι , as ημαι (perf. pass, from εω) οΐ£α, &;c. These verbs were chiefly used in the iEolo-Doric dialect, and in the writers of that dialect verbs very fre¬ quently occur in the form — μι, which are otherwise in — εω, — άω, e. g. νίκημι TheOCV. VII, 40. 7 τοθόρημι id . VI, 22. ορημεθα Tim. L. p. 7. φίλημι Sappho in Athen. p. 697 . φορημεθα from φόρημι Alcasus in Heraclid. Ponticus p. 13. ed. Schow e . In the old Ionic Poets also similar forms occur, at least in single tenses, as άίνημι Hesiod, epy. 683. 7 ηράντβσσι from 7 ηράς, y ηρημι, id. epy. 188. II. p, 197 . ννημι II. ε, 893. 746, 8ξ€. ίητοφθάς II. η , 144. from — φθημι , επιτελώς II. ζ' , 291. from — πλωμι { , where otherwise the words in common use are aivew, yηpάω, φθάνω , ( φθάω ), πλέω, ττλωω. Hence also comes the form of the third " -— . ' Fisch. n, p. 440. f Heyne ad II. f>', 197 . 202 272 Verbs in —μι. Conjugation. person — ησι for— ei, e. g. παμφαίνησι for φαινει from φαίνημι. θάλπησι Bacchyl. in. Anal. T. I, p. \5\. XI. (what is called σχήμα Ίβύκειον. See §. 195. 7 .) and the participles in —ei? instead of in— ων. See §. 196. Obs. 8. These forms in — μι are thus properly of iEolic origin, or rather they existed already in the old Greek language, which was used by Homer and Hesiod, and in which the dialects were as yet mingled together. The Ionic and Attic dialects, which first assumed a determinate form, retained some of these verbs in — μι. The iEolians, however, which retained the most of the an¬ cient language, made the greatest use of them. Notwithstanding this antiquity, these verbs appear to have come from older forms in — εω, — ·άω, — όω, partly because their futures, and sometimes tilso their perfects and first aorists, are regularly derived from such verbs ; and partly because they always have a determi¬ nate relation to these verbs, viz. ]) — ω in verbs pure is changed into— μι, and the short vowels α, ε, o, preceding, are changed into the long ones η, ω; ; i . . ’ * , * , ' · ‘ * ' / I J » I - 1' p t 2) they generally receive a prefix also, the reduplica¬ tion. This consists in prefixing 1 , before which, in verbs beginning with a consonant, this consonant, or one which 1 ^ » answers to it, is repeated, e. g. θεω, /ut. θησω, τίθημι (not θιθημι §. 36.) Sou), Jut. $ωσω, perj\ SeSwKa, $ί$ωμι. This reduplication, however, is not used in verbs whose radical form is already more than a disyllable, e. g. δείκνυμι from δεικνύω, ζεύγννμι from ζευγνύω, ονημι from ονεω, and various others, e. g. φημί from φάω. If the verb begins with a vowel, or with τττ, στ, i, only is prefixed with a spintus asper , e. g. εω, fut. ησω, Ίημι. 7Γτάω, ΐπτημι. στάω (flit, στήσω, aor. έστησα ) 'ίστημι. I Verbs in — μι. Conjugation. 273 i Some verbs, which begin with vowels, repeat the first syllable, as in what is called the Attic reduplication (§. 168. Obs. 2.) e. g. άλάλημαι, άκάχημι, from άλάομαι , ά*χεω. In some the initial vowels e and t are made long by changing them into the diphthong ei, as εω, είμί, ’ ϊω , εΊμι. In είμί, however, ει appears to have arisen from the old mode of using εε for η , or by interchanging ει and η, as in τεθεικα, and είμί from ημί, whence too ην. Formation of the Tenses. 1. In the present tense pass, and mid. the termina¬ tion of the pres. act. — μι is changed into — μαι, and the long vowel preceding, into the short vowel of the radical form, τίθημι, τίθεμαι (from θειο) ϊστημι , 'ίσταμαι (from στάω) $ί$ωμι, $ί$ομαι (from $οω). 2. In the imperf. act. the termination — μι of the present is changed into — v, e. g. τίθημι ετίθην, ϊημι, ϊην, ΐστημι, ϊστην, φημί, <εφην, $ί$ωμι, ε$ί$ων, S είκνυμι , ε§εί- » / / » Α ? κνυν, ειμι \ημι), ην. The imperf. pass, and mid. take — μην for — v, as the imperf. pass, and mid. of verbs in — ω, and change the long vowel of the penultima into the corresponding short vowel of the radical, so that the pres. pass, and mid. appears to be the basis — μαι in — μην . ετίθην , τίθε¬ μαι , ετιθεμην. ϊστην , ίσταμαι, ίσταμην. ε$ί$ων, $ι$ομαι, εϊ)ΐ$όμην. 3. As the second aorist of verbs in — ω in the act. and mid. has the same termination as the imperf. with the radical vowel made short, the second aorist of verbs vol. 1. τ 203. 274 Verbs in — μι. Form, of Tenses. in — μι in the act. and mid. accords entirely in its termi¬ nation with the imperf. act. and mid. except that the shortening vowel is produced by omitting the reduplication. Verbs beginning with consonants, and those whose redu¬ plication consists in i aspirated, receive here the syllabic augment. Imperf. A. δτίθην. Aor. 2. A. ϊθην. Imperf P. med. ετιθεμην. Aor. 2. Μ. εθεμην. Imperf A. εδίδων. Aor. 2. A. εδων. Imp. P. 1\I. εδιδόμην. Aor. 2. 1VI. εδόμην. Imperf A. "ιστην. Aor . 2. A. εστην. Imp. P. Μ. ϊστάμην Aor . 2. Μ. εστάμην. 4. The future is only of one kind, and is regularly derived from the radical form of the verb, e. g. τίθημι from Θεω, θησω. ίστημι from στάω 3 στήσω. δίδωμι from Sow, δωσω. ίημι from εω, ησω. εννυμι from 'εω, εσω. φημί from φάω , φησω. The fut. mid. is formed from this, as in verbs in — ω. θησομαι, (TTt](J o/ului, cwo Oficii. iffTotiut , 8$C. 5. The aor. l. act. in most verbs differs essentially from the formation of the aor. l. of verbs in — w. For instead of retaining the σ of the fut,, the verbs in — μι generally change it into κ , e. g. θήσω 3 εθηκα. ησω , ήκα. δώσω, εδο)κα. But Theocr. XXVII, 21. has ίωσ»| from έδωσα for εδωκα, since the conjunct, of the form in use is not met with. Probably, however, δώσει is more correct, ac¬ cording to the conjecture of Fischer n, p. 253 . as Herod. VI, 133. οκω 9 — δώσου σι for δώσωσι. ίστημι Only, and φημί, deviate from this, and make έστησα , εφησα. Perhaps these forms in — κα were originally perfects, but after¬ wards were used as aorists, when a peculiar form was introduced for the perfect^. The forms also of the aorists in — κα have not the rest of the moods, but only those in — σα. From this aorist, however, is formed δ Herm. de r. em. Gr. Gr. p. 233. I Verbs in — μι. Form. of Tenses . 275 the aor. i. mid. by annexing the syllable— μην. εθηκάμην , ηκαμην , εόωκαμην. 6. The perfect is formed regularly, as in verbs in — ω, except that verbs whose perfects were the same in sound as the aor. l. take ei instead of η, 8ωσω, but θησω , τεθεικα, ησω, εϊκα. This Use of ει for η must be Boeotian. In ΐστημι it must be observed, that in the perf. the augment e, which enters in the place of the reduplication i, is aspirated , and further takes an i in the plusq. perf. εστηκα, ειστηκειν. The plusquam perf. however, frequently has the simple augment, as συνεστη - κει Xen. Cyr. VI, 1, 54. ττεριεστηκει TIlUC. VI, 61. άνεστη - κει Arist. Pint . 738, $c. See §. 164. Obs. l. The perf. pass, is derived from the perf. act. accord¬ ing to the same rules, as in verbs in — ω, except that 'ίστημι and $ί$ωμι take the short vowel, instead of the long one, εστηκα , εσταμαι, έεέω/τα, ^εέο /xat, which in τιθημι, ίημι takes place first in the aor. i. From the perf. act. and pass, comes the plusq. perf. A. and P. as in verbs in — ω. τεθεικα , ετεθείκειν. τεθεί - μαι , ετεθείμην. 7. The aorist. l. pass, of verbs in — μι 3 stands in the same relation to the perf. as in verbs in — ω. Thus from εσταμαι , εσταται comes εστάθην , aor. 1. $ε$ομαι } Se$o- ται, ε^όθην. In τίθημι and 'ίημι the diphthong ει of the perf. is changed into the short vowel e. τεθείμαι, τεθειται, ετεθην (for εθεθην according to §. 37.) αφεΐμαι, άφειται , άφεθην. From the second pers. perf. p. comes the fut 3. p. τεθεισαι, τεθείσομαι, εστασαι , εστάσομαι, 8$C. and from the aorist. pass, the fut. 1. ετεθην , τεθησομαι . άφεθην , αφεθησομαι . ε$όθην, $οθησομαι . Τ 2 % 276 Verbs in μι. 204. Conjugation. I 1. The principal difference between the conjugation of these verbs and that of the preceding, consists in the final syllable — μι in the l. p. pres. sing. — σ«άη the third p. pres. sing. — θι in the second p. imper. sing. — σαν in the third p. imperf. plur. Note. The termination — θι of the imperat. aor. 2. is usu¬ ally changed into ?. 2. Here it must be observed further, that in all per¬ sons of the dual and plur. in the pres, imperf. aor. 2. in the indicative, but not in the conjunctive, the short vowel of the radical form enters, whilst in the sing, the vowel is Used ; thus e in τιθημι , a in ' ίστημι and φημί, o in $ί$ωμι. The aor. 2. of ίστημι only is excepted, ίστην, which re¬ tains η throughout; and some particular verbs, as αημι, pass, αηται , imp. αητό , άκάχημαί; $1ζημαι } 8$C. Before the final syllable of the third pers. plur. — σι, which ap¬ pears to have arisen from— τι (§. 191 . Obs.) either the short vowel is lengthened after rejecting the v before the termination, so that e becomes et, ο ov , a and v short become a and v long, τιθεντι , τιθβισι , $ι$οι/τί, &ι$ονσι, ιστάντι, ιστάσι, ζςυγνιιντι, ζβν^νυσι, or the ν before the termination is changed in the Ionic manner into α, τι - Θίασι , SiSoaaij (evyvvaai. In these verbs the terminations — σαι and — σο of the pres. pass, imperf. p. and imperat. p. are very much used, which before also were made the basis of the common forms in verbs in — ω, e. g. τίθβσαι Plato Cratyl. p. 2 35. τίθβσο Aristoph. Pac. 1039 . ίστασαι 11. K, 279. ίστασο Eurip. Ale . 1122 . Phcen . 40. VWo Aristoph. Vesp. 421. Verbs in 277 — μ ι . Conjugation. 3. The optative in the tenses in — ημι, — -ην, ends always like the aor. pass, of verbs in — ω, in — ην, which is preceded by the radical vowel with i; thus τιθείην , θειην, ισταιην, σταίην, διδοίην, δο'ιην. In the passive and middle the termination is — μην, with the same diph¬ thongs preceding it, τιθειμην, θειμην. ισταίμην, δεδοηιχην, δοίμην. The verbs in — υμι have commonly no optative of their own, but only of the radical form, e. g. δεικνυοι, ζενγνυοι. Yet we find in Plato Phcedon. p. 266. on ψύχοιτό re και TrnyvvTO (ττη'γνύτο) analogous to ΧεΧυτο Od. σ', 237. Thus δαινύτο II. ω, 665. appears to be the opta¬ tive of δαίνυμι (whence δα'ινυ II. i, 70 . Od. 7 ', 309 .) h 4. The conjunctive has the long vowel of the pres, indie, in all persons where the common conjugation makes η , e. g. τιθώ, τιθης, τιθη , τιθγτον , τιθητε. \στώ , ιστί}?, ιστη, ιστητον , ιστητε. δίδω, διδώς, δίδω, διδώτον, διδωτε, 8$C. The form — υμι also appears to have a conjunctive. Plato Phcedon. p. 175. οττως μη διασκεδάννυται η ψυχή, και — τούτο τεΧος fj (where διασκεδαννύται must have been written. Thus also ibid. p. 176. δεδιεναι, μη ό άνεμοί αυτήν δασκεδαυνύσιν. In this case too the reading of the 2nd Basil, edit, in Plato Gorg. p. 47 . αποκτί i/- νυμεν , όταν αττοκτιννυμεν ( — κτιννύμεν) would not be false. It is at least more supported by syntax than el nva Ο.ΤΓΟΚΤ. 5. The infinitive is a. in the active always — ναι in the present tense, with the short radical vowel, τιθεναι , ievai , ιστάναι , φάναι , διδδναι, ζευ·γνύναι , in the aor 4 2. with a diphthong, or the long vowel, et for e, η for α, ου for o, θείναι, είναι, στηναι, δούναι, b. in the passive and middle — σθαι with the short vowel, τϊθεσθαι, θεσθαι , ίστασθαι , δίδοσθαι, δόσθαι. h Comp. Clarke ad Od. σ', 237. 205. ♦ 278 Verbs in — μι. Conjugation. 6 . In the participle a. in the active the form — νς is the basis, τιθενς, η. τιθεν, Gen. τιθεντος, διδόνς, n. διδόν, Gen. διδόντος, fyc. The final syllable was made long after rejecting v , according to §. 39· by changing ε into ei, o into ov, a and v short into a and v long, τιθείς, n- I \ θεισα, διδους, διδονσα, στας, στασα, δεικννς, δεικννσα. b. The termination of the participle in the pass, and mid. is — μένος with the preceding short vowel, τιθέμενος, θε μένος, ιστάμενος , διδόμενος. See Table F. Observations. 1 . In Ionic and Doric the forms —eo>, — άω, — όω often occur in the present and imperf. sing, with the reduplication, e. g. τιθείς Find. P. 8, 14. ετητιθείς Herod . v. 95. προτιθείς id . i, 133, επιτιθεί id, vn, 35. \στα id. iv, 103. διδοΊς II. i, 164. διδοΊ Hesiod, epy, 279· Herod, iv, 163. Pind. P. 4, 472. Impf. ετίθει Od. ε , 196. Herod, vi, 69- Xen. Cyrop . iv, 1, 24. vni, 2. 26. ίστ a Thucyd . n, 106. νι,’43. εδίδους Demosth. p. 914. Herod, i, 163. in, 50. Xen. Cyrop. vn, 5, 35. vni, 2, 17· εδίδουν 3. p. pi. Hesiod, epy. 138. ίει Herod, iv, 28. μεθιει Eur. Bacch. 1071*. ίστημι is commonly conjugated like verbs in — μι , the rest, according to the contracted form, only in the sing. Verbs in — υμι are conjugated in the pres, and imperf. according to the form — μι, fcy the Attics, some¬ times also as if from — vco k . Obs. Whether the contracted form in the present was used by the Attics also, is a matter of dispute. Brunck has received τιθείς, ie?s in many places, e. g. Soph. Phil. 992. Antig. 403. Aristoph. Lysistr. 895, fyc * 1 . and calls τίθης , ίης the common form. O n the other hand Porson asserts ad Eurip. Or. 141. that τίθης , ί ης * Fisch. ii, p. 442. 478. k Brunck. ad Arist. Av. 520. Fisch. n, p. 458. 1 Brunck. ad Soph. Ph. 1. c. (Ed. T. 628. Aristoph. 1. c. Musgr. ad Eurip. Here. f. 710. VERBS in —μι. I. Active. To face page 278 . Present. Indicative. τίθ - η μι, ίστ -ημι. SiS - ωμι, ζενγν Sing. - ημι, — W, —ησι (*) -<ομι, — — ay, — e, &C. ( 3 ) $έόα>κα | Plusquam perf. Aor. 1. ετεθείκειν έστήκειν εοε&ώκειν τέθεικε V εστηκε > as τέτνφε $έ(Ιωκε ) — ay, — ε, §C. ( 4 ) Only of έστησα §. 203. 5. r στήσου, —ατω — ατον, —α Γων — ατε. —άτωσαν Aor. 2. as imperf. except έστη >■ — νν, — m, —η - ητον, - ητην — ημεν, — ητε, —ησαν Optative. τιθ-ειην, ιστ-αιην, $ι$-οίην (— νοιμι ) Sin Dual. Plur — ειην, —εό /y, - αίη ν, — αίης, — οίην, — οίης, ■ — είητον, — αίητον, — ο'ιητον, ειημεν, - είητε, — αίημεν, —αίη τε, - οιημεν, - οίητε, —ειη - αίη - οι η —ειήτην —αιήτην / —οιητην —ειησαυ —εΐεν —αιησαν —αΐεν —οίησα ν Οΐ€Ρ £0erf] θές, στήθι, [yo(9ij coy ( 5 ) j^erij — ey, - ετω ηθι - ητω [Mi] ciy, - ότω Dual. - ετον, ετών, SgC. Plur. — ετε, — έτωσαν. Future. θήσω ; στήσω > as τΰψι* 3ώσαι J τεθεικ εστήκ $ε$ώκ - οιμι, as τετνψοιμι only of έστησα στησαιμι, as τΰή/αιμι θείηυ Ί σταίην I as in the present ( 6 ) δο'ιην J Conjunctive. τιθ -i Sing. - Dual. — -ώ, SiS -ω — >j —fa - ή -- ψ ητον, — ητον Plur. -ωμεν, — ωμε -ωτον, -ητε -ωτον -ωσι -ωσι Infinitive. τιθ-ε εναι ιστ-αναι StS-ovai ζενγν-ιίναι Participle. τιθ -els, ιστ -ay, SiS-ovs, £evyv-vs, -εισα, -ασα, -ονσα, -νσα, -εν -άν / -ον -νν τεθεικ εστήκ $ε$ωκ -ω, as τετνψα τεθεικ-' εστήκ- ϊ $ε$ωκ- ’ εναι τεθεικ- εστηκ- έεϋωκ- ως. -oy. only of έστησα στήσω, — ης, as τνφω στησαι στησας, — ασα, — αν. θώ Ί στώ , as in the present. θειναι στηναι Sovvui Note. As τ',θημ, so ΐημι, and as ϊστημι so φημί. §. 209· II. θείς, στα y, $oi/y, -εισα, — εν Λ / ~ασα , —αν -ονσα, — ον. ύ- . - _ · ! ,'’ ,0- - . I -i ’ - V: : · * .·■ \ f -'r k —- . rr. · — ;< .,·'·> - . · I • 11 '<·> - · TV -V' c,\ ♦ . ,’ΟΜΓ» -r n^VQ *— i T -. . <* - , · * > - . ι-,.α , • ■; · ··> , · . r,.;. - t ■ HVV y ■ ·'··· ^ * ' . V. . t 1 u . V > * I * * ■ ·· .'V . .· T'\ ·· t •t > · Verbs in — μι. Conjugation. 279 alone are Attic, and τιθεις, ιβϊς barbarisms. One of the grounds on which Porson rests his assertion, viz. that the Attics could not have said τιθέίς, because they did not say r i- θουμεν, τιθειτε proves too much, and therefore nothing; since, on the same grounds, we might reject τιθεϊς from the Ionic dialect, which did not admit τιθουμε v } τιθειτε. But a more decisive proof is, that in Attic writers τίθησι always occurs, and never τιθεΊ, because the transcribers could not alter this, at least in the Poets, on account of the measure of the verse. In most of the passages too of Attic writers, in which the contracted form occurs, the accent is so placed in the old editions and MSS. as it must have stood over τίθης, and not over τιθείς, viz. τίθεις, and hence ει appears to have arisen from the later pronuncia¬ tion of η. 2 . In the third pers. pi. the form — ασι is used by the Attics, which occurs frequently in Ionic, and hence is called Ionic, e. g. τιθεασι Herod. iv, 23. v, 8. Thuc. ii, 34 . Aris- . toph. Vesp. 562. ίιδόασι Herod, i, 93. Thuc. i, 42. fyc. In verbs in — υμι ,- υασι is given as the new Attic, — υσι (as ΰεικνυσιν Plato Rep. vii, in.) as the old Attic form m . Heindorf has rightly received άττοκτιννυάσι in Plat. Gorg. p. 67· ιασι Plat. Rep. vm, p. 217. Thuc. vi, 86. Xenoph. Mernor. S. ii, 1, 33. (contracted from ιεασι , a contraction which occurs only when a vowel, and not a consonant, precedes, as in Π eipaia, but not in βασιλέα.) n Herodotus also has ιστεασι v, 71. 3. The form εστακα , which in the common grammars, is chiefly found in later writers only, (also JEschin. Antioch. 18.), and in a transitive sense. The Doric form εστακα with a long is distinct from this, e. g. Pind. P. 8, 100. τταρεστάκε. Instead of εστηκα, the form εστα by syncope (see §. 183. 7.) is more used, e. g. εσταμεν Plato Gorg. p. 47- Thuc . vi, 18. Aristoph. Ach. 683. for εστηκαμεν. εστατε Demosth. p. 99· instead of which Herodotus uses εστεατε v, 49· In the third person pi. the two a which are left together, after rejecting /c. m Moeris p. 127- 171. n Thofn. M. p. 225. 40b. Moeris p. 281. 406'. Fiscli. n, p. 450. 280 Verbs in — μι. Conjugation . and one of which has arisen from η , are contracted,, whilst in the other persons, and in the infinitive, one a is omitted, ear άσι (as βεβασι , τεθνασι) Herod, ι, 155. 179. Thuc. i, 6l, tyc. Herodotus says also εστεασι i, 200 . hi, 62. Thus also in the conjunctive εστωμεν Plato Gorg. p. 47. infin. εσταναι Soph. Antig . 651. Eurip. Ale . 209. Thuc. hi, 15. partic. εστηως Hesiod, θ, 519· εσταως II. β\ 170. εστεώς Herod, ι, 102. v, 92. έστω? 7%wc. iii, 9. iv, 10. Soph. Ο. T. 633. in the neuter Thuc. iv, 10. plusquam perf. εστασαν Hesiod . vm, 74. Thuc. iv, 56. vii, 28, &;c. 0 As these forms are like a present in — μι , and although belonging to the perf. have the signification of the present tense, a present tense εστημι , was invented, which, however, never occurs, and an imperative was formed from it εσταθι II. \fsj 284. v, 354. Arist. Av. 206. Soph. Ej. 49. in the optative εσταίη Od . >|/, 101. 169 p . Besides this, a present formed from the perf. was taken as a basis, and a fut. εστηξω and εστηζομαι Plato Pep. ix, p. 271. Symp. p. 268 t Eurip. Iph. A. 675. formed from it. t 4. The aor. 1. in — κα occurs in good authors only in the sing, and third p. pi. Yet Xenoph. Mem. S. iv, 2, 16. has εθηκαμεν . In the rest of the persons the aor. 2. is more used, which again hardly ever occurs in the sing. On the other hand έστησα and εστην are equally used, but in different senses. See §. 206. 5. In the imperative pres. 2. pers. the contracted form also is very frequent in τ ίθημι, ιημι , §ί$ωμι, η-ίθει JEschyl . Agam. 931. S. ad Th. 203. Arist. Ran. 1316. Thuc. vi, 14. Xen. Cyrop. v, 3, 21. ΐει Arist. Pac. 158. Ran. 1462, SiSov Herod. HI, 140. Plat. Phadr. p. 343. Xen. Cyrop. i, 4, 10. Instead of which Pindar has &<5oi 01. i, 136. 6, 178. 7, 164. in the Doric dialect. For ίσταθι we find more commonly 'Ιστη II. Φ , 313. Aristoph. Eccl. 738. Eurip. Suppl. 1229- Hel. 1264. Ion. 1129. In the same manner πίμπρη Eurip. Ion. 527· 974. εμττίττλη Arist. Av. 1310. ζη Eurip. Iph. T. 699- for ττίμπραθι. liscli. u, p. 453. 461 sq, 463. p Fisch. ii, p. 442 sq. Verbs in 281 — μι. Conjugation. εμπιπλαθι, ζηθι q . Similarly δείκνυ for δείκνυθι Aristoph. Av. 665. Plato Rep. vii. p. 144. So also σάω for σάωθι Od. p, 595 r . ; On the contrary φάθι alone is in use. In the imperative aor. 2. the second person is always #ey, $ός 3 not θετι, δόθι. But the latter occurs in Nicand. Ther. 562. In compound verbs, for στηθι is frequently found — στα, e. g. αυστα Theocr. xxiv, 36. (or ava Soph. Aj. 194. Eurip. Troad. 98.) Thus also πρόβα for προβηθι Arist. Ach. 262. παραστα Meriand. p. 46. Cler. The third person, plur. of the imperat. pres, and aor. 2. is, as in verbs in — ω, frequently — ντων for — τωσαν , e. g. παρα- θεντων Arist. Nub. 455. SiSovtivv Thuc. v, 18. 6. The optative pres, and aor. 2. as in the aor. pass, of verbs in — ω. have in the plural, in the Poets as well as prose _ n ^ ^ writers, more commonly — ειμεν, — είτε, —eier, αιμεν, — αΐτε, — ai€v 3 — οιμε v, — οιτε, — οιεν 3 for ——ειημε v 3 e. g. θειμεν Od. μ, 347. Demosth. p. 323. 1251, ίσταιει; Xen. Cyr. it, 4, 15. Thuc . 1, 18. $οϊμεν 3 Soier Od. β' 3 336. Thuc . 11, 12. Plat. Republ. x, p. 309. (Ποίησαν Damoxen. ap. Athen. hi, p. 401. ed. Schw.) μεθείτε Arist. Ran. 1384, 1393. (Optat. for. imper. as in Plato Euthyd. p. 9· ίλεω ε'ιητον for εστον.) Pind. P. v, 160. δίδοϊτε. Porson ad Eur. Or. 141. considers μεθείτε as the contracted imperative for μεθίετε (in which case it ought to be μεθίειτε) and corrects μεθεσθε. Obs. For δίδουν, όοιην, fyc. some moderns said also δι- $ωην, Ιιρην, which, however, is censured by the old Gramma¬ rians 8 . / > lld ® ltj ' M > 5o. 1. e. €ΐστηκ€ΐσαν> ill a transitive sense. II. Ίημι. # » , · 1. The compound άφίημι has frequently the augment at the beginning, e. g. ί,φ' ιει Thuc. n, 49 . Demosth. P · 7Q, 301. ηφίεσαν id. p. 540. 2. In the perfect, of this verb, besides the proper form eha, there occurs, but only in the New Testa¬ ment, €ωκα, αφεωκα (Pass, άφ^ωμαι), which must be Doric; but which is falsely given as Attic in the common Grammars „ 3 - In the P 1 · of the a or. 2. the Attics for Ιίφεμεν, Ιίφετε, αφπα*, more commonly say άφάμεν, «tyelre, άφεΐσαν, e.g. αυε,μεν Anstoph. Vesp. 572. Thucyd. i, 76 . (not the optat. as Fischer 11 , p. 481 . thinks) καθεϊμεν Eurip. Iphlg. A. 423. «Ire Soph. (Ed. T. 1405. άφεΐσαν Thuc. v, 81 . (not the participle, as Valckenaer ad Herod, p. 261 , 58. thinks) vii, 53. Demosth. p. 217 , 17 . Xenoph. Iiellen. * Fisch. 1, p. 107. Maitt. p. 51. ψ I Remarks on some Verbs in — μι. $83 5, 19. in the editions of Aldus and the 2nd of Stephens. avei σαν Thuc. V, 32. Plat. Symp. p. 180. παρεΐσαν Eurip. Troad. 694 u . The regular forms, άνεσαν , άνεσαντες, occur in Homer II. φ', 537. II v, 657. The aor. 2. infinit. είναι some,- times occurs in compound verbs. See Dorvill. ad Cha- rit. p . 485. Heindorf. ad Plat. Crat. p. 105. Obs. 1. In Herodot. 111, 126. iv, 103. occurs also a parti¬ ciple είσας, υττείσας, νττείσαντες, which Valckenaer p. 261, 58. derives from ύφίημι , as in another place νπεις Χο'χον occurs. But this appears rather to come from εω. See the list of defec¬ tive verbs under εω. Obs. 2. Another form of the aorist sometimes occurs,, ησα, e. g. άφησαν Xen. Hell. I, 6, 19- in some editions ; ανησαν , Eurip. Ion. 1J 70. μεθησρ<$ Arist. Vesp . 437- άφησρς Plato Symp. p. 170. ult. But in the better editions άφεΊσαν (< άφηκαν ), άνεισαν, μεθησεις , are read, and in Plato it must be και μη αφησεις, or και μη αφρς χ . Thus in Isocrates Areopag. p. 145. _D. ττροσθησωσιν , is falsely read, where the Milan edition gives correctly 7 τροσθήσουσιν. 9 * III. φημί. See §. 209 . Π. Dialects. In many cases the dialectic variations of this con¬ jugation agree with those of the first conjugation. 1. — σκον in the imperf. and aor. 2 . for — ην, where the short vowel is always used, e. g. τίθεσκεν Hesiod. u Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 1405. Fisch. ii, p. 479* x Fisch. n, p. 481. Verbs in — μι. Dialects. Fragm. 77 . ed. Cler. Μόσκον Od. r, 76. II. t f 3 331, σ ' } 54^ tor eSwv. στάσκβ II. y, 217. for ίστη. μεθσσκεν Apoll. Rh. hi, 274. 2. μεν and — μεναι in the infin. for — ναι, in which case the short vowel generally precedes this termination also, e. g. ύττβρτιθβμεν Pind. Pyth. 5 , 33. τιθεμεναι Clin, ap. Gale, p. 687. But τιθημεναι II. ψ, 83, 247. θέμαιαι IL β , 285. and θεμεν Od. λ', 3]4. Pind. 01. 11, 33. 6, 5 y . εσταμεν for εστάναι ( εστηκεναι ) Od. a , 120. φ\ 261. στα- μεν Pind. pyth. 4, 2. ΰάόμεν Pind. Isthm. 8, 132. έόμ€- vctt II. a, 116. Pind. Nem. 8, 34. $όμεν II. 379. Pind . OZ. 6, 54. 8. 111. Deer. Byzant. in Demosth. p. 256. in the compounds /uefleVei/ II. a', 283. σι/ζ /eVev PZwdf. P- 3 , 141. for μεθεϊναι, σννειναι , from μεθίημι , συνιημι. The long vowel remains in βάμεν for βηναι Pind. P. 4, 69. βημεναι Od. Θ , 518. f, 327. νποστάμεν Euryph. ap. Gale , p. 668 2 . . ' / * , · The Dorians use a for η in verbs whose radical form was in αω, e. g. Ίσταμι from στάω ; but not τίθαμι for τίθημι. The Dorians circumflexed the last syllable of the fut. θησω Theocr. VIII, 14. 17. 20. στασώ V, 53. 8ωσ£ I, 25. in, 36. Hence in the mid. θησενμβσθα id. vm, is. 3. In the second person τίθησθα Od.. i, 404. for τίθης. See §. 195. 7. 4. In the third person pres. sing, the Dorians say τ I for σι, e. g. τίθητι Theocr. Ill, 48. ύφίητι id. IV, 4. αττοόίίωτι Timceus Locr. p. n. 12. 16*. 5. In the third person pi. — VTl is Doric, τίθερτι, Haiti, p. 236'. y Fisch. 11, p. 45.9. a Maitt. p. 233. z Dialects. Verbs in — μι. εζιστά ντι Timceus Locr. p. 19 . φαντί Theocr, in, 45. Ίσαντι id. xv, 64 b . 6 . The imperf. in Ionic ended in — εας, —ea, —ee, as in the plusquam perf. 193. 4. e.g. υπερετίθεα Herod. hi, 155. 7 rpocTiOee viii, 49. aviee iv, 125. which, however, may be derived from the radical form άν — ιεω. Homer has also ζυνιον IL a, 273. for ξννίεσαν. see Etymol. M. p. 612 , 7 . 7. The third person pi. imperf. and aor. 2. is often abbreviated, but only by the Poets, — εν, —αν, — ον , — ων , for — εσαν, — ησαν, — οσαν , — ωσάν, β. g. τίθεν Pind. Ρ. 3, 114. ϊεν II. μ, 33. Pind. lsthm. 1 , 34. εσταν Od. θ', 325. Pind . Ρ. 4, 240. στάν II. λ', 216. ε^ον Hesiod. Th. 30. εφαν Theocr, 11 , 130. eyvov Pind . Ρ. 4, 214. and eyvwv id. 9, 137 c . «1 » 4 ' v - ‘ f ' ' ■ 1 4 · i J * i 8. Theloniansin these verbs also repeat the long vowel in the conjunctive, or prefix an e, e.g. 3ώωσιν IL a', 137. t, 136. στηγς II. p, 30. στηγ IL e, 598 d . στεωμεν IL λ', 348. χ. 231. θεωσι Herod . hi, 81. iv, 7. and lengthen the e which has been inserted; θείω IL a', 143. tt, 83. στείομεν IL ο , 297· μεθειω for μεθώ IL y , 414. In the Poets the short vowel also is inserted after the long one, as δώομεν II. η , 299· παρστηετον Od. σ', 182 e . 9. Homer frequently forms the third person conj. like the indicative, II. a', 129 . Od. a', 379. β' , 144. when the termination — σι is annexed, as in εθεΚγσι §. 195. 7. Instead of which he also says δώγσιν IL a, 324. μ , 275. and Scorj Od. μ , 216 . thusScoo), $ώρς, $ώρ, -—$ώωσι appears to be the formation, in which case the 1 subscriptum should b Maitt. 1. c. c Fisch. 11, p. 338. tl Heyne Ohss. ad II. T. V. p. 112 sq. e Fisch. 11, p. 449. 286 208 . Verbs in — μι. Dialects * stand under the ,, which in the optative is under ω, $ψην. Thus also πίμπλγσι Hesiod. epy. 299 . Ζφρ£ σ6 λιμοί Εχθαίρτ,, φιΧίη Si έϋστ. Δημητηρ Α’ιοοίη, βιότου Si Τ€ην 7τίμ7τ\γσι καλιην. t 10. As the third pers. conj. was formed like the third pers. indie, so the first person conj. in the old language appears to have been formed in — μι. At least the Eh/m,. M. p. 54 . 43. reads in II. «/, 716 . ίπη» dyd- yw M i mXtvSe, which is received by Wojf, for ‘ dyd- y °ιμι. Thus II. 1 , 414. ei Se icev (Ηκαίί’ 'ίκωμι φ'ιλψ es 7 r. 7. for ικοιμι. II. χ', 450. SeSre, νΰω μοι Ζττεσθον, Ίνωμ οτιν' epy α τ ετνκται. Od. τ, 490. where Eustathius on II. η, 243. read ύττττόταν — κτΐίνωμι, and according to syntax also the conj. is more corrects 11. In the infinitive Theocritus has xxix_, 9 . SiStvv for StSodv from ΙιΙόω, hlovai. Passive and middle voice. See Tables G. H. Observations. 1 . The imperative Ood for θεσο , θεο occurs only in the compounds, e*g. ττερίθου Aristoph. Eccl. 131. i 'πίθου ib. 1023 τταραθον zb. 1024. Resolved into θίσο it is found in an Epi¬ gram of Eratosthenes Anal Br. T. in, p . 123. jii. accord- mg to the emendation of Hemsterhusius ad Lucian. T. i, p. 389 . Βψ. θεο Od. /c', 333. and in composition ενθεο II. «S', 410, Sfc. ενικατθεο lies. epy. 27. τίθεσο Aristoph. Bac. 1039. Plat, boph. p. 241. In ίσταμαι , ιστω is more common than ίστασο, e. g. Soph. J. 786. Arist. Eccl. 732. although ίστασο occurs Eurip. Ale. * Hermann de Rat. em. Gr. Gr. p. 2 63. cf. Heyne ad II. y', 450. Schaef. Melet. in Dion. H. p. 99 . G II. Passive. Present. Indicative. Imperative. τ'ιθ - εμαι, Sing. — Dual. ιστ - αμαι, εμαι, αμαι, ■ομαι, υμαι, εμεθον, ■άμεθον. Plur. -1 SiS -ομαι, ζεάγν-νμαι — εσαι, (η) — erai — ασαι, (, —ωται Dual. —ί άμεθον, — ησθον,—ησθον — t άμεθον, — ωσθον, —ωσθον Plur. — (άμεθα, — ησθε, —ωνται — (άμεθα, — ώσθε, — ωνται. To face page ·28<>, nfinitive. ~ίθ - εσθαι ττ - ασθαι 'ιά - οσθαι 'evyv -υσθαι. Participle. τιθ-εμενος, — εμενη, —άμενον ιστ - άμενος, — αμάνη, —άμενον άιά -άμενος, - υμενη, —άμενον ζεν'γν-ά μένος, — υμενη, — άμενον. τέθ - είμαι, — είσαι, — ειται, SfC. εστ - αμαι, — ασαι, — αται. άεά-ομαι —οσαι —οται 3 εά· τάθ - εισο, εστ - ασο — είσθω, SgC. — άσθω, 8 ξ 0 . — άσθω, 8$C. Plusquam perf. Aor. l. άτεθ-είμ>] v, άστ-αμην, εόεά-ομην — ειτο, 8fc. — ατο, -οσο -οτο άτάθ -ην j έσταθ-ην > ε$ά - θην j as ετν ίκρθ-ην Future. : τεθήσομαι j σταθήσομαι > as τνψομαι j άοθήσομαι J τεθ - ητι στάθ - ητι εάθ - ητι τεθειην σταθειην οοθείην νεθ - εισθαι ιστ - άσθαι ($δ - άσθαι τεθ-ειμενος, — ειμάνη, —ειμενον εστ-αμενος, 8ξ0. άει$ - ομενος, 8$C. τεθησοίμην σταθησοίμην άοθησοίμη ν • ! '■ : r //. V E R B S in -r-jui. III. Middle. To face page 286 . Indicative. Imperative. Optative. Conjunctive. Infinitive. Participle. Present] lmperf. j as in passive - Aor. l. έθηκάμην 1 έστησάμην > as έτυψάμην εϋωκάμην ) only στησ - αι, — άσθω , — $ωσ J -οιμην θήσ j στησ>εσθαι δωσ J θησ Ί στησ ? όμενος. $ωσ J . Verbs in ■μι. Dialects. 287 1122 . Phan. 40. Arist. Vesp. 285 6 '. In the aor. 2 . the impera¬ tive is Soi/ in the compounds περίπου Arist. Nub. 644. (as περί - δοσθαι Equ. 791.) απόρου Ran . 1235 h . 2 . The optat. pres. pass, and aor. 2 . m. in Attic have fre¬ quently the form of the optative of a barytone verb in e. g. τίθοιτο Xen. Mem. in, 8 , 10 . ίιπεκτίθοιτο id Cyrop. vi, 1 , 26 . τταρατίθοιτο ib. vm, 2 , 3. επιθοίμεθα Thuc. vi, 34. 67 rt- θοιντο ib. 11 . 67 τίθοιτο Xen. Cyrop. vm, 5, 14. προσθοιτο Demosth. p. 68 , 27 . (I on. θεοιτο Herod, i, 52. 53. vii, 237.) From ίημι , άφίοιντο Antipho p. 653. ed. R. πρόοιντο Thuc. i, 120 . Demosth. p. 311, 27 . πρόοισθε id. p. 67 , 21 . 3. The same is the case in the conjunctive, except that here the distinction consists only in the accentuation, προτιθωμεθα Herod, v, 18. κατάθωμαι Arist. Vesp. 565. μετάθηται (for μεταθηται ) Plat. Cratyl. p. 232. in Fischer, πρόθηται Isocr. Enc. Hel. p. 208. D. επίθωνται Thuc. i, 64. (Ion. — θεωνται Herod, i, 194. v, 24. vii, 191. vm, 4\) From ίημι, πρόηται Demosth. p. 377· πρόησθε Thuc. m, 14. In the same man¬ ner εζίνι in the active Eurip. Troad. 94. Similarly we find παρα$ί§ωται Herod, m, 117 . άπό^ωνται Xen. Mem. in, 7, 6 . This deviation, however, in the conjunc¬ tive is very uncertain, since the distinction consists merely in the accent. I. ’ίημι . 1. The aor. pass, and mid. of \ ίημι receive also an augment in the compounds, έίθψ, είμην, in which case the aor. 2. mid. takes the form of the plusq. perf. pass, and of the optat. aor. 2. m.. Aor. l. ί ταρείθη 11. >//, 868. μετείθη Herod. I, 114. απειθή id. VII, 122. άφείθη De¬ mosth. p. 1209 . Lysias p. 496 k . Aor. 2 . mid. εφεΊτο jflsch. Prom. 4. Aristoph. Vesp. 242. Eurip. Suppl. ε Moeris p. IS sq. et Piers. Thom. M. p. 75. Fisch. n, p. 468. h Brunck. ad Arist. 1. c. * Fisch. 11, p. 470. k Dorv. ad Char. p. 600. 288 Verbs in -— μι. Conjugation. 1199, Soph. El. 1111. aireiro Herod. VIII, 49. καθειτο Thuc. IV, 100. 103. ύφοΊτο Eurip. Ph. 31. 7 rpoeivro De- mosth. p. 258, l6· 7 τροατο id. p. 264, 23. 7Γ ροεισθβ id , p. 59, 19. προειμβθα id. p . 60, 17· 7 rpoeivro id. p. 61, 4. καθνφβίμεθα id. p. 30, 24 l . 2. The imperative perf. pass, is commonly wanting in the grammars. Aristoph. Ran. 1427. μεθεϊσθον. Herod· IV. 98. μβθβίσθω. \ , · h r v 3. μεμβτιμβνος partic. perf. for μβταμβνο^ Herod. V, 108. VI, 1. VII, 229. is a very anomalous form. II. φημι is conjugated like 'ίστημι, but is only used in some tenses. Pr 'es. Ind. φημί , φη^> φησί ( v )> φ<* τ ον* φατον , φαμβν, φατό , φασί (ρ). Imperat. φαθί {jX.en. Cyrop. ιν, 5, 34. Arist. Equ. 22. See Moeris p. 392,) #c. Opt at. φαίην. For φαίημβν, 8$C. φαϊμ€ν , #C. e. g. Jtep. ix, 276 . Cory, φώ, φγς, φη· i · V 4 * Infin. φάναι. Partic. φάς, φασα , φάν. & Imperf. ίφην , βψ»?? ( ίφησθα ), εφατον, εφατην, ϊφαμβν, ίφατε, ίφασαν (in the Poets βφαρ). φησω. , ν Λ(θΓ. 1. βφησα. Opt. φησαιμι. Con], φησω. Inf. φησαι. Part, φησας. In the passive and middle occur: 1 Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 619. • I f % Verbs in μι . Conjugation. Aor. 2. med. εφάμην, chiefly occurs in the Poets and Ionic writers, φάσθε,ϊοτεφ. Οά.ζ',ζ 00. Imperat. φάο Od. 7 τ 168 . σ 9 170 . φασθε II. t , 422. i Infin. φάσθαι , not φάσθαι m //. t. 100. Od. 7Γ , 287» ^ 106. :M . * Vt I ” 'i \ , < \ J ίΛ I ·? . rj ") t v ; ·_ TiV’ TTkJi <» «IX » *' » *1j? » 1 > Ί «V! ' f r * Part, φάμενος". .· i j ' Π5 Observations. ,! 9 W 07 1. The present indicative, with the exception of the second person singular, is enclitic, i. e. it throws back its accent upon the preceding word. • · ■ , \ 210 . 390 Verbs in — μι. Dialects. Dialects. . · * r 1. Instead of v in the third person plur. the Ionians often have a, e. g τιθεαται Herod. i, 133. νπ,«ΐΐ9 · ίστβα- ται for Ίστανται id. II, 80. 113. Ill, 6l. V, 61. ετιθεατο id. I, 119. €$€ΐκνύατο id. IX, 58. εστεαται for εστανται I, 196. / 4 ■ 'w 1 : . i *-· ' ’t f 2. Here also the Ionians resolve the circumflexed vowel, e. g. επιθεωνται Herod. VII, 191. Comp. §. 208, 3. 3. The following are peculiar and less frequent deviations: οι^ωσω for $ωσω Od. v\ 358. ft), 313. $ί$ωθι for δβοθι Od. 7 , 380. But θεσσαντο Pind. Nem. v, 18. comes from θεσσεσθαι, c to obtain by prayers ,p . p Interpr. ad Hesych. T. i, p. 461, 15. 1704. Bentl. ad Cailim. H. in Cer. 48. Heyne ad Pind. 1. c. 0 V‘ *V - Vi V 1 Λ\(\ ? Γ . i. . W ■ << · »p; · K li: ■»* • . .ΚϋΐΙ f Of! i-ill I / y* , f' 4 Λ Irregular Conjugations in Irregular Conjugations in — μι. 291 2k 'SO Part. •N ,1 0 Λ 2k >3 > £ i / * > · f \ i *|i> / / * ; f > V /:. 1 li U J fH4' :iw / f. ■ ' cm a a 2k HH to • O .♦ A)S : V ;· V ‘ A O «Ν f s ('S'- =5 •N Ο» c (-S’- 0 0 ai 3 ε o .fe¬ ed ed ·*-» Q- O 3. > — to cd M <υ a- P-H ε i v?i ♦ W 5?· ^ «*** "S' b i ^ * * 50 to ^ ^ O to £ t t '5 V S '3 •N 2k sT i. S' S' it— it — to to ζή O p! 3 b b tto A 3 b b tto 2k e b 3 b b 2k 3 b b ^>to "Sto J' ? £ φ b b b b b >- it to 2. to c/iQP^ ^•4 b ·* fe'b “to b φ ·> _·* *> 5 —i - 1 2 > Ο O 'to b 3. <„£ b b & frSr 2k C S' b _ a t »■« S' F4 i *· O b δ b ^ b ^ (' 52 λ 2k O c/> b b s- vrS " T3 C c >- k Mi ζήΟΡ* CD V Wt < Λ S' ~ S' c " S' S' & ^ . ζή Q P* CM u o P- ε 2k O •\ u> O 2k to =t b <« ^ •N •a « b to b * ^y ο b «»* O b * to •k o ^4 O b sto sT S' .3- o b K (yj . Jjv O c b 2k O b cs b ttS •k o — o β φ b b to to b b it to > to "sto *N 2k O to ^ b b S'- to to b b b >to it to i to sT ^ - Ο β 2 Φ Φ O to to ^ 3 . O ^O Ό b b b ^ φ ·* 7 : Mi"' - ?'*.· : v* '! \ f ■> , -f v s. . f t { j Av' ην for ησαν in an inscription in JEsckin. in Ctesiph. p. 573. Hesiod. Th. 321. Herod. V, 12. particularly in the Doric dialect, e. g. in Epicharmus ap. Athen. II, p. 250. ed. Schw. vii, p. 12. 43. 119- 201. &>cA Dialects. F or «aiqiafftsqi elpi the Doric form was εμμί Theocr. xx, 32. els anciently εσσί II. a , 176 . y, 164 , #c. Theocr. i, 17 . Pind. Ql. 6, 1 53. Pyth. 1 , 172. and in the Attic Poets also Eurip. Hel. 1250. Aristoph. JLys. 600 z . εστί, Doric εντί Theocr. 1 . 17. xi 3 46 sq. This is used also for <; ^ ψ * εϊσι Theocr. v, 109 . xi 3 45 a . - i. εσμεν, Ion. ειμεν II. e, 873, $C. Herod. VII, 51. 9, 3. Dor . ειμες Theocr. II, 5. XV, 73, 89. 91. enercod Wi \mu· . * 7 : *>!ΐθί« If? nil· : ... . m-wi 76 ' ■■■'*· ' ΊΗ\ oti) ham?hcrra u Spanh. Kiister. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Plut. 77 · Fisch. 11, p. 498 sq. Brunck. Lex. Sophocl. p. 722 sq. * Thom. M. p. 425. Moeris p. 175. y Valck. ad Herod, p. 376, 21. z Brunck. ad Arist. 1. c. a Koen. ad Greg. p. 129 sq. “ 212 294 Irregular Conj. in — μι. Dialects. Obs. Callimachus uses also βμβν for βσμεν p. 541. ccxciv, ed f Ern. and Brunck also gives it in Soph. El. 21. v. not. h eia-l Ion. Dor. ίασι II. β', 125. Herod. 1 , 66 . Theocr. XXV, 24. V \ 4 ' X ► W · » > ' *- A . · * ' ■■■■*·.'+. * * * ■. · - ^i/ l. and 3. pers. Dor. Theocr. v, 10 C . ημβν Dor. J 7 M 6 S Theocr. XIV, 29 . ησαν, anciently eaav 11. β\ 70 S. Herod, iii, 125. Find. 01. 2 , 17. Theocr. xxv, 117. 128. and βσσαν Find. 9, 79. Obs. For ην the Ionic dialect had besides the form ίσκον, e. g. II. 153. Herod, yi, 133. vii, 119- Mschyl. Pers. 657. Theocr. xxv, 274. in a part written in the Ionic dialect. Ιεσομαι Dor. βσουμαι Thuc. v, 77, 79. and, on account of the verse, εσσουμαι Theocr. vii, 67 . v, 56. also II. β , 393, v, 317, \ In the imperf. the optative the conjunctive and the participle, the Ionians frequently have too the original form €ω. e, g. eov II. \J/, 643. X , 761 . optat. βοιμι II. i , 142. 284. Herod. VII, 6 . Conj. erjai Od. λ', 433. eioai II. 1 , 282. Herod. 1 , 155. This, however, may also be the Ionic resolution of the circumflexed syllable (§. 200.) as ίην for ην in the imperf. II. β', 217, 8$c. also ηην 11. λ', 807. From the original form ewv came the common ώι/, ουσα, ον. The infinitive elvcu is in Ionic €μ€ναι II. y, 40. 42. e , 602, 8$C. (εμμεναι II. a\ 117, 8$C. and €μ€ν II. $, 299· ^>19· Theocr. xxv, 116 . βμμζν Find. P. iv, 1 74. in the same manner as θβμβναι and θεμεν for Oeivcu. The Dorians produced the penultima by means of the diphthong et, eW, which, however, is also written γμεν. Theocr. n. b Comp. Toup. Em. in Suid. T. i, p. 115. c Koen. ad Greg. p. 118. Irregular Conj. in — μι· Dialects. 41. vii, 86. Thuc. v, 77. Decree of the Byzantines De mosth. pro. cor. p. 265, 10. Aristoph. Ach. 741. 771. m* *- ναι ΟΓ β'ιμβναι id. ib. 775 d . Particip. ούσα. Ion. βουσα , Dor., εοΐσα Theocr. n, 64. evaa Theocr. ii, 76. v, 26. xxviii, 16 . Erinn. Anal. ΊΓ. i, p. 58. II, V. 5. and βασσα TinKBUS L. p. 9* 12. 14. Stobceus Eel. Phys. p. 45. 33. ed. Canter. Euryph. ap. Gale , p. 667. The latter is derived from the ancient analogical form of the participle els (ew) euros, as τίθημι, TiOek, which the iEolians retained. Thence came evres, ίντβσσιν in the tabula Heracl. p. 214. 210. for ovres, oSaiv, and in Aleman ap. Eustath. 1787* παρόντων for παρόντων e . * i a Dorville Vann.' Crit p. 27, 28. Keen, ad Greg. p. 91. Fisch. u, gj. 501. * Fisch. ii p. 502. Schneider's Greek Lex. under <1μί. 296 *Λ\ Irregular Conjugations in — μι : ·. :| * κ 8 S-4 ^ G (s> Λ 3 Ο Ρμ ... .01 Vj Λ\ Τ vV \r\\ s. V ·<)8 «IIV Λ (νΐίΐ <: \ ·ι)ι >ην UV4 V α ) % ** ·ν>^ Λϊμ S .£ ^ a *- -— ί I Γ ·*· ■ ψ \» \α\άηΎ έί\ G r~‘ Ο *» cn Χ5 Ο © , «** (= ^ V L *3 *· ο ^ . ΐΠ in cs V* . .(ΙΟΙ , tTtM . f " Vi\^ ' 1 . - · i . ■' . ΠΓ" - Λ\ ( L l 1 r< rj.f-Al' - .'.. -V Λ » Vi \ r vl V -VI ,Λ','ύ'ό >i)Qi ^ifT r [ΛΑ - 1 V’l 7 i>c{ oil' # to in ίο! - ίί ί·)Γ. 0 : ;j(il> I Λ . ε ο ,s* <4-t Ο fe£> 3 «« ο cd 05 α> c« Ο 0) Η 6β Ο '5 ) ■ ■ < «S α; -C ι-Ο Sm <ϋ > VI 2 -+-J <+Η Ο C0 *—< 01 ■■ ·~'Γ" - -- «»>* « , ** Γ • o • «J b -*-> cd ■w •V N ~2> Oh b o •i’ s2 vi cn cd 1 ■ ; .: /ν’ :γγ· Πί i*i i) , * 3 b cd ί. <υ Ο. ε CM I ^ ι ^ Λ*{. ^ 3 ϊ? ο£ Λ 3 5ο&; cd ο • «■· "θ' Ο *5 7* 2k « "rT Ρ b b a ®δ s- •N p p (r*+ ^ f· <$P a o g § £ b St 8 to to b SSrJiSrjC-55-. 3 to sT to ft *Q& w OJ *H. a, 8 Sh O 8 : st •*sr- ai &H fL ^ s ^—v S* to Lt· t· ; *>*4 ^ I w ^ -* 2 Γ ·*» to O * Λ l· s 3 st to 3- ^ 3 >R·- to *5=. cr ao 297 Irregular Conjugations in — μι. To this is to be added an imperfect ' which oc¬ curs only in the old Poets: in the sing, Ίον ( yov , fjov) ’les, Ίε, e. g. II. β', 872. Od. tt, 41. 155. p > 30. 256. t, 53. ω, 220. In the Dual and plural Wov, ίτην 3 Ίμζν, ΐτε, ίσαν. e. g. 11 ζ, 120. y, Β. Od. o', 176. Hesiod. Th. 686. For the latter the Grammarians invented a sin¬ gular elV, €ΐς 3 €l 3 analogous to that of the other veibs in — μ 1} e. g. τίθημι, €τίθ - ην , but which does not occur. Besides these, some tenses of the middle voice occur ; in the pres. sing, Ίεμαι, ’ίεσαι, Ίεται (Xen. Cyr. νϊι, 3, 15. Plato Phcedro , p. 309·) Plur. ίεμεθα ^εμεσθα Soph. Antig. 432.) ίεσθε, ievrai (Xen. Anab. v, 7> 24.) In the imperf. ίεμην ( Aristoph . Equ. 625.) iWo, ίετο (Herod, ix, 78.)-’/ e „ TO (Aew. iv, 2, 7. y, 2, 8.) Infinitive ιεσθαι Herod, vi, 134. Aerc. Anab. in, 4 ,- 41 . v., 7, 25 f . In the aor. 1 . εϊσαμην II. ί ,138. e , 538. which is to-be carefully distinguished from εισάμην, £ I appeared’, e. g. IZ.y, 103. In the fut. eWa tj e. g. //. f, 8. not to be con¬ founded with είσομαι, the fut. from ol$a, * I know . Note, εισάμην and έ'ισομαι occur in this sense only in the Ionic Poets. The Attics use as a future only tile pres, form 6t/« s , which occurs in Ionic also in this sense. είσομαι occurs in Attic only as the fut. of ol£a, e. g. Eurip. Iphig. A. 975, where some have mistaken it for the fut. of εϊμι. Thus also Eurip. Phan. 260. f Fisch. 11, p. 508. Brunck. 1242. ad Arist. Eccl. 346. Soph. m. T. ε, Fisch. 11, p. 503. 1 298 Irregular Conjugations in — μι. 14. Observations. 1. el is more used in Attic than els*, e. g. Soph. (Ed. C. 872. Arist . Av. 991· Homer also has όϊσθα II. k, 450. Od. r, 69- In composition the present throws back the accent, e. g. αναμι Herod. VII, 239· e%€i Soph. (Ed. C. 950. a7rei id. (Ed. T. 680. €7re^ei Demosth. p. 583, 23. αττβισι Xen. Mem. IV, 3. 8. όιεζιμβ v Plat. Prot. p. 193 h . 2. In the imperative again Wl is more used than el. For Ίτωσαν iEschylus uses Eumen. 32. ’ίτων. Ιόντων Xen. Cyrop. v, 3. 3. For Ίοιμι is found also ιοίην Xen . Syrnp. 4. 16. Isocrat. ad Phil. p. 102. A. * · I - ' * 4. rjia is Ionic, and occurs in Herodotus, e. g. IV, 82. and in Homer Od. , 427. 433. 572. κ, 309· Instead of which Homer has also ηίον Od. κ , 274. 446. 370. ω , 500. in the plur. ηομ€ v Od. κ , 570. λ', 22. rjie which is so frequent in Homer and Herodotus, may come from either 1 . In the third pers. plur. both have the form rjiaav. In this, as well as in ηιον, the η appears to be a sort of augment, for Ιον, Ίσαν, as in rjeiSei for >l$€t from eiSw. which was used in order to retain the chief * syllable of the verb distinctly marked. In Attic ηα is chiefly used in the first person sing, in the rest ijet?, ηβι, fyc. which are under the plusquam perf. above. But in Xen. (Econ. 6, 15. irpourjeiv and Alciphr. 3. Ep. 37. yetv. With regard to the signification, i /α has never that of the perf. and rjeiv never that of the plusquam perf.; but both forms agree in this respect, and designate generally a time past, either of itself, or with reference to another time, i. e. they stand for the aor. and imperf. rja stands for an aor. in Herod, lv, 82. v, 32. Plat. Apol. S. p. 50. evrevOev eir a\\ov ηια (>}α) των cKeivov όοκουντων σοφωτβρων elvcu, which, in p. 49.» is thus expressed : fa Fisch. n, p. 504. * Valck. ad Herod, p. 10, 96. 299 Irregular Conjugations in — μι. ηΧθον εττι τινα των ίοκούντων σοφών είναι. Charmid. in ήα — κα \ —βισηΧθον (where ήκον has the signification of the plusquam perf. ‘I had come’, see Syntax). Demosth. p. 1106. ίν o\ μεν $ ικασται — ε^νωσαν, eyw — ήα. As an imperf. Plat. Rep. V. in. viii, p. 221. Symp. p. 266. Xen. Cyrop. v, 4, 11. ήειν stands for an aor. Plat. Symp. p. 270. Rep. x, p. 312. Pro¬ tag. p. 98. 198. Euthyd. p. 73. 'Eurip. Or. 559. Mschin. in Ctesiph. p. 532. and thus ήει, ήεσαν universally in narration are used just as the aorists. Het as imperf. Plat. Symp. p. 204. 227. 267. Xen. Anab. vii, 7, 6. Thuc. ii, 3. extr. Eurip. Suppl. 753. Iphig. T. 1407. Ion. 1152. Aristoph . P/wi. 696 . Demosth. p. 229, 18. 26. 232, 23. 299, 27. 305, 8. 306, 11. 549, 24. 576. 27 k . In many places it may stapd as an imperf. and as an aor. In the same manner rjiov has frequently the sense of the aorist. Since then these forms never have the sense ol the perf. or plusq. perf. but only that of the imperf. and aorist; and considering besides, that no characteristic termination for the perfect occurs, the opinion of Buttmann (Gr. Gram, see 198. p.) appears to be just, that ήειν is merely a form of the imperf. είν } analagous to TjeiSeiv, ή-ιον, ή~εσαν, which in tune, on occount of it s resem¬ blance to the plusq. perf. was conjugated as such; but that ήα is originally the Ionic form, as ea, ήα for ήν from ei/xt. ήα has the 1 subscriptum on account of the radical form ίω. In jjeiv however, it appears to have been retained improperly, merely from it’s common derivation as a plusq. perffrom ήα. ήΰβιν, which notwithstanding the form of the plusquam perf. was used as an imperf. is formed either from ή$€α II. ζ' 3 71. as a plusq. perf. rj^eiVy for ή$ην from έβημ i, or has properly the signification of the plusq. perf. as the Latin noveram. That ήα 3 however, and ήειν have also the sense of the aorist, is no· argument against the truth of this explanation; for the imperf. frequently stands for the aorist, especially in the old writers, and this must more particularly be the case when there was only one form to express a past time. Plato Tim. p. 299· has ήεισθα for ήεις. In the infinitive ιεμεν Archyt. ap. Gale , p. 697· ιμζναι II. v , 32. 365. occurs for ιεναι. k Comp. Fisch. 11, p. 507 sq. I 215. 300 Verbals in τόος and τον. From verbs of all kinds adjectives also are formed, which partake of the signification of the verbs after the manner of participles, more than other adjectives derived from verbs, and hence they are called by way of dis¬ tinction, Verbals. They are formed from the third person perf. pass, by omitting the augment of the reduplication, and changing ται into — τεος and to?, e. g. τετυπται, τυπτεος. τετυπτηται, τι/7 ττητεος. πεφίΧηται, φϊΧητεος and φϊΧητος. παρεσκευασται, παρασκευαστές. πεποται from πίνω, ποτεος , συνεκποτεα Aristoph. Plut. 1086. δεδοται, δοτεος. εσταΧται from στεΧΧω , σταΧτεος. τεταται from τείνω , τα- τεος* τέτμηται, τμητεος . κεχυται from χεω, χυτός. These verbals always have the accent on the termination, except the compounds, as θεατός , αθέατος , ανασπαστος , ανηροτος. Here it must be observed : 1. Verbals from verbs pure have frequently σ before the final syllable, although it was not in the perf. e. g. πεπανται , πανστεος. εΧηΧαται, εΧαστεος, εΧαστός , κεχρηται from χράομαι, χρηστές, χρηστός . In this, however, the peculiarity of usage is to be regarded. On the other hand σ is frequently omitted in many verbals, especially in compounds, e. g. θαύματός , άγατός , αδάματος, for θαυ¬ μαστός , ay αστός, αδάμαστος 2. Verbals have often e before the final syllable, although the perf. had η, especially if the aor. l. p. also had e. §. 186. 2. e. g. ευρηται, ευρετε'ος TIlUC* Ill, 45. επγνηται, επαινετβος . ηρηται, αιρετεος , αιρετός . ανεσχηται , άνασχετός. 1 Rubnk, Epist. Cr. ρ. < 26 . Fisch. ι, ρ, 208 sq. ιι, ρ. 49 sq. Verbals in τεος and τός. 301 3. Frequently a perf. p? appears to be invented merely for the sake of the derivation, although the perf. never did or could occur, e.g. συνεστεον Plat. Prot. p.9%· from συνειμι {fut /εσομαι \_pwf' ίσμαϊ]), όιαμαχετεος Plat. Rep. II, p . 253. as from όιαμεμάχεται from μάχομαι , μα- χεσομαι, but Soph. p. 250. 266. όιαμαχητεος. See §. 242. V. μάχομαι. With respect to the signification, the following ver¬ bals fcorrespond 1. Those in — τεος with the Latin partic. fut. pass, and the neuter of these — τεον (in Attic more commonly in the plur. — Tea) to what is called the gerund, e. g. φίλητ4ός amandus, i τοτεος bibendus. ποτεα earl, biben- dum est. πόλεμητεα εστί, bellandum est. 2. Those in — τός have commonly a passive signifi¬ cation, and in that case correspond with, either the Latin partic. perf. p. e. g. ποιητός, factus, χυτός, aggestus , στρεπτός, flexus, or convey the idea of ability, as the Latin adjectives in — His, e. g: ορατός, ακουστός, c which can be seen or heard, visible, audible’, κτητός, ωνητός, c which can be acquired, sold’, &c. Some have also a neuter signification, as πλωτός, c navigable, which can swim’. t ^ They have also frequently an active signification, as κάλυπτός, Soph. Antig. ion. μεμπτός , ‘ blaming’, id. Trach. 446. μισητός , "causing hatred’, Xen. M. S. n, 6, 21. α^ανακτός^ c causing indignation , Plato^Govg. Of Defective Verbs. 216. A great number of Greek verbs are used only in some tenses, whilst the tenses which are wanting in one m ' _ _ _1-—— ————i n 1 ■ ■ *■-' m Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. i, p. 448. Ruhiik. ad Xen. M* S. 1. c. Brunck. ad Soph, Antig, 1. c. 302 Of Defective Verbs. form are supplied by others derived from similar forms, ; proceeding from the original one, or even from verbs entirely different, but agreeing in signification. Thus, for instance, of verbs in — άνω, only the pres. act. pass, and the imperf. are used ; the remaining tenses are derived from simple forms, which are the basis of ί those in — άνω. Χανθάνω, Χαμβάνω have in the fut. Χησω , Χηψω, aor. 2. eXaOov, βΧαβον, from Χηθω , Χηβω. In οράω only the imperf. βωρων, the perf. βωρακα, are used ; instead of the fut. οράσω, οψομαι, from οπτομαι , is em¬ ployed : for the aoristcfy^a only elSo»/ from eiS ω ; the aor. pass, is ωφθην, although a perf. pass, βωραμαι occurs. These verbs are commonly called anomala, irregular ; but this expression appears to favour the improper dis- j position, by which all these different forms are made to belong actually to one determinate present tense. although not derived from it, according to the common rules: hence they are here called defective verbs , or such as are deficient in some essential tenses. Perhaps there is no one Greek verb, in which some tenses are not wanting (see §. 190 . Obs.) and in this case all the verbs of the Greek language would be defective. But those verbs have at least a perf. an aorist. and a fut. of the same form; and thus all the essential tenses : the verbs, however, which are here instanced as defective, are wanting in some essential tenses, and are obliged to borrow them from other forms, related to them in their formation or signification. The cause of these different forms of one verb is to be sought chiefly in the endeavour after euphony, so peculiar to the Greek language above all others, as beingone which owed its cultivation to Poetry and Song. This bias was favoured by the flexibility of the language, and by the different dialects, which were formed independently of Of Defective Verbs. 303 each other, and of which each assumed many peculiari¬ ties of the others, in the progress of time, as intercourse became more frequent. It is sufficient for our present purpose to notice the manner in which this effort after euphony developed itself, in the forms of the verbs ; and this consists partly in the lengthening of the radical syl¬ lable of the verb, partly in the lengthening of the termi¬ nation, partly in prefixing the reduplication ; frequently also in a combination of all these kinds. I. The radical syllable, was lengthened by changing 217. the short vowel into the long, or into a diphthong, as κάω, καίω, συω, σευω, or by adding to it a consonant, Χάβω, Χηβω and Χάμβω, whence the Ionic Χαμφθείς. In the same manner τέμνω, κάμνω, τύπτω, are probably from τεμω, κάμο), τυπω, by producing the radical syllable, although .there is no necessity for these forms in the derivation. See §. 168. The following methods of lengthening are most frequent: 1. The insertion of v, as in the examples adduced, τέμνω, κάμνω, from τεμω, κάμω ΟΓ κημω. $άκνω ΟΓ $ηκω. S αμνάω from $αμάω. πτάρνυμαι from πταίρω. The μ also in Χάμβω appears to have arisen from v, which ac¬ cording to the rule §. 37- l. before β always becomes μ. In the same manner λα 7 χω from Χηγω. Comp. II, l. 3. Universally, however, after the production of the prin¬ cipal syllable by this insertion, the long vowel of the syl¬ lable is changed into the corresponding short one. v also is inserted between two vowels, e. g. πίνω, $ννω, from πίω, $ύω. 2. The insertion of σ, chiefly before the consonant, e. g. εσπομαι for έπομαι. 3. The insertion of τ after a consonant, as βΧάπτω, κΧεπτω, from βχάβω, κΧεπω ; also between two vowels, as άνντω, άρυτω, ατάω, from άνύω, άρυω, άάω. I 304 \ Of Defective Verbs . Obs . In this case e in the principal syllable is frequently changed into i,~ as πίτνω from πετώ, ισχο), ενίσπω, from €χα>, ενεπω. τίκτω from τεκω. σκίδνημ t, κίρνημι , from σ /ceSa ο), κεράω. ' 4 . y, κ, χ are often changed into σσ (ττ) e. g. 7 τράσσω, φρίσσω } from Trpayw } φρίκω into ζ also, as στενάζω from στενάζω, κράζω from κpάyω. Comp. §. 171· and of the interchange of ζ and σσ. §. 29- 31. t-r t ' t ‘ * » » * ·. In the same manner S is often changed into ζ , as in φράζω , εζώ } from φρά^ω, β$ω. 5. Another method, that of putting the accent on the principal syllable, the first syllable having suffered syn¬ cope, takes place in polysyllables, as πλάζω and πλάθω (whence πλασθείην JEsch. Prom. 904.) from πελαω, πλημι from πελάω. βλημι (whence βλείμην , βλειο in Homer) from βάλω , βάλεω . If the first syllable has an o, this is retained after syncope in the principal syllable, but coalesces with the termination εω into ω , e. g. βολεω (derived from βάλλω) βλόω, βλωσκο). βορ^ω (related to βορά), βρόω , βι-βρωσκω. νοεω, yvow (as άμφ^νοεω } ) yi- yvec>, e. g. διωκάθω, κιάθω , άγ€ρε0ω, τελεύω, φθινυθω , from διωκω, άγ είρω, τελε'ω, φθίνω . —ά0ω is the termination of verbs, whose penultima is long, — €0ω of those in which it is short. From the contrac¬ tion of the termination — ε'0ω with a and ε, comes — ηθω, with o — ωθω , e. g. νηθω, πληθω , αΧηθω , βρωθω , from νε'ω, 7 τλεω, ( impleo ) βρόω ( βορεω ) χ . \ 05s. Some verbs have the form in —pt only in the aor. 2. e. g. εκί'χρν, έκτα , /eras, οντα, καταπτητην , εσβη , εσκΧη, σκΚηναι , εφθη, επΧωμεν, πΧως } from κιγανω, κτεινω, ουταω, καταπεταμαι , σβεω , σβεννυμι, σκεΧΧω, φθάνω , 7τΧωω, but formed like κί'χρμι, κτημι } ουτημι , πτημι , σβημι , σκΧημι, φθημι , πΧώμι. ν Fisch. in, a. ρ. 15. r Fisch. hi, a. p. 11 sc[. 307 Of the Defective Verbs . Thus also the imperf. σχες, σπες, from εσχον, εσπον. τεθναθι, fyc. §. £17. 3. a . 3. in aVo>, as λαμβάνω from λάμβω l , from ληβω, αμαρτάνω, αισθάνομαι, from αμάρτω, αίσθω, ικανω from ίκω, θιγγάνω from θίγω. According to the analogy of ληβω, λάμβω , we might also assume the forms λάνθω, λάγχω (λελογχε) as intermediate links between ληθω and λαν¬ θάνω, ληχω (βίλί/χα) and λαγχάνω. Mostly, however, the long vowel of the radical syllable is changed into the short one in this termination, and the syllable made long by the insertion of v, which, however, is changed before 7 x into 7 , before μ π, #c. into μ §. 37. I. as άν$άι/ω from η$ω, λιμττάνω, φυγγάνω, πννθάνομαι, τυγχάνω, θιγγανω, from λείπω, φεύγω, πενθομαι, τεύχω , θίγω s . 4. into —σκω, as άραρίσκω , άρεσκω, from άράρω, άρω, ριπτάσκω. '■> III. Reduplication, as in the instances already ad¬ duced, $ι$άσκω, γιγνωσκω, βιβρωσκω, τιτρώσκω, μιμνησκω, πιπίσκω, αραρίσκω, τίθημι, $ί()ωμι. Thus also βιβαω in Homer, πιφαύσκω from φάω, πεφνω from πε-φενω, the Attic τετρεμαίνω for τρέμω . It is worthy of remark here, that the initial consonant of the verb repeated takes an t after it. Other forms also which have been made long appear to have arisen from the reduplication, as μίμνω from μι-μενω, πίπτω from πι-πετω, γίγνομαι from γι-γενο- μαι\ where the e after reduplication suffers syncope, as in πιπράσκω for πι-περάσκω from περαω. IV. Sometimes new forms of present tenses arise from a tense of the first form; but such new present tenses occur mostly in the Poets only. Thus have arisen: 9 Fisch. hi, a. p. 3. * Valck. ad Phoen. p. 470. / 308 Of the Defective Verbs. ' ί. from the perf. SeSoi/cw from SelSw, SeSot/ca , Theocr. XV } 58. 7T€υμαι, is used. It takes the syllabic instead of the temporal augment (§. 160.) aor. 1. A. εαξα, (άξαιμι, άζω, αζαι, άζας) for ήζα Od. τ, 539 * perjf. * α 7 α (Ιοη. eVy α Herod, νιι, 224 .) in a passive sense, aor. 2. pass. ea 7 »?i/. The other tenses are wanting. Obs. 1 . Lysias has the augment on the participle also, κατεα- yels p. 156 . κατεάζαντες p. 159 . and Apoll. Rh. iv, 1686. efecryeitfa, which otherwise is used only in later writers, as Epictetus c. 3 . 25 . Milan. H. A. x, 10. and the writers of the New Testament 7 . Obs. 2 . καυάζαις in Hesiod epy. 664 . and κανάζαι in He- sychius, is considered as iEolic or old Greek for κατάζαις, κα- τάζαι. If we assume that ayu had the digamma Fay ω, from KaraFa^ai after omitting a in the preposition came κατΡάζαι (§. 38 .), and this was softened into καΡΡάξαι (as κάββάλλε, κάπ φάλαρα, #c.) and κανάξαι , since the F in writing was commonly expressed by v (§. 20.) 1 ayto, ‘l bring’, is placed here only pn account of the aor. 2. riyayov, riyayowv, which some derive from a present ayayu formed from ayu, by reduplication. Yet there are several instances of aorists with the reduplica¬ tion in the old language. See 165. Obs. 4. In other respects it is regular. It is to be observed, however, that the aor. l. ηξα {Horn. Batrachom. 114. 1 18.) is not used by good writers\ Yet in Aristophanes we find Ran. 468. άπη- ζας and Thucyd. 11 ,97. προσήζαν (r). For the perf. there is an Attic form ηχα (hence pass, rjypai. aor. 1. pass. ηχθην. Herod, hi, 145. Xen. M. S. iv, \, 3. fut. άχθησο- μα t b ), and an old form which remained in Doric, ayriyoxa x Taylor and Markl. ad Lys. 1. c. Thom. M. p. 497- Brunck. ad Aristoph. Ach. 945. Abresch. ad Cattier p. 11 sq. a Thom. M. p. 4. Phrynich, p. 124. Valcken. ad Xenoph. Mem. S. iv, 2, 8. , b Piers, ad Moer. p. 21. 222 . 312 List of Defective Verbs . 0Γ ay ay οχα (from ayeacOj η·γεκα } ayrjyetia. See 183. 3.) and ayrioya, which Demosthenes also has, p. 238. in a letter of Philip. 249, 18. Otherwise, however, it is used only by later writers c . aipeo), ζ I take', has only fut. αφησω Plat. Apol. S. P . 65. perf. act . pass, γρηκα, γρημαι (Ion. άραίρηκα , άραί- ρημαι. §. 168. Obs. 2.) a07\ 1. pass, γρβθην (§. 186. 7* 2 ·) αφεθησομαι. The aor. acZ. and mid. are taken from ΈΛΩ. εϊΧον^ €ΐλόμη v (βιλάμην is a later Alexandrian form. See 188. 7.) In Plat . Polit. p. 60. the fut. διελουμβ v appears to occur. \ aip<*>, | cj U p» e The j g no ticed only on άβίρω, ' account of the aor. mid . of which there are in Homer the forms άράμην for ηρόμην II. 592. 1, 124. and η pa- μην II. χ, 393, #c. The latter form occurs only in the indicative. In the other moods only άροίμην , αρωμαι , άρεσθαι are found. In Attic writers the usual form of the aor. 1 . is ηράμην , άραι , αραίμην , αρωμαι , αρασθαι, αραμβνος, as in the active η pa. inf. άραι } partic. άρας. From άβίρω comes aor. l. aepay in Panyasis Athen . n, p. 139. cd. ScJlW. ηερμενοϊ Apoll. Rk. II, 171. αωρτο in Homer, §. 185. i d . αισθάνομαι , ‘ I perceive, am sensible of', occurs only in the pres, and imperf. The radical word is ΑΙΣΘΟ- MAI, the aor. mid. of which γσθόμην, αισθοίμην , %c. has remained in use. The rest of the tenses are formed as , t ' i : ' ' 4 · ' 1 c Thom. M. p. 274. Phryn. p. 46. Moeris p. 147. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 494. ed. Lips. d Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 265. A future αίρω (from aep£, αίρω !) which Porson. ad Eurip. Med. 848. assumes, and thinks is found in Arist. Ran. 378. Eurip. Heracl. 323. can hardly ever have existed. % β List of Defective Verbs. 3 ιό from αίσθβομαι, §. 178. Obs. 3. fut. αίσθήσομαι perf. γσθημαι FJlUC. I, 26 e . * άκαχμβνος, c pointed ’,-part. perf. pass, from ΑΚΩ, or it’s derivative ΑΚΑΖΩ, in which χ before μ , instead of y, is irregular. According to the first derivation it receives what is called the Attic reduplication. Fut. αξω , ηχα, η·γμα ι, άκη+γμαι, άκαχμαι* . Άκαχω ΟΓ άκαχεω (from ί χ(ϋ3 ίχος) is quite different ; from this comes άκαχησει Horn. H. in Merc. 286. άκάχησε, άκάχημαι , άκαχήσθαι, άκαχημβνος, which is also written άκαχημενος, and in that case is derived from άκάχημι , pass άκαχημαι. The η which is here retained in the passive is irregular άλδησκω, c l nourish", from ΑΛΔΕΩ, (§. 218. e.)^and this from ΑΛΔΩ Arist. Nub . 282. (whence άλσος, αλσαι Pind. 01. 3, 29 . according to the emendation of Her¬ mann 11 ). The future of άλδεω is άλΰησω. άλεξω, ‘to ward of", a verb derived from a fut. 219. IV, 2. fut. άλεξησω (§. 178. Obs. 3.) aorist. άλε£α- σθαι Xen. Cyr. i, 5. 7. άλεξάμενοι Od. i,57. from ΑΛΕΚΩ, from which the verb itself is derived 1 . άλίσκομαι, ‘ I am taken", only in the pres, and im- perf. The root is άλόω , άλωμι , hence fut. άλωσομαι, aor. (in a passive sense) ήλων , commonly εαλων, άλοιην and άλωην, άλω (2. p. άλως Arist. Plut. 481.) άλώναι. e Fisch. in, a. p. 25. 1 Heyne ad II. k', 135. s Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 267· Heyne ad II. e, 24. h Herm. de Metris Pind. p. 240. , - 1 Of αλ έομαι, άλεύμαι, aor. 1. ά\€ασθαι, άλϊΰασθαι, see §. 182 Obs. 1. f 314 List of Defective Verbs. \ * ]\ωκα, uXwku. See i6o k . , Note. In the Attic writers ηΧωκα occurs, but not ηΧων , instead of it βαλαηΛ αμαρτάνω , r I err’, from 'ΑΜΑΡΤΩ, of which the aor. ημαρτον (in Homer ημβροτον 40. iv. also) is in use. The fut. is formed as from αμαρτεω , αμαρτησομαι , perf ημάρτηκα , ημάρτημαι , CLOT. pass, ημαρτηθην™. άμβλίσκω, c l make an abortion’, from άμβλόω. Hence fut. αμβΧωσω. αμφιενννμι. See ecu, εννυμι. αναλίσκω , c \ consume*. The tenses, except the pres, and imperf. are derived from άναΧόω, which occurs also in the pres, and imperf. in the old Attic writers. Msch. S. c. Th. 819 . Eurip. Med. 325. Thuc. n, 24. Ill, 81. VI, 12. VIII, 45. fut. άναΧωσω . aor. αναΧωσα. perf. άνάΧωκα , άναΧωμαι aor. pass, άναλωθην. Obs. Since the second a in this verb is already long, it receives no augment in the old Attic writers. See §. 163. Obs. 2. 223. άνΰάνω, from ή$ω, from which also the tenses come. Aor. eaSov (§. 160.) with a short. Opt. ά$οιμι. conj. aL·. inf. aheiv. part , ά§ων· perf. eaSa with a long”. The fut. αχήσεις Herod, v, 39. is formed as from α&'ω, as μαθησγ \ Thom. M. p. 257. Moeris p. 178 . et Piers. Fisch. in, a. p. 26 sq. 1 Dawes Misc. Crit. p. 315. Piers. 1. c. Of α'λώτκω, fut. άλυξω, see §. 171 . m Fisch. in, a. p. 30. Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 269 . n Fisch. in, a. p. 21 . Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 253. 315 List of Defective Verbs. from μηθω. Thus also ά^ηκα in Hipponax, according to Eustathius p. 1721, 60. Plutarch has a form aL·. Comp. Cimon. et Lucull. T. HI, p. 349. ed. Η. at αριστοκρατι¬ κοί φΰσεκ oKiya rol? ττολλοΤ? άοουσι και irpos ήδονην εχουσι, but it is doubtful 0 . avwyw, ‘ to order’, whence dvwyere, aimyoi^i, avwye- fiev> 11. ν', 56. for avmyeiv. Imperf. amyov II. e, 805. Od. y, 35. fat. άνωζω Od. it, 404. II. o, 295. dOT. 1. infin. άνωξαι Od. K, 531. occur. Perf. avwya (l per. plur. avwyjicv for rjvioyiiev Horn. H. Apoll. π, 349·) Plusq. ήνώ yea Od. i, 44. κ 263. ήνωητειν, in the imperative ανωχθι (§. 219- 3. a.) άνωχθω, ανωχθε Eur. Here. f. 241. besides the form avioye, avwyerw, $jc. p Another form ovioycw occurs in 11. u , 394. Analogous to this is yeywvw, 1 cry’; 7 t 7" l ' //, 7i£. and has mostly a transitive sense, except Od. $, 777. and in the participle άραρυία It. o, 737. ω', 318. which, however, may stand for άρηρυια , i \ " ' \ * . / List of Defective Verbs. 317 . ' i according to §. 189. Obs. 2. άρηρα and ijpapa are in the same relation to each other as ire-pay a and ττεπραχα. For aprjpa the Dorians said apapa, which was retained by the Attic Poets,, and by Lucian T. 111 , p . 1 19. Bip · in apape or apype, ‘ it is determined’ q . (Hence the adj. άραρός, ά, oV, adv. άραρώς in Hesych. and άραρότως.) From the two perf. new present forms are derived; from άρηρα, 7 Γ ροσαρη ρομαι Hesiod. €py. 429· from η papa comes αραρω , (apapev Soph. El. 147- in the Chor. conj. apaprj II. 7Γ, 212. άραροίατο Apollon. Rh. I, 369- part. aor. άραρων Od. e , 252.) lengthened into άραρίσκω. άρηράμενος in Apollon. Rhod. i, 787. hi, 833. iv, 677. may come from either. • * * * . t < i' ’ *· * 2. In the sense conciliare, ‘to render favourable, satisfied', it agrees in flexion with the former only in άρσαντες κατά θυμόν II. a', 136. ηραρε Θυμόν eSwSr/ Od. e , 95 . Otherwise it makes fut . αρέσω , άρεσομαι or άρεσσομαι II. S', 362. ζ. 526. Od. θ', 402. aor. ηρεσα, e. g. όόρττω τε 7 τ οτητί re θυμόν άρεσσαν Apoll. Rh. Ill, 301. inf. άρεσαι, II. ι, 120. mid. άρεσασθαι. But συναρεσσετε μενοινην Apoll. Rh. Ill, 901. and θεμιν συναρεσσαμεν IV, 373. ap¬ pears to come from the foregoing. αυζάνω, from αυζω of άεζω, a form derived from the fut. of a verb ΑΥΓΩ, takes from this verb all it’s tenses except the pres, and imperf. fut. αύ ζησω. §. 178. Obs. 3. aor. ηυξησα. perf p. ηυξημαι. aor. pass, ηύξηθην. The pres, αυξω occurs Xen. Cyrop. v, 5, 10 , 8gc. but more frequently in the Poets r . 4 . t V / . . ' q Porson. ad Eurip. Or. 1323. ' r . > . . ‘ r f v 1 αχθομαι, fut. άχθεσομαι, aor. ηχθεσθην does not belong to this place, since all it’s tenses are derived from one root, according to analogy §. 173. See Note. / 225. 318 List of Defective Verbs. ' 1 * % ' * ' · V f j i . 1 , B. Βαίνω, f I go’, derived from ΒΑΩ. This simplest form occurs in an intransitive sense in the fut. βησομαι. perf. βεβηκα, βεβαμεν, βεβάσι. COTlj. εμβεβωσι Plat. Pheed, p. 334. part, βεβως, βεβώσα. inf. βεβάναι Eurip. Heracl. 6n. chiefly in Ionic and Attic Poets. See §. 183. 7. Aor. med. εβησάμην ; also in the partic. pres, εκβώντας Thuc . v, 77. in Doric; in an active sense fut . βησω Lucian. D . Mort. vi^ 4. aor . εβησα, especially in Ionic writers, εμβεβακεν also is used transitively in Pindar Pyth. x, 19 s . From the future of this verb again are derived new present forms, a) βησομαι, whence εβησετο II. ε , 745. $ , 389- b) βάσκω (from βάσκον instead of εβην, as στάσκεν) It. θ', 399· β'> 234. Apoll. Rh. 1Y, 210. AEsch. Pers. 662. From βάω came l. βιβάω , whence βιβώντα It. y, 22. βιβώσα Od. λ', 538. βιβα Horn . H. in Merc . 225^ 8$c. From this again came a) βιβάσθω It. v\ 809. b) βιβάζω in a transitive sense, which the Attics used for βησω 9 εβησα. 2. βημι, βίβημι, whence βιβάς Od. ι, 450. and aor. 2. εβην, as εθην from τίθημι. (Imper. βηθι. opt . βαίην. COnj. βώ, βεω, βείω — inf. βηναι. particip. βάς, as εστην.) 3. βαίνω, which remained in use only in the pres, and imperf. Several of these forms are made use of to complete the conjugation of βαίνω, fut. βησομαι. perf. βεβηκα from ΒΑΩ. aor. εβην from BIBHMI. Some compounds have also a perf. pass, and aor. pass, παραβεβάσθαι Thuc. i, 123. ζυμβεβάσθαι id. VIII, 98. άναβεβαμενος Xenoph. Hipparch. 4, 3, 4. τταραβαθη ζνμβαθη — βαθείς s Porson ad Eurip. Or. 1427. % ' ' + · ■ t I I List of Defective Verbs. 319 Thuc. nr, 67. iv, 23. 30. Xenoph. Hippie . 3, 4. Comp. §. 185. 4. Obs. In the aor. 2. the same changes take place as in εστην, e. g. εβαν for εβησαν II. a , 39 1, fyc. (§. 207. 7.) Imperat. in compound verbs — βα, e. g. είσβα Eurip. Phcen. 203. επίβα id. Ion. l67. εμβα id. El. 113. πρόβα Aristoph. Ach. 262. κατάβα id. Pan. 35. (§. 205. 5.) Optat. βαιμεν for βαίημεν Eur. Ph. 593. (205. 6.) Γ The conjunctive is in Ionic βεω for βώ, e. g. επι- βεωμεν Herod. VII, 50, 2. βείω II. ζ', 113. καταβείομεν II. κ, 97. (§· 207. 8.) The Homeric βεομαι appears to have a similar origin II. o, 194. βείομαι II. χ', 431. βερ II. π, 852. «o', 131. in the sense of ζησομαι, ‘ I shall live’, properly, ‘ I shall walk upon the earth 5 . Here the con¬ junctive receives the sense of the future, as is probably the case in πίοααι for πίωμαι, although elsewhere it is w φ never used thus 1 . * Infin. βημεναι Od. θ', 518. Dor. βάμεν Pind. P. iv, 9 . a, 327. (§. 207. 2 .) Moreover the third pers. dual, besides the regular εβητην makes also εβάτην, or without augment, βάτην II. e, 778, 8$c. βάλλω is conjugated regularly, fut. βάλω Thuc. 1 , 58. 226 . iv, 8, fyc. βάλλησω in the Poets §. 178. Obs. 3. aor. εβα- λον. perf. βεβληκα by syncope for βεβάληκα, §. 183. 4 perf. pass, βεβλημα i. aor. pass, εβληθψ. But Homer uses tenses as from a form βλημι (for which βάλημι may be supposed, as the form βαλεω is, according to the analogy of βεβάληκα ) e. g. ζυμβλησεαι II. υ , 335. ζυμβλη- την Od. ψ', 15. Opt. βλείμην, βλειο. II. υ , 288 u . Βολβω 1 Heyne ad II. o', 194. Others assume a present βέω. Etym. M. p. 198, 5. Fisch. hi, a. p. 49 sq. u 320 List of Defective Verbs. is a derivative form (as from βάλλω, βάλω, βεβολα) βεβο- \ ληατο II. ι, 3. βεβολημενος II. ι, 9· Apoll, Rh . I, 1269· II, 409. βαρύνω, 1 1 load", had the following tenses derived from βαρεω, which occurs in the present only in later writers. Perf. A. βεβάρηκα pass. Od . y, 139. τ', 122. perf. pass, βεβάρημαι Plat. Symp. p. 231. Apoll. Rh. i, 1256. Lucian also D. Mort. 10, 4. ha» a fut. βα- / * X ρησει . ΒΑΏ. See βαίνω. * βίβημι. See βαίνω. βιβρωσκω, β I eat’, from ΒΟΡΕΩ, ΒΡΟΩ, (§. 216. 5.) whence also a form in — μι, βρω μι, is derived, fut. βρωσω. perf' βφρωκα. (For βεβρωκότες Soph. Antig. 1022. βεβρώτες.) P. βεβρωμαι. fut. 3. jP. βεβρωσομαι Od. β', 203. aor . 1. P. εβρωθην. fut . 1. P. βρωθησομαι from βρόω. aor. 2 yi. ίβρων, as from βρώμι , Callim. H. in Jov. 49 . //om. H. in Apoll. 1 , 126. Another form βεβρωθω, §. 217. 2. occurs in Homer //. 35. βιόω, c l live’, forms, besides the aor. l. εβίωσα, (e. g. Plat. Phcedon. p. 256. Afew. CPcon . 4, 18.) an aor, 2 . from βίωμι, εβίων Thuc . v, 26. Ρ/αί. Pep. x, p. 32&. docid. p. 62 . erf. P. Imp. ( βίωθι ) βιωτω II. θ', 429. ορί. βιφην. conj. βιω. Plato Phcedon. ρ. 257. i’w/1 βιωναι . pari. B«Wcr0a //om. H. Apoll. 11 , 349. is a peculiar form, in the sense of the fut. as ττίομαι, related probably to βεομαι. See βαίνω. A peculiar anomaly is found in this verb, that the Thom. M. p. 141 sq. Graev. ad Luc. Soloec. p. 484. X List of Defective Verba . 321 active has an intransitive, the middle a transitive sense in the aor. 1. Od. θ', 468. avjyap μ ββιώσαο, κονρη, parti¬ cularly άνεβιωσάμην, which is referred to άναβίωσκομαι* . βλαστά vw, c I bud', from β\ο.(ττ(ύ 3 whence also the tenses are derived: fut. β λαστησω §. 178. Obs. 3. (aor. l. ββλάστησα only in later writers) aor. 2. ίβλαστον. perf. βεβλάστηκα and εβλάστηκα (§. 164.) βούλομαι, ‘ l will·, fut. βούλησομαι according to §. 17B. Obs. 3. εβονληθην and ηβονληθην §. 162. Obs. 3, 8$c. Homer and other Poets have also a perf. med. προ- βεβουλα. ΒΡΟΩ. See βιβρωσκω. τ. Γαμεω, *1 marry', takes only the aor l. act. from 22 '· ΓΑΜΩ or ΓΗΜΩ £7 ημα . ya μύσσεται also in Homer, ap¬ pears to come from yfaw. ε^/άμησα occurs only in the New Testament. ΓΑΩ. See ΓΕΝΩ. yevro in Homer, f he took', for eXero. The 7 stands for the digamma or spiritus asper , as in yaSerai, 7041/09, yevrep in Hesychius for ήδεται, οίνος, εντερον z . From FeXero came FeXro, and changing X into v (as in κεντο for /ceXeTo, which is quoted from Aleman, ηνθε Dor. for ήλθε) Fei /το, 7eVro. No part of this verb occurs else¬ where in the ancient writers ; but yet Hesychius adduces yevvov for eXov, FeXot/ a . ΓΕΝΏ, an old verb, which was lengthened into yel- y Fiseh. in, a. p. 53 sq. 2 Interpr. ad Ilesych. T. 1 , p. 818, 26. d Heyric ad II. θ', 43. Em. ad Callim. H. in Cer, 44, V YOL. I. 322 List of Defective ferbs. νομαι and y'ty νομαι. Of ΓΕΝΩ there occur aor. 2. M. ^ενόμην. perf. med. yeyova. flit. 1. yevήσoμat. perf yeyei 'ημαι (§. 183. 4.) In later writers aor. 1. eyevj- θην V From this, or from yel^ai comes aor . 1. med. ey εινάμην , which has an active signification, ‘ I have begotten’, and occurs in Prose writers also, as Xenoph. Mem. Socr. i, 4. 7. although rarely ; the more usual form is yewdw, derived from ΓΕΝΩ. *. / . I X . Ϊ l . Φ yel^ai occurs only in Ionic and Doric Poets, in the present and imperf. e. g. yelvecu Od. v, 202. (transitive) yειvόμεθa II. χ, 477. yειvό μένος Od. S', 208. It. K, 71. v, 128. imperf. yeivovro Theocr. xxv, 124. (intransitive.) ytyvoμcu is used only in the pres, and imperf. Another old form was ΓΑΩ (as ΤΑΩ, τείνω, ΚΤΑΩ, t κτείνω are different forms of one verb), the perf. of which, y£yaa (§. 183. 7.) occurs in the Ionic Poets: plur. yεyaμεv f yeyaare , yεyάaσι. inf. yεyάμεv It. ε', 248. Pind. 01. 9, 164. for yεyάvaι, as τεθνάμεν for τεθναναι. parti. yεyaως (Attic yεyως, as εσταως, €στά, Eurip. Pk. 641. Ale. 860.) yεyaυia (in Attic yεyωσa Eurip. Ale. 532.) plusquam perf. εκyεyάτηv Od. κ , 138. From y£y^a, whence yeyaa appears to have arisen, comes a new present yeyfaw. Dor. yeyatew Pind. 01. 6, 83. as from yiyaa the present yεyάω, eκyεyάovτaι Hom. H. in VBn. 197. Obs. For εγει/€τ o is found also εγεντο Theocr. t, 88. Pind. P. 3, 154. yripaaKi*), ‘ I grow old’, from yv\ ράω, whence it also takes it’s tenses. Yet the Attics instead of yηpdσat • .» V b Thom. M. p. 189 sq. List of Defective Verbs . 323 ( Xen. Mem. S. hi, 12 , 8.), more commonly say 7 ηράναι, which comes from 'γηρημι, as partic. 7 ηράς JL p, 197. Hesiod . 6^7. 188 C , Comp. §ι§ράσκω. \ 7/71 >ομαι. See ΓΕΝΩ. yiyvataKO), ‘ I know’, Attic; otherwise 7 ινωσκ:ω & 3 from voewj βνόησα, Ion. €νωσα. See 217. 5. The tenses come 1. from the simple form ΓΝΟΩ, fut. 7 νωσομαι. perf. eyvwKa. perf p. 'ey νωσμαι . CLOT. 1 . p. eyvioaOw. Ill Ionic avayiptvaKO) in the sense of f persuade’, has an aor. 1. aveyvtoaa Herod, i, 68. 87. viii, fyc. 2. from yvωμι } aor. 2. €yva)v· Imper. 7 νώθι. opt. yvo'^v (and yvi^v Mschyl. * Suppl. 230. Schcef. Melet. in Dion. 1. p. 100. not . plur. yvo^ev, yvoievj for yvolημ€v, yvofyaav dd ). Conj. 7 νω. inf: 7 pcovcu. part, yvovs. aor. 2. med. opt * avyy volto occurs jE' sch. Suppl. 231. Δ. ’ * - • ^ . / \_ ΔΑΩ has several derivative forms, which are dif- 228 ferent also in signification : $αίω, $ηω, $άζω, λ^ασ^ω, οαίννμι. From *ΔΑΩ, ι. f I teach, learn’, comes aor. 2. act. eSaov, eSaev Theocr. xxiv, 127- £ learnt, taught, had taught’ Apoll. Rh. in, 029. iv, 989· Aor. 2. p. βΰάην. opt. Saeujv. COUJ. Saw (II. β\ 299- Saelu) II. 7 r, 423, $C.) infin. &αηι >ai and ^αημβναι. part, octets·, (I learn to know, expe¬ rience, try). In the fut. it has, as from ΔΑΕΩ, §αησομαι Od. 7', 187. τ', 325. perf a. SeSdq κα, c 1 have learnt’; or SeSaa, which signifies in the partic. έεοαω?, f learned, experienced’; in the indie, however, &'&tey, f he had c Thom. M. p. 192. Moeris p. 115. d Valck. ad Phoen. 1396. Brunck, ad Aristoph. Ran. 52. dd Moeris p. 112. 324 List of Defective Verbs. taught', in Homer at least: in Orpheus Argon. 126. it signifies also, * he was taught, he understood*; (if this be not the imperf. of the derivative form SeSaw). See below. Perf. p. SeSay/xcu, inf. $€$αησθαι, ‘ to experience', Apoll. Rh. ii, 1154. Prom Saw, in this sense,' is derived, ι. SiSaaxw. 2. *St}w, which has the sense of the fut. f I shall find'. II. v, 260. /, 418. 681, 3. SeSaw, (from the perf. SeSaa), whence SeSaov in Hesychius (eSe^av, δίδαξαν) and SeSaev in Homer Od. ζ, 233. θ\ 448. υ 3 72.. ψ' 3 ι6θ. is derived, since like all the forms derived from perfects, it always occurs in the sense of a plusquam perf. £ he had learnt*. 4 . SeSaaaOai Od. π , 31 6 . 2. *ΔΑΩ, /I bum', occurs more commonly in the form Saiw. 11. vy 317. coll. φ\ 376. Thence perf. SeSrje II. v, 736. plusq. SeStj€ 3 II. μ 3 35. Hesiod. Sc. Here. 62. (Others write SeSrje , SeSijei) . aor. 2. med. conj. δάηται II. v 3 316. 5. 5. ΟΓ im¬ mediately derived from the present δίω , as δεδουπα, aiwya f . This form in the plural suffers syncope δεδιμεν , δεδιτε, plusquam perf. εδεδισα v, for δεδίαμεν , δεδίατε , e<5e- δίεσαυ. In Attic δεδια is only used by the Poets, but δεδιμεν , δεδιτε, δεδιασι , tTlf. δεδιεναι, part, δεδιως, plusq. εδεδίειν, more used than δεδοίκαμεν , tyc. A conjunctive also δεδίωσι occurs in Isocrates Paneg. p. 73. C. ad Phil . p. 96 . B. and c. Euthyn. p. 704. ed. L. In the impera- f Fisch. hi, a. p. 69 . Herm. de jem. Or. Gr. p. 2 7b, 326 List of Defective Verbs . tive it has the form of a verb in — μι , δείιθι Arist. Fes/j. 372, 230. See §. 219. 3. - ' ' Obs. 1. Homer says δείδοικα, δβίδια, δείδιμεν, δείδιθι, fyc. Apoll. Rh. hi. 7^3. has a particip. perf. δειδνιαν for δειδιυιαν. 2. The middle δίομαι and the derivative form δεδίσκομαι (Horn. δειδισκομαι) δεδισσομαι^ δεδίττομαι (δειδίσ’σ’.)^ s have a transitive sense,, c I frighten’. > ■ ΔΕΚΩ. See δεικνυμι . ΔΗΚΩ. See δάκνω. 4 . ' ' διδράσκω from ΔΡΑΩ, whence also δρασκάζω Lysias p. 359· From this also the tenses are derived, which, however, have throughout a long·, fut. δράσομαι. aor. 1. έδρασα Xen. Cyrop. v. 2, 15, 8$c. perf δεδρακα. For έδρασα έδραν (Ιοη.εδρην), as from ΔΡΗΜΙ, is a more Attic form. (See 218. 2. Obs.) which also has έδραν in the third pers. plur. h Opt. δραίην. conj. δρώ, δρ$ς, δρα. inf δ pa ναι, part . δράς , δρασα. This verb occurs only in com¬ position, αττοδιδρ. διαδιδρ. εκδιδρ. δοκεω. ‘ I appear’, takes most of it’s tenses from the old word ΔΟΚΩ. fut. δόξω. aor. ]. εδοξα· perf p. δεδο - 7 μαι. The regular forms occur only in the Poets, or old Prose writers. Rut. δοκησω JEsch. Prom. 386. aor. εδό- κησα Pind. Ol . 13, 79- AEsch. S. c. Th. 1038. Eurip . Her act. 187· 246. 262. perf δεδόκηται Herod, y 11, 16, 3. δύναμαι , ‘I can’, a passive form, as ίσταμαι has, like this, in the fut. δννησομαι, as from ΔΎΝΑΩ. Aor. 1. med. εδννησάμην It. e', 621. ζ', 33. Demostfl. 7r. παραπρ. p. 445. 1. aor. 1. p. εδυνηθην, more Attic ηδννηθην (see §. 162.) perf p. δεδύνημαι. s Piers ad Moer. p. 118. h Thom. M. p. 93. Moer. p. 37. List of Defective Verbs. 3&7 For the aor. l. p. there is besides another form eSu- νάσθην, as from ΔΎΝΑΖΏ * 1 . Obs. In the pres. conj. 2. pers. it makes SviPlat. Phcedon. p. 132. which form occurs also in the indicative for Svvaaai in later writers k . Suva for Suvaaai Theocr. x, 2. is Doric. For eSvvaao a more Attic form is ηδυνω, which also occurs in the old authors Horn. H . Merc. 40 5. eSvvoo l . The lonians say also Svvearai, eSuvearo, for Suvavrai , eSuvavro. See §. 198. 6. c. m Smo, Suvco. Instead of this form in the aor. 2. a form in — pi from ΔΥΜΙ in an intransitive sense, is used, f to go into, to put on', indui, eSw (3νσκε v II. θ' , 271. for eSv, but in the sense of the imperf.) imper. SvOi, e. g. ύπόδυθι, άπόΐυθι. Infin. Suvai (ΰυμεναι II. ζ' , 411.) part. Sus, Sucra. The perf. act. SeSuKa has also an intransitive sense; the fut. and aor. l. 3tW>, έδυσα, a transitive sense, f I sink'. In the pres. δνω is transitive, δυνω intransitive. Another form is ΔΥΠΤΩ, whence δυψας Apoll. Rh. 1326. See εσθίω. ϊζομαι, ‘ I seat myself', from ΕΩ, more used in the compound καθίζομαι, fut. καθεδουμαι §. 188. 1 . (pioperly € ζέ σω and εδεσω, εδεω, εδεομαι). The forms εκαθεσθην , κα- θεσθηναι, καθεσθείς, καθεσθησομαι aie not used by the Attics, and occur only in later writers. The Attics use εκαθημην ΟΓ καθημην* 1 . For κάθετον , seat thyself , καθισον 9 > Wessel. ad Herod, p. 553. 86'. - . k Phrynich. p. 158. Thom. M. p. 252. 1 Moeris p. 182, ■ . ■ . · ,n Fisch. in, a. p. 73 sqq. « Thom. M. p. 483. 485. Phrynich. p. 114. Grasv. ad Lucian, Sol. p. 498. Dorviil. ad Charit, p. 212. Fisch. hi, a. p. 113. I 328 List of Defective Verbs. sc. acauToi', is used, different ..from κάθησο , ( remain seated’ 0 . βί<5ω has two senses 'see’, and 'know/ 1. In the sense of ‘ see’, it occurs only in the aor. 2. eiSov (pi. 67 60. Plat. Alcib. p. 83. οίδασι Xen. CEc. 20 , 14. In the dual and plur. derivatives from ίσημι are more commonly used, which again occur in the sing, only in Doric writers. (See Ίσημι). Thus Ίστον , Ίστον (for Ίσατον) ισμεν , ιστέ , Ίσασι ι . For Ίσμεν Homer has Ίδμεν, which arose either from changing ‘. In the dual and plur. this is often contracted by the Poets, ηστο„, τ,στην* {for τι$ΰτον, rjei-LTjjy) i/cT/idi 1 . ijarc. r /σαν, e. g\ jEschpl. Prom. 451. Eur. Hec. 1102 . ubi v. Pors. (for faqur, rjSeaav)* The following table shews the tenses of this verb, which were in common use. z Brunck. ad Arist. Eccl. 551. a Piers, ad Moerid. p. 173 . b Brunck. ad Arist. Av. 19 . / , u a 0< cj • P·* es Tjist of Defective Verbs. 331 cd s-< *5* o O ( 3 <>O • «ΝΙ p -w 0-1 O & R* "N CJ 2k ·>. Φ p l b t r b b o >«■* >*■* e o •Ί 2k <υ Ph c V * cn V s-< Pm /-'** { : \s i t · ", 1 V',' } V <$£> Ui ■SR·- CT< 03 E C+H u 4> Q-i B « §· o< S fe 06s. 1. In Homer and Doric writers an aor. 2. also occurs from e&Wj ‘I know’,, ’ίδμεν Theocr. u, 151 . ’βμεναι id. xxv, 67. Od. S', 493 . μ, 154 . for iSeii/ Jpoll. Rh. in, 332. 355 . iv, 1360. Yet this infin. was first formed probably by analogy from the 1 pers. plur. ειδεμεναι, etSeyue v, as τεθι>άμεναι, reOva- μεν (1 pers. plur. τεθναμεν). Thus also the conjunctive of Ari¬ starchus tSeo) 17. If , 235 . List of Defective Verbs. Obs. 2. Homer instead of rjSeiv uses also ηείόειν II. 280. Od. i, 206. Herod. 1 , '45. ηείόει, and the Ionians used yew for ειν, ηιου for ίον°. ηείόειν stands as 3. pers. plur. for tjSeaav Apoll. Rh. iv, 1700. είκω, ‘ I resemble, I appear’, (different from the regular είκω, e I yield’), is used only in the perfect, οΐκα, as in Herodotus, εοικα, as in Homer and the Attic writers. For εοικα the form είκα also was peculiar to the Attics, e. g. e’Uaai in a fragment of Cratinus in Hesych. v. άί- <)ρντον κακόν , εΊκε Aristoph. Αν. 129B. which is used by Homer II. σ , 52 0. in the sense of r it is fit’, particularly in the in fin. and partic. εικεναι, είκως ά . είκως also occurs in Homer and Hesiod, e. g. εικν Γα IL y' f 386, 8$c. Hes. Sc. Here. 206. In prose εοικως is commonly used in the sense of ‘ resembling’; but the neut. εικό 9 (eo-n), in the sense of-‘it is reasonable, natural, to be expected’. Hence εικότως, άπεικότυπ, instead of which, however, Thucyd. VI, 55. uses άπεοικότως. Plusq. εωκειν ( ρκειν * * ) is doubtful. In the fut. it occurs in Aristophanes Nub. 1001 . είξεις. From εονγμεν Eur. Hevctcl. 428. 681. eiKTOVy εικτην , §. 195. 5. from ηίκτο , ττροσηιζαι , 8$C. §. 185, 4. Obs. For είκασιυ ( εοικασιν ) the Attics also said είξασιν Plat. Politic, p. 75. 106. where ξ for κ must have come from the Boeotian dialect f . επτείν an aor. 2 . the basis of which is probably the form ΕΠΩ, not in use, whence εττος, ενεττω or εννεττω. But the aorist cannot come from επω, because then ει would be e Fisch. in, a. p. 83. Heyne ad II. χ, 280. d Brunck. ad Arist. Nub. 185. Moeris p. 148. * As Dawes Misc. Cr. p. 295. reads in Aristoph. Av. 1298, where fixer, however, is written. See Brunck. on that passage. f Bergl. et Piers, ad Moerid. p. 147. Ruhnk. ad Timaeum p. 98. .Musgr. ad Eurip. Iph. A. 853. List of Defective Verbs.. 333 an augment, and would be retained contrary to analogy throughout all the moods : the base, therefore, is the form €Ϊπω } with the first syllable lengthened after the manner of the Ionians, as in αίρομαι, ειρωτάω (Comp. εω. l.) Indie. εϊττον. Imper. είπε. Opt. είποιμι. Conj. είττω· Part. €i 7 ra>Vj—ova a. Είπα is ail Ionic form. Infin. εϊπαι. Part. είπα**. From this the Attics, who otherwise used only €ΐ 7 τον, είπε ιν } είπωι/, said είπα? in the 2d pers. indie, e.g. Xen. (Econ. 19, 14. and in the imperat. είπα'τω, εί πάτων, είπατε, and an aor. l. med. άπειπάμην derived from it h . Comp. §. 188. 7. The imperative also εϊττον or είπο'μ occurs besides in Pind. 01. 6, 156. Theocr. xiv, il. in Plato Menon. p. 330. See Etym. M. p. 302. The rest of the tenses are formed from ΈΡΩ, εϊρω fut. (ερεσω), ep in Ionic, in Attic ερώ.' From ερω 3 είρω (JEsch. Eum. 639. Plat. Crat. p. 261 .) came another present form ερεω, ειρεω Hesiod. Theog . 38. ειρευσαι , Theocr. xxviii, 24. ειρείτω. Hence perf. είρηκα. perf. pass, είρημαι. /ut. 3. ε’ιρησομαι , although this may also be formed from ερεσω 3 ερεω, as κεκΧηκα from κάλεσω'. Either ερρηκα , ερρημαι were also used, or the ει was arbitrarily considered as an augment, which might be again taken from the verb, as if the present tense had been ρεω . For otherwise the derivatives ρήμα , prjais , ρητωρ from εί~·ρημαι 3 εί-ρησαι, εί-ρηται cannot be explained. To this arbitrary root may also be referred the aor. pass, ερρηθην or ερρεθην*. Inf. ρηθηναι . part, ρηθείς. E ιρεθη in ΗβΓΟ- & Valck. ad Herod, p. 649, 91. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 228. h Thom. M. p. 57. Moeris p. 29 . 1 Eustath. ad Od. e', p. 1540. 11. deduces, as Buttmann does in his Gr. Gr. p. 233. είρηκα, είρημαι from ρεω. But there is 110 example of a verb which begins with p, taking the augment et. k Heindorf. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 46, « 232. 334 - List of Defective Verbs. dotllS IV, 77. is analogous to εΐρηκα, είρηται, as ενρψταί, εύρεθηρ. Others derive ερρηθη v from a peculiar form pew, which, however, if it ever did exist, was first derived from βΐρηκα in the same arbitrary manner. Obs. For εττω was also used εσττω ; hence the poetic εσπετε e. g. IL β', 484. Hence, changing e into z, the compound ενίσττω , which, however, occurs only in the aorist ηνισττον ενισττον, conj. ενίσττω IL X', 839. Od. z', 37. 7', 327. Infin. ενισττειν Od. y 3 93. In the fut. it makes ενίψω Od . λ', 147. Apoll. Rh. 1, 1257· comp. §. 174. and ενισττησω Od . ε 3 98. ενίτττειν or ενίσσειν, is different, 4 to mortify, to reprimand’, which is derived from z7rxezi/, ‘ to hurt, to grieve’ (IL a , 454. β' 3 193) 1 . είρω 3 see e’nrelv. αίρομαι, see ερομαι . ελαύνω takes it’s tenses from ελάω. fut . ελάσω. aor. ηλασα . perf. a. ( ηλακα ) εληλακα. p. εληλαμαι m . Aor. p. ηλάθην (ηλάσθην is less Attic 11 .) The simple ελ$ν occurs in Homer and other old writers, e. g. IL e, 366. ελών Od. X 3 2. ελασκον AEschyl. Agam. 605. Imper. ίλα Pind. Isthm. v, 48. Eurip. Here. f. 8 19 . άπελα in Xenophon also Cyrop. vm, 3, 32. Elsewhere ελώ, ελ£ ? , ελώσι, ελών is the Attic fut. for ελάσω. See §. 178°. » S - % Obs. The radical word of ελαύνω is ελω, which besides ελάω , ελαύνω , admits the forms ελλω, εζλω, εζλεω, ζΧλω, 6 to bring together, compel, drive into a corner’ 1 *. From είλω , ελλω, comes the Homeric ελσας, ελσαζ, c to crowd together, to drive together’, (0ά.ε 3 132. asez'Xez Od. μ, 210. Apoll. Rh. 11, 571.); from είλεω, άττειλεω, άττειληθείς in Herodotus, e. g. 1, 24. c to drive into a corner’, άνειληθεντες Tku.c. vn, 81 q . From ελλά» I Ruhnk. Ep. Crit. 1 , p. 40. m On the accent of the part, εληλάμενος, see Thom. M. p. 294. • * f . Jfl ( ? A II Piers, ad Moer. p. 13. .. · 0 Piers, ad Moer. p. 146. >■ - · * ·.«»." p Hemsterh. ap. Ruhnk. ad Tirngeum p. 71 . ** Valck. ad Herod, p. 670, 40. i 1 t; I List of Defective J'erbs. eye li comes, perhaps, also the Homeric εάΧην, άΧείς, αΧηναι (as εστάΧην from στεΧΧω), at least it agrees entirely in it’s signifi¬ cation with ελλω, είλεω, and hence points to a similar origin r . Otherwise it is considered as a new verb αΧημι, whence come άΧεείνω, and αΧίξω. In the same manner from ελλω a perf. 2. eoXa (as εστοΧα from στελλω) appears to be derived, at least it may be supposed so; and hence εόΧημαι, εόΧητο Apoll. Rh. in, 471. (Etym. M. Hesych. Schol. ετετάρακτο) as αττεκτόνηκα from άττεκτονα* * . From ελλω also αελλα, * the storm*, ctoX- Χης 9 c collective, assembled’, appear to come, as στοΧη from στελλω. Again, from εολα, ούΧος, ούΧαι τρίχες. ΕΛΕΥΘΩ. S GQ έρχομαι. 'ΕΛΩ. See αιρεω. ΈΝΕΚΩ, ενεικω, ενε·γκω. See φέρω. * ενηνοθα , a perf. 2 . with the reduplication, from ΕΝΟΘΩ, f I shake, agitate’, (whence ενοσις , ενοσίχθων , είνο- σίφυΧΧος), occurs in the compounds άν-ηνοθε v 9 εττ-ενηνοθεν, κατ-ενηνοθεν , παρ-ενηνοθεν , in an intransitive sense, and ex¬ presses any motion or agitation, e. g. κόμη κατενηνοθεν ωμούς Horn. H. in Cer. 279· ‘ the hair floated on the shoul¬ ders’, atjua άνηνοθεν εξ ωτεϊΧης II. X', 2 66. Comp. Od. p , 270. ' the blood rushed from the wound’, Χάχην επενηνοθε II. β' 3 219· κ 9 134. 'the hair waves on the head’, a poetical representation of standing on end, εΧαιον επενηνοθε θεούς , 'flowed on the bodies of the Gods’, Od. η , 364*. The expressions in which the later writers used this word, e. g. Apoll. Rh. I, 664. μητις τταρενήνοθε, IV, 276. αιών €7 τενηνοθεν shew merely how they explained it, since they derived it sometimes from 0εω, by transposition of r Heyne ad II. e', $23. 1 /, 408. Buttmann’s Gr. Gr. p. 233. * Brunck. ad ApoH. Rh. 1. c. Interp. Hesych. T. I. p. 1512. 24. t Payne Knight Analytical Essay on the Greek Alphabet, p. 59· Hermann, de cm Gr. Gr, p, 279· Heyne ad II. β\ 219 . 336 List of Defective Verb*. εθω, sometimes from εω, εθω, 6 1 amV and sometimes from άνθεω. εννυμι from ΈΩ, f I put on’, is used as a simple word only in Poetry. Fut. εσω, εσσω (εσσομαι Pind. Nem. II. 21.) aor. εσσα. aor. m. εσσάμην. perf. p. εΐμαι Od. τ , 72. εΐσαι, εΐται. Hence ε'ιμενος, εττιειμενος II. ι, 372. plusqiMWl perf. 2. ρ. εσσο (thus εσμην from εσμαι, as ημφίεσμαι) 3. ρ. εστο. In prose only άμφιεννυμι occurs. Fut . άμφιεσομαι Xen. Mem. S. i, 6, 2. and άμφιώ (from άμφιεσω) Arist . Equ. 887* aor. ημφιεσα Xenoph. Cyrop . i, 3, 17. perf . pass, ημ- φίεσμαι, ημφίεσαι Xen. M. S. I, 6, 2. , . , * · · >. · άμφιάζω u is another, but a less authorized form. εττισταμαι, f I know, understand’, appears properly to be the middle voice of εφίστημι, the same as εφίστημι Ύον νουν, retaining the Ionic f(5rm for εφίσταμαι* . In the pres, imperf. and fut. it is conjugated like ' ίσταμαι , € 7 Γίσταμαι, ηττιστάμην y ( εττιστάμην ) επιστησομαι. In the pres, indie, the Ionic form εττίστεαι in the second form is to be remarked. For εττίστασαι the Doric form is εττίστα Pind. Pyth. hi, 143. The Attics say εττίστασαι Xen . M. S. n, 3, 10. Plat. Euthyd. p. 56. For επίστασο in the imper. the Attics use also, commonly in prose, εττίστω 1 . Comp. §. 208. Opt. εττισταίμην. COnj. εττίστωμαι Plato Eutliyd. p. 55. επ laTrjid.ib.p.bS. Isocrat. ad Demonic, p. 11. A. (as δύναμαι in the indie. §υνασαι, in the conjunctive Svv v ). In the aor. 1 . it has εττιστηθην , or, which is more Attic, ηττιστηθην analogous to the fut. Plato Symp. p. 19 5, $c. a u Alberti ad Hesych. Τ. I. p. 295. Dorv. Vann. Cr. p. 610 . x Fisch. ii, p. 491. Schneider Gr. Lexicon. y Moeris p. 182. z · Moeris p. 163. Piers, p. 18 sq. Thom. M. p. 354. a Wessel. ad Herod, p. 201, 74. Fisch. 11 , p. 492. List of Defective l erbs. 337 * €7Γώ, c I am employed about any thing*, and έπομαι, ‘ I follow*. Both have an aorist. εσπου, e. g. επ-εσιτον, μετ-εσπον in Homer, εσπόμην, ibid, and TThuc. 1, 60. Plat. Polit. p. 52. with this peculiarity : that, in the rest of the moods it loses e, as if it had been an augment. (R) Imper. σπεο, σπειο ll. κ , 285. συνεπίοπεσθε Plat . Critia ρ. 35. επι-σπεΊν, II. η, 52. επί-σποιμι Od. β\ 250. επί-σπω, — σπφς, — σττη 11. ζ, 412. β', 359. €7ΓΙ- σπων, μετα-σπων II. ρ\ 190* σπεσθαι Od. χ, θ24. επι-σπό- μενος. From this form a new verb ΣΠΕΩ appears to have been invented, and thence σπεύδω to have been derived. Compare εχω h . The future is εφεψεις, II. φ', 588. Od. ω. 470. ερδω. See ρύζω. ΈΡΙΔΩ or ΈΡΙΔΕΩ occurs only in the fut. εριδησω. Aor. l. mod. εριδδησασθαι II. φ', 792. Hence ερίζω, which is complete, and εριδαίνω. The perf. ερηρικα may come from ερίδω and ερίζω. ερνθαίνω, e I make red*. The radical form is ΈΡΥΩ, ’ΕΡΕΥΩ, ύρενθω II. λ', 394. (hence ερευσαι II. σ, 329·) and ΈΡΥΘΩ, ΈΡΥΘΕΩ, (hence ερυθρός ), of which also the fut. ερυθησω and perf. ηρύθηκα remained in use. έρχομαι , ‘I go*, is used only in the pres, and imperf.; yet τιειν is very frequently met with for ηρχόμην. The tenses wanting are supplied by derivations from ΈΛΕΥΘΩ fut. ελεύσομαι (in Homer. The Attics use instead of it εΐμι, in the sense of the future. Some later b epoixai (Ion. e’tpopat), * Γ enquire*, proceeds regularly. Imperf, ηρόμην , clpoft t\v. Inf. epevOai, but aor/ 2. ερεσθαι. Fut., ερησομαι, ♦ t N , 6ΐρησομαι. VOL. I, Z 338 List of Defective Verbs. Attic writers, however, use also εΧευσομαι*), aor. 2. ηΧυ- θον , in Homer, in prose ηΧθον (Doric ηνθον) perf 2 . η\υθα Hes. Th. 660 . and more commonly εΧηΧυθα {Horn. Theocr. είΧηΧουθ a.) i ·\ , L · *# 4 #·'. εσθίω, (and εσθω II. ω , 415. 476.) ‘I eat’, from eL·, which occurs in the present only in the old Poets II. e, 341. ζ', 142, fye. Prom εδω come also the tenses perf. €$η So/ca (§. 183. 3.) perf. pass. cfySea/uLcu (§. 185. 1,) and from the other supplementary forms of the future (e&w. eSewj €$ώ ), in Homer the perf. 2 . eSjySa II. p, 542. The aor. i. pass. ηΜσθην is rare, e. g. Hippocr . T. n, /?. 225. εφα^ον from (pyj'yu) or (pccyu) is taken as an aorist 5 as a fut. only έπομαι is used §. 180. 4 v % . ευρίσκω, ‘1 find’, from ΕΥΡΩ, whence also the fut. ευρησω, perf εύρηκα , perf p. ευρημαι , Λ 0 ?\ 1 . p. εύρεθην, aor. 2 . β. ευρον, aor. 2 . merf. ευρομην are formed. Of εύράμην see §. 188. Obs. 7 - The verbal is εύρετεος. f 2 S 4 . εχω, ‘ I have’. Fut. εξω §. 36. As εττω has an aor. 2 . formed by inserting σ ; so from εχω is formed an aor. 2 . εσχον 9 in the mid. εσχόμην ; and, in the same manner as in εσπον, σπείν , σίτων , this ε is omitted in the rest of the moods, as if it had been an augment. A. imp. σχες , opt. [ σχοιμι ], σχοίην §. 193. 2. conj. σχω. inf. σχεί,ν. part. αχών. med. imp. σχου. opt. σχοίμη v. COnj. σχώμαι. inf. σχεσθαι part, σχόμενος. The middle occurs mostly in compound words άπο-σχεσθαι , ύπο-σχεσθαι. Prom this εσχον , εχω is made into ’ ίσχω , (as εν-ίσττω from ενεττω) which, in Attic particularly, often occurs in the same c Thom. M. p. 88 . 336. et Hemsterh. Moeris p. 16 sq. Phrynich. 339 List of Defective Verbs; sense as €χω^ ά and from ίοτχω, ισχνεομαι in the com¬ pound ύπ-ιαχνεομαι, in Homer and Herodotus νπίσχομαι. These forms of the aorist without e are again made the basis of other forms (as σττεΊν of σττεύ^ειν) , and from the present ΣΧΕΩ, which is only imaginary, comes, on the one hand, fut. σχησω 3 mid. σχησομαι, (which the Grammarians, without reason, call more Attic than εξομαι*) perf. εσχηκα, perf. p. εσχημαι, aor. 1. pass, εσχεθην, which are chiefly used in composition; on the other hand, a new present σχεθω is formed. The imperat. σχες Soph . El. 1016 . particularly in composition επίσχες, παράσχες, 8ξο. is formed from ΣΧΗΜΙ, as οπτές from εσίτον . —is very rare, e. g κάτασχε Eurip. Here. f. 1211 . 7 τάρασχε Plat. Protag. p. 164. as also Eurip. Hec. 8 36. in all the MSS f . εττίσχε Menand. ap. Stob. Tit. xx. Obs. The compound ανέχομαι has commonly also an aug¬ ment in the preposition, ηνειχομη v, ηνεσχόμεν. See §. 170 & . ΈΩ, a radical word, of which only single tenses and some derivative forms occur. 1 . In the sense of ‘ to place, to erect a building’, it occurs in the aor. 1 . εΐσα 11. *, 392. ζ, isg. Μχον εΐσαν. II- e , 693 . Od. 7 ', 416 . εϊσαν , r they placed him, or seated him*, aor. med. ε'ισάμην. This ει in Ionic was not merely an augment, but a lengthening of the e, and thence remained also in the fut. είσομαι Apoll. Rh. 11 , 807 . in the partic. aor. Herod. 111 , 126 . vi, 103 . av&pas o\ ύπείσας d Moeris p. 198. Fisch. 111 , a. p. 100. e Moeris p. 26. 320. Phrynich. p. 180. Thom. M. p. 690. f Porson. Herm. ad Eur. Hec. 1. c. 8 Fisch. hi, a. p. 99 . I 340 List of Defective Verbs. κατ' ον^όν^ νυκτός υττείσαντες αιώρας, as λοχοι/ είσαν in Homer, which elsewhere is νπείς from υφίημι* * 1 . In the same manner ιρόν εισάμενος Herod, i, 66. Plutarch. Them. p. 22. Apollon. Rh. i, 967*. The Attics effected this lengthening of the e by doubling σ, εσσάμενος Thuc* hi, 58. which also was originally Ionic, ίσσε, εκάθισε, in Hesych k . From ew comes ημαι the perf. p. for είμαι. See §. 235. Another derivative is εζομαι , whence ίζω 3 καθίζω is again another, but an active form. 2. In the sense of 6 put on’, the derivative εννυμι is used. See εννυμι. I . 3. Another derivative in the sense of f I send one any where, let go\ is 'ίημι, conjugated like τίθημι. 235. Z. 1 Ζάω (ζώ, ζγς, ζγ, see 240. note*) has an imperat. ζηθι , as if from ZHMI, and a form of the imperf. εζην, to which, however, the grammarians prefer the form εζων , βζης, ίζ> 7, for εζαες, εζαε. The old classic writers use the tenses from βιόω , βιωσομαι , εβίωσα, βεβίωται in pre¬ ference to those from ζάω. But ζησονσι occurs in Plato Rep. v, p « 36. Hi See άνδάνω. [ΐμαι> £ I sit*, a perf. pass, from *£Ω, ‘ I set’, for είμαι . ημαι , ήσαι, ηται , (as κάθηται Xen. CJyr . VII, 3, 5.) and h Valck. ad Herod, p. 261 , 58. who is, however, wrong in comparing αψβΐσαν. See.§. 20 6. II, 3. * Brunck. ad Apoll. 1. c. Ruhnk. Ep. Cr. n, p. 202. k Comp. Etymol. M. p. 306'. 32. - 341 List of Defective Verbs. ήσται. 3. pi. ήνται, Ion. carat, as κατεαται Herod, i, 199 . 11 , 86, fyc. and Poet, eiarai, e. g. II. β', 1 37 . In the same manner in the plusquam perf. 3. pi. βατό and e /ατο, e. g. 11. y\ 149, fyc. for ήντο. Imper. ησο II. β', 200, 8$C. ήσθω< Iniin. ησθαι. Part, ημει /os' (for ημβνος on account of the present signification). The compound κάθημαι is more common, inf. καθη- σθαι, which has also an optat. καθοίμην, e. g. Aristoph. Lys. 149 . Run. 919 1 , and a conj. κάθωμαι Eurip. Hel. 1093. Demosth. Phil . 1 , p. 53, 2. In the imperf it has €καθημην 3 3. p. βκάθητο JEschin. p. 267. R· Xen. Cyrop. vii, 3, 14. and καθημην 3. p. καθηστο, which latter the Grammarians consider as better”. For the imper. κάθησο there is also a less genuine form κάθου (from κάθεσο, κάθεο) 11 . · For the present and imperf. in the sense of ‘ seating one’s self’, and the future, καθίζομαι, εκαθεζόμην, καθεδούμαι are used. See e£o,uat. Θ. ΘΗΝΩ, ΘΑΝΕΏ. See θνήσκω. 236. * θηττω , f I am astonished, perplexed’, occurs only in the Poets, in the perf. 2. τεθηπα Od. ζ, 168. ψ', ίο 5. II. φ\ 29, fyc. and aor. 2. εταφον, τάφον Apoll. Rh. 11 , 207 . 1039. Part, τάφων (§. 36. comp. §. 188. Obs. 3.) II. 1 , 193 , 8 ςο. Hence τάφος in Homer, ‘ astonishment’, θηβος , i. q. θαύμα, in Hesychius. θηπω itself is probably from θάττω, whence θάττη , Θάττα in Hesych. and the common θάμβ os°. 1 Brunck. ad Arist. Lys. 149- n Moeris p. 234. Thom. Μ. 1. c. 1,1 Thom. Mag. p. 485. 0 Schneiders Gr. Lex. 342 List of Defective Verbs. Oiyydvu) from θί yw. Hence fut. θίξω, and θίξομαι. aor. 2. eOtyov. Indn. 6iyc7v. part. Oiya>v. * - s , Θνήσκω , 4 1 die/ from θανεω, which again comes from ΘΗΝΩ. Prom ΘΗΝΩ is derived fut. m. θανουμαι aor. 2 . εθανον. perf. τεθνηκα , (as μεμενηκα from μένω 183. 4 .) from which, in the plur. in the infin. and partic. are chiefly used the forms by syncope (§. 183, 7.) τεθναμεν, τεθνασι , re- θνάναι ( τεθνάμεναι II. ω, 225. Tyrt. El. 2 , 1 . τεθναμεν II. ο, 497·) τεθνεως (in Homer τεθνειως Ιί, ρ\ l 6 l. Gen. τεθνειότος 11. τ', 300. —τεθνειωτος Od. a , 289 · Also τεθνηως, —ότο 9 and —ώτος Herod, ιι, 90 . II. ρ, 435. Hesiod. Sc. Η. 175 . Doric, τεθναως Theocr. Epigr. II, 5 .) Neutr. τεθνεός Herod, ι, π 2 . (the feminine seems not to occur.) Gen. τεθνεώτος. The imperat. and optat. perf. are formed from τεθναμεν , as from τεθνημι , τεθναθι II. χ', 365 . (not € die’, but, 4 lie lifeless there’) τεθναίην Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2 , 3 , $c. Comp. 219 . 3. a. The ai corresponds to a in τεθναμεν, τεθνατε } as 'ισταίην to 'ίσταμεν, ΐστατε , without the neces¬ sity of assuming a form θνάω. From τεθνηκα the conj. τεθνηκωσι occurs Thucyd. VIII, 74 . Prom τεθνηκα a new form is derived, τεθνηκω, of which the fut. remained in common use, τεθνηξω 2Es- chyl . Ag. 1288. Aristoph. Ach. 325. and more frequently τεθνηξομαι , as εστηζω, εστηξομαι 205. 3. τεθνησω and τεθνησομαι. are not genuine forms p . ♦ ... θρωσκω , ‘ I jump, leap’, from ΘΟΡΩ, θορεω §. 216. 5. has from ΘΟΡΩ fut . θορονμαι , aor. εθορον. Another deri¬ vative is θορνύω . p Gatak. ad Marc. Anton. 11 , 14. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Vesp. 654. Ach. 5p0. Reiz ad Lucian. Sol. p. 478. Tom. ix, p. 101. T. x. Oudend. ad Thom. M. p. 835 sq. Fisch. in, a. p. 106. 343 List of Defective Verbs. I. * Ικν€ομαι , ' I come’, from ίκω , whence also ικάνω is derived. Hence fut. 'ίζομαι. aor. 2. ικόμην (ΐκτο for ίκβτο. Hesiod. Tkeog. 481.) perf. (only in composition) acpiy^ai (Ion. οπτΊ'γμαι). 'ίκω, ' Ικει , ίκοι, ΐκων } all with t long*, occur in the old Poets, e. g. Od. p, 444. II. θ', 192. t, 521, p\ 399. Pind. Οί. 5, 20, The fut. of this form, ίζω (whence aor. l. ΐξας Horn. H. Apoll. ii, 45. but doubtful), was considered as a new present, and thence an imperf. ΐξον formed, IL β', 667. e , 773, #c. ιλάσκομαι, 4 1 conciliate, propitiate', derived from ιλάομαι, which also occurs II. β\ 53 0. Apoll . /2A. ii, 847. Hence is formed fut. ιλάσομαι (with a short) aor. x.med. \\ασάμην Herod, i, 67. II. cl, 100. A derivative form of ΐλαω, 'IaHMI is supposed; hence ί\ηθι in Homer, ίλαθι with a short Theocr. xv, 143. and the pres. med. ίλαμαι Horn. H. xxi, 5. ίπταμαι. See πετρμαι. * - * - ίση μι occurs in the sing, only in Doric writers, e. g. ίσαμι Pind. Pyth. iv, 441. Theocr. v, 119· ίσατι for ίσησι Theocr. xv, 146. Part, ίσας, in the Dative ίσαντι Pind . P. hi, 52. The imperf. act. ίσαν for ίσασαν occurs II. σ r 405, 8 $c. Eurip. Cycl. 230. For what remains in com* mon use of this verb, see in είδω, ‘I know'. &. ΚΑΖΩ, probably an Ionic form for χάζω, except that in the pres, only χαζω, γαζομαι, occurs; on the other hand ΚΑΖΩ only in the derivative tenses, and in pecu¬ liar senses. The radical form appears to have been ΧΑΩ, f to stand Open, to be empty', in Latin hiare. 23S 3H List of Defective Verbs. * Hence χάος and χάορος , contracted χώρος*, and χάσμα. In this sense the verbs χαίνω, χάσκω, fut. χανοίνμαι , clot . ίχανον, perf, κβχηνα remain. Connected with this is \, the sense, ‘ to have empty space sufficient, to take up or comprehend any thing’, and consequently 'to contain’. In this sense are found in Homer εχα&? II. 24. θ', 461 . ^Uprj c ouk exabe στήθος χό\ 0 ν , and perf. plusquamp. perf. κζχανοα, εκβχάν^βιν 11. ω 191 . ψ', 268 . Od. S', 96 . which is derived from χάζω. Hence adv. χανδον and χανδάνω. 2 , ‘to want, to be in want of’, in which sense the forms χατβω, χατβνω, χατ'ιζω , χητεω are used ; hence χητος, 'want, longing·'. The form κηδος, appears to have a relation to this, grief at any loss, and κι$ω, κήδομαι, ‘ I grieve, am sorrowful’, the latter also ‘ to be anxious about any thing, to care for any thing’. Either from κηοομαι, (as ίδησω from €Ϊ$ω), or from ΚΑΖΩ, καΰησω. Comes κ€κα$ησομ€θα II, θ', 352. ovkcti νώϊ ολΧνμβνων Δα- ναών κεκαδησομβθ νστάτιόν ί rep ; 3. ' to make to yield, to clear a place. In this sense the middle χάβομαι is used in the pres. Ί yield, give way’, particularly in the Poets, and an aor. κ€κά$οντο 11. & } 497 . o', 574 . 'they retreated, gave way’ (got out of the way of the javelins, without making the army retreat). II π', 736. ον χάζετο φωτός , ‘missed’. δις θα ve7v ον χάζομαι Eur . Or. 114. Xe- yeiv ον χάζομαι id. Ale. 33. non refugio, non recuso. (r) Apoll. Eh. IV, 190. μηκβτι vvv χαζζσθο. — πάτρην^β νεεσθαι. Hence again the following senses are derived: a) in the active joined with the genitive, it signifies ' to bereave’, properly ‘ to make one quit any thing’, where an aorist JS used. Κ€κα$ώ V ll. X', 333 . and a fut. derived from it κεκα- $ησω Od. φ , 153. 170 . θνμον και φνχης κ€κα$ών, i. e. q Valck. in Lennep. Etym. p. 1097 . 345 List of Defective Verbs. ύποχωρησαι ποιησας , according* to Eustathius, in the same manner as οφρα ε τιμής και σκήπτρων εΧασειαν Apoll. RIl. hi, 597. b) Since he who compels another to make way for him is superior to the other; hence a new signi¬ fication f to overcome". In this sense only the perf. pass, is used κεκασμαι, εκεκάσμην, e. g. II. v, 431. πάσαν yap ομη- Χικίην εκεκαστο κάΧΧεί και epyotaiv iHe φρεσίν. Hence without an accusative f to distinguish one's self", κεκάσμεθα άΧκτΐ τ rjvoperi τε 0(1. a/, -508. πΧούτιρ τε και υιάσι κεκάσθαι II. ω, 546. Partic. κεκασμενος 11. cT, 339 · Doric κεκαη¬ μένος Pind. ΟΙ. I, 42. εΧεφαντι φαί^ιμον ώμον κεκα$μενοι>' . καίω , Attic κάω with a long α §. 26. jut. καύσω §. 177 . 239· b) aor. 1. pass, εκαυθη v, perf. pass, κεκαυμαι. Tile aorists εκηα and εκάη Vj e. g. II. a, 464. Herod, n, 180. iv, 79. indicate another form of the fut. καώ. From εκηα a new present κηω Od. ί, 553. appears to have arisen. For κηας in the part, the Attics said also κέας ASschyl. Again. 858. and this was lengthened into κείας , κειάμενος, κείαντο Od. ι, 231. φ' , 51. II. ι, 88. 234. καυσας occurs in some later Atticists, Maxim . Tyr. xii, 2. Themist. p. 148. C. 149 . A.* κάμνω. See §. 183. 4. 188. 1. κείμαι , ‘ I lie", from κεομαι (Herod . IV, 139 . κεεται Theocr. V, 129 · II· χ, 510. Od. X', 340. κεονται) as <$είν, πλείν §. 49- From the form of the imperat. and infin. κεεσο , κεεσθαι, κείσο , κείσθαι , it is conjugated as a perf. r I have. endeavoured to develop the various forms of one root, and the genealogy of their significations in a manner which differs widely from the common one. Detached observations are to be found in Hem- sterh. ad Polluc. p. 1233. Interpr. ad Iiesych. v. κεκαΖησ-όμεθα. Her¬ mann. de em. Gr. Gr. p. 296 . especially H. Steph. Thes. T. iv. Schneider's Greek Lexicon, under χάζω. s Piers, ad Moerid. p. 231, 239 sq. Fisch. in, a. p. 114 sq. 346 List of Defective Verbs . κείμαι, κεΊσαι, κεΊται, κείμεθα, third pers. plur. κεΊνται, Ionic κεαται It. λ', 658. 825. Herod. I, 14. 105. 133. Theocr. xxix, 3. imperf. εκείμην, εκεισο, εκειτο, third pers. plur. εκειντο, Ionic άεατο Hesiod. Sc. H. 175 . Herod, h 167 , &c. imper. κβΤσο, κείσθω, 8$c. optat. κεοίμην Herod. 1 , 67· Plato. Rep. v, p. 60 . x, p. 327 l . conj. κεωμαι Plat. Phileb . /?. 269 . Phcedon. p. 211 . Aen. (Ec. 8 , 19 . inf. κεισθαι partic. κείμενος. fut. κείσομαι η . (r) κεράννυμι , 4 1 mix", from κβρα'ω (whence κβρώι/ ΛΑ. I, 1185. κεράασθε Od. 7 ', 332. κερόωντο Od. v, 253.) and this from κερω (whence κερωνται II. S', 260 . From SJ κεραω comes fut. κεράσια, Attic, κερω Hesych. aor . 1. εκε- ρασα with a short, perf. pass, κεκραμαι with a long, Ionic κεκρημαι Hippocr. T. I, p. 27. 180. and κεκερασμαι Anacr. xxix, 13. aor. 1 . pers. εκράθην , Ionic εκρηθην, and εκερά - σθην Plato Phileb. p. 282. Another derivative form from κεράω is κιρνάω 216 ,3. Obs. Hence κίρνημι. Imper. κίρνη. See §. 205 . 5 X . κερδαίνω, ‘I gain’, in the fut. for the common κερ- Savto, has also κερΰησω, aor. 1 . εκερ^ησα Herod. IV, 152. * κιχάνω, e l reach, overtake’, from ΚΙΧΩ aor. 2. εκιχον. from κιχεω (Od. ω , 283.) fut. κιχησω , aor. 1. med. εκιχησάμην II. S', 385. ζ ', 498, 8$c. With the aor. εκιχον the form εκίχην , also occurs, as from KIXHMI, from κι χήτην II. κ, 376. εκίχημεν Od. π , 379· Opt. κιχείην II. β\ 188. ι, 416, $C. Conj. κιχώ (κιχείω 11. α, 26, $C.) inf. κιχηναι ( κιχημεναι II. o ' , 274.) part, κιχεις II. n r , 342. From κίχημι comes partic. pres. med. κιχήμενον II. 187. X', 451 y . 4 Moeris p. 226. « Fi sc h. 488 sqq . x Piers, ad Moer. p. 208 sq. y Fisch. hi, a. p. 122. List of Defective Verbs. 347 κίχρημι, ( I lend’, from χράω. Hence fut. χρησω , CLOT . εχρησα, 8$C. * κ\άζω. See 174. c. κορβννυμι, f I satisfy’, from κόρω, fut . κορεσω and κορεω II. ff, 379. v y 831. CLOT. 1. med. εκορεσάμην (poet. εκορεσσ. —) perf. κεκόρηκα , whence κεκορηάτε Od. σ', 371. perf. pass, κεκόρημαι in Ionic II. σ', 287. Od . θ', 98. f, 436. >//, 330. Herod, in, 80. in Attic κεκάρεσμαι Xenoph. M. S. Ill, 11. 13. aor. I. pass, εκορεσθη v. κράζω 3 ‘I crow’, is conjugated regularly κράξω, εκρά - yov, κεκρά^α, except that in the imperf. pass, it has the form of a verb in — μι, κεκραχθι Aristoph. Thesm. 692 . Vesp. 198 . κρεμάνυυμι, C 1 suspend’,, from ΚΡΕΜΑΩ fut. κρεμάσω 240. with a short, Attic κρεμώ Aristoph. Plut. 312. in Homer κρεμάω II. η, 83. aor. 1. med. εκρεμασα aor. 1 .pass. εκρε~ μάσθην. Besides these forms κρεμαμαι, ζ I hang’, like Ίσταμαι, probably arose from the regular, perf. p. κεκρέμαμαι not in use, with which it agrees also in signification, f I am hung’; consequently c I hang’. Opt. κρεμαίμην Arist. Nub. 868. Acharn. 944. Vesp. 297· conj. κρεμωμαι. part. κρεμάμε VOS. imperf εκρεμάμην II. o', 18. fut. κρεμησομαι (as στησομαι from Ίσταμαι) Aristoph. Vesp. 804. Ach. 278. (Schcef. ad. Long. p. 401.) Another form still is κρημνημι, in the imperf. κρημνη Etym. M. p. 637.64. Eustath. ad II. 0 , p. 1001 . 10 . pass, κρημναμαι JEsch. S. C. Th. 231 \ κτεινω in the Poets, has, besides εκτεινα 9 εκτανον , an¬ other aor. 2. as if from ΚΤΗΜΙ, εκταν , κατεκτας Eurip. z Heyne ad Pind. P. iv, 43. Fisch. hi, a. p. 120 sq. 241. List of Defective Verbs . Heracl . 1290 . έκτα id. Here. f. 424. third pers. plur. εκταν II. κ , 526. Od. a, 30. for εκτασαν, λ ίσταν for εστα- σαι/. Inf. κτάμεναι II. ε, 301. ρ, 8, #C. κτάμεν II. o, 557. e', 675. Part, κτάς, as κατακτάς Eurip. Ale. 3. 696 . aor. med. part, κταμενος inf. κτάσθαι II. o, 558 a . κυνβω, ‘ I * kiss', has fut. κύσω, aor. 1. εκνσα, κυσε II. 474 · *" σσ6 Od. π, 15. with v short from ΚΥΩ. There is a difference of signification in κνω, κνεω, i to be preg¬ nant ; whence κνισκω , ‘ to impregnate*; κυσαμενη Hesiod . Th. 165. 405. and ύτ-οκυσαμενη in Homer. II. ζ', 26, %!$c. which is commonly written with a double σ. κν\ί vHu)> 6 1 roll’, from κυλίω , whence also the tenses fut. κνλίσω, aor. 1 . εκυλισα, aor. 1 , pass. εκνλίσθην. A. Ααμχάνω, ζ I receive by lot*, from A ΗΧΩ, (whence ληξις, f the casting of lots*) in the same manner as λαμβάνω, λανθανω , from ληβω, ληθω. fut. 1. ληξομαι. perf. είληχα. per/, ρ. ειλημμένος Demosth. ρ. 873. aor. 2 . ελαχον. Between ληχω and λαμχάνω there seems to have been an intermediate form ΑΑΓΧΩ §. 618. 3. Hence the old perf. λελομχα (§. 183. 3.) which occurs in Doric and Ionic, rarely in Attic b . Prom the aor. 2. ελαχον Homer uses a new verb λε- λάχω in a transitive sense, ‘ to impart*, 11 . v \ 80. d, 350. X> 343. >//, 76. λελαχησωμεν in HesychlUS. The Ionians had derivatives also from λόμχη (i. e. λάχος,) εύλομχεΊν in Hesychius. c a Fisch. Ill, a. p. 122 sq. b Lucian. Soloec. p. 226 . et Granins p. 484. c Valck. ad Herod, p. 535, 99· ) 349 List of Defective Verbs, λαμβάνω from ΑΗΒΩ, whence fut. ληφομαι (Doric λάψοΰμαι , Xa\jsrj Theocr. i, 4.10.) perf, a. ε’Ιληφα. perf. p, €Ϊ\ημμαι (and λέληαμαι Eurip. Ion. 1113. Hence Doric λελαττταί in Hesych.) aor. l. pass, εληφθην.' aor. 2. a. ελαβον. aor . 2. mod. ελαβόμην. For είληφα the Ionians had also a form λελάβηκα , analogous to άττεκτόνηκα from απεκτονα (§. 189· Obs. 4.) Herod, iii, 42, 65. vm, 122 . ix, 59 d . ΛΑΜΒΩ was an intermediate form between ΛΗΒΩ and λαμβάνω, fut. λάμφομαι Herod. I, 199· VII, 39* 157- hi, 3d. 146. aor. med. ελαμφάμην id. vii, 157. perf. p. λελαμμαι id. IX, 51. third pers. λελαμπται, whence κατα- λαμπτεος Herod, hi, 127. aor. 1 . pass, ελάμφθην Herod . 11 , 89, #c. e Another form still is λάζομαι, whence λελά- σθαι in Hesych. and λάζυμαι. λανθάνω, 4 I am hidden’, med. λανθάνομαι, ληθομαι , 4 1 forget’, from λήθω 11. φ', 323* ω , 363, S$c. Xen. CEcon. 7, 31. fut. λησω, λησομαι. aor. 1. ελησα. COTflj. ΰιαλησφ. Isocr . Nicocl. p. 30. a. more correctly διαλησει. λησγ Plat. Ale. 11 , p. 79. where, however, the second Basil edit, has λησεται. In Xenoph. Cyr. i, 6, 1. instead of ώς ού^ενα άν λησαντα should be read λησοντα , with Her¬ mann. ad Viger. p. 780.281. Part, X^Va? Xen. Cyr. i, 6, i. perf p. λελησμαι, 4 1 have forgotten’, the old form Χαλα¬ σμοί//. ε, 834. λ', 313. from ΛΑΘΩ. aor. ι. pass, in Doric only, ελησθην, λασθημεν for λησθήναι Theocr. η, 46. aor. 2. a. ελαθον , m. ελαθόμην. perf m. λεληθα, ( I am hidden’. From aor. 2. ελαθον Homer has a new verb XeXa'0a> in a transitive sense, 4 to make to forget’. II. β', 600. d Valek. ad Herod, p. 217, 7· e Wess. et Valek. ad Herod, p. 232, 3. 350 List of Defective Verbs. λούω, l wash’, from \6ω, hence λό’ i. e. iXoeOd. κ 361. fut. Χοίσω contr. Χούσω. aor. 1. exicaa, eX is retained in some dia¬ lects; in Homer both are frequent. The Spartan wo¬ man, in Aristoph. Lysistr. 156. uses οίω. In the same manner Homer uses όίομαι with £ long, oUrfok II. 453 . ώισθην Od. d , 453. 7r , 475. οίσατο Od. a , 323. t\ 390. The distinction which, according to Thom. M. p. 645 . the Grammarians (ot ακριβείς τεχνικοί) make between οΊμαι and οίομαι, that the one is applied to certain deter¬ minate things, the other to indeterminate things, is so nice, that hardly any language, except one merely of books, could ever have observed it, especially as it is so arbitrary. This remark sometimes applies accidentally, as Demosth. in Mid. p. 19 , 40. ed. Spald. but it fre¬ quently also does not, as Xenoph. (Econ. 16 , 2. Isceus in the note of Sallier on Thom. Μ. 1 . c\ ΟΙΩ. See ώερω. οΧισθάνω, ολισθαίνω k , c l slide, slip’, from οΧίσθω. Hence fut. ολισθησω , aor. 1 . ωΧίσθησα , perf ωΧίσθηκα aor. 2. ωΧισθον . οΧΧνμι, ‘ I destroy’, from ΟΛΩ. Hence fut. 6 λεσω, Attic ολώ, el?, ει. med. όΧονμαι. aor. 1 . ωΧεσα. perf a. οΧωΧεκα. aor. i. p. ωΧεσθην JEschyl . Ag. ]6l3. (r) perf 2. οΧωΧα. aor. 2. med. ωλόμην. ομνυμι, l swear’, from ΌΜΟΩ fut. όμόσω , med. 6 μό- °μαι , Attic ομουμαι , — el * 1 . — εΊται. (The Attics use only 1 On οίχωκα see §. 183. 6*. k Davves ^ ilsc · Cr. p. 331. Porson..ad Eurip. Ph. 1398. and contra Toup. ad Long. p. 280. 1 Piers, ad. Moer. p. 2 76 . 353 List of Defective Verbs. the fut. M. m ) aor. l. ωμοσα . perf. a. όμωμοκα . joer/L ομωμομαι Aristoph. Lys. 1007. aor. 1. p. όμοθείς Demosth. p. 1174. ομόρ'γννμι, c I wipe off% from ΌΜΟΡΓΩ fut. όμόρξω . aor. 1. ωμορζάμην . ονίνημι , * I benefit’, from ονημι, ονάω. Hence fut. ονησω, aor. i. ωνησα. In the pres. p. it has ονημαι. Hence ονημβνος Od. β' , 33. imper. ονησο Od. τ', 68. aor. 2. ωνάμην Eur. HerC.f 1371. imperf. ωνημην, ωνησο Lucian. Prom. 20. άπωνητο Herod. I, 168. Od. λ', 323. ττ, 120. //, 293. ωνατο in Homer is from ονομαι, ονοσαι, ‘to injure, abuse’ inm . Opt. 6 cal μην, as ισταίμην. infin. ονασθαι Apoll. Rh. II, 196 . From ονίνημι comes όνίνησι , the infill, ονινάναι Plat. Rep. x, p. 294 . (where όνίναι stands), and ονίνοιεν (per¬ haps όνίναιεν ) in Hesychius. οράω, f I see’, has of itself only the imperf εωρων , 244. Perf. a. εωρακα. Perf p. εωραμαι , with a long*. The rest of the tenses are supplied by derivatives from ΟΠΤΩ and eiL·. From ΟΠΤΩ comes fut. οφομαι , tran¬ sitive. Per /', p. ώμμαι (which Pollux 11 , 57 . quotes from Isagus), ώττται, inf. ωφθαι , f to have been seen’, aor. i« p. ωφθην. perf 2 . οττωττα, only in the Poets. From εύω the aor. 2. a. and m. See ε&ω. ορνυμι , ‘ I move, excite’, from ΟΡΩ fut. ορσω. aor. l. ωρσα. perf. p. [ωρμαι~\ imperf. ορσο Pind. 01. 6, 107 . IL co, 88. Od. η , 342. for ωρσο. inf. ώρθαι or ορθαι II. 9' r 474. m Moeris 1. c. Thom. M. p. 650. Dawes Misc. Cr. p. 329. mm Phrynich. p. 6. Thom. M. p. 931. et Oudend. Eustath. ad II. p, 25. p. 1123, 35. Herodian. Piers, p. 451. Fisch. hi, a. p. 149. Valck. ad Theocr. Adon. p. 362. VOL. I. A A 354 List of Defective Verbs. Part. ορμενος. plusq. ώρτο. (The perf. and plusquam perf. express the continuance of the motion, of which ορννμι marks only the beginning.) Perf. 2 . ορωρα, intran¬ sitive, * I am risen’, and ωρορα , mostly transitive (§. 168 . Obs. 2 .) Hence a new present Γ ορωρωλ pass, ορωρομαι Od. τ , 377. aor. 2. ωρόμην. φ f I ; V · · . ■ The fut. ορσω, ορσομαι, is again considered as a new theme ; hence ορσεο in Homer. ·· οσφραίνομαι, ‘I smell’, transitive, from οσφρομαι. Hence fut. οσφρησομαι Aristoph. Pac. 151 . aor . 2 . άσφρόμην Aristoph. Ach. 179. Vesp. 792". ’Ωσφράμη v also occurs in Herod. 1 , 80. and in later writers Milan H. An. v, 49 . and a new pres, όσφράομαι Antiphan. ap. Athen. p. vn, p. 299 . E. Lucian. Reviv. T. in, p . 166 . όσφράται του χρυσίου. Id. Jup. Trag. Τ. VI, p. 241. όσφρασθαι according to Graevius; where, however, the MSS. read οσφρησθαι (a Paris MS. οσφρείσθαι) or ωσφρησθαι which is the perf. p. formed according to analogy. ούτάω, οντα'ζω , 1 1 hit, I wound’, has in the aor. 2. third pers. ουτα II. 6, 376. S', 525. as έκτα, as from OYTHMI 0 . ούταμβνο? II. X', 658. 825. is the part. perf. from ουτάω for ούτασμένος (as εΧηΧαμενος for εΧηΧασμενος ), as appears from βεβΧημενοι which accompanies it, and ουτασται im¬ mediately following. The infin. ουτάμεναι II. φ\ 68. 397. or ούτάμεν II. ε, 13. may be the inf. pres, for ουτάναι , but it may also be for ούτάειν , ούτμν, as άρόμμεναι for αροειν , αρουν. Moeris ρ. 281. Thom. Μ. ρ. 66ο. Dawes Misc. Grit. ρ. 31 g sq. ° Heyne ad II. S', 31.9. List of Defective Verbs. 355 IT. Πάσχω, ' I suffer’, from ΠΗΘΩ. Hence fut. 7Γ ησομαι, (doubtful) aor . 1 , part . ττ^'σα? JEschyl. Agam. 1637*. ττησασκε Etym. M. p. 624, 50. aor, 2. ετταθον. perf 171» ( τΓ€7τηθα ) part, πβτταθι /ly Od. p , 555. One form of the fut. of 7 τηθω is τταθησω Plat. Rep. I, p. 189. as μαθησομαι from μηθω, unless it should be εύπαθησω in one word. Another form of πηθω was ΠΕΝΘΩ, with which . πένθος is related. Hence fut. n τείσομαι §. 174. perf. 2. 7Γ€7 τονθα. From πάσχω Epicharm. ap. Etym. M. p. 662, n. and Stesichorus ap. Phot. Lex. have perf. πεποσχε. From this probably comes the Homeric πεποσθε II. y, 99 . Od. k , 4 65 . ψ', 53. for 7Γ67Γοσχατ€, according· to Others for πεπόνθατε ΟΓ πεπησθε, from 7 τησω, ΟΓ πεπόνη- σθε, or indeed from 7τοω ρ . πεσσω, πεττω, f I digest’, has its fut. from πεπτω fut. πεψω. Aor. επεψα. Perf. p. πεπεμμαι. Part, πεπεμμενος, Aor. p. επεφθην. ΠΕΤΩ, an old form, whence came afterwards πίπτω, (ττιττετω §. 219 ·) in the poetic dialect of the Attics πίτνω (§. 217 . 3. Obs.) Hence the Dor. aor. επετον , e. g. κάπε- TOV Pind. 01. 8, 50. for κατεπεσον. κάππεσον §. 38. εμπετες for ενεπεσες, id. Pyth. 8, 117 · 7 τετοντεσσι, id. Pyth. 5, 65. 7 τετοισαι 01. 7, 126. In the other dialects this is επεσον. fut. πεσονμαι, e. g. Plat. Rep. X, p. 326. Thuc. V, 9 . Ion. 7 τεσεομαι, as from ΠΕΣΩ. From ΠΕΤΩ, fut. πε- τησω, comes also the Homeric πεπτηως Od. 354. 474. χ', 362. or πεπτεως II. φ', 503. Od. χ', 384. ΟΓ πεπτως. * π η σας is a corrupt reading for πταΐσας. Ed. p Fisch. in, a. p. 150 sqq. Herm. de em. Or. Gr. p. 29 2 . A A 2 356 List of Defective Verbs. ΚεΚΤ(?)ΤΟ 5 Soph. Aj. 840. for 7Γ67 Γτηκως from κεκτηκα* * For πεπτηκα, however, ττετΓτωκα is used. §. 183. 6. From 7Γ€Τϋο is derived. πετομαι * I fly *, in Homer and the Attic dialect q . The aor. €7Γ€τόμην becomes by syncope εκτόμην Soph. Aj. 693. €7Γ-€7ττον Aristoph. Av. l i8. εκ-εκτετο Arist. Av. 48. 7τροσ-€7ττ€το Soph. Aj . 282. Opt. ava-n ttolto Plat. Phcedon. p. 248. Conj . ανακτώνται Aristoph. Lys. 774. Iniin. κτεσθαι Soph. (Ed. T. 17 · εκι-κτεσθαι II. 126. Part. εκ-κτόμένος Afist. Av. 789. From this form, thus con¬ tracted by syncope, came again 1 ) a new presentTlITHMI, med . ΐκταμαι, which, however, the genuine Attics do not appear ever to have used r . Lucian has D. D . 20, 5 , p. 61. καθίκτάμενοι, ih. p. 62. συμκαρικτάμην , although he censures ίκτασθαι and ϊκτατο as not Attic Lexiph. T. V, p. 203. Solcec. T. IX, p; 226. 2) In the fut. κτησομαι, e. g. άνακτησγ Plat. Leg. x, p. 108* and κετησομαι , as from κετάομαι Aristoph. Pac. 77. Π26. 3 ) aor. 2. έκτη v. εζεκτη Hesiod . epy. 98 . Attic άκεκτα Xen. Anah. 1 , 5, 3. third pers. plur. κροσεκταν Aristoph. Ach. 865. Opt. κταίη NIeleag. Ep. 90. conj. κτώ, e. g. κατακτη Lucian. Prom. p. 149* For κτηναι, κτάς the AttlCS use rather κτάσθαι y κτα- μενος from εκτάμην aor. 2. med. although this also is rare, for κτεσθαι , κτόμενο^ . There was also a form κεταμαι , but not in Attic. In Homer and iEschylus, e. g. 8. c. Th. 84. is found κοτάο - q Moeris p. 311. ubi v. Piers. Thom. M. p. 473. Graev. ad Luc. Solcec. T. ix, p. 485. r Thom. M. p. 473. Graev. 1. c. Porson. ad Eurip. Med. in. * Thom. M. p. 506'. Moeris p. 20 6. Fisch. hi, a. p. 111. 152. The form εκτάμην Brunck. ad Soph. Aj. 282. thinks not to be Attic. Cf, ad Aj. 6’93. Contra Porson 1. c. List of Defective Verbs . 357 μαι 9 II. (Ϊ, 463. (hence πεπότηται Od. X', 221. 7Γ67Γ οτηαται It. β' 9 90 . π€ττοτημένος Apoll. Rh. ii, 1043.) with the Ionic flexion ποτεομαι Od. ω , 7· and 7 τωτάομαι It. μ, 287. Tre- τάομαι occurs only in later writers, e. g. Aristot. Me- taph. hi. hence επετάσθην Anacr. 40, 6. Aristot. H. An. ix, 40. This appears to have been confounded with the following 1 πετάννυμι , 7 τετάω. 7 τετάνννμι, r I spread’, from ητετάω, appears to have arisen from πετομαι , by which was expressed the spread¬ ing of the wings in flying, and afterwards merely that of spreading. Fut. πετάσω , Attic 7Γ€τώ. aor. 1. επετασα, perf. ρ. πεπετασμαι Herod, i, 62. for which is generally Used Only πεπταμαι. aor. ρ. επετάσθην II. φ r , 538. Od. φ ', 50. Eurip. Cycl. 495. Another form is πιτνάω Hesiod, epy. 510. and πίτνημι. Imp. πιτνα II φ' , 7· πιτνάς Od. X', 391. πη^γνυμι, - νύω, c I fasten’, from ΠΗΓΩ fut. πήξω. 246. aor. l. έπηξα, perf ρ. πεπη^μαι Arrian. Exped. At. p. 363. aor. l. ρ. επηχθην. aor. 2. ρ. επά^ην perf. 2. πεπη^γα intransitive 1 . πίλνημι, πιλνάω. Ρ. πίΧναμαι , ‘I approach’, from « ΠΕΛΑΩ, πελάζω. fut. πελάσω, aor. επελασα. perf ρ. πεπλημαι Od. μ , 108. The aor. is formed as from a verb in μι, πλημι. πληντο It. ξ , 468. 438, fyc. u In the aor. 1 . P. the Attics use the form by syncope επλάσθην and επλάθην* * . ' πίμπ\ημι> 'I fill’, from ΠΛΑΩ, πληθω, (the latter of which, however, in the pres, signifies only f to be full’) in the pres, follows ίστημι. πιμπλασι It. φ , 23. Herod. Ruhnk. Ep. Crit. p. 91. * Fisch, hi, a. p. 153. * Pors, ad Eurip. Hec. 884. u 358 List of Defective Verbs. \ ii, 40. Infin. ττιμπΧάναι. ΠΛΗΜΙ, ΠΛΗΜΑΙ appears to have been another form, whence ei τλητο, e? τληντο, or πλητο , 7 τληντο occurs in' Homer and Hesiod, in Ari- stoph. also, Aristoph. Vesp. 911 . as an imperf. not as an aorist; but this may be also the plusquam perf. for εττεττλητο^ as Hesiod. Sc. Hevc . 146. τον και oSovtwv μεν 7 τλητο στόμα , Aristop/l. Vcsp. 1304. ως evei τλητο τ γο\- \ών κάλαθων, Ενηλατο , f was full ", not f filled" himself. It stands as an imperf. Hesiod. Theog. 688 . and in most places. From the pres. 7 τλημαι comes the imperf. ττλησο Avist. V °sp 603. έμττλησο, \eywv. Opt. πλίρμην, e. g. Anst. Lys. 23 5. υ$ατος εμπλ^Ο' η κύλιξ. Acham . 236 . ουκ αν εμττλρμην (as Brunck reads after Dawes . Misc. Crit. p. 329 sq.; others read ττλείμην, ττλβΓο, as βλείμηι >, βλεΊο, but which Brunck reads also βλγο ; and this would come from ΠΛΕΩ, to which ττληθω is related, as νηθω to νεω.) Part, εμττλημννος Aristoph. Equ. 931. Vesp. 422. The rest of the tenses come from ΠΛΑΩ, ΠΑΕΩ or ττληθω. fut. ττλησω. perf. ττεττληκα Plat . Gorg. p. 155. perf p. ττεπλησμαι. aor. ί. ρ. 67 τλησθην. In the plusquam perf. Apoll. Rh. Ill, 271. εττεττληθει. ' ' Obs. 1. If in composition μ immediately precedes ττίμ- ττλημι, μ is omitted before 7 τλ, εμττίττλημι, but ενεττίμττλασαν. Obs. 2. Other forms also occur, as ττιττλεω Her. vn, 39. and τπ'ττλω Hesiod. Sc. Herr. 291. but doubtful. See the note or Heinrich, p. 196. 7 τίμττρημ., ‘ I burn’, transitive (in later writers also 7Γ ιμπράω) follows ϊστημι, third pers. plur. πιμπρασι. inf. τημπράναι, derived from ΠΡΕΩ (hence έ'πρεσβ Hesiod. Theog. 856.) or -n -ρήθω. Hence fut. πρησω. aor. 1 . εττρησα. perf. 1 . ττίπρηκα Alciphr. 1, 32. perf. p. ττΐττρη- σμαι Arist. Lysistr. 322. aor. ρ. ίττρήσθην. List of Defective Verbs. 359 . Obs. In composition, as in πίμπΧημι, the second μ is omitted after μ, εμπίπρημι, but ενεπίμπρασαν* · πίνω, 4 1 drink*, from ΠΙΩ. Of this the following* 247 tenses are in use : l) the pres. p. πίομαι with l long, in the sense of the future, 4 1 am about to drink’; instead of this, the moderns used the form πιονμαι , which, though censured, occurs in Xenoph. Symp. 4, 7. §· 180*. 2) the aorist, 2. A. επ ιον. For the imperat. 7 vie ( Od.c\ . 347. Menand. ap. Athen. x, p. 446. E. Lucian. D. M. xiii, 6.) the Attics use more commonly a form in — μι, ττιθι Λ · A fut. π ίσομαι is adduced from Antiphanes by Eustathius ad II. χ', p. 1253, 57. and the verbal πιστός seems to refer to an old perf. p. πεπισμαι. The rest of the tenses in use are formed from ΠΟΩ. Perf. πεπωκα. F*erJ. p. πεπομαι. Inf. πεπόσθαι Pheogn. 469. Br. aor. p. επόθην. —Another derivative from πιω is πιπίσκω, 4 1 water’, fut. πίσω Pind. Isthm. 6, 108. _ / πίσαιο Nicand. Ther. 573. πιπράσκω , 4 1 sell·, derived from περάω, properly 4 to transport, to carry any where for sale’. Hence fut . πε¬ ράσω with a short. Attic περώ (in the sense of f to pass over’, has περάσω with a long. Ion. περησω.) Aor. 1. επερασα. In the rest of the tenses e is omitted by syn¬ cope. Perf a. πεπρακα. Perf. p. πεπραμαι. Inf. πεπρα- σθαι. Ion. πεπρησθαι. ΑθΓ. p. επράθην. Ion. επρηθην* The Attics use the form πεπράσομαι, as a fut. pass, not πραθη- σομαι b . y But see Brunck. ad Arist. Lys. 311. z Fisch. hi, a. p. 156. a Moeris p. 322. Thom. M. p. 265. Athen. χ,^ p. 446. A. b Moeris p. 294. 360 - List oj Defective Verbs . πίπτω, See πετώ, π\άζω. See §. 174. C. 7τλί:'ω in the Poets has &π nor. 67 τ\ωρ, e. επεπ\ωμεν } εξεπΧ. Apoll, Rh. ii, 152. 645. whence επιπΧως occurs as part. II. ζ' } 2gi. from the Ionic form πΧωω for πλέω, ‘ I navigate, sail’. ( πεπΧωκότα Eurip. Hel . 540. should be πεπΧενκότα ). πτησσω, ‘ I crouch', derived from πετώ, hence perf. πεπτηκα , partic. πεπτηως, c astonished'. In the aor. 2. a form in — μι occurs, καταπτητην in Homer 11. 0 , 136. In the rest of the tenses it is regular, πτηζω, επτηζα, επτη-χα. ττννθάνομαι, ‘ I learn by enquiry’, derived from ττεύθο- fiat Od. y, 87. Mschyl. Ag. 629. 997. fut. πενσομαι. perf. πεπυσμαι. aor . 2. επυθόμην. P. 248. epSu), and ΕΡΓΩ, different forms of the same word. According to the Grammarians ρέζω is the radical word. This, in Doric pronunciation, is f ew ( Hesych, peSei, πράττει, θύει) or peSSto, and transposing 1 0 and e, ep$a>, or hpSw. ρβζω and epcw or epSio both occur in the pres, and imperf. fut. ρεξω, and by transposition ερξω ' Od. e, 360. aor. l. ερεξα. imp. ρεξον. inf. ρεξαι and ίρξαι Od. ψ, 312. ξ, 411. ερξον II. S’, 37, #C. ερξαιμι,ερξιο, ip%u, ίρξα S JEschyl. Pers. 234. 783. Prom ρέζω comes partic. aor. p. ρεχθεί? II. 250. p, 32. The fut. ερξω gave rise to a new theme ipyw. Hence perf. p. εργμαι, elpypm, Sepy/mi, yet remaining in y έφυραι eep'^evai II. e, 89. which Otherwise signified τετυγμενος, ποιητός*. ? See my Animadv. ad h. Homer, p. 129. I 361 List of Defective Verbs. At least the noun epy μα refers to a perf. ipy/wi, Henee perf. 2. A. eopya d . pew, ‘1 flow \fut. ρευσομαι §. 176. C. aor. 1. ερρευσα, neither of them common in Attic. As from ακούσω by omit¬ ting σ, and making the penultima short, άκ-ηκοα is derived, in like manner a form 'ΡΥΩ appears to be made use of, which bears the same relation to ρβυσω as ΆΚΟΩ to ακούσω , and from this the aor . 2 . p. βρρυην Thuc. ii, 5. Isocr. enc. Hel. p. 217. D. Fut , ρυησομαι seem to have been formed. This aor. and fut. are more common than the for* \ . mer. From this aorist, and a derivative form /Wax, to which it refers, came the perf. βρρυηκα. Plat . Rep . vi, p. 72 . Isocr. de Pace p . 159. D. ’ΡΕΩ, f I say’. See enrelv. ρ^νυμι, fayvw, ‘I break, rend’, transitive, from *ΡΗΓΩ. ρησσω filt. ρηξω. aor. 1. βρρηξα, βρρηξάμην. aor. 2. p. eppayriv . fut. payfaofxat.. perf. 2 . epfaya §. 189· 3. intransitive. Kindred forms are ράσσω and ρωσσω. ρωννυμι , f I strengthen’, from ρόω or ρωω, ρωομαι (in Homer, f to strain, to be active’, e. g. II. X', 50. σ', 411. 417. as Thucyd. II, 8. ίρρωτο nras ξννβπιΧαββΊν) fut. ρωσω. aor. 1 . a. ίρρωσα. perf. p. ίρρωμαι. imp. ίρρωσο , vale , f farewell’, infin. βρρώσθαι . aor. p. βρρωσθην. Σ. 'Σαόω (whence σαοϊ Callim. in Del. 22. imperat. σάου 249 d Eustath. ad II. £', p. 984, 1. Hemsterh. in Lennep. Etymol. p. 846. According to Hermann de Emend. Gr. Gr. p. 293. there are two radical forms ephto and epyw. From the first came e/)8£«, and by transpo¬ sition pe'fai. epe^a. 362 List of Defective Verbs. Anal. T. 11 , p. 41. iv. See Hesych. v, Σαοϊ. Suid. v. σάου), and the lengthened form ΣΑΩΖΩ. σώζω. There was also a verb declined in —MI. The imperative σαω is in Od. p, 595. imperf. or aor. σάω II. ττ, 363. φ, 2J8. Another form was σόω. σόεκ occurs in He- s J/ck. σοί /s· II. i , 677 . Also σάω in an epigram in Diog. Laert. Ill, 45. τον μεν, 'tva φνχρν, τον c, Ίνα σώμα σάοι , where, however, Olympiodorus in Vit. Platon, reads σόοι. Ιβένυυμι, ‘ I extinguish’, from ΣΒΕΩ fut. σβόσω. aor. 1. εσβεσα. perf p. εσβεσμαί. aor. p. ίσβόσθην. For the perf. a. and the aor. 2. a form ΣΒΗΜΙ was made use of, εσβηκα and εσβην, inf. σβηναι, both in an intran- sitive SGnSG^ 3.S €στηκα } (ττηναι 6 . , σί ™’’ I shake, agitate, drive’, from σεω, whence also σείω. Instead of this there were also the following forms, σοω, c/m,f σόω. Aor. ίσευα, εσευάμην §. 182. note. Perf. p. εσσνμαι, εσσόμην, Ισσυο II. π', 585. aor. 1. ρ. όσόθην from ΣΥΩ. Hence also an aor. 2. εσύην, ίσσόην, in the Laconic dialect §. 26. εσσουαν, hence M IvSapos άττεσσουα Xenoph. isi Gr. I. 1 , 23*. From σόω comes the Attic σοόσθε VLsch. Suppl. 843. 849. Sept. c. Th. 31. Aristoph. Vesp. 456. σοόσθω Soph. Aj. 1414. σοόται Msch. Choeph. 639 σοννται Pers. 25 h . Hence also the Homeric λαοσσό*. σκεόάννυμι, I dissipate’, from σκεόάω fut. σκείάσω Attic σκεοώ. aor. a. WU perf. ρ. ί σ Ασ μαι . aor. p. 7^· Another form » «αλ*, Hesiod. Th. 875. οκ'ώναμαι II. λ', 308. Thuc. vi, 98 as * Ruhnk. ad Tim. Lex. PI. p . 4 0 . f Ruhnk. Ep. Cr. n, p . 206. g Herm. de em. Gr. Gr. p . 294 . h Valck. ad Theocr. Adon. p. 265 . ^ A * 00 , σονσις, arouade, σουται. • . f ■ · ; ✓ Hesych. T. 11, p. 1237 sq. v. \ List of Defective Verbs. 363 7 Γ€τάω^ 7 τίτνημι, ττ εΧαω, 7 τίΧνημι. Again κε$αω, whence κε^όωνται Apoll. Rh . IV, 500. κεδαιω, ομαι Apoll. Rh. II, 626. and κίδι/ημι. σκεΧΧω , * I dry up’, transitive, κατεσκεΧΧοντο 2Esch. Prom. 480. fut. σκεΧώ, σκεΧουμαι, σκεΧουνται in Hesych. There seems to have been another form ΣΚΗΑΩ, of which the future was σκάΧω, or σκαΧησω (as from μάθω, μαθησω). From σκαΧω comes the aor. 1 . εσκηΧα. conj. σκηΧη II. Ψ', 191. opt. σκηΧειεν, and infill. σκηΧαι in Hesych. From σκαΧησω the perf. εσκΧηκα (for εσκαΧηκα) part. εσκΧηωτε 9 Apoll. Rh. 11 , 53. with an intransitive signification. After the analogy of εστηκα, εστην there was also an aor. 2. formed as if from a verb in — μι, εσκΧην, άπεσκΧη, opt. άττοσκΧαίην (like σταίην) in Hesych. Infin. άττοσκΧηναι, all with an intransitive signification * 1 . σμηχω, 'to wipe*, has in the fut. aor. a. σμησω , έσμησα , σμησαι, from the radical word σμάω. Ion. σμεω k . στορεννυμι , στόρνυμι from ΣΤΟΡΕΩ, and στρωννυμι from ΣΤΡΟΩ §. 215, 2. has fut. στορεσω. aor. 1. εστο- ρεσα and έστρωσα, perf. p. εστρωμαι , iEol. εστόρημαι 1 . aor. p. εστορεσθην Hippocr. T. I, p. 34. T. ΤΑΛΑΩ, (hence ταΧάσσγς II. v , 829- o', 164. ταΧασι- 250. φρων, ταΧαύρινος ) commonly ΤΑΑΩ, ί I bear, dare . Fut. i H. Steph. Thes. T. in, p. 804. 814 sqq. Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. 1 . p. 539 . Piers, ad Moerid. p. 49 sq. k Thom. M. p. 802. Moeris p.355. Phryn. p. 108. Valck. ad Herod, p. 272, 58. 603, 95. Ruhnk. ad Tim. p. 222. considers the > 608.) Imperat. τλήθι. Opt. τλαίην. Conj. τλώ ( Eurip. Ale. 276 .) Infin. τΧήναι. Part. rXds. Homer lias the imper. τέτΧαθι 11. 586. τετΧάτω Od. w, 275. Opt. τετΧαιη if 11. i , 373. Infin. τετΧάμει/αι Od. V , 307. or τετΧαμεν (τετΧάναι) Od. y, 209- ζ, 190. from τετΧα- με» by syncope for τετΧηκαμε v, as Ζσταμε v, εσταθι, τε- θναθι, from τεθναμεν. ΤΑΩ, the radical word from retVw, (properly e to stretch out the hand’, in order to take hold of any thing). Imper. τη 11. ξ, 219 . Od. ε', 346 . θ', 477 . ('take’). From this appears to be derived Τ.ΑΖΩ, perf. 2 . rlraya, and thence a new theme τετάyω II. d, 591 . o', 23 . Also τέ- τακα, τίταμαι under τε /Vo) are derived from raw. See §. 183 , 2 ". ΤΕΚΩ. See τίκτω. ΓΕΥΧΩ. See τυγχάνω. \ 1 τίκτω, ' I bring forth’, from ΤΕΚΩ fut. τέξω Eurip. Troad. 742. Mscli. Prom. 850. 868. and more commonly τεξομαι, aor. 2. ετεκον, perf. τέτοκα. τιτράω, τίτρημι, f I bore’. Attic τετραίνω. ( fut. τε- τρανέει* Herod. Ill, 12. aor. 1. ’ετίτρηνα, ’ετετρηνάμην. aor. p. τετρανθεΊσα Lycophr. 781.) from ΤΡΑΩ or ΤΡΕΩ (from τορεω §. 215, 5.) aor. 1. ετρησα. perf. p. τέτρημαι. Related to this is τιτρώσκω, ζ I Wound*, from τρώω, τρώει Od. φ', 293 . and in Hesych. Thus also τρώεσθαι (τορεω) fut. τρώσω. aor. a. ετρωσα. perf. P . τετρωμαι. aor. p. ετρώθην. The Herm. de em, Gr. Gr. p. 295 . n ΝΙ» j fro* 365 , List of Defective Verbs* I radical word appears to be τείρω, whence τετορα, Perf. 2 . τορεω (in Homer, as άντιτορησας), and by syncope τρεω, (hence τιτράω, τρίβω,) τρόω, τρωω, ( τιτρώσκω ,) τρύω> (τρύχω.) , ΤΛΑΩ, ΤΛΗΜΙ. See ταλάω. τμη^ω Apoll. Rh. ιν, 707. Ι1· ν, 390. formed from τέμνω, τετμηκα. Hence in Homer διετμα Γγεν, i. e. —τ μάση¬ σαν, διετμαγον act. Od. η, 276. intrans. Apoll. Rh. u, 298. ετμηξεν Apoll. Rh. II, 481. τμηξας II. λ' , 146. an ro- τμιρ^εντες Apoll. Rh. IV } 1052. τρέχω, f I run fut. θρεζω. aor. a. εθρεξα, rare 0 . It more commonly takes it's tenses from ΔΡΕΜΩ, fut. Spa- μουμαι %. 188. 2. (βραμεονται Herod. VIII, 102.) aor. 2. εδραμον. perf. a* Ιεΰράμηκα (§. 188. 4.) perf. p. ΰεδράμημαι Xen. (Ec. 15, 1 . perf. 2. SeSpo^ia. τυγχάνω, c I obtain, I am any where’, from ΤΕΥΧΩ, ΤΥΧΩ, fut. τευξομαι, aor. a. ετύχησα from a form of the fut. τυχησω, as μαθησω from μηθω, thus also perf. (I. τε - τυχηκα Pldt . Protdg. p. 149. Xen. Symp. i, 4. Also τετενχα ( I am , Herod, hi, 14. Pldt. R*ep. vii, p* 142. especially amongst the Dorians. See Euryph. dp Gdle p. 605 p . dor. 2. ετυχον. Obs . In the sense ‘ to be, to find one’s self’, only τυγχάνω, eTvy χάνον, ετυχον are used; the rest of the tenses and ετυχον , mostly only in the sense f to attain’. Another form is τιτύσκομαι , f to aim at any thing’. Ίευχω, ‘ I make ready, complete’, is different in sig¬ nification though from the same root; it is conjugated regularly : τεύξω, ετευξα. Perf τετευχα (τετευχως for TCTvy μένος Od. μ', 423. hence a new theme τετεύχω II. v , 251 ° Piers, ad Moer. p. 187. p Thom. M. p. 842. Phryn. p. 174. 366 List of Defective Verbs. 346.) perf. p. τέτινγμαι §. 185. 3. aor. p. έτόχθην. The derivatives from this are τεύχος, ' the weapon’, τενχέω, ‘ to arm’, whence τετευχί,σθαι Od. f, 104. τ ,τόσκομα, II. ν', 23. and r ετόκομαι 11. a',' 467. Od. μ, 283. φ', 428. o', 77. t Ί i Y. * ‘ / Φ 252. νττισχνβομαι, c I promise’, from υπισχομαι (Herod . VII, 104.) υττεχομαι ; follows €χω. flit, υποσχησομαι, perf. V7rc~ σχημαι. aor. 1. υττβσχεθην. Impel’, υττοσχεθητι Plato PJltfdr. p. 297. aor. 2. νττεσχόμην, l Φ. * ΦΑΓΩ or ΦΗΓΩ, e l eat’, only in the fut. (in the mo¬ dern writers alone) φά 7 ομαι §. 180. and in the aor. 2. tyayor. The rest of the tenses are formed from ίσθίω and ecco (in Homer). See έσθίω. ΦΑΩ, the radical word of φημί, φάσκω (only in the pies, and imperf.) of φαίνω, τιφάσκω, m φανσκω, and in the sense r to kill’, of πέφαται II. o', 140. p , 689 . tv, 20 . 27 . Od. χ, 54 . (to be distinguished from ττεφαται from ΦΑΩ, φημί, Apoll. Rh. II, 500.) ιτέφανται II. e', 531. o', 563. (to be distinguished from πέφανται third pers. sing! perf. p. from φαίνω II. β', 122 . if, 207 . §. 184. Obs.) Inf. πεφασθαι II. ω, 254. fut. ττεφήσομαι II. ν’, 829. o', 140. {ιτεφησεται II. p, 155. is from ΦΑΩ. φαίνω) for ττεφάσο- μαι from 7 Γβφαμαι, πβφασαι. From ΦΑΩ comes ΦΕΝΩ, as from ΤΑΩ, ΤΕΝΩ, τείνω, from 7 άω, ΓΕΝΩ, 7 είνομαΐ, hence φονος and πέφνω (πε-φενω) in the pres, and im¬ perf. ,3 · φέρω, ‘ I bear’, only in the pres, and imperf.; but the verbal φερτό s refers to several tenses either actually m use, or invented according to analogy, fut. φέρσω ( Eustalh. ad Od. k, p. 1665, 14.) perf. ιτέφερμαι, ιτέφερ- 367 List of Defective Verbs. \ rai, the derivative φορεω, φρεω to the perf. 2. πεφορα. The tenses wanting in φέρω are supplied by derivatives from ΟΙΩ, ΕΝΕΚΩ and ΕΝΕΓΚΏ. Ion ενείκω , fut . όίσω, οίσομαι. Hence a new theme οίσω, imper. οϊσε in Homer and the Attic writers' 1 . From οίω fut . p. οισθησομαι (as from ώίσθην , ωσθην) a verbal οιστός, as άνωίστος Herod. vij 66. (as from ωίσμαι, ωίσται) and in the aor. 1. a. inf. άνοισαι, not ανωσαι, Herod. I, 157· CIOV. 1. a. r)\^yKa and ηνεγκον, both Attic, though the remaining moods are chiefly derived from ’fay kov. imper. fay^. inf. ^y^iv, although εν^καιμι Isocr. Panath. p . 26 1 . B . Xen . Symp. 2, 3. partic. εν^κας Xen. Mem. S. i, 2, 53. n, 2, 5. also occur. The Ionians and Dorians instead of this use ηνεικα from ενεκω r or ΕΝΕΙΚΩ. Perf. a. ενηνοχα. Perf. p. εvηvεyμaι. Ion. ενηνε^μαι Herod. II, 12. IX, 41. jdor. p. ηνε^θην. Ion. ηνεί'χθην Herod. I, 66. 84. 116 . 173, 8$C. fut. p. ενε'χθησομαι and οισθησομαι* . The derivative φορεω is regularly conjugated, and has again a derivative φόρημί ; hence φορημεναι II. o, 310.· and φορηναι Ιί. β ', 107. φρεω the derivative of φορεω , is used only in com¬ position, εκφρεΊ v, c to bring out*, εισφρεϊν, ‘ to bring in’, διαφρεΊ v, c to bring through’ 4 . In the imperat. it has this form in — μι , εϊσφρες. The old Grammarians derive it from προ-ω, as φροίμιον, φρούδος, from 7 τροοίμιον, πρόοδος, ' §. 35. Obs. 2. φθάνω, ‘ I come before" from φθάω fut. φθάσω. aor. l. εφθασα, perf. a. εφθακα, both with a short. Hence Moeris p. 285. r Gregor, p. 226 . et Koen. s Fisch. hi, a. p. 185. t Wolf, ad Demosth. Lept. p. 276. Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. C. 2 77. 368 List of Defective Verbs. ΦΘΗΜΙ, fut. φθήσομαι, and chiefly in Attic aor. 2. ίφθην, optat. φθαιην, conj. φθώ, inf. φθηναι, part, φθάς, aor. 2. Tiled· p. φθάμένος 11 · * φθίω II. ξ', 87. v, 173. and φθίνω, the former transitive, Ί destroy’, the latter intransitive, I sink, fall’. This takes it’s tenses from the middle voice of φθίω, fut. φθίσομα ,, perf ίφθ ιμαι . third pers. pi, εφθινται sEsch. Pers. 923. Imperat. φθίσθω 11 . θ’, 420. Inf. φθίσθαι Od. ξ', 117 . Part, φθίμενος for έφθιμένος. Plusq. έφθίμην 11. a’, 2όΐ. Either this plusq. peif. itself, or a derivative of φθίμι has also the sense of the aorist Od. c, 363 . o', 268. Eurip. Ale. 414. In the same manner the opt. φθίμην Od. k, 51. is either an aor. or perf. Another form of this optat. is φθείμην, φθεΐτο Od. X', 329. from ΦΘΕΩ, whence Hesych. T. n, p. 1 , 503 . has’ rendered φθεί, θνήσκει, and φθείης, φθαρείης , as from ΦΘΗΜΙ and φθήσονται II. ψ, 444 . he explains by διαφθα* ρήσονται. Hence also φθείρω and φθόη. Other forms of φθίω , φθίνω are φθίσθω Od. ε, 110 , 133. φθινέω , κατεφθινηκότες Plut. Cic. 14. φθινύθω. φνζω, ' I flee, make to flee’, related to [<£υ'γω] φεέχν [fut. φν 7εσ®]. Hence φΰζα, ' flight’. Its second per¬ fect is formed directly from the present, (see §. 189 . Obs. 6 .) πεφνζότες II. φ', 6 , 528. 532. χ, 1. An infin. of the aor. 1 . φύξαι occurs in Hesychius. Hence φΰξμ, 'flight’. From φνζω also seems to come ττεφνχ μένος (φνξω, ττέφνχα 7 τέφυ·γμαι) with a transitive signification, μοίραν S’ o£ τινά φημι ττεφνχμένον έμμέναι άντρων. II. ζ, 488. (See Animadv. ad H. Horn. p. 321.) Two other κ Thom, M. p. 895 . Moeris p. 396. u List of Defective Verbs. 369 forms are φυζάω , whence φυζηθεντες Nicand. Ther. 825. and φυζημι, whence φυζάναι in Hesychius. φύω, c I bring forth’, has in the perf. πεφνκα (also πεφυα §. 183. 7·) and aor. 2. εφυν, inf φΰναι, part, φύς, in an intransitive sense, r being produced, qualified by nature’, from ΦΥΜΙ. εφύην, φυηναι, φυείς are later Hellenic forms. Yet a conjunctive of this form in the third person φυγ i^s in Plato Rep . v, p. 53. Vi, p. 90. 94. Epist. vii, p . 134. Theocr. xv, 94. φυωσι Plat. Rep. X, p. 287. X. Χαίρω, c I rejoice’, fut. in Attic χαιρησω §. 178, 3. and 254. χαρησομαι in the other dialects x . From the form χαρησω comes the perf. κεχάρηκα, part, κεχαρηως, in Homer, perf. p. κεχάρημαι, also κεχαρμαι , ( χαίρω, χαρώ, κεχαρκα), κεχαρμενος Eurip. Or. 1120 . aor. 2. εχάρηυ. From the aor, 2. comes a new form κεχαρόμην II. π, 600. κεχαρησω II. o', 98. An aor. l. mid. also is found εχηράμην, χηρατο II . ξ', 270. Apoll. Rh. iv, 55. 1628. Epigr. Leonid. Tar. 65. {Anal. Br. T. i, p. 237.) and εχαίρησ a Pint. Lucull. 25. Arrian. Exp. Alex, v, p. 352. χανΰάνω, e I receive, or hold’, from ΧΗΔΩ from ΧΑΩ, ΧΑΖΩ. See κάζω. aor. 2. εχαδον. perf κεχαν$α. fut. χείσο- μαι Od. σ', 17. for χησομαι , as some explain ί τείσομαι to be put for πησομαι, Etymol. M. p. 668. 43. Others derive it from χβίω, as Athen. xi, p. 477. 2). Between χη§ω and χανΰάνω there seems to have been an intermediate form χάνΰω (like λάμβω between ληβω and λαμβάνω, §. 218. 3.) from which came the second perf. κεχανΰα 189· Obs. 6. χείσομαι is either put for χησομαι , or it is from a form χεν^ω, which has the same relation to χη^ω as πενθώ has to πηθω. x Thom. M. p. 910. Moeris p. 403. Fisch. hi, a. p. 196. VOL. I. B B ^ List of Defective Verbs. ΓΓ fUL Xe "™ ^ m · c · aor - U h™ and * χ ^ ^ y ■ mw. t, «wi · i. evei /α ana €vea ft. 182. Obs 1 tiPT*? n ' r ^ Λ. v US. 1. per/, a. κΐχυκα §. 183, 2. per/; n κβχυμαι, aor. pass. Ιχόθην. J P ranf’’’-! 1 ° P ° rtet ’ im P erS · opt. xpe’rf, ZT XP ? ’ ' nf - ,*TO‘ ( in Euripides Hec. 264. Here. f. 328. XP>IV , analogous to the infin. of aV0 wv , drrovpi Demosth. p. 46, io. 52 io ) i mnpt .f ■ - A freonontlv - b ,e ’, mper J‘ e XP’> , ’> and more the Au^A- 7;} XP ” ™ Χρη) parL XP * 1 ' fr om the Att,c dialect for χΡ ά ον f 70 . (from ^ ά £ — ωσα, — wv.) fut. χρ^,. ™ XP ’ ~ Xpe r as h'declin. occurs in Eurip. Here. f. 21. Are 01 / X pewv aera. Compare Hippol. 1256. X T V ™ fU : ΧΡ ω γ ω ’ 1 COlOUr ’/ fr0m Χ/>όω, χρ^, ■ Alexis ap. Athen. hi, p. 124 . a. fut. χρ <ί σω . aor . a. οχρωσα. per/, p. κλώσμα,. ’ χώνοομι, χα,ηύω, ‘I heap up', a common form for the Attic yow, yovv c . Ωθεν, I push·, f rom ΩΘΩ Jut more . Ζ ησω f oph \ J ‘ 1265 · Aristo P h - Eccl. 300. aor. i. «. “ μ Γ™' Ρ< ^' a - * ma PluU T · T "« />· 156. erf. TO /»· «»«'· aor. p. ΙΑσθην. fut. p. ώσθήσομαΑ. Concerning the augment see §. i6o. Ly J m WeS MiSC ’ Cr · P · 324 ' BrUn ° k · ad (Ed ‘ T · 555 ' 791. ad Arist. * ^ ru nck. ad Arist. Lys. 133. * Pors. et Herm. ad Eur. 1 . c. * Eisch. hi, a. p. 199 . I ρ ίθ6 ™ ρ · 4Π · Thom · Μ · Ρ· 916·. Fisch. in, a . p . 200 . ; Dsch. m, a. p. 201 ·. Pors. ad Eurip. Med. 336 . 371 *■ Of the Particles. • * The Particles are the Adverbs, Conjunctions, Pre- 255. positions, and Interjections. As the conjunctions and prepositions will occur again in the Syntax, they will be omitted here, and the adverbs only considered. . / The Adverbs are properly epithets of verbs, which define more accu¬ rately the meaning of the verbs with respect to certain determinate relations; but they are also joined to adjec¬ tives and to other adverbs. a I. The greater number of those which express the kind and manner in which a verb is to be understood, have a) the termination — ως, and are formed from adjec¬ tives of the second declension (oy), and participles, by changing —oy into —toy, or from the genitive case, of adjectives of the third declension, by the same change, (e. g. άληθης, άληθεος, άληθευχ, COUtr. αληθώς. η$νς, η δέος } ηδεως. γαρίεις, χορίεντος, χα ριεντως. ευδαίμων, ενδαί- μονος, ενδαιμόνως*). b) Others which are derived from substantives or verbs, have the termination — δην , which is annexed immediately to the chief syllable of the perf. of the verb, instead of the termination —rat; but the lene preceding is changed before the middle δ (§. 13.) into the middle consonant corresponding to it. §. 34. Thus yeypairray ypaβδηv. κεκρυττται , κρνβδην. 'ττετιλεκται, Ίτλε'γδην. είλη - Trrat, συλλήβδην. εΊρηται , — ρηδην , διαρρήδην, βεβληται. * Fisch. ι, ρ. 303. ΒΒ 2 0 372 Of the Particles. Adverbs. άμβΧηδην, τταραβΧηδην . εσταται (from ίστημι), — στάνην, σύστασην, ορθοστάτην. \_βεβαται from βαίνω §. 225.]] βάδην· In άνεδην from άνίημι, άν-εΓιται, the same change of the diphthong into the short vowel takes place, which before took place in άν-εθην. Adverbs derived from substantives change the termination of these substantives into — άδην· λόγ- 09 , Xoy -άδην, καταλογάδην, σττορ-ός, σπορ-άδην. αμ~ βολ-η, άμβο\-άδην . Some have instead of — άδην the termination - ίνδην, e. g. άριστίνδην, 7τΧοντίνδην ί . A similar class of adverbs ends in — ίνδα , and signify kinds of games, as δστρακίνδα, φαινίνδα , διεΧκυστίνδα & . c) Some, derived from substantives, change the ter¬ minations α, η , 09 , ον of the nominative, or (third deck) genitive into — ηδόν, more rarely — αδόν, e. g. σττεΐρα, σττειρηδόν. ά*γ€\η> α Γ γ€\ηδον. 7 rXivOos, ττΧινθηδον. τετρά - ττοδον, τετραττοδηδόν. κύων 3 κυνο$ 3 κννηδον. They express a comparison, and correspond with the Latin adverbs in — atim, e. g. ά'γεΧηδόν , gregatim , f in flocks’, σωρηδόν , catervatirriy f in heaps’, βοτρυδό v, ‘ in clusters’ 11 . d) Some adverbs, derived and compounded from substantives and verbs, have the termination — εί or i and — τί . As ττανδημεί. αύτονυχεί. αύτοετεί . αμαχητί and άμαχεί. άδακρυτί. άστενακτί. ^ρη^γορτί. εθεΧοντί \ (it) e) The adverbs in — στί or — ιστί, which mostly indicate a peculiarity of a nation, are similar, e. g. Ελ- Χηνιστί , f after the manner of the Greeks’, f Ρωμάίστί, f Fisch. i, p. 305 sq. s Sc weigh, ad Athen. i, p. 130. 249- h Fisch. i, p. 297 sq. i Valck. ad Theocr. x. Id. p. 228. Brunck. ad Arist. Eccl. 1020. Fisch. p. 299 . 373 Of the Particles. Adverbs. * after the manner of the Romans.’ Thus also a ν^ριστί, s after the manner of men’, βοϊστί , τβτραττο^ιστΡ . f) The adverbs, which are formed from prepositions, have the termination ω, as βζω, άνω, κάτω, έίσω from βζ, άνά, κατά , e*?. Some other adverbs also have the same termination, as άφνω, ‘ suddenly’, ούτω , ‘thus’, before a VOWel άφνως Apollon. Rh. IV, 580, and ούτως. The other adverbs of this class must be learnt by 257 practice. 2. Adverbs of place, as ki /ταυθα, ‘ here’, e/cet, ‘ there’, kyyvs, ‘near’, ττόρρω , ‘far’, Sevpo, ‘hither’, άνω , ‘above’, κάτω, ‘below’, efa), ‘without’, βσω, ‘within’. In these a three-fold relation obtains, according as they refer to a state of rest in a place, a motion to a place, or a removal from a place, in answer to the question : where? whither? whence? For each of these relations there is a parti¬ cular termination in the derivative adverbs : a) Where ? here the terminations θι, σι, χού are annexed. θι, e.g. ay ρόθι, ‘ in the country’, άλλοθι , ‘elsewhere’, ούδαμόθι, ‘nowhere’, άμφοτύρωθι , ‘on both sides'. They are formed from the nomin. and genit. in os, and from the genit. ης, by omitting s. Since nouns with this termination sometimes stand as genitives (e. g. I λιόθι irpo II. θ', 557. ηώθι 7 τ ρό II. λ', 50, fyc.) and, in others the common termination also of the genitive occurs in the same sense, e. g. οθι , poetic : and ου, ττόθι and 7 του, these adverbs must originally have been genitive cases, like the forms in θβν §. 87 . Note. σι chiefly in the name of cities, as Άθηνρσι, (it) θηβγσι. * Fisch. 1 , p. 29S sq. Koen. ad Greg. p. 37 sq. 374 Of the Particles. Adverbs!. 'at Athens, Thebes’. Thus also θνρησι, 'without’, forts. % Probably these are originally datives plur. from the Ionic dialect §. 67 . After, however, that this σι was once considered merely as an adverbial termination, and no longer as a termination of the dative plur.; it was annexed also to other names, preceded by a, as Όλνμ- πιασι, ' at Olympia’ 1 . ΥΥλαταιασι Thuc. IV, 72. θβσπιασι Isocr. Plat. p. 299 . B. Μ ουνυχιασι Thuc. vm, 92 . • » · * * * . / · K. -< yovy e. g. iravTuyovy (also 7 τανταχόθι), ' everywhere*, αλλαχού, ‘elsewhere’, 'in divers places (also as an adverb of time, ‘ sometimes’). 258. Under this head are reckoned also the adverbs in — χη, 7 τανταχη, αλλαχη , ενιαχη, which occur as adverbs of place in Aristoph. Av. 1008. 1020 . Thuc. vn, 43. Eurip. Phoen. 272 . τνανταχη signifies also 'in every way’, άλλαχη, ‘ other¬ wise’, and according to some, 7 τανταχη has always this sense, whilst πανταχοΰ only is the adverb of place” 1 : this distinction, however, is not universally observed, even by those who maintain it. Other adverbs of place answering to the question where? have only the termination — ov , and some ap¬ pear to be actually genitives, as ov 'where’? (also οθι , αυτόν (< αυτόθι ) 'there’. Hence some consider also the adverbs 7 rod (πόθι) as interrogative particles, ' where’ ? and 7 τού, 'anywhere’, οττου , as genitives from obsolete nominatives 7 ro? and otto?, which occur also in the form 7 t> 5 , 7 νη and ΟΤΠ7, as datives of the feminine gender (r). In the same manner also many other adverbs w r ere formed in ov , without our being able to conjecture a nomina- 1 Hemsterb. ad Lucian. T. 1 , p. 338. Schweigh. ad Athen..i, p. 6l. Fisch. in, a. p. 208. rn Brunck. ad Arist. Lys. 1230. Sind. v. πανταχώς. 375 Of the Particles. Adverbs. tive, as νφον, (νφδθι) μηδαμον, ουδαμον, ( ονδαμοθι ) τη\ου (τ^ΧοΟι 0 ). Others have the termination — η, some of which are actually datives of the feminine gender , e. g. rrj, there , η, ‘ where’, as a relative, κείνη, ‘ there , αΚ\γ, ‘ in another place’. Thus also μηδαμη, μηδαμά, and ονδαμη , ά. They serve also to express the kind and manner τηδε, 'therein, therefore’, v, as τ τη, ‘ how’? Obs. The Dorians and iEoiians instead of rj , have ei, e. g. αυτεί, ταντεί, τηνεί, ei, which also appears to have arisen from the old inode of writing the dative of the feminine gender 0 . Another termination is — oi. Of these Τίυθοι is really a dative of ΥΙυθω, as HvOdl ενι II. ί, 405. Thus ΊσθμοΊ, οίκοι, an old mode of writing* (ev) Ίσθμ$, οίκω. According to this analogy the adverbs M eyapoi, αρμοί , * lately’, and the Doric ενδοΊ, εξοϊ, for ένδον, εξω, are formed p . (r) b) Whither ? The termination δε, according to an¬ other pronunciation σε, is generally annexed to the accusative case, without alteration, e. g. οΐκονδε, ττεδίονδε , κλισίηνδε, άλαδε, ' ΕλευσΊναδε, Μαραθώναδε, Μεγάραδε. If ν precedes the δ, instead of σδ is put ζ , as Άθηναζε, βηβάζε, θδραζε, for Άθηνασδε, $c. When this had once obtained as the termination of verbs of place, it was an¬ nexed also to other words, without respect to the form of the accusative, e. g. Όλυμιτίαζε, Μονννχίαζε, θρίινζε, from 0 Χνμ 7 τία, Μ οννυχία, Ορια, εραζε (Doric ερασδε Theocr, νπ, 146.) from ερα, ‘the earth’, χαμάζε. Thus also φυ- ry αδε, for εις φυ^γην, in Homer, οίκαδε for οΐκονδε, ill Homer and the Attics. n Fisch. hi. a. p. 206\ 0 Koen. ad Greg. p. 16Ό. p Koen. ad Greg. p. 16 * 8 . Fisch. m, a. p. 208. 259 , 376 Of the Particles. Adverbs . Adverbs in σε have o or ω before the termination t * f f y νψοσε, τηλοσε, ποΧΧαχόσε, τταντόσε, ετερωσε, εκατερωσε q . Obs. 1. The Dorians instead of — Se used the termination vtS) as οικαδες. Homer also has χαμάδις, as well as χαμαζε*. Obs. 2. Homer puts this —Se twice, as — ονδε δόμονδε II. ττ', 445, fyc. αιδοσδε is a more analogous idiom, as ety αιδος or ei? tfdov, sc. οίκον. In the same manner ημετερόνδε, sc. δόμον, Od. θ', 39. c) Whence? Termination 0ev. ουρανόθεν , Άθηνηθεν, χαμάθεν, c from heaven, from Athens', &c. This form is principally used instead of the prepos. e*, with the geni¬ tive; also where the determinate place is implied, e. g. θεόθεν, Αιόθεν, "from the God, from Jupiter' s . That this termination appears to have been origin- al!y a genitive form, has been observed §. 87. Note. In the Ionic dialect it becomes in the Poets 0e, on account of the metre, e. g. όκτοσθε. 3. With regard to the rest of the adverbs, the fol¬ lowing only require a particular remark : a) ( as , (as an interrogative, relative, and parti¬ cle of time) is to be distinguished from ω?, which, par¬ ticularly in the Poets, occurs in the sense of ούτως, f thus'. The corresponding particle to m is τω?, ‘thus’, which is used only by the Poets. % b) The interrogative adverbs τ rod, πώς, ττοί, irfj, πόθεν, ποτέ, which are used in direct questions, are answered by όπου, 07 τως, οποί, ΟΊΓΎ], όπόθεν, οπότε, which are used as interrogative particles in indirect questions and as relatives, (i. e. as conjunctions). q Fisch. hi, a. p. 212. r Koen. ad Greg. p. 106. Fisch. in, a. p. 213 . 5 Fisch. i, p. 299. hi, a. p. 20 9 sq. 377 Of the Particles. Adverbs . c) The enclictic πως in Homer often omits s before consonants and vowels, e. g. II. γ', 169 . and is most commonly joined with μη, μη πω (‘lest’, ‘sure not", and with the imperative ‘ sure not’, ‘ not yet’) and ου, ουπω< Elsewhere it constitutes the first part in composition, e.g. πωπ ore, ‘ever’, ούπωποτε , ‘never yet’. d) Other particles also are annexed to adverbs, as περ, ώσπερ, 8$C, ουν, οπωσουν, όπονονν, ΟΓ the enclitic δε, τηνικάδε, ενθάδε, ενθενδε. Instead of the termination — αδε is used αντα , analogous to τ-άδε, τ-αΰτα, e. g. τη- νικαυτα, ενθαυτα , Attic εντανθα , and for — ενθε , — ευτεν , as ενθευτεν , Attic εντεύθεν. e) To several demonstrative particles ι paragogicum is annexed, e. g. νυν, νυνί. όντως, ούτωσί, εντεύθεν, εντευ- θενί. Thus also δευρί for δενρο. This l serves to add strength to the signification. The 1 in the Attic ούχί, ναιχί, is different from this. The Degrees of Comparison are used in adverbs, as in adjectives. See §. 132. It is 260 to be observed, however, 1. Of adverbs in — ως, which come from adjectives in — ος, — ης, that instead of a comparative and superlative in — ως, the neuter sing, in the compar. and the neuter plur. in the superl. are used, e. g. σοφώς , σοφωτερον , σοφωτατα , αισχρως, αισγιον, άΐσγιστα , άσφαΧως, ασφαΧε- στερον , άσφάΧεστατα. This is especially the case in those which are derived from adjectives, making — ίων and — ιστός in the comp, and superl. We find, how¬ ever, μειζόνως, πΧειόνως, though instead of the latter πλέον or πλεΤον is more used. In the same manner also are compar. adverbs, which are not derived from ad¬ jectives, e. g. μάλα , μάλλον , μάλιστα, άγχι, άσσον, ay χιστα. 378 Of the Particles. 2· Adverbs in — ω formed from prepositions have, in the compar. and superl. the same termination, e. g. ανω, ανωτερω, ανωτατω. κάτω , κατωτέρω , κατωτάτω. In the same manner the prepositions which are compared in the sense of adverbs, e. g. από, απωτερω. This is imitated by some other adverbs, e. g. e'yyi)?, € r y r yvT€pw J eyy ντατω. ctyyov, ay^orepw. εκάς, εκαστερω , εκαστάτω. ένδον, ενδοτερω, ενδοτάτω\ Yet instead of these we find as frequently eyy υτερον , eyyiov , Σχιστά. άσσον, ay -χιστα. The remaining derivations see §, 126 . 26l. Ohs· The distinction between adverbs and conjunctions is not thoroughly determined, since some Grammarians consider particles as adverbs, which others refer to the conjunction, and vice versa. If, however, that be regarded as the characteristic mark of a part of speech, which is found in most of the words belonging to that class, then the characteristic of an adverb consists in this, that it determines the sense of another word joined with it (a verb, an adjective) more accurately in the circumstance in question, or confines the form of an entire proposition to and for itself,_ with¬ out reference to its relation to other propositions ; and the characteristic of conjunctions in this, that they determine the mutual 1 elation of propositions to each other, or even merely that of one proposition to another. These characteristic marks on the one hand apply to most of the adverbs, generally acknow¬ ledged as such, which all contain absolute definitions of time, place, quality, or form, referring to the word with which, or to the proposition in which they occur; and also to words, as ναι μα, ον μα, νη, δηπου, η μην , μων , άρα , η, which bv their nature cannot express a relation of one proposition to an¬ other; as well as to words which occur only in composition, and which define the quality of the word with which they are com¬ pounded, as api, ept, βον , ζα , νη, δνς, a, which are usually, but improperly, called “ inseparable prepositions ’. On the other hand they apply in the same manner to far the greater part of the conjunc¬ tions ; but 111 this case we must also consider as belonging to the latter, such words as η, than (which according to the characteristic * Fisch. 11, p. 1J 3—1 ]<). 379 . Degrees of Comparison. sign above-mentioned is clearly distinct from μάλλον , μάλιστα, which are generally ranged in the same class with it) ω?, ώσπερ, καθάπερ, * as ’. That according to this principle some particles are referred to the conjunctions, which correspond to others, that by the marks before laid down, should be adverbs, will not overthrow' this distinction, any more than the distinction between o and os is affected by the circumstance of both these particles being in certain combinations interchangeable, and both being originally one. Thus the same particle is sometimes considered as an adverb, and sometimes as a conjunction, as 76 , when referring to a proposition following, is a conjunction, and, as a restrictive par¬ ticle, an adverb; τοι, when they express a consequence, are conjunctions, but as affirmative particles they are adverbs. Other distinctive characters, (as that adverbs indicate objective qualities of things, but conjunctions only subjective modes of representation, or that adverbs may be considered abstractedly, and as presenting a determinate idea, but conjunctions only when in connection with other words), require many limitations, and at the same time are consequences of the above-mentioned distinctive characteristics : for a word which indicates only the form of a relation, cannot of itself convey any clear idea, and relatives rest, for the most part, merely upon subjective representation. 0 End or Vol. 1. / a" r t · >v ' ' ' τ ·. . , ' i ii -'ί . . ·· .t *Μ ■■ a , ■ · ' . · ,:'!{>{ / •.' .!<’>■. V · · - . uVrfH t •".'•v · hint mt*i b irfj i v ^ rx #¥ ' * >ί?#ΊβΓί 3 *!Π - if 1 '· :t .< fii ,·: U ■ - ^ /-■ . .. . M) , I 41 * . v. - ‘ IH r| * ..· 4* • ' ■ : . ; ■*·■■·*’·· ' < 1 1 . · * **·· |j ·■*.’, . . ..J? · i . · -Oft 1 n>.|.b 'i ii v ■ >. * i: vfxto . iPUib*jF} *. . "< i .. * ' i * . i * ir> ya? x f j -'' # * V * A COPIOUS GREEK GRAMMAR BY AUGUSTUS MATTHLE DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY, DIRECTOR OF THE GYMNASIUM, AND LIBRARIAN ΟΓ THE DUCAL LIBRARY AT ALTENBURG ; HONORARY MEMBER OF THE ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AT ERFURT, OF THE LATIN SOCIETY AT JENA, AND OF THE SOCIETE DES SCIENCES ET ARTS, / AT MENTZ. TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY EDWARD VALENTINE BLOMFIELD, M. A. LATE FELLOW OF EMMANUEL COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE IN TWO VOLUMES YOL. II SECOND EDITION. CAMBRIDGE: Printed by J. Smith, Printer to the University ; FOR JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE-STREET, LONDON 1821 * -me *■ * ·** 4 » ’ ? “V · *· 1 4 . Ψ h* ; ^ ■ w 0 - W f ■ #i* O 1 «f ♦ '■ I . * 1 ■ΆΙ - * · * # · f % , t ■ : tj . *» % , *-«P /to. T|T-»fci.u #ντ*ί *V. ) . I . u Tv '^ · ' '· . ' .-! * * t τι Vi . ; wnr* » MIT ό> μ·\- ί,-. v.·· j*:i .>/.·» .« -to : . i . .. P* ... - # . * · ‘W '« »Λ | 1 ?. ►. -/i.uv w >i\ vf. >va ο;·Η>.Λ·· f .v>vv v ■ **· * Y «1 . * ■ ■ * Pb # . - ,MJ ^ f ’ f 7 . to V"v>J . i ·. *% * . .· . * # • ■ 4 Λ #K - ■ % » , - - . % A. .JO/ Φ • v. , . . . Λ - 0 t\ 4 4 ' . .V.OYVUVt ΛΥ.Ο J 4 i iflu 0 -■ t , j . .' . ; c . /· ’ ·· -t * *<* r Ί * m * # ) I i t* * # 4T i * x II. SYNTAX. i ‘V Λ VOL. II. B I . 4 r 1 SYNTAX. Of the Article. The Article serves to signify, that the noun with which it stands, indicates either a determinate object amongst several, which are comprehended under the same idea, or the whole species. The use of it, however, is very different in the old Greek Poets, and the Attic writers; the latter use it whenever the noun, not being quite indeterminate, signifies some one member of a class; also what particular member it may be (thus, where in Eng¬ lish the indefinite article a , an cannot be used); Homer, however, Hesiod, and other old Poets, for the most part, use it only in the sense of the demonstrative pronoun, this , even without the addition of a noun, e. g. II. a, Ί2. oyaprjXOe, θοάς βπι νηας’Αχαιών, c this person’, VIZ. Χρυσής. v. 20. τα cT αποινα δεχεσθαι, ‘ this ransom" (while he points to it) v. 29 . την S’ eyto ου Χύσω for ταυτην. This di¬ stinction is most clearly shewn in practice, by comparing the passage in Homer II. a , 12 —43. with the relation of the same circumstance in Plato Republ. hi, p. 275 . sq. Bip. In these Poets the article regularly is never used in proper names' 1 . Obs. There are, however, several passages where the article is put according to the Attic idiom, even in those poets, in u Plutarch. Qu. Platon. T. x, p. 99. ed. R. Reiz. de accent, inclin. p. 5 sq. Heyne ad II. a 9 11 . 384 Syntax. Of the Article. proper names, where it appears to signify a designation, e. g. II. a, 11. τον Χρυσήν ητίμησ* * άρητηρα. X 659· π', 25. ο Ύυδείδης κρατερδς Διομήδης. Od. X', 518. τον ΎηΧεφίδην - ηρω , ΈνρύπυΧον (unless, in this passage, it means that renowned son of T.) ω , 10S. τον άγακΧντδν Άμφιμεδοντα. Hesiod. Th. 734. o Ιδριάρεως μεγάθυμος. The following passages II. o', 74. to Il^Xeidao εεΧδωρ, p' , 122. άτάρ τα ye re ύχε ύχει κορυ - θαίοΧος’'Εκτωρ , ib. 127. τον δε νεκυν δοίη. 695. τω δε οι οσσε δακρνόφι πΧησθεν. 698. τα δε τεύχε άμύμονι δώκεν εταίρω. φ' , 317. τα' τεύχεα καλά, approach very nearly to the Attic idiom x . With these, however, we must not class those passages where Homer (r). as it w ere, prepares us for a proper name, by means of the article, and the two are separated by one or more words, e. g. II. a, 409. α’/ κεν πως εθεΧρσιν εττι Ύρωεσσιν άρηζαι , Τοι)$ δε κατά πρύμνας τε και άμφ* αλα ίεΧσαι ’Αχαιούς. Compare ib. 472 sq. II. <5 , 20. at δ’ επεμυζαν Αθηναίη τε και *Ίΐρη. Hesiod . Theog. 632. μάρναντο - Ό\ μεν άφ’ νφηΧης Οθρύος Τ ιτηνες ayauoi, οι δ* άρ’ απ’ ΟύΧυμποιο θεοί } δωτηρες εάων. For in these passages the article is put for the demonstrative pronoun^ and the proper name following is put in apposition, as a more exact designation of the pronoun, e they, however (that is the, Greeks) to draw them to the sea*, &c. The Attics, on the other hand, put the article in all cases, where an object entirely indefinite is not to be expressed. It stands, therefore, even with proper names , although the tragic Poets commonly (not always) omit it y . If the discourse be upon an object which is entirely indefinite, where modern languages use the in¬ definite article a , an, the Greeks, since they have no such article, generally either omit the article, e. g. He¬ rod. vii. 37- ' ίππος ετεκε Xayov , ‘a horse brought forth a hare’, or add to the noun the pronoun τ ις } in the sense of f a certain’, in order to indicate the indefiniteness l * Reiz. et Wolf. 1 . c. and p. 74. ,1 · · a* y Valck. ad Phcen. p. 60 . a. Porson. ad Eurip. Ph. 145 . Syntax. Of the Article . 385 more clearly, e. g. 7 υνη τις εΊχεν όρνιν , f a certain woman had a hen’. Thus ayaOov is, ‘a good, any good thing', to ay αθόν, rayadov, 'good, by itself', honestum . Lucian. D. Mort. xiii. 5 . επαίνων άρτι μεν ες το κάλλος , ω? καί τούτο μέρος ον TayaQov (of good, absolutely), άρτι S’ ες τάς πράξεις και τον πλούτον' και yap αν και τοντ ayaOov ηyε'ιτ είναι*, το καλόν and καλόν Plat. Hipp. maj . ρ. 18. sqq . In English, however, the indefinite article is often used, although the noun of the proposition expresses a definite person or object; in this case also the article is put in Greek, e. g. ‘ he is a wise man'; σοφός yap o άνηρ Plato Republ. 1 , p. 1 56. of Simonides. Id. Phcedr. p. 364. σοφός yap ό άνηρ , of Evenus, according to the emendation of Heindorf b (r). Obs. The remark must be taken with this limitation, that the article is put with the subject of the proposition 0 , and is omitted in the predicate, when both the subject and predicate are sub¬ stantives. This takes place when the subject of the proposition is to be designated as something determinate, and the predicate substantive merely shews that the subject belongs, generally to the class indicated by the predicate, e. g. Aristoph. Thesm. 733. ασκός ^ενεθ’ η κόρη , c the (definite) maiden became a wine¬ skin'; and as this is mostly the case in such a combination, this remark also generally holds good. But if the subject is a gene¬ ral idea, which is used as such, it does not require an article with it, e. g. in the proposition of Protagoras, πάντων χρημάτων μετρον άνθρωπος, c man (generally, no definite person) is the measure of every thing'. ( Xen. (Econ. 6, 8. εόοκιμάσαμεν άνόρι καλφ τε KayaOip εpyaσίav είναι και επιστήμην κρατίστην yεωpyίav 3 ( agriculture is the best occupation and science', is doubtful) Isocr. ad Demon, p. 8. B. καλός θησαυρός παρ a Brunck. ad Aristoph. Plut. 985 . Fisch. 1, p. 321 . b Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. Col. I 486 '. Heind. ad Plat Phiedr. p. 316. c Valck. ad Herod, p. 85 , 66 . 451 , 7 . Fisch. 1, p. 319 sq. 1 386 Syntax. Of the Article. άνδρι σπουδαίω χάρις όφειΧομενη. Nicocl. p. 28. A. Xoyov αΧηθης και νόμιμός και δίκαιος ψυχής α·γαθής και πίστης ε’ίδω- Χον εστι. In other cases, if the predicate be a definite object, of which it is affirmed that it belongs to the general idea in the subject, then the predicate has the article, e. g. Philem. ap, Stob. Floril. Grot. p. Q 11. ειρήνη εστι τά^γαθό v, ( peace (generally, no particular or definite peace) is the abstract good*. Lucian. Ώ. Mort. χνπ, 1. tout αυτό ή κόΧασίς εστιν , ( this is just the punishment, of which we speak*, xvm, 1. τουτι to κρανίον η Ελένη εστίν , * this skull is the Helen whom thou seekest*. 264. According to this definition the article is also put, where in English it is never found: 1. With the demonstrative pronouns ουτος , oSe, εκεΊνος, in order to express the designation more strongly. He¬ rod. VI, 45. ου yap δή πρότερον άπανεστη εκ των χωρεων τουτεων Map$oi/to$, πριν ή σφεας υποχειρίους εποιήσατο. Yet here the article is often omitted, when the speaker points out an object or person actually present, or con¬ sidered as present, as in ούτος άνήρ, which frequently occurs d . * . * III I·* ί 4m 2. With πας, πάσα , παν, when this adjective stands with a noun, which would otherwise be taken in a defi¬ nite sense, πάντες οι άνθρωποι are all the men designated or otherwise defined, πάντες άνθρωποι, all men gene¬ rally q . 3. With the pronouns possess, εμός , σάς, ήμετερος, %c. when the substantive is defined, e. g. ο σός υ\ός, 6 thy son’, * but υιός σου , ‘a son of thine’, one of several. In the same manner the article is omitted, when a still closer l * / d Brunck. ad Anst. Eccl. 36'7. Wolf, ad Demosth. Leptin. p. 263. Fisch. i, p. 322 sq. The contrary is asserted by Dawes Misc. Cr. p. 301. e Valck. ad Herod, p. 537, 35. Fisch. i, p. 322. Syntax, „ Of the Article. 38 7 definition follows, e. g. JEsch. Prom. 627 . σον epyov ^ ΊοΓ, ταϊσδ’ vTTOvpyrjaai χάριν, where σον epyov constitutes the predicate, and the closer definition lies in the following words. Soph. Phil. 15. Plato Soph. p. 294. σον epyov δη φράζει v y περί ού τ εστί καί οτου. But not if the nearer definition is included in the substantive epyov , νυν ήμε¬ ρον το epyov Herod, v, 1 . In Plato Euthyd. p. is. τα δη μ€τά ταυτα , ώ Κριτών , πως άν καΧώς σοι διηyησaίμηv; ου yap σμικρόν το epyov , δύνασθαι άναΧαβειν διεζιόντα σο¬ φίαν άμηχανον όσην, the words δυνασθαι , 8$c. are an illustra¬ tion (β7τε^7 ησις) of that to which to e/0701; refers, namely, το καλώς διηyησaσθaι τά μ€τά ταυτα. 4. With the interrogative pronouns ποΊος, τίς, but only with reference to something preceding, the fuller defini¬ tion of which the question is to produce. Eur. Ph. 7 18. ά δ’ εμποδων μάλιστα, ταΰθ’ ηκω φράσων. ΈΤ. τά ποια ταυτα ; JEsch. Prom. 248. θνητούς έπαυσα μη προδερκε- σθαι μόρον. ΧΟΡ. το ποΊον ευρών τησδε φάρμακον νόσου ; Aristoph. Pac. 696 . ευδαιμονεί' πάσχει δε θαυμαστόν. ΈΡΜ. το τί; lb. 693. οΐά μ* εκεΧευσεν άναπυθεσθαί σου. ΤΡΥΓ. τά τί; where τά refers to the preceding ola f . Obs. Those cases are different, where the question is not intended to produce a fuller definition of a thing mentioned pre¬ viously to the question, but a new affirmation, and where in this case a substantive with the article, or a demonstrative pronoun follows the interrogative pronoun. These are abbreviated pro¬ positions, e. g. Herod. 1 , 86. καί τον K ύρον άκούσαντα , κεΧευ - σαι τούς ερμηνεας επείρεσθαι τον Κροισον, τίνα τοντον επικαΧεοιτο, for τις οντος είη, ον επικαΧ. Plat. Protag. ρ. 129· άλλα τί μοι δοκει εν αύτω διάφορον είναι, άλλά τί τούτο διαφέρει ; for τί τούτ εστί , (καθ’) ο οιαφ. Lucian . f Fisch. ϊ, ρ. 340 sq. Herm. ad Vig. p. 704, 25 sq. 388 Syntax. Of the Article. D. I). II. in. τί r αυτα, ώ ΣεΧηνη, φασι ποιείν σε ; D. Mort. 9, 4. τ'ινα τον κληρονόμον είχον, for τις εστίν ον είχον. 5. Sometimes with έκαστος. Thuc. V, 49. κατά τον 07 τΧίτην έκαστον. VI, 63. κατά την ημέραν εκόστην. Plat. Epist. 8. ρ. 163. άφ* εκάστης της αρχής, \euoph. Anah. VII, 4, Π. και ήρεμων μεν ην ό όεσπότης εκάστης της οικίας , especially in Isocrates, e. g. p. 163. B. 197 . C. 307. B. $c. 6. With the pronoun όεϊνα, which hardly ever ex¬ presses an indefinite, but a definite person or thing*. • " * * * 7. With τοιουτος, when it is not defined by any sub¬ stantive added to it** (r). The article is put especially, even where otherwise it would not be put, when it is to be expressed, that the substantive to which it belongs, has been already men¬ tioned, or is something commonly known. Herod, vm, 46. ΧαΧκιόεας ra? e7r Άρτεμισίιρ είκοσι (νηας) παρεχόμενοι, ih. 82. εζεπΧηρούτο το ναυτικόν τοίσι *ΈΧΧησι ες τάς oySco- κοντα καί τριηκοσίας νηας , with reference to C. 48. Thuc. I, 49· >7 αυτοί ησαν οι K ορίθιοι, επι τό) ευωννμιρ, ποΧυ ενικών , τοις Κ ερκυραίοις των είκοσι νεών - ου παρουσών , ‘ the twenty ships, of which mention was made previously’, 01 yap Κ ερκυραίοι είκοσι ναυσιν αυτούς τρεφόμενοι και κατα- όιώζαντες - ενεπρησαν τάς σκηνάς. Id. VII, 43. Αθηναίοι ες την ΣικεΧίαν επεραιουντο - τοζόταις τοις πάσιν oyiori- κοντα. Lucian Ώ. Mort. 4, 1 . * AyKvpav εντειΧαμενω e/co- μισα πεντε όραχμων. ΧΑΡ. ποΧΧοΰ Xεyetς. ΕΡΜ. νη τον Άίόωνεα, των πεντε ώνησόμην. Thus also in the pro- s Hoog. ad Vig. p. 23 b. Herm. ad Vig. p. 704, 24. .· es Schaefer. Meletem. in Dion. Hal. 1. p. 32. 97, 43. ψ . Syntax . Ο /' the Article. 389 noun personal. Plat. Lys. p. 212 . Δεύρο όη, η δ’ 6ς, ει/0ι) ημών ου παραβαΧΧεις ; α^/ον μεντοι. ΠοΤ, εφην ε*γω, λεγει?; /cat παρά τίνας τους υμάς; Id. Phileh. ρ. 227. δεινόν μεν τοινυν προσόοκαν ουόεν όει τον εμε, επειοη τουσ ούτως είπες, where the article in εμε appears to refer to the preced¬ ing· άλλ* * εί όραν τουθ ’ ημείς άόυνατουμεν , σοι δ ραστεον’ υπε- σ Χ ου y^p. βουλεύου όη, 8$c. f I, who, as thou sayest, must do all this, can have no longer any fear/ Com¬ pare Sophist, p. 245 h . In the same manner, when in the form όστις εστί, quisquis sit , the preceding word is repeated, it is accompanied by the article. Horn. H. in Merc. 27 6 . μήτε τιν άλλον όπωπα βοών κΧοπόν ύμετεράων f άίτινες α'ι βόες είσί. Eurip. Or. 412. όουΧευομεν θεοις , ο τι ποτ εισίν οι θεοί The article here answers to the Latin pronoun ille, iste. In the same manner in the predicate Plat. Apol. S. p. 42. ούτοι , ώ άντρες Αθηναίοι, ο 1 ταυτήν την φημην κατασκεόάσαντες , οι δεινοί είσί μου κα- Triyopoi , graves illi accusatores. In a similar manner the article often stands with a * substantive, accompanied by an adjective, which sub¬ stantive refers to something preceding, where, in English, the indefinite article is put. The construction is, as in the interrogative sentences, §. 264. Obs. Eurip. Iphig. A. 305. καλόν ye μοι τουνειόος εζωνείόισας, f y0U cast against me a reproach which does me honour', for καλόν τό όνειόός εστιν , ο μοι εξωνείόισας , with reference to the preceding. Χίαν ye όεσπόταισι πιστός εΐ. Lucian. D. Mort. 12 , 3. δ μεν ε'ίρηκεν ουκ ayevvrj τον Xoyov. t Sometimes the article seems to be put in an indefi- 266. h These passages are otherwise explained by Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 28 9 . where «ντο? εαυτόν seems more correct than τόν εαυτόν. * Porson. ad Eurip. Or. 1. c. 390 Syntax . Of the Article , nite sense; but for the most part, even in this case, a definite relation may be traced, though not in every point, yet with reference to the context. Plato Rep, i, p. 151. Αλλα το τον θεμιστοκΧεους εύ εχει, ος tuj Σεριφ'κρ Χοιόορουμενψ και XeyovTi, ότι ού Si αυτόν , αλλα Sia την ττοΧιν ευόοκιμοι, απεκρινατο , ότι ουτ αν αυτός 3 Σερίφιος ων, ονομαστός eyeveTo , ουτ εκείνος , Αθηναίος , where Cicero, Cato. m. 3. Seriphio cuidam. But the article is put, in this case, because it was a story well known in Athens; that celebrated Seriphian. Thus Charmid. p . ill. Κριτίας είπε v, επι του καλού Xeywv παιόός, 8$C. e of that beautiful boy’. Phcedr. p. 282. άπαντησας όε (ΦαΓ όρος) τίρ νοσουντι περί Xoywv ακοήν , — ησθη 3 ‘ that passionate lover of speeches’, Socrates k . • , This takes place especially with the participle, when a person or thing only designated generally, is yet in some measure defined by the action which belongs to it, where in Latin, qui, with the subjunct. is put, e. g. in the phrase εισιν οι Χε^οντες, sunt , qui die ant, e.g. Xen. Anab. vi, 5, 9· for which Plat . Govg. p. 121. εισίν οι XdyovTiv, Demosth, p. 18, 4. TO yap τούς ποΧεμησοντας ΦιΧίππω yεyεvησθaι } ( exstitisse , qui bellare velint) - όαιμονίς. τινι και θειοι παντάπασιν εοικεν εύεpyεσiφ, particularly in the oblique cases 1 Plato Alenex. p. 278. ηκουσε yap , απερ συ Xεyεις, οτι μεΧΧοιεν Αθηναίοι αιρεισθαι τον ερουντα , qui orationem haberet , f one, who was to make an oration’. Xenoph. Hist. Gr. vii, 5 , 24. μάΧα yap χαλε¬ πόν 3 ευρειν τούς εθεΧησοντας μενειν, επειόάν τινας φευ y όντας τών εαυτού όρώσι, e people who would be willing to re¬ main’. invenire , qui manere velint. Id. Anab . 11 , 4, 5. k Wolf, ad Reiz. de acc. incl. p. 76 . Heind. ad Plat. Charm, p. 62. Buttman. Gr. Gr. §. 278. Obs, 2. 391 Syntax. Of the Article. αυθις δε o ijy ησόμενος ουδεις εσται 3 nemo erit 3 qui nobis viam monstret. Comp. ib. 22. Isocr. ad Phil. p. 104. C. eyco δε ορώ τοπον -— 7 τοθουντα τον αζίως αν δυνηθεντα διάΧεχθηναι περί αυτών. Id.Areop. p. 144. D. χαΧεπώτερον ην εν εκείνοις τοις χρόνοις ενρεϊν τους βουΧομενους άρχειν , η νυν τους μηδέν δεόμενους. Comp. Plat . Phcedr. 1. C. Rep. vii, p. 148. Lack. p. 172 1 . * L»t j ■ ' v „ .., , , r * f , , , . * . . , . ’ 4 , . Another case is, when, after verbs signifying ‘ to call", the predicate substantive is accompanied by the article, Plat. Leg. V, p. 211 . δ δε και ^vyKoXa^wv εις δύναμιν τοις α Ρχονσιν 3 ό μ^ας άνηρ εν πόΧει και τεΧειος ούτος avayopev^- σθω. Xenoph. Cyrop. Ill, 3, 4. ο $e Αρμένιος συμπρουπεμ- πε και οι αλλοί πάντες άνθρωποι , άνακαΧουντες τον ευεpyετηv 3 τον ανδρα τον ayaOov. Id. Anab. VI, 6, 7. οι δε αΧΧοι οι 7Γ αρόντες των στρατιωτών επιχειρουσι βάΧΧειν τον Δεζιππον, άνακαΧουντες τον προδότην . AEschin. in Ctes. ρ. 473. τον μόνον άδωροδόκητον όνομάζοντες τυ\ πόΧει. (See Herod. v, 70. Thuc. VII, 70.) The article is not only put with substantives, but also 267. with adjectives, and participles by themselves, without a substantive, and with the infinitive; to all which it gives the sense of substantives: 1 . With adjectives, οι θνητοί , ‘the mortals’, espe¬ cially with the neuter in the sing, and plur. e. g. to υπεpyηpωv 3 senectus decrepita, AEschyl. Agam. 79. to πρόθυμον Eur. Med. 179. for η προθυμία, το ευτυχες for η ευτυχία Thuc. ιι, 44. in whom the greatest number of instances of this idiom occur: 1 , 68. Eur. Phoen. 275. το πιστόν for η πίστις, ‘the confidence’, Thuc. ib. 69 . ’ * · v ^ SV·' ' tJb το άναίσθητον for η αναισθησία , ‘carelessness’, ib. 78. τα 1 Wolf. Heind. Buttman. 1. c. Fisch. 1, p. 326. 392 Syntax. Of the Article. διάφορα for η διαφορά, ‘ the difference*, τα βνδικά Eurip. Phcen. 473. for η δίκη, in like manner το υμετερον for υμείς, το εμόν, τάμά Eur. Troad. 355. for € 7 ω ,ιη . In the same manner τα αναγκαία, ‘the necessary things*, and other expressions, which accord more nearly with English idioms. Similar to this is the union of the article with interrogatives, adjectives, and pronouns, to t«, ‘the substance*; το ποών, ‘the quality’; το πόσον , ‘the quantity’. Aristot. Eth. 1 , 6. Plat. Epist. yn, p. 1 33. Adjectives in — ικάς are used in the neuter, with the article, and without the substantive, in two different senses: a. In the singular they express generally a whole, το πολιτικόν Herod . vii, 103. ‘the citizens’, ( πολΊται ), collectively considered as a body. τό'Ελληνικόν Thuc . 1 , 1. το Δωρικόν vii, 44. το βαρβαρικόν Plat. Menex. p. 289- TO ιππικόν, το όπλιτικόν id. Lack. p. 187. το ζυμμαχικο v Aristoph. Eccl. 193. Other adjectives also are thus used, as το εναντίον, ‘the enemy’, Thuc. vii, 44 . το κοινόν* ‘the commonwealth, the state’, το υπήκοον, ‘ the sub¬ jects collectively’. h. In the plural they signify any circumstance de¬ terminable by the context, in which the radical noun is concerned, or the history of a people, as τα Τρωικά Thuc.i, 3. \ the Trojan war’, τα Ελληνικά , ‘the Gre¬ cian history*. On the other hand, substantives in —ικη are mostly without the article mra . Obs. In other cases, where the adjective retains its proper m Valck. ad Herod, p. 687, 52. mm Schaefer. Melet. in Dion. Halic. 1. p. 4 sq. 393 Syntax. Of the Article. signification, or is put as a substantive, the article often changes its peculiar signification, as in άλλος, πολύς, αυτός , fyc. άλλοι means 1 others*, oi άλλοι, ‘ the others, the rest’, in Homer, e. g. β', 674. κ, 408. o', 67* although he uses άλλοι in the sense of ceteri, e. g. II. o, 87 n ; and in the sing, η άλλη * Ελλάς, e the rest of Greece, Thuc. i, 77. extr. Πολλοί, ‘many’; but oi πολλοί sometimes ‘the greater number’, and sometimes ‘the multitude, the many’, plebs nn , except in the cases where the article, as a pronoun, refers to something that has been mentioned, e. g. Plat. Hipp. Maj. p. 26. απαλλάξεις αυτόν των πολλών λό Γ γων, a prolixis istis sermonibus avocabis . Thus πλείους, ‘several, more’, oi 7 Γλείους, ‘ the most’, Herod, v. 38. δε και άλλοι οι πλευνες απίεσαν τοι)$ τυράννους, the rest being greater in num¬ ber, ‘most others*. Αι /ros, ‘himself’, ipse; but ο αυτός, ‘the same’, idem ° . Ποί ντες , ‘ all’; but oi πάντες is joined with nu¬ merals, in the sense altogether, ‘in all’; Herod, vii, 4. συνη- νεικε αυτόν Ααρειον , βασΐλεύσαντα τα πάντα ετεα εξ τε και τριηκοντα, αποθανειν , ‘after he had reigned in all’, ix, 70. Λακεδαιμονίων των εκ 'Σπάρτης άπεθανον οι πάντες εν συμ - βολτ! εΐς και εννενηκοντα. Thuc. I, 100. Αθηναίοι εΐλον τριη- ρεις Φοινίκων και διεφθειραν τάς πάσας ες διακοσίας. Comp. II, 101. nr, 85. νι, 43. Ολίγοι, ‘few’; but oi ολίγοι, ‘the oligarchs, the advocates of an oligarchy’. Plat. Epist. vn, p. 151. την πολιν αν ουτω τις ευεργετών τιμάται υπ’ αυτής , τοϊς πόλ- λοις τα των ολίγων υπό ψηφισμάτων διανεμων. ■ Sometimes, however, this distinction appears to have been neglected. Eurip. Iphig. A. 122. εις τάς άλλας ώρας γάρ δη Ilaidds δαίσομεν υμεναίους, ‘to another time’ (r). 2. With participles, oi κολακευοντε s for oi κόλακες 269· Isocr. ad Demon, p. 8. C. o\ φΐλοσοφουντες id. Nicocl. p. 26. Thus also oi τυραννευοντες, oi ίδιωτευοντες in the same. And in the neuter το τιμώμενον της πόλεως Thuc. n Reiz. de acc. incl. p. 74 sq. et Wolf. nn Schaefer. Melet. 1. p, 3. Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. p. 340. Comp, Schaefer. 1. c. p. 65. o 394 Syntax. Of the Article. u, 63. for η τιμή , ‘ the estimation in which the city stands’, το μέλλον id. I, 84. for η μελλησις. το διαλ- λάσσον της -γνώμης id. Ill, 10 ρ . (Comp, the partlC.) Sometimes the article is wanting·. Pind. 01. 13 , 24. άτταν δ’ ευρόντος epyov. Plat. Leg. VII, p. 334. διαφέρει δε παμπολυ μάθων μη μαθοντος και ο γεγυμνασμένος τον μη y εκγυμνασμένου, especially in speaking indefinitely, Xen. Oyrop. VII, 5, 73. δταν πολεμουντων πόλις άλω. Plat. Soph. p. 243. και μην ούτε δίκαιόν yε ούτε ορθόν φαμεν, όν επιχειρειν μη οντι προσαρμόττειν, ‘ something that is,’ р. 2 55. τι δε; όν καλειτε τι; \ The neuter of (he participle is often put in a col¬ lective sense, as an adjective. Herod. 1 ; 97. πλεΰνος άει γιγνομενου του επιφοιτεοντος, where το επιφοιτεον is the same as οί επιφοιτουντες. Id. VII, 209 . εί τουτονς τε και το υπομενον εν Σπάρτη καταστρεψεαι, for τους υπομενοντας. Thuc. VII, 48. ην yap τι και εν Συρακουσαις βουλόμενον το7ς Αθηναίοις τά πpάyμaτa ενδουναι , for τινες βουλόμενοι. Comp. с. 49 . id. νπι, 66. ορών πολύ τό ζυνεστηκός , which for¬ merly was ο\ ζυνεστωτες. Ohs. The use of the partic. in the masc. and fem. for the substantive, is idiomatic; the participle with the article is the same as the Latin is, qui, and the finite verb; in Homer II. \J/ y 325. τον προύχοντα δοκευει. Xen. Cyr. 11 , 2, 20. αισγρόν (, εστιν ) αντιλεγειν, μη ουχι τον πλειστα και πονουντα και ωφελουντα τό κοινόν, τούτον και μεγίστων άξιούσθαι, 6 he who labours the most, and benefits the state’. This usage is very frequent, and must be distinguished from the participle without the article, which adds, in a kind of parenthesis, a definition to u substantive preceding, or a pronoun joined with a verb, which is to be constructed with various conjunctions, 6 since, if, while, although . To this also belongs the expression which occurs peculiarly in edicts and laws ο βουλόμενος , 6 he who will*, (but p Fisch. 1 , p. 323. Gregor, p. 58. 395 Syntax. Of the Article. Xen. Cyrop. iv, 5, 6. άστε του Χοιπον ουδέ βονΧόμενος αν εύρες τον νύκτωρ πορενόμενον, * not even if any one had wished’), which indicates no definite person, but defines it with respect ' to the action attributed to it. Add to these, participles with the article, in which an indefinite signification is wrongly assigned to the article. This participle, with the article, is often found in the predicate with εστι as an energetic paraphrase of the verb. Herod, ix, 70. πρώτοι δε εσηΧθον Ύε·γεήται ες τό τείχος, και την σκηνην τον Χίαρδονίον οντοι εσαν οι διαρπα- σαντες , " these it was who plundered the tent’. Isocr. NicocL p . 27. E. σχεδόν άπαντα τα Si ημών μεμηχανημενα Xoyos ημιν εστιν 6 σι^κατασκενάσας, * it is the language which,’ &c. and in the subject^ and predicate Xenoph. Hell, ii, 3, 43. ονχ οι εχθρούς κωΧυοντες ποΧΧούς ποιεισθαι, ούδε οι ζυμμά- χους πΧείστους διδάσκοντες κτασθαι , ούτοι τούς ποΧεμίονς ισχυρούς ποιουσιν, αΧΧά ποΧύ μάΧΧον οι αδίκως τε χρήματα αναιρούμενοι και τούς ούδεν άδικονντας α ποκτείνοντες, οντοι είσιν οι και ποΧΧούς τούς εναντίους ποιονντες και προδιδόντες ου μόνον τούς φίΧους, αΧΧά καί εαυτούς , δι αισχροκέρδειαν· Of the inftn. with the article, see in the infinitive. The article with a substantive (expressed, or to be 270. understood from the context) is often joined to adverbs and prepositions with their case, to which it gives the signification of adjectives. a. With adverbs: η άνω πόΧις , " the upper city’, ot τότε άνθρωποι Herod. viii, 8. or merely οί τότε, " the men of that time’, opp. ο'ι vvv, "those of this day’, ol πάΧαι σοφοί άιώρες Xen. Mem. S. i, 6, 14. 4 the wise men of old’. Soph. (Ed. T. in. Κάδμου τον πάΧαι νεα τροφή, "of ancient Cadmus’, η άνω βουΧη, the "upper council’, i. e. of the Areopagus, οι πάνυ των στρατιωτών Thuc. VIII, 1. e the best soldiers’, oi εyyυτάτω yεvoυς, " the nearest relations’. Taylor . ad Lys. p. 27 . R. q b. To prepositions with their case, τα είς τόν q Fisch. 1, p. 322 sqq. hi, a. p. 22 6. 4 396 Syntax. Of tht Article. t πόλεμον Herod . V. 49. Xen. Cyr. VI, 4, 5. i. e. τα πολε¬ μικά. τα κατά Παυσανίαν ThllC. 1 , 138. res Pausanice. o\ καθ' ημάς, ‘ our contemporaries* (distinct from κα& ημάς, without the article. Aristot. Poet . 2 , 1 . μιμούνται οι μιμούμενοι - βελτίονας η καθ' ημάς, meliores, quam nos sumus. See in the comparative.) εν τ<£ προ του χρόνφ Demosth. ρ. 1250. f in former times*. Plat. Gorg. p. 150. Μιλτιάδην $ε τον εν Μ αραθώνι εις το βάραθρον εμβα- λεϊν εψηφίσαντο, c the Marathonian Miltiades*, i. e. * who defeated the Persians at Marathon*. In this case, instead of the preposition εν, εκ is often put, if a verb is used in the same sentence with which εκ can properly be joined, e. g. Herod. VI, 46. εκ μεν € αμφί τον Ααρεϊον αύτίκα τε ίεναι, — μήΡ ύπερβαλεσθαι, soon after which it is said την Ααρείου πάντες αίνεον 397 Syntax. Of the Article. 'γνώμην. Plat. Epist. 9., P · 165. o\ περίΆρχιτητον και ΦιΧω- νίόην Hipp. Maj. p. 5. Π ιττακου τε και Βίαι/τοξ 1 και των άμφί τον Μιλησιόν Ουλήν. Thus also the passages in Homer and Hesiod are probably to be explained : II. y 3 146. ot άμφι Π ρίαμον και ΙΙάνθοον ηόε θνμοίτην, Λάμττον τ€ Κλυτίοΐ' θ’, ίκετάονα τ’, όζον 'Αρηος, Ο υκα\ό ( γων τβ και ’ Αντηνωρ, ττεττνυμενω αμφω, Έΐ'ιατο όημο'γεροντβς επί Έικαιησι ττυλησιν, where we cannot suppose any companions of Priam and the rest. The article is used here, according to the Homeric idiom §. 262. Obs. as a pronoun, in oppo¬ sition to Helen and her domestics; ‘ but they’, viz. Priam. Thus also II. ζ', 4 35. τρις yap Trj y εΧθόντες εττειρησανθ οι αριστοι, άμφ ΑΊαντε $νω και ayaKXvTov I όομενηα. Other passages; as 11. ί, 81. Od. y , 162. belong to l. and He¬ siod. Sc. Here. 17B. ( εν S’ ην υσμίνη Ααπιθάων αίχμητάων Καινεα τ’ αμφι άνακτα , Αρυαντά τε ΙΙειρίθοόν τε, 8ξ0.) has nothing to do here. Arist. Vesp. 1301. καίτοι παρην 'Ι7Γ7 rvXXos, Άντιφων , Αυκων, Ανσίστρατος , Οουφραστος , οι 7 τ βρι Φρύνιχον. This phrase occurs particularly in this sense in the later Grammarians r . In other cases o\ περί Άρχίόαμον Xen. Hist. Gr. vn, 5, 12. means '.the companions of Archidamus’, without himself, particularly in later writers. Instead of which Plato Sophist, p. 200, o\ άμφί ΐίαρμενίόην καί Ζήνωνα εταίροι. Obs. We must distinguish from these the cases, in which the prepositions are not followed by a proper name , but by another substantive, or when the article is neuter, οι περί φιΧο- σοφίαν, 4 those who study philosophy’. o\ περί την Θήραν Plat. Soph. p. 209· ' the hunters’, oi περί την σοφίαν Id. Hipp. Maj. r Valck. ad Eur. Phoen. p. 6lS. Casaub. ad Diog. L. hi, 22 . Ern. ad Xen. M.S. I. 1 , IS. Fisch. in. b. p. 220 sqq. Hoog. et Zeune ad Vig. p. 7 sqq. Herm. ib. p. 700 . VOL. II. C 398 Syntax. Of the Article . p. 5. τα άμφι τον πόλεμον Xen. Cyrop. ιι, 1, 21. c what belongs to war’, τα πολεμικά, τα περί Λάμφακον Xen. Hell . π, 1, 20. f the occurrence at Lampsacus*. τα περί Θηβαίους Isocr. ad. Phil. p. 92. E. c the situation, constitution of the Thebans’. Some¬ times also it is merely a circumlocution, e. g. τά περί την * αμαρτίαν Plat. Cratyl. 33. for η αμαρτία. Thuc. ι, 110. τα κατά την μεγάλην στρατείαν Αθηναίων. 272. c. The article also stands before several words together, which collectively have an adjective sense. Plato Hep. I, p. 175. όιόρισαι, ποτερως Χεγεις τον άρχοντα τε και τον κρείττονα, τον ως έπος είπεΊν , η τον άκριβει λόγιρ, which afterwards is expressed τον τφ άκριβεστάτφ Χόγιρ άρχοντα όντα. Phileb. ρ. 244. τό$ε το καλούμενου ολον επι- τροπεύειν φώμεν την του αλόγου και είκη όύναμιν και τά οπη ετυχεν, for και την τύχην. Ohs. This union of the article, with an adverb or a preposi¬ tion, is generally explained, by supplying a participle suited to the sense, particularly ων, e. g. οι νυν άνθρωποι sc. οντες, and such a participle is frequently found with it, e. g. instead of the common ο'ι τότε ( άνθρωποι ) Herod, says, i, 23. οι τότε εόντες. Eurip . Ion. 1349. et? τον νυν όντα χρόνον. Thus Xenoph. Hist. Gr. ii, 4 3 11, κατά την ες τον ΊΊειραιά αμαξιτόν άναφε- ρουσαν. Cebes . c. 10. o$o? επι την αληθινήν παιόείαν άγουσα, where, in other cases, the participles are wanting. Thuc. vii, 58. το προς Λιβύην μέρος τετραμμενον. In Plato Gorg. ρ. 150. ΧΙιΧτιαόην τον εν Μ αραθώνι νικησαντα τοι)$ βαρβάρους. was to be supplied. Such an ellipse, however, is hardly foiind in common use, and was only conjectured, because the Latin language was assumed as the standard. 27 3. If a word be added to a substantive, without a copula , in order to explain or define it more accurately ( Apposi¬ tion ), this word is put with the article. This is either a substantive, or an adjective, participle, adverb, or pre¬ position with it's case. In the proper Apposition, where a substantive, parti¬ cularly a proper name , is explained by another, it stands 399 Syntax . Of the Article . generally without the article. Άστυάγης ο K ναξάρεω 7rats· Herod. I, 107· K υαζάρης 6 τον * Αστυά^γους ποίις, της $ε Κ όρου μητρός άδεΧφός Xenoph. Cyrop. I, 5, 2. Έκαταιο? ό Χογοττοιός Herod. V, 36. Β [ας 6 Τίριηνευς, Πίττα /co? 6 Μιτυ- Χηναιος id. 1, 27. Ίνάρως ό των Αιβυων βασιΧευς TJlUC. 1, . 110. Ο ρέστης, ο Έχε κρατικού υιός, του θεσσαΧών βασιΧεως Id. ib. ill. If a gentile noun follows, still the article is very often omitted, e. g. Ηρόδοτος*ΑΧικαρνασσενς Herod. I, in. Οουκυό&ης ’ Αθηναίος Thuc. i. in. Thus also in the names of the Demi, e. g. * Ερατοσθένης ΟΊηθεν, Lysias, p. 19 . where it is not put, for the sake of distinction. In this case the substantives υιός, παις, θινγάτηρ, ·γυνη are very frequently omitted. Herod, vii, 204. Αεωνίόης ό Αναζαν^ρίόεω, του Αεοντος, του Έυρυκρατί^εω, 8$C. (and SO passim), or, with the apposition before, τον * Αμφιτρυ- ωνος 'ΊΛρακΧεα Herod, ιι, 44. As this mention of the descent is frequently not so much a precise definition of the person in contradistinction to others, as a mere customary addition, the article is often omitted, e. g. ΦάΧως ΈρατοκΧείδου Thuc. i, 24. and thus it mostly oc¬ curs in the orators, in decrees, and state documents 8 . If a participle or adjective be added for the sake 274. of definition, it has regularly the article, as also the substantive to be defined, if it be not a pronoun per¬ sonal. This takes place in adverbs and prepositions, independently of the case above-mentioned. Herod, vi, 47. μακριρ ην των μεταΧΧων θαυμασιωτατα, τά οι Φοίνικες ανευρον οι μετά Θάσου κτίσαντες την νήσον ταυτην {την Θάσον). AEsch . Agam. 181. Χήνα Se τις προφρόνως επι¬ νίκια κΧαζων τευξεται φρένων το παν, τον φρονειν βρόν¬ τους όόωσαντα, τόν πάθη μάθος θεντα κυρίως εγειν , where the addition serves to mark more energetically the deno- s Herm. ad Vig. p. 701. 11. Fisch. 1 , p. 266. 338 sq. 0,75. 400 Syntax. Of the Article. mination. Thus also after pronouns personal. Eurip. Hcc. 364. επειτ ισω S' αν δεσποτών ωμών φρενας τύχοιμ* αν, όστις apyvpov μ ώνησεται 9 την 'Έκτορός re χάτερων ποΧΧών κασιν, c me ; who am Hector's sister’. Suppl. lio. σε, τον κατήρη χΧανιδίοις, άνιστορώ. Herod . VII, 103. εί τό ποΧιτικον υμιν παν εστι τοιοντον } οίον σύ διαιρεεις, σε ye, τον εκείνων βασιΧηα, πρεπει ί τρος το διπΧησιον αντιτάσσε- σθαι, where the apposition marks the ground of the con¬ clusion. Also, where the nominative of the pronoun lies in the verb, which is adjoined. Eur. Andr. 1072. οιας ό τΧημων άyyeXώv ήκω τύχας ! Soph. Track . 1103. νυν S ώδ άναρθρος και κατερρακωμενος τυφΧης ύπ’ άτης εκπεπόρ- θημαι ταΧας, 6 της αρίστης μητρος (ονομασμένος, 6 του κατ άστρα Τ,ηνος αύδηθείς yόvoς. This apposition in the pron. pers. often serves to express indignation and irony. Soph. El. 300. ξύν ί εποτρυνει πεΧας ο κΧεινός αυτή ταυτα νυμφίος παρών , ο πάντ αναλκις ούτος, ή πάσα βΧάβη, ο συν y υναιξί τάς μάχας ποιού¬ μενος. ib. 357. συ δ ημίν, ή μισούσα, —μισείς μεν Xoytp — epytp δε τοϊς φονεύσι του πατρος ξύνει. Plato Apol. S. ρ. 79· βυρησετε, ω άντρες, παντας εμοι βοηθειν ετοίμους , τω $ιαφθειροντι, τω κακα εpyaζpμεv(p τούς οικείους αυτών, ώς φασι Μ εΧιτος και ’Άνυτος. id. Crit . ρ. 117. συ δε ημάς τούς νομούς και την πατρώα, καθ οσον δυνασαι, επιχειρήσεις ανταπ— οΧΧυναι , και ψήσεις, ταυτα ποιών , δίκαια πράττειν , ο τη αληθείς, της αρετής επιμεΧούμένος ! Xen. Hell . VII, 5, 12. επει yap rjyeiTo Αρχίδαμος ουδέ εκατόν εχων άνδρας, καί διαβας, οπερ εδοκει, τι εχειν κωΧυμα, επορεύετο, επί τούς αντίπαλους, ενταύθα δη οι πύρ πνεοντες, οι νενικηκότες τούς Λακεδαιμονίους, οι τιρ παντι 7rXeoi'6S', και προς τούτοις υπερ- οεξια χωρία εχοντες, ούκ ύδεξαντο τούς περί Άρχιδαμον, άλλ! ey κΧίνουσι, where the apposition is united with the sub¬ ject of the proposition, as in Soph. El. 300. In the three last passages the irony consists in the opposition of Syntax. Of the Article. 401 contrary designations in the principal verb, and in the apposition 1 . Every designation, which is adjoined to a noun by a participle, an adjective, an adverb, or a preposition with it’s case, (whether the noun conveys a perfect idea of itself, independently of this designation, as in the proper appo¬ sition, or not, but requires this designation to make it complete); the Greeks place either before the noun or after it: in the first of which cases it stands between the article and the noun belonging to the article ; but in the other succeeds it, with the article repeated. To the first case belong the examples cited above, §. 270. o\ νυν άνθρωποι, οι πάλαι σοφοί κ. τ.ε. In two designations the article is sometimes also repeated. Thuc . vii, 54. τροπάϊον έστη¬ σαν της άνω της προς τω τείχει άποληφεως των οπλιτών· The other case occurs in the following examples: Μιλ- τιαδην οι εχθροί υπό δικαστηριον ά^α^όντες έδιωξαν τυραννίδος της εν Χερσονησω Herod VI, 104. τάς ηδονάς θήρευε τάς μετά δόξης Isocr. ad Demon, p. 5. Β. τα άλλα τά καθ' εκάστην ημέραν συμπιπτοντα id. ad N~IC· ρ. 16 . D. πρεπει καί συμφέρει την των βασιλέων γνώμην άμετακινητως εχειν περί των δικαίων, ώσπερ τους νόμους τούς καλώς κείμενους ib. ρ. 18. C. and with the article doubled Thuc . i, 108. τά τείχη τά εαυτών τά μακρά απετελεσαν. This designa¬ tion seldom stands with the article before it’s noun, ac¬ companied by the article, as Herod, vi, 46. εκ τώνεκ Σκαπ¬ τής ^Χλης των χρύσεων μετάλλων foi εκ των ^)· μ. των εκ Σ /c. *'γ. Thuc. I, 126. εν τη τού Αιός τη με^ίστγ) εορτ rj for εν τη τού Δ. e. Trj μ€7· Id. VIII, 77* οι δε από τών τετρακο- σίων πεμφθεντες ες την Χαμόν οι δέκα πρεσβευται . t Valck. ad Eur. Phoen. ρ. 552. Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. p. 110. 111 Hence may be defended the passage oi Paus. V. 14, 5. which is attacked by Horm. ad Vig. p. 704. 23. Comp. Schaef. in Dion. Hal. I. p. 8. 72. sq. ' -· . *'· ^ Syntax. Of the Article. 277. In like manner genitives are placed either between the noun by which they are governed, and the accompa- nying article, or with the article repeated after the noun. From the former position several articles some¬ times stand together. Plat. Phcedr. p. 369- άλλά δη την του τφ οντι ρητορικού τε και πιθανού τέχνην 7 τώ? και πόθεν αν τις δύναιτο πορίσασθαι. Sophist, ρ. 276. τα της των πολλών ψυχής όμματα καρτερεΊν προς το θειον άφορώντα αδύνατα. Polit. ρ. 54. το της του ξαίνοντος τέχνης εργον. JEschin. in Tim. p. 39· R . ένοχος έστω ο γυμνασίαρχος τώ της των ελεύθερων φθοράς νόμω. The genitive stands very frequently before the article and the noun, e.g. Xcn. Cyrop. VI, 3. 8. συνεκαλεσε και ιππέων και πεζών και αρμάτων τούς ηγεμόνας καί των μηχανών Si καί τών σκευοφό¬ ρων τους άρχοντας καί των άρμαμαξών. This takes place particularly in the participle and article, where the proper name accompanies them, e. g. Ώερσών καί Μηδων οι καταφυγοντες και Αιγυπτίων οι μη ξυναποστάντες ThllC. I. 105. The following are instances of the second posi¬ tion : Herod. V, 50. άπό θαλάσσης της Ίώνων. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 76. ό δήμος ό ’Αθηναίων , according to the emendation of Fischer ad Well, i, p. 341. and Heindorf, p. 115. Plat. Epist. VII, p. 113. Αιών άδελφώ δύο προσλαμβάνει ' Αθηνηθεν, ουκ εκ φιλοσοφίας γεγονότε φίλω , άλλ’ e/e της περιτρεχούσης • εταιρείας ταύτης της τών πλείστων φίλων , ην δκ τού ξενίζειν τε καί μυειν καί εποπτεύειν πραγματεύονται. If the desig¬ nation adjoined is an adverb or a preposition, with it s case, the repetition of the article is peculiarly essential. Ohs. Besides these cases, the article is sometimes found doubled. Plat. Apol. S. p. 70. ουκ εκ χρημάτων η άρετη γί- γνεται, αλλ εξ άρετης χρήματα καί τάλλα τάγαθά τοΊς άνθρωποις άπαντα ^ Xen. Apol. S. 33. ούδε προς τάλλα τά¬ γαθά προσάντης ην. Plat. Polit. ρ. 48. τό ταύτόν. Tim. ρ. 316. λόγος δε 6 κατά ταύτόν άληθης γιγνόμενος, περί τε X % Syntax. Of the Article. 403 θάτερον ών και περί to ταυτόν , 3$c. — ο τον θατερου κύκλος, ib. p. 332. το τε θάτερον και το ταύτό. On account of the intimate union of the article with it s noun by crasis , it seems to have been seldom considered that there was an article in the composition. But in Id. Phileb. p. 270. Ο υκούν to με p €7 TlOvfJLOW Y]V Y] φυχη T(t)V TOV σωμαΤΟς βναντίων €<ζ€(νν } το δε την αλ* *γηδόνα η τινα διά πάθος ηδονην το σώμα ην το 7 ταρα~ δεχόμενον, the repetition of the article is required by the trans¬ position of the words, for to δε την a\y. η τινα δια 7r. η. παραδεχόμενον το σώμα ην. Id. Sophist, ρ. Q71 , 27S. το τε ταυτόν και θάτερον , the expression ‘ the same, and the other . §. 279 - Sometimes, in Ionic writers particularly, e. g. He- 278. rodotus, the article is separated from it’s noun by the governing word, or by another, e. g. τών τις στρατιωτεων Herod. V, 101. των τινας δορυφόρων id. VII, 146, 357, 12. Hemsterli. ad Luc. 1. Ϊ. p. 294. * Fisch. i, p. 325. 404 Syntax. Of the Article. the construction by other verbs or prepositions, or are followed by a verb, as a predicate; also before single words which are to be explained. Plat. Peg. \i, p. so5. καΧώς μεν και 6 ποιητικός υπέρ αυτών Xόyoς υμνείται , τό, χάΧκά και σιόηρά όείν είναι τα τείχη μάΧΧον η yrjiva. Rep. I. Ρ* 147. Ουκουν, ην S εyω ) ενετι Χειπεται, τό, ην πείσωμεν υμάς, ως χρη ημάς άφείναι. In propositions which are quotations with the genitive : x 4j)ol. S. p. 80. και yap αυτό τούτο τό του Ομηρου, ουό εyω απο όρυός ουό από πετρης πεφυκα , αλλ’ όξ ανθρώπων. Id. Phcedon. ρ. 164. ταχύ αν τό τοΰ Ava^ayopov yεyovoς ε\η 3 ομου πάντα χρήματα. Cf. Gorg. ρ. 42. Alcib. ι, ρ. 24. Rep. ι, ρ. 151. twice ιν, ρ. 370 . ρήμα also occurs with the article : Plat. Euthyd. p. 37 . επει είπε, τι σοι άΧΧο εννοεί τούτο τό ρήμα, τό , ουκ εχω 6 ΤΙ χρησωμαι τοίς Xoyo^, whence, however, it does not follow that ρήμα is always to be supplied. Sophist, p. 229 . ορθή yap ή παροιμία, το, τας άπατας μη ράδιου είναι διαφευ- 76 W. Cf. Phil. ρ. 307. Hipp. Maj. ρ. 57. Epist. νπ, ρ. 126. και πάλιν ό λόγο? ηκεν ό αύτ os, τό, μη δε'ιν προδοϋναι Αιώνα. Cf. Phileh. ρ. 279. In the genitive : Plat. Leg. VII, p. 367. Τοΰ περί Xeyeis ; ΚΛ. τον, προς τί παράδε^μα ποτβ άποβλεψας άν, τό μεν έφ πάντας μανθάνειυ τους νέους, το ό' άποκωλΰοι.' Id. Republ. IV, ρ. 351. είπερ άυ έν άλλη πολει ή αυτή δόξα ενεστιν τοις τε άρχουσι καί άρχομενοις, περί του, ουστινας δει αρχειν, καί kv ταότν, άν τοάτο είη iv6v. Herod. IV. 127. extr. άντ'ι δδ τοί, άτι δεσπότης ίφη. σας είναι εμάς, κλαίειν Xkyw. id. VII, 79. ημεας στασιάζειυ χρεών έστι περί τοί, όκότερος ήμόωυ πλόω άγαθά την πατρίδα ipy άσεται. In the dative: Plato Phcedon. p. 232. ούδέ yo αύ όπό Φαίδωνος ύπερέχεσθαι (τόν Σιμμίαν, όμολινγεΊς) ° τί ^ίδων 6 Φαίδων έστ'ιν, άλλ’ άτι μό 7 εθος 0χει ό Φαίδων προς τήν Σιμμίου σμικρότητα, when before it merely was οόδ’ αυ Σωκράτους ύπερεχειν, άτι Σωκράτης ό Σωκράτης όστίν. In the accusative, Plato Gorg. p. 34 . άντίθες τό, σοΰ μα - Syntax. Of the Article. 405 κρα \eyovros και μη εθελοντος τό ερωτωμενον άητοκρίνεσθαι, ον δείνα αν β·γω 7 ταθοιμι, ei μη εξεσται μοι άπιεναι και μη άκονειν σον ; where Heindorf quotes Demosth. in Ari- StoCT. p. 89*3· extr . νπερβας το, και εαν αλφ φόνον, και τό, άν απεκτονεναι, και τό, δίκας V 7 τεχετω τον φόνον, και τό, τάς τιμωρίας είναι κατ αντον τάς αύτάς, — και πάνθ όσα εστι δίκαια, νπερβάς y0y ραφε. Plat . Polit. ρ. 78. κατά τοντον δη τον τρόπον μερίζοντες, δευρ άει προεληλυθαμεν, επιστήμης ονκ επϊλανθανόμενοι, τό S’ ητις ονχ Ικανώς τ τον δυνά- μενοι διακριβωσασθαι. Plat. Lack, ρ. 180. εις τον επειτα βίον πpoμηθεστεpovάvάyκη είναι τον —εθελοντα κατά τότον Σόλω- νος και άξιου ντα μανθάνειν, εωσπερ άν ζρ, must be understood with reference to the verse of Solon: Ύ ηράσκω g αίεί ττολλα διδασκόμενος. Instead of the neuter, the gender of the preceding substantive is also put: Plat. Polit. p. 103. Ώότερα δ’ αυτών ονδεμίαν ( επιστήμην ) άρχειν δεΊν άλλην άλλης ( φησομεν ) ; η ταντην δεΊν επιτροπεύονταν άρ¬ χειν ξυ μπάσων των άλλων ; ΣΩ. ταντην εκείνων, την, εί δε? μανθάνειν η μη. —SEN. καί την , εί δεΊ πείθειν άρα η μή, της δνναμενης πείθειν. ρ. 104. Τι δε περί της τοιάσδ ’ άρα δννάμεως διανοητεον, της, ως πολεμητεον εκάστοις, οΐς αν προελωμεθα πολεμεΊν ;- Ύην δ’, είτε πολεμητεον, είτε δια φιλίας απαλλακτεον, ταντης ετεραν υπολάβωμεν, η την αυτήν ταότν ,; Xen. Mem. S. I, 3 , 3. καί προς φίλονς δε και ξένους και προς την άλλην δίαιταν καλήν εφη παραί- νεσιν είναι την Κα$ δυναμιν ερδειν. Thus also in single words, which are explained or quoted. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 255. 4. R. ύμεΊς, ω άνδρες Αθηναίοι * — τό δ) νμεΊς όταν είπω, την πόλιν λ^ω. Plat. Soph. p. 272. τψ τε είναι πον περί πάντα άν ay κάνοντας χρησθαι, και τφ χωρίς, καί τω άλλων, και τίρ καθ' αυτό, καί μνρίοις ετεροις. Comp. ρ. 282. In nouns the article is generally in the gender of the noun, e. g. τό όνομα, ό ΑΊδης, τό όνομα, την άρετην, in Plato. Also without the 406 Syntax , Of the Article. article: Soph. Jlntig. 567 . αλλ. ηδε μεντοι μη \eye z . When a word is considered merely in a grammatical sense,, the article is put by the grammarians and scho¬ liasts in the gender of the noun which belongs to the part of speech, e. g. η διά, because we say, η πρόθεσις, c the pre¬ position'. η eyco } on account of η αντωνυμία , f the pronoun’, ο €7Γ6ί, on account of ό σύνδεσμος, 6 the conjunction'. 280. The article is properly in the gender which the noun belonging to it requires ; but with feminines in the dual the article is often put in the masc. e. g. τώ χειρε Xen. Mem. S. n, 3, 18. and Theocr. 21, 48. τω ήμερα id. Cyrop. I, 2, 11. τω yvval κε lb. V, 5, 2. τω πόΧεε ThllC. V, 23. roly τορύναιν Plat. Hipp. Maj.p. 26 a . (r) Sometimes the article is put only once to two words of different genders. Plato Cratyl. 22 . τόν όμοκε- Χενθον και όμόκοιτιν, for την δμόκοιτιν. 281. The article often stands without a noun belonging to it. This takes place : l. When a noun, which has just preceded, is to be repeated once again, the article belonging to it stands alone ’. Isocv. ad Nicocl. p. 15. Σ). (ot τύραννοι ) πεποιη- κασιν , ώστε ποΧΧονς αμψισβητειν, πότερόν εστιν άζιον εΧεσθαι τον βίον τόν των ιδιωτενόντων μεν, επιεικώς δε πρατ- τόντων , η τόν των τνραννευόντων. c than that of the tyrants'. Plat. Epist. 8. p. 159. μβτρία η θε$ δονΧεία , f the service which we pay to the Deity'), άμετρος δε η τοϊς ανθρωποις. ThllC. VIII, 41. αψεις το ες την Χ/ομ ($C. πΧεΊν') επΧει ες την Kavvov. Sometimes however the noun also is repeated. Xen. Cyrop. V, 2, 31. ον δύναμαι εννοησαι άσψαΧε- * z Fisch. r, p. 328. a ICoen. ad Greg. p. 304. Fisch. i, p. 315. 3, a. p. 303. Brunck. Lex. Soph. p. 741. Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl. 140. ■V Syntax. Of the Article. 407 στερα v ου^εμίαν πορείαν ημιν της τρος αυτήν Βαβυλώνα πορείας ίεναι , (where ίεναι belongs to άσφαλεστεραν e more safe to travel’). The article often stands without the noun, and has the genitive of a collective noun following it, as o\ του $ημου. TllUC. VIII, 66 . The article is also without the noun, when the speaker is doubtful how he shall designate something. Demosth. pro Coron. p. 231, 21. η των άλλων 'Ελλήνων, €ΐτ€ χρη κακίαν , ε’ιτε ayvoiav, είτε και ταυτα άμφότερα είπεΊν. 2 . In certain phrases, a noun which has not gone before must be understood. The nouns which are to be understood are principally, Yrj. είς την εωυτων Herod. VI, 15. η ημετερα Isocr. PldtdlC . Τνωμη } in the phrase κατά ye την βμην Pldto Phileh. p. 2, 9 b . and elsewhere, e.g. η εμή νικ% Pldto Rep. hi, p. 284. LC ·>* Ή^χβ^α, e. g. η avpiov y ‘ the morrow’, i. e. day. > O^os·, e. g. ω? &e θαττον την παρά τείχος ηειμεν JEschin. Socr. 3, 3. In other cases the article is used in the feminine and accus. with an adjective ddverhidlly , e. g. την τάχιστη v Xen. Hist. Gr. n, ], 28. for τάχιστα , celerrime. Thus also την πρωτην Xen. M. S. in, 6, 10. Herod, in, 134. *at first’, την ευθείαν , f right on’. The noun also is omitted when the speaker thinks proper to avoid mentioning it from any cause. Pldt. Epist. 4, p. 85. άναμιμνησκειν Se όμως Sei ημάς αυτους 3 b Koen. ad Greg. p. 11 sq. 408 Syntax. Of the Article. ότι προσηκει πΧεον η 7 ταίόων των αΧΧοιν ανθρώπων όιαφερειν, τους — old θα όηπου. To this class belong the phrases μα τόν, μά την, νη τόν, when the name of the Deity,, by whom the person swears, is omitted through reverence. Plat . Gorg. p. 44. Aristoph. Ran. 1374 c . The article also frequently stands in the accus. neut. with adverbs and prepositions accompanied by their case, in the sense of adverbs., e. g. το πάρος II. κ , 3og. τό πρόσω Hevod. IV, 123. for the simple, πάρος, πρόσω, το πριν, f formerly’, τό πάΧαι, £ of old’, το αύτίκα , c imme¬ diately’, τα νυν, r now’, τα μάΧιστα, and ες τα μάΧ. maxime, τό πάμπαν, τό παράπαν, ‘entirely’* *. In the same manner the article is put with adverbs in the genitive, with a preposition, e. g. εκ του παραχρημα, c on the instant’, &c. also with an infinitive following, το νυν elvcu, c now’, Xen. Anab. hi, 2, 37? τό τημερον είναι, ζ to-day’. With prepositions: το άπό τοο3ε Soph. Aj. 1376. * after this’, το πρό τουτου, before this’, Thuc. n, 15. to €7ri τούτω, τό επι τφόβ, c hereupon’. Plato Gorg. p. 142®. Xenoph. Anab. vi, 6, 23. το καθ' εαυτόν, privatim. In like manner the article is redundant in the following phrases: Plat. Min. p. 139. νομοφύΧακι τω'Ϋαόα- μάνθυι εχρητο ο Μ/μω? κατά τό άστν, τα όε κατά την αΧΧην Κρητην τψ ΎάΧω. Phil. p. 307· το μεν όη φρονησεως τε και ηόονης περί προς την αΧΧηΧων μίζιν, ε’ι τις φαίη, 8$C. Such phrases must frequently be rendered in a paren- c Koen. ad Greg. p. 65. Toup. ad Suid. n, p. 324. not. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 68. Reiz. de Incl. Acc. p. 14.—On the omission of the Article, see Schaef. in Dion. Hal. i, p. 45. 11 6 . j d Fisch. i, p. 334 srp ii, p. 122. * Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 228. 409 Syntax . Of the Article. thesis, το 67Γ e^e, του ττ έμέ, τουττί σβ, ‘ as far as lies in me, in you 3 , Eur. Hec. 518. also f what concerns me, you’, &c. f to ets e/xe, c what concerns me', Eurip. Iphig. T 697. to /car έκβίνην την τέχνην Plat. PJllleb. p. 221. f what concerns that art/ With an infinitive also fol¬ lowing. το €7ΓΙ σφάς elvai. Thuc. IV, 28. to e?r έκβίνοις eli/m It/. VIII, 48 *. το' κατα τούτον είναι Xen. Anab. I, 6, 9. f as far as regards him’. More fully in Eurip. Or. 1338. σώθηθ 3 οσόν ye τούπ e/xe, and Plat. Epist . VII, p. 102. /xe^oos oVoy 67rl σοι yeyove, ‘ the same as before was’, κατά το σον μέρος. Thus are to be explained Soph. (Ed. C. 649. θάρσει το TovSe y άνΰρός, ‘ as far as regards this man (on my account) be under no concern’. Yet to TovSe άνδρός may also be a circumlocution. for toSg avSpa §. 284. The article is also put adverbially in the neuter, with adjectives and substantives, το 7 Γρώτον and τα 7Γ ρώτα, c at first’, το 7to\v 3 ώς το 7 τολο, f for the most part 3 , το λοιττόν , f for the future 3 , του λοιττου, ‘ besides, moreover 3h . It has been before observed, that the arti¬ cle is put in the feminine also, with adjectives, in an adverbial sense. Obs. In these cases the article is often written as one word with the adverb, adjective, or preposition following, τοττάλαι , τοττρώτον, <5fc/ which serves as a distinction between the case in which the article stands with another word as an adverb, and that in which the adjective retains its signification, and the adverbs and prepositions receive the sense of adjectives k , e. g. f Pors. ad Eurip. Or. 1338. s Duker. ad Thuc. iv, 28. h Herm. ad Vig. p. 706 , 26\ 1 Duker. Praef. ad Thucyd. ed. Amstel. ad Thuc. 11 , 13. Wesseling. ad Herod, p. 53, 36. k Wolf. Pragf. ad Iliad, ed. 1804. p. lxii. 283. 410 Syntax. Of the Article. τοπρίν , f formerly’, in contradistinction to το πριν μίνος, ταπρώτα, c at first’, and τα πρώτα, c the first’. In favour of the separation of the article from the word following, however, it must be observed, that the article is frequently separated from its accompanying word by particles, as μεν, δε, ye, fyc. e. g. το μεν παραυτικα, fyc. As the article is used in the neuter with adverbs and / prepositions, as a parenthetic expression, so it frequently occurs also with participles, or with its noun in the genitive, as a shorter parenthesis. The most common phrase of this kind is το Χεγομενον, for ώσπερ Χεγεται. Plato Rep. VI, pi S6. εν δη τφ τοιουτιρ τον νεον, τό λεγό¬ μενοι/, τίνα όίει καρδίαν 'ίσχειν; Sophist, ρ. 291. σχολρ π ου, το κατά την παροιμίαν Χεγόμενον, ογε τοιουτος άν ποτέ εΧοι πόΧιν. Alcib. I, ρ. 41. ημών δε γεννωμενων, το τον κωμωδοποιού, οΰδ* οι γείτονες σφοδρά τοι αισθάνονται, c as he comic writer says’, Theaet. p. 138. Παρμενίδης δε μοι φαίνεται, το του Ομηρου , αίδοΊός τε μοι άμα δεινός τε, c as Homer says’. Rep. IV, p. 332. έκαστη yap αΐιτών πόΧεις είσι πάμποΧΧαι , αλλ’ ου πόΧις , το των παιζρντων, f as one is accustomed to say in joke’. Comp. Rep. ix, p. 248. Lach. p. 187. και συ, τό τών Σκυθών, ιππέων περί Χεγεις. This kind of phrase seems to have arisen from the idiom in §. 273. and the article appears to stand in the accusative, as if in apposition to the whole proposition adduced. See Apposition. The following phrases seem to have the same origin: το κεφάΧαιον, ■ principally, in general’: Plato Theaet.p. 151 .καί, το πάντων κεφάΧαιον, σκοπεί. Gorg. p. 104. καί, τό τούτων τοιουτων όντων κεφάΧαιον. which, accord¬ ing to the sense is the same as : ο πάντων κεφάΧαιον εστι, not, however, that the article can be said to be put here for the relative pronoun. The following also is a similar apposition : το δε μεγιστον Thuc. 11 , 65. id quod maximum est. Plato Alcib. 2 . p. 86. ΧεΧηθαμεν ημάς Syntax. Of the Article . 41,1 αυτους Si ayvoiav και πράττοντες, καί , το ye έσχατοί', ευχό¬ μενοι > 7 /χΤι/ αντοϊς τα κάκιστα, ζ what is the worst 5 . Plato Epist. 8. p. l60. υμών οι 7 rpoyovoi, το 7 ε μ^ιστον, έσω¬ σαν άπό βαρβάρων τούς 'Έλληνας. (without the article also : ThllC. I, 142. μ^ιστον $6, Ttj των χρημάτων σ Travel κωΧυσονταιβ Xenoph. Hiero. Q, 7 - καί — το ττάντων ye χρησιμώτατον , ήκιστα Se ε’ιθισμενον Sia φιΧονεικίας πράσσε- σθαι —, η yeωpyίa αυτή άν ποΧυ εττώοίη, 4 what is UflOSt profitable, useful 5 , &c. Comp. Xen. Cyrop. v, 5 . 24. The expression το μ^ιστόν in Plato Epist. vii, p. 101 . extr} is entirely adverbial. Otherwise these phrases make the first member of a proposition, in the second of which άτι (e. g. Plat. Phcedon. p. 151 . ri S’ έσχατον , ότι. Isocr. ad. Phil. p. 109· TO Se μ^ιστον των είρημενων , οτι ) or a new proposition with yap follows, (e, g. Isocr. Pac. p. 170 . B. to Se 7 τάντων σχετΧιώτατον’ ούς yap ομο- Xoyi^aa^ev άν πονηρότατους elvat' των ποΧιτών , τούτους πιστότατους φυΧακας ηyoυμeθa της ποΧιτείας είναι .) This is put for το o’ έσχατον τουτό όστιν , οτι Plato Euthyd. ρ.73. The neuter of the article is often put absolutely 284. with the genitive of a substantive, and in that case sig¬ nifies : 1 . Every thing to which the substantive, which is put in the genitive, refers, 4 all that concerns it, that arises from it, that belongs to it 5 . Eurip. Ph. 414. ΊΟ. φίΧόι Se πατρος και ζενοι σ ούκ ώφεΧουν; ΠΟΑ. ευ πράσσε C to expect assistance from them, one must be fortu¬ nate 5 .) τά φίΧων S’ oSSev, ην Tis· SoTTo^rj^ 4 the assistance of friends is nothing 5 . Ib. 393. Sei φερειν τά των θεών, 4 the visitation of the gods 5 , Suppl. 78. τά τών φθιτών , 1 Viger. ρ. 15. Fisch. 1 , ρ. 342. 412 Syntax. Of the Article. honores inortuorum . Hence the expression τα Αθη¬ ναίων φρονεΊν, e to be on the side of the Athenians/ Herod. vra, 75. Thuc. viii, 31. %C. It signifies particularly that which any one has done, is wont to do, or that has befallen him ; in which case the article is in the sing. Plato . Par men. p. 93. καίτοι όοκώ μοι το του Ιβυκείου ίππου πεπονθεναι, e I seem to be in the same situation as the horse of Ibycus/ Phcedon. p. 176. όμως Se μοι όοκεις συ τε και Σιμμίας —όεόιεναι το των παίόων, μη ως αληθώς ό άνεμος την ψυχήν εκβαίνουσαν εκ του σώματος όιαφυσφ. και όιασκεόάννυσιν. Xen. (EcOTl. J6, 7. και yap όη άνεμνησθην το των άλιεων, ότι OaXaTToopyoi όντες —όμως ούκ όκνουσιν αποφαίνεσθαι περί της yr /ς, s what fishermen are accustomed to do’. To this also belong the expression το του Όμηρου §. 279. ~ -v · J \ f 285. 2. It is a periphrasis merely of the substantive in the genitive case, τα της 6pyw Thuc. 11 , 60. or το της opyfc Plutarch. Prut. 21. for η opyf τα της εμπειρίας. Thuc. VII, 49. τα θεών ουτω βουλόμεν εσται Eurip. Iphig. A. 33. ΟΓ τοιοΰτό v εστι το των θεών, ώστε υπό όωρων πα- payεσθaι, Plat. Alcih. 2, p. 99· το των επιθυμιών , οϊαί τε και όσαι είσίν, ου όοκούμεν μοι ικανώς όιρρησθαι Plat. Rep. IX. in. (See id. Polit. p. 17 . Rejt. vm, p. 223.) The Greeks add to this periphrasis the adjective and participle, in the gender of the word which is the subject of the periphrasis, and in the case of the article. Soph. Philoct. 497· τα των όιακόνων, τουμόν εν σμικρφ μερει ποιούμενοι , τον οίκαό* ηπ oiyov στόλον. Plat. Phileh. p. 279* τούς μεν σωφρονάς που και ό παροιμιαζόμενος επίσχει λόyoς εκάστοτε, το μηόεν ayav παρακελευόμενος, ώ πείθονται, το όε των αφρόνων τε και υβριστών μόχρι μανίας η σφοόρά ηόονη κατε- χουσα περιβόητους anrepyaCyTai. de Leg. p. 68 . άρ ούν ούχ ημών οι μεν νέοι αυτοί χορευειν έτοιμοι, το όε τών πρεσβυ- 413 Syntax . The Article as a Pronoun. \ τερω v ημών εκείνονν clv θεωρουτεν, hayeiv nyov/ieOa πρεπόν¬ των, χαίροντεν τγ εκείνων παιδίαι τε και εορτάσει m . In the same manner the possessive pronouns are put with the article instead of the personal pronoun, e. g. το υμετερον for ύμείν Herod. VIII, 140, 1. τάμα for eyuo Eurip. Androm. 235. το εμόν for εμε Plat . Theaet. p. 90 D . % Both senses are united Eurip. Troad. 27. νοσεί τα των θεών , ού$ε τιμάσθαι θεΧει, where τα των θεών , joined with νοσεί signifies f the reverence towards the gods’, but is put with ου τιμάσθαι θεΧει instead of o't θεοί . The Article as a Pronoun. P “ ' I V , * The Homeric idiom, in which the article is used as 286 a pronoun demonstrative o<5e, ovtov §. 262. is preserved with what is called the Attic idiom, chiefly in Herodotus and other Ionic and Doric writers : Herod, iv, 9 . και τον , κομισάμενον , εθεΧειν άπαΧΧάσσεσθαι 0 . This Use of the article is found also in Attic writers, though more rarely. Soph. El. 45. o yap μ^ιστον αύτοίν τυγχάνει δορυξενων , for ούτον yap. and in the plur. Thuc. I, 86 . too? ζυμμάχουν ου μεΧΧησομεν τιμωρείν. οι $’ ουκετι μεΧΧουσι κακών πάσχειν. Cf. ιιι, 18. This takes place more fre¬ quently in the oblique cases , and in the neuter. Plat. Epist. vii, p. 105. to c) είχε όη πων . and passim^. m Duker. ad Thuc. iv, 54. viii, 77 . Markl. ad Lys. p. 445 . ed. R. Fisch. 1 , p. 335 sqq. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 324. Schaef. ad Dion. Hal. 1 , p. 31 sq. Plat. Rep. viii, p. 223. n Valck. ad Herod, p. 687 , 52. Heind, ad Plat. Theaet. p. 349. 0 Reiz. ib. p. 7 sq. 67 . p Bibl. Crit, hi, 5. p. 11 . VOL. II. D / 414 Syntax. The Ar ticle as a Pronoun. * • » , ' , . - * > Euthyd. p. 44. άλλα μην το 7 ε εύ οίδα, otl , 8 $C, Polit. p. IO 6 . το 7 ε οη κατανοητέ ον, ιοοντι ζυμπασας τας ειρημενας έπιστήμας, οτι πολιτική τις αύτων ouci -μία εφάνη. Soph. (Ed. Col. 742. πας σε Καδμείων Χεως καΧεΊ δικαίως, εκ $ε των μόΧιστ 0yio. ThllC . I, 81. τοις $ε αΧΧη yn εστι η τολ- X*, 179 apyovcn. Soph. CEd. T. 1082. της y άρ πεφνκα μητρός. Comp. 1466. Xen. R . A . π, 8 . of the Athe¬ nians : επειτα φωνήν την πάσαν ακουοντες εζεΧεζαντο τούτο μεν εκ της, τούτο $ε εκ της q . Especially in the accus. after καί. Xen. Cyrop. I, 3, 9· κα\ τον κεΧευσαι Sovvai. Plat. Symp. p. 168. καί τον είπε7ν, οτι επί $ειπνον εις Aya- θωνος ( ιοι ). In the nominative the pronoun os is used, και os, και η, και οι ( Thuc . IV, 33. Γ ) \ , To this also belongs the expression προ του for τού¬ τον, or προτού , f heretofore’, f formerly’; moreover the designation of a person or thing, which is not named, because the name may be different according to cir¬ cumstances. τον καί τον , το και το, r this and that, the one or the other’. Plat. Leg. vi, p. 316. όμόσαντες, η μην α^υνατειν τον και τον βεΧτίω ποιειν. DeTilOSth. pro Cor . ρ. 308, 4. εί το και το εποίησεν, ουκ αν άπεθανεν *. 287. The Attics moreover use the article for the pronoun in the following cases : l. Before the relatives os, όσοι, οΐοι. Thus it oc¬ curs in Homer, II. p , 171 . W εφάμην σε περί φρενας εμμεναι αΧΧων, των οσσοι Αυκίην εριβωΧακα ναιετάουσι. Od. β\ 118. επίστασθαι Kepcea. of ου πω τιν άκούομεν ου$ε παΧαιων , τόων , αι πόρος ησαν εϋπΧοκαμιδες Αχαιαί. Plat. Critias p. 52. η yrj εφερε τον ήμερον καρπόν , το ν n Wolf, ad Reiz. 1. c. ρ. 9 . 10 . 68 . 70 . Herm. ad Vig. p. 7 00 , 9 . r Reiz. p. 26. 96 . Fisch. 1 , p. 339 sq. s Reiz. p. 11 . Syntax . The Article as a Pronoun. 415 re ξηρόν, — και τον όσος ξύλινος. Phil.p. 261. και μην και τον Spaay, 8$C. Ib. X, p. 100 Sq. πρώτον μεν θεούς άμφότεροι φάτε yiyvwTKeiv και opqv και ακουειν πάντα, λαθεΊν §ε αυτούς ε αυτους (ττημαι 5 Epist. 8, p. 155. tcov Se oca *y ενοιτ άν η πααι Yet here the article seems to retain its usual signi¬ fication, and the proposition with the relative, as one word,, appears to receive by means of it an adjective or substantive sense, so that in this kind of attraction, no stop is to be put after the article, as τά όπη ετνχεν §. 272. This most frequently takes place in a division, where 288. ο μεν , ό ot μεν — οί Se are opposed to each other, the one the other , hz zllz, e. g. οι μεν εκηρυσ- σον, τοι $ ηγείροντο μαλ' ωκα II. β', 52 . and with τις , if ο μεν —ο Se do not refer to determinate nouns which have gone before. Eurip. Hel. 1617. οίκον v ό μεν τις λοισθον αιρειται $όρν, ό $ε, fyc. Comp, the passage from Plato quoted in f. Arist. Plut. 162. Xen. Cyrop . vi. 1, 1. ' * Reiz, p. 3 5. 73. 78. et ibi W. Heincl. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 488. D 2 416 Syntax,* The Article as a Pronoun . Lucian D. Mort. 16, 5. el yap 6 μεν τις ( alius nescio quis) εν ούρανφ , 6 δε Trap ημίιν, συ το εΐ'δωλον, το δε σώμα εν Οϊτφ κόνις ηόη yεyεvητaι, ο μεν τις refers to the immor¬ tal divine part of Hercules, which is to be in Heaven, but which Diogenes laugh at as absurd. The indeter¬ minateness often consists in this, that in the singular the plural is signified, as Eur. Hel. 1617 - Xen, Cyr. vi, 1 , 1 . a . If the word thus divided be a nouti sing. 6 μόν — o δε, are translated, f the one and the other.’ Plat. Phcedr. p. 339 Sq. του ρεύματος εκείνου •Trrjyv» πο\\η φίρομενη προς τον εραστήν , * —η μεν εις αυτόν εδι/, η δε, άπομεστου μενού, εζω άπορρει. Id. Leg. VIII, ρ. 417. Τέχνην St] τιν αύ τούτου του νόμου της θεσεως εν τω νυν τταρόντι την μεν paSiav ύχω, την S' αύ τινά τρόπον παντάπασιν ως οιόν τε χαΧεπωτάτην. For which ρ. 419· τέχνην κεκτημην ττρ μεν ρά,στην άπασών, τυ\ δε χαΧεπωτάτην. Demosth. in Phcen. ρ. 1040, 25. ό δε άπεκρίνατο , ότι ό μεν πεπραμενος ε*ιη τού σίτου , δ δε evSov άποκείμενος. b. When the division or opposition does not take place in the case of a substantive, but an adjective, verb, or an entire proposition, the neuter is put τδ μεν, — τδ δε', τα μεν, — τά δε, in the sense of f partly’ — f partly’. Herod, i, 1 73. νόμοισι Se τά μεν Κρητι- κοΊσι , τά δε Κ αρικοΊσι χρεωνται. Sometimes τι, 8$C. is found in this case, when the distribution is only ge¬ neral, without being accurately defined. Xen. Anab. iv, 1, 15. και ταύτην μεν την ημέραν ούτως επορεύθησαν, τά μόν τι μαχόμενοι , τα δε καί αναπαυόμενοι". Cf. Thucyd. I, 118. 108 (r). Instead of which Herodotus often uses τούτο μεν Hoog. ad Vig. p. 13. Reiz. p. 12. u I Syntax. The Article as a Pronoun. 417 — τούτο δε χ . Isocr . Paneg. p. 44. O. sq. τούτο μεν yap, €i δε7 τούτους εφ’ εκάστω τιμάσθαι των epywv, τούς εμπειρό¬ τατους όντας και μεyίστηv δύναμιν έχοντας, άναμφισβητητως ημιν προσηκει την η Γ γβμονίαν άποΧαβείν ,- τούτο δε εί Tive ς άζιούσι την riy εμονίαν εχειν η τούς πρώτους τυχόντας ταύτης της τιμής, η τούς πΧείστων ayaOiov αιτίους ''ΕΧΧησιν όντας, tjy ούμαι και τούτους y είναι μεθ’ ημών. DeiflOSth. ΙΥΙ. Lept. p. 474, 25. τούτο μεν τοίνυν θασίους τούς μετ E/c- φάντου πώς ούκ αδικήσετε, εάν άφεΧησθε την άτεΧειαν, —* — τούτο δε * Αρχεβιον και *ΉρακΧείδην . c. When a preposition governs the article, the par¬ ticles μεν and δε often come immediately after the preposition. Plat. Theaet. p. 103. άδικε 7v $ εστίν εν τφ τοιούτω, όταν εν μεν τφ (άyωvίζeσθaι) παίζει τε και σφάΧΧγ, καθόσον αν δύνηται , εν δε τφ διαΧ^εσθαι σπουδάζω τε και επανορθοι τον πpoσδιaXεyόμεvov. Phcedr. ρ. 356. εν μεν αρα τοις συμφωνούμεν, εν δε τοί ς ου. ISOCT. Areopag. ρ. 141. Λ* d. One of these is frequently omitted. 11. X. 15 7· τί} pa παραδραμετην, φεύyωv, o S όπισθε διώκων. Euvip . Ipllig. T. 1361. κοντοις Se πρώρας ειχον * οι S επωτίδων ay κυρας εζανηπτον . Plat. Phileb. p. 260 Sq. φευδεΐς, ai αΧηθείς ούκ είσιν ηδοναί ; Comp. Rep . v. ρ. 8. particularly 16 *. o\ μεν is used also in antithesis II. ω, 721. άοιδούς — — Oi τε στονοεσσαν αοιοην Ui μεν αρ ενρηνεον, επι oe στε· νάχοντο yvva 7κες. Od. a , 115. όσσόμενος πατερ εσθΧον ενι χ Herm. ad Vig. ρ. 701, 15. y Reiz. 1. c. p. 13. 69 . Fisch. 1 , p. 331. Herm. ad Viger. p. 699. < z Musgr. ad Eurip. Jph. T. 1361. Porson. ad Eur. Or. 891. Heusde Spec. Plat. p. 75 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 421. I \ 418 Syntax. The Article as a Pronoun. φρεσίν, el ποθεν ελθων, μνηστήρων των μεν σκεδασιν κατά nr \ \ >r οωματα υειη - τιμήν ο αυτός εχοι. *·’ * , * * - * ■»■**■. . ' · - \ ’ > ι' ' . * · e. Instead of one, or both, the name itself also is put. » Herod . V, 94. επόλε μεον - ΜιτνΧηναωι τε και * Αθηναίοι, οι μεν άπαιτεοντες την χωρην, * Αθηναίοι δε, 8$C. Plat . Charm . ρ. 122. ούκ άρα σωφροσύνη άν είη αιδώς’ είπερ το μεν (η σωφροσ.) aya9ov τυγχάνει όν, αιδώς δε μηδέν μάλλον αγαθόν η και κακόν, and with το μεν. Thuc. I, 84. πολεμι¬ κοί τε και ,ευβουλοι διά το ευκοσμον γιγνομεθα, το μεν, ότι αιδώς σωφροσύνης πλείστον μετεχει, αισχύνης δε ευψυχία, ευβομλοι δε, αμαθέστεροι — παιδευόμενοι a . The name also is put with them. II. π, 317. N εστορί- δαι,ό μενουτασ Άτυμνιονόζει δουρί; Αντίλοχος. Thuc. \ΙΙ, 86 . ζυνεβαίνε δε, τον μεν πολεμιωτατον αυτοις είναι, Δημο- σθενην, διά τα εν Trj νησιρ και ΙΙυλω, τον δε δια τα αυτα επιτηδειότατον. II, 29* αλλ ο μεν εν Λαυλίοι της Φ ωκιδος νυν καλούμενης yw ο Τ ηρευς ιρκει, -Τ ηρης δε, 8$C. Plato Gorg. ρ. 117. η μεν τουτου ού θεραπεύει και την φύσιν εσκεπται και την αιτίαν ών πράττει, και Xoyov εχει τούτων έκαστου δούναι, η ιατρική, η δ ετερα της ηδονης (ου την φυσιν εσκεπται). Compare Sophist, ρ. 204 b . See §. 262, Obs. l. fi ο μεν — ό δε, are not always opposed to each other, but instead of one of them another word is often put, e. g. Thuc. VII, 73. extr. και οι μεν ειπόντες άπηλ- θον, και οι άκουσαντες δη iyyeiXav τοϊς στρατ^ 0 *? των * Αθηναίων. Plat.Leg. II, ρ. 69. είκός που τον μεν τινα επι- δεικνυναι, καθάπερ'Όμηρος, ραψωδίαν, άλλον δε κιθαρφδίαΡ, τον δε τινα Tpay^ia ν, τον δ * αύ κωμωδίαν. Id. Republ, II, a Heind. ad Plat. Charm, p. 77. b Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. ρ. 185. i Syntax. The Article as a Pronoun. 419 p. 231. άλλο τι yetvpyos μεν εϊν, o δε οικοδόμον, άλλον δε τιν υφαντήν; Pollt. p. 51. και των σκεπασμάτων νποπετά- σματα μεν αλλα, περικαλύμματα δε ετερα. Thus οϊ μεν — ενιοι ΟΓ εστι 5* * όι , οι μεν — αλλοί δε, οι μεν — ετεροι δε, 8$C. frequently refer to each other c . Demosthenes and more especially modern writers use also the pron. relat. ovv μεν — ovv δε, 8gc. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 248. πόλειν *Ελ- ληνίδας αν μεν άναιρων, είν άν δε τούν φυyάδav κaτάyωv. Comp. ρ. 282. 289. Xen. Cyrop. II, 4, 23. ουτοι αν σοι ουν μεν άν συλλαμβάνοντεν αυτών κωλυοιεν των εζayyελιώv the Wolfenbuttel MS. has τουν μεν, which appears to be altered from the ovv δε following. In Doric this idiom appears to be more ancient. Archyt. ap. Gale, p. 674. €7Γ€ί ών των άyaθώv ά μεν αυτά εντι διά ταυτά αιρετα, ου μαν όι ατερον, α όε όι ατερον. ρ. 676. των αγα- θών ά μεν εντι άνθρώπω, ά δε των μερεω v e . We find also, not indeed ον μεν — o? δε, but ov by itself for ό or ουτος in II. φ', 198. αλλα και δς δείδοικε Αιός μεyάKoιo κεραυνόν, and in Theognis 207. αλλ ο μεν αυτός ετισε κακόν y^peov, όν δε φίλοισιν άτην εζοπίσω παισίν επεκρεμασεν. Obs. 1. It is hardly worth remarking, that in this phrase the article does not always follow in the same case, although Wasse ad Thuc. it, 42. notices it as an elegance. The passage in Thuc. vii, 13. is more remarkable τα δε πληρώματα διά τάδε εφθάρη τε ημϊν και ετι νυν φθείρεται, των ναυτών των μεν διά φpυyavtσμόv και άpπayηv μακράν και υδρείαν υπό των ιππέων άπολλυμενών, οί δε θεραπευοντεν, επειδή εν αντίπα¬ λα καθεστηκαμεν, αυτομολουσι, for των δε θεραπευόντων — αύτομολουντων. Obs. 2. If in ο μεν — ο Se the entire proposition is ex- € Fisch. 1 , p. 330 sq. • Hemsterh. ad Thom. Μ. ρ. 1 sq. Grasv. ad Lucian. Soloec. p. 447. Reiz. 1. c. p. 32 sqq. Fisch. i, p. 332. Herm. ad Vig. p. 706 , 28. 1 420 Syntax. The Article as a Pronoun . pressed, it is put either in the genitive, or quite as often in the same case, as d μεν — o δε. e. g. II. π\ 317· which passage is quoted before in e. Hesiod, epy. 160 . και τούς μεν πόλεμός re κακός και φυλοπις αίνη τους μεν εώ* επταπύλφ θηβη Κ αδμη- ιοι yaiy ωλεσε μαρναμενους μήλων ενεκ Όιοιποόαο, τους οε και εν νηεσσιν ύπερ μ^α λαίτμα θαλάσσης ες Ύροίην ayaycov Ελένης ενεκ ηϋκόμοιο. Soph. Antig. 21. ου yap τάφου νων τω κασιγνητω Κρεων τον μεν 7 τροτίσας, τον δ’ άτιμάσας εχει; More examples will be produced afterwards in the genitive f . Both constructions are united Herod, vi, 111. το στρατοπέδου εξίσου μενον τφ Μ ηδικίρ στρατόπεδα) το μεν αυτού μέσον kyiveTO επι τάξιας ολίγα?, το δε κεράς εκάτερον ερρωτο πΧηθεί. Thus the second οί δε, is again divided, Thuc. vn, 13. και οι ξένοι, οι μεν avayKaTToi εσβάντες ευθύς κατά τάς πόΧεις άπο'χωρουσιν, οι δε υπό μεyάXoυ μισθού το πρώτον επαρθεντες, — επειδή παρά yv^Y\v ναυτικόν τε δη και τάλλα από των πολέμιων άνθεστώτα όρώσιν, οι μεν επι Χιθο- Xoyia ς προφάσει απέρχονται, ο\ δε, ως έκαστοι δυνανται, είσι δ’ οι και — άφρρηνται. Properly speaking the nominative here is not put for the genitive, but the definitions annexed with ot μεν — οι δε constitute an apposition frequently used in Homer, in which the whole proposition is followed by the part in the same case. See Apposition. Obs. 3. Similar to this is the use of the formula d μεν δη or ο μεν νυν in Herodotus, followed by δε, which repeats the substance of what was mentioned before, in order to make a transition to something new, e. g. Herod, vm, 74. oi μεν δη εν τίρ Ίσθμίρ τοιούτω πόνω συνεστασαν - ο \ δε εν ΣαΧαμινι — αρ- ρωδεον. Xen. Cyrop. π, 2, 10. οι μεν δη αΧΧοι, ιός εικός, kykXtov επι τ rj δορυφορια της επιστολής’ ό δε Κύρος είπεν. Also μεν alone Thuc. ι, 3β. τοιαύτα μεν ο\ Κ ερκυράϊοι είπεν ' οι δε Κορίνθιοι μετ αυτούς τοιάδε. Or else it is in the sense of the Latin cum — turn. Herod, vii, 204. τούτοισι εσαν μεν νυν καί άλλοι στραϊψγοί κατά πόλις έκαστων' ό δε θωυμαζόμενος μάλιστα — Λακεδαιμόνιος ην. Λέων Ιδης, and in the beginning of a relation, after an introduction, Xen. Cyrop . 1 , 2 . in. f Valck. ad Eur. Ph. p. 436. Brunck. ad Soph. Antig. 21. Duker, Thucyd. iv, 71. Hoog, ad Vig. p. 5. Syntax. The Article as a Pronoun. In a narration, ό U without a noun refers to what has been mentioned before, although not always pre¬ ceded by ο μεν. 3. The article seems also to be used as a pronoun, in 289. the phrase ev τοΊς, which mostly stands with superlatives, (in modern writers also with σφόδρα, μάλα, ? raw), the su¬ perlative being in the masculine, feminine, or neuter, and which, with superlatives, answers to the Latin omnium , longe, multo . The superlative does not stand in the case of το!?, but in the case of the noun to which it properly belongs. Amongst the old writers it is used only by Herodotus, Thucydides, and Plato; by the latter most frequently. Herod. vii> 137. τούτο μοι ev τοίσι θειοτα- τον φαίνεται yiyvea θαι. TJlUC. I, 6, ev τοις πρώτοι δε Αθηναίοι τον σίδηρον κατεθεντο. III, 17· ev τοίς τ τλεΊσται δη νηες άμ αυτοις evepyoi καλλει eyevovTo. lb. 81. οίκτων ωμη στάσις προσχώρησε* και εδο^ε μάλλον, διότι εν τοις πρώτη ey ενετό. VII, 24. μ^ιστον δε και εν τοις πρώτον εκάκωσε το στράτευμα των Αθηναίων η του Π λημμνριου ληγις. 10. 71· ev τοις χαλεπώτα τα διηyov. ΥΙΙ, 90. ανηρ εν τοις μα λίστα και εκ πλείστου ενάντιος τφ δημιρ. Plat. Criton. p. 101. (άφ^μαι) ayy ελίαν φερων χαλεπήν , —ην ey ω , ως μοι δοκώ , w τοις βαρύτατα αν εν^καιμι lb. ρ. 120. ταύταις δή φαμεν και σε, ω Σώκρατες , τοις αίτίαις ενεξεσθαι , είτ rep ποιήσεις , ά όπινοεις' και ούχ ήκιστα Αθηναίων σε, αλλ εν τοις μαλιστα. €ΐ ούν εγω είποιμι , διά τί δη , ίσως άν μου δικαίως καθάπτοιντο, Aey οντες ότι εν τοίς μάλιστα Αθηναίων eyio αύτοίς ώμολο^/ηκώς τυγχάνω ταυτην την oμoλoyιav· THcact. p. 142. κοι τούτων μοι δοκει εν τοις μάλιστα προς άλληλα σκοπείσθαι την ουσίαν (η φνχν)· Sympos. ρ. Ιββ. Αριστόδηαος ην τις, Κυδαθηνεύς, σμικρός , ανυπόδητος αιεί. ι xapayeyovei δ ev Trj συνουσία, Σωκράτους εραστής ών εν tois μαλιστα των τότε. Epist. 10. ρ. 166. Ακούω Δίωνος εν τοις μάλιστα εταιρον είναι σε , and with the comparative forth*, superl. Euthyd. p. 71 . πολλά . > I \ 422 Syntax. The Article as a Pronoun. V μεν ουν και αλλα οι λόγο* υμών καλά εχονσιν, ώ Ενθυδημε τε και Αιοννσοδωρε, ev δε τοίς και τον το M€ya\o7r(j€7reaT€pov, οτι των πολλών ανθρώπων και των σεμνών δη και Sokov ντων τι είναι ovSev όμΐν μελει, where Heindorf (ρ. 407.) adduces Mlian. V.H. χιν, 38. Prom these combinations it is clear, l. that the formula εν τοίς stands by itself, and is not to be joined with the superlative following, since the com¬ bination εν τοις πρώτοι, εν τοις πΧεισται is at variance with this explanation; 2 . that τοίς is neuter, because the superlative in the feminine also is put with it. Hardly any explanation of this phrase can be given to suit all passages, since the idiom of the language apparently has given to it by degrees a greater extension than it originally had. Thus, originally, in εν τοίς it appears either to be necessary to supply the adject, or part, in the same case, and in the neuter, as Plat. Cratyl. p. 320. 6 δη SoKei εν τοις μεγίστοις με^ιστον είναι , or that εν τοίς should be the same as εν τοντοις } when it seems to be used after several things previously mentioned, the most important ©f which is to be thus distinguished; in which sense Herodotus commonly uses εν δε δη, e. g. Ill, 39. σνχνάς μεν Sr) τών νήσων α'ιρηκεε , πολλά δε και της ήπειρον αστεα εν δε δη κα'ι Αεσβίονς—εΐλε. This explana¬ tion suits particularly the passage in Plato Euthyd. V- 71. and Herod, yii, 137 . In time it became merely a phrase, which served to strengthen the superlative. A different origin, though it has a similar signification, may be assigned to όμοια τοίς με·γίστοις Herod. Ill, 8. σέ¬ βονται δε Αραβιοι πιστις ανθρώπων ομοια τοίσι μάλιστα (sc. σεβομενοις) VII, 141. Τιμών ό Ανδροβονλον, τών Δελφών άνηρ δόκιμος ομοια τώ μάλιστα ( SC . δοκίμφ), instead of which also όμοίως is used Herod. 111, 68. Demosth. Epist . V· 1473, 12. εύρησετε με εννονν τώ πληθει τώ όμετερω τοίς μάλισθ’ όμοίως. Thucyd. I, 25. χρημάτων δυνάμει οντες κατ J / * Syntax. The Article as a Pronoun. € κείνον τ ον χρόνον όμοια τοις Ελλ//νωι/ πλουσιότατοι*}· This answers to the Latin ut qui maxime s . 4. The oblique cases of the article are often used 290. absolutely, as demonstrative pronouns. a. The dative τφ, ‘for this reason’, idcirco. II. {X, 250. τφ νυν ’Arpeity Ά'γαμεμνονι, ττοιμενι λαών , ησαι ονει&ζοιν.' Plat. Theaet. ρ. 129. Τ Φ TOt > ® Φ OeoSwpe, μάλλον (ΓΚ€7ΓΤ€θν 6^ Ο,ρχηζ, (*)(Τ7Γ€ρ CtVTOl V 7 TOT 61 VOVTCU . ί <■ Then, in that case’, when this expression may be resolved into a conditional proposition. II. S', 290. τψ ( i . e . εί roTos Ίτασιν θυμοί ein στηθεσσι yevoiro ) κε τάχ ήμΰσει e ιτόλκ Πριαμοιο ανακτος. Cf. II. ο, 51. ττ , 723. ψ, 527· b. τη, ‘ here, or there’, for which τρ2ε is put else¬ where. Xen. R. A. II, 12. οπού \7i/oV έστι πλεΊστου, λεία χώρα καί αξυλοί· mice χαλκοί καί σίόηρκ έκ τηί αύτήί πόλεως, mice ταλλα δύο η τρία μια ττόλει, αλλά το μεν τη, το 2ε τη. Cf. Xen. Anab. ιν, 8, ίο. and in motion Hesiod, ipy. 206. τη $ els, η σ άν εγω περ αγω. Τ η μών—τί i 2ε, c on the one hand’, —‘ on the other’, Eurip. Or. 350. ώ 2ώμα, τί} μέν σ’ η2έω s προσδέρκομαι, Τροίαθεν ελθών, τη 2 ί2ών καταστενω. ί Hemsterh. ad Luc. Τ. ι, ρ. 170 sqq. couples εν tow with the super¬ lative, and supplies to them the dative of that word, which stands in the superl. and nomin. e. g. εν row μάλιστα τανταιε ταιε αιτιαιε ενεξομενοιε. Reiz. de incl. acc. p. 17 sqq. Herm. ad Viger. p. 765, 250. iv row toiou'tow μάλιστα, e. g. eiiSoKipoc. Comp. Wolf, ad Reiz. p. 21. who shows that tow is neuter. Fisch. ad Well, n, p. 122. compares it with h τά μάλιστα, so that tow is the neuter, and the whole a circumlocution of the simple superlative; which however does not apply to the passages, where another superlative, τρωτοί, βαρύτατα, &c. follows. »> Valck. ad Phoen. p. 53. ad Callim. Fr. p. 82. I I * / Η' ■ 4 ’ 434 Syntax. The Article for the Pron. Relat. c. to', ‘ on this account’, only in Homer. It. p, 404 . το μιν ου ποτέ εΧπετο θυμφ τεθνάμεν. 291. The Article for the Pronoun Relative. It' '.· ‘ ' . . \ . . J . , The article is very often putin Ionic and Doric writers for the pron. relat. i 5', Il. a \ \ 25. άΧΧά τά μ i v (£μ μ ) ττολίων εξεπράθομεν, τα (ταυτα) όέόασται, %c. Herod. V, 37. Άρισταγόρης και εν ττ} αλλρ Ίωνίγ τωϋτο τοοτο εποίεε, too? μεν εξεΧαόνων των τυράννων , τοι/? (oi/V) 5* e\a/3e τυράννους τουτους $e εξεόίόου. Of Attic writers, the Tragedians only use it in this sense, not the Comic and Prose authors; and these only in the neuter and the oblique cases . JEschyl. Agam. 535. αλλ’ ευ viv ασπασασθε — Τροίαν κατασκάψαντα του Νικηφόρου Διος μακεΧΧτ], τί} κατβίρ^ασται πεόον. Soph. (Ed . Τ. 1379· δαι- μόνων άyάXμaθ , 'ιερά, των ο παντΧημων βγω — άπεστερησ εμαυτόν. Cf. 1427, 8ξΟ. Eurip.Iph. A. 1351. ΚΛΥ. τί Si φευ Ύ εις } τεκνον ; ΊΦΙ. τον ΆχιΧλόα, τον iSe Ίν αίσχυνομαιΚ Of the Noun . 292 . In the noun we have to consider, first, the use of what are called the Numbers, and next the use of the v .cases. Of the Numbers, the singular has nothing which distinguishes its use from that of other languages. Instead of the dual the plural is often used. In the use of the plural the Greek language mostly agrees This idiom is denied to the Tragedians by Koen. ad Gregor, p. Ill, 79. Piers. Vens. p. 74 . Valcken. ad Eurip. Hippol. 525. but asserted by Brunck. ad vEsch. S. c. Th. 3 7 . Soph. (Ed. C. 1259. Comp. Reiz. de Inch Acc. p. 2 6. 95. et Wolf. Fisch. 1 , p. 345. / 425 Syntax. Of the Noun. with other languages, even the modern. Thus in Greek the plural is often used instead of the singu¬ lar. JE sch. Prom . 67 . συ δ’ αυ κατοκνείς, των Διό? τ εχθρών inrep στενεις ; where only Prometheus is meant. Eurip. Hec. 403. χαλα τοκευσιν εικότως θνμονμενοις instead of f the mother’. Soph. (Ed. T. 1184. όστις πόφασμαι φυς τ άφ’ ών ου χρην, ξύν οΐς τ ου χρην μ, ομίλων (ί. β. ξυν μητρί), ους τ εμ ούκ eSei (l.e. τον πατέρα), κτανών k . The general expression in the plural gives greater em¬ phasis to the speech. To this also belongs the expres¬ sion τα φίλτατ a, which in the Tragedians often signifies only a person, mother, wife, &c. and ημβΊς for eyu> very frequent in prose. In other cases the plural is often put for the singular, without having any particular specifi¬ cation in view, especially in the Poets, e. g. δώματα, καρηνα Όλυμπου, perhaps because the idea of an object was formed from its different parts * 1 . Substantives also are frequently put in the plural, when as a predi¬ cate, or an apposition, they signify a person or thing, although the person or thing be in the singular. Eur . Hipp. 11. Ίττττόλντο?, α*γνου Πιτθβιο? παι^βυματα · Vice versa, the names of nations are sometimes in the singular instead of the plural n . k Brunck. ad Eurip. Bacch. 543. Soph. CEd. T. 366. Fisch. hi, a. p. 302. 1 Fisch. in, a. p. 301. m Pors. ad Eurip. Or. 1051. » Gregor, p. 52. et K. Fisch. hi, a, p. 300. I 426 t Of the Use of the Nominative. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. I. Every proposition, even the simplest, must contain two fundamental ideas, the Subject of a thing or per¬ son, of which any thing is asserted in the proposition, and the Predicate, that which is asserted of that person or thing* # ' ‘ v , > i ' * \ - · . , « , , In propositions which are independent of any other, the Subject is always in the nominative, except in the construction of the accus. with the infinitive . Some¬ times the subject, as in Latin, is not expressed, either because it is implied in the form of the verb (as in φιλώ, φιλεΊς, φιλεϊ, ‘ I love, thou lovest, he loves', ex¬ cept when an emphasis is thrown upon it) or because it is easily seen from the context. Thus it is omitted in the termination of the third person plural, if there be no determinate subject, Xeyovai, φασί, dicunt , r they say'°. Frequently also from the nature of the verb a subject is inadmissible, as in verbs impersonal, e. g. χρη, $ei } εξεστι, and in verbs which are used imperson- ally, as φαίνεται , εοικε, είκός εστι ; in verbals also [n the neutei, ιτεον εστι , eundum est , ποΧεμητεα εστι, bellcin- dum est. In the same manner the proper subject is omitted, when a proposition follows which begins with the pron. relat. 09, ή, o or a relative conjunction ένθα , οπού, οτε, and these words refer to the subject which is kept in mind. lisch. in, a. p. 547. Duker. ad Thuc. vii, 6 $. Comp. Heind. ad Plat. Cratyl. p. 17 . m Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative. In this case the whole proposition with the relative constitutes the subject, e.g. 71/007 δ’ αν όστις κά v βραχύ της παιδείας eyevaaro. Instead of ό?, ή, o are frequently put el ns, el τι, as in Latin si quis is a more softened expression for qui. The nominative of the subject also is referred to the relative following in the same case, as 7 r\ovTou δ* ον μεν δώσι θεοί, TrapayiyvexaL ανδρι εμπεδος, Solon. El. Brunck’s Poet. Gnomic, p. 74. v. 9 . See Pron. Relat. Ohs. Of εστιν ot, eariv ου s, fyc. which united make an adjective ενιοι , ενίους, see the article on Pron. Relat. The following are some particular cases: When the verb indicates the employment of a deli- 294. nite person, whose appellation in this case is often derived from the verb itself, the subject is not expiessed particularly : Herod. II, 47· θυσιη δε ήδε των υων Σελήνή 7Γ oieeraC Ιττεάν θυσγ ( SC . ό θυτήρ), την ούρήν άκρην και τον σπλήνα και τον επιπλοον συνθείς όμου κατ ών εκάλυψε τί} πιμελή. lb. 70. επεάν νώτον υό s δελεάσγ ( SC . ο aypevs, from the preceding aypai) περί ay κιστρον, μετιει ε9 μέσον τον ποταμόν. Cf. V, 16 . Xen. Anab. Ill, 4, 36. eiret U ey’iyvui- σκον αυτούς οι -Έλληνες βουλομενους άπιεναι και 6iayye\- λομενοικ, έκηρυξε ( SC . ό κήρυξ) τοϊί”Έ\\ησι παρασκευάσασθαι. lb. VI, 5, 25. πapηyyελλετo δε', τα μεν δόρατα επί τον δεξιόν ωμόν εχειν, εως σημαινοι rrj σαλ7Γί77 4 ( sc * ® σαλπικτης). Demosth. in Lept. ρ. 465, 14. όμως δε και τον νόμον υμιν αυτόν avayi /ωσεται SC. ό ypaμμaτeυς. In the same man¬ ner, when in general τδ πρ^μα may be considered as the subject. Thuc . I, 1Q9- we δε αύτω ου προυχωρει. 2 . The indefinite subject ns, ‘any one, one’, is sometimes also omitted in the singular of the verb. II. v, 287. (v, 276. ei yap νυν παρά νηυσι \ey οίμεθα παντες άριστοι es λόχον — —) ot /δε κεν ένθα τεόν ye μένος και / ; 295. 428 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative. Xeipas Soot to. Soph. (Ed. T. 314 Sq. AvSpa $ ώφεΧεΙν άψ too €χοι τ€ και ‘ voutTo, καΧΧιστοί wootoo. A similar passage occurs Xen.Mem.S. ι,2,55. (ΣωκρΑτη*) παρεκΑΧειότιμεΧεΙ- σθαι rod ωί φρονιμώτατον είναι καί ιύφεΧιμιότατον, Stows, ear re ντοό warpos ear re ύτοο άίεΧφού ear-re ύτο’ aXXov tioos βοόΧη- yat τιμασθαι, μη to o’lKelos eloat ττιστεύωνάμεΧρ, άΧΧά ττειρΑται, νφ wo So βούΧηται τιμασθαι, τούτοις ώφεΧιμος eloat. Plat. Men. p. 383. ότι ό ούκ ear to όρθώί ήγεΐσθαι, ear μη φρόνιμοί V’ τούτο όμοιοι όσμιο ονκ όρθώς ο'νχολισ/ηκόσι. Ohs. In many passages of this kind the second person is taken instead of the third, e. g. Soph. Tr. 2. όκμάθοκ for εκμΑ- θοι. Eurip. Or. 308. ooarjs — ύοξάζ^ for οοση — ϋοξάζη. Eurip. Jon. 1408. it now stands νττερβαίην for ύττερβαΐη 9 . 3. In dependent propositions the subject is often wanting, because it is construed with the verb of the pre¬ ceding proposition II. β', 409. pee yap κατά θομόο άύεΧ- φεοο, ok όττονεΐτο, for As όττον-εΐτο άΰεΧφόί. Cf. o', 310 sq. Od. τ', 219, SgC. Find. Pyth. IV, 6 Sqq. ίνθα xorj χρυσόων Atos ορν'ιχων ττάρεοροί — \epia χρησεν οικιστηρα Βάττοο καρττοφορον Αιβύας, ’ιερόν νόσον As ηύη Χι-κΑν κτίσσειεν εύάρ- ματοο ττόΧιυ. Mschyl. Agam. 500. rd* ei σόμεσθα λαμττά- . f ae(T . 313. Hindenb. ad Xen. M. S. in, 5, 24. 8 Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl. 186. Brunck. ad Arist. Plut 1030. Wessel. ad Herod, p. 720, 55. * Wessel. et Valck, ad Herod, p. 285, 88. 431 Syntax, Of the Use of the Nominative . Maj. p, 9· ποΧΧον ye δεω (τοι)? Σπαρτιατών υιεΊς άμείνουν ποιησαι), Otherwise ποΧΧου , oXiyou δει ΟΓ δειν, e. g. Thuc. ii, 77 . τους Π Χαταιεας ταΧΧα διaφuyόvτaς εΧαχίστου εδεησε διαφθεϊραι 11 . Thus Thuc. VII, 70. βραχν yap άπε- Χιπον ζιιναμφότεραι ( νηες ) διακόσιαι yεvέσθaι, c they wanted very little of being·’. The following constructions are more rare. Soph . Ant. 547. άρκεσω θνησκουσ ey ώ. Aj. 76. ένδον άρκείτω μενών, for άρκεσει εμε θνησκειν , άρκείτω αυτόν ένδον μενειν, as Aj. 88. εμοι μεν αρκεί τούτον εν δόμοις μενειν. Thuc. I, 132. ApyίXtoς - Χνει τα? επιστοΧάς , εν αΐς, νπονοησας τι τοιουτον προσεπεστάΧθαι , και αυτόν ενρεν εyyεyραμμένου κτείνειν, where the construction is 'ApyiXw 0veyeypawTo κτείνειν , is for ivey^yp. ’ ApyiXiov κτείνειν , e it was in the letter, that Artabazus should put to death A’. Hence in Isocr. Trapezit. p. 363. C. should be read ενρεθη yap εν τώ> ypaμ- ματείω yεypaμμεvoς αφειμενος απαντων τών συμβοΧαιων υπ εμού, not yεyραμμενον. DeiUOSth. in NeoBV ρ. 1347, 17· εμεΧ- Χεν εyypaφησεσθaι ’ ΑποΧΧόδωρος τριάκοντα τάΧαντα όφείΧων τώ δημοσίω - Herod. I, 155. extr. ουδεν δεινοί τοι εσονται μη άποστεωσι , for ον δεινόν εσται, μη εκείνοι άποστ. — Xenopll. Hist. Gr. VI, 4, 6. τών Θηβαίων ο\ προεστώτες 0Xoy'^ovTo - εί μη εζοι 6 δήμος ό Θηβαίων τάπιτηδεια, ότι κινδυνευσοι και η πόΧις αυτοϊς εναντία yei >εσθαι 3 as Thucyd. VIII, 91 · φάσκων (ο θηραμενης) κινδυνενσειν το τεΊχος τούτο και την πόΧιν διαφθεΊραι , for ότι κινδυνευσοι, κίνδυνος εσοιτο , μη η ποΧις εναντία y^voiTo, μη τό τείχος τούτο διαφθειρειε. Eurip. Or. 76 1 . ου προσηκομεν κοΧάζειν τοισδε , Φωκεων δε yrj, for ου προσηκει τοισδε , κοΧάζειν ημάς , f it does not become them to punish us’, lphig. T. 453. όνείρασι συμ- βαίην όίκοις ποΧει τε πατρώα τερπνών ύμνων αποΧανειν, for Dorv. ad Charit. p. 558. Bibl. Grit. 111 , 2. p. 15. E 2 U 432 Syntax. Of the Use'of the Nominative. συμβαιη, εμε άπόΧαύειν, where, however, Musgrave reads συμβαίη *v οίκοις. On the other hand, the verb, which should be referred to a subject, is changed into the passive, and is put imper¬ sonally, with the dative of the subject, e. g. Thuc. vn, 77. ικανά τοις ποΧεμίοις ευτό’χηται, for ικανώς οι ποΧεμιοι ευτυ- χηκασιν. Otherwise the third pers. pass, is put without a subject in the same manner as in Latin, itur. Thuc . i, 93. υπηρκτο του Πει^οαιώ?. To this may be referred Herod, vi, 112 . επεί δε σφι διετετακτο. Thuc. 1 , 46. επειδή αύτοις παρεσκευαστο , unless it be better to supply in the first το στρατόπεΰον, and in the second to ναυτικόν, in which case both would belong to §. 294. 1 . s * j 297. Instead of the nominative we have sometimes ]. an¬ other case with a preposition. Xen. Cyrop. vm, 3, 9 . ‘Έ στασαν δε πρώτον μεν των δορυφόρων εις τετρακ^σγιΧίους, έμπροσθεν δε των πυΧών, εις τετταρας, δισχϊΧιοι δε εκατέρωθεν των πυΧών, and thus generally in numbers which are given roundly. Thus also κατά with an accusat. Thuc. 1, 3. δοκει μοι — κατά έθνη αΧΧα τε και το Πελασγικόν επι πΧεΊστον άφ’ εαυτών την επωνυμίαν παρεγεσθαι, singulos populos. ibid, καθ έκαστους η δη τϊ} ομιΧία μάΧΧον καλει- σθαι ''ΈΧΧηνας. 2. What is called the accus. absolute, which is rendered by quod attinet ad, e. g. Od. a, 27 5. μητέρα δ’, ει οι θυμός εφορμάται 'γαμεεσθαι , άφ ίτω ες μεγαρον, 6 as far as regards the mother, let her return’, for μητηρ δε. See 426. 2. 3. The genitive, in the same sense. Plat. Phcedon. » p. 179· τών ποΧΧών καλών, οΐον ανθρώπων, η ίππων - άρα κατά τα αυτά εχει; See §. 320. 3. 298. The Predicate expresses the action or the quality, the condition, which is ascribed to the subject. The Syntax . Of the Use of the Nominative. copula, as it is called, serves to connect this with the subject, by which means the simple ideas (in the sub¬ ject and predicate) are converted into a proposition. This is always a verb. For this copula either a proper verb is assigned;—and this is chiefly the case with βίμί, f I am’, and other verbs which of themselves convey no perfect idea, but require the addition of another defini¬ tion in a substantive, adjective, or adverb; — or the copula and predicate are united in one verb, which takes place in those verbs which perfectly express a condition of themselves, e. g. Κύρος τ βθνηκε, c Cyrus is dead\ Frequently the condition, or action, expressed by the verb, requires besides, to be determined by means of a relation in which it stands to a person or thing; hence arises the determination of the oblique cases , which are governed by the verb. V , , « The verb, whether it be the copula alone, ora copula with the predicate, is determined by the subject, with respect to person and number. Of the persons, the first and second, in sing, dual, and plural, can only be put when the subject is a personal pronoun, either ex¬ pressed or merely understood for these persons, e. g. kyin μεν ασθενώ, σι) ερρωσαι, c I am ill, but you are well’, els οσας ο τΧημων είσπεπτωκα συμφοράς , f into what misfortunes have I, wretched man, fallen’. In all other cases the third person is put. When several subjects, of different grammatical persons, are put together, the verb in the predicate agrees with the chief person ; which is the first, with relation to the second or third; and the second, with relation to the third, as in Latin. Hesiod . Th. 646. η $rj yap μαΧα $ηρον ενάντιοι άΧΧηοισι νίκης και κράτβος περί μαρνάμεθ' ηματα πάντα, Ύιτηνες re θβοί καί οσοι 434 Syntax. OJ the Use of the Nominative. Κρόνον ε^ενόμεσθα. Euripid. ap JEschin. c. Tim. p. 254. Kayw μεν ουτω χ^ωστις εστ άνηρ σοφός \ο·γίζομαι ταΧηθες εις ανόρός φυσιν. Pldt. Tim. p. 304. aycnrq.v χρη μεμνημενον, ως ο Χε^γων νμεις τε οι κριται φυσιν άνθωπίνην εχομεν. ΧβϊΙ. Hist. GrV. II , 3, 15. επει και ε·γω και συ ττοΧΧά όη του άρεσκειν ενεκα Trj 7τόΧει και ειπομεν και επράζα- μεν. Eurip. Ον. 86. συ S η μακαρία, μακάριός θ’ ό σός κοσις ηκετον εφ’ ημάς αθΧίως κεκρα^ότας^. There are, however, exceptions to this rule. Soph. EL 622 . ω θρεμμ άναιόες, η σ’ €<γω, και ταμ επη και Tapya τάμα πόΧΧ’ ayav X0yeiv ποιεϊ, where different persons are not meant,, but the words τάμ επη κα\ Tapya τάμα are an illustration of εγώ, ‘ P, that is, my words and actions f make you speak so much’, and the predicate is referred to the explanation. Plat. Symp. p. 200. aXXrj yε πη εν νιρ εχω XεyειVj η y συ τε και ΤΙαυσανίας ε’ιπετην, for ειπετον (r). ΰ\.βΐΙ. Mem. S. IV, 4. 7. περί τον όικαίου πάνυ οιμαι νυν εχειν ειπειν, προς α ούτε συ ουτ αν αΧΧος ουοεις ουναιτ αντεί¬ πε ιν, for όυναισθε. 299. With regard to the number the natural construc¬ tion is, that the verb is put in the singular, dual, or plural, according to the number of the subject. In Greek, however, an exception takes place, which again has the force of a rule, viz. that the nominative of the neuter plur. has the verb in the singular, e. g. των όντων τα μεν εστιν εφ’ ημιν, τά όε ουκ εφ’ ημ'ιν. This idiom, however, is more observed by the Attics, than by the older writers in the Ionic and Do¬ ric dialects. The latter often join the neuter plur. with a plural verb, e. g. It. -f, 266. ούτε τι νώΐν όρκια εσ- σονται. λ', 310. άμηχανα tpya yevovTo , where the Scholiasts Person, ad Eur. Or. 1. c. X t Syntax . Of the Use of the Nominative. observe, that this is constructed άρχαϊκώς. Comp. II. β , 87. 8Q. 13.5. 459. 462. 464. 489- The Attics also sometimes join the verb in the plural with the neuter plur. especi¬ ally in two cases, 1. when the neuter plur. signifies living persons, e. g. Thuc. i, 58. τα τέλη { magistratus ) των Λακεδαιμονίων υπεσχοντο αυτοις. VII, 57· τοσαδε μεν μετά ’Αθηναίων έθνη δστράτευον. Xen. Anab . I, 2. extr. τα δε ηρπασμενα ανδράποδα , ην που εντυγχάνώσιν, άπολαμβά- νειν. Eurip. Hec. 1149· τεκν εν χεροιν επαλλον , ως πρόσω πατρδς ^γενοιντο (Pors. ySvoiro). 2. when the abstract is put for the concrete , and animate creatures, not things, are to be understood. Eur. Cycl . 206. πώς μοι κατ άντρα νεογονα βλαστήματα; η προς γε μαστοΊς ε’ισί * *. But there are also, besides these cases, numerous exceptions to the rule in Attic 2 . Frequently the plural of the verb is put with the 300 dual of the subject: II e, 275. τω δε τάχ δγγυθεν ηλθον } ελαυνοντ ώκεας 'ίππους. Comp, π , 337. σ, 605. Eurip. Phcen . 69 . τω δε ξυμβάντ έταξαν . In the same manner the verb in the dual is put with the plural of the subject, when no more than two per¬ sons or things are meant. II. ε , 10. δυω δε οι υιεες ηστην. Plat. Rep . V. ρ. 62. δυνάμεις άμφάτεραι εστον. Thus in II. S', 452. ως S’ οτε χείμαρροι ποταμοί κατ ορεσφι ρεοντες ες μισ^ά^κειαν συμβάλλετον δβριμον ύδωρ two streams are to be understood a . Hence the plural is often interchanged with the dual of the verb. Soph. (Ed. C. 1435. σφψν (Ismene and Antigone) S’ εύοδοίη Zeus 1 , ταδ εΐ τελείτε μοι θανοντ επει y Pors. ad Eurip. Or. 596. Heind. ad Plat. Cratyl. p. 137. z Fisch. hi, a. p. 342 sq. * Fisch. hi, a. p. 305. 436 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative, ov fxoL (ζωντι y αυθις εμετόν. μεθεσθε $ η$η 3 χαίρετον τε. Aristoph. Αν. 641. (Epops to Pisthetasrus and Euelpides. see V. 644 sq .) είσεΧθετ εις νεοττίαν yε την εμην - και τουνομ ημιν φράσατον. id. Plut. 75. (PlutUS to Carion and Chremylus) μεθεσθε vvv μον πρώτον - ακούετον $η. Plato Phcedr. P . 342. τω ακοΧάστω αυτοιν VTro^vyia) Xa- βοντε τας φοχας αφρουρους } o'way ay οντε εις ταυτόν, την υττο των 7 τοΧΧών μακαριστήν άίρεσιν ε'ιΧεσθην τε και $ιε~ 'Π’ρΟ’^αντο, και $ιαπραζαμενω το Χοιπον η$η χρωνται μεν αυτή, σπάνιά όε. Obs. I his reciprocal use ol the dual and plural appears to have been the cause, that sometimes, though seldom, the dual of the verb is put with the plural of the subject, even when more than two persons are signified (r). Ιί. θ’, 185. Έάνθε τε καί συ, TloSapye, και Α’ίθων λάμπε τε όιε, νυν μοι την κομιΰην αποτινετον (ν. 191·) αΧΧ εφομαρτειτον καί σπευ$ετον. Comp'. II. ε, 487- ι 3 182. Horn. Η. in Apoll. ιι. 277. (ν. 273. ω ζεινοι, τινες εστε ;) τιφθ ούτως ησθον τετιηότες. 307. αΧΧ ayeO , ως άν eyiuv ε'ίπω, πείθεσθε τάχιστα' ιστία μεν πρώτον κάθετον Χυσαντε βοείας. Comp. ν. 322. Find. 01. ιι, 156., μαθοντες $ε Χαβροι πayyXωσσ^a., κόρακες ως , άκραντα yapveTov Αιός προς όρνιχα θεΊον, where, however, Heyne after Dawes, has received froni the Scholiast the less natural reading yapυεμεv f Χάβροι είσι y αρυειν. Plato Theaet. p. 70. και περί τουτου παντες εζης οι σοφοί , πΧην Τ1αρμενί$ου, ζυμφερεσθον , Tlpωτayάpaς τε και ΉράκΧειτος και ΈμπεδοκΧης, where Sta¬ tus Eel. Phys . p. 42. has ξυμφερονται. Arat. Diosem . 291. και οφε βοώντε KoXotoi b . 30 J. With words of number in the singular the verb is very often put in the plural, because in such words the idea of several subjects is always included. II. β r , 278. ως h Dawes. Misc. Cr. p. 49. Heyne ad Pind. 1. c. (ad Iliad, a, 567.) hold that the passages out of the older writers are corrupt, or think that they must be explained differently. On the contrary side see Ern. ad II. a, 566. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 98. Fisch. in, b. p. 59, who, however, pioduces some instances which do not belong to this head. 437 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative. φάσαν η πΧηθύς. ο , 305. η πΧηθυς επι νηας Αχαιών άπονεοντο. Lferod. IX, 23. ώ'? σφι το πτΧηθος επεβοηθησαν. AEsch. Agam. 588. Τ ροίην εΧοντες δηποτ ’Apyeicov στόλο? Οεοις Χάφυρα ταυτα Tots καθ Έλλαόα δόμοις εινασσαΧευσαν. Thuc. I, 20. Αθηναίων το πΧηθος 'Ίππαρχον ο’ιονται υφ Αρμοδίου και ’ Αριστο·γ6ΐτονος τύραννον όντα αποθανειν. lb. 89· Αθηναίων δε το κοινον—διεκομίζοντο ευθυς } οθεν υπεζεθει'το } ποίιδας και ^γυναίκας. II, 4. τό δε πΧεΊστον και όσον μάΧιστα ην ζυνεστραμμενον , εσπίπτουσιν ες ο’ικημα. IV, 43. το δεξιόν κεράς των Αθηναίων και Καρυστίων—εδεξαντό Τ€ τους Κορινθίους και εώσαντο μόΧις. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 3, 10. ποΧυ δε y ενός ανθρώπων τόίς μεν εκ της yw φυομενοις εις τροφήν ού χρώνται } άπδ δε βοσκημάτων - Χωσι*. This is especially the case with έκαστος , and in the formula αΧΧοθεν αΧΧος . a. Od. σ , ult. βάν δ ’ ’ ίμεναι κείοντες εά προς δώμαθ έκαστος. Herod. Ill, 158. εμενον εν Trj εωϋτου τάξι έκαστος. VII, 144. εμεΧΧον Χάξεσθαι δρχηδδν έκαστος δέκα δραχμάς. Xen. F. L. 6, 1. εν μεν yap ταϊς αΧΧαις πόΧεσι των εαυτου έκαστος καί παίδων και οίκετων και χρημάτων άρχουσιν. Plat. Leg. VI, ρ. 322. Χαβόντες υπό μάΧης έκαστος — πορεύονται d . Obs. Otherwise έκαστος in the singular is added to a noun or pronoun plur. as an apposition, or a fuller definition. II. η , 17 5. οι δε κΧηρον εσημγναντο έκαστος. Comp. 185, fyc. In this case, the verb sometimes follows in the sigular, referred to έκαστος or some word equivalent to it, although the proper subject is in the plural. II. π, 264. οι δε ( σφήκες ) αΧκιμον ητορ εχοντες πρόσσω πας πετεται , και άμυνει οΐσι τεκεσσι. Cf. Her. νιπ. 86. Her. νιι, 104. μαχοίμην αν πάντων ηδιστα •-;--Τ--— c Moeris, ρ. 2. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 380. 565. Lips. Bibl. Crit. in, 2. p. 35. d Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. 785. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 197. Fiseh. in, b. p. 59 sq. 438 i Syntax. OJ the Use of the Nominative. evi τουτεων τών ανδρών, ot Ελλήνων έκαστος φησι τριών άξιος είναι. Hence the transition from the plural to the singu¬ lar Plat. Gorg. p. 12j. οι αλλοί 7ταντες δημιουργοί, βλεπον- τες 7τρος το εαυτών εργον έκαστος , ονκ εικη εκλεγόμενος 7 τροσφερει ά προσφέρει προς το εργον το αυτόν, αλλ* όπως αν εΐ$ός τι αύτω σχη τούτο, ο εργάζεται. Arist . Plut. 785. one reading is, νυττουσι ycip και φλωσι ταντικνήμια, Ενδεικνύμένος έκαστος ( Pors . ad Eur. Or. 1263.) Analogous to this is the construction in Milan . V. H. 10, 16. oi δε ούδείς αύτώ προσεΊχεν. Comp. Xen. Hist. Gr. ii, 2, 3. b. II. t, 311. ως μη μοι τρνζητε παρημενοι άλλοθεν άλλος. AEs. Ag. 606. ολολυγμον άλλος άλλοθεν κατά πτολιν ελα- σκον εύφημουντές. Eurip. Ph. 1263. παρεξιόντες δ' άλλος άλλοθεν φίλων, λόγοισι θαρσυνοντες, εξηυδων τάδε. Plat. Charm, in. και με ως ειδον εισιοντα εξ απροσδόκητου ευθύς πόρρωθεν ησπάζοντο άλλος άλλοθεν. Thus also ηρώτων δε άλλος άλλο id. ib. ρ. 107*. Obs. In a similar manner, according to the sense, is con¬ structed the following : πολυτελώς Άδώνια άγουσ εταίρα μεθ’ ετερών πορνών χύδην Diphil. αρ. Athen. νιι , ρ. 292. D. as in Livius χχι, 60. ipse dux cum aliquot principibus capiuntur. Thus also Lucian D. D. 12, 1. και νυν εκείνη ( η ‘Ρβα) —παραλαβούσα και τους Κορυβαντας—άνω και κάτω την 'ίδην περιπολουσιν * η μεν δλολύζονσα επί τίρ’Άττι, ο\ Κορύβαντες δε, fyc. 302. Besides these regular deviations from the proper construction, the following· occur, though more rarely: l. With the dual of the subject the verb is put in the singular. Aristoph. Vesp. 58. ημΊν γάρ ούκ ίστ ούτε καρυ εκ φορμίδος δούλω παραρριπτουντε τοις θεωμενοις. Plato Gorg. ρ. 1] 6. ! ίσως ούν βέλτιστου εστιν,—διελομενους και όμολογησαντας άλληλοις, εί ίεστι τούτω διττώ τώ βίω, σκε- φασθαι, τί διαφερετον άλληλοιν. Eustathius On II. ψ', 380, says, this is Αωρικώτερον. * Valck. ad Eur. Ph. p. 423. Wolf. Pr*f. ad II. p. lviii. - Syntax . Of the Use of the Nominative . 439 2. With the plural of the subject masc. and femin. the verb is put in the singular, as with the neuters. Pind. 01. XI, 4. μεΧ^άρυες ύμνοι υστέρων α,ρχαί Xoywv τεΧΧεται, as it should probably be 01. VIII, 10. αννεται Se προς χάριν ευσεβέων άντρων Χιταί } and Fragm. Pind. p. 68. V. 23. ed. Η . άχειταί τ ομφαι μεΧεων συν αυΧοις , αχειται ΣεμεΧαν έΧικάμττυκα χοροί { . Hom. Η. in Cer . 279- ξανθαι Se κόμαι κατενηνοθεν ωμούς. EtlT. Bacch. 1339· $ε$οκται τΧη- μονες φυ<γαί. Apoll. Rh. II, 65. ου$€ τι γίειν νηττιοι ύστατα κείνα κακτ) $ησαντες εν αίση. TJlUC. II, 3. αμαζας ες τας ο$ους καθίστασαν , tV άντι τείχους r\, the author had άρ¬ ματα in his head. The Grammarians call this schema Pindaricum and Boeotium. To this class also is referred the construction of the imperf. third pers. sing, ην with a noun masc. and fem. plural. Hesiod. Theog. 32 1. της 8 ην τρεις κεφαΧαί. Epigr. in Anal. Brunch. T. hi, p . 180. CLV. ην άρα κακεΊνοι ταΧακαρ^ιοι. Especially in the Doric dialect, in the fragments of Epicharmus in Athenseus, e. g. vn, p. 288. B. 306. A. fyc. In Attic for the most part in the Choral Songs only, or in passages where the Doric dialect occurs. Soph. Trach. 520. ην 8 άμφίττΧεκτοι κΧίμακες. Aristoph. Lys. 1260. ην yap των^ρες ούκ εΧασσως τάς ψαμμας, τοι Π ερσαι. Yet Eurip. Ion. 1146. ένην 8 ύφανται y ράμμασιν τοιαί8 ύφαί s . This ην however is probably an old Greek form for ησαν, which afterwards remained a Doric idiom. Obs. The passage in Hesiod. Th. 790 . (eg 'ίερου τ τοταμοΊο f Heyne has altered these passages: but see Herm. de Metr. P. p. 246 sqq. Hom. H. in Cer. 493. must be read ττρόφρων, for σεΐο follows See Ruhnk. ad H. in Cer. p. 74 sq. Dorv. ad Char. p. 364. Lips. Fiseh. hi, a. p. 345.· g Valck, ad Her. p. 376, 21. Wolf, ad Hesiod. Th. 321. 303. 440 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative. peei διά νύκτα μελαιναν, Ωκεανοί ο κεράς' δεκάτη δ’ επι μοίρα δεδασται.) Εννέα μεν (sc. μοιραι ) περί yrjv τε και ενρεα νώτα θαλάσσης δίνφς apyvpeys ειλ^μενος εις άλα βάλλει' η δε μι εκ πετρης προρεει is merely constructed according to the sense, because the εννεα μοιραι are what is properly called Oceanus. When several subjects are united by a conjunctive particle, the verb, which belongs to all, should properly be in the plural; but it is frequently governed in its num¬ ber by one substantive, and mostly by that which is nearest to it, if it be a singular, or neuter plural. II. ε\ 703. ένθα τίνα πρώτον, τίνα δ ύστατον εζενάριζεν *Έκτωρ τε ΤΙριάμοιο πάίς και χαλκεος^Αρης ; II. η, 386. ην^ει Πρίαμός τε και άλλοι Τ ρωες άyaυoι είπειν. π , 844. σοι yap εδωκε νίκην Ζευς Κ ρονίδης και ’ Απόλλων. Her. V, 21. ερπετό yap δη σψι και ό'χηματα και θεράποντες και η πάσα πολλή παρασκευή. Eur. Suppl. 14β. Tt/£eu9 μά-χτην ξυνηφε Πολι/- νείκης θ' άμα Thuc. ι, 29· εστρατ^ει τών νέων Άριστεύς ο rie\Xt/cou και Καλλικράτης ο ΚαλΧίου καί Ύιμάνωρ ό Ύιμάν- θους. Comp. VII, 43. Plato Theag. ρ. 11. τίνα επωνυμίαν εχει Ιππίας και Περίανδρος ; and before this τίνα επωνυμίαν εχει Βάκις τε και Σίβυλλα και ό ημεδαπός Άμφίλυτος ; lb. p. 20. ότε άνίστατο εκ του συμποσίου ο Τ ίμαργος και Φίλη- μων ό Φιλημωνίδου , άποκτενουντες Νικίαν h The singular also is put, when the more remote subject is in the singular, or is a neuter plural. II. p } 387. y ου'νατά τε κνημαί τε πόδες θ' υπενερθεν εκάστου χβϊρες τ οφθαλμοί τε παλάσσετο μαρναμενοίν. lb. \|/, 380. πνοιρ δ Εν μήλο ι ο μετάφρενον ευρεε τ ώμω θερμετο. Plat. Euthyd. ρ. 69 . εστι yap εμο^ε και βωμοί καί 'ιερά οικεία και πα¬ τρώα και ταλλα, οσά περ τοίις άλλοις *Αθηι/αίοις τών τοιου - των. This, however, seems only to be the case in εστι , h Dorvill. ad Charit. p. 364. 497 . Lips. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 411. Fisch. in, b. p. 61 . 441 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative . yiyveraij when these verbs stand before their subject. Comp. Plat. Rep. n, p. 218. v, p. 31. See §. 302. 1. also 42i hh . Homer joins two verbs of different numbers Od. μ, 43. τω ο ούτι yvvri και νηττια τέκνα, o’licaSe νοστησαντι , 7 τα- ρίσταται , ovSi yavvvTai. When two or more substantives are united by fj , ‘ or*, which reciprocally exclude each other,, the verb which is common to them should properly be in the singular; but sometimes it is in the plural. Longin. 14. ? τώς αν ΐΙΧάτων η Δημοσθένης ύψωσαν, η εν 'ιστορ'ιμ θονκυ$ί$ης ', as in Cicero Or. η, 4, 16. ne Sulpicius — aut Cotta plus quam ego apud te valere videantur. Heusing. ad Cic. de Off. i, 41. Sometimes the verb is governed in its number not by the subject, but by the substantive, which stands with the verb as the predicate. Herod, vi, 112. ησαυ Si στάδιοι ούκ εΧασσονες το μεταιχμίου αυτεωυ , η οκτω, for ην , referred to μεταιχμίου. II, 16. το $ ώυ 7 νάΧαι άϊ θηβαι A.’ly υτττος εκαΧεετο. Comp. VIII. 46. Thuc. Ill, 112. εστου Si Svo Χόφω η Ί $ομενη νψηΧώ. Cf. I, 110. Avistoph. Thesm . 21. οΐόυ τι ί του ’στιν αι σοφαι ξυυουσίαι\ Isocr. Paneg. ρ. 54. Β. (c. 18.) εστι yap αρχικώτατα των εθνών και μεyιστaς Sυvaστείaς εχοντα Σκυθαι και Θράκες και σαι 11 . Similarly Xen. Mem. S. ι, 4, 13. τι φυΧον αΧΧο, η οι άνθρωποι, θεούς θεραττεύονσιν ; for θεραττενει. This, how¬ ever, may belong also to §. 301. Very often the verb ειμί is wanting, especially with 304. 305 . hh Heind. ad Plat. Euthyd. p. 403. » Schaefer Meletem. in Dion. H. spec. I. Ρ. I. p. 24. ϋ Dorv. ad Charit. p. 565. Pleind. ad Plat. Farm. p. 243 sq. 442 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative. €TC ? Eurip. Med. 612. ως έτοιμος (sc. ειμι) άφθόνω δού.αι \epi. id. Troad. 74. ετοιμ , a βούΧει, τάττ εμού (sc. εστιδ) Plat Phcedr. p. 332. (y φυχη) δουΧεύειν έτοιμη^. Thus also with verbals. Xen. Mem. S. ι, 7 , 2. el τις , μη ων ay αθος αυΧητης , δοκειν βονΧοιτο } τί άν αντιρ 7 τοιητεον ε'ιη; άρ ού τα εζω της τέχνης μιμητεον τούς aya θούς αύΧητάς ; καί 7τρωτον μεν - και τούτιρ ταυτα ττοιητεον' εττειτα — και τουτω 7τοΧΧούς ειταινετάς τταρασκευαστεον. άλλα' μην epyov ye ονδαμού Χητττεον. And with φρούδος. Euvip. Hec. 163. φρούδος ττρεσβυς^ φρούδοι 7 ΓαΊδες, 8$C. It is also generally omitted after ούδεις , where the relative ος, οστις follows with a negation. Herod. v, 97 . και ουδεν ( εστιν ) 6 τι ούκ ύττεσχετο. Soph. (Ed. T. 372. σύ δ άθΧιός ye , ταύτ όνειδί ζων, α σοι ουδεις ος ούχι τώνδΐ ονειδιεϊ τάχα. ‘ there is no one of these who will not immediately reproach you with the same’, nemo non tibi exprobrabit. Plat. Menon. p. 329 . el yovv τινα εθεΧεις ούτως ερεσθαι των ενθάδε, ούδεις οστις ού yεXάσετaι. This phrase, however, is usually considered as one word, in the sense of the Latin, nemo non, c every one’. Plat. Hipp. Maj. p. 43. KaTayeXip αν ημών ούδεις οστις ού. In this case ούδεις is put in the same case as the pron. rela¬ tive following*. Plato Menon. p. 329· άτε και αυτός 7 rape- χων αυτόν έρωταν των ΕΧΧηνων τφ βουΧομενω ο τι αν τις βούΧηται , και ούδενι οτω ούκ άττοκρινόμένος, id. Phaedon. p. 2 65. Α·7γ οΧΧοδωρος — ουδενα οντινα ού κατεκΧαυσε των τταροντων. id. Alcib . I, p. 8. εΧττίδας εχεις εν τρ ί τοΧει ενδει- ζασθαι, ότι αυτή τταντός άζιος el, ενδειζάμενος δε οτι , ούδεν ο k Dorv. ad Charit. p. 228. Valck. ad Eur. Ph. p. 355. 'Pors. ad Eurip. Phcen.’983. Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 2 67 . Schaef. Melet. in Dion. H. 1 , 1, p. 43 sq. 114. 443 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative. Iji „ Λ '·' % τι ου παραυτίκα όυνησεσθαι. Xenoph. Cyvop. I, 4, 5. ούόένα έφασαν όντιν ούκ άποστρέφεσθαι 1 . The verbs which in themselves do not constitute 306. a complete predicate, but require another word, are, with the exception of verbs signifying, ‘being, or becoming’ (είμί, υπάρχω, γίνομαι) or those in which this idea is con¬ veyed, as μένω, πέφυκα, κατέστην, 8$c .—chiefly the pas¬ sives, which signify f tO be called’ ( καλούμαι, ονομάζομαι, 8sc.) ‘to be named or chosen for anything’ ( άιρουμαι , χειροτονούμαι, 8$c.) 6 to appear, to be considered as any thing, to be known’, ( φαίνομαι, έοικα, νομίζομαι). They have also the additional word in the nominative. This idiom is used also in Latin, as well as in Greek. To this belongs also άκούειν, signifying, ‘to be called’, Demosth. pro Cor. p. 241. άντί yap φίλων και ξένων, a τότε ώνομάζοντο, ηνίκα έόωροόάκουν, νυν κόλακες και θεοις εχθροί και τάλλα , α ί νροσηκει, πάντ άκουσιν . Theocr. 29, 21. αι yap ώόε πογ\ς, 0yaOov μέν άκουσεαι εξ αστών. With όνομά έστι and the dative of the person or thing, and όνομα έχει, which refers to a subject, the name is put in the nominative, as with όνομάζεσθαι, with which both phrases accord in signification; and not, as in Latin, in the genitive or dative, est ei nomen Tullii or Tullio. Herod. II, 17· τοισι ούνάματα κέεται τάόε' τφ μέν Σάίτικόν αύτέων, τφ όέ Ί$/\.ενόησιον. VII, 26. ουνομα όέ τιρ ουρεί τοντω και τρ άτραπφ τωντό κειται Ανόπαια. Plato Theag. ρ. 11. Εί 7 τοί 5 ούν αν μοι , τίνα έπωννμίαν έχει Β άκις τε και Σίβυλλα και ό ημεόαπός *Αμφίλυτος ; ΘΕ. τίνα yap άλλην, ώ Σώκρατες, πλην yε χρησμωόοί ; — τίνα επωνυμίαν έχει Ιππίας και Πε¬ ρίανδρο? \ ΘΕ. οιμαι μέν, τύραννοι, de Leg.. XII, ρ. 207· 1 Herm. ad Vig. ρ, 709, 29. Schneid. ad Xen. Cyrop. 1. c. 444 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative, ·* m δικαστηρίων δε τό μεν πρώτον αιρετοί δικασται yiyvoivT αν, ους αν ο (pevyiov τε και ο διώκων εΧωνται Koivrj, διαιτηται δικα¬ στών τοννομα μάΧΧον πρεπον εχοντε$. Symp. p. 236. οι δε κατα εν τι είδος ιοντες και εσπουδακότες το του οΧον ονομα εχουσιν, ερωτά τε και ερα,ν και ερασταί. Hence in Cratyl. p. 232. ον φησί σοι Έpμoyεvει ονομα είναι we should proba¬ bly read ΈJpμoyεvη, as 'Pheaet, p. 64. >} δη πpoayωyείa ονομα, not πpoayωyείa m , The words which in the predicate are added to such verbs, are mostly adjectives, though sometimes also sub¬ stantives and adverbs. a. The adjectives are sometimes put in the gender and number of the subject, sometimes in the neuter sing, number, with subjects in the masc. and feminine or plural. See under the head of Adjective. h. Examples of substantives in the predicate are already given, §. 263. Obs. In this case, however, a noun is often put, which indicates an employment or thing in general, instead of a word that properly belongs to the case in question, abstractum pro concreto, II, π , 498. σοι yap eyco και επειτα κατηφείη και ’όνειδος εσσομαι, Comp. II. ρ, 38. 636. χ, 358. 433. Herod. VI, 112. τέως δε ην τοίσι'ΈΧΧησι και τό ουνομα τό Μ,ηδων φόβος άκουσαι. Eurip. Ph. 7 33. και μην τό νικ$ν εστι παν ενβουΧία. and passim.' This substantive in the predicate is often different in gender and number from the subject. II, η , 98. η μεν δη Χωβη τάδε y εσσεται αινόθεν αϊνώς. Thuc. II, 44. ιδιει yap των ονκ οντων Χηθη οι επιλυόμενοι ( παιδες ) τισιν εσονται. Plat. Menon. p. 372. ουτοί yε ( ο'ι σοφισται) φα - Heind. ad Plat. Theat. ρ. 307. ad Cratyl. p. 6'. m 445 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative. . ^ A f * νερά εστι λωβη τε καί όιαφθορα των avyy Γίνομε νων, 1 . e. λωβωνταί τε /cat διαφθείρουσι τοι)? avyyiyv. In the same way are to be explained the passages in Thuc. iv, < 26 . αίτιον δε ην οι Λακεδαιμόνιοι προειπόντες, for αίτιοι ησαν. VIII, 9 · αίτιον s ky ενετό της αποστολής των νεών οι μεν πολλοί των Χιών ονκ ειδότες τα πρασσομευα , οι δε όλί·γ οι ξυνειδότες, where the participle with the subject in the nominative is not put instead of the accus. with the infin. according to the opinion of the Scholiast, although it might also be αίτιον δε ην or € 7 ενετό, ότι οι Λακεδαιμ « προειπον , ότι οι μεν πολλοί γ\δεσαν } and this IS the only construction admitted in Latin. In the same manner Thucydides began the construction 111 , 93. αίτιον δε ην οί τε θεσσαλοί, εν δυνάμει όντες των ταυτμ χωρίων και ων επι τη yfj εκτίζετο , φοβούμενοι , μη σφισι μεyάλr| ίσχυί παροικώσι, φθ ε ί ρ οντ ες καί πόλε μουντές, but from the distance of the principal verbs from their nominative, being sepa¬ rated by other participles, he was led to consider the last part as an independent proposition, and therefore altered the construction, ίφθειρον καί επολεμουν , and thus the words αίτιον δε ην are similar to the phrase τεκμήριου δε 3 σημείου δε, except that yap could not follow ( οί τε yap Θ.), because properly o\ θεσσαλοί should be the subject to αίτιον ην. c. Adverbs in the predicate. Herod, vi, 109 . τοίσι δε 308. Αθηναίων aTpa^yoiai εyίυovτo δίχα ai y νωμαι. I hucyd. IV, 6 l. ου yap τοις εθνεσιν , ότι δίχα πεφυκε , του ετερου εχθει προσίασιν. Jristot. Polit. IV, 3. fin. εάν δίχα η εκ¬ κλησία y^Tai. Xenoph. Cyrop. IV, 1 , 18 . εί — μαθησον- ται, χωρίς y ενόμενοι, ημιν εναντιουσθαι. Herod. VIII, 60, εν Ίίαλαμινι ημίιν καί λόyιόν εστι των εχθρών κμτν π ε ρθε 7 ενεσθαι. Eurip. Iphig. Τ. 1014. άλις τό κείνης αίμα ( εστί), as Or. 1037. άλις τό μητρός αΐμ’' eyw δε σ ου κτενω (where F VOL. II. , / 309. 446 Syntax. Oj the Use of the Nominative. the opposition is, άλλ αύτόχειρι θνησκ€ , and on this account an emphasis is thrown on eyw) n . Obs. The passage in Pluto Euthypr. p. 4. is not in this class, (MeXtTos) μοι φαίνεται των πολίτικων μόνος άρχεσθαι ορθως. όρθως yap όστι των νόων πρώτον επιμεληθηναι, όπως εσονται ότι άριστοι. For here όρθως εστι is not for ορθόν εστι, but it would be fully: όρθως yap των πολίτικων άρχεσθαι εστι των νέων επιμεληθηναι, ί The care of youth is the pro¬ per commencement of state affairs’, as ib. p. 32. ap oSv ορθως αιτειν αν ειη , ων $εομεθα 7 rap εκείνων , ταυτα αυτούς αιτειν. Thus also Leg. Ill, p. 147. £et και avayKaiov τιμάς τε και ατιμίας όιανεμειν. ΚΛ. Όρθως.· Λθ. Εστι $ε ορθως (ύιανεμειν τιμ. και ατ.), τιμιώτατα μεν και πρώτα τα περί την φυγήν cty αθά κεΊσθαι. ib. ρ. 172. τί μετά τουτ είπεΊν όρθως εστιν (ειπεϊν) ; and in the passages which Heusde Spec . in Plat. p. 6. adduces, viz. Cratyl. p. 239. Hipparch. p. 260. With verbs also which have a perfect signification of themselves, a second nominative case is put as a predi¬ cate, which is to be explained by ως , ‘ as’. Soph. El. 130. yeveθλa yewawv τοκεων , ηκετ εμών καμάτων παραμυθίαν , ‘as a comfort, a comforter’, ib. 1141. άλλ’ kv ξενρσι χερσι κηύευθεις ταλας 3 σμικρός προσηκεις ογκο 9 εν σμικριρ κυτει°. With substantives also, which have a generic significa¬ tion, a more precise definition of them, or the name, is put in the nominative. Thuc. I, 96. και Ελληνοταμίαι τότε π pah - τον Άθηναίοις κατέστη άρχη, οι όδεχοντο τον φόρον. - ην όε ο πρώτος φόρος ταχθείς τετρακόσια τάλαντα και όξη- κοντα 3 where,in Latin, it would be magistratus qucestorum Gracia, tributum quadringentorum talentorum Id. hi, 104. την πεντετηρίόα τότε πρώτον μετά την κάθαρσιν εποιησαν οι Αθηναίοι τα Αηλια. Xen. Vect. Ill, 9 . ύεκα μναι εισφορά. IV, 23. προσούος εξήκοντα τάλαντα, ib. 24. η Valck. ad Ph. ν. 1241. ° Koen. ad Gregor, p. 153. I 447 Syntax. Of the Use of the Nominative. εκατόν τάλαντα η προσοόος εσται. but III, 10. όυοιν μναιν πρόσοόος. Comp. Anab. ill, 4, 7. I * Sometimes also a nominative is put without a verb following, nominativus absolutus. These are ανακολου¬ θίας where the writer considers the thing which he is about to speak of, abstractedly or as a subject, but takes occasion, by means of a parenthesis, to change the con¬ struction. Soph . (Ed. C. 1239. ev (t) (yrjpq τλημων oSe, ovk ey ώ μόνος, παντόθεν βόρειος ως τις ακτά κυματοπληξ γειμερία κλονεΊτας ως και τόνόε κατάκρας όειναι κvμaτoayeϊς αται κλονεονσιν άεί ξυνουσας for τλημων οδε αταις κλονεί- ται. Plat. Theaet. ρ. 116. σπονόαί Sg εταιρειών επ' άρχας η σύνοόοι και όεΊπνα και συν αύλητρίσι κώμος ούόε όναρ πράτ- τειν προσίσταται αύτοίς. ΧβϊΙ. Hier. IV, 6. ώσπερ οι αθλη- ται ούχ, όταν ίόιωτών yεvωvτaι κρείττονς , τούτο αυτούς ευφραίνει , άλλ’, όταν τών άvτayωvιστωv ηττους , τούτ αυτούς άνια, for τουτω εύφραίνονται — άνιώντας as SOOtt after¬ wards ουτω και ό τύραννος — ευφραίνεται — τουτιρ λυπέΊται. Comp, νι, 16. Thus also Cicero de Fin. ii, 33, 107. hcec leviora , poema , orationem cum aut scribis aut legis , — signum , tabula , locus amcenus , ludi, venatio, villa Luculli {nam si tuam dicerem , latebram haberes ; ad corpus diceres periinere ) sed ea, quae dixi , ad cor- pusne refer s p ? * The nominative is used also in exclamations. Soph. Trach. 1046. ώ πολλά Srj καί θερμά καί Xoy ω κακά καί "χερσί καί νώτοισι μο'χθησας Gyd ! Eurip . Iph. A. 1305. ω όυστάλαινα eyal ! ρ Kuster. ad Arist. Plut. 277. Hemsterh. ad Lucian, in, p. 377. Brunck. ad Soph. Antig. 260. ad Arist. Ran. 1437., Davis, ad Max. T. xxiv, 3. ad Cicer. Tusc. tii, 8. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 389. ad Cratyl. p. 6 8. 310 . 311 312. 448 Of the Vocative. The vocative is used, as in English and Latin, in addressing an object. With respect to the Greek lan¬ guage the following remarks will be sufficient: l. For the vocative the nominative is often used. II» 7, 277· Zeu 7 τατερ -HeXto? θ , δς πάι nr έφορμς. Plat. Symp. ρ. 1 65. ο Φαληρευς οντος Απολλόδωρο8, ον περιμενείς; Xen. Cyr . VI, 3, 33. καί συ δε, ό αρχών των έπι ταϊς καμηλοις άντρων, όπισθεν των άρμαμαξών έκτάτ - TOU q . 2. The vocative is often put in the singular when the verb is in the dual or plural. Soph. (Ed. C. 1102 . ώ τεκνον, η παρεστον ; 1104. προσέλθετ ώ παϊ, πατρί, where CEdipus points out Antigone alone, who has addressed him, but means Ismene also. Od. β\ 310. Άντίνο, οίπως έστιν ύπερφιάλοισι μεθ* ύμΊν δαίννσθαι. Comp. Od. ά , 130 Γ . 3. When a person turns suddenly from a narration, &c. to an address, or passes in an address from one person to another, the vocative is commonly put first. Hesiod, ερ·γ. 210. Qs εφατ ωκνπετης Ιρηζ , ταννσίπτερος ορνις» Ω Πέρση, σν $ ακούε δίκης. Comp. 246. 272. II. £',429. Soph. El. 507. χωροιμ αν ες τοδ , Αντιγόνη' σν & ενθάδε φύλασσε πατέρα τονδε. Plat. Theag. ρ. 17. Ιίάνυ καλώς λε**γεις. Ω 2α )κρατες, προς σε δ αν ηδη είη ο μετά τούτον λό·γος* (r). η Gregor, ρ. 47. et Koen. Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. v. 1332. Mu^gr. ad Eurip. Iph. T. 1234. Brunck. ad Soph. Aj. 89. Fisch. in, a! p. 319 sq. r Brunck. ad Arist. Ran. 1479- Soph. Phil. 369. ? Porson. ad Eurip. Or. 614. 449 Syntax. Of the Genitiue. ' The remaining relations, which the verb in the pre- 313 dicate requires to be adjoined, either according to its nature, or in certain combinations, are expressed by what are called the oblique cases (i. e. those which must always be dependent upon other words) the genitive, da¬ tive, and accusative. The most extensive range among ** these cases belongs to The Genitive , which may stand not only with the predicate, but with any word of the proposition, and expresses in a certain degree a relation in general. Each idea of relation, (whether it be expressed by a substantive, adjective, verb, adverb, or pronoun, and whether it requires the addition of the definite relation, for the sake of perspicuity, as f desirous, &c/ or, being an intelligible and perfect idea of itself, becomes an idea of relation only in certain cases,) takes the noun by which this relation is determined in the genitive. In many cases, e. g. where the substantive is joined with others in the genitive,in the question, f whose*? the Greek language agrees with the Latin and English. Those cases are the most common, where the genitive indicates that thing or person in which another is, or which belongs to another, as the subject ot the action, the situation, &c.' But frequently the genitive also expresses the object of an action or feeling expressed in another noun, and is used objectively, as in Latin ; a relation which in English is sometimes expressed by prepositions, e. g. πόθος υ\ου , desiderium filii , ‘ not the regret of thy son, i. e. which the son has, but regret for the son\ Soph . (Ed . C. 63 1 . τίς Sijr αν άνδρός ςύμό· veiav €κβόλοι roiouSe ; ‘ good-will towards such a man . Eurip. Phccn. 1757. fyyyovov νβρίσματα, ( insults of- 450 I 314. Syntax. Of the Genitive. fered to the brother’, injuria fratris. Id. Androm. 1060 . yvvatKos αίχμαλωτίδος φόβος, c fear of the slave’, εγθος Κορινθιων, ε'χθρα Αακεδαιμονίων, φιλία Αημοσθενους, εύνοια Αθηναίων Thuc. vii, 57 . Comp. Xen. Anah. ιν, 7, 20. Passages also occur, where substantives which are de¬ rived from verbs, or correspond to verbs which take the object in the dative, are constructed with the genitive. Eurip. Or. 123. νερτερωυ δωρήματα , f offerings of the dead, i. e. offered to the dead’. Plat. Leg. vii, p. 342. εν (το???) των θεών θυμασιν. Soph. Antig. 1185. είίτγματα Παλλα^ο?, prayers to Pallas’, Thuc. n, 79* η τών ΥΥλαταιεων €7τ ιστρατεία, ‘the march against the Thebans’. Id. i, 108. εν άττοβάσει της yrj$, ‘in the departure from the country’. Obs. 1. Sometimes one substantive governs two different geni¬ tives in different relations. Her. \ ι,2. ΙστιαΓο? — Σαρδώ νήσον την μεyίστηv υποδεζάμενος κaτεpyάσaσθaι J ύπεδυνε των Ιωνων την ηyεμovίηv τον προς ΑαρεΊον πολέμου, ‘ the leading of the Ionians in the war against Darius’. Thuc. ill, 12, el τω δοκουμεν αδικεί v προαποστάντες διά την εκείνων μελλησιν των εις ημάς δεινών, c on account of their delay with respect to the harm . Plato Republ. i, p. 150. ενιοι δε καί τάς των οικείων προπηλακίσεις του yηpως οδύρονται , when the genitive του y ηρως is used objectively , ‘ the, insults which the relations offer to old age’. Isocr. Panath. p. 249. A. (Ayaμεμvωv τους βασιλείς επεισε κινδυνευειν και πολεμειν) υπέρ του μη την ΕΧλαδα πασ'χειν υπό των βαρβάρων μήτε τοιαυτα , μη θ' οΐα προτερον avTrj συνεπεσε περί την IleXo7ro£ μεν άπάσης ΙΙελοποννησ ου κατάληψιν, Ααναοΰ δε της πόλεως της Αργείων, Κάδμου δε θηβων. 4 _ Obs. 2. The following are abbreviated phrases, which cannot be explained by the above modes: άρμα Ίππων Νισαίων Herod. vii, 40. ‘ a chariot drawn by Nisaean horses’, λευκής γιόνος πτε- ρνξ Soph. Antig. 114. ‘a snow-white wing, a wing of snow\ The following cases are especially to be noticed: 451 Syntax. Of the Genitive. I. To words of all kinds other words are added in Si5. the genitive, which shew the respect in which the sense of those words must be tak^n ; in which case the geni¬ tive properly signifies, ‘with regard to’. l. With verbs : in the phrases ώς, όπως, πώς, όντως ϊχει, c to be qualified or endowed in any manner what¬ ever’, se habere. Herod, vi, 116. * * Αθηναίοι δε, ώς ποδών ειχον, τάχιστα εβοηθεον ες τγ άστυ , ut seSe habebant quoad pedes, i. e. quantum pedibus valebant, ‘as fast as they could run’. Thus also Plat. Gorg. p. 131, and elliptically Msch. Suppl. 849. σουσθ επί βάριν όπως ποδών Herod. ΙΧ, 66. όκως αν αυτόν όρεωσι σπουδής εχοντα. V, 20. καλώς εχειν μέθης, ‘ to be pretty drunk’. I, 30. μετρίως εχειν βίου. Eurip. Hipp. 462. εύ εχειν φρενών. Soph. CEd. Τ. 345. ώς ορ^ης εχω. Thuc. I, 22. ώ εκάτερος τις εύνοιας η μνημης εχοι , ‘ as each wished well to a party, or remem¬ bered the past’. II, 90. ώς είχε τάχους έκαστος. Thus also Plat . Gorg. p. 13. πώς τα άστρα προς άλληλα τάχους εχει, and before, προς αυτά και προς άλληλα πώς εχει πλή¬ θους, c as they stand in relation to each other with regard to number’. Rep. II, p. 221. τοσαυτα λεγάμενα αρετής περί και κακίας, ώς άνθρωποι και θεοί περί αυτά εχουσι τιμής, τί οίόμεθα άκουουσας νέων φυχάς ποιειν, ί. e. ώς ά. και 0. αυτά f / yf · ξ/ f τιμώσι. Ill, Ρ· 267- όπως πραξεως εχει, 1. e. όπως πράττει. Gorg . ρ. 53. ον yap οιδα, παιδείας όπως εχει και δικαιοσύνης, ignoro, quam sit doctus, quam bonus vir , Cic. Tusc. Qu. V, 12. Leg. IV, ρ. 163. vaυπηyησίμης ύλης ό τόπος πώς εχει ; ‘how is the place with respect to timber for ship¬ building’? Thus Plat. Lys. p. 241. in Heindorf, §. 33. it is properly τους ούτως άyvoίaς έχοντας, and Leg. IX, ρ. 17. it should be πώς εχει συμφωνίας , not της συμφ. Xen. Cyrop. νπ, 5,56. ουτω τρόπου εχειν, eo ingenio esse t . ___—_.— - . .... - — .. . *- - t Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. 1 , p. 228. Valck. ad Herod, p. 263, 33. ad Eur. Hippol. 462. Wessel. ad Her. p. 7 22 , 36. Fisch. hi, b. * P· 72. 452 Syntax. Of the Genitive. Plat. Rep. VII, p. 239· vyieivm έχει αι)το? αύτοΰ — περί is put with this genitive Plat. Rep. viii, p. 186. In the same manner ηκω also is used. Herod, i, 30. ΎέΧΧφ — του βίου ευ η κουτί — τεΧευτη του βίου Χαμπρο- τάτη επ eyeveTo. Eltrip. Heracl. 214. yevovs μεν ηκεις ωδε τοΊσδε, Δημοφών, properly, 4 with respect to thy family, thou art thus circumstanced in relation to them', for ωδε προσηκεις τοισδε yevei' 1 . With other verbs also the genitive is put on the same ground, e. g. €7 reiyeaOai άρηος II. τ', 142. ' to be in haste with respect to the battle* (or on account of) έπ. οδοίο , f with respect to the setting out*, Od. a, 309. un¬ less here, as Od. v , 30. e', 399· έπε'ηεσθαι signifies f to long after any thing*, as ΧιΧαιόμενός π ep όδοΊο Od. a , 315.— Hesiod, epy. 577· ηως τοι προφέρει μεν όδου, προφέρει δε καί έ py ου^ c forwards in respect of a journey and of work’— Tyrt.m, 40. ( Brunck. Gnom. p.63.). ουδέ τις αυτδν βΧάπτειν ουτ αίνους ούτε δίκης έθέΧει , Γ to injure him neither with respect to reverence, which forbids it, nor to justice’, (r) —In the same manner Soph. Antig. 22. ου yap τάφου vitjv τω KaaiyvYjTU) Κρέων τον μεν προτίσας (for the simple τίσας) τον δ' άτιμάσας έχει ; ‘ honouring him, in giving him interment*; where the sense of f depriving* might be given to the verb ατιμάζω as to the verb βχάπτω, in the former example; but this very construction of the verb 4 to deprive’, seems to be derived from that which is here explained. See §. 331. Hence Plat. Hipparch. p. 264. Xέyeτaι δε υπό των χαριεστέρων ανθρώ¬ πων και ό θάνατος αυτου (του Ιππάρχου) γενέσθαι ου, δι ά ο\ ποΧΧοι ιρηθησαν, διά την της άδεΧφης άτι μίαν της ρ. 72- 85. Toup. Em. in Suid. T. in, p. 12. Brunck. ad Arist. Ly- sistr. l73. Valck. ad Herod, p. 5J7, .96. ad Eurip. Ph. 36’4. Syntax. Of the Genitive. 453 κανηφορίας , ‘because Hipparchus had refused to the sis¬ ter of Harmodius the honour of bearing the baskets i. e. of being one of the κανηφόροι , where the substantive retains the construction of the verb. Of the double geni¬ tive see §. 314· Thuc. III;92. του προς'Αθηναίους πολέμου καλώς αύτο'ις εόόκει η πόλις (η Τ ρσχίν) καθιστασθαι επι re yap τη Εύβοια ναυτικόν παρασκευασθηναι αν, ωστ εκ βρα¬ χέος την όιάβασιν y '^νεσθαι, της τε επί Θράκης παροόου χρησίμως εξειν, c the city appeared to be favourably circumstanced with respect to the war*, &c. Thus the passage in Eurip. Med. 286. is to be rendered with Mus- grave '. Συμβάλλεται όε πολλά τουόε όείματος, wheiC, as in χρησίμως εχειν ΟΓ χρήσιμον είναι , the construction πρός τι is more usual. — ύφιεναι opyης, ‘ to remit one s anger , Herod. 1 , 156. in, 52. where the middle is more usual*; άνιεναι της ύφόόου, ‘ to slacken in one’s approach’, Thuc.\ 11 , 43— Xen. Hier . 4, 1. και πίστεως όστις ελαχιστον μετεχει , ιτώϊ οι/χί μεγάλου αγαθόν μειονεκ τεΐ ; ' does he not fall short, in respect of a great good’? &c. Isocr. ad Phil. n. 86. D. τον $ή τοιοϋτον καί τηλικαΰτα διαπεπραγμενον ονκ οίει—ιτολν (σε) οιεφείσθαι νομιεΊν τής τε των λόγων ΰυνάμεως και της αύτοΰ διάνοιας, ' to be mistaken with respect to the effect of his speech’. Comp. Archid. p. 131. A. 138. B. de Pace 165. A. Thus also σφάλ- λεσθαι twos, ' to be deceived with respect to a thing’, e. g. σφα'λλεσθαι ίλπίδος Herod. II, as φενύεσθαι έλπ. id° I, 141. Eur. Med. \ 000 .~δόξης ίσφάλην εύαγγελον, id. Ph. 770. έάν τι τής τύχης εγω σφαλώ. ^ In a deri¬ vative sense, Eur. Or. 1076. γάμων ii τής μεν διισποτμου τήσ$ ’εσφάλην. It is the same with άμαρτάνειν Tiros §. 368. To this belongs the phrase κατ eaya τής κεφαλής. x Valck. ad Her. p. 580, 87. f ψ 4S4 Syntax. Of the Genitive . ξυνβτρίβην της κεφαλής, fractus sum (quod attinet ad) caput , instead of caput fractum est , according* to the Graecism, by which the verb is not referred to its proper noun, but to that of which the noun is a part, in which case the proper noun of the verb usually is put in the accus., as in the Latin poets, e. g. jam multo fractus membra labore, for cujus membra fracta sunt. Plat. Gorg. p. 51. καν τινα $όξρ μοι της κεφαλής αυτών κατεα·γε- ναι (* vulg . KaTeayrjvai) $εϊν, κατεα'γώς εσται αυτίκα μάλα. Aristoph. V esp. 1428. κατεά^η της κεφαλής μεγα σφόΰρα. Id. Pac. 71. εως ξυνετρίβη της κεφαλής. Lucian Contempl. Ρ· 37. ζυντριβεντες των κρανίων. In Isocr. in Collim. p. 381. A . it · must probably signify, r /τιωντο Κρατινον συντριφαι της κεφαλής αυτήν ( θεράτταιναν ) for κατά της κεφ. αυτής*. 2 . With adjectives, the more exact definition of the idea contained in the adjective is put in this man¬ ner in the genitive. επίκλοπος μύθων , II. χ , 281. Xen. Gyr. VI, 1, 37. συγγνώμών των άνθρωττίνων αμαρτημάτων , 6 forgiving with respect to human errors.’ Herod . vii, 61. άπαις ερσενος y όνου, ΟΓ, as Xen. Cyrop. IV, 6, 2. Isocr. Panath. p. 258. Z). απαις αρρενων παί^ων, * childless with respect to sons’, Thuc. n, 65. of Pericles χρημάτων διαφανώς άδωρότατος yεvόμεvoς. Plat. Leg. VI, p. 296. τιμής Se τταρα των νεωτερων άτιμος 7 τάσης έστω , c let all respect be denied him’, vm, p. 424. άτιμος των εν τή τ-όλει επαίνων, c unhonoured with respect to the custo¬ mary panegyrics’, expers laudum. Soph. El. 36. άσκευος άσπ'ώων. (Ed. C. 677 . άνήνεμος πάντων χειμώνων. 865. άφω- νος αρας. Aj. 321. αψοφητος κωκυμάτων . Eurip. Ph. 334. y Piers - ad Moer. P· 233. Thom. M. p. 499 . Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. 1, p. 419. t Syntax. Of the Genitive. 455 απεπλος φαρέων. Med. 671 . ούκ έσμεν εήνης άζυγες γαμήλιου. Iphig. A. 988. ανοσοί κακών. Herod. I, 107. παρθένος άνδρος ώραίη, or i. 196 . γάμου ωρ. Comp. Xen. Cyr. IV, 6 , 9· <■ mature with respect to marriage’. This also seems to be the origin of the following phrases : Soph. Track. 247. χρόνος άυψιθμος ήμερων, ‘ with respect to days’, when properly it should ημέραι ανηριθμοι (Ed. T. 179· °' n ’ πόλις άνάριθμος όλλυται, for οι εν Trj πόλει άνάριθμοι ολλυνται. ΕΙ. 231. ούόέποτ εκ καμάτων άποπαύσομαι άνάριθμος ώϋε θρήνων . This appears also to be the proper sense-of the geni¬ tive with the words, 'near, to draw near to’. Soph. Antig. 580. φεόγουσι γάρ τοι χ οι θρασείς, όταν, πελας τον άόηυ είσορίύσι τού βίου. Thus also εγγύς, προσ¬ πελάζεσαι, έμπελάζεσθαι. Soph. (Ed. Τ. 1100. Ώανός όρεσ- σιβάτα προσπελασθεϊσα. id. Tr. 17. πριν τησόε κοίτης όμπελασθηναί ποτέ. In other cases such verbs take the dative after them. In έξης with the genitive ( Anst. Ran. 765.) besides this the construction ίχεσθαί τίνος remains, ‘ to touch upon, to border upon . The expression θρασύς έΐ πολλοΰ Arist. Nub. 916 . is singular; ' thou art very audacious’ (properly by much). Note. From hence appears to have arisen the observation, that adjectives compounded with a privat. govern the genitive; Fisch. in, a. p. 353 . But a privat. cannot well designate either the genitive, or any other case. 3. In the same manner it appears is to be explained the genitive, which often accompanies adverbs, to deter¬ mine their signification by adding the respect in which they are to be taken. Herod, vn, 237 . πρόσω άρετης άνηκειν, ‘ to carry it far with respect to virtue’. Xen. Cyrop. I, 6. 39 . πρόσω ελάσαι της πλεονεξίας (it.) Hence the ■ :· J ” r. a Schaef. Melet. in Dion. H. i, 1. p. 137· 318 ' s · < *°° Syntax. Of the Genitive. abbreviated phrase : Herod, in, 154 . κάρτα ev τοίσι Πβρ- σ ν σ [ «yaOoepylai e s το τρύσω μβ-γάϋβος τιμών rat, i. e. τιμωνται, ware αυτούς (tow ayaOoepy ούς) es το τρύσω rnycSeos άνηκοιν. Plato Euthyphr. p. 7. τόρρω σοφίας ύλαύυαν, or Euthyd. p. 52. x. σ. ηκβιυ. Comp. Gorg. p. 85. Lys. p. 213. πορρω πορευεσθαι του έρωτος, ‘to make great progress in love’. Gorg. p. 82. πάρρω τη, ηλικία,' φιΧοσοφεΊν, ‘ far in years* (properly far advanced with respect to years). Protag. p. 119 . πρωϊαίτατα τη, ηλικίας, very early with respect to age*. Hence Aristoph. Nub . 138. τηλου yap οικώ των aypcov, c far from hence in the country , Plat. Menon. p. 356. εννοεί, αύ, ώ Μενών, ού ' €στιν βαδίζων. όδε τον άναμιμνησκεσθαι , c to what point of reminiscence he has arrived/ Plato Rep . vn, p. 198 . 7 τροιεναι ε, το προσθεν του χρηματίζεσθαι. Thus also may be explained Eurip. Ph. 372 . ουτω τάρβου, — άφικόμην, to such a pitch of fear am I arrived’, if ουτω can be united with verbs of motion, and it should not rather be ταρβο,, i. e. εί, τάρβο,. See Herm. ad Vig. p. S 09 . h 4. In the same manner the neuters τούτο, τοσούτο, τδδε with a preposition, often take a genitive as a defini¬ tion. Thuc. I, 49· ζυνεπεσον ε, τούτο aray/c^ ‘they came to this, with respect to necessity’, i. e. into such neces- Slty. Isocr. de Pac. p. 165 . C. ει, τούτο yap τινε, άνοια, εληλύθασιν, ώστε, 8$c. lb. ρ. ]74. D. ει, τοσούτο μίσους κατεστησεν, ώστε , $c. where in Latin eo with the geni¬ tive is used, eo necessitatis adducti sunt , eo dementice progressi sunt , #c. Thus also in the dative with iv. Thuc. II, 17. οι μεν εν τουτω παρασκευή, ησαν , ‘in this degree of preparation*. Xenoph. Anab. 1 , 7 , 5. διά το εν τοιουτω είναι του κίνδυνου. Thus also Thuc. 1 , lie. οι Αθηναίοι επί μ^α εχωρησαν δυνάμεω ,, where επί μ^α is put adverbially j the same as πόρρω. JEschin. Axioch. 9 . άλλοι [επί) πολύ y ηρω, άκμάζουσιν. In point of sense / Syntax. Of the Genitive. 457 ~ S f it is the same as ες ταύτην την ανάγκην, ανοιαν, εις τοσουτο μίσος, εν ταύττι ty παρασκευή , εν τοιοντω κιν$υνφ, and hence this syntax often serves only as a circumlo¬ cution, e. g. eis τό$’ ημέρας Eurip. PhoeU. 428. Ale. 9· for εις ταύτην την ημέραν. Hence the genitive is sometimes put with substan- 320 tives or verbs, or absolutely , where otherwise περί , with the genitive is used. ]. With substantives. Soph. Antig. 632. ώ παι, τελείαν yj /ηφον άρα μη κλύων της μελλόνυμφόν, πατρι λυσσαινων πάρει; ‘ the decree with respect to, on account of, thy bride*. Aj. 99B. οξεία yap σου βάξις , ως θεού τίνος , διηλθ ’Αχαιούς πάντας, ως οίχει θανων . c the fame of you, with respect to you, as the annunciation of a God*. Thuc. ΥΙΠ, 15. άyyελίa της Χίου , 'the relation concerning Chios, ib. 39. άyyελίav επεμπον επί τάς εν τη Μ ΐλητω ναύς τού ξυμπαρακομισθηναι , 4 concerning the conveying, in order to be conveyed by them*. 2. With verbs. Soph. (Ed. C. 355. μαντεία , a rovcT εχρησθη σώματος , i. e. περί τουόε σώματος, περί εμού. ib. 307· κλύων σου &εύρ αφίξεται ταχύ. Comp. Antig. 1182. Ajac . 1122. της μητρος ήκω της εμης φρασων, εν οίς νυν εστιν. de matre mea (r). See §. 295. Thus also Od. λ, 173 . είπε Se μοι πατρός τε καί υ'ιεος, ον κατελειπον , η ετι παρ κεινοισιν εμον y ερας . Thuc. I, 52. τον $6 ο’ίκα^ε πλού μάλ¬ λον $ιεσκόπουν , οπη κομισθησονται. Plat. Rep. II, ρ. 221. οι &ε της των θειον υπ’ ανθρώπων πapayωyης τον Ομηρον μαρτνρονται. · 3. As the Genit. absol. Eurip. Andr. 361. ημείς μεν ούν τοιοί^ε’ της Se σης φρένο ς, εν σου $ε$οικα, as to what regards your turn of mind*. Plato Leg. vn, p. 332. των Se τροφών αυτών καί της ay ελης ξυ μπα σης, των $ώ$εκα yvi 'αικών μίαν εφ έκαστη τεταχθαι. Comp. Rep. V, 321. Syntax. Of the Genitive. ' t . % p. 45. Xetl. (EcOTl. Ill, 11. τη 9 δε y υναικός, el μεν διδασκό¬ μενη υπό του άνδρός Taya θά κακοποιεί (— οί), ίσως δικαίως αν η 7 ννη την αιτίαν ,εχοι. Mem. S. I, 3 , 8. τοιαυτα μεν περί τούτων επαιζεν αμα στ τουδάζων, άφροδισίων δε, παρηνει των καλών ίσχυρώς άπεχεσθαι. Isocr. π. άντιδ. ρ. 317. D. τον δε καλώς και μετριως κεχρησθαι τη φύσει, 1 δικαίοις αν / y ρ y 1 * παντες τον τροπον τον εμόν επαινεσειαν. id. de Big. ρ. 347. Ε. είδοτες δε την ποΧιν των μεν περί τους θεούς (in US, quce Cld deos Spectant ) μαΧιστ αν opyia0eiaav , εί τις εις τά μυστήρια φαίνοιτο ίξαμαρτάνων, των δ ’ αΧΧων, εί τις τοΧ- μφη τον δήμον καταΧυειν\ Comp. §. 297. 3. Herodotus adds περί VII, 102. αριθμού δε περί, μη πυθρ, όσοι τινες εοντες ταυτα ποιεειν οΐοί τε εισι. In the same manner also it seems, we must explain the genitive, which serves to illustrate single words, or entire propositions. Thuc. VII, 42. τοΓ* Συρακουσίοις κατά- ττληξις iy ενετό, εί πέρας μηδέν εσται σφίσι τοΟ άπαΧ- Xayrjvai τοΰ κίνδυνου, "if there was to be no end*, viz. with respect to deliverance from danger, where, at the same time, is to be remarked the pleonasm πέρας του άπαλλ^ήναΐ' JUSt as in Plato Leg. II, p . 67. η της ηδονης καί Χυπης ζητησις τοϊ Kaivrj ζητείν άεί μουσική χρησθαι , σχεδόν ου μεyάXηv τινά δυναμιν εχει προς το διαφθείραι την καθιερωθεισαν χορείαν, επικαλουσα αρχαιότητα. Leg . XII, ρ. 209- πάντων μαθημάτων κυριωτατα, του τον μανθάνοντα βεΧτιο) yiy νεσθαι, τα περί τους νομούς κείμενα, c the chief of all sciences, with regard to the improvement of the learner, is that of the laws*. See Plat. Phcedon. p. 220. Thus also Soph. Track. 55. πως άνδρός κατά ζητησιν ού π^πεις τινά , μάΧιστα δ’ όνπερ είκός, "ΥΧΧον, εί πατρός νόμει (not νεμοι) τιν ώραν, τοδ καΧώς πράσσειν δοκείν ; "if he ' Heind. ad Charm, p. 89. I Syntax. Of the Genitive . 459 cares about his father, viz. that he is thought to be in prosperity’. ' r If in many of the cases above cited, the genitive 322 was more rare, and only occurring in certain combina¬ tions (which however were the better adapted to shew that use of the genitive) ; on the other hand, in the following cases, the genitive regularly occurs, but is founded on the sen§e of the case before explained, 'with respect to’. A. All words expressing ideas of relation, which are not complete without the addition of another word as the object of this relation, take this object, (which however must not be passive, &c.) in the genitive. To this belong. l. Adjectives which have an active sense, and are mostly derived from verbs active, or correspond to them; In the case of these their relation to an object which with the verbs would be in the accusative, is expressed by the genitive». Herod. II, 74. φοί οφιες, ανθρώπων ουΰαμώς ϊηλημονες (from ΰηλβίσθαι τινά) 1 which do not harm men’. Comp, hi, 109 . AEschyl. Agam. 1 167- Ία) γάμοι Π άριδος όλβθριοι φίλων (from όλεθρός, ολω) 'which have proved destructive to friends’. Soph. (Ed. T. 1437. ρίφονμε yrjs εκ τησ% οσον τάχισθ*, οπού θνητών φανουμαι μηδενος προση'γο- ρος, 'when I shall converse with no mortal’, although the Scholiast ( Brunck . T. iv, p. 385.) takes προση^ορος as passive for προσα^ορευόμενος . Soph. Antig. 1184. Παλ- λά^ος θεάς όπως \κοίμην ευ^ματων 7 τροση^ορος, lit Ctd PcillcL- dem preces facerem. See §. 313. Eurip. Hec. 239· καρ - $ίας & ηκτηρια ($ άκνειν την καρ^ίαν) ' that afflict the heart } κερτομα. lb. 687. άρτιμαθης κακών , ' who has but lately been acquainted with misfortune’, ib. 1125. ύποπτος ών <$η T ρωίκης αλώσεως (υποπτευειν tl) c as he guessed the capture of Troy’, id. Androm . 1197. τοξοσννα φόνιος 460 Syntax. Of the Genitive. πατρος. Thus Phosn. 216. πεδία n τερίρρυτα Σικελίας, for a ί repippei 'Σικελίαν. See Musgr. and Porson on this passage,, Med. 7 35. άνώμοτος θεών ; because όμνυναι θεούς was said for διο i θεούς. Hence σι)νερΎο$ του κοινον ayaOov Xen. Cyrop. Ill, 3, 10. κακούργος μεν των άλλων, εαντον δε πολύ κακονρ^οτερος (from ερ'γαίζεο'θαι τινά κακά .) υποτελής φάρου Thuc. I, 56. VII, 57 . from τελείν φόρου, αλιτήριοι της θεού Thuc. I, 126. from άλιτεϊν τινά . In this place are to be reckoned especially adject, in ικος. Plat. Euthyphr. p. 6. διδασκαλικός της αύτου σοφίας, ‘ who can teach his wisdom to others', id. Rep. m,p. 267. ανατρεπτικός πόλεως. Plat. Rep. VI, p. 145. sq. to ye τοιου- τον νοησεως ουκ αν παρακλητικόν ουδ* eyepTiKov εϊη. See lb. p. 147· Xen. Mem. S. Ill, 1, 6. και yap παρασκευαστικόν των εις τον πόλεμον τον στρατη^/όν είναι χρη και ποριστικόυ των επιτηδείων τοίς στρατιώταις. Id. Rep. Laced. 2, 8. μηχανικός των επιτηδείων , where μηχανάσθαι την τροφήν went before b . Add to these various adjectives compounded with a privative , e. g. Herod. I, 32. απαθής κακών, from πάσχειν κακα. (Ed. Ύ. 88 5 . Αίκας αφοβητος , i. e. μη φοβούμενος Αικην. Xen. Mem. S. ΙΙ, 1. 31. του πάντων ηδίστου άκου¬ σμα τος } επαίνου σεαυτης, άνηκοος el, και του πάντων ηδιστου θεάματος αθέατος’ ουδεν yap πώποτε σεαυτης epyov καλόν τεθεασαι. Comp. Hier. I, 14. Soph. (Ed. T. 969 . άφαυστος εγχους € . Participles also are constructed in the same manner, e. g. Od. a , 18. ovS ένθα πeφυyμevoς ηεν άεθλων , which in other cases is put with the accus. II. ζ', 488. μοίραν δ> ουτινα φημι πeφυyμεvov εμμεναι άνδρών 11 . χ , 219 · Hom. Η. Ven. 36. Od. a , 202. οιωνών σάφα βί^ω?. II. β'. b Fisch. Ill, a. p. 352 sq. c Fisch. in, a. p. 353. 461 \ · Syntax. Of the Genitive . 718 . τόξων ευ είδώς. 611 . επιστάμενοι πολεμοιο 0 . Yet the verb είδεναι is found even with the genitive. II. o , 4U, See §. 324. Ohs. Various relations of adjectives also in a passive or 323. neuter sense are expressed by'the genitive, e. g. Od. a, \ΊΊ . επίστροφος ανθρώπων , ‘much conversant with men ^ (e7 τιστρε- φβσθαι ανθρώπους.) Od. β', 431. επιστεφης οίνου (and επεστε- φαντοποτοϊο II. ί , 175.) Soph. (Ed, Col. 83. πολυστεφης δάφ¬ νης ‘ shaded with laurel’, Anacr. ap Athen. I, p. 12. A. κατηρεφης παντοίων αγαθών. Plat. Leg. vm, p.S 97. επώνυμον είναι τίνος, ‘to receive a name from any one’. Soph. (Ed. C. 1519· € Υ ω διδάξω, τεκνον Αιγεως, a σοι γηρως αλυπα τρδε κεισεται πόλει. * uninjured by age, ib. 1722. κακών ουδεις δυσάλω- τος. ΕΙ. 343. άπαντα γάρ σοι τάμα νουθετηματα κείνης διδακτά, κούδεν εκ σαυτης λεγεις. ‘all thy lessons which thou givest me, are suggested by her . Antig. 847» φίλων ακλαυστος. 2. Words which represent a situation or operation 324. of the mind, a judgment of the understanding, which is directed to an object, but without affecting it. Such are the adjectives, ‘ experienced, ignorant, remember¬ ing, desirous’; and the verbs ‘ to remember, to forget, to concern one’s-self about anything, to neglect ; to con¬ sider, to reflect, to understand’; ‘ to be desirous of . a. Adjectives : ‘ experienced’, έμπειρος , επιστήμων, τριβών, and the opposite, ‘ inexperienced’, άδαης, Άδρις, άπειρος , as in Latin, peritus and imperitus. Herod, n, 49· της θυσίας ταυτης ουκ είναι αδαής, αλλ εμπειρος. AEschyl. Suppl. 468. θόλω 8 αίδρις μάλλον η σοφός κακών είναι. Xen. Cyrop. Ill, 3, 55. row άπαιδευτους παντάπασιν άρετης θαυμαζοιμ ίν, εί τι πλέον ίν ώφελησειε λόγος καλώς ρηθείς εις ανδραγαθίαν, η τους άπαιδευτους μουσικής άσμα καλώς άσθεν εις μουσικήν. Aristoph. Vesp. (l Hemst. ad Thom. M. p. 183 sq. VOL. II. G 462 Syntax, OJ the Genitive. 1429· ζτυγχανεν ού τριβών ων ιππικής. Isocr. ad Dem. p. Ιο. B, ώσπερ την μελιτταν ο ρω μεν εφ> άπαντα μεν τα βλαστήματα καθιζάνουσαν, άφ’ έκαστου δε τα χρήσιμα λαμβανουσαν, ούτω χρή και τους παιδείας ορε·γομενους μηδε- νος μεν απείρως εχειν, πανταχόθεν δε τα χρήσιμα σνλλε- *y€iv. Plat. Tim. ρ. 286. Κ ριτιαν δε που πάντες οι τήδ* ισμεν ουδενος ιδιώτην οντα ών \ey ομεν*. In the old Poets participles follow the same con¬ struction, agreeing in sense with the adjective. II. β', 823. μάχης € υ είδότε πάσης. lb. 720. τόξων ευ είδοτες. ρ, 5. •γυνή ου πριν είδυΊα τόκοιο, and passim. In the same mannei ειδως frequently occurs with the accusative, as πεπνυμενα^ μήδεα είδώς. II. π', 811. διδασκόμενος πολεμοιο. Hesiod, epy. 648. ούτε τι ναυτιλίης σεσοφισμενος , ούτε τι V η ών. This was imitated by the Sophists par¬ ticularly, e. g. ξυνιεις δράματος, yεyυμvaσμεvoς θαλάττης in Philostratus f . Hence also ήθάς, 'accustomed’, is constructed with the genitive. Soph. El. 373. οψιμαθής των πλεονεξιών Xen. Cyrop. i, 6, 35. Comp, hi, 3 , 37. although this belongs more properly to §. 322. i g . Obs. Sometimes περί with a genitive is found with adjec- tives of this kind. Plat. Hipparch. p. 257. ούχϊ όμ οΧογεΓ* τόν φιλοκερόη επιστήμονα είναι περί της αξίας τούτου, 0θεν κεροαινειν άξιοι. Hipp. Min. ρ. 209- περί τών τεχνών επι¬ στήμων. JEschin. Socr. n, 9 . καίτοι ούκ Αν άμαθεστερός ye ομολο Ί ησαις άν είναι περί ούδενός τών με Ί ίστων, άλλά σοφωτερος." Isocr. ad Phil. ρ. S6. Α. εί καί περί τών άλλων απειρως εχουσιν. Sometimes also adjectives of this kind are joined with the ' Fisch. Hi, a. p. 356 sq. f Hemsterh. ad Thom. M. p. 183 sq. s Fisch. 1. c. 463 Syntax. Of the Genitive . case of their verbs, the accusative. JEschyl. Agam. 1098. πολλά ζυνίστο pa αύτάφονα κακά. Plat. Epinom. p. 249· ο ταυτ επιστήμων. Xen. Cyrop. in, 3, 9· επιστη μονές ησαν τα προσήκοντα τη εαυτών έκαστος οπλίσει, where Aristot. Polit. ι, 7. adds περί. — το περί τα κτήματα έμπειρον είναι. Plat. Tim. ρ. 290. τους μάλιστα περί ταυτα των ιερεων εμπείρους. So also τριβών with the accus. Eur. Med. 691. Rhes. 6%5. Bach. 717· Arist. Nub. 867- b. Verbs. f To recollect, to forget’, μνάσθαι, μνη - 325 σθηναι, μνησασθαι , λανθάνεσθαι, ληθεσθαι, and their com¬ pounds, as μνησασθε δε θούριος άλκης. Isocr. ad Demon · p. 12. C. εν άπασι τοΊς εργοις οΰχ ουτω της άργης μνημονευο- μεν , ως της τελευτής α’ίσθησιν λαμβάνομεν. θετις δ ου ληθετ εφετμεων παώος εου II. α, 495. and elsewhere regu¬ larly. Thus also the active μνμν, ύπομνμν, 6 to remind/ Od . a', 321. υπεμνησεν τε ε πατράς. II. a', 407. των νυν μνησασα παρεζεο. Eur. Ale. 1066. μη μ’ άναμνησρς κακών. Od. ξ, 168. 170. Thus too the active ληθειν, ‘to make to forget', and the derivative and compound verbs : Od. η , 221. εκ δε με πάντων ληθάνει, οσσ επαθον. Od. δ', 221. φάρμακον , - κακών επίληθον άπάντων. 11 . ο, 60. λελάθρ δ ? δδυ νάων. Hymn, in Ven. 40. Ήρης εκλελαθουσα κασιγνητης αλόχοο τε. Μνάσθαι, ‘ to make mention of', is sometimes joined with περί : Herod. \, 36. παιίος μεν περί του εμού μη μνησθητε ετι. Plat. Lack. p. 165. λε'γετε' μοι, οδ’ εστι Σω¬ κράτης, περί ου εκάστοτε εμεμνησθε ; Menex. ρ. 285. τούτων περί μοι Sokci χρηναι επιμνησθηναι. Xen. Cyrop. I, 6, 12. οόδ’ οτιούν περί τούτου επεμνησθη. Obs. These verbs are also constructed with the accusative. II. 222. Τι/δεα δ’ ου μεμνημαι. Herod . νπΐ, 66. των επε- μνησθην πρύτερον τά ουνοματα. Plat. Cratyl. ρ. 2ο6. ει δ εμεμνημην την Ησίοδον y ενεαλο'γίαν. Demosth. Phil. II, βήματος οντες ου ρ . 73, 9· ταυτα yap ενταύθα μνημονεύετ ευ \ τα απαντα |δ’ οτι ρηθεντα > > επι του οι καιπερ 464 Syntax. Of the Genitive. Scivoi τους άόικουντας μεμνησθαι. Comp. Xen. Cyrop. b The active is also found with a double accusative. Herod, vi, 140. Μ ιλτιαάης — προη^/όρευε εζιεναι εκ της νήσου ( Λήμνου ) τοισί TleXaayoiTi, άναμιμνησκων σφεας το χρηστηριον . Thuc. VI. 6. ο\ ’Ey εσταϊοι ξυμμαχίαν άναμιμνη- σκοντες τους Αθηναίους , εόεοντο σφίσι ναύς πεμψαντας (not — τες)επαμυναι.ΡΙαί. Rep. νι, ρ. ] 16. ( Αεξω) άναμνησας , τα Τ € ev TOLS έμπροσθεν ρηθεντα και άλλοτε πολλάκις ηόη είρημενα. Xen. Η. Gr. π, 3, 30. άυαμνησω ύμάς τα τουτω ‘ττεττρα'γμενα. Μνημονεύω, άμνημονεϊν are more commonly used with an accusative. Isocr. ad Nic. p . 22. A. εάν ί ταρεληλυθότα μνημόνευες, άμεινον και περί των μελλόντων βουλευσρ. Thus also τι. Lysias ρ. 231. μη yap ο'ίεσθε, ω ανάρες ικασται, ει υμείς βουλεσθε τα τουτω πεποιημενα επιλαθε- σθαι, και τούς θεούς επιλησεσθαι. Eurip. Hel . 271. και τάς τυχας μεν τας καΐλας, ας νυν εχω, Ελλ>/ι/εν επελάθοντο. Homer says in the active II. β', 6Ό0. και ύκλελαθον κιθαρι- as κενός, ‘ empty,’ Soph. El. 390 . αί 3ε σάρ- αικεναί φρένων ά-/άλματ ά-γοράς ε’ισίν. Id. Aj. 511. αου^μονος. φίλων έρημος Eur. Med. 513. άλλαι — yuav6v μ εθηκαν όιπτυχου στολίσματος Id. Hec. 1146. Plato Cratyl. p. 271. τό συ- Π ίνεσθαι, επειίάν ή φυχή καθαρά ρ πάντων τών περί τό σώμα κακών καί ύπιθυμιών, ού φιλόσοφόν σοι 3οκε'ι είναι καί ευ ύντεθυμημύνον; Id. Tim. Ρ· 339. ρυθμός 3ια τήν άμετρου 'εν ήμίν καί χαρίτων ε πιόεά -μ- { νομύνην ύν τοίς πλείστοις εξιν επίκουρος ύπί ταύτα υπο τών αύτων (των Μουσών) έ3όθη. Eurip. Hipp. 1468 . τί φής; άφήσεις αίματός μ’ ελεύθερον “. The passage in Plato Leg. m, p. 130 . is different: d ίλεύθερος* καί μή Fisch. in, a. p. 357- sqq. Valck. ad Eur. Hipp. 1450. * P enult ‘ ελεύθερος επαίνων (this word is omitted in the original) and presently < of good quality.’ But the passage of Plato stands in need of emendation. The following is both obvious and certain. The passage is this : λόγω με'ν τοίνυν σΐ, J ξένε, επαινεΐν, επαχθέστερου · 0ργω Se', σφόΰρα / Syntax. Of the Genitive. 471 (leg. και 6 μη) which belongs to §. 315. c a man of good', (liberalis ) e with respect to the praise which he bestows'. This relation is expressed also by prepositions, as καθαρός από Demosth. p. 1371. and by the accusative as ενδεής τόν βίον Menand. ap. Stob. 122. b. Verbs. πΧηθω. πΧηρόω, πίμπΧημι . Xen. Cyvop. II, 330 2, 27. ον τούτο μόνον ώφεΧήσονσιν οι κακοί άφαιρεθεντες, ότι κακοί απεσονται, αΧΧα και , των καταμενόντων όσοι άνε - πίμπΧαν το ήδη κακίας, άνακαθαρουνται παΧιν αυτήν . Isocr. Areop. ρ. 150. ^4. τί}? βουΧής (της εν ’ Αρείω πάγιο) επιστα- τονσης, ον δικών, ουδέ εγκΧηματων, ουδέ εισφορών, ουδέ πενίας, ουδέ ποΧεμον η πόΧις εγεμεν. Cf. Ctd Phil. ρ. 104. C. Bacchyl. Fr. (Brunch. Anal. T. I. p. 151. ιχ.) συμπο¬ σίων ερατών βρίθοντ αγυιαί. Hence also αδην εΧααν κακότητος Od. ε , 290. κορεσασθαι τίνος, c to satiate one's- self with any thing' (to fill one’s-self with any thing) II. t, 167. ‘to have enough' Hesiod, epy. 33. πάσασθαι τινός, c t0 enjoy any thing' II. Ty 160. τερπεσθαι τινός, f to have enough of any thing', Od. τ', 213. f as other¬ wise πΧησθηναι, άσασθαι γόου. Perhaps also εστίαν τινα Xόyωv και σκεφεων Plat . Rep. IX, p . 239· Obs. πΧηθειν is also found with a dative. See Sch&f. ad Long. p. 386. f Want'. δείσθαι, απορειν τινός. Her. Ill, 127. ένθα σοφίης δεει, βίης εργον ουδόν. Xen. Cyrop . II, 2, 26. οίκος ενδεό με νος οίκετών, ηττον σφαΧΧεται, η νπο άδικων ταρατ- τόμενος 0 . Eur . Suppl. 242. oi 8 ονκ εχοντες και σπανίζον- T6S βίου,—εις τους έχοντας κεντρ αφιασιν κακα. Here. f. σφοδρά επαινεσόμεθα. ιτροθνμως yap τοΐς λεγόμενοι·! επακολουθησομεν. εν oh ο ye ελεύθερος επαίνων, κα\ μη, μαλιστα εστι καταφανής. Read ο ye ελευθερως επαίνων, he who praises like a gentleman, £ with since¬ rity.' Some MSS. have επαίνων. See H. Steph. in marg. p. 688. Ed. ° Fiscb. hi, a. p 413. i 1 331. 472 Syntax. Of the Genitive. 360. ( ΙΙρακλης) Αιός άλσος ηρημωσε λεοντος. Thus also χηρούσθαι τίνος Herod . VL, 83. κενούν τι τίνος AEschyl. Suppl. 66 7. Herod. VIII, 62 . ημεΊς μεν—κομιεύ μέθα δς Σίριν την ev Ιταλίν]' υμείς δε συμμάχων τοιώνδε μουνωθ εντες^ μεμνησεσθε των εμών λόγων. Plat. ΜβΠΟΠ. ρ. 329. συ μιτ ε¬ ν ο μα ι τοις 7 Γολίταις τούτου του ητράγματος } —ούκ είδώς περί αρετής τοπαράπαν. as πενεσθαι των σοφών JEschyl. EllTJl. 434. Id. Rep. II, p. 234. αν κομίσας ο γεωργός εις την αγοράν τι ών ποιεί , η τις άλλος των δημιουργών μη εις τον αυτόν χρόνον ηκη τοΐς δεομενοις τα παρ’ αυτού άλλάζασθαι , αργήσει της αυτού δημιουργίας , καθημενος εν άγοραί ; Ούδαμώς. Hence the following verbs also take the genitive of the thing. a. f To bereave’, στερειν, αποστερειν τινά τίνος. IsOCV. ftd Phil. p. 87· C. D. επειδάν o Xo^yo? άποστε ρηθν/ της τε δάξης του λεγοντος και της φωνής - και μηδέν fj το συναγωνιζόμενον και συμπεΊθον, άλλα των μεν προειρη¬ μενών απάντων έρημος γενηται και γυμνός , άναγινώσκη δε τις αυτόν άπιθάνως —- — εικότως, οίμαι , φαύλος δοκεί τοΊς άκούουσιν. Thus also νοσφίζω. Soph. Phil. 1426 . Τίάριν —τόξοισι τοις εμοίσι νοσφιεΊς βίου. Id. Antlg . 22 . ου γάρ τάφου νών τώ κασιγνητω Κρεων τον μεν προτίσας, τον ο ατιμασας εχει; $ Note, αποστερειν takes also a double accusative. h. f To deliver’. Herod. v, 62. τυράννων ελευ- θερώθησαν o\ ’Αθηναίοι. Eur. Hipp. 1467. σε τούδ’ ελευ- θερώ φόνου , ‘ I clear you’. Od. ε, 397. άσπάσιον δ’ αρα τόνγε θεοί κακότητος έλυσαν. Hesiod. Th. 528. (Ηρα¬ κλή ΤΙρομηθεα) έλυσα το δυσφροσυ νάων. Eur. Ph(E7l. 1028. νόσου τηνδ’ άπαλλάξω χθόνα. and passim p and with transposition id. Hec. 1187. 09 φγς ’ Αχαιών πόνον απαλλασσων διπλούν — παίδ’ εμόν κτανειν, for άπαλλάσσων Αχαιούς πόνου διπλού.—καθαίρειν τινός Plat . Rep. IX, ρ. 242. 4 473 ' 1 Syntax. Of the Genitive . Thus also f to escape 5 . Xen. Anab. i, 3, 2. Κλέαρχο? * δε τότε μεν μικρόν εξεφυ ye του μη καταπετρωθηναι. Soph . Antig. 488. αυτή τε χη ζυναιμος οΰκ αΧυζετον μόρου κακίστου. See Brunch, on the place. Note. These verbs are also constructed with εκ or από. Eurip. Hercul. f. 1012. εΧευθερουντες εκ δρασμών 7 νόδα. Thuc. ii, 71. ΥΙαυσανίας εΧευθερωσας την Έλλαόα από των ) Μ^δωι/. Comp, νιιι, 46. Isocr. ad Phil. p. 108. C. Msch. PrQm. 509· ευεΧπίς ειμι τωνδε σ εκ δεσμών ετι Χυ- θεντα μηδέν μειον ίσχυσειν Δίο?. Plat. Pep. ιχ, ρ. 239- οΊσθ' ότε πάντα εν τω τοιουτω τοΧμα. ποιειν , ως από πάσης ΧεΧυ μενον τε και άπηΧΧα^γ μεν ον αισχύνης τε και φρονησεως. Comp. id. Rep. νι, ρ. 93. ιχ, ρ. 245. c. c To keep off, to hinder; to desist from any thing’, κωΧυειν , ερητυειν 3 εχειν τινά τίνος , είρ^γεσθαι, e. g. Antipll. ρ. 783. ό νόμος ούτως εχει, επειδάν τις άπο^ραφτι φόνου δίκην , ε’ίρΎεσθαι των νομίμων ρ . Pint. Cvntyl. p. 296. τό yap εμποδίζον καί ΐσχον της ροής. Xen. Afiub. Ill, 5, 11. ο ασκός δυο άνδρας εξει του μη καταδυναι. In the middle εχεσθαί τίνος for άπεχεσθαι , and εχειν T/lUC. I, 112. ΕΧΧηνικου ποΧεμου εσχον οι Αθηναίοι. Obs. Hence generally the genitive appears to be put in order to express a distance, which otherwise is marked by the preposition από. This takes place principally in the verbs. c To be distant 5 , διεχειν. Xen. Anab. 1, 10, 4. ενταύθα διε- σχον άΧΧηΧων βασιΧευς τε και οι '’ΈΧΧηνες ως τριάκοντα στάδια. Id. Vectig. 4, 46. άπεχει των apyvpe’^v η eyyv- τατα πόΧις Μ eyapa ποΧυ πΧείον των πεντακοσίων σταόίων, where §.43. it was, άπεχει δε ταυτα άπ άΧΧηΧων. τοσου- τον άπεχω Isocr. Archid. ρ. 130. C. ζ To separate, 5 e. g. χωρίζειν, επιστήμη χωρίζομενη δικαιο¬ σύνης in Plato, διουρίζειν. Herod, n, 16 . Νείλο? ο την Ασιην διουρίζων της Αιβυης. See SchaeJ . JMelet. in Dion. Η. I . p Miscel. Philol. vol. I, p. l6l. Note. 474 Syntax. Of the Genitive. V- 95· note.' Again,, Plat. Phadon, p. 153. χώριζαν άττο του σώματος τήν Isocr. Archid. p. 133. D. χώριζαν τούς οικειοτατους a φ ημών αυτών. ‘ To repel', as αμυνειν, αΧαΧκειν. II. μ, 402. άλλα Ζευς κηρας αμυνε παιδός εοΰ, which elsewhere stands with « 77 - 0 , as in 7Γ , 80. νεών απο Xoiyov άμυναι. Sometimes αμυνειν is put alone with the genitive : II. v\ 109. άμυνεμεν ούκ εθεΧουσι νηών ώκυπόρων, ‘they are not willing to defend the ships', properly, ‘to avert destruction from them’, and with περί] ‘ to % ht for defence’, II. p, ]82. άμυνεμεναι περί Π ατρόκΧοιο θανόντος , as μάχεσθαι ττερι τίνος *.— II. <£', 539. Τρώων ίνα Xoiyov άΧάΧκοι, which in ν. 138. was Τ ρώεσσι — Xoiyov άΧάΧ - κοι. II. κ , 288. ο κεν τοι κράτος άΧαΧκησει κακόν ημαρ. Hence καΧυπτρη νιφετου in Callim. fr. 142. πρόβΧημα κακών Aristoph. Vesp. 613. επικού ρήμα της χιόνος Xen. An. ιν, 5, 13. ‘help, protection against the snow', as επίκουρος φυχους, σκοτου id. Mem. S. iv, 3, 7. f serviceable against the cold, darkness’ r . Γο make way foi . Herod, ii, 80. οι νεωτεροι αυτεων (Λα¬ κεδαιμονίων) τοίσι πρεσβυτεροισι συvτυyχάvovτες είκουσι της όδου και εκτράπονται. Arist. Ran. 790. κάκεΊνος υπε- χώρησεν αύτφ τοϊ θρόνου, ib. 174. ύπάyε& όμεϊς της όδοΰ. Xen. Symp.4, 31. όπανίστανται δε μοί ηδη και θάκων και οδών εξίστανται οι πΧουσιοι. On the other hand id. Hier. /, 2. και υμείς , ως εοικε , τοσαυτα πράτ^ματα δχουσης, οπόσα Χ^εις, της < τυραννίδος, 6μως προπετώς φερεσθε εις αυτήν , όπως — υπανιστώνται πάντες από τών θάκων , οδών τε παραχωρώσι. Tyrt. ιπ, 41. ( Br . Gnom. p.Q3.) πάντες 8 ’ εν θώκοισιν όμώς νέοι οί τε κατ αυτόν εϊκουσ εκ χώρης, οί τε παΧαιότεροι 9 . Hence also συyχω- ρείν /to resign, or ‘give up to’, takes the genitive of the thing instead of the accus. Herod, vn, 161. μάτην yap άν ώδε πά- ραλον ΕΧΧηνων στρατόν πΧεΊστον εϊημεν εκτημενοι, εί Έυρα - q Heyne Obss. ad II. ττ', 522. r Valck. ad Callim. Eleg. fr. p. 291. s Valck. ad Herod, p. 140, 84. 475 ■ Syntax. Of the Genitive. κουσίοισι εόντες Αθηναίοι συγχωρήσω μεν της η^εμονίης, properly, c to retire from the command’. Hence also 7 rXavq.v τινα oSov 6 to lead one from the road’ 1 . Among the adverbs,, χωρίς, and 7 τόρρω in particular take the genitive. Plato Phadon. p. 219· τι σοι ύοκεϊ περί αυτών; 7 τόρρω που, νη Δία, εμε είναι του ο’ίεσθαι περί τούτων την αιτίαν εί$εναι, ‘ I am far from thinking’. Thus also εκποδών, which otherwise takes the dative. Hence, as it seems, μέσος and μέσου v, as well as the adverb μεταζύ take the genitive, e. g. Pur. Rh. 531. μέσα cT αίετός ουρανού ποτάται. Herod. 1 , 181. μεσούντι Se κου της άναβαΙσιος εστι κατα ( γω Γ γη. At least Sophocles., (Ed. C. 1595. joins από with them : άφ ’ ου μέσος στα 9, τού τε θορι- κίου πετρου κοίΧης τ άχερόου κάπό Χάίνου τάφου * καθεζετο . There is also evidently the idea of an equal distance from two or more places conveyed in it. Yet the genitive, in cases where two or more places cannot be supposed, e. g. in Herodotus, I. c. must be resolved by the expression ‘ with respect to’. d. Hence the words ‘ to cease, to make to cease’, παύειν, παύεσθαι , \η Γ γειν, II. β\ 595. Μονσαί— θάμυριν παύσαν άοιόης f , 107. ’ Apydioi έ* ύπεχωρησαν , Χηζαν $ε φόνοιο. Xen. Mem,. S. I, 2, 64. Σωκράτης, άντι τού όιαφθεί- ρειν τούς , νέους — φανερός ην των συνόντων τούς πονηράς επιθυμίας έχοντας τούτων παύων. Thus also Thuc. II, 65. ο Π ερικΧης επειράτο τούς Αθηναίους της επ αυτόν ορ^ης παραΧύειν. Xen. Cyr . VIII, 5, 24. Herod. VI, 9· κατα- Χύειν τινά της αρχής , as παύειν τινά της αρχής. Her. VI, 3. II. ρ , 539· κηρ’ άχεος μεθεηκα , i. e. έπαυσα 11 . In the same manner ύφίεσθαί τίνος. Xen. Cyrop. νιι, 5, 62. o\ ταύροι εκτεμνόμενοι του μεν με^γα φρονειν και απειθειν υφίενται, τού 8 ίσχύειν και perhaps, μεθίεσθαι, άφίεσθαι τινύς, which occur §. 367· ερ^άζεσθαι ου στερίσκονται. Hence also, 1 Abresch. ad N. T. p. 547. Lect. Aristaean. p. 2 76 . u Fisch. hi, a. p. 372 sq. 476 Syntax. Of the Genitive. Note. These words are also constructed with εκ or an to. Soph. El. 987. 7 ναυσον εκ κακών εμε. Eur. Hec. 911· μοΧπάν S’ άπο και 'χαροποιών θυσίαν καταπαυσας πόσις ev θαΧαμοις }/ €Κ€ΙΤΟ. 332. The construction, which,, according to the foregoing observations, was admitted by verbs in their proper sig¬ nification, is sometimes retained in their derivative senses, although the same reference is not admitted. Thus Sew, δέομαι in their proper signification ‘ to want’, and hence ‘to stand in need of, to require’, take the genitive; and this construction remains also 1. in the impersonal Set, e. g. Eur. Herc.f. 1173. e’i n Set ή χειρός υμάς τής εμής ή συμμάχων , ‘if yOU Stand in need of my hand’. JEsch. Prom. 874. ταυτα δει μακρου Xoy ου ειπειν Χ . 2. In the phrase ολίγον Set, n ΓοΧΧοΰ Set, or (§. 296 .) ολίγον Seo>, ‘it wants but little, a great deal of’. Thucyd. II, 77. TO πυρ εΧαχίστου εδεησε διαφθειραι τους Π Χαταιεας. The compound άποδεω, Oil the contrary, takes the neuter of these adjectives in the accusative, with another noun in the genitive. JEschin. Ax. 6. εγω Se ευζαίμην αν τα κοινά ταυτα ειδεναι * τοσουτον άτ roSew τών περιττών, comp. 22 y . Set is often wanting with the genitive, e. g. Plato Leg. iv, p. 170. to Se συμ- πνευσαι , και καθάπερ ίππων Xfvy ος καθ ενα εις ταυτον i ζυμφυσήσαι , χρόνου ποΧΧου ( SC . Set) και πα Γ γχαΧεπον Ζ , especially with ολίγον, which then is used entirely as an adverb, ‘nearly’. Plat. Phcedr. p. 347. τίνος ενεκ αν τις , tvs· ειπεΊν , ζωη , άλλ’ ή τών τοιουτων ηδονών ενεκα ; ου yap που εκείνων γε, ών προΧυπηθήναι Set η μηδε ησθήναι ο δη χ Porson ad Eurip. Or. 659. y Dorv. ad Charit. p. 558. Fisch. hi, a. p. 413 sq. 2 Valck. ad Eur. Ph. v. 726. Syntax, Of the Genitive. 477 ολίγου 7 τάσαι αι περί το σώμα ηόοναι εχρυσιν*. More fully in Isocr. ad Phil. P . 92 . C. οΰτω τα περί τον πόλεμόν ατνχονσιν (Α ργειοι) 9 ώσθ ολίγον όειν καθ έκαστον ενιαυ¬ τόν τεμνομενην και πορθονμενην την χωράν περιορώσιν. Comp. Xen. Mem. 8 . πι, 10 , 13. 3.’ In the sense of 'to intreat, to desire’, e. g. Herod, i, 36. προσόεόμεθά σεν . Xen. Cyrop. I, 5 , 4. Κυαξάρης επεμπε και προς Κνρον , όεό μένος αν του πειράσθαι αρχοντα ελθειν των ανόρων. And with the double genit. Herod, v, 40. της μεν γνναι- κός, της εχεις, ον προσόεο μέθα σεν της εζεσιος. In the same manner id. νπ, 53. τών$ εγώ νμεων χρρζων σννελεξα. The other verbs, which signify ‘ to intreat’, are joined with the accusative. "T· ‘ %i »y* ' ·.’ - , . - . · . r v **. * * Λ"' c. Substantives; partly, such as are derived from 333. the adjectives above-mentioned, as Plato Rep . i, p· 15 1 . παντάπασι των γε τοιουτων (των αφροόισιων ) εν τω γηρ(£, πολλή είρηνη γίνεται καί ελευθερία , ‘freedom from such passions’; partly also others, e. g. which signify a ves¬ sel, &c. and take the genitive of that with which they are filled, e. g. όεπας οίνου Od. i, 196. ( Sch&f. ad Long, p. 386.) νάπος πετάλων Eurip. Ph. 814. ' glass (full) of wine, a wood full of leaves, a leafy wood’. d. Adverbs, αλί?, satis. Eurip. Hec. 282. τώντεθνηκό- των άλις. Or. 234. αλις εχω τον όνστυχειν. jEsch. Αχ. 13. εγωγε αλις εσχον του βήματος. % I ” ·' V \ ^ ' * f 1 , ...» . . » * ί»· 4. The same original signification of the genitive 334. (§. 315.) appears to be the basis of the construction of the comparative with the genitive, for instance, μείζων πατρός properly signified ' greater with respect to his father’. From this construction all words which in- a Ad Thuc. viii, 35. VOL, II. If / > 335 . 478 Syntax, Of the Genitive . volved a comparison, took the object of this comparison in the genitive. The genitive is also put with the comparative of adjectives and adverbs (see below of the Adj.), and hence with all words which imply the idea of a compara¬ tive, e. g. διπλάσιος. Isocr. Panath. p. 268. B . (τί ου v εστι τό συμβεβηκός αγαθόν εκ του πόλεμου του περί τάς αποικίας ;) τοις αιτίοις τούτων γεγενημενοις, ευδοκιμειν και διπλάσιάν πεποιηκεναι την Έλλαδα της εζ άρχης σύστα¬ σης. Herod. VII, 48. το Ελληνικόν στράτευμα φαίνεται πολλαπλή σιον εσεσθαι του ημετερο υ. Plat. Pirn, p. 313. μίαν άφεΊλε τό πρώτον από παντός μοίραν * μετά δε ταυτην άφτιρει διπλασ ίαν ταυ της' την δ> αύ τρίτην ημιολίαν μεν της δεύτε ρας, τ ριπλασ ίαν δε της πρώτης' τετάρτην δε της δεύτε ρας διπλήν' πεμπτην δε τριπλήν της τρίτης' την δ’ εκτην της πρώτης όκταπλασ ίαν’ εβδόμην δε επτακαιεικοσαπλασίαν της πρώτης. X€Π. Cyrop. VIII, 2, 21. τηδε γε (not ττρ δε ye) μεντοι διαφερειν μοι δοκω των πλείστων , ότι σι μεν, επειδάν των άρκουντων περιττά ( f more than they Want’) κτησωνται , τα μεν αυτών κατορυττουσι, τα δε κατα - σηπουσι -* εγώ δε υπηρετώ μεν τοις θεοις και ορέγομαι αει πλειονων επειοαν οε κτησωμαι, α αν ιόω περιττά οντα τών εμοί άρκουντων, τούτοις τα? ενδείας τών φίλων εζακοΰ- μαι. So also δεύτερος, ύστερος. Herod. VI, 46. δευτεριρ δε ετεί τουτεων, for μετά ταυτα ; as ύστερον τουτεων id. VII, 214. Plat. Pim. p. 286. ουσίει και γενει ou^eyo? ύστερος ών, as Herod. I, 23. Αρίονα —κιθαρωδόν τών τότε εόντων ουδενός δεύτερον. Comp. Plat. Phcedon. p. 198 sq. I-. * i *b · · ■ · %■ λ- · · , . ' 'h** '.>*· ;»<ΠΠ v- \ - Note. The rest of the adjectives, which are. derived from verbs, occur after those verbs. Thus the genitive is put also with verbs which are derived from comparatives, as ηττάσθαι τινός, e. g. ηττω Syntax J Of 'the Genitive. 479 ehai τίνος, inferiorem esse aliquo. Isocr. Nicocl. p. 34. B. των μεν άλλων πράξεων εώρων ^κρατείς καί tous ποΧΧους yiyvo μένους } των Se επιθυμιών των περί τονς τται^ας και τας yi /ναΊκας και τούς βεΧτίστονς ηττωμενους, c that even the best were overcome by means of these affections’ b . Following the same analogy, Eurip. Iph. A. 1367. ενικώ- μην κeκpayμoυ c . Xen. Ancib. I, 7, 12. A βροκομας υστέ¬ ρησε της μάχης, c icame after the battle . Isocr. Nicocl . p. 30. D. οι μεν (εν ταις οΧ^αρχίαις και τάϊς όημοκρατίαις) υστερ ονσι των ίγ pay ματ ων' (τον μεν yap 7 νΧειστον χρόνον € 7 τι τοις ιόίοις όιατ ρίβουσιν -- ) οι Se ev ταις μοναρ- χιαις όντες, ούτε συνεδρίων ούτε χρόνων αυτοις airoSeSei- y μενών, άλλα και τάς ημέρας και τάς νύκτας επι ταΊς ττράξεσιν οντες, ούκ άποΧείπονται των καιρών, αλλ έκαστον εν τίρ όεοντι ττράττονσιν. ί do not miss the right opportu¬ nity’. Since the idea of f to lose’, is related to this, Eurip. Iph. A. 1213. says, 7 ταιοός ύστ ερησομαι, ‘ I shall lose my daughter’ d . Xen. Mem. S. i, 3, 3. θυσίας $e θύων μικρας άττό μικρών ου$εν ηyeιτo μειον σθ αι των αϊτό ποΧΧών και μεyάXωv 7τολλα και με yaXa θιιόντων. Other words of this kind are compounded with προ , and occur below. In the same manner the genitive is put with verbs in 336. which the idea of a comparative is included. Such are : 1. Those which signify, ‘ to surpass’, or the con¬ trary, f to be surpassed, to be inferior to another’, (as ησσασθαι) τ repiy ενεσθαι. Isocr. ud Phil. p. 103. B. τάχιστ αν πε p ly ε v ο ιο της του βασιΧεως όνναμεως. Xen. Cyrop. VIII, 2, 20. €7^ yap, ώ Κ ροισε, ο μεν οι θεοί όόντες εις τας ψυχάς τοις ανθρωποις επόιησαν ομοίως πενητας b Valck. ad Eur. Hipp. 724. c Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. 458. A Fisch. hi, a. p. 3β9· H 2 337. 480 Syntax. Of the Genitive. πάντας, τούτον μεν ούδε αυτός δύναμαι περιγενεσθαι. περιεϊ- ναι Od. σ\ 247· €7Γ€ί 7Γ ερίεσσι yvvaiKtov €ΐ$θς T€ μ€~ ye6//, 670 . μάχης επιδεύομαι, i in the fight', as βίης επιδευης Od. φ', 253. To this head should, perhaps, be referred also άνεχεσθαι τίνος Plat. Rep. viii, p. 226 . AEsch . Axioch. 15. f to bear any thing’; the opposite to ‘ sinking under', succumbere. 2. Those which signify f to rule' (the contrary to ησσάσθαι ), Or the opposite, άνάσσειν. II. a', 38. ος - Tei/eooio Ίφι άνάσσεις. Herod. I, 206. Ώ βασιΧεύ Μη- δων, παυσαι σπεύδων τα σπεύδεις *- παυσάμενος δε , βασίΧευε των σεωντον, και ημεας άνεχευ όρεων άρχοντας τώνπερ αρχομεν. ιι. ξ, 84. α*ίθ ώφεΧΧες άεικεΧίου στρα¬ τόν άλλου σημαίνει ν. Xen. Cyrop . I, 1, 2. άνθρωποι επ ονδενας μάΧΧον σννίστανται , η επι τούτους , ονς αν α'ισθωνται αρχειν αυτών επιχειρού^τας. §.3. εyιyvώσκoμεν, ώς άν- θρώπφ πεφνκότι πάντων των αΧΧων ζώων ειη ραον , η ανθ ρώπων, αρχειν. Soph. Aj. 1050. κραίνειν στρατόν. e Ileind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 97- Syntax. Of the Genitive. 4$Ji ib. 1100. που σύ στρατη*γ€7ς τονόε; που δε σοι Χεων εζεστ άνασσαν, ων οδ tjyeiT οίκοθεν ; 'Σπάρτης ανασ¬ σών ηΧθες, ουχ ημών κρατών. Avchyt . dp Gdle. ρ. 677· στρατεύματος μεν α^ειται στρατα^γός, πΧωτηρων δε ο κυβερνάτης, τω δε κοσμώ θεός, τας φνχάς δε νοος, τάς δε περί τον βίον ευΰαιμοσύνας φρόνασις. The following verbs, for the same reason, and because they are derived from substantives, take the genitive after them: κυριευειν Xen. Mem . 8. hi, 5 , n. i. e. κύριον είναι . κοιρανειν ( κοιρανον είναι) JEschyl. PevS . 214 . επιτροπευειν, ‘ to administer a government, Hevod. vii, 7. (in the sense ‘ to be a guardian’, usually with the accusative f ) τυραννευειν Herod. I, 15 . 23 . 59 . στρατη yεiv > Herod. 1, 2)1. Soph. Aj. 1100. &εσπόζειν Isocr. ad Phil, p. 91. D. Eur, Ale. 486 g . According to the same analogy επιστατειν τίνος is constructed, which otherwise takes the dative. Isocr. ad Phil. ρ. ΙΟΙ. E. K Χεαρχον τον επιστάτη σαν τα των τότε π pay ματ ων. Cf. id. ρ. 92. Β· Xetl. Mem. 8. II, 8. 3. Eurip . Andr . 1100. όσοι θεού χρημάτων εφε- στασαν. Note. It is clear from the construction of κρατεω, that these verbs contain the idea of a comparative. Thuc . vn, 49- τανς yovv νανσιν η προτερον θαρσησει κρατηθείς, i. e. μάΧ- Χον θαρσων ταις νανσιν η προτερον. Obs. Some of these verbs are also constructed with a dative 3S8. or accusative, provided the relation, which is implied in them, may be considered at the same time as a reference either to a personal object, the consideration of which defines the action, or to an object, which is subject to the operation of the action, and dependent on it. ____ _ _—- - ■■ - .. · ■ .. » »— ■ ■ . ■■ ~ 1 ■ --- - ' “ f Thom. M. p. 360. Moer. p. 149. s Fisch. ill, a. p. 369 . / 483 Syntax. Of the Genitive. a. With the dative, άνάσσειν, σημαίνειν. II. a, 288. πάν¬ των μεν κρατεειν εθεΧει, πάντε σ σι $* άνασσαν, πάσν δ e σημαίνειν * ά τιν ου πείσεσθαι όίω. Comp. II. a , 180. φ', 86. Od. a, 117· 402. 419· β\ 234. and κρατειν. Od. π, 265. (Zeus· και Αθηνη) ωτε και αΧΧοις άνδράσι τε κ ρατε ου σ ι και αθ ανατοισ ι θεοΊσιν. άρχειν , JEsch. Prom. 948. (Zeus) δαρόν ούκ άρζει θεοΊς, where the Scho¬ liast calls this an Ionic construction, η>γε7σθαι II. β', 864. Μ ηοσιν άύ ΝΙεσθΧης καιΆντιφος η·γησάσθην. ih. β', 816. Ύρωσι μεν η< Λ γεμόνευε μεγας κορυθαίοΧος 'Έκτωρ, which otherwise takes the genitive ih. 563. 601. 627. 650. 698. 740. 759- ' * t, v · ■* · - V * ' * ^ * * ■ ' ♦ · * l ·* · - 1 •v * ι » i '4 Ίΐ^γεΊσθαι especially in the sense of * to lead*, takes the dative after it. Herod, vm, 215. M^Xiees θεσσαΧοΊσι κατη- •γησαντο επι Φωκεας. Plato Rep . ix, p. 243. ούκ ανάγκη, ώσπερ υπο κέντρων εΧαυνομενους των τε αΧΧων επιθυμιών , και διαφεροντως υπ αυτού του 'Ερωτος, πάσαις ταΐς άΧ- Χαις, ωσττερ δορυφόροις, rjy ου μενού, οιστράν h . b . With the accusative. κρατεΊν. Soph. (Ed. C. 1380. Toiyap το σον νακημα καί τους σους σρονους κρατουσιν, ‘ are in possession of’. Eurip. Pli. 600. σκήπτρα κρατειν , f to hold firmly*, quod teneas , mordicus retinere , as Valckn. renders it 1 . Especially in the sense 4 to conquer’. Euripid. Ale . 501. Aristoph . Av. 418. Thuc. i, 109. 111. ii, 39- vi, 2. vji, 11, fyc. Plat. Phileb. p. 210. Symp. p. 267· Isocr. ad Phil, p. 100. E.' κραίνειν τι Soph. Track. 127. άναΧ^ητα yap ovcf ο πάντα κραίνων βασιΧεύς επεβαΧε θνατοις Κ ρονίδας. δε- σπόζειν τι. Eurip. Here . f. 28. Λύκος την επτάπυpyov τηνδε δεσπόζων ποΧιν. ef^yeicr&u Thuc . i, 71. Vi, 85. as ^y εΊσθαι i, 19· In this passage άρχειν τίνος is put in opposition, and in eζηy. rjy. the idea of proper dominion does not seem to be implied, but only the command, or leading of a people who are otherwise represented as free. Hence also adjectives and substantives, in which the same idea of governing is implied, and which are 11 Fisch. in, a. p. 371. 1 Brunck. ad Eur. Ph. 600 . Syntax. Of the Genitive. mostly derived from such verbs, have a genitive after them : a. Adjectives, ey κράτη?, άκρατης- Xen. Mem. S. n, 1, 7· o\ ey κρατείς τούτων απάντων , opposed to αδυνατοις ταυτα ποιε'ιν . IsoCT. Ctd Phil. p. 86 . C. Φίλιππος τον I κ Λ f > » *1 λλυριών πλήθους — ey κρατης και κύριος yeyove. espe¬ cially when transferred to mastery over the soul : (as κρατειν φόβου και θνμου Plat. Tim. p . 327·) Xen. CyTOp · IV 5 1, 14. εμοί δοκεί, της peyiOTn ς ηδονης πολύ μάλλον συμφερειν ey κράτη είναι , c fri aster over pleasure,, pro¬ vided one regulates his enjoyment’, is opposed to §. 15. άπληστως χρησθαι. Mem. S. II., 1, 3» ύπνου ey κράτη είναι, ώστε δύνασθαι και οφε κοιμηθηναι και πρωί αναστηναι * και άypυπvησaι, εί τι δόοι. Cyrop . V, I, 14. τά μοχθηρά άνθρώπια πασών, οίμαι, των επιθυμιών ακρατη εστι, κάπειτα έρωτα αίτιώνται’ οί δε ye καλοί ^ya0oi, επιθυμούν- τες και χρυσίου και ίππων άyaθώv και yi ιναικών καλών , όμως απάντων τούτων ρμδίως δύνανται απεχεσθαι , ώστε μη απτε- σθαι αυτών παρά τό δίκαιον. Both adjectives may be translated € moderate, immoderate in apy thing’; but the construction is determined by their signifying f to be master over any thing, to have in one’s power’. In the same manner ησσων is used, e. g. ήττων πόνου, ύπνου, ηδονών. Xen. Mem. S. 1,5, 1. IV, 5, 11. άρχειν ύπνου ib. II, 6, 1. κρατειν ηδονών ib. I, 5 , 6. Thus also καρτερος. Theocr. XV, 94. μη φυνί, Μελιτώδες, ός άμών καρτερος ειη, πλάν όνος. ‘ who shall rule over us’? k w. b. Substantives. Plat. Leg. i, p. 53. ήττα τού πόμα- τος, ‘ defeat by means of drinking’, i. e. f intemperance in drinking’, id. X, p. 102. ητται ηδονών η λυπών, ib. ρ. 114. άκράτειαι ηδονών καί λυπών. Xeiil. Mem. S. II, 1, 1· k Valck. ad Theocr. Adon. p. 386. I 340. 484 Syntax. Of the Genitive. ( Σωκράτης ) εδόκει μοι προτρεπειν τους συνόντας άσκειν ε 7 * κράτειαν προς επιθυμίαν βρωτον και ποτού και Xayvelas και ύπνον , και plyovs και θάλπους καί πόνου, where the three last genitives are governed by εγκράτειαν, not b y επιθυμίαν, ( mastery over cold, heat, labour*, i. e. f power, not to be overcome by them, but of bearing them*; and even in the former part the words πρός επιθυμίαν might be omitted. Isocr . ad Demon, p. 6 . C. ύφ* ών κρα - τεισθαι την φνχην αισχρόν } τούτων εγκράτειαν ασκεί πάν¬ των, κέρδους , όρ·γης , ηδονης, λύπης. Thus also adjectives, which are used as substantives in this sense. II. π\ 470. πότνια Θηρών , ' mistress over the wild beasts’. Pind. P. iv, 380. πότνια όζυτάτων βελεων, e of Venus*. * 3. f To obey*, as the opposite of f to command*. άκουειν τινός AEsch. Agam. 9 65. Id. Prom . 40. άνηκον - στεΤν δε των πατρός λόyωv οΐόν τε πώς ; c not to obey*, υπακουειν. Phuc . II, 62. είκός yvώvaι ελευθερίαν μεν , ην αντιλαμβανόμενοι αυτής διασώσωμεν, ρφδίως ταυτα αναληφομενην, άλλων δ* ν πακουσασι, και τα προσκεκτη- μενα φιλεΐν ελασσουσθαι . Comp. VI, 82. Xenopfl. Cyr. IV, 1, 3. VIII, 1, 4. 20. Thus also πείθεσθαί τίνος Her . I, 126. νυν ών εμεο πειθόμενοι , yivea0e ελεύθεροι. Comp, γ, 33 . Thuc. VII, 73 1 . In Plato Rep. in, p. 270 . ον δ’ όσιον ταυτά ye κατά Άχιλλεως φάναι, καί άλλων λ εyόvτωv πείθεσθαί. άλλων λεyόvτωv appears to be the genit. consequ. c nor to believe it on the assertion of others’. άπιθεϊν, απειθειν τίνος , ‘not to obey*. Horn. H. in Cer. 448. ουδ άπίθησε θεά Διός ά yy ελιάων. Xen. Cyrop . IV, 5 , 19. πώς χρη καλουντος ά πείθε ι ν. 1 Wessel, ad Herod, ρ. 63, 59. 485 Syntax. Of the Genitive. Qhs . The dative is more usually found with these verbs, e. g. άνηκονστείν Herod, x i, 14. νττακονειν Xen. Cyr. iv, 5, 19. viii. 1, 18. 7, l6. With ττείθεσθαι, απειθεϊ v the genitive itself is rare. Homer joins both cases with ακονειν. II. π > 531. οττι οι ωκ ηκονσε με'γας θεός ενξαμενοιο. 4. Words which imply a comparison with respect 341. to value, or require a definition of value. To these belong: , a. άξιος, ανάξιος, properly ‘ equivalent’, e. g. Col¬ lin. El. V, 19. (Brunch. Gnom. p. 58.) Xa . —«ί— ... η . --· Τ - ™ Fisch. hi, a. p. 378. sq. / Syntax. Of the Genitive. 487 Hence also adjectives. Isocv. ad Nicocl. p . 21. B. <ϊοξ*7 μβν χρήματα κτητά , δόξα $6 χρημάτων ονκ ώνητη . c. The construction of the genitive is the same in the phrase τιμμν or τιμάσθαι τινί tlvos. Plcit. ApoL. S. p, 83. τ i ματ a ί μοι ο ανηρ θανα τον. ρ. 85. el ούν δει μβ κατά το δίκαιον της αξίαν τιμάσθαι, τούτον τιμώμαι , της €V UpvTave'np σιτησεως. because the punishment was considered as an estimate of the crime, a price as it were, as is evident also from the form τί όστιν άξιος παθειν η άποτίσαι. Obs. 1 . The preposition αντί , with the genitive, sometimes accompanies the verbs, signifying ‘ to exchange’. Isocr., Archd. p. 138. B. κάΧΚιόν εστιν, αντί θνητόν σώματος αθανατον δόξαν άντικαταλλά ξασθαι και ψνχης , ης ονκ ενπορησο- μ€ν ολίγων ετών, πρίασθαι τοιαντην εύκλειαν, η πάντα τον αιώνα τοΊς εξ ημών yiy νομενοις παραμένει. Id. ad Phil. ρ. 109· C. ιδοις αν καί τών Ιδιωτών τονς επιεικεστάτονς νι rep άλλον μεν οίιδενός αν το ζρν άντικαταλλαξαμε νονς, νπερ δε τον τνχειν κάΚης δόξης άποθνησκειν εν τοΊς πολεμοις εθελον- τας. Comp. Plat Pliadon. ρ. 136, 157. Also with προς and the accus. Plat. Phadon. p. 156. μη ονχ αντη ^ η όρθή προς^ αρετήν, ηδονάς προς ηδον «9 και λνπας προς λνπας και φόβοι’ καταλλάττεσθαι. 343. Obs. 2. Instead of the genitive the dative is also put. Eurip. Troad. 355. οόκρυα τ' άνταλλάσσετε τοϊν τησόε μελεσι, Τρωάοεν, γαμηλίονί·. Androm. 1028. αυτά τ’ (Κλυ- ταιμνήστρα) έναλλάξασα φόνον θανάτψ προς τέκνων άπηνρα· Comp. Bel. 385. d. A comparison is also implied in words which 344. express a difference, διάφορος , ετερος , άΧλος, άΧλοιος , αλ- Χάτριος. Plato Charm, p. 133. τίνος εστιν επιστήμη έκα¬ στη τοντων τών επιστημών , ο τvyχaveι ον άλλο αν της της επιστήμης’ οίον, η \oyiTTU (η εστι 7 τον τον άρτιον και τον περιττόν πληθονς, όπως εχει (leg. περιττόν , όπως εχει πληθονς) προς άντά και προς αΧληλα. η yap ; Πανί/ ye 9 345. ^88 Syntdx. Of the Genitive . € τιμωρησομαι της ενθάδε αφ ιξιος. Comp. Plat. Symp. p. 253. II. y , 366. ητ εφάμην τίσασθαι ΆΧεξαν - δρον κακότητος. — Thus also φθόνεΊν τινί Τίνος , e. g. της σοφίας Plat. Hipp. ρ. 262. Xen. Ages. Ι, 4. η ποΧις ον&επωποτε , φθ ονησασα του προτετιμησθαι αυτόνς, (τοι)? πpoyόvoυς του AyησιXaoυ) επεχειρησε καταΧνσαι την άρχην αύτών. Isocr. Plat. ρ. 300. C. ΤΥ\ ύμετερα ποΧει της y ης της υπ Ώρωπίων ύεύομενης φθονουσιν (οι Οη~ βοΓιοι.) Hence Thucyd. 1 , 75. άρ (“ nonne” ν. Herm. ad Vig. ρ. 788, 488. Schaf. Melet. in Dion. H. sp . I.P.I. p. 89·) άξιοι εσμεν αρχής yε ης εχομεν τοις Ελλ^σι μη ούτως ay αν επιφθονως $ιακεισθαι. Hence also in the sense, f to deny one any thing’. JRschyl. Prom. 588. μη εμοι φθόνησες εν y μάτων, αναξ. 631. ου μεy αίρω του$ε σοι δωρήματος. Plat. Menex. p. 282. τούτον καρ¬ πού ουκ εφθονησεν, αΧΧ ενειμε και τοις αΧΑοις . He rod. I, 90. Κροίσο? κατέβαινε αύτις παραιτεομενος , επειναι ο'ι τω θεω τούτων ονει^ίσαι. Xen. Cyrop. Υ, 4, 32. ο Kopos άκούσας τού πεν πάθους ιμκτειρεν αυτόν . Id. Ages. I, 33. Ώ$ S” ηκουσεν ( y ΆyησιXaoς) τους ποΧεμιους τα- β Fisch. hi, a. ρ. 412 sq. 490 Syntax. Of the Genitive. ρασσεσθαι, Sia το αίτιάσθαι άΧΧηΧους του ysyei 'ημε- νου> ευθυς rjyev επί Σάρόεις. Id. Anab. II, 4, 1. μη μνή- σ ίκακησειν βασιΧεα αυτοις της συν Κι ίρφ επιστρα - τβιας, μη$ε a XX ου μη $ ενός των 7 ταροιχομενων. Under this head way also be reckoned αμφισβητειν τινί τίνος. Isocr. Cld PHll. p . 198, C. του όε φρονειν ευ και πε- παιόενσθαι καλώς αμφισβητώ. Cf. Archid. p. 131. C p . with which elsewhere περί is put. 346. Hence the genitive also is put with the verbs f to accuse, to criminate’, as επεξιεναι , όιώκειν , € 7 ταιτιάσθαι, φε^ειν, c to be accused’, α\ρε 7v, c to cause the condemna¬ tion of any one, to gain one’s suit’, άχώναι, ( to be con¬ demned, to lose one’s suit’. Plat. Leg. ix, p. 44 sq. επεξί- τωσαν οι προσήκοντες του φόνου τιρ κτείναντι, c must accuse him (on account) of the murder’. Comp. Euthyphr. p. 19. Her. vi, 104. (ΜιΧτια^εα) οι εχθροί εόίωξαν τυραννί.όος της εν Χερσονησω , f prosecuted him on account of the tyranny’. Aristoph. Equ. 367. όιώξομαι σε όειΧίας. Demosth. in Never, p. 1347, 2. 7 ραφεσθαι παρανόμων, c to accuse’. Id. in Med . p. 554, 4. οιομαι φονου αν εικότως εμαυτφ ΧαχεΊν. Ib. ρ. 548, 20. χρήματα υπισχνειτο όώσειν , ει του π pay ματος αίτιώντο εμε. ρ. 552. επαιτιασάμενός με φόνον q . Plat. Apol. S. p. 82. μη ovv άξιουτε με τοιαυτα όεϊν προς υμάς πράττειν — μάΧιστα πάντων , νη Αία , και ασεβεί ας Φ ευyοντα υπό ΜεΧίτου τουτουί. ib. p. 60. ei όε άκων όιαφθείρω (τούς νέους), των τοιουτων και ακουσίων αμαρτημάτων ου όεΰρο νόμος εισάyειv (in judicium adducere) εστίν. Aristoph . Nub. 591· ην Κλεωμα— όώρων εΧόντες και κΧοπης είτα φιμώ- σητε τούτον τω ξυΧω τον αυχένα. Xen. Mem. S. I, 2, 49. αΧΧα Σωκράτης y , εφη ό κατ^ορος, τους πατέρας προπηΧα- κιζειν εόιόασκε φασκων, κατα νομον εξειναι παρανοία ς q Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. ρ. 239. ρ Fisch. hi, a. *p. 411. t Syntax. Of the Genitive. 491 εΧοντι και τον πατέρα δησαι. DeUflOSth. in TilUOCV. p. 732, 17· XeyovTCOv των νόμων, ονς εθηκε Σόλων-- εαν τις αΧφ κΧοπης και μη τιμηθγ θανάτου, προστιμαν αυτω δεσμόν, και εάν τις αΧονς της κακωσεως των <γονεων εις την ayo- ράν εμβάΧγ, δεδεσθαι, καν άστρατείας τις όφΧγ — και τούτον δεδεσθαι’ Ύιμοκράτης άπασι τουτοις άδειαν ποιεΊ. Comp. Plato Leg. ιχ, ρ. 45. Arist. Αν. 1046. καΧοΰμαι Πβί- σθεταιρον ύβρεως. Thus also δικαζειν Xen. Cyvop. I, 2, 7· δικάζουσι δε και 0y κΧηματος, ον ενεκα άνθρωποι μισουσι μεν άΧΧηΧονς μάΧιστα, δικάζονται δε ήκιστα, αχαριστίας. Obs. 1. This genitive is besides often accompanied by other 347· substantives, or prepositions, on which it depends, e. g. φευyειv επ' αιτία φόνου Demosth. in Aristocr. p. 632, 10. ey ράφατο (με) τούτων αυτών ενεκα Plut. Euthyphr. ρ. 5. Comp. He¬ rod. νι, 136. see Obs. 3. ypάφεσθaί τινα y ραφήν φόνου τραύματος. JEschin. π. παραπρ. ρ. 270. in Ctesiph. ρ. 6 08. άπoypάφεσθaι φόνου δίκην. Antiph. ρ. 7S3. ΧαχεΊν τινι δίκην επιτροπής. Demosth. in Aphob. ρ. 853, 18. Obs. 2. Other verbs of the same signification are, on ac¬ count of the nature of their composition, differently constructed; those compounded with κατά take the person in the genitive, and the crime, or the punishment, in the accusative, e. g. κατη- y ορεΊν τι τινός. See §. 377· ey καΧεΊν has the person in the dative, and the crime in the accusative, e. g. Soph. El. 778. eyKaXivv δ’ εμοι φόνους πατρώους, δείν επηπείΧει τεΧειν τ . Yet with Ka^yopeiv τίνος the crime also is put in the genitive. Demosth. in Mid. p. 5 17, 27. el μεν ουν παρανόμων η παρα- πρεσβείας η τίνος αΧΧης τοιαυτης αιτίας ημεΧΧον αυτόν κατη- y ορεΊν, ούδεν αν υμών ηζίουν δεισθαι. Obs. 3. The punishment also is sometimes in the genitive, yet seldom any word except θανάτου. Herod. vi, 136. αάνθίππος ό ' Αριφρονος θανάτου ayayoov υπό τον δήμον ΧίιΧτιάδεα εδίωκε της Αθηναίων άπατης είνεκα e accusing capitally’, Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 14. και θανάτου δε ουτοι κρίνουσι. Tkuc. ill, 57· θανά- Γ Fisch. hi, a. ρ. 381 sq. 49$ Syntax. Of the Genitive. του δίκρ κρίνεσθαι. Hence also Plat. Rep. ill, p. 212. ανθρώπων καταφηφισθεντων θανάτου η φυ'γης. Obs. 4. ένοχος y which properly is constructed with the dative ( Demosth. in Timocr. p. 755, 11. ιεροσυΧίη. και άσεβείφ και κΧοπρ και το?ς ιτάσι $€ΐνοτάτοις εισιν ένοχοι. Isocr. de Pac. ρ. 160. A .) sometimes takes the genitive. Lysias p. 520. τολ- μώσί τινες \eyeiv, ως ουρείς ένοχός εστι Χειποταζίου ούδε δειΧίας. Also the genitive of the punishment, Demosth. p. 1229., 11· ένοχοι δεσμού ·γε*γόνασι 9 . h. With adjectives. Eur. Ale. 753. ώ σχετΧία τολ- μης, Iphig. A. 1287· ΟΪ eyu>, θανάτου του σου μεΧεα. Thus Porson explains Eurip. Or. 219 . ω βοστρύχων πινώδες άθΧιον κάρα \ but it seems to stand for βοστρυχοις πινωδεσι , f filthy with respect to the hair’, as §. 317 . Plat. Phce - don. p. 132. ευδαίμων μοι ό άνηρ εφαίνετο και του τρό¬ που και των Χ0*γων. Hence the genitive stands alone in exclamations, with and without an interjection or a word that expresses admiration, indignation, compassion, &c. Aristoph. Av. 6l. ^Απολλον αποτρόπαιε , του χασμήματος I c what a SWal· low H . Nub. 153. ώ Ζευ βασιΧευ, της Χεπτότητος των φρένων ! * Ο Jupiter! the acuteness of his mind"! Also with the addition of a nominative. Eurip. Ph. 384. οιμοι τών εμών eyco κακώνΐ Xen. Cyrop. Ill, 1, 39. φου του άνδρόςΐ 1 Alas ! the man'! II, 2, 3. της τύχης , το εμε νυν κΧηθεντα δεύρο τυχείν ! f the misfortune ! that I should have been sum¬ moned hither\ Thus also it seems Eur. Hec. 661 . is to be explained : τί δ’, ώ τάΧαινα ; σης κακο*γΧωσσου βοής ! * what is this, wretched woman ? Oh thy unhappy excla¬ mation* ! or ώ τάΧαινα σης KaKoyX. β. ‘ wretched on account of thy ill-boding exclamation*. Theocr. iv, 40. at at τω σκΧηρω μάΧα δαίμονος ! X, 40. ω μοι τω πι^ωνος. -■ 1-;--————-- ---- 9 Markl. ad Lys. ρ. 520. ed, R. I 493 Syntax. Of the Genitive. The article usually accompanies the substantive in the genitive, because the exclamation generally refers to a determinate case, not, however, in all cases 1 . AEsch. Pers. 114. όα, Π ερσικον στρατεύματος τονδε ! 728. ω ττοττοι , κενής αρωγής κατνικονρίας στρατόν ! 924. αι αί αι αι , κερνάς α\κάς ! Soph. Aj. 908. ψ μοι εμάς άτας ! Eur. Ale. 400. ίω μοι τνχαςί Arist. Nub . 1476. οίμοι 7ταρανοίας\ Plut. 1127. οιμοι 7 τΧακονντος τούν τετράδι πεπεμμενον ! Plat . Rep . VI, p. 120. ’'ΑττολΧον, δαιμόνιας νττερβοΧης ! Pheocr. XV, 75. χρηστώ κ οικτίρμονος άνδρός ! The grammarians supply '■ * · ,f u ενεκα , y f' \ , v , A \ ψ C. With substantives. Od. o , S. Τηλέμαχο? ννκτα Si άμβροσίην μεΧεδηματα Ίτατρος εγειρεν. ‘ grief ΟΠ ac¬ count of his father*. II. o', 25. οδύνη ΉρακΧηος θείοιο. Thuc. VII, 73. το ττεριχαρες (η χαρά) της νίκης, "joy for the victory’. Soph. Trach. 41. ττλην εμοι ττικράς ωδίνας αν τον 7τροσβα\ων αποίχεται, ( anxiety on his account’. Eur. Or. 42 6 . το Τροίας μίσος , "hatred of Troy*. 452. Kovpcf. τε Θ vyaT po ς πενθίμιρ κεκαρμενος χ . Ob.s. With passives also, though very rarely, the person from whom the effect arises, is put in the genitive, instead of νπό with this case. Eur. Or. 491. ^ΓXηyεις θι^ατρδς της εμης. El. 123. κείσαι σάς άΧόχον σ $ t \ ~ . ικετεν ω σε τωνόε y ον νατ ων, και σον ye veto u, δεζιάς τ ενδαίμονος. Or. 663. τ αν της (βάμαρτος) ικνονμαί σε Ζ . In other cases νπέρ, αντί , προς accom¬ pany this genitive. Hence the genitive with Χιτη , ‘ the prayer'. .Eur. Or. ‘284. όΐμαι Se πατέρα τον έμον — ποΧΧάς yevt -ίον τονά’ άν έκτ€ΐναι Χιτάς. Id. Or. 244. ΧιταΙ θεών, ‘ intreaties by the Gods', i. e. which are addressed whilst the suppliant takes hold of the altar of the Deity (as in the first • instance the chin of the person intreated). But it may also be, the prayers which we address to the Gods whilst we implore their protection. Soph. (Ed. C. 1308. τι $ητα vvv αφημένος κνρώ ; σοι προστροπαίονς, ώ πάτερ, Χιτάς έχων, αντός τ ε μ αν τον, ζυμμάχων τε των έμων, (which is followed by V. 1326. όί σ άντί παίδων τών$ε και φνχης, πάτερ , 'ικετενομεν.) c intreaties On my own account, and on that of my auxiliaries', where the idea of the .cause is quite clear. 351. 6. The genitive is also put with the verbs, f to begin', άρχειν, άρχεσθαι, νπάρχειν , κατάρχειν , properly, f to make a beginningin, or with any thing'. Theocr. i, 70. άρχετε y Comp. Musgr. ad Eur. Ipb. Aul. 1078. 2 Brunck. ad Eurip. Med. 326. hlec. 7 42. Pors. ad Eur. Or. 663. I Syntax . Of the Genitive ; 495 βωκοΧικάς, Μώσαι φίΧαι, άρχετ άοιδάς. JEschlYl. Socr. Axioch. 7· ού κατα τ»}»' πρωτην yeveaiv to νηπιον κΧαίει, τον ζγν ct 7 ro Χνπης ά ρχόμενον. Xeft. Xlevfi. S. ϊί } Sy 11. €t τινα των γνωρίμων βουΧοιο KaTepyaaaaOai, οπότε θνοι, κα- Χείν σε επι δειπνον, τι αν ποιοίης\ ΧΑΙΡ. οη\ον οτι κατά ρ- χόιμι αν τον αυτός, ore θυοιμι, καΧεΊν εκείνον, νπάρ- χειν signifies especially auctorem esse, c to do any thing first, to give occasion to, e. g. υπάρχειν χειρω v αδίκων, αδικίας, ‘ to cause outrages first"; also υπάρξαι alone. Eur. Androm. 274. Η με·γάΧων άχεων άρ' ύπηρζεν, ότ Ύδαίαν ες νάτταν ηΧθ ’ ο της Matas re καί Διον ·γόνος. Plat. Menex. p. 2 80. της εύγενείας ί τρωτόν ύπηρζε τοισδε η των irpoyo νων ^γενεσις. Afldocid. p . 71 · ed. R, Λακεδαι¬ μόνιοι . . ·Λ \ ^ ; ' * V 1 \ * > * < · Hence when a substantive is joined with an adjective, where both should be in the same case, the Greeks con¬ sider the substantive as the whole, and the adjective as a part of it, and put the former in the genitive, as οϊ χρηστοί τών ανθρώπων Avisl. Plut. 490. c good men . o 353. 498 Syntax. Of the Genitive. ήμισνς του χρόνου, ‘ half the time’, Demosth. in Lept. 7 . της yrjs την ττολλην Thuc. ii, 57. f the greatest part of the Country’. εν παντί κακού Plat. Rep. ix, p. 254. See under the head Adjective. 4. In the same manner the neuter of the pronoun demonstr. has the substantive in the genitive, though it should agree with the former in gender and case. To this may be referred the phrases ες τούτο avay κης, άνοιας, εις τοσουτο μίσους, εν τούτω παρασκευής, for ece ταύτην άνά^/κην, άνοιαν , είς τοσουτο μίσος, εν ταυττ] παρασκευή, which are explained above §. 319- Herod, vn, 50, 2, ες o Si /νάμιος. Lysias p. 397- €ΐς τοσουτόν είσι τόΧμης αφημέ¬ νοι, instead of which ρ. 395. εί? τοσαυτην άπΧηστίαν » II C αφικοντο . The construction in Herod, vn, 217. κατά τούτο του ουρεος εφυΧασσον Φωκεων χίΧιοι όπΧΐται, c On this sidg the mountain’ is different. 354. 5. With relatives, Herod, vii, 205. παραλαβών Si άπίκετο και Θηβαίων too? (for ους) ες τον αριθμόν Xoywa- μενος εϊπον . Xen. Anab. I, 7 5 13. μετά την μάχην οι ύστε¬ ρον εΧήφθησαν των ποΧε μ ίων, ταύτά ήyyελλov, for τούς Θηβαίους, ους. οι ποΧεμιοι, οι εΧ. Eurip. Hec. 858. ούκ εστι θνητών 6στις εστ εΧεύθερος, in which a comma must not follow. Thuc. 11, 65. SιεXόvτες του τείχους r\ προσε- πιπτε τό χώμα , εσεφόρουν την yrjv. qua parte TYlUri agger imminebat, earn interciderunt, fyc. Plat. Rep. x, in. περί ποιησεως λέγω το μ »βαμη πapaSεχεσθaι αυτής όση μιμητική, and passim. Thus Liv. ι, 14. vastatur agri quod inter urbem et Fidenas est. The construction in Thuc. vn, 36. is different from the foregoing, τοις Si Αθηναίοις ούκ εσεσθαι σφών εν στενό - -- - ■" ■— —---* e Wasse ad Thuc. ιν, 69 . Fisch. m, a. p. 295 sq. I 499 Syntax. Of the Genitive. χωρίη ούτε περίπλουν ούτε όιεκπλουν, ωπερ της τέχνης μάλι¬ στα εττίστευον } c in which manoeuvre of their tactics’, pro¬ perly,, f in which part of their art’, &c. where rjirep τεχνγ could not be substituted for ωι rep της τέχνης . Thus also Xen. Cyr . VI, 1 , 28. εόοζε S' αύτιρ, ο κράτιστον είκός ην είναι της λύναμε ως, οντων των βέλτιστων επϊ τοις άρμασιν, τούτο εν ακροβολιστών μερει είναι. 6. With substantives two cases especially are to be noticed: > a. Where the names of cities or other places are ac¬ companied by the name of the country in which they lie ; the latter, as the whole, is in the genitive, and almost always placed first. Herod . v, 1000. άπικόμενοι Se τίρ στόλιρ τούτιρ Άωνες ες Εφεσον , πλοία μεν κατελιπον εν Κ ορησσω της Έφεσίης. VI, 101. oi Se Π ερσαι πλεοντες κατέσχον τάς νέας της Έρετρικης χωρης κατά Τ αμύνας και Χοιρεας και Αιγίλια. lb. 47. τα Si μέταλλα τα Φοινικικά ταύτά εστι της Θάσον μεταξύ Αινυρων τε καλεομενων και Κ οινύρων. Thucyd. II, 18. ο Se στρατός των Πβλο- ποννησ ίων προιων αφικετο της Αττικής ες Ο ινοην. Comp. C. 21. Xen . Hist. Gr. Π, 1, 20. Oi Se Αθηναίοι ωρμίσαντο της Xe p p ονησ ου εν ’ Ελαίου ντ ι. Also in other combinations. Herod, vi, 114. άπό S> εθανε των στρατ η<γών Έτη σίλεως ο θρασυλεω. > , \ , 1 ί ι Ί .·' ν t ··’·'' . ' ' ’ ι\ it) . /v5j , » » * b. An adjective in the genitive plural sometimes accompanies substantives of all kinds, in order to mark the class to which the thing or person mentioned belongs. Xen. Symp. 7, 2. εισεφερετο τρ όρχηστρ'άι τρο¬ χός των κεραμεικών, f a wheel of the class of the earthen’, i. e. an earthen wheel, τροχός κεραμεικός. Theophr. Ch . 5. Θνριακάς των στρογρύλων ληκύθους και βακτηρίας των σκολιών εκ Λα κεόαίμονος. Lucian. D. Mort. 10, 9· Μ€ι/ 17 Γ 7 γο$ οντοσι , λαβών πελεκνν των ναυπη- \ 500 Syntax. Of the Genitive. yiKwv, άποκόφει τον Trvoywva. Comp. Plat. Hipp. MlTl. p. 209 d . - ; 355. 7. With verbs ; and a. with είναι. Thuc. i, 65. teat ai/T^s ηθεΧε τών μενόντων είναι , * one of those who remained at home*. III^ 70. ετυγνανε yap και βουΧης ών (o Ilet^ias,) ‘ a member of the council·. Plat. Euthyd. p. 17. τών Χαμ- βανόντων άρ είσιν οι μανθάνοντες, ‘belong to those who take'. id. Menon. p. 350. οι μεν Χ^οντες είσι τών ιερεων τε και ιερειών, οσοις μεμεΧηκε, περί ών μεταχειρίζονται Xoyov οίοις τ είναι διδοναι. Phcedon. ρ. 153. οίσθα, ότι τον θάνατον rjyovvTai παντε s οι αΧΧοι τών μεy ιστών κακών είναι» Rep. II , ρ. 212. (top Yvyw') διαπραζασθαι ϊών ayy^Xwv y ενεσθαι τών περί τον βασιΧεα. Aristoph. Plat. 869. V τών πονηρών ησθα και τοιχωρύχων. Xen. Anab. I , 2, 3. ην δε και ο Σωκράτης τών άμφι Μίλητον σ τρατευο- μενων. Similarly Isocr. in Callim.p. 380. D. ώστ αύτφ (Καλλίμαχέ) προσηκει μετά τών αύτομοΧων άvayεypά g · * ιγγ * 1 ,Vi ·\Γί\\«0 yQV'i/O h Thom. M. p. 6*98. Moer. p. 315. 1 Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. 310. Pierson, ad Moer. p. l6'5. Koen. ad Greg. p. 50. Hemst. ad Arist. Plat. 840. Fisch. hi, a. p. 263. 356. 376 . Heind, ad Plat. Gorg. p. 232. Syntax. Of the Genitive. 503 νος yeypcnrTai, properly, e in what part of my mind’. Soph . Phil. £04. η που ttjS’ η τρόε τόπων; Eur . Hec. 1275. ονχ όσον τάχος νήσων έρημων αυτόν εκβα- ΧεΊτε ποι ; Plat. Rep. IX, p. £73. ενταύθα Xoyov. Xen. Cyrop . VI, 1, 42. εμβαΧείν που της εκείνων χωράς. VII, £. 8. *0 06 Ki/joo? καταστρατοπεοευσας τους εαυτου, οπού εοοκει επιτηόειότατον είναι της πό\ε ω?, where however the genitive may also be governed of the superlative. He¬ rod. II, 17£. άyaXμa όαίμονος ίόρυσε της πό\ιος οκού ην επιτηόεωτατον. Soph, Philoct. £55. ου μηόε κΧρόων ώ$ εχον- τος οΊκαόε, μηό Ε ΧΧαό ος ^ης μηόαμου , όιηΧθε που. Aj. 386. ούχ όρφς, ίν εϊ κακού. Eur. ΙθϊΙ . 1£71· ιν εί τυχης ν . Hence the Latin phrases, uhi terrarum, uhi gentium. In the same manner the genitive is put with adverbs of time, e. g. όψε της ημέρας , c late in the day’, πηι HKa της ημέρας Avistoph. Αν. 1498. though here the genitive may be constructed 'with respect to' * 1 . Obs. Sometimes in this case the nominative is put for the genitive. Time, ιι, 47· ΤίεΧοποννησιοι και ζυμμαχοι τα όυο μέρη εσε βαΧον ες την Αττικήν, instead of ΥΥεΧοποννησιων και ζυμμάχων. Ill, Q£. οι ζυμπαντες εισι μεν τρία μέρη for Μ^λίβωι/ των ζυμπαντων. This takes place especially in ο μεν —o $e. Od. μ , 73. dt $ε όυω σκόπεΑοι, ο μεν ουρανόν ευρυν ί κάνει * (ν. 101.) τον ό ετερον σκοπεΧόν χθαμαΧωτερον όφει. Thuc. ι, 89· οικιαι αι μεν ποΧΧαι επεπτωκεσαν, oXiyai όε περιησαν . Rurip. Rhes. 413. οί ό* ουόεν ημιν εyyεvεις πεφυκοτες, παΧαι παροντες , οι μεν εν χωστοΊς τάφοις κεϊνται πεσόντες , πίστις ον σμικρά 7 τόΧβί, οι ό’ ενθάόε - μενουσιν. Plat. Rep. νι, ρ. 92* °ι ξυνόντες αυτί} ( φιΧοσοφία ) οι μεν ουόενός, οι όε ποΧΧοι ποΧ- k Valck. ad Herod, ρ. 1 67, 37. ad Eurip. Hipp. 1012. Fisch. hi, b. p. 71 sq. 1 Fisch. hi, b. p. 72. 358 504 Syntax. Of the Genitive. Χών κακών αζιοί είσι. Isocr. de Pac. p. 182. A. συνίσασι τοι)ί v. ■ * *■> r \ \ > / * / προ αυτών τετυραννηκοτας τους μεν υπο y ονεων ανηρημε- νους, τους οε υπο παιόων, τους οε υπ αοελφων, τους οε υπο yvvaiKcov. See §. 288. f. Obs. 2. Thus also έκαστος . II. i/j 44. T ρω ας δε τρόμος αίνος ύπηΧνθε yvia έκαστο ν. Comp. §. 301. Obs. From the same reason a genitive is put with many other verbs, which signify participation, or in which at least this idea is implied. l. μετεγειν, κοινωνειν τίνος, fyc. ‘ to participate in any thing’, the impersonal μετεστί μοί τίνος . Find. P. 2, 153. ου ot μετεχω θρασέος. Isocr. Nicocl. p. 35. D. της μεν ανάριας και της δεινότητος και των αΧΧων των ευδοκιμούντων εώρων και των κακών άνδρών πολλοί)? μετέχοντας, την δε σωφροσύνην καί την δικαιοσύνην 'ίδια κτήματα των καΧών κayaθώv όντα. Xen. Rep. LctC. I, 9· at τε yap yvvai^ διττούς ο’ίκους βουΧονται κατεχειν, οΊ τε ανδρες αδεΧφούς τοΊς παισι προσΧαμβάνειν, οι του μεν *ye- νους και της υνά μεως κοινωνούσι, των δε χρημάτων ουκ αντιποιούνται. Thuc. YV , 10. άιώρες οι ξυναράμενοι τού δε του κινδύνου. Eur. Med. 942. ζυΧΧηφομαι $ε τονδε σοι κά^/ώ πόνου, and in the active Iphig. A. 360. συΧΧαβεμόχθων™. Soph. (Ed. C. 567. εζοιδ’, άνηρ ών , χωτι της ες αύριον ούδεν πΧεον μοι σου μετεστιν ημέρας. Hence Xen. Mem. S. II, 2 , 32. dyaOrj συΧ- Χηπτρια τών εν ε’ιρηνρ πόνων , βέβαια δε τών εν ποΧεμχρ σύμμαχος epywv, αρίστη δε φιΧιας κοινωνός . Obs. 1. μετεχειν is often accompanied by μέρος. JEsch. Agam . 518. ου yap ποτ ηύχουν θανών μ ε Θ ε ζ ε ι ν-φιΧτάτου τάφου μέρος. Herod . ιν, 145. μοίραν τιμεων μετεχο ν¬ τε ς. Eur. Suppl. 1080. μετεΧαχες τύχας Οίδιπόδα , y^pov, > - . ' « Γ Γ - ' ” re m t f f v m r ' ■* - > “* * 4 m Brunck. ad Soph. Phil, 281. Fisch. in, a. p. 414. I 505 Syntax, Of the Genitive. φ m μέρος, και συ, 7 τόΧις εμά τΧαμιων. Comp, jurist· Plut, 226. Isocr. Archid. p. 116 . B. ηγούμαι, περί του ποΧεμεΊν, η μη , προσηκειν μαΧιστα τουτοις συμβουΧειιειν, οιπερ και των κίνδυ¬ νων πΧειστον μέρος μεθεζουσ ιν. Thus also with μετεστι. Bur. Iph. T. 1310. μετεσ τι ν ύμϊν των πεπραγμενών μερ ος. Isocr. Nicocl. ρ. 35. D. κάΧΧιστον υπεΧαβον, εί τις δυναιτο ταυταις ταις αρεταις προσεχειν τον νουν, των αΧΧων αφεΧο- μένος, ών μηδέν μέρος τοις πονηροις μετεστ ιν. Comp. Archid. ρ. 135. Β. Xen. Cyr . νπ, 5, 44 \ μετεστι also is put with a nominative as the subject. Thuc. n, 37 · μετεστι πάσι ' >/ ο το ίσον . Obs. 2. μετεχειν is also found with the accusative of the thing, in which one participates. Soph. CEd. C. 1482. εναισίου δε συντυχοιμι, μηδ\ αΧαστον άνδρ* ίδών, ακερδή χάριν με- τ άσχοιμί πως. Aristoph. Plut. 1144. ου γαρ μετείχες 7 *ds Ίσας πΧηγ ά ς εμοί. — Thuc, 11 , 16 . tyj ουν επιποΧυ κατά την χωράν αυτονόμψ οικησει μετειχον οι Αθηναίοι, with μετεΊχον it seems the genitive της χωράς or των αγρών is to be understood. With κοινωνειν, instead of the genitive, εις with the accus. is put Plat. Rep. v, p. 10. δυνατή φυσις η θηΧεια Trj του άρρενος γένους κοινωνησαι εις άπαντα τα έργα. 2. προσηκει μοί τίνος , f any thing becomes me, concerns 360. me’. Xen . Cyr op. IV, 2, 40. εννοήσατε, ώς, ει μηδ εκείνους αί- σχυντεον ην, ουδ' tos ημιν νυν προσηκει ούτε πΧησ μονής πω, ούτε μέθης, lb. VIII, I, 37. ότι μεν ουν ουκ ιρετο προση- κειν ουδενι αρχής , όστις μη βεΧτίων ειη των αρχομενων, και τοις προειρημενοις πάσι δηΧον. Aristoph. Αν. 970. τι δε π ρ όσ¬ η κει δητ εμοί Κ ορινθίων', ( what are the Corinthians to me?* properly, it seems to be the same as μετεστι μοι. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 5, 10. από του μαθεΊν τι καΧον καί αγαθόν - ηδοναί μεγισται γίγνονται, ών οι μεν εγκρα¬ τείς άποΧαύουσι πράττοντες αυτά, οι δε ακρατεις ου δ ενός μετεχουσι. τω γάρ αν ηττον φησαιμεν των τοιουτων “ Fisch. in, a. ρ. 411. ° Thom. Μ. ρ. 6θ6. 506 Syntax'. Of the Genitive. 7 τ ροσηκε iv } 8$C. and §. 11. δοκέ Ts· μοι Χεγειν , ώς ανδρι ηττονι των διά του σώματος ηδονών πάμπαν ουδεμιάς αρετής π ροση κε ι ν . inf 7/ oelc *υιΐ J .·>« voa->i\ μ«γ / · 3. "to impart, to participate with’, μεταδιδόναι τινί τίνος Xen . Mem. S. II, 7, 1. εοικας βαρεο)ς φερειν τι, γ^ρη δετού βάρους μεταδιδόναι τοις φίλοις. id. CyvOp. V ΙΙ> 5, 78. 79· θάΧπους μεν και ψύχους και σίτων και ποτών και ύπνου ανάγκη και τοις δουΧοις μεταδιδόναι— ποΧεμικης δ '* επ ιστη μ ης και μεΧετης παντάπασιν ου μεταδοτεον τούτοις, $fc. q In the same manner Plat. Leg. xi, p. ill. είσι συγγνώμονες άει θεοί τοις των ανθρώ¬ πων άδικοις και άδικουσιν , αν αύτοις των άδικημάτ ων τις * / άπονε μη. » Ohs. μεταδιδάναι occurs with the accus. Herod, vm, 5. ix, 34. Arist. Vesp. 917. Xen. An. iv, 5, 5 r . j In the same manner μεταιτείν is put with the genitive of the object. Herod. IV, 14f). της βασΐΧηίης μεταιτεοντες , " desiring a part in the government’, to which Aristoph. adds μέρος. Vesp. 972. τούτων μεταιτεϊ το μέρος. * ί ί · ■· * : ' ·· . · ϊ . : ' t : · - ■ »■ . KU\ R AlJtiOOi »*' *> 4. c To enjoy’: επαύρομαι, επαυρειν , άποΧανειν, ova*? σθαι. 11. ό, 17 · ου μάν oi$’, εί αύτε κακορραφίης αΧε- γεινης πρώτη επαύρηαι, "whether you will first enjoy the fruits of your artifices’. Hesiod, εργ. 240. ποΧΧάκι και ξύμπασα ποΧις κακού άνδρος άπηύρα , Xen. Mem. S, IV, 3, lit. το δε' - προσθειναι τοις άνθρωποις αισθήσεις άρμοττούσας προς εκαστα, δι ών άποΧαύο μεν πάντων των αγαθών, το δε και Χογισμόν ημιν εμφύσαι , φ -— ποΧΧά μηγανωμεθα , δι ών των τε άγαθών άποΧαύ ο μεν και τα κακά άΧεζόμεθα. Isocr. Paneg. ρ 41. Β. ενός αν- (; ·. Ρ Thom. Μ. ρ. 751. Valcken. Diatr. ρ. 123. Not. 87. Fisch. hi, a. p. 411 sq. r Schaefer Meletem. Spec. I. p. 20 sq. 507 - Syntax. Of the Genitive. άρος ευ φρονησαντος άπαντες άν a ποΧαυ σε ιαν οι βουΧόμε- νοι κοινωνεΊν τής εκείνου ΰιανοίας. Arist . Thesm. 469. καυτή yap ε Γ γω Γ γ , — ούτως ο να ίμη ν των τέκνων —μισώ τον άνδρ εκείνον, ‘ so may I find comfort in my children". Soph. Track. 569 . 7rat ^εροντος Οίνεως , τόσον& ονήσει των εμων, εάν 7 τίθιμ πορθμών. Thus yeveaOai has always the genitive. For in Herod, ii, 14. instead of μήτε yevaeTai ή χώρη τα από Αιός, μήτε — is now read μήτε ye ύσεται ή χώρη , μήτε. Καρπουθαι however takes the accusative. It is evident that the genitive was intended to imply a part, from Isocr. c. Soph. p. 293 . B. ούκ άν εΧαχιστον μέρος άπεΧαύσαμεν αυτής. Also εκ or άπο is found with the genitive, e. g. Plat. Rep. in, p. 279- x? p· 306. Apol. S. p. 72 s . ' OT'Vj < KM . :··Λ ■ ο' Λ ' ·'- . ; . vy. ' - ' ‘ · The accusative also is often put with άποΧαύειν, hut in order to mark another reference, besides that which the genitive implies, viz. the accusative expresses the na¬ ture of the consequence resulting from the object which is enjoyed, or to whose influence one is exposed, either good or bad ; the genitive on the other hand points out the object itself: hence the genitive and accusative often stand together. Isocr. Pac. p. 17 5. B. SeS οικαμή, πειρωμενος υμάς evepyeTeiv , άπ οΧαυ σ ω τι φΧαυ ρον. Xen. Mem. S. I, 6, 2. eycv μεν ωμήν τους φιΧοσοφουντας ευ^αιμονεστερους χρήναι yiyveaOai. συ άε μοι &οκεϊς τάναν - τία τής σοφίας ά π οΧεΧαυ κενά ι. Id. Hier. 7, 9· άπο- Χαυειν τίνος ayaOa. Xenoph. Symp. 3, 3. constructs it with the accusative, ήδιστ άν άποΧαυοιμι παρά Καλλέοι» την υπόσχεσιν. A similar idiom obtains in the verbs οζβιρ, 6 to smell", s lens, et Hemst. ad Luc. T. I. p. 32 6. sqq. Fisch. in, a. p. 367. ✓ ^ , / \ 508 Syntax. Of the Genitive. πνεειν 9 ‘to breathe’, when that of which any thing smells, or which it breathes, is putin the genitive. Arist. Li/s.6\6.fih yap όζειν ye ταόι μειζόνων και πΧειόνων π pay ματων μοι όοκεϊ. Theocr. νπ, 143. πάντ ωσόεν θερεος μάΧα πίονος, ώσόε S οπω ρης. The part also which emits the smell is at the same time in the genitive, in which case the quality of the smell is expressed by a neuter adjective, ηόύ, κακόν . Aristoph. Acharn. 852. Άρτεμων όζων κακόν των μασχαΧών πατρός Τ payaaaiov. Eccl. 524. της κε φαΧης όζω μύρου. The verb also is put impersonaliter. Aristoph. Vesp. 1058. ύμίν Si έτους τών ιματίων όζησει όεζιότητος. ‘ There will be a smell of dexterity from your clothes’. Compare Pac. 529 sqq. Herod . m, 23. adds άπό to the genitive : όζειν Se αττ αύτης (κρηνης) ωσει 'ίων ‘ the spring smells as of violets’ 1 . More fully in Hermipp . ap. Athen. i, p. 29 . E. ού και από στό¬ ματος - όζει ’ίων — όσμη θεσπεσία. Agreeable to this analogy seems to be the construction of αιχμής άπεΧαμπε 11- χ, 319. In the same manner Anacr. 9 , 3. πόθεν μύρων τοσούτ ων 9 επ* ηερος Θεούσα , πνεεις τε και ψεκάζεις. Aristoph. Equ. 437. (ύς ούτος ηόη Κ αικίας και συκοφαν¬ τίας πνεί. Epigr. Lucill. in Anall. Br. T. 11 , p. 336. ού μόνον αύτη πνεί Αημοστρατίς, άλλα και αυτής τούς οσμησαμενους πνείν πεποίηκε τρ ay ου. Also προσβάΧΧειν μύρου , in which όσμην is understood, Aristoph. Pac. 180. πόθεν βροτού με προσεβαΧε , where it is put impersonaliter , and όσμη is supplied. Athen. xui 4 p. 566. E. τούς μύρου προσβάΧΧοντας 11 . 363. 5. The construction of the verbs which signify r to 1 Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. 1020. Schweigh. ad Athen. T. vii, p. 681. Thom. M. p. 521. Schaef. ad Long. p. 392. u Schweigh. ad Athen. T. vn, p. 47. % < Syntax \ Of the Genitive. participate, to receive, to give’, with the genitive, ap¬ pears to have been the cause of other verbs also, ^which signify f to obtain, to receive’, having the same construc¬ tion, although this too may have arisen from the cause mentioned in §. 328. Not. Of this kind are τυγχάι>ειν, \ayycLV€Lv τινός, and αντιάν, κυρειν τίνος. ISOCV. ad Nicocl. p. 22. B. C. e 7 τειδη θνητού σώματος ετυχε?, αθάνα¬ του δε "ψυχής; πειρώ της ψυχής αθάνατον μνημην καταΧι- πειν» Id. Nicocl. p. 39. Β. οΐωνπερ ονομάτων εκαστα των πραγμάτων τετύχηκε , τοιαύτας η Γ γεισθε και τας δυνά¬ μεις αυτών είναι ; and with a double genitive Xcyi. Ατι. v, 5, 15 έρωτα δε αυτούς , οποίων τινών ημών ετυχον, c what kind of men they found us.’ II. ω , 76. ως κεν ΆχιΧλεύς δώρων εκ ΤΙριάμοιο Χάχη 3 από θ 'Έ,κτορα Χυσφ. Sop/l. (Ed. C. 450. άλλ’ ουτι μη Χάχωσι τοΰδε συμμάχου. Thuc. II, 44. το $ εύτυχες , οι άν ( MlSC . Philol. V ol. II. Ρ. 2. ρ. 101.) της ευ π ρ επεστάτης Χάχωσ ιν 3 ώσπερ ο'ιδε μεν νύν 3 τεΧευτης 3 υμείς δε Χυπης. Thus also the active form II. η 3 79 sq. όφρα 7 τυρός με Τρώες και Τρώων αΧοχοι ΧεΧάχωσι θανόντα. Comp. ο 3 350. χ, 342. ψ, 76. II. α', 66. αϊ κεν πως άρνών κνίσσης αιγών τε τεΧείων βούΧεται άντιάσας ημιν από Χοιγόν αμύναι. Soph. El. 868. (εί ζενος άτερ εμάν χερών') κεκευθεν 3 ούτε του τάφου άντιάσας 3 ούτε *γόων παρ ημών. Hcvod. II, 119* απικο- μενος ο IMeveXecos ες την Λ’ί^υπτον ζεινιων ηντησε μεγ άΧων Χ . Id. I, 31. αι Άργειαι (εμακάριζον) την μητέρα αυτών {τών νεηνιεων) 3 οίων τέκνων εκυρησε 3 that such children were her lot’. Eur. Iph. A. ι6ΐ4. πε-μπει δ Αγα¬ μέμνων μ’ ώστε σοι φράσαι ταδε 3 Χε^ειν θ ο π ο ιας ε κ θεών χ To that belong the passages which Musgr. ad Eur. Troad, 211. quotes, in which he takes ανταυ erroneously in the signification of ‘to meet’. VOL. II. K 510 ‘ Syntax. Of the Genitive. μοίρας κυρει. Comp. Id. Med. 23. Ion. 1288. εσθΧον 8 εκυρσα δαίμονας } . \ Ohs. These verbs are also very often constructed with the accusative : Tvyyaveiv. Soph. (Ed. T. 598. Eurip. Or. 676. Med. 756. and in the sense of f to attain* II. e , 582. in which Plato says σκοπού τυ-χειν, c to meet with, to find’, Plat. Rep. iv, p. 350. τάς $e ye άπΧάς τε καί μέτριας ( επιθυμίας ), at $η μετά νού τε και $ύ£ης ορθής Xoyισμω ayovTai , εν οΧίγοις τε επιτεύ a και τοις βεΧτιστα μεν φύσι, βεΧτιστα $ε παι$ευθεισιν ζ .— εντυγχάνειν, e to meet with’, takes the dative; also when it signifies the same as c to obtain’, e. g. εντεύζεσθαι φρονήσει Plat. Phccdon. p. 154. With Xay^ai >ειν the accu¬ sative is more common than the genitive. Soph. El. 751. στρα¬ τός — άνωΧόΧυξε τον νεανίαν , of’ £pya $ράσας οΐα Xay^avei κακά Ά . — κυρεω. JEsch. Sept. c. Th. 700. κακός ου κεκΧησγ βίαν ευ κυ ρησας, especially in the sense of f to meet with, to find’, Eurip. Hec. 693. Rhes. 113. 697. f to touch’, Horn. H. in Pen. 174. in Cer. 189. in which sense it elsewhere takes the dative also b . 364. In the same manner with κΧηρονομεΊν the thing* which is inherited is in the genitive. Demosth. in Ari- stocr. p. 690, 14. εΊΘ’ ουτοι κΧηρονομουσι της ύμετ'ερας Ζόξν* και των ύμετερων ay αθών. in Avistog. ρ. 800, 8. τις ο της τούτου πονηριάς μετ άράς και κακής $όζης κΧηρο- νομεΊν βουΧησόμενος. The person also of whom one inhe¬ rits, is in the genitive. Demosth. in Eubul. p. 3 311, 17. επικΧηρου κΧηρονομησας εύπορου. If this person is men¬ tioned, the thing is put also in the accusative. Lucian. D . Mort. li, 3. ούτε , οίμαι, σύ, ώ Κράτης, επεθύμεις κΧη- y Fisch. hi, a. ρ. 36? sq. z Herm. ad Vig. p. 744. a Brunck. ad Soph. El. 364. b Ruhnk. ad H. in. Cer. 1. c. Valcken. ad Eur. Hippol. 744. Brunck. ad Eur. Hec. 1. c. 511 Syntax. Of the Genitive. povopeiv άπ οθανόντος εμού τά κτήματα, και τον πίθον καί την πήραν. -α yap εγρρην, συ τε Αντί - σθένους εκΑηρονόμησας, καί eycv σου, ποΑΑω μείζω και σεμνότερα της ΤΙερσών αρ^χτης, —·- σοφίαν , αυταρκειαν, fyc. where just before in the phrase ως κληρονομη&αιμι της βακτηρίας αυτου, briefly, the genitive of the person was governed by the genitive of the thing, as Demosth. p. 1065 , 25 . προσηκει ονδενός κΑηρονομεΊν των Ayviov. * , > Obs. Later authors construct kA. with the accus. of the thing, without the genitive of the person, and even with the accusative of the person. Pint. Sull. 2. εκΑηρονομησε δε και την μητρυιάν 0 . 6. The construction of the verbs Ho take’, with the genitive, appears to have arisen from the same cause. Yet these are for the most part only verbs middle. Ααμβάνεσθαι and the compounds επιΑαμβ. δράττεσθαι, άπτεσθαι. Arist. Lys. 1121. ου 8 άν διδώσι, πpόσayε τον τους, Ααβομενη. Vesp. 434. Αάβεσθε το ντουί. Lys. Epit. ρ. 117. βτερων jye- μόνων Ααβόμενος, for ετερους rjy εμόνας Ααβων. Xen. Cyrop. VII, 1, 31. ότον δε επιΑάβοιτο τά δρέπανα, πάντα βία διεκόπτετο , καί οπΑα και σώματα. Arist. Lys. 596 · της δε yv~ ναικός μικρός 6 καιρός * καν τούτον μη ’ πιΑάβηται , ονδείς εθεΑει y^ai ταντην. Plat. Phcedon. p. 179- των κατά ταντά εχόντων ονκ εστιν οτω ποτ αν αΑΑω επιΑαβοίο , η τιρ της διανοίας Aoy^ip. The same construction remains in the other meanings: f to blame’. Xen . Hist. Gr. 11, 1, 32. e^ofev άττ okt είναι των α’ιχμαΑωτων οσοι ησαν Αθηναίοι, πΑην Αδει- μάντον , ότι μόνος επεΑαβε το εν τρ εκκΑησίί$. τον περί της απότομης των 'χειρων φηφισματος. αντιΑαμβανεσθαι. HeMOSth , Ρ· 15 , 5 . εως εστί καιρός, αντιΑαβεσθε των πρα- y μάτων. Compare Xen. Cyr. 11 , 3, 6. Isocr. Arch. 365. c Moeris p. 149- Thom. M. p. 537· Fisch. 111 , a. p. 368. 366. 512 Syntax. Of the Genitive. / * , . “V. -, »· p. 136. D. E. c to blame’. Plat. Theaet. p. 150. ούκ άν 3 οιμαι 3 σοι &οκώ του άΧηθώς \f/eu$ovs άντιΧαβεσθαι. '■to catch, to make an impression’, Plato Phcedon. p. 201. θαυμαστώς yap μου o Xoyov ούτος άντιΧαμβάνε- ται και νυν και αεί, τό αρμονίαν τινά ημών είναι την ψυχήν .— εχεσθαι, άντεχεσθαί τίνος. Xen. Anab. VII, 6, 41. ην ουν σω- φρονώμεν, εξομεθα αύτου , c we shall keep hold of him*. ib. VI, 3, 17· Koivrj της σωτηρίας εχεσθ αι 3 in Salutem ίΐΐ- cumbere 3 ‘ to be earnestly attentive to his safety’. Herod. I, 93. Χίμνη Se εχεται του σήματος μ6 Γ γαΧη, c borders Upon’. Thuc. l 3 140. της γνώμης της αυτής εχομαι 3 c per¬ severe in’. Eur. Hec. 402. ομοια, κισσός Spvov όπως, τησ$ εξομαι. - ThllC. I, 93. της θαΧάσσης πρώτος ( θεμιστοκΧης ) ετοΧμησεν είπειν ώς άνθεκτεα εστίν. Xen. Cyvop. V, 1, 14. οι καΧοι KayaOoij επιθυμουντές και χρυσίου καί 'ίππων ά'γαθών και ^γυναικών καΧών 3 όμως απάντων τούτων ραδίως Si ίνανται απεχεσθαι 3 ώστε μη άπτεσθαι αυτών παρά το SiKaiov. Many verbs are constructed like άπτομαι , which sig¬ nify the same ; as ψαύει v 3 6iyyaveiv. Eur. Hec. 609. μη Oiyyaveiv μου μηSεv, aXX’ είpyειυ οχΧον 3 της π aiSov d . Upon this is founded the construction by which, with the verbs ' to take, to seize, to touch, to carry,’ &c. the part by which any thing is taken, is put in the genitive, whilst the whole is put in the accusative. Xen. Anab. I, 6, 10. μετά ταυτα 3 κεΧεύοντος K υρου 3 εΧάβοντο της ζώνης τον Ορόντην επί θανάτω άπαντες άναστάντες καί οί avyyeveiv, ‘took him by the girdle’. Eur. Andr. 711 . ην oS> εζ ημών yεyώς iXcji Si ο'ίκων τησ S' επ ισπάσας κόμης. Comp. Troad. 888. Iphig. A. 1376. ΚΛΎ. άξει S ουχ εκουσαν αρ πάσας; ΑΧΙΑ. SηXaSη ξανθής εθείρης. Antiphan.ap. Stob. p. 608 . τους yXιχoμevovς SS ζρν κατασπη. του σκεΧους d Fisch. in, a. p. 363. 366. 513 Syntax. Of the Genitive. άκοντας 6 Χάρων. Hence 11. ω, 515. y εροντα Se χάρος ανί¬ ατη. πεΧειαν Seiv 7Γθ$ός II. φ\ 854 e . Avistoph. Plltt. 515. των ορχεων κρεμωμεν. Lucian says, Asin. p. 158. Χαμβα- νεταί μου εκ της ουράς. Ohs. It is seldom that an active is constructed as in §. 365. II. η , 56. μεσσου Λούρος εΧων. * The probable expla¬ nation of 7Γ } 406. εΧκε $e Λούρος εΧων υπέρ ayTvyos (Comp. 409· θάσσον. Eur. Hec. 404 . ιρς τησ$ εκούσα παιδος ου μέ¬ θη σομαι. Avistoph. Plut. 42. οτω ξυναντησαιμι πρώτον εξιων εκεΧευσε τούτου μη μεθίεσθαι μ ετι. Euv. Med. 734. ayovoiv ου μεθεί άν εκ ya ίης εμε IS governed of ayov - atv 3 and with μεθεΊο must be supplied εμού. Yet Herodotus has the genitive with the active ix, 33. Στ ταρτιηται $ε, πρώτα μεν ακουσαντες 9 Seiva εποιευντο και μετιεσαν της χρησμοσύνης τοπαράπαν in the sense of to lose sight of" f . (r) ; άφίεσθαί τίνος. Plat. Lach. p. 165 . μγ άφίεσο ye τον άνδρός. lb. p. 171. άφίεται του Αόρατος, c lets go the • Valck. ad Theocr. x. Id. iv, 35. f Schol. Arist. Plut. 42. Dawes. Misc. Cr. p. 236. Valcken. ad Eur. Ph. 189. Hipp. v. 326. On the contrary, Brunck. ad Eur. Med. 737. Arist. Vesp. 416. 514 Syntax. Of the Genitive. spear’ (on the contrary, άφιεναι δόρυ, f to hurl the spear’) lb. p. 177. καθάπερ άρτι Αάχης μη άφίεσθαί σε εμοΰ διεκεΧευετο, αλλά ερωτφν, και iyw νυν παρακεΑευομαί σοι μη αφίεσθαι Αάχητος, μηδε Ν ικίου, άλλά έρωταν. Isocr. π . αντιδ. p. 318. I). εκε'ινως υμάς ηγούμαι τάχιστ άν αφεΊ,σθαι της δόξ ης ταυτης. ρ. 333. Α. άφε μένος, του βοηθεϊν τοΊς εϊρημενοις. Comp. Archid. p. 133. Β. C. Eur. Hel. 16.50. ουκ άφησομαι πεπΧων σών. On the other hand άφιεναι is constructed regularly with the accusative. 368. 7 Γ ρόίεσθαι. Demosth. p. 1 8 , 13. ω? εστι των αισχρών, μάΧΧον δε των αϊσχίστων, μη μόνον πόΑεων και τόπων, ών ημεν ποτέ κύριοι, φαίνεσθαι π ροιεμενους, άλλα και των υπό της τύχης παρασκευασθεντων συμμάχων τε και καιρών. Yet more frequently with the accus. See Indie. De¬ mosth . άμαρτάνειν and the COmp. Herod. I, 43. ένθα δη — Άόρηστος, ακοντιζων τον συν, τον μεν αμαρτανει, Tvy- χάνει δε του Κ ροίσου παιδός. and in a metaphorical sense l, 207. ην yap εyω yvωμης μη αμάρτω, κείνοι ιδομενοι aya6a ποΧΧά, τρέφονται προς αυτά. IsOCV. ad Phil, p. 87. A. ώμo\όyoυv δε μη δ ενός πώποτε τοσουτο πρά- y ματος διαμαρτειν. Comp. Archid. ρ. 123. C.D. In the latter metaphorical sense it very nearly agrees with ψευδεσθαί τίνος (§. 1.316.), as σφάλλεσθα'ι τίνος, ‘ to miss of any thing, §. 3 16 . accords with αμαρτάνειν τινός, as opposed to τυχεϊν s . 369. 8. From this idea of partition, which is implied in the genitive, in the superlative also that substantive which marks the class from which the superlative takes the chiefest (as a part), is put in the genitive, s Fisch. 111 , a. p. 368. as in Syntax. Of the Genitive. £>15 Latin, e. g. IL a, 176. ίχθιστοι Si not έσσ'ι SurrpfPim* βασιλήων. Herodotus adds έκ I, 196 . την εύειΖεστάτην εκ 1 τασίων, the same as in Latin different prepositions are put for the genitive 11 . Obs. Properly the genitive can only designate the class of objects, of which the superlative marks the chief. Hence the passage in Pind. 01. 10, 48. of Augeas is peculiar: κάκεΊνος αβουλία ύστατος άλώσιος άντησας, θάνατον aiir υν ουκ έξεφυ^εν, ' at the end of the capture 1 , περ'ι τα τελευταία της άλώσεως Schol. In the passage of Isocrates also quoted above, §. 320. the genitive των περί τούς θεονς and των άλλων may be governed of the superlative μάλιστα, in which case the genitive would mark the class of the objects of the anger, but not of the persons angry. Hence the genitive is put also with verbs, adjec- 370. fives and adverbs, which are derived from superlatives, or in which merely the idea of a degree of prefer¬ ableness is implied. a. Verbs. II. ζ, 460. "Εκτορος ήόε yuv>], os άριστεύε- σκε μάχεσθαι Τρώων ϊπποόάμων, ΐ. e. αριστος ην Τρώων·. Xen. Mem. S. lily 5, 10. λ^ω πάντας (τούς πολέμους ) tows €ττί Θησέως πολεμηθεντας, έν ok πάσιν εκείνοι (οι ’Αθηναίοι) Ζήλοι yey άνασι των καθ’ εαυτούς άνθρώπων αριστευ- σαντες. Eurip. Ηΐρρ. 1009- πάτερα τό τήσόε σώμ! εκαλ- λιστεΰετο πασών γυναικών; Med. 94.1. Ζώρ', & καλ- λιστεύεται τών νυν έν άνθρώποισιν , οΐ§ εγω , πολύ. Ale. 653. ή τάρα πάντων Ζιαπρέπεις άψυχία, to which Pmd. 01. ι, in. adds ’έξοχα, besides ό χρυσός α’ιθόμενον πυρ ατε Ζιαπρέπει νυκτ'ι μεγάνορος έξοχα πλούτου. b Adjectives. Eur. Suppl. 843. πάθεν πόθ' οιοε Ζια- πρεπε-ις εύψοχία θνητών έφυσαν. Thus also c?o X os II. ν’, 499- and passim, which however Od. φ , 266 . is 11 Fisch. Hi) 3.· P- 352. 516 Syntax. Of the Genitive. constructed with the dative, ‘ amongst', for εν πάσιν αϊποΧίοισιν. " ' · ^ \ I . m. " », ; · C. Adverbs, βξοχα //. 257. e^e έξοχα πάντων ζητεί. Pind. 01. 9j 104. via δ ’Άκτορος e’^o^ws τίμασε v €7 τοίκων Aiyiva ς re Mevolnov. III. The genitive is used also to mark the person or thing to which any thing belongs, whether it be a property, or quality, habit, duty, &c., and those also from which any thing arises. Probably here too an obscure idea of the relation of this quality, &c. to that which possesses it, as of a part to the whole, is the basis. l. Property, οίκε ως } ’ίδιάς τίνος. Isocr. ad Nicocl. p. 19· -β· άπαντα τα των οίκονντων την πάΧιν οικεία των καλώς βασιΧενόντων εστι, and elsewhere passim. In the same manner the simple article with the genitive is used, as in the passage adduced τα των οικονντων την ποΧιν 3 ‘ the property of the citizens'. Hence ίεράς with a genitive Herod, w, 72 . ίρονς δε τοντονς τοΟ Ν eiXov ψασι. Plat. Phcedon. ρ. 193 . Eur. Ale. 7 6. elVut, yiyveaOaiin particular, with the genitive, signify ‘ to belong to'· Herod, in, 117. τοδτο το πεδίον ην μεν κοτε X ορασμιων^ επει τε δε ΥΙερσαι εχονσι το κράτος, εστι τον βασιΧηος . id. II, 134· Αίσωπος Ιαδμονος eydi *ετο } VIZ. δονΧος . Hence Sopfl. (Ed. Ρ. 41 1. ον Ιάρεοντος προστά- τον yεypά\|/oμaι, c the client of Creon belonging to Creon as my patron', εαντον είναι , r to be his own master, free'. Demosth. Olynth p. 26, 27 . δει δή ταϊτα άπανεντας καί νμων αντών ετι και νυν y ενομενονς κοινον καί το Χεγειν 1 Valck. ad Herod. 1 . c. ρ. 255, 6j. k Valck. ad Her. 1 . c. p. 16'8, 55 . V Syntax, Of the Genitive, 517 και το βουΧευεσθαι και το ί τράττειν ποιησαι. Comp. p. 42, ίο. 1456, 9· Isocr. de Pac, p. 185. B. Plat. Gorg.p, l53. είμί δε επι Tip βουΧομενιρ, ώσπερ οι άτιμοι του εθεΧοντος , αν τε τύπτειν βουΧηται, c in the power of any one who wishes it\ Politic, p. 1 1 i. εΧαθον αυτοί τε άποΧεμως Ίσ-χον- τες, - οντες τε άεί των επιτιθεμε vojv, f the prey of those who attacked them'. Soph. (Ed. T. 917 . aXX’ εστι του X^yovTos, ην φόβους X0yrj, c he gives himself up entirely to him who speak of terror’. Demosth. c. Pan- tcen. p, 982, 3. μήτε συyyvωμης, μητ άλλοι» μηδενός είσιν, άλλ’ η του πΧείονος, where είσί properly belongs only to πΧείονος, e are intent upon profit’, but by a zeugma is referred also to the other 1 . To this class also, in some measure, belongs Soph, Antlg, 1205. αύθις προς Χιθόστρωτον κόρης νυμφεΊον *Άιδου κόιΧον είσεβαίνομεν , where νυμφειον αδου is the tomb of Antigone, sentenced to death, and thus destined to be the bride of Pluto, νύμφη 'Άιδου, as his property. f Quality, power, custom, duty’. Here είναι may be 372 . translated different ways. a. Soph. Electr. 1054. ποΧ- Χης άνοιας (εστι) και τό θηράσθαι κενά, ‘ it partakes of great folly, it is very foolish’, as in Latin magnce stul- titice est. Eurip. Phccn. 731. άχχά τοΰθ’ όρώ ποΧΧου πόνου (όν) f a matter of great labour, I see that it is attended with great labour’, in which there is no need to supply δεόμενο v with Valckenaer. Thuc. I, 83. εστι v ό πόΧεμος οάχ όπΧων τό πΧεον , άλλα δαπάνης. V, 9· νομίσατε είναι του καΧώς ποΧεμεϊν τό εθεΧειν και τό αίσ'χυνεσθα t, f that alacrity and a love of honour are necessary to fight well’. Brunek. ad Soph. Ο. T. 1. c. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 213, 1 518 Syntax. Of the Genitive. b. In other cases είναι may be rendered by 4 to be able’, referred to the Greek genitive as the subject. Soph. (Ed. T. 393 . καίτοι το y cttviyf ούχι τονπιοντος ην άνδρος διεϊπεϊν^ i it was not a riddle for the first comer to solve’. Thuc. VI, 22. πολλή yap ούσα (η στρατιά ) όν πάσης εσται πόλεως υποδεϊζασθαι, ‘ not every city will be able to receive the army’; where, at the same time, it is to be observed, that the verb is referred to στρατιά , as its subject, instead of to πολλην ούσαν — ύποδεξασθαΐ, as in the passage adduced of Sophocles to aiviyp-a was* the nominative. Plat. Gorg. p. H5. άρ ovv παντού άνδράς εστιν εκλεζασθαι, ποια aya^a των ηδεων εστι και οποία κακα ; η τεχνικόν όει εις έκαστον ; C. 'Must’, Soph. (Ed. C. 1429- στρατηλάτου χρηστόν , τά κρείσσω μηδε τανδεα λεyειv. ι d. ‘ To be wont’. Thuc. 111 , 39. άπόστασις τών βίαιου τι πασχόντων εστίν. ‘ they who are treated with vio¬ lence are wont to revolt’. Plat. Rep. 1 , p. 163. εστιν apa δικαίου άνδρος βλάπτειν καί όντινονν ανθρώπων ; f it IS to be expected from a just man, a just man is accus¬ tomed’, &C. Xen. Anab. II, 5, 21. παντάπασι δε απόρων όσ^ι καί άμηχάνων καί άvάyκr} εχομενων , καί τούτων πονηρών , οιτινες εθελονσι Si επιορκίας τε προς θεούς καί απιστίας προς ανθρώπους πραττειν τι , where the construe tion is changed, for το εθελειν. Xen. Mem. S. it, 1 . 5. τηλικούτων επικείμενων τώ μοιχενόντι κακών τε καί αισχρών -— όμως εις τά επικίνδυνα ψερεσθαι , άρ ονκ ηδη τούτο παντα- πα σι κακοδαι μονωντος εστι\ c IS not that the action of a mad man’ ? Obs. 1. 7 Γ ρός often accompanies these genitives. JEsch. Agarh. m Vale ken. ad Herod p. 575, 27. 519 Syntax. Of the Genitive. 603. η κάρτα προς ·γυναικος αίρεσθαι κεαρ, £ the custom., the characteristic of a woman*. 1647. to yap δοΧώσαι προς y υναικός ην σαφώς. Herod, νιι, 153. τα τοιαντα epya ού προς άπαντος άνδρός νενόμικα yeveaOa ι. ‘ that not every one can do such things*. Soph. Aj. 319· προς yap κακού re και βαρυ- γυχου yooi /ς τοιουσο aei ποτ αν όρος e^yeiT €χειν, that it is cowardly* 11 , or Isocr. de Pac. 177· C- των αρχόντων epyov εστί του? ά p χαμένους τάις εαυτών επιμεΧείαις ποιεϊν ευδαιμονε- στάτους. (Cf. ρ. 167· Β.) In Thuc. ιι, 39· τφ άφ> ημών αυτών εύφυχω the quality is considered as something that pro¬ ceeds from any one. Obs. 2. Hither is to be referred also the phrase είναι ετών τριά¬ κοντα Plat. Leg. iv, p. 195. ‘to be thirty years old’, where Isocr. JEg. p. 388. E. puts the accusative, άδεΧφην κόρην τετταρα καί δεκετη yεyovυιav. The phrase is more peculiar in Herod, iv, 138. η σαν de ούτοι oi d ιαφεροντες re την φηφον και εοντες \0yov προς βασιΧηος , which elsewhere is είναι εν Xoyip, aliquo numero haberi. Είναι also, with the genitive, signifies f to have’, in the phrase της αυτής yvώμης είναι Thuc. I, 113. Comp. Xen. H. Gr. ii, 4, 36. ejusdem sententice esse , c to be of the same opi¬ nion*. Otherwise the Latin idiom of esse , with the genitive, e. g. Titus erat summce facilitatis, is not used in Greek. Thus the genitive is used, particularly with demon- 373 strative pronouns , (which are explained), in order to shew in whom a certain quality is found. Eur. Iph. A. 28. ούκ άyaμaι ταυτ ανδρός a ριστέος, ‘ I do not ap¬ prove this in a prince*. Xen. Ages, ιι, 7· αλλα μάλλον τα ο αυτό υ ayaμaι 3 οτι πΧηυος τε ουοεν μειον, η το των ποΧεμιων, παρεσκευάσατο , 8 $c. ( I admire this in him*, ib. I, 8. ευθύς μεν ουν τιοΧΧοι πάνυ ^άσθησαν αυτού (vulg. αυτό ) τούτο , το επιθυμησαι, 8$C.° — Plat. Theaet. p. 89· οίσθ' ουν , ώ Θεόδωρε, ό θαυμάζω τού εταίρου σ ού Π ρωτα- 7 όρου ν . Menex. ρ. 288. τούτο δη άξιον επαινείν τών η Brunck. ad Arist. Ran. 355. ® Ruhnk. ad Tim. p. 8. p Heind, ad Plat. Theaet. p. 34-7· 520 Syntax. Of the Genitive. άντρων των τότε νανμαχησάντων , ότι τον εχόμενον φόβον 8ιεΧνσαν των * ΕΧΧηνων. de Rep. II, p. 227· τουτ ουν αν το επαίνεσον 8ικαιοσν νης, ο αυτή 8ι αυτήν τον εχοντα ονί- νησι, και ά8ικίαν , ο βΧάπτει. Xen. Ages. 8, 4. eyco ονν και τούτο επαινώ Ά y ησ ιΧάου, το προς τό αρεσκειν τοις *Έλ- Χησιν, ύπερι8ειν την βασιΧεως ξενίαν. - ThuC. 1, 84. και τό βρα8ύ και μεΧΧον, ο με μφοντ αι μαΧιστα ημών , μη αϊσχυνε- σθε. — Xen. Cyrop. VIII, 1,40. καταμαθεϊν 8ε του Κόρον 8οκονμεν, ως ου τοντω μόνω ενόμιζε χρηναι τους άρχοντας των άρχομενων 8ιαφερειν } τώ βεΧτίονας αυτών είναι, αΧΧα και κατα- yoητευειv <ρβτο χρηναι αυτούς. e W6 think W6 have ob¬ served in Cyrus’. CEcon. 16, 3. ονκουν και άΧΧοτρίας yης τούτό εστι yvcvvai , ο τι τε 8ύναται φερειν και ο τι μη 8υναται , όρώντα τους καρπούς και τα 8εν8ρα. AnCib . Ill, 1 . 19. ey<8 μόν—ονποτε επαυόμην — βασιΧεα και τους συν αυτω μακαρίζων, 8ιαθεωμενος αυτών ,, όσην μεν χωράν και οίαν εχοιεν, ως 8ε άφθονα τα επιτη8εια } 8$C. Ohs. The above-mentioned construction of ay αμαι and θαυμάζω appears to have been the cause of the construction of both verbs, with a genitive of the object, the genitive being un¬ accompanied by another word, denoting a quality, &c. These verbs, with this construction, usually signify, ‘ to wonder at any one, or any thing’, the idea of disapprobation, of blame of con¬ tempt being implied. Isocr. Nicocl. p. 27· A. B. Θανμαζω των ταυτήν την yvωμηv εχοντ ων } όπως ον και τον πΧουτον και την ρώμην και την αν8ριαν κακώς Xeyovoiv. Comp. π. αντι8 . ρ. 313. Ε. Archid. ρ. 128. Ε. 135. Β. de Pac.p. 16Ί. A. also, ‘to admire, to approve, ironically, in ridicule*. Herod, vi, 76 . aya- σθαι εφη του Έρασ ίνου ου προ8ι8όντος τούς ποΧιητας. Plat. Hipp. Maj. ρ. 27. και νη την 'Ήραν ay αμαι σου, οτι μοι 8οκεϊς ευνοικώς , καθ όσον οίος τ εί , βοηθεϊν. Frequently, however, it signifies ‘to admire’, in a good sense. Plat. Griton · p. 100. άλλα καί σου πάΧαι θαυμάζω , αισθανόμενος ως η8εως καθεύ8εις. Leg. χιΐ, ρ. 190. 'Ρα^αμα'ι^ι/ον 8ε περί την Xεyoμevηv κρίσιν των 8ικών άξιον Ι^ασθαι, 8ιότι κατει8ε τούς τότε ανθρώπους γούμενους ει mpyws είναι θεούς' εικότως , άτε 521 Syntax. Of the Genitive. κατά τον τότε χρόνον των 7 ΓοΧΧών εκ θεών όντων. (yulg. θεούς εικότως.) Demosth. Pro. Cor. ρ. 296 ., 4 . τις yap ουκ άν aya- σαιτο των άντρων εκείνων της αρετής, fyc. Otherwise aya- μαι and θαυμάζω usually stand with the accusative q . In other places the genitive expresses the person or 374 thing from which any thing proceeds, and is to be ren¬ dered by the preposition ab, ex, f from'. This is the case particularly with the verbs c to hear, to experience, to learn'. Xen. Cyrop. hi, l, l. 6 Αρμένιος, ως ηκουσε τον ay yeAov τά παρά του Κόρου, eζεπXάyη. Herod . II, 3. ώδε μεν yevεσθaι των \ρεών του Ηφαίστου εν Μ εμφι ηκουον. Eur. Ale. 3 78. ώ παΊδες, αυτοί δη τάδ είσηκουσατε Ίτατρός X0y οντος, μη yaμειv αΧΧην ποτέ yvvaiK εφ υμιν, μηδ' άτιμάσειν εμε, which however may also be explained, according to §. 327 . Obs. 2 r . Again, in a somewhat different sense. Soph. Aj. 1235 . ταυτ ουκ άκουειν pGyaXa προς δουΧων κακά ; 1320 . ου yap κΧυοντες εσμεν αίσχιστους Xόyoυς, άναζ Όδυσσευ, τουδ υπ άνδρός άρτίως; Plat . Euthyphr. ρ. 8. ό πατήρ - πεμπει δεύρο άνδρα πευ~ σό μεν ον του εζηyητoυ, ο τι χρι 7 ποιειν^ instead of which lb. ρ. 19. is παρά των εξηyητωv περί αύτου πυ- θεσθαι , τί χρη ποιεϊν. Thucyd. I, 125 . επειδή άφ' απάντων ηκουσαν yvώμηv. Eui'. RheS. 129· μαθ οντες εχθρών μηχανάς κατασκόπου βουΧευσόμεσθα. Obs. The foundation of the construction άκουειν τίνος Αγοντος, ‘ to hear any one say*, rests partly on this idiom, and partly on the remark §. 327 - Obs. 2 . In a similar manner appears to have arisen the expression αποδεχεσθαί τίνος, i to assent to any one, to listen to him', properly άποδ. τί τίνος, ‘ to approve something that another has said or done , Plat. Prot. p. 115. ως μεν εικότως αποδέχονται οι σοί πόΧιται καί χαΑ- * Piers, ad Moerid. ρ. 1 sq. Ruhnk. ad Tim. 1. c. r Fisch. hi, a. p. 362 sq. 522 I 9 _ — Syntax. Of the Genitive . κεως και σκυτοτόμον συμβουλεύοντας τά πολίτικα , αποδεδεικταί σοι. Isocr. c. Eutli . ρ. 403. Β. ενθυμεισθαι $e χρη, ei άποδεξεσθε των τά τοιαυτα XeyovTwv, ότι νομον θησετε, πώς χρη αδικεΐν. * „ # In the same relation stand 1. είναι , yίyvεσθaι with the genitive. Xen. Cyr. I, 2, 1. πατρός μεν δη Xey εται Κύρος yeveaOai Καμβνσου, μητρός δε όμoλoyείτaι Μαν* δάνης y ενεσθαι, natus essedicitur patre Camb.—Eurip. Hec. 383. δεινός χαρακτηρ κάπίσημος εν βροτοις εσθλών y ενεσθαι. Thus also ποταμού (κατα) y0vo9 είναι, Διός είναι yεvεηv II. φ\ 186. Again, Id. Iphig. A. 407. δείξεις δε που μοι πατρός εκ ταύτου yεyώς ; This genitive is used even with passives. Eurip. Med. 800. ούτε της νεοζύγου νύμφης τεκνώσει παίδα, with which otherwise εκ is put. 2. The genitive often expresses the material of which any thing is made, with verbs, substantives, and adjec¬ tives. Herod. V, 82. επειρώτεον ο'ι’Επιδαύριοι, κότερα χαλκόν ποιεονται τά ay άλματα, η λίθον * η δε ΥΙνθίη ουδέτερα τουτεων εα , άλλα ξύλου ημερης ελαίης. II, 138. εστρω- μενη εστι οδός λίθον επι σταδίονς τρεις μάλιστα κη. \en . Cyr. VII, 5, 22. εύφλεκτα δε τά πρόθυρα αυτών, φοίνικος μεν αι θύραι πεπο ιημεναι, 8ξ0. Στέφανος ποιας Pind. Ρ. 4 , 426. στ. άνθεμων AriSt. Ach. 991 . στ. λευκοίων Theocr. VII, 64. σχεδίαι διφθερών Xen. Anab. ΙΙ, 4, 28 s . Έκ often accompanies this genitive. Herod, n, 96. τά δε δη πλοία σφι—εστι εκ της άκάνθης ποιευμενα ; and again : εστι εκ μυρίκης πεποιημενη θύρη. Theocr. XVII, 21. έδρα — τeτvyμeva εξ αδάμαντος, ΟΓ απο. Her. VII, 65, ειματα α π ο ξύλων πεποιημενα. Tile dative also is used s Heind. ad Plat. Crat. p. 79· Syntax. Of the Genitive. 523 for the genitive, when the stuff of which any thing is made may be considered also as the means by which it is made. Od. τ , 563. αι μεν yap κεράεσσ i τετεν- χαται, αι $’ εΧεφαντι 1 . 3. A genitive is put with substantives of all sorts, to express the author of a thing implied in the substan¬ tive. JEsch. Prom. 908. 'Ήρας άΧατεΊαι, ‘ the wanderings of Io caused by Juno’. Sop /ι. (Ed. C. 786. (ήκεις εμ άξων, ϊνα) ττόΧις σοι κακών ανατος τησδ άπαΧΧα"χθη χθονός, QUO urbs tibi sit immunis a cladibus, quce ab hac terra im¬ pendent. Eur. Or. 610. (μάλλον δ’ εκείνη σου θανειν εστ αξία, η τυ\ τεκουση σ rjy ρίωσεν) όνείρατ ayyeXXovaa τα- 7 αμεμνονος, c the dreams sent by Agamemnon from the shades below’. Suppl. 1038. ηκω, διτ rXovv ττενθος ye δαι¬ μόνων βχων, luctum a diis immissum. IV. The genitive is put with verbs, compounded with 376. prepositions which govern the genitive, that is to say, when these prepositions may be separated from the verb, and placed immediately before the case, without altering the signification of the verb, e. g. avTnrapeyeiv τί τίνος for παρε'χειν τι αντί τίνος, αττοττηδαν άρματος for ττηδαν άφ> άρμα¬ τος. εζερχεσθαι οικίας for ερ-χεσθαι εζ οικίας, 8$C. but not άντι- \eyeiv τινός , f to contradict any one’, for τινί, because Xeyeiv αντί τίνος would give an entirely different sense, r to speak in the place of any one’. Frequently also a verb compounded with a preposition which requires a genitive, governs the genitive, though the preposition cannot be separated from the verb, e. g. άντπτοιεΊσθαί τίνος , εφίεσθαί τίνος, cnroXaveiv τινός. Here then the geni¬ tive does not arise from the preposition, but from the relation which the verb expresses. t Fisch. iri, a. p. 374 sq. 524 Syntax. Of the Genitive. / Prom the same kind of reference to themselves and to the preposition,, with which they are compounded, and which expresses this reference more definitely, the verbs compounded with κατά ( c against’, with a genit.) which represent an action as tending to the disadvan¬ tage of a person or thing, take the genitive of the person or thing against which the action is directed ; together with the accusative of the thing which is the passive object of the verb, e. g. κατη^ορείν τι τίνος ^ pro¬ perly, f to utter, to assert any thing to the disadvantage of a person’, i. e. To accuse one of any thing’. Xen. Mem. S. I, 3, 4. των αΧΧων μωρίαν κατη Γ γόρβί , οίτιν6ς παρά τά παρά των θεών σημαινόμβνα ποιουσί τι. (Hence in the passive the verb* as the predicate, is referred to the thing, or the object, as the subject. Thuc. i, 95 . και *γάρ αδικία ποΧΧη κατη>γορειτο αύτοΰ (ΤΙαυσανίου) υπό των ΈΧΧηνων των άφικνουμβνων. - κατη'-γοράιτο oe αυτου ούχ ήκιστα Μ ηδισμός. PausamaS aCCUSobatur ifljus- titice , studii partium Persicarum. Cf. Xen. Cyrop. v, 2, 27.) KaTayiyvcvaKeiv. Plat. Ap. S. p. 58. ποΧΧην ye μου κατ^νωκας άτνχίαν. c thou pronouncest that I am very unhappy’. Peg. I, p. 6. άνοιαν Stj μοι SoKel κατα- yvωvaι των π οΧΧων 3 ω? ον μανθανόντων , οτι πόΧβμος άβί 7 τάσι $ιά βίου ζννσχης βστι προς άπάσας τάς πόΧας. Euthy- phr. ρ. 4. ου yap σου (yulg. που ) eKeivo ye κaτayvωσoμali συ ye eTepov (yeypafai) . Isocr. C. Loch. p. 396. D. ορώ c!> ύμας , όταν του KUTay v ωΤ€ le ροσ υΧί αν η κΧοπην, ού προς το μeyeθoς ών άν Χάβωσι την τιμωρίαν ποιούμενους , αλλ’ ομοίως άπάντων θάνατον κατακρίνοντας , f judge that any one has committed sacrilege or theft, condemn him of sacrilege or theft’. Comp. id. p. 17. B. 35. A. Thuc. Ill, 81. κατ^νωσαν απάντων θάνατον , ‘ declared • _ *·. death to all, condemned them to death’. Thus κατα- κρίναν άπαντυ)ν θάνατον ib. καταφηφ'ιζ^σθαί τίνος SeiXiav 5S5 'v Syntax< Of the Genitive. Lysias p. 325. ‘ to pronounce that one is guilty of cow¬ ardice’". AEsckin. Axioch. 12. o\ Se περί θηραμενην και KftX- λίζενον ·— κατεχει ροτόνησαν των άντρων άκριτον θάνα¬ τον. — Plat. Rep. Ill, , p. 274. τον Se ( Χρυσήν ) κατευ- χεσθαι των Αχαιών προς τον θεόν. — IVIoreover κaτaσκεSa- ζειν, καταχεϊν, καταντΧεΊν in their proper and figurative sense. Xen. Anab. VII, 3, 32. άναστάς ο Σεύθης συνεζει ne και σν^γκατεσκεδασε των μετ αυτόν το κεράς, ( poured out the’ drinking-vessel over them’. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 242, 12. α’ίτιος Se ούτος, ώσπερ εωλοκρασ ίαν τινα μου της 7 τονηρίας της εαυτόν και των aSικημaτωv κατασκεοα- σας χ . καταφορειν τι τίνος Plat. Rep. IX, p. 272. Plat. Leg. VII ,ρ. 345. πάσαν βλασφημίαν των \ερων καταχε- ουσι. II. φ', 408. μη σφωίν ελεγχείην καταχεύρ Α'ιθη . Plat. Rep. VII, p. 171 - φιλοσοφίας ετι πλείω γέλωτα καταντλησομεν. Lys. ρ. 214. επεώάν τά ποιήματα ημών επιχείρησή καταντλεΊν * *. — κατειπεΊν τί τίνος. Msch . Axioch. 7· τoσάSε τον ζγν κατειπεν. * said thus much against life*. Xen. Cyrop. I, 4 , 8 . o\ Se φυλακές προσελα- σαντες — εφασαν κατ ερ εΊν αυτόν τφ παππφ, c that they would accuse him to his grandfather’. Plat. Phcedon . p. 193. oi άνθρωποι — των κύκνων καταφεύ 8 ονται, και φασιν αυτούς θρηνουντας τον θανατον νπολνπης e^ijiSeiv. id. Rep. VI, 119. καταλάμπειν τινός. TkltC. VIII, 8 . τον πλονν ταύτη εκ του προφανούς εποιουντο, καταφρόνησαν- τες των Αθηναίων aSvvaaiav , ότι ναυτικόν ovSev αυτών πολύ πω ύφαίνετο, 6 thought that the Athenians were unable’,, καταφρονειν more usually has the genitive only, without the accusative of the thing’ f to despise any one’. καταφρονειν τινός. καταγγελίαν τίνος. Plat. Lach. εισι y ap u Fisch. hi, a. p. 381. * Piers, ad Moer. p. 216 sqq. Toup. Em, in Suid. T. 1 , p. 319 *q. y Heusde Spec. Cr. in PI. p. 127 sq. VOL. II. L 5£6 Syntax. Of the Genitive. rives oi των το ιόντων καταγβλώσι. Hence also Apoll. Rh. IV, 25. μετά δ η ye παΧίσσντος άθρόα κόΧπων (εκ κόΧ- ττων) φαρμακα πάντ αμνδις κατεχευατο φωριαμοίο for cis φωριαμόν. Ohs . 1. These verbs have not always the two cases, the geni¬ tive and accusative; only one is often put, if the thing or per¬ son which is expressed by the other, is easily understood. Plat. Theaet. p. 187. μη τοίννν ραδίως κaτayιyvωσκωμεv το μηδέν ειρηκεναι τον αποφηνάμενον επιστήμην, δ νυν σκοπού μεν. the object only, or matter of the judgement is expressed; and since this is an infinitive, the person is referred, as the subject, to this, for μη κaτayιyvωσκωμεv τον άποφηναμενον το ειρηκε- ναι or δτι μηδέν ε'ιρηκεν. Ohs. 2. Sometimes the person in the accusative accompa¬ nies these verbs, rods πρεσβντερονς Ka^yopelv Plat. Gorg. p. 162. — Ear ip. Bacch. 503. καταφρονεί με και Θήβας οδε. in the dative also Herod, vii, 9» 'Ιωνάς τούς εν τη Ευρώπη ' * *» t , t Λ * * »' κατοικημενονς ονκ εασεις κaτayεXaσaι ημιν. ib. 146. και τοισι μεν κατεκεκριτο θανατος , in the active κατακρίνειν τινι Θανατον. II. ν , 282. κάδ δ αχός οι χντο μνρίον δφθαΧμοισιν. So also is constructed κατακερτομεϊν τινός , τινι and τινά. Schaef. ad Long. ρ. 366 sq. Ohs. 3. The genitive also, from the analogy of κατα- φρονειν accompanies περιφρονεΊν , ύπερφρονεϊν, ‘ to despise*. JEsch. Axioch. 22. ηδη περιφρονώ τον ζην, άτε εις αμεινω οίκον μεταστησόμενος. Arist. Nub. 1400. (ως ηδν - ) των καθεστωτων νομών νπερφρονεΊν δννασθαι ! Yet this is often put with the accus. also, as Thuc. in, 39. Arist. Nub. 226. So also νπερορ^ν τίνος Xen.^Symp. 8, 22. which ib. 8, 3. Mem. S. i, 3, 4. is constructed with the accusative. The same is the case with προ in composition. Thucyd. Ill, 3Q. ποΧεμον νιραντο , ισχύν α^ιωσαντες τον δίκαιον προθείναι, ‘ to set higher*. Herod. V, 39. εί τοι σν yε σεωντον μη προορξς, ‘ to Care for*. Xen. filer. 6, 10. αντών (τώ ν φνΧάκων) π ροφνΧάττον σιν οι νομοί, ώστε περί εαυτών φοβούνται και νπερ νμων. Ib. 1J, 9 Syntax. Of the Genitive. 527 i . · „ 5, 7. 7 τροστατεύειν τινός. Isocr. p. 108. ^4. προστηναί τίνος. ΧβϊΙ. Hier. 10, 8. ir ρονοεϊν και προκινδυνεύειν των πολιτών. On the other hand. Plat. Lys . p. 245. o r ι αν τις περί πολλοί) ποιηται, — αντί πάντων των άλλων χρημάτων προτιμ%. Leg. V, ρ. 205· ουδέ μην , προ άρετης οπόταν αν προτιμά τις κάλλος , τουτ εστιν ούχ ετερον, η η της "ψυχής όντως και πάντως ατιμία. Obs. 1. Sometimes, in these compound verbs, no regard is paid to the prepositions, and another case is put for the genitive, as the sense and reference of the verb require, as άποστρεφε- σθαί τινα. Eur . Suppl. 159· aver sari aliquem. άποτρεπεσθαί τι Iph. A. 336. άπεΊναί τινι, id. Troad. 393. ‘to be distant with respect to any one*. εκπλεϊν τον Ελλήσποντον Herod, v. 103. επει εζηλθον την ΐΐε ρσίδα χώρην id. νιι, 29· Comp. Aristot. Polit. in, 14. ρ. 47-5. D. εκβαίνειν τα τριάκοντα ετη Plat. Rep. νιι, ρ. 174 ζ . Sometimes also some verbs compounded with εκ are constructed with the dative. II. ζ\ 115. ΤίορθεΊ yap τρεις πάιδες αμυμονες e£ey ενοντο. Η. in Ven. 197. ποώδες παίδεσσι διαμπερές e/cy εyάονται. Herod, ι, 30. καί σφι είδε άπασι τέκνα ε /cy ενομένα. Similarly Eur. Iph. A. 1226. ίκετηρίαν δε yovaaiv εζάπτω σεθεν(κ.) Thus also verbs compounded with κατά sometimes take the accusative. Arist. Ach. 711. κατεβόησ€ δ ’ αν κε Kpayio 9 τοξοτας τρισχιλίονς a . Obs. 2. On the other hand, verbs which are compounded with prepositions governing a dative or accusative, sometimes take the genitive. Soph. Aj. 1292. τειχεων εyκεκλεισ μένους. Aristoph. Lys. 272. ου yap, μά την Δημητρ, εμού ζώντος εγχανονν- ται. Soph. (Ed. Τ. 825. εμβατευειν πατρίδος. Phil. 648. τί του&, ο μη νεώς yε της εμης ενι; ( ενεστι ) Plat . Leg . ν. ρ. 222. νόσημα πόλε ως εμπεφυκός. Soph. (Ed. Τ. 808. και * Valck. ad Herod, ρ. 429, 86. \ Brunck. ad Arist. Equ. 287. L 2 a 528 Syntax. Of the Genitive. μ 6 πρεσβυς ώς όρα οχου παραστείχοντρ, tyc. Eur. Ph. 454. τόνό' είσεόεζω τειχεων b . V. The genitive serves also to determine place and time, in answer to the question where ? when ? &c. 1. Where? Od. y, 251. fj ούκ’Άρ'γεος ηεν Άχαιϊ- κου; for εν *Apyei. φ', 108 sq. όίη νυν ούκ εστι yvvrj κατ Άχαιΐόα yauav , ούτε ΠνΧον ιερής, ουτ ’'Apyeos , ούτε Μι ικηνης, ουτ αυτής Ιθάκης , ουτ Άπειρο ιο μεΧαίνης. Thus also AEsch. Prom. 720. Ααιάς όε χ€ΐρός οί σιόη- ροτεκτονες οικούσι ΧάΧυβες, c on the left hand*, for επι X. χ. Soph. El. 900. έσχατης όρω πυράς νεωρη βόστρυχον τετμημενον. Eur. Suppl. 499· Καπανεως κεραυνιον όεμας καπνουται κΧιμάκων όρθοστάτο)ν. Hence the adverbs ου, που , όπου , where ? 2. When ? II. X', 690. εΧθων yap εκάκωσε βίη Ήρα- κΧηείη τών π ροτε ρ ων ετεων, ‘ in (he former years*. φ, 111. και εμοι θάνατος και μοίρα κραταιη εσσεται η ηως , η όεΙΧης, η μέσον ημαρ. c in the afternoon*. Soph. (Ed. C. 396 . και μην K ρεοντά y ίσθι σοι τούτων χάριν ηξοντα βαιου κούχι μυριου χρόνου. Aj. 141. της νυν φθιμενης νυκτός , for επι της νυκτός — 285. άκρας νυκτός. Tkuc. Ill, 104. του αυτού χειμωνος. της αυτής ημέρας ISOCT . dc PciC. ρ. 170. A. Thus the genitives νυκτός, θέρους, χειμωνος, εαρος, ‘ in summer, winter, spring*, are very frequent, accompanied sometimes by ούσης, όντος c . 3. The genitive is often to be rendered by, f within, in the Space of*. Her . II, 11.5. αυτόν όε σε καί τούς σονς b Valck. ad Ε. Ph. 454. Brunck. ad Soph. Ο. T. 825. Herm. ad Vig. p. 813, 392. c Thom. M. p. 630 sq. 52 9 Syntax. Of the Genitive. συμπλόους τριών η με ρεών nrpoayopevo) εκ της εμη? Ύη$ ες άλλην τινά μετορμίζεσθαι. Plat. Alcib. I, ρ. 7· VJV> θάττον εις τον 'Αθηναίων δήμον παρελθρς τούτο δε εσεσθαι μάλα η μερών οΧ'ι'γων , παρελθων δε ενδειξασθαι, 8ξΟ. Comp. Leg. I, p. 41. ΧΙ, Ρ· 125. eav δε καί τψ άττελενθερω- θεντι η καί των άλλων τφ (vulg. των) ξένων οόσια ττλείων •γί^γνηται τον τρίτον με^εθει τιμήματος, η αν τοντο ημερφ *γί Γ γνηται, τριά κοντά ήμερων αϊτό ταντης της ημέρας λαβών an Λτω τά εαντον * ΧβϊΙ. Anah. V, Ί , 20. This genitive is accompanied by erro? Plat. Ale. i, p. 10. ei/ros ον πολ- λον χρόνον. Isocr. Mg. p . 388. E.' εντός τριάκονθ ’ ήμερων. Evag. ρ. 20i. E. εντός ετών. 4. e Since*. Msch. Again. 288. ποιον χρόνον δε και πεπόρθηταί ττόλις. Plat. Phcedon. in. οντε τις ξένος άφΊ- κται χρόνον σνχνον εκεΊθεν. Syrnp. ρ. 165. ονκ οϊσθ’, ότι τ τολλων ετών Α*γαθων ενθάδε ονκ επιδεδημηκεν ; 5. 4 How long’? Arist. Lys. 280. εξ ετών άλοντος. 'for six years, daring six years*. Plat. Gorg. p. 150. ( ονκ εξωστράκισαν Κίμωνα) Ίνα αντον δέκα ετών μη ακουσειαν της φωνής, where however it may also be f within ten years*. Isocr. de Pac . p. 177. D. πολλών 'ετών ούδ' ίδειν αντοις εξε*γενετο την αντών. Obs . The word which governs the genitive is often wanting. 379 These words are, besides νιος, e. g. Θονκνδίόης ό Ολορον Μιλτιάδης ό Κίμωνος, especially οι κος or δώμα. e. g. Od. β, 195. μητέρα ην e? πατρός άνω^ετω απονεεσθαι. Per. ν, 51. ες τον Κλεομενεος. Id. ι, 35. εν Κ ροκτον. Theocr. 24, 89. εν Αιός, instead of which is put 17, 17. εν Αιος οικιρ. Particu¬ larly εις μδον and εν μδον, * to the shades below, in the shades below’. Fully in Homer Od. κ , 512. είς Άίδεω δόμον, (Comp. φ', 322. II. y, 322. ξ\ 457. ψ, 74, #c.j and Hesiod. 0py. 153. , e ? δόμον κρνερον Άίδαο. Homer himself has "Αίδόσδε IL η, 330. υ, 294. and passim. Thus είς διδάσκαλον ίεναι or φοιτάν > 530 Syntax. Of the Dative. Xen. Cyr. n, 3, 9· ζ to go to a teacher’, properly c to the house of a teacher*: εις ορχηστρίδος ιεναι Arist. Nub. 992. f to go to a dancer’ 4 * The Dative. \ 380. The Dative in Greek expresses two determinations, one that of the dative in other languages, answering to the question, ‘ to whom’ ? and one that of the Latin ablative. l. The Dative expresses the distant object of a (transitive or intransitive) action, with reference to which this action takes place. It answers thus in most cases, as in Latin and English, to the question € to whom* ? e. g. διδόναι Ti Tin , f to give any thing to any one’, πεί- θεσθαί τινι, c to obey any one’. Thus also with adjectives with the same reference, as φίλος τινί, εχθρός τινι , εννους, όμοΊος, ωφέλιμος , £c. This requires no further illustra¬ tion ; but there are some cases especially to be noticed : ^ * The verbs to oi der, to exhort’, as ττροσταττειν , €7τιτ€λ\6σ0αί, τταραινεΊν, irapeyyvav, τ ταρακελενεσθαι, ύττο- τίθεσθαι , #c. regularly take the dative, κελεύειν how¬ ever, takes not only the dative in the sense of e to ex¬ hort’ ; but also the accusative with the infinitive. II. β, 50. αυτάρ ό κηρυκεσσι λ^υφθό^-γοισι κελευσε κηρυσσειν ά·γορηνδε καρηκομόωντας ’ Αχαιούς . and 28. θωρη- ζαι σε κελευσε καρηκομόωντας *Αχαιούς. Thuc. I 44. εί yap 67Γ ι Κόρινθόν εκελευον σφίσιν οι Κερκυραιοι ζυμπλεΐν. d Koeri. ad Greg. ρ. 18, 36. Brunck. ad Arist. Lys. 407. Fiscb. hi, a. p. 255. 531 Syntax. Of the Dative. εΧυοντ ay αύτοις αι προς ΤΙεΧοποννησίους σπονόαί. Thus also προστάτην. Demosth . in Macart. p. 1070, 1. ταΰτα πάνθ\ όσα o\ νόμοι προστάττουσι ποιεί ν τούς προσηκοντας, η μίν προστάττουσι και ανα'γκαζονσι ποιβιν*. Note. On the other hand, νουθετείν } παρακαΧείν, προτρε- 7τ ειν, παροζύνειν 3 π αρορμμν, $ c - ta ^ e on ty die accusative. From this analogy the verbs f to rule, to govern', also take the dative for the genitive, see §. 338. a. Thus too Eur. Androm. 325. σύ όη στρατη*γών Χο^/άσιν ΈλΧί/νωυ 7Γ οτε Τροίαν άφε'ιΧον ΤΙρίαμον. 2 . Of the verbs signifying c to obey, to disobey', πείθε· 381. σθαι } άπειθείν take regularly the dative, ύπακούειν takes the genitive and dative. Of the Genitive, see §. 340. The following are some instances of the construction with the dative. Xen. Cyr. 11, 4, 6 . T^oXrj σαΧενων ύπηκουόν σοι. Arist. Nub. 360. ον yap άν αΧΧφ y ύπακούσαιμεν των νυν μετεωροσοφιστών, πΧην η Π ροόίκφ. Plat. Leg . VI, ρ. 296. μηόείς ύπακονετω μηύεν αύτω εκων των νέων. Comp. Xen. Mem. S. 11 , 3, 16 . Obs. 1. The same relation of subordination is expressed by the dative also. II. σ', 432. εκ μεν μ’ άΧΧάων άΧιάων άνόρι όάμασσεν, Αίακίΰγ ΤΙηΧήϊ, * made me subject, as a wife, to Peleus’, in which construction υπό also elsewhere accompanies the dative; II. v, 434. π', 543. Obs. 2. To this class ύποπτησσειν τινί also seems to belong, f to lose one’s courage against any one, to be afraid of any one, to reverence one’. Xen. Cyr. 1 , 5, 1. ενταύθα όη παΧιν ύπεπτησσον ο\ ηΧικες αυτίρ (τω Κ ύρφ) opposed to the fore¬ going σκωπτειν τινά. Xenoph. also ib. 6, 8. joins the accusa¬ tive with it, πάνυ μοι όοκεί αισχρόν είναι το τοιου τους αυτούς όντας ύποπτηζαι, which is rendered ‘ to fear. Obs. 3. Χατρενειν, ‘ to serve, to pay honour- to the gods by e Fisch. 111 , a. p. 404. 532 Syntax. Of the Dative. offerings*·; in the first sense takes the dative; and with reference to the latter, though rarely, the accusative. Eurip. El. 132. τ’ινα πόΧιν , τίνα δ* οίκον , ώ τΧάμον avyyove, Χατρευεις ; ‘im¬ plore*. Iphig.T. 1122. ενθατάς εΧαφοκτόνου θεάς άμφίττο\ον κουραν, παίδ' *Α·γαμ€μνονίαν , Χατρευω, it is found, how¬ ever, in the first sense with the accusative also. 382. 3. The verbs f to yield*, είκειν 3 ΰπείκειν, fyc. govern the dative, as in Latin. See the passages §. 331. c. 454. Soph. Aj. 669 Sqq. και yap τα δεινά και τα καρτερώτατα τιμαίς υπείκει* τούτο μεν νιφοστιβεις χειμώνες εκχωρου- σιν εν κάρπιρ θερει' εζίσταται δε νυκτδς αία νης κνκΧος τ rj Χευ κοπ ώΧιρ (peyyos ήμεροι φΧ^ειν. But υπεκστηναι is put with the accus. of the thing Plat. Phileb. p . 273. αλλα yap υττεκστηναι τον Xoyov επιφερδμενον τούτον βου- Χομαι. as Soph. Aj . '82. φρονουντα yap νιν ονκ αν εξεστην οκνα). Comp. Demosth. in Lept. p. 460, 1 . in Androt. p. 617 , 15. Where, on account of the preposi¬ tion εκ the genitive should be put. ύπεκτρεπεσθάι τινα Plat. Phcedon. p . 245. So in Apollon. Rh. 11 , 92 . it should probably be o d* άξαντος ύπεκστη , not νπεστη. Hence also εκποδών is often put with the dative, though elsewhere accompanied by the genitive. Eur . Or. 54 1 απεΧθετω δη τοις Xoyoiaiv εκποδών το yηpaς ημίν το σόν. Phoen. 40. ώ ζενε 3 τύραννοις εκποδών μεθίστασο { . 4 . The Poets add sometimes εν to διδόναι , with the dative instead of the dative alone. Eurip. Med. 629 . ερωτ e?, νπερ μεν ay αν εΑνοντες } ονκ ενοοςιαν , ουό αρεταν παρεδωκαν εν άνδράσιν*. V I Obs. The verbs ‘ to happen of, to meet any one*, take the dative, as in Latin, αντίρν, evTvy^aveiv τινι, συντνγχάι/ειν τινι. f Thom. Μ. p. 288. Brunck. ad Eur. Bacch. 1137. s Pors. ad Eur. Med. 1. c. p. 404. ed Lips. 533 Syntax. Of the Dative. Arist. Kan. 198s ο'Ιμοι κακοδαίμων, τ<£> ζυνετυ'χον εζιών; and in the derivative sense c to fall into anything; Soph. Philoct. 681. aXXov δ’ ούτιν eywy οϊδα κΧυω v 3 ουδ εσίδο v μοίραν τούδ εχθίονι συντυ χόντα θνατών. Nevertheless €VTuy%. συν- τυγχ. are found also with the genitive, in which case the com¬ pound is put instead of the simple verb. Herod, iv, 140. ΧεΧυ- μενης της 'γεφυρης εντυ^δντες. Soph. CEd. Col. 1482. εναισιου δε συντύ'χοιμι {σού 3 ώ λαιμόν?) utinarn propitium numen nan - ciscar. Philoct. 320. συντυγων κακών ανδρών Ατρειδών της τ 'Οδυσσεως βίας h . Note. It is doubtful whether άντάίν in the sense of ‘to meet, to happen of’, takes the genitive also instead of the dative. At least it has not this sense in the passages which Musgrave quotes Ear. Troad. 214. See §. 363. But άντιαζειν, ‘ to go against’, with the collateral idea, ‘to attack, to repel’, is con¬ structed in Herodotus, with the accusative, iv, 118. αντιαζωμεν τον € 7 πόντα. ib. 121. οι Σκυθαι vn τηντίαζον την Δαρειοο στρατιη ν. Thus ενογΧε7ν also, incommodare , molestum esse alicui, £ to be troublesome to any one’, governs the dative. Isocr. Paneg. p. 42. C. ενο"χΧείν τοις άκούουσιν. ad Phil. p. 84, E. ταις , πανηγύρεσιν ενο'χΧείν ; but ib. p. 92 sq. Θηβαίοι ηνω-χΧουν τάς 7 τόΧεις τάς εν ΥΙεΧοποννησφ. Again, εμιτοκίζω governs properly the accusative, * to hinder any one', e. g. Xen. Mem. S. iv, 3, 9· hut on account of the construction of εμποδων τινι, the dative also, impedimento alicui esse. Isocr. n r. άντιδ. p. 321. E. νυν δε μοι το *γηρας εμποδίζει, and in Aristot. See Steph. Thes. 5. άρεσκειν, e to plea.se’, takes the dative, as in Latin, 383. {Plat. Menon. p. 341.) though frequently the accusative also, as delectare. Plat. Theaet. p. 113 sq. εάν αυτούς 6 επεΧθών (λο*γο$) τού προκειμενου μάΧΧον, καθαπερ ημάς, άρεσν\. ib. ρ. 177· άρεσκει ούν σε και τίθεσθαι ταυτγ, δόζαν αΧηθη μετά Xoyov επιστήμην είναι ; ρ. 178. εν μεντοι h Toup. ad Suid. I. p. 171. Brunck. ad Soph. 11. cc. 534 Syntax. Of the Dative. ·«. _ _ τί με των ρηθεντων απαρέσκει. Comp. Rep. VIII, ρ. 211*. Hence άρεσκεσθαί τινι, c to be pleased with any thing, to take delight in’, delectari aliqua re. Herod, hi, 34. iv. 78. Thuc. ii, 68. viii, 84 k . The same construction as in άρεσκειν τινα occurs Soph. EL 147. αλλ* εμε y ά στονόεσσ άραρε φρενας , ά'Ίτυν, αίεν ’'ΐτυν οΧοφυρεται , ορνις. On the other hand, Od. 777. μύθον, o $η και πασιν ενί φρεσίν ηραρεν ημιν. Obs. in some passages άνδάνειν with the accusative is also found: Theogn. 26. ovSe ycip o Zei)v οΰθ’ ύων πάντας avSavei, ουτ άνεμων; where however Porson reads ad. Eurip. Or. 1623. παντεσσ άν^άνει. Thus Eur. Med. 12. is read αν$άνουσα μεν φυyrj ποΧίταις, where Brunck has ποΧίτας * 1 . 6. The verbs f to reproach one with any thing, to censure, to reprimand, to rebuke", take the dative of the person or thing against which the reproof is directed, often with the accusative of the thing in which the reproof consists, επιτιμμν τι τινι , μεμφεσθαί τι τινι , βγκα- Χεϊν τι τινι , as in Latin exprobrare alicui aliquid. Isocr. Cld Deni. p. 5. C. μάΧιστα αν ευ$οκιμοίης 3 ει φαινοιο ταυτα μη πραττο)ν , ά τοις αΧΧοις αν πράττουσιν επ ιτιμφης. XeTl. (Econ. 2, 15. ει ΰ$ωρ παρ εμού αιτουντί σοι 3 αυτόν μη ε’χων, αΧΧοσε και επί τούτο rjyayov (an άνακοΧουθία 3 when the writer had the preceding ny ησάμην in his mind in the dative αιτουντί σοι , but afterwards took rjyayov instead of it; yet perhaps καί επί τούτο r\y ησάμην is more correct, and ηyayov in the former) oi$* οτι ού$ αν του το μοι εμεμφου. These verbs, however, frequently are put 1 Moeris p. 175*. Spanh. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Plut. 353. Gregor, p. 27·' Toup. ad Suid. i. p. 83. Duk. ad Thuc. i, 128. Fisch. ni, a. p. 410. Heind. ad Plat. Cratyl. p. 29· k Valcken. ad Her. p. 579, 58. 1 Pors. 1. c. Bibl. Crit. n, 1. p. 40. Syntax . Of the Dative . 535 with the dative alone, lsocr. Areop. p. 149 . E. άστε ούκ αν εικότως τουτοις επ ιτ ιμιρη μεν, αΧΧα ποΧύ άν όικαιό- τερον τοΐς oX'iyip προ ημών την πόΧιν όιοικη σασιν. Evcig . ρ. 197 . Β. C. Thuc. ιν, 61 . ου τοις άρχειν βουΧομε - νοις μεμφομαι , αΧΧά τοις υπακούειν ετοιμοτεροις ου - σιν. lsocr . Paneg. ρ. 77. C. (των πόΧεων) αϊ εκύεύομεναι τοις βαρβάροις μαΧιστα μεν Αακεόαιμον ίοις ey καΧου- σιν, επειτα όε και τοΊς αΧΧοις το7ς μετεχουσι της ειρηνης, ως υπέρ τούτων ^ουΧεύειν r]vayKaa μεναι. Obs. 1. Μ εμφεσθαι is found also with the accusative. Thuc, vii, 77. (ου χρη) καταμεμφασθαι υμάς ay αν αυτούς μήτε ταις ξυμφοραις , μήτε ταις παρά την αξίαν νυν κακοπα- θείαις (‘ on account of your misfortunes’ §. 403, 4. b .) Comp. lsocr. Panath, p.234. C. Areop. p. 154. C. Also επιπΧηττειν τ iva 3 Plat. Protag. p. 120. εί μη οΐόν τ ην πόΧιν είναι , εί μη παντες αυΧηται ημεν 3 οποίος τις εόύνατο έκαστος , και τούτο ι$ίφ και όημοσίφ πας πάντα και εόίόασκε και επεπΧηττε τον μη καΧως αυΧούντα, ■- otet άν τι μάΧΧον των ayaOcov αυΧητων ayaθoύς αυΧητάς τούς ιηεις yeveaOai, η των φαυΧων ; Obs. 2. Λοιόορεϊν is usually constructed with the accusa¬ tive, but the middle ΧοιόορεΊσθαι with the dative. Herod. 11 , 121, 4. τον όε όιαΧοιόορεεσθαι πάσιν. Xen. Cyrop. 1 , 4, 8. oi $e φυΧακες εΧοιύόρουν αύτόν ib. 9· ενταύθα μεντοι ηόη και ο θειος αυτφ εΧοιόορεΊτο , την θρασύτητα όρων. Aristoph. Pac . 57. ωύι κεχ·ρνως Χοιύορείται τω Au m . 7. Some verbs, which signify f to assist, help, to 384. injure’, govern the dative and accusative, aptjyeiv , άμύ- νειν, άΧεξεΙν, βοηθέ Γν, επικουρεΊν, ΧυσιτεΧεΊν govern only the dative, like auxiliari , opitulari ; ωφεΧε 7v however is used with both cases. With the dative : AEsch. Pers. 839. άς τοΊς θανούσι πΧοντος ούόεν ωφεΧεϊ , nil juvat mortUOS. m Hemsterh. ad Aristoph. Plut. p. 131. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 128. Fisch. hi, a. p. 403. 536 Syntax. Of the Dative. Prom. 542. μάτην yap, ούδεν ώφελών εμοί, πονησειΐ, εί τι και Troveiv θελεις. Soph. Afltig. 56 Ο. η εμη φυχη πάλαι τεθνηκεν , ώστε rots φίλοισιν ωφελεί V. Ear. Or. 658. τούς φίλους εν το7ς κακοις χρη τοις φίλοισιν ωφελειν. Cf. 673. Aristoph. Αν. 420. Herod. ιχ, 103. των Σαμίων ο\ στρατευόμενοι - ερδον όσον εδυνεατο, π ροσωφελεειν όθελοντες τ o?or ι * *'Ελλη crt n . See in §. 406, 4. examples of the construction of this verb with the accusative. Thus also λυμαίνεσθαί τινι Herod. I, 214. λυμαινομενη δε τφ νεκρώ €πeλ€y€ τοιάδε, ‘ maltreating . VIII, 13· νέας ουτω σφι ολίγα? λυμαίνεσθαι } e to injure . ΧβΤΙ. Hell. II, ό, 26. πολύ μάλιστα ημΐν δοκει δίκαιον είναι, ει τις ημών αυτών λυ¬ μαίνεται ταύτη τη καταστασε ι, δίκην αυτόν διδοναι. VII, 5, 18. 'Ο Έπαμινώνδας ενθυμούμενος, οτι - αυτός λελυμ ασ μένος παντάπασι T~rj εαυτού δοζγ εσοιτο. Arist. Nub. 925. λυμαινόμενον τοις μειρακ ιοις. Both con¬ structions are united Herod, in, 16. φ λυμαινομενοι Ile/>- σαι εδόκεον *' Ά,μασιν λυμαίνεσθαι 0 . Thus also λωβασθαι τινι. Plat. Crit.p. 110. Άλλα μετ εκείνου εστιν ημίν βιωτόν διεφθαρμένου, φ το άδικον μεν λω βάται, το δε δίκαιον ονινη- σιν. On the other hand, ονίνημι, βλάπτω are constructed with the accusative only. To this class belongs the phrase τί πλέον εστιν εμοί, 4 what advantage have I from it ? what good is it to me’? Xen. Cyrop . V, 5, 34. τί yap εμοι πλέον το την yrjv πλατύνεσθαι , αυτόν δε ατιμαζεσθαι \ Soph. Afltig. 268. οτ ονδεν ην ερευνώσι πλέον , ( as we made nothing out of our enquiries V n Fisch. hi, a. p. 406. * Gronov. ad Herod. 1. c. Wesseling. ad Her. p. 623,94. Len· nep. ad Phal. p. 47 sq. Ernesti ad Xenoph. Mem. S. i, 3, 6. Fisch in, a. p. 406. p Valck. Diatr. p. 150. Syntax. Of the Dative. 537 8. The verbs and adjectives which signify f useful, injurious, inimical·, &c. are properly constructed with the dative q , but sometimes with the genitive also. Plat. Pollt. p. 87. ώσπερ ο κυβερνήτης, το της reals και ναυ¬ τών άει ζυμφερον παραφυλάττων , - σώζει τούς συνναύτας. Rep . I, p. 169· φημι ε^/ώ είναι το δίκαιον ούκ άλλο τι, η το του κρείττονος ζυμφερον. Thus also εχθρός. Plat. Rep. X, p. 335 . εχθράν δε και ταύτην (την ' Αγαμεμνονος ψυχήν) τού άνθρωπ ίνου yεvoυς διά τα πάθη αετού διάλ- Χάζαι βίον. Έ,ναντίος. Id. Theaet. ρ. 139 Γ . 9. The impersonal δεί is constructed with the dative and accusative (r). With the dative: Mschyl. Agam. 857. οτψ δε και δεί φαρμάκων παιωνίων, ήτοι κεαντες, η τεμόν- τες εύφρόνως πειρασόμεσθα πηματος τρεψαι νόσον. Eur. Med. 565. σοι παίδων τί δεί; Suppl. 596. εν δει μόνον μοι, τούς θεούς εχειν όσοι δίκην σέβονται. Plat. JS/IeYlOYl. ρ. 346. δει ούν σοι πάλιν εζ αρχής , ως εμού δοκει , της αυ¬ τής ερωτησεως , τί εστιν αρετή 9 . Also, if an infinitive follows, in the place of the accusat. with an infin. which is more usual. Soph. CEd. C. 721. νύν σοι τά λαμπρά ταύτα δει φαίνειν επη. Plat. Phileb. ρ. 253. ερρηθη που τότε εν Trj παραβολή των βίων, μηδέν δείν μήτε με·γα μήτε σμικρόν χαίρειν τω τον τού νοείν καί φρονεΐν βίον ελο - μενιρ. Rep. X, ρ. 311. οίει άθανάτω πράγματι ύπερ τοσούτου δει ν χρόνου εσπουδακεναι j On the other hand, χρη takes only the accusative ; for in Eurip. Ion. 1337. it should probably be : τοίσι δ> ενδίκοις ιρά καθιζειν , όστις ηδικείτ , εδει. q Fisch. hi, a. ρ. 399. r Fisch. hi, a. p. 396. * Fisch. hi, a. p. 413. 386. 538 Syntax. Of the Dative . 10. κοινός is also constructed with επί and the dative. Plat. Theaet. p. 141. η όε Sia τίνος όύναμις τό τ 6 7 ri ττάσι κοινόν και τό €7 γι τουτοις όηΧοί σοι. The following phrases are to be noticed in the construction of κοινός with the dative: Eur. Ion. 1303. τί 8 εστι Φοίβφ σοί τ€ κοινόν εν μόσω. ‘ What has Phoebus to do with thee? what art thou to Phoebus’? Heraclid. 185. ημίν Se και τω8 ουόεν εστιν εν μεσιρ. ComiCUS apud Stob. p. 501, 4. Ύίς yap κατότττρω και τυφΧιρ κοινωνία ; where, in Latin, one dative is put with the ablative and cum : quid Phoebo tecum rei est . ττρ^μα also is used in this combination. Herod. V, 84. οι όε Aiy ινηται εφασαν σφίσι τε και Άθηναίοισ ι είναι ούόεν ίγ prjy μα. Demosth. pro Cor. ρ. 320. μηόεν είναι σοι και ΦιΧί7 Γ7 τω 7 rpaypa. which in this case belongs to §. 392. i. a. Hence the abbre¬ viated phrase τί σοι καί εμοί ; Demosth. in Aphob. ρ. 855. τί νόμω και Trj βασάνιρ ι . The words which signify f equality, suitableness, resemblance’, or the contrary, as όμοίος , Ίσος, #c. u go¬ vern the dative, as similis in Latin ; but this idiom is more extended than in Latin. Thus the following in Greek take the dative. Si? 1. ο αυτός , idem. Herod. Ill, 48. ύβρισμα - κατά η τον αυτόν χρόνον του κρητηρος τρ apTrayp yεyovός. 'at the same time that the cup was carried off’. Thus also VII, 206. rjv yap κατά τωυτο (i. e. κατά τον αυτόν χρόνον ) ’ΟΧυμπιάς τουτοισ ι τοίσι ττ prjy μασ ι συμττε- σουσα. Comp. VII, 3. Id. IV, 132. /xus εν yrj «γίι/βταί, καρ¬ πόν τον αυτόν άνθρωΊτιρ σιτεόμενος. Phuc. VII, ' 77. i Valck. ad Herod, p. 387 sq. ad Eur. Hippol. 224. Fischl hi, a. p. 419. u Fisch. hi, a. p. 395 sqq. 539 Syntax. Of the Dative. Kay ω rot - - νυν εν τω αντω κινόυνω rot ς φαύλο· τάτοις αίωρουμαι. Plat. Leg. XII, p. 205. τον αυτόν φίλον τβ καί εχθρόν νομιζετω πας τρ πόλει. Comp. Rep. ιι, ρ. 234. Instead of which Herodotus says v, 69. ϊνα μη σφισι a\ αυταί εωσι φυλαί καί (as) Άωσι. In the same manner as ό αυτός , εΐς also is constructed with the dative. Eur. Ph. 157 . Ο? εμοί μιας εγει>ετ εκ ματερος. Note. Of the imitation of this in Latin see Burm. ad Ovid. Am. 1 , 4, 1. Cort. ad Sallust. Catil. 20, 3. 2. τοιουτος. Euvip. Or. 90 5. υπό S ε τείνε Τυνόαρεως λόγους τψ σφω κατακτείνοντι το ιουτους λεγειν , 'words such as he would speak who condemned you to death’. Obs. In the same manner as in .this construction the dative is to be rendered by an entire proposition, beginning with a particle of comparison; so also other adjectives, whose construc¬ tion in other respects agrees with that of the equivalent adjective in Latin, take the dative of the principal word only in the proposi¬ tion, which contains the member of the comparison, whilst in Latin and English a proposition with quam , atque , ac , ' as, than’, must follow. Herod, vn, 155. Ιπποκράτεα, τνραννευσαντα ’ ίσα ετεα τφ αόελφεφ Κλεάνό ρω κατέλαβε άποθανείν , toti- dem annos , quot frater regnaverat. Arist. Ran. 649. ον καί συ τύπτει τας ίσας πληγας εμοί’, ‘as many strokes as I*. 3. The adverbs ομοίως, ίσως (εζ’ίσου) παραπλησίως , ωσαύ¬ τως. Herod. ΙΙ, 72. ηόη ών εφη λεγων ομοίως αυτός τίρ ποόανιπτηρι πεπρηγεναι. 'that he had fared the same as the foot-bath (of which a statue of a god was made, as Amasis, who being formerly a private individual, was now a king.) Xen. Hier. 6, 3. μεθην καί ύπνον ομοίως ενεόρφ φυλάττομαι. — II. y, 454. ίσον —- σφιν πασιν άπηχθετο κηρί μελαίνη , 'as death’. Soph. Antig. 644. 540 Syntax. Of the Dative. Sr {τούτου ούνεκ άνόρες εύχονται yovas — ^X €LV ) τ ° ν φίλον τιμωσιν εζ 'ίσου πατρι. — Hcvod. II, 67· ws ό αυτως τη σι κυσι ο\ ίχνευται θάπτονται· ( in the same manner as the dogs’. Soph. Track. 371. και ταΰτα πολλοί προς μεσγ Ύραχινίων ayopcj. ξυνεζηκουον ωσαύτως εμοί. · 4. In the same manner the verbs ‘ to accommodate one’s self to, to become’, πρεπειν, άρμόττειν, εοικεναι, govern the dative ; and hence the adverb εικότως also . takes this case. JEsch. Ag. 924. Άπουσί? μεν είπας εικότως εμγ, 1 thou hast spoken with propriety, consi¬ dering my long absence’. Obs. πρεπειν is found also with the genitive. Soph . Aj. 534. πρεπον ye τ ην άν όαίμονος του μου τοόε. Plat. Rep. ill, ρ. 289· αλλά ταΰτα μεν και μετά Δάμωνος βουλευσο - μέθα, τίνες τε ανελευθερίας και ύβρεως, η μανίας και άλλης κακίας πρεπουσαι βάσεις. In the latter passage, how¬ ever, the genitive may also be governed of βάσεις, and πρεπου- σαι be put absolutely: ‘which are the natural proceedings of’; and in the former the participle may be put substantively. πρέ¬ πει also is accompanied by an accusative with an infinitive. Isocr. Evag. p. 191 . C. πρώτον μεν ούν περί της φύσεως της Ει tayopov, και τίνων ην άπό^γονος, - όοκεϊ μοι πρεπειν, και εμε των άλλων ενεκα όιελθεϊν περί αυτών. Άρμόττειν is found also with πρός and the accus. e. g. in Isocrates, η σωφροσύνη πρός τάς συνουσίας αρμοττει. 5. όμοιος, 'ίσος are also constructed with the geni¬ tive. Herod. Ill, 37. εστι Se καί ταΰτα όμοια του Ηφαί¬ στου*. also with κατά and the accus. Plat. Rep. vm, p. 206. Like όμοιος are constructed all adjectives of a simi¬ lar meaning, e. g. άόελφός , ‘ akin, conformable to . Soph. (Ed. C. 1262. άόελφά, 8, ως εοικε, τούτοισιν Thom. Μ. ρ. 649· X Syntax. Of the Dative . φορβι τα τί /s ταλαί^ νηδυος Θρεπτηρια. Plat. Leg* * III> p. 128 . πατήρ — w παθημασιν άδελφοίς ων to7s yevo- μενοις Οησει προς τον δυστυχώς τελευτησαντα Ιππόλυτον* However, with the genitive also : Plat. Phil. p· 229· opa δη, ™d φρουείν καί voeTv καί λογίζεσθαι τα δέοντα, καί οσα τούτων αδελφό ; (τροσδεΐν αν σοι ή-/οιο.) Isocr. Paneg· Ρ . 55. ^4. άδελφά των ειρημενων. ξννωδός is similar Eur. Med. 1004. τά£ oJ ξυνωδά τοΊσι ν k^riyyeXtJ.evois*, προσιρδός , Eurip. Ion . 371. 7 Γ ροσωδός η τύχη τψ μφ παθει. See below. * · Obs. Since the idea of conformity and agreement is ex¬ pressed by the dative, so in It. σ', 312, "Εκτο pi μεν ydp ewr,- νησαν κακά μητιόωντι, the sense is c agreed with him. 2 The dative is put with transitive and intransitive 387- verbs, to shew that an action takes place with reference to a person or thing ; particularly l. f for the advantage of any one, for the pleasure of any one’, (dativ. corn- modi.) Herod. VIII, 61, Τα5τα λβγοντον Θεμιστοκλέους, αντις ό Κορινθίαν ’Αχείμαντος έτεφέρετο, - Εέρυβιάόεα οίκ ίων έπιφηφίζειν όττολι όνδρ'ι, 1 dissuading him from collecting the voices to oblige a man without a coun¬ try’. Soph. Aj. 1045. MeveXaos, « δη τόνδε τελούν ίστείλα- μεν, which Homer expresses II. a, 149- τιμήν άρνΰμενοι Μενελάψ*. Eur. Suppl. 15. 009 (septem duces) tot "Αδραστος ηγαγ, Οίδίττου irayK ληρίας μέρος κατασχειν φν- yaSi Πολυνείκει θέλων ya μβρφ, 'for Polynices.’ Hence the expressions: τιμωρεΊν τί τι w. Plat. Apol. S. p. 66. εί τιμωρήσεις Πατρο'κλω τω εταίρω τον φονον. y Heath, ad Eurip. Suppl. 73. * On this whole section, see Fisch. iu, a. p, 395 sqq. l * i * Valcken. ad Eurip. Ph. p. 582. VOL. II. M I / 388, 542 Syntax. Of the Dative. αμννειν τί τινΐ. Od. θ', 525. for αϊτό τίνος. See §. 331. C. JEsch. S. C. Theb.418. eipyeiv τεκου σρ μητρί πολέμιον δόρυ. περιδείδειν τινί II. ο, 123. νπεραρρωδεειν τινί Herod. νιιι, 72. timere alicui, which also is δειμαίνειν περί τινι in Herod, vm, 74. < < 2. r In honour of any one’. Herod . iv, 34. τγσϊ παρθενοισι ταυτρσι τρσι εξ Ύπερβορεων τελευτησάσφσι εν Αηλιρ κείρονται και αί κόραι και οι πάιδες των ΑηΧ'ιων. Aristoph. Jjysistr. 1277. όρχησάμενοι Oepiffty, ευλα- βωμεθα το λοιπόν αύθις μη ξαμαρτάνειν ετι ]> . • * 3. Generally a reference to a person or thing may be considered as implied in verbs of all kinds, in \vhich such a reference is admissible; in this case it is expressed by the dative, which is rendered in various modes. Xen. Mem. S. I, 1. in. οτι άξιός εστι θανάτου τη * πόΧει. . * ‘ with regard to the. State’, i. e. ‘ deserves that the State should condemn him to death’. Id. Agesil, 2, 9. εϊχε δε 6 Αγησίλαος μεν το δεξιόν του μεθ’ εαυτόν , Όρχομενιοι δε έσχατοι ησαν αυτω του εύωνυμου. οι δ’ αύ Θηβαίοι αυτοί μεν δεξιοί ησαν y Apypioi δ αυτοϊς το ενωνυμον είχον. jEschyl. Prom. 12. Κράτος Βία τε, σώων μεν εντολή Αιός εγει '\ ? ' fjN* > $ \ >/ . i : Λ t ν q ’^V r τέλος οη, κουοεν εμποοων ετι ε^ω οε } c$C. as iai* as con¬ cerns you, for you’. Soph. Aj. 11 28. 0eo9 φάρ εκσωζει με , τωδε (ΑΊαντι) δ* οίχομαι, ‘with regard to Ajax’, i. e. ‘as mpch as lay in him’. Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 2. δοκουσιν o\ νομοί άρχεσθαι ουκ ενθεν, οθενπερ ταις πΧείσταις ποΧε- σιν αργονται, ‘with respect to most of the cities*, i. e. c in most of the cities’. Plat. Leg. iv, p. 166. Όδυσσεύς αύτφ t (Ομηριρ) Χοιδορέι τον Ay αμεμνονα, ‘ ill Homer\ Hipp. Min. p. 20*1. o A χιΧΧευς ου πολύτροπος τω 'Ομηριρ .(ΐπύίι be .ifijsall b Valck. ad Herod, p. 132, 19. ad Phoeh. p. 582. Brunck. ad Arist. Lys. 1. c. Hemsterh. ad Lueiap. T. i, p. 291. ,16 543 Syntax. Of the Dative . πεποιηται ; the dative may be explained thus, but it may also be referred to the passive πβττοίηται, for υπο τον Ομ. 7Γ€7τ. The passage in Plat . Theaet . p. 157. may be thus explained : eir ίσταμαι αυτός εμαυτω, ‘ I know it of myself"; where Heindorf reads εν εμαυτψ. Soph. (Ed. T. 380. to 7 r\ovT 6 καί τνραννι και τέχνη τέχνης νπερφερουσα τίρ 7το\ν'ζη\(ο β'κρ, ad vit(6 felicitatem, as Brunck renders it. Hence II. a, 284. ανταρ βγωγβ λίσσομ , Άχιλληί μεθεμεν χόλον, as Od. φ', 377. μεθίεν χαλεποιο χόλοιο Τ ή¬ λε μάχω, Η. in Cer. 350. όφρα ε μητηρ όφθαλμοΊσιν ίόουσα χόλου και μηνιος αινης άθ ανάτοις παυσειεν, Ho suf¬ fer the anger with respect to Achilles to subside", i. e. ‘against Achilles" c . Thus also μίμνειν τινί, manere ali- quem, ‘to await any one". JEschyl. Ag. 1160. εμοϊ Se μίμνει σχκτμός άμφηκει όορί. In the same manner the dative seems to be put for the accusative Plat. Phileb. p. 253. τίρ τον τον φρονειν ελομενψ βίον οίσθ ως τούτον τόν τρόπον ού^εν αποκωλνει Xyv, ‘ there is no obstacle to him who — has chosen"; in which case αποκωλνει is in a neuter sense. k ' i Q f|· "10 Thus the dative is put with verbs and adjectives,, where in English the preposition for is used : with ρμόιος, ‘easy’, χαλεπός, ‘difficult"; ar /αθός, εύχρηστος, καλός, ‘good, serviceable, useful, handsome", αισχρός, ‘bad", ηϋυς, ‘pleasant", and others, with which the dative expresses the person or thing, with reference to which one of those predicates is applied to an object. Thus also Έκτορ, άτάρ συ μοι εσσΐ πατήρ και πότνια μητηρ, ηόε κασίγνητος. and passim , as in Latin. Plat. Phtfdon* « On these passages of Homer, see Brunck. ad Arist. Ran. 851. Porson. ad Eur. Or. 663. M 2 * 544 389. Syntax. Of the Dative. 4 j p. 147. apa εχει αλήθειαν τινα οφις τε και ακοή tqT$ αν- Θ ρωποις. Hence various phrases are to be explained: a. The dative is often put, especially with ως, in order to shew that a proposition is affirmed, not as generally true, but valid only with respect to a certain person. Soph. CEd. C. 20 . μακραν yap, ως yepovn, προύστάλης οδόν, ‘ for an old man’, ib. 76. επείπερ el yev- ναϊος, ως ίδόντι, c for one who sees thee’, in appear¬ ance. φαίνεται or είκάσαι might be supplied. Plat. Soph, p. 220. ταχειαν ως εμοι σκεψιν επιτάττεις. Rep. Ill, ρ. 267· σωφροσύνης δε ως πληθει ον τα τοιαδε /JL^yia τα, for the people d . Instead of which Plat. Soph. 241. χαλεπόν ηρον και, σχεδόν ειπειν , οϊφ yε εμοί, παντάπασιν άπορον. Thus the dative expresses the opinion or judgment of a person. Soph. Alilt. 904. και τοι cr εyω τίμησα τόις φρονουσιν εν, c according to the judgment of those who un¬ derstand . See the Scholiast. Hence the phrase ως εμοί, or ως y εμοί , c according to my judgment’. Soph. Antig. 1161. K ρεών yap ην ζηλωτός, ως εμοι, ποτέ. Aj. 39 5. ερεβος ώ φαεννότατον, ως εμοί. Plat. Rep. VII, p. 171- ay ανακτησας μοι δοκώ και ώσπερ θνμωθεις τοΊς αιτίοις, σπου¬ δαιότερου ε’ιπειν α εΊπον. Ού μά τον Δί, εφη, ονκονν , ως 7 ακροατή. Άλλ' ως όμοί, ην δ* 0yu>, ρητορι. Instead of which Eurip. Ale. 810. * y δμοί χρησθαι κριτϊ,. Plat. Soph. p. 236. pk yow δμοί, τηλικωδε Svti , κρίναι. Xen. V ectig. 5, 2 . ως εμϊΐ δόζιη. Herod. Ill, 160 . παρα Δαρείφ κριτη € . d Heusde Spec. Grit, in Plat. p. 52. Valck. ,ad Hipp. 324. loup. ad Suid. i, p, 454. Brunck. .Lex. Soph. p. 744. 545 \ Syntax. " Of the Dative. b. In the definition of a property, distance, situation 390 . of a place, &c. there is often put a participle, which ex¬ presses the action with respect to which that definition is applied. It may be resolved by a conditional proposition. Herod. II, ll. άρξαμενω εκ μυχόν διεκπλώσαι ες την εύρεην θάλασσαν ημεραι άναισιμούνται τεσσερηκοντά , είρεσίρ χρεω- μένφ, ^when one begins’. Id. ib. 2 9 . άττό ’Ελεφάντινης πόλιος άνω ίόντι άναντες εστι χωρίον. Comp. I, 181. IV, Thuc. II, 49 . το μεν εξωθεν α7 ττομενιρ σώμα ουκ ay αν θερμόν ην. Plat. Rep. IX, ρ. 275. πρός τε ηδονην και προς ευδοξίαν και ωφέλειαν σκοπού μενιρ ό μεν επαινετής του δικαίου αληθεύει , ο δε φεκτης ούδεν i>yi ες, ουδ’ είδώς φε- yε^ ό τι \J/eyoi. (r) c. The same takes place in definitions of time, when it is to be expressed that an action has taken place since a certain person has done this or that. II. β', 295. ημΊν δ’ εϊνατός εστχ περιτροπεων ενιαυτός Ενθάδε μιμνόντ εσσ ι, 6 since we have been here.’ &/, 413. δυωδεκάτη δε o\ ηώς κειμενω . Comp. Od. τ , 192. Instead of which II. φ> , 155. ηδε δε μοι νυν ηώς ενδεκάτη , ο τ ες ’Ίλιον είληλουθα. ω, 7 65. η δη yap νυν μοι τοδ’ εεικοστόν έτος είσι, εξ ου κεΊθεν εβην. Comp. Od. ω , 308. Herod. IX, 41. ώς δε ενδεκάτη eyeyovee άντικατημενοισι εν Πλα ταιίρσι. Soph. Phil. 354. ην S ημαρ ηδη δεύτερον πλεοντί μοι. Eurip. ΙθΐΙ. 353. Χρόνος δε τις τω παιδί 0 ιαπεπ pay με ν ω; Xen. Hell. II, 1, 27. όπει ήμερα ην πέμπτη επιπλεουσι το7ς Αθηναίος. Similar to this is Herod, n, 124. χρόνον δε εyyεvεσθaι τρίβομενω τω λαω δέκα μεν ετεα της οόου, κατά την εϊλκον τους λίθους , την εδειμαν , 8$C. whilst the people were tormented’, ib. 145. Ήρακλεί μεν δη όσα αυτοί Αι^/ύπτιοί φασι είναι ετεα ες *'Αμασιν βασιλέα, δεδηλω- ταί μοι πρόσθε. ‘ from Hercules’, or f since the death of Hercules’ 1 , and passim, in following parts of his work. f Valck. ad Herod, p. 104, 2’ εμοί 6 κΧεινός ηΧθε Zeros' ΑΧκμηνης τε παίς, f he came, to my delight’. Eurip. Phcen. ιοβί. εβα - Οί&ί- 7Γ ους - θηβαίαν τάνόε yav τότ άσμενοις, πάΧιν <§’ αχη s e. In a similar manner the verbs είναι and yiyveaOat are often accompanied by a participle of the verb f to wish’, &c. in the dative ; in which case the participle only, as the leading idea, is translated by the finite verb. Od. ·■)/, 228. ουκ αν εμoιyε εΧπομενω τά yevoiTO, c I had not hoped this’., Herod, ix, 46. e ?rel S ών αυτοί εμνησθητε και ηδομενοισιν ημιν οι Xoyoi y ey όνασ ι, και έτοιμοί είμεν ττοιεειν ταΰτα> c since we were pleased with your discourse’. Thuc. VI, 46. τω N π p οσόεχο μεν ψ η v τα περί τών 'Ey εσταίων, c Nicias expected the events in Se- gesta’. VII, 35. o ί K ροτωνιάται είπον , ουκ αν σφίσι βουΧο- με vois είναι , $ιά της yrjs σφων τον στρατόν ιεναι. Comp. II. • 3. Soph. (Ed. Τ. 1356. θεΧοντι κάμοι του τ αν ην. Eur. Ion. 654. ο $ ευκτόν ανθρωποισι , καν ακουσιν y, δίκαιον είναι μ 6 νόμος, η φυσις θ άμα παρείχε τω θεω. Plat. Gorg. Ρ· 7· ει άυτω ye σοι βουΧομενιρ εστίν άποκρίνεσθαι · Comp. Each, ρ . 178, 179 . Cratyl. ρ. 231. Rep. ι, p. 209 h · Similarly Thuc. V, 111. τούτων μεν και πεπει- δ Miisgr. et Pors. ad Eur. Ph. 1. c. h Valck. ad Herod, p. 666, 3. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 4 67. ed L. Koen. ad Greg. p. 173. Syntax. Of the Dative. ραμενοις αν τ i yevoiTo και υμΐν και ovk. ανεπιστημο^ <τ tv, ότι ovS’ από μιας πωποτε πολιορκίας Αθηναίοι Si άλλων φόβον άπεχώρησαν. i. β. according to the Schol. τοντών μεν και ύμεΊς πεπείρασθε, και ουκ ανεπιστημονες εστε. An imitation of this in Latin occurs Sallust Jug. 100. uti militibus excequatus cum imperatore labos volentibus esset. Tacit. Agr. 18. quibus bellum volenti- bus erat. I* rWi&i v f. Hence verbs of all kinds are accompanied by the da- 392. tive of the personal pronouns, which represent the action with reference to a person, but might also have beeti omitted without injury to the sense; a pleonasm which is very common in Latin and English. II. ξ\ 501. εϊπεμεναί μοι, Τρώες, ayavov Τλιονηος πατρι φιλώ και μητρί , yor /μεναι εν μεyάροισιν. as Herod. VIII, 68. V. ειπαί μοι προς βασιληα, Μ αρδόνιε. Soph . (Ed. C. 82. ω τεκνον , η βεβήκεν η μίν ο ξένος-, Plat. Rep. I, ρ: 179. (η ηθη ) σε κορυζώντα περώρ$ και ούκ άπομυττει δεόμενον' ος ye αότρ οόδε πρόβατα ο0δε Η X υό( ποιμένα Ύΐνώσκεκ. Μ. Protag. p.lii. el ζητοίς, τις αν «αΐν ewclfeie τους των χειροτεχνών υ'ιεϊς αύτην ταύτην την Χ ' · '.. ! . MMHUiL· -ί.ω21· ΊΒ&άτκάί τέχνην, — φανηνάι\ ου ρόδιον οίμαι είναι τούτων διδάσκαλον -I ί 1 1' XU-. X; Note. Τρ. this place may perhaps be referred the passage Plat. Theaet. p. 51. τίνες ημΊν των νέων επίδοξοι y ενεσθμι επιεικείς and οίφ ΰμΐν των πολιτών μειράκιο) εντετυχηκα, wheVe Heittdorf ad Theaet. ρ. 287. supposes the dative to be j , 1 jj r put instead of the genrtWfe. ω. Partly from this idiom, and partly because gene- rally in the dative the idea of respect of reference to a person or thing is implied, the dative is often put in :. A< λ'Ϊ ‘ > Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. i, p. 432. Wessel. ad Herod, p. 649, 91· Taylor. Ind. Lys. p. 916 . ed. K. FisA. ii, p. U32. I 548 Syntax, Of the Dative. Greek, where, in other languages, the genitive is used; for this reason, that the Greeks understand a person or thing in relation to the action expressed in the verb, or to an adjective ; whereas others, the Latins, for instance, take it with relation to a substantive. Hence this ex¬ change of cases takes place mostly in verbs only. l. The dative for a genitive in reference to a verb. Herod . II, 17· η δε δη ίθεη των οδων τω Ν € /λ Μ €(ΤΤΙ ηδε, Thuc. V, 70. ίνα μη διασπασθείη αυτοί ς η τάξις. VI, 31. 7Γ ροθυμηθεντος ενός έκαστου, όπως αυτω τινι ευπρεπεία τε η ναυς προεξει. I, 89· Αθηναίων τό κοινόν , επειδή αύτοίς οι βάρβαροι εκ της χωράς άπηΧθον, διεκομίζοντο — παίδας, 8$C. These three cases may also be explained in the same manner as /. Comp, i, 6. Thus also Eurip. Ph. 1563. ουκετι σοι τέκνα Χευσσει φάος i. q . τέκνα σου ΟΓ like Ν°. f. Eur . Hec . 664. εν κακοισι δε ου ρόδιον, βρ οτοίσιν ευφημείν στόμα. Comp. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 2, 4. 7. Plat. Hipp. Min. in. του σου πατρός * Απημάντου ηκουον } ότι η Ιλιάς καΧΧιον ε’Ιη ποίημα τιρ Όμηρψ, η η * Οδύσσεια. Thus in ThllC. V, 46. ( εκεΧευον ) την Βοιωτών ζυμμαχίαν άνειναι , with reference to a substantive; but immediately after¬ wards with reference to a verb, εί μη την ξυμμαχίαν άνη- σουσι Β οιωτοις, την μεν ξυμμαχίαν οι Αακεδαιμόνιοι Β οιω- τοις ουκ εφασαν άνησειν. Thus also Plat. Phcedon. p. 140. Sq. αΧΧά τόδε ye μοι δοκεΐ ευ Xeyea9aij το — ημάς τους ανθρώπους εν των κτημάτων τοίς θεοίς είναι , which just afterwards, ρ. 141. is expressed : εύXόyως εχει ημάς εκείνου κτήματα είναΡ. 2. With adjectives. Plat . Charm, ρ. ιΐ5. η τε yap πατρώα νμιν οικία , η Ίάριτιου του Δρωπίδου, και υπό Ανακρεοντος καί ντο οΧωνος και υπ αΧΧων ποΧΧων ποιητών k Wolf, ad Dem. Lept. p. 274. 549 Syntax . Of the Dative. όγκεκωμίασται. where, however, the dative υμΊν may be referred to εγκεκψμ, and then - would belong to f. or g. l. 3. Substantives are often accompanied also by a dative, which is to be explained by a genitive, but not without limitation. For it signifies properly 'for any one\ Some adduce passages as instances of this, which belong to the preceding observations. Eur . Phcen. 17. J Θηβαίοι» εύί*πτοις άναξ , because the expression άνάσσειν τινί is used. lb. 86. $ κλεινόν ο’ίκοις, ’Αντιγόνη, θάλος πατρί, where the dative πατρί belongs to κλεινόν βάλος (not to one of them alone), 'illustrious offspring to the father’, and οίκο vs for εν οίκοις. Hippol. 189. x e p- <τ\ν πόνος, 'labour for the hands’, Thucyd. vi, 18. και μη υμάς η Νικίον των λόγων άπραγμοσυνη και όιάσταςτις +τοΐς νεοις ες τοι)? πρεσβυτερονς άποστρεψη is the same as οι Nuctoo λόγοι οϊ άπραγμοσννην ποιουντες και όιαστασιν €μποιονντες τοις νεοις . ^ Obs, Passages in which a dative, referred to a substantive, seems to be put for the genitive, are very rare. Pind. 01. 9, 24·. άν Οεμις θυγάτηρ re oi σωτειρα λόλογχεν μεγαλόόοξος E όνομία for θυγάτηρ αυτής , unless οι express a companionship < whom her daughter has received with her’. Hermann explains thus Pind. OL 1, 91. τάν οι πατήρ (for πατήρ αυτόν ) υπερ- κρεμαοτε καρτερόν αντφ λίθον , where, however, it may also be a pleonasm, more frequent in the ancient-informed language, oi αυτφ, not ei ipsi, but instead of the simple oi or αντφ, as OL fi, 21. — Nem . 7, 32. appears to belong to h. Soph . Antig. 8.57· εψαυσας αλγεινοτάτας εμοι μέριμνας, πατρος τρι- πόλιστον οίτον (λόγων), του τε προπαντός άμετερου πότμου κλεινούς Λαβόακίόαισιν, where κλ. Ααβό. has the sameie- ference to εψαυσας πότμου, as εμοί has to εψαυσας μέριμνας. 1 Fisch. in, a. p. 420. 550 v Syntax.. Of the Dative. Herod. vi, 103. 6 μεν Srj πρεσβντερος των παίόων τω Κ ίμωνι ΣτησαΎομην ην τηνικαυτα παρά τω πάτριρ Μ,ιλτιάόη τρεφό¬ μενος is said with relation to the verb ην τρεφόμενος Xen. Anah. iv, 4, 2. βασίλειο v είχε τω σατράπη signifies properly, e had a palace for the Satrap’; but which, according to the sense is un¬ doubtedly the same as ‘ had a palace of the Satrap’. The dative for the genitive may also be explained frequently by supplying the particle ων. Plat . Rep. v, p. 33. τον μεy ιστού άρα ay a θου τη 9 f ? Λ f i ( 1 ^ ^ I f ,A iroKet cutlcl ημιν ί τβψανται η κοινωνία rote €π ικον ροις των τε 7ταί$ων και των yi ιναικών, aild just before : η των y ύναίκών τε και ιταίίωρ κοινωνία τοίς φυλαζι. Comp. ρ. 38 “V i ίονη Λ h. The old Poets in particular often add to the dative a pronoun in the dative, which in other languages is put in the genitive, in the same manner as the Greeks also join with an accusative another accusative of a pro- noun in the place of the genitive. See §. 413. Obs. 6. The pronoun is usually put as a pleonasm, as j. II. ε , 116. εϊ ποτέ μοι και πατρι φίλα φρονεονσα π αρεστής, c if once thou supportedst my father’, the same as πατρί μου. Comp. S', 219 . Herod. 1 , 34. μη τί οι κρεμάμενον τω παιόι εμπεστι. II. 18. μαρτυρεει Se μοι τί} yvωμr^, where τ /7 yvcopy seems to be a more precise explanation of μοι. Find. 01 . 8, 109 . κόσμον , ον σφιν ωπασεν Zeus 7 ενει. ‘ t6 them’, viz. f to their race’, for 7 ενει σφών. ΝβΊΤΙ. 7 , 32. επει φεν^εεσσ'ιν οι ποτανα. μαχανα σεμνόν επεστί τι. This is more rare in Attic. Arist. Av. 812. φερ ίόω, τί S’ ημίν τουνομ εσται τ»} πό λει ; as Ν°. f. Plat. Hlpp. Min. p. 200. ωκνουν επανερεσθαι, μη σοι εμπο- Stov είην ερωτών rrj επ δείξει, c to thee’, i. e. f t0 thy exposition’., ■’ i MOTH» WTOl /θΤΓ i. The same relation seems to be the basis of the con¬ struction of the verbs είναι, yiyi ιεσθαι, υπόρχειν f t0 be’. ra Hemsterh. ad Arist. Plut. p. 2. X 0 Syntax. of the Dative. 551 with the dative, and of passives, with the dative, instead of i/7ro, with the genitive. a. είναι, $C. Eurip. Heracl. 298. ov/c etrrt rovSe 7 raicri κάλλιον yepas, η 7 rarpos εσθλου KayaOov πεφυκεναι. < there is no nobler privilege to the children'. Xen. Cyr. \M 3 3 , 3 . ovSkv όντως ημετερόν εστιν, η ημείς ημιν αυτοις, f than we belong to ourselves'. It is usually translated f to have', asjn Latin esse with the dative, e. g. Τελλω 7 ΓαΤ &9 ησαν καλοί κά Ύ αθοί , f Tellus had good children'. Hence also μετεστί μ οι τιτος 11 . β. The dative for υπό with the genitive. II 326. CU9 τω μεν όοιοϊσι κασ lyvrjToia ι όαμεντε βητην είς’Έρε- βος, Σαρπηΰόνος όσθλοι εταίροι. Soph. Aj. 539 . και μην πε- λας yε προσπόλοις φυλάσσεται. c by his attendants . Pind. Ol. 12, 3. to the goddess Fortune: t\v yap kv πόντιο κνβερνω νται θοαι νάες, εν χερσω τε λαιφηροι πόλε¬ μοι Kayopai βουλαφόροι. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 2, 16. ά ύπισχνώ ποιησειν aya9a ημάς - αποτετελεσται σοι ηόη, and else¬ where in abundance in the Prose writers and Poets 0 . Hence the dative, with verbals. See under the head Adjective. Obs. The dative frequently stands in this sense with ι/πο, especially in Homer, although this preposition in the sense of a } ab governs the genitive, υπό with the dative, signifies pro¬ perly ‘ under’, and is put in this construction, with passives, in i order to express the subordinate relation in which the subject of the passage stands to the person, by means of which relation it suf¬ fers the effect. II. π, 420. εταίρους χόρσ υπο Πατρόκλοιο Μενοιτιάόαο $ αμεντας for the simple dative. Thus also ib. / 08 . ου νυ τοι α'ισα , σ’ΐρ υπο όονρι πολιν περθαι Τ ρωων ayεpω χων. ib. 384 . ως ι/ττο λαίλαπι πάσα κελαινη βεβριθε u Fisch. hi, a. p. 414. ° Fisch. in, a. p. 399 i 552 Syntax. Of the Dative. κασσίτεροί ως τ 6 X v *7 ύπ’ volo: θαλφθείς, ηε σίδηρος, b Η φαίστου παλαμησιν. Eurip. Suppl. 404. Ετεοκλεοι/? θανδντος - αδελφού χειρι ΐίολυνείκους ύπο. Iphig. A. 1284. ελεύθεραν yap δεΊ νιν (την Ελλα<5α), όσον εν σοί, τεκνον, κάμοί, yet 'εσθαι, μηδε βάρ¬ βαρο ις υιτο, "Έλληνας όντας 9 λεκτρα συλάσθαι βίφ. On the other hand. Plat. Each. p. 173. όστις Tvy^civei 1 ) 7 ro 7 rai- δοτρίβτ] ayaOto πεπαιδευμένος, for υπό παιδοτρίβου. Rep. Ill, p. 27E νπδ τφ σοφωτάτω Χείρωνι τεθραμμενος. ib. νιιι, ρ. 213. νιος υπδ τω πατρι τεθραμμενος. Comp. IX, Ρ· 240. Isocr. de Big· ρ. 352. C. ηyoυμaι yap και tout εΊναι των καλών, εκ τοιούτων yεvdμevov υπδ τοιουτοις ηθεσιν επιτροπευθηναι και τραφηναι και παιδευθηναι, 1 under a man of such a character’ p . 1 , % ■ j > ' * · ♦. ' » · t.' » A / / _ ^ · I t m\ ■ <*. g. « 1 * The dative expresses also the direction of an action to an object, whether this direction be proper and agreeable to the senses, or an improper one, which is only imagined in conformity with a sensible mode of expression by action, e. g. 11 . ζ, 301. αι δ ’ όλoλυyrj πάσαι Αθηντι χεΊρας άνεσχον, ‘ lifted up their hands to Minerva’. * * Thus also the verbs "to pray’. II. y, 29 6. ευχοντο θεο?ς αίειγενε'τρσιν, ‘ prayed to the gods’, because in pray¬ ing the countenance or the hands were lifted up. II. y , 318, η, 177- λαοί δ ’ ηρησαντο θεοις ίδε χειρας άνεσχον. Xen. Cyr. V, 2, 12. εύχονται πασι θεοΊς yevea0ai ποτέ (οΐοί τε) καί εαυτούς επιδεΊζαι, δτι πιστοί εϊσιν. Comp. νιι, ι, 1 . Plat. Rep. in, ρ. 276. Aristoph. Vesp. 862'. Soph. Aj. 509· μητηρ σε πολλακις θεοις αράται ζώντα προς δόμους μολειν. Thus also προσευχεσθαί τινι , though πρός by itself, in the sense of r to, against’, governs the accusative. Jien. Pyv. II, 1, 1 . προσευζάμενοι θεοΊς και χθων. Hesiod. Th. 862. ετηκετο , - τήκεται εν χυονι όιη υ r Lennep. ad Phalar. ρ. 242. 553 Syntax. Of the Dative. ηρωσι. Plat. Rep. 1 , in. κατεβην χθες εις Jleipcua — προσ- ενξόμενός τ rj θεω. But the construction with the accu¬ sative was one peculiar to the Attics q . Eurip. Andr. 1107· ω νεανίαι, τί σοι θεω κατε υζόμεσθ a ; Plat. Leg. Ill, p. 128. και μην , ων y 6 παΊς εύχεται εαυτφ ·γί^γνεσθαι, 7 τολλα ό 7 τατηρ άπ ευζαιτ αν τοις θεοΐς μηδαμώς κατά Τα? του υιεως ευχάς yiy νεσθαι. Thus also άναβ\εττειν τινι , c to look up to any one". Eur. Suppl. 323. δρεις, άβουλος ως, κεκερτομημενη ( c who was ridiculed as inconsiderate") τοί? κερτομουσι yop- yov ω? άναβλεπει ση πατρίς ; Ion. I486, άνηβα. Έρε- χθεύς, ο τε ί γη Γ γενετας δόμος ουκετι νύκτας δερκεται , Αλίου δ άναβλε 7 τ ει λαμπάσ ι. Bacch . 1307· της σης τόδ ερνος, ώ τάλαινα, νηδυος αίσχιστα και κάκιστα κατθανόνθ ορώ, φ δώμ άνεβλεπεν, where, however, Brunck reads ον. Plat. Charm, p. 111. άνεβλεφε τε μοι τοϊς δφθαλμοις αμηχανόν τι oiov. Similarly εμβλεπειν τινί Plat. Rep.S· Ρ· 311. Of this kind seems to be also the construction ava- στηναί τινι , f to stand up against any one, in order to fight with him". II. ψ, 635. The dative alone often stands in this sense, instead of the preposition προς, el?, επί, with the accusative, Herod. II, 62. e? Έάιν — επεάν συλλεχθεωσι τγσι θυσιρσι. for εις τα? θυσίας. Eurip. Or. 1429. ά δε λινόν ηλακάτη δακτύλοις ελισσε, νήματά θ’ ιετο πεδω. .Thus too Ari* stoph. Thesm. 10 55. αιόλει νεκυσιν επι πορείες, for προς νεκνας τ . I' ’■ ih '.· ί ';#;··■ ; / · (.θ’ .Μ V> J ■>' ·.* .. The same appears to be the ground of the construc- * Moeris p. 314. Fisch. in, a. p. 372. r Abresch. Diluc\ Thuc, I , p. 92 sqq. Musgr. ad Eurip. Phoen. 310. 554 Syntax. Of the Dative. tion ύποστηναί τινι, ‘ to await an enemy, not to give ground’, excipere. Xen. Anab. ni, 2, Η. εΧθόντων Τίερσών και των συν αντοις παμπΧηθεϊ στοΧφ , ως αφανιουν- των τάς Αθήνας , υποστηναι αντοις Αθηναίοι τοΧμησαντες ενίκησαν αύτους. Hellen. VII, 5, 12. εξεστι Xiy ειν, ως τοϊς απονενοη μενοις ουρείς αν υ π ο στα ιη. ThuC . II, 61. ττολίν μεηάλην οίκουντας και εν ηθεσιν άντιπάΧοις αΰτγ τεθραμμενονς χρεών και ζυμφοραις ταΤς με^ίσταις εθεΧειν νφιστα- σθαι , και την αζίωσιν μη αφανι(ειν · It more commonly takes the accusative. Both constructions are united Eurip. Here. f. 1352. ταϊς συμφοραϊς yap οστις ουχ υφίσταταί) ου$ αν^ρος αν <)υναιθ υποστηναι βεΧος . 394. Hence those verbs govern a dative, which are com¬ pounded with the preposition επι and προς, serving to mark more precisely the idea of the direction of an object, although these prepositions by themselves, in that sense, govern the accusative. .* Π c. a . ’Κπί. εττιστρατευεσθαι. Eur. Med. 1182. $ιπΧουν ycip αυτγ πημ επεστρατευετο . Avist. Αν. 1522. οι Se βάρ¬ βαροι θεοί - επιστρατευσειν φάσ άνωθεν τ Δ ι ί. Comp. Vesp. ll. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 5, 25. επεξιεναι τινι. Dem. in Mid. p. 583, 23. όπως επεζει τω μια ρω. Έπι- γειρείν τινι , properly, ‘ to lay hands on any thing, to undertake’. Isocr. de Pac. p. 180. C. ταΊς πράξεσι ταϊς αυταις επεχείρησαν. \^περχεσθαί τινι. IsoCT . Pan. p r %b ( l. C. επεΧηΧυθε μ οι το παρρησιάσασθαι* . Comp. Xen . Μ. & ιν, 2, 4. Plat. Rep . νιιι, ρ. 212. Thus also wey- yeXyv τινι. Soph. Aj. 989· τοϊς θανοΰσί τοι φιΧουσι πάν- τες κειμενοις eπεyy εΧαν. (on the other hand, lb. 969- πως $ητα τοΰ<) επεyyεXωεv αν κάτα; (Xen. Cyr. V, 5. 9.? ,«>1C r i J; Ϊ * 7 / \V Obs. 1. These verbs are also found with the accusative,, when- ,. ‘ ‘ ; · , * ,, fc ■ ever consideration is had, not to the direction of an action, biit to its effective relation, or where the preposition is considered as separate. Soph. Track. 74. ΈνβοΊδα χωράν φασίν, Εύ- ρυτου π όΧιν, επιστρατεύειν αυτόν. Comp. 362. Eur. Suppl. 648. ’Άδραστος - επεστράτευσε Καδμείων πόΧιν. Thac. ιν, 92 . ειωθασί τε ο\ (not οι) ισχύος που θράσει τόίς πεΧας, ώσπερ ’Αθηναίοι νυν, επιόντες τον μεν ησυχάζοντα και εν τη εαυτόν μόνον αμυνόμενον αδεεστερον επιστρα·* τενειν — Demosth. in Mid. ρ. 549, 24. επεξρειμ&ν του φόνον τον Αρίσταρχον. — Herod, ν, 1* τους δε (Eleptv" θίους) επιχειρεειν η < ' ^ VT · £ “\Λ Obs.· 2. In Herodotus the construction of επeyyε\$v is followed in narayeXav ill, 37· 7Γολλα τωyaXμa τι KaTeye- Χασε. 38. ου yap αν ίροϊσί τε και νομαίοισι επεχειρησε κaτayεXφv. Comp. ib. 155. ιν, 79· ου b . Πρό$. as προσεχειν τον νουν τοις πpάyμaσ. πρoσyε~ Χμν τινι. Lucian. D D. 7. in. προσβαΧΧειν Tin, c to attack’, e. g. τφ τείχει. Xen. Hell, i, 2, 2. also in the sense of f to smell of any thing’ x . προσερχεσθαί τινι. Xen. Cyr. i, 4, 27. — Herod. Vlt. 6. Tie ισιστ par ιδεών οι άναβε - βηκότες ες Σουσα — — ετι πΧεον πpoσωpεy ο ντο ο ι (τφ Ξερξρ) which shortly afterwards is expressed προσ- φερεσθαι and I, 123. προσκεϊατθαί τινι. Xen. Mem. S. Ill, 11, 11. ποΧυ διαφέρει τό κατά φυσιν τε και όρθώς άνθρωπιυ π ροσφερεσθαι. Obs. These verbs too are often constructed with the accu- . il';i —7-7T 4 Valck. ad Her. p. 531, 64. u Perizon. ad M\. V. H. 13. Reiske ad Dion. Chrys. p. 14. Valck. ad Herod. p t . 393, 99* ,,*: . t x Koen. ad Greg. p. 14 sq. q q 556 Syntax. Of the Dative. » v> , ^ - r, ' r; ~ r, / sative, e. g. 7 τροσεύ-χεσθαί τινα §. 393· Eur. Med. 1159 . άψυχον είκω προσ*γε\ώσα σώματος y . προσβάλλειν, c to seized often takes this preposition besides. Xen. Anab . v, 2, 4. Cyrop .\ v, 3, 12. Aristoph. Pac. 180. 7ro0ei/ βροτού μ€ προσέβαλε*, προσκυνέιν, προσειπεϊν , προσφωνειν, προσπτυσσεσθαι a , govern only the accusative, so that on the whole the idiom in this case is to be carefully observed. • Μ.Ί UViilCiVV fifilOCl Vli 1 ,r 1 ··. .Ud.l .· . *? . IV*[‘ < :* . ^ i a , ' . c. Even verbs compounded with prepositions, which never govern a dative, take the dative, when they express such a direction to an object, as είσέρχεσθαί τινι. Soph. (Ed. C. 372. είσηλθε τοϊν τρισάθλιοι v ίρις κακή. Herod. I, 24. και — τοΊσι έσελθεΊν yap ηδονην, εί μέλλοιεν άκούσεσθαι του άρίστου ανθρώπων αοιδού. — αι/αγω- ρησαι εκ της πρύμνης ές μέσην νέα. III, 14. αυτίρ τε Καμ~ βνσνι έσελθ ειν οίκτον τινα. Plato. Rep. I, p. 153. επειδάν τις eyyi^ γ τού οιεσθαι τελευτησειν , είσέρχεται αντφ δέος και φροντίς περί ών έμπροσθεν ονκ ειστιει. Pkced. ρ. 133. διά δη ταύτα ούδέν πάνυ μοι ελεεινόν είσγει. on the other hand, ρ. 132. ούτε yap ως θανάτφ παρόντα με ανδρός επιτηδείου ελεος είσφει. Eur. Iphig. A. 1589· εμοι δε τ aλyoς ου μικρόν είσγει φρενί. (§. 392. h.) Soph. (Ed. Col. 422. τον υμέναιον, δν δόμοις ανορμον είσέπλευσας. Yet the accusative is no less usual b . , \y\. .·> ■ 4 / - . - r J * ’ 1 * · v \ v V ^ Thus Aristophanes says Av. 501. καί κατέδειξεν πρώ¬ τος y ουτος βασιλεύων π ρ οκυλινδε ισθαι τοις ικτί- νοις , which elsewhere is joined with a genitive. Isocr. Panath. p. 244. A. νυν δ’ ούδέν ύπέρχεταί μοι τοιούτο. y Schweigh. ad Athen. T. hi, ρ. 307. 2 Koen. ad. Greg. p. 14. a Brunck ad Soph. Antig. 1237. b Hemst. ad Luc. T. 1, p. 206. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 501. Valck. ad Ph. p. 46*4. Thom. M. p. 272 sq. 557 Syntax. Of the Dative. where, however, Valcken. ad Herod, p. 531, 64. reads όπερχεται. d. Otherwise verbs, compounded with prepositions which by themselves require the dative, govern the same case, if the preposition may be separated from the verb without affecting the sense, as ενοραν τί τινι. Also e? n- στατεϊν τινι Isocr. p.9l. B although στατεΊν does not exist out of composition, άμφιβαλλειν τί τινι. Verbs also compounded with περί are constructed with the da¬ tive, where the preposition appears to have no influence upon this construction. Isocrat. Paneg. p. 67. B. irepi- βάλλειν ταις με*/ίσταις συμφοράς like SiSovai τινα συμφο¬ ράς 11 . β, 397. Plat . Phcedr.p. 338 c . Isocr. de Pac. p. 17 e.'A. 7 τλείοσι και μείζοσι κακοίς περιεπεσον. TJlUC. 1, 55. η μεν ουν Κέρκυρα ούτιο περιγ ί^νετα ι τω πολεμώ των Κ ορινθίων, emerSlt e bello. tb. 7 0: ημίν δε και εκ του επιεικούς (εκ της επιείκειας ) άόοξία το πλέον η έπαινος ουκ εικότως περιεστη , where the accusative is more usual, e. g. see vril, 1 5. but περιεστη is only a more figurative expression for ενετό ημΊν: . Μ £ , ' t ν I ; ‘ ’ ■ ' . % ‘ The following: constructions are to be noticed : ι. Επιφη φίζειν τινι, ‘ to permit one to vote’, in suf- fragia mittere. Luc. Tim. p. 113. Επ εψηφισε τη Εκκλη¬ σία Ύίμων. instead of wliich Thuc. i, 87. Επεψηφιζεν αΐιτόί es την Εκκλησίαν των Λακεδαιμονίων. The con¬ struction seems to arise from this, that Επνψηφίζειν is the same as φηφόν προθειναι, ewayayoiv τινι. Plato, On the other hand, uses it actively, Gorg. p. 60. μη oSv μ η$Ε νΰν με κΕλευε Επιφηφίζειν τούς -παρόντος. Comp. ρ. 64 . c Dorv. ad Char. ρ. 598. 0 Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. i, p. 415. Valcken. ad Herod, p. 645, 83. VOL. II. N 896 . 558 Syntax. Of the Dative. 2. Sometimes the dative is used for άπό with the genitive. II. o' , 87. θεμιστι δε καΧΧιπαρήφ δεκτό δεπας, 'from Themis’, or 'took it off Themis’. Od. ΊΓ , 40. ως άρα φωνή σας, o\ εδέκατο χαΧκεον ey χος. Pind. P. 4, 35. όρνις (augUviuTTl) ον ί τότε Ύριτωνίδος εν προχοαις Χίμνας θείρ άνερι είδομ ενιρ, yaiav δίδ ovri ζείνια, πρώραθεν E υφαμος καταβάς δεζατο. Soph. El. 442. σκε- φαι yap , et σοι προσφιΧώς αυτί} δοκεΊ yepa τα$* ου ν τ άφοισι δεζασθαι νεκυς. Similar to this is Soph. El. 226. τινι yap 7ror av - πρόσφορου άκουσαιμ ’ έπος ; τινι φρο νοΰντι καίρια ; for παρά τίνος 6 . This reference or respect to a person or thing can properly take place only with verbs, because it is only admissible in an action ; but the dative often accompa¬ nies substantives also, which are derived from or allied to verbs, governing the dative. Hesiod. Th. 93. τοίη τοι Μ ονσεων ιερή δόσις άνθρώποισιν, instead of which Plat. Phileb.p. 219. θεών εις άνθρώπους δόσις. Herod. VII, 169. ώ νηπιοι, επιμεμφεσθε όσα υμάν εκ των Μ ενεΧεω τιμωρημάτων Mii /ω? άπεμφε μηνίων δάκρυματα 9 6 on ac¬ count of the assistance which you afforded to Mene- laus’, because they said τιμωρείν τινι. Eurip. Phcen. 948. (δε7 τοΑ) φόνιον αίμα yrj δούναι χοάς, K άδμω παΧαιών ,r Αρεος εκ μηνιμάτων, ος yηyεvει δράκοντι τιμωρεί φόνον . from μηνίειν τινι. ThllC . I, 73. η μεν πρεσβευσις ημών ούκ ες avTiXoy ίαν τοΊς υ μετε ροις ζνμμάχοις ey^veTo. from avriXiyeiv τινι. VI, 76. ον περί της εΧευθερίας ούτε ουτοι τών ΈλΧ^υωι/, ουθ* ο\ 'ΈΧΧηνες της εαυτών τώ Μ ηδιρ αντεστησαν , περί δε οι μεν σφίσιν , αλλα μη εκείνψ κατα- δουΧώσεως , oi δε επι δεσπότου μεταβοΧν/, from καταδου - Χονν τινά τινι. Plat. Ale. I, p. 30. την εν τα) ποΧεμφ το7ς * Herm. de Metr. Pind. p. 273. Abresch. Diluc. Thuc. i, p. 95: /* * Syntax. Of the Dative . 559 , φίλοις βοήθεια v. Charm, p. 134. σύ δε ομοιότητα τι να ζητείς αυτής ταις αλλαις. Leg. I X, /?· 18. τι συμ¬ βουλεύεις ημιν περί της νομοθεσίας τ rj των Ελλήνων πο- λει; Aristot. Polit. Ill, ρ. 473. Ε. τούς ψέγοντας την τυραννίδα και την Περίανδρου Ορασυβουλω συμβουλιαν ούχ απλώς οιητεον δρθώς επίτιμον . II. The Greek dative also supplies the place of the 397. Latin ablative, and in this case expresses the relation of the connection or companionship to the question c where¬ with’? of an instrument or mean to the question • whereby’ ? of an impulse or excitement, ‘ from what’? of an external cause, ‘ by what means ? on what account? for what’ ? &c. l. f Wherewith’? when a society or companionship is expressed, σύν , άμα , are usually put in this case. The dative alone is used only in the following cases: a. With words which are compounded with σύν, μετά ( c with’) ojuoD, e. g. συζγν τινί , vivere cum aliquo, viz. when the preposition may, without injury to the sense, be separated from the verb, and be placed im¬ mediately before the dative, or where this division can¬ not take place, may be repeated. Thus in adjectives. Herod. VII, 102. τ rj Έλλαδι πενίη αίεί κοτε σύντροφος εστι. σύντροφος . σύμφωνος , συμφωνειν , Μετά, indeed, in the sense of f with’, by itself, takes the genitive ; but in composition the dative, e. g. μετεχειν τίνος τινι , ( to partake of any thing with some one’ μεταίτιος τινί. (Butin μεταδι - δόναι τινί, μετεστί μοι , μεταμελει μοι , the dative does not f Duker. ad Thue. v, 46. vm, 21. Valcken. ad Herod, p. 517, 100. V. et Pors. ad Eurip. Ph. 1. c. Herm. ad Viger. p. 71<3, 47. Fisch. hi, a. p. 336. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 229. * Fisch. in a. p. 394. N 2 560 Syntax, Oj' the Dative. express a companionship, but merely the personal object of the verb, as in the simple verbs SiSovai τινι, εστί μοι, μεΧει μοι.) Ομού, e. g. όμολο'γβιΐ' τινι, ‘ to agree with any one', properly, ‘to speak with him\ όμόyXωσσός τινι, c speaking the same language with any one’, ομώνυμός τινι, ‘ of the same name with any one, a namesake of any one’* όμότροφός τινι, e brought up with any one, living with any one\ όμορος (Ion. όμονρος), ‘ who has a common boundary (όρος, ονρος) with any one ,h . Thus also όμίΧείν τινι (which is a lengthened form from όμού) ‘to associate with any one’’. , Obs. Adjectives compounded with συν or όμου are often found with the genitive. Herod, ji, 134. Έοδώπις ην - σύνόονΧος Αίσωπον του Xoy οποίου’ και yap οντος Ίάόμονος ey ενετό (όούΧος). Plat . Phadon. ρ. 193. βγω δβ και αμτός r)y ούμαι όμόόονΧός ye είναι των κύκνων καί ιερός του αυτόν θεού. Soph. Aiitig. 451. η ζννοικος των κάτω θεών Αίκη. Arist. Αν. 676. ώ φίΧη , ώ ζονθη, ώ φιΧτάτη, όρνεων πάντων ζύννομε, των εμών ύμνων Ιζυ ντ ροφ* άηόοι. Plat. Phadon. ρ. 195. τον θνητού S~vyy ενη. Comp. Phileb. ρ. 226. 280. 320. ib. ρ. 208. ΦίΧηβος αγαθοί/ είναι φησι το γαίρειν ητάσι ζώοις και την ηόονην και τερφιν και όσα τού yevoi /ς εστι τούτον ζύμφωνα. Ib. ρ. 291· τού¬ του ζνμφντους ηόονάς επομενας. Isocr. Evag. ρ, 192. C. Τ εύκρος ΣαΧαμινα κατιρκισεν, ομώνυμον ποιησας της πρό- τερον αυτω πατριόος ουσης. b. With the verbs 1 to follow, επεσθαι, άκοΧονθόιν, όπηόείν. That the dative with these verbs does not express their personal object, but a companionship, is evident from this, that they are often constructed with μετά, σύν, άμα , 8$C. Soph. Track. 563. η νίκα ξύν ‘Η ρακΧεί τό πρώτον εύνις εσπόμην. ΧβΠ. HlCT. 9, 8. η σωφροσύνη ποΧύ μάΧΧον συν τρ ασ’χοΧία. σνμπ αρομαρτ el. CyrQp. V, h Fisch. hi, a. p. 3p4. * Fisch. hi, a. p. 401. 561 Syntax. Of the Dative. <2, 36. σνν tols νικώσι, cra

ή[| iir.lil Q J'jI l Hence also άρεσκεσθαί τινι (as far as άρεσκειν is a tran¬ sitive verb §. 383.) delectari aliqua re. Herod, iv, 78. ό Σκύλης - διαίτη μεν ουδαμως ηρεσκετο Σκυθικη. TllC phrase too άρκεΊσθαί τινι, contentum esse aliqua re. He¬ rod. IX, 33. ούδ ’ ούτω εώη ετι άρκεεσθαι τούτοισι μού- '· . , τ νοισι. JEschin. Axioch. 15 f τα παθήματα σοφισμάτων ουκ άνεγεται, μόνοις δε αρκειται τοις δυναμενοις καθικεσθαι της Α Μ VI (ί οω Τ -5 TV VJ Μ J3 Γ'3 ΰ Ο Τ S 0 : \\ Τ » i .> Μ-.ηΤ 0 V » ’Λ Η > I Λ y ' ψυχής . ,ΓΤ \ % | \ · ' | , . . . - 6. With verbs of all kinds, when the dative is ren- by f on account of J , Herod, i, 87. βγω ταύτα έκραξα τ rj σίρ μεν ευδαιμονίφ, ττ} εμεωϋτού δε κακο- ^lt)*I9m «ί .C;U d-iivl ,·/ ,^ΛνήοΑ. j Α·\ ’ . \·.) ν \ Λ ν , \χ Λ*1:)Μ Ο» ) U ’ u Brunck. ad. Apoll. Rh. n, 96 . Ilgen. ad Horn. H. Cer. p. 560. Herm. ad Vig. p. 816. n. 4l6. x Valcken. et Wessel. ad Herod, p. 579, 58. Fisch. m, a. p. 409. .WViUM \ 569 Syntax. Of the Dative. \ δαιμονίη. Thuc. 111,-98. extr. Δημοσθένης δε περι Να ύ- πακτον και τα χωρία ταύτα ύπεΧείφθη, τοις πεπραγμέ¬ νο ις φοβούμενος τούς Αθηναίους , as Eurip. Or. 455. Τννδα- ρεως δδε στείχει προς ημάς , ού μάΧιστ αιδώς μ’ εχει εις ομματ εΧθειν, τοισιν εζειρ ( γασμενοις. Thuc. ΙΥ. 35. οι Αθη¬ ναίοι επισπώμενοι ( επισπομενοι ) περίοδον μεν αυτών και κύκΧωσιν χωρίου ισχνι ουκ είχον , c ΟΠ account of ttl6 strength of the place’. VI, 33. Αθηναίοι εφ * ημάς ποΧΧή στρατιμ ώρμηνται και ναυτική και πεζική, πρόφασιν μεν Εγε- σταίων ζυ μ μ α χία, και Αεοντίνων κατοικίσει , το δε αΧηθες, ΣικεΧίας έτ τιθυμία c on account of the alliance with the * » ( inhabitants of Segesta, and in order to re-establish the Leontines’, I, 84. μόνοι δι αυτό εύττρα^ίαις τε ουκ εξυ- βρίζομεν και ξυμφοραΊς ήσσον ετερων είκομεν. c we alone are not insolent on account of our success’. Comp, vn, 77. JEsch . Choeph. 51. άνήΧιοι βροτοστ vyew δνόφοι καΧύπτουσι δόμους δεσποτών θανάτοισι . Plat. Menex. ρ. 283. ούτε άσθενεία, ούτε πενία ., ούτ ayvwaici πάτερων άπεΧηΧα- ται ούδείς, ουδέ τοις έναντιοις τετίμηται , ώσΊΐερ εν άΧ- Χαις πόΧεσιν. Rep. II, p. 210. τδ δε δίκαιον — ayai τάσθαι, ουχ ώς ά Γ γαθόν ) αΧΧ’ ως αρρώστια του άδικειν τιμώμενον. Leg. I, p. 9· εν όπόσαις οι άμείνονες νικώσι το πΧήθος και τούς χείρονς , όρθώς αν αύτη κρείττων τε αυτής Xeyoiff η πόΧις, επαινοιτό τε αν δικαιότατα τη τοιαύτγ\ νίκη γ : c. Hence the dative is put with many passives and neuters, where it also expresses the cause, occasion, or object of the action. Thuc . iv, 85. θαυμάζω τή άπο- κΧείσει μου των πυΧών. VII, 63. της τε φωνής τή επι¬ στήμη και των τρόπων τύ\ μιμήσει εθαυμαζεσθε κατά την Έλλαδα. III, 97·' Δημοσθένης —τή τύχγ\ εΧπίσας y Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl. 304. Brunck. ad Soph. Antig. 1219. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 146. Fisch. in, a. p. 408. t 570 Syntax. Of the Dative. otl ούδεν αύτφ ηναντιουτο, -—— εχώρει επί AiyiTiov. Plat . Hipp. Maj. p. 14. εικότως σόι χαίρουσιν o\ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, are πολλά είδότι, ‘ rejoice on your account, are pleased with you". Symp. p. 180. και την εκείνης (Άλκηστιδος ' ψνχήν) άνεισαν (ο'ι θεοί), ά^γασθεντες τψ ερ·γφ. Isocr. de Pac. p. 159· extr. ο\ ούδεν τοιοΰτο προτείνουσιν, άλλ* ως ησυχίαν εχειν δει, και μη μεγάλων επιθυμειν παρά το δίκαιον , άλλα στε pye ιν το7ς παρούσ ιν. lb. p. 163. D. όρώσιν ημάς ου aT^pyovras οΐς αν εχωμεν. επί is joined with this dative lb. p. 177 .A, aT^pyovTat επί ταϊς υπό του πλήθους διδομεναις δωρεαις. Comp. Panath . ρ. 242. A . ζ Άyaπάω is constructed like aTepyw in the same sense. Lysias Epitaph, p. 82. ο της Ασίας βασιλεύς , ούκ ay απών το7ς ύπάρχουσιν ay αθοις, αλλ ελπίζων και την Ευρώ¬ πην δουλώσεσθαι, εστειλε πεντηκοντά μυριάδας στρατιάν. Comp. ρ. 106. Demosth. ρ. 13, ιι. Xen. Anab. i, 3, 3. ανδρες στρατιώται, μη θαυμάζετε, ότι χαλεπώς φέρω το7ς παροΰσι πpάyμaσι f which otherwise is accompanied by επί, as Xen. Hell. VII, 4, 21. χαλεπώς η των Λακεδαι- / μονιών πόλις φερουσα επί τη πολιορκία, as Cicer. V err. IV, 30, 68. interverso dono regali graviter ferre. Isocr. Panath. p. 275. A. ε δύσχεράνε μεν ούδενι των yεypaμ- μενων. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 12. δυσχεραίνων το7ς λόyοις. Id. Phcedon. p. 143. εί μεν μη ψμην ηζειν πρώτον μεν παρά θεούς άλλους σοφούς τε καί άyaθoυς, επειτα καί παρ ανθρώ¬ πους τετελευτηκότας άμείνους των ενθάδε, ηδίκουν άν, ουκ ay αν ακτών τω θ ανάτψ. Xen. JVIeVil. *S. II, 1, 31. Tots πeπpayμevoις αίσχυνό μενοι. To these also πιστεύειν τινί, ‘ to rely upon any thing', seems to belong, as far as the dative expresses the ground of the reliance. z Fisch. hi, a. p. 409 sq. 8 Bibl. Crit. hi, 2. p. 17- / / Syntax. Of the Dative. 571 ! Obs. 1. It is more usual to find εττι with this dative. Plat. Menon. in, θετταΧοι εθαυμάζοντο e φ ιππική τε και ττΧουτφ. στερΎω is also found with the accusative,, in the sense of ‘ to be content with any thing*. Herod, ix, 117. ούτω δη earepyov τα τταρεόντα. Soph. Fr. p. 677. xxvm. ed. Br. στεργειν δε ταμ ττ εσ όντα και θεσθαι Ίτρεττει σοφον κνβεντην } αΧΧα μη στενειν τύχην**. Xhus also ayair^v, ί to be content with any thing’. Isocr. Paneg. p. 69* D, ούτως αίσχρώς άττηΧΧαχησαν, ώστε τούς αφεστώτας μηκετι την εΧενθεριαν ayair^.v } αΧΧ ηδη και των ομόρων ζητειν επαρ^ειν. Comp. Thuc. VI, 18. Demosth. Phil, π, ρ.> 70, 19· Obs. 2. This dative often signifies f according to, in con¬ sequence of’. Fur. Phcen. 677· (Κάδμο? δράκοντα ωΧεσε) δίας άμάτορος Παλλάδο? φραδα ις ya7reτεΐς δικών οδοντας εις βα- θνσπόρους yύaς } as II. ο , 412. υποθημοσυν^σιν Αθηνης. Horn. Η. in Apoll. ι, 98. Ή ρης φραδμοσύνγ. Fur. Phcen. 1058. χρόνιρ δ εβα Hi/f ? ίαις αττ οστοΧα ισιν Οιδιττονς ο τΧαμων θηβαίαν τάνδε yav. Xen. Cyr. I, 2, 4. νόμω εις τάς εαυτών χωράς έκαστοι ί ταρεισιν 0 . Similarly Herod, ιν. 16. ακορ τι Xeyeiv, f from hearsay’, which Plato Phcedon. p. 139. calls εξ ακοής Xεyειv. Thus also κρινειν τινα αρετιι και κακιφ, και ευδαιμονία και τιρ εναντίω Plat. Rep . χ, ρ· 256. Comp. ρ. 261. 5. The dative besides expresses the kind and manner 404. of an action. Xen. Cyrop. I, 1, 2. βίοι εις οικίαν παριεναι , f with force’. ♦ Thuc. iv, 19. βίκτί, τρισι μησί , 7 ΓθΧΧοίς ετεσι. b. ‘ Where’ ? with the names of places, where some¬ times εν is used. Soph. Trach. 171. ως την παΧαιάν φηyόv αυδησαί ποτέ Δ ωδώνι δισσων εκ Πελεκάω * * 7 εφη , at Dodona . Eur. Phcen. 617 . Μ υκηναις, μη ’νθαδ , άνακαΧει θεούς. Αη- stoph. Ach. 697· ανδρ ay αθόν όντα Μ αραθώνι περί την πόΧιν. ειτα Μαραθώνι μεν ότ ημεν , εδιώκομεν. Plat. Me - nex. p. 296. βασιΧε I Se αυτή μεν ούκ ετοΧμησε βοηθησαι, αίσχυνομενη τά τρόπαια τά τε Χίαραθώνι και ΣαΧαμινι και Πλαταία7? Η κ Brunck. ad Eur. Hec. 1. c. Markland. ad Lys. 1. c. Fisch. m, a. p. 384. * Valck. ad Eur. Hipp. 545. Wessel. ad Herod, p. 130, 34. Brunck. ad Arist. Lys. 129.9- VOL. II. O ! 406. t vc . .. 4 v ^ I 574 ,*Πν<ί£4Πΐ -Vi Ο /* tAe Accusative. The Accusative, as in other languages, marks the person or thing, which is affected by the action of the accompanying verb, i. e. which suffers a change of any kind. The verbs which govern an accusative, are hence called verbs active or transitive , i. e. which shew an action passing on to an object, and affecting and deter¬ mining it in any actual manner. Besides ihe verbs which are transitive also in Latin, and govern an accu¬ sative, there are in Greek the following: 1. 7Γ είθειν, ‘ to persuade’, e. g. ποΧΧάκις εθαύμασα, τίσι 7 νότε Xoyois ’ Αθ ην a ίο vs €7 τεισαν οί γραφάμενοι Σω- κράτην, ως άζιος είη θανάτου Trj ποΧει. Xen. Mem. S. in. quanam oratione Atheniensibus persuaserint accu- satores Socratis. S V ' I 2. v βρίζε iv rim, f to insult, to maltreat any one’, Isocr. p. 179· Β· ύβριζον τάς νήσους. Lysias p. 7. τους παιόας τοι)? εμούς γσχυνε, καί εμε αυτόν ύβρισε. Obs. ύβρίζειν εις τινα, is frequently found, which is to be distinguished from the foregoing in this, that the former relates to one’s self, e. g. to any maltreatment of the person, but ύβρίζειν είς τινα ‘ to insult any person connected with one.’ This distinc¬ tion, however, is not always observed 1 . 3. άόικεϊν. Xen. Anab. I, 4, 9· τους ιχθύς οί Έύροι θεούς ενόμιζον και άόικειν ούκ είων 3 ουόε τα? περιστεράν. 4. Several verbs which signify c to assist, profit, injure’, as JEsch. Prom. 507. μη νυν βροτούς μεν ώφε- 1 Lucian. Soloec. Τ. ιχ, ρ. 232. Graevius et Reitz, ad Luc. 1. c. p. 496. Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. 1, p. 280. Kuster. ad Aristoph. Plut. 900. Markl. ad Lys. p. 17. 575 Syntax. Of the Accusative. \ei καιρού ττερα. Eurip. Herc.f. 584. Δίκαια τούς τήκον¬ τας ωφεΧείν τέκνα ηνοτερά τε πρεσβυν, την τε κοινωνον αγάμων, where τέκνα is the accusative of the subject. Xen. Cyrop. II, 20. αισχρόν εστιν άντιΧ^ειν, μη ούχί τον πΧείστα και πονούντα και ωφεΧοΰντα Το κοινον τούτον και μεγίστων άζιοΰσθαι. lb. VIII, 4, 32. το, 7 roXXa Sokovvtu εχειν,μη κατ άξίαντης ουσίας φαίνεσθαι ωφεΧοΰντα τους φίΧους, άνεΧευθερίαν εμοι^ε όοκεΊ 7τερια7ττειν · Thus also όνημι. II. a', 394. et ποτέ $η τι η εττει ώνησας κραόιην Διός, ηε και ipyip. Eurip. Fr. inc. CLI f 1. 2. ουόεμίαν ωνησε κάΧΧος εις πόσιν ξυνάορον * η *ρετη S αίνησε ττοΧΧας. Even Χυειν in the sense of ΧυσιτεΧεΊν is constructed with the accusative, by Sophocles. El. 1005. Χύει yap ημάς ovUv ού$ όττωφεΧε 7, βάξιν καΧην Χαβόντε , ΖυσκΧεη θανεΊν^ un¬ less the accusative is governed of the word επωφεΧει . Ohs. 1. The adverbs f very, more/ &c. are expressed with these verbs, by the accus. neuter of the adjective dyas, 7 τΧεων. Plat. Hipp. Maj.p. 5. συ yap και iSfy ικανός εϊ, παρά των νέων ΊτοΧΧά χρήματα Χαμβάνων , ετι πΧε ίω ωφεΧε ιν ω ν Χαμβα- νεις. Id. ΑροΙ. S. ρ. 71. ev yap ιστέ, βάν όμε άποκτείνητε τοιου- τον όντα οϊον eyui \ε<γω, ούκ εμε μειζω βΧαφετε η υμάς αύτους. Thus also Xen. Mem. S. I, 2, 7· εθαυμαζε όε, ει τις, άρετην kirayy εΧόμενος, φοβοΊτο, μη ό y ενόμενος καΧος κα Ύ αθος Tip τα μεyιστa ευ ε pyετησ αντί μη την μεyιστηv χαριν ίξοι. Ib. IV, I, 1· μικρά ωφεΧείν . Ohs. 2. For ωφεΧείν with the dative also, see §. 384, 7. 5. άμείβεσθαι, άνταμείβεσθαι, ‘ to remunerate , is con- structed with the accusative of the person or thing remunerated. Eurip. Or. 1045. και σ άμβιψασθαι^ θέλω φιΧάτητι χειρί,ν. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 3, 15. εκείνο άθυμά, οτϊ μοι W τάι τώ,< θεών eiepyeaiai ούο eh ποτέ . k Thom. Μ. ρ. 935, 576 Syntax. Of the Accusative. άνθρωπων άζίαις χάρισιν άμείβεσθαι. Also, ill the sense of ' to answer*. Hesiod. Theog. 654. Herod. v, 93. vn, 136. Thus too τιμωρβίσθαί nva , f to avenge one’s self on any one’. ' i J A , / / i « » k . . , * v · s. *\ t ^ Many verbs have an accusative, which does not mark the passive object of the action, but the object to which an action has only generally an immediate reference, e. g. 1. προσκυνειν τινα. Herod. II, 121. και τον μεν καΧεουσί θέρος, τούτον μεν π ροσ κυνεουσί τε και εύ ποιεουσι. VII, 136. ου yap σφι εν νόμψ είναι άνθ ρωπον π ροσ κυνεειν. Aristoph. Plut. 771. και προσκυνώ yε πρώτα μεν τον Ήλ ιον , επειτα σεμνής Πΰλλαδο? κΧε ινόν πεόον, χωράν τε πάσαν Κεκροπος , η μ εόεζατο. Comp. Vesp. 516. Plat. Rep. Ill, p. 284. άνόρα όη, ως εοικε , όυνάμενον υπό σοφίας παντοόαπόν yiyi ;εσθαι και μιμείσθαι πάντα χρήματα, εί ημιν άφικοιτο ,- προσκυνοιμεν αν αυτόν , ως Ιερόν καί θαυμαστόν καί ηόυν. In the writers of the New Testa¬ ment it is joined with the dative. 2. Αορυφορειν τινα, i. e. όορυφόρον είναι τίνος TflUC. I, ISO. όιά της Θράκης πορευόμενον αυτόν ( ΙΙαυσανίαν ) MijSot και Α’^υπτιοι εόορυφόρουν. Xetfl. Hier. 4, 3. ποΧιΤαι (f. όι ποΧίται ) yap όορυφορουσιν άΧΧηΧους άνευ μισθού επί τους όουλου s, and metaphorically. Plat. Rep. ix, p. 245. α'ι νεωστι εκ όουΧείας ΧεΧυμεναι $όζαι, όορυφοροΰ- σαι τον ’'Ερωτα, κρατησουσι μετ’ εκείνου, ρ. 246. άλλον τινα όορυφορουσι τυραννον. 3. The verbs which signify f to flatter’, JEsch. Prom. 945. σεβου, προσευχου, θώπτε τον κρατουντ αεί. AEschin. in Ctes. p. 618. τίςάνείη όημayωyός τοιουτος, όστις τον μεν όημον θωπευσαι όυναιτο, τοι)$ όε καιρούς, εν οϊς ην σωζεσθαι την πόΧιν, άπόόοιτο. Comp. Plat. Rep. IX. p. 254. Xen. Hist. Gr. V, 1, 17. ΤΙ yap ηόιον, η μη- \ Syntax. Of the Accusative. Seva άνθρωπων κοΧακευειν , μήτε 'Έλληνα, μήτε βαρ- βαρον, ΐΐνεκα μισθού; But the following passage is quoted from Plutarch : όπως υπεζανιστάμενοι τοΊς πΧουσιοις κοΧακευωσι. 4. φθάνειν , ‘ to come before, to prevent*, as in the letter of Agesilaus Plutarch. T. vm, ρ.·ΐ8ΐ.' βνομαι τ£ επιστολή, σχεόόν S' αυτά ν και φθάσω. Especially with the participle, of which hereafter. ο. Χανθάνειν. See §. 418. 6. επιτροπβνβιν ηνά , f to be a tutor or guardian to any one*. Thuc. I, 132. ΤΐΧείσταρχον TOv Χεωι /iSov, οι/τα βασιΧεα και νεον ετι ? ανεψιός ων, επετρόπενε (Γϊαι/σαΐ'ΐα$.) Aristoph. Equ. 212. τον όήμον οϊός τ είμ επιτροπευειν eyw. Plat. Prot. ρ. 106. ΚΧεινίαν του ’ΑΧκιβιάόου του - τοι/ι νεωτερον άόεΧφόν επιτροπευων ο αυτός ούτος ανηρ Π ερικΧης, — καταθεμενος εν Άρίφρονος επαίόευε. Also, 111 the sense of f to govern’. Plat. Rep. vi, p. 130, 137- But in the sense of f to be regent or governor’, it has more usually the genitive. §. 336. 2*. 7. επΐΧείπειν, e to be wanting’, deficere. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 1, 1. ot πατερες προνοουσι των 7 ταίόων, όπως μηποτε αύτονς TayaQa επιΧείψει m . Ohs . Some verbs occur with other cases, besides the accu¬ sative. In addition to those already mentioned, whose construc¬ tion with the genitive or dative appeared to be the proper construction, as founded upon the nature of their relation, the following also properly require the accusative. άποόιόράσκειν τινά , ‘to run away from any one’, with the accusative. Plat. Rep. vm, p. 192. φιΧαναΧωται αΧΧοτρίων Si επιθυμίαν και Χάθρα τάς ηόονάς καρπόνμεμοι, ώσπερ παιόες πατέρα τον νόμον άποόιόράσκοντε s. Xen. Cyrop. ι, 4, 13. 1 Thom. Μ. ρ. 36ο. ™ Thom. Μ. ρ. 349. 578 Syntax. Of the Accusative. ην τις άιτοδράστ} των οίκετών σβ 3 και Χάβρς αυτόν, τι αυτψ χρ\1\ and βουΧευομαι όπως σε άποδρώ. Comp. Thuc. ι, 128. With the dative Xen. Mem. S. n, 10, 1. αν τις σοι των οικε- τών άποδρά, επιμεΧη όπως άνακομίση ; where, however, σοι seems not to be governed by αποορ ct but to have the same construction as in §. 392. f. for immediately after comes, εάν τις σοι κάμνιρτων οικετών. άπομάχεσθαι τινα and τινί, ‘ to endeavour to keep any thing off, to fight off”. Herod, vn, 136. ως δε άπεμαχεσαντο τουτιρ, where one MS. has τούτο”. 408. Many verbs which signify an emotion, a feeling with regard to an object, as f to be ashamed, afraid, to com¬ passionate any one’, are accompanied by an accusative, which expresses the object, and at the same time the effective cause of this emotion. Eur. Ion. 1093. αισχύ¬ νομαι τον ποΧυϋμνον θεόν. Comp. 932. Xen. R. Lac. 2, 11. ουοεν ούτως αιόουνται ούτε παιόες , ούτε ανόρες, ως τους άρχοντας. Soph. Aj. 121. εποικτείρω δε νιν δύστη¬ νον εμπας , καίπερ ον τα δυσ μ εν η, όθ’ ουνεκ άτφ συ^κατε- Χευκται κακίρ. Plat. Symp. p. 167· υμάς τους εταίρους εΧεώ, ότι οίεσθε τι ποιειν , ονδεν ποιουντες. Herod. V, 4. τον μεν y ivo μεν ον περιιζόμενοι οι προσήκοντες οΧοφυ ρ όν¬ τα ι, όσα μιν δεΐ, επεί τε ey ενετό, άναπΧησαι κακά. The same takes place with some neuter verbs, which express an emotion, although, even without indicating the object, they convey a perfect idea; e.g. aXy^iv τι. Soph. Aj . 789- Sq. τουδ’ εισακούε τάνδρός, ως ηκει φερων Χίαντος ημιν πραζιν (fortunCMl, as 792.), ην ηXyησ 0yio. II. ί, 77, τις αν τάδε γηθησειεν ; Soph. Ay. 136. σε μεν εύ πράσ- σοντ επιχαίρω. Eurip. Hipp. 1 355. Tot)s yap ευσ ε β ε7ς θεοί θνησκοντας ον χαίρουσιν. Soph. Phlloct. 314. ησθην πατέρα τε τον εμόν evXoyov ντά σε αυτόν τ εμε. Some 11 Valcken. et Wess. ad Herod. 1. c, p. 504, 69 . I 579 Syntax. Of the Atcusativc. supply ορών, άκούων, 8$c. with this accusative . Thus also θαρρεϊν τι. ‘ to take courage with regard to any thing’. PfuBclon. p. 200. ούδενϊ προσήκει θα νατό v θαρρονντι μη οϋκ άυοήτως θαρρε'ιν, Comp. Euthl/d. ρ. 13. Xetl. y, 5, 42. εΐ Tires tre τιμωσιν, άντασπάζου καί εύιόχει αύτους, W σε καί θαρρήσωσιν. Comp. Demosth. ρ. 30, 15.— Δυσχεραίνειν τι. ΡΜ· Leg. X, ρ. 98. οι) δυνάμευος δνσχε- ραίνειυ Meow's, ib. ρ. 114. δυσχεραίνειν την αδικίαν. Rep. ll, ρ. 216. ώφεΧεΐσθαι κερδαίνοντα τψ μη δυσχεραίνειν το άδι- κεϊν. Isocr. Plat. ρ. 305. C. εκπεσοντες εκ τής οικείας, άθυ- μοΰντες και άΧωμενοι την 'Ελλάδα τ τερίίμεν, ire ίσα* δυσχεραί- νοντες t«s οίκησες. Plato joins περί with this verb, Rep. y, p. 56. τον περί τα μαθήματα δνσχεραίνοντα ρ . Many verbs have the accusative, not only of the 409· nearer and more immediate object of the action, but also of the more remote object, i. e, the person or thing to which the action with its immediate object passes, which in English is generally expressed by the dative, e.g. εδ or κακώς ποιεί? τινά, ‘ to do good, harm, to any one’, εί or κακώς λε'γειε τινά, ‘ to speak well, ill, of any one.’ Hence these verbs often take two accusatives at the same time : 1. ττοιεΐι/, it ράττ fiv, δράν, ερδειν, to do . a. with one accusative, and the adv. ευ or κακώς. Soph. Aj. 1154. 'άνθρωπε, μή δρώ τούς τεθνηκόταςκακώς. Xen. Mem. S. II, 1, 19- τούς πονοΰντας, 'ίνα - δυνατός yevo- μενοι καί το'ις σώμασι και ταΐς ψνχαΊς καί τον ίαυτών οίκον καΧως οίκώσι, καί τούς φίΧους εύ ποιώσι, καί τήν πα¬ τρίδα εύερ Ί ετώσι, πώς ούκ οίεσθαι χρή τούτους καί πονειν . Valcken. ad Eur. Hippol. 1339. Brunck. ad Ariel. Equ. 783. ad Soph. Aj. 136. 790. P Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. l6. I 580 Syntax. Of the Accusative. ηόεως ei 9 τα τοιαύτα, και ζ^ν ευφραινόμενους ; also Without these adverbs. Herod · vii, 88. τον όε 'ίππον αύτίκα κατ άρχάς εποίησαν οι οικεται, ως εκεΧευε, ‘they did with the horse’, where the proposition ως εκεΧευε supplies the place of that adverb q . In the same manner are constructed evepyereiv and κακού py6iv. Xen. Mem. S. ii, i,, 19 . the passage just quoted, id. lb. IV, 4, 24. ουχ οι / 1 €V €V ποιουντες τούς ερω¬ μένους εαντοις ayaOol φίΧοι εισίν , οι όε μη αντ εν ε py ε τ ον ν- τες τούς τοιούτονς λα' μεν την αχαριστίαν μισούνται νπ αυτών, λα $e το μάΧιστα ΧυσιτεΧειν τοίις τοιούτοις χρησθαι τούτους μάΧιστα όιωκουσι ; Aristoph . PL 912 . ον yap προσ- ηκει την εμαυτου μοι πόΧιν €V€py€T€iv με. KaKOvpy€iv τούς φίΧους Xen . Cyr. I, 6 , 29· Κ. too? εναντίους lb. VI, 3, 24. Comp. IV, 3, 5. την βασιΧεως χωράν κακοποιεϊν id. Mem. S. Ill, 5, 26 r . 9 . I * 1 Hence also Χυμαίνεσθαί τινα. Isocr. de Pac. p. 179 . B. 1 _ _ εΧνμαίνοντο την ΤΙεΧοπόννησον. Evag. p. 183. D. οΧη v την ποΧιν Χυμαίνεσθαί. Comp. Panath. p. 235. C. 236. C. which elsewhere is constructed with the dative $. 384. * * i * b. With two accusatives. Herod, i, 137. αίνεω και τόνόε τον νόμον , το μη μιης αιτίης είνεκα μήτε αυτόν τον βα¬ σιλέα μηόενα φονεύειν , μήτε των αΧΧων ΤΙερσεων μηόενα τβν εωυτού οίκετεων επι μιη αίτίη άνηκεστον πάθος ε ο- t ^ I όει ν. IV, 1 66 . Αρυάνόης Tapyv ριον τωυτό τούτο εποίεε. Xen. Cyr Op. Ill, 2 , 15. οί yap ονόεπωττότε επαύοντο ποΧΧά κακά ημάς ποιου ντες, νύν όρω τούτους έχοντας , ώσπερ εyω ηυχομην. 10. Ιο. α υπισχνου ποιησειν ayatia ημάς. Plat. Rep. VI, ρ. 92 . εκ τούτων όη των άνόρων και οι τα μεy ιστα κακά ε py αγόμενοι τάς πόΧεις yiyvovTai και η Fisch. hi. a. ρ. 429—432. if r Fisch. in, a. p. 432. I 581 Syntax. Of the Accusative. του? ιόιώτας, και ol TayaOa, οι αν ταυτι 7 τνχωσ'ΐ ρυεντες σμικρά δε φυσΐ9 ουόεν peya ουόεποτε ovSeva ούτε ίόιω- πην ουτε π ό X ιν όροι*. Hence TIlUC. Ill, 56. Θηβαίοι δε 7 Γθλλά μεν και αΧΧα ημάς ηόίκησαν. IsOCT . PaflClth. p. 271· jB. a rot? 'Έλλι/σί rots αΧΧοις ουδέ τους πονηρότατους των οικετών όσιόν εστι μιαιφονειν. Ohs. The, remote object is also sometimes in the dative. Od. ξ', 289. Φοινιζ άι>ηρ, τρώκτης, ός όη 7πολλά κάκ άνθρω- 7 τ οισι eiopyei. Plat. Apol . »S. ρ. 69· ταυτα και νεωτερω /cat π ρεσ βυτε ρφ, οτω άν evTuyyavo) , ποιήσω και , ζενιρ και άστ ίρ } μάλλον δε rot 9 άστοϊς, οσω μοι eyyυτepω εστε yevei. Charm, ρ. 115. ούκ αν εχοίμεν, ο τι ποιοιμεν σοι. Xen. Hier. 7, 2. τοιαυτα yap όη ποιουσι τοΊς τύραννοις ο\ αρχομενοι, και άλλον όντινα άει τιμώντες Tuy^avouai. Isocr. de Big. p.^ 357. B. dyavaKTco, - ei T ίσιας μηόεν ay αθόν ποιησας τϊ) πόΧει και εν όημοκρατία και ev oXiyap^iq. με*γα ουνησεται. Both cases are joined Xen. Anab. v, 8, 24. αν ούν σωφρονητε, τουτω τάναντία ποιήσετε, η τους κυνας ποιουσι . * · % 2. Xeyeiv, ειπείν, ayopeueiv τινα. a. With an accusative and the adverb ευ or κακώς . Xen. Mem. S. II, 3, 8. ττώ? δ’ αν eya) άνεπιστηαων ειην άόεΧφφ χ ρησθαι, επιστάμενός ye και εύ Xeyeiv τον ευ Χε- y οντα, (‘to treat with fair words’, opp. Xoyip aviyv) καί ευ ποιειν τον ευ ποιουντα; τον μεντοι και Xoyip και epyip πειρωμενον εμε ctvtctv ούκ αν όυναίμην ουτ ευ Xeyeiv , ουτ εύ ποιειν , ctXX ονδε πειρασομαι. Pint. Ellthl/d. p. 32. κακώς dpa Xeyouaiv 01 ay αθοι τα κακα, ειπερ, ως εχει, λε- yovaiv. Nat μά Δί, η δ δ?, σφοόρα ye τους youv κακούς ανθρώπους * ών συ, εάν μοι πείθρ, ευΧαβησρ είναι, ινα μη s Fisch. 1. ο. 4 Dawes. Misc. Crit. ρ. 184. 334. Dorv. ad Char. p. 3l6. ques¬ tion this construction. Fisch. ill, a. p. 429. Zeune ad Vig. p. 289· 410. 1 I 582 Syntax. Of the Accusative. σε οι ayaOoi κακώς Xeyoxriv, ως εύ οίσθ' , on κακώς Xcyovaiv o\ ayaOol τούς κακούς. Herod. V, 83. κακώς δ' rjyopevov oi χοροί ανδρα μεν ούδενα, τα? δ* επιχωρ'ιας yυvaικaς. Also in the sense of 6 to speak well of any one, to praise'. Od. a', 302. αΧκιμος εσσ , ϊνα τις σε καί όψιγοι/ωρ ^ *f U €V €l7Trj . Thus also evXoyelv and κακολογείι». Isoer. Areop. p. 276. B. ούτως είκη καί παρανόμως, οΰς άν τύχτ/ς, επαίνων, οΐς $e επιτιμφν δέον, εύXoyώp αυτόνς. (Zeg. ονς αν τύχρς j επίτιμον δέον, εv\oyώv αυτούς ) χ . Of the different constructions of Χοιδορείν and Χοιδο- ρεισθαι, see^· 383. 6. Obs. The following construction is more rare. Soph. Aj. 764. 6 μεν yap αυτόν εννεπει' τεκνον, δορι βονΧου κρατείν μεν , %ύν θεφ (ΐ αει κρατειν * ο cT — ημεί^ατο, £ his father said to him , II. p\ 237- και τότ άρ Α’ίας είπε βοήν αγαθοί/ Μ εν έ¬ λα ον. Comp. «/, 375. b . With two accusatives. Herod, viii, 61. τότε $ε δη ό θεμιστοκΧεης κείνον τε και τούς Κορινθίονς ποΧΧά τε καί κακά έλεγε, £ he abused him and the Corinthians very much'. Xen. Mem. S. ii, 2. 9. οϊει χαΧεπώτερον είναι σοι άκούειν ών αύτη (y μητηρ ) Xeyει, η τοις ύποκριταίς , όταν εν ταις TpayipSiaw αΧΧηΧονς τα έσχατα λεγωσιΐ'; also, c to say any thing to one, for 7 τρόςτινα. Aristoph. Ach. 593. ταυτι λέγει? σι) τον στρα- Trjyov } πτωχός ων\ ‘to say any thing of one , Soph. El. 520. καί 7 τολλα προς ποΧΧούς με δη είζειπας , ως θρασεία και πέρα δίκης άρχω καθνβρΐζουσ α και σε και τα σα. lb. 984. τοιαντά τοι νώ πας τις εζερει βροτών, %ωσαινθανουσαιν θ' ώστε μη κΧιπειν κΧεος. Thus is to be explained the pas¬ sage in 11. ζ\ 479. καί ποτέ τις ε'ίπγσι , πατρός δ’ ογε ποΧ - U Fisch. in, a. ρ. 433. Fisch. in, a. p. 429. X Syntax. Of the Accusative. 583 Xoi/ ά μείνω v, εκ πόλεμου ανιόντα, c will say of him when he returns from the war* * y . Obs. 1. The passages which Dawes ( Misc. Crit. p. 149·) cites, in illustration of this construction, are different: Find. ΟΙ. xiv, 31. ΚΧεόόαμον όφρα ίόοίσ υ\όν ε’ίπρς, ότι οι νεαν — εστεφάνωσε κυόίμων αεθΧων πτεροισι 'χαίταν. Arist. Nub. 1147. και μοι τον υιόν, εί μεμάθηκε τον Xoyov εκείνον, εΐφ ον άρτίως είση^γαγες. Since these constructions are instead of όφρα είπης, ότι ό υ\ός οι εστεφάνωσε. είπε, εί ό υιός μεμάθηκε , according to §. 295. Thus too J Eurip. Andr. 646. In Plato Menon. p. 341. sq. και παυσαι n roXXa ποιων εκ του ei/os, όπερ φασι τούς συντρίβονταν τι εκάστοτε οι σκώπτοντες — ποιειν is to be understood, όπερ φασι ποιειν τους συντρ. Obs. 2. In the phrase -χαίρειν Χεγειν τινά , properly < to bid farewell to any one’, i. e. ‘ to leave out of consideration*, non curare, non morari 1 , τινά seems to belong to χαίρειν, as the subject, and Xeyciv to be put in the sense of κεΧευειν, since this word is also used, e. g. γαίρειν κεΧευων 7 ΓθΧΧα τους Α'χαρνεας Aristoph. Ach. 200. and χαίρειν εη,ν τινά. But the expression ‘χαίρειν είπειν or Xeyen/ or φράζειν τινί is also used. Plat. Phileb. p. 260. γαίρειν τοίνυν del Xe«yetv τοϊς αΧΧοις μηκεσιν, Phccdr. ρ. 376. το είκός όιωκτεον είναι , ποΧΧα είπόντα 'χαίρειν τφ αΧηθει. 3. ερωτφν or ερεσθαί τινά τι, to ask one about any 411, thing*, (because not only έρωταν άνθρωπον is used, but also ερωτφν Tiy { to ask after any thing*. Herod, hi, 22. Plat. Euthyd. in. and p. 5. Polit. p. 124.) Pind. 01. 6, 81. άπαντας εν όίκιρ είρετο παιόα, τον τεκοι, e in¬ quired of all after the child*.) Herod, i, 32. εκείνο de, το ε*ίρεό με, ουκω σε εyω Xεyω, πριν αν καΧώς τεΧέυτησαντα τον αιώνα πυθωμαι. Plat. Prot. p. 97. εφαίνοντο de περί φυσεως τε και μετεώρων αστρονομικά αττα όιερωτφν τον Ιππίαν . Comp. Symp. ρ. 166. Xen . Cyrop. m, 3, 48. y Wolf. Opusc. Lat. p. 100 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 252. * Valck. ad Herod, p. 712, 46'. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 441. I /' -l 584 Syntax. Of the Accusative. • I o Ki/pos ηρωτά τούς αύτομοΧους τα εκ των ποΧβμίων. Thus also ερεείνειν , \στορειν 3 άνιστορειν τινά τι. Also the expression έρωταν, 8$c. τινά Trepi τίνος is used. Herod, i, 3&. 67Γ ειρωτφς με άνθρωττηίων ττρη Γ γμάτων 7 rept a . The construction is analogous to this in Plat, Lack, p. 183. ίσως ον κακώς εχει εξετάζειν και τα τοιαύτα ημάς αυτούς, , 4 The verbs 'to require,, to desire’, a ίτείν 3 απαι¬ τεί V, ττράττβσθαί τινά τι. Herod. Ill, 1 . πεμφας Καμβνσης ες Αίγυπτον κηρυκα, αίτ€€ Άμασιν Θυ*γατ6 pa. Cf. IV, 164. Plat. Rep. VIII, p. QQ9. το όη τυραννικόν αίτημα το ποΧυθρύΧΧητον 67 τι τούτφ πάντες οι εις τούτο προβεβηκότες εζευρίσκου σιν, αίτεΐν τον όημον ψυΧακάς τινας τού σώματος. Cf. χ, ρ. 291· Ώράττεσθαι and πράττειν in the sense of 'to require’, Pind. 01. 3, 10. χαίταισι μεν ζευ- χθεντες επι στέφανοι πράσσοντί με τούτο θεόόματον χρέος. 10, 34. ως Avyeav Χάτριον άεκονθ * εκών μισθόν ύπερβιον πράσσοιτο. Xen.Mem. S. 1, 6, 11. ούόενατης συνουσίας ά py ύ ρ ιον πράτττι. Isocr. ad Phil. ρ. 111. Ε. την ποΧιν ημών ούόεις αν επαινεσειεν ,- ότι τοσούτο πΧηθος τών χρημάτων είσπ ράζασα τούς συμμάχους είς την άκρόττοΧιν άνηνε^/κεν. Thus also AEsch. in Ctesiph. p. 504. ed. R. οι Αοκροι οι Αμφισσεις —τεΧη τούς κατα- ττΧεοντας e^eXey ov h . 412. 5. 'To take any thing from one’, άφαιρεΊσθαί τινά τι. II. a , 275. μηόε σύ τόνό\ άyaθός περ εών , άποαίρεο κούρην. Xen. Oyr. Ill, 1, 39· οι τεας εαυτών yvvai^i Χαμβάνοντες συνόντας άΧΧοτρίους άνόρας — — νομ'ι- £οντ€$ ( αυτούς ) άφαιρεισθαι αύτάς την προς εαυτι.ύς' φιΧίαν , όιά τούτο ως ΊτοΧεμίοις άντοις χρώνται. lb. IV, . ! . · U * Fisch. in, a. p. 436. b Fisch. ill, a. p. 433. 436 sq. 585 Syntax. Of the Accusative. 6 4. τον μόνον μοι και ψιλόν τταΤ^α αφείλετο την | ( * , , * ν * *■ '; ( ί ’· ■» r \ « ψυχήν 0 . Thus also other verbs which are used in the same sense. II. o', 462. (Ζευς) T εΰκρον ΎεΧαμώνιον εΰχος απηυρα. Od. a, 203. μη yap oy εΧθοι άνήρ, οστις σ άέκουτ α β'ιρφι κτήματ άπορραίσει, instead of which Hes. Theog, 393. μη τιν άπορρα'ισαν yepamv. II. φ, 451. Tore νωι βιησατο μισθόν άπαντα Ααομέύων eKirayXos. Eurip. Iph. A. 796. T£S άρα μ' εΰπΧοκάμους κομας αποΧωτιει. Pind. Pyih. Ill, 173. τον μεν ύξείαισι θώχατρες ύρήμωσαν πάθαις εύφροσύνας μύρος α\ τρείς. Demosth. in Androt. V. 6l6. 19. την θεόν τους στεφάνους σεσυληκασι. ' I · 1 . ... <·|) \r . .. ■ . 7 \ ! t » f. .'.5 'iJ' 1 ·'. ν· ,ί ·: Λ Thus also αποστερείν τινά τι. Xen. Cyrop. V, 3, 19· σέ, ώ Γαύάτα, ό Άσσΰριος παΐόας μεν, ώς εοικε, το ποιείσθαι άφείΧετο, ού μίντοι τό ye φίΧους κτΖσθαι ύύνασθαί σε άπεστέρησεν. Anab. VI, 6, 23. τούς Ύ ραπεζουντίους άπεστερήκαμεν την πεντηκόντορον. Isocrat. Archl . ρ. 119. Α.Β. ταύτην υμάς την χώραν αποστερειν επι¬ χειρούσα. Hence Horn. Η. in Cer. 311. -χεράων έρικυύέα τιμήν καί θυσιών ήμερα εν ’ΟΧύμπια ϋώματ’ "έχοντας*. Obs. άφαιρείν is also constructed with the dative of the person. Xen. Cyr. vn, 1, 44. oi ι\’ι Ί ύπτιοι το μεν ύπ'ι Κροίσον σνστρατενειν άφεΧεΐν σφίσιν εαεήθησαν, ώ.%, 26. μαχας σο , καί ποΧύμους άφαιρώ. II. φ', 296. also with the gen.t.ve of the person, which is governed of the accusative of the thing Plat. Rep. v, p. 46 sq. μύτριον είναι τούς καρπούς αφαι- ρείσθαι τοίς κρατοΰσι των κρατουμένων. Dem. ρ. 1098. ούδεμίαν ούσίαν Λεωστράτου. In the moderns also with the accusative of the thing, analogously to άποστερειν τινα τίνος . C Valcken. ad Her. p. 620, 38. Diatrib. p. 203. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 39, 68. Thom. M. p. 130 et Oudend. d Fisch. hi, a. p. 434. c Koen. ad Greg. 1. c. Fisch, ill, a. p. 434 sq. 586 I Syntax. Of the Accusative . 6. ‘To teach^ Μάσκαν τινά τι, as in Latin docere aliquem aliquid. Eur. Hipp . 254. πολλά Φάσκει μ ό πολύς βίοτος. * ·~\ y r . ( «*" \ 7· 6 To put on, to put off", εκ^νσαι, εν^νσαι, αμφιεν- ννναι. Xetl . Cyv . I, 3, 17· παις μ€·γας } μικρόν εχων 'χιτώνα , ετερον παίόα μικρόν, με^αν εχοντα χιτώνα, εκόύσας αυτόν, τον μεν εαυτόν εκείνον ημφίεσε, τον όε εκ€7νου * \ * f αυτός ενεου . 8. κρνπτειν τινά τι, as in Latin, celare aliquem ali¬ quid. Herod. VII, 28. ώ βασιλεύ, ού σε άποκρύφω, — την εμεωϋτου ονσίην. Soptl. El, Q57. ούόεν yap σε όει κρνπτειν μ ετι. Eur. Hippol. 927. ού μην φίλους yε κάτι μάλλον η φίλους κρνπτειν όίκαιον σα$·, πάτερ , όυσπραζίας. With the simple accusative of the person Plat. Theaet. p, 130. to yε όη πρόβλημα άλλό τι παρειληφαμεν, η παρά μεν των αρχαίων μετά ποιησεως άποκρυπτομενων τούς πολ¬ λούς, ως η y^veaw των αλλωι/ πάντων ίϊκεανός τε και Ύηθύς ρεύματα τυyχάvεt e . 413. Obs. 1. Several other verbs are found besides, with two accusatives, though this construction cannot be reduced to a rule. It is chiefly grounded on this, that many verbs may be referred sometimes to a person, and sometimes to a thing, and we may say κωλυειν άνθρωπον , and also κωλύειν π pay μα. αίτιάσθαι. Xen. Cyr. vu, 2, 22. ούκ αιτιώμαι Se ούοε τάόε τον θεόν, instead of τώνόε. άναμνμν. Xen. Anab. hi , 2 , 11. άναμνησω υμάς καί τού ς των πpoyovωv τών υμετερων κινόύνους, for τών κινόύνων. See §. 325. Obs. Thus also Thuc. vl I, 64. τούς * Αθηναίους y /ft « / και ταοε υπομιανησκω. f Fisch. hi, a. p. 435. 5 Brunck. a( j p rom . Ar j st> xhesm. 74. in Add. 587 Syntax. Of the Accusative. άπολοΰίιν. II σ', 345. οψρα τάχιστα Πάτροκλο» Χούσειαν αϊτό βρότον α'ιματόεντα, for Πάτροκλου or Πατρόκλω. *■' ' κωΧύειν. Soph. Phil. 1241. sq. εστιν τ«, εστιν, os σε κωΧυσει το $ρ$ν. ΝΕΟ. τί φης ; τις εσται μ ύύπικωΧύσων τά$€. Thus too elpyeiv τινά τι. Arist. Vesp. 334. τί? yap ίσθ’ ό ταυ τα σ elpywv h ; « 7 Γ είθειν. Herod, ι, 163. ως τούτο ουκ επειθε τούς Φ ω- καιεας. Xen. Hier. I, 16. εκείνο yε ούκ αν ετι πείσαις αν¬ θρώπων ούδενα, ως ονχί } ύι ων τριφομεθα οι άνθρωποι , πο\ύ πΧείω υμείς εν αυτοις ευφραινεσθε. Hence πειθεσθαι τι. Herod, νιπ, 81. οΐ πΧεύνες των στρατιών ουκ επειθοντο τα εξα ΊΊ ε\θεντα. Thuc. π, 21. %η (vulg. δβ) καν η φυyη αντφ (Πλειττοαι/ακτι) eyeveTo εκ Σπάρτης y So^avTi χρημαατι πεισθηναι την ανα^ωρησιν· τίσασθαι. Od. ο , 236. και ύτίσατο epyov αεικες άν- τίθεον Νι/λ^α, analogous to πράττειν, ποιεΐν τινα τι. Obs. 2. Some verbs take, besides the accusative of the per¬ son, an accusative also of the adjective in the neuter plural, in the sense of an adverb; e. g. ευepyετείv τα μεyιστa Xen. Mem. -S. l. 2, 7. σίνεσθαι. Xen. Cyr. v, 5, 4. ορών και τούτους ποΧΧα (Γινομένους την Μ ηύικην. Thus also ωφεΧειν, βΧα- πτειν τινά μeyάXa. §. 407. Obs. 1. Obs. 3. If the second accusative is the accus. of a pronoun, this will not be sufficient to permit us to assume that the verb governs a double accusative generally, or of substantives ; for the pronouns of the neuter gender are put in the accusative with all verbs, whatever cases the verbs may govern, instead of this case. See under the head Pronoun. Hence there is never any certainty as to the construction of a verb with two accusatives, unless passages are found in which two accusatives of substantives are joined with it. Verbs with which, besides an accusative of a substantive, an accus. also of a pron. neut . is joined, are: εΧεγχειν τινα τι. Plat. Lys. p. 251. άΧΧα μην και τούτο ye ιρόμεθα h Thom, Μ. p. 272. 588 Syntax. Of the Accusative. e^cXey^ai ημάς αυτους , c we think we have refuted ourselves in this . Thuc. iv, 12. και ο μεν τους τε αΧΧους τοιαντΟ, 67 Τ€ w σττβρχε, for τοιούτοις, c by such words’, νι, 11. όπερ οι 'Eye- σταιοι μαλιστα ημάς εκφοβούσι, forwTrep. P/at. Rep. n, ρ. 219 · ταυ τα δη και αλλα τοιαυτα ζ^κωμιαζουαι δικαιοσύνην. where the pronouns are put in the sense of adverbs' * 1 . Id. Symp. p. 18.5. χρη και τουτους τους πάνδημους εραστάς ττροσανα^γκά- ζειν το τοιουτον, (i. e. ωσαύτως) ώσπερ και εΧευθερων y υ- ναικών 7 τροσ αν ay κάζο μεν αυτούς, καθόσον δυνάμεθα, μη εράν, which is to be distinguished from the construction in Obs. 4. Obs. 4. The second accusative is often to be explained by a preposition. Thuc. n, 72. άπερ και το πρότερον ηδη πρου - καΧεσαμεθα. Plat. Euthyphr. ρ. 9· αρ ούν μοι κράτιστόν εστι, προ της y ραφής της προς Μβλίτομ αύτά ταυ τα προκαΧεϊ- σθαι αυτόν, ‘require that he should give me an answer upon this subject’, i. e. f to make use of this against him*. Comp. p. 10. Id. Charm, p. 141. ου }~ι^γωρησαί μοι ηθεΧεν αδύνατος είναι διεΧεσθαι, ά προυκαΧούμην αυτόν. Arist. Equ. 792. τάς πρεσβείας — αί τα? σπονδάς προκαΧουνται. It is complete in Thuc. iv, 19 · Λακεδαιμόνιοι δε υμάς προκαΧουνται ες σπον - δας. and ν, 43. επί την Ιζυμμαγίαν προκαΧουμενους*. Αποκρίνεσθαί τι, ‘ to answer to any thing’, for πρός τί . ihucyd. hi, 6l. τους μεν Xoyovς ουκ άν ρτησάμεθα είπειν, εϊ και αυτοί βραχεως το ερωτηθεν άπεκρίναντο. Plat. Alcib. I, ρ. 10. ει 'χαΧεπον δοκει τό άποκρίνασθαι τα ε ρωτω μένα, td· Phil. ρ. 224. ποτερος ημών αποκρινειται τό νυν ε ρω τ ω¬ μέ νον. το μη δυνασθαι το νυν ερωτηθε ν αποκρίνασθαι. Comp.^CnVo. ρ. 112. The full construction in ρ. 115. ούκ *Χ ω ) ω Σωκρατες, άποκρίνασθαι πρός ό έρωτας™. Άvayκάζειv τι, ‘to compel to any thing’. Plat. Rep. v, 1 Heind. ad Plat. Lys. p. 51. k Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 227 . 1 Duker. ad Thuc. iv, lp, v, 7. 90 . p. 802. m Heind. ad Plat. Hipp, p. 138. /' f - ζ > Λ . \< | , Abresch. Diluc. Thuc. ad vm. ft 589 Syntax. Of the Accusative, p. 51. τούτο μεν όη avayKafi με. Ph&dr. p. 337· τω όε || ^ ^ I / ^ ^ ^ ^ \ \ κατ αρχας μεν αντιτεινετον, αγανακτουντε ωςρεινα και πα¬ ράνομα avayna(ppev(D n . Χρήσθαί τινί τι, c to make use of any thing for any thing’, for είς tl. Thuc. n, 15. και Trj κρηνγ - eyyvs ούσφ τα πλείστου άξια εχρώντο και νυν ετι από του αρχαίου προ Τ6 yapiKwv και ες άλλα των ιερών νορίζεται τφ ύόατι χρη- σθαι. Plat. Phileb. ρ. 260. ταυττι όη Trj σκεψει τούτων των παθημάτων τόόε χρησώμεθα, c to this end’, ib. p. 276* του - τοις μεν ταυ τα άν προσχρησαιο. With εττί Demosth . in Aristog. ρ. 779 3 1Β. εφ* a 8 αν και χρησαιτό τις τοιουτω θηρίω, {ταύτα όει) άπεύχεσθαι τοις θεοις μη yεvεσθaι. Plat. Rep. ν, ρ. 8. ει άρα ταις yvvai^iv επι ταύτα χρησορεθα και τοις άνόράσι, ταύτα καί όιόακτεον αυτας. Hence the phrases : ούκ εχω, ο τι (for εφ’ ο τι) χρησωμαι αύτίρ or εμαυτφ {Plat. „ Theag. ρ. 15. Lys. ρ. 232. 251. Crito. ρ. 104. Xen. Cyr. ι, 6,, 2.) ( I know not what I shall do with him*, non habeo, quid eo faciam, quid agam. Frequently, however, τι or ο τι in this phrase signifies nothing more than ττώ? or οττως Xen. Cyr. i, 4, 13. ην τις άποόράσρ των οικετών σε, και λα β^ς αητόν , τι αυτά) xprj ; Similarly Thuc. ιν, 34. ούτε οι πΊ\οι εστεyov τα τοξεύω ρατα , for προς τά τοξ. ‘ did not defend them from the arrows’. The verbs of dividing especially are constructed with a double accusative, with one of which εις is to be supplied. Instead of this Herodotus says, iv, 148. σφεας αυτούς ες εξ ροίρας όιεϊλον, (Comp. Mschin. in Ctes. ρ. 587. Plat. Rep . ix, p. 257. πόλις $ ιηρηται κατά τρία ε’ίόη) } says vil, 121. Τρεις ροίρας ό αερζης όασάμενος πάντα τον πεζόν στρατόν. Plat. _ ' ' -ν \ , / \ > \ f * Leg. ν. ρ. 225 sq. yn οε και οικήσεις τα αυτα ρε ρ η όιανε- μηθητων. ib. ρ. 226. ό όε των τετταράκοντα και πεντακισχι- Χίων αριθμός - ού π λείους μιας όεουσών εξήκοντα όύναιτ άν τεμνεσθαι τομών. Id. Polit. ρ. 59. όιελωμεν τοίνυν αυτήν 3ύο μέρη. Parmen. ρ. 110. κατακεκερράτισται αρα ως οΐόν » Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. ρ. 235. "VOL. II. Ρ 590 Syntax. Of the Accusative. re σμικρότατα και μ€*γιστα. Comp. Rep. νι, ρ. 121. Xen. Cyrop. νπ, 5, 13. άκουσας Se ταυτα ό Κ υρος το στρά¬ τευμα κατενει με όωόεκα μερη°. Instead of this the whole, which is divided, is also put in the genitive, and the word μέρος, μοίρα , fyc. referred immediately to the verb. Herod. i, 94 . Suo μοίρας S^XovTa AuScov πάντων, κΧηρώσαι , for Ανθους πάντας (els·) Suo μοίρας SieX. Plat. Leg. v, ρ. 226. Suo μεν Srj μέρη του παντός αριθμού νεμηθη- τω. ih. χΐτ. ρ. 207 . ότε Se μέρη όιρρηται της πόΧεως ξυμ- πάσης. id. Soph. ρ. 297· όιαΧομεθα της βίόωΧοποίκής ε'ίόη Suo. Xen. Cyrop. ι, 2, 5. ScoSeKa Π ερσών φυΧαι Sirj- ρηνται. Id. Rep. Lac. 11, 4.. μόρας διεΊΧεν εξ καί Ιππέων και ό πΧιτών. In Xenophon Hellen. ι, 7 ? 27 · should be read: Si -ρρημενων της ημέρας τριών μερών. Thus Cicero says de Or at. r, 42, 190. delude e or um gene rum quasi qucedam mem¬ bra dispertiat. Obs. 0 . Instead of a verb active a circumlocution is often used, the substantive derived from that verb active being joined with ποιεισθαι, e. g. την μάθησιν ποιείσθαι, for μανθάνειν, Thuc. ι, 68. υπόμνησιν ποιεισθαι id.~ ib. 72. for υπομνφν. The object of this verb, which with the simple verb would have been in the accusative, is properly in the circumlocution put in the genitive. It is sometimes, however, in the accusative also, provided the circumlocution answers in its signification to a verb active ; and in this case the verb ποιεισθαι has a double accusa¬ tive. Herod. 1 , 68. τυγχάνεις θωυμα ποιευμένος την Spya- σίην του σι$ηρον. νυι, 74. 'όως μεν όη αυτεων άνηρ άνόρι παραστάς aiyrj X.oyov εποιεετο, θωυμα ποιευ μ εν οι την ΈiυpυβιάS€ω άβουΧίην, for θαυμάζοντες. Thuc. vm, 41. την χωράν καταόρομαχς ΧεΊαν εποιεϊτο, for εΧεηΧάτει. ib. 62. σκευή και avS ράποόα αρπαγήν ποιησάμένους, i. e. άρ- πάζων. Similarly ΐν, 15. εόοξεν αύτοΊς σπονόάς ποιήσα¬ με νους τά περί Πιίλομ, άποστειΧαι ες τάς Αθήνας πρέσβεις. ° Valck. ad Her. ρ. 558, 6 0 . Abresch. Diluc. Thuc. p. 612. Auctar. p. 066. Fisch. in, a. p. 444 sq. Heind. ad Plat. PhEedr. p. 272. Syntax. Of the Accusative. 591 > for σπενδεσθαι in the sense of c making up*, as .in Luvip. Med. 1140 p . Thus the passage in Plato may be defended Plat. Phce- don. p. 275· € 7 τειδη δε ταύτης ( αιτίας ) εστερηθην, και ουτ αν αυτός εύρειν ούτε 7 rap άλλου μαθειν οίος τε ε Γ γενομην 9 τον δεύτερον πλουν επί την της αιτίας ζητησιν, ην πεπρayμa- τευμαι 3 βούλει σοι , εφη , ε πίδε ιζιν ποιη σωμαι 3 i. e* επι- δείξω. In the same manner, if a verb active is joined with the sub¬ stantive from the same primitive in the accusative, in order to give an additional definition, the accusative also of the person to'which the verb is referred, is added to it. Od. o, 245. Αμ- φιάρηον , όν περί κηρι φίλει Zeus τ α^ιοχος ΚΟί Απόλλων 7 ταντοίην φι\ότητα 3 instead of which Η. in M^erc. 572. εφί\ησε παντοίγ φιλότητι. Soph. El. 1034. ονό’ αυ τοσοϊτον εχθος εχθ αίρω σ ε*γω. Comp. Phil * 59* Thuc . vm, 75. ωρκωσαν πάντας τους στρατ ιώτας τους με Γ γιστους όρκους. Herod. II, 1. Psammetichus παιδία δύο — διδοί ποι- μενι τ ρ εφε ιν τροφήν τι να τ οιηνδ ε 3 i. e. ωδε. Xen. Lyiop. VTli, 3, 37. εμε 6 πατήρ την των παίδων παιδείαν, y λί- σχρως αυτός εpy απόμερος και τρεφων, επα ιό ευ εν, JEschin. in Ctesiph . ρ. 537* ό Φωκικός πόλεμος δεκαετή^ yεyονως αεί¬ μνηστον παιδείαν αυτου ς επ α ιό ευ σ ε. Plat. Leg. ιιι 3 ρ. 143. όιεφθαρμενην παιδείαν υπο της λεyoμεvης ευδαιμονίας την Μηδικη ν περιειδον υπό yυvaικωv τε και ευνούχων παιδε υθεν- τας αυτου τούς υιεις. Herod, νΐι, 233. τους πλεΰνας αυ- τεων εστιζον στ iy ματ α βασιληία. Hence also the phrase, ypάφεσθa , ι τινα ypaφηv ) e. g. Xen. Mem . S. iv, 8, 4. Sometimes the substantive, which is added foi the pm pose of definition, is related to the verb only in signification. ^ Eur. Troad. 42. K άσανδραν - yapei βιαιως σκοτιον, Aya- μεμνων λεχος. «6.36 1. Έλβν^ Ί αμεΊ με δυστυχεστερον •γάμον. In all these cases the dative might he put for the accus., or, omitting the substantive in the accusative, an adveib instead of the adjective. Obs. 6. Sometimes the Poets in particular join an accusa- p Comp. Hoogev. ad Viger. p. 285. P 2 592 Syntax. Of the Accusative. tive with a verb active , besides the proper object, commonly the accusative of a pronoun, which indicates the whole, of which the proper object is a part. II. σ', 73. τέκνου, t l κΧαίεις ; τί δε σε φρενας t/cero πένθος ; where the proper object is φρενας; but σε, according to the common construction, should be σου. v , 44. Τρώα? $e τρόμος αίνος επηΧυθε yvia έκαστον . 406. ως αρα τόν y ερνγόντα Χίπ’ όστεα θυμός ayr /νωρ, and elsewhere in innumerable places. Find. 01. i, 100. προς ευάνθεμονδ' ore φυάν Xayyai νιν με\αν y ενειον ερεφον . Soph. CEd . T. 713. και νιν αρθρα κείνος ενζευξας ποδοιν ερριφεν αΧΧων γερσιν εις άβατον όρος. Q^d. Col. 113. σνγησομαί τε, και συ μ εξ οδού 7 τόδα κρυφόν κατ αΧσος. Comp. ih. 314. El. 147. Phil. 1301. Aristoph. Pac. 1099* Φράζεο δη, μη πως σε δόΧω φρε¬ νας εξαπατησας Ικτίνος pap^rf q . The preposition κατά is usually supplied with the accusative of the proper object, τί πένθος ίκετο σε κατα φρενας , although this explanation does not suit all passages, and sometimes makes the expression stiff and awkward. . It is much more probable, that this construction is to be explained by a kind of apposition, which is particularly frequent in Homer, by means of which the whole is more accurately defined by the addition of the part (e. g. II. φ' , 38. ερινεόν τάμνε νέους ορπηκας . See on Apposition). A similar construction is admitted in the dative. 392. h . 414. Other verbs, besides the accusative of the person, take also an accusative of an adjective or substantive, which is a predicate, and expresses a quality or pro¬ perty, which is attributed to the object by the, verb. These verbs are, as in Latin, those which signify f to call or name, to make, to choose’, and when in the pas¬ sive, take a double nominative. §. 306. Here is to be remarked : l. All these verbs frequently take, with the predi- q \ r alck. ad Her. p. 22, 26. ad Theocr. x. Id. i, 55. Brunck. ad iEseh. S. c. Th. 836. ad Arist. Pac. 1. c. Syntax. Of the Accusative. 593 * x - I ■'* cate, the infinitive eivai, from which, however, it does not follow that this word is to be supplied where it does not appear. a. c To call or name’. Plat. Protag. p. 89. σοφιστήν όη τοι ονομαζουσί ye τον avbpa eivai. Ladl. p. 188 S(J. τί \eyei<$ τοντο , o ev ητάσιν ονομα^ις ταχύτητα eivai. Hip- parch, p. 258. άλλ\ eyco, ώ Σωκρατ€ς, βούλομαι Xeyeiv του - * του? φιλο^ρ^Ις eivai 1 . b. e To make’. Herod. VII, 122. weav be συμμιχθόωσι τάχιστα, evOevTev η§η ο ΪΙην€ΐος τω ούνόματι κατακρατ€ων, ανώνυμους τούς άλλους nvoieei eivai. c. c To choose, to name to any thing’. Herod, vn, 154. μ€τά ου πολλον χρόνον (Αίνησίδημος) άπ€<$όχθη 7 τάσης της Ίππου eivai Ίππαρχος. VIII, 134. οι be σύμμαχοί μιν βΊλοντο eivai. 2. In the verbs f to call’, the following is to be ob¬ served : a. The predicate is sometimes the neuter singular of a pronoun, although the proper object of the verb be masculine or plural. Plat. Rep. i, p . 174. to b’, οίμαι , όκαστος τούτων , καθόσον τουτ όστιν ο πpoσayopeυoμev αυ¬ τόν, ούύόποτ€ αμαρτάνω. Gratyl. ρ. 243. τον be ύρωταν και άποκρίν€σθαι ύπιστάμ€νον άλλό τι συ καλ€ΐς η biaXeKTi- κόν, Gorg. ρ. 93. άλλα πάλιν ύξ άρχης €ΐπό , τί ποτ€ λό- 7€ts τούς β€λτίστους, c whom do you understand by the best’? Plat . Rep. V, p. 31. τί o ev ταΐς άλλαις όημος τούς άρχοντας προσ ay opevei j and in the passive Id. Rep. X, p. 288. τούτο e^uorye boKel μ€τριωτατ av πρoσayopeυ- €σθαι , μιμητη ς, ού eKeivoi ^pioupyoi. Thus it should be Gorg. p. 6. ei eTvyxave Γ opy'w ei τιστημων ων της τόχνης, r Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. pr344. 594 Syntax. Of the Accusative. ησπερ 6 άδεΧφός αύ:του ' Ή ρόδικος, τί αν αυτόν ωνομαζομεν δικαίως; ουχ όπερ εκείνον, as it is also in the Zeitz MS. (See Chr. Gottfr. Muller notitia et recensio Codd. MSS. qui in Bibl. Episc . Numburgo- Cizensi asservan- tur . Lips. 1806. p. 11 sq .) for τίνα 3 . b. This is often accompanied by δνομα. Od. Θ! , 550. 6Ι7Γ όνομ , 6 ττι σ€ κειθι κάΧεον μητηρ tg πατήρ τ€. Eurip. Ion. 9,69- δνομα τί σε καΧειν ημάς 'χρεών; c what are We to Call you’? lb. 813. όνομα δε 7 roiov αυτόν ονομάζει πατήρ; Plat. Cratyl. in. ου τούτο είναι δνομα, δ τι αν τινες συνθεμενοι καΧειν καΧώσι. Id. Soph. ρ. 91 5. ουκουν και τον μαθήματα ζυνωνου μενον — ταυτόν προσερεις δνομα. Xen. Mem . 8. II, 9, 1. καταμεμάθηκας ούν, τους τί πονουντας τό δνομα τούτο ( αχάριστους ) άποκαΧουσιν. Id CEcon. 7,3. ει μεν, όταν σοι διαΧεγωνται περί εμού τινες, καΧουσί με τούτο τό δνομα, ούκ οιδα. This is founded on §.413. Obs. 5. In this case also the person or thing which is named, is in the dative. Plat. Cratyl. p. 234. ου yap εχω εγωγε ονόματος αΧΧην ορθότητα, η ταυτην, εμοί μεν ετερον είναι καΧειν έκαστο) όνομα, ο eyiv εθεμην, σοι δε ετερον, δ αν συ. Polit. ρ. 51. τουτοισι δη — τοϊς άμυντηρίοις και σκεπάσμασι το μεν όνομα ιμάτια εκαΧίσαμεν. Soph. ρ. 226. τουτω yε οιμαι μόνιρ της άγνοιας άμαθίαν τοδνομα προσρηθηναι. Comp. Rep. V, ρ. 48. 46 ι . Thus is said καΧειν, όνομάζειν , επονομ, τινί τι. Plat . Theaet. ρ. 141. η δε διά τίνος δυναμις τό τ επί πάσι κοινόν και τό επί τουτοις δηΧόϊ σοι , ψ τό εστιν επονομά¬ ζεις και τό ουκ εστιν Plat. Phcedr. p. 302. επιθυμίας αΧο- s Heind. ad Plat. Gorg, p. 8. 145. Auctar. p. 507· Schaef. ad Long. p. 369. Bast. Lelite Crit. p. 30. t Heind. ad Plat. Cratyl. p. 11. l63. * Syntax. Of the Accusative. 595 ycos εΧκονσης ειτι ηδονάς και άρζάσης εν ημιν Trj άρχτι υβρις €7 νωνομάσθη. The construction is similar in Thuc. iv, 98. παρανομίαν επι τοις μη avayKp κακοις ο νομασθηναι, και ονκ €7 ri τοις από των ζυμφορών τι τοΧμησασι. Comp. Plat. Soph, ρ. 204. Peg- IV, p. 179· το του δεσπότου έκαστη π poaayopcifeTai κράτος 11 . This construction seems to have arisen from the phrase τίθεσθαί τινι όνομα. See c. c. As in the phrase όνομά εστι , the name itself is always in the same case as όνομα (§. 306.), so the phrases compounded with a verb active, take an accusative, e. g. Plat. Rep. II, p. 230. ταύττι τη ξυνοικία εθεμεθα πόΧιν ονομα. Leg. ν, ρ. 222. όσοι διά την τροφής απορίαν τοις ηyεμόσιν επί τα των εχόντων μη εχοντες ετοίμους αυτούς ενδείκνυνται παρεσκευακότες επεσθαι, τού τοις, ως νοσηματι πόΧεως εμπεφυκότι , δι ευφημίαν anraXXayfc ονομα αποι¬ κίαν τιθέμενος, εύμενώς ότι μάΧιστα εξεπεμψατο. Thus also τίθεσθαι alone, omitting όνομα. Plat. Theaet. ρ. 80. ω δη άθροίσματι άνθρωπόν τε τίθενται και Χίθον και έκα¬ στον ζωόν τε και είδος*. Of the passage Peg. XII, ρ. 207. see §. 306. 3. The construction of the verbs f to make’, is fol¬ lowed by διδάσκειν, παιδευειν, τρεφειν , f to educate one, to bring* one up to any thing’. Eurip. El. 379- άΧΧ’ εχει νόσον πενία * διδάσκει δ ανδρα χ η χρεία σοφόν. c make him wise’. Heracl. 576 . δίδασκε μοι τοιούσδε τούσδε πάι- δας , εις τό παν σοφούς, ώσπερ σύ. Comp. Med. 297· Plat. MenOU. p. 376. ούκ άκηκοας, ότι θεμιστοκΧης Κλβο- φαντον τον υιόν ιππέα μεν εδιδάξ ατο aya0ov; ‘ made u Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 222. ad Cratyl. In. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 334. X. 596 * Λ Syntax . Of the Accusative. him be brought up a good rider’, ih. p. 377. Τούτου? ραΧον και αάνθιππον) ιππέας εόίόαζεν ουόενός χείρους Αθηναίων. Rep. IV, ρ. 330. τούς υ'ιεΐς η αΧΧους , ονς αν όιόόζρ, ψειρούς δημιουργούς διδαζεται. Soph. (Ed. C. 919· καί τοί σε θηβαι ούκ επαίδευσαν κακόν. Plat. Rep. VIII, p. 188. ονς ηγεμόνας ποΧεων επαιδεύσασθε. EpiSt. VII, ρ. 1 12. τ αυτόν προς Αιώνα Συρακουσιοι τότε επαθον , οπερ και Αιονύσιος , ότε αυτόν επεχείρει παιδευσαι και θρε- ψαι βασιΧεα της αρχής αζϊον. Thus ThllC. I, 84. ευ- βουΧοι γιγνόμεθα , αμαθέστεροι των νόμων της υπεροψίας παιδευό μενοι (l. e. όμ. η ώστε τούς νόμους υπερορίαν) και ξύν χαΧεπότητι σωφρονε στεροι, η ώστε αυτών άνηκου- ί ν στειν* *. > _ _ Thus also αύζειν τινα μεγαν Plat. Rep. VIII, p. 228. Ohs. From these are to be distinguished the phrases, in which the second accusative is an apposition of the first, and is determined only by means of the verb, e. g. Isocr. ad Demon, p. 2. JB. άπεσταΧκά σοι τόνδε τον Χόγον δώρον , 6 as a present’. Xen. Cyr. v, 2, 14. τον Τωβρυαν σύνδειπνον παρεΧαβεν ζ . The verb active frequently takes a substantive of the same derivation, or of kindred signification, in the accu¬ sative. Hr v, 220. που τοι άπειΧαι ο’ίχονται , τάς Τ ρωσιν άπείΧεον υΐες ’Αχαιών; Euvip. Ph. 65. άράς άράται παισιν άνοσιωτάτας. Plat. Rep. X, p. 300. πράττοντας ανθρώπους μιμείται η μιμητική βίαιους η εκούσιας π ρ όζεις. Comp. ρ. 310. Demosth. de Halon. ρ. 80, 20. άποστό- Χους άποστεΧΧειν βούΧεται. This takes place still more frequently with in trail- y Bentl. Epist. ad Mill. p. 470. Toup. ad Suid. n, p. 383. Hem- sterh. ad Aristoph. Plut. p. 4. * Hemsterh. in Obss. Misc. vi, p. 340. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 219· 597 Syntax. Of the . Accusative. • 1 ' · ' > sitive verbs, generally in order to subjoin a new defini¬ tion, which might often also be expressed by an adverb, ΟΓ the dative Case. II. i, 74. πολλών δ ά^ρομβνων, τίρ πει- σεαι, ός κεν άρίστην βουλήν βουλε υσρ, i.e. άριστά βου- λεύσγ. ο’, 675. ηΧ όσσοι παρά νηνσι μάχην Εμάχοντο θον,σιν. for the simple Εμάχοντο. Soph. Phil. 173. νοσεί νοσον aypiav. ib. 276. ποιαν μ άνάστασιν δοκεϊς—Εξ ύπνον στη¬ ν αι τότε; for πως με άναστηναι δοκεις. JEschyl. PrOTYl. 926. ούδεν yap αυτιρ ταυτ επαρκεσει , το μη ου πεσειν άτίμως πτώματ ουκ ανασχετα. PevS. 303. πηδημα κου φον εκ νεώς άφηλατο , when also πηδηματι κούφιο , ΟΓ merely κούφως might be put. Comp. A gam. 835. Eurip. Ion. 1287. οθεν πετραιον άλμα δισκευθησεται , for όθεν Εκ πέτρας δ. Comp. Troad. 756. Hence πόλεμον πολε- μεΊν, as Thucyd. I, 112. Λακεδαιμόνιοι μετά ταυτα τον Ιερόν καλούμενου πόλεμον εστρατενσαν. Pint. Leg. Ill, ρ. 114. βασιλείαν πασών δ ικαιοτάτην βασιλεύ ο μεν οι. Alcib. II, p. 84. υπό των συκοφαντών πολιορκουμενοι πολιορκίαν ουδεν όλάττω της ύπό πολεμίων. Protag. ρ. 117- Επιμελούν¬ ται πάσαν επιμέλειαν. Comp. Rep. IX, ρ. 280. V, ρ. 6. according to the Parisian MS. ( νομίμων περί), τούτο ούν το κινδύνεύμα κινδννευειν εν εχθροις κρειττον η φίλοις a . In the same manner the accusative is put with adjec¬ tives. Plat. Rep. IX, p. 255. εστιν άρα τγ άληθεία ο τω όντι τύραννος τω όντι δούλος τάς μεy ιστας θωπείας και δουλείας. Ib. VI, ρ. 83. κακούς πάσαν κακίαν , c utterly bad’. « j » r / . /· Hence also the following phrases, in which κατά is usually supplied in the accusative, provided it expresses Fisch. hi, a. p. 422 sqq. —428. a 417 . 598 Syntax. Of the Accusative. 416. the kind and mode of the action. Soph. Aj. 42. τί δητα ποίμναις τηνδ> επεμπιτνεί βάσιν, ί. e. ώδε, όντως. Eurip. όϊ. 1018. <τ ι$ ου o' ev ομμασι παννστάτην 7 τρόσο- λ \ /ιν > εξώστην φρένων, ib. 1041. τερπον κενήν ονησιν. PhceYl. 1394. ρξαν δρόμημα δεινόν άλληλοις εττι. ib. 300. yovv- πετεις έδρας προσπιτνώ σε. ( V . Porson .) where γονυπε¬ τείς έδρας stands for επί yow πίπτων , (or, if there were such a word, γοννπετώς.) In the passage Soph. Tr. 49. δέσποινα Αι^ανειρα 9 7τολλα μεν σ εγώ κατειδον ηδη παν- δακρντ οδνρματα την Η ρακλειον έξοδον γοωμενην , the con¬ struction of πανδακρντ οδνρματα γοάσθαι belongs to this place,, but γοάσθαι έξοδον to §. 419. 3. '» ·*"'* * * > ' Adjectives also, which are derived from verbs active, and retain an active sense, sometimes take the accusa¬ tive. JEschyl. Agam. 1098. (προς την Ατρειδών στέγην ηγαγόν σε) ΚΑΣ. μισόθεον μεν ο5ν 3 πολλά ξννίστορα αντόφονα κακά κάρτάνας , for πολλών κακών. Ib. 103. €λπις άμννει φροντίδ άπληστου , την θνμόβορον φρένα λύπην. Comp. Prom. 912 . and Schutz·. p. 134. Soph. Afltig. 787. καί σ οντ αθανάτων φνξιμος ουδείς, ονθ* άμε- ρίων επ ανθρώπων. Plat. Charm . ρ. 117. είπεν ότι ον ρμδιον €ΐη εν τφ παροντι ονθ ομολογειν 3 ούτε εξάρνω είναι τα ερωτωμενα. Alcib. II, p. 83. οίμαί σε ονκ ανηκοον είναι ενια γε χθίζά τε καί πρώίζα γεγενημενα. ΧβΠ. Cyrop. Ill, 3, 9· κατανοων ο Κ.νρος 3 ως εν μεν αντώ ειχον τα σώματα οι στρατιωται ,- επιστήμονες δε ησαν τά προσήκοντα Trj εαυτών έκαστος οπλίσει , fyc. Til US τρί- βων , ‘experienced, skilled’, sometimes takes the accu¬ sative instead of the genitive (see §. 324,) Eur. Med. 684. τριβών τά τοιάδε. Rhes. 627. τριβών yap εΐ τά κομ¬ ψά καί νοειν σοφός. Several verbs intransitive are used by the Poets as transitive, and take an accusative of the object, e. g. Syntax. Of the Accusative. 599 άίσσω. Soph. Aj. 40. και προς τί SvaXoy ιστόν ώό f /ξεν χβρα; Eurip. Hec. 1062 . 7τα πόό’ 67Γ φζας σαρκών όστεων τ εμπΧησθώ j ApolloTl . Rh. I, 1253. ενθ αυτω ζνμβΧητο κατά στίβον Η ρακΧηι 3 '"γυμνόν επαίσσων παΧαμρ ζιφος . βαίνω. Eurip. Phoen. 1450. πρόβας όε κώλον όεξιον. Arist. Eccl. 161 . εκκΧησιάσουσ ονκ αν προβαίην τον ποόα τον ετερον, εί μη ταυτ άκριβωθησεται 0 . ζεω. Apoll . Rh. Ill, 273. τοί $ε λοετρά πνρι ζέον. JEschyl. Prom . 370. τοιόνόε Τ υφώς εζαναζεσει χοΧον. Eurip. Cycl. 391. χάΧκεον Χεβητ επεζεσεν πυρί Α . Χάμπειν. Eurip. Hel. 1145. Acy αίαις τ εναΧίαις άκταΊς όόΧιον αστέρα Χάμφας . ΙθΠ. 83. άρματα μεν τά$ε Χαμπρά τεθρίππων ηΧιος ηόε Χαμπει κατα yrjv e . ρεω. Horn. Η. in Apoll. II, 202. προρεειν καΧΧίρροον ύόωρ. Eurip. Hec. 53 1 . πΧηρες εν χεροϊν Χαβών όεπας ^^y χρνσον, όρρει χ^ ι ρ ι παις ΑχιΧΧεως χοας θανοντι πατρι . σπεύόειν , f to urge, to pursue'. Soph. El. 25 1 . το σόν σπενόονσ άμα } και τουμόν αυτής. Eur . Phcen. 591· όνο κακά σπενόε^ς, τεκνον. Also in the Prose writers. Herod, 1 , 206. πανσ cu σπενόων τα σπευόεις. Thuc. VI, 39* μη μα.ν~ θάνετε κακά σπευόοντες^. Obs. 1. We may consider also as belonging to this head βομν τινα , 1 to call any one . Find. Pyth. vi, 36. Xen. Cytop. vii, 2, 5. προθνμεισθαι την oXcyapxiav, Thuc. vm, 90 1 . b Brunck. ad Soph. 1. c. Porson. ad Eur. Or. 1427. c Porson. 1. c. d Brunck. 1. c. e Brunck. 1. c. f Musgr. ad Eur. 1. c. Brunck. 1. c. et ad Apoll. Rh. 111 , 225. g Valck. ad Herod, p. 535, 93. Musgr.· ad Eur. Suppl. l6l. h Duker. ad Thuc. 1. c. p. 560. 600 Syntax. Of the Accusative. ■ Ohs. 2. With βΧεπειν, ‘to look*, intransitive, the expres¬ sion of the look is often marked by a substantive in the accusa¬ tive, in the Poets. JEsch. S. c. Th. 500. φόβον βΧεπειν, £ to look fearful’. Eur ip. Ion. 1282. δράκων άναβΧεπων φ ον lav φΧό^γα, ‘with fiery blood-thirsty look’. Aristoph. Pint. 328. βΧεπειν 'Αρην, ‘to look martial’ 1 . Thus with νικάν, 6 to conquer*, intrans. the words μάχη, ναυ¬ μαχία, ποΧεμος, fyc. and, if a victory in a solemn public contest is signified, the place of the conquest, or the nature of the field of battle, are put in the accusative. Isocr. Panath. p. 286. E. Λακε¬ δαιμόνιοι εν τω 7 τοΧεμω τω προς τους βαρβάρους απάντων των 'Ελλ^ωΐ' ηγεμόνες κατέστησαν - διάτό, μάχας ποιησάμενοι πΧειστας των άνθρωπων κατ εκείνον τον χρόνον, μηδεμιαν ητ- τηθηναι τούτων , ηγουμένου βασιΧεως, άλλα νενικηκεναι πάσας. Hence πάντα ενικά II. ε', 807. Comp. lien. Anab. I, 10, 4, n, 1,1. Isocr. Ep. ad Phil. p. 41 5. D. νικα,ν τους στεφανιτας α·γώ- vas. T/mc. I, 126 . ΟΧυμπια νενικηκότι. Epigr. Simonid. in Brunch. Anal. I, p. 140. * Ισθμια και ΤΙυθοϊ /Χιοφων ο Φίλωι /09 ενικά ά\μα, ποδωκεΐην , δίσκον , άκοντα, πάΧην. Yet the dative is very frequently put here. Isocr: p. 351. C. Ίππων ζευ·γει πρώτος ΑΧκμαίων των ποΧιτών ’ΟΧυμτ ιάσιν ενι- κησε. Plat. Apol. S. ρ. 84. ει τις υμών Ίππ ψ η ζυνωρίδι η ζευ<γει νενικηκεν ΟΧυμπιάσ iv k . 418. These are to be distinguished from the cases in which the verb retains its intransitive signification, and yet takes an accusative. Such as : 1. Χανθάνειν, c to be concealed’, as in Latin latere aliquem. Pind. 01. I, 103. ει δε θεόν άνηρ τις εΧπεται τι Χάσε μεν ερδων, αμαρτάνει. 2 . In the Poets the verbs c to stand, to sit’, have an accusative of the place. JEsch. Agam. 190. δαιμόνων δε που χάρις, βιαιως σεΧμα σεμνόν η μενών. Eurip. Andr. 147- ώ yvvai, ά θετιδος δάπεδον και ανάκτορα θάσσεις δαρόν. 1 Brunck. ad Arist. Αν. Il6’9. k Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. 1 , p. 338. Syntax. Of the Accusative. 601 Or. 861. ό/οώ δ’ όχλον στείχοντα και θάσσοντ ακραν. 943. ηυ yeveia δε ουδεν'σ επωφελησεν, ουδ ο Πυ0ιο? τρί¬ ποδα καθίζω ν Φοϊβος. So also the compounds with τ τρός, JEsch. Agam. 843. ιος καρδίαν προσημένος. Soph, (Ed, C. 1166. τίς δητ αν ειη τηνδ ο προσθακων έδραν, Eurip. Οτ. 1248. στηθ’ α\ μεν υμών τηνδ α μα<ζη ρη τρίβον. Here κατά may be considered as omitted. Else¬ where επί also accompanies the accusative, e. g. Thuc. i, 126. καθίζουσιν εη ri τον βωμόν ικεται, and προς. ThllC. Ill, 70. αυτών προς τα I ερά \ικετών καθεζομενων. Xen. Mem, S, IV, 2, 1 . κ, εις ηνιοποιεΊον. Note. In Soph. El. 1377. V σε πολλά δη, αφ* ων εχοιμι , λιπαρέι προυστην χέρι, the accusative seems to be put more because in προυστην λ. χ. the idea of ικετέυσα σε θυουσα, άφ' ων εχοιμι, is contained, than that προστηναι (κατα) τινα was put for προστηναι τίνος. 3. With verbs of motion an accusative is put in two ways: a. The accusative of the place whither, or the person to whom one c goes, comes 5 , for εις. Od. a, 332. η cT ότε δη μνηστηρας αφ ικετο δια 'γυναικών, for προς μν. Comp. Od. φ\ 25. Soph. El. 1349. ου το Φωκίων ι re δον υπεξεπεμφθην, σγ\ προμήθεια, χεροΊν. Euv . Ph. 110. ου yap τί φαύλως ήλθε Τίολυνείκης χθονα. Thus also SopJl. Aj. 516. άλΧ η μοίρα τον φύσαντά με καθειλεν αδου θανασι-' μους οίκητορας, for προς θ. οικ άδ. (r) Find. 01. 2, 173. αίνον εβα κόρος 1 . * b. The accusative of the way in which one goes. Horn. H. in Merc. 547. άλίην οδόν είσιν, as in English, « he goes a fruitless road 5 . Soph. Aj. 287. ίμαίετ όξόδους i Misc. Obss. T. v. p. 278. Musgr. ad Eur. Suppl. 254. Herm. ad Pind. 1. c. 419. 602 Syntax. Of the Accusative. ερπειν κενά s*. Thuc. Ill, 64. μετά ' Αθηναίων , άδικον 6 δον ιόντων, εχωρησατε. Comp. Plat. Rep . VI, p . 115. Thus also Soph . -<φ*. 30. κάμοί τις όπτηρ αυτόν είσιδων μονον πηδωντα πεδία συν νεορράντιρ ζίφει. 845. συ δ\ ώ τον αίπύν ουρανόν διφρηλατών,'Ήλιε. Here κατά may be supplied. 3. With the verbs f to swear’, the Deity or person by whom one swears, is put in the accusative. Herod. IV, 172. ομνυουσι τους παρά σφίσι άνδρας δικαιότατους και άρίστους λεγ ομενους γ ενεσθαι. Arist. Nub. 245. μισθόν , όντιν αν πράτττ] μ’ όμουμαι σοι καταθησειν τους θεούς. Hence Ζευς όμνυμενος Arist. Nub. 1241. Thus also επιορ - κείν τινά. Xen. Anab. m, ι, 22 m . This is sometimes accompanied by the accusative absolute. Soph. Antig. 758. άλλ’ ου, τόνδ' " Ολυμπον , Ίσθ* ότι χαίρων επι >//ογ οισι δεννάσεις εμε η . 4. The impersonal δεΊ (and χρη) is accompanied by an accusative of the person, together with the genitive of the thing, even if no infinitive be joined with it. Mschyl. PrOUl. 86. αυτόν yap σε δει Π ρομηθεως. Eur. Here. f. 1 17 3- x ηλθον, ε'ί τι δει , γ ερον, η χειρός υμάς της εμης 3 η ξυμμάχων. — Od. a , 124. μυθησεαι , όττεό σε χρη. γ, 14. Ύηλεμαχ, ου μεν σε χρη ετ αιδους ούδ> ηβαιόν. Thus the substantive χρεω } χρειω, 'χρεία, is often put, especially in Homer. II. λ', 650. τί δε σε χρεω εμείο ; Od. δ', 634. εμε δε χρεω γ«γ νεται 1 αυτής. Eur. Hec. 970. αλλά τις χρεία σ εμού. Instead of which Od. β', 28. τί να χρειω τοσον ίκει. ε' , 189. ότε με χρειω τόσον 'ίκοι. Soph. m Fisch. in, a. p. 439 sq. n Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 66(5. Syntax. Of the Accusative. ' 603 I - r Phil. 646. ενόοθε v Χαβων , ότου σε χρεία και πόθος μάΧιστ €\εΓ. ο . Note. Of Set with the dative, see §. 385. 9· 5. With the middle verbs τύπτεσθαι, κόπτεσθαι , pro¬ perly f to strike one’s self, to bewail’, as in Latin, plangi, the object of the grief is put in the accus. Herod. II, 13(2. επεάν τύπτωνται o\ A’vy ύπτιοι τον ούκ ονομαζόμενου θεόν νπ εμευ, - τότε ων και την βουν εκ- φερουσι. Eurip. Troctd. 628. έκρυψα πεπΧοις κάπεκοψάμην νεκρόν. 6. Plcit. Leg. XII. in. ypcupai κατά τούτων εστων, ως Ερμου και Αιός ά<γ·γεΧ'ιας και επιτάξεις παρά νόμον άσεβησάντ ων for άσεβ. εις ayy. και επιτ. Again εύσε- βεΊν τινά is found only in later writers; the ancients said ’/Ο-»/ n " s ευσερειν εις τινα ν . Similar to this is άΧείτω with the accusative. Od. S', 378. άλλα νυ μεΧΧω αθανάτους άΧιτεσθαι. II. τ , 265. εμοί θεοί άXyεa όοιεν, ποΧΧά μάΧ*, όσσα SiSovaiv , ότις σφ’ άΧίτηται όμόσσας. ω, 586. Αιός αΧίτηται εφετμάς. Hesiod. Sc. Η. 80. η τι μεψ αθανάτους μά καρας - ηΧιτεν Άμφιτρύων. • * Passives also, if they retain their passive sense, are 420 . often accompanied by the accusative, in the following cases: l. With verbs which govern a double accusative in the active, the thing is put in the accusative, in the passive also. Thuc. VIII, 5. υπό βασιΧεως πεπpayμεvoς τοι)$ φόρους (§. 411. 4.) Herod. Ill, 157. εξαιρεθεντες τε τον Αημοκηόεα και τον yavXov άπαιρεθεντες. ThllC. VI, ° Valck. ad Eur. Hippol. 23. Brunck. ad Arist. Lys. 605. Pors. * ad Epr. Or. 659· p Valcken. Musgr. ad Eurip. Ph. 1340. 421 . . 604 Syntax, Of the Accusative. \ * 24. to μεν ε πιθυμου v τον πΧου ουκ ε^ρρεθησαν ( DlOTl . άφρρεθηίταν) υπό του ο'χΧωδους της παρασκευής. Plat. Govg. p. 156. τούτου του λόγοι» τί άν αΧο^/ωτερον είη προχγμα, αν¬ θρώπους ay αθούς και δικαίους yεvoμεvoυς εξαιρεθεντας 'μεν αδικίαν υπό του διδασκαΧου, σπόντας δε δικαιοσύνην , αδικειν τούτω, ο ουκ εχουσιν^', — JEsch. ΡτοϊϊΧ. 171· 'Τ'ο νεον βου- Χευμ, ύφ’ οτου σκηπτρον τιμάς τ αποσυΧάται. IsOCV. ArcJlid. ρ. 119- D· συΧηθεις ΉρακΧής τάς βούς—ύπδ ΝηΧεως και των παίδων - τούς άδικησαντας άπεκτεινεν — Soph. El. 96 Ο. ( εμο'ι ) πάρεστι στενειν, πλούτου πατρίρου κτη- σιν εστερημενη. Eurip. Troad. 379· ού yw ορι άποστε- ρούμενοι . Thuc. νι, 91 . τα? προσόδους αποστερησονται. (§.412. 5.) — Solon, αρ. Plut. Sol. 31. (Comp. Plat . Lack. p. ISO.) yηpάσκω δ ’ αιει ποΧΧα διδασκόμενος. Plat. Menex. p. 277. και όστις εμού κάκιον επαιδεύθη , μουσικήν μεν υπό Λάμπρου παιδευθείς , ρητορικήν δε υπ Αντιφών- τος του Ύαμνουσίου , όμως καν ούτος οΐος τ ε’ιη Αθηναίους γβ εν Άθηναίοις επαίνων εύδοκιμειν. (§. 412. b.) Plat . Rep. V, ρ. 18. (αι yvvai κες) άρε την άντί ιματίων άμφιε- σονται. Demosth. in Con. ρ. 1266, 2S. μεμαρτυρηκασιν όραν υπό Κόνωι>ος τυπτόμενου εμε , και θοιματιον εκδυο - μενον. (ib. 7.) Thus in Homer επιειμενος άΧκην — Xen. Cyrop. V, 5, l6. εγω επείσθην ταυ τα υπό σου (§. 413.) In the same manner, from the phrase όνομάζειν τινά όνομα, is constructed Thuc. i, 122. η καταφρόνησή (con¬ tempt of the enemy, and, because this is connected with an advantageous opinion of one’s self, self-conceit) εκ τού ποΧΧούς σφάΧΧειν , τό εναντίον όνομα άφροσύνη με - τωνόμασται. 2. As moreover, by a peculiar Graecism, verbs which, in the active, take a dative of the person, can be * Valck. Diatr. p. 203. Syntax. Of the Accusative.' WJ referred to this person as a subject in the passive, so these verbs in the passive have also the thing in the accu¬ sative, whilst, in other languages, only that which is the object of the active, becomes the subject in the passive. Thuc. 1, 126. o\ των 'Αθηναίων επιτετραμμένοι την φυλα¬ κήν, for oh η φυλακή έπετέτραπτο. Aristoph. Eccl. 5 17. κεχειροτόνημαι άρχήν, for άρχή μοι κεχειροτόνηται. Soph. Antig. 408. προς σου τά den 1 e κ e I ν επηπεΐΧημενοί; foi ole . τά δεινά εκείνα έπηπείλητο. Hence the phrases : Herod, vn, 69- ΑΙΘίοπες π apSa- Χεας re και Χεοντεας έναμμένοι (for ενημμενοι) ; Arist. Nub. 72. διφθεραν ένημμενος, because, in the active, the con¬ struction would have been, ενάπτειν τινί παρδαΧήν, Χεοντην, διφθόραν'. Soph. Track. 157. λείπει παΧαιάν δεΧτον iyyey ραμμένην ξυνθήματα. from iyy ράφειν συν¬ θήματα δεΧτψ. as Virg. Eel. in, 106. inscripti nomina^ regum flores. Xen. Cyrop. vi, 3, 24. προβεβλημένοι δε τούί θωρακοφόρους μενοΰσι. In point of sense it is the same as παρδαΧεας και Χεοντεας έναμμενας εχοντες, διφθεραν ένημμένην έχων, ξυνθήματα eyyey ραμμένα εχουσαν , and It IS thus in a fragment of Machon, in Athen. xm, p · 582. C. AalSa λέγουσι την Κορινθίαν ποτέ Εύριπίδην Μούσαν έν κηπιυ τινί πινακίδα και y ραφείου έξηρτημένον εχοντα. After this analogy is formed, κυνην, έσθητα περικείμε¬ νος though properly one should say, κυνην, έσθης περί- κειται αύτέρ. Instead of which it might also be κυνην . , εσθήτα περικείμενη ν ίχων*. Herod. I, 171. τέως ^ ανευ όχάνων έφόρεον τάς ασπίδας --, περί τοισι αυχεσι τε και τοισι άριστεροισι ωμοισι περικείμενοι , VIZ. τας ασπίδας. · * * Valck. ad Herod, ρ. 541, 68. Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. I. p. 345. s Dorvill. ad Charit. p. 240. Q VOL. II. 606 % Syntax. Of the Accusative . • x Ohs. After the same analogy is the following construction in Xen. Mem. S. II, 0, 28. οΧος ώρμημαι — hiri to — άντεπιθυμει- σθαι της ζυνουσίας. so that they may have said επιθυμούμαι της ξυνουσίας. That is to say, in Greek, the person, who with the active verb, is put in the genitive case, may become the sub¬ ject designated by the passive; for instance, we may say, o άδεΧφός επιθυμείται, from επιθυμώ του άδεΧφοΰ. The case of the object remains unchanged ; thus επιθυμώ της ζυνουσίας του άδεΧφου, 6 άδεΧφός επιθυμείται της ζυνουσίας. Not that the case is precisely the same ; for in this example the genitive του άδεΧφου, with επιθυμώ is, in the first instance, governed by της ζυνουσίας. 422. 3. In these cases the accusative of the object which is put with the passive, is referred to the subject of this verb passive , in a certain measure, as the part to the whole. In the same manner also in other combinations, when the proper subject of a passive is to be repre¬ sented as a part of a whole, and this whole is in the genitive, e. g\ το τραύμα μου επιδείται, the whole is con¬ sidered as the subject, and the part put in the accusa¬ tive, with the passive. ( 67 ω) επι^εομαι το τραύμα , as Xenoph. Cyr . V, 2, 32. Soph . Aj. 1178. γένους άπαντος ρίζαν εζημημενος. Eurip. Hec. 114. rets ποντοπόρους τ εσχε σχεδίας, Χαίφη προτόνοις επερειδομενας, for ών τα Χαίφη επερείδεται προτόνοις. lb. 904. από δε στ εφάν αν κεκαρσαι πύργων, for στεφάνη πύργων σών άποκεκαρται. Plat . Rep. ΙΙ, p. 216. ούτω διακείμενος ό δίκαιος εκκαυθη- σεται τώ ’φθαΧμώ, for του δικαίου τώ όφθ. εκκαυθησετον. Arist. Nub. 24. είθ* εζεκόπην πρότερον τον όφθαΧμόν Χίθω. Xen. Anab. IV, 5, 12. εΧείποντο δε και των στρατιω¬ τών οι τε διεφθαρμένοι υπό της χιόνος τούς ο φθαΧμους, χους τούς δακτυΧους τών ποδών άποσε- σηπότες, for ών οι όφθαΧμοι διεφθαρμένοι ησαν — καί οι δάκτυΧοι άπεσεσηπεσαν. Id. Mem. S. 11 , ι, 17 . εγώ μεν ούκ οιδ\ ο τι διαφέρει το αυτό δέρμα εκόντα η άκοντα μαστι - Λ ι r ΟΙ Τ€ 1/7το του ψι/ / 607 Syntax. Of the Accusative. \ y ουσθαι, η οΧω s το αυτό σώμα ττάσι τοις τοιοντοις βκόντα η ακοντα ποΧιορκεΊσθαι, and elsewhere very fre¬ quently. In these cases it is usual to supply κατά. Simi¬ larly Arist. Nub. 241. τά χρηματ ενέχυράζομαι 7 for τα χρήματα μου ενεχυραζεται. . *· ' * 4. In all combinations an accusative may be put 423 with verbs and adjectives, when the idea of the verb or adjective is to be more accurately determined by an additional circumstance, when in English we say f with respect to’. Here too properly the verb or adjective is to be referred to the substantive in the accusative, as it’s subject. Od. ci 3 208. αινώς yap κεφαλήν re και όμ- ματα καλά εοικας κείνω, for κεφαλή και όμματα σου εοικε τοΊς εκείνον. Instead of which in II. y, 158. αίνώς άθανά- τησι θεης εις ωττα εοικεν. Theocr. VIII, 23. ετι και τον δάκτυλον άλ/γώ τούτον , for ο δάκτ. οντός μοι aXyei. Comp. Plat. Rep. v, p. 30. where before it was expressed όταν ttou ημών δάκτυλος του ^ΓXηyη. Hevod. II, 111. καμνειν τούς οφθαλμούς. Ill, 33. τάς φρενας vyialveiv. — II. a , 114. 67 Γ€ΐ ον εθεν εστι χερείων ου δέμας, ουδέ φυην, ουτ αρ φρενας, ούτε τι epya. 'Thus 7roSas ωκύς Άχιλλευς in Ho¬ mer. Theocr. XXIII, 2. ηρατ εφάβω τάν μορφάν ayaθώ, τ ράττον ουκ εθ ομοίω , for ου η μεν μορφή ay αθη ην 9 ό δε τρόττος ονχ όμοιος 1 . Here too κατα is supplied.. 5. As in these cases the dative might be put for the accusative, and sometimes is put, e. g. Xen. Mem. S. ii, l, 19 . δυνατοί και τοΊς σώμασι και ταις -ψυχαϊς , SO pronouns or adjectives in the neut. plur. are joined with other datives in the same sense, e. g. Plat. Gorg. p. 166. el τίνος μεγα ην το σώμα φύσει η τροφτ} η αμφοτερα η . u Heine! . at Plat. Charm, p. 57- Q 2 x Fisch. hi, a. p. 420 sq. 608 ' Syntax* Of the Accusative. ■ '■* - s ' % t Hence in the Poets the accusative is sometimes put for the dative generally. Soph. Aj. 1107 . καί τά σεμν επη κόλαζα εκείνους, for Tots σεμνοις €7 τεσιν· II σ , 485. ev $ε τε τείρεα πάντα, τα ουρανός εστεφάνωται, for oh. Herod. IV, 75. Επειτα τό κατασ ωχό μενον τούτο, 7 ταχύ εόν, καταπλάσσονται παν τό σώμα και τό πρόσωπον. Plat. Leg. II, p. 67. την αυτήν τέχνην άπειρ*γασμενα. Hence the accusative is often put adverbially, e. g. την αρχήν or simply άρχην ‘ altogether*, τάχος , e quickly*, τέλος, ‘ finally*, την πρώτην, e at first*, την ταχίστην, 'in the quickest manner* x . The accusative is more especially used as an adverb in the following cases, or instead of the dative : * . . * - . 1 . With comparatives, in order to determine the measure, πολύ μείζων, 'much greater*, πολλόν άμείνων Ih 479· πολλόν εχθίων Soph. Afltig. 86. II. β', 239· Me 7’ άμείνονα φώτα. Of the dative in this sense, see 405. 7 . 2 . To the question : ' how far ? how deep* ? Herod. I, 31. σ ταόιούς όε πεντε και τεσσεράκοντα όιακομίσαντες άπίκοντο ες τό ιρον. *■ ι . * 3 . With definitions of time, to the following- ques- tions : a. When ? II. φ , 111 . αλλ επί τοι καί εμοί θάνατος και μοίρα κραταιη εσσεται, η ηώς, η όείλης , η μέσον ημαρ . Herod · Π, 2. την ώρην επα^γινεειν σφίσι άϊ<γας, ' at a defi¬ nite, appropriate time*. Hence ημαρ , c by day*, interdiu. Hesiod. ερ· y. 176 . Apoll. Rh. 11 , 406. 111 , 1079· νύκτα , noctu, 4 by night’, Herod. 1, 18 1. * Fisch. hi, a. p. 224 sq. 609 Syntax. Of the Accusative. b. ( How long’? with cardinal and ordinal numbers. Hesiod. ΎΊΐ . 635. εμάχοντο δέκα πΧείους ενιαυτούς. Hence χρόνον, 'a long time’, diu. Herod. i, 175. and the accusative with είναι to the question, ' how old* ? Xen. Mem. S. Ill, 6, 1. ονδεπω είκοσιν ετη ^ε·γονως y . C. ‘ Since*. Thuc. VIII, 23. τρίτη v ημέραν αύτου ηκοντος , 'the third day after he arrived’. Eurip. Rhes. 444. συ μεν yap ηδη δέκατο v αίχμάζεις έτος , 'for ten years, ten years long*, as annum jam tertium et vicesimum reg¬ nat. Plat. Apol . S. 41. εμού yap ι τολλοί KaTtjyopoi yεyo- νασι ττρός υμάς , καί 7 ΓαΧαι 7ΓθΧΧα ηδη ετη , και ονδεν αΧηθες Χεγοντες. Leg . II. p. 66. σκοττων δ' εύρησεις αυτόθι (ΐη Egypt) τα μυριοστόν έτος yεyραμμένα η τετυττωμενα -—twv νυν δεδημιovpyημεv(vv ούτε τι καΧΧιονα, ουτ αισχκν. Xen. Anab. IV, 5, 24. καταλαμβάνει την OvyaT^pa του κω- μάρχου εννάτην ημέραν yεyaμημεvηv. Lucian. Η. Μ. 13. εν ΒαβυΧώνι κείμαι τρίτην ταύτην ημέραν. d. 'Before*. Xen . Cyrop. νι, 3, n. καί χθες δε καί τρίτην ημέραν το αυτό τούτο εινραττον, 'three days ago’ 2 . Demosth. Olynth. p. 29, 21. μεμνησθε , ότ a^y- Ί εΧθη ΦίΧππτος ύμίν εν Ορ^κη τρίτον η τέταρτον έτος # τουτί , Η ραϊον τείχος 7 τοΧιορκών. Plat. Rep . X, ρ. 32 ο. Άρδιαιος τύραννος eyeyovei ηδη χιΧιοστον έτος εις εκείνον τον χρόνον. Lastly, the accusative is put on account of the pre- 425 position with which a verb is compounded, if the prepo¬ sition of itself, in the same sense, governs the accusa- tive. Soph. Aj. 290. τί τήνέ έφορμ^ί iretpav, 1. e. n 6ppv eiri τήν$β πείραν ; Herod. V, 34. παρεσκενάσαντο κα'ι y Thom. M. p. 183. z Ruhnk. Diss. de Antiph. p. 824. in Reisk. Orat. Gr. T. vu / 610 Syntax, Of the Accusative. σι τα και ποτά , και τειχος βσαξαμτο. Eurip. Andv. 985. €ίσ7Γ€σ€ΐι/ ζυμφοράν. Xen. Cyr . Ill, 1, 5. περιίστασθαί τι. Hence the double accusative : Herod, i, 163. τείχος περι- βαΧεσθαι την πόΧιν. VII, 24. τον ίσθμ ο ν τα$ νέας ό ιειρύσαι . Thuc. Ill, 81. VIII, 7· νπερενε^γκοντές τάς ναυς τον ισθμόν. But with the exception of περΐίστασθαι , it is more common for the preposition to be repeated with these verbs. On the other hand, the following verbs are more frequently constructed with the dative : άμφιβάΧΧειν τι τινι §. 3Q4. d. but Eurip. AndrOTtl. 1 10. όουΧοσύναν στυγε¬ ρόν άμφιβαΧουσα κάρα, είσιεναι τινί §. 394. C. and τινά. Thuc. IV, 30. ούχ ήκιστα αυτόν ταυτα εσγει. VI, 31. μάΧΧον αυτούς εσγει τα όεινά. Comp. Herod, VII, 46 a . επιζεΊν τινί , f to be warm upon any subject", Herod, vn, 13. but Eurip. Iph . T. 994. όεινη τις opy -η όαιμόνων επε- ζεσεν το ΎαντάΧειον σπέρμα , in the sense of f jto break forth against", επιστρατεύειν. See §. 394. Obs. 1. προσ- βάΧΧειν τινί , and τινά. §. 394 . b. Obs. Eurip. Or. 1280. τάχα τις Άρ'γείων ενοπΧος όρμησας ποόι βοηόρόμω μεΧαθρα προσμίζει.—προσοικεΊν τινί. but Thuc. I, 24. προσοικούσι ό’ αυτήν ΎαυΧάντιοι. Eurip. Andr. 165. προσπεσεΐν εμόν / b yovv . Even verbs which are compounded with prepositions, which do not govern an accusative, take an accusative sometimes, as εκπΧεΊν 3 εξεΧθειν, εκβαίνειν τι. §.376. Obs. 1. Eurip. Ion. 311. σηκούς ό’ ενστρεφει Ύροφωνίου, where, however, others read σηκοις , ενστρεφει for ενστρεφεται , 1. e. αναστρεφεται κατά σηκούς Τ ρ. The accusative is frequently put absolutely, i. e. without being governed by another word, verb, adjec¬ tive, or preposition. / . a Valck. ad Her. p. 531, 6'4. b Brunck. ad Eurip. Or. 1. c. s 611 Syntax. Of the Accusative. 1. As an apposition to an entire preposition. Eurip. Or. 1103 . 'ΕΧενην κτάνωμεν, MeveXew Χυπην πίκραν, i. C. ο (το κτείνειν Ελ.) Μ. Χυπη πίκρα εσται. ib. 149*5. ο $€ Χισσομενος, θανατου προβοΧαν, quod , ft. το Χισσεσθαι, munimentum esset contra mortem, ib. 1598. άρνεί κατα¬ κτάς, κάφ ’ υβρει Xeyew τάόε' Xvypav ye την άρνησιν. See of Apposition §. 432, 4. 2 . Frequently the substantive which expresses the leading* idea of a proposition, is put at the beginning of this proposition, in the accusative, without being con¬ nected with the rest of the proposition. This accusative is rendered by quod attinet ad. Od. a , 215 . μητέρα S' e’i o\ θυμός €φορμάται yaμεεσθaι } άφ Ίτω εις μeyapόv, with regard to thy mother, let her go*. Herod, n, 106. τάς Se στηΧας, τά s ίστα κατά τας -χωράς ο Aiyui ττου βασιΧευς ΙΣεσωστρις, αι μεν πΧευνες ονκετι φαίνονται περιεουσαι ; where, however, the accusative τα? στηΧας may be deter¬ mined by the pronoun relative following, τα'? for a?. Soph. (Ed. T. 717. παιόός Se βΧαστάς, ού όιεσχον ημε- ραι τρεΊς , καί νιν άρθρα κείνος ενζενξας ποόοϊν, ερριφεν αΧ- Χων χερσιν εις άβατον όρος. Xen. Cyrop . II, 1, 5. τούς μάντοι ΈΧΧηνας τούς εν τϊ} Ασία οί κουντας, ουόεν πω σαφές XeyeTai, ει επονται. Isocr . Panath. p. 253. Β· αΧΧα μην και τάς στάσεις και τάς σφayάς και τα? των πο- Χιτειων μεταβοΧάς, εκείνοι μεν αν φανειεν απασας τα? πόΧεις, πΧην οΧ'^ων, μεστάς πεποιηκότες των τοιου των συμφορών καί νοσηματων. Sometimes the accusative is not at the beginning. Soph. Antig. 212. σο\ tout άρεσκει, παι Μενοικεως Kpeov, τον τρόε όνσνονν, και τόν ευμενή πόΧει ; with reference to the preceding words of Creon. - , * Obs. From these cases we must distinguish the following: J. When the accusative is connected with a verb in the / 612 Syntax. Of the Accusative. 1 proposition, but is repeated by means of a pronoun, or another equivalent substantive ; which mostly takes place when the accu¬ sative is separated from it’s verb by a long parenthesis, or when the emphasis which lies in the substantive in the accusative, re¬ quires this to be presupposed, and the proposition becomes com¬ plicated by this arrangement. Soph. El. 1364. τούς yap εν μεσψ \oyov ς, ποΧΧαι κυκΧούσι νύκτβς ημεραι τ *ίσαι, cu ταυτά σοι όείζουσιν. Ή Χεκτρα, σαφή. Thuc. ιι. ον. τον οε ηονον τον κατα τον ποΧεμον, μη yevητaι τε ποΧύς και ουόεν μάΧΧον 7 νερ^ενώμεθα, άρκείτω μεν ύμίιν και εκείνα, '€ν οίς άλλοτε ποΧΧάκις ye όη άπεόειϊζα ούκ όρθώς αυτόν υποπτευόμενον. Isocr. Panath. ρ. 241. C. και πρώτον μ€ν τάς Κ υκΧάόας νήσους , τ repl ας eyevovTO ποΧΧαϊ 'tTpuyV-wrelai κατά την Μ ίνω του Κ ρητός όυναστείαν, ταύτας το τεΧευταιον υπο Καρών κατέχομε νας, εκβαΧόντες εκείνους, ουκ εζιόιώσασθαι τάς χώρας ετόΧμησαν. Here the accusa¬ tive may also often be rendered ‘ with regard to’, quod attinet ad, as in the passages adduced. 2. When the accusative is determined by a pronoun rela¬ tive following in the accusative ; for the case of this pronoun has frequently an influence upon the case of the substantive to which it is referred, as in other cases this has upon that of the pronoun. See of the Pronoun relative. §. 474. c. Her. n, 106. τάν όε στηΧας τας \στα κατά τάς χώρας ο Α’^υπτου βασιΧεύς Έεσωστρις , αι μεν πΧευνες ούκετι φαίνονται περιεουσαι , where, in this case, no comma should follow στηΧας : ας Se στηΧας ίστα , — τούτων αι μεν πΧ. Soph. Track . 283. τάσόε $ άση rep είσορςις, - χωρουσι πρός σε. Aristoph. Lys. 408. ω ΧΡ νσο Χ οε > τ°ν όρμον ον επεσκεύασας , ορχουμενης μου της yvva ικος εσπερας , η βαΧανος εκπεπτωκεν εκ του τρήματος , for του όρμου , ον. 3. When in propositions, which are separated by a paren¬ thesis, the writer after the parenthesis quits the construction which was begun before it, and follows another. Her. v, 103. και yap την Καΰνον, πρότερον ου βουΧομενην συμμαχεειν, ως ενεπρησαν τας Σα ρόις, τότε σφι και αυτή ί rpoaeyeveTo, where την Κ αύνον properly should be followed by προσεκτη- σαντο. Xen. Tl. Gr. v, 4, 1. τους των ποΧιτών εί σ ay ay ό ν- 613 Syntax. Of the Accusative. ras eiy την άκρόπολιν αυτούς (Αακεδαιμον'ιονς) και ^ βουλη- θεντας Αακεδαιμον'ιοις την πολιν δουλευειν, " την τούτων άρχην επτά μόνον των (puyo ντων ηρκεσαν καταλυσαι. Comp. ib. νι, 4, 2. where properly it should be: Κλεομβροτον Se, εχοντα to ευ Φ ωκεΰσι στράτευμα, και επερωτωντα τα οίκοι τέλη, τί χρη ποιεΐν - έκελευσαν μη διαλυειν το στράτευμα, but on account of the parenthesis UpoOoov λβξα»'- tos — το' δαιμόνων ηγεν there follows ίπίστειλαν^ όε τω Κλεομβρότω. Isocr. Panath. p. 264. C. το μόνούν / τις τονς Ελλ^ας* όνοι ν θάτερον η συν ay ωνιζομένους 3 η ττοΧΧην έννοιαν έχοντας τοΊς ττραττο- μενοις, especially in Plato. f Jens, et Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. ii, p. 446. 615 Remarks on the Oblique Cases generally· / j When two verbs governing different cases are 428 , joined with one substantive, the substantive properly should stand with each verb in the case required, or at least be repeated once by means of a pronoun. Fre¬ quently, however, the substantive is put only once, and is governed in its case by the verb which stands next to it : Hesiod, ipy. 166 . to?? δε δίχ άνθρωπων β'ιοτον καί ηθε έπάσσας Zet)e Κρονίδης κατενασσε (sc. αύτοΰς ) πατήρ εκ πείρατα -γαίης. TJlUC. VI, 71. (*?*>' αν) χρήματα άμα αΰτόθεν τε ξυΧΧέξωιιται καί παρ’ ’Αθηναίων εΧθη. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 32. μέμνησαι Xiywv oXiytp προτερον, ότι ού δει τοΐί παιδοτ ρίβαις iy καΧε'ιν ού8 έκβάΧΧειν έκ των πόΧεων, έάν ο πνκτης τή πυκτική μή καλώς χρήταί τε και άδική ; ωσαύτως δε καί έάν ο ρήτωρ τή ρητορική άδίκως χρή- ται' μή τψ διδάξαντι iy καΧεΐν μηδε έξεΧαυνειν έκ τής πόΧεως, άΧΧά τώ άδικοΰντι και οϋκ άρθως χρωμενφ τή ρητορική. Rep. V, ρ. 35. πρεσβυτέρα μεν νεωτερών ■πάντων αρχειν τε καί κοΧάζειν προστετάξεται. Isocr. Panath. ρ. 267 * C . ούχ ^ησαντο ceil/ τους αμ£ΐνον των άλ¬ λων φρονούν τας αμελεί f ovSe π e ρ to ρ q.v τας της αυτής (Tvyyevei ία? μ€Τ €χούσας α 7 τολλυμ€νας. Id . Areop. ρ. 149· C. according to the emendation of Wolf, o\ νβωτεροι ev το7ς € 7 Γιτη$€υμασιν ε μεν ον, ev οίς εταχθησαν, ομιλούντες και θ αυμάζοντες τούς ev τούτοις π ρωτ ev όντας. In the same manner os, η, o are often put once with verbs of different government Eurip. Suppl. 863. $ βίος μεν rjv πολύς, ήκιστα ο ολβω yaύpoς ην. Plat. Rep . \ } ρ. 37» οίς €%ον ύχειν ov^ev εχοιεν, foi οίς εζειη ^χειν και οι, fyc. or οι, εξόν αύτοΊς εχειν, ovSev εχοιεν. Symp. 1 - ' *· 616 Syntax. Remarks on the Oblique Cases. p. 226. ώμο\ό·γηται 9 ov ενδεής εστι και μη βχβί, τούτου * ^ fr epqv b . Sometimes the case is governed by the remoter Verb. Soph. (Ed. C. 583. τα δ εν μεσιρ η Χηστιν 'ίσγεις, η δι ουδενός 7Γ οιεΊ. Antig. 537. και ζνμμετίσχω και φέρω ~ · r h της αίτιας . 2. Compounds frequently take,, especially in the Poets, the case which the simple verb governs. Soph. (Ed. C. 1482. εναισίου δε (δαίμονος) σνντύ'χοιμι. Phil. 320. συντνχων κακών άνδρών Ατρειδών, της τ Όδυσσεως βίας'. Interchange of Substantives amongst one another and with Adjectives: Circumlocution. l. Substantives of different classes are often inter¬ changed : substantives especially which express a ge¬ neral idea of kind, are put for the definite person or thing to which that idea, as in one single case, refers : abstractum pro concreto. II. if, 201, 302. ’Ωκεανόν re, θεών γενεσιν, και μητέρα Ύηθύν , for ·γεννητορα. AEsch. Choeph. 1025. μητέρα , θεών στύλος, { object of the hatred'. Eurip. Ph(En. 1506. α·γεμόνευμα νεκροισι ποΧύ- στονον , for ήρεμων. Troad. 420. νύμφευμα , for νύμφη. Soph. Aj.3 81. στρατού αΧημα, for αΧητης. Thuc.ll , 41. την Ίτόλιν e Ruhnk. ad Horn. Η. in Cer. 151. Herm. ad Viger. p. 707. Schaef. adJLong. p. 397 sq. h Pors. ad Eur. Med. 734. Fisch. hi, a. p. 448. * Bruuck. ad Eur. Or. 1291. Phil. 1. c. Syntax . Interchange, of Substantives , fyc. 617 π αίδευσ iv είναι της EWccdos, ί*ΟΓ παιδευτριαν ^ . In JE$ch· Agam. 202 . 7 rvoal βροτών a\ai, c are the storms which cause men to wander out of their way at sea’. In prose πρεσβεΊαι for πρέσβεις, c embassies for em¬ bassadors’, is very common; also in connection with κηρυκες. Thuc. II , 12 . ην Π ερικΧεους γνώμη πρότερον νενικηκυΊα, κηρυκα και πρεσβείαν μη προσδεχεσθαι Λακε¬ δαιμονίων εζεστρατευμενών. Comp. IV, 118. Plat. Leg. χιι, ρ. 195 . Isocr. Panath . ρ. 268. D . E. Thus in Eur. Suppl. 173 . πρεσβευματα is used * 1 . Thus also η ξυμμαχία, for οι ξυμμαχοι , Herod. I, 82. ThllC. I, 118. 119.130. υπηρεσία, for ύπηρόται, Tkuc.l , 143. Isocrat. * Paneg. c. 39· 2. Words which signify the inhabitants of a country are sometimes put for the name of the country. Phuc . I 107. Φ ωκεων στρατευσάντων ες Δωριάς, την Λακεδαιμο¬ νίων μητρόποΧιν , $C. Thus I, 52. όρώντες προσγεγενημενας vads εκ τών Αθηναίων ακραιφνές, for έξ ’Αθηνών. Ib. 110. ίκ ύε των ’Αθηναίων και τής άλλης ξνμμαχί$ος ττεντήκοντα τριήρεκ διάδοχοι ττλεονσαι es Αίγυπτον εσχον κατά το Mer- δήσιον κεράς. Thus some national appellations in Latin. in Sequanos, in JEduos. 3 . · Patronymics are often used for the proper name from which the patronymic is derived, e. g. Άγνωνίδης for ’ Λγνων, ΑημοκΧείδης for ΔημοκΧης. See §.101 . 4. Frequently two substantives are put for adjec¬ tives. II. ft/, 58. * Έκτωρ μεν θνητός τε, γυναίκα τε θησατο k Casaub. ad Athen. ρ. 11. Valcken. ad Eur. Hipp. v, 406. ad Ph. p. 506. Brunek. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 85. Philoct. 25.9. 1 Casaub. ad Atb. p. 30. Miscell. Pbilol. 1 , p. 256. m Koen. ad Greg. p. 133. Ruhnk; Hist. Crit. Orat. Gr. p. xc. / > 618 Syntax. Interchange of Substantives, fyc. μαζόν. Hesiod. epy. 191. μάλλον Se κακών ρέκτη pa και υβριν άνερα τιμησουσιν. Herod. IV, 78. *£λλα£α γλώσσαν, for which he puts IV, 108. 7 λ. ‘ Ελληνικήν . VII, 22. Σάνη, πόΧις Έλλα?. Soph. Phil . 223. Έλλα9 στοΧη. Eurip . Ph. 609 . κόμπος el n . Plato often uses Χήρος , nugce , for nu¬ gatory ‘atrifler* 0 . Properly both substantives in this case should be of the same gender; but a masculine is often joined with a feminine. JEsch. Agam. 675. τύχη Se σωτηρ νανν θε- Χουσ εφεζετο, for σώτειρα. Comp. Soph. (Ed. T. 80. 5 . Hence the circumlocution, in which a substan¬ tive is put with another in the genitive, instead of an adjective. Aristoph. Pint. 268 . ώ χρυσόν άγγεΐλας επών, for επη χρυσά. Eurip. Bacch. 388. ο της ησυχίας βίο - το 9 , for βίος ήσυχος. A similar circumlocution is, when the same substan¬ tive is put twice, once in the genitive, in order to ex¬ press a kind of superlative, e. g. αναξ άνόκτων. JEsch. Suppl. 533. for ‘the greatest king'. Adjectives espe¬ cially are used in this manner, of which hereafter p . 6. The following substantives in particular are used in circumlocution : \ ■ ! *#V -I βία, is*, μένος , ‘strength*, e. g. βίη ΉρακΧηείη. Αίνείαο βίη, in Homer, Κάστορος βία Pind . Pyth. χι, 93. Tv- όεος βία xEsch. S. G. Ph. 77. no\i>mVeo9 βία Eurip. Ph. 56. for ΒρακΧης , Αινείας, K άστωρ, Ti/3eJ9, ΤΙοΧννείκης, but η Valck. ad Eur. Ph. p. 38. Ernesti ad Callim. p. 138. Abrcsch. ad iEsch. 11 , p. 71. Koen. ad Greg. p. 45. Musgr. ad Eur. Ph. 1. c. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. T. 80. ad Phil. 1. c. 0 Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 402. p Fisch. 11 , p. 123. / Syntax. Interchange of Substantives , fyc. 619 with the collateral idea of f strength’ or f powers as in Latin, perrupit Acheronta Herculeus labor: Ca¬ to nis virtus incaluit mero. Thus ίς ΎηΧεμάχοω, ις άνεμου (even t? βίης ΐϊρακΧηείης Hes. Tkeog. 332.) as odora canum vis. μένος ’ ΑΧκινόοιο , ’*Αρηος } άνεμου 3 ηεΧίου, 8$C. σθένος "ϋετίωνος IL 817. σθένος ίππων, ημιονων Pind. ΟΙ. νι, 38. κηρ. II. β', 851. ΥίαφΧα^όνων δ* ηγείτο ΧΙυΧαιμενεος Χάσιον κηρ. φόβος. Hes. Sc. Η. 144. εν μεσσω δε δράκοντος εην φόβος. πείρας, τεΧος , τεΧευτη, especially in the Epic Poets. II. ζ', 143. ως κεν θάσσον όΧεθρον πείραθ ’ ίκηαι, for όΧεθρον. Thus θανάτοιο τεΧος in Homer and Hesiod, τεΧεντη θανάτοιο Hes. Sc. Η. 357. These circumlo¬ cutions seem chiefly intended to mark the perfection of a thing. In the Tragic and the Lyric writers the folio wing- circumlocutions chiefly occur: δέμας, * a body’, JEsck. Eumen. 84. κτανείν μητρφον δέμας, tor την μητέρα. Soph. (Ed. C . 1550. νυν δ έσχατον σου τούμόν άπτεται δέμας, for ε<γω. Comp. (Ed. Τ. 1208. "Track . 908. φίΧων οϊκετών δέμας , for φίλους οί,κετας Eurip. Hec. 718 . άλλ’ εισορω yap τον δε δεσπότου S ε¬ μάς Αγαμεμνονος, 8fC. κάρα. Soph. (Ed. Τ. 950. ω φίΧτατον y υναικός Ίοκά - στης κάρα. 1235. τεθνηκε θειον I οκάστης καρα. Eurip. Or. 470. ω χάιρε πρεσβυ, Ζηνός όμόΧεκτρον κάρα. 475. , Λ f » ' / πρoσφθεyyει νιν ανοσιον καρα. Thus the Epic Poets use κάρηνον and κεφαλή. II. ί, 407. Χηιστοί μεν y άρ τε βόες και ίφια μηΧα, κτητοι δε τρί¬ ποδες τε καί ίππων ζανθά κάρηνα. Hesiod . Sc. Η. 104. 620 Syntax. Interchange of Substantives , fyc. r 1 / 1 $ σην κβφαλην. Thus also Pindar 01. vi, 102. αιτίων Χαοτρόφον τιμάν τιν ea κεφαΧαί, for of. ομμα and ονομα. JEsch. Prom . 65 9. TO Siov ομμα , for Zei/s. Soph. Tr. 527. TO & άμφινείκητον ομμα νύμφας eXeeivov άμμένβι. Eurip. Ph. 313. χρόνι ρ σον ομμα μνρίαις έν άμέραις προσβι^ον. Or. 1080. ώ ποθβινον ονομ ομιΧιας €μης, χαιρβ, for ώ ποθβινη ομιΧία and this for ομιΧητης. Ion. 1280. ώ ταυρόμορφον ίμμα Κηφ ίσου πατρός, οΐαν ίχιδναν την$ έφυσας. The two words, however, are often confounded q . σέβας. xEsch. Prom. 1099. ώ μητρός έμης σέβας. Soph, Phil. 1289· άπω μ οσ ayvov Ζηνός νφιστον σέβας. In prose the circumlocution with παΊ^ς, υιοί , and χρήμα especially occur. Herod, i, 27. έΧθβΊν έπι Λν$ών ί rail ας, for έπ\ Ανθους, and passim. Thus Homer i/fes ‘Αχαιών, as κούροι ’ Αχαιών . Comp. Pind. Isthm. IV, 62. χρήμα. Herod. I, 36. συος χρήμα μέya, for μ^ας σνς. Eurip. Ph. 205. χ^ρημα θηΧαων. Ar'lSt. Nub. 2. το χρήμα τών νυκτών. Xen. Cyrop. II, 1, 5. σφβνδονητών παμποΧν τι χρημα ν . . · 7. Another circumlocution is, where a personal denomination which expresses an office or business, a situation, &c. is accompanied by the substantives άνηρ, άνθρωπος, in the same case, άνθρωπος here expresses mostly 4 contempt'; avtjp, on the other hand, 4 respect', e.g. Lysias in Nicom . p. 864. ed. R. οι μέν πpόyovoι νομοθέτας q Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. 415. Pors. ad Eur. Or. 1080. r Valck. ad Eur. Ph. p. 70. More instances of circumlocution (which', however, are not all circumlocutions, inasmuch as they express more than the proper substantive) are collected by Fisch. in, a. p. 269 — 290 . I 621 Syntax. Of Apposition. ■ ' . * γρουντο ΣόΧωνα και θεμιστοκΧεα και Π ερικΧεα -. ύμεϊς δε Ύισαμενόν τον Μ η'χανίωνος και Νικόμαχον και ετερους } αν - Θ Ρ ώπους ύπογ ραμματεας. Plat. Gorg. p. 154. διακό¬ νους μοι Χεγεις και επιθυμιών παρασ κευαστάς ανθρώ¬ πους. On the other hand, in addresses, άνδρε s δικασται, άνδρες στρατιώται, άνδρες *Αθηναίοι are commonly used. Elsewhere άνηρ is put with these personal denomina¬ tions, when the class only is to be indicated to which he belongs, without regard to the persons for whom he exercises that office. Thus too Thuc. i, 74. ανδρα στρατηγόν ζυνετώτατον παρεσχόμεθα. βοών επιβουκόΧος άνηρ in Homer 8 . Of Apposition. ; ? Apposition is, when a substantive or pronoun perso¬ nal is accompanied by another substantive without a conjunctive particle, in the same case, serving to ex¬ plain the former, or to supply any definition whatever for the sake of emphasis or clearness. It is to be ren¬ dered by the pronoun relative with εστ’ι , ε\σί } and hence many of the cases which came under the head of Predicate, are found under that of Apposition. The sub¬ stantive which is added should be properly in the same case and number as the first; but they often deviate from this, especially if the apposition contains an ab- stractum pro concreto (§. 429. l.) Hes. Th. 792. η δε μι (μοίρα) εκ πετρης προρεει , μεγα πημα θεοισιν. Herod. I, 205. γέφυρας ζευγνυων επί του ποταμού διάβασιν τιρ * Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 217. Buttman Gr. Gr. §. 277· 431. VOL. II. R V * 622 Syntax, Of opposition, t _ στρατω. as JEschyl. Agam. 953. υπαί τις άρβυΧας \ύοι τάχος, πρόδουΧον εμβασιν ποδός. Soph. (Ed. C. 472. I κρατηρες είσιν , άνδρός ευχειρος τέχνη. Eurip. Ph. 829. οι μη νόμιμον τοι παιδες ματρί Χοχευμα , μίασμά τε πατρός. Id Troad. 429· άπεχθη μα πά*γκοινον βροτοις οι περί τυράννους και πόΧεις ύπηρεται. The apposition is often in the plural, whilst the substantive is in the sin¬ gular. Eur. Hipp. 11. ΊππόΧυτ os, ayvoii ΤΙιτθεως παι - δε υματα. Or. 1050. πως αν ζίφος νω ταυτόν, εί θεμις, κτά- νοι, και μνήμα δεζαιθ’ εν , κέδρου τεχνάσματα. PhtETl. 819· Sq. μηδε ( ωφεΧε ) το παρθένων πτερόν ουρειον τέρας εΧθεΊν, πενθεα ·γα«α?, Σφιyyός. Thus it stood Soph . Phil. 36. correctly before the edition of Brunck : αύ- τόζυΧόν y εκ πώμα, φXaυpoυpyoυ τίνος τέχνη ματ άν- δρός *. In Apposition the following cases are more especially to be noticed in Greek: l. When the Apposition refers to pronoun posses¬ sive, it is put in the genitive. Aristoph. Plut. 33. to v εμόν μεν αυτου του ταΧαιπω ρου σχεδόν η δη νομΐζων εκ- τετοξευσθαι βίον. See more examples in the Pron. pos¬ sess. §. 469, l. 3 9 1 . V J ' ■ » . · * · “ " “ «*·■ .» ‘ ·*·* · · Thus also in adjectives, which are derived from pro¬ per names, if the proper name contained in it is to in¬ clude a definition. II. β', 54. N εστορεγ παρά νηί, Πυλ»/- y ενεος βασιΧηος. ε, 741. εν δε τε Topyείη κεφαΧη δεινοϊο πεΧω ρου. Plat. Apoll. S. ρ. 69· Αθηναίος ων, ποΧεως της μεyίστης και εύδοκιμωτάτης εις σοφίαν και ίσχυν , χρημάτων ουκ αισχύνη επιμεΧόμενος η ; Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. Τ. 2 67 . 1 Pors. ad Eiir. Or. 1. c. u Syntax . Of Apposition. 623 . i * 2. Apposition also is used, though the word, which by these means is to be defined more accurately, does not stand with it. Luc . D. D. 24, 2. 6 δε Mai as της "AtXuv- τος διακονουμαι αυτοΐς , where ο Maias is in apposition to the personal pronoun βγω, which is contained in διάκο¬ νονμαι. 3. Apposition is also used in order to determine 432. more accurately a whole or a general idea, by means of subjoining the parts or the particular ideas of parts which are properly implied. II. 0' , 48. 283. ’Ίδην δ' ’ 'ίκανεν ποΧυπίδακα, μητέρα Θηρών , Tapy αρον, ί. e. f tO Gar- garus’, a single point of Ida. φ> , 37. δ δ* ερινεόν όξεϊ χαΧκφ τάμν€, νέους όρττηκας. π, 502. ως άρα μιν ε’ιττόν- τα τεΧος θανάτοιο κάΧνφεν } όφθαΧμους ρινάς τε. II. υ, 44. Τ ρώας δε τρόμος αίνος ύπηΧυθε yv7a έκαστον. Thuc. I, 107. Φ ωκεων στρατευσάντων ες Δωριάς, την Λακεδαιμο¬ νίων μητρόποΧιν, Βοιομ και Κ ντίνιον και Έρινεόν ,— — οι Λακεδαιμόνιοι -— εβοηθησαν το7ς Δωριευσιν. Plat . Rep. X. p. 326. τον δε Άρδιαϊον κα\ αΧΧους συμποδί- σαντες, ψείρας τε και ττόδας και κεφαΧην , εϊΧκον. For the determining a general idea by means of the ideas of its component parts. II. ε , 122. yv7a δ’ εθηκεν εΧαφρά. 7 τόδας και χε7ρας υπερθεν. 4. Frequently also a substantive with an adjective is subjoined in apposition to an entire proposition, at least to several words of it, in order to express an opinion or sentence upon the contents of the proposition. II. ω , 735. η τις Αχαιών ρίφει , χειρός εΧων, αττό irvpyov , Xvypov οΧεθρον. i. e. ός εστι Xvy ρός οΧεθρος. xEsch. Aganil. 233. ετΧη Θντηρ yεvεσθaι OvyaTpos , yυvaικo^Γoίvωv ττοΧεμων αρω· yav και ναών προτεΧεια, i. e. ο, VIZ. το θυτηρα yεve- σθαι ΟΓ θύειν, ειη άν apwyrj. Soph . (Ed. Τ· 603. /cat, τώνδ7 sXcyxo ν, τούτο μεν Πι/0ω$ ιών ττευθου , τα χρησθεντ ει σαφώς ηyyεtXά σοι. τουτ αλλ, εάν , δ$Ό. ί. e. ό > το πεύ* R 2 433. 624 Syntax. Of Apposition. θεσθαι ΠυθοΊ, e\ey χος τώνδε εσται. Eurip. Hec . 1158. το λοίσθιου δε, π η μα πηματος πλέον, εζειργασαντο δειν . «ycqo ομμάτων —— —τα? ταλαίπωρους κόρας κεντουσιν. Ph(£Tl. 1234. ταί παιδε τω σω μελλετον, τόλμηματα αίσχιστα, χωρίς μονομαχειν παντός στρατού , when the plllF. IS put for the singular, as §. 431. Plat. Gorg. p. 131. ουτος εμονγε δοκει ό σκοπός είναι, προς ον βλεποντα δει ζην, KCU πάντα εις τούτο τά αυτόν σνντείνοντα και τα της πολεως, όπως δικαιοσύνη παρεσται και σωφροσύνη τω μακαρίφ μελλοντι εσεσθαι, ουτω πράττειν, ουκ επιθυμίας εωντα ακόλαστους είναι και ταυτας επιχειρουντα πληρούν, άνηνυτον κακόν, Χτίστου βίο» ζάντα. Thus also in Latin, e. g. Cic. de Orat. ii, 19, 79. Or. 16, 52*. ' y , % Ohs. 1. It is a kind of apposition when a substantive is repeated with an additional proposition, e. g. II. φ' , 85. Ααοθοη, θυ Γ γάτηρ Άλταο γεροντος, u Αλτεω, ος Αελεηεσσι φιλοπτο- λεμοισιν άνάσσει. Here the substantive should properly be put twice in the same case, but Homer puts it the second time in the nominative. I/. ζ, 395. Ανδρομάχη, < θυ^άτηρ μεγαλητο- ρος Άετίωνος, Ίϊετίων, ός εναιεν υπό Ώλάκω υληεσσγ]. Od. a, 51. Of Ulysses : ός δη δηθά φίλων άπο πηματα πά¬ σχει νησω εν αμφιρυτρ , οθι τ ομφσλος εστι θαλασσής, νήσος δενδρηεσσα, θεα χ εν δωμασι ναίει. * .V * Obs. 2. Frequently the substantive which is put in apposi¬ tion to another, contains not so much an explanation or fuller determination of the former, as the operation or design of it. II. δ', 155. θάνατόν νυ τοι όρκι εταμνον, where, in English, we should say, ( for thy death*. AZsch. Again· 823. θεοί άνδροθνητας Ίλί'οι; φθοράς είς αιματηρόν τεύχος ου διχορ- ρόπως φηφους εθεντο, unless φηφους εθεντο φθοράς for εφηφίσαντο φθοράς be preferable, as §. 413. Obs. 5. Euiip. Or. 802. οπότε χρυσέίας ερις άρνός ηλυθε ΤανταΧ/δαι?, οι κ¬ ι ϊ ii' χ Misc. Philol. νοί. η, ρ. 7 sq. where however different cases are intermixed. Heind, ad Plat. Gorg. p. 210. > f; Syntax, Of Opposition. 62 5 I τρότατα θοινάματα και σφάγια γενναίων τεκεων. Id. Phan. 1372. ώ τΧημον , οΐον τερμον I οκάστη } βίου γάμων τε των σων 3 Σφιγγδς αίνιγμους, ετΧης. See Poison’s note. Also besides the apposition, the accusative is put in this sense. Soph. (Ed. C. 91· δΧεξεν - ενταύθα κάμψειν τον ταΧαίπωρον βίον , κέρδη μεν οίκησαιτα τοις δεδεγμενοις, ατην δε τοις πεμψασιν , where κερδη } ατην should be pro¬ perly an apposition to κάμψει v βίον , yet take to themselves a verb, without being governed by it. # I Obs. 3. Frequently a substantive which is joined to another, without a copula , is to be explained by ‘ as’. Hesiod. Th . 788. of the Styx: εξ ιερού 7 τοταμοιο ρεει διά νύκτα μεΧαιναν , ΩκεανοΊο κεράς' δεκάτη δ’ επί μοίρα δεδασται, ‘ as the tenth part’. According to the prose idiom the auxiliary verb ειμί should be put instead of the substantive verb, δεκάτη μοΊρα εστίν 3 in which case δεκάτη μοίρα would be the predicate. See §.309. Thus too Mschyl. Agam. 81* το υπεργηρων - 7ταί$ο'ν ουδέ v άρειον δναρ η με ρό φαντ ον άΧαίνει. Also in other cases. Plat. Protag. p. 100. τα Ίς τεχναις ταύταις πα- ραπετάσμασιν εχριίσαντο, ‘ as cloaks’. Hence the apposition frequently expresses a comparison; or the thing compared, and that to which it is compared, meet in one. Eurip. Or. 545. ση δ ετικτε πυχς, το σπερμί άρουρα παραΧαβουσ άλΧον 7 τάρα. Iphig. A. 1226. ικετηρίαν δε γόνασιν εξάπτω σεθεν τό σώμα τουμόν , δπερ ετικτεν ηδε σοι. Rhes. 56. ώ δαΊμον , δστις μ ευτυγουντ ενόσφισας θοίνης Χεοντα. So in Horace, Rusticus exspectal y dum defluat amnis. Obs. 4. Words which express generally a class, kind, οχ qua¬ lity, are often accompanied by words which contain a more exact determination of them, in the same case, without a copula, whilst, in other languages, the latter are put in the genitive. Herod. 111 , 5, επί τρεις η με ρ ας odoe, trium dierurn iter. Plat. Soph. p. 226. και δη καί τούτω ye οΊμαι μδνω της άγνοιας αμαθία τ ον νομα προσρηθηναι. Rep. V, ρ. 55. μεΧαγ- χΧωρους δε και τ ου ν ο μα ο'ίει τίνος αΧΧου ποίημα είναι η εραστου υποκοριζρμενου. Charm, ρ. 153. ονδαμη δυνάμεθα ευρειν , εφ' οτιρ ποτέ των οντων ο ονοματοθέτης (vulg. νρμο- / 626 Syntax. Combination of Adjectives , $c. θετής) τούτο τουνομα εθετο την σωφροσύνην. See §. 414. 2. Xen. Cyr. II, 2, 12. ο άλαζών εμοι^ε δοκει ονο- μα κεισθαι επί τοϊς προσποιούμενοι καί πλουσιωτεροιςείναι, % είσι, καί ανδρειοτεροις, fa. Lys. Epit. ρ. 82. ο της 'Ασίας βασιλεύς - εστειλε πεντηκοντα μυριάδας στρατιάν . Yet here also the genitive is very often put as τριών ημερών όδός, το της άμαθίας ονομα, στρατιά πολλών μυριάδων , §c. The same takes place in the predicate, bee §. 309. Of the Combination of Adjectives , Adjective-Pronouns, and Participles , with Substantives. ) . ■ 1 I i ! J ·· i r ' * **"$ 1 Adjectives, adjective-pronouns (as the pron. posses- Siva. ουτος, αυτή , τούτο, οδε, 8$C. αυτός , ός, ή, ο.), and participles, are governed properly, in gender and num¬ ber, by the substantives, with which they are put as epi¬ thets or predicates, or to which they are referred. An adjective, for instance, stands as an epithet, when with its substantive it constitutes one whole; so that the substan¬ tive, without the determination, conveyed in the adjective, would be imperfect; as a predicate, when a new de¬ termination is subjoined to a substantive considered as perfect. Prom this rule there are many deviations in Greek writers: J. They refer an adjective, &c. to the substantive only in its sense, and put it in the gender which is im¬ plied in the substantive, though this last should have a different grammatical gender. J a. Adject, and partic. II. χ , 84. φίλε τεκνον , of Hector, and V. 87. φίλον θάλος , ον τεκον αύτη. II. π, 280. εκίνηθεν δε φάλay'yes ελπόμενοι , because the φαλ. 627 Syntax* Combination of Adjectives, fyc. are an aggregate of men. Herod, v, 11 5. των de εν Ιίυπρω πολίων άντεσχε χρόνον επι πλαστόν πολιορκευ - μόνη Σόλοι, την , περιζ ύπορυσσοντες τό τείχος πεμπτφ μηνι d\ov οι Π όρσαι* AEsck. Agam. 120. βοσκόμενοι \ctyi· ναν ερικυμονα φερματι yew αν, β\α βόντα λοίσθιων δρο - μων. Plat. Phcedr. p. 3 04. ούτε δη κρείττω ούτε ίσου - μεν ον εκων εραστής παιδικά άνεζεται, ήττω δε και υποδεέστερον άει anrepyaaeTat· p . 306. ert τοίνυν aya- μον , άπαιδα, αοικον ότι πλειστον χρόνον παιδικά ερα~ στης ευζαιτο αν γενεσθαι. Xetl. Cyr. I, 2, 12. αι μενουσαι φυλαι - δ ιayωvι < ζό μενοι ταυτα προς άλληλους δια~ τελουσιν*. « / b. Pronoun. Eur. Suppl. 12 . θανόντων επτά yevvaiwv τέκνων, - ους ποτ Apyeiwv άναξ Άδραστος rjyayev. 2. Hence a noun collective in the singular and femi¬ nine, or neuter, is often accompanied by the adjective in the plural and masculine. JEschyl. Agam. 588. T ροίην ελόντες δη ποτ Apye'wv στολος, $$C. Thltcyd . I, 143. κνβερνητας ’όχομεν πολίτας και .την άλλην υπηρεσίαν πλείους και άμείνους. XeYl* Hist . Gr. II, 3, 55. η δε βουλή ησυχίαν εΊχεν - ούκ ayi νοουντες, ότι ey χειρίδια εχον - τες παρησαν*. In both respects Thucyd. hi, 79· T j? ^ υστεραία επί μεν την πόλιν ουδεν μάλλον επεπλεον j καίπερ εν πολλή ταραχή και φόβιμ όντας. b. With pronouns. II. π, 368. (Έκτωρ) λείπε λαόν Τρωικόν , ους άεκοντας ορυκτή τάφρος ερυκε. IsocVttt. Plat· ρ. 299· Ε· τηλικουτου στρατευματος οντος θεσπιασιν, υφ> ών ου μόνον ουκ αν ελαττον η υπο Θηβαίων διεφθα ρημεν^ αλλά και δικαιότερου. Pauath. Ρ. 270. Α. το τρίτον με~ y Valck. ad Eurip. Phoen. p. 436. Koen. ad Greg. p. 29. 3 7- Fisch. hi, a. p. 306. 317 sq. Herm. ad Vig. p. 713, 49. z Fisch. 1. c. Bibl. Crit. hi, 2, 35. Dorville ad Char. p. 415. \ i. . 628 Syntax . Combination of Adjectives , fyc. I \ pos αΰτωι /j oi)s κάΧούμεν vvv Λακεδαιμονίους, στασιασαι μεν φασιν αυτούς οι τα εκείνων ακριβούντες, ως ουδένας αΧΧους των 'ΕΧΧηνων. In the same manner Xen. Mem. S. n, l, 31. τις αν ευ φρονών τού σου Θιάσου τοΧμησειεν είναι , οι, νέοι μεν όντες τοις σωμασιν αδύνατοι είσίν, 8$C. Thus the relative also often stands in the plural, after a singular antecedent, when it does not refer to the definite individual person or thing, but to the whole class: as if for οΐος. Eurip. Or. 90S. άνδρεΊος άνηρ, οΧιγάκις αστυ κα- y ορας χραίνων κύκΧον , aυτoυpyός, ο'ίπερ καί μονοί σωζουσι y ην, cujus generis homines. See Poison’s note. Plat. Rep . VIII, p. 204. αυχμηρός y0 τις ων, καί άπό παντός πε¬ ριουσίαν ποιούμενος , θησαυροποιος ανηρ’ ους δη και επαινεί το 7 τΧηθος. Similar to this is the construction, when an adjective or participle is governed in gender by the substantive, which is in the genitive, but in case by the substantive which governs that genitive. II. β\ 459. « των δ’, ωστ ορνίθων πετεηνών εθνεα ποΧΧα - ένθα και ένθα πο- τωνται ay αΧΧόμεναι πτεpυyεσσιv. Soph. Antig. 1001. ayvcoT ακούω φθόyyov ορνίθων, κακιρ κΧαζοντας οΐ“ στρφ κρί βεβαρβαρωμενω. Aj. 168. πτηνών ay εΧαι με~ yav α’^υπιόν ύποδεισαντες Ά . In the same manner a singular in a collective sense is used, to which a participle in the plural is referred. Soph. Antig. 1021. οι)3’ όρνις εύσημους άπορροιβδεϊ βοας, άνδροφθόρου βεβρώτες α'ίματος Χίπος. — Thus too the relative. Plat. Rep . VI, p. 71. μαθήματος αεί ερώσιν ( ο'ιφιΧο- σοφοί) όσα άν αύτοις δηΧοι , 8$C. Obs. It is a somewhat different case, when the writer, in¬ stead of the word actually used, imagiues another equivalent to it indeed, but of another gender, and refers to this the adjective Fisch. in, a. p. 314. \ Syntax. Combination of Adjectives, Sfc. 629 or participle. Od. μ, 74. νεφέλη όέ μιν όμφιβεβηκε κυανεη 7 ο μέν ουποτ έρωεί, where το μεν νέφος is alluded to. Time. Π, 47. η νόσος -πρώτον ηρξατυ yeveaOat τοις Μ)η- ναίοις, λε'/όμενον μέν και πρότερον πολλαχοσε ε-ματασκη- φαι, as if τό νόσημα preceded. See Duker’s note on the passaged Adjectives and demonstrative pronouns are often 435 referred, in respect of gender, to words which are im¬ plied in a preceding one from the sense or the composi¬ tion. II. t, 383. θηβαι, a'i θ’ έκατόμπνλοι εισί, όιηκοσιοι id έκάστην (πόλην) όνέρες ε’ισόιχνεύσι. Herod. IV, 110. έντυχούσαι έέ πρώτω 'ιπποφορβίψ, τοίτο όιηρπασαν' και επι τούτων (ίππων) ’ιππαζόμεναι έληίζοντο τα των Σκνθεωυ. Soph. Track. 0,60. (Ερχεται ττοΧιν την Ευ ρντειαν τον, ε , yip μεταίτιον μόνον βροτων ’έφασκε τοόϋ είναι πόθους. Eunp. Hec. 21. έπεϊ ύέ Τροία θ’, "Εκτορός τ’ ώπόλλυται ψυχή, πα¬ τρώα θ’ έστία κατεσκάφη, αύτός U (viz. πατύ,ρ) βωμψ πρός θεοόμήτψ πιτνεί. Phan. 12. καλού σι ό Ίοκαστην με' τούτο (όνομα) yip πατήρ ’έθετα. Plat. Leg. Ι,ρ. 45. θαύμα μέν 'έκαστον ή Ί ησώμεθα τών ζώων θειον, είτε ώς παίγνιον έκείνων, (τών θεών) είτε ώς σπονέη τινι ξυνεστηκος. IX, ρ. 26. παιΰιά χρώμενος, ούόέν πω τών τοιούτων όιαφε- ρων, VIZ. irai$wv c . This takes place in the pronoun relative os, v, o. Hesiod. Theog. 450. θηκε όέ μιν Κρονίόης κουροτρόφον, ο'Ι (κούροι) μετ’ έκείνην όφθαλμοίσιν ίΐοντο φάος πολυόερκεος ’Hour. Thuc. VI, 80. ώστε ούκ ώθρόους yε όντας είκός αθν- μΐ : ν _ άλλως τε καί όπό Ώ,ελοποννησου παρεσομενης ώφελείας, ο'ί Πελοποννήσιοι or ο\ ώφέλειαν φέροντες, %, e. t * ‘ ϊ ji b Gregor, p. 37 sq. et Koen. C Valck. ad Phcen. p. 10. Wessel. ad Diod. S. T. i, p. 373, 81. Person, ad Ear. Hec. 22. Eisch. Prief. ad Well. Gr. p. xx sq. ill, a. p. 26'8. Herm. ad Vig. p. 712. 44. Heind. ad Plat. 1 heaet. p. ob9- I 630 Syntax. Combination of Adjectives, fyc. ^ / σύμμαχοι) τωι tSe κρεισσους εισι το παράπαν τα πολέμια. Soph. Afitig. 1130. και / ' 5 ’' προς νοτον και μεσογαιαν της Αιρυης έρημος και ανυόρος και άθηρος και άνομβρος και άζυΧός εστι η χώρη. In Thucyd. νιι, 62. και yap τοζόται ποΧΧοι και άκοντισται επιβησονται και όγΧος, ώ, ναυμαγίαν μεν ποιούμενοι εν πεXάyει J ουκ αν εχρωμεθα, οια το βλαπτειν αν το της επιστήμης Ttj ραρυτητι των νέων, εν δε τη ηvayκaσμεvr| από των νέων πεζομαχίμ π ρο σ- φορα εσται. It should be properly: os ( οχΧος) πρόσφορος εσται. But the proposition εν δε Trj η vayK, fyc. does not de¬ pend upon the relative, and πρόσφορα εσται is put for πρόσφο - pov εσται (see §. 443.) where we must understand τψ όχΧψ, χρησθαι. 5. Proper names in the singular are often accom- 438. panied by the adjectives πρώτος, πάς, and others, in the neuter plural, as predicates, or in apposition. Herod, vi, 100. Αισχίνης ό N όθωνος, εών των Έρετριεων τα πρώτα. IX, 77 · Λαμπών ό Τίυθεω, Aiy ινητεων τα πρώτα, prin- ceps Eretriensium , Mginetarum. Eurip. Med. 912. οΊμαι yap υμάς τησόε y ης Κορινθίας τα πρώτ εσεσθαι. Comp. Or. 1245. Herod. Ill, 157· πάντα όη ην [[εμ] τοίσι Βαβυλωνίοισι Ζωτ τυρός. e was every thing to them*, vn. m See Wesseling's Note. 439. 636 Syntax . Combination of Adjectives , £fc. 156. 6 Se (ΓεΧων) τα? 'Συρηκουσας εκράτυνε ,· /cat εσαν άπαν¬ τά οι at Σι t ρη κουσ αι· ' Thuc. VIII, 95. Εί/βοια yap αύτοΊς άποκεκΧ^σμενης της Αττικής πάντα ην. Soph . Philoct. 435. Πάτροκλο?, ο? σοο πατρός ην τα φ ίΧτατα. In these phrases, πρώτα is commonly put with πάντα without the article, yet Eurip. Hec. 788. πρώτα των εμών φ'ιΧων, where, however, Brunck reads τα πρώτα τών ε. φ. Porson πρώτος ών εμών φίΧων. Herod. I, 122. ην τε οι εν τώ Xoyo) τά πάντα η Κ.ννώ } c Cyno was every thing in his story : he talked of nothing but Cyno’\ Demonstrative pronouns are often not in the gen¬ der of the substantive to which they refer, but in the neuter, provided the idea of the substantive in the ab¬ stract be considered generally as a thing or matter. Plat. Alcib. I, p. 29* ττώ? ούν λεγβί? περί άνόρίας; επί πόσω αν αν του όεζαιο στερεσθαι ; Each, p · 175. ei τις a ρα ημών τεχνικός περί φυχης θεραπείαν, καί οίο? τε καΧως τουτο (την φνχην) θεραπευσαι ; Xen. Ct/rOp. I, 6, 28. Χεουσι καί άρκτοις καί παρόάΧεσιν ουκ εις το ’ίσον καθιστάμενοι εμάχεσθε, άΧΧα μετά πΧεονεζίας τίνος αεί επειράσθε aywi άζεσθαι προς αυτά. Aristot. Polit. VII, p. 589. C. όεΊ καί χopηyίaς τίνος το ζρν καΧώς, τούτον όε εΧάττονος μεν τοΤ? άμεινον όιακει- μενοις, πΧείονος όε τοις χείρον. Thus too Plat. Rep. IV, p . 331. 7 τΧουτός τε καί πει>ία 3 α>? του μεν ( πΧουτου ) τρυφήν τε καί apyiav καί νεωτερισμόν εμπιουντος , του όε (της πενίας) άνεΧευθερίαν καί KaKoepyiav προς τώ νεωτερισμώ. These pronouns are even put sometimes in the neut. plur. although the word to which they refer is in the n Of τά πρώτα see Hemst. ad Luc. T. i, p. 400. Obss. Misc. V. p. 30. Wessel. ad Her. p. 484, 47- Brunck. ad Eurip. Or. 1251. Aristoph. Ran. 421. Of πάντα Valck. ad Herod, p. 576 , 66. Duker. ad Thuc. vm, 95. Herm. ad Viger. p. 722, 95. X. 637 Syntax· Combination oj Adjectives, fyc. singular. Plat. Menon. p. 345. χρυσίο v καί αργυρίου ητορ'ιζεσθαι αρετή εστιν, ως φησι Μεμωμ. τ τοτερον προσ~ τίθης τι τουτιρ τιρ πορω , το δικαίως και οσιως , η ουδεν σοι διαφέρει; άλλα καν αδίκως τις αυτά τ τοριζηται, ομοίως συ αυτά (το ποριζεσθαι) αρετήν καλεις; Phileb. ρ. 209· μών ούκ 3 άν μεν ηδονγ μάλλον φαίνηται ξυγγενης (έξις φυχης) ηττώμεθα μεν άμφότεροι τοά ταΰτα (την ηδονήν) εχοντος βεβαίως βίου , κρατεί, δε ό της ηδονης τον της φρόνησε ως; Tjeg. ι, p. 50. άρ ουν ουκ άμ νομοθετης και πας, ου και σμι- κρον όφελος, τούτον τον φόβον ev τιμή μεγστγ σίβοι, και καλών αί&ί, το τούτων θάρρος εναντίον άναίΰειαν προσαγο- ρεύοι ; The neuter is used also when the pronouns refer to persons as well as things. Isocr. ad Nicocl . p. 54. B· τους παΊδας τους εαυτών και τα? γυναίκας rots εις ταυ τα εξαμαρτάνουσι. . I Thus the pronoun relative is put in the neuter, when it refers to a thing generally, whether masculine or feminine. Soph. (Ed. T. 542. άρ ουχι μωρόν εστι τουγ- χείρημά σου 3 άνευ τε πλήθους και φίλων τυραννίδα Θήραν 3 ο πληθει χρημασίν θ' αλίσκεται; Thuc. I, 122. την ησσαν, εί και δεινόν τω άκουσαι, ίστω ουκ άλλο τι φερουσαν, η αντικρυβ δουλείαν * ο καί λόγφ ενδοιασθηναι αισχρόν τγ ΥΙελοποννησιρ ΥΙΙ, 62. εύρηται δ ημιν , οσα χρη αντιναυπηγεισθαι 3 και προς τάς των επωτίδων αυτοΊς παχύτητας 3 φπερ (qua re) μαλιστα εβλαπτόμεθα. Plat . Symp. ρ . 215. , συμμέτρου και άγρας ιδέας μεγα τεκμήριου η εόσχημοσυνη, ο δη καί διαφερόντως εκ πάντων άμολογουμεν ως " Ερως εχει °. Again, Xenoph. Mem . S. hi, 9^ 8· φθόνον δε σκοπών 3 ο τι ε\η 3 fyc. is regular, as in Latin, quid sit invidia , which refers to the determina¬ tion of the class of objects to which any thing belongs, 0 Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 47. . VOL. II. s 638 Syntax . Combination of Adjectives , fyc. as on the contrary in φθόνον σκοπών, όστις είη, the class is considered as already determined, and the question only is put, what other qualities besides the thing has. This distinction is marked in Cicero Tusc. Qu. i, 22, 51. animi, quid aut qualis esset, intelligentia: Obs. 1. In a similar manner an adjective is sometimes put, as well as a pronoun demonst. or relative, in the neuter, which either designates a thing generally, or refers to a verb preceding, or to an entire proposition, and is afterwards explained by masc. or femin. substantives (per epexegesin). a. Adject. Thuc. n, 63. είκδς· - μη νομίσαι περί όνος μόνου, δουλείας άντ ελευθερίας, άγωνίζεσθαι. b. Pr. demonstr. Plat. Pep. ii, p. 207. λόγουσί που και παρακελεύονται πατέρες τε υ\εσι και πάντες οι τινών κηδόμε- νοι, ως χρη δίκαιον εϊναι , ουκ αυτό, δικαιοσύνην , επαίνουν- τες, αλλά τάς άπ* αυτής ευδοκιμήσεις. Comp. Phcedon , ρ. 212 ρ . . ^ . . c. Pr. relativum. Thuc. hi, 12. ο τοίς αλλοις μάλιστα, εύνοια, πίστιν βέβαιοί, ημιν τούτο (την πίστιν) ό φόβος εχυρον παρεΊχε. Plat. Rep. IX, ρ. 264. ο μεταξύ άρα νυν δη άμφοτερων εφαμεν είναι, την ησυχίαν, τουτό ποτέ αμφο- τερα εστ at, λυτή τε και ηδονη <] . Hence may be explained the complicated passage in Thuc. n, 40. διαφερόντως yap δη και τόδε εχομεν, ώστε τολμάν τε οι αυτοί μάλιστα, και περί ών επιχειρησομεν εκλΌyιζεσθaι' δ (sc. τό εκλoyίζeσθaι) τοΐς αλλοις, άμαθία μεν θράσος, λoytσμός δε οκνον φερει, where only the opposition, άμαθία μεν θράσος, interrupts the con¬ struction. Obs. 2. Thus also the adjectives πας, άλλο?, especially when they are referred to a substantive which is not in the same case with them, are used in the masculine or neuter, though the substantive is feminine. Soph. Tr. 1216. πρόσνειμαι δ * εμοι P Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 297 sq. n Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 121. ad Cratyl. p. 97; Parmen. p. 226. / \ Syntax. Combination of Adjectives, Sfc. 689 χάριν βραχείαν προς μακροίς αΧΧοις Είδους. Plat. Tim. ρ. 326. ζυστησας δε το παν, δίεΐλε ψυχάς ισαρίθμους τοΐς άστροις , ενειμε θ έκαστην προς έκαστου, - νόμους τε τους ειμαρμενους είπεν αυταις . οτί ^/ενεσις μεν εσοιτο τετα*γμενη μία πάσιυ ('j /υχαις) Γ . < 6. In the same manner as the verb, though refer¬ ring to a subject in the plural, is often in the dual (§. 300.) when not more than two persons or things are alluded to, so the participle is put in the dual, with a substantive in the plural. II. π /} 429. o\ δ’, ώστ a\yv π ιο\ γαμφωνυχες, ά Γ γκυΧοχειΧαι 1 πετρρ εφ ' υφη\^ peyaXa κΧάζοντε μάχονται . Plat. Rep. X, ρ. 422. εν ω της yης $υο είναι χάσματα εχομενω άλΧηΧοιν. Hence Soph. (Ed. C. 1674. αΧΧοτε μεν πόνου εμπε^ον είχομεν, εν πυμάτω δ* aXoyioTa παροίσοαεν ίόόντε και παθουσαι , for ίόουσα (§. 436. 1.) και παθούσα. 7 . As the predicate verb is sometimes referred to the substantive in the" predicate, instead of that in the subject, so the participle sometimes is governed not by the subject, but the predicate. Plato Leg. v, p. 221. sq. τους μ^ιστα εζημαρτηκότας , ανιάτους δε όντας, μεyίστηυ δε ουσαν βΧάβην ποΧεως (for όντας) άπαΧΧαττειν ε'ιωθεν. Parmen. p. 87* πάντα , ά όη ως ίόεας αύτάς ουράς υπο~ Χαμβάνομεν, for αυτά όντα, where αυτά after the relative is superfluous. See §. 471 s . In the same manner the relative, as in Latin, some¬ times takes, not the gender and number of the substan¬ tive to which it refers, but that of the following one. Herod. V, 108. την άκρην, αι καΧευνται Κλάδες της Κόπρου . Eur. Η el. 290 . δ δ’ άyXάiσμa όωμάτων εμού τ εφυ, τ Dorv. ad. Ghar. ρ. 551 sq. Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. x, p. 447 sq, 5 Heind. ad Plat. Parm. p. 212. , , s 2 440. 640 Syntax. Combination of Adjectives , fyc. θνγάτηρ άνανδρος ττοΧιά παρθενεύεται. Plat. Leg. Ill, p. 152. d φόβος , — ον δουΧεύοντες τοις πρόσθεν νομοις εκεκτηντο , ην αιδώ ποΧΧακις ev τοις ανω Χο·γοις είττομεν. Comp. Id. Leg. ι, ρ. 14, 18. Epist. ρ. 60. Hence Eur. Andr. 862. κυανοί TTepoi ορνκ οίθ (Ίην, η ιτΐυκαευ σκάφος, η διά κυανεας εττερασ ακτάς 7τρωτο7τΧους πΧατα 1 . 8 . When the demonstr. and relative pronouns are in the subject, and have a substantive for the predicate,, they are put, as in Latin, in the gender of the predicate; but sometimes also in the neuter. Plat. Phcedr. p. 318. μόνον δη το αυτό κινούν — ου7τοτε Χη^ει κινουμενον , αλλα και τοις αΧΧοις 3 όσα κινείται , τούτο 7τη·γη και αρχή ^/ενεσεως. Cicero Tusc. Qu. ι, 23, 53. says, hie fons , hoc princi - pium est movendi. If an adjective, participle, or pronoun refers to two or more substantives, then 1 . If all the substantives are of the same gender, the adjective, &c. is properly in this gender and number. Yet here, if the substantives signify inanimate objects, the neuter is often put. Xen. Cyrop . i, 3, 2. όρων αυτόν κεκοσμημόνον και οφθαλμών υπογραφή και χρώματος εντρίφει και κόμαις προσθετοις, ά δη νόμιμα ην εν Μ ηδοις. Isocr. Ρα - nath. ρ. 278. Β. ταύτα $ είττον , ου προς την εύσεβειαν , ουδέ τι -ρός την δικαιοσύνην , ουδέ προς την φρόνησιν άποβΧεφας , ά συ διηΧθες , , , , 2. If the substantives are of different genders, then a. If inanimate objects be signified, the neuter plural is usually put. Plat. Menex. p. 299 sq. ούτε yap πλούτος t Herm. ad Vig. p. 70S. Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 279· ad Cratyl. 75. Syntax. Combination of Adjectives , fyc. 641 /caXXos /9 «γ»; 5 *7 αριστη del τα? μεταβολάς των οίκητόρων είχεν, c the best of coun¬ tries’. Id. V, 31. επί τ>] ημισείη. της 'γης. Plat. Phcedotl . ρ. 23b. ο ημισυς του αριθμού άπας. Xetl. Cyr. ΙΥ, 5, 1. πεμ- - πετε ημιν του πεποιημενου σίτου τον ημισυν χ .~— Thuc. VII, 3. τρ νστεραίφ aywv την πλε/στ ην της στ ρατ ιάς πα- ρεταζε προς τα τείχη των Αθηναίων , f the greater part of the army’. Arist. Ach. 350. της μαρίλης συχνήν, 6 many glowing embers’. Xen. Cyrop. in, 2, 2. σκοπών κατενόει πολλην της χώρας τοις Αρμενίοις έρημον και apyov ούσαν , € a great part of the country’. Comp ib. vi, 2, 26.— Thuc. VII, 25.· χαλεπωτάτη d’ ην της σταυρώσεως η κρύφιος. Plat. Rep. Ill, p. 322. την μεylστηv της ευλαβείας παρεσκευασμενοι αν ειεν 3 . 3. The neuter of the adjective or participle is more common here. Herod, vui, 100. το πολλόν της στρατιης. VI, 113. το τετραμμενον των βαρβάρων. II. ν , 178. τι συ , τόσσον ομίλου π ολλόν επελθών, εστης. To this place belongs the expression εν παντί κακού είναι Plat. Rep. IX, p. 254. Euthyd. ρ. 65. εν παντί άθυ- μίας Thucyd. vii, 55. ‘altogether unhappy, quite spirit¬ less, without courage’, εις παν κακού άφικνεΊσθαι Herod. VII, 118. In the same manner the neuter of τίς, ‘ who?’ and τις, ‘ any one’, is used, though rarely. Soph. Aj. 314. * Wolf, ad Demosth. Lept. p. 223. y Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. i, p. 356. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 281'. Wes- sel. ad Diod. S. T. i, p. 506’. Fisch. in, a. p. 2p6 sqq. Heind. ad Plat. Cratyl. p. 28. i \ 4 644 Syntax. Combination of Adjectives , Sfc. άνηρετ\ εν τώ 7 τραγματο? κυρεΊ ποτέ. Thuc. IV , 130. ην τι και στ ασ ιασ μου ev Trj πόΧει , for τις στασιασμος. He- Tod. VI, 133. οί Πάριοι, δκως μεν τι δωσουσι τιρ ΜιΧτια^ apyvploy, ονδεν διενοευντο. 4. It rarely happens that the genitive of a substantive tnasc. or femin. is accompanied by the adjective in the neuter. Soph. Antlg . 1209· ™ δ' άθΧίας ασημα περιβαινε ι βοής ερποντι μάΧΧον άσσον 3 for βοη άσημος. Εΐΐτίρ. PhfEn. 1500. ού προκαΧυπτόμενα βοστρυχωδεος αβρα παρηίδος 3 for παρηίδα αβράν βοστρυχωδη · Hel. 935. α σοι παρεΧιπεν ηδε των \ό·γων 3 φράσω, for ο£ς λόγους, where a MS. has τω Xoyip. Xen. Cyrop. VIII, 3, 41. ή' /cei δε τις η των προ¬ βάτων ΧεΧυκωμενα φερων , η των βοών κατακεκρημνι- σμε να. This accords with the strata viarum of Virgil. Soph. CEd. T. 261. κοινών τε παίδων κοίν άν } ει κεινω yevos μη δυστυχησεν 3 ην αν εκπεφυκοτα 3 for κοινοί παιδες ησαν αν εκπεφυκότες. Of the Adjective in particular. The following observations still remain to be made, upon the usage of the adjective : l. When an adjective is put with an auxiliary verb, as predicate, without referring to a proper subject, con¬ sisting of one word, it is properly in the neuter singular, the Greeks, however, often put the neuter plural; He¬ rod. I, 91 . την πεπρωμενην μοίραν αδύνατά εστι άποφυ- yeeiv καί θειρ. Comp. Thuc · ι, 125. hi, 88, 8$c. Herod. Ill, 109 . ούκ αν ην βιώσιμα άνθρώποισι. IX, 2. χαΧεπα είναι περ^ίνεσθαι και απασι ανθρωποισι. Soph. Antlg. 576. δεδoy μεν, ως εοικε , τηνδε κατθανεΊν. δεδoyμεva εστι for δε^μένον. Philoct. 524. άλλ’ αισχρά μεντοι, σοά y εμ ει/δεεστερον ζενω φανηναί προς το καίριον πονειν . Eurip. r Syntax. Of the Adjective in particular. 645 Hec. 12S0. άχθεινά μεν μοι, τάλλότρια κρίνειν κακά. Plat. Rep. VIII, ρ. 220. λοιττα αν είη ζ . This is particularly the case with verbals. Herod. HI, 61. (ό μάγο, Πατ.ξείΜ κήρυκα, έπεμπε τΐ, τε aWr, καί δη καί es Αίγυπτον, προερεοντα (applies merely to the one who was sent to Egypt. See c. 62. in.) τω στρατφ, a . Tpvya . 2 When a pronoun relative is referred to the sub¬ stantive, the adjective, instead of standing properly with it’s substantive, is often separated from the substantive, and, as in Latin, put with the relative. 11. ν', , 340. εφρι- ξεν δε μάχη φθισίμβροτο, ’εγχείρσι μάκρη,, α, είχαν ταμε- σίνροαε. Eurip. Or. 844. Ήλεκτρα, λόγους ακόυσαν, ου, < 70 . δυστυχεί, ηκω φόρων. Thuc. VII, 43 καί διαφυγον- τε, εόθυ, προ, τα στρατόπεδα, ά ην επί των Έπιπολιοκ τρία _ άγγεΧΚουσί t„V ίφοδον, where just above the geni¬ tive was put in the same manner: προσβάντε , το τείχισμα, ο ην αυτόθι των Συ ρ ακουσ ίων, αιρουσι. 3. Two or more adjectives (and participles also) 444. are often added to one substantive without a conjunctive particle. This juxtaposition of adjectives, without a copula, facilitates the combinations of these different ♦ * Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. 370. Keen, ad Greg. p. 53 sq. . Hemsterh. ad Arist. Plut. p. 408. Brunck.ib. v, 1085. Valck ad Herod, p. 227, 22. Keen. 1. c. 445. 646 Syntax. Of the Adjective in particular . ideas in one image, and to one whole, whilst the repeti¬ tion of the copula represents the continuation as distinct. 11. 7Γ , 221. 'χηλού αιτο πωμ ανε wye καλής, όαιόαλεης. 42S. αί- yvTuol γαμψωνυχες, cty κνλοχεΐλαι. 802. ey χος βριθν 3 peya, 1 στιβαρόν, κεκορνθμενον. σ', 275. υψηλοί re πόλαι , σανίδες τ επι Trjv αραρυιαι , μακραι , ευ^εστοι, e^evyiuevai ειρυσονται ^· An adjective or participle, and its substantives, often constitute together a leading idea, and to this leading idea another adjective refers, Herod, vii, 23. σ? to? Si σφισι πολλος εφοίτα εκ της Άσίης άληλεσμε νος, e much ground corn’, i. e. f much meal’, where much and ground corn, would be a solecism in English also. 4. On the other hand the Greeks regularly join ττολι /'s with another adjective, expressing praise or blame, e.g, άyaθός ) κακός, by means of the copula. Herod, viii, 6i. τότε δη ό θεμιστοκλεης κείνον τε καί τους Κορινθίους πολλά τε και κακά 'ελεyε. Aristoph. Lys. 1159. τίδηθ', v^py μό¬ νων τε πολλών κά^/αθων 3 μάχεσθε. Plat. Rep . X, p . 325· πολλά τε και ανόσια είpyaσμεvoς. Xetl. Mem . 8. II, 9, 6. συνειδώς αυτφ πολλά καί πονηρά°. 5. Two adjectives also are frequently put together, one of which negatively expresses the sense of the if Others. Herod. Ill, 25. εμμανης τε εών και ού φρενή¬ ρης. Soph. (Ed. Τ. 58. yvwTa κουκ ayi >ωτά μοι ά . 6. Adjectives also are often expressed by circum¬ locution : . a. The adjective, in order to determine more accu¬ rately the substantive, and to express this determination better, is subjoined with the relative and the verb είμί. b Comp. Herm. ad Orph. Lith. 81. e Brunck. ad Arist. Thesm. 351. Nub. 1329. A Valcken. ad Her. p. 206 , 52. Brunck, ad Soph. 1. c. 647 Syntax. Of the Adjective in particular· II. η, 50. αυτοί Se ττροκάλεσσαι ’Αχαιών οστις αριστος, for του άριστον 'Αχαιών, ρ, 61. «i? ore τΙς re \ewv — — βοσκομύνης dy£\rn βούν άρττάσρ, ητις άρίστη. 509- ήτοι l iev τον νεκρόν έτητράπεθ', οίπερ άριστοι, αμφ αντφ βεβαμεν., Eurip. Ph. 7 55. προκρίνας όίπερ άλκιμ-οτατοι*. b. The adjective is accompanied by olos. Aristoph. Vesp. 970 . ό $ ετερος olos ίστιν οικουρος μόνον. Oem. oil/nth p. 23, 7. et μεν yap τις αυι?ρ εστιν ev αυτοις olos e μπειρος. Thus the passage Plat. Theaet. p. 166· ac¬ cording to the common punctuation, should be rendered el S’ Ψ άντιλογικος olos άνύ,ρ, (here should follow: ίφ,,ν αν τούτων άτ ήχεσθαι. Instead of this, however, the expression is general, and the following referred to avri- XoyiKOS άνηρ, as .it’s subject) el κα'ι viv % raprjv, τούτων τ αν ϊφη άιτεχεσθαι, κα'ι ήμίν σφύύρ αν, a eyio \eyw, επεπληττεν.^ But Heindorf stops it: ei S’ ην άντιλογικος, olos άνηρ el και νύν 7 ταρήν, according to which el S' ην άντιλογικος would be an aposiopesis. Xenophon says fully Mem. S. iv, 8. exlr. έδόκει TOioiTos elvaij olos άν είη αριστον ye άνηρ Μ Π ’ 1 '· ' ’ ’ * \ . 41 KCIL CV^CLLfJiOVGGTCLTO^· This ofos is also put after an adjective. Herod, iv, 28 . ένθα τούς μέν άκτώ τών μηνών άφόρητος olos ylyve- ται κρνμος. Plat. Charm, ρ. in. άνέβλεφέ μοι. τοίς ύφθαλ- juots άμηχανον τι οίον. c. In the same manner also ίσος is used, only that •this usually follows, it’s adjective, and is put at the end of the proposition. It accompanies adjectives which express a distinction generally, or greatness with respect to quantity (r). Herod, iv, 194. o\Se (πίθηκοι) σφι άφθονοι οσοι ev τοίσιούρεσι yivovra ι. Plat. Hipp. Maj. ρ. 7. χί»Ι" * Comp. Heyne ad II. π, 272. 648 446. Syntax . Of the Adjective in particular. « μα,τα εΧαβε θαυμαστά όσα. Aristoph. Nub. 750. ήν περί αυτόν οχλος υπερφυής όσος. This phrase seems origi¬ nally to have been formed from two propositions refer¬ ring to each other, as θαυμαστόν εστιν, όσα χρήματα εΧαβε } instead of θαυμαστά εστι χρήματα, οσα εΧαββ. By usage, however, όσος has been referred to the adjective, and both put in the same case, as Plat. Rep. ix, p. 273 . ει τοσουτον ήδονή νίκα, ό άyaθός τε και δίκαιος τον κακόν τε και άδικον , αμηχανιρ δη οσιρ πΧειον νικήσει εύσχημο - συντι τε βίου και κάΧΧει και αρετή . The construction is similar in the phrase οόδενα οντιν' οόκ άποστραφηναι εφα- σαν §. 305. 7. Adjectives are very often put in the neuter sin¬ gular and plural, with and without an article, for adverbs, e.g. πρώτον , 'in the first place’, το πρώτον , ‘at first’, επίτηδες , ‘with diligence, care’, consulto , $c. αίνά for αινώς II. a, 414. άκίχητα II. p , 75. πότερα } lltrwn, Xen. Mem. S. 11 , 3 , 6, 8$c. Comparatives of adverbs especially are expressed by the neuter singular of ad¬ jectives, and superlatives by the neuter plural. See §. 260 f . 8. Adjectives also, referred to substantives, are in the same way put in the masculine or feminine, for ad¬ verbs or several words. II. p , 361 . τοί δ' ά^χηστίνοι επιπτον , for ayχι αΧΧήΧων. σ, 334. σευ ύστερος ειμ υπό yalav, c as the second to you’. More particularly, adjectives, marking a time, and derived from substantives or adverbs, are put adverbially for adjectives or their substantives in the dative, e. g. II. 423 sq. Ζευς χθι- ζός εβη κατά δαϊτα, for χθες . lb. 497. ήερίη δ’ άνόβη * Fisch. in, a. ρ. 216 sqq. Syntax. Of the Verbals in — reos. 649 με^αν ουρανόν, for ηρι, mane, β', 2. eSSor τταννύχιοι, for vvkt'i s . A \ I 1 Adjectives in — αϊο$, chiefly derived from ordinal numerals, are put thus, e. g. Sevrepalos άφίκετο, for rrj δεύτεροι ημερη.. See §. 144. Of the Verbals in — τεος. The Verbals in — τεος (§. 215.) are used either im¬ personally, as the Latin Gerunds, e. g. ίτεον εστίν, eundum est } * one must go’; or are referred to a subject, like the Latin participles fut. pass. 1. When they are put impersonally, the neuter plu¬ ral is often put for the neuter singular, particularly in Attic. See §. 443. 2. Verbals govern the cases of the verbs from which they are derived, e. g. ετηθυμητεον εστιν ειρηνης, επιχει- ρητεον εστι τω ερΎψ, ασκητεον εστι την αρετήν . 1 nis case usually expresses the object of the action ; it is seldom that a verbal of a passive verb is joined with the word by which it is determined. Soph . Antig. 678. οντοι yvvai κός ον^αμως η a αητέ a. Avist. Li/S. 450. ον γυναικών ούΰεττοτ εσθ ηττητεα ημιν. 3. When the verbals take an accusative, two con¬ structions, equally common, are made use of. a. Either the verbal remains in the neuter imperso¬ nally, and retains as an active its object in the accusa- t ——— g Dorv. ad Char. p. 389. Valcken. ad Theocr. (x. Id.) vii, 21 Fisch. in, a. p. 331 sq. 447. X / 650 Syntax. Of the Verbals in — τεος. tive. Eurip. Or. 750. οίστεον τάδε. Phcen. 724. efoi- 1 στεον y ap όπλα Kct^etW πολει. Plat Gorg. p. 88. καί 7ΓΟΤ6 υμών eye!) υπηκουσα βουλευομενων, μεχρις. οποί την σοφίαν ασκητεον είη. lb. p. 131. σωφροσύνην μεν οιωκτεον και ασκητεον, ακολασίαν όε φενκτεον, ως εχει πο¬ δών Εκαστος ημών' και παρασκευαστεον μάλιστα μΕν, μηδέν δβισθαι του κολάζεσθαι' εάν δε δεηθρ η αυτός , η άλλος τις των οικείων , η ιδιώτης, η πόλις, επιθετεον δίκην , και κολαστεον 3 εί μελλει ευδαίμων Είναι. Comp. Eeg. IV, p. 185. Xen. Mem. i, 7, 2. εί τις 3 μη ών ayaOos αύλητης , δοκειν βούλοιτο 3 τ · * \ *>r ~ - αρ ον τα εςω της τέχνης μιμητεον τους ay αν ο υς αυλητάς ; and the same, πολλούς επαινετός παρα¬ σκευαστούν, Epyov ούδαμού ληπτε ον. Comp. II, 1, 28. b. Or the object becomes the subject, and the ver* bal is referred to it as a passive , in the same gender, number, and case like the Latin participle, fut. pass. Herod. VII, 168. ου σφι π e p ιοπτεη εστί η Έλλας απόλ- λυμενη, for ου περιοπτεον εστί την ΈλΧά$α. Xen. Mem. S. III, 6, 3 . τούτο δ ήλον, ότι, ε’ίπερ τιμάσθαι βουλει , ώφελη- τεα σοι η πόλις εστίν h . 4. When a person accompanies the verbal as the subject of the action, it is put in the dative, as with gerunds and participles in Latin, fut. pass. e. g. ώφε- λητεα σοι η πόλις εστίν. Sometimes, however, the person is putin the accusa¬ tive, provided the construction of the verbal is the same with that of the impersonal δε7 with the infin. and accus. as παρασκευαστεον εστί τέχνην τφ άνθρώπω, the same as παρασκενάσασθαι δει τέχνην τον ανθ ρωπον. ThllC. VIII, 65. \oy ος εκ τού φανερού πpoείpyaστo αντοις , ως ούτε μισθοφορητεον είη άλλους η του? στ ρατενο μένους, -τ- h Fisch. hi, a. p. 416 sqq. \ / I Syntax. Of the Use of the Comparative. 651 oire μεθεκτεον των πραγμάτων πΧειοσιν η πεντακισ- χιλίοις. Plat. Rep. VII, ρ. 139· καταβατεον εν μερει έκαστον είς την των ά,ΧΧων ξυνοίκησιν. Comp. Ill, p. 290. Leg. VIII, P . 408. lb. I, p. 41. διά ταύτης (της παιδείας) φαμεν ιτεον είναι τον προκεχειρισμε νον εν τφ νυν λο- y ον ύφ * ημών. lb. VII, ρ. 362. ανευ ποιμενος ούτε πρόβα¬ τα ούτε άλλο ούδεν πω βιωτεον, ουδέ δη παίδας ανευ τινων παιδαγωγων ί ουδέ δ ουΧ ο υς ανευ δεσποτών. Isocv. Evag. ρ. 190. Β. ου μην δουΧευτεον τούς ye νουν έχον¬ τας τοις ούτω κακώς φρονουσιν. The tWO constructions are united in Plat. Rep. v, p. 12. ούκοΰν και ημιν νευ- στεον — εΧπίζοντας 1 * r Of the Usage of the Comparative . The Comparative compares two things or proposi¬ tions with each other, either by means of the conjuhc- tion η, quam } ‘ than/ or instead of this, by changing the second substantive into the genitive. l. a. In the construction with η , the word with which another is compared is usually put in the same case with the word compared (subject of the comparison). ' II. a, 260. ηδη yap ποτ εγω και άρείοσιν , ηεπερ ύμΊν , α νδράσιν ωμίΧησα. Herod. VII, 10, 1. συ δε μεΧΧεις επ ανδρας στρατεύεσθαι ποΧυ αμεί νονας, η Σκυ θ ας. Thuc . VII, 77· * 1^*1 τινες και εκ δεινότερων , η τοιώνδε , εσω- θησαν. Plat. Leg. X, ρ. 81. αρα ούκ εξ ανάγκης τα ψυχής συγγενή πρότερα αν είη γεγονότα των σωματι προσηκόντων , * Em. ad Xen. Mem. S. in, 9, 1. Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 335. Schaefer. Melet. in Dion; H. p. 89. \ / t 448. I 652 Syntax. Of the Use of the Comparative. ουσης τ αυτής πρεσβυτέρας, η σώματος. Xen. Cyrop . VIII, 3, 32. αλλα πΧουσιωτέ ρω μεν αν, η έμοί έ$ί$όυς. Sometimes, however, after η the nominative is put, if ε’ιμί, or another word, can be supplied. Xen. Mem. S. i, 6, 4. πεπεισμαι, σέ μάΧΧον αποθανεΐν αν έΧε'σθαι, η ζην, ώσπερ ^ώ. for ώσπερ eyco ζώ. Isocr. PdC . extr. rots νεωτέροις και μάΧΧον άκμάζουσιν, η eyco (ακμάζω), παραινώ. Ohs. The passage in Plat. Symp. p. 236. ουίε'ν ye άΧΧο εστίν, ου ερώσιν οι άνθρωποι, η του ayaOov for η το ayaOov, is a kind of anacoluthon, since ούδεν aXXo and to ay αθόν are compared together. Comp. §. 474. a. h. When it is an entire proposition with which the subject is compared, and the comparative has the sense of f too much’, η is followed by the infinitive with ώστε. Herod. Ill, 14. ω πάί K υρου, τα μέν οικηια ην με ζω κακά , η ώστε άνακΧαίειν, graviora mala, quam ut flere possem. Simonid. ap. Plut. de Aud. p. c. l, p. 59. ed. Η. αμαθέστεροι yap εισιν, η ως υπ' εμού έξαπατάσθαι. ώς or ώστε is very often omitted. Soph. (Ed. T. 1293. TO yap νόσημα μεΊζον η φερειν. Eur. Hec. 1097. ξυ y- yvωσθ\ όταν τις κρείσσον , η φερειν, κακά πάθρ, ταΧαί- νης εξαπαΧΧάξαι ζόης. Id. Ale. 230. άξια και σφayάς TaSe, και πΧεον η βρό'χω όερην ουρανιω 7T€Xd£eti' k . The positive is very frequently put for the compara¬ tive; in which case also i} is omitted. Herod, vi, 109 . oXiyo ΰς yap είναι στρατί rj τρ Μηδων συμβαΧεειν, e too few to come to action with’, &c. Comp, vii, 207. Thuc. 1 , 50.— Thuc. II, 6l. ταπεινή υμών η όιάνοια eyKapTe- k Valck. ad Her. p. 200, 6 0 . 653 Syntax. Of the Use of the Comparative. pe'iv a 67 νωτ€, c your mode of thinking is too low to persevere in it’. Plat. Menex. p. 274. ό χρόνος βραχύς ά^ιως διηγησασθαι. XeiZ. CEcOTl . 16 ? 10. σ κΧη ρ α εσται η γη κινεΊν τφ ζεύγει. In this case ώστε also accompanies the infinitive. Plat. Protag. p. 49. ημε~ις en νέοι, ώστε τοσούτον πράγ¬ μα διεΧεσθαι. Xen. Cyr . IV, 5, 15. όλίγοι ύσμεν, ώστε εγκρατείς el ναι · zd. ΜθΤΤΙ. S. III, 13. 3. aWa ψυχρόν, ώστε Χούσασθαι , 'εστίν. Eurip. Androm. SO. γεροον εκείνος , ώστε σ ωφεΧειν παροον. Id. PhcETl . 1376· ον μακράν γάρ τειχεων περιπτυχαί , ωστ ουχ άπαντα σ € ιδεναι τα δρώμενα, for ού μακροτερω ΟΓ μακρότεραι 1 . For other modes see below §. 451. c. When a substantive is not compared with an^ 449. other, but the quality of a thing, in its proportion to another, is considered and compared in degree with this proportion, where, in Latin quampro is used, then η κατά or η προς is put after the comparative. Herod, iv, 95. τον ΖάμοΧξιν τούτον επιστάμενον δίαιτάν τε Ίά£α και ηθεα βα¬ θύτερα η κατά Θρηίκας, ί. e. η οϊα θρηίκει εχουσιν , f than can be expected from the Thracians, than one meets with among the Thr/ Soph. (Ed. C. 598. τί γάρ τό μεΊζον, η κατ άνθρωπον , νοσείς ; Worse than man can bear’. Thuc. II, 50. γενόμενον κρεΊσσον λόγου τό είδος της νόσου τά τε αΧΧα χαΧεπωτερως, η κατά την άνθρω- πείαν φύσιν, προσεπιπτεν εκάστω , και, &$C. Id. VI, 15. Αλ- κιβιάδης, ων εν άζιοοματι υπό των αστών , ταΓις επιθυμιαις, μείζοσιν η κατά την ύπάρχουσαν ούσίαν ύχρητο, ‘ had more wants than he had ability to satisfy . Id. vn, 45. όπλα πλέω η κατά τούς νεκρούς , εΧηφθη , f more arms ι Wyttenb. in Bibl. Crit. nr, 2. p. 64. VOL. II. T 654 Syntax. . Of the Use of the Comparative. than the number of the dead led one to expect'. Plat. Rep. 11, p. 211. ενόντα νεκρόν μείζω η κατ’ άνθρω¬ πον, ‘greater than a man usually is'. Xen. Mem . 8. iv, 4, 24. to τοι)$ νόμους αυτους τοίς παραβαίνουσι τάς τιμω¬ ρίας εγειν, βελτ ίονος η κατ άνθρωπον νομοθετου δοκει μοι είναι, c more sagacious than can be looked for from man'. Comp. Aristot. Poet. 2, l m . In this manner also the relations explained in the preceding §. is ex¬ pressed. Thuc. VII, 75. μείζω, η κ ατά δάκρυα, τα μεν 7Γ67τοι/0ότα9 ηδη, τα δε μέλλοντας, which in Herod, is μεζω κακά, η άστε άνακλαίειν. Both constructions are United Euvip. Xled. 673 . σοφωτερ , η κατ άνδρα σνμ- βαλειν, επη, i. e. η κατ άνδρα και η άστε άνδρα συμβαλείν. Thus too Plat. Crat. p. 247· ταΰτα μείζω εστιν η κατ ε με και σε εξευ ρείν. In the same manner ή πρός is used. Thuc. iv, 39. ό yap άρ'χων Έ,πιτάδας ενδεεστε ρως εκάστιρ παρεί-χεν Λ \ ^ / α η προς την εςουσιαν . % 2. The omission of the conjunction η is very com- mon, in which case the substantive following is put in the genitive. II. p , 446. ου μεν yap τί που εστιν όιζυρωτε- ρον άνδρός πάντων, όσσα τε y αίαν επι πνείει τε και ερπει. Od. a, 27. ου τι εyωyε ης yaίης δύναμαι yλυκεpωτε ρον άλλο ίδεσθαι 0 . Hence Isocr. Panath. ρ. 287. C. δοκεΊς yap μοι ζων μεν ληφεσθαι δόξαν, ου μείζω δε, ης άξιος εϊ. for μείζω εκείνης, ης. Unless it should be η ης a. el. Obs. 1. The prepositions προ and αντί are sometimes placed before these genitives. Herod. l, 62. οΐσιν η τυραννις προ ελευθερίης ην άσπαστότερον. Soph. Antig. 182. μείζον ra Wess. et Valcken. ad Herod, p. 636, 100. n Valck. in Oratt. Hemst. et V. ρ. χχχ. ° Fisch. hi, a. p. 350. 655 Syntax. Of the Use of the Comparative. όστις άντι της αυτού ττάτρας φίΧον νομίζει, τοντον ου&αμον Xeyu). Eurip. Suppl . 421. ό yap χρόνος μαθησιν άντι τού τάχους κρείσσω δίδωσι, where, however, κρείσσω may also stand by itself. Arist. Vesp. 210. η μοι κρειττον ην τηρειν Σκιωνην άντι τούτου τού ττατρός ν . Obs. 2. This genitive is sometimes accompanied by a re¬ dundant η . Xen. Hell, n, 1, 8. η Si κόρη εστι μακ ρότε ρον η χε ι ρό ς. IV, 6, 5. ου ιτρορει ττΧεον της ημέρας η δώδεκα σταδίων, where, however, σταδίων may be governed by οδοί/ omitted. Isocr. Arch. p. 131. A. και yap i^ayye\9tjvai. τοΊς 'ΈΧΧησι καΧΧίω ταύτ βστι και μάΧΧον άρμόττοντα τοΊς ηαε- τεροις φρονημασιν , η ών ενιοί τινες ημίν συμβουΧευονσιν , where the genitive ών for α presupposes the genitive τούτων. Theocr . xx, 26. gk στομάτων Si ερρεε μοι φωνά yXuKepwrepa, η μεΧικηρω q . Thus Virgil. Mn. iv, 302. graviora timet, qu am morte Sichaei. Quint, χτ, 1, 21. Et aperte tamen gloriari nescio an sit magis tolerabile vel ipsa vitii hujus simplici- tate , quam ilia jactatione perversa , si abundans opibus pauperem se — vocet. Tn the same manner the genitives τούτον , ον , which are go¬ verned of a comparative, are often followed by an explanation with η. Eurip. Her ad. 298- ούκ εστι τονδε παισ'ι κάΧΧιον y ερας, η 7 τατρός εσθΧον KayaOou ττεφυκεναι. Plat. Iheag. ρ. 16 . ούκ εσθ' ο τι τούτου μειζον αν ερμαιον ηyησaίμηv, η εί ούτος άρεσκοιτο τη σρ συνουσία^. Id. Criton. ρ. 102. τις άν άισχίων είη ταύτης δό£α, η δοκεΊν χρήματα ττερί ττΧειονος ττοιεΊσθαι η φίΧους. If /5 should be followed by an entire proposition (a substantive or an infinitive with εστί ), the substantive only of this is often put in the genitive, or the infinitive p Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 419· Fisch. 1. c. q Koen. ad Greg. p. 36. Valck. ad Theocr. x. Id. p. 162. Fisch. in, a. p. 351. r Toup. ad Longin. p. 321. Markl. ad Lys. p. 370, R. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 183. For similar passages from Latin authors, see Misc. Philol. π, 1. p. 99- 3. p. 85. - T 2 451. 656 Syntax, Of the Use of the Comparative. changed into the kindred substantive in the genitive. Herod. II. 35. η Αίγυπτος έργα Αόγου μόζω παρέχεται προς πασαν χώρην, for epya μείζω η Αεγειν εστίν , εξεστιν 3 ‘greater curiosities than can be expressed". Thus Thuc. II, 50. γενόμενον κρείσσον λόγου το είδος της νόσου. Comp. Xen. Mem . S. m„ ιι, ι. — Thuc . ii, 64. η νόσος , πράγμα μόνον δη των πάντων εΑπίδος κρεϊσσον γεγενη- μενον, ‘worse than one could expect’. JEsch. Agam. 276. πεύσει δε χάρμα μεΊζον εΑπίδος κΑυειν .— Xen. Hell. II, 3, 24. et τις υμών νομίζει πΑεονας του καιρού άπο- θνησκειν, i. e. πΑ. η καιρός εστι } plures , quam par est. Id. ib. VII, 5, 13. έδιωξαν πορρωτερω του καιρού .— Xen. Mem. S . I, 6, 11 . εΑαττον της αξίας. — Herod. II, 18. τό εγώ της εμης γνώμης ύστερον περί Αίγυπτου επυ- θόμην. i. β. ύστερον η εγώ εγνων. Some phrases of this kind are equivalent to the construction of the comparative and infinitive with ώστε , e. g. κρείσσω v Αογου 3 the same as κρείσσων η ώστε Αεγειν. κρείσσων εΑπίδος for κρείσσων η ώστε εΑπίζειν. Hence Thucyd. I, 84. αμαθέστεροι των νόμων της υπερορίας παιδευομενοι , for αμ. η ώστε υπερορίαν τούς νόμους. 452. By a usage which is similar, the comparative is fol¬ lowed by the genitive of the reciprocal pronouns εμαυ- του , σεαυτου , εαυτού, and the same subject is compared to itself with regard to it’s different circumstances at different times. Herod . n, 25. o δε Νείλο? — τούτον τόν χρονον αυτός εωυτου ρεει ποΑΑιρ υποδεέστερος η του θερεος 3 where η του θερεος is a kind of explanation of twvTov t for υποδεέστερος η οίος αυτός τού θερεος ρεει. Thus t°° &πλ«'σί 0 ϊ. Herod. VIII, 137. οιπλησιος eyevero a ντο? ewvrovj 'as great again as it was’. Thuc. 111 , n. Suva- τωτεροι αυτοί αυτών εγίγνοντο. Plat. Rep . ΐν 3 p. 330. ττλοντησαί χυτ /iefc p · 14,9 · a· p. 327. Herm. ad Vig. p. 715 , 5 ( j. > Syntax. Of the Use of the Superlative. 668 * ζ£ ν . Plat. Gorg. p. 88. αίμχνντηροτέρω μαλ- \ov Tod Seovros. Leg. VI, p. 309. yens mZv των ar- θρωττων λαθραιότερον μόλλον καί όπικλοπιότερον'φν το θήλυ Sid το άσθενες. Isocr. Archld. ρ. 138. Β. C. ·πολυ μάλλον κ ρεΐττον, με Ύ ιίλον καιρού τιμήν άνταλλαξασθαι, H μικροί χρόνον μεγάλαις αίσχύναις ήμάς αύτους περψαλειν. Comp. ib. ρ. 134. C. Enc. Hel. ρ. 218. C. d Of the Use of the Superlative. The Superlative is used, to shew that the quality 459 implied is in its highest degree in the subject defined. When the class of objects from which the definite su¬ stentive is in this manner taken, is expressed at the same time, then the superlative is used also in English. If this class be not expressed, the superlative is usual y rendered by f very, extremely’, with the positive, e. g. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 1 , 3. it τεόείκνυεν t£v Ιππων τούς ευφυέ¬ στατους, _ « μ*ν όκ νέων όαμασθείεν, εύχρηστοτά- τονς καί άρίστους Ί ι Ί νομόνους, βί Si άόάμαστοι ykvoivTO, δνσκαθβκτοτάτους καί φαυλοτάτους, ‘ in the greatest degree, very useful, good’, &c. K When the class from which the substantive to which the superlative belongs is taken, is mentioned at the same time, the genitive is usually in the plura, e g. οικαιότατος Κενταύρων II λ', 831. which IS often accompanied by πάς, e. g. Herod, iv, 142. κακίστους a Wetsten. ad Phil, i, 23. Valcken. ad Herod, p. 17b 36. 69. 33 . Brunck. ad Arist. Eccl. 1131. Heusde Spec. Cr. in Plat. p. Fisch. II , p. 137 sq. Herm. ad Vig. p. 7l6,60. ✓ bb4 Syntax. Of the Use of the Superlative. ’re καί άνανό ροτάτους κρίνουσιν ehmi απάντων ανθρώ¬ πων. In the Poets this genitive is often the positive of the adjective, which is in the superlative. Mschyl. Suppl. 540. μακάρων μακάρτατε καϊ τελεων τελειότατου κράτος. Soph. CHd. Ί 1 . 334. ώ κακών κάκιστε. Aristoph. Jrac. 183. ω μιαρών μιαρωτατε e . Comp. §. 36 * 9 · 2. The superlative is put in the gender of the sub¬ stantive which is in the genitive case, e. g. ουρανοί ηόι- ατορ των θεαμάτων , not ϊμ: ιστός. Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. σύμβουλος ayaOos χρησιμώτατον και τυραννικώτατον απαντων κτημάτων εστι. Instances, in which the superlative is in the gender of its subject, and not of the genitive, are very rare, and justly suspected, e. g. Antiphon, ap. Surd. V. θεαιόέστατον άνθρωπος, os ψησ'ι pev πάντων θηρίων θεαιδόστατος y ενέσθαι. Menand. ap Lucian. Amor. Τ. V. p. 306. νόσων χαλεπότατος φθόνος , where Bentley (Emend, in Menandr. et Phil, fr. p. 96 .) corrected χαλεπωτάτη. In the first passage the construction is probably according to the sense, as in Cicer. N. D. 52, 130. Indus, qui est omnium fluminum maximus. But in Horace Sat. i, 9 , 4. it should be punctuated: quid agis, dulcissime, rerum { ? , « Obs. Sometimes the genitive does not mark the class of objects to which the substantive accompanied by the superlative belongs, but the class of the subject of the verb. Herod, vn, 70. οι εκ της Λιβύης ΑΙΘίοπες ούλάτατον τρίχωμα εχουσι πάντων ανθρώπων. ' The superlative is frequently accompanied, not by the genitive plural of a class of objects, but by the geni- fisch. 11 , p. 146 sq. iit, a. p. 352. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 347. Porson. ad Eur. Ph. 1730. 665 Syntax. Of the Use of the Superlative. tive of the reflexive pronoun, by which, in this case, is expressed the highest degree which a thing or person attains to. Herod. I, 193. eiredv Se άριστά αυτή εωυτής ivebcr,, έπι τριακόσια εκφέρει, ‘ at the very best that it ever produces’. I, 203. 'Η ΚασπΙη - ε5ρος εστί, τη εύρυτα- τη έστί αυτή έωϋτής, όκτω ήμερέων., Eurip. αρ Plat. Gorg. Ρ· 83. Λαμπρός έστ'ιν έκαστος εν τουτφ, ιν αυτός αΰτοΰ τυγχ_άνη βέλτιστος ων. Plat. Leg. IV, ρ. 184. νέος ων πάς άνθρωπος τα τοιαΰτα άμβλυτατα αυτός αυ¬ τό? όρά. Xen. Mem. S. I, 2, 46. είθέ σοι, ω nepi/cXe.s, τότε συνε-γενόμην, &τε δεινότατος σαυτοΰ ταΰτα ήσθα*. ■ In order to strengthen the signification of the super- 461 , lative, particles, $c. are often added to it, as πολλφ, μακρώ, πολύ, παρά πολύ. Herod. 1 , 143. πολλω ασθενέ¬ στατου. multo infirmissimum. Thuc. ιν, 92, πολλω μά¬ λιστα. II. «, 91. -ολλώ άριστος. β' , 769. χολ? φέρτατος. Aristoph. Plut. 445 . δεινότατου epyov παρα πολύ. Herod. I, 193. μακρφ άρίστη, longe optima. Anst. Pac. 672. μακρω 9 f evi ιονστατος. In the Ionic Poets 0 X a, έξοχα, μέ Ί α are often joined with it, e. g. οχ άριστος, II. « j 69, ><£ ζ°Χ άριστοι, 629. μεγα φερτατε, Od. λ, 477· Καί, β. g. και μάλιστα, Xen. Cyr. II, 1, 5 · vet maxime. The particles ως, όπως , οτι, fi especially are often joined with the superlative, in the sense of ω,, as m Latin, quam. (a) Xen. Cyr . vi, 1,43. ίτ. -λεΐστο, χρονον. Od. e, 112 . οττι τάχιστα. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 26. ως ταχιστα, quam celerrime. οπω% άριστα , JEsch. Agam. 6 Π. όπως β Stephan. App. de Dial. p. 41. Wessel. ad Herod, p, 9h 18, Hoog. ad Vig. p. 68. Fisch. ii, j>. 148. 666 Syntax. Of the .Use of the Superlative. τα.'χιστα Arist. Vesp. 168. 365. r\ άριστον Xen. Ch/V. II, 4, 32. VII, 5, 82. όσον τάχιστα Soph. El. 1457. Words signifying·, ‘ ability, possibility", are very often added. Xen. Mem. S. il, 2, 6. e 7 ημελοϊνται οι yoveh πάντα ποιουντες, όπως οι παίδες αυτοις yevoovTai ως δυνατόν βέλτιστοι. IV, 5, 2. άρα καλόν και μεyάλεΊον νομίζεις είναι ανδρι και ητόλει κτήμα ελευθερίαν; Ώς ο Ιόν τε μάλιστα , εφη. TJlUC. VII, 21. εφη χρηναι πληρούν ναυς ως δυνανται πλείστας. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 5, 9. ίνι (licet) ηδιστα. Icl. Cyr. VII, 1, 9. r\ άν δύνωμαι τάχιστα. I, 4 , 14. δια· •γωι ηζεσθαι, όπως έκαστος τα κράτιστα δύναιτο. Id. Rep. Lac. I, 3. σιτω r\ άνυστόν μετριωτάτιρ. ThllC. VII, 21. α 7 ων στρατιάν , όσην εκασταχόθεν πλείστην εδυνατο. Herod. VI, 44. εν νόιρ εχοντες , όσας άν πλείστας δυ ναι ν¬ το καταστρεφεσθαι των Ελληνίδων πολίων. VII, 60. σννά- ζαντες μυριαδα άνθρωπων ως μάλιστα είχον. Xen. Hell. II, 2, 9· όσους ηδυνατο πλείστους άθροίσας h . Still more diffusely Plato says Rep. ix, p. 270 . ai όπιθυμίαι τάς άλη- Θεστατας ηδονας ληφονται, ως οΐόν τε αυτοις αληθείς λαβε7ν. Obs. These particles are also used without the superlative. Thue. 1 , 22. οσον δυνατόν άκριβεί ct, for άκριβόστατα. Thus also ως καλώς ες δνναμιν , Cratin. αρ Suid. s. ν. τό παρόν ευ εσθαι. See Hemst. ad Luc. T. hi, p. 366. for ως κάλλιστα ουνατον. ως or όσον τάχος, quam celerrvme. οΐος also is put with the superlative. Plat. Apol. 8. p. 52 sq. άπεχθειαι, οίαι χαλεπωτατ αι και βαρύτα¬ τα i. Symp. p. 267 . π ay ου οι ον δ εινοτάτ ον. Xen. Anab. IV, 8, 2. χωρίον oiov χαλε πωτατ ον. Aristot. Eth. IX, 3. ρ. 155. D. άνηρ οΐος κράτιστος. In Xenophon it is fully expressed, Mem. S. iv, 8. extr. ό Σωκράτης - h Fisch. 11, p. 142—151. Syntax. Of the Use of the Superlative. 667 €$όκ€ΐ τοιουτος eivai , οίος ay ειη a p ιστός ye ανηρ και €\)δαιμον^στατος. Comp. §. 445. b. eh also is put with the superlative. Herod, Yi, 127. 'Σμινδυρίδης — eirl ττλεΤστον δη χΧιδης eh ανηρ άτι rucero. Soph. (Ed. T. 1380. 6 τταντΧημων eyia κάΧΧιστ ανηρ €Ϊς ev ye rah Θηβαις r paepeh. Thuc. VIII, 68. τους arywin- ζομενους πλειστα ei? ανηρ δννάμβνος aKpeXeiv. Xen. Anab. 9, 22. δώρα 7 τλεΤστα ei? 7 ε ανηρ ων δχάμβαν€, as 1U Latin, unus omnium maxime hh . Sometimes too the superlative is accompanied by an adverb or adjective in the superlative, for the posi¬ tive. Soph. (Ed. C. 743. ττΧ€Ϊστον άνθρωττων κάκιστος, for πολύ κάκιστος . Id. Phil. 631. της ττλεΐ στον βχθί- στης ύμοι €χίδνης· Euv. Ale. 802. την 7 rXe ιστόν ηδι στην θ€ών Κνττριν. - Thus also μμΧιστα εχθ ιστός, II. β' , 220. μάΧιστα δμφερέστατα, Herod. 11, 76. Comp. I, 171. μάλιστα ξινότατος, Thuc. VII^ 42 1 . Obs. Several kinds of circumlocution also are admitted with the superlative. JEschin. Eryx. 1. biro Se των σμικρών τού¬ των άν μάλλον όργίζοιντο, όντως ώς αν μάλιστα χαλεπωτατοι ΐ'ιησαν, for opyiXpivTO αν χαλβιτωτατα. Xen . Cyr. ' /ll, 5, 58. άτι η ιτόλκ όντως ίχοι αύτω «is άν ιτολεμιωτάτη yevoiTO ανόρι 7Γ οΧις. Sometimes two superlatives in two different proposi¬ tions are compared with each other by the words to- σουτω — οσω, in order to shew that a quality exists in the highest degree in one subject, in the same measure as it is possessed by another in the highest degree. In this case comparatives also may be put for superlatives. When the proposition with οσω follows, τοσουτψ is often omitted in the first. Thuc. 1 , 68. 7 νροσηκει ημάς 462 hh Valck. ad Herod, p. 497? 51. » Fisch. 11 , p. 144. 463 . 668 Syntax. Of the Lse of the Superlative. ονχ ήκιστα (μάλιστα. See 466.) 617Γ61Ϊ/, ο σιρ και μέγιστα έγκλήματα έχομεν, * we have the greatest right to speak in proportion as we have the greatest charges to answer to . II, 47. αυτοί μαλιστα εθνησκον, όσιρ και μάλιστα προσρεσαν. VIII, 84. οσιρ μάλιστα και έλευθε - ροι ησαν οι ναυται , τοσουτω και θρασύτ ατα προσπεσόν- τες τον μισθόν άπητουν, as in Latin, nautce, ut liberrimi erant , ita audacissime , with this difference only, that in Latin, in this case ita — ut are commonly the parti¬ cles of comparison, instead of eo—quo , but in Greek they remain the same as in the comparative. Also the indeterminate subject which, with this construction in Latin, is expressed by quisque, in Greek is expressed by τις, as in the comparative. Plat. Rep . n, p . 241. όσιο με y ιστόν το των φυλάκων εγον , τοσουτιρ σχολής τε των άλλων κλειστής αν ειη και αύ τέχνης τε και έπιμε- λείας μεγ ίστης δεόμενου ; and the comparative is inter¬ changed with the superlative. Demosth. Olynth. p.. 21, 22. οσιρ yap ετοιμοτατ αυτώ δοκουμεν χρησθαι , τοσου¬ τιρ μάλλον απιστουσι πάντες αυτιρ. This kind of construction too, as in Latin, is abbre¬ viated by the omission of τοσουτιρ — οσιρ, and the two propositions are contracted into one. Herod, vn, 203. είναι θνητών ουδενα ουδέ εσεσθαι, τιρ κακόν εζ α ρχη$ γινομέ- νιρ ον συνεμιχθη , τοισι δε μεγιστοισι αυτέων μέγιστα , 1. e. όσιρ μέγιστοι ησαν, τοσουτω μέγιστα. Soph. Antig. 1327. βράχιστα γάρ κράτιστα ταυ ποσίν κακά , f the shorter the better . Xen. XLcyu. S. iv, i, 3. αι ά p ιστ a 1 δοκουσαι είναι φύσεις μάλιστα παιδείας δέονται. Id. Hier. I, 21. τον εκαστιρ ηδομενον μαλιστα τούτον οΊει και έρω- τικωτατα εχειν του έργου του του ; The superlative of negative adjectives or adverbs is often put with w, for the positive, without ου, espe- eially ουχ ήκιστα, for μάλιστα. Thuc. i, 68. See §.4 65. » Syntax. Of the Use of the Superlative. 669 Plat. Phcedon. p. 266. eyco ούχ ήκιστα τούτον ei >βκα τάς γυναίκας άπόπεμφα, 'ίνα μη τοιαυτα ηΧημμεΧοΊβυ. Herod. II, 43, ούχ ήκιστα , αλλα /χαλί στα. TflUC . VII, 44. /χ€·γ ι¬ στοί/ $€ και ούχ ήκιστα €βΧα\[/€ν ο τταιωνισμος. Thus also II. ό 3 11. €7rei ον μιν άψανρότατος βάΧ ’Αχαιών. ί. β. Ισχυρότατος. and with the antithesis, Od. p , 415. ov yap μοι δοκόβις ό κάκιστος ’Αχαιών όμμεναι , αλλ wp ιστός. Herod. IV, 95. (Ζ αΧμοζις ώμίΧησβ) 'ΕΧΧηνων ου τώ) άσθβνεστάτιυ σοφιστρ Ylv6ay0prj. ThllC. I, 5. ηyoυ- μόνοον άν^ρών ου τών aSv νατιντατιον. COmp. VIII, 100. Xen. Hist. Gr. VI, 4, 18. ο\ ούκ ελάχιστοι/ ΰυνάμενοι ev τη 7roXei k . ι As the comparative is put for the superlative, in the 464. same manner the superlative is sometimes put for the comparative. Od. X', 481. σειο S’, ΆχιΧλεί/, οντις άνηρ ττροττάροιθβ μακάρτατος, ουτ άρ οπίσσω. Herod. II, 103. €ς τούτους <$e μοι Sokecl και ου 7 r ροσώτατα αττικεσθαι ο Α^υτττιος στρατός. Comp. Ill, 119· Euvip. Iphig. A. 1603. ταυτηρ μάΧιστα της κόρης ασι τα^εται, where Musgrave quotes, Apoll. Rh. m, 9ΐ· Aristoph. Αν. 823. λοστόν, η το Φ Χ^ρας 7τεδίον 1 . k Gatak. Advers. Misc. i. c. 7- p. 215. F. Valck. ad H et. p. 324, 95. Koen. ad Greg. p. 41. Comp. Valck. ad Her. p. 206, 52. Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 58. 1 Wessel. ad Her. p. 517, l6. Fisch. 111, a. p. 329- Herm. ad Viger. p. 715, 57. Schweigh. ad Athen. T, vii, p. 12 sq. VOL. II. / V 670 465. I \ /\S" Of the Use of the Pronoun. 0* - · . · { ,, . _ - | I t> Hi'. 1|·Λ u - ' .«t'v , .t J. ) v · k Λ 1 .. i \ '> 1 \j I. Pronom. Person, and Possess. 1. The nominative of the personal pronoun is usu¬ ally omitted with the personal terminations of verbs, as in Latin, except where there is an emphasis, e. g.» in an opposition, that is expressed or understood, e. g. άλλα •πάντως και συ οφβι αυτήν Xen. Cyr . V, 1, 7· 2. In dialogues the personal pronoun is often put without the verb, if it has occurred in the speech of an¬ other preceding. In this case it is mostly accompanied b y •ye. Plot. Gorg. p. 20. καλεις τι 9 π€πιστ€υκ€ναι j ΓΟΡΓ. ^Eyorye, i. e. f yes/ ib. p. 36. BoJXet ovv, 67 Γβιδη τιμφς το χαρ'ιζεσθαι, σμικρόν τί μοι χαρίσασθαι ; ΠΩΑ. ’'Eytoye. Id. Rep. Ill, ifl. η·γη τιν a 7Γ οτ civ yeveaOa ι άνδρβΐον, ίεχοντα kv αυτφ τούτο το Sema, Μα Αία, η δ* ο?, ουκ εγωγε, ζ no*. Comp. Xen. Cyr. ν, ι, 4 m . Thus too in the dative. Plat. * ' -y * · * \ / 1 f < * ι v ( f* j t Gorg. p. 137. φίλος μοι δοκεΊ έκαστος βκάστω el ναι ως οίον Τ€ μάλιστα , . -ό ομοιος τω ομοίω. ον και σοί; ΚΑΛ. 6/utoiye. This is founded upon the general usage, by which, in answers, the leading word of the question is re¬ peated. When any one wishes to dissuade another from any thing by entreaties^ μη συ ye is very commonly used with the omission of the verb preceding. Soph. (Ed. Col . 1441. ΠΟΑ. ei χρη, θανουμαι. ΑΝΤΙΓ. urj συ y\ άλλ' 'βμοϊ ra Thom. Μ. p. 26*4. \ <.i* u / Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. 671 πίθου. Eurip. Hec. 412. {βονλει πεσεΊν προς ουδας — ασχημονησαί τ, εκ νέου βραχίονος σπασθεισ ;) α πείσει, μη συ y 9 ου yap άξιος. Phcen. 541. τι της κάκιστης δαιμόνων εφίεσαι , φιλοτιμίας , 7ταΤ; /α>} συ y * άδικος η θεος η . 3. In the forms of entreaty, προς θεών , προς δεξιάς and the like, the accusative of the pronoun, which is governed of 'ικετεύω, 8$c. is commonly put between the preposition and the genitive. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1333. πρός νυν σε κρηνών , προς θεών ομογνιων, αιτώ πιθεσθαι. Eurip. Med. 325. μη π‘ρός σε γουνών, της τε νεογάμου κόρης. Ale. 281. μη, πρός σε θεών, τλγς με προδουναι 0 . Thus also in Latin, Per te deos oro. 4. The personal pronouns are sometimes put twice in the same proposition, when in the first instance they were separated too far from the verb ; Pleonasm. Eur . Phcen. 507. €μοι μεν, εί και μη καθ' 'Ελλήνων χθόνα τε- θράμμεθ\ άλλ’ ούν ξυνετά μοι δοκείς λεγειν. Xenoph. Cyr. VI, 4, 7· Καί Κι φω δε δοκώ μεγόλην τινα ημάς χάριν όφείλειν, ότι με , αιχμάλωτον y ενομενην και εξαιρεθεισαν εαυτψ , ούτε με ώς δουλην ηξίωσε κεκτησθαι , ούτε ως ελευθεραν εν άτίμιρ όνόματι, where Schneider omits the second με. ib. iv, 5> 29 . σκεφαι δε καί , οίω οντι μοι περί σε οιος ων περί εμε επειτά μοι μεμφγ. (Econ. 10, 4. ού yap αν εγω γε σε δυναίμην, εί τοιουτος ε’ίης, ασπασασθαι σε εκ της ψυχής , where Zeune erases the second σε. This is different from the case, where the same pronoun is put twice with two different verbs p . The possessive pronouns are equivalent in signifi- 466, “Λ“·· Λ n Valcken. ad Phoen. p. 4.96'. « Valcken. ad Eurip. Ph. 16*59. Pors. ad Eurip. Med. 325. p Valck. ad^ Eur. Phoen. v, 500. Wopkeng. Lect. Tull. p. 271. i) 2 / I 672 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. cation to the genitive of the personal pronouns, e. g. w 7 τάτερ ημετερε, νιος εμός is the same as πάτερ ημών, νιος εμού. x V,. Hence l. A more accurate definition of the person indi¬ cated by the possessive pronoun, is put in the genitive, as an apposition to the pronoun possessive. II. 7 ', 180. $αηρ αντ εμός εσκε κυνωπιόος. Soph. (Ed. C. 344. σφω cT άντ εκείνων τάμα δυστήνου κακά v7rep7rov6iTOv. Plat. Symp. ρ. 210 sq. επιΧησμων μεντ αν ε'ίην, ώ Α*γάθων, - ει ίόων την σην ανάριαν και μεΎαΧοφροσυνην αναβαίνοντος επί τον όκρίβαντα μετά των υττοκριτών , και βΧεφ αντος εναντίον τοσουτου θεάτρου, μεΧΧοντος επιόείζασθαι σαυτου , και ούεΐ όπωστιουν εκττΧα^εντος, νυν οίηθείην σε θορυβηθησεσθαι , fyc. Aristoph. Ach. 93. εκκοψειε ye κοραξ πατάτας τον ye σόν ( όφθαΧμόν ) του πρεσβεως, as U0- men meum absentis , meas prcesentis preces , Cic. Plane. 10 , 26. Comp. §. 431, l. Xoy ους In the same manner the pronoun αυτός , f self" is added to the pronoun possessive in the genitive, as in Latin, mea ipsius culpa. II. o', 39. νωίτερον Χβχο? αυτών . Herod. VI, 97. άπιτε επί τα νμετερα αυτεων , and pas - sim q . 2 . As the genitive is sometimes put objectively (§. 313.) the pronouns possessive too are used in a similar manner, though rarely, in the same sense, e. g. σός πόθος , Od. X', 201 . not ‘ thy regret", but ‘my regret for thee*. Soph. (Ed. C. 332. τεκνον, τί ό* ηΧθες ; ΙΣΜ. σ>}, πάτερ , προμηθίς, ‘ from anxiety on thy account". Id. El. Fisch. ii, p. 234. I # / 673 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. 343 . τάμα νουθετηματα, ‘ the lessons which thou gavest me*. Plat. Gorg . p. 85. ciWoi yap €ρω τη $ 09 , τούτον—φανερός εστι Αεωνίόης άποπεμ- πων. Soph. (Ed. Τ. 246. κατευχομαι όε τον όεόρακότ , είτε τις εις ων ΧεΧηθεν, είτε πΧειόνων μετά , κακόν κακώς νιν άμορον εκτρίφαι βίον. Comp. Ex. 269 sq. Plat. Apol. S. p. 93. ο'ιμαι άν μη ότι ίόιωτην τινά 3 άλλα τον μεγαν βασιΧεα ευαριθμητους άν ευρειν αυτόν ταυτας προς τάς αΧΧας ημέρας και νύκτας. Id. Rep . III, ρ. 284. άνόρα όη, ■ ως εοικε , όυνάμενον υπό σοφίας παντοόαπόν γίγνεσθαι και μιμεισθαι πάντα "χρήματα , εί η μιν άφίκοιτο εις την πόΧιν — — — προσκυνοίμεν άν αυτόν. Xenoph. Anab. II, 4, 7. εγω μεν ούν βασιΧεα, ψ ποΧΧά ούτως εστι τα συμμαχα, είπερ προθυμειται ημάς αποΧεσαι , ουκ οιόα 3 ό τι όει αυτόν α Ruhnk. ad Horn. Η. in Cer. 2. 675 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. όμόσαι. Id. C'l/rop. I, 3, 15. πειράσομαι τψ πάππω, aya- θων ιππέων κράτιστος ων ιππευς, συμμαχέΐν αντψ. Id. Mem. II, 3, 9· θαυμαστά ye \eyeis, ei κνυα μεν, et σοι ήν έπι προβάτος επιτήδειοι, καί τους μεν ποιμένας ησπαζετο, σοι δε προσιόντι εχαλεπαινεν, άμελησας άν του όρ-/ίζεσθαι επειρω ευ ποιησας πραΰνειν αύτόν, where Schutz and Schneider throw out αΰτον improperly. Comp. Isocr. Evag. p. 191. C. Nicocl. p. 28. B. The pronoun is fre¬ quently used thus after a proposition beginning with the relative, although the word itself to which the demon¬ strative pronoun refers has gone before. Herod, iv, 44. Aapeios βουλόμενος Ινδοί; ποταμέ, v, os κροκοδείλους δεύτε¬ ρος ουτος ποταμών πάντων παρέχεται, τούτον τον ποτα¬ μόν ειδεναι τη ές θάλασσαν εκδιδοι, SgC. b. The following passages are somewhat different: Herod. II, 124. εκ των λιθοτομιε ων των εν τιρ Αραβιω ουρεί, ίκ τοντεωυ ελκειν λίθους , which is a pleonasm originating in the ancient inartificial simplicity of the language. Thus also Thue. iv, 69. «· οίκίαι τοΰ προα¬ στίου έπάλξις λαμβάνουσαι, ανται ΰπηρχον ερυμα χ . A similar simplicity is observable in Pind. 01. l, 91· τάν οί πατήρ ύπερκρεμασε, καρτερον αυτψ λίθον. The pron. dem. also serves to express emphasis, Xen. Cyrop. vi, 1, 17. υμείς δέ τα προσορα νμιν αυτοΐς της Ασσυρίας, εκείνα κτάσθε καί ερ~/αζεσθε. c. The pron. demonstr. is very frequently redundant before and after participles or infinitives with the article, without a parenthesis. Plat. TheaeLp.U9.sq. το κοινΐ, δόξαν τούτο yiyveT αι άληθες. Id. Leg. Ill, p. 114. μών ' οϋκ εκ τούτων, των κατά μίαν οίκησιν καί κατά yevos διε¬ σπαρμένων (τοιανται πολιτειαι yiyvovTai.') Comp. Isocr. χ Jensius ad Lucian. T. n, p. 355 sq. Dorvill. acl Charit. p. 288. Schaefer, in Dionys. Hal. I. p. 83 sq. not. I 676 Syntax, Of the Use of the Pronouns * Areop. p. 145. A . Xen . Cyvop. IV, 2, 39· €t $e των vvvl οιωκοντω v και κατακαινοντων τους ημετερονς ποΧεμίους και μαχο μενών, €ΐ τις εναντιονται , τούτων όόζομεν όντως αμεΧειν. Id. Ages. 4, 4. οι προίκα εύ πεπονθότες, οντοι άβι ηόεως ύπηρετουσι τφ evepyeTrj. The passage in Herod . IV, 1/2. is more peculiar, ομννουσι μεν τους παρά σφίσι >f ft Λ f , , . , . ανορας οικαιοτατονς και αρ ιστούς Xey ο μεν ον ς yevecrOai το ν¬ τους, των τύμβων άπτόμενοι γ . Xen. Cyr. VIII, 7, 9· το Ιε π ροβουΧενειν και το η y ε ισ θ α ι, εφ 6 τι άν καιρός όοκτ} eivai, τον το ητροστάττω τφ προτερφ yεvoμεvφ, and in the neut. plur. ib, 12. to $e όνσκαταπρακτοτερων T€ epq. ν, καί το ποΧΧα μεριμνάν και το μη όννασθαι ησυχίαν εχειν, κεντρί- ζομενον νπο της προς ταμ a epya φιΧονεικίας , και τό € 7 τιβου- Xeveiv και το επιβονΧευεσθαι, ταντα τφ βασιΧενοντι άνατγκη σου μαΧΧον σνμπαρομαρτείν. Eur. Ph. 545. κείνο κάΧΧιον, f >t ' λ _ τεκνον , ισότητα τιμειν , d. Another, but a similar case is, when the neuter of the demonstrative pronoun is used, in order to an¬ nounce a noun which follows, whether in the masc. Or fem. Plat. Rep. JII, p. 303. ημάς αυτούς όιδάζωμεν, πότε - ρον μεΧετητεον τον το τψ πΧουσίω και αβίωτου τω μη μεΧε- τωντι, η νοσοτροφία. Protag. p. 191. τί ποτ εστίν αυτό, η άρετη, which is particularly frequent in Plato. Thus Cicero says : Tusc, Qu. i, 34, 83. illud angit vel potius excruciat, discessus ab omnibus iis , quae sunt bona in vita. Eurip, Hipp. 431. μόνον όε τούτο φασ αμιΧΧ άσθαι βίω, yvωμηv όικαίαν KayaOrj ν 3 ότψ ··■»*' ’ παρη . ( ■ / · 4 » Λ ? * J > i Λ * / I ί —· ’ &V\&- Ww W *,r Vi Μ · .#.* · * Obs. In a similar manner εκείνο often announces an entire y Jensius 1. c. Morus ad Isocr. Paneg. p. 9. c. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 382. z Fisch. ii, p. 235 sq. a Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. p. 138. ad Cratyl. p. 134. 677 Χ'ϊ- Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns , proposition. Plat· Hipp. Maj. ρ· 9· αΧλ εκείνο, μώνμη Λακεδαιμόνιοι σου βελτιον αν παιδεύσειαν τους αυτών παιόας; See HeindorPs note, ρ. 129- 3. The pron. dem. is not unfrequently used for the 468. pron. relative in the continuation of a proposition begin¬ ning with a relative, where this is to be repeated, but in a different case from that in the first instance. II. d, 78. os με-γα πάντων ’Apyelwv κρατέει καί οί πείθονται ’Αχαιοί, for Κ αι $ π. A. Comp. Od. a’, 70. Herod, hi , 34. ΤΙρηξά- σπεα, τον έτίμα τε μάλιστα, καί οί τάς άγγελίας 'έφερε ουτος. Comp. ib. 120. ιι, 40. viii, 62. Plat. Euthyd. ρ. 68. άρ ουν ταϋτα ψβ σά είναι, ων 0ν άρξ >js, καί ίξρ σοί αν τ οί $ χρήσθαι, 6 τι αν βοΰλν,, for καί oh όξρ σοι. Comp: Theaet. ρ. 155 . Rep. νι, ρ. ns. Xen. Cyr. in,· 3, 38. ποΰ ύη εκείνος έστιν ο άνηρ, os συνεθηρα ημΤν, καί συ μοι μάλα έόόκει s θαύμαζαν αυτόν. Comp. IsOCV. Pdltath. ρ. 278. Β. JEschin. in Ctesiph. ρ. 510. Also in the same case with the relative, Herod, ix, 21. fj τό "επιμαχώτα- Τον ην τ oi χωρίου παντός, καί πρόσοόος. μάλιστα ταότ,, ίγί- νέτο τη 17Γ7ΓΜ. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun is wanting. II. y, 235. ους κεν ευ γνοίην και τ ούνομα μυθησαίμην (ούνο- μα αύτων, ί. β. ων οίν.) Plato Phcedon. Ρ . 187. , βκεΊνοι, oh ΤΙ μέλει της αύτων ψυχής, άλλα μή σώματα τ τ\άττοντες ζωσι (sc. αυτοί), unless in such cases it be better to supply the relative in another case . The demonstrative pronoun follows the relative even in the same proposition. Herod, iv, 44. Ινδόν ποταμόν, ος κροκοδείλους δεύτερος ουτος ποταμών πάντων παρέχεται. b Herm. ad Vig. ρ· 707 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 248, (which passage, however, does not come under this head). Hipp. p. 145. I 678 Syntax . Of the Use of the Pronouns. Soph. Philoct. 316. 0/9 ΟΧυμι not θεοί δοιεν 7 tot αντοΐς άντίποιν εμού παθεΊν (ll). Eurip. Afldr. 651. (γι/ναικα βάρβα¬ ρον) ήν χρην σ εΧαυνειν τη v$ υπερ N είΧου ροάς. In Xe- noph, R. L(IC. 10, 4. 09 (AvKovpyos') επειδή κατεμαθεν , ότι οι μη βονΧομενοι επιμεΧεισθαι της αρετής ουχ ικανοί είσι τάς πατρίδας αυζειν, εκείνος εν τ rj Σπάρτη ηνάγκασε, fyc. this construction is occasioned by the parenthesis®. Note. The case where the noun itself with the article fol¬ lows the relative, is similar to the foregoing. See §. 474. 4. By means of the demonstrative pron. also, propo¬ sitions, the first of which contains the verb εϊμί, and the second the pron. relat. are contracted into one. II. X', 6ll. N εστορ ερειο, όντινα τούτον α·γει βεβΧημενον εκ ποΧεμοιο, for οστΐ9 ούτός εστιν, ον άγει. 0(1. ι, 348. οφρ ειδής, ο ιόν τι ποτδν τόδε νηυς εκεκευθει ήμετερη , for οΐόν τι το ποτδν τόδε εστιν, ο ην, εκ. JEschpl. Prom. 251. μεγ ωφεΧημα τουτ εδωρησω βροτοίς. Eurip. Ion. 1281. ο'ίαν εχιδναν τηνδ’ έφυσας\ Plat. Prot. p. 102. ? Ω Πρωταγόρα, τούτο μεν ου δεν θαυμαστόν Χε^εις, for ουδεν θαυμαστόν εστι τούτο, ο Χε*γεις Λ . Thus apparently Theocr. 1 , 7. is to be explained, άδων, ώ ποιμάν, τδ τεδν μεΧος, ή τδ καταχες την απδ τάς πέτρας καταΧείβεται νφόθεν ύδωρ , for ή τδ καταχες τηνο ύδωρ εστιν , ο καταΧεί- βεται. 5. The demonstrative pron. is often used instead of the adverb * here, there". II. φ\ 532 sq. ή yap ΆχιΧ- Χευς εyyυς όδε κΧονεων, ζ for Achilles rages there near the tumult". Comp. Od. ω, 307. Eur. Androm. 1232. δαίμων όδε τις Χευκην αιθέρα πορθμευόμενος —-πεδίων επι- c Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 1. c. Herm. ad Viger. p. 70S. d Hcind. ad Plat. Oorg. p. 193. 1 679 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. βαίνει. Ale. 24. ηδη δε to vac θάνατον είσορω πέλαί. 134. αλλ’ όχαοωκ έκ δόμων τκ ’έρχεται δακρυρροονσα. Ipfllg. Α· 6. Tts χοτ αρ όστηρ οδε πορθμευει. Aristoph. Nub. 214. αλλ.’ ») Αακεδαίμων trod '' στιν ; ΜΑΘ. οχου στιμ; αυτηΐ. όδε is often put thus with the personal pronoun, with or without είμί, in the sense of the Latin, en ! adsum. Od. φ' , 207 . ένδον μεν δη όύ αυτοί eyw κακα πολλά μο- Ί ήσαί, ’ ηλυθον. Comp, π', 205. Pind. ΟΙ. IV, 37. αϊτοί έγιο ταχυτάτι. Eurip. Supp. 1048. ηδ’ iy προ σοό, for όπέρ εμοΰ. Plat. Gorg . ρ. 92. ovTocri ανηρ ον παναεται φΧναρων. €i7re μοι, ω "Σώκρατεί, οέκ αισχύνη &C. for συ ού παΰσψ Comp. lb. p. 126. These pronouns are put for the second person mostly in a contemptuous sense f . 7. οντος is frequently put with καί in the same man- ner as the Latin, et is, isque, in the sense, and ’ truly, indeed’. Herod. I, 147. ουτοι yap μοόνοι Ίώνων ούκ ayovaiv Άπατοΰρια' και ουτοι κατά φόνου τινα σκηψιν. Id. X 1,11. « Toup. ad Suid. ι, ρ. 429 sq. Schaef. in Dion. Hal. I, p. 77· Not. f Hensde Sp. Crit. in Plat, p.3 sq. Schist. in Dion. Hal. ι, ρ. 114, 62. Heiiul. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 14-3. 680 Syntax. · Of the Use of the Pronouns. €7τι ζνρον ακμής εγεται νμιν τα π ρήγματα, άντρες 'Ιωνες } η eivai εΧενθεροισι η δονΧοισι, και τοντοισι ώς δραπεττισι. More frequently, however, the pronoun is put in the neut. plur. that is, provided generally that the more accu¬ rate definition of an entire proposition, at least of seve¬ ral words, or of one verb, and not of a single noun, is to be thereby expressed, και ταντα. It is commonly translated € although’, and 6 especially"; but this signifi¬ cation is not contained in the words και ταντα , but in the participle following, or generally in the kind of sup¬ plement ; since this, for the most part, contains a chief motive of an action, a particular obstacle, or generally a principal reference. Plat. Rep. hi, p. 298. 'Όμηρος — » ^ ~ / « f >/ > n t »\« '* *) — εν ταις των ηρωων εστιασεσιν οντε ΐ'χυνσιν αντονς εστκ$, και ταντα εττ\ θαΧάτττ] εν ΈΧΧησπόντφ όντας , where the ' although", which is required by the sense, lies in the participle. Soph. El. 6 13. ητις τοιαντα την τεκονσαν νβρισε } και ταντα τηΧικοντος , et quidem , quod indig- nius etiam est , etsi tantilla cetate sit. The neuter of the pronoun is used absolutely, without a verb, when it refers to a verb preceding. Plat. Rep. iv, p. 331. εάν $ετ] μάγεσθαι, άρ * ον 7τΧονσίοις άνΰράσι μα’χοννται , αντοι όντες ποΧεμον άθΧηταί ; Ναί τοντό γε, for μαχοννται*. * * 8. ταντα is often put for $ιά ταντα , f on this account". Plat. Symp. p. 168. ταντα $ εκαΧΧωττισάμην, ίνα καΧος τταρά καΧόν Ίω. Protag. p. 87. αλλ’ αντά ταντα ννν ηκω τταρα σε . Oil» ίΐί 9· The demonstrative pron. is also used with adverbs of time and place in more accurate definitions, where. s Hoogev. ad Vig. p. 176 sq. * Koen. ad Greg. p. 11. Brunck. ad Arist. Nub. 319* 681 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. in English ‘just’is used, Herod, x n, 104. ώς h“> ruy- γάνω ’τανΰν τάόε έστοργώί έκείνους, αυτοί μάλιστα εξεπι- στοαι, ‘just now’, as nunc ipsum Cic. ad Att. xn, 3. ^ XII, 16, 40. Eurip. Ion. 554. τοΰτ e K εΐ νυν εσπαρημεν, ‘ at that very time’. 10. αύ TOS is often in the sense of is ipse. Plat. Lys. 472. p. 218. αύτοΰ τρωτόν ήόέως άκούσαιμ άν, επί τω και εισει- μι, for αΰτοΰ τούτοι/. Rep. II, ρ. 217. αύ το οόκ είρηται, ο μάλιστα eSei ρηθηναι. Thus ipse is often put for is ipse, e. g. Cic. Fin. i, 5, 13. See Misc. Phil, n, 1 . p. 96'. n Sometimes αύτο'? stands for οότος or έκε'ινος, and has the relative after it. Eur. Troad. 668. άπέπτνσ' ai- την, OTIS avSpa τον τάρας καινοΊσι λεκτροις άποβαλουσ άλλον φίλεΐ. Plat. Theag. ρ. 9· άρ ούκ αότη, r, πλοίων όπιστάμεθα αρχειν. In Thuc. II, 37· οό παρανομονμεν — — άκροάσει τών νόμων καί μάλιστα αότάν, όσοι όπ άφελεία τ £ν άόικονμόνων κεΊνται, the demonstrative pron. is omitted, and αντων (ex Us) governed of μάλιστα, et ex iis maxime edrum. y, 12 . αυτό? is often used after ordinal numbers, to shew that one person with several others, whose number is less by one than the number mentioned, has done some¬ thing. Thuc. I, 46. Κ ορινθίων στρατηγό? ην αενοκλεΆμ ο Εύθυκλόου?, -πέμπτος αότός, ‘ with four others’. Xen. Hist. Gr. II, 2, 17. μετά ταΰτα ρρεθη πρεσβευτής ές ΑακεΟαίμονα αΰτοκράτωρ, όέκατος αότός, ‘with nine others’. In¬ stead Of which, Thuc. I, 57. μετ’ άλλων όννόαΚ ■g/l t & Λ It ·- # I ^ 1 · i" I ■’ . L | ' l’ · 13. Homer often puts ού, οΐ, e, which he uses as ΐ Heind. ad Plat. Lys. p. 4 sq. k Wasse ad Thuc. n, 13. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 262. Hoog. ad Vig. p. 73. a. 473. i 68.ί Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. a pronoun of the third person (§. 147. Not.), and makes the noun itself follow these. II. ν' , 600. ijv apa ol θβρά- 7rwv ττ οι fxe v i Χαών. φ 9 249. ίνα μ iv παυσειε πόνοιο , S? ον ΑχιΧΧηα. Od. ζ, 48. αυτίκα δ> Ηω$· ηΧθεν ευθρονος, η μιν eyetpe, Ν αυσικάαν ευπεπλον. This is the same idiom which obtains in the article also, §. 262. Obs. Relative Pronoun. r ' . *H *i \ V td f ' ' , ·. , The case of the Pronoun relative is properly deter¬ mined by the verb of the proposition in which it stands ; but it is a peculiarity of the Greek language, that when it should be put in the accusative, on account of the verb active following, it is put in the genitive or dative, according to the case of the foregoing noun or pronoun, to which it is referred, and is governed by this noun or pronoun preceding not only in gender and number, but in case also. Herod . i, 23. Άρίονα — — διθύραμβον πρω- τον ανθρώπων των ημείς 'ίδμεν, ποιησαντα. TJlUC . VII, 21. aywv αι το των πόλεων, ών επεισε, στρατιάν. Eurip. Ale. 501. η χρη μ€ παισιν οίς 'Αρης iyGivaTo μάχην συνάψαι* Jsocr. de Pac. ρ. 162. Β. φημί χρηναι - χρησθαι ταΊς σννθηκαις , μη τανταις , αΐς νυν τινες yεypάφaσιv, άλλα, 8$C. Plat. Gorg. p. 14. οι δήμιου pyol τούτων ων επρνεσεν ο το σκολιον ττοιησας. Jens, ad Lucian. Τ. V. ρ. 585. Fisch. in, a. ρ. 337 sq. If the word to which the relative is referred be a pron. demonstr. this pron. is generally omitted, and the relative takes the same case. Isocr. Paneg. p . 46. B. C. η πόλις ημών , ών ελαβεν, άπασι μετεδωκε, for μετεδωκεν e κείνων, αελ. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 26. εμοί δοκεϊ* σύ ού πμνυ άκολουθα XGyGtv ουδέ σύμφωνα οίς το πρώτον eXeyes, for εκείνοις, a. Xen. Anob . I, 9, 25. συν οΐς μάλιστα φιλεϊς. * I Syntax *. Of tlie Use of the Pronouns . 68S Because the accusative alone is often put for the accus. with κατά, hence Dcmosth. in Alid. p. 5io, 10. says δίκην βουλόμενοι λαβεΐν, ων eiA των άλλων ετεθεαντο θρασύν οντα καί βδελυρόν, for καθ' a — θρασυν. Sometimes the con¬ struction, by these means, is complicated. Soph. (Ed. T. 862. ούδεί' yap αν πράξαιμ' αν, ών ου σοι φίλον , for ονδεν αν πράξαιμ αν εκείνων, ά με πράξαι ου σοι φίλον εστί 1 . Obs. 1. This is imitated also by other relatives : οθεν. Soph. Track. 701. εκ δε yrjs, οθεν προυκειτ, άναζεουσι θρομβώ¬ δεις άφροί } for εκεΐθεν, οπού. Thuc. 1, 89. διεκομίζοντο εύθυς, οθεν νπεξεθεντο, παιδας, for εκειθεν, οπού. Plat. Polit. ρ. 17· φράσον δη μοι , το της άποπλανησεως δπόθεν ημάς δευρ' rjyayev. οϊμαι μεν yap μάλιστα, οθεν ερωτηθεις συ την άyελaιoτpoφίav οπη διαιρετεον, είπες. οΐος. Plat. Rep. νιπ, ρ. 208. ελαττω φυοιντο των τοιουτων κακών , οίων νυν δη είπομεν. Comp, ιν, ρ. 377· Isocrat . -Eg· ρ. 392 . Β. a. This, even when it should be in the nominative, with the substantive belonging to it, and have εστί or είσί after it> takes the case of the word to which it is referred, in which case εστί or είσί is omitted. Thuc. vii, 21. προς άνδρας τολ¬ μηρούς , οίους καί Αθηναίους , for οίοι Αθηναίοι εισιν. Plat. Soph. ρ. 241. οϊ(*) ye εμοί παντάπασιν άπορον , for οΐος εyω € ίμι. Xen. Mem. S. ι, 9, 3. πολλω ηδιόν εστι , χαριζόμενον οΐο> σοί ανδρί η απεχθομενον, ωφελεισθαι , for ανδρι 3 οΐος συ εί. Hence Plat. Euthyd. ρ. 5. κρατίστω — και άλλον διδάξαι λεγείν τε καί aayy ράφεσθαι λ6yoυς οίους εις τα δικαστήρια , properly οίοι εις τά δικ. αν αρμοττοιεν. See Heind. ρ. 302 sy. Also when οΐος stands for άστε. Demosth. ρ. 23, 16. τοιουτους ανθρώπους, ο'ίους μεθυσθεντας δρχεΐσθαι. — 1). If the word to which οΐος should refer, is omitted, the article is put with οΐος in the case of the word omitted. Xen. Hist. Gr. n, 3, 25. yv6vτες τοΐς ο'ίοις ημιν τε καί υμΐν 'χαλεπήν πολιτείαν εΐναι δημοκρατίαν, for τοιούτοις, οΐοι ημείς τε καί υμεΐς * f m εσμεν . 1 Brunck. ad Arist. Thesm. 835. Pint. 1128. m Reiz. de Acc. Inch p. 79* 684 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. ηΧικος. Arist. Ach. 703. βίκος avSpa κυφόν, ηΧ'ικον Θον- '^>ιοην, εξοΧεσθαι. Peel. 465. εκείνο $εινόν τοιιτιν ηΧίκοκτι νψν } for ηΧικος θ. εστι, τηΧικουτοις, ηΧ'ικοι νψ εσμεν. κν Ohs. 2. Also when the relative remains in the right case, it serves to contract two propositions into one, by omitting the demonstrative pronoun. Xen. Mem. S.U, 6 , 34. εμοι eyylyveTai εύνοια προς ους αν V7 νοΧαβω ευνοϊκούς όχειν προς εμε, for προς εκείνους , ους αν ύποΧ. Ohs. 3. The case of the preceding noun stands instead of the nominative of the relative pronoun. Plat. Phtedon. p. 156. τούτο S όμοιόν εστιν φ νυν §η eXeyeTo ; where, however, Stob. Eel. Eth. p. 78. reads ο νυν όη eXe'yeTo (which would be a con¬ struction like that noticed in §. 474. 2.), and lamhlichus , p. 76. o— eXeye. 474. Sometimes the relative has the noun, to which it should be referred, in the same case after it; as in Latin. Herod · V, 106. μη μεν 7 τρότερον εκόυσασθαι , τον εχων κιθώνα καταβησομαι ες Ίωνίην, πριν, 8gC. Eurip. Or. 63 . ην yap κατ οίκους εΧιφ , οτ εις Ύροίαν επΧει, παρθένον , — — ταυττι yey ηθε. Xen. Anah. I, 9, 19* el τινα όρωη κατασκευάζοντα ης αργοί χωράς, for την χωράν , ης άρ- χοι. In this case the noun frequently has the article. Soph. Antig. 404. Plat. Polit. p. 29. Rep. v, p. 6J\ VJ . _ , ■ · ··! , ; i · · a. Hence the nouns which should precede the rela¬ tive, in conjunction with a demonstrative pronoun or adjective, in the same case with these, are frequently referred to the relative. II. η, 186. άλλ’ ore <$η τον Ικανέ , φερων αν όμιΧον απάντη, ός μιν επ^ράφας κυνερ βαΧε , φαίϋιμος Αίας. Plat. Hipp. Maj. p. 5 . τι ποτέ το αίτιον, οτι οι παΧαιοι εκείνοι , ων ονοματ a μεyaXa XeyeTai επι σοφκ£, Π ιττακου τε και Β ίαντος ——*- ως η πάντες η οι ποΧΧοι αυτών φαίνονται άπεχόμενοι των ποΧιτικων πράξεων ; η Valcken. ad Herod, ρ. 574, 86. Fisch. in, a. p. 340. Herm. ad Vig. ρ. 7Π, 35. Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. 685 also with the article. Soph. (Ed. Col. 907. viv o οΰσπερ OUTOS TOWS νόμονς είσήλθ' έχων, τοΰτοισιν, ουκ αλλοισιν, άρμοσθήσεται. DemOSth. in Leptin. p. 46Q, 16. των εισφο¬ ρών και τριηραρχιών - ούδείς έστ ατελής έκ των παλαιών νόμων, ούδέ ους οντος έγραφε, τούς άφ’ 'Αρμοδίου και Άρι- στο*γ€ΐτονο9 0 . b. This construction is also united with the pre¬ ceding. Soph. (Ed. Col. 334. (ήλθον) ξύν ωπερ είχον ο’ικε- τών πιστώ μόνψ. Eurip. Or. 1406. o't Se προς θρόνους έσω μολόντες as εγημ <5 τοξότα s Πα> 5 7 νναικός. Thuc. VII, 54. Αθηναίοι δε (τροπάΐον έστησαν ) ης οι Ύυρσηνοι τροπής έποιησαντο τών πεζών, for τής τροπής τών πεζών, ήν οι Τ νρσ. έπ. Comp. Pint . Hipp. Maj. ρ· 26 . c. In the above instances the relative takes the case of the preceding substantive ; but sometimes instead of this the substantive takes, even when it stands, first, the case of the relative wh^ch follows. II. σ, 192. άλλου £ ον τεν οΐδα, τεν αν κλυτά τενχεα δόω. Herod. II, 106. τάν δε στήλας τάς Ίστα κατά τάς* χώρας ο Αίγυπτου βασιλεύς Σεσωστρις, a't μεν πλεύνες ούκετι φαίνονται* περιεοΰ- σαι. Plat. Menon. p.S 81. έχεις ουν είπεΐν άλλου ότουούν πράγματος, ον οι μεν φάσκοντες διδάσκαλοι είναι, —-ομο- λογοννται πονηροί είναι, ib. ρ. 382. ώμολογήκαμεν δέ γε, πράγματος, οδ μήτε διδάσκαλοι μήτε μαθηταί είεν, τούτο διδακτόν μή είναι. In this manner we must explain Virg. jEn. i , 557. urbem, quam statuo, vestra est v . ·· t 4 '/ i \ ·./ t ' « Note. Sometimes in a proposition, consisting of two mem¬ bers,, each of which depends upon the relative, but in each of which the relative should be in a different case, it is put only o Wolf, ad Dem. Lept. p. 236. p Heind. ad Plat. Lys. p. 47 sq. Dorville ad Char. p. 593. 609. VOL. Π. 686 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. once, and is to be supplied in the other in another case. Od. β', 114. άνωχθι δε μιν γαμεεσθαι τω, ότεω re πατήρ κελεται και ανδάνει αυτή, i. e. καί os ανδάνει αυτή. See 428. See 590. 475. The relative often differs in number,, from the word to which it is referred,, and is in the singular when that is in the plural. This takes place when it refers not so much to a determinate person or thing,, as to all of the species to which the preceding sub¬ stantive belongs, or when a word of general import, as 7 ras, precedes. Hence also in this case οστις or os av is commonly put. II. π , 621. χαλεπόν σε — πάν¬ των. άνθ ρώπων σβεσσαι μένος, os κε σευ άντα ελθη αμυνόμενος. Od. φ', 293. o!i/os σε τρώει μελιηδης, όστε και άλλους βλάπτει, os άν μιν χάννον ελγ. Comp. ib. 313. Soph . Autig. 707 . 6 στις yap αυτός η φρονείν μόνος δοκεί, η γλώσσαν, ην ουκ άλλος, η ψυχήν εχειν, ουτοι διαπτυχθεν- τες, ώφθησαν κακοί. Euvip. Hec. 363. επειτ ίσως άν δε¬ σποτών ώμων φρενας τυχοιμ άν, όστις άργυρον μ ώνησε- ται. Amstoph. Nub. 348. yiyvovTai π άνθ' ο τι βούλονται. Simonid. αρ Plat. Protag. ρ. 159- πάντας δε έπαινοι μι και φιλεω εκών, ο στις ερδρ μηδέν αισχρόν. Plat. Rep. VIII. ρ. 230. προσγελφ τε και άσπάζεται πάντας, ω άν περιτυγ- 476 . Similar to the usage explained in §. 471 . d. is that, in which the relative is followed by the proper noun, with the article, as if for explanation in the apposition. Plat. Theaet. p. 101 sq . ετερα τοιαυτα, ά δη τινες τα φαν- τασματα υπό απειρίας άληθη καλουσιν. Hlpp. Maj. ρ. 29* ημείς yap που εκείνο εζητουμεν, ψ πάντα τα καλά π pay ματα καλα εστιν, ώσπερ φ πάντα τα μεγάλα εστί μεγάλα, τω νπερεχοντι. Rep . IX, ρ. 2 55. ουκουν τοί s τοιουτοις κακοίς 3 Brunck. ad Soph, Aj. 760. 687 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. /· ΐτΧείω καρττοΰται o ανηρ, ος άν κακώς εν εαυτίρ ΐτοΧιτευο μένος (ον νυν $η συ αθΧιωτατον εκρινας τον τνραννικον) ως μη ιδιώτης καταβιω*. Comp. §. 439· Obs. In a similar manner the relative is explained by an infinitive or an entire proposition. Thuc. v, 6. ώστε ονκ civ εΧαθεν αυτόθεν ορμωμενος ο Κλεωι/ τψ στρατίρ οττερ ητροσε^εγετο ττοιησειν αυτόν, εττι την ΑμφιττοΧιν , υττεριόοντα σφων το ττΧηθος, αναβησεσθαι. Isocv. 7Γ. αντ. ρ. 314. u4., α φυΧακτεον εστιν, θ 7 τως μη^εν νμιν σνμβησεται τοιου- τον, μηΧ, α τοΊς αΧΧοις αν 'εττιτιμησαιτε, (vulg- — τιμησητε) τουτοις αυτοί φαίνησθε περιπίπτοντες. Thus the genitive of the relative after a comparative is explained by a sup¬ plement with η : Isocr. Panath. p. 249- B. ων τις άΧΧος φανησεται 7 τρονοηθεις η τις εμΊΓο^ων καταστας , του μη$εν ετι y ενεσθαι τοιουτο. Comp, de PttC. ρ. l6l. D. See §. 450. The relative serves also, as in Latin, to connect pro- 477 positions instead of the demonstrative, e. g. Κρόνος κατε- 7 Γιεν Εστίαν, είτα Δήμητραν και Upav μεθ ας ΠΧοοτωι/α και Ποσβι^ωι/α. This takes place also in combinations which do not occur in Latin. a . After a parenthesis, when the discourse reverts to what preceded. II. X221 . ( τις ττρώτος ’Ay αμεμνονος άντίος ηΧθεν ;) Ίφιδάμας Άντηνορ&ης , ηυς τε μ^ας re, os τράφη εν θργκγ, #C. to V. 230. os ρα τότ Άτρεβεω ’ Ay α- μεμνονος άντίος ηΧθεν, hie, inquam , obviam processit, or hie igitur, 8$c. Comp. Herod, vn, 205. Soph. O. C. 1308 — 1326. Eur. Or. 892—904 s . b. In addresses. Soph. (Ed. C. 1354. νυν S’ αξιωθείς r Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 121. ad Cratyl. p. 97 . Parm. p. 226. t Animadv. in H. Horn. p. 176. Horn. Hymni et Batraehom. p. 31. X 2 688 i Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. εϊσι, κάκουσας y εμού τοιαυθ\ a μη τουδ’ οίποτ ευφρανει βίον. ός y , ώ κάκιστε, σκήπτρα και θρόνους εχων, -— τον αυτός αυτου πατέρα τόνδ' άπηΧασας, where properly συ y, ω κάκ. should be put. Thus too with the impera¬ tive. Soph. (Ed. T. 723. τοιαυτα φήμαι μαντικαι διώρισαν. ών εντρεπου συ μηδέν, for αλλά τούτων εντρεπου συ μ. Id. (Ed. C. 731. (ορω τιν υμάς όμμάτων είΧηφότα*ς φόβον νεωρη τής εμής επεισόδου *) όν μήτ όκνειτε, μήτ αφήτ έπος κακόν , where όν is referred to the personal pronoun contained in εμής, for άλλα μ*} όκνειτε εμε. Comp. 282. Eurip. Andr. 177 - Iphig. A. 394. And in interrogations. Eur . Or. 746. OP. ψήφον άμφ' ημών πόλίτας επί φόνω θεσθαι ■χρεών. ΠΥΛ. ή κρίνει τί ’χρήμα; for τι δε χρ. αυτή κρίνει ; * ' . f I # J, ♦ , « .· c. For the demonstrative with yap. Eurip. Hec. 409- βουΧει πεσειν προς ούδας, εΧκώσαί τε σόν ydpovTa χρώ- τα , προς βίαν ωθούμενη, άσχημονήσαί τ ,' εκ νέου βραχίονος σπασθεισ ; α πείσει, ‘ since all this thou must suίfer , . Id. Ale. 6β9· ου μην ερεις y0 μ, ως άτιμάζοντα σόν yήρaς, θα- νειν προυδωκας , οστις αίδόφρων προς σ ήν μάΧιστα. Here the proposition with ός contains at the same time the antithesis of the preceding negative proposition, as in the following passage, it expresses the antithesis of an interrogation, which also has a negative sense. Xen. Mem. S. Ill, 5, 15 sq. πότε yap ούτως Αθηναίοι, ώσπερ Λα¬ κεδαιμόνιοι, ή πρεσβυτερους αίδεσονται ; — οΐ από των πάτε¬ ρων αρχονται καταφρονείν των yεpaιτεpωv' — ή σωμασκήσουσιν ούτως;—οί ου μόνον αυτοί ευεζίας αμεΧουσιν, άλλα και των επιμεΧουμενών κατα^/εΧώσι, &C. when the proposition with οί may be rendered by c nay’ ; f nay they begin, nay they neglect 3 . d. o especially often stands at the beginning of a pro¬ position, i. e. St ό for διά τούτο , quare for itaque. Eutip. Hec. 13. νεώτατος S* ήν lljotauticoir ο καί με yής υπεζεπεμ- I Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. 68θ , f er . ( B ) Comp. Ph. 156. 270. Isocr. de Pac. p. 160 . A. οττερ άξιου έστί SeSievai, μη καί νϋν ήμβίς 'ένοχοι yeviineOa ταύταις ταΐς άνοίακ 1 . Thus also a for Si’ «., Soph. Tr. 186. α καί σε ταμ άνασσαν βλιτίσιν λέγω ταv άλyω κλυ'ωυ, - του'σοε καί / Λ ττρασσαν στυγω. It precedes also, when there is no pronoun demon- 478. strative following, but an entire complete proposition to which it is referred. Eurip. Ion 654. o S ούκτόν άνθρώ- τΓ οισι καν άκουσιν rj, δίκαιον eivai μ ο νομος η φυσίς θ άμα ,παρείχε τω θεφ, where ο is referred to the following : Si- καιον eivai. τοϋτό or τ αυτά έση may be supplied, as in Plat. Gorg. p. 158. ip μόνω ασφαλές ταντην την ευεργεσία ν προέσθαι, {τοϋτό έστιν)’ είττερ τψ οντι Ιιύναιτό τις άγαθυΰί 7 Γοιείν. Hence the following kinds of construction arise: a. The neuter 0 at the beginning of a proposition which refers to a succeeding proposition, has the sense of quod attinet ad id, quod, as the Latin, quod. Xen. Hier. 6 , 12. ο ο έκλωσα? ημάς, <ύς τους μύν φίλους μάλιστα ευ ττοιειυ όυνάμεθα, τούς ο ύχθρούς ττάντων μάλιστα χειρου- μοθα, οιίοε ταύθ' οϊΐτως εχε<, ‘ with regard, however, to that on account of which thou enviest us’, viz. that we, &c. Here 6 refers to the entire proposition which follows, «is τούς μύν φίλους, &c. and this proposition is to be con¬ sidered, at the same time, as an epexegesis of the «, t Valck. ad Phcen. p. 52. Musgr. ad Eurip. Ph. 270. Brunck. ad Eurip. Hec. 1. c. Phoen. 270. Arist. Eccl. 338. Herm. ad V.ger. p. 706 . 27. 690 Syntax. Of the Lse of' the Pronouns . according to §. 477 . as in Plat. Euthyd. p. 5. o Se σύ ρωτμς, την σοφίαν αντοιν , θαυμάσι , ώ Κριτών, πάν¬ σοφοι άτεχνώς , (as in Eurip. Iph. A. 943 .) f with respect, . however, to the subject of your enquiry’, viz. f their abi¬ lity’. The relative, and the proposition to which it should refer, are united in Herod, iii, 81. τα ί ey το πλήθος avωyε φερειν το κράτος , γνώμης της άρίστης ημάρ- τηκ€ 3 quod vero jussit , f with respect, however, to his desire, that the supreme power should be delivered to the people/ &c. b. This kind of remark upon a proposition follow¬ ing, which is expressed by the relative, often stands independently, and the proposition to which it refers is so placed as if τούτο, with a predicate, preceded. The leading proposition in that case commonly begins with ydp, οτι, επειόη, εί, fyc. yap. Isocr. Trap. p. 361. C. ο όε πάντων όεινό- τατον' όιεyyυωvτoς yap Μενεζενου προς τον Π ολεμαρχον τον παιόα, Τίασίων , ω? ελεύθερον οντος αυτόν, επτά ταλάν¬ των S^yy υησατο. lb. 364. Ε. ο όε πάντων μ^ιστον τεκμηριον, ω? Π ασιων ωμoλoyηκως ην αποόωσειν το άρ- yvpiov’ οτε yap Μενεξενος, 8ξθ. Comp, in Euthyn. ρ. 402. A. οτι, επειδή, ει, 8$C. Plat. Lys. ρ. 214. ό εστι τούτων όειυάτερον, οτι και %$ει, fyc. Rep. VI, ρ. 83 sq. ο μεν πάν¬ των θανμαστοτατον ακονσαι , οτι εν έκαστον ών επηνεσαμεν της φυσεως απολλυσι την εχουσαν φνχην και αποσπη. φιλο¬ σοφίας. Comp. Symp. ρ. 188. Euthyd. ρ. 73 . Isocr. Bus. 223. Β. in Soph, p.291. E. — Plat. Hipp. Min. p. 208. και o yε πάσιν εόοζεν άτοπώτατον και σοφίας πλεί- στης επιόε^μα, επειόη την ζώνην εφησθα του χιτωνίσκου, ην είχες, είναι μεν οΐαι αι Π ερσικαι των πολυτελών, ταυτην $ αυτός πλεξαι. — Isocr. Archid. ρ. 127. D. ο Se πάντων 691 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. σχετΧιώτατον, ei φίΧοπονώτατοι Βοκουντες είναι των Ελλη - ραθνμότερον βουΧευσάμεθα περί τούτων. Id. in Callm. ρ. 376 . Β. ο Βε πάντων αν τι 9 μάλιστα θαυμάσειεν, εί — τοιοΰτοκ opKovs ύποιήσασθε .— Thus also with ίταν. Arist. Vesp. 605. o oe γ ηοιστον τούτων ’εστ'ιν πάντων, οΰ πι- ΧεΧήσμηυ, όταν o'UaS ίω τον μισθόν εχων. Isocr -π. αντιΒ. ρ. S14. Ε. ο oe πάντων Βεινότατον, Βταν τ« writ μενκιν- Βυνεύων άξιο'ι κατηγορείν των Βιαβαλλύντων, ύτέρω Oe δικάζω./, μη την αύτήν εχρ γνώμην περί αυτών. Comp. Archld. ρ. 132. C. This kind of construction seems to have been originally an άνακολούθια, afterwards, by usage, becom¬ ing regular, in which, after a proposition which properly can itself only be dependent or included, the construc¬ tion of the remainder is made dependent upon it, as it it were an abstract proposition of itself. See Anacolu- thia. Otherwise, in order to bring it nearer to the genius of our language, we may supply τούτό εστιν, οτι el, 8$c. after the relative propositions. The relative is put also for various conjunctions, which would refer to a pronoun demonstrative preceding or to be supplied : a. For ώστε, e. g. in the form ίφ' ωτε , ‘ upon con¬ dition that’. This should be properly ’επ\ τούτψ, ώστε, oc Thuc III 114. says: σπονΒάς και ξυμμαχιαν εποιησαντο „· χ ; τ ' οΐ ;§6, ώστε μήτε Άμπρακιώτα, μετά Άκαρνάνων στρατεύειν έπι ΠεΧοποννησίους, μήτε, $C. Thus ώστε, Thuc. ill, 34. 75 . 114. v, 94. VII, 82. But because the relative properly refers to the demonstrative, so according to §. 473· they said επί τούτοι, ώ or ψτε, or, with the pre position repeated, επί τούτψ, έφ ωτε, as Plat. po . · ». 68. (Herodotus says VII, 154. ίπϊ τοϊσΒε, επ ωτε.) The demonstrative is then omitted by §. 478. εψ ψ, as Xen. Hist. Gr. 11 , 2 , 20. - and if ώτε. Hence on 479- I 692 Syntax. Of the Ose of the Pronouns. account of ώστε, as it should properly be, the infinitive usually follows in this place, though the fut. ind. also frequently follows, e. g. Thuc. i, 103. 1 13. 't ’ \ I . · V ' r - ' ' , ’ ' . ' v 1 Ohs. 1. There are also other cases where the relative os, οστά is put for ώστε , especially after οντω , or ώόε, τηλικοΰτος, τοιου- τ os, where, however, the verb {finite), and not the infinitive follows: Herod » iv, 52. κρηνη πικρή, οντω δη τι εουσα πικρή , η, με^/ά- θει σμικρή εουσα, /αρνα τοι/ 'Ύπανιν, ‘ so bitter that\ Comp. ι. 87. Plat. Rep . it, p. 212. ονδεις αν yevoiTo ούτως αδαμάν¬ τινος, os α v μείνειεν εν τ rj δικαιοσύνη. Xen. Anab. ιι. 5, 12. τις ον τω μαίνεται, ο στις ου σοι βούλεται φίλος είναι ; Isocr. Ppist. ρ. 408. Ώ. χρη επιθυμειν δόζης — τηλικαυτης το με'γεθος , ην μόνος άν συ των νυν όντων κτησασθα,ι δυνη- θείης 11 . Obs. 2. Other relatives also are put for conjunctions, espe¬ cially ofos and όσος. ofos in the expression ofos βίμι or ofos τ είμι with the infini¬ tive, which is properly τοιουτός είμι , ώστε, c 1 am of such a kind, as’, which may have three significations: 1. 6 1 am able*. 2 . ‘I am wont’. 3. ( I μ m ready, willing’. Od. φ', 172. ου yap / «■* > / / f r\ f t ^ τ οι σ% ye τοιον eyeivaTo ποτνια μητηρ, οίον τε ρυτηρα βίου τ εμεναι και οίστών. Soph. CEd. Τ. 1295. θέαμα & είσόφει ταχα τοιον τον, οΐον και aTvyovvT εποικτίσαι. Plat. Cratyl. ρ. 253. κινδυνεύει τοιουτός τις είναι ό Ay αμεμνων, ofos, αν δόζειεν αντίο, διαπονείσθαι και καρτερείν. c Agamemnon seems to be able to persevere in difficulties’. Comp. id. Criton. p. 106. Rep. i, p. 198. m, p. 321. Menoh. p. 389. Amat. p. 38. Xen. Cyrop. vn, 5, 84. ονκ εστιν άλλη φυλακή τοιαυ - τη, οϊα αυτόν τινα καλόν KayaOov υπάρ'χειν, a passage which is remarkable on this account, that dla stands without any gram¬ matical connection ; since elsewhere it is joined with a verb either ^s subject or object. Comp, i, 2, 3. vm, 4, 31. Demosth. 01. p. 23. The abbreviated forms ofos ώιμι and ofos τ είμι, are more common, which have usually this distinction, viz. that ofos είμι sig- u Wyttenb. Bibl. Crit. iii, 2, 63. Schafer. in Dion. Hal. p. 71. not. Syntax. Ojf the Use of the Pronouns. 693 nifies ' I am wont’, and of* τ «μα ‘ I am able-. But although this distinction almost always holds good, it is not universally established by usage, e. g. olds «ίμι signifies.. l am able, Pa . Rep. hi. in. ei μόλλουσιν είναι άνδρειοι, ap ου ταυτα re λ κτεον, καί ola αύτούς ποίησα, ήκιστα τον θανατον bob, εναι talia, qua efficere possint, 'things which are calculated o diminish fear’, id. Theag. p.' 16. ττάνυ φοβούμαι υπέρ τούτον, μή τινι α\λ <ρ έντύχη οΊψ τούτον διαφθειραι, w ο may, or is able, to mislead him’. Thuc. vi, 12. extr. και to άραγμα μύγα el vat και μη οΐον νεωτερφ βουλευσασθαι τε και οξεως μεταχειρίσαι, 'such as a younger man would be able. X · Mem. S. iv, 6, H. where it is put with Αγαθοί δύ πρός τά τοιαΰτα νομίζεις άλλον! τινας,η τους 6υναμέ¬ νους αύτοίς καλώς χρήαθαι-, Οίκ, «λλα τουτους, εφη. Κα¬ κούς 06 αρα του s οίους τοΰτοις κακώς χρησθαι. la. lb. 1, , 6. τούς μεν πρόσθεν όδόντας ττάσι ζώοις οίους τεμνειν είναι, τούς δε γομφίους οίους τ ταρά τούτων ύεξαμενους λεαινειν. ‘ are adapted to cutting, to bruising’. In general, the 1 ea ° being accustomed, able, is not contained in this phrase independ¬ ently, but in the whole import of the proposition; since some¬ time δύναμαι, δυνατός is added, e. g. Plat. Charm p. 112. Uti 7 dp τοιαύτη {η δύναμις) οία μη δυνααθαι την κεφα¬ λήν μόνον ύγιά πο,εΐν. Hipp. Maj.p. 35. τοιουτοι είναι οιοι μ ύ δυνατοί όραν. The idea of must is often contained in the proposition, as Thuc. vn, 42. ‘ to be inclined Xen Ages 8, 2. Demosth.p. 1086, 21. Plat. Rep. u, p. 223. (where, ho - ever it may signify ‘ to be accustomed or able , as εθελειν also has these three meanings). The principal idea, ‘ to beeo consti tuted as’, nearly the same as πεφυκεναι, is throughout the basis and is differently modified, according to the different relations of the propositions. c. e. g. II. σ', 93. X \ 547. Od. 0', 611. JEsch. Prom. 915. ν μην ετι Ζει /s, καίπερ αυθάόης φρένων, εσται ταπεινός, ο Ιον εξαρτνε- ται γάμον γαμε~ιν\ In Lucian. Dial. Mar. ι, 1. εοικας ουκ ερα.- στήν, αλλ’ ερώμενον εχειν τον ΐ\ο\ΰφημον, ο ία επαινείς αυτόν for ότι οΰτως ίταινεΐς. Thus Homer employs a relative pro¬ position in which oios refers to a noun following in the same proposition, in order to give the ground of explanation of another sentence. II. σ', 262. οΐος έκείνον θυμός υπερβιος, ουκ έθελήσει μ'ιμνειν έν πεοίω, for ότι τοιοΰτος έκ. θ. υπερβ. which is the same as pro sua atrocitate nolet, and may be com- y Herm. ad Vig. p. 709? 33. z Wasse ad Thucyd. vi, 89· a Wyttenb. ad Eel. Hist. p. 347. 481. β9ο Syntax. Oj the Use of the Pronouns. pared with the Latin, qua ejus est atrocitas, qua est atrocitate. Comp. II. O', 450. Od. o', 211. In this manner the passage in Plat. Symp. p. 233. might be explained: ov όε συ ψηθης Ερωτα είναι, θαυμαστόν ovSev απαθές, for οτι όε τούτον συ φηθης. It seems however to be rathei an elliptic phrase: ov Se συ φηθης * Ερωτα elvai, τούτον οίομενος, θ. ου$εν Απαθές. The relative also is frequently put for ΐνα, in order to express a purpose, as in Latin qui for ut is. II. i, 165. αλλ aycTe , κλητούς οτρύνομεν, οΐ κε τάχιστα ελθωσ ες κλισίην Πηληίάόεω Άχιληος. Tkuc. VII, 25. και των νέων μία εις Πελοπόννησον ωχετο, πρέσβεις ay ουσα , οίπερ τά σφε- τερα φράσωσιν. Xen. Mem. S. II, 1, 14. όπλα κτώνται, οΐς άμυνωνται τους άόικουντας. Eurip. Iphig . Τ. J2I7. και πολει πεμψον τιν , 6στις σημανεΐ. \ Obs . 1. Sometimes the relative is put with a finite verb, instead of the substantive related to the verb'. Demosth. pro Cor . p. 231,4. οΐς yap εύτυχηκεσαν εν Αεύκτροις, ου μετρίως εκεχρηντο, for τοΐς εύτυχημασιν. Similar to this is εκεχρηντο Plat. Phcedon. p. 214. ωμoλoyησaμεv εν τοΐς πρόσθεν, μηποτ αν αυτήν {την ψυχήν ) αρμονίαν yo ούσαν, εναντία qSeiv οΐς επιτεινοιτο και χαλωτο και παλλοιτο. Both idioms have arisen from the use of the relative for tos. j * v v * C * _ M Obs. 2. In other cases the relative is put for other conjunc¬ tions; but these are generally cases of anacoluthia. Thus it stands for ει τις. Hesiod. Theog. 783. καί p όστις ψευόηται 'Ολύμ¬ πια όωματ εχοντων, Zeus όε τε Ιριν επεμψε. Herod, π, 65. y V* »/ ~ λ , > ' , 1 λ \ * \ , TOO αν τις των υηριφν τούτων κατακτεινη, ην μεν εκων, θά¬ νατος η ζημίη, ην S' άεκων, fyc* Sometimes os stands with ά finite verb after a proposition, which contains the predicate of an action ; thus for ei τις , or rather for the infinitive, as the subject: Thuc. iv, 18. σωφρόνων όε αι /όρων, οΐτινες TayaOa ες αμφίβολον ασφαλώς εθεντο , for το τα y. — θύσθαι. Id. ιι, 44. το S' εύτυχες, οι αν της ευπρεπέστατης λάχω σι ν, ώσπερ οΐόε uou, τελευτής, υμείς όε λύπης, for λαχειν. Kur . Pkcen . 579· avavSpla "yap, το πλέον Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. 697 , οσ -ris air ολε'σα?, τονλασσον έλαβε. Ipkig. Γ. 610. τα των~ φίλων άίσχιστόν οσ τι? καταβολών εί? ξυμφοραί αυτός σεσω- σται. Arist. Thesm. 177- Άγάθων, σοφού ιτρος ανόρος, οστις iv βραχεί ττολλοέ? καλώ ? οΐος τε συυτερυειυ λογου?. Λεη. Hist Gr. 11 , 3 , 51 . ε γ «; υορίζω προστάτου έργου ειυαι ο<ου &Ι ο? αν, όρων τούς φίλου? «ξαπατα-ρευου?, μη επιτρεπ?. Since there are two turns of this kind : 1. σο,φρουε? ανόρες ε’,σίν, ο'ίτινες — εθεντο, ευτυχεί? είσίυ, oi αν—λαχωσιν,ανανόρο ? (αίσχιστο?) έστίυ, 'όστ,ς-ίλαβε. «. σωφρο^υ «*>- εστι τό—θεσθαι, ευτυχία (and for this το ευτυχε?) εστι το λαχε.υ, άνανύρία [άίσχ,στίν) εστ, τό—λαβεΐν, hence writers passed from one to the other . Xenophon has another anacoluthia, ^««6. Π, V' oiSa ί,Ιη άνθρίτους του?' ρέυ έκ ο^αβολφ, του? & καί εξ υπογιας, οί, φοβηθεν τε? άλληλους, φθάσα, βουλομενοι πρ<υ_ ^ταθε.υ, ειτοίησ αν άνήκεστα κακά for οΐέα αυθρ. του? ρευ εκ ^αβ του? έέ έξ έποφία?— -πο,ησαντας, or ο.ύα αυθρ., οι, ο. ρευ εκ φαβ., oi $έ έξ ύττ.— εττοίησαν. The noun also or pronoun to which the relative refers, 482. is often wanting, if the former be either a general word, or one which may be easily supplied from the context: e. g. Xen. Cyr. in, l, «9- «-«*» eu P eiv ' αυ χαρίσα, o, for εύρείυ τιυα. Comp. ib. IV, 5, 49- V, , · Pie*. Rep. ix, p. 250. Xen. Λη«δ. n, 4, 5. πρώτον μεν ά Ί οράν οΰύεις >)ρΙυ βρέξει, οέέ', έπο'βευ επισιτ,ουρεθα, to 0 ΦΓ (σται ούέε’υ, ΟΓ τι, ί!0ευ, ΟΓ οέοεί? ταρε ς ε. τοιτον, οθεν. ib III 1 ,^0. οτ ου ωνησόμεθα, ijSetv ετι ολίγους έχοντας- Hence είσίυ οί λέγουσιυ, Plat. Gorg. ρ. 1*1. wh ‘ C i. · 18 imitated in the Latin sunt qui dicant, instead of t is, however, the Greek prefer είσίυ οί λέγουτε?. Similar to this is ούκ εστ,ν, ος or οστι?, where the proposition with the relative may be considered as the i» Wyttenb. ad Eel. Hist. p. 405. 698 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. subject of the verb ίστί, e . g. II. f, 343 . m οόκ ίσθ', Sg σης ye κννας κβφαλης άπα\ά\κοι ‘ no One will keep off\ From hence the construction εστιν (with the accen thrown back) οί, όσην ών, όσην ots, appears to have arisen. For the verb είμί seems at first to have been referred to a subject preceding·, and to have been in the same number as the relative following. But generally, 1 . It stands in the third person sing. pres, όση, not οισί or ην, ησαν, though the relative following be in the plural, and the chief verb of the proposition in the im- perf. aorist, or future. 2. όσην oi does not accord with the construction of the proposition, but stands by itself in an adjective sense όνιοι, όνιαι, evict. Thuc. 1 , 12 . Πελοποννησιοι φκισαν της άλλης 'Ελλάδος βστιν α χωρία , i. e. evict χωρία. II, 26. K\f07ro,UTrov της παραθαλασσίου ' 0στιυ α όδβωσε. III, 92. Λακεδαιμόνιοι τών άλλων Ελλήνων εκελευον τον βουλόμενον επεσθαι, πλην Ίώνων και ’Αχαιών και όστιν ών άλλων ίθνών. VII, Π. ήλθε Τΰλιππος Λακεδαιμό¬ νιος στρατιάν εχων εκ Πελοπόννησου καί από τών όν Σικελία πόλεων ίστιν ών. Plat. Alcib.p. 86 . εΐ ye μη προσθείη- μ€ν την βστιν ών τβ ayvoiav καί βστιν οΐς , και βχονσι πως ayaOov, ώσττβρ βκβίνοις κακόν . Comp. ρ. 88 . Phcedon . ρ. 252. βστι g οίς καί βραχντβρους τώ βώθβι τού όυθάόβ €ίναι καί ττλατντβρονς. Xetl. Cyrop. II, 3, 18. βνταύθα οι μγ ββαλλον τ ah βώλοις, καί βστιν οί eTvy χάνον καί θω¬ ράκων και yeppw ν, οι όβ καί μηρού καί κνημΐόος. Helletl . II, 4, 6. και βστι μβν ονς αυτών κατβΧαβον . Memor, S. Ill, 5, 3. Trpoyovwv καλά ipya ουκ βστιν οΐς μβίζω καί ττλβίω υτταρχβι, η Άθηναίοις. Thus Propert. Ill, 7, 17, Est qui- bus Elece concurrit palma qucidrigce, Est quibus in celeres gloria nata pedes , for sunt . For βστι, ivi also was used, and hence the adjective evioi , nonnulli. Thus also in interrogations, where, however, όστις is gene- 699 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. rally put. Plat . Menon. p . 359 . βσπν ήντινα δόξαν ουχ αυτου ούτος άπεκρίνατο. Xen. Mem . S. I, 4, 6. βστιν οί σ- τινας ανθρώπων τεθαυμακας επί σοφία. Comp. Plat. Rep. ι, ρ· 200. 202°. Obs. I. Yet είμί is sometimes put in the plural or imperf. Thuc. vii, 44. oi ύστερον ήκοντες, είσίν οί διαμαρτόντες των οδών κατά την χώραν επλανήθησαν. Plat. Leg. χΐ, ρ. 166. γί¬ νονται μεν ούν πολλοί πολλούς τρόπους, ους μεν νϊν είπομεν, ύπδ νόσων , είσί δε οϊ διά θυμού κακήν φυσιν άμα καί τροφήν γενομενην. Xen. Anab. II, 5, 18. είσί % αύτών {των ποταμών ), ονε ούδ> αν παντάπασι διαβαίητε. Id. Hellen. vii, 5, 17· των πολεμίων ήν ου ς ύποσπόνδους άπεδοσαν. Cyrop . ν, 3, 16. ην δε καί ο ελαβε χωρίον. Obs. ·£. In the same manner εστι is often used with a rela¬ tive adverb following, in which case the two are put for an adverb εστιν tf iva or οπού , est ubi, est quando , ‘many times. Rut. Iph. A. 929* όστιν μεν ου v, tv ήδύ, μη λίαν φρονειν^ εστιν δε χώπου χρήσιμον γνώμην εχειν. Thus also εστιν ου Eurip. Or. 630. εστιν ένθα , ‘in many places’. Xen. Cyr . vii, 4, 15. viii,, S, 5. εστιν p, f in a certain degree . Eur. Hec. 851. εστιν όπως , ‘is it possible’, in interrogations. Eurip. Ale. 53. εστ ούν όπως ’ Άλκηστη ες γήρας μόλοι ; ‘ it is possible that, &c.’ Comp. Plat. Rep. v, p. 11. or with a negative preceding ούκ βστιν όπως, c by no means, in no case. Herod, vii, 102. Eur. Med. 172. εστιν ore, f sometimes’. Other particles besides are put with the pronoun 483 relative , as re and τι?, os re generally occurs, when to the substantive already sufficiently defined another defini¬ tion is added, as in Latin qui quidem, yet not without real exceptions, as II. e, 467. κείται άνήρ , ον τ Ισον ετιομεν Ε κ- τ opt δίω. Hymn. Horn, it, 189. ού βιοθάλμιος άνήρ γίγνε- ται, ίς τε θεαΊς εύνάζεται άθανάτγσιν. In general τβ is c Jens, ad Luc. T. i, p. 188. Fisch. i, p. 343. Abresch. Diluc Thuc. p. 410. - . V /OO Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. i added to all relatives, as II. χ, 115, κτήματα πάντα μάλ',* οσσατ 'Αλέξανδρος rpyayeTo Ύροίηνδε ά . s οστις is different from ος 3 inasmuch as it applies to an object in general, in the sense of quisquis , quicunque, in which case πάς often goes before, e, g. iZ. τ', 260. ανθρώπους τιννννται , ο τις κ επίορκον ομόσ&φ 3 c to every One who swears falsely’. Here it is to be observed, that after πάς it is used only in the singular; in the plural they said παντες οσοι , not οίτινες. Yet sometimes it refers to a determinate object, and stands for &*. όστις is often used in ellipses, especially in negative propositions: ούδείςοστις (and os) ου * every one’. Herod, v, 97. και ούδεν 6 τι ούκ υπίσγετο , * he promised every thing’. Thuc . YII, 87. καί πεζός και νηες καί ούδεν 6 τι ούκ άπωλετο. Comp, ιι, 88. ιιι, 81. οστις is usually go¬ verned in case by the preceding ούδείς , or this by Ζστις. Plat. Prot. p. ΙΟΙ. ουδενός ότου ού πάντων αν υμών καθ' ηλικίαν πατήρ εϊην. Comp. ih. ρ . ιΐ3. Thus also in interrogations after τίς. Thuc. in, 39 . τίνα οιεσθε όν^ τινα ού βραχεκρ. προφάσει άποστη'σεσθαι; Comp .id. 46. Comp. §. 445. C. SO 5. οστις is also frequently joined with ουν 3 δήποτε } bat in the case of the substantive which accompanies it, for οστις αν rj ΟΓ ειη. Plat. Rep. I, p. 163. εστιν άρα δικαίου ανδρος βλαπτειν και οντινουν ανθρώπων ; ( any man who¬ ever he may be’. Comp. p. 194 . Leg . xi, p. 135 . Μα- Ύνητών μήτε καπηλος εκων μη$ ακων μηδεις ^γι*γνεετθω^ μηδ έμπορος , μήτε διακονίαν μη$ η ντι να κεκτημενος. Comp. Ηίρρ. Μ. ρ. 7 . Phcedon. ρ. 178. In the same manner ος άν 3 seems to be used, as refer- d Herm. ad Orph. Litli. 299 . e Brunck. ad Eur. Bacch. 115. I Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. iV i ring also to something in general, quicunque, Thuc. ·νπ, 7. πρέσβεις — άπεστάλησαν, όπως στρατιό, ετι περαιωθη τρόπψ ω αν εν όλκάσιν , η πλοίοις η άλλως , όπως αν προ¬ χωρώ where τρόπω φ αν stands for όστις αν γ ό τρόπος , as quocunque tandem modo. The relative is often put also for the article ό, or 484. rather for the demonstrative pronoun. a. In antitheses of ό, ό μεν. II. χ, 201. ως ό τον ου όυνατο μάρψαι ποσιν , ονό ος αλυζαι. Also without an antithesis of ο. II. φ', 9· o yap ~/ερας εστι θανοντων. The moderns use also ός μεν — ός Se. See §. 288. /. See 401./. b. ός και ός , * this or that person, speaking inde terminately. Herod. IV, 68. λ^ουσι ούτοι ως τοεπιπαν μάλιστα τάόε, ω? τάς βασιληίας ιστίας επιορκηκε ος και ος. In the oblique cases the article is put, τόν και τον. §. 286. C. και ός for και ουτος. Herod. VII, 18. και ός άμβω- σας μ^α } άναθράσκει. Plat . Theag. ρ. 21. και ος επεσχε and in the feminine id. Symp.p. 227. και ή, Owe ευφημη- σεις ; εφη. Comp. ρ. 228. Xen. Cyrop . V, 4, 4. και ος εζαπατηθεις όιωκει άνά κράτος. Comp. lb. 5, 36. Heie also in the oblique cases the article is put §. 2S6. Thus also η S 6ς, ‘said he’, which is very frequent in Plato f . The relative often stands also for τις , 'who’? but 485. only in dependent propositions. Soph. CEd. Col. 1171· εζοιό’ ακονων τωνό\ ος εσθ' ό προστάτης. Thuc. I, 137- of Themistocles : και όεισας φράζει τφ ναυκληρω , οστις εστι, quis sit , aperit. Plat. Menon. ρ. 349. περί άρε της. f Koen. ad Greg. p. 6l, 5. Heind. ad Plat. Charm, p. 78. Hoog. ad Vig. p. 25. Herm. ib. p. 706 , 28. VOL. II. Y 703 / 486. « Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. o εστιν, eyuj μεν ούκ οϊδα. Rep . VIII, p. 214. προελωμεθ a δη τι παραδε^μα εκατερων, αι εισιν. Xen. Cyr. Vi, 1 , 46. πεμ- 7T€i προς τον Κύρον, είπων, oe ην. Thus too αττα (§. 153. Obs. 2.) II. κ, 206. eii τινά που και φημιν ενι Ύρωεσσιν 6 Λ 0 ΙΤ 0 , ασσα τε μητιοωσι μετά σφισιν. 4 Note. Of another use of οστί§ in interrogations see §. 488. 1. Instead of the relative the Poets, especially Homer, often put ως. II. ξ } 44 . μη $η μ 01 τε\εσρ έπος οβριμος Εκτωρ, ως ποτ επηπειλησεν. φ , 50. οτρυνον ·——ύλην τ αξεμεναι, παρα τε σχειν, ως επιεικες νεκρόν εχοντα νεεσθαι υπο ζοφον ηεροεντα. Soph. CEd. C . 1124. και σοι θεοί πόροιεν , ως εyω θέλω, αυτω τε και yrj τρδε%. The following pas¬ sages, however, which Wyttenbach ad Eel. Hist. p. 358. quotes, do not belong to this place : Herod, n, 116. Ho - TKieruS εποιησε εν I λιαδι — πλάνην την Αλεξάνδρου, ως άπη - χθη ay ων EXew/y. Thuc. I, 1. θουκυδ. Αθ. ξυvεypaφε τον πόλεμόν των ΤΧέλοποννησιων και Αθηναίων , ως" επολεμησαν προς άλληλους. For here the sense of the preceding substantive is extended by another turn of the sentence, and ως signifies as. Some parts of the relative have a peculiar significa¬ tion, viz. 1. The genitive ου stands adverbially in the sense f where’? uhi? 2. The dative feminine signifies, a. ‘ where"? as the Latin, qua; or f whither’? Hesiod, ίφγ . 206. r>J $ eh, y σ αν εyω περ ayu\ h. ( So far as', quatenus. Xen. Mem. S. n, l, is. s Animadv. ad H. Horn. p. 373. Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. ΊΟό ον Sok€i $ μάλλον δηλον yevVT „ * houses again’, or Met every one build his house’. Xen. Cyr. VI, 1, 6. XeyeTa) τις 7rept αι/τον τούτον, rj yiyvwaicei. Comp, hi, 3, 6l k . 3. Hence it stands often for the personal pronoun, eyw, as we use f one.’ Soph. Aj.%45. ωρα τιν ηόη κάρα κα- Χνμμασι κρνφάμενον ποόοίν κΧοπάν άρεσθαι. Aristoph. Thesm. 603. ποΐ τις τρεφεται; Plat. Alcib . II, in. ΣΩ. < paivr ι ye τι εσκυθρωπακεναι τε καί εις yfjv βΧεπειν, ω? τι συννοούμενος. ΑΛΚ. καί τι αν τις συννοοίτο 1 ; Thus also it is put for συ. Soph. Aj. 1138. tout είς ανίαν τούπος εργεται τινί. Arist. Pan. 552. 554. κακόν , » . ft, ηκει τινι.—οωσει τις οικην. • I 4. On account of the collective sense, in which τις is sometimes used (N° l.), the word which refers to τις is sometimes put in the plural. Thuc. iv, 85. άΧΧά καί , ✓ν r οΐς αν επίω , ησσόν τις εμοί πρόσεισι. Xen. Mem. S. b 2, 62. κατά τούς νόμους εάν τις φανερός yεvητat κΧεπτων η Χωποόυτών -, τουτοις θάνατός εστιν η ζημία. Comp. Cyrop. νιι, 4, 5. vm, 8, 4. V Τ \ , 5. τις is often put with adjectives of quality, quan¬ tity, magnitude, especially when these stand alone, with¬ out a substantive, or in the predicate. Herod, iv, 198. όοκεει μοι ουό αρετήν είναι τις η Λιβύη σπουόαίη. Plat. Pep. II, ρ. 208. eyta τις , ω$· εοικε , όυσμαθης. IV, ρ. 352. όνσ βατός τις ό τόπος φαίνεται καί κατάσκιος. Symp. ρ. 171. έθος τι τούτ ϊχει. Aristoph. Plut. 726. ως φίΧόποΧις τις εσθ' ο όαίμων και σοφός. Herod. I, 181. τείχος ού ποΧΧιρ τεω ασθενεστερον. Thuc. VI, 1. ου ποΧΧω τινι υποόεεστε- ρον πόΧεμον άνρρουντο η τον προς ΐΙεΧοποννησίους. Also ———- - ■ - ■ - ■ ι I Α »β * f · 1 Rrunck. ad Soph. Aj. 245. * Yalck. ad Herod, p. 671 . a. Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. 705 with the adjective as an epithet. Soph. Aj. 1266 . του θα - νοντος ως ταχεία τις βροτοις χάρις όιαρρει . With numerals also. Thuc. hi, ill· ό? διακοσιους τινας αυτών άπεκτειναν. VII, 8?. ημέρας εβίομηκον τα τι - να? οί/τω διρτηθησαν αθροοι . Here it is the English, <■about, nearly 511 , ('some two hundred of them; some seventy days’). αττα especially is thus used, which is rarely found by itself without an adjective 0 . The neuter π is put with adverbs especially, or neu¬ ter adjectives standing as adverbs, e.g. σχεδόν τι, πάνυτι, ττολυ τι, ονδεν τι ρ . In all these cases τις seems to temper the nature of the expression by inferring a kind of doubt, instead of an unlimited assertion. On the other hand, rt?, τι are sometimes also omitted. Plat. Soph. p. 241. χαλεπόν ηρου και , σχεδόν είπε tv, οίω ye εμοι, πα νταπασιν άπορον. 6 . In other cases τις , without an additional adjec¬ tive, has the sense of ‘ especially’. Theocr. xi, 79- Mov- qt εν τ£ y $ Kriyafv τις φαίνομαι ημες , a man of consi¬ deration’. Plat. Amat. p. 32. καί μοι το μεν πρώτον εδοξε τιείπεΊν. Phcedon.p . 143. ευελπίς είμι είναι τι τοίς τετε- λευτηκόσι. Thus the Latin aliquis , e. g. est aliquid q . 7 . The form >5 Tt? ουρείς is negative, yet with the expression of doubt, c next to none, Hcvod. 111 , 140. άναβε βήκε δ’ η τις η ούϊείς κω παρ ημεας αύτων. Xen. m Wessel. ad Herod, p. 368. Toup. ad Suid. 11 , p. 333. » Koen. ad Gregor, p. 3. b. 0 Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 338. p Dorv. ad Charit. p. 477. q Ad Viger. p. 152. Herm. p. 725. Comp. Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 288. * I 706 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. Cyr. VII, 5, 45. τούτων των περιεστηκύτων η τινα η ούδενα οίδα τ . Note. In modern Alexandrian writers τις is sometimes put for οστις, but not in the old Classic authors s . 8. άλλότι, properly άλλο τι, is used in interrogations a. with η following. Herod . 109 . άλλο τι (άλλοτι) η λείπε- ται το ενθεντεν εμοι κινδύνων ό μ^ιστος; UOUXie SUperest ? Plat. Apol. 8. p. 56. άλλοτι η 7Τερι πλείστου ποιγ, όπως ώς βέλτιστοι οι νεωτεροι ίσονται ; originally it seems that ποιώ, yiy νεται, άλλο τι ποιείς, η — ποιτι, was under¬ stood, which is often omitted after άλλο, as in Latin, nihil, nisi de ccede cogitat. (Comp. Plat. Me - non. p. 340. 348.358.) Hence Plat. Phcedon.p. 180. φερε or], ή ο ος, άλλο Τί ημών αυτών η το μεν σώμα εστι, το oe ψυχή; Ούδεν άλλο, εφη. This, however, soon received the sense of a simple interrogation, and hence h. η also is omitted. Plat. Charm, p . 136. άλλοτι ούν πάντα ταυ- τα άν εϊη—μία τις επιστήμη; Hipparch. p. 259. άλλοτι ούν ον γε φιλοκερδείς φιλουσι το κέρδος ; c what ? do not the greedy love gain’? * * 4 . Pronom. Interrogativum , Tts. _ * 1 . The interrogatory pronoun τίς is used in direct and indirect interrogation, in the latter οστις also. But if the person who is interrogated repeats the question before the answer, then οστις is used. Arist. Ran. 198 . XA'P. ούτος, τί ποιείς; Δ10Ν. ο τι ποιώ; τί <8* άλλο y * Valck. ad Herod, p. 270, 35. s Wolf, ad Demosth. Lept. p. 230. 4 Herm. ad Viger. p. 725, lop. 1 10 . Comp. Heusde Spec. in Plat. 59 . 707 Syntax. Of the Use of the Pronouns. . Av. 698. σύ δ> el τις άνδρών; 'Ό στ is €ΐμ eye * * ; Μετωυ. Plat . Euthyphr. p. 4. άλλα δη τίνα y ραφήν σε yey ραπται ; ΣΩ. ηντινα ; ούκ ayevvrj, εμο^ε δοκε! α . 2. Sometimes this word of interrogation has the article : Aristoph. Nub. 776. aye δη ταχέως τοντϊ ζυνάρ- πασον. ΣΤΡΕΨ. το τι; Αν. 1039. νόμους νέους ηκω παρ’ υμάς δεύρο πωλησων. ΠΕΙ. το τί; Comp. 264, 4. 3. Sometimes τί as predicate, with εστι following, is accompanied by the subject in the neuter. Plat. Theaet. p. 74. τί ποτ εστίν, ά διανοούμεθα. lb. ρ. 76. Θαυ¬ μάζω , τί ποτ εστι τ αύτα Χ · 4. τί is often put for διά τί; ‘ what'? quid? for 4 where¬ fore’? quare? Xen. Mem. 8. IV, 2,6. Θαυμαστόν , τί ποτέ o\ βουλόμενοι κιΘαρίζειν—ικανοί y ενεσΘαι πειρώνται ως συνε¬ χέστατα ποιεϊν ό τι αν βούλωνται αγαθοί γευεσθαι. 5. τίς is often used independently of the rest of the proposition, which cannot be the case in Latin or English, e. g. Plat. Prot.p. 91 . τούτο μεν εξεστι λεγ ειν καί περί ζωypάφωv καί περί τεκτόνων, ότι ούτοί εισιν οι των σοφών επιστήμονες * άλλ’ είτις εροιτο ημάς , των τί σοφών είσίν οι ζωypάφoι επιστήμονες , είποιμεν αν που αύτφ , ότι τών προς την άπepyaσίav την τών εικόνων. —εί δε τις εκείνο. epoiTOj ο δε σοφιστής τών τι σοφών εστι ; Pheag. p. 12. €ΐ ουν εροιτό τις τον Έύριπίδην, τών τ ί σοφών συνουσία φγς σοφούς είναι του? τύραννους; c in what must their wisdom consist, from whose society tyrants learn wisdom’. Symp. p. 237· τών τίνα τροπον διωκοντων αυτόν και εν τίνι πράξει η σπουδή καί η σύ στάσις ερως άν καλοίτο ; Comp. u Brunck. ad Arist. Thesm. 630. Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. p. 153. * Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 212. 708 Syntax . Of the Use of the Pronouns. Xen \ Mem. S. n, 2, i y . Also after conjunctions. Plat. Hipp. Maj. p. 29 . (according to the correction of Schleiermacher:) ταυτα πάντα, άφης καλά είναι, ει τι έστιν αυτό το καλόν, ταύτ αν είη καλά ; c what must beauty be in itself, if these be beautiful·? Xen. Mem. S. 1 , 4, 14. όταν τί ποιησωσι, νομιεις αυτούς σου φρόντιζαν 1 ; especially with the participle. Xen. Mem. S. iy, 2 , 10 . τί $η βουλόμενος αγαθός γενέσθαι συλλέγεις τα γράμματα ; f in what do you wish to be versed, that you collect these writings' ? which takes place also in Latin, quern fructum petentes scire cupimus. See Participle. τι is also preceded by the interrogation πώς \ Of the Pronoun Reflexive. ? T o' ου, οι, e. See §. 147. not. Reciprocal Change of the Pronoun. i. Pronoun Person, and Possessive. έός is sometimes put for the pronoun of the first and second person, in the Poets, έμός , σός, $c. Od. v, 320. άλλ’ αιει φρεσιν γσιν έχων όεόαϊγμόνον ητορ ηλώμην, for έμαΊς. Od. a', 320. όώμασιν οΐσιν άνάσσοις, for σοΊς. Thus II. a, 393. περίσ-χεο παιόός έηος , for σου. II. κ, 398. η — φυζιν βου- λεύοιτε μετά σφισιν, for μεθ' ύμιν. έός, for σφέτερος. r Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. M. p. 140. 2 Reiz. ad Viger. p. 725 , 112. Schneider, ad Xen. 1. c. Heind, ib. p. 166 . I Syntax. Reciprocal Change oj the Pronoun. 709 Hesiod, epy. 58. ψ κεν άπαντες τερπωνται κατά θυμόν, cov κακόν άμφα'γαπωντες, and vice versa, σφετερος for «os id. Scut. Here. 90. os προλιπω v σφετερόν τε Ιομον σφετέρους τε τοκήας ψχετο . II. The reflexive pronoun εαυτοί for the other per¬ sonal pronouns compounded with awros. Plat. Pheed on. p. 207. αντιτείνετε εόλαβοΰμενοι, ottos μη «7«! όπο προθυ¬ μίας άμα εαυτόν τε καί υμάς έξαπατήσας — — οίχήσομαι, for έμαυτόν. Thuc. I, 82. τα αυτών άμα εκποριζωμεθα, for ήμων αύτάν. Plat. Phesdon. ρ. 177. ίβϊ ημάς άνερεσθαι εαυτούς, where ημάς is the accusative of the subject to άνερεσθαι. Also if the proper pronoun accompanies it. JEsch. Again. 1333. άπαξ «τ' είπείυ ρησιν η θρήνον■ θέλω εμόν τον αύτης. - ibid. 1308. el $ ότητύμως μόρον τον αότης οΐσθα, πάς — πρός βωμόν εύτόλμως πατείς ; for σαυτής. Plat. Protog. ρ. 90 . συ &> ούκ άν άισχΰνοιο εις τους “Ελληνας αότόν σοφιστήν παρεχων ; Comp. Amat. ρ. 39. Alcib. ιι, ρ. S6. Xen. Cyr. vr. 3, 27. Mschm.m Ctesiph. p. 55i c . Demosth. Olynth. p. 9, 13. ™υ π Ρ α Ί - μάτων ύμ'ιν εκείνων αύτοίς αντιληπτήν εστιν, είπερ ντ rep σωτήριας αυτών φροντίζετε, for υμών αυτών . Note. Where αυτός seems to be put for εγώ, συ, ημείς, fyc. the truth is rather that these pronouns are omitted. See §. 470. III. The reflexive pronoun εαυτών and the recipro¬ cal pronoun άλληλων. Soph. Antig. 145. πλην roly στυ- yepoiv, ώ, πατρός ενός μητρός τε μιας φυντε, καθ αυ¬ τοί ν όικρατεϊς λό^γγας στησαντ , εμετόν κοινού θανατου μέρος Ζμφω, for /car άλληλοιν. Plat. Parmen. ρ. 86. αύτά αύ- τών και προς αύτά όκεΊνά εστ t, for άλληλων καί προς *> Wolf. Proleg. ad Horn. ρ. 247 sqq. Fisch. n, p. 237 sq. c Dorv. ad Char. p. 296. 710 Syntax. Of the Verb . άλληλα. Again, the reciprocal pronoun is put for the reflexive, TflUC. Ill, 81. ot 7 roXXot των ικετών —- $ιεφθει- pav αυτού εν τψ ϊερφ ά\\η\ους Λ . - · $ · Of the Verb. 490. By transitive verbs are here meant, according to the distribution §. 156. in contradistinction to neuter and deponent verbs, those which are capable of determining various relations of the subject, to which the action be¬ longs, to an object or person. These have three ge¬ nera, the active, passive, and middle. As the effect of the active consists in determining· the case which it governs, what has been said of the use of the cases is sufficient to illustrate the active. The passive, if we follow the analogy of other lan¬ guages, takes properly as its subject the nearest object of the active, which with this voice was in the accusative; the subject of the active, on the contrary, is joined with the passive, by means of the preposition υπό with the genitive (rarely άπό, e. g. Tliuc. hi, 36 . αλλαι 71 ,ώμαι άφ’ έκαστων eXeyovTo. Comp. Herod . II, 54. V, 17.), or προς with the genitive. Frequently, however, it stands in the dative also, with or without υπό, (§. 403. a.) as with the verbals in — τεος, e. g. A^iXXei)? κτείνει τόν Εκτορα. f Έκτωρ κτείνεται υπό (προς) Άχιλλεως, in the Poets ΑχιΧληϊ (υ7τ Άχ) εόάμη. The dative is very fre¬ quently put with the perf. pass, of verbs whose perf. act. d Hemsterh. in Obss. Misc. x, p. 209 . I Syntax . Of the Verb. 711 * ^ is not much used, e. g. μέχρι τούτον ημιν πειταίσθω. ταυ- τα λέλεκται ημιν, for λελεχα ταυτα. In Greek, however, the object also, which was in the genitive or dative with the active, may become the subject of the passive. Plat. Rep . viii, p.212. άνθρώπων καταφηφισθέντων θανάτου η φυγής , from καταφηφιζεσθαι τίνος θάνατον. Xen. Hist. Gr. V, 2 , 36 . και έκείνος μεν κατεφηφίσθη .— Plat. Symp . ρ. 216 . είναι όμολογείται σωφροσύνη το κρατειν ηδονών και επιθυ μιών, Ερωτος μηδεμίαν ηδονην κρείττω είναι ’ ει δε ηττους, κρατοιντ αν ι/7γο τοΟ "Ερωτος, ο δέ κρατοί. Comp. Xen. Η. Gr. V, 4 , l. — Plat. Euthyd. ρ. 9 · «πων ονν ταυτα κατεφρονη- θην νττ αντον. Comp. Rep. VIII, ρ. 209 . Isocr. ad Phil. p. lio. B .—T/mc. I, 68. μέγιστα έγκληματα έχο- μεν, υπδ Αθηναίων ν βριζόμενοι , νιτο δε νμων α μελού μεν ο ι. Plat. Rep. VIII, ρ. 198 . ασκείται δη το αεί τιμώμενον , αμε¬ λείται δε το άτιμαζομενον. Comp. lb. X, ρ. 320 . ThllC. Ill, 6ΐ. ούκ ηΐζίουν ούτοι ηγεμονευεσθαι υφ ημών. Herod. VII, 144. αί δε νηες, ές το μεν έποιηθησαν, ουκ έχρησθησαν , from χρησθαί τινι. —Thuc. I, 82. άνεπί- φθονον, οσοι ώσπερ και ημείς in τ Αθηναίων έπιβουλευό* μέθα — διασωθηναι. Comp. IV, 6l. Plat. Alcib. II, ρ. 82. — Thuc.W, 54. το Άριστογείτονος και Αρμοδίου τόλμημα δι ερωτικήν ζυντυχίαν ε πεχειρηθη. Id. VII, 70. £ υνετυγ- χάνε πολλαχου διά την στενοχώριαν τα μεν άλλοις εμβε- βληκέναι, τά δε αυτους εμβεβλησθαι. Xen. Η. Gr» II, 3, 35. εκείνοι έφασαν, προσταχθέντα με υφ εαυτών ουκ άνελέσθαι, §c. Comp. Soph. Antig. 670. Thuc. v, 75. YU 70 . — Xen . Mem. S. IV, 2, 33. Π αλαμηδην πάντες υμνουσιν, ως δια σοφίαν φθονηθεις υπο τον Οδυσσεως απω- λετο.— Isocrat. ad Demon, ρ. 8. C. μισεί τους κολακεύοντας, ώσπερ τούς έζαπατώντας* άμφότεροι yap πιστευθεντες τους πιστεύσαντας ( Vulg . πιστεύοντας) άδικούσιν . Id. ad 712 Syntax. Of the Verb. Phil. p. 92 . A . οι Λακεδαιμόνιοι απιστουνται υπό πάντων ΤΙελοποννησίων e . It has been noticed before, §. 420 . f that the pas¬ sive takes an accusative also. From a union of this idiom with the foregoing, arise the phrases explained in §. 421 . C. g. Elirip. Res. 53 9 . τις εκηρυ'χθη πρωτην φυλακήν ; from κηρυσσειν τινι φυλακήν . TflUC . V, 37. ο\ Κ ορίνθιοι ταυτα επεσταλμενοι. Plat. Tim. ρ. 367· τό δε υπό πυρός πάχους το νοτερόν παν εζαρπασθεν, for ώ τό νοτερόν εξηρπάσθη. Xen. Hier. I, 19· ό παρατιθέμενος πολλά , unless παρατιθέ¬ μενος be rather the middle voice in this place. The proper signification of the middle is most evi¬ dent in the aorists, particularly the Aor. 1 . In the pre¬ sent and irnperf. the distinction between the passive and middle is often indeterminate in the signification, as the form in both is exactly the same. The fut. middle has usually the sense of the active, also of the passive, and what is called the perf. mid. more properly the perf. 2. act. never has the signification of the middle. The peculiar signification of the middle is the re¬ flexive, where the action returns to the subject of it. a. The chief characteristic consists in the subject of the action being at the same time the proper imme¬ diate object of it, so that the middle is exactly equiva¬ lent in signification to the active, joined with the cor¬ responding pronoun pers. refl. e. g. λούω , f I wash another’, λούομαι , i . q. λούω εμαυτόν , ζ \ wash myself'. άπεχειν, f to withhold another’, mid. an Γεχεσθαι, άπο- σχεσθαι , ί. q. άπεχειν εαυτόν. e Dorv. ad Charit. μ. 576. 713 Syntax. Of the Verb. Many middle verbs receive a genuine intransitive signification, e. g. τταύειν τινά τίνος, avocare alium, τταυε- σθαι, se ipsum avocare, c to make one’s self abstain, i. e. f to desist’. Thus στελλειν, f to send’, στελλεσθαι, f to travel’, e. g. Herod, iv, 147. ττλαζειν, c to make an¬ other wander’, πλάζεσθαι, f to wander’, &c. φοβεΊν, c to put to flight, to terrify’, φοβείσθαι, * to fly, to be terri¬ fied’. Of these verbs some are referred to an object, and are transitive, either because the active may take a double accusative, as ττεραιουν τινά ττοταμον , * to convey one over a river’, mid. ττεραιουσθαι ττοταμον , ‘ to pass a river’; or, when the action which is properly intransi¬ tive, is considered in relation to an object, e. g. φοβεϊ- σθαί τινα, ( to fear any one’. b. More frequently, however, the subject of the 492 action is the remote object of it, with reference to which it takes place; so that the middle is equivalent to the active, with the dative of the reflexive pronoun, εμαυτω, σεαυτω, εαυτω, e. g. αίρειν , 1 to take Up any thing for another, in order to transfer it to another’, αϊρεσθαι, c to take up, in order to keep it one’s-self, to transfer to one’s-self’ f , άφαιρείν, ‘to take any thing from another’, άφαιρεισθαι, c to take any thing one s-self for one’s-self, in order to retain or use it g . δούλοι, κατα - δουλουν, c to subject any thing to another, e. g. JEsch. 8. C. Th. 256. αύτη συ δουλόις καί με καί ττάσαν ττολιυ. καταδουλουσθαι, f to subject one’s-self’ h , ενδυειν, 6 to put any thing on another’, ενδυεσθαι , ' to put on one’s-self , Xen. Cyr. vi, 4, 2. of Abradatas : εττει δ * εμελλε τον f Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. 235. s Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. 1140. h Hemsterh. ad Tb. M. p. 249. 714 Syntax, Of the Verb. Χινουν θώρακα ενόυεσθαι, τγ ροσφερει αυτφ η Πα νθεια χρυ- σουν κρανο?, 8ξΟ. 3. ταυτα Se Xeyovaa άμα ενεόυε τα όπλα 1 . φυ\άττ€ΐν , f to watch any one, to observe’, φυ- λάττβσθαι, c to observe any thing to one’s advantage’ (dat. commodi), ‘ in order to avoid it’ k . » , , f ‘ f Hence the middle is used, when the passive object is any thing belonging to the subject of the verb; generally, almost any relation which the object bears to the subject of the action: e. g. περιρρηζαι χιτώνα signifies e to tear the garment of another*, περιρρηζασθαι χ. ( to tear one's own garment* *, Soph. (Ed. T. 1021. άλλ’ αντί του $η παϊ$ά μ ώνομάζβτο, e called me his son’, Χυειν, ‘to return any thing to any one for a ransom’, Χυεσθαι, ‘to receive back any thing that belongs to one*, II. a, 13. 19 . £9. Thus θβσθαι νόμους is said of a legislator, who submits himself to the laws which he has made, or of a free state, which enacts laws for itself. The same distinction obtains between ypa(j>eiv and ypa^aa9ai νόμους. Xen. Mem. S. 1, 2 , 45 . όσοι οι oXiyoi τοίις ποΧΧοίις μη πείσαντες, αλλα κρατούντες y ράφουσ ι, ττότερον βίαν φώμεν η μη φώ- μεν είναι. On the other hand (Ecotl. 9 , 14 . εν ταϊς ευνο - μουμεναις ττόλεσιν ουκ άρκειν όοκει τοίις ποΧίταις, ην νόμους καλούς y ράφωνται. c. The middle often expresses an action which took place at the command of the subject, or with regard to it, which is expressed in English by f to cause’. Herod. 1, 31. Apyειoι σφεων εικόνας 7 τοιησάμενοι άνεθεσαν ες ΑεΧ- φους, ‘caused statues to be made*. Xen. Cyr. vi, 4, £. * Brunck. ad Arist. Thesm. 252. k Dorv. ad Charit. p. 4 69 . 1 Hemsterh. Obss. Misc. V. 3, p. 64. Valck. et Wessel. ad He¬ rod. p. 230, 37. 715 Syntax. Of the Verb. of Panthea: εποιησατο όπλα. §. 3. συ §ηπου, ώ yvvat , συΎκόψασα τον σαιιτης κοσμον τα όπλα μοι εποιησω \ He¬ rod . VII, 100. Η όρξης — όιεξελαύνων όπ άρματος 7ταρ έθνος ev έκαστον, όπυνθάνετο, και a7rey ραφον οι *γραμματισται· — όνθαυτα ο Ξόρξης, μετεκβας εκ του άρματος ες νεα Σιέο- νιην —- παρόπλεε παρα τας πρώρας των νέων, εττειρωτων τε εκάστας ομοίως και τον πεζόν και airoy ραφομένος, ‘ causing them to be registered’. (Comp. Xen. Hist. Gr. vi, 3, 19 .) a distinction, which Plutarch. Themist. 13. does not observe. Hence ·γράφεσθαί nva, e to accuse’, properly f to cause the name, as of an accused person, to be taken down in writing by the magistrate before whom the process is carried’, nomen deferre. όιόάσκειν, f to teach’, διδάσκεσθαι, * to cause to be taught’, Eur. Med . 269 Sq . χρη S’ ούποθ’, όστις άρτίφρων πόφυκ άνηρ, παί^ας πε¬ ρίσσιος εκ$ι$άσκεσθαι σοφούς m . Thuc . I, 130. of Pausa- nias*. τράπεζαν Π ερσικην παρετίθετο , as Xen. Hier. I, 19 , 20 , % d. The perf. pass, is used as a perf. mid. Soph. An- 493. tig. 363. νόσων αμήχανων φυyάς ξυ μπόφρασται. Xen. Anab. V, 2. 9 . οι μάντεις άποόεόει^γμόνοι ήσαν, οτι μάχη μεν είη, τό $ε τέλος καλόν της εξόόου. Isocr. Areop. p . 147. Β. της εύκοσμίας οΐόν τ ην μετασχείν - τοΊς πολ- λην αρετήν και σωφροσύνην εν τω βιω ενόεόει*γμενοις. Plat. Euthyphr . in. ^γραφήν σε τις , ώςεοικε , yey ραπται. Thuc. Ill, 90. ότυχον Si ίο φυλαι - τινα και ενεοραν πε- πο ιη μεν α ι. Comp. Plat. Theaet . ρ. 13. Pvot. ρ. 122. Rep. VIII, ρ. 209. Xen. Cyr. 2, 12 . Sιaπόπpayμaι παρά σου μη ποιησαι άpπayηv. Isocr. ad Phil. ρ. 86. Β. ευχή * αξία όιαπόπρακται. Herod. Ill, 136. παρεσκευασμόνοι πάντα όπλεον ες την Ελλογο. Xen. JHeiTl. S. IV, 2, 1. κα— « Thom. Μ. ρ. 265 . Kvister. ad Aristoph, Nub. 1341. Valck. ad Amm. p. 70 . Ruhnk. ad Tim. p. 83 sq. 716 \ Syntax. Of the Verb. ταμαθων Ένθύδημον y ράμματα πολλά συvειXeyμεvov ττ oitj* των. Id. Anab. IV, 7, 1. χωρία ωκονν ισχυρά οι Τ άοχοι, εν οίς και τα επιτήδεια ιτάντα βΐχον ανακεκομισμόνοι. Ib. V, 6, 12. ot μεν άνδρες γρηνται πορείαν, ην υμείς συμβου- Χεύετε. Demostk. in Phorm . ρ. 958, 13. την μεν ΧεΧυ- σαι, την 8 εκδεδωκας εταίραν. Thuc. VI , 36. ούκ αυτούς είκός, τον εκεί πάΧεμον μηπω βεβαίως καταΧεΧυμε νους, επ άλλον πόλεμον ούκ εΧάσσω εκόντας ελθείν. Eurip. Iph. A. 1279· Ού Μει/ελεω? με καταδεδουΧυιται, τεκνον η . Obs. The perf. pass, of verbs which are used as actives also, frequently occur in a passive sense, e. g. παρεσκευα- σμενος , Thuc. in, 3. βιασθεντας , id. ιν, 15. 19. ( [v. Wasse) γτιασμένος id. in, 6l. avve^y μένος, c collected’, yεy ραμ¬ μένος, ‘ written’, πεποιημενος, ‘made*, &c.° e. The aor. pass, also is often used as a middle; as εφράσθη, Eurip. Uec. 550. See HesycJl. S. V. επειχθείς Thuc. hi, 3. This takes place regularly in certain verbs, e. g. άπηXXάyηv, c I departed*, επείσθην, c I suffered myself to be persuaded', (when επεισάμην never occurs) εφοβη - θην , e I was afraid', εκοιμηθην , (and εκοιμησάμην ) f I slept', &C. The part. fut. p. for the fut. mid. επιμεΧηθησόμέ¬ νος, Xen. Mem. S. n, 7 , 8. rarely occurs. Of the Perf. 2 . or what is called the Perf. Middle. 494 . The Perf. 2. has l. In some verbs a sense entirely transitive, e. g. ίκτονα ( άπεκτονα ), άκηκοα (where ηκουκα is merely Doric), εσπορα , ΧεΧοιπα. πεφευya, II. φ>, 609- n Musgr. ad Eur. Med. 1139. Fiseh. iii, b. p. 62 sq. Viger. p. 216 . ubi v. Z. et Herm. p. 735, 166 . 0 Fisch. iii, b. p. 62 sq. 717 Syntax. Of the Verh. Od. a', 12, 8$C. οί$α, πεπονθα, τετοκα, iaropya, Herod. VII, 104. and the poetic οπωπα , πεφραΰε, $ε$ορκα, eopya, ' 7 r€ 7 r\‘yiyci } XcXo'y^o. The perf. act. of these verbs are not in use, on account of euphony. 2. In most verbs, however, this perf. 2. has an intransitive signification. This is self-evident in verbs which are of themselves intransitive or neuter , as ίρχο- μαι, εληλυθα, εθω, έίωθα, είκω, εοικα, κράζω , KGKpctya, οζω, ο$ω$α, $c. But in many verbs also which have a tran¬ sitive signification in the active, the intransitive enters into the perf. 2. as ayI ;υμι, ‘ I break’, perf 2. eaya , ‘ I am broken’, avoiyw, ‘l open’, perf l. (άνεφχα, ‘I have opened’), perf 2. dvetpya, "I stand open’, more usually, aveipy μένος €ΐμί· This is to be distinguished from the imperf. act. which has an active sense, as 11 π, 221. ft)', 228. 04· *, 389. where it might also be aor. 2. Herod, i, 187 . Demosth. in Ze- noth. p. 889. The pass, aveipyovro occurs in Xen. H . Gr. vi, 4, 7°°· eyeipwy ‘I wake another’, eypriyopa , awake’. βλπω, ‘I give hope’, Od. fS, 91. βολ™, *1 hope’. οΧΚυμι, ‘ destroy, lose’, perf l. άλωλεκα. perf. 2. ολωλα, ‘I am undone, lost’, peril πείθω, ‘I persuade, perf. A. πεπεικα. perf 2. πεποιθα , ‘ I rely upon, trust, confide’. πη Ί ννμι, ‘ I affix’, 7Γ6ΤΠ77 o, ‘ I am fixed’, infixus sum . πράσσω, perf l. πεπραχα , ‘I have done’, perf 2. 00 Thom. M. p. 71. Graev. ad Luc. T. ix, p. 486'. VOL. II. Z Syntax^* Of the Verb. 7T€7rpaya 9 e. g. e5, m/cio?, ‘ I have been fortunate, unfortunate". (Anglice ‘I have done well or ill*). See §. 190 . Obs. \ ρη^γνυμι, ‘1 break, rend*, eppwya, ‘ I break in pieces’, intrans. Plat. Phcedon. p. 295. x σηπία, c l Corrupt, make putrid", δουρα σεσηπε νέων, II. β', 135. 'are rotten’. τήκω, c l liquefy, melt’, το και κλαίουσα τετηκα, II. y , 176 . consumta sum. φαίνω, ‘ I shew", πί-φγνα, e I have appeared", Eurip . Iph. A. 973. Troad . 615. To this class also belongs Od. \|/, 237. πολλή δε περί χροΧ τετροφεν άλμη , 'has accumulated, condensed itself." In some verbs the perf. 2. has both a transitive and intran¬ sitive, or passive sense, as in διεφθορα, which stands some¬ times for διεφθαρμαι, sometimes for διεφθαρκα , especially in Attic p . In others, the two perf. are distinguished in a different manner in the signification. Thus μένω has μεμενηκα, in the perf. l. Ί have remained’, in the perf. 2. μεμονα, ' I persevere, am zealous in any thing", also transitive, μεμονε δ’ oye Ίσα θεοΊσιν, molitur. Obs. It was noticed §. 181. Obs. that the fut. 1. mid. is very often found for the active, and is the only fut. left in some verbs active. It is often put also for the passive, of which here¬ after. 495. The deponent verbs are to be distinguished from the middle; the former having the form of passives, but the sense of actives, e. g. αισθάνομαι , δέχομαι, yiy νομαι, δέομαι, δύναμαι, εpyάζoμaι, έρχομαι, ζέομαι, μαίνομαι , μάχομαι , and others. Some of these in the perf. and aor. have the p Thom. M. p. 230 sqq. et Interpr. Mceris, p. 127. Ammon, p. 41. Gnev. ad Luc. T. ix, p. 452 sq. 719 Syntax. Of the Verb. form of the passive, others of the middle; in others one of the tenses has the passive, the other the middle form, as αισθάνομαι, γσθημαι, ήσθόμην. δέχομαι., δεδεγμαι, εόεζάμην. γί^νομαι, ^ε^ενημαι, and yeyova, ey ενόμην f $eo- μαι, εόεηθην. epy άγομαι, ^ipy ασμαι*, ειρ^/ασάμην. έρχομαι , ηλθον, εληλυθα, ζέομαι, ^ημαι, η^/ησάμην. μαίνομαι, με- μγνα, εμάνην. μάχομαι, μεμάχημαι, εμαχεσαμην. A depo¬ nent of this kind seldom has a perf. of the active form, as όίχομαι, οίχωκα. The different kinds of verbs, however, are often con- 496 founded with each other. Thus we find 1. Transitives in the active for neuters. In this case an ellipsis is generally the foundation, άyειv, Xen. Anab. IV, 2, ] 5. ειτει 5* kyyv? rfyov οι 'Έλληνες, SC. την στρατιάν, which accompanies it, vn, 5, 9. Thus S^yeiv is commonly used as a neuter, persistere. άπολείπειν . Herod. VII, 221. 6 όε άποπεμπομενος αυτός μεν ουκ άπε~ λιπε, c did not depart’, Thuc. Ill, 10. ημΊν όε και Άθη - ναίοις ΐζυμμαχία εyενετό πρώτον, απολιποντων μεν υμών εκ του Μυϊκοί) πολέμου, παραμεινάντων όε εκείνων προς τα υπόλοιπα των epyiov'. εισβαλλειν, εμβαλλειν, SC. εαυτόν, c to make an irruption, to overflow", of a river. In the lat¬ ter sense also εκόιόόναι' ειτιόιόόναι, c to make progress", proficere, 8$c. v . 2. Neuters for actives, as άίασω, ρεω, λάμπω, 8ξο. See §. 417. Eur. Ph. 233. ώ λάμπουσα πέτρα πυρός Valck. ad Eur. Ph. 1069· r Hoog. ad Viger. p. 181 sq. Burgess, ad Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. 493 sq. z 2 720 i Syntax. Of the Verb. S ικόρυφον σέλα?, ib. 248. 'Αρης αίμα έάϊον (jiXeyei ra$e 7roXet s . * * , 3. * Neuters for passives , Ιί. ζ, 73. ένθα κεν αυτε Τρώες Άρηίφΐλων νπ* ’Αχαιών ’Ιλιον είσανε βησαν, αναλ- κείγσι δαμεντες, wliere, nevertheless, the passive construc¬ tion might be explained by coupling in ro with §αμεντες. II. σ' , 149· Αχαιοί υφ ’ 'Έκτορος άνδροφόνοιο φευηοντες. With φευ*/ειν, accusatum esse , this construction is regu¬ larly used. Thuc. I, 130. 6 Παυσανίας, ών και 7 τρότερον εν με*γαλω άζιώματι υπό των Ελλήνων. Comp. VI, 15. as Cic. pro Mil. 35, 96. beatos esse , quibus ea res ho- nori fuerit a suis civibus. Eurip. -ΡΛ. 729- οχει τιν’ oyKov ταρσός Ελλήνων πάρα. Id. Med. 1011. κατει τ οι καί συ προς τέκνων ετι. Plat. Apol. S. ρ. Ί\ . εάν με άπο- κτείνητε , ού ραόίως άλλον τοιουτον εύρησετε άτεχνως προσ¬ κείμενον τιη π ολει υ7το του θεοί). Aen. de Vectig. 5,6. επεί ωμώς* α·γαν όόζασα προστατεύειν η 7τολι? εστερηθη της αρχής, ου και τότ, επει του άόικεϊν άττεσχομεΦα, 7ταλιν υ7το των νησιωτών εκόντων προστάται του ναυτικόν ε*γενο μέθα; This usage is particularly common in the phrase θνησκειν υπό τινο? 1 . 4. Actives for passives. Soph. (Ed. T. 967 . ό έε θανών κενθει κάτω for κευθεται , Eurip. Med. 106. όη\ον 8 άρχης εξαιρόμενον νέφος ο\μω·γης } ως* ταχ αναφει με'ιζονι θυμω. Plat. Phcedon. p. 164. εΐ το καταόαρθάνειν μεν εϊη, το ό’ άνε-γείρεσθαι μη άνταπ οόιόοίη η . Thus εάλωκα. 1 s Burgess, ad Dawes, ρ. 495. Vechner. Hellenol. p. 91 sq. ed. Heusinger. Abresch. ad Thom. M. p. 298. Zeune ad Viger. p. 194 sq. * Valck. ad Herod, p. 457, 99. ad Eur. Hipp. p. 287- b. Fisch. hi, a. p. 441. u Abresch. ad iEsch. 1 , p. 86 . Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. C. 74. ad Eur. Bacch. 1041. ad Or. 296 * Dorvill. ad Cliarit. p. 435. Fisch. hi, b, p. 6*1 sq. 721 Syntax. Of the Verb. Λ y \ βαλών are always passive, and Homer uses II. ε 3 555 . ετραφετην, II. η 3 199 · ·σ , 436. Od. y y 28. yevQa6ai re τραφε μεν τε 3 for ετραφητην 3 τραφηναι. 'Τ’’··- . . Λ , S , . 4 y η ·,' Γ " . 5. Actives for middle verbs, (r) Eur. Hec. 9.11. μοΧπάν c) απο και χαροποιών θυσίαν καταπαύσας πόσις εν θαΧάμοις έκειτο. Avist. Ran. 580. παύε , τταυε του Xoyov 3 for 7ταυσομ χ . Eurip. Or. 288. και νυν άνακάΧυπτ 3 ώ κα- aiyvrjTov κάρα. Phoen. 21. ο $ rj^ovrj $ovs y . fEsch. Per 8. 197. πεπΧους prjyvvaiv άμφι σώματι. (Comp. 466. 1024. 1052.), which elsewhere is περιρρηζασθαι πεπΧους ζ . 6. Passives for active verbs, as οίκημένος for οίκώ v 3 Herod. I, 27. VII. 21. oi περί τον ’'Αθων κατοικημενοι , and immediately afterwards in a passive sense : 6 yap * Άθως εστι ορος μ6*γα — οίκημενον υπο ανθρώπων. Thus in Homer πεφυyμεvov είναι , for πεφευyεvaι. But the cases in which the perf. p. is at the same time the pprf mid. do not belong to this place. See §. 493. 7. Middle verbs for active. II. a 3 501. άλλα συ τόν y εΧθουσα 3 θεά 3 υπεΧύσαο δεσμών. χ 3 235. νυν S ετι και μάΧΧον νοεω φρεσι τιμησασθαι 3 ΪΟΥ τιμήσαί σε , Herod. II, 121, 4. ώς $e Xόyoυς τε πΧείους εyyίvεσθaι 3 καί τινα και σκώφαί μιν και εις y^XwTa π poayayi -σθαι. In Attic only the fut. mid. is used for the fut. act. See §. 181. Obs. 8. Middle verbs for passives in the aor. 2. Herod. VIII, 90. a\ νηες ΰιεφθαρεατο (i. e. §ιεφθάροντο 3 §. 198. Obs. 2. b . See 255.) Pind . Pyth I, 16. 6 3ε (αίετός) κνώσσων vypov νώτον αίωρει 3 τεαις ριπαισι κατασχο μένος. Eurip. χ Brunck. ad Arist. Ran. 269· y Valck. Diatr. p. 233. B. C. Pors. ad Eur. Or. 1. c. z Misc. Obss. v. 3, p. 63. Dorv. ad Char. p. 411. 722 Syntax. Of the Verb * * Hipp. 27. Hippolytum ίδουσα Φαίδρα καρδίαν «ατεσχετο ερωτι δεινή). Plat, Phcedr. ρ. 317. λυσιν τφ όρθώς μανευτι και κατασ^ομευω των παρόντων κακών ευρομενη. Also the aor. 1. Pind. 01. VII, 27 . όφρα πελώριον ανδρα παρ Άλ- φειφ στεφάνωσα με νον αίνεσω ) where, however, στεφ* may be taken in it’s proper signification, inasmuch as he gained himself the prize by his own strength. Soph , Afltig. 354. και φθε·γμα και ηνεμόεν φρόνημα και αστυνό¬ μους όpyάς εδιδάξατο , where, according to the common usage εδιδάχθη should be put. But εδιδάχθη signifies, f he learnt from others', passive εδιδάξατο , * he learnt by his own means' a , ( f taught himself'). The futures middle especially are put for the fut. pass. II. v, 100. θαύμα - ο ουποτ εyωyε τελεύτησε - σθαι εφασκον. Eurip. Hipp. 938. βίοτος ^oyK(oaeTai h . 9. Deponents used as passives , e. g. Plat. Rep . VIII, p. 229. τύραννος άπειpyaσ μένος κατέρχεται. De - mosth. in Mid. p. 576, 15. τάχα τοίνυν 1 ίσως και τα τοιαΰτ ερεΊ , ως εσκεμμενα και παρασκευασμένα πάντα λέγω νυν eyiv. Thus ωφθην is used in a passive sense. Ά Hemst. Obss. Misc. x, p. 216 . Comp. Markl. ad Lys. p. 650 . ed. R. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 358. Herm. de Em. Gr. Gr. p. 236. b Hemsterh. ad Thom. M. p. 852. ad Luc. T. 1 , p„ 181. Duker. ad Thuc. 11 , 87. Valcken. ad Herod, p. 388, 20. ad Theocr. (X. Id.) p. 10. v. 26 , Pierson, ad Mcerid. p. 367. Fisch. 111 , b. p. 63 sq. 1 Syntax. Of the Tenses. >723 \ - Y-'j · ; , , j f ’ i - ru · * »*>·» >>>/ /' >r i ?' '■ ' * ?' ·' ···.}(· i v 'λ'· v > , ■: " £ 1 1 . ' ' , Of the Tenses. • The signification of the Tenses has already been 497. treated of generally, §. 158. /. According to the remarks there made, the present, as in all languages, designates an action present, and still incomplete : and of the three tenses of past time, the aorist marks an action past abstractedly, without any reference to an¬ other action, at the same, or a different time. Hence it is used in narrations; and answers, in this respect, en¬ tirely to the perfect of the Latin. The perfectum, on the contrary, expresses an action which has taken place, indeed, at a previous time, but which is connected either in itself or its consequences, or its ac¬ companying circumstances, with the present time. Thus ’eypayjsa signifies, indeed, the completion of the action, but it does not determine whether the consequences of it, viz. the writing which I have written, be still existing or not. Teypafpa, on the contrary, signifies not only f I have written’, but it shews also the continued existence of the writing. In the same manner ^ε^άμηκα } f I am married’; on the contrary, ε^άμησα (βγ^μα), C I have married’, η πόλις όάλωκε , ‘ the city is taken, conquered’, η πόλις εάλω, "the city has been taken, was taken’ 0 . Isocr. de Pac.p. 163. A. ό μεν πόλεμος απάντων ημάς των ειρημενωυ άπεστερηκε ( c continued privation’) και yap TOL πενε- στερους πεποίηκε ( c continued poverty’) και πολλούς κινόυνους νπομενειν ην ay κασ ε f passing at the time ), και προς τους'Έλληνας όιαβεβληκε , και πάντα τρόπον τετα- Primisser, μ. 62. \ C 724 Syntax. Of the Tenses . Χαητωρηκεν ημάς. Thus immediately afterwards : ταρα¬ χής, βί 9 ην νυν προς αΧΧηΧους καθεσταμεν , 'into which our counsels have driven us, and in which we still find our¬ selves', not κατεστημ^ν, according to the reading of Jer. Wolf. Comp. Xen. Hellen. V, 3, <27. Hence κεκτημαι signified ‘ I possess', properly ‘ I have acquired to my¬ self ( κτάομαι ) so that the acquisition is still mine'. The plusquamperfectum shews an action which is past, but which still continued, either by itself or in its following and accompanying circumstances during an¬ other action which is past. Herod . vm, 61. τούτα U oi προεφερε, οτι ηΧωκεσάν τε και κατεΐχοντο αι Αθηναι. Tkuc. II, 18. η Ο’ινόη, ούσα εν μεθορίοις της Αττικής και ΙΒοιωτίας , βτετβίχ/στο, και αύτω φρουρ'κρ οι Αθηναίοι εχρώντο. The imperfectum expresses an action continuing during another action which is past, the accompanying circumstances of an action, or of a situation in past time, whether the main action be expressly stated, or be con¬ cluded from the context. It differs from the aorist in this, that the aorist marks an action past, and gone by; the imperfect, an action past, but at that time continuing. Xen. Anab. v, 4, <24. τούς πεΧταστάς εδεζανπο οι βάρβαροι και ε μάχοντο' €7 rei S' εγγύς η σαν οι 07τλίταί, ετράποντο. και οι μεν πεΧτασται ευθύς εΐπον - το —οι $e οπΧιται εν τάζει είπο ντο. 498. Of the several forms of the future, which, as belong¬ ing to one kind of verb, are as little to be distinguished in signification as the two aorists, the 3 fut. pass, or as it is called the Paulo post futurum , marks a future action, the beginning of which, however, in regard to time, is past; but the consequences of which, or the circumstances resulting from it, fctill continue; con- * ; * ϊ Λ I _ ^ ^ J Syntax. Of the Tensest sequently it is a future. Thus it bears the same rela¬ tion to the other futures, as among the tenses of past time, the perfectum does to the aorist. Hesiod. epy. 177. άλλ’ ίμττηι και τόισι με μίζετ ηι εσθλα κακοισιν, ‘will be mixt’ (continuing, not ‘ will have been mixt’). Thuc. II, 64. yvire οε ονομα niy ιστόν αάτήν (την πάλιν) εχουσαν έν πάσιν άνθρώποις, Old το ταις ξυμφοραις μη εικειν, πλεΐστα Se σώματα και πόνους άναλωκάναι πολεμψ, (the infin. άναλ. depends besides upon 8m τό) και Ιΰναμιν μεγί- στην άη μέχρι τοάϋε κεκτημενην, ής « άίάιον τοις wiyiy νομε- νοις, ην και νυν άπενίώμευ ποτέ (πάντα yap πέφυκε καί ελασ- σοΰσθαι), μνήμη καταλελείφεται, ‘ will survive’, Plat. Rep. VI, p. 114. ούκοΰν ήμϊν ή πολιτεία τελεως κεκοσμη- σεται, Εάν ά τοιοΖτος αύτήυ ’επισκοπή φάλαξ ο τούτων Επι¬ στήμων, ‘ will be completely organized’, ib. v, p. 35. πρεσβυτΕρψ μεν νεωτέρων πάντων άρχειν τε και κόλαζειν προσ- τετάξεται, ‘will be ordered’, i. q. νόμος ίσται. Ari- stoph. Equ. 1369. επειθ’ ά πολίτης έν καταλογή ουεείς κατα στοίβα? μετεyyραφήσεταΐ (‘will or shall become enrolled in another class’) άλλ’, ώσπερ ήν το πρώτον, έ 7Ύ ε Ύ ράφεται (‘will remain enrolled in that in which he was’). Hence of those verbs whose present marks only the beginning of an action, but the perf. the complete action, as μΕμνημαι, κεκτημαι, Sgc. the futur. 3. is used, in order to show that the perfect action is to happen in future, κεκτήσομαι, ‘ I shall possess , but κτήσομαι, ‘I shall obtain to myself’. Thus too the futures ύεοήσομαι, πεπαύσομαι, πεπράσομαι, SfC. express not so much the simple fut. pass. ‘ a future action passing over’, as ‘a future situation continuing’, which will have arisen from an action passing over. See the instances in Piers, ad Moerid. 123. 293 . 294. Comp. Brunck. ad Aisch. Prom. 846. Eur. Bacch. 1303. 726 Syntax. Of the Tenses. Sometimes also this future is used, in order to ex¬ press the rapidity of an action, by taking not the beginning of it, but its completion, and the situation resulting from it. Arist. Plut . 1027 . ri 7 dp ποιήσει, φράζε, και πεπράζεται. Comp. 1200. > ' % \ , . Λ „ _ Instead of this simple form a circumlocutory future is also used, which consists of the future of είμί, and the partic. perf. p. Xen , Cyr . VII, 2, 13. ην Si ΰιαρπάσγς, καί at τεχναι σοι, ας πηηάς φασι των καλών είναι, δίεφθαρμε- ναι εσονται. AflClb. VII, 6, 36. ην Si ποιησητε ά \ε·γετε, ιστέ, οτι avSpa κατακανόντες εσεσθε, 8$C. Hellert . VII, 5, 18. ο *Έ.παμινώνόας ενθυμούμενος, οτι - αυτός λελυμα- σμένος παντάπασι τρ εαυτου So^rj εσοιτο. ' ' '·■ · Γ ; 5 ■’ * 1 ·\ ■· 7" V ' > ■ · ' f t ΐ ; The simple fut. often has the sense of the French f devoir’, if the discourse has any reference s to a purpose, where μέλλω is elsewhere used. (§. 502.) Plat. N Rep. V, p. 24. εΐ αύ η ά^ελη των φυλάκων οτι μάλιστα άστασίαστος εσται, £ is to be,’ where just before it was expressed, el μελλει το ποίμνιον ότι άκρότατον είναι . Also, "must’, Xen. Mem. S. U, 1, 17 . οι είς την βασιλικήν τέχνην παάευόμενοι — τι όιαφερουσι των εζ ανάγκης κακοπα- θουντων, εί ye πεινησουσ ι και Si -φησουσι, fyc. Obs. With regard to the distinction between the aorist and perfect, it is to be observed, that in many cases it is arbitrary, whether or not it be intended to express the idea of the duration of a situation resulting from a past action; for this duration is often understood of itself, or the writer wished to direct the attention chiefly to the action itself. Hence the aorist is often put where the perf. should properly be; but vice versa, the perf. is rarely put for the aorist, and probably never in Attic : Thus Plato, Tim. p. 339· η αρμονία —:- εις κατακόσμησιν και ζυμ- φωνιαν εαυτ'ρ ζυμμαχος υπό Μ ουσων SeSoTai , but directly following : ρυθμός — επίκουρος επι ταυτα υπό των αυτών Syntax. Of the Tenses* T&l είόθη, for .SeSorai, In the same manner it is riot always neces¬ sary to express definitely in past actions the continuance of one during the passing of the other, and hence the aorist is often put for the plusq. perf. in narrations, e. g. Thuc. J, 102. oi ’Αθηναίοι — ευθυς, επειδή άνεχώ ρησαν - ζνμμα,χοι eyevovro, and thus the aorist is more frequent in narrations than the plusq. perf. (( The nature of the aorist is thus univer¬ sally negative; i. e. only the other preterites are confined m their use to certain cases, and the aorist is used universally, where this relation cannot be, or is not intended to be made . « ! ’ » . f This peculiar signification of the tenses is most clearly marked in the indicative, and participle, e. g· Demosth. in Mid . p . 576, 18 . και yap αν άθλιο? ην, el τοιαυτα παθών και πασχών, ημεΧονν ών περί τούτων ερειν ημεΧΑον 7 rpk υμα*. Hence the participles of the aor. act. can only be rendered in Latin by the participle of an active verb, making the object of the Greek partici¬ ple the subject, rendering the verb active by a passive, and referring it to that subject, e. g. ταϊτα ποίησαν , ειπών, his factis , dictis . το v πατέρα ιΐών, patre viso. The remaining moods of the present, however, serve at the same time for the imperfect, and thus especially the infin. present is used, in order to express the con¬ tinuance of the accompanying circumstances of an action, or a past action frequently repeated. Herod, vm. 69. of Xerxes I όμως δε τοισι πΧεοσι πειθεσθαι εκεΧενε, τάΐε καταδόξας. πρδς μεν Ε ύβο'ιτ, σφέας εθ εΑοκακϊειν, < had fought badly’, where in the oratio recta the 1 m- perf. ηθεΧοκάκου v would be used, VI, 117 . Έ^πιζηΧον των ομμάτων στερηθηναι, ούτε τ rXnyevTa ουδεν του σώματος ούτε βΧηθεντα, και το Χοιπδν της ζόης διατεΧεειν ( ( COnti- d Buttman Gr. Gr. p. 314. Obs. 2. Markland. Expl. Vett; auct. post. Eurip. Suppl. p. 281 sq. 500. Ϊ28 Syntax. Of the Tenses . nuing* ) απο τούτον του -χρόνον εόντα τνφΧόν. X0yeiv ( repeated, and thus continuing’) όε αυτόν ηκονσα περί τον 7 ταθεος τοιονόε τινα Xoyov' avSpa οι όοκεειν οπΧίτην αντί- στηναι μεyav i του το yeveiov την ασπίόα πάσαν σκιάζειν’ τό όε φάσμα τοΟτο όωϋτόν μεν τ ταρεξεΧθ εΊν, τον όε εωύ- τον παραστάτην άποκτεΊναι. Comp. VIII, 109. Plat. Hep. X, p. 322 Sq. όικαστάς $ε μεταζυ τούτων καθησθαι * ονς } €7Γ ειόη όιαοικασειαν, τους μεν όικαίους κεΧενειν πόρευε- σθαι την εις όεζιαν τε και άνω όιά του ουρανοί). - όράν η ταυττ} μεν καθ εκατερον το χασμα του ονρανου τε και της 'γης απιουσας τάς ψυχάς, c had sat down, had ordered him, that he had seen ; and thus in the whole following pasr sages ; άνιεναι, καταβαίνειν , κατασκηνάσθαι , άσπάζεσθαι , πυν? θανεσθαι, όιη·γεισθαι 3 8$c. clearly denote actions which ar0 continued in their frequent repetition. Comp. Symp. p. 252. Arist. Av . 472. Demosth. p. 46, 19 . But since in Herodotus, as well as Homer, the imperfect and the aorist are not distinguished accurately enough in signification from each other, the former often put this infinitive imperf. for the aorist, e. g. n, 121 , 5 . The perfectum preserves its proper signification through all its moods, and expresses a condition conti¬ nuing during the present, or (since the plusquam perf. has these moods in common with it), a past time, and arising from a past action Herod, vn, 208. άκηκόει όε— —ως αΧισμενη ειη ταυτγ στρατιη όΧ'^η, m, 75 . εΧε'γε, όσα ayaOa Κύρος Τίερσας πει roitjKoi, Xen. Oyr. VI, 2, 9· βλβγ ον, ότι Κροΐσος μεν ^εμων καί στραβός πάντων γρημενος ε'ίη των ποΧεμίων, SoSoypevov είη ητάσι τοΊς σύμμαχοι s βασιΧευσι, πασρ Trj όυνάμει έκαστον παρείναι —* Λ όε και μεμισθωμενους είναι ποΧΧονς μεν Θρακών μαχαιροφορους, Aly υπτίους, οε προσπΧεΊν - πεπομ- φβναι όε Κροϊσον και εις Αακεόαίμονα περί σνμμαχίας , συΧ- \ Syntax, Of the Tenses. " 729 \eyea9ai $e το στράτευμα - και ayopav 'K a pyyy e\9 at ενταύθα κομίζειν. Comp. II, 4, 17* Arist. Av. 1350. ey- ίρείυν ye πάνυ νομίζομεν, os an π επλ ή y η πατέρα, νεοττοί ων. Equ. 1148. επειτ αναγκάζω, πάλιν εξεμειν, αττ αν κεκλάψωσΐ μου. Thus τέθναθι, II. χ, 365. does not signify ‘ die’, but is the same as κείσο θανων. τεθναίην, ίτε μοι μηκίτι τ οΰτο μέλοι, Mimnerm. not ‘ may I die’ but ‘ may I be dead.’ Hence] the] perf. is used in the rest of the moods, when the writer wishes to shew that the condition men¬ tioned is to be continued on, Plat. Rep. tiii, p- 225. ω (κηφϊ,νε) m, δεί τον άγαθόν ιατρόν τε καί νομοθε την πόλεω,— πορρωθεν εύλαβεϊσθαι, μάλιστα μεν, Απω, μη ίγγίνησθον, άν δε όγγόνησθον, &πως Ατι τάχιστα σίν αότοί, toTs κηρίο*, •εκτετμησθον. Xetl. ΗβΙΙ.'Ύ, 4, 7· έξιόντε, X είπον,την θόραν κεκλεισθαι, ‘that the door should remain shut. This is the case particularly in the imperat. perf. the use of which is by no means, as Buttmann thinks (p. 317, 10 ), confined to verbs whose perfect has the sense of the present, or occurring only in the Poets: Plat. Euthyd. p. 19· τα5τα μεν olv, ω Ευθόδημε τε και Αιονυσο- $ ωρ ε, πεπαίσθω τε ύμΊν, και Ίσως ’ικανά 0χει, With the implied idea, that there should be no more sport. Id. Rep. VI, p. 108. ωκνουν ίγά> ε’ιπείν τά νίν άποτετολμημενα. νίν δε τούτο μεν τετολμήσθω εϊπείν, ’ότι τον, άκριβεστα- toW φόλακα, φιλοσόφου, δει καθιστάναι. Id. Rep. VIII, Ώ. 220. τετάχθω ημίν κατά δημοκρατίαν ό τοιουτοί ανηρ 10. 202. άπειργάσθω δη όμίν και αίτη ή πολιτεία, ην ολιγαρ¬ χίαν καλοΰσιν. Id. Leg. X, ρ. 83. άγε δη, θεόν ει ποτέ παρακλητεον ήμίν, νίν ίστω τοίτο ούτω γεν ο μεν ον ,επι γε άπόδειίιν, ά είσί την αύτά σπονδή παρακεκλησθων. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 2, 19 . όμως δε είρησθω μοι, α ™ ωτ *Ρ ον είναι τον ίκόντα φενδόμενον τοί ακον ros. Lucian. D. Mor . 10, 10. το άγκόριον άνεσπάσθω, ‘let the anchor be 730 501. Syntax. Of the Tenses. weighed, and remain so’; especially id. ib. 30, i. o μβν ληστής ουτος Σωστρατος e? τον Π vp^XeyeOovTa e/x/3e- βλησθω' (to remain there) ο S’ Ιερόσυλος ιίττο τί/ 9 Χ/μαί- ρα 9 διασπασθητω (an action passing by, and leaving no remarkable consequences)* o τύραννος , ω Ερμη , 7ταρα τοί/ Τ/τι/ομ α7τοτα06ί 9 , ι/7το τώυ γι/ττώμ κειρεσθω (con¬ tinued action) /cat αί/το 9 το ήπαρ. Comp. Thuc . I, 71 . Since in the perf. more regard is had to the duration of the consequences, and the action, properly speaking, is left almost out of the question, it is, therefore, also used to express the rapid passing of an action, in which the moment of the action itself is entirely overlooked, Lucian. D. Mort. 10 , 2. άλλ ι$ου ή πήρα μοι και τό βάκτρον ε 9 την λίμνην άπερρίφθων. Hence probably Thuc. νιπ, 74. \να, ην μή υπακουσωσι , τεθνή κωσι. ^ J r* , ι k Further it is to be remarked, that it is as little ne¬ cessary in the rest of the moods as in the indicative, always to shew determinately this continuance of an ac¬ tion, or its consequences, by the form ; and that hence the aorist is sometimes used, where, accurately speaking, the perfectum should be put. Thus Demosth. in Midiam\ P * ^7()> 23. ουχ ο €σκεμμενος ουό ο μεριμνήσας τα δί¬ καια Xeyeiv νυν , for μβμεριμνηκως, for the consequences of μεριμνάν are continued as well as those of σκεπτεσθαι , and just before, p. 16. € 70 ) a y όσκόφθαι μόν φημί 3 καί οόκ άν αψνηθειην, και μεμελετηκεναι y , ως ενην μάλιστα εμοι. But it does not follow from hence, that the perf. and the aor. have exactly the same signification. The aorist in all the moods, except the indicative and the participle, is usually expressed in Latin and English by the present. But in Greek this distinction between the imperat. opt. conj. infin. of the aorist, and the same moods of the present, appears to obtain ; that \ Syntax . Of the Tenses . 731 the aorist designates an action passing by, and consi¬ dered abstractedly in its completion, but the present a continued and frequently repeated action, or one in which the beginning only is considered. Thus Plato Rep. IX, p. 241. θες to'ivov πάλιν τον τοιουτου ηδη πρεσβυ- τ ερου yeyovoros νεον νιον εν τοις τοντον ον ηθεσι τεθραμ- μενον. Ύίθημι. Tt|9et τοίνυν και τά αυτά εκεΊνα περί αυτόν Ί ι Ί νάμενα, because the first shews the admission of a proposition, which can only be instantaneous and tran¬ sient, although the proposition, or the supposition itself be continuing; but in τίθει every new point of compa¬ rison requires the repetition of the admission. Xeno¬ phon Cyrop. V, 1, 2. καλεσας ο Κύρος Αρασπην MjJcW, τούτον εκελευσε διαφυλάξαι αι)τφ την τε y υναΐκα και την σκηνην, where he refers only to the action as one con¬ cluded in itself; on the contrary, §. 3. ταντην ούν εκε- λευσεν 6 Κϊρος διαφυλάττειν τον Αρασπην, εως αν αδτος λάβγ}, because the addition εως άν, 8$c. requires the con¬ tinuance of the same action. Id . Mem. S. ι, l, 14. τοις μεν άει κινεΊσθαι πάντα (δοκεΊ ν), τοις δε ούδεν αν ποτέ κινηθηναι , και τοις μεν πάντα yiyveaOai τε και απολ- λυσθαι , τοΊς X ουτ αν Ί ενεσθαι ποτέ ούδεν, ούτε άπο- λεσθαι, where the infin. aor. with αν in the oratio ohli - qua answers completely to the optat. aor. with άν in the oratio recta (see of the Infin.), and designates an action abstractedly, without reference to its continuance or frequent repetition : but the infinitive present marks distinctly, continuance, or frequent repetition of the action. Lucian. D. Mort. x, 10. ώστε λυε τά αττο- y εια (beginning of the action), την άποβάθραν ανελω- μεθα, το ay κύριον άνεσπάσθω * πέτασον το ιστιον, βίθννε , ωπορθμευ 3 τά πηάάλιον ( continuance), β. 9. the Philosopher says to Menippus: ούκούν και συ άπύθου την ελευθερίαν 3 but Mercury answers : μηδαμώς, άλλα και 732 Syntax. Of the Tenses. Ιεχβ ταυτα, because the latter shews a continued action, the former one confined to a particular time. In the same way we must take the passage quoted by Buttmann. p. 316, 7· to shew the perfect identity of the moods of the aorist with those of the present: Demosth. Phil, i, p. 44, 2. επει8αν άπαντα ακουσητε , κρίνατε και μη ητράτε- ρον προλαμβάνετε , inasmuch as the previous judg¬ ment has a continued influence upon the decision of the auditors, and is repeated at every single point of the speech ; but the judgment and the sentence, κρίνειν, is inferred in the conclusion of the whole, ib. 16. πρώτον μεν τοινυν τριηρεις πεντηκοντα παρασκενάσασθα ι φημι 8ειν, ειτ αυτούς ούτφ τα? ·γνώμας εχειν. - προς 8ε τουτοις , τοις ημισεσι των ιππέων ιππα , γω , γονς τριηρεις και πλοία ικανά ευτρεπίσαι κελεύω, ταυτα μεν , ο'ιομαι 8ειν υπάρχειν επι τα? εξαίφνης—στρατείας , where the regular change of the aorist, and the present, leads us to suspect a difference also of meaning, viz. τα? yv^a 9 ίχειν and ύπάρχειν are, from their nature, necessarily continuing : the ships, however, are not to be prepared during the whole time, but only at first (opposed to βίτα), which if it cannot be immediately accomplished, yet appears to the speaker and hearer only as a space of time in itself completed. See 45, 2. ίν η $ιά τον φόβον — νσνχίαν όχρ (continuing) η παρι8ών ταυτα αφύλακτος ληφθγ (passing). The cases in which an action com¬ pleted in a moment, is referred to, are naturally much more frequent than those in which a continued action is I marked, or where merely the beginning of it is to be considered ; and hence the imper. opt. conj. and infinit¬ ive of the aorist are more frequent than the same moods, of the present. It is often indifferent also, whether these accessary significations are intended to be marked at the same time. - Syntax. Of the Tenses. 733 In the oratio obliqua the optative sometimes has the sense of time past, e. g. Herod, i, 31. e? τβψωτα, τίνα SevTepov μετ €κ.€ΐνον Ί$οι, c had seen . It has oftenei, however, besides the above particular indication of a complete action, the sense also of an indefi¬ nite time, where in Latin the conjunctive of the perfect is used, e. g. Demosth. p. 676, 16 . ουκ αι> άρνηθείην, non negaverim , f I will not deny it’. Xen. Mem. S. iv, 2, 5. άρμόσ etc <5 av οντω προοιμιαζβσθαι, it might SUlt . The conjunctive with particles of time, orau, εττ etSdv, often corresponds to the Latin Futurum exactum. 11. ζ', 412. ou yap ex aXXrj βσται θαλπωρή, επ€ΐ αν συ ye ποτμον €πίσπγς. and passim f . Yet the leading idea of a per¬ fect action always remains. The futurum retains in the optative and infinitive the sense of a future action g . The participle fut. is used in apposition in wishes. Arist. Ach. 865. πόθβν προσήπταν οι κακώς αποΧουμβνοι €7 τι την θυραν μοι Χα- ρώης βομβαυλιοι ; qui utinam male pereant. Comp. Lucian. D. D. 14, 2. Besides the simple form of the futurum, there is also a periphrastic futurum, made up of μέλλω and the infin. of the pres, aorist, or fut. (not the perf. for τβθνάναι. Plat. Apol. is a present, according to the sense), and cor¬ responds with the Latin periphrastic future of the parti¬ ciple in urus, and the verb sum. It expresses the future in relation to another time, which is marked by the e Fisch. ii, p. 268 . f Fisch. ii, p. 270 sq. « Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. 105. Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 792. El. 34. . / .·■' Ϊ '·'· : > , VOL. II. A A 502. I 734 Syntax. Of the Tenses. tense in which μέλλω stands., e. g. μέλλω, έμελλον, έμέλ- λησα ypatpeiv, scripturus sum , eram, fui. In English this is expressed sometimes by f about to do any .thing, intending’, &c. Plat. Rep. n, p . 232. 6 yap y εωρ- yos ουκ ai/ros 1 ποιησεται έαυτω το άροτρου, ει μέλλει κάλλιον είναι/ if the plough is to be good’, i. e. c if he intends that it should be good’. Comp. Aristot. Poet. l. in Plat. Rep. VI, p. 7S. avayKY] αυτέρ (tw κυβερνήτη) την επιμέλειαν ποιεισθαι ενιαυτόν και ωρών και ουρανου - ει μέλλει τψ οντι νεώς αρχικός έσεσθαι, 6 if he intends’, lb. p. 83. πας ημίν oμoλoyησει } τοιαυτην φυσιν και πάντα εχουσαν, οσ α προσετάζαμεν νυν όή, ει τελέως μέλλει (according to the Cod. Reg· vulg. μέλλο i h ) φιλόσοφος y ενέσθ ai 3 ‘if one wishes’. Ib. VIII, p. 231. υπεζαιρείν τούτους πάντας όε7 τόν τύραννον , ει μέλλει άρξειν, which immediately afterwards is expressed είπερ άρξει. The infinitive is often wanting, when it can be easily supplied either from the context or otherwise. Isocr. Euc. Hel. p. 213. B. τάς μεν επόρθουν , τάς όέ ε μέλλον, τάις όέ ηπείλουν των πόλεων. SC. πορθεΊν. Plato Theaet. p. 61 . ουτ αυτός όυναμαι πεισαι εμαυτόν, ως 'ικανώς τι λeyω, ουτ άλλου ακουσαι λεyovτoς ούτως , ως συ όιακελευη, ου μεν όη αύ ούό’ aπaλλayηvaι του μέλλει ν. SC. λέyειv ούτως'. Hence μέλλων, ‘ future’, and the expression τί ου μέλλει ; Plat . Hip. Min. p. 202. εόόκει άρα } ως έοικεν , Ομηρω έτερος μεν είναι ανηρ άληθης έτερος όέ φευόης, αλλ’ ούχ ό αυτός. 1ΠΠ. Πώ? yap ου μέλλει , ώ Σώκρατες ; SC. όοκεΐν, ‘ how should it not appear thus to him,’ i. e. ‘without doubt’. Rep. VI, p · 90. ουκουν ευθυς εν πασιν ο τοιουτος πρώτος έσται έν απασιν , αλλα>9 τε και εάν το σώμα φυρ προσφερές τρ ψυχρ ; h Heind.ad Plat. Parm. p. 291 sq. Hemsterh. ad Lucian, ii, p. 546. f Syntax . Of the Tenses. 735 \ « ' * Τ< ο ον μ e\\ei ; βφη. Comp. ibid, via, p. 233. Phcedon. p. 177 k . Besides this proper signification, the tenses have also 303. that of an action frequently repeated, ‘ to be wont’, for which the present also might be used. 1 . Imperfectum. II. a, 218. ος κε θεοίς επιπείθηται, μάλα τ εκλυον αυτόν, Plat. Theaet. p. 77. ειρ^η δε, εξ ης και a νυν δη e\ey ομεν πάντα ηρτηται , ηδε αυτών . ως το παν κίνησή ην, ιι a Wo παρα τούτο ουδεν . 1 '■ » 2. Perfectum. II. a, 37· κλύθί μοι, *Α pyvpoTog, ος Χρυσήν άμφιβεβηκας, c hast protected and still pro- tectest’. Plat. Phcedon p. 1S3. αυτή δε δη ημίν η τοιαύτη και ουτω πεφυκυΊα, άπαλλαττομενη του σώματος, ευθύς δια- πεφύσηται και απολωλεν. Pvotag. ρ. 122. επειδαν yap τις παρ' εμού μάθγ, εάν μεν βούληται, άποδεδωκεν ο eyd) πράττομαι dpyvpiov' εάν δε μη , ελθων εις 'ιερόν, όμόσας, όπόσου αν—φησι άξια είναι τα μαθήματα, τοσούτον κατεθηκε . Xen. Cyr. IV., 2, 26 . ουδεν εστι κερδαλεώτερον τού νίκην' 6 yάp κρατών άμα πάντα συνη ρπακε, και τούς άνδρας και τάς yvi /αίκας, fyc. m 3. Aorist. II. η, 4. ως δε θεός ναύτγσιν εελδομενοισιν εδωκεν ουρον - ως άρα τώ Τ ρώεσσιν εελδομενοισι φανητην. Eurip. Or. 698 . και ναύς yap , εκταθείσα προς βίαν πόδι, εβαφεν, εστη δ αυθις, ην 'χαλη ποδα. Comp. Suppl. 227 . Troad. 53. 713. Plato Rep. vi, p, 92. ούτοι μεν δη ούτως εκπίπτοντες, oh μάλιστα προσηκει , έρημον και άτελη φιλοσοφίαν λιπόντες, αυτοί re βίον ου προσήκοντα ούδ' άληθη k Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 304. 1 Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 328. , Fisch. 11 , p. 258. m Fisch. 11 , p. 258. Λ A 2 1 504. 736 Syntax. Of the Tenses. ζώσι, την 5e, ώσπερ ορφανήν £uyyevcov, άλλοι επεισε\θόν- τες ανάζιοι ί/σχ υνάν re και όνείυη ί re ριηφαν. Comp. ib. ν, ρ. 30. νιιι, ρ. 216 . ιχ, ρ. 268 sq. χ, ρ. 312. Leg . IV, ρ . 185. IX, ρ. 5. Phcedon. ρ. 167. Xen. Cyr. ι, 2, 2. τι? τούτων τι παραβαίνει, ζημίαν 67 re θε σαν 11 . 4. Futurum. Herod. I, 173. καλεονσι από των μητέ¬ ρων εωντονς, και ουκ απο των πάτερων. είρομενου όε ετερου τον ετερον, τις ε'ιη, καταλεζε ι εωντόν μητρόθεν καί της μητρός άνανεμε'εται τα? μητέρας. Soph. Afltig. 348* κρατεί &ε μηγαναΊς θηρός όρεσσιβάτα, Χασιαυχενα Θ Ίππον υπάγεται άμφίλοφον Xyyov, which is followed V. 356. by ε$ι$ά£ατο°. This is different from τί λεζεις for τί Xeyew, in Euripides, which seems to shew the expectation of something to follow p . v ... . . ί ' . ... Hence the different tenses with this signification are often interchanged. Thus in the passages cited from Plato, N° 2. the perfectum with the aorist, in the same N° 3. the present and the aorist, in Sophocles, N° 4. the pre- sent* future, and aorist, and in Herodotus, ib. the present and future. Comp. Hesiod, epy. 240 sq. 244 sq. Theog. 748. Callin. El. 14. I ^ · \ fix.//' I r e Besides these cases the tenses are put for each other also, e. g. l. The present is put 1. for the aorist, in an ani¬ mated narration, which represents what took place as pre¬ sent, as in Latin the prcesens historicum. Eurip. Suppl. 652. Καπανεως yap ην Χάτρις , όν Ζευς κεραυνφ πνρποΧιρ η Valcken. Diatr. ρ. 163. Λ. Toup. ad Longin. p. 275. Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 275. Fisch. ii, p. 26*0 sqq. Hoog. ad Vig. p. 210. ° Fisch. ii, p. 263. Zeiine ad Vig. p, 212. p Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. 353. 737 Syntax, Of the Tenses. karaiO αΧοϊ. lb. 893. εΧθω v S’ επ Ινάχου ροάς, παίδευε - ται κατ’ ’'Apyos. Hence the present is often put for the aorist. Thuc. i, 95. of Pausanias : εΧθων 8 els Αακεδαί- μονα των μεν Ιδία προς τινα αδικημάτων εύθυνθη, τά δε μ^ιστα άποΧυεται μη άδικειν. VII, 83. και αναΧαμβα- νουσι τε τά οπΧα , και οι Συρακουσιοι αισθάνονται και επαΐων ισαν. Comp. Xen. Η. Gr. II, 3, 23. VII, 3, 12 q . ~ r \ · / ’ ■ Γ 0: ι ! * * · ■ - 2. ηκω has regularly the signification of a past action, of the perfect, f not, I come, am in the act of coming’, but f Iam come, lam here’, adsum, ζδεΧηΧνθα, and the imperf. ηκον answers to the plusq. perf. He¬ rod. VI, 100. Αισχίνης — φράζει τοίσι ηκουσι των Αθηναίων πάντα τά παρεόντα σφι πργ^ματα, { to those who weie come’. Comp. 104. vm, 50. 68. Thus Aristophanes Plut. 284. uses ηκει for άφϊκται , v. 2β5 Γ . In this man¬ ner άκονω is often used for άκηκοα. Od. y\ 193. Ατρείδην δε και αυτοί ακούετε νοσφιν εοντα , ως ηΧθε } $ξ0. ο, 402. νησός τις Σνρίη κικΧησκεται , ει που άκου εις. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 122. ΘεμιστοκΧεα ουκ ακούεις άνδρα ayaOov yεyονάτα, και Κίμωνα και ΜιΧτιάδην και ΥίερικΧεα τουτονι τον νεωστι τετε- Χευτεκότα , ου καί συ άκηκοας 8 . 3 . The verb εΐμι in the present has regularly the signification of the future. Herod, vm, 60. ην δε γε καί τά €7ω εΧπίζω y^ ται, καί νικησωμεν ττισι νηυσί, ούτε ημιν ες τον * Ισθμόν παρεσονται οι βάρβαροι , ούτε προβη~ σονται εκαστερω της Αττικής , απιασι τε ουδενι κοαμψ . q Valcken. ad Eurip. Hipp. 34. Brunck. ad Eurip. Hec, 21. Scha3« fer in Dionys. Hal. 1 , p. 116 not. *· Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. 48 sq. Dorvill. ad Charit. p. 221. Valck. ad Eur. Phoen. 383. Musgr. ad Eur. Hec. 1. 8 Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 195. Comp. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 562» * Duker. ad Thuc. 11 , 44. Piers, ad xWoer. p. l6 sq. 738 Syntax . Of the Tenses. \ . , Thus the participle also is used Thucyd.v, 65. ’εστρατό- πεδενσαντο, ως toy τες επι τους πολεμίους, and the infini¬ tive, Plat. Phcedon. p. 2 35. και το πυρ ye αύ, προσιόντος του ψνχρου αυτω , η ύπεζιεναι η άτιολεΊσθαι. \ 4'ί /. Η ϊ; Ί, 3 · # / Ο "·■ \ , 505. II. The imperfectum is sometimes put for the aorist, in Homer especially, and Herodotus. For on the one hand the significations of the aorist and imperf. were not accu¬ rately distinguished in the ancient language, and on the other, the subject maybe an action which, with respect to the situation of the speaker, is quite concluded, yetis ca¬ pable of being represented as continuing for some mo¬ ments at the time in which it took place, e. g. Plat. Rep. X, in. παντός apa μάλλον ορθώς ωκ ίζομεν την πολιν. Comp. Herod. VllI, 61 sqq. Plat. Tim. p. 313. ολον τούτο μοίρας οσας προσηκε διενειμεν.—ηρχετο δε διαιρείν ώδε. μίαν αφειλε το πρώτον απδ παντός μοίραν . μετά δε ταύτην άφηρει διπλάσιάν ταύτης , where ηρχετο , άφηρει, stand for ηρζατο, αφειλε. Obs. The imperf. εχρην, εδει , προσηκεν are often used by the Attics for the presents χρη, δει, προσηκει. Arist. Plut. 605, ειμι δε ποι yijs ; XPEM. ες τον κυφών * ά\λ’ ου μελλειν χρην σ, άνύτειν u . But in most cases these imperf. are used like the Latin oportebat , debebam, which in English are rendered by the plusq. p. conj. See §. 510. III. l. The perf. for the present, especially in verbs whose present tense shews the commencement of the action, e. g. δεδοικα , πεφόβημαι , κεκλημαι , πεποιθα. In this case the plusq. perf. has the sense of the imperf*.·- _ - < f S * , , ' - * y r r 2. The perfectum for the aorist is doubtful. Herod. u Dorv. ad Char. p. 6l0. Valcken. ad Eur. Ph.9bb. Heind. ad Plat. Charm, p. 71. Fisch. ii, p. 257. s Thom. M. p. 264. \ Syntax . Of the Tenses. 739 VIII, 50. ταυτα των από ΏεΧοποννησου στρατηγών ει nXeyo- μενων εΧηΧυθε άνηρ Αθηναίος, perhaps it should be επη- Xl 106, II. V y 60. Εννοσ'^αιος άμφοτερω κεκοπως πΧησεν μενεος Kparepoio, κεκοπως is the plusq. perf. for which the aorist κόφας also might be put. The plusq. perf. is also put sometimes where other¬ wise the aorist is Used. Herod, vi, 130. φαμενου όε εγ- yvaaOai Μβγακλεο?, εκεκυρωτο 6 yάμoς ΚΧεισθενεί. VIII, 38. συμμ^εντων όε τουτεων πάντων, φόβος τοισι βαρβάροισι ενεπεπτωκεε. But in this instance the plusq. perf. « is put in order to shew something as an immediate instantaneous result of an action, since the former seems to be spoken of as complete when the latter is finished. IV. The aorist is put l. in the sense of the present 506. even where it cannot be rendered, f to be wont', espe¬ cially in the Tragedians. Eurip. Med. 273. σε, την σκυθρωπόν και πόσει θυμουμενην Μ ηόειαν, εϊπον τησόε yης εζω περμν. Soph. Aj. 536. επηνεσ epyov και πρόνοιαν ην εθου. Eurip. Or. 1687 sq. ιόου μεθίημ 'Ερμιόνην από σφα- y ης, και Χεκτρ επγνεσ, ηνίκ άν όιόφ πατήρ. Id. Iph. A. 510. απεπτυ σ α τοιάνόε avyyweiav αΧΧηΧων πικράν. Soph. El. 668. εόεζάμην το ρηθεν' είόεναι όε σου πρώτιστα χρρζώ, τίς σ άπεστειΧε βροτών. In Latin and English the pre¬ sent must be used here ; but in Greek the aorist seems here also to retain a sense very nearly related to its pro¬ per one, of an action completely finished, in which no alteration can be made, and to be used, in order to ex¬ press the action completely determined, every doubt as to its truth and unalterableness being removed y . y Herm. de em. Gr. fir. p. 194 sq. ad Vig. p.734. n. l 62 . who has however explained this idiom somewhat differently. 740 Syntax . Of the Tenses. 2. The aorist indie, or partic. is rarely pilt for the future, although Homer says II. S', 1 . 58 . ού μεν πως αλίομ πεΧει ορκιον , αΐμά re άρνών, σπονδαί τ ακρητοι, και ίεζιαΐ; > 7 ? επεπιθμεν. ειπερ yap re και αύτίκ *ΟΧυμπιος ούκ ετεΧεσ- <τεν, εκ τ€ και όφε τεΧει * συν re μeyάXιρ άπετισαν συν σφησιν κεφαΧρσι, yvi >αιζί τε και τεκεεσσιν. But here the aorist is put either in the sense of the Latin futurum exactum , in a conclusion after premises with si and the fut. exactum (si Jupiter hoc perfecerit , Tro - jani pcenas dederint, and without the premises, da mihi te facilern; dederis in carmina vires) by which the immediate consequence of an action is so expressed, as though it was introduced complete, when the action takes place (where in Latin also the perf. is sometimes put, as in Quintilian, si tales animos in prodio habehi- tis , quales hie ostenditis } vicimusf ; or it is an union ot two propositions for εκ re και οφε TeXet, Τ|θω άμ- φηριστον εθηκεν. 5. The indicative also of all tenses is frequently put without any condition implied with άν, where in Latin and English the conjunction is used. ' ' ’ - i 74 ? Syntax. Of the Moods. a. Imperf. r PhuC. VII, 55. ούουνάμενοι επενεγκεϊν ούτε ex πολιτεία? τί μεταβολής το οιάφορον αύτοίς, ώ προσή- yovTo αν, quo sibi eos adjunxissent, where the imperf. shews an incident then happening, and accom¬ panying the circumstances at that time, Xen. Pier. i, 9* el yap τούθ’ ούτως έχει, πώς Αν πολλοί μεν έπεθύμουν τύραννεϊν—, πώς ύε πάντες έζήλουν αν τούς τυράννους ; quart concupiscerent , inviderent, a continuation to the present time of an action begun in past time. Thus especially έβουλόμην αν, ήθελον Av is used, 1 would’, not only now, but also previously. Plat. Phcedr. p. 282. καίτοι έβουλόμην y αν μάλλον (άπομνημονευειν τα Λνσίου) η μοι πολύ χρυσίου γενεσθαι. Again, βουλοιμην Αν, Plat. Lys. ρ. 228. ‘ I would now’, without regard to the time past, velim k . b. Perfectum. Demosth. pro Cor. έπεί St ά ye ύμας αύτούς, πάλαι Αν άπολάλατε, ‘you had long ago been ruined’. c. Plusquamp. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 235. της ειρή¬ νης αν ϋιημαρτή κει καί ούκ αν άμφότερα είχε, καί την ειρήνην καί τά χωρία. Id. in Aristocr. ρ. 680, 25. "ινα S' ωί ραστα τούτο nrepaveie, ψήφισμα τοιουτόντι η rap υμών evpeTO , έξ ου κυρωθέντος α ν, εί μη St' ημάς και ταύτην την γραφήν, ήόίκηντο μέν φανερεές οί Svo τιΣν βασιλέων, ησυχίαν S’ αν ήγον οι στρατηγοΰντες αύτοίς. The plusq. ρ. as well as the perf. here retains its signification. d. Aorist. Plat. Apol. S. p. 42. ετι Se (είσ'ιν οΰτοι οί κατήγοροι) καί έν ταύτν, τρ ηλικία λέγοντες προς υμάς, έν ή αν μάλιστα έπιστεΰσατε (credideritis) . Id. Leg. III. p. 111. πλούσιοι ούκ αν ποτ εγενοντο, άχρυσοι τε και k Dawes. Misc. Cr. ρ. 237. Schsef. in Dion. Hal. I, ρ. 124 sq. 510. 748 ' Syntax. Of the Moods. avdpyvpoi οντες. Xen. Anab. IV, 2, 10. και αυτοί μεν aP επορευθησαν, ρπερ οι άλλοι, τα ό* inTofvyia ούκ r/v αΧΧη εκβηναι. profecti essent or proficisci potuissent. Isocr. in Soph. p. 293. B. eyo) Se 7Γ po ποΧΧων αν χρημάτων ετιμη- σαμην τηΧικούτον όυνασθαι την φιΧοσοφία ν, οσον ούτοι λβ- yovaiv , (ισω? yap ούτ άν ημείς πΧεΊστον άπεΧείφθημεν, ου& αν εΧαχιστον μέρος άπεΧαύσαμεν αυτής). ThllS also ηκιστ αι/ ηθελησα , minime voluissem 1 . * » · , , * Obs. Here also sometimes αν is wanting. II ζ', 348. (α >9 μ οφεΧ - ο'ίχεσθαι 7 τροφέρουσα κακή ανόμοιο θυεΧΧα εις ορος η εις κύμα ποΧυφοίσβοιο θαΧασσης *) ένθα με κυμ άπό ε ρσ ε } Ίταρος ταόε εpya yεvεσθaι, for άπόερσε κε . Thuc . νπι, 86. ωρμηιχενων των εν Σαμω Αθηναίων πΧειν 67 τί σφας αυτούς (εν φ σαφέστατα Ιωνίαν και Ε,ΧΧησποντον ευθύς ειχον οι ποΧε- μιοι , tenuissent .) Plat. Alcib. 11 . ρ. 78. όοκει σοι οΐόν τε είναι η φρόνιμόν η αφρονα ; η εστι τι $ιά μέσου τρίτον πάθος, ο ε ποιεί τον άνθρωπον μήτε φρόνιμον μήτε άφρονα ; Id. Symp. ρ. 202. ούτε yap όπως αποκτείναιεν ειχον , καί , ώσπερ τούς yiyavTas κεραυνωσαντες, το 7 ενός άφανίσαιεν (α\ τιμαι yap αυτοις και τα ιερά τα παρά των άνθρωπων ηφανίζετο.) uEschin. in Ctesiph. ρ. 383. εβουΧόμην μεν ούν καί την βου- Χην τους πεντακοσίους και τάς εκκΧησίας υπό των εφεστηκότων ορθως όιοικεισθαι. 6. The imperfects, χρην, εόει, προσηκεν , are used with- out αν, where, in English, the conjunctive, ‘I ought,should have’, &c. but in Latin the indicative, is used, oporte- bat, oportuit , debebam, debui. Herod. 1 , 39 . εί μεν yap υπό όόόντος τοι είπε τεΧευτησειν με, η άλλον τευ, ο τι τούτω εοικε , χρην όη σε ποιεειν τα ποιεεις , ‘ thou shouldst then have done. Soph. Phlloct. 1363. χρην y άρ σε μητ αυτόν ποτ ες Τροίαν μοΧεΐν, ημάς τ άπείpyειv, 4 thou shouldst Hot have come . Pint. Chnr?n. p. 1 ] 6. ει μεν σοι ηόη πάρε- στιν j ο Xeyei Κριτίας όόε, σωφροσύνη, και εί σωφρων ικανώς. 1 Se'haef. 1. c. I Syntax. Of the Moods. 149 * οΐίδεν ετι croi εδει ούτε των 'Ζ,αμοΧξιδος 3 ούτε των Αβαριδος τοΰ Ύπερβορεου επωδών™ . Thus too the aor. 2 . of which, §. 513. Obs. 3. > 7. Sometimes also the indicative is used in suppo¬ sitions, where in every other language the conjunctive should be put. Eur. Androm. 335. τέθνηκα τϊ} σϊ} Ouya- τρί , καί μ* άπ ώΧεσ ε' μιαιφονον μεν ονκ 6Τ αν (pwyoi μυσος, * granted that I had been slain by thy daughter, and that she had made an end of me’. Id. Supplic. %5 C 2. ημαρτε v‘ eV νεοισι $ ανθρώπων τό& ενεστιν, ‘suppose that he has erred’. Id. Ilel. 1068. καί δη παρεΊκεν' είτα πως avev νεώς σωθηο’ομεο'Θα, * grant that he has yielded d Of the Imperative. The Imperative is used in Greek, as in other lan¬ guages, in addresses, intreaties, commands, &c. The personal pronouns, as in other languages, are omitted except when they serve for distinctions, or have an em¬ phasis. With respect to the Greek idiom, it is to be observed: l. The second person sometimes receives a subject, and thus stands for the third. Eur. Rhes. 687 sqq. πεΧας τις ίθι. π ate, τ rate πας τις αν.—ϊσχε πας τις—Ίσχε πας δόρυ.—ερπε πας κατ ’ίχνος αυτών. Arist. Αν. 1186. pei δεύρο πας υπηρέτης * τόξευε πας τις. 1191· αλΧα φυΧαττε πας τις αέρα περινεφεΧον. m Schasf. in Dion. Η. 1. ρ. 130. 88. η Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 1. c. VOL. II. B B 51 ( 750 Syntax. Of the Imperative. 2. Sometimes the plural of the imperative is used though only one person be addressed. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1104. 7 rpoaeXOer, ω παϊ } πατρί. Comp. 1112. Arist. Ran. 1479· X<*)pe ϊτε τοίνυν, ώ A ιόνυσ, εσω. But in He- siod. Sc. H. 327. χαίρετε, Avyicrjos yevet], y ενεη according to the sense is plural. Again, the imperative is also put in the singular, though more than one person is men¬ tioned. Plat. Prot. p. 89 . e/ 7 re μοι, ω 'Σωκρατβς τε και Ίππόκρατες 0 . 3. In prohibitions with μη , the present imperative only is used, (r) If the aorist is used, then the conjunc¬ tive must be put. II. i } 33. συ hi μη τι χολωθγς. Plat. Gorg. p. 117 · η συμφαθι η μη συμφγς 1 * 4. The imperative is used not unfrequently by the Attic Poets,' in a dependent proposition after οϊσθ' o. Soph. (Ed. T. 543. οϊσθ ω? ποίησον ; knowest thou what thou hast to do 3 ? Eur. Hec. 229. οϊσθ * ουυ ο βράσου ; Heracl. 452. αλλ οϊσθ ό μοι συμπραζον ; Thus also in the third person. Eur. Iph. T. 1211. οισθα νυν a μοι ye - νβσθω. The imperative here cannot be rendered by any other tense or mood; for the future does not pro¬ perly contain the sense of f must’. The phrase seems to have arisen from a transposition, for ποίησον , οϊσθ ' ό ; yev^a) μοι , οϊσθ' ο; as Plaut. Rud. in, 5 , 18. Tange , sed scin quomodo*? 0 Brunck. ad Arist. Ran. 1479- Soph. Phil. 369 . Cf. ad H. Horn, p. 41. p Thom. M. p. 611 . Herodian. Piers, p. 479- Koen. ad Greg, p. 6. Brunck. ad Arist. Thesm. 870 . Lysistr. 1036 ’. Soph. (Ed. C. . 731. q Bent1 · ad Menandr. p. 107. Berg, ad Arist. Equ. 1155. Koen. ad Greg. p. 7 sq. Brunck. ad Arist. Av. 54. Eur. Hec. 1. c. Soph. (Ed. T. 1. c. Iierm. ad Ariger. p. 729, 143. Fisch. in, b. p. 52. 751 l * , Syntax . ' Of the Imperative. 5. Sometimes the imperative is put for the future. jEsch. PrOM. 713. πρώτον μεν ενθενδ’ rjXiov προς αντοΧάς στρεψασα σαυτην, στεΊχ ανηρότους yvas. Έκυθας δ αφίξει νομάδας. On the other hand, the future is still more frequently put for the imperative. IL κ , 88. ^νώσεαι Άτρείδην Άγα- μεμνονα, for yvto9i. Comp. Euv. Ion. 1377· Soph. Antig. 84. αλλ’ ού v προμηνύσεις γε τούτο μηδενι τούρ^ον, κρυφή δε κευθε, where Brunck reads προμψύστις. Eur. Here, f 794. ώ ΤΙυθίου δει>δρώτι πέτρα, Μουσώι/ θ' 'ΈΧικωνιδων δώμα¬ τα, ηξετ εν^γαθεΊ κεΧάδφ ρμάν ποΧιν. Arist. Plut. 488. μα- Χακόν δ' ενδώσετε μηδέν. ΧβϊΙ. Cyr . Till, 3, 47· αΧλα σν μεν πΧουτων οίκοι μενεις. — More especially the future often stands for the imperative, with a negation interro¬ gatively. Soph . Philoct. 97 5. ούκ el μεθεις τά τόξα ταυτ εμοί παΧιν. Comp. Soph. (Ed. Ρ. 638. Aj. 75. Pvach. 1183. Plat. Gorg. p. 44. ουκουν ( ουκουν ) αποδείξεις τους ρήτορας νουν έχοντας ; Id. Symp. ρ. 227- ούκ εύφημησεις ; for εύφημεώ. Of the Optative and Conjunctive . The Optative and Conjunctive express, according to 512 . their different modifications or varieties, that which in Latin and English can only be signified by the conjunc¬ tive. Both represent an action not in its actual relation, but rather in its reference to the ideas of the speaker: only the Conjunctive expresses this more determinately r Herm. ad Viger. p. 729? 145. B B 2 752 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive . and certainly than the Optative ; so that the Indicative, Conjunctive, and Optative have a complete gradation in the determinateness of what is asserted in their several order. Moreover, as in §. 192 . c. the conjugation of the optative, with respect to the form, bore a constant analogy to that of the historical tenses, and the conjuga¬ tion of the corijunctive to that of the principal tenses, so both are related in signification to these tenses; the optative regularly accompanies the historical, the con¬ junctive the principal tenses. The use of the opt. and conj. in independent or abstract propositions, must be distinguished from the use of it in those which are dependent. Each has its proper rules, although they coincide in the main princi¬ ples just mentioned. I. The Optative and Conjunctive in abstract Propositions. \ 513. A. The Optative is used 1 . in the expression of a wish, and then is put without av , or the Poetic κε 8 . II. a, 42. τίσειαν Δαναοί εμά δάκρυα σοΊσι βεΧισσιν, ‘may the Greeks atone for’. H. 304. μη μάν άσττουδει ye και άκΧειώς άττοΧοίμην\ Soph. Aj. 550. ω τταΊ , yevoio ττα- τρδς ευτυ'χε&τεροξ , τα δ αλλ ομοιο$ και yεvoι αν ου κακό s - , f mayest thou be more fortunate than thy father :—then thou wilt not be bad’. Brunck, ad Eurip. Ph. 514. Arist. Equ. 400. s Syntax. Of the Optative arid Conjunctive. 703 In this case el, el yap, είθε, utinam* *, are often put, or ως, πώς άν η with the optative. Eur. Hec. 830. el μοι yevoiTo φθό^γ'γος εν βραχιοσι, 8$C. Od. y, 205. ei yap εμοι τοσσηνδε 0€θί δυναμιν παραθειεν ! ΗοϊϊΙ. Η. in Merc. 309· ώ πόποι, είθ' άπόΧοιτο βοών yevoς\ which Cal- lim. fr. VII, expresses Χαλυβών ως άπόΧοιτο yevo9\ Comp. Soph. El. 126. Soph. Aj. 388. ω Zed, —7rcus άν τον αιμυΧώτατον—όΧεσσας τελο? θάνοιμι καρτόςΐ \ · * * ' · \ *· · ·'* Obs. 1. In this sense it is often accompanied by κεν, II. %, 281. ως κεν οι αύθι yaia χάνοι. Obs. 2. If the wish relates to any thing past, the indicative aorist is put with είθε, without av. Xen. Mem. S. I, 2 9 46. είθε σοι Tore avvey ev ο μη v, ότε Ξινότατο? σαυτ;ου ταυτα ησθα\ Also the imperfect is used in an action whicli is continued from the past to the present. Eurip. Iph. A. 666. είθ ην καλόν μοι σοί τ' ayeiv συμπΧουν εμε. Obs. 3. Another mode of expressing a wish is είθ ώφεΧον, ωφεΧες, — ε, especially in the Poets; in present action, II ά , 415. αίθ' όφεΧες παρά νηυσιν αδάκρυτος και απημων ησθαι , debebas sedere , f thou shouldest sit’, i. e. utinam sederes. Comp. Arist. Vesp. 730. Plat. Rep. iv, p . 352. όρα ου v και πρόθυμόν κατιδειν, εάν πως πρότερον εμού ίδρς και εμοι φράσής. Εί yap ώφεΧον, εφη. in past actions, II. φ', 269. ω? μ οφεΧ *Έκτωρ κτείναι. Eurip. Med. in. είθ ώφεΧ *Apyovs μη δια- πτάσθαι σκάφος—κυανεας ΣυμπXηyάδaς. Also ώφεΧε, ώφειΧε stand alone. Eur. Iph. A. 1303. μηποτ ωφειΧε ( Priamus ) τον άμφι βουσι βουκόΧον τραφεντ ΆΧεξανδρον οικίσαι άμφι το Χευκόν ύδωρ. Demosth. in Aristog. ρ. 783, 23. ωφεΧε yap μηδεις άλΧος 'ApiaToyeiTovi χαίρειν. Sophocles uses a form taken from §. 178. 3. (Ed. C. 539. ε,δεξάμην δώρο v, ό μηποτ eyuj ταλακάρδιος επωφεΧησ a πόΧεος εζεΧεσθαι. Later 4 Valck. ad Eur. Ph. 761. Zeune ad Viger. p. 503 sq. Herm. ad Viger. p. 741 sq. who makes a difference between el, el yap and eWe. * Valck. ad Eur. Hipp. 208. 345. Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 79& / 754 Syntax· Of the Optative and Conjunctive· ‘ . r \ writers use ώφελον, ώφε\ε, as conjunctions. Callim. Epigr. 38. ώφε\ε μηδ’ eyevovTo θοαι νεες. Arrian. Diss. n, 18. ώφε- Xo v τις μετά ταυτης εκοιμηθη χ . Obs, 4. Thus also the optative with ως is used in intreaties, when, in order to render the other propitious to the suppliant, the latter wishes him something pleasing or profitable, as II. a , 18. Em. Med. 712. όντως ερως σοι προς θεών τεΧεσφόρος yevoiTo παίδων, καυτός οΧβιος θάνοις , as Sic te diva potens Cypri regat. Or in assurances, Aristoph. Thesm. 469. κάυτη yap εyωy 3 ούτως όναίμην των τέκνων, μισώ τον άνδρ εκείνον , c I hate him, as truly as I wish to live to have joy in my child- ren\ Nub. 520. ούτω νικησαιμί y €·γω και νομιζοίμην σοφός , ως υμάς γούμενος θεατάς δεζιους,—πρώτους ηζίωσ avayευσ υμάς. 5 14. 2. Otherwise the optative is us,ed, but in connection with άν or κε, in order to give to a proposition an ex¬ pression of uncertainty, doubt, of a mere conjecture, a bare possibility, or in expressions of volition, in order to declare any thing, not as a fixed resolution, but only as an inclination, where in English, e l would that, wish, could", are used, e. g. Plat. Cratyl. 26. εyωyε ηδεως άν θεασαίμην ταυτα τα καλα ονόματα. Herod. I, 70. extr. ταχα δε άν και οι αποδομένοι Xεyoιεv άπικόμενοι ες Σπάρτην, ως άπαιρεθείησαν υπό Σαμίων. Comp. VIII, 136. Isocr. Areop. 146. Ε. ίσως άν ούν τινες επιτιμησειαν τοίς είρημενοις. Herod . Ill, 23. το δε ύδωρ τούτο ε’ί σφί εστι άΧηθεως οΐόν τι λεγετ at, διά τούτο άν ειεν, τουτω τα πάντα %ρεώμενοι , μακρόβιοι , 'they are perhaps". Comp, ιχ, 71. Hence Plat. Leg. Ill, p. 106. νοησωμεν μίαν των ποΧλών ταυτην , ( φθοράν ) την τω κατακΧυσμίρ ποτέ yεvoμεvηv. ΚΛ. το χ Thom. Μ. ρ. 269· 665. Interpr. ad Mcer. ρ. 285 sq. Gnev. et Reitz ad Luc. Solcec. T. ix, p. 448. Fisch. hi. a. p. 147 sq. Herm. ad Viger. p. 742 sq. V I - % Syntax . Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 755 7Γ όιόν τι περί αυτής διανοηθεντες ; Αθ. ως οι τότε Trepifpvyov- τες την φθοράν σχεδόν ορειοί τινες άν είεν νομείς , f they were, perhaps, probably, shepherds'. Herod, n, 41. ουτ άνήρ Αιγύπτιος, ούτε yvvrj άνδρα 'Έλληνα φίλη σείε άν τψ στόματι , ούδε μαχαίρι άνδρός 'Έλληνος χρήσεται - ούδε κρεως καθαρού βοός διατετμημενον Ελληνική μα'χαίρη yeva εται } c will hardly kiss , where the change to the future is remarkable, ih. 47. τα δε άλλα κρεα σιτεονται εν τη πανσεληνψ, εν ττι αν τα ιρα θυσωσι εν άλλνι δε ήμεργ ούκ άν ετι y ευσαίατο, ‘ they hardly taste it'. Soph. Track. 196 . TO yap ποθούν έκαστος εκ - μαθεΊν θελων ούκ άν μεθεΊτο, πριν καθ' ηδονήν κλύειν. Xen. Cyr. I, 2, 11. και θηρώντες μεν ούκ άν άριστησαιεν , 'they breakfast with difficulty'. Thus it is used in a rough enumeration. Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 13. επειδάν δε τά πεντε και είκοσιν ίτη διατελεσωσιν, είησαν μεν άν ούτοι πλείόν τι ή πεντηκοντα ετη yey ονότες από y ενεάς. Very often, however, the optative serves to express even the most definite assertion with moderation and politeness, as a mere conjecture; a discretion which, in consequence of their political equality, was common to all Greeks, but particularly observable in the Athenians, and very seldom occurring in modern languages. Art - stoph. Plut. 284. ούκετ άν κρύφαιμι, 4 1 will no longer conceal it from you'. Xen . Cyr. 1, 4, 13. ώρα άν παρα- σκευάζεσθαί σοι εϊη , ότω μαστζώσεις με. Comp. lb. 28. Ill, 1, 43. VII, 5, 25. ούκ άν άμελείυ δε οι, εφη ό Κύρος , άλλ' ίεναι. Thus the optative is often used : 1 . In conclusions. Plat. Euthypr. p. 29 sq. άλλά τις δη θεών θεραπεία είη άν ή όσιότης\ ΕΥΘ. ήνπερ, ώ Σώ- κρατες , οι δούλοι τοι /s δέσποτας θεραπευουσι. ΣΩ. Αϊανθανω. υπηρετική τις άν , ω? εοικεν, είη θεοίς. lb. ρ. 32. 'επιστήμη άρα αίτήσεως καί δόσεως θεοΊς, ή όσιότης άν είη. Gorg . 756 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. p . 120. ΑημηΎορία apa τΙς εστιν η ποιητική. ΚΑΛΛ. φαίνε -- ται. ΣΩ. OJ/c ουν η ρητορική δημη^γορία αν είη. 2 . The opt. may be frequently rendered by c to be able*. Od. k, 269 . ετι yap Ke v άΧύζαιμεν κακόν ημαρ. ib. μ , 137 sq. τάς εί μεν κ άσινεας εάεις, νόστου τε μεδηαι, η τ αν ετ ei? Ιθάκην, κακά περ πάσχοντες, ίκοισθε, c it is pos¬ sible that you may come*. Herod. y, 9 . 7 ενοιτο δ’ άν παν ev τψ μακρψ χράνω. Comp. VI, 63. ThllC. II, Β9· ούτε yap αν εκπΧευσειε τις, ως χρη, €ΐς εμβοΧην, ούτε άν άναχω ρησειεν εν δεοντι. Plat. PhcedoU. ρ. 184. εάν δε yε - (η ψυχή ) του σώματος άπαΧΧάττηται, - ye- yoητευμεvη υπ * αυτου, υπό τε των επιθυμιών και ηδονών, ώστε μηδέν άλλο δοκεΊν είναι άΧηθες, άΧΧ’ η το σωματοειδες, ου τις άν άφαιτο και Ίδοι και πιοι και (jydyoi, 8$C. ISOCV. de Pace, p. 183. C. άνηρ ασεβής και πονηρός τυχόν άν φθάσειε τεΧευτησας, πριν δούναι δίκην τών ημαρτημένων , ‘ it is possible, it may be, that he may die before’. 3. The optative often restricts the future. II. β', 158. ουτω δη οικονδε, φίΧην e? πατρίδα yaiav, ’ Apyειoι φ εύ¬ χονται Α π* ευρεα νώτα θαΧάσσης ; καδδε κεν εύχωΧην ΤΙριά- μιρ και παισι Χίποιεν *Apyείηv Ελένην ; Comp. Od. β', 218. ε, 34. ι, 277. IL ο\ 70. Herod. IV, 97. εψομαί τοι και ούκ άν Χειφθείην. ThllC. Ill, 13. ούτε yap άπο- στησεται άλλο?, τα τε ημετερα πpoσyεvησετaι, π άθ οι μεν τ άν δεινότερα η οι πριν δουΧεύοντες . Soph. Phil. 1302. ούκ άν μεθείην, for ου μεθησω. Eur. Iphig. A. 310. ούκ άν με- θείμην. ΠΡΕΣΒ. ούδ’ oyojy άφησομαι. Plat. Rep. X, ρ. 325. ούχ ηκει , ούδ’ άν ηζοι δεύρο*. • I * ( 4. In the same manner the optative gives a more gentle turn to the imperative. Od. a , 287. el μεν κεν π a- y Brunck. ad Soph. El. 14pl. Aj. 88. ’ . 1 < Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 757 -, τρός βιότον και νόστον όκούσψ, η τ’ αν, τρυχόμενός ττερ, ετι τΧαίης 'ενιαυτόν, for τληθι, or ‘ then thou canst yet en¬ dure’. Sopk. Phil. 674. χωροΊς αν εΊσίο. Plat. Leg. VII, p. 371. rots μεν τοίνυν παισιν όρχησταί, τα~ις δε όρχη- στρίδες αν εϊεν. - ΚΛ. έστω δη ταύτρ\ The optative is also put in a negative interrogation for the imperative. II. e, 456. ούκ αι/ δη τόνο άνδρα μάχης ερύσαιο μετεΧθών, where the optative softens, ‘thou wouldst not drag him away’? Thus in in treaties, Od. η, 22. Comp. ib. x, 132. Sometimes, however, this turn gives the command more emphasis. II. ω, 263. οόκ αν δη μοι άμαξαν όφοττΧ'ισσαιτε τάχιστα, ταΰτά τε ■κανά δπιθεΊτε, ίνα ιτ ρησσωμεν όδοΊο-, « also With the opt. is used thus, II. ω, 74. el τις καΧεσειε, for καΧεσατω τις. 5 . The optative also is used thus where the indica¬ tive is put in other languages. Thuc. hi, 84. « ? ovv rji Κέρκυρα τα ποΧΧα αύτων ιτροετόΧμήθη, καί οκοσα υβρει μεν άρχόμενοι το ττΧύον η σωφροσύνή υπό των' την τιμωρίαν -παρα¬ γόντων ο\ άνταμυνόμενοι δράσειαν, with the expression of indeterminateness, although the thing is intended to be determined, ‘ which they, as is to be expected, may do’, or ‘ are wont to do’, as afterwards γγώσκοιεν, άκεΧ- θοιεν. Id. I, 50. των νε&ν, as καταδνσειαν, ‘which they might have sunk’. Obs When regularly constructed, the optative in this case is accompanied by Hv or κεν. Yet this particle is sometimes wanting. II. ε, 303. S οό δύο γ άνδρε φύροιεν. ib. η 48. η pa vv μοι τι ■κίθοιο: (again, Od. θ’, 136. η ρά κεν kv δεσμοις εΰεΧοις— εύδειν ; Comp. Od. o', 430. σ', 356.) Comp.^ Od.X, 612. v 248. f, 122. Eurip. Iph. A. 1220. ουδεις -προς ταό αντεί- * Brunck. ad Soph. El. 1491· Heind, ad Plat. Parni. p. 188. I 1 515. 758 Syntax· Of the Optative and Conjunctive. * Ίτοι βροτών. Plat. Cratyl. p. 247. πάνυ yap η^εως τά επί- Χοιπα περί των ονομάτων άκούσαιμι , as Isocr. Panath. p . 253. C. ου yap άποκρύψαιμι τάΧηθες. Thus too in the passages of Thucydides i, 50. ill, 84. See N° 5. and §. 528. Xen, Hier. 11, 13. θησαυρούς ye μην εχοις πάντας τούς παρά τοις φίΧοις πΧούτους . Cyrop. m_, 2_, 1. την "χωράν κατεθεάτο, σκοπών, ου τειχισθείη φρούριον , ‘might bebuilt\ Isocr. Panath. p. 241. D. τούς 'TXX^yas a ξαν, ον τρόπον $ιοικούντες τάς αυτών πατρίδας και προς ους ποΧεμονντες μeyάXηv την 'Ελ¬ λάδα ποιησ e ιαν. — Od . ι, 269* αλλ’ aiSoio , φεριστε, θεούς, for α&Γο (αίόεο, α’ιόού), ό, 24. Plat. Euthyd. ρ. 9· οι $ε νυν αληθώς ταύτην την επιστήμην εχετον, ΊΧεω ε’ίητον. Leg. XI. in. μήτε ούν τις τών εμων χρημάτων άπτοιτο εις δύναμιν, μη& αύ κίνησειε μηόε τό βραχύτατου , for άπτεσθω , κινη- σατω. JEsch. Agam. Q53. υπαί τις αρβύΧας Χύοι τάχος , for Χυετω*. # " ι s Β. The conjunctive is put when any thing is to take place. Thus, l. without άν or κε , in exhortations in the first person plural, f let us do this or that', e. g. ϊωμεν , Met US go’, μαχώμεθα. Met us fight'. But in the second and third person the optative is used, as §. 513, ]. II. v, 119· άλλ άyεθ ημείς περ μιν άποτρωπώμεν οπ'ισσω αύτόθεν , η τις επειτα και ημείων ΆχιΧηΐ παρσταίη, %οίη $ε κράτος μ^α, for which, in the following verse, the imperative is put. Od. χ , 77· εΧθωμεν άνά άστυ, βοη y ώκιστα yevoiTo 0 . To this we may refer, II. χ, 450. ’&ωμ ότιν epya τετυκται, c let me see, I wish to see*, as ib. 418. Χίσσωμ άνερα τούτον, in some editions. But see §. 516. r.' - - v . ■ > . ·. * . 1 ■ r I Obs. Homer and other Epic Poets use here a form similar to the indicative, ! ίομεν . See §. 195. 7. p. 248. Thus too Eurip. a Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. in, p. 373. Herm. de Metr. Pind. p. 241. ad Arist. Nub. 1344. ad Vig. p. 783 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 47. b Valcken. ad Her. p. 332, 95. Herm. ad Viger. p. 731 sq. I Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive . *759 Iphig. A. 16. στείχομεν είσω, where, however, it appears to be the actual indicative, and the action which is to take place first, seems, in the animated representation of the speaker already to have taken place. 2. In questions of indecision or doubt, when a person asks himself or another what he is to do, also without av , and indeed with or without an interrogative particle. 11 . κ 3 62. αύθι μένω μετά τοισι, δεδeyμένος ει- σόκεν ελθης, ηε θεω μετά σ αυτις ; Eurip. ΙθΠ. 758. είπωμεν η σι*γώμεν ; η τι δράσομεν ; f are we to speak or be silent’? Eur. Phcen. 740. άλλ’ άμφι δείπνον ονσι προσ βάλω δορν 3 Thus Euvip. Hevc. fur. 1111. must be taken as an interrogation: ye ροντέο, έλθω των εμών κακών 7 Γελάς ; c am I to approach ? Thus τι φώ ; τι δρώ; ‘what am I to say? do’? Aristoph. Plut. 1198. Ιε τι ποιώ ; Plat. Gorg. p. 5. τι ερωμαι, II. λ', 404. τί ττάθω ; ‘ what am I to do’? Comp. Herod . iv, 118. Plat . Prot. p. 111. πάτερον, ως αί τεχναι νενεμηνται , ουτω και ταυτας νείμω ; lb. 136. πάτερα ουν, οσα άμοι $οκει δείν αποκρίνεσθαι , τοσαυτα σοι αποκρ ινωμαι , where just before it was expressed’: η βραχύτερα σοι άποκρί- νωμαι, η δεί ; Comp. Hipparch. ρ. 264 sq. Instead of the conjunctive the future also is put. Plat. Crit.p. 116 . η e pod μεν πράς αότούς, οτι ηδίκει yap ημάς η ττολί?, και ονκ άρθώς την δίκην ίκρινε; ™ϊτα η τί € pod μεν; Thus too in indirect questions. 11 . π , 648. [Ζευς φράζετο θυμώ 3 ~] η ηδη και κείνον ενι κρατεργ ύσμίνγ αυτόν επ αντίθεα) Σαρπη- δονι φαίδιμος 'Έκτωρ χαλκφ δηωσφ , απο τ ωμων τευχε ίληται, η ετι και πλεόνεσσιν όφελλειεν πόνον αιπνν. Comp. Od. π, 74. Herod. I, 53. Κροϊσος υμεας επειρωτμ, εί στρατευηται επι Π ερσας, και εί τινα στρατόν άνδρών c Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. v. 782. ad Eur. Pb. 755. Porson. ib. Herm. ad Viger. p.731. / I - * 760 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. i - - . .. « * προσθεοιτο (flZ. προσθεηται ) σύμμαχον; where προσθε- Ύ]ται seems more correct, if it signifies f whether he is to take any army as his auxiliaries'; but 7 τροσθεοιτο, if the sense be c whether he can take it'. Thuc. vi, 25. εφη χρήναι — εναντίον απάντων η$η \eyeiv , ήν τινα αυτώ παρα¬ σκευήν Αθηναίοι ψηφίσωνται . ΧβΤΙ. Α/ΙβΤΪΙ. S. II, 1, 21. Τίρακλεα εζεΧθόντα είς ησυχίαν καθήσθαι, άπορουνται όποτε- ραν των ό$ών τράπηται. Obs. 1 . The rule which Dawes. Misc. Cr. p. 207· Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. 438. Av. 164. Soph. Aj.403. Antig. 605. Phil. 1393. Comp. Schaefer, in Dion. H. i, p. 97 sq. establish, that in interrogations the conjunctive is put without av, but the optative with av, is true in general ; only there is a difference of signifi¬ cation in the origin of this idiom. With the conjunctive a per¬ son asks, wishing to be informed, what he is to do (except in some cases, which are explained from what follows, and occur hereafter) ; but with the optative, when he considers what may be done. In those cases where the conjunctive expresses an obli¬ gation to do any thing, it takes av ; but which may also be included in the case about to be explained below. The optative has here the same signification as in §. 514. and takes, as it does there, av by the rule; and sometimes, as there also, omits it. See Herm.^ad Viger . p . 724, 108. Obs. 2. The indicative also is put in this case for the con¬ junctive, e. g. 7τών \ε*γομεν ; Plat. Gorg. p. 73. τι $ή ουν Χε- *γομεν περί του οσίου; Id. Euthyphr. ρ. 22 d . 3 . In a similar manner the conjunctive is put with¬ out a conjunction and ά v after βουΧει in interrogations. Soph. Phil. 762. βουΧει Χάβωμαι $ήτα και 9iyw τί σου; Plat. Gorg. ρ. 20. βουΧει ουν βυο εϊοη Θώμεν πειθους ; Comp. ρ. 72. The conjunctive also first Plat. Phcedon. p. 179· θώμεν ουν βουΧει Svo εΐ$η των οντων ; Without a d Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 109· ad Theaet. p. 441 > .1 t Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 7 61 question also id . n, p. 238. et 8 αύ βουΧεσθε και φΧε^γμαίνουσαν ποΧιν θεωρησωμεν, ου$εν αποκώΧυει, for θεωρησαι ημάς. Phcedon. p. 217. etre τι βουΧει πρόσθιε η αφεΧρς, for προσθείναι η άφεΧεΊν. θεΧεις is used for βουΧει . ν 4. The conjunctive also is used in questions of indig¬ nation, with which a preceding command is repeated. Arist. Ran. 1132. ΔΙΟΝ. Αισχύλε, παραινώ σοι σιωπήν. ΑΙΣΧ. eyco σιωπώ τ$$ε ; 'am I to be silent before this man"? Comp. id. Lys. 530. Luc. D. D. l. Χΰσον με, ώ Zev— ΖΕΥΣ. Αύσω σε , φης & ; The conj. is sometimes put l. for the future, with ίν 51& or κε. II. a , 184. την μεν eyco— πεμψω , £ya> Se κ ayω B ρισηί^α κοΧΧιπίρφον. ib. 205. ys υπεροπΧίτισι ταχ αν ποτέ θυμόν οΧεσση. ib. X', 431. σήμερον η $ οιοισιν επευζεαι Ιππασί$ρσι, — η κε ν εμω υπο $ουρι τυπεις απο θυμόν οΧεσσγς, where, however, another reading is όΧεσσαις . Od. χ^, 325. ουκ αν οη προφ^^σθα. Thus in interroga¬ tions Plat. Crit. p. Il6. τί ούν αν ε'πτωσιν οι νόμοι. In this sense αν also is sometimes wanting. II. ζ, 459. καί ποτέ τις ε’ίπρσιν, iScvv κατά όίκρυ 'χεουσαν' Κκτορος ηόε yvvr}. followed in V. 462. by ω? ποτέ τις ερεει. Comp. η 3 87. ο, 350. χ', 418. Χίσσωμ άνερα τούτον, where it coincides with the idiom, §. 515, l. Obs. In this case the conjunctive coincides very much with the optative, which in this combination is much more used than the former, and in Attic constantly: όΧεσειε αν , πpoφυyoις av 3 ε'ίποι αν. This use, however, of the con¬ junctive in the old language, seems to have arisen from this, that the conj. and the future, in most cases, are distinguished only by the long and short vowel, and are frequently confounded, * Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. 78. Comp. Yalck. Diatrib. p. 211. V ■ I 762 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive . even in sense, some examples of which have been given already, and more will be found in the following §§. As in the instances just adduced the conjunctive is used as a future, in the same manner as the optative is commonly put; so the real future is put for the optative in Herodotus n, 41. in the passage quoted §. 514. The conj. seems to be put exactly as the optative Od. a , 396. των κεν τις τόδ εχτισιν } €7ret θάνε διος Όδυσσευς’ αύτάρ eywv οίκοιο αναζ εσομ ημετεροιο , for εχοι αν , f may have the government, has it perhaps’ (for the future itself εζει would here be too definite), and thus we must defend the passages, Horn. H. in Apoll. 11 , 161. αλλ’ oye φερτερος η, οσσον Κρονου ευρυεπα Δευς. b. In negative propositions especially, the conj. is used after μη or ου μη for the future, but only the conj. aor. 1. pass, or aor. 2. act. and middle, instead of the aor. 1 . act: the future is used f . Soph. El. 42. ov yap σε μη y ηρα τε και χρόνψ μακρω yvwa\ ουδ’ υποπτευ σουσι ν ώδ’ ηνθισμενον . Id. Phil . 103. ου μη πίθ ηται, 1. β. ου πείσε - ται. Plat. Charm, p. 139· άχρων οφις ούδεν αν μη ί τότε ^Srjy for ούκ δψεται. Rep . V, p. 53. ουδε αύτη η πολιτεία μη ποτέ πρότερον φυτ} τε εις το δυνατόν και φως ήλιου .ί Sri. Comp. lb. X, p. 287. Ib. VI, P . 87. ούτε yiy νεται, ούτε 'ye'yovey, ου Si ούν μη y εν ηται άλλοιον ήθος προς αρετήν , παρά την τούτων παιδείαν πεπαιδευμενον. Hipp. Maj. p. 47· ου yap μη ποτέ εΰργς, ο μηποτ £yio πεπονθα μήτε συ , τουτ άμφοτερονς ημάς πεπονθότας. Also the conj. present. Plat. Rep. 1, 176 . άλλ’ ου μη οΐός τ $ς. Xen. Hier. ll, 15. εάν τους φίλους κρατάς ευ ποιων , ού μη σοι δύνωνται άντεχειν οι πολέμιοι. (But in Herod . I, 199. it should be : ου ydp μη άπώσεται. Plat. Polit. p. 112. ου S’ άρα η κατά φυσιν ούσα ημιν πολίτικη μηδέποτε — f Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. 221 sq. Brunck. ad Arist. Lye. 704. ad Soph. CEd. C. 1023. El. 42. Phil. 103, Comp. Valck. ad Eur. Hipp. 6'07. ! % / f f Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 76S ✓ εκ χρηστών και κακών ανθρώπων εκονσα είναι συστησεται τινά πάλιν. Comp. Soph. ρ. 237.) And with the aor. I. pass. Plat. Symp. p. 254. όπόσον αν κελεύσγ τις, τοσον- τον εκπιών, ούδε v μάλλον μη ποτέ μεθυσθρ^ . Also ου merely is put. Od. ζ\ 201. ούκ εσθ’ ουτος άνηρ διερός βρο - τός , ον $ ε ye νηται } 8$c. Thus the passages Xenoph. Anab. vii, 7, 24. must be explained : dl αν φανεροί ώσιν αλήθειαν άσκούντες, τούτων οι Xoyoi, ην τι δεωνται, ον δεν μειον δύ νωνται άνύσασθαι, η άλλων η βία , unless this be rather an error of the transcriber, for δύνανται caused by δεωνται. Obs. 1. The passages in which the aor. i. occurs, are easily corrected, e. g. Plat. Rep. x, p. 312. ού yap Toye ay αθον μη ποτέ τι α πόλε σρ. Leg. απολεσει , Xen. Cyr. ill, 2, 8. οι ye Αρμένιοι ού μηποτε δεζωνται τούς πολεμίους. Leg . δεζονται. Obs. 2. From this case we must distinguish μη ού with the conj. in which δεδοικα is omitted. Plat. Ph&don. p. 152. μη καθαρώ yap καθαρού εφάπτεσθαι μη ού θεμιτόν vereor ne nefas sit , which is in Latin also a milder expression for nef as est. Comp. Gorg. p. 36. Leg. lx, p. 20. 2. For the imperative. Soph. Phil. 300. φερ, ώ τε- κνον, νυν καί το του νόσου μάθρς, for μάθε, ΟΓ for the future, μαθησγ. In prohibitions with μη, or an adjective or adverb compounded with μη, the aorist is put in the conj. and not the present. AEsch. Eumen. 797. ύμεΊς δε Trj yjj TrjSe μη βαρνν κότον σκηψησθε, μη θυμούσθε, μηδ* ακαρπίαν τενζητε. Herod. VIII, 65. aiya τε και μηδέν ι άλλω τον Xoyov τούτον ε’ίπγς. Comp. IV, 118. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 117- η σύμφαθι η μη συμφρς. Leg. XII, p. 183 Sq. άνηρ ός άν όφλρ δίκην ως αίσχρώς άποβαλών όπλα πολεμικά, τούτω μητ ονν τις στpaτηyός, μη τ’ άλλος ποτέ % μ. . .? ι ν \ Λ - * κ , ’ * ν ί . . . . '* <· .·* - ι> * 1 1 · ·' ν. '· ■ ■■■■■■ ■■■■ . > . . ■ ■ - ■ - - - I s Wyttenb. ad Eel, Hist. p. 343. t 76 i Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. των κατά ττολεμον αρχόντων ως άνόρι στρατιώτη χρη σηται, μηό’ εις τάζιν κατατάζρ μη S’ ηντινούν. Comp. Phil, ρ. 217 . Symp.p.z ίο. See §.· 511.3. Obs. In many passages the conjunctive is put where the optative ought to be; but these appear to be corrupt. Plat . Alcib , ii, p. 77. τις άν σοι $ οκρ τόλμησαι vyiaivwv τοιαντ ενζασθαι ; I. δοκεϊ, so that αν belongs to τόλμησαι. ib. ρ. 87. I. ΰοκοίης ό* άν , or as ρ. 88. Phileb. ρ. 264. I. ταυτ ειπειν άν τις 7τρος εαυτόν όοκεΊ σοι. Rep. ιν, ρ. 331. ούκ άν όοκεΊ σοι ρα$ίως μάχεσθαι ; ib. νι, ρ. 89. ούκ άτοττος άν σοι όοκοίη είναι παιόεντης ; ib. χ, ρ. 318. και τότ άν τις Ίόοι αυτής την αληθη φύσιν , opposed to ούκ άν ετι ραόίως Ίόοιεν αυτόν την άρχαίαν φύσιν, ρ. 317· Id. Phcedr. ρ. 289· 'σως άν εγ φρονησαντές ταύτα καλώς εχειν η^γησονται. The Conjunctive and Optative in Interrogatory Propositions , Besides what was remarked in §. 515. it is to be observed : The conjunctive is put in order to express a future, as well in direct as in indirect questions, in the latter, when the chief verb in the proposition upon which the question depends is a present or a future, e. g. τί ούν άν εϊπωσιν οι νόμοι; c what will the laws say’? §. 516. 1. II. o', 16. ού μάν οίδ’, εί άντε κακορραφίης άλε*γεινης ιτρωτη ετταύρηαι καί σε 7τλη Γ γ^σιν ιμάσσω. Also as a present, or even aorist, after μη , ‘whether’, in which case the conjunctive seems to be more indeterminate, more con¬ nected with the expression of uncertainty, than the indi¬ cative, but more determinate than the optative. II. k, 97. όεύρ εις τούς φύλακας καταβείομεν , οφρα Ίόωμεν, μη τοι μεν καμάτω αόόηκότες ηόε και ύττνω κοιμη σωνται, ατάρ φυλά - Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive . 765 Κης € 7 τι Tray^v Χαθ wvtcu. —ouSe τι ι$μεν } μη ττιος και ^ια νύκτα μενοινησονσι μα^εσθαι. SopJl. JPhlloct . 30. · opa } καθ νττνον μη κατακΧιθεις κνρρ. Plat. Phcedon. p . 146. apa μη aXXo τι rj ο θάνατος, η τούτο. In past actions the optative is used. Od . φ\ 394. ττειρωμενος ένθα και ένθα, μη κερά ΐττες eSoiev· Yet, in a past action the con¬ junctive also is used in a direct question. Soph. Philoct. 416. άλλ’ οιίχ ό Ύν$εως y όνος, ovS ούμπόλητος Σίσυφου Λαερ- τίο) ου μη θάνωσι ; This usage seems properly to have arisen from that which was noticed in §. 516. Obs. 2. and in most of the instances adduced, is implied the idea also of anxiety, that which is expressed by the question may be true. %ε$οικα 3 μη κοιμησωνται , Χαθωνται μενοινησωσι. αρα δεδοικας, μη άΧΧο τι r, ο θάνατο*. In this case two pro¬ positions are united, and thus μη receives the sense of a simple interrogative particle, and is constructed also with the indicative present, e. g. Sophocl. CEd C. 1502 . Antig.63%. Eurip. Troad. 178. Plat. Rep. γ,ρ.37. 64. Xen. Mem. S. iv, 2, 10 sqq h . The optative is used in the sense mentioned in §. 514. e. g. H. y, 52. ovk άν μείνειας Άρήίφιλον Meye- Xaoy; ‘ were you not able to withstand him ( k, 204. OVK άν $η τις άνηρ πεττίθοιτο ; ib. 303. τις κεν μοι τεΧεσειε ; i. C. ττειθεσθα) τις , τεΧεσατο) τις. .Plat. Govg. in. οιλλ αρα ύθεΧησειεν αν ημΊν Ζιαλεχθηναι ; ‘ WOUld he be willing’? Here άν is sometimes wanting. Soph. (Ed. C 1418. ττώ? yap ανθις αν ττάΧιν στράτενμ ay οι μι ταντον , εισαπαξ τρέσας; ‘ how am I to be able? but Brunck reads ανθις άν ττάΧιν, Schaefer, in Dion. H. p. 99. ayotf av or άyωμι (§. 207 . 10. p. 274.) Id. Antig. 604. τεάν } Ζεν 3 Svvaoiv τις h Herm. ad Viger. p. 776 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Parm. p. 213 sq. where, however, the examples with the conj. belong to §. 516'. Obs. 2. V OL. II. C C * -·■'* · - , , - \ \ . 766 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive . άντρων ι/ 7 τερβασιφ κατάσχοι; f who COllld controuf? τις — κατάσχω i, as Brunck reads, would signify f who is to controul it’? which is against the sense. Eurip. Iph, A. 523.. o v μη συ φράζεις, πώς ύποΧά βοιμεν Xoyov^ c how could we divine the speech’? Plat. Lack. p. 185. τίνα τρόπον τούτου σύμβουΧοι yei 'οίμεθα ότωούν. This is not more peculiar than the omission of av with the optative, §.514. Obs. l. which sometimes takes place. ■ n'“ ·■·’ ■ .· Besides this, the optative is used in the oratio obli- φια. See §. 529- II. Of the Optative and Conjunctive in Dependent Propositions , or after Conjunctions. ' *\ 518. The use of the Optative and Conjunctive after Con¬ junctions, is distinguished in this respect, that the for¬ mer is used when the chief verb of the whole proposition,* or the verb of the proposition upon which the conjunc¬ tion depends, expresses an action of past time, and the verb which depends upon the conjunction, belongs deter- minately to past time. The conjunctive on the other hand is used, if the preceding verb expresses any thing pre¬ sent or future, in which case the verb which is governed of the conjunction necessarily belongs to the same time. Thus that which in Latin is the consequence of the tenses, in Greek is the consequence of the moods; and where in Latin, after conjunctions, the imperfect should be put, in Greek the optative is used; and where in the former case the conj. present is employed, in the latter the conjunctive is put. Here, however, appears again the peculiarity of the Greek language in narra¬ tion, mentioned §. 507: that the narrator often puts him- Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 507 self in the situation of the person of whom he relates any thing, and considers a thing as present or future, which is indeed present or future with respect to that person, but which in the relation should be represented as past. For the same reason, the two moods are sometimes put after conjunctions, which determine the use of them in independent propositions. The conjunctions after which these moods are put, are i. those which shew an object, ire, όφρα, ώ?, όπως. and μη. 2. Particles of time, as έπεί, έπειοή, ore, «is. ίπήν, όπειύάν, όταν, πριν, Sm, %c. 3. Conditional parti¬ cles, et and εάν, ήν. 4. Relatives, &, ofo, oVos, οπού, οθεν, ένθα, οποί, 8gC. . Of the Optative and Conjunctive after tv a, οψρα, OTTWS, Here particularly the rule just mentioned holds good, according to which the optative is put after verbs of past time, and the conj. after verbs of present or future time, and without av, e. g. II. λ', 289 sq. αλλ ιθνς ελαύνετε μώνυχας 'ίππον S ίφθίμων Ααναβν, ίν ύπερτερομ άχος αρησθε, but II. in. ενβ αΰ Τν$βί$ρ Αιομήέεί Ι]αλλαν Άθήνη δωκε μόνος και θάρσος, 'ίν εκέηλος μετά πα- σιν ’Apye'ioiai yivoiT ο, άέ κλέος όσθλον άροιτο. Thus in Homer II. a, 26. μή σε, yepov, κοίλν,σιν eyd παρά νηυσϊ Κίχείω —μη νν τοι ον χραίσμρ σκηπτρον και στέμμα θεοίο. 32. <ίλλ’ ίθι, μή μ ερέθιζε, σαιότερος ιίς κε νόηαι; but Plato relates the same event thus : Rep. hi, p. 276 . o ce Άyaμεμvωv nypiaivev, έντελλόμενος νΰν τε άπιέναι και ανθις μή εΧθειν. μή αΰτψ το τε σκηπτρον κμι τμ τον θεόν στέμματα CC2 768 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive . μή επαρκεσοι . — άπιεναι όε εκεΧενε καί μη ερεθίζειν, Ίνα σως οικαόε ε Χθοι 1 . But frequently the conj. is used, although the pre¬ ceding verb be in the past time, viz. when the verb, which depends upon the conjunction, shews an action which is continued to the present time, e. g. II. c, 127 . $ αν τοι άπ οφθαΧμών εΧον, η πριν επηεν, οφρ ev y ινωσκρς η μεν θεόν ηόε και ανόρα, because at the time at which Minerva is speaking, yivM&tdeiv is a conse¬ quence still continuing of the past action άφαιρεϊν άχΧιίν* But Plato Alcib. 11 , extr. could no longer represent this as present : ώσπερ τφ Αιομηόει φησι την Αθήναν 'Όμηρο? άπο των όφθαΧμών άφεΧειν την αχΧυν, οφρ εύ y ινωσκοι ημεν θεόν ηόε και άνόρα. Comp. JEsch. ΡΤΟΤΥΙ. 462. Choeph. 730. Eurip. Hec. 27. κτανων ei? οϊόμ’ αΧος με- θηχ, ιν αυτός χρυσόν εν όόμοις εχ»7· Pldt. Leg. II, p. 59 Sq. θεοί όε οικτείραντες το των ανθρώπων επίπονον πεφυκος yεvoς — Μούσα? ΆποΧΑωνά τε μoυσηyετηv και Αιονυσον ζυνεορτα- στάς εόοσαν, ίν επανορθώνται τάς yei /ομενας τροφάς εν ταις εορταις μετά θεών ]ί . ■· ■ » · * ' » ■ f 4 - ' i ' ' ’ - Sometimes it is indifferent whether one wishes to express determinately that the consequence of a past action is continued on to the time of the relation, or not. Hence, in such cases, the conj. sometimes changes places with the opt. Thus it is in Eurip. Hec. 697. EK. εμός ζενος, θράκιος 'ιππότας (εκτεινε viV.) ΧΟΡ. ωμοί , τί Χεζεις I χρυσόν ως εχοι κτάνων , although ib. 27· he had 1 j # ; , . · , , ., * j · i . j ;.> * Dawes. Misc. Cr. p. 85. Brunck. ad Arist. Ran. 24. Equ. 893. Herm. ad Vig. p.767. 76 8, 259. 776, 268. 805. Schaefer, in Dion. Η» Ϊ. p. 109 sq.‘ · - u : -.V . ( ; '■ · k Miscell. Philol. 11, · 1, p. 34 $q. ; Heind. ad Plat.Theaet.^ p. 439. Syntax* Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 769 used ίχγ in the same combination. Comp.. Eunp. Suppl. 201 sqq 1 . > > On the contrary, the optative in certain combmar tions, is put after verbs of the present time, e. g. when the present ( historicum ) is put for the aorist, as in Latin also, the conj. imperf. follows the present, e. g. Eurip. Hec. 10. 7 roXiV $e συν εμο\ χρυσόν εκπεμπει Χάθρα πατήρ, ΐν\ είποτ Ιλίοι/ τείχη πεσοι , tols ειη παισι μη σπα- νις βίου. Thus also, when the verb which follows the conjunction really shews a past action, as Herod, vii, 103. opa , μη μάτην κομπος oXoyo 9 ο ειρημενος €ΐη, vide , ne fuerit ostentatio , i. e. vereor. Obs. 1. Many passages, however, occur, in which these rules of the consequence of the moods are not observed, and the optative is found where the conjunctive should be, and vice versa. Thucydides especially almost regularly sets the conjunctive after verbs of the past time, rarely the optative. Many of these pas¬ sages in other writers may easily be made to agree with this rule, by changing η into ot, or ot into η. In others some MSS. and Edd. have the mood required, where the common editions retain the wrong. Yet notwithstanding many passages are left which cannot be altered with equal facility. Since the two moods in independent propositions are chiefly distinguished by this, that the optative expresses an action as merely possible or probable, or desirable, but the conjunctive as actual and deteimmate, though only such m the consideration of the speakei or actor, it may not be an unfounded supposition, that the optative sometimes stands even after verbs of the present or future time, following the conjunction ίνα , &c. when the action which follows the con¬ junction is to be marked only as presumptive and probable, and the conjunctive after verbs of the past time, when the conse¬ quence is considered as actual and determinate, in the same man¬ ner as in general the conjunctive borders very nearly upon the future. Without doubt, however, it cannot in any case be posi- 1 Misc. Phil. ib. p. 3(5. t 770 Syntax. Of the Optative aiid Conjunctive. tiVely determined, whether an action is to be marked as proble¬ matical or certain, since this depends upon the intention ahd will of the writer; it can only be determined, that he has deviated from the common rule for sortie such reason. The following are some instances of this deviation: The optative for the conjunctive. Od. χ, 391* T ηΧεμαχ ei $*, aye μοι καΧεσον τροφόν ΕυρυκΧειαν , οφρα έπος ε’ιποιμι, το μοι καταθύμιόν εστιν, where otherwise όφρ είπω is used. Od. β', 52. μνηστήρες — πατρός μεν ες οίκον απερ- piyaai νεεσθαι Ίκαρίου , ως κ αυτός εεόνωσαιτο θυγατρα , όοίη έ’ ψ κ εθεΧοι καί οι κεχαρισμενος εΧθοι , c that he may, perhaps, give some dowry’. Od. ε, 17. ου yap ot παρα νηες επηρετμοι και εταίροι, οι κεν μιν πε μποιεν επ ευρεα νώτα θαΧασσης 3 c who might convey him . Soph. El. 760. (εν βραχεί χαΧκφ μ^ιστον σώμα όείΧαίας σι roSou φερονσιν άντρες Φωκεων τετayμεvoι,') όπως πατρψας τύμβον ε κΧαχοι χθο- νός. Eurip . Iphig. Τ. 1217. και ποΧει πεμψον τιν , οστις σημανεί - εν όόμοις μίμνειν απαντας. ΘΟ. μη συν αν- τιρεν φόνΐιΐ ι 4 lest they meet Γ But in Soph. El. /60. it should be εκΧαχρ and It. σ', 63. ειμ , οφρα ίόωμι. See §. 207 j 10. The following constructions must be distinguished from these, in which' cos does not signify * that’, but * as : Elat. Eh&dr. p. 286. και ως ακμήν εχει της άνθης , ως αν εύωόεστατον π αρεχοι τον τόπον ! ib. ρ. 2S8. ου yap υπ avay^s, αΧΧ εκόντες , ως αν άριστά περί των οικείων βουΧευσαιντο , προς την Svva- μιν την αυτών ευ ποιουσιν. Gorg. ρ. 17. του ουν ενεκα όή αυτός υποπτευων σε ερησομαι, αΧΧ ουκ αυτός Xεyω ; οϋ σου ενεκα , άλλα του Xoyov , ίνα ουτω προίρ , ως μαΧιστ αν ημιν κατα¬ φανές ποιοι , περί ότου XeyeTai m . Conjunctive for the optative. Herod, i, 29. ΣοΧων απεόη- μησεεΤεα όεκα, ίνα $η μη τινα των νόμων avay κασθρ Χυσαι των εθετο. Comp. I, 34. ΙΠ, 150. VII, 206. 221. νιΐτ, 141, &c. Isocr. Areop. ρ . 145. C. εκείνο μονον ετηρουν 3 όπως μηοεν μήτε των πατρίων καταΧυσουσ ι, μητ εςω των νομι- *ζρμενων προσθησουσιν } and passim. Thucydides especially. Comp. Heind. ad Gorg. p. 25. m Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 771 in narration, almost regularly puts the conjunctive for the opta¬ tive, probably to represent the object as one, the attainment of which was not doubted of by the actor or (in orat. obliqua ) the speaker, since he seems, on the other hand, to use the optative when he intends to mark an object of uncertain accomplishment, or depending upon a condition not mentioned (Seevn, 23.). Thus also the conjunctive seems to be put especially after the verbs, to fear’, for the optative. Eur. Phoai. 70. t«! S’ els φόβον πε- σόντε, μη τελεσφόρους εΰχας θεοί κραινωσ ιν, ο'ικουντων^ όμοό, ξυμβάντ έταξαν. Ηίρρ. 1311. η 8, eis εΚε^χον μη πέσρ, φοβούμενη, ψευδείς γραφας ey ραψεν. Plat. Euthyd. ρ. 39· και eyw φοβηθείς, μη \oiSopta ^/ενηται, πάλιν κατεπράυνον τον Κτησιππον, and passim. For the object of the fear is mostly considered as determinately future, although it may sometimes be represented as merely possible. But frequently the use of the conj. for the opt. may be caused by the kind of representation used by the Greeks, in which, even when they mark an action as passed, yet in the relation of the accom¬ panying circumstances of it, they transport themselves to the time in which it happened, and represent it as present.^ See §. 507. e. g. Lysias Epitaph, p. 83 sq. R. ετι S’ αότοΊς εκ των προ τε¬ ρών iepywv περί της πόλεως τοιαύτη δόξα παρειστηκει, ως, ει (leg. ην) μεν πρότερον επ’ άλλην πάλιν Ίωσιν, εκείνόις και Άθηναίοις πολεμήσουσϊ προθύμως yap τοΐς άδικουμενοις ήξουσι βοηθησοντες, 8fc. Comp. Xen. Anab. ι, 3, 16 . Obs. 2. Sometimes the conj. or, in it’s room, the indica¬ tive is interchanged with the optative. Od. y, 77. αυτή yap evi φρεσι θόρσος Άθήνη θηχ, Ίνα μιν περ\ πατρος αποιχομενοιο εροιτο, ηο 'ίνα μιν κλέος ίσθλόν εν ανθρωποισιν εχρσιν, where the distinction may be supposed to be, that ερεσθαι might only be admitted in past time, but the fame might last to the time of the Poet, although it is very doubtful whether the‘Poet was determined in his choice of the different moods by this distinction, which after all was not necessary to be expressed. Comp. Od. μ! 156 so. Herod, ix, 51. ές τοότον δη τον χώρον εβουλευσαντο μεταστηναι, ’ίνα και SSaTi ’έχωσι χράσθαι αφθονω, και οι ■ιππέες σφέας μη σινοίατο. Thuc. νι, 96. επτακοσιουςλο Ύ α, όας των όπλιτάν ίξέκριναν πρότερον, — 'όπως των τε Επιπο- 520. 772 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive . λώί/ εϊησαν φνλακες, και, ην ες a λλό τι δεη, τα'χν ξννεστώ- rey τταρα^ί^νωνται. Comp. Plat. Menon. p. 367. Obs. 3. These conjunctions usually stand along with the opt. and conj. without άν, κε. But sometimes with these parti¬ cles. Od. μ', 51 sq . εκ δ αντον πείρατ άνηφθω , οφρα κε τερπομενος οπ ακόυες Σειρηνοιίν. ib. 157. άλλ’ ερεω μεν εγων, Ίνα ειδότες η κε θ άνω μεν, η κε ν άλευάμενοι θάνα¬ τον και κηρα φν^γοιμεν. Comp. ν\ 402. 412. τ', 17. JEsch. Prom. 10. τοιασόε τοι αμαρτίας σφε δει θεοις δονναι δίκην, ως άν διδαχθρ την Αιός τυραννίδα στερΎειν. Pur. Troad. 85. πλησον δε νεκρών κοίιλον Εύβοιας μνγόν , ως άν το λοιπόν ταμ ’ άνάκτορ ευσεβεΊν είδώσ 'Αχαιοί. Thuc. II, 93. ην — προσδοκία ουδεμια, μη αν ποτέ οι πολέμιοι εξαπιναίως ούτως επιπλευσειαν. The particles άν, κε are thus used, also when the proper mood follows, and are omitted where the im¬ proper follows, as is shewn in the instances, §. 519. But according to Brunck on Apoll. Rh. i, 17 . they are necessarily put when the conj. is used for the opt. n Obs. 4. The future is often put for the conj. especially after the verbs £ to fear', after μη. Aristoph. Eccl. 486* *. κύκλω περί - σκοπονμενη κάκεϊσε και τα τρδ’ εκ δεξιών, μη ξνμφορά <γενη- σεται το πpayμa. Plat. Rep. ν, ρ. 6. φοβερόν τε και σφα¬ λερόν, μη, σφαλείς της αλήθειας, - κείσομαι 0 . Comp. id. Lack . ρ. 178. Also the present indicative. Pur. Ph. 91. μη τις πολιτών εν τρίβω φαντάζεται, κάμοι μεν ελθη φανλος, ως δονλω, yf/oy ος ρ . V' · ’'** " * ι ι f · YW.J · J 1 i’\i ι {j y I In particular, this is the regular construction, after όπως , which indeed takes the pres, the aor. 1. pass, and aor. 2 . in the conjunctive, but instead of the aor. 1. act. and mid. requires the future, and this, whether it be governed by a verb preceding, or that opa, cave, is omitted, (e, g. Plat. Menon. p. 3 41. Menex. n Comp. Herm. ad Vig. p. 76 8, 259. 0 Hemsterh. ad Arist. Plut. p. 203. Heind. ad Plat. Crat. p. 36 . Observ. Misc. Nov. in, p. 14 . • * p Brunck. ad Aristoph. Nub. 493. Syntax . . Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 773 \ p. 278. 306. Xen. Cyr . iv, 2, 39.) In the passages where the aor. 1. coni. act. still remains after ο7τω?_, one or other of the MSS. or editions generally has the future. But όπως αν, that, takes the conj. and aor. 1. act. q Obs. 5. ΐνα, ως, μη, are found very frequently with the indicative of a past tense ; e. g. with the imperf. Soph. CEd. T. 1389 . ίν ην τυφλός τ€ και κλυων μηόεν. Eurip. Ηιρρ. 645. χρην—αφθογγα αυταΐς (ταϊς y υναιξΐ) avy κατοίκιζαν όάκη Θηρών, iv εΙ\ον μηόε προσφωνεΐν τινα, fyc. Plat. Menon. ρ. 367· των νέων τους ayaOovs τάς φύσεις αν παραλαβοντες — εφνλάττομεν εν άκροπόλει, κατασημηνάμενοι πολύ μάλλον , η τό χρυσίον, iv α μηόεις αντους όιεφθειρεν, in actions which continue during another past action. With the aoiist. JEsch. Prom. 753. τί — ούκ εν τάχει ερριψ* εμαυτην τησ$ άπό στυφλου ί τετράς, όπως πεόω σκηφασα, των πάντων πόνων απηλλ ay η ν. Soph. CEd. Τ. 1392. τι μ ου λαβών εκτεινας ευθύς, ω? εόειξα μηποτε εμαυτόν άνθρωποισιν, ενθεν ην yεyως; Eurip. Phocn. 213. (Τ υριον οίόμα λιπουσ εβαν - φοίβω δούλα μελάθρων,) iv υπό όειράσι νιφοβολοις ΤΙαρνασου κατενάσθ ην. Jphig. Τ. 358. ιν αυτους άντε ~ τ ιμωρησά μην. Comp. Plat. Euthyd. ρ. 74. Prot.p. 138. In actions which are past, but represented as passing before us . Thus μη is put with the indicative of a past tense_, when the action is to be represented as past. Od. ε , 300. όειόω, αη όη πάντα θεά νημερτεα ειπεν, ‘ that she has said. Thuc. ill, 53. νυν δε φοβουμεθα, μη άμφοτερων ημαρτηκαμεν. Isocr. ad Phil. ρ. 85. Ε. εξεπλάyησav, μη όιά τό y ηρας εξεστηκα ί Dawes. Misc. Crit. ρ. 227- 459. Wolf, ad Demosth. Lept. p. 266. Fiseh. ad Well, ii, p. 251. Comp. Brunck. ad Arist. Lys. 384.. 1305. Ran. 378. 1363. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 1392. Ajac. 556. Valcken. ad Theocr. x. Id. p. 30. ad Herod, p. 4 77, 5. Toup. ad Suid. I, p. 45. r Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. 928. Diatr. p. 149. A. Brunck. ad Arist. Ran. 919. ad Soph. CEd. T. 1392. Zeune ad Viger. p. 557. Herm. lb. p. 805 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 347 sq. 774 Syntax, Of the Optative and Conjunctive. του φρονειν. Plat, Lys. p. 243. φοβούμαι, μη, ώσπερ άνθρω¬ ποι? άλαζόσι, \6yois τισι τοιοντοις φευδέσιν έντετυχη- καμεν περί τον φίλου 9 . 2 . Of the Optative and Conjunctive after Particles of Time, The optative is put with the particles έπεί, επειδή, 6τε, οπότε , where the discourse is concerning a past action,, which, however, was not limited to a precise point of time, but was often repeated by several persons, or in several places; the conjunctive is put with έπην , επειδάν, όταν , όπόταν , when an action thus frequently recurring is mentioned in the present or future tense. 11. y, 232. πολλάκι μιυ ξείνισσεν Άρήίφιλος Μενέλαος οίκω εν ημετέρψ, οπότε Κρητηθεν 'ίκοιτο. 11 ΐ, 191. Πηλείδ ης δέ οι οΐος ενάντιο ? ηστο σιωπτ/, δeyμevoς Αιακίδην, οπότε λη^ειεν άείδων. Comp. 11. α', 610. y, 216. S', 335. 344. Od. y } 283. 0, 87, 8$C, Herod. I, 29. άπικνέονται ές Σάρδις — παντες εκ της EWaSos σοφισται ί ω? έκαστος αντέων απι- κνεοιτο, ΥΙΙ, 6 . of Onomacritus I όκως απίκοιτο ές οφιν την βασιληο 9 —κατελε ye των χρησμών. Comp. lb. 119 · . Thuc . II, 10. επειδή δε έκαστοις έτοιμα yiyi ιοιτο κατά 'τόν χρόνον τον ειρημενον , ζυνήεσαν τα δυο μέρη από πόλεως έκαστης ές τόν ισθμόν , because the discourse is, concerning several parts, and the action is considered as repeated with each; afterwards it is concerning the whole : lb. 49. και τό σωμα } όσον 7 rep χρόνον και η νόσος άκμάζοι 9 ονκ έμαραίνετο , because he speaks of that which happened to all sick persons, and therefore frequently. Comp. 1, 49. 11, 13. — - -——----- s Musgr. ad Eurip. Ph. 93. Burgess. Praef. ad Daw. Misc. Cr. p. xxviii. Not. Syntax . Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 775 / 15 . 18 . 34. 79. VII, 18. 44. 70. Plat. Phmdr.p. 134. aei yap in και τάς ττρόσθβν ημέρας ειώθειμεν φοιτάν και eyta και ο'ι άλλοι ! ^ f f of t προς τον Σωκράτη. — περιεμενομεν ουν εκαστ ore, εως ανοι- χθείη τό όεσμωτηριον.—επειόη Se ανοιχθειη, γειμεν παρα τον Σωκράτη. Comp. Xen. Cyr. II, ι, 5. 26. 3, 20. νιιι, 4, 2. Anab. i, 2, 7. Ages.i , 21. Hellen. vi, 4, 11. In the same manner ei is put. T/mc. vli, 79. el μεν όπιο ι εν o\ ’ Αθηναίοι, υπεχωρουν, ει S' άναχωροιεν, επεκειντο. Comp. ib. 71. In this case the imperf. usually stands in the other member, or a plusq. perf. of the same signification as the imperf. as in Xen. Anab. i, 5, 2. since this also serves to shew an action often repeated ; more rarely the aorist, as II. y, 232. Time, vn, 71. Oftentimes also the frequent recurrence of an action is indicated more strongly by the addition of the particle ay, as follows ; The conjunctive : II. a 168 . iyw S oXlyov re φίλον re ερχομ εχων επι νηας, επην κεκάμω πολεμιζων. Herod. VI, 27· φιλεει κως προσημα'ινειν (ο θεός), εύτ αν μελλγ μβ 7 άλα κακά fj πόλι ή Ϊθνεϊ ίσεσθαι. Plat Gorg. ρ. 21 Sq. όταν περί ιατρών α'ιρεσεως ή τή πόλει avWoyos. - άλ- λότι η τότε ό ρητορικός ον συμβουλεύσει , 8ξ0. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 3, 26. όπερ και νυν ετι ποιουσιν οι βάρβαροι βασιλείς ο π όταν στρατοπεόευωνται , τάφρον περιβάλλονται εό- ητετως Sid την πολυχειρίαν. Anab. II, 4, 26. Ό Κλέαρχος Ηγείτο μεν εις 5υο· επορενετο Si άλλοτε και άλλοτε εφιστα- μενος- όσον S' αν χρόνον το dy ουμενον rod στρατεύματος ε πιστή, τοσουτον 0v0yw χρόνον Si όλου του στρατεύματος Ί 1 Ί νεσθαι τήν βπίστασιν, where the conjunctive is right, so long as it is a general proposition containing a re¬ mark which is applicable; but if it be uttered merely in reference to that particular march of Clearchus, the reading of other MSS. 'επιστησειε (sc. όαυτό), would be more correct. Thus too is used as a paiticle of time with the conj. Herod, iv, 172. των Si ως έκαστος οι μι - 776 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive . rj, ύιύοϊ όώρον.· —Hence the conj. with these particles* is put in general propositions,, where the discourse is of something that takes place usually, and therefore fre¬ quently. 1 · i r Afi o ' i/> «·· -» j ^ fri t 4 ' *■/ ^ Sometimes the conj. with these particles does not express an action frequently repeated at the present time, but merely a future action, II. ζ, 412. ού yap ετ άλλη εσται θαΧπωρη, ει ret αν συ ye πότμον επίσπης, where the aor. 2 . conj. expresses the fut. exactum of the Latin, quum tu mortem obieris. Thuc. iv, 60. είκός, όταν yvwaiv ημάς τετρνχωμενους, και πΧεονί 7 rore στοΧω εΧθόι>τας αυτούς τάύε πάντα πειράσεσθαι υπό σφάς ποιεί- σθαι. Obs. 1. The use of the optative and conjunctive does not depend upon whether one wishes to use ore, επειόη, fyc. or οται/, επειύάν, but vice versa, the proper sense of the moods in assigning the time, determines the use of the particle. Now commonly the particles compounded with av are used when the conjunctive is to be put: with the optative those without av. Sometimes, however, the former όταν, επειόάν, are found with the optative, and ότε, επειόη with the conjunctive; but the latter only in Homer. JEsch. Pers. 448. ενταύθα πεμπει τούσό ' , όπως όταν νεών φθαρεντες ε'χθροί νήσον εκσωζοίατο, κτείνοιεν εύ’χείρωτον Έ,ΧΧηνων στρατόν, for ore. But in re¬ ference to the main proposition, this is still a future action; and here also the oratio obliqua has an effect. Eur. Suppl. 1151. ei yap yevoiTo, τεκνον, όταν, θεού θεΧοντος, εΧθοι μοι όίκα, where the wish in ei yevoiTo is continued on. Plat. Alcib. ii. p. 97. ’ Αθηναίοις καί Αακεύαιμονίοις όιαφοράς yei ιομενης, συνε- βαινεν τρ πόΧει ημών, ώστε και κατά yrjv και κατά θάΧατταν, οπόταν μά'χη yevoiTo, όυστυγειν. Id. Sijmp. ρ. 266. οπό- ταυ yoύv άι >ay κασθ είημεν, άποΧειφθεντες που, οΐα όη επι στρατείας, άσιτεΐν , ούόεν ησαν οι αΧΧοι προς το καρτερειν. Comp. Tim. ρ. 321. JEschin , Αχ. 8. Xen. Cyr. vin, 1, 44. και yap , οποταν εΧαύνοιεν τά θηρία τοίς ιππεύσιν εις τά πεύία, φερεσθαι σύτον εις Θήραν τουτοις επετρεπε. Ages. 9, “· * τότε μαΚιστα ε'χαιρεν, οποταν τα-χιστα τυχοντας. Syntax· Of the Optative and Conjunctive. tLv όεοιντο, άποπεμποι. Comp. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 308, J. But in Xen. Cyr. I, 3, 18. is more correct, επειόάν οίκοι γς, since then a future action is marked. ore, οπότε, επειδή with the conj. is put for όταν, επειδάν, since the conj. is required. II. φ\ 323. ovSe τι μιυ χρε<*> εσται τυμβοχοής, οτε μιν θάπτωσιν 'Αχαιοί, quum , Gr. eum sepelient. Comp, μ', 286. π', 24 5. Od. κ, 486. λ, 105. μ, 55. 170. ο', 408. and passim. Not. όταν , επειδάν, #c. rarely occur with the indicative. For in II. μ!, 41 sq. φ',3 41. Od. d, 41. στρέφεται , φθε Ί ξομαι, \μείρεται are conjunctives. See §. 19*5· P- 248. In Xen. Mem. S. i, 2, 35. IV, 3, 4. 6. 9· επειδή is now restored from MSS., and in ’ Cebet. Tab. p. 229. it should be read: όταν μή επί- στωνται. Obs. 2. The optative also is sometimes put, without express¬ ing an action frequently repeated. II. σ , 465. at yap μιν θανα- τοιο δυσηχεος ωδε δυναίμην νόσφιν άποκρνφαι, ότε μιν μόρυς αίνος 'ικανοί , a case merely conjectural, in pursuance of the wish. Od. β\ 31. ήν χ ήμΊν σάφα είποι, ότε πρότερός ye πν θ οιτο, ‘if he have any how heard it\ Plat. Rep. ix, p· 244. 07Γ0Τ6 δε μή δνναιτο, άρπα'ζοι αν και βιάζοιτο μετά τούτο , a case only imaginary, as with ei, Vvhen the optative follows in the conclusion. p Obs. 3. This use of the conjunctive, inasmuch as with όπειδάν, όπόταν, it expresses an action often repeated in the present time, or usually happening, is connected with the Ho¬ meric use of it, since in comparisons the conjunctive is put with words of all kinds; as with ός II. ε , 138. ο, 580. ωσει II. ι, -477. άστε II. λ', 68. μ , 278. άς οτε II. λ', 155. 292. ο, 605. (instead of which, II. λ', 269. ώ όταν is used), ιός όποτε II. λ', 305. ο, 382. ήύτε II. ρ , 547. With the remaining particles of time, which do not 522. determine a space of time during which an action takes place, but a point of time, before or until which some¬ thing takes place, as εως, εστ αν, πρίν, μέχρι ου, the opt. I 77 $ Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. \ and conj. are used in the same cases in which they were used with ' ίυα·, όφρα, 8ξ€. viz. the optative, when the main action of the proposition is past, the conjunctive, when it is present or future. Od. e, 385. ωρσε 8 επί κραιπνόν Bo- ρεην,.πρό οε κύματ εαξεν, εως o ye Φ αιηκεσσι φιΧηρετμοισι utye ίη. Comp, ι , 376. But they are more frequently used with the optative in the oratio ohliqua, when the proposition is expressed as one which belongs to the discourse of another, as Xen. Cyr . iv, 5, 36. τούς 'ίππους εκεΧευσε φυΧάττειν μένοντας τούς ay ay όντας 3 εως αν τι σημανθείη αύτοίς. Comp. lb. V, 3, 5S. Thus also Soph. Track, in. \όyoς μεν εστ αρχαίος ανθρώπων φανείς, ως ουκ αν αιών εκμάθοι βροτών , πριν αν Θάνοι τις, ουτ εί χρηστός, οίτ εί τω κακός , where also the optative in the preceding proposition, of which that with πριν contains the condition, determines this construction. Or in mere suppositions, which are all expressed by the opta¬ tive, as Plat. Phcedon. p . 230 . The conjunctive II. β\ 331. μίμνετε πάντες εϋκνημι- όες ’Αχαιοί αυτού , είσόκεν άστυ μεγα ΤΙριάμοιο &Χωμεν. Comp, ε, 466. Od. β, 99 sq. Soph. Antig. 6ΐ8 sq. είόοτι ουόεν προσερπει , πριν πυρί θερμά) πόόα to φαυστ/. Comp. Od. κ, 175. ρ, 9. Thuc. 11 , 6. Xen. Anab. 1 , 1, 10. (In the two last passages the proper oratio obliqua is changed into the recta.) — Soph. (Ed. C. 113 sqq. και συ μ ες οόου ποόα κρυφόν κατ άλσος, τωνο εως αν εκ μάθω, τίνας Xόyoυς ερούσιν. -— II. α , 509. τόφρα ό* επί Τ ρώεσσι τίθει κράτος, όφρ άν 'Αχαιοί υιόν εμόν τίσωσιν. Comp. 11. ν, 141. φ', 558. Od. β, 154. The following also are deviations from this rule: II. d, 70 . when, however, the Leipz. MS. gives %Χωσι for εΧοιεν. Od. ε, 378. o', 51. (Comp. 75.) χ, 444. Eur. Jphig. T. 20. (when probably it should be Χάβγ). Thus Syntax . Of the Optative and Conjunctive, 779 the conj. is put for the opt. IL o , 23. oται, άξουσιν, ενθεν εξουσι τά επιτήδεια, a transition to a kind of oratio recta. Obs. In the premises et also is often put with the indicative present or future, if the condition is to have not only the expres¬ sion of mere possibility or probability, but is considered as a case determined, as happening with reference to the consequence. II. e\ 350. ει δε συ y εις πόλεμον πωλησεαι, η τε σ οίω piy^eiv πόλεμον. Comp. II. ο, 213. Herod, ι, 32. ei δε προς τουτοισι ετι τελευτ ησ ει τον βιον εύ, ούτος εκεΐνος, τον σύ ζητείς, όλβιός κεκλησθαι άξιός εστι , whereby the ne¬ cessary connection of the condition with the consequence, by virtue of which the latter supposes the necessity of the former, is ,made more prominent * 1 . i: O; 2. When the optative with άν is put in the conclu- • it f ■ MVj 1 Comp. Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. 10^4. I Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 781 sion, and consequently a case is adduced, which is merely possible and problematical (although necessarily determinate with relation to the condition by means of this), then in the premises the optative is put with el , without av , as the condition, equally in that case, is only problematical. The entire relation, in this case, does not express any thing future or present, but something which is merely possible or imaginable, at an indefinite time, the reverse of which is equally possible. II. a, 255. η κ e v *γηθησαι Πρίαμο? Π ριάμοιό τ€ παίδε?, άλλοι re Τρώε$ μ^α κ€ν κεχαρο'ιατο Θυμω, el σφωίν τά$€ πάν¬ τα πυθυιατο μαρναμ€νοιίν. Xen. Cyr. hi, 3, 49. Τ I S’, ιίφη, ω Κ vp€j el και συ avy καλεσας, εω? οτι εζεστι, παρα - κελει/σαίο, εί άρα ( num ) τι και σι) άμε'ινους ( άν ) ποιησαις τους στρατιωτας ; ( wouldst thou make them ?— e if 'thou exhortedst them’. Isocr. ad Nicocl. p. 16 . C. ei τις τους κρατούντας του πλήθους επ’ άρ€την π poTpefe lev, αμφο - τερους άν ωφελτ]σειεν α . It has been observed before, that in past actions, or in those which are divided between the past and the present, the indicative of the aorist or imperf. is put twice in the conclusion with άν. Obs. From these general fundamental propositions, how- 524. ever, there are various deviations, which are founded mostly on the several kinds of the conditional propositions. 1. εί with the indicative, and in the conclusion the opta¬ tive, with av , viz. when the condition contains a determi- nately expressed case, and the conclusion is accompanied by the expression of a mere conjecture, or contains a consequence which is merely possible or probable. Plat. Theaet. p. 110. ουκουν την αύτου (οιησιν) άν φευ$η συ·γχω pol> el την των u Valcken. ad Hipp. 4/1. Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. 1037. tol. π. D D 782 Syntax . Of the Optative and Conjunctive. ηγουμένων αυτόν φευ^εσθαι ομοΧογ ei αΧηθη είναι , where that which here constitutes the condition, w r as just before men¬ tioned as a determinate case. The distinction between the indie, and opt. with et, is particularly marked in the following passages : Plat . Apol. S. p . 66 sq . kyco δεινά άν εϊ η v eipy ασμενος , — et, ore μεν με οι άρχοντες εταττον, ούς υμείς είΧεσθε άρχειν f ^ | ^ yj yf f/ \ μου, - τότε μεν, ου εκείνοι εταττον , εμενον, ώσπερ και αΧΧος τις, καί εκινδύνενον αποθανειν, του δε θεού ταττον- τος—φιΧοσοφούντά με δείν ζτ^ν και εζετάζοντα εμαυτόν και τούς αΧΧους, ενταύθα δε, φοβηθείς η θάνατον η άΧΧο οτιούν π pay μα, Χειπο ιμι την τάζιν, where the indicative expresses a circumstance as determinately happening then, but the opta¬ tive, an action which is merely assumed as possible. In the same manner Hippias Min. p . 199^ 200. Cratyl, p. 245. Gor&. p, 15. Eurip. Hipp. 476. αλλ, et τα πΧείω χρηστά ^ ° J ~ -y / » ν / γ it των κακών εχεις, άνθρωπος ουσα, καρτα y ευ πραςειας αν, where the indicative is more correct than the conj x . But in Plat. Menon, p. 348. it should be ει — τοιαύτα ποιοις (as a mere supposition), ταγ* αν άπαχθείης , and Alcib. 2, p. 88. ει ετγχειροίς — ay νοοις, — ούποτε άν επίθοιο. The case is different when et signifies ‘Although’. Soph. TV. 592. αλλ ειδεναι χρη δρωσαν, ως ουδ , ει δοκεις εχειν, εχοις άν yvωμa, μη πειρωμενη. Plat. Alcib . ι, ρ. 16 . ει· yap και δ ιαν οεΐταί τις , ως δει προς τούς τα δίκαια πραττοντας πο - Χεμείν, ούκ άν ομoXoyησειε ye. In the same manner et is not unfrequently accompanied by the future indicative, when the opt. with av follows in the con¬ clusion. Eurip. Hipp. 484. η τάρ ’ άν οψε y άι>δρες εζευ- ροιεν άν, ει μη yυvaικeς μηχανάς ευ ρησομεν. Arist. Eccl. 162. ου προβαίην τον πόδα τον ετερον άν, ει μη τούτ ακρι - βωθησεται. The optative here serves to soften a determinate declaration. 2. et with the indicative of a past tense, and the optative with av in the conclusion, viz. when a circumstance in past time is represented as a condition, in it’s relation to a conse- % * Brimck. ad Eurip. Ilipp, 474. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 380. s t Syntax. Of the Optative arid Conjunctive . 783 quence which is still present. Od. a, 236. e7ret ου Ke θανόντι περ we)’ άκατοί μην, ei μετά οΐς ετάροισι όάμη Τ ρωων ενι όήμφ, ‘I should not grieve if he were slain’, non mocrerem, si periisset. Thuc . n, 60. ε’ί μοι και μεσως ηγούμενοι μάΧΧον ετερων προσεΐναι αυτά ποΧεμεΊν επείσθητε, ούκ άν εικότως νυν ye του άόικεΐν αιτίαν φεροίμην. Plat. Rep. νΐ, ρ. 88. οΐόν 7 rep άν ei θρέμματος μεyάXoυ και ισχυρού τρεφόμενου τ ας opyάς τις και επιθυμίας κατεμάνθανεν ,- κατ αμα¬ θών $ε ταυτα πάντα — σοφίαν τε καΧεσειε, και επί SiS α- σκαΧίαν τ ρεποιτο — (όνομάζοι $ε — όχοι — καλοί — εω- ρακως είη)—τοιουτος όή ων, προς Αιός ούκ άτοπος άν σοι άοκοίη ( vulg . όοκή) είναι παιόευτής; ‘if anyone had learnt, and called that wisdom’. 3. ei with the optative, and the indicative in the conclu¬ sion, when any thing in the conclusion is determinately asserted, but the premises convey only a possible case. Find. Pyth. iv, 468. €i yap τις όζους όζυτόμω πεΧεκει εξερείψαι κεν με- yάXaς όρυός, αίσχυνοι όε οί θαητόν εΐόος’ και φθινόκαρπος εοισα όιόοΊ ψήφον περ αύτάς, when εί signifies ‘although’. Herod. J, 32. ου yap τοι 6 μ,ε·γα πΧούσιος μάΧΧον του επ ήμε- ρην εχοντος οΧβιωτερός εστι, εί μή οι τύχη επίσποιτο, πάντα καΧά εχοντα τεΧευτήσαι ευ τον βίον. Comp, νιι, 101. Thuc. II, 5. οι άΧΧοι Θηβαίοι, ους εόει τής νυκτός πaρayε- νεσθαι πανστρατιά,, el τι άρα μή προχω ροίη τοις εσεΧηΧυ- θόσι, - επεβοήθουν, ‘ unless some success should attend them’, ib. 39. βί ραθυμία μάΧΧον ή πόνων μεΧετφ, και μή μετά νόμων το πΧειον ή τρόπων άνόρείας εθεΧοιμεν κινόυ- νεύειν, πεpιyίyvετaι ήμιν τοις μεΧΧονσιν dXyeivoi ς μη προκάμνειν. Comp. Plat. Charm, ρ. 109 y · Thus the future also is put in the conclusion. II. κ , 222. ε’ί τις μοι άνήρ άμ εποιτο και άΧΧος, μάΧΧον θαΧπωρή καί θαρσαΧεωτερον εσται. Comp, ι, 389 Plat. Phcedon. ρ. 238. sq. ε ί yap όρο ιό με, ω άν τί [εν τψ del.] σωματι eyyevr/- ται , θερμόν εσται, ού την άσφαΧή σοι ερω άπόκρισιν εκείνην τήν αμαθή, ότι ω άν θερμότης , where the condition is irame- y Wolf, ad Demosth. Lept. p. 283. D D 2 ' \ , 784 Syntax' Of the Optative and Conjunctive. diatelv afterwards expressed more definitely: av eprj, φ άν τι , ' » r t » > ~ σωματι eyye^raif νόσησα, ουκ βρω. Also the indicative of a past tense follows, in the sense of §. 508. c. Plat. Alcib. I, p. 21. el βουΧηθβιημβ v άδεναι μη μόνον ποιοι άνθρωποι ασιν, αΧΧ οποίοι vyiavoi η νοσώδεις, άρα ικανοί αν ημιν ησαν διδασκαΧοι οι πόΧΧοι ; 4. With the opt. and the conjunctive in the conclusion. II. Xj 386. βι μβν δη άντιβιον συν τβυχβσι πβιρηθβιης, ουκ αν τοι χραίσ μγσι βιος, as §.516. But in the following passages the reading is probably corrupt : Plat . Euthyphr. p. 15. apa av el διαφβροιμβθα eyco re και σύ π epi αριθμού , όττο- repa πΧείω, η πβρι τούτων διαφορά βχθρους αν ημάς ποιη; leg. ποιοι . Then follows η ταχύ άν άπαΧΧαγάημβν. Alcib. τ, ρ. 7· δοκάς yap μοι , et τις σοι €ΐποι θβων δοκτΐς αν μοι βΧόσθαι τβθνάναι, read δοκάς. The αν belongs to τεθνα- ναι. ib. ρ. 69· €£ τω όξουσία ο’ίη ποιαν ο δοκά, καθορης ο αν ξνμβαίντι . 1. — βαίνοι, or ξυμβαίη. Id. Lys. ρ. 217- ποιος τις ούν άν σοι δοκη θηρβυτης βιναι, βι ανασοβοι. 1. δοκοί. Comp. Xen . Anab. n, 5, 16 . 19. when it should be δοκοΊς and δνναισθβ. 5. ην {άν, eav) with the conj. and the optative in the con¬ clusion. II. δ', 97- του sev δη παμπρώτα παρ ayXaa δώρα φ e ρ ο ι Ο) at Kev Ίδφ MeyeXaoy -7 Γύρης βπιβαντ aXeyei- νης, where the optative is put, as in independent propositions, to soften the expression of the future, { thou mightst bear thence , not ‘thou wouldst’. Thus too Od. β, 246. 251. Xen. Apol. S. 6. ην δβ a ισθάνωμαι χάρων yιyvoμevoς και καταμβμφωμαι βμαυτδν , (a case which was previously represented as occurring of necessity : aray/c^ βσται τα του yηpως: αποτβΧασθαι, & fc.) πως άν eyco en άν ηδόως βιοτβυοιμι ; ί how am I to be able to live with pleasure’ ? which is equivalent to, ουκ av en €yω ηδβως βιοτβύοιμι , or ουκ en eyco ηδβως βιοτβυσω. Thus also Isocr. Areop. p. 152. C. Herod, vn, l6l. μάτην yap άν ώδβ πάρα - λοι/ 'EXX^raw στρατόν πΧαστον βίημεν βκτημβνοι, el Έυρη- κουσιοισι βόντβς Αθηναίοι avy χωρησωμβν της ηyβμονιης, because the latter was required. Of ei with the conj. see §. 525. 7. b. . . 525. 6. el i^ also a kind of participle of time, and when it accom- I Syntax . Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 785 panies an action often repeated in past time, takes an optative, like the proper particles of time. See Thuc. vii, 44. Plat. Apol. S. p. 7 6. Xen. Cyr. i, 3, 12. 4,6. Anab . vii, 4, 24. Mem. S. i, 3, 4. 7 . The deviations hitherto adduced are founded upon the peculiar nature of the conditional propositions, and are thus, in a certain degree, regular. The following cases, on the contrary, are irregular: a. When et with the optat. takes av. Find. Pyth. iv, 468. a passage which is quoted §. 524. 3. Comp. II. φ , 592. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 3, 55. τούς απαίδευτους παντάπασιν αρετής θαυμάζοιμ αν, et rt πλέον αν ωφελησειε λογος καλώς ρηθεις €ΐς ανδραγαθίαν. Xen. Agesil.in. ού yap αν καλώς εχοι, et, ort τελεως άνηρ αγαθός εγενετο, δια τούτο ούδε μειόνων αν τυγ- χάνοι επαίνων. b. εί is sometimes also constructed with the conjunctive, but only in Ionic and Doric writers, e. g. It. ε , 258. λ , 116. μ, 224. 245. π , 30. 559- Od. α, 204. ε , 221. μ , 96. 348. Herod, ιτ, 13. 52. νιπ, 49. νιι, 161. Theocr. χχν, 45 ζ . But in Xenophon the optative must be put with an action frequently repeated: ουκ είς μεν ΥΙερινθον, ει προσιοιτε ( vulg . ιητε ) τη πολει, Αρίσταργος ύμας 6 Λακεδαιμόνιος ούκ εία είσιεναι. Also εί is put with the op thing II. i , 141. et δε κεν άρούρης , γαμβρός κεν μοι ε formerly 136. et κε with the conj. stood. . for ήν , with the conj. in a future * Άργος ίκοίμεθ’ Άχαΐίκόν, ούθαρ ji, τίσω δε μιν Ισον Όρεστνι , where It is more doubtful whether ην occurs with the optative: for in Thuc. in, 44. some MSS. have et re — ειεν, for ην re, though there the conj. with ην would be more correct, and Isocr. Pac. p. 168. C. αλλ’ όμως ούτως αυτούς άγαπωμεν, ώσθ ύπερ μεν τών παίδων τών ημετερων, ην περί τινας εξαμάρτοιεν , ούκ αν εθελησαιμεν δίκας νποσγείν ; it should, perhaps, be et, although here also the conj. with ην would be more correct*. 2 Herm. ad Vigor, p. 791, 304. Bast. Lettre Crit. p. 90 sq. a Herm. ad Viger. p. 7§7, 291. Scliader. ad Dion. Η. I. p. 8/. I 786 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. The interchange of et and ην is extraordinary, Thuc. n, 5. εβονΧοντο yap σφίσιν, e’i rtra Χάβοιεν, νπάρχειν αντί των ίνδον, ην άρα τνχωσί τινες ktpypr^evoi. The reason is, perhaps, that the last circumstance, some Thebans were taken, was just before related as actually happening, and as something that the Thebans had just suffered; but the former was first to happen still, and thus was uncertain. Note. Besides, the antecedent with et is often wanting, when it is easy to be supplied, as II. 7 ', 52 sq. ovk av δη μείνειας άρηίφιΧον MeueXaoi/; 7 νοίης χ, ο'ιου φωτός ε'χεις θαΧερην παράκοιτιν . c Then thou wouldst perceive’. Comp. t, 245. 303. Od. η, 278 . Thuc . 1 , 71 . π, 11. where οντω is put for the premises. Instead of this also the participle is often put, II. κ , 246 . τον τον y ε σ π ο μεν 010 και βκ πνρός αιθομενοιο αμφω νοστησαιμεν. Xen. Anab. hi, 1 , 2 . 526. €i signifies also, f whether’, and in this sense it is often put elli- ptically, especially in Homer, with the omission of πάρω μένος, σκο¬ πών, e. g. II. ψ', 40. αντίκα κηρνκεσσι Xιyvφθ6yyoισι κεΧεν- σαν , αμφι πνρι στησαι τρίποδα μ^αν, εί πεπίθοιεν ΐΙηΧείδην, whilst they wished to enquire, c whether they could prevail upon Pelides’. In past actions et is put without av with the optative, in present or future actions, et /ce, εάν, ην with the conjunctive, e. g. II. V , 172 . ^Χανκιόων (ϊ ίθνς φερεται μενει , ην τινα πεφνρ άνδρών. ib . 463 . 6 μεν άντίος ηλνθε , yovvωv, et πως εύ πε- φίδοιτο, Χαβών , και Χωδν αφείη. Comp. II. κ, 206 . Thuc . I, 58. Π οτιδαιάται £e πεμψαντες μεν και παρ' Άθη- ναίονς πρέσβεις , et πως π είσειαν, fyc. 11 . 77· προτερον δε πνρι εδο^εν αντοις πειρασαι, ει δνναιντο , πνενματος y ενο- μενον , επιφΧεξαι την πόΧιν , ονσαν ον μεyάXηv. πάσαν yap δη ίδε'αν επενόονν, εί πως σφίσιν άνεν δαπάνης και ποΧιορκίας προσαχθείη. Comp, π,, 12 . 64. νιι, 79· επεκειντο, και μάλιστα τοίς νστάτοις προσπίπτοντες, εί πως , κατά βραχν τρεφάμενοι, παν το στράτενμα φοβη σειαν. Comp. Ill, 45. Eurip. Androm. 44. δειματονμενη δ* ey ώ, δόμων πάροικόν θετιδος εις άνάκτορον θάσσω τόδ εΧθονσ , ην με κωΧνσρ θανείν. In this case it is often put for ‘That’, ut h . b V, ad h. Homer, (ed. Lips. 1805.) p. 0. Syntax . Of the Optative and Conjunctive. 787 4. Of the Optative and Conjunctive after the Relative, os, οσ -Tis, oios, οπού, ouev, %c. l. If the relatives refer to definite persons or things, 52 they are followed by the indicative. But if the person or thing be indefinite, i. e. if any person or thing of a kind, or every person or thing to which the accompany¬ ing definitions are applicable, be signified only generally, where in Latin quicunque or si quis is put; then the verb may be in the optative or conjunctive ; in the opta¬ tive without av, when the whole proposition affirms something of past time; in the conjunctive with av , when it affirms something of present or future time. Then the relative is mostly put with the conjunctive in general propositions. II. /3', 188. οντινα μεν βασιληα και εξοχον άνδρα κιχείη, τον S' ayavois επεεσσιν ερητύσασκε παραστάς. 198. ου έ* αν Srj μου τ' avSpa Ί$οι, βοόωντά τ' εφευροι , τον σκήπτρα) ελασασκε. Comp. κ, 489- Again, Agamemnon says. It. β\ 391 . ονίε κ kydv άπάνευθε μάχης εθεΧοντα νόησω μιμναζειν παρά νηυσι κορωνίσιν , ου οι επειτα αρκιον εσσειται (Pvy^iv κυνας η& οιωνούς. Euvip. Tvoad. 380. ονς Α.ρης ε\οι, ου παϊδας εΐδον, ον ΰάμαρτος εν χεροΊυ πειτΧοις συνεστα - Χησαν , f all who fell in battle*. Thuc. vii , 29 . πάντας έξης, οτω εντύχοιεν , και παϊδας και yvvai κας κτείνοντες , whom¬ soever they might meet*. Comp. Xen. Anab. 11 , 5, 32. 6 , 13. 25. Thuc. II, 34. μία Se κλίνη κενή φερεται εστρω - μενη των αφανών , οι αν μη ευρεθώσιν qui HOTl inve- niuntur) είς άναίρεσιν. - ανηρ ρρημενος ύπο της πόλεως , ος αι/ yvώμη τε άοκγ μη άξυνετος είναι και άξιώματι προη- κη, Xe^yei επ' αύτοις επαίνου τον πρέποντα. II. μ, 48. οππη τ ίθΰση, Ttj τ είκουσι στίχες άντρων, Thuc . II, 11. € 7 recr#e. 788 Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive. οποί άν τις ηγηται. Blit Xetl. Anab. IV, 2, 24. μαχό με¬ ν >oi $e o\ ποΧεμιοι και όπη ε'ίη στενόν χωρίον προκαταΧαμ- βάνοντες εκώΧυον τάς παρόδους. The conjunctive in this case is mostly put in general propositions, when some¬ thing is expressed which happens usually, and at this time also, e. g. Xen. Mem. S. iv, 2, 29 . όρ$ς δε καί των πόΧεων ότι όσαι αν άγνοησασαι την εαυτών δυναμιν κρειττοσι ποΧεμησωσιν , αι μεν ανάστατοι yiyvovTai , α'ι δε εζ εΧευθερων δουΧαι , and passim. Obs. 1. In some places, however, the conjunctive or optative is put, where the opt. or conj. should be; e. g. Od. η, 33. ου yap ό'ιδε —ayai τάζόμενοι φιΧεουσ , ός κ αΧΧοθεν εΧθοι. Thus the optative is put for the conjunctive. II. oj 82. Herod. I, 29* όρκίοισι μεyάXoισι κατείχοντο Αθηναίοι, δέκα ετεα χρη- σεσθαι νόμοισι , τους άν σφι ΣόΧων θηται, which, however, seems to be a transition to the oratio recta. Xen. Cyr. 1 , 6, 19· του μεν αυτόν X^yeiv, ά μη σαφώς ειδείη, φείδεσθαι δει, for α άν είδη. Comp. 11 , 4, 10. But these deviations are rare, and generally the rule above-mentioned is observed, even by Thucydides, more closely than that of the use of those moods after ίνα, όφρα, Sfc. Obs. 2. av is usually put in the construction with the conjunctive, but is omitted in that with the optative c . Yet there are exceptions to this too. av is omitted in the construction with the conjunctive. II. μ, 48. Herod. 11 , 85. Tyrt. 111 , 16. 33. Plat. Menon. p. 329. Rep. vii, p. 138. Isocr. Panath. p. 248. D. Thus the reading is correct in Xen. Mem. S. 1 , 6, 13. οστις oe, ov av yvio ευφυα οντα, όιόασκω v ο τι αν εχρ ayauov , φίΧον ποιηται , SfC d . άν is put in the construction with the optative. Plat. Rep. vm, p. 211. κινδυνεύει τώ βουΧομενιρ ποΧιν κατασκενάζειν avayKaiov είναι , εις δημοκράτου με- νηυ εΧθόντι ποΧιν , ος άν αυτόν αρεσκοι τρόπος, τούτον c Dawes. Misc. Cr. p. 82. Again, Burgess, p. 501. d Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. C. 393. Porson. ad Eur. Or. 141. Notae ?d h.'Hom. p. 83. I t Syntax. Of the Optative and Conjunctive 789 εκλεξασθαι. But here also the conjunctive must be put, be¬ cause the discourse is upon something present. 'In Soph. (Ed. T. 77. eyco κακός μη Spwv αν είην πάνθ, οσ αν ο ήλοι θεός, which passage is quoted by Burgess, /. c. $ηλοι is the conjunc tive. Thus the reading is doubtful in Xen. Anab. H, 6, 25. οσους μεν £ay[] αισθανοιτο. Obs. 3. II. κ 3 43. Xpew βουλής εμε και σε, ίιοτρεφες ώ Χίενελαε, κερδαλεης , ητις κεν ερνσεται η$ε σαωσει Αρ- γειους και νηας , where, however, both may be the old form ,of the conjunctive. Comp. 282. Eurip. Ale. /7* Plat. Leg. p. 189. ους αν οι προσήκοντες rod τελευτησαντος εποφον- ται. 2. From these are to be distinguished the passages in which the optative is put after the relatives, in the sense which it usually has in independent propositions, and thus is the potential mood. II. ff, 292.. πρώτιρ -rot μ€Τ εμε πρεσβηιον εν χέρι Οησιν, ηε ·γυναιχ 3 η κει τοι όμον λόχος είσαναβαίνοι. Comp, κ, .166. Γ> 451 · ThuC. II, 39. και οΰκ εστιν, ore ζενηλασιαις aveipyopev τι να ij μαθήματος η θεάματος, ο μη κρυφθεν αν τών πολεμίων ’Μν ώφεληθείη. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 24. ον yap «τη, περί οτον ονκ άν πιθανότερου ε’ίποι 6 ρητορικός η άλλος οστισ- οΰν. Comp. ρ. 119. Euthyd. ρ. ιι. Phcedon. ρ. 229. μ iya αν βοιρης, 'ότι ούκ οϊσθα άλλως πως έκαστον γινόμενον, η μετασχόν της ίόίας ουσίας έκαστου , ου αν μετασχοι, of which they may partake’, άν is wanting in Sophocl . Phil. 693. 10 .) the optative is put with av in the consequences after a condition. 3. Sometimes also in these optatives ως or on is omitted. JEschyl. Again. 615. ταυτ άπάγγειΧον ττάσει, ηκειν όπως ταχιστ εράσμιον ί χόΧει' γυναίκα πίστην δ* εν δομοις ευροι μοΧων , οίαν περ ούν εΧειττε. Soph. Phil. 6 15. νπεσ*χετο τον ανδρ Α'χαιοις τόνδε δηΧωσειν άγων' ο’Ιοιτο μεν μάΧισθ', εκούσιον Χαβων, 8ξ0. Plat. Rep. IV, p. 32S. ει ημάς ανδριάντας γράφοντας προσεΧθων τις εψεγε, Χεγων, ότι ου τοις καΧΧίστοις του ζώου τά καΧΧιστα φάρμακα προσ- τίθεμεν' οι yap οφθαΧμοι, κάΧΧιστον ον 9 ουκ οστρείω ενα- ΧηΧιμμενοι εΊεν , άΧΧά μεΧανι. Comp. ib. X, p. 323. Symp. p. 226. Epist. vii, p. ιοί. Phcedon. p. 217 . Xen. Anab . vii, 3, 13 e . Of the Distinction between the Infinitive and the Participle. If a verb is governed of another verb or an adjec¬ tive, a double relation is established, according to which the use of the infinitive or participle or certain particles is determined : • Schsef. in Dion. Η. I. p. 102. » · Syntax . Of the Infinitive and Participle. 793 Either the leading verb or adjective conveys in itself a perfect and independent idea; Or it has no perfect idea, but expresses an action which first becomes perfect by the addition of its refer¬ ence. Thus the verbs ' I pray, I persuade, I will’, &c. always require an addition which expresses 'for what I pray, to what I persuade any one, what I will’. Now when such an imperfect verb or adjective refers to a verb, this reference expresses either the con¬ sequence in view, the end, or merely the object of the first verb or adjective. Thus in the propositions : ‘ Ϊ will write, I command you to write, I admonish you, warn you to go’, &c. the English infinitive is the conse¬ quence in view of the first verb, and is in most cases expressed in Latin by ut. On the contrary, in the pro¬ positions ' I saw him fall, I heard him say’, scio me esse mortalem, intelligo me errasse, the infinitive is merely the object, not the end of the verbs ‘ to see, hear, know, perceive’. Hereupon are founded the following* rules. l. When an imperfect verb or adjective followed by a verb which expresses the object or the consequence of it, the latter in Greek is put in the infinitive, without a conjunction. Thus the infinitive sometimes answers to the infinitive in Latin after the verbs nolo, cupio, conor, audeo, 8gc. when the subject of the two actions is the same, sometimes to the conjunctions, ut, ne, quominus: e. g. oro te, ut venias, hortor te, ut scri¬ bes, impulit me, ut discerem, persuasit mihi,ut pro- ficiscerer, imperavit mihi, ut ad te irem, impedivit me, quominus scriberem, must be rendered in Greek 794 Syntax. Of the Infinitive and Participle. by the infinitive! $εομαι σου εΧθειν, παραινώ σοι y ρά- (j)eiVy παρωζννεν εμε μανθαι>ειν, επεισεν εμε πορενε- σθαι, εκεΧενσε v εμε (εμοι) προς σε εΧθεΊν, εμωΧνσεν με •γραφειν, or μη ypdcpeiv. According to the rule in this case, no conjunction is put with the infinitive or conj. opt. instead of the simple infinitive, .although some few cases are found in which conjunctions are put; of which hereafter. επιμεΧεΊσθαι , however, consti¬ tutes a regular exception, which is followed by 'όπως, with the finite verb. 2. When an imperfect verb is accompanied by an¬ other, which marks merely the object of the former; the latter is put in the participle, sometimes where in Latin the participle is used, as video te scribentem , audio te docentem , ορω σε ypacpovra, ακούω σε $ι$άσκοντα, sometimes after verbs, which indicate a perception by means of the external senses, or the understanding, {verba sensuum) where in Latin the accus. with the infin. is used, as scio me esse mortalem , sentio te iratum esse, $c. oiSa θνητός ων , αισθάνομαι σε "χαΧεπαίνοντα. The distinction of the construction with the infini¬ tive, and with the participle, is most clearly shewn, when the same verb takes, according to its different senses, sometimes one, sometimes the other mood, e. g. μαθεΐν, 'to perceive', has the participle, JEschyl . Prom. 62. 1m μαθτι σοφιστής ών τον Δίος* νωθε στερος. But μ. Τθ learn', has the infinitive, Xen. Cyr. iv, l, 18. ει μαθη- σονται εναντιονσθ ai. Thus too yiyv^Keiv, Thuc . I, 102. eyvwTav άποπεμπόμενοι , f they perceived that they were sent away’; but Soph. Antig. 1089. Iva — yv$ τρε - φειν την yXwσσav ησνγωτεραν , That he may learn', ποιεΐν , ‘to make', is followed regularly by the infinitive, αρετής ποιησας επιθυμεΊν, Xen. Mem. S. i, 2, 2. quumfaceret , ut Syntax. Of the Infinitive and Participle. 793 virtuti studerent; but π οιειυ, f to represents has the object in the participle, as in Latin. Isocr. Evag. p. 190. D. tols ττοιηταΊς — του? θεούς οίον τ εστι ποιησαι και $ iaXey ο- μενονς και σνναγωνιζομενονς, οΐς άν βουΧηθωσιν. (ποιεί ν, ‘to put the case’, Xen. Anab. v, 7, 9. has the infinitive, as νομίζω , Χε^γω.) 3. The verbs ‘ to say, to announce, constitute a regular exception to this rule; as well as f to mean, to think, to hope’, which take the infinitive; the former also take on , with the finite verb, &?λουυ, however, takes the participle. 4. If the former verb is of itself perfect, or be pre¬ ceded by a proposition entirely perfect, then the object of it is expressed by means of conjunctions, : iva , οφρα, όπως, e. g. παραινώ σοι μαθειν y ραμματα , ινα σοφωτερος yevr\, but the consequence not immediately in view is expressed by ώστε with the infinitive. Fhis takes place especially after the comparative τοσουτο?, τοιουτος , ούτως. These rules are more clearly illustrated in the fol¬ lowing sections. Of the Infinitive. The Infinitive is thus put, l. after verbs which im- 531 ply any object whatever, and require the addition of this object or its effect, by means of another verb ; and then sometimes, when the subject of both verbs remains the same, as f to wish, to desire', εθεΧω , βούΧομαι, επι- θυμεω , επιχειρεω (conor), πειράομαι , τοΧμάω , δύναμαι, εχφ in the sense of ‘ I can', εξεστι (licet), οΐόν τ εστι , μεΧΧω, 796 Syntax. Ο /’ the Infinitive. προαιρεομαι ( statuo ), είωθα 3 c I am accustomed’, μανθάνω 9 ‘ I learn’, (and 7rat 1. ολ'^ον άπολιπόντι ες αύτάς ’Αθήνας άπικεσθαι ουδείς ηντιωθη ες μάχην. IX, 33. παρά εν πάλαισμα εδραμε νικ^ν ’ Ολυμπιάδα , per solam luctam stetit 3 quominus prce- mium reportaret. Thuc. iv, 106. την ΉΊονα παρά νύκτα ey ενετό λαβε7ν 3 per unam noctem stetit 3 quominus • .i-... ' _ 2 _ ' f Herm. ad Viger. p. 744, 195. I ^ > ^ • J 797 Syntax . Of the Infinitive . ' occuparet. VIII, 76 . η Σάμος 7 ταρ τάχιστον ήλθε το 'Αθη¬ ναίων κράτος άφε\εσθ aii For the same reason the infinitive is put after πεφυ- κάναι, ita natura comparatum esse, ut — Soph. Phil. 80, €ξοι$α καί φύσει σε μη τ νεφυκότα τοιαύτα φωνεΊν , μη&ί τεχνάσθαι κακά. ib. 88. εφυν yap ούδευ εκ τύχνης πράσ- σειν κακώς. Thucyd. II, 64. πάντα πεφυκε και ελασσον- σθαι. The construction is different from the Latin in the infinitive after the verbs ‘ to chuse, to appoint’. Herod. V, 97· στρατηγόν άποίεξαντες αϋτεων elf at λίελανθιον. Comp. ib. 99 . Xen. Mem. S. 1 , 7, 3. Ζήλον, Art κυβερ¬ νάν κατασταθείς ό μη έπιστάμενος η στρατηγειν, απολε- σεπν Αν, οίς ήκιστα βούλοιτο. ib. Ill, 3, 1,, ίππαρχεΊν τινι ηρημενψ οίδά ποτέ αυτοί/ τοιάδε οιαλεχθύντα. Comp. Ages. ι, 24. Thus the infinitive is put after παρασκευάζεσθαι also. Time, ill, 110. τη άλλρ στρατί $ άμα παρεσκευάζετο βοη¬ θέ! v επ' αυτούς, ad opem suis contra illos ferendam se preeparabat. Yet here the participle also is put. See below. Obs. 1. It was remarked, §. 530. 1. that έπιμελε'ισθαι con¬ stitutes a regular exception to this rule. Xen. Cyr. n, I, 29 . ίπεμύΧετο δε καί τοίδε δ Κύρος, Α π ως μηποτε ανέρωτοι γε- νομενοι επί τ<5 αριστον καί τδ Ζεΐπνον είσίοιεν, and passim When πείθειν is not followed by the action which is implied by the persuasion, but by the object of the persuasion where in Latin the accus. with the infin. is put after persuadere then oV, or ok is generally put; e. g. Xen. Mem. S. in πολλακις έθαύμασα, τίσι ποτέ λόγοις ’Αθηναίους επεισαν οι γραψαμενοι : Ζωκράτην , «is άξιος είη θανάτου τ rj πολει. Γ)Α« 2 These verbs nevertheless are sometimes followed by a conjunction. Eurip. Hipp. 1327. Kikrp.s 7 άρ ήθελ ώστε γίγνεσθαι τάδε πληρούσα θυμόν. Herod, νιι, 101. ως VOL. II. Ε Ε 798 Syntax. Of the Infinitive . στρατη^/ησεις της * Ελλάδθ9, yXi^eai. Id. VI, 133. oi II άριοι οκως μεν τι δωσουσι Μ ιΧτιάδφ apyvpiov, ουδεν διενοευντο. Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 13. βουΧευομαι οιτως σε cn τοδρω. Soph. Phil. 6*36. άρ εστιν, ώστε KayyvOev θεάν Xaf. 3eii/; Isocrat. ad Phil . £>. 110. B. προ ποΧΧου αν εποιησάμην οΐόν τ είναι ο 7τ ο' 9 αν συνερανίσαιμι τους Xόyoυς πάντας. Plat · Leg. IV, ρ. 172. εξεις ώστε —δ ιοικησαι . Oc?. (f, 344. Χίσσετο δ’ αίει 'Ήφαιστον κΧυτοε^όν, όπως Χυσειεν 'Αρηα. Herod . Ill, 44. εδεηθη, όπως αν—δεοιτο στρατού. Comp, ib. 135. ΙΧ^ 117· I hue. V , 36. T. 1ms too εΐΊΐ ως Herod. v, 30.— Thuc. VIII, 63. προτρεπειν , ώστε. Herod. VIII, 15. οί μεν δη πά¬ ρε κεΧεύοντο, οκως μη παρησουσι ες την * Ελλάδα τους βαρβάρους , οί δε οκως κρατησουσι. Plat. Rep. VIII, ρ. 196. δι ακεΧευ οντα ι, ο πως — τιμωρησεται. Id. Phcedon. ρ. 135. πapayyεXXoυσιv :) ο7τα>9— τεΧευτα. Comp. Rep. Ill, ρ. 320. — Herod. VI, 5. ου yap ε πείθε 7-01)9 X/ot/ 9 , ώστε εωυτω δούναι νέας. Comp. VII, 6. Thuc. II, 101. Ill, 75. Plat. Hipparch. p. 262.— Herod, ill, 14. συνηνε ικε, ώστε των συμποτεων ο'ι άνδρα άπηΧικεστερον — παριεναι. Thuc. V, 14. ζυνεβη - άστε πόΧεμου μεν μηδέν ετι άφασθαι μηδε- τερους. Comp. Plat. Alcib. II, ρ. 97. — Thuc. II, 99· πα- ρεσκευάζον το, όπως — εσβαΧουσιν. — Plat. Phcedon. ρ. 235. ουτω πεφυκεναι άστε άποΧείπεσθαι. Comp. ib. 236.— Xen. Ages. I, 37. Agesilaus εποίησεν, άστ άνευ fivy^ και θανάτων—τάς ποΧεις διατεΧεσαι. 2. For the same reason the infinitive is put after many adjectives, expressing· f fitness, ability’; by which a verb following is affected, e. g. δυνατός , άδυνατος , " able’. Thuc. 1, 139· Χ^ειν τε και πράσσειν δυνατάτατος .— δεινός , "strong in any thing, adapted, fitted for any thing’. Eurip . Ph. 739. ενδυστυχησαι δεινόν εύφρόνης κνεφας. ικανός , e proper, qualified’. Xen. Mem. S. 11 , 9 , 4 . Άρχε- δημον πάνυ μεν ικανόν ειπεΊν τε καί πράζαι. επιτή¬ δειος, " adapted, suitable’, as Herod, ιχ, 7 . της y e ημετε- ρης επιτηδεωτατον εστι εμμαχεσασθαι τό θριάσιον πεδίον, campus maxime idoneus , in quo pugna committatur . 799 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. Comp. Thuc. II, 20 g . Thuc. I, 70. οί μεν ye νειοτε ροττοιοι και επινοησαι οξείς και επιτεΧεσαι epyto ο αν yvwTiv. Id. II, 6θ. ο? ούδενός ησσων οίομαι είναι yvwvai τε τα Ζέοντα και e ρμηνβΰσαι ταΖτα. Herod. VI, 108. συμβου- Χεύομεν ύμίν δούναι ύμεας αυτούς Αθηναίοισι, πΧησιοχωροισι τε άνδράσι και τιμωρεειν εούσι ον κακοΊσι. Eur . Or. 896. πιθανός ετ αστούς περιβαΧείν κακω τινι. Ηίρρ. 1124. ω9 ey καθηβαν πόΧΧ εχεις ευδαιμονα. Thus also after «7 αθός. The same relation obtains also in many com¬ binations with ράύιος, χαΧεττος, and others, which signify * easy, difficult 5 ; but which generally belong to §. 534. h. Hence άξιός είμι with the infinitive, I deserve, e. g. Thuc. II, 40. αξίαν είναι την ποΧιν θαυμαξεσθαι digUCim esse, quce in admiratione sit. (§. 296.) after δίκαιος ειμι (See ih.) after οϊός τ είμι (§. 479. Obs. 2.) also after τοιόσδε. II. ζ 3 463. χητει τοιοϊδ* * άνδρός άμυνειν νηΧεες ημαρ. Comp. Od. η, 309. ω, 253. after τγο7ο9. Od. φ' 3 195. 7Γ οίοί κ είτ Όδνσηι άμννόμεν; Eurip. Iph. A. 1404. είς y άνηρ κρείσσων y νναικών μυριων opq.v φαος , for άξιος. After οίθ 9 · Od. β\ 271. el δη τοι σου ττατρός ενεστακται μένος ην 3 οΐος εκείνος εην τεΧεσαι epyov τε έπος τε. Comp. ih. ξ', 490. χ, 234 h . Obs. 1. Sometimes a conjunction instead of the simple in¬ finitive is put after these adjectives also, e. g. άστε after αδύ¬ νατον Plat. Prot. p. 143. after ικανός id. Polit. p. 84 . δεινός προς τό ποιησαι Isocr. p. 192 . E. \ Obs. 2. "Αξιος is sometimes followed by the infin. active for the passive. Thuc. 1, 138. άξιος θαυμάσαι. Eur. Or. llfil. άξια στι ryfiv. Herod, tx, 77. άξιοι οφασαν ehai σφέας ζη- g Valcken. et Wessel. ad Her. p. 6'94, 100. 8. h Fisch. hi, b. p. 13 sqq. * Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 291- 325. E E 2 800 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. μιώσαι. Thus too Χοιπδς σκεψασθαι P/at. Rep. ix. in. vice versa Plato puts the passive for the active Alcib. i, p. 8. τούτων σοι απαντων των διανοημάτων τεΧος επιτεθηναι αδύνατον, for επιθείναι. 533. 3. Again, the infinitive is put after verbs 1 to say', and all those in which this idea is implied, as f to assert, to deny, to mention, announce, shew ; to think, mean, hope’, and f to seem’; which in Latin also is followed by the infinitive. Instances will be given below. Hence also the infinitive after εΧθείν for ayy εΧΧεσθαι. Xen. Ages. I, 36. επειδή ηΧθεν αύτω an το των οίκοι τεΧών βοη¬ θάν Trj 7 τατρίδι. Thus too after enraipoiLaiy c I glory in% Thuc. i, 25. ναυτικφ και ποΧν 7 r ροεχε ιν εστιν οτε επαιρά- μενοι. Obs. 1. Verbs ‘ to say’, and those in which this idea is implied, are often followed by οτι or ω?, c that, so that’, Xe- yovai τον εταίρον τεθνάναι , and Xeyovaiv , ως (οτι) 6 εταίρος τεθνηκε , are equivalent. This is rarely the case after εΧπίζω Thuc. v, 9. Toils εναντίους εικάζω — ονκ αν εΧπίσαντας, ως άν επεζεΧθοι τίς αυτοίς ες μάχην, άναβηναι , after δοκεω. Plat. Criton. ρ. 102. ποΧΧοις δόζω, ώς, οΐός τε ων σε σώζειν, ει ηθεΧον άναΧίσκειν χρήματα , άμεΧησαιμι. The following construction accords with those in the preceding §. Obs. 2. IL nr 3 652. ώδε δε oi φρονεοντι δοάσσατο κερδιον είναι, δ φρ ηδς θεράπων ΤΙηΧηίάδεω ΆχϊΧήος εζαυτις Τρώα? — ωσαιτσ 7 νροτι άστυ , which elsewhere is always followed by the infinitive* Obs. 2. Verbs f to fear’, are not regularly followed by the infinitive, but by μη with the finite verb , as in Latin ne. Yet here also sometimes the infinitive only is put. Pur. Ion. 1564. θανείν σε δείσας μητρδς εκ βονΧευμάτων. Id. Hec. 762. πατήρ νιν εξεπεμψεν, ορρωδών θανείν. After κινδυνευειν , on the contrary, the infinitive is generally put. Thuc. in, 74. η ποΧις εκινδυνευσε πάσα διαφθαρηναι. Hence id. ιι, 35. εμοι δ ’ άν άρκονν εδόκει είναι — μη εν ενι άνδρι ποΧ - Χών αρετάς κινδυνεύεσθαι εύ τε και χείρον είπόντι πι~ σ τευθηναι. 801 Syntax . Of the Infinitive. Ohs. 3. After verbs, which contain a denia], both those which belong to 2, and to 1, the Greeks add frequently the negation μη to the infinitive, (r) 1. After verbs ( to prohibit’. Eurip. Suppl. 469· εγώ δ απαντώ - Άδραστον eh yrjv τη νδε μη παριεναι. Her. Ill, 128. Δαρειο? άπ ay ορευει ύμιν μη δορυφορεειν *Οροίτεα. Comp. Arist. Thesm. 790. k Also with the construction men¬ tioned in §. 581. Obs. 2. Plat. Rep. I, p. 171. a^yopeves όπως μη τούτο άποκρινοίμην. lb. 167- πώς Xeyew, μη απο - f τ -» § / κρινωμαι , ων προειπες μηοεν. 2. f To deny’, SopA. Α/ζί. 442. ^ καταρνρ μη δε- δρακεναι τάδε. Comp. 545. Arist. Plut . 241. εξαρνός εστι μη8 ίδεΊν με πώποτε. Id. Equ. 572. ηρνουντο μη πεπτω - κεναζ * 1 . Similarly, Herod. VII, 12. μετά δ») βουΧεύεαι , ώ Πε'ρσα, στράτευμα μη ayeiv επι την Έλλα'δα, and άντερεΤν, with which ASscA. Agara. 550. μ»; is omitted: χαίρω * τεθνάναι δ’ ov/c eV άντερώ θεοις. 3. f To prevent, to restrain’. Ewrzp. Hec. 8β0. νόμων 7 ρα- <£cu etpyovai χρησθαι μη κατά y νώμην τρόποις., Soph. El. 517 . ον πάρεστ A > ιyισθoς i ος σ επειχ αει μητοιθυραιαν y ουσαν αίσχυνειν φ'ιΧους. Comp. Herod. I, 158. Thuc. I, 73. SopA. (Ed. T. 1387. Eurip. Iph. A. 661.^ Similarly, Eurip. Herc.f. 197. το σώμα ρυεται μη κατθανειν. Yet here sometimes μη is wanting. Eurip. Or. 257- σχησω σε πηδ^ν δυστυχή πηδήματα. Plat. Lys. ρ. 221. διμκωΧυουσι τούτο ποιειν , ό αν βουΧρ. Comp. Soph. Aj. 70. Eurip. Rh. 432. A/c. 11. ον θανεΊν ερρυσάμην. 308. 4 . Thus also after τ ravetv, Xriyeiv, άπεχεσθαι , and simi¬ larly JEsch. Prom. 248. θνητούς έπαυσα μη προδερκεσθαι μό- ρον. Thuc. VII, 53. παιϋσαντες την fiXoya καί το μη προσεΧ- θειν eyyw την οΧκαδα του κίνδυνου aπη\Xayησav. Comp. k Koen. ad Greg. p. 73. 1 Heind. ad Plat. Lys. p. 8. 802 Syntax . Of the Infinitive . Soph. EL 107. TAwc. V, 25. άττεσχοντο μη επιτην εκατερω v •χωράν στρατεύσαι. Plat. Rep. I, p. 203. oi)/c άπεσχόμη v του μη ούκ επι τούτο εΧθεΐν απ εκείνου. Similarly, Thuc. VII, 6. άστε — εκείνους και πανταπασιν άπεστερηκεναι (' ‘ to render incapable*), e ί και κρατοίεν , μη αν ετι σφας αποτειχισαι. Soph. El. 133. ου$ εθεΧω προΧιπειν τόοε, μη ου τον εμον στοναχείν πατερ άθΧιον. Eurip . Androm. 339· ην δ* ούν €<γω μεν μη θανειν υπεκ^ραμω. Xen, Anah. I, S, 2. Κ Χεαρχος μικρόν εζεφνγε τού μη καταπετρωθηναι , parum aherat, quin m . 5. i To be cautious*. Herod . V, 78. οκως τις ύστερον φυ- Χάσσηται των βαρβάρων μη υπαρχειν ερ'γα ατασθαΧα ττοιεων ες τούς 'ΈΧΧηνας. 6. f Not to believe*. Thuc. IV, 40. άπιστούντες μη είναι τούς παρα^όντας τοις τεθνεωσιν ομοίους. Comp. II, 101. ΙΙΙ> 6. VIII, 1. and with the construction mentioned §. 531. Obs. 2. Plat. Menon.p. 368. απιστείς μη ούκ επιστήμη rj η αρετή η . 534. 4. An infinitive is sometimes put with words which express a quality, and shews the respect in which that quality obtains, where in Latin, after adjectives, the supine in — u 3 or the gerund in — do follows. The infinitive in that case has the same signification as the accusative of the substantive, with or without κατά. a. With verbs. Hesiod. Theog. 700. είσατο $ άντα οφθαΧμοίσιν ϊδείν η& ομμασιν οσσαν άκούσαι αύτως ως οτε ycua και ούρανος ευρύς ύπερθε πίΧνατο , c it appeared to the sight or hearing*. (Comp. 11. χ, 410.) Od. ί , 143. ούύε προυφαίνετ ί^εσθαι. Plat. Plicedon. p. 191 · ι^ειν εφαίνετο. Soph. El. 664. πρεπει yap ως τύραννος etcro- pqv. Plat. Rep. VI, p. 93 . δοκείς ούν τι ΰιαφερειν αύτούς m Heind. ad Plat. Parm. p. 246. n Duker. ad Thucyd. 11 , 101. On the whole Observ. Comp. Herm. ad Viger. p. 777. 271. 803 Syntax. Of the Infinitive . i$€iv apyvpiov κτησαμενου γαΚκεως. (instead of vvhich id. Hipparch. p. 265. διαφέρει κατά το σιτίον είναι). The infinitive seems to be thus put Eurip. Med. 125. των yap μέτριων πρώτα μεν είπειν τουνομα νίκα, diet'll optimum est°. b. This infinitive is particularly frequent after adjec¬ tives. II. k } 437. θείε tv άνεμοισιν ομοιοι, for δμοίοι κατα τον δρόμον. lb. 402. οι δ> ά\εyεLVol δαμημεναι, difficiles domitu. Herod. IV, 53. Β ορυσθενης πίνεσθαι ηδ ιστός εστιν. Eurip. Iphig. A. 275. κατειδόμαν πρυμνας σήμα ταυ ρόπουν οριι,ν, παροικον Α\φεον. tb. 318. ουμος, ουχ ο τουδε, μύθος κνριώτερος \ε y ειν, potior dictu. Id. Phcen. 512. νυν ουθ όμοιον ουδεν ουτ ’ίσον βροτοις , πΧην δνομάσαι, ί. e. π\ην κατά το δνομα, c with respect to the name’. Aristoph. Nub. 1172. νυν μεν y ιδειν ei πρώτον εζαρνητικός. Comp. Αν. 1710. Plat. Phcedon. p. 249· λέγεται είναι τοιαυτη η yrj αυτή ίδείν. Comp. Alcib. ϊ, p. 9 . Gorg. ρ. 71. πιθανώτατοι \£y ειν, in dicendo. Theocr. 11, 20. Χευκοτερα πακτάς ποτιδειν. Thus Hoiace says Od. IV, 2. niveus videri. Partidf&rly after ρ4διος, χα- λεττό?. Plat . Critia. p. 51. Thuc. iv, 10. Xen. Mem. S. 1 , 6/ 9 p . (R) The infinitive active frequently stands for the inf. passive. II. Ψ, 655. ητ άπιστη δαμάσασθαι, which, II κ\ 402. is 01 δ’ aXe'y εινοί δαμημεναι. AEsch. Prom. 246. είσορφν ε Ί ώ. Eurip. Med. 320. άνηρ ράων φυ- λάσσειν, for φυλάσσεσθαι. Plat. Rep. X, ρ. 290. ρ$ια ποιεϊν μϊ είδότι την άληθειαν. Active and passive for each 0 Interpr. ad Eurip. Suppl. 1056. Brunck. ad Soph. El. 664. p Fisch. in, b. p. 24. 804 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. other, Isocr. Panath. T. n, p. 262 . ed. Battie άκουσαι μεν ίσως τισιν αηδή, ρηθήναι δε ούκ άσνμφορον (1 . f · ν t · 1 i - « / ' ^ 4 c. In a similar manner the infin. t£e?i/ is put after a substan¬ tive in Plat. Critia , p. 53. εις εκπληζιν ^eyeOeai κάλλεσί τε epyojv ίδεϊ v την όίκησιν aireipyaTavTo. Ohs. Sometimes with an infinitive a word must be supplied from another proposition. Herod. I, 82. Λακεδαιμόνιοι δε τα εναντία τούτων εθεντο νόμον * ου yap κομώντες ί τρό τούτον από τούτον κομ^,ν, sc. νόμον εθεντο. Sometimes also an infinitive requires a word to be supplied which is the opposite to the preceding one, as Herod. VII, J04. d νόμος - avooyei τωί/το αίεί, ονκ εών (pevyetv ονδεν πλήθος ανθρώπων εκ μά-χης, αλλά μένοντας εν τγ τάζει επι- κρατεειν ή άπόλλνσθαι sc. κελευων , the contrary to ονκ εών, as Cicer. Fin. II, 21, 68. Comp. Herod. VII, 143. Thuc. IV, 9· Furip. Or. 608. ώ πλήν y νναικός ουνεκα στ ρατηλα- τειν , ταλλ ονδεν , in ονδεν lies the antithesis δεινός , \κανός, which must be supplied to στρατηλατεΊν 1 . Or in a negative word is implied the idea ‘ to say, mean/ Thuc. I, 44. oi Αθη¬ ναίοι μετ^νωσαν ( f changed their decision, and determined , ). K ερκνραιοις ζι'μμαχίαν μεν μη ποιήσασθαι*. 5. The infinitive stands also after various other verbs, to express an object: _ ■ * · ' ' ! a. After the verbs f to give’, II. η , 251. Έ\ενην δώoμεvΆτpείδrισιvάyeιv ) (ibducendam demus. Thuc. II, 27· Tots AiyivtjTais ot Λακεδαιμόνιοι εδοσαν θυρεαν οίκε'ιν q Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. 1, p. 308. Dorv. ad Char. p. 435. 469. 52 6 . Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 1167. r Dorville ad Charit. p. 441. Hemst. ad Luc. T. hi, p. 3 77. Valcken. ad Herod, p. 552. 63. ; 5 Heind. ad Plat. Lys. p. 50. N Syntax. Of the Infinitive. 805 καί την 7 ην νέμεσθαι. Eur. Phan. 25. διδωσι βουκόλοισιν έκθεϊναι βρέφος. Comp. Iph. Ί\ 68. 696 . Thuc. ιν, 36. el δε βούλονται έαυτψ δούναι των τοξοτών μέρος τι και των φίλων ire ρ lie ναι κατά νώτου αυτοις. C Ο m ρ · Xen. Cyr. VII, 2, 26. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 74. παρέχειν εαυτόν τέ- fjive ιν και Kifetv, — τύπτειν — Selv. Comp. Apol. S. p. 77. Pheedr. p. 283. παρόντος δε Λυσίου εμαυτον σοι c μμνλ c ταυ παρέχειν οΰ ιτάνυ δέδοκται. Xen. Mem. S. I, 5, 2. έπιτρέφαι ή πάϊδας άρρενας παιδεΰσαι η θυγατέρας παρθένους διαφυλάξαι η χρήματα διασωσαι. Hence Eur. Iph. A. 1305. όθι κρήναι Νυμφάν κε'ινται, λειμών τ άνθεσι θάλλων χλωρούς, καί ροδόεντ ανθεα ύακίνθινά τε θεαισι δρέπειν. Comp. 1336. Arist. Eccl. 5 76. b. After verbs of motion c to go, send, &c. II. χ , 194. όσσάκι ύ ύρμήσειε πυλάων Ααρδανιάων άντιον άίξασθαι. 11. V, 27. βή X έλάαν. Comp. II. φ', 216 ., Od. y,' 176. Herod. IX, 59· Π έρσαι δε όρέοντες ώρμημένους δίωκε ιν τούς " Ελληνας , instead of which Xen. Anab. i, 8, 25. says εις το διώκειν ορμησαντες. Thuc. I, 50. οι K ορινθιοι πρός τούς άνθρώπους ’ετράποντο φονεόειν, where the infi¬ nitive is an epexegesis of the words προς τούς ανθρ. ετράποντο. Id. VIII, 29- Άστυόχω παραδουναι τας ναυς ξυμπλέων, ad naves Astyocho tradendas. Soph. lEd. L. 12. ήκομεν μανθάνειν. Eur. Iphig. A. 679- χώρει $ε μελα- θρων έντύς, όφθήναι κόραις. Thus also after πεμπειν. Herod, VII, 208. έπεμπε Ξ,έρξης κατάσκοπου ιππέα ι ε- σθαι όκόσοι τέ εισι και ο τι ποιέοιευ. Thucyd. ΐν,β.υπεκ- πέμπει φθάσας δύο ναός άγγεύλαι Εύρνμεοοντι. (R) c. In a similar manner the infinitive stands after μένειν, and it’s compounds. II. o', 599. ™ γάρ μένε μη- τιέτα Ζεύς, νηός καιομένης σέλας όφθάλμοισι ιδεσθαι. Plat. Lys. ρ. 224. ούκ άρα την ηλικίαν σου περιμενει ο πα¬ τήρ ίπιτρέπειν πάντα, as Eur. Ph. 230. Κα<τταΧ,α 5 806 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. ύ$ωρ επιμενει μ€ κόμας εμάς Several, where παρθενίου χΧί- 3άν is an apposition to κόμας εμάς. See §. 431. In the passage AEsch. Ag. 469 . μόνει S' άκουσαί τι μου μέ¬ ριμνα νυκτηρεφες is to be noticed the transition from the sense of c to stay'., to that of f to wish', which takes place peculiarly in μεμονα , c she waits to hear’, i. e. f wishes to hear’. d. The infinitive alone is also put, where the pre¬ ceding verb or the phrase gives a complete and inde¬ pendent sense : thus, where άστε ought to be put, in order to express a consequence. Herod. 1 , 32. el μη οι τύχη επίσποιτο , πάντα καΧά εχοντα τεΧε ντησαι εύ τον βίον. Id. II, 79. συμφερεται τωυτό είναι τό οι 'ΈΧΧηνες Αίνον όνομάζοντες άε&ουσι, .andasan epexegesis Thuc. hi, 6. της μεν θαΧάσσης eipyov , μη χρη σθαι 3 ΊΜιτυΧηναίους. Eurip. Iph. A. 1360. εις θόρυβόν τοι καυτός ηΧυθον. ΚΛΥΤ. ες τίν , ώ ξενε ; ΑΧ. σώμα Χευσθηναι πετροις, (as εκινόυνενον Χευσθηναι) ΚΛ. μών κόρην σώζειν εμηυ ; for ίνα σώζοις. See Markland's Note. And thus, it seems, the following phrases are to be explained. II. σ, 14. eywv όόε πάντα παράσχει v, CtdsUTil (§. 470.) Ut preeheam. II. v } 312. νηυσι μεν εν μεσσγ\σιν αμυνειν εισι και αΧΧοι. Od. χ 3 106. άμυνεσθαι πάρ ( πά- ρεισιν) όίστοί, and with the omission of the verb είναι Eur. Or. 1479· που όητ αμυνειν οι κατά στβγα$ Φpυyeς; Phryges , qui auxilium ferre possent. Soph. (Ed. T. 792 . ώς yevoς άτΧητον ανθρώποισι όηΧώσ οιμ όραν , unless όραν belongs to άτΧητον , according to §. 534. (Ed . Col. 752. τούπιόντος άρπάσαι, where, at the same time, the active stands for the passive, ώστε αρπασθηναι. Eurip. Iphig. A. 1478. πΧόκαμος όόε καταστεφειν, etl COinam. quam cingCttis. Plat. Prot. p. 124. σμικρου τίνος ενόεης 807 Syntax. Of the Infinitive'. €ΐμι ττάντ eyeiv, where perhaps μη is wanting, €ΐμι μη ττάντ ίχ. quominus omnia haheam. If the infinitive has a subject of its own, it is put in 535 the accusative; but if this is the same with the object which stood in the preceding sentence, upon which the infinitive depended, the subject is put in the same case as in the preceding instance. But when the subject of the infinitive is the subject also of the preceding finite verb, then it is omitted with the infinitive, except when an emphasis is laid upon it, e. g. dicebat, se esse ducem f means εφη ehai στρατηγό*, but dicebat, se esse dueem, non illos, βφη αι)το? eivcu στρατηγός, ουκ e/c eivovs . The nominative with the infinitive II. a , 397· εφησθα κελαινεφέί Κρονίωνι οίη εν αθανατοισιν αεικεα \otyov άμΰναι, te sol am perniciem ab eo depulisse. Herod. VIII, 137- oi oe τον μισθόν έφασαν δίκαιοι elvai άττοΧαΙ.3όντε, οίτω ίξιέναι. I, 57. είχε φάς, αύτό, μύν άμφοτύρων ήδη πεπειρήσθαι, κείνον δε ου. , Comp. IX, 90. Thuc. I, 69. άντι του έπελθεΐν αυτοί άμύνεσθαι βουλεσθε μθλλον έπιόνται. Comp. Π. 40. extr. VII, 5& VIII, 47. Plat. Protag. Ρ· 139- rod δε διαλέχεσθαι οίό, τ’ είναι θαυ- μάζοιμ άν εί τω άνθρώπων παραχωρεί. Id. Hipp. Maj. ρ. 44 sq. άρ ουν, φήσει, ηδύ ήδεο, ότιούν ότονούν ^ διαφέρει τούτω, τω ηδύ είναι; μη χάρ, ε’ι μείζων τίί ηδονή η έλατ- των, ‘η μάλλον η ήττύν ίστιν, αλλ’ εί τι, αύτω τούτω διαφέ¬ ρει, τω ή μεν η δον η είναι, ή δε μη~ ηδονή. Eur. Iph. A. 1222. ' εί μεν τον Όρφέω, είχαν, ω πάτερ, λόχον, πείθειν ίπάδουσ, άσθ’ όμαρτείν μοι πέτρα,. Phan. 488. εξήλθον εξωτήσΧ έκων αύτό, χθονό,, - ωστ αύτό, αρχειν αύθκ t Fiscli. hi, b. ρ. 9 sq. 12. ♦ 808 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. άνα μέρος Χαβων, και μη St εχθρας τφδε και φόνου μοΧώ ν κακόν τι Spaa at και παθειν, a yiyi ιεται. But in Or. 1 120 . κεχαρμενη would be an error. Comp. Xen. Cyr. rv, 2, 12. Mem. S. n, l, 15. 3, 17. Ages. 9, 1.2. The genitive with the infinitive, Thuc. vii, 51 . ως και αυτών KareyvwKOTwv ηδη, μηκετι κρεισσόνων είναι σφών μήτε ταίς ναυσι , μήτε τ<£ πεζφ. Plat. Epist. VII, ρ. 97 · πόΧις oύSeμίa αν ηρεμησαι κατά νόμους ουδ’ ούστινασουν, αν- δρων οίομενων άναΧίσκειν μεν δείν πάντα εις υπερβοΧας , apywv δε εις άπαντα γουμένων αν δείν ylyveaOai , πΧην εις ευωχίας και πότους και άφρoSισίωv σπουδας διαπονουμενών. Comp. Apol. S. ρ. 49) 50 , 51 . The dative with the infinitive. Herod, vi, 11 . επί ζνρου yap ακμής εχεται ημίν τα πράyμaτa i η είναι. εΧευ- θεροισι , η δουΧοισ ι, και τουτοισι ω? δραπετρσι. Comp. VIII, 140, 2. I, 36, 90. Thuc. ΙΙ, 87. καί ούκ ενδώ- σομεν πρόφασιν ουδενι κακω yev0a6ai. Comp. VII, 77· Plat. Rep. II, ρ. 212. και αυτίρ ούτω συμβαίνειν , στρεφοντι μεν είσω την σφενδόνην, άδηΧω yiyi >εσθαι, εζω δε δηΧφ. Comp. ib. ιχ, ρ. 256. Aristot. Eth. hi, 5, 1. εφ’ ημίν εσται τό επιεικεσ ι και φανΧοις είναι. Comp. X, 10. p. 188. D. Xen. Hier. 10, 2. εν άνθρώποις τισιν εyylyvε- ται , όσω αν εκπΧεω τα δέοντα εχωσιν, τοσουτιρ νβριστό¬ τε ροις είναι. Comp. Cyr. π, 2, 12. Mem. S. ι, ι, 9. AEsch. Eumen. 893. Soph. (Ed. T. 1209 . Trach. 454. Eurip. Iph. A. 839. Demosth. p. 199. Obs. Yet there are many exceptions to this, and the accu¬ sative is often put with the infinitive, where the nominative, geni¬ tive, or dative should be put: For the nominative, II. v, 269. ουδέ yap ονδ’ εμε φημι ΧεΧα- σμενον εμμεναι αΧκης. Ilerod. 1,34. Κ ρεισος ενόμιζε, εωντον είναι πάντων οΧβιώτατον. Comp. I, 171. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 1 6. 809 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. Leg. ix, p. 17. Xen. Hellen . 11 , 3, 6. Isocr. Paneg. p. 58. Panath. p. 249- C. Ό emosth. p. 70, ll u . For the genitive. Thuc. 1, 120. άντρων σωφρονοιν μεν εστιν , €ί μη αδικοιντο, ησυ"^αζειν , a'yaOwv δε, αδικούμενους, εκ μεν ειρηνης ίΓ ολεμειν, fyc. Lysias ρ. 364. δέομαι υμών τα δίκαια ■φηφίσασθαι, ενθυμούμενους, οτι , fyc. Isocr. Plataic. ρ . 297· D. de permut. p. 313. C. D. Trapez. p . 370. A. Mgin. p . 394. D. E. x For the dative,, Herod. 1 , 37. κάλλιστα ί τρότερόν κοτβ και 'γενναιότατα ημίν ην, ες τε 7 τολεμους και ες ay ρας φοι - τεοντας ευδοκιμεειν . Comp, νι, 109* Thuc . π, 39· 7repiyi~ yvετuι ημιν τοις τε μελλουσιν aλyειvoις μη ττροκαμνειν Και ες αυτά ελθονσι , μ»} ατολμότερους των άει μοχθουντων φαί - νεσθαι. Comp, ιν, 20. Eur. Med. 810 Plat. Eutkyphr. p . 9· Xerc. Cyrop. 11 , 1, 15. Mem. S . 1 , 1, 9· 6, ^6* (Econ. 4. lifter. 2, 8, 10. 4. Rep. L. 5, 7. y Hence sometimes the two constructions are interchanged. Plat. Gorg. p. 98. οΐς εξ αρχής ύττηρξεν, η βασιλέων υ\εσιν είναι 3 η αυτούς τη φύσει ικανούς. Comp. ib. ρ. 138. Charm, ρ. 149. Rep. in, ρ. 307. Thus also II χ, 109. εμοι δε τότ άν πολύ κερδιον είη , άντην η Αχιληα κατα- κτείναντα νεεσθαι , ηε και αυτω ολεσθαι ευκλειως προ ί τοληος. If the subject of the infinitive is different from that 536. which occurred in the preceding sentence, it is put, together with all the definitions of it, in the accusative. This corresponds to the accusative with the infinitive, which is usual in Latin. Sometimes the infinitive has no definite subject, (where in English we use the word ‘ one*,) but certain collateral definitions, expressed by a partici¬ ple or adjective; in this case these also are put in the u Heind. ad Plat, Eutbyd. p. 414. x Markl. ad Lys. p. 364. 620 . y Wessel. ad Herod, p. 16 , 12 . Duker. ad Thuc. iv, 2 . vir, p. 507. Peiz. ad Lucian. T. vn, p. 576. Ernest, ad Xen. Mem. S. 11 , 6 , 26 . 810 > Syntax. Of the Infinitive. accusative, e. g. Xen. Cyr. i, 2, 16. αισχρό v όε ετι κα\ top Ιόντα που φανερόν yei ιεσθαι, where in Latin a subject quisquam is put, quemquam palam secedere turpe est. The accusative with the infinitive in Greek is put after all verbs, which would be followed by the simple infinitive, if the nature of the proposition admitted a peculiar subject of the infinitive. If the leading verb by itself governs another case than the accusative, then, when the infinitive follows, either the case which the verb governs, or the accusative, accompanies it, e. g. κελεύω σοι, τούτο ποιειν , and κελεύω σε τούτο ποιειν . See §·. 380. As μένω, &c. are followed by the infinitive alone, 535. c. so they have the accusative also with the infin. after them. Pind. Pyth. Ill, 28. ουκ εμεν’ ελθεΊν τρά¬ πεζαν νυμφίαν. Comp. Herod. V, 35. VIII, 56. Thuc. Ill, 2. Soph. El. 303. Track. 1176 . Arist. Lys. 74. Plat. Theaet . p. 115. Rep . 11 , p. 243. Lysias , p. 86. The same construc¬ tion also follows κιυόυνευειν. Thuc. IV, 1 5. κινόννευειν ουκ εβουλοντο υπό λιμού τι παθειρ αυτους , after εθ ίζεσθαι. Thuc. ιν, 34. ζυνειθισμενοι μάλλον μηκετι όειρους αυτους ομοίως σφίσι φαίνεσθαι, after αισχυρεσθαι. Χβϊί. Cyr. VIII, 4, 5. τον πρωτευορτα εν εόρφ ν/σχυνετο μη ου πΧε'ίστα και ayada εχοντα παρ’ αυτοΰ φαίνεσθαι. The accusative with the infin. is put especially after the verbs Xεyειp, άyyεXXεtv, and similar verbs of speaking. When these are in the passive, then either the subject of the infinitive is changed into the subject of the lead¬ ing verb, as in Latin, Xen. Cyr. i, 2. in. πατρός μεν όη Xeyerat Kijoos yεvεσθaι Καμβυσου. Id. ih. V, 3, 30. o A σσύριος είς την χωράν εμβάΧΧειν άyyeXXετaι. Plat. Rep. I, p. 179· ωμoX6yητaι ό ακριβής ιατρός σωμάτων 811 Syntax. Of the Infinitive . είναι αρχών, άΧΧ ου -χρηματιστής . (Comp. VI, p. 90 .) or the accus. with the infin. remains unaltered, which is equally common. Herod, viii, 118. Εερξεα XeyeTai ακουσαντα ταύτα είπαι. Plat. Phcddon. p. 163. ομοΧο- γειται όε και ταύττ), τοι)? ζώντας εκ των τεθνεωτων yeyovevai. Hence sometimes the two modes of con¬ struction are united. Plat. Charm, in. και μην rjyyeXTai ye η μάχη ισχυρά yeyovevai και ποΧΧους τεθναναι. In the same manner άοκε i, videtur, is followed by an accusative with the infin. c. Infin. Thuc. rv, 3. extr . Sometimes an accus. with the infin. is put, which is governed of the verb dicendi , cogitandi f understood’, or because the idea of to say, to think, is contained in the principal verb, as Herod, n, 174. απέλυσαν μη φώρα είναι. Id. VII, 220. XeyeTai όε, ως αυτός σφεας άπεπεμφε Αεωνίόης, μη άπόλωνται κηόόμενος ’ αυτω Se και Έπαρτιητεων Λ ^ > .,ί > ^ ^ ' ιγ τοισι παρεουσι ουκ εχ€ΐν~ ευπρεπεως εκλιπειν την ταςιν, which depends on νομίζων, contained in κηόόμενος. Thuc. II, 93. προσδοκία ούόεμία ην, μη άν ποτέ οι πολέ¬ μιοι εζαπιναίως ούτως επιπλευσειαν. επει ουό απο του προ¬ φανούς τοΧμησαι άν καθ ησυχίαν, ου$ε, εί όιενοουντο, μη ουκ άν προαισθεσθαι , because in προσδοκία the idea also of to mean, is contained. The accusative with the infin. is also put after par¬ ticles which begin an antecedent proposition, and in the construction with the relative, when the oratio obli- qua takes place. Herod. I, 94 . (Xεyovτeς) τούς Αυόους τέως μεν Siayetv Χιπαρεοντας* μετά όε, ως ου παυεσθαι (την σιτο- άηιην), άκεα όιζησθαι. Comp. I, 24. VIII, 111. 118. 135. Thuc . II, 102. XeyeTai όε και ΑΧκμαίωνι τφ Αμφιαρεω, οτε όη αΧάσθαι αυτόν μετά τον φονον της μητρος , τον ΑποΧΧω ταυτην την y -ην χρησαι οικειν. Plat. Sljmp. ρ. 169· επειόη $e yev^O αι επί Trj οικία τν) Ayaθωvoς. Comp. Jlldb. II, ρ. 98. Rep. X, ρ. 322. — Herod. Ill, 55. τιμάν $ε 5S8. 812 Syntax . Of the Infinitive. Σαμίους εφη> διότι ταφή ναι οι τον παππον δημοσίρ υπό Σαμίων εύ .— lb. 105. είναι δη ταχύτητα ούδενι ετερισ όμοιου, ουτω άστε, ει μη π ροΧαμβάνειν της όδοΰ τούς ’Ινδούς εν φ τούς μύρμηκας συΧΧεγ εσθαι, ουδενα αν σφεων αποσωζεσθαι. Comp. ib. 108. Plat. PhcedoTl. p. 163. ικανόν που τεκμήριου είναι, ότι αναγκαίου τας των τεθνεωτων ψυχάς είναι που, όθεν δη παΧιν γιγνεσθαι. Comp. Liv. IV, 51\— Herod. VI, 117. ανδρα ο'ι δοκεειν όπΧίτην άντιστηναι μεγαν, του το y ενειον την ασπίδα πασαν σκιάζειν. Soph. El. 421. εκ τε τούδ) άνω βΧαστειν βρύοντα θαΧΧον, φ κατασκιον πασαν y ενεσθ at την Μ υκη- ναίων χθόνα. Comp. ThllC. II, 13. 24. VII, 47· Plat · Leg. ιι, ρ . 97. Also, when the relative is the subject. Plat. Rep. X, p . 322 Sq. εφη , επειδή ον εκβηναι την ψυχήν; πορενεσθαι μετά ποΧΧων, και αφικνεισθαι σφας εις τόπον τινά δαιμόνων , εν ψ της τε γης δυο είναι - δικά - στάς δε μεταξύ τούτων καθησθαι * ους, επειδή διαδικασειαν, τούς μεν δικαίους κεΧενειν πορεύεσθαι, SC. Comp. Phcedon. P . 251. Her. II, 129 . Xen. Cyr. V, 2. 4. άπηγγεΧΧον τφ Κύρω, ότι τοσαυτα είη ένδον αγαθά, όσα επ άνθρωπων γε¬ νεάν, ω* σφίσι δοκέίν, μη αν επιΧείπειν τούς ένδον όντας. Obs. Some cases of anacoluthia are also to be noticed here * 1. After the verbs to say, &c. in addition to the construction of the accus. with the infin. another also with ως or ό τι is used, and hence writers not unfrequently pass from one to the other. Herod . vin, 118. εστι δε και αΧΧος όδε Χεγόμενος Χόγος, ως , επειδή Άερξης άπεΧαύνων εξ Άθηνεων άπικετο επ Ηιονα εκ ο μ ι- ζετο ός την Άσίην' πΧωοντα δε μιν άνεμον Στρνμονίην ύποΧαβείν. Comp. Xen. Hist . Gr. ιν, 3, 1. and vice versa ; Thuc. vni, 78. το ν T ισσαφερνην τάς τε ναύς ™υτας ου κόμιζε ιν, και τροφήν ότι ού ξυνεχως ούδ εντεΧη διοουϊ > ζ Wessel. ad Herod, ρ. 118. Herm. ad Viger. p. 79b 305. 813 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. κακοί, το ναυτικόν. Even the same proposition which begins with ώς or ότι , is continued mostly after an interruption, by means of a parenthesis, in the construction of the accus. with the infin. Acc. c. Inf. Herod, vii, 226. Αιηνεκης, τον το'$ε φασϊ είπαι το έπος' πριν η συμμίζαι σφεας τοισι Μ ηδοισι, πυθόμει>ον προς τευ των Ύ ρη^ινίων, ως, επεαν οι βάρβαροι άπιεωσι τά τορεύματα, τον ηΧιον νπό τον πΧηθεος των 6 ιστών αποκρύπτει ν. Plat. Phil. ρ· 314. οιμαι μεν προς ταυτα τόδ* αυτάς ανα^καιότατον είναι \eyeiv, — οτι, καθαπερ έμπροσθεν ερρηθη, το μόνον και έρημον ειΧικρινες είναι τι y ενός. Comp. lb. ρ. 219· Phccdon. ρ. 24 6 . Xen. Cyr. ι, 6, 5. εκείνα μεμνησαι, ά ποτέ εδοκει ημιν, ως, απερ δεδωκασιν οι θεοί, μαθόντας ανθρώπους βεΧτιον π ράττειν, η ανε- πιστημονας αυτών όντας, (where, after δεδωκασιν, μαθειν must be understood, or the words μαθ. ανθρ. β. πρ. taken twice. See Miscell. Philol. n, 2. p. 93.) Comp. ib. i, 6, 18. 25. Isocr. Enc.Hel. p. 218. E. Soph. (Ed. C. 385. Arist. Vesp . 100 sq. Vice versa the construction of the accus. w 7 ith the infin. passes into that with ως. Arist. Av. 651. όρα νυν, ως εν Αισώπου λο'γοι? εστιν Xeyόμεvov δη τι, τη ν αΧώπεχ ως φΧαύρως εκ οι νώ- νησεν αυτω ποτέ. Thuc. ill, 51. εβουΧετο δε Νικίας την φυΧακην αύτδθεν δι εΧάσσονος τοίς ’Αθηναίοις «— είναι, τούς τε ΪΙεΧοποννησίους, όπως μη ποιώνται εκπΧους αύτόθεν Χανθάνοντες , — τοίς τε Mεyαρενσιν άμα μηδέν εσπΧείν, where, at the same time, the construction εβουΧετο, όπως is to be remarked 1 . 2. Sometimes the construction of a proposition which pro¬ perly is independent, is determined by a parenthesis: Herod. lv, 5. ώς δε Σκύθαι λεγ ουσι, νεώτατον απάντων εθνεων είναι το σφετερον. ib. 95. ως δε εyω πυνθανομαι των τον ΕΧΧησποντον οικεόντων ΕΧΧηνων και ΤΙοντον, τον Ζ*άΧμοζιν τούτον, εόντα άνθρωπον , δουΧευσαι εν Σαμιρ. νΐι, 229· ώ μεν νυν ην μούνον Αριστόδημόν αΑτ^ησαντα απο- νοστησαι ες Σπάρτην, η και ο μου σφεων αμφοτερων την κομι- δην yεveσθaι, δοκεειν εμοι, ούκ άν σφι Σπαρτιητας μηνιν ούδεμίην προσθε σθαι, for ουκ αν προσεθεντο. Soph. Tr. a Wessel. ad Di<^d. S. iv, 26 *. F F VOL. II. 814 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. 1238. ανηρ oS , ως eoijcev, ου νεμειν εμοί φθίνοντι μοίραν, Xen. Anab. νι, 4, 18. ω? yap ε yw , από του αυτομάτου χθες ηκοντος πλοίου, ηκουσά τίνος , ο τι Κ \eavSpos εκ Ί&ν'ζαντίου αρμοστής μελλει ηζειν πλοία εχων καί τριηρεις *. The infinitive is joined also with the neuter of the article,, and stands as a substantive. This takes place through all cases, in all the combinations, in which the cases of the substantive stand, so that the infinitive stands as a subject or object in the nominative or accusative, as also in the genitive or dative after substantives, adjectives, and prepositions; and this takes place not only in simple infinitives, but also in the accusative with the infinitive, and even in entire long sentences. The infin. as subject in the nominative. Soph. Antig. 710. avSpa, κην τις rj σοφάς , το μανθάνειν πολλ*‘αισχρόν ovSev, καί το μη τείνειν ay αν. Comp. Track. 1228. Eunp. Andr. 185. Plat. Theag. p. 4. Xen. Cyr. v, 4, 19 . το άμαρτάνειν ανθρώπους όντας ovSev , οΐμαι 9 θαυμα¬ στόν. Comp, hi, 3, 49 . Mem. S. iv, 3, 5 — 12 . Thuc. I, 41. η ευεpyεσίa αυτή re καί η ες Σαμίους , το Si ημάς ΤΙελοποννησίονς αυτοις μγ βοηθη σαι, παρεσχεν υμΊν Alyi- νητών μεν επικράτησιν , Σαμίων Se κόλασιν % the infinitive explains the preceding substantive. Comp. Xen. Cyr. vn, 5, 52. and after τούτο ib. 75 . Plat. Phcedon.p. J80. τούτο yap εστι to Sia του σώματος το Si αίσθησεως σκο¬ πεί v τι , where το Sia του σ. σκοπεΊν is the subject, and το Si αίσθ. σκ. the predicate by τούτο. In the genitive. AEsch. Prom. 235 . όξερυσάμην βρο - τους του μη όιαρραισθεντας εις aSov μολεϊν. Xen. Mem. S. I, 2, 55. παρεκάλει επιμελεΐσθαι του ως φρονιμωτατον είναι καί ωφελιμωτατον. Ib. II, 1, 16. του Spaπετευειv - — , ,. ■ — ... ■■ . « ... -- b Steph. de Dial. p. 138. Herm. ad Vig. p. 737 sq. 815 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. ( τούς οίκέτας) δεσμοϊς direlpyovaiv o\ δεσποται. lb. I, 6, 8. του $e μη δ ουΧεύ ε iv yaTTpi μηδέ ύπνω και λα yveia οιει τι aXXo a ιτιώτε pov είναι , η το έτερα τούτων έχειν ηδίω .— Plat. Syrup, ρ. 264. έμοι ούδέν έστι π ρεσ βύτερον του ως οτι βεΧτιστον έμε y ενέ σθ αι. Xeu. Cyv. IV, 2 , 42. ου μοι δοκεί το Χαβείν κε ρδαΧεώτε ρον είναι του, δικαίους φαινομένους έκείνοις, τούτω πειράσθ αι έτι μάΧΧονι ποιείν αυτούς, η νυν, ασπάζεσθαι ημάς. — ib. Ill, 1, 9· το φευδο- μενον φαίνεσθαι , ευ ίσθι, οτι και τού συyyvώμης τίνος τι/γ* χάνε ιν έμποδών μαΧιστα άνθρώποις yίyvετaι ) and as explanatory of a pron. dem. Xen. Cyr. viii, 7, 25. τι τούτου μακαριωτερον , τού yrj μιχθηναι. Comp. Hier. 4, 2.— Xen. Mem . S. IV, 3, 1. άνευ τού σω- φρονείν » Id. Apol. S. 8. άντι τού ηδη Χηξαι τού βίου. Xen. Mem . 8. IV, 7, 5. το δε μέχρι τούτου αστρονομίαν μανθάνειν, μέχρι τού — yvcovai, where it constitutes an epexegesis of the foregoing pron. dem. Comp. Plat. Leg. u, p. 95. This genitive with υπέρ or ένεκα must be rendered by a suitable causal proposition. Thuc. I, 45. προείπον δε ταύτα τού μη Χυειν ενεκα τα? σπονδάς, ne fcedera frangerent. Xen. Hier. 4, 3. δόρυ- φορούσιν έπι τούς κακούpyoυς υπέρ τού μηδένα των ποΧιτών βιαίω θανάτω άποθ νησκει ν, f that no one might perish 5 . Isocrat. Areop. p. 152. D. τις ούκ οϊδε των πρεσβυτερών τούς μεν δημοτικούς καΧουμενους ετοίμους όντας οτιούν πάσχειν υπέρ τού μη ποιεϊν το προσταττόμενον, c in Ol’der — not to perform 5 . Xen. CEcon. 13, 6. τά μεν aXXa ζώα εκ δυοιν τούτοιν το πείθεσθαι μανθάνουσιν, εκ τε τού , όταν άπειθειν έπιχειρώσι , κοΧάζεσθαι, και εκ τού, όταν προ- θύμως ύπηρετώσιν , ευ πάσχειν. Obs. 1. ενεκα is often wanting. Thuc. I, 23. διότι δ’ εΧυ- σαν (τα? σπονδάς), τα? αιτίας %ypa\Jsa πρώτον και τάς διαφο¬ ράς, τού μη τινας ζητησαί ποτέ, e£ οτου τοσούτος 7roXe- μος τοϊς 'ΈλΧησι κατέστη, ne quis aliquando requirat. Comp. F F 2 540. 816 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. ii, 4, 22. Plat. Gorg. p. 27 . φοβούμαι ουν διεΧ^χειν σε, μη με υποΧαβρς ου προς το πραγμα φιΧονεικουντα Xeyeiv, τον καταφανές yεvεσθaι, άΧΧά πρός σε, 6 that the thing may he clear’. Comp. Soph. Phil. 198 . Xen. Cyr. i, 3, 9. v, 1, 25 c . Ohs, 2 . Sometimes the idea f with respect to’, is the basis of the genitive. Plat, Leg. iv, p. 182. άρ ουν οίει ποτέ δήμον νικησαντα — θησεσθαι εκόντα πρός αΧΧό τι πρώτον νόμους η το συμφέρον εαυτιρ της αρχής του μενειν. Thus it is put in the nominative, as explanatory of a substantive. Plat. Pluedon. p. 220 . η ξυνοδος του πΧησίον αΧΧηΧων τεθηναι, ‘ inas¬ much as they are near each other’. Comp. Leg. vi, p. 249. Thuc. vii, 42. et πέρας μηδέν εσται του άπaXXayηvaι του κίνδυνου, where του άπ, might be away. Comp. Plat. Leg, n, p. 67 . In the dative. Xen. Apol. S. 14. ίνα ετι μάΧΧον οι βου- Χομενοι υμών απιστωσι τω εμε τετιμησθαι υπό δαιμό * νων. Comp. Isocr. π. άντιό. ρ, 315. A. Demosth. pro Cor , ρ. 316, 10. το τάς ιδίας ευεpyeσίaς υπομιμνησκειν και Xeyeiv μικρού δείν όμοιόν εστι τίρ όνειδίζειν. — Phuc. II, 89· τιρ εκάτεροί τι εμπειρότεροι είναι , θρασυτεροι εσμεν, c thereby, that’. Comp. Plat. Rep. ii, p. 215. Xen. Mem, S. I, 2 , 3. Isocr. Areop. p. 154. B. επιδείζαι βουΧόμενος , - τα? καΧως ποΧιτευομενας (δημοκρατίας) προεχονσας τψ δικαωτερας είναι , f therein, that’. Xen. Hier. 7, 3. δοκει τουτιρ διαφερειν άνηρ των αΧΧων ζώων, τω τιμής όρε - ye σθ α ι. Sometimes the dative is to be resolved by f because’, or f since’. Plat. Phcedon. p. 136. ώς ατοπον — εοικε τι είναι τούτο, ο καΧουσιν οι άνθρωποι ηδυ, ώς θαυ- μασίως πεφυκε πρός τό δοκουν εναντίον είναι, το Χυπηρόν, τιρ αμα μεν αυτώ μρ θεΧειν πapayίvεσθaι τω άνθρώπω, 8$C. Xen. Cyr. IV, 5, 9. ενταύθα δη εβριμουτό τε τιρ Κ υριρ και ! Duker. ad Thuc. vin, 14. Fisch. in, b. p. 25 sq. 817 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. τοίς Mt/Sois τίρ κατάλιπόντας αυτόν έρημον οίχεσθαι. Comp. lb. 12 d . Id. V, 3, 2. ei ούν, τοίς Oeoiis εζελόντες τά νομιζόμενα και τρ στρατιά τα ! ικανά , όοίημεν την άλλην τούτιρ λείαν, άρ αν καΧόν ποιησαιμεν τίρ ευθύς φανεροί είναι, &$C. since, f inasmuch as we shewed'. Plat. Rep. v, p. 241. ίσα όε όεί yiyveaOa ι τα όωόεκα μέρη τίρ τά μεν ayaOtjs yης είναι σμικρά, τά όε χείρονος με’ιζω, e as far as that .— Soph. Aj. 554. εν τιρ φρονείν ηόιστος βίος. Plat. Gorg. p. 25. εκείνοι μεν yap ί ταρεόοσαν επί τιρ όικαίως χρησθαι του- τοις, ea conditione ut uterentur. In the accusative. Herod, ιχ, 79· το μόν ευνοεί v Τ6 και ττ poopcf.v άyaμaι σεύ. Thuc. VII, 81. θάσσον ο Νικίας *jye, νομίζουν ου το ύπο μενειν εν τιρ τοιούτιρ εκόν- τας είναι και μάχεσθαι σωτηρίαν , άλλα το ,ώς τάχιστα υποχωρείν . Comp, νι, 34. Thus are to be explained the passages *. Thuc. II, 87· ούχϊ όικαίαν εχει τεκμαρσιν τό εκφοβησαι, where the infin. with the article, consti¬ tutes the subject to the predicate τεκμαρσιν. Xen. Cyr. V, 1, 28. όαίμονος άν φαίην την βούλησιν είναι, το μη εάσαι υμάς μεya εύόαίμονας yiyi )εσθαι, where the explanation of the substantive βούλησιν , which is contained in the infin. with the article, may be given by means of quod. Thus also Plat. Amat. p. 30. ου προς σου yε ττοιείς τό και άνερεσθαι τούτον, where τό άνερ. depend upon ττοιεΐς. Xen. Cyr. VII, 5 , 42. τοίς μεν θεοίς ούόεν άν εχοιμεν μεμ- ψασθαι τό μη ούχί μόχρι τούόε πάντα, όσα εύχόμεθα, κατ α- πεπ ραχεναι. Xen. Mem. S. I, 2, 1. προς το μέτριων όείσθαι πεπαιόευμένος. Plat. Rep. V, ρ. 4Q. αφεθησρ προς τό μη είπείν. όιά in particular often stands in the sense of ‘on account of', with the accusative of the infin. where in English a suitable causal proposition is d Gatak. ad M. Anton, m, §. 1. i 818 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. put. Xen. Mem. S. II, 1, 15. συ U — 5t« το ξβνος elvai, ovk av oiei άδικηθηναι ; ‘ because thou art a stranger*. Comp, iv, 3, 4. 541. Ohs. ]. The article is often wanting in the nominative and accusative of the infinitive, when this is governed by a verb ; sometimes also in the genitive. JEsch. Agam. 595. del yap ηβ£ τοις y€poυσιv ev μάθουν. Eur. Ale. 424. πασιν ημιν κατθα - velv όφείΧεται. Comp. Suppl. 1092. Arist. Nub. 1333. Soph. El. 264. €K τωνό βμοι Χαβειν θ ομοίως καί το τη- τάσθαι 7 re\ei. The following constructions are peculiar: Herod. I, 61. τον Se δεινόν τι έσχεν άτιμάζεσθαι υπό Πει- σιστρατου , agre ferebat, quod contumelia ajficeretur , where άτ ιμάζεσθαι stands as the subject, for το άτιμ. έΧνπει αυτόν. Xen. Cyrop. iv, 5, 46. οι Ίπποι — πpάyμaτa παρέξουσιν έπι- μεΧεσθαι , where two kinds of constructions are united, πpάyμ. παρεξονσιν επιμεΧομενοι, and τό επιμεΧ. αυτών πρ. παρέξει. Plat. Rep. vi, p. 89· η ούν τι τούτου δοκει διαφέρειν ό την των ποΧΧων και παντοόαπων ξυνιοντων opyηv και ηδονάς κ α- τανενοηκεναι σοφίαν Y\yov μένος. Xen . Cyr. νπι, 4j 5. νόμι¬ μον εποιησατο και ay αθοις εpyoις π ρ ο βη ν αι εις την τιμιω - τατην έδραν, και , εΊ τι pqSiovpyofy, άναχωρήσαι εις την άτιμοτεραν. Comp. Thuc . n, 40. But when the accusative is governed of a preposition which accompanies it, the article is not omitted. Fi equently it is indifferent, whether the infinitive be accom¬ panied by the article or not. Thus Herod, v, 49. says, άναβάΧ- Χομαί τοι άποκρινέεσθαι, and Xen. Hist. Gr. i, 6, 10. αεϊάνεβάΧ- Χετό μοι διαλεχθήναι, but id. Mem. S. in, 6, 6. το μεν πΧου- σιωτεραν την ποΧιν ποιεΊν αναβαΧούμεθα. Xen. Mem. S. iv, 3, 1. το μεν ούν Χεκτικούς και πρακτικούς και μηχανικούς yiyveT0ai τούς συνόντας ούκ έσπευδεν, as σπεύδειν τι. ^17· but which is more usually followed bv the simple infini¬ tive. (It) ' F Note. Upon the use of the infinitive in the nominative with and without the article, instead of a substantive, is founded the phrase ουδεν οίον, followed by an infinitive. Aristoph. Av. 967. dXX ουδεν οίον εστ ακουσαι των επών , for ουδέν έστι τοιοΰ - ‘it tovj οιον το ακουσαι , 4 nothing is so good as to hear’, e g· Syntax. Of the Infinitive. 819 is best to hear'. Comp. Lysistr. 135. Demosth. in Mid. p. 529, 11 , and with the article Plat. Gorg. p. 5. ovSev οΐον το αυτόν έρωταν. Xen . CEcon. 3, 14. ονδει; οΐον το επίσκοπεΐσθαι. The explanation by ovSev κωλύει άκουειν is not accurate, although not contrary to the sense®. With the genitive also. Thuc . I, 16 . eTre'yry νέτο δε αλλοις τε άλλοθι κωλύματα μη αυζηθήναι. Plat. Pep. II, ρ. 230. η τιν ο’ίει αρχήν άλλην πόλιν οικίζειν. Xen. Ages, ι, 7· α σχολ 'ιαν αύτφ παρεζειν στ ρατευ ειν επι τους Ελληνας. With αίτιος Herod, ιι, 20. τούς ετήσιας άνεμους είναι αίτιους πληθύειν τον ποταμόν. Comp, in, 12. Soph. Antig. 1173. Trach. 1233. Plat. Phadon. p. 220. Hipp. Maj. p. 45 f .— Plat. Euthyd. p. 76. ώστε παρά πάσιν ευόοκιμεΐν έμπορων σφίσιν εΐναι ου^ενας άλλους , η τούς περί φιλοσοφίαν ανθρώπους. The omission of the article after a proposition is more harsh. Her. i, 210. os αντί μεν όουλων επο'ιησας ελεύθερους ΙΊερτα? εΐναι, αντί δε άρχεσθαι υπ άλλων , αρχειν απαντων. Thus probably Soph. (Ed. C. 335. που εισι πονειν , is for jrov πονεΐν, as §. 357. After εχειν, ‘ to prevent’, Herod. I, 158. Άριστόόικος — εσχε μη ποιησαι ταυτα Ενμαιους. Comp» Thuc. ι, 73. Soph. El. 517. Again, Xen. Anah. in, 5, 11. εχειν του μη καταόυναι. Also after the verbs to deliver from’. Eurip. Ph. 609· κομπός εϊ σπονύαΐς πεποιθως , αΐ σε σωΐουσιν θανειν. Ale. II, ον θανειν ερρυσαμην^ . The ν _ ^ yf 9 construction is more singular in Tliuc. v, 100. ηιτον apa, ei τοσαυτην ·γε υμείς τε , μη παυσθηναι αρχής , και οι όουλευον ~ τες ηόη } απαλλα Γ γηναι την παρακινύυνευσιν ποιούνται , for ενεκα του μη π. α. ενεκα του απαΚλα^ηναι. Obs. 2. Frequently also the infinitive, with the article, is 542. put for the infinitive alone, Msch. Ag. 1300. ίούσα κά*γω τλη- σομαι το κατθανεΐν. Soph. (Ed. C. 442. οι δ επωφελειν , οι τού πατρός , τίρ πατρι όυνάμενοι , τό Spciv ουκ ηθελησαν. Id. e Schol. Arist. Αν. 1. c. Budseus Comm. 1. Gr. p. 978. Fisch. hi, b. p. 17· f Schaef. Melet. in Dion. H, i, p. 23. % Herm. ad Vig. p. 703, 20. Heind. ad Plat. Crat. p. 110 sq. 820 Syntax . Of the Infinitive. Antig. 663. όστις 8 ύπερβάς η νόμους βιάζεται , η τουπι* τάσσειν τοις κρατουσιν εννοεί, ουκ εστ επαίνου τούτον εξ εμού τνχειν. 1106. καρόιας εζίσταμαι το όρμν. Id. Aj. 1143. ναύτας εφορμησαντα 'χειμωνος τό πΧειν. Thus after πείθο¬ μαι. Id. Philoct. 1252. Eurip. Iph. A. 452. το μη όακρΰσαι αίόουμαι. Xen. CEcon. 9, 12. το προθυμείσθαι συναυζειν τον οΐκον επαιόευ ο μεν αυτήν. Arist. Ran. 68. ουρείς ·γε μ άν πείσειεν άνθρω πων τό μη ουκ εΧθειν επ εκείνον , as Xen. Hist. Gr. ν, 2, 36. Here the article with the infin. is put for the accus. with the inf. as Arist. Av. 36. αυτήν μεν ου μισουντ εκείνην την πόΧιν , το μη ου με^αΧην είναι κευόαίμονα , where in μισουντε the idea of ‘to think’ is contained. The same sense however in Latin would be expressed by quasi, quasi non esset magna . Plat. Symp. p. 202. περί εκείνων Χεάγεται το εις τον ουρανόν άνάβασιν επιχειρε ί ν ποιεΊν , as Xen . Apol. S. 13. το προειόε ναι τον θεόν τό μεΧΧον πάντες Χε·γουσι. Plat. Leg. ι, ρ. 29 . όμως δ’ εμοιηε όρθώς όοκεΐ το τα$ ηόονάς φεύ·γειν όιακεΧεύεσθαι τον yε εν Λακεόαίμονι νομοθετην. Soph. Antig. 265. ημεν έτοιμοι—θεούς ορκωμοτειν το μήτε όράσαι κ.τ.Χ. Comp. Aristoph. Nub. 1084. Thus after adjectives also. Soph. El. 1079· το μη βΧεπειν ετοί μα. Antig. 78. το όε β iq. ποΧιτων όρα,ν, εφυν αμήχανος. Thuc . II, 53. το μεν π ροσταΧαιπ ω ρ ειν τω όόζαντι καΧφ ούόεις πρόθυμος ην. Plat. Apol. S. ρ. 68. οοχ οίον τ εΐναι τό μη άποκτ είναι με. Lys . ρ. 215. εζαρνος εϊ το epciv . Obs. 3. The infinitive is put also with the accusative of the article, fox the genitive. Soph. Antig . 778. τευξεται το μη θανειν. After ε'χειν, * to withhold’, εγεσθαι , c to withhold one’s self*. Soph. CEd. T. 1387. ουκ άν εσγ^όμην τό μη ’ποκΧεισαι τούμόν άθΧιον όεμας. Eurip. Ph. 1191 sq. εκόμπασε , μηό άν τό σεμνόν πυρ νιν ειρ'γαθε'ιν Νιος τό μη ου κατ άκρων περ- *γάμων εΧεΊν πόΧιν. iierod . ν, 101. το μη ΧεηΧατησαί σφεας εσχε τό$ε. Thuc. ill, 1. τον πΧειστον όμιΧον των ψιΧών εϊρ- y ον τό μη — τα εγγι)? της πόΧεως κaκoυpyειv. ib. nij, 11. ο yap παραβαίνειν τι βουΧόμςνος τό μη προεχων άν επεΧθεΐν άποτρεπεται , as Xen. Mem. S. ιν, 7, 5. το μανθάνειν απετρε- πεν. — Id. Rep. Lac. 5, 7· άν^κάζονται τό υπό οίνου μη σφάΧΧεσθαι επ ιμεΧεισθ αι, as Cyrop. ν. 3, 42. επιμε- Syntax. Of the Infinitive, 821 Χου το νυν είναι πάντων όπισθεν 11 * — Thuc. vi, 14. νόμισαν, τό μεν Χυειν τους νόμους μη αιτίαν σχειν. Plat. Lack, ρ . 186. εγώ α’ίτιος τό σε αποκρίνασθαι. Ohs. 4. The infinitive with the accus. of the article is some¬ times also put without being governed by a verb or a preposition, and in different senses. ' r · 4 * *' a. For ώστε . Soph. CEd. T. 1416. aXX ων επαιτείς ες όεον 7ΐ·άοεσ0’ οδε Κρεων, τό πράσσειν και τό βουΧευειν. Αη- * f ft/ \ \ » Λ " tig. 544. μη τοι, κασιγνητη, μ ατιμασρς το μη ου σανειν τε συν σοι, τον θανόντα θ αγνίσαι, quominus moriar. Trach. 88. ουόεν εΧΧείψω τό μη ου πάσαν πνθεσθαι τώνό αΧη - ν, θείαν περί. JEsch. Prom. 871. μίαν όε παιόων ίμερος θεΧζει, το μη κτείναι συνευνον. ib. 926. ουόεν yap αυτφ ταυτ επαρκε- σει, τό μη ου πεσειν ατίμως πτωματ ουκ ανασχετα. Comp. Agam. 15. 1182: Eur. Ale. 702. όιεμάχου το μη θανεϊν. Plat . Criton. ρ. 100. ουόεν αυτοις επιΧνεται η ηΧικια το μη ουχι άγανακτειν τρ παρουσρ τυχρ. Leg. νΐ } ρ· 311. ουόεν ημάς όστι το κατεπειγον, τό μη παντη πάντως σκοπεί ν τα περί τους νόμους. The article is omitted here also, as after ενόεω Eurip. Iph. A. 41. Troad. 798. Comp. Plat. Prot. p. 124. b. i With regard to, as far as concerns’, both at the begin¬ ning of a proposition, and after some words. Xen. Cyr. i, 6, 18. to γε μεΧετάσθαι εκαστα των ποΧεμικων έργων, αγώνας άν τις μοι όοκει προειπών και αθΧα προτιθεις μαΧιστ αν ποιειν εύ άσκεισθαι εκαστα. Thus may be taken the passage Soph. Tr. ό45. τό ό' αύ Ιζυνοικειν τρό ομου , τις αν γυνή όυναιτο , κοινωνουσα των αυτών γάμων ; which may also be rendered τις άν γ. όνναιτο το ζυνοικεΐν, after Obs. 2.— Eur. Hec. 360. ιση^ θεοισι, πΧην τό κατθανειν μόνον. Xen. Cyr. yii, 5, 46. τα του ποΧεμου τοιαυτα εγίγνωσκον όντα, ως μη υστερίζειν όεον τον άρχοντα , μήτε το ειόεναι α όει, μήτε το πραττειν -α άν καιρός ρ. Comp. §. 426. 2. c. In exclamations, and questions of indignation, Arist. Av. ό. τό ό* εμε κορώνρ πειθόμενον τον αθΧιον οόου περιεΧθει ν Brunck. ad Eur. Hipp. 49. 822 Syntax. Of the Infinitive . στάλα 7 r\eip η χίΧια ! Plat. Phcedon. p. 224. To ydp μη όιεΧεσθαι οιόν τ el ναι, οτι άλλο μεν τι εστ\ το αίτιον τφ οντι, άλλο ο εκείνο , ανευ ον το αίτιον ουκ αν ί γοτ ει>; αίτιον ! just as Czc. TVw. n, 10. Hoc vero non videre maximo argumento esse , #c. See ilfzsc. PA?7. ii, p. 124. Xew. Cyr. n, 2, 3. εκείνος πάνυ άνιαθεις είπε προς εαυτόν * τί/$ τύχης, το 6/Χ6 νυν κΧηθεντα όευρο τυχείνΐ ‘ that I should be sent for hither’! Also in a simple exclamation, with the expression of joy, not of indignation. Soph. Phil. 234. ω φίΧτατον φώνημα ' φευ το καί Χαβείν πρόσφθε^μα τοιουό ’ άνόρός εν μακρφ χρόνω ! The Poets also omit the article, Msell. Lumen. S35. εμε παθείν τάόε, φβυ, εμε παΧαιόφρονα κατά yav ρ’ικείν , άτίετον, φευ , μυσος ! Comp. Again. 1673. Also in Lucian. Cont. p. 6 1 . We usually supply ου όεινόν εστιν το εμε περι- εΧθείν; ουκ ευηθες εστιν ; ον θαυμαστόν εστι ; as in the simi¬ lar accus. with the infin. in Latin, nonne indignum est? And thus Xenoph. Cyrop. i, 6, 7· το όε επίστασθαι ανθρώπων άλλων προστατευειν — τούτο θαυμαστόν όηπου εφαίνετο ημιν είναι. But the article appears to be put with these infinitives in the accusative, in the same manner as nouns are put in the accusa¬ tive in exclamations. §. 427*. 543. The infinitive is put also after particles, especially after ώστε and ως, c so that’, ita ut. Eurip. Ale. 358. ci $ Ορφεως μοι yXtoTTa και με\ος παρην, ως την κόρην Δημη- τρος—κηΧησαντά σ εξ μόου Χαβείν. ως also for the sim¬ ple ut, ( in order that’, as AEsch. Pers. 716 . Plat. Gorg. p. 12. ως έπος ειπείν, c in order to say’ k . Herod. II, 25. ως εν πΧεονι Xoyip όηΧώσαι. Thuc. IV, 36. ως μικρόν μeyάXφ εικάσαι, instead of which Herod. 11 , 10. says : ώστε είναι σμικρά ταυτα μeyαΧοισι συμβάΧΧειν. Xen . Mem. S. Ill, 8, 10. IV, 3, 7. ως όε συνεΧόντι ειπείν, 6 to be brief’, utpaucis 1 \alck. ad Eur. Ph. p. 57 2 . Wyttenb. ad Plut. d. s. n. v. p. 46 . Coray apud Levesque iuThucyd. vii, 2 S. Herm. ad A^ig. p. 702 . n. 19 . k Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. p. 132. Valck. ad Herod, p. 129, 33 . 823 Syntax . Of the Infinitive . absolvam . Hence the phrases μικρόν δε7ν, ποΧΧον δε7ν, ita ut parum, multum abesset. i. e. fere . Xen. Hell. n, 4, 21 . Jsocr. Paneg. c . 40 1 . ws is often wanting here, and the infinitive is put absolute. Herod. I, 61. μετά Se, ού ποΧΧω Xoya) είπε7ν, χρόνος διεφν. Ill, 82. ενι δε επει πάντα σνΧΧαβόντα είπε7ν. Thuc . VI, 82. καί , €S το ακριβός (i.e. ακριβώς ) et7re?i/, oi/Se αδίκως καταστρεφάμενοι τους [ωνας· Thus also Herod. IV, 50. εν-προς εν σνμβάΧΧειν. JEsch . Agam. 877. τετρω- ται δικτύου πΧεω Xeyetv, c as one may say . Ώ? is put with the infinitive in many other senses also, especially in limiting propositions. Herod, n, 125. ως εμε εν μεμνη σθαι, c as far as I recollect rightly . VII, 24. ως μεν εμε σνμβαΧεόμενον ενρ ίσκειν 3 as far as I can conjecture’, quantum quidem conjectura assequi pos¬ sum. Soph. (Ed. Col. 17 · χώρος όδ’ 'ιερός, ως σάφ είκα- σαι, βρύων δάφνης. Eur. Ale. 810. ως y εμοι χρησθαι κριτρ. Aristoph· Plut. 736. ως ye μοι δοκεΐν , c as it seems to me’. Plat . Rep . IV, p. 352. ills 76 ούτωσι δάξαι. For ως, ώστε is also put. Soph. Tr. 1220. ΊόΧην εΧεξας , ωστ € 7 Γ εικάζειν όμε, unless it should be ως y e . The phrase is somewhat different, though still a limiting proposition, in Herod. II, 135. η Έ*οδώπις — μεyάXa εκτησατο χρήματα , ως αν είναι 'Ροδω7πο9, άτάρ ονκ ως yε es πυραμίδα τοσαυ- την εζικεσθαι, ζ for Rodopis, as far as the means of a private individual’. This infinitive after ως is accompa¬ nied by εστι, i. e. ίζεστι, licet , Herod. IX, 32. ώς δε επεικάσ αι εστι , ες πεντε μνριαδας σvXXεyηvaι εικάζω, and in the same sense πάρεση Mschyl. Choeph . 973. For ως is also put όσον , όσα. Aristoph. Nub. 1254. 1 Zeune ad Viger. p. 205 sq. 544. 824 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. » όσον ye μ ειόεναι, quantum sciam. Thuc. VI, 25. οσα ηόη όοκεΐν αύτω. L m and οσον are also omitted. Herod, i, 172. Oi όε Ι&αύνιοι αύτό'χθονες , εμοι όοκεειν, εισί Μ . The infinitive is frequently put for the imperative, particularly in the Poets. R. e, 124. θαρσών νυν, Αιόμη- όες, € 7 Γί Τ ρωεσσι μαχβσθαι, and passim, especially in Homer. JEsch. Prom. 7 11- oh μη πεΧάζειν. Soph. El. 9. φάσκειν Μυκηνας όροίν. Comp. Philoct. 1411. 57. Antig. 1142. Thuc. V, 9· συ Se, K XeapiSa, όταν εμε op$9 ηόη προσκείμενον - αιφνιόίως τα? πύΧας άνοίξας επεκ- θειν και εη reiy εσθ αι α>$ ταχιστα ξυμμίξαι. Plat. Cratyl. p. 317· συ ό> αν τι ε'χρς βεΧτιον ποθεν Χαβεϊν, πε ιρασθαι και εμοι μεταόιόόναι. Comp. Rep. VI, ρ. 118. 120 η . εθεΧε is usually supplied as II. a, 277. μήτε συ, ΐΙηΧείόη, θεΧ βριζεμεναι βασιΧηι. Comp, β', 246. ΟΓ μεμνήσο, as JEsch. Suppl. 217· μεμνησο 8 είκειν. But this phrase is probably a remnant of the ancient simplicity of the lan¬ guage, from which the action required was expressed by means of the verb absolute, or the mood of the verb which of itself indicated the action, without any refer¬ ence to other parts of speech, (r) The infinitive stands also instead of the third person imperative. II. y, 285. εί μεν κεν MeveXaov ΆΧεξανόρος καταπεφνφ, αυτός επειθ’ ΈΧενην ε'χετω και κτήματα παντα * - €ΐ όε κ ΆΧεξανόρον κτεινγ ξανθός Μενελαο?, Τ^οώα? €7Γ ειθ* ΕΧενην και κτήματα 7 τάντ άποόουναι, for αποόόν- m Reiz. ap. Herm. ad Vig. p. 732. Fisch. hi, b. p. 13. \ n Hemst. ad Arist. Plut. p. 196. Dorville Vann. Crit. p. 341. Moeris Att. v. λαμβάνειν. Koen. ad Gregor, p. 198. Heind. ad Plat. Lys. p. 21. Fisch. ui, b. p. 36 sqq. 835 Syntax. Of the Infinitive. των. II ζ', 92 . η 3 79. 375. Eunp. Hec. 882. αλλ’ yen >ίσθαι, as Troad ; 727. JpAfc. 6 °7* ( where others read ^ενεσθω. Comp. Herm. ad Eurip. Hec. p. 150.) Thuc. VI, 34. και παραστηναι τταντι , το μει/ καταφρονείν TOO? επιόντας εν των epyaw τί} άλκί/ δεικνυσθαι , for τταρα- στητω . The infinitive is even put for the third person plur. coni. Herod . VIII, 109- άλλα - μει/ εν τ »7 Ελλα& (j Λ ^ Λ καταμείναντας ημεων τε αντεων ειτ ιμε\ηθηναι και των οικετεων, for καταμείναντες επιμεΧηθωμεν. Soph. Antlg. 150. εκ μεν ο η 7Γολρ/ναικών του παρεστώτος θράσους θεσθαι τρό¬ παιου ημάς 9 . Hence perhaps the infinitive and the accusative with είθε in Antipat. Thessal. Epigr. 35. Crinagor. Epigr. 20. The construction is more pecu¬ liar in Od. ω , 375 sqq. α'ί yap, Ζευ τε πάτερ καί Αθη- ναίη καί 'Απολλον - -τοίος εων τοι χθιζρς ευ ημετεροισι δόμοισι, τευχε εχων ωμοισιν , εφρ&'τάμεναι και αμννειν άνδρας μνηστήρας. The infinitive είναι , with and without an article, is frequently put absolute and redundant, with adjectives, adverbs, or prepositions with their case, when the dis¬ course is with certain limitations, e. g. εκων είναι for εκων, ‘ willing*. Herod. VII, 164. ο δε Κάδμος ούτος — εκων τε είναι καί δεινόν επιόντος ουδενός, αλλ* από δικαιοσύνης ες μέσον Κ ωοισι καταθείς την αρχήν, οίχετο ες Έικελίην. Comp. lb. 104. IX, 7 3 1. VIII, 20. (Φ ωκεες εφασαν ) ουκ εσεσθαι εκον¬ τές είναι προδόται της 'Ελλάδος. Comp. Thuc. II, 89. ιν, 98. νιι, 81. Plat . Rep. vn, p. 137. Phcedr. p. 332. όθεν δη εκουσα είναι ούκ άπολείπεται η φυχη. Gorg. p. 114. καίτοι ουκ ωμήν ye κατ’ άρχάς υπό σου εκόντος είναι εξαπατηθησεσθαι. This phrase is usually employed in negative propositions; {Thom. M. p.2 90.) but not always, e. g. Herod, vn, 164. (■ ·· ./* '· κ ’ ζ · * > The following are similar phrases : Herod, vn, 143. . p Valck. ad Herod, p. 430, 19* Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 2. Koen. ad Greg. p. 54, 93. Brunck, ad Soph. (Ed. T. 193. • I Syntax. Of the Participle. 827 to (TV/JL 7 TCLV elvai, ‘ generally . Soph· (Ed» C. 1191· V elvai, ‘ with respect to you’. Plat. Cratyl. p. 257. to yuei/ Trifiepov elvai , ‘ to-day at least. Comp. Moeris p. 364. Plat. Protag. p . 100 . κατά τούτο elvai, c herein, with respect to this’, and the very common phrase το νυν elvai, ‘ now*, to €7t eKelvois elvai , to eVi σφάς -elvai, το κατα τούτον elvai, of which see §. 282 q . Note. Of the redundant infin. elvai after KaXelv , fyc. (e. g. Eurip. Ion. 75. Plat. Phil. p. 212. Plmdon. p. 232.) see §. 414. Of the Participle. According to §. 530. the Participle is put after another verb, when the object of that verb is to be expressed. In this case the same rule obtains as that mentioned above, 535. with the infinitive, that the case of the participle is determined by the case in which the subject of the action, expressed by the participle in the principal proposition, stood. Thus, if the subject of the participle be the same as the subject of the finite verb, it is' put in the nominative ; if it be the same as a preceding noun in the genitive, dative, or accusative, the participle also is in these cases. The verbs which take another in the participle, are : l. Verbs of sense, ‘to hear, see’, $c. II. β’ 9 391. i Hemsterh. ad Luc. i, p. 321. Duker. ad Thuc. iv, 28. Toup. ad Suid. i, p. 323. Reiz. ap. Herat, ad Vig. p. 738 sq. Bach, ad Xen. Hier. 7, 11. 828 Syntax. Of the Participle. ov Se κ eycov άπάνευθε μάχης εθελοντα νοήσω μιμναζειν . Thuc. vii, 47. εώρων ου κατορθονντβς ( se non secundcc fortuna uti ) και τους στρατιώτας άχθομενους. Eur. Med. «351. 6ρώ εζαμαρτάνων, video 7Yie evrare. Ειιτ . Cycl. 442. Ασιανός ουκ άν ηόιου φοφον κιθαρας κλυοιμεν , η Κυκλωπ όλωλότα. Soph. EL 293. όταν κλυρ τίνος ηξοντ Όρεστην. Xen. Mem. S. ΙΙ, 4. in. ηκουσα he ποτβ αυτου καί περί φίλων διαλεγομένου, e I heard him speaking’. The participle is put not only when the verb is active, but also when it is passive ; whilst in Latin, the active only is put in the participle after videre , audire. Since άκούειν is constructed with the genitive of the thing (§. 327. Obs. 2.) Eurip. says, Phcen. 1361. ω $ωματ\ είσηκούσατ , Οιόίπου, τάδε, παίόων ομοίως ζυμφοραίς ολω- λότων. Comp. II. ω } 490. Plat. Symp. ρ. 212. Thus also 7 τ υθεσθαι II. ρ, 427. Also οράν Soph. Track. 394. SlSa^ov, ως e ρποντος είσορα,ς εμού. See §. 327· Obs. 2. 2. ‘ To know’, Thuc. I, 76. εί τότε υπομείναντες Sia παντός απήχθεσθε εν τρ η^γεμονίει, ώσπερ ημείς , ευ ισμεν μη άν ησσον υμάς λυπηρούς γενομενους τοΐς ζυμμαχοις , και avay κασθε ντας άν η άρχειν eyKpaT ώ? η αυτους κινάυνευειν, c that you would have oppressed the allies in the same manner, and would have been compelled’, &c. Id. n, 44. εν πολυτρόποις ζυμφοραις επίστανται τραφε ντες, SCZUnt f se educatos esse. VI, 64. ειόότες ουκ άν ομοίως όννηθεντες , f that they would not have been equally able’. Soph. El. 396. και μην K ρεοντά y ίσθι σοι τούτων χάριν ηζοντα βαιου κουχι μυρίου χρόνου. ib. 294. αλλ ίσθι τοι τίσουσα y άζίαν άίκην, scito , te pevsolutuvam esse. Aristoph. Plut . 963. ίσθι επ’ αύτάς τάς θυρας αφ iy μενη. Acham. 4 55. λυπηρός ϊσθ’ ων. Xen * Hier. 2, 9. ΟΙ τύραννοι, επειόάν εις την εαυτών πόλιν άφίκωνται , τότε εν πλείστοις πολεμιοις 829 Syntax. Of the Participle. Ίσασιν Sms. Comp. ib. ll, 7. Ages. 9, 5. Demosth. V. 77, 25. Φίλιππο? ονκ ayvoei ταΰτα ον οικαια \eyiov . In the same manner σ weiSevai όαυτψ is constructed. With this verb the participle is put either in the nomi¬ native, because the same subject is contained in the persons of the verb, Eurip. Med. 495. ξννοισθά y eh m ονκ e’iopKos ilv. Xen. Cyr. I, 5, Π. ίσβίπβρ σύνισμβν ημϊν aiirols M rraiSivv άρξάμονοι άσκητα'ι oW των καλών K dya0£v ipyo>v, ίωμβν ίπ'ι τού, πολομίου,. Comp. Eurip. Or 390. Aristoph. Vesp. 999- Plat. Apol. S. p. 43. Xen. Hellen. n, 3, 12. Anab. i, 3,10. n, 5, 7- or, with relation to the dative of the accompanying reflexive pronoun, m the dative. Herod. IX, 60. συνοίοαμεν υμιν VITO τον πα- peovra rivSe τόρμον koZci πολλύν πρόθυμότατοισι. Plat. Apol. s. p. 52. I μαντό, ξυν,βειν ovlcv οπιστ α- μίνω. Comp. Rep. x, P■ 308. Symp.p. 258. Mschirum Ctesiph. p. 306. Demosth. in Mid. p. 514, 1 1 s . T us also avyy ινόσκβιν. Herod. V, 91. avyyivwaKopev αντοισι ημϊν ου ποίησαν ι ορθώς « 3. c To perceive, discern, consider’, Herod.y, 91· τάχα t.s καί άλλο? ίκμαθήσοται άμαρτων, mtelllget se peceasse. Eurip. Andr. 8! 5. τά πρ'ιν ^ραμένα Jeyvonce πράζασ ού καλό,. Thuc. I, 102. οί S’ Αθηναίοι eyvwaav ούκ ίπ'ι τψ βολτίονι λο' 7ϊ > άποπομπύμονοι. lb. 120. ο β, «ολίμψ elTvfia πλεονάζων ονκ έντεθύμηται θρασει άπιστη, ίπαιρόμενος. Comp. VI, 78. VII, 77. extr. yviore αναγ¬ καίου το lv ύμ-ιν άνύράσιν άγαθοϊ, ylyverfai, - -Te άλλοι τενξόμενοι. ό,ν ίπιθνμεΊτέ πον επιύειν, και οι ' Γ Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. p. 93. ad Hippol. 304. Toup. ad Suid. T. i, p. 71. not. Brunck. ad Eurip. Bacch. 184. a Fisch. hi, a. p. 324. * Valck. ad Herod, p. 2 99 > 20 * VOL. II. G G , V *548. I 830 Syntax . Of the Participle. Αθηναίοι την μ eyahtfv όύναμιν της ποΧεως, καίπερ πεπτώ- κύιαν, ί-πανορθώσοντες. Plat. Symp. ρ. 220. ενενόησα τότε άρα κατα^γελαστος ών η . ν 4. c To observe, to experience’. Her. νι, 100. Έρε- τριεες όε πυνθανόμενοι την στρατιην την ΤΙερσικην επιπΧεον- σαν , Αθηναίων εόεηθησαν, $C. Eur. Med. 868. ταύτ εννοη- θέΐσ , ησθόμην αβονΧίαν ποΧΧην έλουσα και ματην θυμου- μενη. Xen. Mem. S. II, 2,1 . Αίσθόμενος Se ποτέ ΑαμπροκΧεα προς την μητέρα ^αΧεπαινοντα. Demosth. pro Cor · ρ. 241. συμβεβηκε τοΊς προεστηκόσι και ταλλα, πΧην εαυ¬ τούς , οιομενοις πωΧειν, πρώτους εαντους πεπρακοσιν ρσθη- σθαι. And since αίσθάνεσθαι is constructed with the genitive also, §. 327. Obs. l. Xen. Mem. S. iv, 4, 11. ησθησαι πωποτε μου η φευόομαρτυρούντος η σύκο n φαντουντος, $C. Cyr. VII, 1, 22. επειόάν αίσθάνησθε εμού επιτιθέμενου τοΊς κατά το Se^iov κεράς. Plat. ΛροΙ. S. ρ. 51. ρσθόμην αυτών οιομενων. ευρίσκω also is constructed in the same manner, in the sense of e to perceive’, Isocr. Areop. p. 143. A. ευρί¬ σκω ταυτην άν μονήν ^γενομενην των μεΧΧοντων κακών απο¬ τροπήν. π. άντώ. p. 311. C. εύρισκον ούόαμώς άν αΧΧως τούτο όιαπ ραζό μένος. 5. e To shew’, όείκνυμι , όηΧόω. Eur. Troad. 977. και τηνόε όείζω μη Χε^ουσαν ενόικα. Id. Med. 548. εν τιρόε $εί£ω πρώτα μεν σοφός 'γε'γως , επειτα σ ωφ ρων 3 είτα σοι μεγας φίΧος. Herod . Ill, 72. όεικνύσθω ενθαύτα εών ποΧεμιος. Id. IX, 58. ούόενες εόντες εναπεόεικννατο. Arist. Plut. 473. πάνυ yap οϊμαι ραώίως άπανθ άμαρτα- νοντά σ άποόείζειν €yω .— Thuc. III. 84. η ανθρωπεια φύσις - άσμενη εόηΧωσεν άκρατης μεν opyfc ουσα 3 κρείσσων όε τού όικαίου , ποΧεμία όε τού προνχοντος. III, Valck. ad Herod, ρ. 194, 28. u Syntax. Of the Participle. 831 64. SijXov εποιη σατε ovSe τότε των 'ΈΧΚηνων ενεκα μο¬ νοί ον μη^ίσ αντες. Comp. Herod. VIj 21. Arist. Plut. 587. Tsocr. 7 Γ. aVriS. p. 311. A. εδηΧωσαν δε οντω διακεί- μενοι. Thus also Soph. El. 24. σαφή σημεία φαίνεις εσθΧός yεyως. Eurip . Phcen . 402. oucf ό χρόνος αντάς διεσάφησ ονσας κενάς. Id, Ale. 152. πως αν μάΧΧον ενδει- ξαιτό τις πόσιν πρ οτιμώσ, η θεΧονσ νπερθανειν. Avist. Plut. 468. κοίν μεν αποφ'ρνω μονήν ayaOiov απαντων ον - σαν αιτίαν εμε νμιν, Si εμε τε ζωντας νμας. Hence also JEsch. Agam. 281. εν yap φρονοντος όμμα σον κατη - γορεΤ. Thus also after κρνπτεσθαι Herod, ιιι, 61. after άλίσκεσθαι, ‘ to be convicted’, Eurip. Med. 83. Xen. Cyr. in, 1 , 16 . after ί\£γχβσθαι, Xen. Mem. S. i, 7, 2. Demosth. p. 1051., 17» In the same manner is constructed δηΧος or φανερός είμι. See §. 296 x . φαίνεσθαι in the sense of c to seem , viderij takes the infinitive, but in that of to be appa¬ rent’, apparere , the participle y . 6. ‘ To recollect, to forget’. Hesiod. Theog. 102. αίφ’ όyε δνσφρονεων επιΧηθεται. Pind. ΝβΤΠ. 11, 20. εί δε τις όΧβον εχων μορφα παραμενσεται αΧΧων, εν τ αεθΧοισιν αρι- στενων επεδειξεν βίαν, θνατα μεμνάσθω περιστεΧΧων μεΧη, και τεΧεντάν απάντων yav επιεσσομένος. Comp. 01. 10, 3. Xen. Cyr.Ill, 1, 31. εμεμ νητο yap είπων, ότι και φιΧον ο'ιοιτο μάΧΧον αντόν η προσθεν ποιησειν . Obs. All these verbs are frequently followed by ότι, e. g. Thuc. i, 93. Arist. Plut. 333. Both constructions ^ are united by Thucydides iv, 37. in an Anacoluthon: y νονς δε ο ΚΧεων χ Valcken. ad Herod, p. 234, 84. 298, (6. y Wolf, ad Demosth. Lept. p. 259· z Brunck. ad Eurip. Bacch. 184. Fisch. in, b. p. 21 sq. G G 2 \ 832 Syntax, Of the Participle* και 6 Δημοσθένης, 6 τι, εί και όπόσονουν μαΧΧον ενδώσονσιν/ δ ιαφθ α ρήσο με νους αυτούς υπό της σφετερας στρατιάς, έπαυσαν την μάχην. After μεμνημαι is very frequently put ore, or another particle of time: II. o', 18. η ου μεμνγι, οτε τ ε^ρεμω υφόθεν. Thuc. ίΐ, 21. *Αθηναίοι — μεμνημενοι και ΤίΧειστοάνακτα τον Χίαυσανίου Λακεδαιμονίων βασιΧεα, οτε εσβαΧών της Αττικής ες ’ΈΧευσίνα -- απέχω ρήσε παΧιν. Xen. Cyrop. ι , 6, 8. μεμνημαι και τούτο, οτε, σου Χεγοντος, σννεδόκει και εμοι υπερμεγεθες είναι εργον το καΧως αρχειν. Comp. ib. 12. Hellen. νι, 4, 5. This phrase probably arose from hence, that του χρόνου was understood : η ου μεμννι του χρόνον, οτε. It soon came, however, to be considered only as a construction with ότι. The same after οίδα. Eurip. Troad. 70. οίδ, ηνίκ Χίας εϊΧκε Κασάνδραν βίη.. Comp. Hec. 112. 243. after ακούω Plat. Leg. vi, p. 312. τουναντίον άκουομεν εν άΧ- Χοις, οτε ουδέ βοός ετοΧμώμεν γευεσθαι. Comp. Alcib. il, ρ. 83. Xen. Hellen. νι, 5, 4β. των μεν ούν ύμετερων προγο¬ νών καΧόν Χεγεται, οτε τους Αργείων τεΧευτησαντας επι τη Καδμείοι ούκ είασαν άταφους γενεσθαΡ. 7. The verbs περιοράιν ( aor . περίίδείν , fui. περιόφομαι) properly, ‘ to overlook any thing, to permit to happen*, atid f to persevere, bear, endure*, άνεχεσθαι καρτερείν . Thuc. VII, 6. άναγκαιον είναι σφίσι μη περιοραν παροικο - δομουμενον το τείχος. Isocv. Cld Nicocl. ρ. 22. Β. μη περίίδτις την σαυτου φύσιν άμα πασαν διαΧ νθείσαν ύ . Thus also ίδεΐν, when it is for περίίδείν, Eur. Or. 736. μη μ ίδείν θανόνθ ’ υπ* αστών και κασιγνητην εμην. Isocr. Patieg* p. 65. Β. rous βαρβάρους ουτω διεθεμεν, ώστε μη μόνον παυ~ σασθαι στρατείας εφ ημάς ποιούμενους, αΧΧα και την αυτών χώραν άνεχεσθαι πορθουμενην, 6 to suffer to be laid waste*. Comp. Thucyd. ii, 74.· Thucyd. vi, 16. ώσπερ δυστυχουντες ου προσαγορευόμεθα, εν τω ομοίιρ τις ανεχεσθω a Porson. ad Eurip. Hec. 112. Wyttenb. ad Eccl. Hist. p. 366. h Daw. Misc. Cr. p. 268. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. T. 1505. Syntax. Of the Participle.' S3& και vtto των evTrpayovvrwv καταφ povov μεν os. JEsch. Again. 1284. άλωμενη ηνεσχομην, SUStifllli eware. Eui. Bacch. 789· ούκ ανεζεται κινονντα Bct/c^as·. Med. 73. και ταΰτ Ίάσων iraiSas εξανεξεται ττασχοντα?; and,, since ανεχεσθαι is constructed also with the genitive for the accusative, id. Troad . 101. μεταβαλλόμενου δαίμονος ανεχου, e sustain the change of thy lot’. Comp. Andr. 341 , Plat. Apol. p. 72. άνεχεσθαι των οικείων αμελούμε¬ νων, res suas perire sinere. Comp. Phil. p. 212. Rep. X, p. 321. Eur. Heracl. 353. νικωμενη Παλλας ουκ ανέ¬ χεται. ‘ will not suffer herself to be conquered’. Xen. Pyr, v 5 1 5 26. ορωντες ere ανε^ομεθα και καρτερησομεν ΐιπο σου ευεργετούμενοι. Comp. Mem. S. II, 1, 2. 6, 4. c'i tk ευ πάσχω* άκεχοιτο, ‘ suffered benefits to be conferred upon him’. Hellen. ii, 3, 14. and καρτερεί* Soph. Phil. 1274. Xen. Cyr. in, 2. 5. Thus also «bnW- *ει*. Herod. VII, ΙΟΙ. ei ’’Ελληνες ύττομενεουσ I χεΤ pas· i/xol άνταειρόμενοι, c whether they will venture’ (properly persevere), which, however, is more commonly followed by the infinitive; and τληναι. jJSsch. Agam. 1049· 7r /’ «" θεντα τληνοί. Soph. El. 943. τλήναΐ σε δράσαν a "* έγώ τταραι*εσω. Comp. PMoci. 536. properly ‘ to persevere’, per sever are. Herod, ix, 45. λιχαρεετε μενοντες, and the opposite κάμνειν, ‘ to be weary of a thing’, w κάμψ φίλον avSpa evepy ετών in thing’. It. p 3 65. < In the same manner also ayairqv, c to be contented withj to be pleased with’, is to be constructed. Plat. Rep. V, p. 36. V 7 TO cr μικρότερων και φαυλότερων τιμώμενοι ά Ί αττώσιν. Isocr. Panath. p. 234. C. oik ά Ί απω ζων * Valcken. ad Eur. Ph, 550. 834 Syntax. Of the Participle. 67 Γ* τούτοις. Thus also Herod. IX, 39· άόην είχον κτεί- νοντες. 8. The verbs f to make to desist', and f to desist*, τταυειν, παύεσθαι. Xen. Mem. S. Ill, 6 , 1 . ΤΧαυκωνα τον *Αρίστωνος ουόεις ηόύνατο παύσαι εΧκόιαενόν τ€ από του βήματος και καταγέλαστοι/ οντα. XeTl. CEcon. 1, 23. at τοιαυται όεσποιναι (at επιθυμίαι) αίκιζόμ€ναι τα σώματα των ανθρώπων και τα? φυχάς και τους οίκους ονποτε Xriyov- civ , εστ αν άρχωσιν αυτών. Avist. Plut. 360. παυσαι φΧνα* ρών. But ίη Eurip. Ion. 1404. σφάζοντες ού \η*γοιτ αν, means non facietis, ut desistam, quamvis me made - tis. — II. ft/, 48. κΧαύσας μεθεηκε, Z. e. επαυσατο , desiit fiere. Eur. Ph. 459. ζυνωρίοας Χάχων τάσσων επεσχον, see the note of Porson. lb. 1747. α ταγέ τα πάρος εύτυ- χηματ αυόών, desine memorare ; see the note of Valckenaer. Plat. Menex. in. ίνα μη εκΧίπγ υμών η οικία άεί τινα υμών επιμεΧητην παρεχόμενη. Comp. ib. p. 305. Phileb. p. 239· και άχχά yε crj μνρία επιΧείπω Χε*γων, dicere omitto } as Xen. CEcon. 6, l. ενθεν Xeywv περί της οικονομίας απεΧιπες. Plat. Theaet. p. 137. εμε όεΊ άπηΧΧάχθαι σοι άποκρινάμενον. In the same manner also the verbs άρχομαι , υπάρχω are constructed with the participle, but only when they signify f to do for the first time’, ( f to be the first to do’), as υπάρχω Herod. IX, 78. όκως — τις ύστερον φυΧάσσηται τών βαρβάρων, μη υ πάρχειν ερτγα άτάσθαΧα ποιεων ες τούς *'ΕΧΧηνας ά , or when it is intended to express not so much the beginning generally of an action not pre¬ viously occurring, but rather a more precise definition of an action already presupposed, e. g. Xen. Cyrop. VIII, 7, 26. αλλα yap η$η εκΧιπειν μοι φαίνεται η ψνχη. d Valck, ad Eurip. Ph. 1576. 835 Syntax . Of the Participle. o9ev7rep, ώς εοικε, ητασιν αρχεται απόΧείπουσα, where it first fails’. Yet Soph. El. 522. says, άρχω καθυβριζουσ a for καθνβριζειν. Obs. 1. The participle ών is sometimes omitted, and only 550. the adjective belonging to it is put. Soph. CEd. C. 1210. σώς ίσθι. See Brunck’s note. Eurip. Hipp. 657. el μεν yap ορκοις θεών άφρακτος ενρεθην. — Soph. (Ed. 0. 7So. φρασω όε και τοισό , ως σε όηΧωσω κακόν. Plat. Leg. x, p. 89. Ικανώτατα όεόει- κται φνχη των ττάντων Ίτρεσβυτάτη , yευoμεvη τε αρχή κινήσεων, where the word yεvoμεvη following, contains the cause. Obs. 2. When the subject of the participle, and of the finite verb is the same, the participle is sometimes put in the accusa¬ tive, instead of the nominative. Isocr. Panath. p. 252. E. οιόα σαφώς εμαντό ν ονκ εμμενοντα τρ ττραοτητι for εμμενων . Ib. ρ. 2S2. D. όοκεϊς - €ΐόώς σεαυτόν εττηνεκότα την "Σπαρτιατών πάλιν, ως ουόας άλλος, φοβεισθαι, ι SfC. Comp. π. άντιό. ρ. 345. E.—Xen. (Econ.S, 7. βγω σοί σύνολα έπι μέν κωμωόων θέαν και πάνυ πρωί ανισταμενον και πανν μα¬ κράν όόόν βαόίζοντα καί έμέ άναπείθοντα προθύμως συνθεάσθαι. Isocr. π. άντιό. ρ. 319. Ε. συνίσασι yap τοΊς μέν διά φιλοπραγμοσόνην έμπειροις των αγώνων γεγενη- μενοις, τούς όέ έκ φιλοσοφίας εκείνων των λόγων, ών προει- πον, την όΰναμιν είληφό τοί, καί τους μέν — ανεκτούς όν¬ τας, τούς όέ — τυγχάνοντας, Sfc. where the change of the dative for the accusative is remarkable. Obs. 3. Instead of the participle after the above-mentioned verbs, the infinitive is put, though rarely, άκούειν with the infi¬ nitive is noticed by a grammarian, ap. Ruhnken. ad Xen. Mem. S. hi, 1 , 1 . as a peculiarity of Xenophon; but this verb com¬ monly takes the infinitive, when it signifies to receive an ac¬ count of any thing’, when any one has not heard immediately the action following, e. g. Her. vi, 117· Xen. Anab. it, 5, 13. _Infin. after οιόα, 'ίσθι, επίσταμαι Soph. Ant. 473. El. 6l6. Eurip. Iphig. A. 1005. But in Soph. Antig. 472. ε’ίκειν ούκ έπίσταται κακο7ς, and Isocr. π. άντιό. ρ. 315. D. έπίσταμαι, signifies c I am. able, she knew not how to yield’, and the infini¬ tive thus put is regular. After γινώσκειν Xen. Cyr. yin, 4, 11. 836 t Syntax Of the Participle. • / After avyytv(0(TK€tv Herod, hi , 53. iv, 126. v, 86. Vi, 61. After πυνθάνεσθαι Herod. i, 196. Thuc. iv, 29· 105. vn, 25. Isocr. in Callim. p. 373. D. After αίσθάνεσθαι Thuc . vi, 59. Plat. Phadr. p. 296. After περιοραν, as having the sense of caw, Herod, n, 64. hi , 48. vn, 16, 1 . Thuc.u, 20. iv, 48. v, 29. vi, 38, 86. After δηΧον είναι Plat. Leg . x, p. 97· After άνεχεσθαι, as τοΧμα,ν, Herod, vn, 139· After τζαυειν Herod . v, 67. JEsch. Prom . 248. Plat. Rep. hi, p. 322. • ,· ·- . ' . : > v v Ohs. 4. On the other hand, the participle is very often put for the infinitive. In many cases it is quite indifferent which con¬ struction is chosen, e. g. εοικεναι, f to appear’, takes the infini¬ tive ; but when it signifies also f to resemble’, it may take the same action, which is otherwise in the infinitive, in the dative of the participle. Plat. Alcib. i, p. 47. παντός μάΧΧον εοικας άΧηθη ειρηκότι. Xen. Mem. S. I, 6, 10. εοικας την ευδαιμο¬ νίαν οίόμενω τρυφήν και ποΧυτεΧειαν είναι. Comp, ιν, 3, 8. Thus also Plat. Menon. p. 383. όμοιοι εσμεν ούκ ορθών ώμoXoyηκόσT. And with the participle in the nominative. Plat. Cratyl. p. 303. χαρά τρ διαχύσει και εύπορίμ της ροής της φυχδς εοικε κεκΧημε νη, as Arist. Thesm. 38. προθυσο- μενος εοικε της ποιησεως. The construction is extraordinary in Plato Epist.wii, p. 98. εις 'Συρακούσας διεττορεύθην, ' ίσως μεν κατα ^ύχην, εοικε μην τότε μηχανω μενιρ τινι των κρειττονων άρχην βαΧεσθαι τών νυν yεyovότωv ^Γpayμaτωv. Schaef > ad Long. ρ. 367 sq. Thus it is indifferent whether we say ζύμφο- pov εστι ταύτα πραχθηνοα or ταυτα ζύμφορά εστι πραχθεντα , 3 s in Plato Republ. ν, ρ. 21. \κανώ τώ φύΧακε κωΧύειν , f are in a situation to prevent’, or 'ικανώ τώ φύΧακε κωΧυοντε. ‘ they are sufficient in preventing", Plat. Rep. v, p. 35. άμεινόν εστιν ημΊν ποΧεμειν or ποΧεμούσι, c when we carry on w r ar, it goes better with us’. Thuc. I, 118. Comp. Xen. Vectig. 6, 2. τούτο άμεινον εστϊ ττράττεσθαι or ^Γε7Γpayμεvov Xen. Cyr. vm, 4, 11 . Thus in Isocr. Panath. p. 268/ E. η πόΧις αύτοΊς ουκ επι- τρεφει παραβαίνουσι τον νόμον , the verb εττιτρεττειν is in an absolute sense, as Xen. Hell, ii , 3, 51. where also ττα- ' ,1 , . ■ I 15 ■ ... y i 1 (, , . ‘ . . e Heind. ad Plat. Cratyl. p. 10S sq. Syntax. Of the Participle. 887 ραβαίυειν might be put. Thus too διακωλΰειν Isacr. Plat . p. 305. A· But the participle is sometimes put after other verbs also, which properly require the infinitive, as after πε,ρασθαι Herod. i 77 . ii,73. iv, 125. 139- vi, 9· vn, 148. ix, 53. Plat. Phil. p. 228. Theaet. p. 153 f , after πείθω Time, iv, 17. after κνριόι είμι Thuc. v, 34 . vni, 51. after συμβαίνει Plat. Phileb. p. 272. Menex. p. 280. after αναινομαι Jtsch. Again. 594 . Eurip. Iph. A. 1512. Here. f. 1238^ particularly after παρασκευάϊεσθαι Time, vi, 53. chiefly with m Herod, vn 64 Thuc. II, 18. m, 115. vii, 50. Pioi- Phadon. p. 222. os of these verbs, in the places where they are joined with the par¬ ticiple seem to be considered as independent verbs, not requir¬ ing the addition of their reference to complete their meaning, an the other verb as an accessary definition of the same, not as the necessary result of them. The participle is put for the infinitive also after the verbs > say’, and their like, e. g. after άγ/ελλεσθαι Eur. Iph.T. 9 9. Thuc. in 16 . vn, 48. vm, 79- Xen. Hellen. vn, 5, 10 . De- mosth V 11 19· 2 9, 20 . after \ί'/εσθαι Plat. Phileb. p. 232. Z ί\ΐω] φράζω Soph. (Ed. c. 1580. Eurip. Iph. A. 807. Rhes. 758. 955. after έννεπω Soph. El. 676 . a ter μαρτνρεω id. Antig. 995. Similarly Eur. Iph. A. 426. όιφ φημη ™Sa σην aμ εμμενει μοι, where dWre yp(jj y ηρα προΧείπων. Xetl. Cyr. Ill, 3, 35. ύμΐν παραινών — αίσχυνοίμην αν. Comp. IV, 6, 7· V, 1. 20. νιι, ι, 16 . νιιι, 2, 13. Isocr. JEgin. ρ. 392 . C. Demosth. ρ. 80, 26. The same relation obtains in χάριν ίσθι εών απαθής Herod, ιχ, 79. where εών απαθής contains the foundation of the first, c consider it a kindness that you are unpunished’. h Valck. ad Herod, p. 212, 36. ad Eurip, Hipp. J.c. 839 Syntax. Of the Participle. When the second verb refers to a different subject from the first, then, according to the different construction of the verbs, the genitive, dative, and accusative are put: the genitive when it expresses a cause (§. 345.) e. g. Herod. VIII, 109. oi Αθηναίοι εκπεφεvyoτωv περιημε- κτ6ον. χαίρειν and ηδεσθαι take the object in the dative (§. 403. b.) Od. β', 249. o\f κεν οι κεχάροιτο γυνή, μαλα irep χατεουσα, ελθόντι. But as χαίρειν, αχθεσθαι take also the accusative of the object, an accusative also is put here, especially by the Tragic writers. II. v\ 352, ηχθετο yap pa T ρωσιν δαμναμε νους {τους Αχαιούς)· Soph. Phil. 1314. ησθην σε ovXoyovvTa πατέρα τον εμόν, ζ that thou commendest my father’. Aj. 136. σε μεν εν πράσσοντ επιχαίρω. Eurip. Med. 884. y χρην —νύμ¬ φην κηδεν ουσ αν ηδεσθαι σεθεν. RheS. 390. χαίρω $ε σ εύτνχοΰντα και προσημενον π vpyo&iv εχθρών ι . 05s. These verbs also are sometimes followed by the infi¬ nitive instead of the participle, e. g. Eurip. Hec. 556. δούλη κεκλησθαι , βασιλις ουσ, αισχυνομαι. Comp. 962. οϊκτείρω, ‘ it grieves me’. Soph. Aj. 652. οίκτείρω νιν χήραν τ rap εχ¬ θροί παΊδά τ δρφανδν λιπεϊν. Sometimes, however, the second verb may be considered as the consequence of the former, in which case the infinitive stands in its place, e. g. Plat. Theag. p. 16 . αισχυνομαι Xoyoiv ως σφοδρά βούλομαι ( f I cannot say it, for I am ashamed’). Xen. Cyr. hi, 3, 13. Id. de Rep. Lac. 1, 5. εθηκε yap (A uKodpyos) αίδείσθαι μεν εισιδντα δφθηναι , αι- δεΐσθαι δ* εξιόντα. With some verbs which express only a circumstance 552. or accessary definition of an action, the verb, of which they express a circumstance, is put in the participle. These accessary verbs are usually expressed by adverbs: l. Verbs which express a continuance, διατελεω , • i Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. 1339- ad Phcen. p. 267- Toup. ad Suid. n, p. 371 . Brunck. ad Soph, Phil, Aj. 41. cc. Aj. 790. * I 840 Syntax. Of the Participle. ^ια^γί^γνομαί) Siaya). Herod. I, 32. ος αν αυτεων {των αγαθών) πλείστα εχων διατελετι ( f continues to have’) και επείτα τελευτησρ ευχαρίστως τον βίον, ούτος παρ εμοι 7*ο ουνομα τούτο (του ολβίου) δίκαιός εστι φερεσθαι. — Xen. Apol. S. 3. ουδεν άδικον δ iay ε^ενημα ι ποιων. Comp. Mem. S . IV, 8, 4. Thuc. VII, 39. οι 'Συρακουσιοι επί πολύ δ ι η you της ημέρας π ειρωμενοι άλληλων . Comp. Xen. Cyr. I, 2, 6. Thus also II. ι , 326. ηματα δ' ηματάεντα δ ιεπ ρησ- σον πόλε μίζων. Eurip. Or. 1678. η δάμαρ -σε μυ- t t ^ ft ^ ft \ ft r ριοις πονοις οιόουσα οευρ αει οιηνυσε. ν * 2. λανθάνει ν, c to be hidden’, Herod. νιπ, 5. αυτός τε ο θεμιστοκλεης εκερδρνε, ελάνθανε δε τα λοιπά εχων, c he had the rest unknown to any one*. 111, 40. καί κως τον * 'Αμασιν ευτυχεων μεyάλως ο ΥΙολυκράτης ούκ ελάνθανε, non fugiebat Amasin, Polycratem fortunatissimum esse, Thuc. IV, 133. ελαθεν άφθε ντα πάντα και καταφλε- χθεντα , c every thing was burnt without being perceived by any one’. Xen. Cyr. 11, 4, 15. ουκουν σοι δοκει συμφορον είναι τό λεληθεναι ημάς ταυτα βουλευοντας ; f that we deliberate upon this in secret’. Arist. Eccles. 26 . η θοιμά- τια τ ανδρεία κλεφάσα ις λαθειν ην χαλεπόν αύτάις. In other cases the accusative of a reflexive pronoun may be understood. Herod. I, 44. ο K ροισας φονεα του παιδός ελάνθανε βάσκων , inscius alebat, or f knew not that he was keeping the murderer of his son’. Id. 11, 173. εί εθελοι άνθρωπος κατεσπουδάσθαι αει , μηδε ες πα^νιην τό μέρος εωϋτον ανιεναι, λάθοι αν ήτοι μανεις η oye άπάπλη- κτος yεvάμεvoς, ‘ wbuld insensibly become deranged’ Comp. Xen. Cyr. vi, 2 , 29 . Mem. S. iv, 3, 9 . Arist. Nub. 380. τουτί μ ελελη θη ό Ζευς ουκ ων, άλλ’ άντ αυ- του ΔΊνος βασιλεύων, ~ c I was ignorant that there was no Jupiter k . Toup. a,d Sviid. T. 1, p. 378. Comp. Viger. p. 25S sqq. Syntax. Of the Participle. 841 Instead of the participle Homer puts ore II. p, 627. €wk cXaOe Zei)s, ore SlSov. Also Χανθά veiv is often put in the participle, e. g. II. μ , 390. άψ $ από ταίχεον αλτο Χαθώ ν. 3. φθάνειν, ‘ to come before, to prevent’, in which 553. a comparison is implied. II. v, 815. ή κε πολύ φθαιη ευ ναιομένη πόλις ύμη χερσιν ύφ’ ημετέργσιν άλοΰσά τε π έρ¬ θομε ν η τε. Comp. II. π, 314. 322. Herod. IV, 136. εφθησαν πολλω οί Σκνθαι τους Περνάς ext την γέφυραν απι- κόμευοι, ’ came to the bridge long before the Persians’. Thuc. VI, 97. ό oe χεξοί έχωρει ευθύς ορομω ιερός τας Έπιπολάς, καί φθάνει άναβάς κατά το Ε ,ύρόηλου,. ιτρϊν τούς ~ϊ.νρακουσ'ιους — παραγενέσθαι. Sometimes- ιτροτερον is added by a pleonasm, as Herod, vi, 91· Demosth. Phil, ii, p. 70. And η is put for -πριν. Herod, vi, 108. φθα'ιητε ιτολλάκις «% άνδραποδισθέντες, η τ,να πυθέ- σθαι ήμεων. Comp. Xen. Cyr. ι, 6, 39 . On the contrary, Eunp.Med. 1170. says μόλις φθάνει θρόνοισιν έμπεσοόσα μη χαμαί πεσεϊν, for ώστε μη πεσεΐν. Hence this verb forms many phrases: a. φθάνειν, with a negation, may often be rendered by vix, ‘ hardly’. Isocr. Paneg. p. 58. B. οί Λακεδαι¬ μόνιοι ουκ εφθησαν τευθόμενοι τον περί την Αττικήν 7 Γ oXefnov, και πάντων των αΧΧων άμβΧησαντες ηκον ημιν άμυνοϋντες, ‘ they no sooner heard of the war, than they, &c. Comp. id. AEgin p. 388. E. ad Phil. p. 92 . E. Demosth. p. 1073, 19 . Arist. Nub. 1384. b. Sometimes the idea of rapidity only is contained in φθάνειν, JEschm. in Ctesiph. p. 639, lav τούς, προκατα¬ λαμβάνοντας τα κοινά και φιλάνθρωπα των ονομάτων, απί¬ στους 'όντας τοις ηθεσι, φυλάξησθε. ή 7«Ρ εύνοια καί τό τφ βημοκρατ’ιας όνομα κείται μεν έν μέσω, φθά νουσι δ' επ αύτά καταφεύγοντες τω λόγω ώς επί τό πολύ οί τοις εργοις 842 Syntax, Of the Participle, πλειστον an Γεχοντε?, where φθάνουσι καταφβύ^γοντες, as well as προκαταλαμβάνουσι , is the same as ευθύς καταφαίγουσι. Hence the phrase ‘. ουκ αν φθάνοις ποιων τούτο ; e wilt thou not do this immediately* ? (i. e. do it immediately. See §.514. 3.) Eunp.Alc.673. Toiyap φυτεύων παιάας ουκ €τ αν φθάνοις ; gignere liberos non amplius differ as. Comp. Iphig. T. 245. Avist . Plut. 1133· ταύτην επιπιων, άποτρεχων ουκ αν φθάνοις ; with the note of Brunck. Comp. Xen, Mem. Socr. n, 3, n. m, n, l. (r) c. This phrase is also used without the interroga¬ tion,, in which case it seems to have arisen from an abbreviation, since the participle properly belonging to φθάνειν, as ποιων, is omitted; and instead of it, the sen¬ tence with πριν is expressed by the participial construe^ tion. Herod, VII, 162. ουκ αν φθανοιτ€ οπίσω απ αλλα(Τ~ cro μεν οι. i. e. ουκ αν φθ. α\\ο τι π ο ιου ντ ες, η άπ· Eurip . Or. 925. ei yap αρσενων φόνος εσται yvvaij'iv οσιος , ον φθανοιτ 6τ αν θνη σ κοντές, for ου φθάνοιτε άλλο τι πασχοντες, πριν (η) θνησκειν, i. e. f you will quickly die*. Comp. 930. Troad. 460. Heracl. 423. φθάνοις S άν ουκ αν τοΐτόε ervy κρυπτών άεμας, for φθάνοις ουκ άν αλλό τι ποιων , πριν συ^κρυπτειν. Plat, Phcedon. p.Q&7 . αλλά μην, ως άιόόντος σοι, ουκ άν φθάνοις περαίνων, c quickly finish*. Comp .Symp.p. 193 . Euthyd, p, 7 . Demosth. in Timocr, p. 745. Aristog. p. 783 l * * 4 . Obs. 1. This verb is put also in the participle II. φ', 576. ε'ιπερ yap φθαμενος μιν η ουτάστι , ηε βάλφσιν, Herod, ιχ, 46. εν νοω ey%veTo είπαι ταντα, τάπερ υμείς φθάντες η τρο- φερετε. In Attic peculiarly φθάσας. 1 Thom. Μ. ρ. 893. Coll. Schol. Eur. Or. 934. Bucbeus p. 214. Piers, ad Herod, post Mcerid. p. 452. Herm. ad Viger. p. 746. takes (pdaveiv in the sense of cesso , desino , the Scholiast on Aristoph. Plut. 485. explains it άναβάλλεσθαι, ‘ to put off'. Buttmann. G. G. p. 336. 4 to escape’. m I Syntax. Of the Participle. Obs. 2. The infinitive also is found sometimes after φθά veiv. II. π, 860. τις S’ ol$’, ει κ Άχϊλεύς - φθηρ εμω in το Soupl τι /7 rets από θνμ.6ν ολεσσαί', Isocr. Evag. ρ. 183. C. ανηρ ασεβής και πονηρός τυχόν αν φθάσειε τ ελευτήσαι, πρϊν όονναι οικην των ημαρτημένων . 4 . ruyxaveiv , which expresses the idea of chance. Herod. I, 88. ω βασιλεύ, κότερου Xeyeiv πρός σε , τα νοεων τυγχάνω, ή σιγερν εν τφ παρεόντι χρόνιο χρή ; c what I am just now thinking". Comp, vii, 3, 224. Thucyd. rvr, 113. e τνχον οπΧιται εν tyj ayopci καθενόοντες ως πεντηκοντα. Plat. Phcedon. p. 131. τύχη τις αντω συνέβη * ετυχε yap τη προτερα'κρ. τής όίκης η 7 τρνμνα ε στεμμένη του πλοίου, c it happened that n , &c." (r) In the same manner the Poets use κυρω. Soph. Phi- loci. 30. όρα καθ' ύπνον μη κατακλιθείς κυρή 0 . Sometimes the participle ων is wanting with adjectives* Soph. (Ed. C. 726. και yap ει ye ρω v κυρω, το τήσόε χωράς οό yey ήρακε σθένος. Arist. Eccl. 1141. και των θεα¬ τών ει τις ευνους Tvy χάνει. Plat. Hipp. JVIoj. ρ. 45. ουόε y αύ η όι ακοής ηόονη, οτι όι ακοής εστι, όια ταυτα τυγ- χάνει καλή. Isocr. Archld. ρ. 129. Ε. καταλελυσθαι τούς νόμους , μεθ’ ών οικουντες ευό αι μονεστ ατοι των Ελλήνων ετυγχανον*. Also without an adjective. Soph. El. 3 13. νυν $ ay ροισι Tvyxavei. SC. ων. Obs. 1 . These verbs also stand in the participle with other finite verbs. Soph. (Ed. C. 1490. ηνττ ep τυ^χάνων ήττεσχό- μην^. m Bibl. Crit. in, 2, p. 22. n Fisch. hi, b. p. 7· ° Fisch. ib. p Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 190* Phasdr. p. oOt). q Brunck. ad Soph. 1. c. Herm. ad Vig. p. 744 , 198. 844 Syntax. Of the Participle. Ohs. 2. The passage Soph. Phil . 222. is to be explained otherwise, ποιας πάτρας υμάς άν η 'γένους ποτέ τυχοιμ αν εϊπων , where τυχοιμ* * άν is the same as ορθώς άν είποιμι. ' \ ■ ' ^ . * 4 . ν . ' , · 554 In other cases the participle serves to express the action, with reference to which the finite verb deter¬ mines any condition or quality. Finite verbs of this kind are, f to distinguish one’s self in any thing, to be inferior, to benefit, to wrong, to err’, &c. Xen. Mem. S. II, 6, 5. επιχειρησομεν φίΧον ποιεϊσθαι εκεϊνον, ος φιΧονι- κός εστι προς το μη εΧΧείπεσθ at ευ ποιων τους ευεργε¬ τούνται εαυτόν , ( not to be behmd-hand in benefits . Herod. V, 24. ευ εποίησας άφικομενος , f thou hast well done in coming’. Comp, vi, 69-— Thuc. i, 53. αδικείτε, ω άντρες Άθηναϊοι, ποΧεμου άρχοντες, και σπόντας Χυον- τες, c ye do wrong in beginning the war’. Comp, in, 12. Xen. Cyr. hi, l, l. Mem. S . i, l. in. — Xen. Cyrop. 3, 56. εΧεγεν , οτι εζαμαρτάνοι διατριβών και ουκ άγων ως τάχιστα επι τούς ποΧεμίους. Thus also Herod. VII, 158. ό ΤεΧων ποΧΧος ενεκειτο Χεγων. IX, 90. ποΧ- Χο 9 ην Χισσομενος ο ζεινος , f was very assiduous in suppli¬ cating’. Id. I, 98. ο Δηίύκης ην πολλο? υπο παντός ανδρος και προβαΧΧόμενΟτ και αινεόμενος τ .— καταπρόίζεσθαι , impune aliquid ferre. Herod, ν, 105. ού καταπρόίξονται άποστάντες, e they shall not escape unpunished in deserting’ 8 . Similarly, Soph. (Ed. Col. 768. μεστός ην θυμού μένος. Καλώ? ποιειν is also put in the participle. Plat. Symp. p. 170. εΐπον ούν, οτι και αυτός μετά Σωκρατους ηκοιμι, κΧηθεις ύπ* εκείνου δευρ* επι δειπνον. Καλά)? γ , ϊφη, ποιων σύ ί Γ Wessel. ad Herod, ρ. 578. 10. s Valcken. ad Herod, p. 213, 93. * Dorv. ad Charit. p. 297. Heind. ad Plat. Charm, p. 64. 845 Syntax. Of the Participle. \ In other cases the participles contain accessary defi- 555. nitions of the principal verb, or of a substantive, which may be explained sometimes by the pronoun relative, and sometimes by various particles ; ‘ since, as, because, according as, although’, &c. They have in that case, on the one hand, the property of verbs, as being parts of them, in implicating the action expressed in them, according to the different tenses ; on the other hand, they are used as adjectives. Thence they are never put, l Regularly, by themselves, but in connection with a finite verb, or a substantive. 2. They are governed in sender, number, and case, by the substantive, whose action they indicate. Obs. 1. The finite verb does not always stand in the com¬ mon order of construction with the participle, but in another proposition; or it must be supplied from a preceding verb, so that it seems as though the participle stood by itself. II. Θ , 3°6. μηκών δ! «is er ερωσε κάρη βάλεν, ητ ένί κήπφ καρττω βρίθαμε νη νοτίησί re είαρινΐ/σι sc. ετερωσε κάρη βάλλει. Comp. Od. λ , 4H.‘ Herod, ι, 82. Λακεδαιμόνιοι δε τα εναντία τούτων εθεντο νόμον- ον yap κομωντες ιερό τούτου ώτο τούτου κομάυ, where the participle, as well as the infinitive, must have the words νόμον εθεντο supplied. The participle is put thus m parentheses, when they have a subject in common with die prin¬ cipal proposition, and in this case the verb in the principal pro¬ position extends its influence to the parenthesis: Herod, i, 185. η δε δη δεύτερον τούτης Ί ενομένη βασίλεια (αύτη όε συνετω- τέμη γενομενη της πρότερον άρξάσης) ελίπετο, ifc. Tkuc. I, 25. Κ ορίνθιοι δέ κατά τε το δίκαιον ύττεδδξαντο την τιμωρίαν, άμα δε καί μισεί των Κ ερκνραίων, &τι αύτών τταρημελουν οντες αποικοι" ούτε ydp iv ττανη Ί ύρεσι ταΐ ς κοιναις διόοντες y e pa τα υοαιΐόμενα, ούτε Κορινθίιρ άνδρ'ι προκαταρχομενοι των 'ιερών, Sfc. here the participles depend upon the word τταρημε- λουν repeated, although another writer would have used finite verbs. Thus in Tkuc. II, 17- vii, 28. Plat. Symp. p. 200. the infinitives in the proposition beginning with conjunctions yap, iwei, depend upon finite verbs in the preceding propositions, δοκούσι in the first and last passage, ηττίστησεν αν τις, in VOL. II. Η H I 846 Syntax. Of the Participle. the second. Sometimes also, when two actions are expressed, one of which has a greater extent, and the other is confined to itself, the latter is put in the participle, where we should have put the finite verb. Herod, vn, 6. extr. e\eye τον re Ελλή¬ σποντον ως ζευχθηναι 'χρεών είη υπ' άνδρός ΐΙερσεω } την τε ελασιν εζη^εόμένος. Thuc.il , 11. και επί πόλιν δυνατωτά- την νυν ερχάμεθ α 3 και αυτοί πλείστοι και άριστοι στρα- τευοντες. In dialogues particularly, the answer of one of the speakers is often united to the words of the other by a participle, as in the passage of Plato Syrup, p. 170. §. 554. Comp. Eurip. Phocn. 1649. Suppl. 247. Plat. Rep. i, p. 162. Theag. p. 10. Hipparch . p. 268. Xen. CEcon. 16 . in Symp. 4, 54. Elsewhere also the participle serves as a connection, as Plat. Rep. in, p. 288. λεληθαμεν ·γε διακαθαίροντες πάλιν ην άρτι τρυ- φμν εφαμεν πόλιν. Σωφρονουντες ye ημείς , η δ ος . ■ Phcedir. ρ. 283. εν κεφαλαίοις έκαστον εφεζης δίειμι , άρζάμένος από του πρώτον . ΣΩ. δείζας ye πρώτον , ώ φΐλότης , τι αρα εν τη αριστερά εχεις. ι» \ ι ('* ι I ’ ■ -Μ f , ι ·■ ( ·' ι t * · f · * < | r ? ^ι > * 1 ο ι * !»- ι ·| τ ** | Λ ~* J ’ll Ohs. 2. In other places the use or the position of the par¬ ticiple which does not agree with the foregoing rule, is the result of an anacoluthia. II. ω', 41. λέων v ως aypia οίδεν, οστ, επει αρ μεyάλy τε βίρ και ayr/vopi θυμψ εϊζας είσ επί μήλα βοών , tva δαίτα λάβησιν, ώς Αχιλευς ελεον μεν άπώλεσεν, fyc. where the proposition is begun, as if είζεν were to follow; but afterwards the conjunction is forgotten, and instead of όπεί είζε the construction είζας , with the same sense, is put. Herod. I, 129 · ώ yap δη δέον πάντως περιθείναι άλλω τεω τ?)ν βασΐλήίην, και μη αυτόν εχειν , δικαιότερου ΧΙηδων τειρ περιβαλειν τούτο τό aya6ov , η ΤΙερσεων, where to et yap δη must be supplied άλλο* περιεθηκε τό κράτος , and δέον signifies quia oportuisset , as just before, ei παρεόν αυτω βασιλέα yevea0ai— άλλω περιεθηκε τό κράτος. Xen . Hier. 2, 10. εάν δε δη καί άλλοι στρατευωσιν εις την πόλιν κρείττονες , εάν εξω του τείχους όντες οι ησ- σονες εν κινδυνω δοκουσιν είναι , εάν is repeated from the begin¬ ning of the proposition. Id. Mem. ii, 6, 25. et δε τ ts εν πολει τιμάσθαι βουλόμενος, όπως αυτός τε μη άδικηται , και τοίς φίλοις τά δίκαια βοηθείν δυνηται και άρζας αγαθόν τι ποιείν την πατρίδα πειράται, διά τι ό τοιουτος άλλω τοιουτιρ ουκ αν δυναιτο - συναρμόσαι ; it is intended to signify et $e τις, — βουλόμενος, Syntax. Of the Participle » 847 o 7 rft)S''-— ιτειράται 9 ουτω ττράττοι , but this conclusion of the conditional proposition on account of the parenthesis, and because οντω 7 τράττοι expressed only generally what was previously declared more definitely, is omitted, and βουΧόμένος is referred to the ο τοιουτος following 11 . | , ... · ■ * Obs. 3. The participle sometimes does not agree with its substantive, in gender, number, and case, like the adjective. , See §. 436. Particularly when the substantive is a collective one in the sing, number , the participle is often put in the plural masc . as Hesiod. Sc. Here. 475. πόλΧος 8 ηyeίpeτo Χαο$·, π- μώντες Κηϋκα. Comp. Thuc. ill, 79. HO. νιιι, 64. Xen. Cyr. iv, 3, 55 x Thus the participle is put in the singular, with the plural of the verb, because it expresses an action which belongs only to one of those indicated by the finite verb. Soph. Phil . 645. χωρωμεν , εν^οθεν Χαβων, ότον αε XP 6ia € Χ €ί · ^ee the note of Brunck. (r) When the participle does not agree with it s case, this also is a consequence of an alteration in the construction, anacolu- thon . II. 546. μεΧΧεις yap άφαιρησεσθαι άεθΧον,, τά φρο- νεων> οτι οι βΧάβεν άρματα και ταχε 'ίτπτω, αυτός τ εσ- ΘΧος εων, for αύτφ εσθΧίρ εόντι referred to οι. Comp. II. κ , 547. Msch. Choeph. 408. πετταλται 8 αύτ ε μ οι φίΧον κεαρ, τόν$ε κΧύουσαν οίκτον. Comp. Soph . El. 479» Plat. Each · p. 177· iyw νυν τταρακεΧευομαι σοι μη αφιεσθαι Ααχητος — X&y οντ α*. The collateral circumstances which are connected 556. with a substantive or a principal action, by means of the participle, are, as has been observed §. 555. either such as are expressed in other languages by the pro¬ noun relative , with a finite verb, e. g. y υνη τις χήρα u Comp, my Note on Horn. H. in Apoll. n, 157. P· 27 sq. Herm. ad Viger. p. 756 sq. x Fisch. hi, a. p. 307. y Interp. ad Iphig. A. 1556. Brunck. ad Msch. Prom. 2l6. Soph, El. 480. Fisch. iii, a. p. 391. Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 234. HH2 - 848 Syntax. Of the Participle. A opviv βίχβ, καθ έκαστη v ημέραν ωον avrrj τίκτουσΟιν, 1. e. η ετεκε, or such as are expressed in Latin and English, by various particles, f as’, or ‘ since, when, because, though, on account of’, &c. (of which see examples §. 565 seq.) In these cases, therefore, the Greek parti¬ ciples agree in sense with the Latin, for the most part; in Greek, however, they are much more frequently used than in Latin, not only because the Greek has partici¬ ples of all the principal tenses, in the active, passive, and middle ; but in the cases also where both languages have the same participle, the Greek employs it much more frequently than the Latin. Every action, which admits of being considered as only accompanying another which is the main action, and may thus be represented as an accessary circumstance of another, the Greeks are fond of expressing by the participle : and even when two finite verbs are joined by ‘ and’, one of them is generally put in the participle, and the copula omitted 2 . In addition to this general remark the following observa¬ tions deserve attention : . > i. The principal action of a proposition has often another verb added to it, which might, as far as necessity goes, have been omitted, and to which the principal action is referred in one of the above-mentioned rela¬ tions. Soph. (Ed . jF. 117· ovc? άγγελός rts, ού$ε συμπρα- κτωρ όΰου /caret S’, οτου τις εκμαθων εχρησατ αν , for εζεμαθεν αν. TkllC. VII, 14. επισταμενοις ύμϊν ·γράφω, ότι βραχεία ακμή πληρώματος. The relation itself IS inverted Thuc. VIII, 87· 'ίνα τούς Φοίνικας προα·γα·γων ες την Άσπενόον, εκχρηματίσαιτο άφείς, where COnsist- Herm, ad Viger. p. 755 sq. My Note ad Horn, H. p. 134. z 849 Syntax. Of the Participle. ently with the words, it must signify <·κχρηματισάμενοι άφείη, but άφείη, άφείς might be omitted 3 . 2. Several participles frequently stand in one pro¬ position,, without a connection. II. σ', 372. τον δ evp ιδ ρωοντα, ελισσό με vov nrepl φυσάς, σπευ δοντα, where the conjunctive particle would represent these verbs as three separate actions. Comp, π, 660. Eurip. Suppl. 231. εις $e στρατεία v πάντας Ά py βίους aywv, μάντεων Xe- yovTwv θεσφατ είτ άτιμο, σας, βιφ παρεΧθων θεούς άπωΧεσας ποΧιν, νεοις ταραχθείς. Comp. PlilCZTl. 22. Plat. Rep. ΙΙ, p. 223. άδικοι (orre?) κερδανούμεν τε, και Χισσόμενοι (the means), ύπερβαίνοντες και αμαρτα- νοντες (declaration of the case, f if’). Τ ref0ovT.es· αυτούς {τούς θεούς, means) άζημιοι άπαΧΧάξομεν. Comp. Xetl. Hist. Gr. vii, 5, 9. Two participles also are put in one member of a proposition, one of which is thus supei- fluOUS. II. φ\ 204. δήμον ερεπτομενοι επινεφριδίου κει- lMb ^ * / ; ■ ■ ροντες · ■ V · 3. Among the cases in which the participle is to be resolved by the pronoun relative, Xεyόμεvoς is particularly to be noticed, e. g. η Αιομηδεια Xey ομενη avayw, Plat. Rep. VI, p. 89 c . Herod. VI, 61. ev tyj θεράπντι καλούμενοι, ‘ in the city called Therapna\ 4. The participle with the article is rendered by is qui. s 269. Obs. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 2, 28. o't μεν εϊδάτες ο τι ποιούσιν, επιτυy')(cίvovτες { c if they are fortunate in it ) ων πράττουσιν ευδοξοί τε καί τίμιοι yiy νονται, και οί τε ομοιοι a Gregor, ρ. 35. ubi ν. Koen. 1. Reiz. ad Lucian. Τ. νι, ρ. 424, sq. Hoog. et Zeune ad Viger. p. 34S. XVII. ? " c Hoog. ad Viger. p. 15. 342. n. 850 Syntax . Of the Participle. (i; e. οι ομοίως επιτυγχάνοντες) τούτοις ηόεως χρωνται, οι Τ6 a jroTvy γάνοντες των ττρα^/ματων επιθυμουσι τουτους iirep αυτών βουΧεύεσθαι. In that case the same verb is often put as a finite verb, and as a participle. Herod. VII, 174. την ατραπόν , ύι ην ηΧωσαν οι αΧοντες Ελ- Χηνων εν θερμοπύΧησι, ούόε γβεσαν ύούσαν πρότερον. Comp. 220. This is particularly frequent in Plato, e. g. Apof S. p. 44. τι όη Xey οντες διεβαΧΧον οι $ιαβαΧΧοντες ; 5. The participle, in the sense of the relative with the finite verb, is sometimes, though rarely, referred to an infinitive. Eurip. Or. 50. πείθει ό Ορεστην μητερ , η σφ εγείνατο, κτεΊναι, προς ουχ άπαντας ευκΧειαν φερον , for ό, το κτέιναι μητέρα , φερει. In a similar manner* Virg. Mn. xi, 383. Proinde tona eloquio, soli turn tibi. .v ί > 6 \ ' ...· t \ ^ 'i * ‘ · '· \ J f *' I· ·' 6. The participle in definitions of time is often joined with the adverbs, αύτίκα , ευθύς , μεταξύ, άμα, the latter with the dative, Herod. II, 146. Διόνυσον XeyooTt οι ' Ελ·’ Χήνες ως αύτίκα y ενόμενον as SOOn as he was born ) es* τον μηρόν ενερράφατο Ζευς, Comp. VII, 220, and with the genitive absolute i, 79· — Soph. Aj. 762. άπ οίκων ευθύς εξορμωμενος, e as soon as he left the house , Plat. Phcedon. p. 171 · ούκούν yεvόμεvoι εύθύς εωρωμεν τε και ηκούομεν , * soon aftfcr our birth . Comp. Leg. 1 , p. 32. Rep. i, p. 148. and with the genitive absolute , Thuc. VII, 50.— Herod. II, 158. Νβκά μεν νυν μεταξύ όρύσσων επαύσατο , e during the digging , inter fodien- dum. Plat. Lys. p. 219 · Ο Μενεξενος εκ της αύΧης μεταξύ παίζων εισέρχεται. Comp. Leg· IX, Ρ· 14. and with the genitive absolute. Plat. Theag. p. 20. Χ^οντός σου μεταξύ y^yovc μοι η φωνή η του όαιμονίού. Comp. Rep. I, ρ. 165. — Herod. HI, 65. άμα τψ ίππω τούτο ποιησαντι , c as the horse did this*, ib. 86. Thuc . vm, 61. άμα τψ ηρι εύθύς ά ρχομενψ. Syntax. Of the Participle. 7. Verbs of motion are accompanied regularly by participles future , to express the object of the verbs. Xen. Mem. S. Ill, 7, 5. σε ye διδάξω v ωρρ,ημάι, ‘ in order to teach thee’. Plat. Alcih. i, p. 12 . άνιστάμενος συμ¬ βουλευτών*. Sometimes also the participle present is put in this case. Soph . Aj. 781. πεμπει με σοι φεροντα τάσδ’ επιστολής. Thuc. I, 116. ετυχον yap αι μεν επί Χαρίας — οίχόμεναι, αι δε επί Χίον και Αεσβου, περί ay- yeW ονσαι βοηθειν . Comp. Α.6ΥΙ. Hist. Gr. II,. 1, 29· Isocr. Panath. p. 268. JE e . But άπιωυ άνίστατο does not come under this head. See §. 504. Frequently, however, the construction of the verb έρχομαι with the partic. fut; serves only as a circumlocution of the future. Herod . i, 194 . έρχομαι φράσων. Plat. Theag. p. 20. έρχομαι άτίοτ θανούμενοςβΟ?· Y.dl ί)Π.ί> / 8. When the subject of the participle is indetermi¬ nate, where in English f one’ is used, it is often put without any substantive, to which it can be referred. Herod. I, 42. ούτε yap συμφορά roirjSe κεχρημενον οίκος εστι ες ομηλικας εύ πρησσοντας ίεναι , ούτε το βονλεσθαι πάρα, 6 one under such a misfortune’, Arist . Plut. 256, άλλ’ εστ επ' αυτής της ακμής , ρ δει παροντ αμυνειν. Comp. Plat. Leg. ιν, ρ. 188. Thus also in the nominative. Xen. Cyr. VI, 2, 1. ηλθον δε εν τουτω τω χρόνίρ καί παρά του Ίνδοΰ χρήματα ay οντες, c people who brought . , \(.·' Ay .(JlilOv/ In this place some verbs require to be noticed parti- 557. cularly, which are put in the participle with other verbs, and differently expressed. Of this kind are : .V ,'iK) · gdj djj a Valck. ad Phcen. p. 289» a( l Herod, p. 642, 82. Ear. Suppl. 542. 772. Fisch. m, b. p. 24. e Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 154. Zeune ad Viger. p. 343. Vig. p. 754, 224. Markl. ad ?, .Λΐ l' Herm. ad ! 852 Syntax * Of the Participle. άρχόμ*νος, alone or with a genitive, f in the beginning*- Thucyd. IV, 64. άπερ και άρχόμένος εϊπον. Plato Phcedr. P. 357. Ο Αυσίας άρχόμενος του Ερωτικού ηνάγ- κασεν ημάς υπολαβείν. But αρζαμενος απο χρυσόν, &C. means, * primarily’, ' or especially gold*. Herod, v, 49. εστι δε και αγαθά τοίσι την ήπειρον εκείνην νεμομενοισι—απο χρυσου άρζαμενοισι, άργυρος καί χαλκός , for πρώτον μεν χρυσός, επειτα δε άργυρος και χ, as V, 50. αρχετο εκ δέκα ταλάντων υπισχνεόμένος, ( he offered first ten talents . Plat. Rep. VI, p. 99. οϊμαι τους πολλούς των άκουόντων προ¬ θυμότερου ετι άντιτείνειν, ουδ οπωστιουν πεισομενους, απο θρασυμάχου άρζαμενους, and particularly Thras. Id. Alcib. I, p. 5. τα υπάρχοντά σοι μεγάλα είναι (ψης)> ώστε μηδενός δείσθαι, από του σώματος άρζαμε να, τελευτώντα είς την ψυχήν, ‘ first thy body, and lastly thy soul·. Xen. Vectig. 5, 3. τίνες γάρ ησυχίαν άγουσης της πόλεως, ου προσ- δεοιντ αν αυτής : άρζάμενοι από ναύκληρων καί έμπορων §· t η « * « 1 ' \ ι » ' f ουχ οι πολυσιτοι ; ΙΟΓ πρώτον μεν των ν. και εμπ. ουχ οι π . τελευτών often stands in the sense of the adverb, f lastly’. Plat. Rep. IV, p. 338. καί τελευτών δη, οίμαι, φαιμεν αν είς εν τι τελεον καί νεανικόν άποβαίνειν αυτό ξ . .UfflfiO Τ'! .,’* · . ·\ · T“Q’3 λ διαλιπών χρόνον , with ΟΓ without πολύν, ολίγον. Plat, Phcedon. ρ. 266. ούτος ό δους τό φάρμακου, διαλιπών χρό¬ νον , ( c after some time’) επεσκόπει croJs πόδας καί τα σκέλη. Comp. ρ. 267. .Νίί.ϊ b-'-oiiOif )(.·;■ ο.ί x l·; vr· -&,‘U ; I Ϊ j ? £t] φέρω v and άγων are often put, the former with in¬ animate, and the latter with animated things: «. in Homer with the verbs * to give, to place’. II. η , 304. Έκτωρ ij> K f Heusde Spec. Cr. in Plat. p. 39 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 83 sq. g Hoog. ad Vig. p. 364. I Syntax. ' Of the Participle. 815 J properly, ‘ make haste and bind’. For which Arist. Av. £41. άνύσα re 7 τετομενα προς εμαν av$av k . Obs. Under this head are reckoned also the participles of the verbs ‘ to go, to come’, in which the idea of quickness is to h Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. n, p. Herm. ad Vig. p, 758. 1 Valck. ad Eur. Ph. p. 92. k Piers, ad Moer. p. 62. 423. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 517· 854 Syntax· Of the Participle. be conveyed 1 . II. v t 9· ου yap by αθανάτων τιν εεΧπετο bv κατά θυμόν εΧθόντ η Ύρωεσσιν apnyefxev η ΑαναοΊσιν. Comp. Herod, vu, 225. Thuc.y ιι, 73. Arist. Nub. 99· μάνθαν εΧθων, a \ cyw παραινεσω. Vesp. 789· δραχμήν μετ εμού πρώην λα¬ βών , εΧθων διεκερμάτιζεν εν τοΐς ίγθυσιν. Xen. Cyr. II, 2, 6. ουτω και €·γω εΧθων εδίδασκον ενα Χόχον. Soph· Phil. 353. ει τάπι Τροία πεpyaμ αιρησοιμ ίων* Comp. II. ν, 15. Eurip. Cycl. 240. Sophocl. Phil. 920 . (ι >οώ) ζυν σο\ τα Τροία? πεδία πορθησαι μοΧων. By themselves these participles seem to have no peculiar sense, only they must be rendered by the finite verb followed by και , f to come and. help, come and hear, i went and spent, went and taught’, &c. where in English, c to go, to come’, and in Greek the participles of these verbs might be omitted. According to this resolution Plato says. Pep. yiii, p. 196. ηΧθε και παρεδωκε , where ηΧθε is in the same’manner pleonastic. 23 The same circumstance attends the participle Χαβων t Arist . Av. 56· συ δ' ου ν Χίθω κόφον Χαβων , c take a stone and strike him’. Also II. μ\ 453. φερεν άείρας 9 c took up and carried’. A third person also, and a participle of the same verb, are often put together, especially in Plato. Plat. Euthyd. p . 40. τίνα ποτ ουν αν κτησ ά μεν οι επιστήμην ορθως κτη- σαίμεθα ; ( how must we acquire knowledge" in order to make a right use of it’ ? 1 how "can we obtain know¬ ledge in a proper manner’ ? Id· Prot. p. 1 74. υπό ηδονη* φασιν ηττωμενους η Χυπης —— ταυτα ποιειν τοι)? ποιον ν- τας, c they who did this, did it because’, &c. Alcib. 1 , p. 12. τότε συ ανιστάμενος ως συμβουΧευσων ορθώς ανα- στηση. Ib. II, ρ. 78. πάντας ουν άν φάντες τους άφρονας μαινεσθαι όρθώς άν φαίημεν. But Plat. Each. p. 175. instead of ου ενεκα σκοπουμενοι σκοπουμεν it should be σκο- πουμεν α σκοπονμεν , as Apol. S„ p. 51. CvitOTl. p. 119· 1 Dorv. ad Char. p. 379. / Syntax. Of the Participle. $55 Gorg. p . 131. (Of the confusion of oi and a see Porson . «d Eurip. Med. 44 m ). Λ The participle frequently expresses the means by which the principal action is effected. Eur. Pheen. 1231 . ην μη με φευ^ων εκφύ yys προς αιθέρα , where Porson adduces more instances. For which Plato Symp. p. 213. φεύ Ύ ειν φιτγγ. Both kinds of this phrase are thus far pleonastic, that the participle is not necessary to sense. Thus also Xen. Cyr. vm, 4, 9. «λλ* υπάκουων σχο\$ υπηκουσα. lb. 6 , 2 . όπως ε’ι$ειεν, εφ οίς ίασιν ιοντες. A more extraordinary pleonasm is in εφη λεγων. Soph . Aj. 757. Herod, v, 36. and \ε·γεί φάς. Herod, ν, 50. > The participle with the finite verb frequently makes 559 . merely a circumlocution. Thus are used, a. particularly participles of all verbs with the verb efii, for the proper verb. II. e', 873. τετΧηότες είμεν for τετΧηκαμεν, τετΧαμεν.ψ , 69. έ/Μτΐο ΧεΧασ μένος επΧευ for Χέλησαι. Herod. I, 57. ησαν ΐεντες for ίέσαν. lit, 99· άτταρνεόμενός εστιν for ατταρνειται. ib. 133. αισχύνην έστί φίροντα. Msch. Prom. 402. *i- Xei οικαιωθείς. Soph. Phil. 1219- στοίχων αν ην. Aj. 588. μ$ τροοούς ήμέμς ykvr,. Plat. Leg. Χ,, ρ. 114. μισονντες yly νονται. ib. IX, ρ. 18. el ταντα ούτως εχοντά έστιν. Comp. Symp. ρ. 221. Also Plat. Ph&don. ρ. CM2, τι τις φ^σει ταΰτα όντα είναι εν τα'ις φνχαΐς, την τε αρετήν και τϋν κακίαν ; is a kind of circumlocution, in which, how¬ ever, όντα belongs to τι, and eivt» to iv ταΊς φνχαΐς*. An other case is, when the participle is accompanied by the article, as Herod. I, 171. επι τα κράνεα Χοφους επιόε- εσϋαι Κάρες ε'ισι οι καταϋείζαντες. See §. 269. Obs. - V « / , C s 'V, · · · μ '"·ν* : " · m Hoog. ad Viger. p. 334 b. sq. « Fiscli. Ill, b. p. 4 sq. Herm. ad Eurip. Hec. 1153. I 856 Syntax. Of the Participle. t Similar to this is ayyeXKwv πρεπει JEschyl. Agam. 30. ·■> ' ' . b. The verb εχω is often joined with the participle active of another verb, where the latter, as a finite verb, would have been sufficient. In this case εχειν properly shews the possession, and the participle the manner in which one arrives at the possession, as II. a, 356. ελών yap εχε« yepas, αυτός αϊτούρας, although in other lan¬ guages only the verb which is in the participle is ex¬ pressed as the principal verb, and the indication of the possession founded upon that, and continuing, omitted, as independent and abstract. Pind. Nem. i, 45. ούκερα- μαι πόλύν εν μεy άρφ πλούτον κατακρυφας εχειν. Herod. I, 27. tva ύπερ των εν Trj ηπείρω Έλλί/νων τίσωνταί σε, των (τύ δουλωσας εχεις. lb. 28. τούς άλλους παντας νττ εωυτφ είχε καταστεφάμεν ος 6 Κ ροισος. Plat . Crat. p. 271. * Ήρα οε, ως ερατη τις , ώσπερ ούν και \eyeTai ο 7.εύς αυτής ερασθεις εχει ν, c to have loved her, and to have her for his wife’. Xen . Mem. S. n, 7, 6. ωνούμενοι εχουσιν. Comp. Hesiod, epy. 42. Soph. Phil. 943. Eurip. Hec. 1013. Arist.Eccl. 355. In some measure this expression answers to the Latin occultum , subactum habeo , and in many cases to the perfections, άφύιρηκε, κεκρυφενα t, ΰεόουλωκας, &ζ C. , " . . · ϊ « i This phrase often serves only to express the con¬ tinuance of the action indicated by the participle, or it’s consequences, expressive of the condition established by it, without any reference being intended to a peculiar possession. Soph. (Ed. C. 1135. Phil. 1362. Plat. Phcedr. p. 344. θαυμάσας εχω for τεθαύμακα. Soph. El. 590. τούς όε πρόσθεν ευσεβείς κάζ ευσεβών βλαστόντας εκβαλουσ εχει? for εκβεβληκας. Comp. Phil. 600, Antig. 32. Aj. 21. (Ed. T. 699. Eurip. Iphig. A . 659. Demosth. π. παραπρ. p. 433, 25. v 857 Syntax. Of the Participle. Frequently/however, it only forms a circumlocution. Sophocl. Antig. 77. τα των θεών εντιμ άτιμάσασ εχε 3 for ατίμασαν. Eur. Troad. 318. πατέρα πατρίδα τε φιλάν καταστενουσ εχεις. Aristoph. Αν. 851. συμπαραινεσας εχω. Yet here also the idea of perseverance seems to be expressed more definitely than by the simple verbV The phrases : τι κυπτάζεις εχων ; and λήρε7ς εχων, are different. See 567. c. ηκω 3 έρχομαι, εΊμι, with the participle, serve also frequently as a circumlocution. II. σ 3 180. σόι λωβη, εί κεν τι νεκυς γσχυμένος ελθη 3 where, however, ελθρ also may be si afferatur cadaver. Herod, 1 , 122 . ηίε ταυτην {την 'yvvaiKa^ αινε ων δια παντός. PlTld. JXeTH. VII, 102. μαθών δε τις αν ερε 7, ει τ rap μέλος έρχομαι ψεγνόν οαρον εννεπων. ^ Thus frequently instead of a simple verb in the sense of f to go away*, its participle is joined with όίχομαι, e. g. ωχετ απ οπτά μένος, for απεπτατο , II. β 3 7 1 · ωχετο φευ- 7 ων, f he escaped’, Herod, ι, 157. ωχοντο άποθεοντες. Xen. Cyr. VII, 5 , 15. In όίχεται θανών Soph. Phil. 413. οίχεται has the sense of periit , which it has also alone, without a participle. Similarly ην μη άποστάς ίγς, Herod. v, 50. Homer uses βαίνει also in circumlocution, e. g. βη φευ - *γων II. β', 666. βη άίξασα δ* } 74, 8$C. Participles are not only used to add to a subject a new condition, or an accompanying action independently of its proper verb ; but the participle is often put as an accompanying action of a principal action, receives a subject of it’s own, and then is put with this in the genitive, as in Latin in the ablative, e.g. θεόν θελον- o Valcken. ad Herod, p. 242, 72. 444, 52. ad Phcen. 712. Brunek. ad Soph. Ο. T. 6'99. Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 285. 560. « * 858 Syntax . Of the Participle . \ f os, ούίεν ί<τχόα φθόνος , ‘ God willing’, Deo volente. But in the use of this genitive absolute the Greek dif¬ fers from the Latin. For where the Latin, in the use of the ablative absolute , is obliged, on account of the want of a participle in the perf. act. to turn the sentence, and to use the participle perf. pass, the Greek, on the other hand, whose principal tenses all have their own participles, can retain the active construction, and then the participle is referred to the subject of the principal proposition, e. g. viso lupo diffugerunt oves (for quum lupurn vidissent) is in Greek ίΰουσαι τόν Χύκον , at όίες άπεφυ r γov } not οφθεντος τον Χυκου, Thus too ταυ τα άκου σας ησθη, his auditis , and in all similar cases. And this construction is universally admissible, when the accompanying action, which is expressed by the participle, belongs definitely to the subject of the principal proposition; whereas the passive construction obtains, where the action expressed by the participle does not refer, or does not refer entirely, to the subject of the principal proposition, e. g. των ποΧεμίων όφθεντω v, εφυ- yov οι 7 Γ ολΊται, c when they (not merely the citizens) saw the enemy the citizens fled’. The construction with the genitive absolute is used properly, only when the action which is expressed by the participle has it’s peculiar subject, distinct from that of the principal verb. If it is the same with this, the par¬ ticiple is referred to the common subject in the same number, gender, and case, e. g. Lysias p. 812. ονκετι ών ούτοι κΧεπτουσιν όργίζεσθε, αλλ ών αυτοί Χαμβανετε •χάριν ’/στε, ώσπερ υμείς τά τούτων μισθοφορουντες, αλλ ου τούτων τά ύμετερα κΧεπτόντων. From this rule there are several deviations: • I . f ΓΙ i r * Γ C) I O r ’ t IV f 1 . f '-i * | / 1 ■ I . ■ 1 ■ ■ * ■ t ·· * , l. When the subject is the same in both propositions, Syntax. Of the Participle. the participle sometimes is not put in the case of the common subject, but a . in the nominative. Eurip. Ion . 946. κακών yap άρτι κύμ ύττεζ αντλώ v φρενί , πρυμνηθεν αίρει μ άλλο σων Xoywv υπο, for — αντλουντα, ΟΓ αίρομαι άλλω. Eurip. Hec. 964. ότω yap ώφθην εύτυχουσ, αιδώς μ ’ εχει, εν τώδε ητότμω τι >y χάνουσ, % ειμι νυν , because αιδώς μ ej^6i IS the Same as αιδουμαι. T/lUC. II, 27· την A’lyivav άσφαλεστερον εφαίνετο τρ ΤΙελοποννησω επικειμενην , αυτών πεμφαντες εποίκους, ύχειν, for πεμφασιν , because εφαίνετο εχειν is the same as εφηφίσαντο εχειν. Comp. VI, 24. VII, 42. 70. Plat. Leg. Ill, ρ. 126. άποβλεφας yap προς τούτον τον στόλον εδοξε μοι. Ib. VI , ρ. 28β. θνη¬ τός ών - σμικρόν τινα χρόνον πονος αυτιρ παραμένει πάμπολυς. Comp. lb. VII, ρ. 368. Rep. VIII, ρ. 228 ρ . δ. In the genitive,, either with the repetition of the subject, Herod, I, 41. οφείλεις yap, εμευ προποιησαν - τος χρηστά ες σε , χρηστοισί με αμειβεσθαι. Comp. ib. 178. Ill, 65. V> 22. Xen. Cyr. VI, 1, 37. οι φίλοι προσιόν- τες συ μ βουλευουσιν εκποδών εχειν εμαυτόν , μη τι καί παθω υπό σου, ως ηδικ ηκοτος εμού pcyaXa. Xen. JS/Iein. S. IV, 8, 5. ηδη μου ε πιχει ρουντος φροντίσαι της προς τους δικαστάς, aπoλoyίaς, ηναντιωθη το δαιμονιον. SC. εμοι . ΟΓ also without this repetition. Thuc. vii, 48. χρημάτων yap απορία αυτούς εκτρυχώσειν , αλλω$ τε και επι πλέον ηδη ταίς υπαρχουσαις ναυσι θαλασσοκρατουντων. Comp. V, 33. Plat. Rep. vili, p. 419· τάχα 8 αν ημΊν τις παρα- στάς άνηρ σφοδρός και νέος - λοιδορησειεν αν, α>ς ανόητα και αδύνατα τιθεντων νόμιμα. Comp. Xen. Anab. II, 4, 1 tv '· V "/·, Q XU i i\ ·," . -M \ .·’ . }.· '■ '■ I ,J\ U 24. Vj 8, 13. \ * fi / <, , ^ Note . When the accusative is put, it arises generally from a p Valcken. ad Eurip. Ph. 101 sq. ad Ammon, p. 188. Brunck. ad iEsch. S. c. Th. Pers. 120. Soph. El. 480. Koen. ad, Greg. p. 33 sq. f 860 Syntax. Of the Participle. change of the construction. Eurip. Phan. 724. εξοιστεον ydp όπλα Apyelwv πόλει- - εκτός τάφρων τώνδ’, ως μαχου μένους Taya. See §. 447· 4. . Plut . Alcib. n, p. 97· τούς ον v \ Αθηναίους ay ανακτουντας τω ττ pay μάτι - βουλευομενοις αυτοι$ όοκειν κρατιστον είναι, as Thuc . II, 27· above N°. 1. isoiw 2. Sometimes instead of the genitive absolute 1. The nominative absolute is put Soph. Antig. 260. Xoyoi δ* εν άλληλοισιν ερρόθουν κακοί , φύλαξ eλεy- χων φύλακα. Eurip . Ph. 290. μέλλων δε πεμπειν Οίόίπου κλεινός yόvoς μαντεία σεμνά , Αοξίου τ επ εσχάρας, εν τφ& όπεστρατευσαν Apyειoι ί τολιν. Hevod. II, 133. €Xtv. ινα οι ουώόεκα ετεα αντί εξ ετεων ye -νηται , α\ νύκτες ημεραι ποι- ενμεναι. Thuc. II, 53. θεών δε φόβος η ανθρώπων νόμος ούόεις άπείpye, το μεν κρίνοντες εν όμο'αρ και σεβειν και μη - των δε αμαρτημάτων ούόεις ελπίζων μέχρι του όίκην yεvεσθaι βίους αν την τιμωρίαν άντιόουναι. Comp. Xen. Hist. Gr. ιι, 2, 3. 3, 54. Isocr. Panath. p. 249. JB q . Note. From these are to be distinguished the following cases, in which the use of the nominative is founded upon other con¬ structions of the Greek language : 1. In divisions, where other¬ wise also the whole may be in the same case as it's part 288. Obs. 2. II. k, 224. συν τε δυ ερχομενω καί τε προ ό του ενόησεν. Comp. Valcken. ad Eur. Ph. p. 436. b. ^ To these passages Plato alludes Alcib. n, ρ. 79· αλλ’ όάν εμοι προσεχές τον νουν , συν. τε δυο σκεπτομενω, σχεόόν ευ ρησομεν. 2. When the subject of the participle is contained in part in the main subject, or this latter in the other! Hevod. vm, 8 S. ,και οι avXXoyov π οιησάμενοι "i Γpoηyόpευε θ εμιστοκλεης. Comp. ib. 86. Thuc. I, 49. μάχη s δε ούκ ηρχον ^ (αιΑττικαι νηες, or oi Αθηναίοι) όεόιότες oi στpaτηyoι την πρόρ - q Valcken. ad Eurip. Ph. 290. Brunck. ad Soph. Antig. 260. Arist. Ran. 1437. Hoog. ad Vig. p. 348. Fisch. in, a. p. 392. 861 Syntax. Of the Participle. ρησιν των Αθηναίων. Comp, ιν, 106 . Plat. ApoL S. p. 42. ev ταντνι τγ ηλικία λέοντες προς υμάς, εν y αν μαλιστα ει ri- στευσατε , παϊδες οντες ενιοι υμών και μειράκιά άτεχνων, where επιστευσατε refers to all of which the ενιοι constitute a part. 2 . For the dative absolute, when the subject of the participle can be considered as that in reference to which the action of the verb takes place. Herod, vi, 21. ’Αθη¬ ναίοι δηλον εποίησαν υπεραχθεσθεντες rr\ Μίλητον άλωσει ri? τεαλλτι πολλαχη, και δη και ποιησαντι Φρυνίχψ δράμα Μίλητον αλωσιν και διδάξαντι, ες δάκρυα τε επεσε το θεη- τρον, και εζημίωσάν μιν. Thuc . VIII, 24. είργομενοις αντοΐς της θαλάσσης και κατά y ην πορθούμε νοις, ενε^εί- ρησάν τινες προς Αθηναίους ayay^iv την πολιν. Xen. Η. Gr. Ill, 2,25. πε ρ ι'ΐοντ ι δε τφ ενιαυτφ φαίνουσι πάλιν ο\ έφοροι φρουράν επι την Ηλ«ι/. Comp. Xen. Ages, ι, 2 . 3. Accusative absolute. Soph. CEd.C. 1120 . μη θαύ¬ μαζε, τεκ v εί φανέντ άελπτα μηκύνω λoyov. Plat. Leg. IX, ρ. 8. τον των μεyιστών μετεχοντα αρχών εν ττι πολει , λελη θοτα τε ταυτα αυτόν η μη λεληθοτα, δείλκρ δ ύπερ πα- τρίδος αυτόν μη τιμωρουμενον , δεί δεύτερον jy είσθαι τον τοιουτον πολίτην κάκτ], sive ilia conjuratio ignota sit ei sive non sit 8 . The genitive of the participle frequently stands alone 563. without a subject, when the subject is indefinite, where a pronoun demonstrative, or the general word πρά- Ί ματα, or, in English, f one’ is used; and sometimes when the subject can be easily supplied from the pre¬ ceding: Thuc . I, 116. Π ερικλης — φχετο κατά τάχος επί r Ernesti ad Xen. Mem. S. i, 3, 2. Fisch, in, a. p. 391. * Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. i, p. 452. Brunei ad Soph. (Ed. T. 101. Fisch. in, a. p. 387· 1 1 VOL. II. 862 Syntax . Of the Participle. K αυνον και Καρίας, εσαγγεΧθ εντων, οτι Φ οίνισσαι νηες εττ’ αύτους τ νΧεουσιν. Xen. Cyr. HI, 3, 54. ei Se τοι, ΐόντωι) €ΐς μάχην συν οπΧοϊς ( SC . τώι/ ανθρώπων), εν τούτω όυνησε- ταί τις άπορραφωόησας παραχρημα άντρας ποΧεμικους ποιη- σαι, 8$C. lb. V, 3, 13. οί/τω μεν γιγυομενων (sc. των πρα¬ γμάτων, (** if it happens then*) σαφώς olSa. ib . 50. οϋτω π ροσταττομενων, εις άΧΧηΧους όρ$ν άπαντες εόόκουν αυτω. Comp. VI, 2, 19 . Hell, ν, 3, 27. Thus in the singular also. Thuc. I, 74. σαφώς όηΧωθεντος, οτι εν ταις νάνιτι τών Ελλήνων τα πράγματα εγενετο, quum C ipparuisset , where the proposition with on in a certain degree con¬ stitutes the subject. Plat. Rep. π. p.255. ούτως εχοντος, $οκει άν τις σοι εκών αυτόν χείρω ποιειν ; qUUTR ves SIC se habeat. Arist. Keel. 401. και ταυτα περί σωτήριας προ - κείμενου , ‘ since we are to deliberate upon the salvation of the State*.— Soph. Antig. 909- πόσις μεν άν μοι, κατ- θανόντος ( SC . του προτερου) αΧΧος ην. Comp. ΚΙ. 1344. Thuc. VIII, 6. οι Αακεόαιμόνιοι—πεμψαντες Φρΰνιν, — απαγ- γείΧαντος αύτοις ( του Φρύνιος) εποιησαντο , 8$C. Comp. Kur. Ph. 67 . Plato Menex. p. 292 . Xen. Cyr. m, 2, 25*. ' . , VM, w i, ;,f · . I k ‘ 4 . » Obs. Sometimes also, though rarely, the genitive of the participle ων is wanting. Soph. QLd. T. 966 . τι όητα σκοποίτό τις — Τ ονς άνω κΧάζοντας ορνις, ών υφηγητών, εγώ κτανειν εμεΧΧον πατέρα τον εμόν; as in Latin quibus ducibus. Comp. ib. 1260 . ubi v. Br. CEd. Col. 1588. Impersonal verbs, as well as adjectives in the neuter with εστί, which have no subject, in their construction as participles, are not put in the genitive, but in the nominative absolute. Kurip. Iphig. T. 694. άπΧάς Se 4 Dorv. ad Charit. p. 308. 354, Duker. ad Thuc. vm, 6. Fisch, in, a. p. 386. / Syntax. Of the Participle. S63 Χυπας εξόν, ουκ οΐσω διπΧάς — Herod. V, 49· ταρεχον δε της ’ Ασίης πόσης άρχειν εύπετεως, αλλό τι αιρησεσθε ; quum liceat. ib. 50. χρεών μιν μη X0yeiv το εόν — Χεγει τριών μηνών φας είναι την άνοδον, qUUm opovtevet. — Thuc. I, 120. aya6(ji)v άντρων εστιν, αδικούμενους εκ μεν ειρηνης ποΧε- μείν } ευ δε παρασχόν, quum Opportunism, est ) εκ πόλεμου παΧιν ξυμβηναι. — Id. IV, 95. 7 ταραστγ δε μηδενι υμών , ώς εν τη αΧΧοτρία, ου προσηκον ( c without necessity’), κίνδυ¬ νον άναρριπτουμεν u . — Id. ν, 60. εν αιτία, εϊχον κατ άΧΧη- Χους 7 roXXrj τον ''Ay ιν, νομίζοντες, εν καΧψ παρατυχόν σφίσι ( quum opportune sibi cecidisset) ξυμβαλείν,- — ούδεν δράσαντες άξιον της παρασκευής άπιεναι. Plat. Alcib. II, ρ. 100. δρας ουν } ώς ουκ άσφαΧες σοι εστιν εΧθείν προς τον θεδν εύξομενω, ίνα μηδ ’ αν οΐιτω τύχγ, βΧασφημουντός σου άκούων, ούδεν άποδεξηται της θυσίας ταυ της, τυχόν δε και ετερόν τι προσαποΧαύσρς, i. e. αν ούτω τύχγ\, SI fors ltd ferat, forte. Comp . Isocrat. p. 183. C. — Plat. Alcib. i, p. 28. o% δ * ού βοηθησαντες, δέον ( c as they should have done’) ύyιeiς άπηΧθον. — Plat. Phcedon. p. 257. oi δ αν ιάσιμα μεν, μεyάXa δε δόξωσιν ημαρτηκεναι αμαρτήματα — — και μετάμεΧον αύτοίς τον άλλοι/ βίον βιώσιν —- — τούτους εμπεσείν εις τον Τ άρταρον avay^, ( when it has repented them’. Lysias, p. 837. προσταχθεν yap αύτφ τεσσάρων μηνών avaypa^ai τούς νομούς τους ΣοΧωνος, αντί μεν ΣόΧωνος αυτόν νομοθετην κατεστησεν, 8$C. Thus also δοκουν, δόξαν, δεδoyμεvov Thuc. ι, 125. quam videretur, visum esset. παρόν, quum liceat, liceret. Even verbs which are commonly used impersonally, when they receive a subject are put absolutely in the nominative. Thuc. V, 65. ό δε, είτε και διά το επιβόημα, είτε και αύτώ αλλό τι η κατά το αυτό δόξαν εξαίφνης, πάΧιν τό στρά * « Duker. ad Thuc. νι, Si. I I 2 864 Syntax. Of the Participle. * * \ τευμα — aTrrjye. Plat. Prot. p. 95. δόξαν ημίν ταυτα. Id . Gorg. p. 118. ητις δε η βεΧτίων η χΑρων Των ηδονών , ούτε σκοπουμεναι, ούτε μεΧον αντοίς άλλο, η χαρίζέσθαι μό¬ νον, 8$C. Thus also adjectives, which are used impersonally in the neuter with εστί. Thuc. vii, 44. αδύνατον ον. lien. CEcon. 20, 10. ρόδιον ον. Cyr. II, 2, 20. iycoy όΐμαι , αμά μεν υμών συvayopευόvτωv, αμα δε και αισχρόν ον αντιΧε- yειvy fyc. Also without a participle. Soph. Antig. 44. η yap voels θάπτε ιν σφ , αϊτόρρητόν ποΧεί', Plat. Rep. VII, ρ. 137. επειτ άδικησομεν αυτούς , και ποιησομεν χείρον i^jjVj δυνατόν αυτοις αμεινον. Comp. §. 568. 5. Obs. 1. Participles also are used thus, as ειρημενον , quum dictum esset. Thuc. v, 30. Comp. Aristoph. Lysistr. 13. ubi V. Kuster. yoy ραμμενον Thuc. V, 56. ώς διαποΧεμησό- μενον id. VII, 25. extr. διηyyεXμεvov Plat. Epist. VII, p. 104. εyyεvόμεvov Isocr. de Big . p. 354. B x . The construction of the participle both with the genitive absolute , or referring to a subject preceding, expresses several relations of propositions to each other, and stands for various conjunctions with the finite verb* It serves particularly: 1 . As a definition of time; in which case it is resolved by ore, επειδή, fyc. and the finite verb, e. g. II. a', 46. εκXayξav δ’ ap οΐστοι επ ωμων χωομενοιο , αυτόν κινηθεντος, as he moved’. Sometimes, in marking an epoch in history, it is accompanied by επί, as Herod. VIII, 44. Αθηναίοι, επί μεν Πελασγό)!/ εχόντων την νυν Ελλάδα καΧουμενην, εσαν Πελασγοί. Thus επι Καλλιάδου * Koen. ad Gregor, ρ. 15. 6'9· Dawes Misc. Cr. ρ. 125. Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. 277. Fisch. in, a. p. 387, 389. Herm.adVig. p. 751. 865 Syntax. Of the Participle. άρχοντος is common, e. g. Thuc. 11 , 2. and KaXXtcXv άρχοντος Herod . VIII, 51. So we have in Thuc . vm, 36. extr. άλλας ( ζννθηκας ) έπϊ θη ραμένους παρόντος βποι- ονν. It is often followed by ουτω, ωό€ 9 ουτω as if in confirmation, jfisch. Prom . 513. Herod . vn. 174. vm, 6 i. Plat. Ale. i, p. 39 . fymp, p. 212 . which also stands after 67Γ eiS η Thuc . II, 19, 70. Ohs. Other less common constructions are Herod. Π, 22 . έπι χιόνι πεσούσφ avayter] εστ\ υσαι ev πεντε ημερφσι. Comp, ι, 170. Hence επ' εζειρ Γ γασμενοίς έλθε7ν, of those who come too late, when the thing is done, Herod, vm, 95. ix, 77 . Lysias p. 874 . with the note of Taylor y . Herod. 1 , 34. μετά Σάλωνα οιχομενον. Comp. VJ, 9S. II· ω, 575. ■ Id· ϊ, 51. μετεκινηθησαν Se και οντοι νπο τον vrjov κατακαεντα. . y . λ . · / ; * Of the construction ημίν S εΊνατός έστι περιτροπέων ενιαυτός , see §. 390. C. • 1 — 2. In assigning a reason, c because’, as Xen. Mem. S. 1, 2 , 22. πολλοί, τα χρήματα άναλωσαντες , ών προσθεν απει- χοντο κερδών, αισχρά ν ο μ ίζοντε ς είναι, τούτων ουκ απε- χονται. Thuc. I, 80. ώστε μήτε άπειρίφ. έπιθυμησαι τινα του έ pyov, όπερ αν οι πολλοί πάθοιεν, μήτε ayaOov και ασφαλές νομίσαντα, where the participle takes the place of the dative. Id. VII, 13. τα oe πληρώματα διά τάδε έφθάρη τε ήμϊν και ετι νυν φθείρεται, των ναυτών των μ'εν cha ψpυyavισμόv και apπayr]v μακραν και υόρειαν υπο των Ιππέων άπολλυμενων, οι $έ θεραπευοντες — αύτομολουσι. Plat. Phcedon. ρ. 229 . ουκ οΊσθα άλλως πως έκαστον yi- yvάμεvov, η μετασχόν τν\ς ι^ιας ουσίας έκαστου , ου αν μετά - σχοι· καί ίν τούτοις ουκ εχεις άλλην τινά αιτίαν τοΰ δυο γενε- σθαι, άλλ' ή την τής δυάδας μετάσχεσιν, and with the corro- » y Valck. ad Herod, p. 727, 11. 566. 866 Syntax. Of the Participle. borating word ούτω in the conclusion, id. Lack. id. υμάς <5e ημείς η^ησάμενοι και 'ικανούς yvciivai, και yvovTas απΧώς αν είττειν a $οκει ύμιν , ούτω τταρεΧάβομεν. HThe participle with a negation may be rendered by non quo. e. g. Isocr. Panath. p. 256. B. 3. In restrictions, for 'although". In this case the par¬ ticiple is often accompanied by και and καίττερ , quamvis , (which is often separated καί — ττερ) 6μως, tamen, εΊτα , in Ionic writers also ττερ , with or without εμττης. 11. e , 651. ''Εκτορα και μεμαώτα μά'χης σχησεσθαι όιω. Sopll . Tvcich. 1201 . μενώ σ eyio και νερθεν ών, αραιός είσαει βαρύς. Plat. Menon. ρ.3 42. οίόμενοι τα κακά ayaOa είναι , λεγει?, η και yιyvώσκovτες ) ότι κακά εστιν , όμως επιθυμούσιν αυτών 2 , όμως does not stand alone, as tamen in Latin, at the begin¬ ning of the proposition opposed to the restricting sen¬ tence, e. g. Xen. Mem. S. n, i, 14, 15. but is sometimes annexed singly to the participle, as Eur. Or. 679. κάγω σ ! ικνούμαι , και yvi >η ττερ ούσ , όμως , for Kayo), καίττερ yvvi] ούσα , όμως σ 1 ικνούμαι , sometimes put before the partici¬ ple, Plat. Phcedon. p. 207 sq. 'Σιμμίας φοβείται , μη η "ψυχή όμως και θειότερον και κάΧΧιον ον του σώματος ττροα- ττοΧΧυηται. Thuc. VIII, 93. οι τετρακόσιοι ες το βουΧευτη- ριον όμως και τεθορυβημενοι ζυνεΧύ yovTo a . — Soph. (Ed. Col. 277· μη , θεούς τιμώντες , el τα των θεών ώραν ττοιει - σθε μηόαμώς. Comp. Antig. 496 . Plat. Charm, p. 126 . ύττ o- θεμενος σωφροσύνην είναι το τα εαυτού ττράττειν, εττειτα ού$εν φησι κωΧύειν και τ<)υ9 τα των αΧΧων ττράττοντας σω- φρονειν b . ζ Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. p. 98 sq. a Heind. ad Plat. Lysid. p. 2 6 sq. ad PI. Theaet. p. 294. b Koen> ad Gregor, p. 62 . Herm. ad Viger. p. 753. I Syntax . Of the Participle.'. . A peculiar construction occurs in Demosth. Philipp * f). 55* vvv () € 7 Γ ά$η\οις over ι τόϊς enro τούτων βμ,αντω ye vt](TO]UL€iOiSj όμως € 7 τι τω gvvoiggiv νμιν 3 ectv 7 τραςΐ]Τ€, tgvtcl πβπεΊσθαι Xeyeiv αφοΰμαι, 4. To express a condition, 'if’. II. i, 261 . σοι c Αγαμέ¬ μνων άζια δώρα δίδωσι, μεταλληζαντι χολοιο ■ Eurip.Ph. 514. άστρων αν ελθοίμ’ αϊθεροι προς άντόλάς και γης ενερθε, δυνατός ων δράσαι τάδε, την θεών μεγίστην ωστ εχειν τυ¬ ραννίδα. Comp. Plat. Symp. ρ. 242. Xen. Rep. Lac. S, 5 C . 5 . The participle also expresses a mean, Soph. Track. 593. είδεναι χρη δρωσαν, 'by the deed. Xen. Cyr. hi, 2 , 25. ληϊζόμενοι ζωσιν, ' live by plunder . Mem. S. Ill, 5, 16. προαιρούνται μάλλον οίτω κερδαίνειν aw αλλη- λων, η συνωφελονντες αυτούς, 'by helping each other . Thus the participle is put in other cases also, where in Latin the gerundium in — do is used, e. g. νίκην τινα ευ ετοιοΰντα Xen. Cyr. v, l, 29· 3, 32. Mem. S. n, 6, 35. The construction of the participle is used also in 567 interrogatory and relative propositions, which in Latin can only happen in some cases. In this case it serves to express all the foregoing definitions' 1 : as a general definition, where the participle often stands with the article as a substantive. Plat. Rep. v, p. 54. άναγκαΤον διορίσασθαι, τους φιλοσόφους τίνας λεγοντες τολμάμεν φάναι δεΐν άρχειν, ‘ those whom we consider as philoso¬ phers, who, we assert, ought to govern’; as Xen. Mem. S. II, 2, 1. καταμεμάθηκας ouv, τους τί ποιοϊντας το ονο- C Don-ill. ad Charit. ρ. 227. 257. Abresch. ad Aischyl. n, p. *7- ir Schaefer in Dion. Hal* i, p. 57. d Hoog. ad Viger. p. 333 sqq. 868 Syntax. Of the Participle. μα τούτο άποκαλουσιν . Plat. Rep. I, p. 157. et ovv τις αυτόν ηρετο 9 ώ Σιμωνίδη, ητίσιν ουν τι αποδιδου σ α οφείλομε- νον και προσηκον τεχνη ιατρική καλείται ; ( what with them is called the healing art? to what persons does it impart what is proper for each ? and in what does this consist’ ? Id. Symp. p. 212. οϊος οίω v αίτιος ών τυγχάνει, 4 what kind of a man he is, and what he has been the cause of’. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 1, 19. ποιαν και σύ του πατρός ήτταν Xe- ywVj ούτως ίσχυρίζτι σεσωφρονίσθαι αυτόν ; e what kind of victory do you mean by which, as you assert, your father is benefited’? IV, 5, 29· σκεφαι, οίιρ οντι μοι περί σε οΐος ων περί εμε επειτά μοι μεμφγ. PlflUC. IV, 20. πολε- μουνται yap ασαφώς, οποτερων αρξαντών , because πο- Χεμουνται , άρξάντων *Αθηναίων is the common expression. A reason. Herod. I, 153. λύεται K υρον επείρεσθαι τους 7 ra ρέοντας οι Ελλήνων, τίνες εοντες άνθρωποι Λακε¬ δαιμόνιοι και κόσοι πλήθος ταυτα εωϋτψ ττροαγορευουσιν. VII, 102. όσοι τινες εόντες 61οί τε εισι ταυτα ποιεειν , ‘ how many of them there are that they should be able to execute this’ ? TflUC.Y II, 70 extr. o\ στρατηγοί — ηρώτων , oi μεν Αθηναίοι , ei την πολεμιωτάτην y ην οίκειοτεραν ηδη της ου δι ολίγου κεκτη- μενης θαλάσσης ηγου μενοι αποχωρουσιν, 4 whether they con¬ sidered the land of their bitterest enemy more as their home than the sea, that they retreated’. Plat. Phcedon. p. 142. Tt yap αν βουλόμενοι άνδρες σοφοί ως αληθώς δέ¬ σποτας άμείνους αυτών φευγοιεν ; Γ what Would they have by flying’ ? i. e. 4 wherefore’ ? Comp. Xen. Mem. 111 , 7 , 3. CEcon. 6 , 14. 7 , 2 . Demosth. in Macart. p. 1072 , 14. Eurip.Phoen. 892. a ’ 7 ώ—τίν> ου δρών,ποΊα $ ου λεγων επη\ — εις εχθος ηλθον παισί τοισιν Οίδίπου , 4 what have I neglected to do or to say, that P, &c. Upon this are grounded the phrases τί μαθών and τί παθών , which are both rendered by f wherefore’; the first, however, of which supposes the causes in some error or oversight of 869 Syntax. . Of the Participle. the understanding·, the second in some external cir¬ cumstance. τι μαθών τοΰτο επο'ιησας, signifies ‘ on what ground, with what intention, or what presumption have you done this’ ? but τ l -παθών, ‘ what has come to you that you have done this’ ? e Restriction, f although’. Xen. Cyr.m, 2,15. ώνόλίγα S„, ,άμενοι προοράν άνθρωποι περί τού μέλλοντος, πολλά Ζπιχοφονμβν πράττβιν ! ' how little.can we foresee and vet how much do we undertake’? We might adduce here the passage ibid, iv, 5, 29- Comp. Demosth. . J * * p. 40. Means. Isocr. Panath. p. 241. D. τού?"Ελληνας iSi- Ζαξαν, tv τρόπον διοικούντες τός αύτών πατρίδας καϊ πρός oSs πολεμοϊντες με^όλην τύ,ν ΈλλάΖα πορείαν, 1 how they must govern their country, in order to aggrandize Greece’ ? Xen. Mem. S. 1, 9· οαιμοναν εφη τούς μαντευο- μένονς, a τοίς άνθρώποις "εδωκαν ο\ θεοί μαθοΰσι όιακρίνειν. Comp, η, 24. This use of the participle in interrogative propositions is the foundation of the phrases: τί κυπτάζεις εχων περί την θνραν ; Arist. Nub. 509. ‘ what makes you lurk at the door’? i. e. ‘ why do you lurk’? Id. Eccles. Π51. τι Ιητα Στρίβεις "εχα,ν; ‘ what makes you loiter’ ? Plat. Phcedr. p. 300. τί όήτα εχων στρέφγ. Perhaps this participle "εχων became gradually to be considered merely as a formula established by usage, without any pecu¬ liar meaning being ascribed to it; and to be use also without an interrogation with other verbs, viz. . Wolf, ad Demosth. Lept. p. 348 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Euthyd. p. 339 sq. 870 Syntax. Of the Participle. those which signify c to sport, play, to make sporty without having any peculiar signification, e. g. Arist. Lysistr. 946. Ran. 512. φΧναρεις ζχων. Ran. 202. 524. ου μη φΧυαρησεις €χων. Plat. Gorg. p . 95. 7 ΓθΤα υποδήματα φΧναρεΐς εχων, lb. p. 108. αλ\α πρόιθί ye ετι εις το έμπρο¬ σθεν, οτι εχων Χηρεις. Theocr . 14, 8. παίσδεις εχων { . 568. The construction with the participle is very often preceded by the particles ώστε, are, Plat. Lack. p. 164. οΐα δη, oiov, Plat. Charm, in. and, indeed, mostly when a reason is given, as contained in the opinion, the words, the intention of another, or when any one supposes a motive for doing any thing in the mind of another. This construction may be resolved by the participles νομίζω v, διανοούμενος, or the like, and the accus. with the infin. The participle fut. with ως in particular is put after verbs of all kinds to mark an intention. When the subject of the participle has preceded, the participle properly should be put in the case in which the subject preceding stood; but if the subject be another, it should be put with the participle in the genitive absolute. But in the latter case the accusative absolute is most in use : sometimes also datives absolute occur. Again, as the genitive ab¬ solute is sometimes put, instead of the participle’s being in the case of the preceding subject, in this instance also the genitive or accusative absolute is put for the case in which the subject is. . f Valck. ad Phcen. p. 2 69 , and also Ruhnk. ad Tim. p. 258. Koen. ad Greg. p. 63. Herm. adVig. p. 758. consider here e%€iv synonymous with τυγχάνειν (but it never occurs elsewhere instead of it), and sup¬ pose a transposition for βχα* λήρων. Comp. Bergler. ad Arist. Nub. 131. Pierson, ad Moerid. p. 391. Alberti ad Hesych. T. i, p. 144. ε Koen. ad Gregor, p. 31. 871 \ Syntax. Of the Participle. l. Participles in the case of the preceding subject. Soph. El. 1025. ws ούχί συνδράσουσα νουθετείς τάδε, f with the intention of not assisting me’, Phil. 1065. μη μ’ αντιφωνεί μηδέν, ως στείχοντα δη. Aj. 679· [ο τ ®Χ“ θρδς ημιν ες τοσόνδ' εχθραντεος, ως και φιλησων αυθις (‘as being likely to love , )‘ ες τε τον φί\ον τοσαυθ ύπουριών ωφελεΊν βουλησομαι, ως αιεν ού μενοΰντα. Comp. Eurip. Ph. 902 . 1171. Ion. 1243. Thuc. IV, 5. οι δε εορτήν τινα βτυχον άγοντες, και άμα πυνθανόμενοι εν ολιγωρώ εποιουντο, ως 3 όταν εξελθωίτιν, η ονχ όπομενουντας σφάς, η ραδίως λη- φόμενοι βία. Comp. VI, 24. Xen. Cyr. I, 5, 9. οι των παραυτίκα ηδονών άπεχόμενοι ούχ, 'ίνα μηδέποτε ευφρανθωσι, τούτο πράττουσιν, άλλ’ ω? διά ταυτην την εγκράτειαν πολ¬ λαπλάσια εις τον επειτα χρόνον εύφ ρανου μεν οι, ούτω πα¬ ρασκευάζονται, ‘in the expectation that’, where sub¬ sequently ελπίζοντες διαπραζεσθαι, νομιζοντες περιαψειν stands. Hence Plat. Menex. p. 289- αύτός δε ηγγόλλετο βασιλεύς διανοεΊσθαι ως επιχείρησών παλιν επι τους 'Έλληνας, for επιχειρεΐν. 2 . Genitive absolute, Herod, νιι, 176 . ά'τε δη πεψω- μίνων των Θεσσαλών καταστρεφεσθαί σφεας, τοΰτο προεφυ- χάξαντο ο'( Φωκεεί, ‘ on the supposition that/ &c. Comp. VIII, 69 . Plat. Alcib. I, p. 10. οΰκοΰν «is διανοουμένου σου ταΰτα δρωτω, Λ φημί σε διανοεΊσθαι, ‘ on the supposition that you have the plan’. Comp. Charm, p. 156. Protag p. 114. Impersonal verbs also are put thus, according to the rule. Nomin. absol. Thuc. vn, 25 extr. επεμψαν καί k ταβ aXXas TroXeis πρέσβεις o\ Συρακούσα i- άξιώσοντας ξνμβοηθεΊν δ π αύτους καί νανσί καί πεζω, ως καί των ’Αθηναίων προσδόκιμων οντων αλλ;) στρατί?, καί, ην φθάσωσιν αύτοί πρό- τερον διαφθείραντες το παρόν στράτευμά αυτών, διαπο\εμη- 873 I Syntax. Of the Participle. σόμενον. Xetl . Hellen. II, 3, 21. τούτων όε 'γςνομ.ύνων, ως όζον ηόη ποιεί ν αυτοίς, ο τι άν βούλοιντο — άπεκτειναν. \ . ; * * . ,, ' , ’ \ * ' 3. Accus. ahsol. Herod . ΙΧ, 42. ηόεσθε τουόε είνεκα, ως περιεσομενους η με ας Ελλήνων, c because you think that we shall conquer the/ Greeks’. Soph. (Ed. T. 101. (άνωθεν ημάς Φοίβος — μίασμα χθονός ελαύνειν) άνόρηλατούν- τας, η φόνΐι) φόνον πάλιν λύοντας, ως τηνό’ at μα χειμάζον πόλιν. Comp. (Ed. C. 380. El. 881. ούχ ύβρει λε*γω ταδ*, αλλ* εκείνον ως παρόντα νίρν, e because I know that he is present. Eur . Ion . 983. σόι ό*' ες τι οόζης ηλθεν εκβαλειν τεκνον ; ΚΡΕ. ωρ τον θεόν σωσοντα τόν y αυτού yovov . Plat. Rep. IV, p. 340. ί rpoayope0ovai τοίς πολίταις, την κα - τάστασιν της πόλεως όλην μη κινειν , ως άποθανούμενον, ος άν τούτο Spy, ‘ with the threat’. Comp. id. Prot . p. 152. Xen. Hellen. n, 3, 19 . Cyr . viii, l, 31. Mem. S. I, 2, 20. Hence Xen. Cyr . I, 6, 4. ως προς φίλους μοι τούς θεούς όντας, ούτω όιάκειμαι. Plat . Leg. Ill, ρ. 127· πρός τούτο βλεπων, ως yεvησόμεva πάντα, the f expectation’ to be understood is implied in the words πρός τούτο βλεπων. Dative ahsol. Soph. Phil. 33. στειπτη yε φυλλάς, ως εναυλίζοντί τιρ, (with reference to the construction στείβεσθαί τινι, for ύπό τίνος.) c so that it may be con¬ cluded some one inhabits it’, or f as if some one inha¬ bited it’. Plat. Leg. XI, p. 139. περί των κατά πόλεμον όημιoυpyωv όντων σωτηρίας, aTpa^ycov τε και όσοι περί ταύτα τεχνικοί, όίκαιον είπειν, ότι το παράπαν εμνησθημεν όημιουρ/γών, ως τούτοις αύ, καθάπερ εκείνοις, οΐον ετεροις ουσι όη- μιονργοις. , r·· , · * ' ·< " ^ 5. Genit. or accus. ahsol. for the case of the sub- ject. Plat. Phcedon. p. 177. ω? όεόιότων, ύφη, ω Σω¬ κράτη 7 τειρω άναπείθειν, μάλλον όε μη ως ημών όεόιότων. 873 Syntax. Of the Participle. Charm. P . 131. συ μεν ώς φάσκοντος εμού ειδεναι περί &ν ερωτώ, προσφερρ πρός με, καϊ εάν δη βουλωμαι, όμολο- 7 ησοντός σου. Comp. Xen. Mem. S. n, 2, 13. 6, 32. Cyr. l, 4, 23. hi, l, 9. Obs. The participle ών is sometimes wanting. Sophocl. (Ed. C. 83. παν εν ησυχω — εξεστι φωνειν, ώς εμού μονής πελας. Thuc . II, 35. ο\ μεν πολλοί των ενθάδε, ηδη ειρηκότων επαινουσι τον προσθεντα τώ νόμω τον λόγον τονδε, ως καλόν € 7 Tt rots εκ των πολέμων θαπτόμενοις ay ορευεσθαι αυτόν. Plat. Gorg. ρ. 105. άλλο τι ουν, ώς ετερον την άνδρίαν της επιστήμης , δυο ταυτα ελεγες ; Xen. Mem. S . ι, 6, 5. η την^ δίαιτάν μου φανλίζεις — ώς χαλεπώτερα πορίσασθαι τα εμά διαιτηματα των σων. Sometimes also the subject τούτο is wanting. Herod. vm, 144. νυν δε, ώς ουτω εχόντων ( τούτων or των πραγμάτων) στρατιην ώς τάχιστα εκπεμπετε. See Valcken. Note, Soph. Ant. 1179. ώς ώδ' εχόντων, τάλλα βουλευειν παρα. The participle with ώς occurs also in other senses, 569» Herod. VII, 23. άτε του τε ανω στόματός και του κάτω τα αντά μίτρα ποιούμενων, εμελλε σφι τοιοίτον Αποβησεσθαι, where it contains a ground (objective) of what follows, ,' as they made the aperture open equally above and below . ώσπερ with the participle expresses more particularly a comparison, 'as’, or 'as though’. Xen. Cyr. iv, 2 , 21 . αύτ'ικα μάλα οψεσθε, ίύσπερ Βουλών ΑποόιΒρασκόντων καί εύρη μενών, τούς μεν 'ικετεύοντας αυτών, SgC. ' as slaves run away’. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 268 , 9 sqq. And since ώσπερ « is used otherwise, with the optative in the sense of 'as though’, Xenophon combines the two constructions, Hetten. II, 3 , 19. ώσπερ τον Αριθμόν τούτον εχοντΑ τινα Ανάγκην καλούς καί Αγαθούς είναι, καί οίτ εξω τούτων σπου¬ δαίους, οντ έντος τούτων πονηρούς οΐόν τε είη γενίαθαι. 0 The construction of the participle is combined with ώς , especially: 874 Syntax. Of the Participle. 1. For the infinitive alone after παρασκευάζεσθαί. Thuc. II, 7. o\ Αθηναίοι παρεσκευαζοντο ω? 7 ΓοΧεμησοντες. Comp. Ill, 115. VII, 50. Xen. CyVOp. V, 5, 47. μη μεντοι, ως Χόγον ημίν επιδειζόμενοι, όιον αν είποιτε προς έκαστον αυτών, τούτο μεΧετάτε, αΧΧ*, ως τούς πεπεισμένους ύφ> έκαστου δηΧους εσομε νους οΐς αν πράττωσιν, ούτω παρα- σκευαζεσθε. 2 . For ότι with the finite verb, or the participle Only after the verbs ειδεναι, νοεΐν, διακείσθαι την γνώμην, εχειν γνώμην, where in Latin the accus. with the infinitive is used. These last verbs, in this case, usually assume ούτω, and are put after the construction of the partici¬ ple. Soph. Phil. 253. ως μηδέν ειδότ ίσθι μ ών άνιστορείς. 415. ω? μηκετ όντα κείνον εν φάει νόει. Thuc.X II, 15. καί νυν ως, εφ’ ά μεν ηΧθομεν τό πρώτον, και των στρατιωτών και των ηγεμόνων ύμίν μη μεμπτών γενομενων, ούτω την γνώμην ύχετε, hoc vobis persuasum habeatis, nec milites nec duces male rem gessisse. Plat. Euthyd. p. 9. εγώ περί υμών διενοούμην ετι, ως δεινοίν όντοιν εν όπΧοις μαχε - σθαι. Critia. p. 37· ως ύπαρχουσης αύτιρ συγγνώμης ίστω. Amat. ρ. 36 . μη ούτω μου ύποΧάβι^ς, ως Χεγοντος, ότι δεί εκάστην των τεχνών τον φιΧοσοφουντα επίστασθαι ακριβώς. Xen. Anab. I, 3, 6. ώς εμού ούν ιόντος, όπη αν και υμείς , ούτω την γνώμην εχετε . Comp. Cyrop. VI, 1, 40. The construction is singular in its kind in Xen. Mem. S. IV, 2, 30. ώς πάνυ μοι δοκεί περί ποΧΧού ποιητεον είναι τό εαυτόν γιγνώσκειν, ούτως ϊσθι, where δοκούν, for δοκεί, would have been the more usual construction 11 . « s · - I) j ■ ' I Ϊ * ' -Λ «1 ’ \ This construction sometimes follows the verbs c ta ' \\ *.■· · 0 Λ .;'Λ V - say, to announce, to think*. Herod, 11, 1. K αμβύσης h Heind. ad Plat, Charm, p. 117. ad Cratyl. p. 179. 182. 875 Syntax. Of'the Participle. the accus. with the infinitive, Thuc. vii, 64. In JEsch. Again, 641 . πάτερα yap αυτοΰ ζώντος ή τεθνηκοτος φάτις 7 τρος άλλων ναυτίλων εκλγζετο the genitive of the par- s Soph. El. 317. καί St} flfoi/TO? t] μέλλοντος Participles are also used as substantives, when they 570. have the article joined with them. Besides the remarks in §. 269. and besides o\ άφικάμενοι, ii qui venerunt, fyc. to which there is no substantive corresponding in signi¬ fication, we may add 01 7 εινόμενοι, for 01 701 /eis Herod. 1 } 120 . Xen. Apol. S. 20 . o\ φυλάσσοντες for ot φυλακές , οι ηβωντες for οι άφηβοι Thuc. V, 32. το νοσουν for η νόσος. Soph. Phil. 675. το μεταμελησόμενον for η μεταμέ¬ λεια, but with the idea of the future, Xen. Mem. S. u, 6, 23. and other combinations 1 . Thucydides especially is fond of using participles for substantives, (r) In this case they assume genitives or possessive pronouns, as in \ Fisch, i, p. 223. 876 Syntax. Of the Participle . Latin factum meum, res gestce Ciceronis . Arist. Eccles* 1118 . η €μη κεκτημενη. Apparently we must understand in this manner Herod, II, 32. τούς ay όντας των N ασαμώ- νων 9 * the leaders of the Nasamones’, notas §. 352.2. Thuc. 1 3 36 . yvώτω τό μεν δεδιός αύτου (το δέος) ίσχύν εγον τούς εναντίους μάΧΧον φοβησον, το δε θαρσουν (το θαρσος ) μη δεζαμενου , άσθενες ον προς ισώνοντας τους εχθρούς αδεε- στερον εσόμενον. lb. 43. εν τφ τοιωδε αζιουντι, ίθΓ μάτι, ib . 142. εν τιρ μη μεΧετώντι άζυνετώτεροι εσονται, * through want of practice*. Eurip. Iph. A, 1280. το κεί¬ νου βουΧόμενον , c his will*. Sometimes the article is wanting. Plat. Rep. x, p. 284. ποΧΧά τ οι όξύτερον βΧεπόντων άμβλύτερον ορών - τες πρότερον εϊδον. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 3, 13. ο τον κόσμον αει μεν χρωμενοις άτριβη τε και vyid και ayrjpaTov πάρε- γων. The article is wanting in the neuter, especially when the discourse is general, or indefinite. Soph. (Ed. T. 515. εί yap εν τάις ξυμφοράίς ταΊς νυν νομίζει προς y εμού πεπονθεναι XoyoiTiv ε’ιτ εpyoισιv εις βΧαβην φερον , for πεπονθεναι τι φερον , ' something leading to harm*. Plato Menon. p. 385. των εκείνου ποιημάτων ΧεΧυμενον μεν εκτησθαι ου ποΧΧης τίνος α^ιον τιμής' δεδεμενον δε, ποΧΧου αζιον. Comp. Rep. v, ρ. 63. The finite verb with the participle refers to τις omitted, in Od. ί , 473. όσσον τε yεyωvε βοησας. The participle in the neuter, with the article, is often put for a nominative or accusative absolute , as an appo¬ sition to an entire proposition. Plat. Pheedon. p. 230. συ δύ δεδιώς άν, το Χεγόμει/ον, ( ut aiunt ) την σαυτου σκιάν - ούτως άποκρίναιο άν ; Comp. Gorg. in* Isocr. Panath. p. 249. B. το τοίνυν εχο μεν ον, ο των μεν προει¬ ρημενών εΧαττόν εστι , των δε ποΧΧακις εγκεκωμιασμενων μει - ζον και Xoyov μάΧΧον αξιον * στρατοπέδου yap , 8$C. Comp. §. 283. 877 Construction of Prepositions. Prepositions are properly adverbs serving to shew 572. certain relations between a noun and another part of speech, and hence govern certain cases. Some require only one case; others, according to the several refer¬ ences which they express, several cases. I. Of those which govern only one case l. άντί, άπό, εκ, πρό take the genitive alone. Αντί, ‘ for, instead of’, the Latin pro , e. g. άντί Θνητού σώματος αθάνατον $όξαν άλλάζασθαι, especially in definitions of value or price, as εϊτά μ έρωτας, άντί ποιας άρετης άξιώ τιμάσθαι ; Demosth. where the honour, τιμή , is considered as the price of virtue, although in other languages a causal relation is here indicated, as in ανθ wVj 1 wherefore, on which account . It is often used also in comparisons with respect to worth. II. ι , π6· άντί νυ πολλών λαών εστίν άνηρ, ον τε Ζευς κηρι φιλησγ, ‘ 1S equivalent to, is worth’, θ', 233. {η^οράασθε) Ύρωων ανθ εκατόν τε Ζιηκοσίων τε 'έκαστος στησεσθαι , where στηναι άντί τίνος is the same as Herod . νπ, 104. αξιον είναι. 11. φ\ 75. άντί τοι είμ i κεταο — αάοίοιο, "I am as Worthy of your forbearance as one who supplicates protection . Hence άνθ’ ενός Plat. Phil. p. 314. Leg. iv, p. 163. e one held against the other’, άντα, c before , is dif¬ ferent. άντα παρειάων σχομόνη λιπαρά κρηδεμνα. Thus also Od. 115. Hesiod, εργ. 725 k . ' Άπό generally shews a removal, f from’, the Latin, 573. VOL. II. k Fisch. Hi, b. p. 100 sqq. K K 878 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. a, ab, e. g. άφ’ ’ίππων ά\το χαμάζε. Sometimes από is put with the measure of the removal or distance, instead of with the place from which the distance is expressed, από σταδίων τετταράκοντα της θαλάττης, c forty st. from the sea’ 1 . Hence also άφ’ ’ίππων μάχεσθαι , / to fight on horseback'. Herod, i, 79. Comp. Thuc. iv, 14. vii, 62. 63. because the direction of the action is from one place to another, yci >εσθαι από δείπνου , f to have done supper'. Herod. vi, l29 m . άπ ελπίδων , i. e. ούχ ως ηλπιζον , Soph. EL 1127· από θυμόν y ενεσθαι τινι IL α, 562. από σκοπού , f far from the mark', &c. From hence is derived the sense in which it signi¬ fies an f extraction, derivation, an origin, beginning', which, strictly speaking, seems to be founded upon f a removal from’. Thus άφ’ εσπερας , f beginning with the evening’. Xen. Hist. Gr. n, 4,24. άφ’ ημέρας πίνειν, de die . Toup. Ctd Suid. II, p. 267 sq. οι άπό της στοάς , άπό της Ακαδη¬ μίας, άπό Πλάτωνος , ‘ the Stoics, Academics, Platonics’ 11 , τα άπό της μητρός , ‘on the mother's side', βους από Πιερίης Horn. Η. in Merc. 191 . as pastor ab Amphryso for Am- plirysius, in Virgil 0 . Hence it stands before names of tools, parts of the human body, members, whose effects may be considered as proceeding from them. II. ω , 605. πεφνεν απ’ άρ^υρεοιο βιοΊο , where we say f with, through, by means of', κυκλοτερής ως άπό τόρνου Herod. IV, 36. όζντης σώματος η ά πό των ποδών Plat . Leg. viii, ρ. 406. Simi¬ larly άπό λείας Xyv, fc to live upon plunder', where λεία is the means of living 11 . Thus also το άπό σευ , f what 1 Schaefer. ad Long. p. 328 sq. m Fisch. hi, b. p. 108. n Schaef. in Dion. Hal. i, p. 2 6 sqq. Fisch. m, b. p. 115. ° Valck. ad Theocr. i, 147. (x. Id.) P Gronov. ad Herod, i, 203, 879 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. comes from you’, το σόν, i. e. ‘ your opinion , Herod, vii, 110. το απ’ ημεων id. IX, 7. φθόνοι από των πρώτων αν ορών Thuc. ιν, 108", Hence it is also put with words which signify a quality of the mind, an interest from which an action is produced, e. g. άπο δικαιοσύνης , ‘ from a love of justice', Herod, y n, 164. «’ ελπίδος, ‘from hope. Soph. Track. 667. άφ’ όαυτοϋ, ‘from one’s own inclination of one’s-self’, Thuc. v, 60. vm, 47‘. άπ ούδενός δόλορον voov Herod, ui, 135. (Comp. §. 401. Obs. 2.) where also the dative alone might be put 5 . Hence άπό is put with an adjective, although the proper reference does not take place, foi a dative or adverb, άπό σπουδής, for σπουνη or σπουδαίων, c with zeal’, άπό τού προφανούς Thuc. ιι, 93. openly , palam 1 . Άπό also is used with the same reference in Thuc. VIII, 79. άπό ξννόδον δοκών, since the council was the ori- o-in of the determination. Comp. ib. vm, 81. vii, 57. από ξυμμαχίας αύτόνομοι, ‘according to the alliance’. Xen. Men S I 2, 9. άπό κυάμων καθίστασθαι άρχοντας, ‘by means of the ballot with beans’. Plat. Rep. vm, p. 197. 199. πολιτεία άπό τιμημάτων, which is expressed lb. p. 202. i K τιμημ. * a constitution in which the governors are chosen according to their circumstances’, ό άπό των πολεμίων φόβος, ‘ which is caused by the enemy’“. Hence απο often signifies ‘on account of’. Soph.Antig. 695. lhuc. 62. in, 64. v, 17. vi, 12. Plat. Rep. vm, p. m x - q Wessel. ad Herod, p. 69 3- r Duker. ad Thuc. vi, 40. . Wyttenb. ad Ed. Hist. p. 414. Fisch. ill, b. p. 106. t Fisch. ib. p. 110. u Wyttenb. ad Eccl. Hist. p. 370. * Fisch. in, b. p. 107. Valck. ad Herod, p. 414, 30. K K 2 880 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. Hence άπό is sometimes put, though but seldom, with persons whp effect any thing, for υπό. Herod. 11 , 54. ζητησιν ^eya\r}v άπο σφεων yei >εσθαι. TIlUC. Ill, 36. V, 17 y . * \ ·. '· · \lmpf \ 574 . Έ κ (before a vowel εξ) serves to shew a choice out of several objects, e. g. εκ των ποΧιτων εκΧ^εσθαι τούς ισχυρό¬ τατους , or to shew a whole, consisting of several parts, e. g. Xen. Mem. hi, 6, 17. But it frequently expresses, like ct7ro, f a removal’, and generally a removal from the inside of a place or thing, e. g. εκ της πολεω? άπιεναι , φευ- yειv J which presupposes that f one has been in the city’, whilst άπο της π. φ. would only signify that f one has been near the city’. Yet this distinction is not uniformly observed. Hence εκ is sometimes put for εξω, as Herod . ii, 142 Z . The idea of a distance is contained also in to εκ τού ισθμού τείχος Thuc. ι, 64. f the wall from thence to the isthmus’, as f a Sequanis\ Caes. B. G. i, l. Hence, it expresses generally the relation of two things, by which it appears that one proceeded from the other, and thus a derivation also, an origin, a beginning, just the same as από \ Hence arises the phrase εκ των ζω¬ στήρων φορειν φιάλας Herod, ιν, 10 . f suspended to the girdles’, and εκ τού ποδός κρεμάσαι τινα , ‘ by the foot’, Χαμβάνειν ίππον εκ της ούράς } c by the tail’ b . It is used, therefore, in order to express an immediate consequence, the production of one thing from another, e. g. εκ της θυσ'ιης yevf-aOai Herod. I, 50. (as άπο δείπνου §. 572.) yεXav εκ των πρόσθεν δακρύων Xen. Cyr . I, 4, 28. 6 to y Fiseh. ib. p. 116 sq. z Valcken. ad 1. 1. p. 173, 24. Fisch. in, b. p. 127. a Fisch. in, b. p. 11 8 sq. b Fisch. ib. p. 120. - Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. 881 laugh after tears*. εκ μεν είρηνης πολεμειν, εκ δε πολέμου πάλιν ξυμβηι rai TJlUC. X, 120. Comp. Soph. TV. 284. Eur. Troad. 495 c . Again, it is put with words which import an affection of the mind, an internal or ex¬ ternal impulse, e. g. εκ παντός του vov Plat. Gorg. p. 137. and hence for an adverb : εκ του εμφανούς, palam , Herod, in, 150. v. 37. vii, 205. εξ απροσδόκητου, inex- Spectato, id. VII, 205. εκ προσηκόντων. ThltC. Ill, 67· εκ του ευπρεπούς id. VII, 57· εκ των δικαίων Avist. Nllb. 1116. Hence it may often be translated f by, on account of through, in consequence of* Eur. Phoen. 948. παλαιών * Άρεος εκ μηνιμάτων. Thuc. II, 62. την τολμάν από της όμοιας τύχης η ξύνεσις εκ του ύπερφρονος εχυρωτεραν παρε-χε- ται. Comp. Herod, π, l29 d . — Herod, ii, 152. εκ της όφιος του ονείρου, ‘ in consequence of*. Plat. Charm . p. 120. εκ τούτου τού λόγου. Thus also εκ stands for υπό, especially in Herodotus, e. g. VII, 175. τα λεχθεντα εξ’ ^Αλεξάνδρου. II, 148. τα εξ 'Ελλήνων τείχεα, ‘ the fortifications built by the Greeks*®. Hence τα εξ ανθρώπων πράγματα, c deeds which can only be done by man*, i. e. f great, extraordinary deeds* f . The phrase εκ τρίτων, c myself and two others*. Plat. Symp. p. 252. is more unusual s . fljod l. f before*, as a definition of place or time 11 . c Valck. ad Herod, p. 240, 93· Fisch. hi, b. p. 121. «» Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 131. Fisch. hi, b. p. 120. e Valck. ad Herod, p. 587, 99· f Abresch. ad iEschyl. p. 140. Hemsterh. ad Thom. M. p. 359, Wessel. ad Herod, p. 176, 14. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 378. s Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 181. h Fisch. hi, b. p. 129 sq. 882 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. * *-’*». 1 1 2 . ' Before’, prceter, prce, to express a preference, e. g. προ άλλων, ' before others’, i. e. 'more than others’, Plat. Menex. extr. προ πολλου ποιςϊσθαι Isocr . Phil. p. lio. B. ( to value higher than much’, i. e. 'to set a great value upon any thing*. Comp. Herod, vii, 3. Thuc. iv, 59. Plat. Rep. ii, p. 215. x, p. 284* . The following senses are less frequent: "for*, for the advantage’, or 'at the command of any one’. II. to, 734. dOXevetv πρό άνακτος άμειλίχου. The expression vav- . μαχεειν προ της Πβλοτ τοννησου Herod. ΥΙΙΓ, 49* coll. 60, 2. is similar. Comp. ib. 68, 2. Xen. Mem. S. n, 4, 7. αυτόν, προ του φίλον. Comp. Cyrop. IV, 5, 44 k . Again, προ φόβοιο II. p 3 667. 'for fear, on account of the flight’. In the phrase yrjv προ yrjs όλαυνομαι JEsch. Prom. 687. Arist. Av. 234. the idea of porro appears to be implied in πρό , as in προβαίνει. Many adverbs take a genitive, and become preposi¬ tions. See §. 601. The most worthy of notice are eWa and όκατι (poet.), 'on account of’; but often also, * with respect to, as far as regards’. Herod, iii, 122. έίνεκεν ye χρημάτων άρξεις άπάσης της ΕΚλαόος, ' as tar as money is concerned’. Comp. Plat. Rep. i, p. 168. Plat. Theaet. p. 6l. προθυμίας μεν ενεκεν φανειται , £ as far as readiness is concerned’. Comp. Xen. Cyr. in, 2, 30. Mem. S . IV, 3, 3. Plat. Rep. VIII, p. 193. οίμαι εyyός τι αυτου Γλανκωι/ο? τουτουι τείνειν ενεκα ye φιλονεικιας, with respect to ambition’. 1 ϊ Fisch. iii, b. p. 130. 131. k Fisch. iii, b. p. 131. 1 Valcken. ad Herod, p. 466, 66. Heind. ad Plat. Charm, p. 72· Schaefer, ad Long. p. 421. 883 Syntax.\ Construction of Prepositions. 2. ev and σύν govern the dative only. ev, c in’, is used only with verbs of rest, as in Latin, «577. in, with the ablative, whose references also it expresses. But it is used also where in Latin the ablative alone is put in answer to the question, "when*? e. g. hoc tempore , kv τούτω τφ χρο νφ, hence ev φ sc. γ^ρόνγ, c when’, Herod. vi, 89. Thuc. vii, 29 m . Again, with names of cities, e. g. ev 'Ρωμτι , ev Καρ'χη^όνι, except with those whose- dative plural Ionic is used as an adverb, e.g. Άθηνρσι. See §. 257. a. Yet in these cases ev is sometimes wanting*. Soph. Trach. 596. σκότω , for ev σκότιρ. See §. 405. 8. b.° Sometimes, however, ev is used with names of places, when proximity only is implied, e. g. ev Αακ€§αίμονι , ev Mavnveia, c near Lacedaemon. Mantinea*. Xen. Hellen. VII, 5, 18°. * e y I Prom this primary use in definitions of places, the following constructions are derived, which accord in part with the English or Latin idiom : l. ev φόβφ elvai, e to be in fear\ ev opyrj elvai Tivi or e^eiv τινα, ( to be in a rage with any one*, ev η$ονρ €στί o\ yeveaOai στρατηλα- σιην € 7 Γί την 'Ελλάδα, f it is his will, he is anxious, de¬ sirous, that’, Herod . vn, 15. Comp. Eur. Iph. T. 494 . ev αίσχυναις eyeiv for αισγυντικως , c to be ashamed*, Eltrip. Suppl. l64. ev €νμαρ€ΐ eaTi for eu/xapes, id. Iph . Aul. 974. See the Note of Musgrave. ev Ίσφ elvai, c to be similar’ 15 . ev ομοιιρ ττοΐ€ΐσθαι, c to esteem equally , Herod, vm, 109· m Fisch. hi, b. p. 139. n Fisch. ib. p. 143. ° Dorvill. ad Charit. p. 206. 418. Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. n, p. 395. Heind. ad Plat. Charm, p. 56. Fisch. hi, b. p. 139. p Interpr. ad Lucian, i, p. 299· 884 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. * ’ € v ελαφρω ττοιβισθαι , 6 to make light of* * q . 2. ev πόΧταις, a κοντίοις, τόζοις όια'γωνί'ζεσθαι, c to be equipped with shields, spears, bows, (the same as ev όσθήτι XevKf) Xen. Mem. S. hi, 9 , 2 . ev στεφάνους Eurip. Here, f 677. ‘ adorned with chaplets’ 8 . ev olvtp, f at wine’ 1 . 3. Herod. YI, IO 9 . ev σοι νυν εστι η καταόονΧώσαι ’Αθήνας η εΧενθερω- σαι, c it rests with you, depends upon you’, penes te est, which elsewhere is expressed επί σοι earl. Arist. Av. 1 677- ev τω ΎριβάΧΧω παν το πρα*γμα η . Hence ev εαντω eivai , c to be master of one’s-self’, sui compotem esse x , and ev όμοί, c as far as regards me, my opinion’. Soph. CEd. C. 12 i4. 4 . * Through’, when a mean or cause is assigned, especi¬ ally in Pindar, and Thuc. vii, 11 . τα μεν πρότ -epov πρα- ■χθόντα ev αΧΧαις ποΧΧαΙς επιστοΧαις ίστε γ . 5. πίναν ev Keparlvou ποτηρίοις. See Zeune ad Xenoph. Anab. vi, 1 , 4. 6 . ‘Amongst’, inter. Plat. Apol. S. p. 58. άμεινόν εστιν οίκειν ev ποΧίταις γ^ρηστοις η πονηροις. Id. Leg. I, p. 5. άνάπανΧαι ev τοίς υφηΧοις όενόρ€σιν eiai σκιαραί, properly, as they are surrounded by high trees, which we should express sub arboribus. Hence also ev νομοθεταις θόσθαι νόμον Demosth. p. 31, 10 Z . 7. It is frequently put with it’s case for an adjective or participle, e. g. πάντες ev νόσιρ, f all sick’ a . 4 Valck. ad Herod, p. 2/5, 23. r Hemsterh. ad Arist. Plut. p. 479· s Mitscherl. ad Horat. 1, 5, 1. Fisch. in, b. p. 137 sq. * Valck. ad Callim. fr. p. 15. 262. u Valcken. ad Herod, p. 241, 46. ad Hippol. 324. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. Col. 247. Eurip. Med. 231. Fisch. in, b. p. 140. x Herm. ad Y r ig. p. 812, 389· y Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 1112. Fisch. in, b. p. 140. 2 Fisch. in, b. p. 137- 139. a Schaef. ad Long. p. 404 sq. Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. 885 Συν, c with’, cum, in combinations in which these prepositions would not be used in Latin and English, e. g. συν τοϊς 'Έλλησι μάλλον η συν τω βαρβαρφ eivat, on the side of the Greeks, the Persians , Xen. Hell, in, L 18. Comp. Cyr. V, 4 , 37· συν τω νόμιρ την ψήφον τιθε- σθαι, c according to the law\ id. Cyr. i, 3, 17. συν τψ σω άγαθω, ‘ to thy advantage’, tuo cum commodo. id. Cyr. hi, l, 15. συν θεω, c with God s assistance 3. ε’ις in, ‘ in, to’, governs the accusative alone, only 578. with verbs of motion, as in with the accusative. But various verbs which of themselves do not imply motion, receive this sense by the construction with εϊς.' πιπρά- σκω, πωλω τινα είς τόπον, for ττωλώ τινα α Ί ων εις τόπον. II. ω , 752. agrees with the English f to sell into a place’ c . But παρείναι ες Σάρ<άς Herod. VI, 1. VIII, 60. φανηναι είς Προκόννησον Herod, iv, 14, 15. signifies * to come to Sardis’. Thus \κετει,ειν είς τινα 11. π, 574. r to come as a suppliant to any one’ d . Especially with σθαι and it’s compound. Herod, vm, 60, 2. es την Σαλα¬ μίνα ύπεκκειται ημίν τενκα τε και -γυναίκες, ‘ are brought in safety to Salamis'. Eurip. Iph . T. 624. e K άνά Ύ ,ςην κεί- μεθα, for άφΡ/μεθα. Herod. Ill, 31. πάντα ες τούτους ανα- κεαται, for άνατεθειμόνα βστ, καθόζεσθαι, ίστασθαι (στηναι) ά , τόποι» το,ό or Α τ. (Od. λ', 513. Msch Prom. 229. Thuc. ι, 24. II, 19. Ill, 75.) stands properly for «.flefc- c0a h > τό*ψ βλΟό,τα ek αύτό»°.) as Eur. PA. 1380. ίστησαν ΪΧθάντ els m joine re quently with adverbs, especially of time, e/s S* αξ, ‘ once , e/s aei, ‘ for ever’. Thus also e/s την ΰστ epalav, ‘tote morrow’, e/s τρίτη» ήμβραν, (and without ήμόραν. Eur. Ale. 323. Xen. Cyr. v, 3, 27 .) ‘ to the third day’ 11 . > -c With numerals it signifies sometimes, ‘ about, ThHC. I, 74. raws es r* rerpa^/as, ‘ about four hundred ships’. Comp. ib. 100 . in, 20. vn, 1 . Herod. 11 '■ Plat. Leg. iv, p. 161 . Xen- C f r ·] * 1 · ’’ 5 \ "V ’.· / sometimes it makes them distributive as Xen. Cyr. vn, 5, 17. eis όκατό v, centeni, ib. vi, , Frequently the noun which is governed of e/s is wanting and it is put with the genitive, which is depend¬ ent upon that noun, (a) e. g. e/s Μ****, sc ' ^“ T “’ t0 i Fiscli. hi, b. p. 153. 154. I Fisch. ib. p. 151. II Piers. ad Moend. p· 152. k Fisch. hi, b. p. 150. 15*2. m Fisch. in, b. p. 15b. ° Fisch. hi, b. p. 15b, 579. 888 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions '/ masters’, Plat. Protag. p. 117 . instead of which, p* 119 , et? διδασκαλίαν is Used, εις παιδοτρίβου ib. p. 118 p . For εις, when it expresses a proper motion, ok is often put, generally with living objects, e.g. Herod. 11 , 121 , 5. εσελθοντα δε ως τον βασιληος την θυγατέρα. Arist. Pac. 104. ως τον Αί εις τον ουρανόν. It is Seldom found with inanimate things, as ως ’[ Αβυδον Thuc. "viii, 103. This usage probably arose from the circumstance of ως and ek being often joined, e. g. Xen. Ages, ι, i 4 q . II. άνά, διά, κατά, υπέρ govern two cases. 1 . άνά governs a dative in the Ionic and Doric Poets only. II. a , 15. χρυσεψ άνά σκηπτρω , for εν. Pind. 01. I, 66. χρυσεαις άν 'Ιπποις, for εν or συν χρ. t. Id. Pyth. I, 10 . ei /δει δ’ άνά σκάπτιρ Αιός αιετός, ‘ on the SCeptre’. Ell- rip. Iph. A. 759· άνά ναυσίν , 4 in ships’, ib. 1064. άνά ελά- ταισι στεψανωδει τε χλοα, as εν στεφάνοις*. Elsewhere it governs the accusative, and expresses 1 . a c duration, continuance’, like the Latin per. Herod . VIII, 123. άνά τον πόλεμον τούτον , ( throughout this War’. Id. II, 130. άνά πάσαν ημερην, * daily’ s . 2. f Against’, as άνά τόν ποταμόν , 6 against the cur¬ rent’ 4 . p Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. i, p. 168 . Koen. ad Greg. p. 19 . Fisch. 111 , b. p. 15S. q Thom. M. p. 933 et ibi Oudendorp. Koen. ad Greg. p. 32. Herm. ad Vig. p. 807 sq. Fisch. in, b. p. l 6 o. r Koen. ad Greg. p. 91 . Musgr. ad Eurip. 1. Ci Fisch. in, b. p. l63. 5 Fisch. in, b. p. l 6 l sq. t Valcken. ad Herod, p. 199 , 98 . Syntax* * Construction of Prepositions. 889 3. With numerals it makes them distributive. Xen. Anab. IV, 6, 4. ava 7 re ντε 7 rapaaayyas της ημέρας, quinas parasangas die n . 4. In the phrase άνά στόμ έχειν, c to have in one’s mouthy to talk often of any thing’. In άνά κράτος it constitutes an adverb,, f with strength’. 2. $ta governs the genitive in the following senses : a. ‘ Through’, per. Sia 7ΓοΧεμίας πορβυεσθαι Xen. Hier . 2, $. Hence the phrases Si ημέρας, Sia νυκτός, Si € τους, e during, throughout the whole day’ x . b. c Through’, i. e. f by means of, with the assist¬ ance of’, like the Latin, per, e. g. Si εαυτόν, per se, ‘ by himself, without external aid’, Sta των οφθαλμών ορμν, 8$c. See §.401. Obs. y c. ‘ In’, in certain combinations, as Sia χάρος έχειν, e to have in one’s hand’, generally metaphorically, f to have in hand’ 2 . d. Frequently it signifies f a distance, an interval’, as Si oXlyov είναι, ‘ to be within a little of’. Hence Herod, y II, 30. ττοταμός Sia aTaSiMV ττέντε άναφαινόμένος, * five stades off’. Comp, vn, 198. Hence likewise in definitions of time : Sia ποΧΧου, μακρου χρόνον, or Sia χρόνου alone, (properly f at the distance of a long time’), ‘ after a long time, for a long time’, for which the simple genitive is put §. 378. Si evSewTov έτεος. Herod, i, u Fisch. ib. p. 163. x Wessel. ad Herod, p. 188. Valck. ib. p. 443, 47. y Fisch. hi, b. p. 166 " sq. * Fisch. ib. p. 167 . Comp. Musgr. ad Eur. Ph. 384, 580 890 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. 62. f eleven years after’. Otherwise it serves with the, ordinal numbers,, to express the recurrence of an action after a certain period of time, as in English r every , Sict τρίτον ετεος , ‘ every third year’, tertio quoque anno , Herod. II, 4. $ια τρίτης ημερης id. II, 37· Si εννατου έτους Plat. Leg. I, in. Sia πέμπτων ετών ib. VIII, p · 410. Si έτους πέμπτου Arist. Plut. 384. (n) e. With the verbs είναι, ylyveaOai, εχειν, Χαμβάνειν, especially ίεναι, ερχεσθαι, it constitutes various peri¬ phrases, e. g. Sia φόβου είναι, for φοβεισθαι , Thuc. VI, 39. Si εχθρας yiy νεσθαι τινι, ‘ to be at enmity with any one, to be treated like an enemy by any one’. Si opytjs εχειν τινά, for opyiaOrjvai τινι , Thuc. V, 29· Si αίνους ομμ εχειν, ‘ to look ashamed’, Eurip. Iph. A. 1000. Si οίκτου Χαβείν , for οϊκτείρει v, Eur. Suppl. 194. Sia τύχης ίεναι, for εν τύχη είναι. Soph. (Ed. T . 773. Sia μάχης ιεναι, αφι- κεσθαί τινι, Herod, ι, ι69· ‘ to give battle’. Sia φόβου ερχεσθαι Eur. Or. 747. Sia y\ώσσης ιεναι, c to speak’. Eurip. Suppl. Π4. with the notes of Markland and Musgrave\ Note. Sia, pra, e. g. Sia πάντων, * before all others’, is peculiar to Herodotus b . / With adjectives it often stands for adverbs. Sia τάχους, for ταχέως. Thuc. II, 18, $£C· 2. With the accusative it signifies especially f on account of’, and is then joined chiefly with infinitives. §. 540. See 779. Hence it is put as in Latin propter. \ t [ " Γ - f \ a Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. v. 482. Wyttenb. ad Eccl. Hist. p. 388. b Valcken. ad Herod, p. 404, 41. c Fisch. in, b. p. 171 sq. 891 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. (e. g. Cic. pro Mil. 22.) in the signification e with respect to, or in consideration of any one, through the interces¬ sion, assistance, fault of any one’. δια' νύκτα II. θ', 510. as dono noctis Virg. JEn. vm, 658 d . Especially in the phrase ei μη δια τούτο , c unless this prevent it. Ί hucyd. II, 18. ε$όκουν oi ΏεΧοποννησιοι επεΧθόντες αν δια ταγούς πάντα ετι εζω καταΧαβειν , ei μη δια την ckcivov μεΧΧησιν, e had not his delay frustrated it’ e . 3. κατά a. with the genitive, signifies sometimes a 581. direction to an object, in its proper sense, as κατά σκο¬ πού τοξενειν, e to shoot at the mark', κατά κόρρης τύπτειν, as well as in the derivative signification, in which it sig¬ nifies generally, ‘ with respect to’, e. g. κατά τίνος ehreiv, ‘to say any thing with regard to some one’, or c any thing that is prejudicial to him, or false’, as Xen . Apol. S. 13. yjsei ?$εσθαι κατά του θεου 3 ί to say any thing falsely of the Deity’. Again, in order to censure, when it is rendered * against’, or otherwise, with a contrary intention Demosth . Phil. II, p. 68, 2. ο και μεγίστου ην καθ υμών εγκωμίου, < with regard to you, upon you’. Thus Plat. Menon. p. 334. ειπερ ev ye τι ζητείς κατά πάντων, c that applies to air. Gomp. p. 339. κατά πασών τών τεχνών , * in, with, all arts’. Id. Ion. p. I94 f . It is used especially in motion from above down¬ wards, and answers to the Latin de, e. g. βη Se κατ’ Ου- Χυμποιο καρηνων g . Hence κατα χειρος ΟΓ κ. χειρών $ι$ο- d Fisch. hi, b. p. 170 . Comp. Brunck. ad Aristopb. Thesm. 414. e Hoog. et Zeune ad Viger. p. 510 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 241. f Fisch. hi, b. p. 478. s Valcken. ad Tlieocr. i, 118. (x. Id.) Comp. Fisch. in, b. p. 177- I * 892 Syntax . Construction' of Prepositions. vcu, ‘ to pour water upon the hands’ * 1 *, κατά yrj ς ίεναι, Svvat, c to go under the earth’ \ ' f fj * t· φ t >»w The following phrases are to be noticed : ευχεσθαι κατά βοός , καθ’ εκατόμβης, κατά χιλίων γιμάρων , £ to VOW an ox, a hecatomb’ k . καθ’ Ιερών τελείων όμόσαι , is different; c to swear by the victim, touching it at the same time’ 1 . b. With the accusative it chiefly indicates any respect whatever, and signifies f According to, after’, κατά νόον , νουν, θυμόν , * accord¬ ing to one’s mind’, κατά τάς Θεμιστοκλέους εντολάς , ( in pursuance of the commands of Th. Herod, vm, 85 111 . Similarly plat. Alcib. I, p. 28. την τοιαυτην βοήθειαν καλήν μεν λε·γεις, κατά την ειπ’χείρησιν του σώσαι ους $ει, * as far as , κατά θεόν, ‘ according to, through divine impulse, pro¬ videntially’ n . e On account of’. Herod, ix, 37. κατά τό εχθος, το Αακε§αιμονίων , ‘ on account of the hatred, from hatred against the Lacedaemonians’ 0 . Hence it is often put with verbs of motion, in order to shew the object of them. Herod. II, 152. άνα·γκαιη κατέλαβε 'Ιωνάς τε και Κά¬ ρας, κατά ληίην εκηλώσαντας, άττενειγθηναι ες A'iyvrrTov , f in order to collect plunder. Id. vm, 83. τριηρης, η κατά τους Αιακ&ας άιτεόημησε. (See C. 64.) Comp. TJlUC. II, 87. h Piers, ad Moer. p. 236. Comp. Interpr. ad Thom. M. p. 510. 1 V&lcken. ad Eurip. Hippol. 1366'. Wessel. ad Herod, p. 508, 95. k Kuster. ad Aristoph. Equ. 657. (Brunck. ib. 660 .) Valck. ad Eurip. Phcen. p. 769 . Comp. Huschke Anal. Cr. p. 133. 1 Mi sc. Phil. 1 , p. 163. Not. 36. Comp. Index. Demosth. v. κατά. m Fisch. hi, b. p. 180. n Valck. ad Herod, p. 2 75, 11. 0 Valck. ad Herod, p.633, 97. Fisch. hi, b. p. 182, Syntax * Construction of Prepositions * 0^3 Thus the Homeric expression η τι κατά πρηξιν — άΧα- Χησθε. ‘ In the expression of a similitude, accordance’. Herod. I, 121. πατέρα re και μητέρα ευ ρήσεις, ου κατά Μ ιθραόατην τε τον βονκόΧον και την ^υνοίικα αυτου, ‘very different people from Mithradates’. Comp. n, ]0. Thuc. n. 62. Plat. Rep. VIII, p. 206. άπιστουμεν μη κατά την οΧι·γαρχουμενην πόΧιν όμοιότατον τον φειόωΧόν τε και χρηματιστήν τεταχθαι. Comp. ib. ιχ, ρ. 249. Si/mp. ρ. 231. 248. Gorg. p- 141. Arist. Αν. 1002 Ρ . Hence κατ εμαυτόν, ‘ of the same kind as myself’. Plat. Si/mp. p. 221. o\ καθ' ημάς, ‘ men of our station, of our character’ q , and with compara¬ tives, μειζων η κατ άνθρωπον. §. 449· * In, on, near’, in definitions of place, κατά στρατόν II. η, 370. ‘in the army, camp’, κατά yijv, θάΧασσαν 7Γ0- ρευεσθαι , ‘ on land, at sea’, κατά τον πΧουν , ‘ on the voy¬ age*. Herod. HI, 14. παρψεσαν αι παρθένοι κατά τους πα¬ τέρας, ‘where their fathers were seated’, i, 80. κατά Φωκαίην πόΧιν , ‘ near, in the neighbourhood of Phocea’ r . ‘During’, in definitions of time. Herod, vn, 137. κατά τον ποΧεμον, ‘at the time of the war . I, 67. κατα τον κατά K ροισον χρόνον. Xdil. Mem. S. Ill, 5, 10. οι καθ εαυτούς άνθρωποι , ‘ their contemporaries ; thus likewise οι καθ' ημάς*. ‘ About', Herod. II, 145. κατά εξήκοντα ετεα και χίΧια. Comp, νι, H7. ρ Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 225 sq. Fisch. hi, b. ρ. 1S1. 186’. Lennep. ad Phal. p. 94. r Fisch. hi, b. p. 183. 187* Valck. ad Her. p. 200, 27. 454, 7» s Fisch. lit, b. p. 179 sq. Valck. ad Herod, p. 26 l, 47. VOL. II. L L 894 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions It serves particularly with numerals, to shew the same as the Latin distributiva, when a certain number is conti¬ nually recurring. Herod, vn, 104. Λακεδαιμόνιοι, κατα μ€ν ενα μαχεόμενοι, ουδαμιυν εισι κακιονες ανδρων , ‘ singly’, singuli, 'one by one’. Comp. Time, iv, 32. καθ’ h ττά, ‘seven at a time’. Arist. Av. 1079·— Time, m, 78. oi ΚερκυραΊοι, κακωί τε και κατ’ ολίγα·; (rare) ττροσπίπτοντες, ‘with few ships at a time’, (likewise κατ’ όλίγοΛ) Likewise without numerals: κατά μήνα, κατ’ ενιαυτόν, καθ ημέραν, ‘ every month, every year’, singulis mensibus, annis, sometimes accompanied by έκαστος, κατα πόλεις, κατά κωμας, ΟΓ κατά κιόμας έκαστος Herod. I, 196· oppida- tim , viccitim u . It is often, with its case, expressed by an adverb, e. g. κατά μοίραν, in Homer, ‘ properly, fitly’, κατά μι¬ κρόν, ‘ gradually’, κατά κράτος , vehementer. κατά μέρος, vicissim, ‘in turn’, κατά ί τόδα, ‘directly’. Xen. Hell. π, l, 20. κατα το Ισχυρόν, vi , 1 with force, or valde , Herod, ix, 2. Ka ff eavTov ‘ by himself, alone’, to which αότός is often joined, αύτο? καθ' εαυτόν , per se solus*. 4. υπέρ governs the genitive in the following senses : ‘For, instead’. Eurip. Ale. 701. μη θνησχ υπέρ τοϊΖ άνδρός, ού$ 6 7 ω πρό σοϊ, which, however, may admit the following signification : ‘ For, in any one’s behalf’, θυειν υπέρ της πόλεως t Duker. ad Thuc. vi, 34. Wessel. ad Herod, p. 673, 39. u Wessel. ad Diod. S. T. n, p. 31. 379· Fisch. hi, b. p. 184 sqq. 189 sq. Herm. ad Vig. p. 814, 402. * Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. xm, 72. Dorvill. ad Chant, p. 510. Fisch. in, b. p. 184. I Syntax, Construction of Prepositions, 895 , A y ' Xen. Mem. S. II, 2, 13. μάγεσθαι υπέρ τίνος, 8$C. Hence,, SeSicvac υπέρ τίνος, timere alicui y ·. f 0n account of 5 . Eurip. Eh. 1345. ηκουσα τέκνα μο- νομάχφ μελλειν όορι εις άσπί cT ηζειν βασιλικών όόμων ίιττερ ζ . Especially with the infinitive, υπέρ του μη ποιεϊν το προσ~ ταττόμενον, f in order not to do’. ‘Of’, de, generally with the accessary idea of the intention to avert, to retain, to defend any thing. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 3, 83. αδύνατον μεν τα συμφέροντα προ- νοεισθαι ύττερ των μελλόντων , ad res futurus bene consti- tuendas. Yet it is often put for περί generally*. V f Over’. Xen. Mem. S. Ill, 8, 9 . ο ήλιος που θέρους υπέρ ημών και των στε Γ γών πορευόμενος σκιάν αυτών παρεγε^. c For’, in prayers. II. ω, 466. καί μιν υπέρ πατρός και μητερος ηϋκόμοιο λίσσεο και τεκεος, c for tile Sake of his parents’ c . b. With the accusative it signifies, f Over’. Herod. IV, 188. ριπτεουσι υπέρ τον όόμον , ‘over the house’. i · V ^ ‘ Above’, i. e. .more than, Herod . v, 64. υπέρ τα τεσσερηκοντα ετη ά , ‘'Against’, in opposition to κατά. Od. a', 34. υπέρ μόρον , c against destiny’ 6 . y Fisch. hi, b. p. 206 sqq. z Valck. ad Eurip. Phoen. 1336. Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 1125. a Markl. ad Lys. p. 123. 162 . b Fisch. hi, b. p. 208. c Brunck. ad Apoll. Rh. in, 701. Append. d Heind. ad Plat. Parm. p. 194. t Fisch. in, b. p. 209· L L 2 896 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. III. άμφί, επί, μετά, παρά, περί, πρός, ύπο, gOVerrf three cases, the genitive, dative, and accusative. * " - . / 1. Άμφί has all the signification of περί . I a. With the genitive, 'of", the Latin de, quod attinet ad. Eurip. Hec. 72. άποπεμπομαι ενννχον οψιν, άν περί παιδός εμού, του σωζομενον κατα Θράκην, άμφι ΤΙολυζεινης re φί\η$ θνγατρος δι ονείρων εΊδον. b. With the dative c About", in answer to the question ‘ where" ? II. β\ 388. 'ιδρώσει μεν τευ τελαμων άμφι στηθεσσιν. Sometimes the case which is governed of the preposition, does not express the thing about which something else is, but that which is about the latter, e. g. άμφι πυρί στησαι τρίπο¬ δα, ' to set on the fire, so that this blazes round the tripod". Thus άμφι κλάδοις έΧεσθαι. Euvip . Ph. 1532. c to surround with boughs, between boughs’. * j » c Concerning", in various combinations Herod, v, 19. άμφί άπόδω tyj εμρ πεισομαι σοι. Hence Ο η account of , II. y, 157, τοιηδ ’ άμφί yvvaiKi πολυν χρόνον άλη/εα πάσχειν, 6 about such a wife". Likewise in the verb 'to fear. Herod. VI, 62. φοβηθείς άμφί ty \ yvvaiKi. Note. Find. Pyth. i, 21. κηλα δε καί δαιμόνων 60\yet φρενας άμφί τε Λα τοίδα σοφία βαθυκόλπών τε Μοισαν, c by the art". c. With the accusative; 4 About", to the question f where’? and 'whither"? in which case it is used as with the dative, ' about", Soph. Aj. 1083. άμφί ψάμαθον όκβεβλησθαι , ' to be thrown in the sand, so that the sand surrounds the body". The phrase άμφί τι εχειν, is to be noticed, ' to concern one"s Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. 897 self with any things e.g. άμφί όείπνον εχειν Xen. Cyr. v, 5, 44. Comp. ib. i, 30. viii. 1, 13. 'Έχειν is also accom¬ panied by σχολήν. Xen. Cyr. Vll, 5, 52. όρων σε άμφ' ίπ¬ πους εχοντα, άμφ’ άρματα , άμφί μηχανάς, yy ουμην, επει άπό τοντον σχολάσαις , τότε σε καί αμφ εμε ε^ειν σχολήν. Hence ο\ άμφί τινα . Άμφί frequently stands in this sense, without signifying a surrounding ; but it is to be expressed by an adverb or adjective. II. λ', 705. άμφί τε άστυ ερόομεν ιρά θεοϊσιν, f all round the city, in the whole city’. 'Against’, of time, e.g. άμφί όείλην , e against, or towards evening’. Xen. Cyr. v, 4, 16. ‘ About’, e. g. άμφί τα εκκαίόεκα ετη y ενόμενος Xen. Cyr. ι, 4, 16. 'Concerning’, especially in periphrases, rd άμφί τον πόλε μ ον, for τα πόλεμικά { . 2 . * > €7Γ I. a. With the genitive : ' In, on, at’, in definitions of place, to the question ' where’? Od. v, 346. επί κράτος λιμενος ταννφυλλος ελαίη , Άί the extremity, the innermost creek’. Herod, n, 35. τα άχθεα o\ μεν άνόρες επί των κεφαλεων φορεονσι , α\ Se yvvai^^i τωνωμων. Id. V, 92, 3. εστεώτες επί των θυρεών , ' near, at the door’. Xen. Anab. iv, 3, 28. μεϊναι επί τον ποταμού , ' at the river’ g . Hence the phrase, επί των τομίων ομνυναι, ' to stand near, and swear . Likewise to the question ' whither’? Thuc. i, 116 . f Fisch. hi, b. p. 212—223. s Fisch. hi, b. p. 228. 229· h Viger. p. 615. Misc. Phil, i, p. 163, 3b. 584 898 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. πλεΊν επι Σάμου. Xen. Cyr. VII, 2, 1. €7Γί Σάρόεων favyeiv. Comp, vi, l, 31. iv, 5, 54. hi, 3, 27. Hence 6 ίός η επι K αρίης φβρονσα Herod, νιι, 31. and with the omission of όόός, ievai την επι Κιλικίας * 1 · c Before’, as Xen. Hellen. vi, 5, 38. επι μαρτύρων k . ‘In, during’, in definitions of time, επί Κεκροπος, ‘in the time of Cecrops’, Herod, tin, 44. επ είρηνης, c in time of peace’, II. β\ 797. €7rt των ημετερων προγονών Xen. Cyr. ι, 6, si 1 . ‘Of’, de , with the verbs ‘to say’. Plat. Charm, p. 111. επι του καλού λεγων παιόός. -Leg*. VII, p . 332. όπερ επι των βουλών y ελ^ομεν. *’ % . > . 1 ‘From’, a. with the verbs ‘to name, to be named’. εγειν όνομα επί τίνος Herod. IV, 45. την επωνυμίην ί τοιεισθαι επί τίνος Id. ι, 94. Comp, ιι, 57. νιι, 58. 83. Hence Herod. IV, 45. ούκ εχω συ μ βαλεσθαι, επ οτευ μιρ εουσρ yfj ουνόματα τριφάσια κεεται, ‘wherefore’? f In, near, at’, with substantives which import any case that may serve as an example, and with the verbs r to shew, see’, &c. Isocr. ad Nic. p. 25. A. επι των καιρών θεωρειν τους συμβουλεύοντας. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 25. επί των πράξεων. Plat. Rep. V, p. 55. επ εμού , ‘ On my example’. Some phrases are to be noticed especially : εφ' εαυτου , c by himself, peculiarly , Herod . ix, 38. j Obss. Misc. vi, p. 293. Fisch. hi, b. p. 230. k Dorv. ad Charit. p. 642. Valck, ad Eurip. Hipp. 213. Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. T. ii, p. 153. 1 Valck. ad Theocr. x, id. p. 115. Fisch. in, b. p. 227. Syntax . Construction of Prepositions. άχον και οι μετά τών Π ερσεων εόντες 'Έλληνες εττ εωυτων μάντιν Ίππόμαχον. TJlUC. V, 67. κεράς μεν ευώνυμον Σκιρι- ται αυτοΊς καθίσταντο , άει ταυτην την τάξιν μονοί Λακεδαι¬ μονίων € 7 τί σφών αυτών εχοντες, c by themselves, un- mixed with others 5 . Comp, vm, 63. Hence όφ' όαυτοΟ οίκεΐν, c of states also, to live by themselves, not depend¬ ent upon others, to have a peculiar constitution.’ Thuc. U, 63. ra But Thuc. I, 17· το εφ' εαυτών μόνον προορωμενοι , said of the tyrants, means f their own concerns, their pri¬ vate interests, in opposition to the regard to the common good 5 , and is explained by the words e? τε τό σώμα καί ες το τον ίδιον ο'ικον αυζειν. βπι τριών , τεττάρων, 'εφ όνος τετάχθαι, στηναι, 1 to stand three, four, one deep 5 . Thuc . n, 90. Xen. Cyr. ii, 4, 2. viii, 3, is. Anab . i, 2, 15. Ibid . v, 2, 6. ίφ’ όνός η κατάβασις ην, ‘ the descent was by one at a time 5 . With names of a business or office, it signifies the execution of them, e. g. o\ επί τών πραγμάτων, qui sum¬ med rerum prcefecti sunt , Demosth. p. 309, 9. particu¬ larly in later writers, o\ επί τών επιστολών , ab epi- stolis n . b . With the dative especially it signifies ‘ a subordi¬ nation 5 , the being in the power of any one, and c a con¬ dition 5 . «: f Subordination 5 , expressed in Latin by penes , e. g. τών όντων τα μεν εστιν εφ' ημίν, τα δ ουκ εφ ημιν , ‘are ill our power, at our command 5 , επι μαντεσιν είναι , to be dependent upon soothsayers 5 , to be guided by them, Xen. Cyr. i, 6. 2. ποιεΊν τι επι Tivij to submit a thing \ 585. m Valek. ad Herod, p. 634, 19· liscli. hi, b. p. 251. n Lennep. ad Phalar. p. 306. Fisch. iii, b. p. 244 sq. / 900 Syntax· Construction of Prepositions. to any one’s judgment’. Plat. Rep. v, p. 24. Hence to € 7 r ομοί , f as far as depends upon me’°. /3. f Condition’, especially in the phrase εφ' φ or εφ' (pre, §. 479. Hence are derived various forms. Herod. I, 60. Me^a/cXe^? επεκηρυκεύετο ΥΙβίσιστράπιρ, ei βονΧοιτο o\ την OwyaTepa εχειμ e?rt τύραννοι. Plat . Alcib. I y p. 8. e?Ti τοιίτοί? μόι /oie ‘upon condition of having this only’. Leg . V, j9. 241. εαμ τι? απειθή τοντω τφ νομω , φανεί μεν 0 βονΧομενος επι τοϊς ημισεσιν, c SO that he receives the half’ in consequence of a promise. JEschin. in Ctes . p. 499· χίήοαμ άναθειναι ΆπόΧΧωνι επι πάση aepy'ia, 6 upon condition that it shall not be cultivated’. Xen. Mem . ii, 8. \eyei, a ούκ αν τις επι τφ βίφ παντι βονΧοιτο άκονσαι , 1 for his life, though his life should be that which he must lose on failure of fulfilling the conditions’. Thus also € 7 Γί πόσιρ αν βουΧοιο , εθεΧοις , οεξαιο, < for how much would you’? the Latin, quid mereri velis, merearis ? Id. Symp. 1, 5. Π pooTayopct ποΧν apyvpiov $ε$ωκας εττι σοφία:, c upon condition that he taught you wisdom’. Isocr. Panath , p. 234. C. τούτων απάντων μοι σνμβεβηκότων, των μεν ύπερβαΧΧοντως, των Se εζαρκονντως, ούκ ay απω Χων επι τούτοις, c upon condition, with the prospect of possessing this, notwithstanding I were to possess this’. Thuc. i, 74. νμεις επι τω το Χοιπον νεμεσθαι εβοηθησατε , i with tile prospect, or in order to’, II, 80. επ' ετησίω προστασία: 7}y εισθαι^. Hence it frequently expresses ‘ an object, an aim’, in¬ asmuch as this is the condition upon which the action is performed. Herod . I, 41. μη τινες κατ' οίόν κΧωπες κακονρ- • Fisch. hi, b. p. 235. Ruhnk. ad Xen. Mem. S. n, 2, 8. Villois. ad Long. p. 207. Fisch. hi, b. p. 239· . * Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. 901 yoi 67 ri δηλησει φανεωσι ύμΊν, c in order to do you mis¬ chief’. Comp, ii, 121. vi, 67. Plat . Protag. p. 90 . τού¬ των <γα/3 σύ εκάστην ούκ επί τεχνρ € μαθές, ω$ δημιουργός εσο μένος , αλλ’ εττί παιδεία, ως τον ιδιώτην και τον ελεύθερον πρεπει, { in order to exercise it as a profession’. Comp. ib. p. 96 . Comp. Apol.S.p. 84. Aristoph.Lys.63 0 r . Hence συλλαμ¬ βάνει τινά επί θανάτιρ, αγειν επί Θ. c to lead to execution . And as the incidental consequence is often substituted foi the immediate, i. e. the object, Eurip. Hec. 649- (ύκρίθη S epu, civ ev ’Ίοα κρίνει τρισσάς μακάριον ιταϊδας άνηρ βούτας), €ΐτί Copi και φόνιρ καί εμιρν μελαθρων Χωβα, with the con sequence of war, slaughter, and devastation’. Comp. Pham. 544. Xen. Mem. S. II, 3, 19- ούκ αν ττολλ.) άμαθία βίη καί κακοδαιμονία τοΊς hr ωφελεί? (the object) ττεποιημενοις επ ι βλάβγ (consequence) χρησθαι ; Hence it often signifies merely f on account of’. Xen. Mem. Ill, 14, 2. εχοιμεν αν είπείν, επι ποίω ποτέ ερτγψ Άνθρωπος όφοφΆγος καλείται ; Thus also θανμάζεσθαι όπί τ m, Plat. Menon. in. φρονεΊν επί τινι , ‘ to pride one s self upon any thing’. Id. Symp. p. 260. άνιασθαι επί τινι s . άνεπτερώσθαι επι τραγωδία, ί to love passionately , Αϊ ist. Αν. 1444 sq. c in pursuance of’. Plat. Rep. vi, p. 88. y. Sometimes also it signifies c at’, as a definition 586. of place, (as Thuc. Ill, 99. περιπόλων επι τω Αληκι ποταμίρ) sometimes in order to shew generally a combi¬ nation, a co-existence. Hence these phrases are con¬ nected with the preceding Xyv, τελεύεσαι, επι παισίν, vivere, mori liber os habentemK — γαμεΊν Άλλην γυναίκα I Wessel. adDiod. S. n, p. 86. S Hemsterh. ad Lucian. T. i, p. 238. Fisch. m, b. p. 238. t Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. u, p. 435. Herm. ad Vig. p. 814, 397- * 902 / _ Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. C t'7rt Ovyarpl άμητορι , Herod. IV, 154. παΧΧακην εχειν err εΧευθεροις 7 ταισίν, Demosth. p. 637> 5 U .— εσθίειν επί τφ σίτω οψον, c to eat with their bread*, Xen. Mem. S. hi, 14, 2. Comp. Cyr. i, 2, ll. ετΛ τφ σίτο) τάνειν, Id. Cyrop. νι, 2, 27. Comp. PZa£. Phcedr. p. 323 X . e?™ τί} κιίλι/α ctSe«/, Ρ/αί. Symp. p. 254. Hence probably also Thuc. ii, 101. υποσχόμενος αόεΧφην εαυτόν $ ωσειν και χρήματα επ’ αυτίι, e with her’, καθησθαι επί όακρυοις. Eurip. Iphig. A. 1184. or €7Π ΰάκρνσι. Troad. 315. for όακρυουσαν. Soph. Ant. 555. ουκ επ' άρρητους yε το7ς εμοις λογοις*, c not with¬ out my having spoken*. Eurip. Ion. 243. επ άσφάκτοις μηλοισι , f without having sacrificed*. eVl *γελωτι Herod. ix, 82. may signify f with laughter*, but likewise f in order to excite laughter, in joke*. / 1» , i « , j ; l t, · It frequently signifies not so much f a being together’, as an immediate c following upon*, (a connection of time) Xen. Cyr. n, 3, 7· ανεστη επ αύτω Φ εραυΧας, c immedi¬ ately after him*. Comp. 22 y . Hence επ' εϊζειρ^ασμενοισι §. 565. Obs. Likewise ‘ besides*, preeter. επί τούτοις, preeterea, c moreover, besides*, Xen. Cyr. iv, 5, 38. ' \ _ . .. ‘ S. In many cases επί with the dative, has the same, or a similar signification with the genitive, e. g. επί χθονί , c on the earth*. Herod. V, 12. ayyos επί τρ κεφαΧρ εχουσαν. Id. Ill, 14. το)ϋτό εποίησε το καί επί τρ 6vyaTpi , f with his daughter’. In the phrase επί τινι είπείν Plat. Menex. p. 274. Thuc. ii, 34. f to utter a panegyric upon any ' one’, a definition of place appears to have been under- u Valck. ad Herod, p. 348, 56. x Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. 1005. y Fisch. in, b. p. 237. * Syntax. Construction of Prepositions . υμο stood,, f to speak at or over the grave of any one’. Thus Herod. VII, 225. Ο Χίθινος Χεων εστηκεν επι Aewvify · With the dative it is put also to express occupations and employments. Xen. Cyr. vi, 3, 28. oi e ?A rah μηχα - να 7ς, qui machinis bellicis prcsfecti sunt. Hence Thuc. vij 29 . πεμπειν rtva επί στρατευματι, c as commander of an army’· c. With the accusative it signifies particularly f upon, against’, to the question ‘ whither’ ? in those cases in which, in Latin, in is put with the accusative, e. g. ava- βαίνβιν €(f> 'ίππον, όπϊ θρόνον Herod, vii, 40. Xen . Mem. S. II, 3, 10. ovSev ποικίΧον $ei επ αυτόν μηχανασθαι, c against him’. Hence it is often put after verbs of mo¬ tion, with substantives, which do not shew a place, but an action, f which is the end of one’s going’, &c. as \kvai € 7 Γί Θήραν Herod, i, 37- € 7 Γ l θεωρίαν Plat. Crit. 14. Hence UvaL € 7 rt ν$ωρ Herod. 111 , 14. Xen. (Econ. 2 , 15. f in or¬ der to draw water, for water’. Xen. Cyr. 1 , 6, 12 . όπ apyvpiov , f to get money’ \ Hence επί τί , c to what end, wherefore’? Arist. Nub. 255. όπ αυτό ye τούτο πάρεσμεν, ως επι$είξοντε και $ι$άξοντε Plat. Euthyd. p. 10. Yet it sometimes stands likewise in answer to the question ‘ where’ ? as ek, e. g. 'ίζεσθαι 'επί τι Herod, n, 55. via, 52. f to go any where, in order to seat one s self there’, επι $εξιά, επ αριστερά κεΊσθαι Herod. I, ο 1. Comp, hi, 90 b With definitions of time it answers to the question - Valck. ad Herod, p. 321, 91. Fisch. hi, b. p. 240. a Valcken. ad Herod, p. 59b, 72. b Wessel. ad Herod, p. 452, 14. Herm. ad Horn. H. in Merc 418. Schaef. ad Long. p. 427* 904 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. f how long’? €7Γ I χρόνον, f for some time’, aliquamdiu, II. β', 299. 67Γ4 δύο ημέρας, 6 for two days’, Thuc. ii, 35. Likewise with definitions of place, ext τεσσαράκοντα στάδια διηκειν, Xen. Mem. S. i, 4, 17. With numerals it signifies f about’, Herod, iv, 198. έπι τριηκάσια ζ about three hundred’. ^ ! * » ' ’ , . It signifies also c with regard to’, in the phrase to e?r εμε. Soph. Antig. 889· τουπι τηνδε την κόρην .— In \eyeiv μύθον €7τί πολλούς Eurip. Suppl. 1069. (See Markland’s note), it is used like είς. Thus also Herod, hi, 82. σι - yipTo αν βουλεύματα επι δυσμενέας άνδρας ουτω μάλιστα. 587. 3. μετά signifies a. with the genitive f together, with’, as σύν, as well in order to shew a companionship as a mean, e. g. μετ’ άρετης πρωτεύειν Xen. Mem. S. Ill, 5y' 8. ει ελπίδα τινά λάβοιμι , τω φιλώ παιδί τιμωρίας άν τί¬ νος μετά σου τυχεΊν , f with thy assistance’, id. Cyrop. iv, 6 , 7 C . Hence μετά τίνος είναι , f to be on any one’s side’. Thuc. hi, 56. vii, 33. y * j r ι T ‘ b. With the dative, in the Poets only, c amongst, with’, 11. a, 252. μετά δε τριτάτοισιν άνασσεν. Also Od. y 3 281. πηδάλιου μετά χερσιν — έ*χοντα. θ', 156. νυν δε μεθ’ υμετερρ ayopri — ήμαι. Hesiod. Sc. Η. 82. άλλην μητιν υφαινε μετά φρεσίν, which elsewhere is ένι φρεσίν. Again, f together with’. Od. β', 148. έπέτοντο μετά πνοιρς άνέμοιο , which otherwise would be άμα πν. άν. * 1 m ' · / 1 · ^ - r ■ j f t - / .. · *, I t ’**"■'· * c. With the accusative f after’, post, of which there are instances every where. It is likewise joined, by the Attics particularly, with ημέρα alone, or with an ordinal number: μεθ’ ημέραν , c in the day-time’, Eurip. Or. 58. ■ ^ · · , ' · : 'W · 1 c Duker. ad Thuc. vm, 73. Fisch. in, b. p. 198 sq. 905 Syntax. Construction of ' Prepositions. Plat. Phcedr. p. 332. ούτε νυκτός οίτε μεθ ημέραν, μετά *τριτην ημέραν , 4 On the third day In the Poets it often signifies 4 to,, towards , with verbs of motion. II. S', 70. ελθε μετά T ρωας και Αχαιούς . Comp, ρ, 458. 261. Eurip. Ale. 67 . Ε υρυσθεως πεμψαντος Ιππέων μετά όχημα, 4 in order to fetch the equipage (Hence μετεΧθειν τινα arcessere.) The signification 4 in’ is more rare, e. g. μετά χεϊρας εχειν Thuc. ι, 138. (Hence μεταχειρίζεσθαά .) 4. παρά. a. with the genitive, signifies 4 of, from’, 588 with verbs active and neuter, especially those c to hear, to learn, to announce’, &c. and with animated beings: μαθειν παρά τίνος. αγγελΧειν παρα τίνος. Hence like¬ wise with the kindred substantives : oi παρά των Περσών ayy ελοι Ε . — παρ εαυτόν SiSovai . Herod. II, 12Q. VII, 29· Vm, 5. c to give something from his own substance, from his own share of booty’ h . In the Poets παρά with the genitive sometimes signi¬ fies also 4 at, near’, e. g. Soph.Antig. 966. 1123. b. With the dative : 4 at’, to the question 4 where’ V e.g. Od. a, 154. φημίω, ος ρ ηειΰε παρά μνηστηρσιν avayKrj. It is seldom put thus to the question 4 whither’? Xen. Anab. il, 5, 27· εφη χρηναι ιεναι παρα Ύισσαφερνει, ους εκε- Χενσε. d Fisch. hi, b. ρ. 201. -e Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. p. 445 sq. Comp, ad Herod, p. 596*, 72. Brunck. ad Apoll. Rh. i, 4. App. f Obss. Misc. x, p. 210 sq. ε Valcken. ad Herod, p. 590, 1. Fiseh. hi, b. p. 264 sq. h Wessel. ad Herod, p. 6*21, 56. » ' , 906 Syntax, Construction of Prepositions. * c. With the accusative it signifies a. c together with,, to, towards’, to the question c whither’ ? II. a', 347. ™ $ αυτις ίτη v παρά νήας Αχαιών, c towards the ships’. Herod . hi, 15. rjyov παρά Καμβυσεα, 1 to Cambyses’, also, c by’, Xen. Cyr. v, 2, 29· παρά την Βαβυλώνα παριεναι . It is fre¬ quently put thus to the question 'where’? Od. μ , 32. οι μεν κοιμησαντο παρά πρυμνήσια νηός. Comp, y, 460. δ', 333. and passim 1 . Hence is derived the use of παρά , with the verbs f to examine, to enquire’. Plat. Rep. vii, p . 196. ορών τά επιτηδεύματα αυτών oyyvOov παρά τά των άλλων, c in comparison with’. β. c During, throughout’, per , π ap ολον τόν βίον, ‘ through one’s whole life’. Herod, vn, 46. ετερα τούτου παρά την ζάην πεπάνθαμεν οίκτρότερα. Especially when a definite point of time is expressed. Herod, ii, 124, 4. παρά την πόσιν , inter potandum , e in drinking’. Demosth . p. 229^ 19 * ττα^ο’ αυτά τά άδικηματα , c at the very moment of the unjust transaction’. Comp. p. 966 k . 7 . f Against, contrary to, otherwise than’, e. g. παρά δόξαν , prceter opinionem , παρά ψι ' /σιν, παρά το δίκαιον. Plat. Rep. YU. p. 157. Trios· Stj ελεyες δεΊν άστρονομίαν μαν- θάνειν παρά ά νυν μμνθάνουσιν, ‘ differently from the pre¬ sent mode of learning it’ 1 . Here it is the opposite to κατά , e. g. παρά δυναμιν, c beyond the power of’, and likewise c beneath the power of’. Hence it is used par¬ ticularly in comparisons, when the word which is go¬ verned of παρά is to suffer disparagement. Xen. Mem. S. s 1 Valcken. ad Herod, p. 687, 15. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 506. • I Brunck. ad zEsch. Prom. 348. ad Apoll. Rh. 11 , 4 96 . App. ad Arist. Ran. 1068 . Fiseh. hi, b. p. 2 67 . 268. k Fisch. in, b. p. 269 . 1 Fisch. ib. p. 269 sq. 907 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. l } 4, 14. παρά ret άλλα ζώα, ώσι rep θεοί, οι άνθρωποι βιο- Τ€ νονσι , ‘ beyond the other animals’. Plat. Theag.p. 18. τούτο μεντοι το μάθημα παρ όντινουν ποιούμαι δεινός elvaij i. e. δεινός, ως ου δ εις. Hence παρ ελαττον του δέοντος η Ύ ε7σθαί τι Plat . Rep. νπι, ρ. 190. Likewise after com¬ paratives, for η. Thuc. I, 23. ήλιου εκλείψεις πυκνότεραι παρά τά εκ του πριν χρόνου μνημονευόμενα ζυνεβησαν , and after άλλος. Plat. Phced. ρ. 211. ουδέ μην ποιεΊν τι ουδέ τι πάσχειν άλλο παρ ά άν εκείνα η ποιγ η πάσχρ. Hence Plat . Apol. S. p. 66. Αχιλλευς τοσουτον του κίνδυνου κατεφρονησε παρά τό αισχρόν τι υπομειναι , ώστε, potius quam tuvpe quid committeret. Hence δ. f Besides \ Arist. Nub. 698. ουκ εστι παρά ταυτ άλλα. Prom these significations are probably derived the phrases παρά πολύ, παρά μικρόν, παρ ολίγον, especially with the verbs ερχεσθαι, ηκειν , which have also a negative sense, 6 it wants much, little, of’. Isocr. JRgin. p. 388. παρά μικρόν ηλθον άποθανεΊν. Thuc. VI, 37. παρά τοσοϊτον Ί ι Ί νωσκω, tantum abest , ut ita sentiam. hi, 49. π-αρά τοσουτον η λϊιτυληνη ήλθε κίνδυνου . e. ( On account of, by means of’. Demosth.* Phil, i, p. 43, 14. ουδέ <γαρ ούτος παρα την αυτου ρώμην τοσουτον επηυζηται, όσον παρά την ημετεραν αμέλειαν, παρα τι ; Oil what account’ ? 5. περί. a. with the genitive, answers most nearly to the Latin de , ‘of’, e.g. περί τίνος λ^ειν. The most univer¬ sal sense is, c in consideration of, in respect to . Herod, n, 10. ουδεις αυτών πληθεος περί αζιος συμβληθηναι εστι. Xeil. Mem. S. I, 3, 1 5. περί μεν δη βρώσεως και πόσεως και m Vaick. ad Herod, ρ. 70S, 9· Viger. ρ. 646 sqq. I ( * I' 908 Syntax . Construction of Prepositions . ^ ■ **'■ V i ; αφροδισίων οντω κατβσκβυασμένος ην. This is also the foundation of the following phrases, where in Latin and English., instead of this general relation, a par¬ ticular one is expressed by means of another definite preposition, as μάχεσθαι κερί κατρίδος, e for one’s coun¬ try’, which otherwise is expressed by ύκερ η . Eur. Phcen. 534. είκ ep yap άδικειν χρν> τυραννίδος κερί καλλιστον αδι- • κεΊν, ‘ in consideration of power’, i. e. ‘for the sake of power*, regnandi gratia. δεδιεναι περί τίνος , otherwise in the dative, ίγ epi τινι° . ' r The following phrases are deviations i κοιεΊσθαι or riye Ίσθαί τι ί repl κολλον , κλείονος, κλειστού, μικρού, ελάτ- τονος, ελάχιστου, ούδενδς, magni , pluris, plurimi , ραννι, minoris, minimi , nihili aliquid facere, where the idea of αντί seems to be implied in κερί, as in Thucyd.vi, 69. o\ $ εχωρονν , Σι ιρακούσιοι μεν κερί τε κατρίδος μαχονμενοι — *Αθηναίοι δε κερί τε της άλλοτρίας οίκείαν σχεΊν, where, however, κερί της άλλοτρίας μαχονμενοι must be supplied, f in order to fight for a foreign country’, and οίκείαν σχεΊν stands for ώστε οίκ. σχ. In Homer κερί often signifies prce , and expresses a preference. II. a, 287· άλλ’ δδ’ άνηρ εθελει κερί καντων εμμεναι άλλων , ‘ above all’ p . ι b. With the dative it signifies especially ‘ on, about’, to the question, ‘ where’? Plat. Rep . ii, p. 211. κερί τν, χειρί χρνσονν δακτύλιον φερειν. It is joined particularly with the verbs * to fear’, in - --- ■ ■ ■ 1 1 \ r\ to f , P t n Fisch. hi, b. p. 216. ° Heind. ad Plat. Euthyd. p. 312 sq. p Heyne ad II. a, 258. Syntax * Construction of Prepositions. 909 the sense of f for, properly, in consideration of\ π epl yap Sie ποιμενι λαών II < β, 566. Thus likewise θαρρεϊν 7 Γ epl Tivi. Plat . Phcedon. p. 259. With other verbs it is used only in this sense by the Poets, e. g. μαχεσασθαι περί $αιτί for ίαιτός. β’, 245. p, 471. σ', 302. Yet Plato also says, Protag. p. 94. opa, μ»ί περί ταϊ? φίλτάτοις κυβεύρς re καί κινουνεύρς. 7 Γ epi with the dative signifies also p)ve, e. g. π epl φόβφ, ' for fear, from fear’, pro, metu. See 402. Obs. The genitive is put for the dative Tkucyd. iv, 130. περί opyrjs- c. With the accusative it signifies particularly * round about, to the question ‘ where’? and ‘whither’? It is here - used like άμφί § . 583. 1 . C. Thuc. VI, 2. ψκουν Φοίνικες π epl πασαν την Σικελίαν, ‘ in the whole of Sicily, round about’. Comp. Plat. Lack. p. 169 . In this case it is often put with definitions of time, e. g. περί τούτου s toi)s χρό¬ νους, ‘ about this time’, περί λύχνων Αφάς, περί πληθουσαυ Ay ορόν''. With numerals it signifies ‘about, nearly’, περί τριατχιλίους* . Otherwise it signifies also f with regard to, when it may be rendered f in, of, against’, e. g. πονηροί περί τι Plato Rep. v, in. εζαμαρτάνειν περί τινα , i to offend against any one’ 8 , Xkyciv περί τι. Hence περί τι είναι or εχειν, ‘ to be occupied about any thing’, as εχειν άμφί τι §. 583. C. , 6. ιερός a. with the genitive, a. ‘ of, by’, with pas- 590. sives. Herod. VII, 209* πο ποιευμενον προς Αακ εοεμμονιων. _ ’ ' ■ ■ ■ 1 ‘ Fisch. hi, b. p. 217· 1 Fisch. ib. p. 218. s Fisch. ib. p. 21b sq. 218 sq. 214. VOL·. IT. Μ M 910 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. In other cases also, as είναι πρός τίνος, ‘ to be on any one’s side’, stare ab aliquo. Herod, i, 124, fyc. Plat. Rep. IV, p . 370. τίθεσθαί τα όπ\α προς του Χογιστικου 1 . Hence πρός τίνος είναι , e to be an advantage to any one . Eurip. Ale. 58. προς των εγόντων, Φοίβε , τον νόμον τίθης. Thuc. Ill, 38. ο εστι πρός' των ηόικηκότων μάλλον. Comp. ib. 59 u . — πρός άνόρός σοφού εστι , sapientis est. Soph. AJ. 319 . πρός yap κακού τε και βαρυφυχου γοους τοιουσό αεί ποτ άνόρός ε%ηyειτ εγειν*.—πρός μητρος , πατρος , ΟΠ the mother’s, father’s, side’. o\ πρός αίματος , c the rela¬ tions by blood’ y . β . Very often likewise πρός is used with the genitive, in in treaties, protestations. Soph. Aj. 588. και σε πρός του σου τέκνου και θεών ικνουμαι, μη προόους 7}μάς yevrj. per te filium or ο 7 . y. ' Against, towards’, versus. Herod. 11 , 99· τον πρός μεσαμβρίης ay^va. VII, 115. πρός η\ίου όυσμεων. IV, 37· πρός βορεου άνεμου. Xen. Anab. IV, 3, 26. εκελευσε τοι)? μεν \oχayoυς πρός των Κ αρόουγων ίεναι , ovpayovς όε καταστη- σασθαι πρός του ποταμου Λ . S. It often signifies also ' in respect to any thing’. Thuc. I, 71. όρμν ουόεν άόικον ούτε πρός θεών ούτε πρός αν¬ θρώπων, ‘ wrong in respect to the Gods, to the injury of the Gods, before the Gods’, Xen. Anab. n, 5, 20. τρό- 1 Fiscli. hi, b. p. 251. 252. u Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. i, p. 254. ed. Amst. Koen. ad Greg. p. 44. Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 1434. Fisch. in, b. p. 251. sq. * Fisch. hi, b. p. 252 sq. Valck. ad Eurip. Ph. p. 786. y Fisch. in, b. p. 251. 252. z Fisch. ib. p. 254. a Fisch. ib. p. 253. 256*. Herni. ad Vig. p. 817. Syntax. ‘ Construction of Prepositions. 911 trov, ός μόνος μεν ττρός θεών ασεβής, μονος όε ττρός άνθρωττωϋ αισχρός. Comp, ϊ, 6, 6. Hence II. α, 338. τω S* αότω μαρ¬ τυρώ έστων ττρός τε θεών μακάρων, ττρός τε θνητών ανθρωττων , ττρός τ αυτόν βασιληος αττηνεος , c before*. Note. The sense of f on account of* seems not properly to belong to it in this construction. Soph. Antig. 51. ττρός αυτό¬ φωρων αμττλακημάτων in τλας όψεις αράζας the idea of 6 ini— pelled, provoked by his offence’, is implied in ττρός. Eiirip. Ph. 64. ττρός της τύχης νοσώ ν, a verb neuter has the construc¬ tion of a passive. Id. Andr. 1 126 . ττοίας οΧλύμαι ττρός αιτίας , the guilt is represented as belonging to the speaker; f what crime ruihs, undoes me’ ? h. With the dative it signifies chiefly either f at, with’, to the question c where* ? or^ f besides, in addition to’, prdeter. Herod. I, 32. εί i0 ττρός τούτοισι ετι τε¬ λευτήσει τόν βίον ευ, ( in addition to this’. Comp. Plat. Hipp. p. 260 b . ' 4 c. With the accusative it expresses a. the Latin ad ‘ to’, to the question f whither’? 591 . — άττεβη ττρός μακρόν 'Ολυμττον. Eurip. Ph. 849· ττρός ττα- τόρα τόν σόν. Frequently, however, it expresses gene¬ rally a direction to an object f towards, after, versus. Herod, vii, 55. in which sense Herodotus often puts it with the genitive, e. g. IV, 122. ττρός ηώ τε και του Τ αναι- όος. See Wesseling’s Note, λεγειν ττρός τινα Plat. Hipp. Min. ρ. 214. σκοττειν ττρός τι, c to look to any thing, to consider’. Hence Plat . Hipp. Min. p. 214. Achilles τού Όόυσσεως τοσουτον φαίνεται φρονεΊν ττλεον ττρός το pcf.ii ως λανθάνειν άλαζονευόμένος, λβγ ειν ττρός τό βελτιστον, c to speak for the best, with regard to the best’, where this is the object. Plat. Alcib. I, p. 8. τί irj ούν τούτο εστί ττρός b Fisch. in, b. p. 2 55. MM2 ( 912 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. τον λόγοι/, όν βφησθά epeiVj e what has this to do with the matter’ c ? Hence it may often be rendered: β. c On account of, Herod, i, 38. πρός ών την όψιν - ταύτην τον ·γάμον τοι τούτον εσπευσα. Plat. Hipp. Min. ρ. 214. λε 7 εις δε δη τί καί πρός τί ; e. g. τ νρος τί σκοπών. Rep. I, ρ. 154. πρός δη τούτ εγωγβ τίθημι την των -χρημά¬ των κτησιν πλείστον αξίαν είναι, ‘ on this aCCOUllt . Soph. Aj. 1018. προς ονδεν , e on no account’, nulla de causa. Προς ταυτα especially is thus used, e. g. Soph. El. 382. προς ταυτα φράζου , f accordingly, from this considei . This phrase, however, frequently does not express a reason, but corresponds to the Latin nunc , jam, as a form of resignation, which is the consequence of a con¬ clusion previously expressed. Soph. El. 820. προς ταυτα καινετω τις , εί βαρυνεται, των ένδον οντων. CEd. Τ'. 42β. προς ταυτα και Κ ρεοντα και τονμόν στόμα προπηλάκιζε. 7 . ' With respect to’. Plat. Alcib. i, p. 39. τελεος πρός άρετη v e . Hence it is used particularly in compari¬ sons. Thuc. Ill, 113. άπιστον το πλήθος λεγ εται άπολεσθαι ώς πρός το μεγ έθος της πόλεως. Plat. Hipp. Maj. p. 5. είναι των αρχαίων τούς περί την σοφίαν φαυλους προς υμάς, 4 in comparison with them’. Even with comparatives. Herod. II, 35. Αίγυπτος ' Valck. ad Herod, p. 734 , 64. * Wessel. ad Herod, p. 124, 47 . Syntax. Construction of Prepositions . 917 < particularly, besides*. Plat. Euihyd. p. 51. Protag. p. no. Hence in Ionic writers they are often put twice, once without a case adverbially, and again with a case, or in composition with a verb. II. Ψ', 709 . av i* O cSovto. ib. 40. όξ ων εΐλον . 47 . άπ ων εβαφε\ Hence when the same word is to be repeated several times, after the first time the preposition only is often put, e. g. II. η , 16 1 sqq . Herod. VIII, 33 . κατά μεν εκαυσαν Δρυμόν πολιν , κατά όε Χαράόραν. Comp. ib. 89· ιχ> 5 , and instead of the composition of a preposition with the verb είμι, the preposition only is often put, 7 rap εμοι ye και άλλοι, for πάρεισιν*. In these cases this is not properly a Tmesis , i. e. the separation of a word at that time used in its com- 1 Herm. ad Vig. p. 80S. u Valck. et Wessel. ad Herod, p. 309, 48. 514. in. x Fisch. hi, b. p. 97 sq, Koen, ad Greg. p. 211, y Reiz dc Incl. Acc. p. 38. Fisch. 1 , p. 309· • -1 ' 918 Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. pounded form ; but the prepositions at that time served really as adverbs, which were put either immediately be¬ fore, or after the verbs 2 . Latterly, however, particularly in Attic, the composition became more close, and the prepositions were considered as a part of the verb. In Attic writers the proper tmesis is extremely rare, as Thuc. Ill, 13. μη ξύν κακώς ποιειν αυτούς μετ Αθηναίων , αλλα ξννελενθερούν. Plat. Gorg . ρ . 159. &ντ ευ τ τείσεται. Phcedr. ρ. 300. ζύμ μοι Χάβεσθε τού μύθον , is an imita¬ tion of lyric phraseology. Otherwise, however, a sim¬ ple verb is sometimes put, and with it a preposition with its case, where otherwise a verb compounded with that preposition is put, e. g. virep τινα εχειν or ύιτερεχειν τινα Isocr. Paneg. c. 2 a . It occurs more fre¬ quently in the Attic Poets, yet oftener in the Chorusses than in the Dialogue. Soph. Track. 1160, προ s· τών πνε- οντων μηδενος θανείν ατ το. Euvip. Hec. 508. Α^αμεμνονος ττεμψαντος , ώ yvvai, μετά \ Thus it should stand, per¬ haps, Eurip. Hipp . 554. οίκων ζενξασ απ εϊρεσία, ( navi - gatione, navi , domo abreptam. Comp. Hec. 460. Phcen . 215. Iphig . A. 771.) $ρομά$α τιν Άι$ος ωσεί τε Ί$άκχαν. 595. 3. The prepositions are often separated from their case. Herod. VI, 69. ev yap σε Trj ννκτι ταύτγ άναιρεομαι. In Attic this takes place, according to rule, with the con¬ junctions μεν , $e, yap , ούν, e. g. εν μεν είρηνγ , εν μεν yap είρηνη , ες μεν ούν τάς Αθήνας , and with προς with the geni¬ tive, when it signifies per , c by*. §. 465, 3. Prepositions likewise are often put after their case. z Herm. de Emend. Gr. Gr. p. 114 sqq. a Schaef. ad Dion. Η. I. p. 68, 7* b Valck. ad Eur. Hipp. 934. 1352. Syntax . Construction of Prepositions. 919 e. g. vewv αττο καί κλισιάων, particularly in Ionic and Doric writers, and the Attic Poets c . This takes place in the Attic Prose writers only in περί, with the genitive, of which the instances are frequent d . 4. When a preposition should stand twice with two different nouns, it is often put only once by the Poets, and that too with the second noun. Od. //, 27 . rj άλός η επϊ γης. Soph. (Ed. T. 733. σχιστή δ' οδός ks ταύτό Δελφών κάττο Δαυλίας άγει. Eur. Pk. 291. μαντεϊα σεμνά , Αοξίου τ επ' εσχάρας. ib. 372. ουτω δε τάρβος εις φόβον τ άφικο- μην for εις τάρβος φόβον τε*. In the Attic Prose writers, the preposition is omitted the second time, if it was put the first time, even when the second noun stands in apposition to the first. Isocr. '· 2 - · ■ , : Pac. 161 . E. προς δε τους επιπληττοντας και νουθετουντας υμάς ουτω διατίθεσθε δυσκάλως , ως τούς κακόν τι την πολιν εργαζομένους, for ως προς τους , 8$C. Plat. Rep. I, p. 153. περί τα χρήματα σπουδάζουσιν , ως εργον εαυτών. The preposition is also put with the substantive of the appo¬ sition, and not with the principal noun, if the former pre¬ cedes. Thuc. I, 84. αεί δε ώς προς ευ βουλευομενους τούς εναντίους εργιρ παρασκεύαζα μέθα, for προς τους ενάντιους ώς προς ευβ. Plat. Rep. VII. ρ. 140. παντός μάλλον ώς επ' άναγκαιον αυτών έκαστος είσι τό άρχειν { . The case is similar when a relative, referring to a noun or pronoun, joined with a preposition, is put with- c Reiz de Incl. Acc. p. 122 sqq. Herm. de Emend. Gr. Gr. p. 101 sqq. Fisch. 1 , p. 309. d Wass. ad Thuc. v, 5. « Bentl. ad Horat. Od. hi, 25, 3. Valcken. in Callim. El. p. 178 sq. Herm. ad Viger. p. 809. f Heind, ad Plat. Theaet. p. 3 77. 920 Syntax . Construction of Prepositions . out this preposition. Thuc. i, 28. όίκας rjOeXov όουναι ev Τΐ€λοποννησω παρά τ roXeaiv, ah άν αμφοτεροι ζυμβωσιν, for παρ ah s · The same takes place in Latin, as Cic. de Orat. n, 68 extr . Fin. iv, 20. Tusc. Qu. i, 46 extr. 5. Prepositions which mark a removal, derivation, motion from a place, άπό, e/c, as well as those which signify motion to a place, as ei?, are often interchanged with those which mark rest in a place, as ev } and vice versa , and mostly in the following cases : a. Properly ev, επί should be put after the article, §. 270. b . when the preposition, with its case, but without a verb, stands in some measure as an adjective ; because, in this case, without a verb being added, rest only can be marked. Frequently, however, the principal verb of the proposition is referred to, and e/c and από are put, when it admits of the construction with these preposi¬ tions. Herod. VI, .46. etc μεν ye των e/c Σκαπτή όλης των χρυσόων μετάλλων τό επίπαν oyStoKovTa τάλαντα προσ- ηΐ€, for των ev Σκαπτϊ} ϋλρ, ‘ on account of\ Comp. V, 36. Thuc. VI, 7- υπό όε νύκτα — εκόιόράσκουσιν οι e/c των Όρνεων. VII, 31. ό όε Αημοσθενης τότ€ άποπλεων μ€τά την όκ της Λακών ικης τεί^ισιν. Theophr. Char. 4. πάντα τα από της εκκλησίας S^yeiaOai, Plat. Cratyl. p. 284. ο αηρ άρά ye } ότι α'Ιρει τά από y ης 3 άηρ κεκληται Χλ . On the Other hand Hei'od. II, 150. eXeyov Se o\ επιχώριοι και ως ες την 'Σνρτιν την ες Λιβύην εκόιόοι η λίμνη αυτή. b. With many verbs which mark no proper motion from one place to another, the direction of the action s Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 240. Fisch. in, b. p. 99 . h Dorv. ad Charit. p. 2β5. 6*31. Fisch. in, b. p. 98 sq. Heind. ad Plat. Crat. p. 89 sq. Miscell, Phil. 11 , 2. p. 8.7 sq. Syntax. Construction of Prepositions. 921 to a place different from the place of action,, is referred to, e. g. tco μεν αφ ϊππ ouv 9 ( f from on horseback, in chariots’) ό δ’ άπό χθονός ώρνυτο πεζός 11. ε, 13. be¬ cause the combatants directed their swords or jave¬ lins to another place, although the one remained in chariots, and the other on the ground. Od. φ', 4ί9· εΓλ /ce v νευρην γλυφίδας re αύτόθεν εκ δίφροι ο, καθη μένος. Thus also εκ νηών χεΊρας άνασχεΊν. An union of this with the preceding kind occurs Herod, vm, 94. m δε αγχου γενεσθαι των νηών, τούς άπό τον κεΧητος Χεγειν τάδε. Ί 'hue. VII, 70. οι άιτο των καταστρωμάτων τοις ακοντιοις και τοξευμασι και Χίθοις άφθόνως επ αυτήν εχρώντο. Comp. Plat. Lack, ρ. 171. c. Verbs also which by their nature express rest, are often made to shew motion by means of the preposi¬ tions ai ro and e/c, because an action is at the same time implied, to which the motion properly belongs. Soph. Aritig. 411. καθημεθ άκρων εκ πάγων υπήνεμοι , be¬ cause the idea of lying in ambush to watch, κατασκόπων , is understood in καθησθαι , with which is connected the direction of the eyes to another place. In the follow- ing passages, II. <ζ , 153. Ίϊρη δ είσειδε χρυσοθρονος δφθαΧ - μοισι στάσ εξ ΟύΧνμποιο άπό ρίου. Eurip. Troad. 527- άνά δ’ όβόασεν Χεώς Ύρωάδος άπδ πέτρας σταθείς. Phoen. 1238. ΈτεοκΧεης δ’ ύπηρξ άπ όρθιου σταθείς πύργου (sc. Χεγειν ός κοινόν) the verbs remain which have properly the con¬ struction with εκ or από, although they must be taken immediately after the verb ϊστασθαι. The following constructions are' similar : II. τ , 395. ώς δ\ όταν εκ πόντοιο σεΧας ναύτμσι φανηρ, c to the mariners upon the sea, when they look from thence upon the shore’. Eurip. Ale. 68. Ει φυσθεως πόμψαντος 'ίππειον μετά όχημα θρηκης εκ τόπων δνσχειμερων, ‘ in order to fetch it fiom Thrace’. Comp. Xen. Hell, n, i, 25. Arist. Nub. \86, 922 Syntax* Of the Construction of Adverbs · εικασι roi ς εκ ΤΙνΧου ΧηφθεΊσι τοίς ΛακωνικοΊς, ‘ who were taken in Pylos, and brought thence hither*. d. Sometimes the noun with e* or από expresses the place or the time,, or the preceding action or situation. Arist. Av. 13. ούκ των όρνεων. Plut, 435. η κτών γειτόνων. Plat . Apol. S . ρ . 74. τούς ούκ άνεΧομενους τούς εκ τη 9 ναυμα¬ χίας, ( who perished in the sea-fight* 1 . Of the Construction of Adverbs. 597. Amongst the Adverbs which influence the construc¬ tion, the most remarkable is av. With respect to it*s construction with the optative or conjunctive, or with the indicative in conditional prepositions, the chief par¬ ticulars have been before noticed. But the use of this particle is more extensive still. 1. It is joined with infinitives and participles, and gives to these moods (not the sense of the future, al- , though in Latin it can only be expressed by this sense k , but) the same signification as the optative, conjunctive, or infinitive with av would have, in the resolution by means of the finite verb. / a. The infinitive with av. Herod, in, 22. ού%ε yap αν τοσαύτα $ύνασθαι Χωειν σφεας , ει μη τω ποματι τίρ$ε ανε- φυρον , ί. e. ούκ ύΰύναντο αν. Comp. Thuc. II, 18. Ill, 11. 76 .89. ανευ σεισμού ούκ αν μοι §οκεΊ το τοιούτο ξυμβηναι γενε- * Fisch. in, b. ρ. 127 sq. k Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. S2 sq. Brunck. ad Aristopb. Plut. 380. 923 Syntax. Of the Construction of Adverbs. σθαι , the same as ούκ άν ξυνεβη, where the conditional limi¬ tation is contained in άνευ σεισμού , i. e. el μη σεισμός ην. Comp. Plat. Rep. VII, p. 131.244. Thuc . II, 49 . ra cyro? ού¬ τως εκαίετο, ώστε — ήκιστα αν ες ύδωρ 'ψυχρόν σφάς αυτούς ρί- πτειν, i. e. άστε ερρπττον αν, ς they would gladly have thrown themselves 5 , ib. 20. τοι)? Αθηναίους ηλπιζεν Ίσως αν επεξελθεΐν καί την γην ούκ άν περι'ίδείν τμηθηναι, 1. e. ότι επεξελθοιεν άν-^—περιιδοιεν άν, more indefinite than περιόψε- σθαι. Comp, ib.93. VI, 18. ανάγκη τοϊς μεν επιβουΧεύειν, τούς oe μη ανιεναι, οια το αρχυηναι αν υφ ετερων αυτοις κινουνον είναι , ει μη αύτοι ά\\ων άρχοιμεν. Comp. VII, 62 . Xen. Mem. S. I, 1, 14. και τοϊς μεν άει κινεΐσθαι πάντα δοκεΐν, τοϊς δε ούδεν άν ποτέ κινηθ η ναι, και τοΐς μεν πάντα γίγνεσθαι τε και αποΧΧυσυαι, τοις οε ουτ αν γενεσσαι ποτέ ουόεν ούτε άπολεσθαι, it has the sense of the optative §. 514. ούδεν άν ποτέ κινηθεί η, γενοιτο, άπολοιτο, it could never be moved 5 · The following passages are particularly clear: Plat. Pvot. p. 151. Χεγει γά p ο Σιμωνίδης , ότι θεός άν μόνο ? εχοι τούτο γέρας * ού δη που τούτο γε λόγων κακόν εσθλόν εμμεναι, είτα τον θεάν φησι μόνου τούτο άν εχειν. ρ. 182 sq. ομολογοιεν αν ημιν οι ανυρωποι η ου ; Ειόοκουν α ν και τιρ Πρωταγόρα ομολογεί ν. Likewise with the infinitive future. Thuc . II, 80. extr. νομίζοντες, el πρωτην ταύτην Χάβοιεν , ραδίως άν σφίσι ταΧΧα π ροσχω ρη σειν. Isocr. Panath. ρ. 245. C. οίμαι δε τούς άηδώς ακούοντας τφν Χόγων τούτων τοις μεν είρημενοις ουδόν άν άντε pel ν . Busiv. ρ. 226. D. ενόμιζε γ άρ τούς μεν τούτων οΧιγωρούντας τυχόν άν και των μειζόνων καταφρονησειν. Avchid. p. 135. Ε. είς ας (πανηγύρεις) τίνας άν τοΧμησειν ημών οίεσθε εΧθεΙν. b. The participle with άν. Plat. Euthyd. p. 73. κινδυνεύω κάγω εις είναι — των ηδιον άν εξελεγχόμενων υπό των τοιούτων Χόγων η εξελεγχόντων, for εκείνων, όι άν εξελεγχοιντο —— εξελεγχοιεν. Comp. Rep. I, ρ. 181. VIII, 598 . 924 Syntax. Of the Construction of Adverbs. p, 220 . Isocr. Panath. p . 255. C. 260. D. 26 1. A. 269. ' Thus likewise with the simple adjective, the participle being omitted. Plat. Rep . ix, p . 250. chat των δυνατών αν κριναι, for εκείνων , οι αν δυνατοί ειεν . Isocr. Areop. ρ . 142. C. Ib . Jt}. 14.3. -^4. ευρίσκω ταυτην αν μόνην y ενομενην των με\\όντων κίνδυνων αποτροπήν . Comp. Avchid. p· 129. Α. επίσταμαι αν βονΧενσομενας. — Thuc. VI, 38. ενθενδε ανδρες ούτε οντα , ούτε αν y ενόμένα (α ουκ αν yεvoιτo) \oyoπoιouσιv. Comp. Plat . Rep . hi, ρ. 318. Comp. Xen. Cyr. i, 6, 9. Mem. 6'. iv, 4, 4. TAmc. hi, 37. ** ev αΧΧοις μείζοσιν ουκ αν δηΧωσαντες την yvώμηv 3 ί. β. ω? ει ουκ αν δηλωσειαν, quasi non possint ostendere. Comp. Isocr . Panath . p. 245. D. τα δικαίως αν ρηθεντα, for ά δικαίως αν ρηθείη. ib. ρ. 277. D. Thus likewise in the consequence of a conditional proposition Thuc. vn, 42. όρων τό παρα- τείχισμα των ΊΖυρακουσίων,—απΧονν τε ον, και , ει επικρατή- σείε τις των τε ΈπιποΧών της άναβάσεως και αύθις του εν αύτοις στρατοπέδου , ραιδίως αν αυτό Χηφθεν. Demosth. ρ. 30, 24. χωρίς της περιστάσης αν ημάς αισχύνης , et κα- θυφείμεθα. for η περιεστη αν ημάς. Likewise for εί with the finite verb. Thuc. VI, 18. νομίσατε, τό τε φαυΧον και τό μέσον και το πάνυ ακριβές αν ξvyκpaθεv μαΧιστ αν ισχυειν, for ότι μαΧιστ αν ισχνοί , εί ζυyκpaθείη. Comp. ib. 64. Plat. Rep. X, p. 289. yi ράφας αν εξαπατφη αν. Comp. Soph. (Ed. T. 339. 445. Plat. Hipp. Min. p. 205. Xen. Cyr. i, 6, 18. Isocr . Panath. p. 265. E} 2. With the indicative, besides the signification mentioned above, it has the following: a. With the indicative, particularly of the imperfect, it often expresses the repetition of an action, the habi- 1 Schaefer in Dion. Η. I. p. 125, 78. Syntax. Of the Construction of Adverbs. 925 > r tude\ Herod. Ill, 51. o Se, os άπεΧαυνομενος εΧθοι ες αΧΧην οικίηυ, άπεΧαννετ αν καί άπό ταύτης. - απελαυ¬ νόμενος $ αν ηιε ει r ετερην των εταίρων. C ΟΓΠρ · 1^ 42. III, 119. VII, 211. Plat. Apol. 8. ρ. 51. διηρωτων αν αυ¬ τούς, τι Xeyoiev. Comp. Symp. ρ. 239. 261. Xen. Mem . 8. IV, 1, 2. 7 τοΧΧάκις εφη μεν αν τίνος εραν. lb. 6, 13. ει $6 τις αντω 7 re ρ'ι του avTiXeyoi , — ειΓΐ την υποθεσιν επανη yev άν πάντα τον Xoyov. Also with the aorist Thuc . VII, 71· άνεθάρσησάν τε άν και 7τρος ανακΧησιν Θεών ετρε- ποντο. Xenoph. Cyr. VII, 1, 10. οπότε προσβΧεφειε τινας των εν ταίς τάξεσι , τότε μεν εϊπεν αν ,-τότε S' aS ύν αΧΧοις άν εΧεξεν. Comp. Arist. Vesp. 278 sqq. b. In past actions it often expresses c ability^. Eurip. Iph. A. 1591. πXηyης κτύπον yap πας τις γσθετ άν σαφώς , f could hear*. Xen. Cyr. νπ, 1 , 38. ίνθα οη iyvio άν τις, όσου άξιον είη τό φιΧεΊσθαι άρχοντα ύπο τών άρχόμενων. Anab. IV, 2, 10. και αυτοί μεν άν επορενθησαν , rj περ οι άλλοι, τα S’ ύποζυ Ύ ια ούκ ην άΧΧρ η ταύτμ ύκβηναι. With present actions the optative with άν would be put. c. It appears frequently to give to the speech only the expression of a modest discreetness. Plat. Theaet. p. 52. tyio μεν ουτ άν ωομην yεvεσθaι, ούτε ορω yιyvoμεvoυς. Alcib. ρ · 85. kivS υνευ ει y αν φρόνιμός τις είναι ύκείνος ό ποιητης. Tim. ρ. 298. α μεν χθες ηκουσα, ούκ άν οίΐα, ει άυναίμην 'άπαντα ev μνημρ πάλιν Χαβείν. Prot. ρ. 193 . και yap ούτε τάλλα οίμαι κακός είναι άνθρωπος , φθονερός τε ηκιστ αν άνθρωπων. We may explain thus, ib. p. 122. ούόε y αν οίμαι , unless it should be considered rather as a continuation of the preceding. m Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 290. Porson ad Eur. Phoen. 412. Herm ad Vig. p. 785. Miscell, Phil. 11 , 1. p. 47 sq. 3. p. 84. N N VOL. II. 599- 926 Syntax. Of the Construction of Adverbs. • ■ , ▼ t - ου8 av εις φανείη' ovSe y av ( SC. eh φανείη), οιμαι, Comp. Eurip . Med. 940. Ale. 48”. *Av is likewise put thus with imperatives. Soph. (Ed . T. 1438. ευ tout ΐσθ ’ av. Plat. Alcib. p. 43. μηόε τούτο αν ημ Τι/ άρρητον έστω. Comp. Od. μ , 81. d. It is also frequently joined with the indicative of the future, and seems, in that case, to soften the de¬ cisiveness of the sentence. II. χ, 42. τάχα κεν ε κυνε s* καί yvires εόοντα ι κείμενον. Plat. Euthyd. p. 44. ει ου v άεόμεθα εκείνης της τέχνης , ητις άν φ άν κτησηται η ττοιη - σασα η θηρευσαμενη αυτή και err ιστησ ετ αι χρησθαι , for η τις άν εττίστηται. See §. 527. Obs. 3. We may unite in the same manner Thuc. n, 80. λέοντες, on ραδίων av Ακαρνανίαν σχόντες και της Ζακύνθου και Ακαρνανίας κρα- τησουσι , unless άν be referred rather to σχόντες , and this latter be taken for ην σχώσι. Xen. Cyr. vn, 5,21. όταν και αισθωνται ημάς evSov όντας , 7τοΧι) άν ετι μάΧΧον , η νυν , αχρείοι εσονται ύττό του εκττεπΧηχθαι. Isocrat. Patieg. p· 79· Α.Β. if εσται yap άν τοΊς μεν ά$εώς τά σφών αυτών καρπουσθαι. Areop. p. 155. jE. ouk εστιν όττως ουκ άν βου- Χευσόμέθα και τν οΧε μησ ομεν και βιωσό μέθα και σχε¬ δόν άτταντα κακά πεισομεθ α και πράζομεν. ad De¬ monic. ρ. 7· C. ουτω $ ά ν άριστα χρηση τοις φίΧοις , άν μη περιμεντις τάς 7 rap εκείνων όεησεις , where, however, several MSS. according to Battie and Auger, omit av°. e. From the preceding observations many passages may be explained, where άν is put twice in a proposition, or in a member of a proposition; for in a proposition. n Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. T. 1438. ad Arist. Plut. 885. Nub. 465. Equ. 1131. Herm. ad Viger. p. 785, 287- Hither is to be referred lleindorf’s note, ad Plat. Crat. p. 27 sq. 0 Markl. ad Eurip. Ipb. T. 894·, Brunck. ad Arist. Nub. 465. / Syntax . Of the. Const ruction of Adverbs. 927 besides the finite verb, a participle or an infinitive is often found, and of the double av one belongs to the finite verb, the other to the participle or infinitive. Yet av is sometimes redundant, not only when the principal proposition to which belongs is divided by a paren¬ thesis, as Soph . Antig. 466. άλλ’ av } el τον εξ εμης μη- --4** τρός θανόντ άθατττον εσχόμην νεκυν, κείνοις αν ηΧ^ουν. Thuc. I, 136. εκεΊνον αν, el εκδοίη αυτόν (είττων εφ ω και νφ’ ών όιωκεται) σωτηρίας αν της ψυχής αττοστερησάι, but in other cases also, e. g. Soph. (Ed. T. 139. όστις yap ην εκείνον ο κτανων , ταχ αν καμ αν τοιαυτρ X €l P L τιμωρειν θεΧοι. 602. ουτ αν μβτ αΧΧου $ρώντος αν τΧαιην 7ΓΟΤ6, %c. Here, indeed, the first av in the former place, might be referred to κάμε , f me perhaps' ; in the other to μετ αΧΧου $ ρώντος , ( with another perhaps ; but even then the participle, with these words, would not modify the sense farther than had been done by the finite verb, with the single av; for the limitation of the principal verb limits at the same time the whole proposition, and all the w 7 ords of this proposition. Also to render this explanation admissible, passages must first be found, in which av belongs undoubtedly to adverbs, prepositions * with their case, or substantives, as 7 ε ; but universally, where av occurs even once only, it refers only to a finite verb, a participle, or an infinitive. For the most part this double or treble av occurs only in the Attic Poets, and in prose writers only in connection with participles ; yet passages occur even in prose writers, where av is once , redundant, e. g. Plot. Alcib. 11 , p. 85. οι ποΧΧοι ούτε αν τυραννικός θίγόμενης αττοσχοιντο αν αΧΧα καν ευξαιντο α ν 7 ενεσθαι. The following passages likewise appear to belong to this class, in which at least the union of the particle with the participle does not give the usual sense : Apol. S. p. 72. υμείς S’ ίσως τάχ αν άχθόμενοι , ωσι rep οι Ν Ν 2 928 Syntax . Of the Construction of Adverbs. νυστάζοντες, eyeipo μενοι , κρονσαντες αν μ€, πειθομενοι Ανυ- τω, ρΑς αν άποκτείναιτε. Theaet. ρ. 98. α ελλοχων αμ πελταστικός ανηρ μισθοφόρος εν λόγοις — εμβαλων αν εις το ακουειν και όσφραίνεσθαι και τάς τοιαυτας αισθήσεις ηλεγχεν &ν. Phcedr. ρ. 383. εφ’ οΐς $ε εσιτονόακε, τη -γεωρ^ικνι αν χρωμενος αν τεχνγ σπείρας είς το προσηκον ά^απωη αν εν oySoio μηνί, όσα εσπείρε, τέλος λαβοντα^. With regard to the negative particles it is to be observed: 1 There are in Greek two simple negative parti¬ cles, with which all other negations are compounded : ov, before a vowel, ουκ and ουχ when followed by an aspi¬ rated vowel (ονόε, nec, ne—quidem , ούτε — ούτε , neque _ neque, ουόείς, nemo , ουποτε, ουπωποτε, nunquam , ουίαμως, nequaquam , ουόαμου, nusquam , 8 $c.) and μη (μηόε, nee, μήτε —μήτε, μηίείς, #c.) Their distinctions are as follows: ov is a direct and definitive negative, and is used mostly in pro¬ positions which are independent of any others; μη, on the contrary, is used only in dependent propositions, and with several words of a proposition which are to be negatived, without extending its influence over the whole proposition. Hence ov is put with single verbs, which express a negation, and in other languages are rendered by a negative verb, e. g. οϊ> φημι, nego , f I deny, contradict, refuse’, ουκ εάω, veto, ‘ I forbid’; also with single substantives, when the substantive and the negative make a whole, e. g. η οό περιτείχισα , Thuc. hi, 9b. c the not blockading’, η των yεφvpωvoυ όιάλυσις id. / · p Abresch. ad .Eschyl. T. i, p. 224. T. n, p. 19'· Koen. ad Gregor, p. 18. Fiscli. in, b. p. 284. On the other hand, Herm. ad Vig. p. 780 sqq. Syntax. Of the Construction of Adverbs. 929 I, l37 q . M^', on the contrary,, is put with conjunctions (which are only used in dependent propositions) el, eav, ' tva y όφρα , όττως, ως. Hence it is itself used as a con¬ junction, in the sense of the Latin ne, in prohibitions, intreaties ; generally when any thing is to be prevented. Again, after verbs ‘ to fear’. The verb όεόοικα or opa is often omitted, and thus the proposition appears to be independent, άλλα τούτο μη ου θεμιτόν f 4 this cannot be right’, for c I fear that this cannot’. With relatives it depends upon whether the relative refers to a definite person or thing, of which any thing is distinctly denied, in which case oi is put, e. g. Xen. Cyr. Vi, l, 28 . αυτοί είσιν oi ουό' ότιοΰν τους ί τοΧεμίους βΧατττουσιν. ΟΓ to an indefinite person or thing, which is only understood, where, in Latin, si quis might be used : in this case μη is put. With participles it depends upon whether they are resolved by a particle or the relative; then μη is put, in the latter case, with the limitation already men¬ tioned. If, on the contrary, the participle depends upon the principal verb, as the object of that verb, and is defi¬ nitely negatived, then ου is put. Xen. Ancib. iv, 4 , lo. ουτος όόόκει και ττρότερον ττολλά ηΐη άΧηθευσαι τοιαυτα τα όντα τε ως όντα και τα μη όντα ως ουκ όντα, ί. 6. άτινα μη » * * / etrrt, ουκ εστι. Hence ού is used when the principal verb of the pro¬ position, and together with it the whole proposition, is to be negatived ; μή, on the other hand, when the negation is confined to one word only of the proposition. Thuc. Ill, 84. ot M4 € 7 ri ΎτΧυονυζιμ, euro ίσον ie μαΧιστα cttlov Tes .—oi yip iv του TC όσιου το τψωρείσθαι προυτίθεσαν, I , η Duker. ad Thuc. ι, 137. Valck. ad Eur. Ph. Sch.-p. 599 . Koen, ad Gregor, p. 41. , * * \ 930 Syntax. Of the Construction of Adverbs. του re μη άδικείν το κερδαίνειν, εν

ns 'Αθηναίων ίταψήσρ, μή εξεστω αύτψ των ίννέα άρχόντων 7 6 νήσθαι, μή$ 'ιερωσΰνηυ 'ιεράσασθαι, μηϋε συνδικησάτω τψ t Herm. ad Vig. p. 772 sq. Sch^f. in Dion. Hal. i, p. 107 »q. « / / 932 Syntax. Of the Construction of Adverbs. δημοσίιρ, μηδε άρζάτω αρχήν μηδεμίαν μηδέποτε μητ ενδημον, μήτε ύπερόριον, μήτε κληρωτήν, μήτε χειροτονητην ’ μηδε κηρυ- κενσάτω, 8ξΟ. μηδε γνώμην ειπατω μηδέποτε μήτε εν τω δημω, μήτε εν τη βουλνι, μηδ αν δεινότατος y\ \ey ειν Αθηναίων. Here sometimes μηδε—μήτε correspond. Thuc. hi, 48. μήτε — μήτε—μηδε Plat. Protag. ρ. 121. μήτε—μηδε ΧβΠ. Cyr. VIII, 7,2ο. οντε — οίτε—ονδε Plat. Rep. VI, ρ. 100. X, ρ.3 10 U . ούτε — ον — ον Herod. VIII, 98. ούδε—ούτε Plat. Rep. IX, ρ. 269· ον — ουδέ — ούτε II. a', 1 15. ούτε—μήτε Soph. Antig. 68β. ούτε — τε Thuc. ιι, 1. It, is also omitted the first time. Eurip. Troad. 481. ους Τρώας ουθ' 'ΕΧΚηνις, ουδέ βάρβαρος yvvrj τεκουσα κομπασειεν αν ποτέ, (r) 2. ‘ Not once, not at all’, when it is in the middle 4 , of a proposition. 4 3. Ουδέ and μηδε £re compounded with els', ούδείς , μηδείς (tile latter form is ούθείς). Thus also μηδετερος , ουδέτερος, where ουδδ, μηδε signifies merely not. Of the distinction between ούδείς and ούδε είς see §. 137. 603. Many adverbs are joined with a case, that is to say, the genitive, (r) These are: άγχι, ay χού, ‘nearby’; άεκητι , poet.: ‘ unwillingly’, e. g. θεών , invitis diis; ά\ις 3 ‘enough’; άνευ , άνευθε, and άνις ‘ without’; άντα , άντίον άντία, ‘ opposite, against’; αντίπερας, ‘ on the other side ; άνω 6 over, above ; άπάνευθε, ‘ far from’; άσσον , ‘ nigh’; άτερ , άτερθε, ‘ with¬ out’; άχρι, άχρις, ‘until’,; δίχα, seorsum; εyyύς, kyyv0i, ‘near’; εσω, έίσω, ‘within’, with verbs of motion x ; ύκάς, ‘ far from’; εκατέρωθεν , ‘ Oil both sides’; εκητι, ‘ on ac¬ count of, with the knowledge of, on occasion of’; εκτός , εκτοσθεν , ‘ besides, except’ ; εμπαλιν , ‘ behind’; έμπροσθεν, e before’; ένδον, ενδοθε v, ‘ within’, with verbs of rest; ενερθε. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 641. x See my note, ad Hymn. Horn. p. 46. 933 r Syntax. Of the Construction df Adverbs. νερθεν, ‘ below’ ; ενθεν, ‘ on this or that side’ ; εντός, εντο - σθε, c within’; εξω, εξωθεν, ‘ without’; ευθύ, ίθνς, imme¬ diately’; κάτω, ‘ below’; κρυφά , κρΰβδα, clam , " unknown^ to’ ; λάθρα, clam; μεσση^υς, ‘ between’; μεταξύ, ( between ; μεχρις, c until’; νόσφι, "removed from’; όπισθεν, "be¬ hind’ ; 7 Γ αρεξ, c besides,, except’ ; πάροιθε, c before’, ante ; πελας, e near by’ ; πέρα, πέρας, trans; πλην, i except ; πλησίον, c near by’ ; σχεδόν, c near’ ; τηλε, τηλου, τηλοθι, * far from’; νπερθεν, ‘ over’; χωρίς, c separate from’, ‘ without, besides.’ y Adverbs are not unfrequently put with the verb 604. είμί or yiy νομαι, in the predicate, instead of the adjective. It. a'. 416. επεί νυ τοι αισα μίνννθα περ, ουτι μαλα δην. Herod. VII, 103. όρα μη μάτην κομπος ο λο^ος ούτος ο ειρημενος είη. Id. VI, 109· eyivovTO δίχα αι γνωμαι. Thuc. VII, 81. δίχα όντας. Eurip. Hec. 536. σΊγα πας έστω λεως. Comp. §. 308. ' Adverbs especially are often put with the verb εχειν in the same sense as the adjectives corresponding to those adverbs, tvith the verb είναι, as καλώς εχει, ι. e. καλόν εστι. Upon this are partly founded the phrases ούτως εχω γνώμης, πως εχει τάχους. Frequently the ad¬ verb with εχω is a periphrasis of the verb answering to the adverb, as όλ^ωρως εχω for ολιγωρώ. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. The Conjunctions which govern a definite mood, 605. as όταν, επειδαν, 8$c. are already noticed with,the moods. s Fisch. in, b. p. 73—80. 934 Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. particularly the optative and conjunctive. Here also those others only will be noticed, which affect the con¬ struction. I. Position of the conj. The greater number stand at the beginning of the proposition; but the following can never stand at the beginning: av, ‘ again, on the other hand’; yap, ‘ for’; ye, ‘ at least*; δαί, ‘ then*, in interro¬ gation. δε, ‘but*; δήθεν, ‘forthwith*, in irony; μεν, ‘indeed*; oZv, ‘therefore*; re, ‘and*; τοι, ‘therefore*. These gene- i rally stand next to the first word of the proposition ; when the proposition begins with the article and a noun (adj. or subst.), sometimes between the article and the first noun, which is the most usual position ; but some¬ times after them both. When two of these particles come together, μεν, Ik, τε have thus the precedence of all, 76 only of the rest of the particles. Sometimes, however, these particles are put after several words of the pro¬ position, as yap, Arist. Plut. 1190. o Zei)s 6 σωτηρ yap πάρεσην ενθάδε z . δε, τε EllT. Ipfl. A. 203 . it IS to be understood, that μεν and τε stand after that word w r hich is opposed to another. ίρα is put in the sense of utique b only, as in ap ouv, ‘consequently*, at the beginning of a sentence, δη in prose is never put at the beginning, but in poetry, parti¬ cularly the epic, it frequently stands at the beginning ol a conclusion or consequence. II. 1 . — 5 e ' have not the definite sense qui - dem — sed, ‘ indeed’ — ‘ but*; they are regularly put in propositions, or with words, which are opposed to each 2 Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. n, p. 52 6. I # a Dorv. ad Charit. p. 173. b Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. p. 306'. Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. 935/ other, or only correspond mutually to each other, where in translation they are not expressed at all, or only the latter Se, e. g. Plat. Rep. V, p. 3. ων άλλο μεν ovSev κατη- κουσαμεν, τ oSe Se, Αφησομεν ονν εφη, η τι S ρασομεν, Sometimes words of a totally different nature are con¬ nected with each other. Plat. Epist. vn, p. 93. βραστε¬ ρόν μεν, εΐλκε δε με όμως η περί το πράττει τα κοινά και πολιτικά επιθυμία, ‘ the love of politics induced me, though but slowly". Lucian. D. D. 8 . άκων μεν, κατοίσω Se. Soph. (Ed. C . 5£l. rjveyKov κακότατ , ώ ζενοι, ηνε'γκον, ακων μεν , θεός Ίστω- τούτων 8 αυθαίρετον ον$εν. The case is similar, when the subject of the proposition with μεν is repeated with Se. Herod. I, 107. Tjjy ΜαΛψ Μ,ηδων μεν των εωϋτον άξιων ovSevi SiSoi yvvaiKa , SeSoiKW την οφιν. ο Se depart Sidoi. Comp. ib. 171. vii, 6 . extr . II. y, 18. tt, 732. This seems not to occur in Attic. 2. The same word also is often repeated in the Anaphora. Hesiod. Th. 655. άλλα καί αυτοί iS μεν , άτι περί μεν πραπ'^ας, περί S εααι νόημα. Herod. VI, 43. MapSόvιoς κατέβαινε επί θάλασσαν , στρατόν πολλον μεν κάρτα 7 Γβ^οι/ άμα άyόμεvoς, πολλον Se ναυτικόν. Xen. Hellen. II, 3,25. ημεΊς Se yvόvτες μεν τοΊς όιοις ημιν τε καί υμιν χαλεπήν πολιτείαν είναι Sημoκpaτιuv, y νοντες Se , fyc. and elsewhere very frequently 0 . 3. μεν is often put twice, especially when a proposi¬ tion beginning* with a pron. demonstr. is referred to a preceding one with the relative, in which case μεν is put in both. Herod. II, 121 . καί τον μεν καλεουσι θέρος , τού¬ τον μεν προσκυνεουσί τε και εύ ποιεουσι τον Se χειμώνα κα- λευμενον, $c. Comp, ι, 113. πι, 65. 75. In the same manner Se is put twice in a similar case. Herod, n, 50. c Ileiz. ap. Kerin, ad Vig. p. 800. 936 Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions: των όε ου φασι θεών yivcocrKeiv τά ουνόματα, ούτοι όε μ οι όοκεουσι υπό Πελασ^ώι/ όνομασθηναι. Plat. Lach. p. 194. ταυτα αγαθός έκαστος ημών, άπερ σοφός* α όε αμαθής , ταυ- τα όε κακός. Comp. Id. Protag. ρ. 92. 119- Hipp. Min. p. 201. Likewise where no relative goes before. Plat . Apol. S. p. 7o. του όε μηόεν άόικον μηό ανόσιου ερ^αζεσθαι, τούτον όε το παν μεΧει. And μεν and όε twice. Hevod. II, 2β. ει όε η στάσις ηΧΧακτο των ωρεων } και του ουρανου τγ μεν νυν ό βορεης τε και ο γειμων εστάσι, ταυτγ} μεν του νό¬ του ην η στάσις και της μεσαμβρίης, τγ όε ό νότος νυν εστηκε, ταυτν\ όε ό βορεης, ει ταυτα ούτως είχε, 8$C. Plato Menon. p. 378. όηΧον ότι ούτος (θουκυόίόης) ουκ αν ποτέ , Όυ μεν εοει οαπανωμενον οιοασκειν, ταυτα μεν εοιοαςε τους παιοας τους αυτου ου όε ονόεν εοει αναΧωσαντα ay ασους άν¬ τρας ποιησαι , ταυτα όε ουκ εόίόαζεν, εϊ όιόακτόν ην. Xen. Pier . 9· 2. τό μεν όιόάσκειν τε ά εστι βέλτιστα, και τον κάΧΧιστα ταυτα εζεpya ί ζόμεvov επαινείν και τιμα,ν, αυτή μεν η επιμεΧεια 0 lc ι -χαρίτων y'ιyvετaι* τό όε τον ενόεώς τι ποιοΰν- τα Χοιόορειν τε και avay^Xciv και ζημιουν και κοΧαζειν, ταυτα όε αι/α<γ/θ7 όι άπεχθειας φαλλοί/ yr Ύνεσθαβ. 4. Μεν also is sometimes put without a όε, especially with the personal pronoun kyd> μεν, the same as εyωyε. Soph. Antig. 634. η σοι μεν ημείς πανταγρ όρώντες φίΧοι ; < to thee at least’. It is more dubious in Plat. Charm. i ^ p. 107. πapεyεvoυ μεν , η ό * ός, τί} μά·χρ\ πapεyεvόμηv. Comp. Arist. Ran. 378. Αν. 1214. I220 e . It is put thus, especially with ουν, in replies, in the sense of imo vero. d Dorv. ad Char. p. 399 sq. 475. Wyttenb. ad Eel. Hist. p. 409 sq. Here must be referred Hermann’s Obs. on Viger. p. 803, 345. Comp. Dorv. ad Char. p. 543. e Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 349. 468. ad Cratyl. p. 25. Herm. ad Vig. p. 800, 336. φ I Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. 937 Soph. (Ed. C. 31. (πελας yap ανδρα τόνδε νων όρω. ΟΙΔ. η δεύρο 7 τροστείχοντα καζορμωμενον ;) ANT. και δη μεν ονν παρόντα. Eurip. Ale. 832. Μώι/ η τέκνων τις φρούδος η yepwv πατήρ ; ΘΕΡ. y ννη μεν ον ν ολωλεΐί Αδμητον, ζενε. Comp. Arist. Eccles. ill. 765. 1102 . Αν. 341. 1464. Equ. 911 f . 5. Mei/ is not always followed by δε, but by other equivalent particles, as αντάρ, ατάρ in Homer, αλλα, μεντοι, μην in Attic. Also αν, ανθις stand for δε^ , like wise re. Plat. Phcedr. p. 363. III. Καί and τε, c and’, are used in the connection of 607. propositions, which express contemporary or successive actions or situations. Of these particles the latter is of itself a connecting particle, chiefly in the Poets, and many times successively, e. g. II. a, 38. K ίλλαν τε ζαθεην, Ύενεδοιο τε ίφι άνάσσεις. Eurip. Suppl. 435. ycy ραμμόνων δε των νόμων ό τ όσθενης, ο πλούσιός τε την δίκην ίσην εχει. the Latin et — et. This reduplication of τε occurs like¬ wise in prose, though seldom. Plat. Phcedr. p. 324. 364 . Xen. Hist. Gr. n, 3, 12. And thus the simple τε occurs in Thucydides especially, instead of καί. καί τε .is Homeric. In prose τε is most commonly followed by καί , in which case τε — καί corresponds to the Latin et et. But τε is not always followed by καί, sometimes by δε, e. g. Soph. (Ed. C. 367 · τε — μηδε. Plat. Rep. in, p. 277. Isocr. Panath. p. 257. D. (as vice versa μόν—τε answer to each other. Thuc. VII, 2 . ωκονν δε Φοίνικες περί πασαν μεν την Σικελίαν , όκρας τε ετ ri τη Θαλόσστι άπολαβόντες 11 .) f Herm. ad Vig. p. 803, 343. g Herm. ad Vig. p. 760, 234. 761, 237. Zeune ad Vig. p. 536 sq. h Herm. ad Vig. p. 796, 318. i 608. , I 938 Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. Sometimes ». Pind. 01. i, 167. Isthm. vm. 75. Plat. * . , | Leg. ix, p. 8. Theaet. p. 50. Ion. p. 190 . also άτάρ ου v Plat. Hipp. Maj. p. 36. v * ' Obs. Καί has other senses still: 1. also', ‘ even’, as et for etiam. Hence a. with a participle or adjective, £ although’, Taya. κεν και αναίτιου αιτιοωτο 11. a , 633. See §. 566. b. οστις και , ί whoever even'. Hence it serves to strengthen, to .lay an emphasis, sometimes, c. as a connecting particle; f and in¬ deed*, whence 7 Γολλα και κα\α. 444. 4‘. d. sometimes in the middle of a proposition, after τις, οστις , πως, ποι, που , τί ypy και \eyeiv; ( what is one to say’? See Herod, n, 69· 114. Thuc. vii. 47· Soph. Aj. 1290 . Plat. Theaeg . p. 6 k . 2. ‘ as’, after κατά ταΰτά, ομοίως , ίσως , as ac or atque, e. g. Plat. Ion. p. 181. ovy ομοίως πεποιηκασι και'Όμηρος. Comp. Herod, ι, 35. vii, 100. Thuc. v, 112. Soph. (Ed. T. 1187. Lysias p. 131 1 . • In the Ionic dialect τβ is often put after relatives, and seems to be nearly the same as f namely*, and £ indeed*, or generally, to give a certain emphasis to the relative proposition. The pas¬ sages §. 483. are to be taken thus, οϊυς re remained thus in prose. It is put likewise after yap, Se, μεν, e. g. II. e, 139- του μεν τβ σθένος ώρσεν, επειτα $e τ ον προσαμυνει, where it seems “ first to lend that connecting power which those particles assumed to themselves in the more established form of the language”. 111 IV. Ei signifies not only / if % but is, l. used especially after θαυμάζω, in order to express the object ΐ Abreseh. Lect. Aristaen. p. 74. Scha?fer. ad Long. p. 351. k Koen. ad Gregor, p; 44. Duker. ad Thuc. iv, 121. Wyttenb. ad Eccl. Hist. p. 395. Pors. ad Eurip. Ph. 1373. Herra. ad Vig. p. 79b, 320. 1 Duker. ad Thuc. vii, 71. Valck. ad Herod, p. 534, 41. Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. p. 321. m Koen. ad Greg. p. 192. Herm. ad Vig. p. 795, 315. Buttm. Gr. Gr. §. 353. I # / / Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. 939 of wonder. Herod. I, 155. θωϋμάζω, el μοι άπεστάσι, 'that they have revolted from tne\ Soph. CEd. C. 1139· out ei τι μήκος των Xoywv εθου πΧεον , τεκνοισι τερφθεις τοΊ,σΙε, θαύ¬ μασαν εχω, ού$ el προ του μου προυΧαβες τα τών$ επη. Thus also after δεινόν ποιεΊσθαι Thuc. VI, 60. after ay ανακτεΊν Plat. Lack. p. 193. after $ηΧοϊ 9 i. e. $ηΧόν εστι, Herod. IX, 68. after ηΰονη εισέρχεται μοι Herod. I, 24. after τού¬ το ύπερφυες Isocr. p. 364. D. τούτο ατοπον Demosth. p . 72 , 10 . . 2. It is often used, sometimes in direct, and some¬ times in indirect questions : in direct questions .Od. a, 158. Plat. Rep. v. p. 63. Amat. p. 32. and often else¬ where. In indirect, II. e', 183. Soph. (Ed. T. 584. Plato Rep . iv, p. 328. 3. A proposition with el Se, sin , sin vero, is often op¬ posed to one with el μεν. Here the conclusion or minor is often omitted with one or the other proposition : after ei μεν II. a', 139. dXX’> ei P-w $ωσουσι yepa9 μey άθυμοι Αχαιοί , αρσαντες κατά θυμόν , όπως ανταζιον εσται ει $ε κε μη $ωω- σιν 3 fyc. where the minor proposition is supplied by καΧώς εζει. Comp. Thuc. Ill, 3. Plat. Prot. p. 117 . Thus likewise eaV μεν εκόντες υπεικωσιν. eav Se μη επιτρεπτ] η ποΧις 3 —την πατρίδα κοΧάσεται Plat. Rep. IX, ρ. 247. after el Se Plat. Euthyd. ρ. 33. ει μεν βούΧεται, εφετω, el 6 τι βούΧεται , τούτο ποιε'ιτω. Comp. Synip. p. 250. Thuc . Ill, 44". Negative propositions are usually followed in the antithesis by a negative condition, instead of an affirm- n Casaub. ad Ath. v, p. 43 sq. ed. Schw. Duker. ad Thuc. 1. c. Valck. ad Herod, p. 646, 93. Zeune ad Vig. p. 509. Herm. lb. p. 792 sq. Comp. Heind. ad Plat. Euthyd. p. 345. Ί ’ 940 Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. ative, el δε μη. Thuc. IT, 5. τα εξω eXeyov αύτοΊς μη ώδικεΊ ν’ el δε μη (for et δε άδικόΐεν) και αυτοί εφασαν αυτών τούς ανδρας άποκτενειν. On the other hand, 6i $ε also is put for 6i δε μη°. % Εί μεν is very often followed, in Plato especially, by νυν δε, as an antithesis, in which usually the opposite to the supposition contained in the antecedent must be un¬ derstood. This is followed generally by a proposition with yap. Plat. Lack. p. 172. el μεν yap συνεφερεσθην τόδε, ηττον civ του τοιουτου εδει νυν δε \^SC. ου ετυμφερετον') την εναντίαν yap, ώς όρας, Αάχης Ν ικία εθετο' ευ δη εχει και σου άκούσαι ητοτερω τοιν ανδροιν συμφηφος εί. Ibid. p. 206. el μεν ούν εν τοις SiaXoyois τοις άρτι eyw μεν εφανην ειόως, τώδε $ε μη είδοτε, δίκαιον αν ην εμε μάΧιστα επί τούτο το epyov παρακαΑειν' νυν δ * ομοίως yap παντες εν απορία eye - νόμεθα' τί ούν αν τις ημών τινα προαιροιτο 1 ; 4. In elliptical propositions of another kind ειπερ also or βί is often used: a. with τις αΧΧος, τι αΧΧο , to mark a superlative. Arist. Ach. 40.5. Ευριπίδη, ύπάκουσον, ειπερ δηποτ ανθρώπων τινί (sc. υπηκουσας ). Plat. Phcedon . ρ. 152. ποΧΧη εΧπίς άφικομενω οΐ eyw πορεύομαι, ικανως εκεί, εϊπερ που άΧΧοθι, κτησασθαι τούτο, $C. ϊ. e. Ικανώτατα κτη- σασθαι. Xenoph. Anab. VI, 4, 12. υμάς δεΊ παρασκευάζεσθαι ως μαγουμενους , ε*ί ποτέ καί αΧΧοτε. Instead of which also ως ούτις , we ουδείς αΧΧος q IS put, and ώσπερ και άλλο τι Thuc. ι, 142. VI, 18. Thus probably is to be understood Aristot. de Poet. 7, 11. el y dp ϊδει ύκατον τ pay (Ο δίας dyw- νίζεσθαι, προς κΧεφύδραν αν r)ywv'i(pVTO, ώσπερ ποτέ και ° Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. ρ. 134. Parmen. ρ. 208. P Heusde Spec. Cr. in Platon, p. 286. Heind. ad Theaet. p. 286. ad Charm, p. 114. Fisch. hi, b. p. 35. q Valck. ad Phcen. p. 537. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 24. Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. 941 aXXore, φασίν (ut aiunt, ‘ as report says'. See Plat. Phil . p. 245.) h. etTT ep entirely alone, with which the preceding, or the principal verb, is to be understood. Plat. Rep. VI, p. 97. ου το μη βούλεσθαι , άλλ^ είττερ, (SC. τι διακώ- λύσει) το μη δυνασθαι διακωλυσει τ . * 5. είτε — είτε, or εάντε — εάντε, άντε — άντε, is the Latin, sive — sive, c whether', — or sometimes with ουν, as Plat. Apol. S. p. 80. ου μοι δοκεί καλόν είναι, εμε τούτων ονδεν ττοιειν, και τηλικόνδε όντα και τούτο τουνομα ε-χοντα , ειτ ουν αληθές, είτ ουν ψευδός. Sometimes it is followed by η instead of the second είτε. Plat. Leg. v, p. 229 sq. Phcedr. p. 386. likewise και. Soph. Antig. 327. eav δε' τοι ληφθγ τε και μη. The former είτε also is wanting. Soph. CEd. T. 517. Xoyoiaiv είτ ’dpyoiaiv*. V. In simple interrogations η is put (especially with 609< yap , η yap. Plat. Hipp. Min. p. 197. η yap , ω ΊτΓΤΓί'α, εάν τι έρωτα, σε Σωκράτης, άποκριν-ρ. It often stands quite alone. Plat. Phcedr. p. 360. μανίαν yap τινα εφησαμεν τον έρωτα είναι * %y άρ ; f lS it notso’? η yap oi); nonne? 1 ) άρα, num. ap ου, or, with reference to a single word άρα μη ; nonne. Sometimes also άρα is put for άρ ου, as the Latin ne enclit. for nonne , e. g. Thuc. i, 75. Isocr. Pac. p. J62. E u . The interrogative particle also is often omitted. Plat. Rep. ix, p. 277. Symp. p 229. Ei is sel¬ dom put in a direct question. See §. 606, 2. In two questions which mutually exclude each other r Heind. ad Plat. Parm. 255. 9 Herm. ad Vig. p. 793 sq. t Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 73. Phaedr. p. 315. u Herm. ad Vig. p. 788. Heind. ad Plat. Crat. p. 19, VOL. II: O 0 \ 942 Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. ] . πότερον (or Att. πάτερα ) — η IS put, ΟΓ άρα η. Plat . Euthyphr. P · 21. άρα το οσιον, οτι όσων εστι , φΐλειται V 7 TO των θεών, η-, οτι φιλειται, όσων εστιν ', ΟΓ ει η, ρ3Γ ticularly in indirect questions §. 606, 2. or είτε είτε. . Plat. Rep. vi, p. 70. x in Epic poetry also η — η, e. g. 11. igo sqq. 2. The interrogative particle likewise is often omitted in the first question, as in Latin, Plat. Rep. VI, p. 85. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 1, 12. εας πλουτεϊν , η πενη- τα ποιείς \ When ου is put in the interrogation, it is often placed after the verb, and before the word, on whose account properly any thing is asked. Plat. Rep. ix, p. 277. η cT αυθάδεια και δυσκολία φύεται οΰχ όταν το λεον- τωδδς τε καί άφεώδες αάξηται ; Symp. ρ. 229. εύδαίμονας δε δτ} λε'γεις ου τους τα^γαθα και καλα κεκτημενους , In a transition to another matter, the words which import this matter are often placed with τί U before, and the interrogative particle, or the verb after them, as in a second question. Plat. Rep. vii, p. 128. (row τοιουτονς πρώτον μεν εαυτών τε καί άλληλων οίει αν. τι εω - ρακέναι άλλο, τ τλην τα? σκιάς -; —Τί tie των τταραφβρα¬ μένων, ον ταυτόν τοΰτο; (i. e. τα? σκιάς.) Id. Reg. IV, ρ. 162. τί δ αν πεδίων τε και ορών και ύλης ; πως μέρος εκα ατών ήμΐν εΐληχε ; where the genitive is governed of the noun in the second member, ταύτον τούτο , μέρος. Phcedon. ρ. 148. τί δε δη τα τοιαδε , ώ Έ*ιμμια\ φαμεν τι είναι δίκαιον αυτό, η ου$ει/; as dc. TllSC. I, 24. Quid ilia tandem ? num leviora censes ? Comp. Mil. §. 57. 1. Man. 13, 36. Or. in, 8, 30. The introductory ques¬ tion τί oZv is confounded with the direct one Plat. x Zeune ad Vig. p. 515. I Syntax. Of the Construction of Conjunctions. 943 Sytnp. C. 23. τί ου v αν ε*ιη 6 *'Ερως θνητός', for τί ούν ; €Ϊη αν, 8$C. The other interrogatory particles are μη (see §. 517.) μων (from μη ου v y ) πώς ου, nonne, e. g. Xen. Mem. S. IV, 3, 8. πως ονχ υπέρ Xoyov ; Comp. II, 6, 24. 26. This is very often put in the answer, in the sense of f why not*? i. e. f of course, naturally’. Xen. Mem. S. iv, 4, 13. ουκουν ό μεν τα όίκαια πράττων όίκαιος, ό Si τα aSiKa, αόικος ; Πώ? yap oil; Comp. Plat. Rep. V, p. 18. Thus also πόθεν Si ου 1 . On the contrary πώς yap, in reply, is likewise a more emphatic denial; properly, ‘how should that take place’? i. e. c by no means’\ Καί πώς is used when the question has a negative sense, e. g. Eurip. Pheen. 1367- και πώς yevoiT αν τώvSε Sυσ^ τοτμώτερα ; i. e. ου yivoiT αν τ. S. Τί μην signifies quidni? c why not’? i. e. f certainly’ b . The particles yap. Sai. οη. Srj ποτέ, ειτα, επειτα. καί. serve to give strength to the question, like the English € then, but, yet’. Ohs „ The Greek do not distinguish direct and indirect questions, like the Latins, by different moods. The only mode of marking the distinction between them is this, that when an interrogatory begins with definite interrogative particles, ‘ how, who, when’, &c. these are usually expressed in direct questions, by πώς, πότερος, πότε, που,ποι, πηνίκα , τις κ.τ.Χ., in indirect questions, by όπως , όποτερος, οπότε, όπου, όποι, οπηνϊκα, όστις, κ.τ.Χ. but not without exception 0 . y Zeune ad Vig. p. 422. Herm. p. 766 . 2 Heusde Spec. Cr. in Plat. p. 25 sq. Comp. Valck. ad Eur. Ph. 1612. a Hemsterh. ad Luc. T. i, p. 330. Valck. ad Eur. Phcen. l6l4. Koen. ad Greg. p. 6l. b Koen. ad Greg. p. 109- c Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. 392. Heind. ad Plat Lysid. p, 25. 0 0 2 944 610 . \ / Of some peculiar Modes of Construction. The best Greek writers very often leave the logical and direct order or relation of the words of a proposi¬ tion, when by so doing, the emphasis which is laid on one or more words, or the clearness is assisted ; or when the language acquires thereby the easy tone of conversation, and thus is improved in grace. The classical writers of the Attic dialect never do this, unless for one of these reasons, and never in bad taste. The modern rhetori¬ cians study an elegance in these deviations, which is never produced, for this very reason, that it is studied. I. Anacoluthon. Of this kind of construction, in which a proposition is concluded in a different manner from what its beginning leads us to expect and requires, and which is extremely frequent, very many instances have been given in the Syntactical parts, which are marked in the Index Anaco¬ luthon. The following inflexions affect the whole pro¬ position rather than single parts of it: 1. Change of Construction. Thuc. I, 72. κελεύω — πεμπειν και αιτια- σθαι μήτε πόλεμον ayav δηλουντας, μηθ' ως, επιτρεπόμενη i. e. και (τε in μήτε) μη ΰηλούντας, ως επιτρεφομεν , ΟΓ και $. ως ούκ επιτρ. where for ως επιτρεψομεν some such word as άμύλειαν should stand. Id. VII, 70. cti προσβολαΐ , ως τν^ζοι ναύς νηί προσπεσουσα, η οια το φευ y ειν η αλλρ επιπλεουσα , πυκνότεραι ησαν . lb. 47. νοσφ τε yap ^ 7Γί€ ~ ζοντο κατ άμφότερα , της τε ώρας του ενιαυτόν ταυ της ουση?, εν tj άσθενουσιν άνθρωποι μάλιστα , και το -χωριον άμα , εν ιμ % { I ' Syntax. Peculiar Modes of Construction. 945 εστρατοπεύευοντο , eXto^es και χαΧεπον ην (for καί του “χωρίου — οντος ), τά τε αΧΧα οτι ανεΧπιστα αυτοις εφαινετο, where νόσφ τε επιεζοντο, and τα τε αΧΧα otl refer to each other. Comp, vm, 78. Thus a new order of construction is commenced, instead of a continuation of the former, Thuc. II, 60. οπότε ούν πόΧις μόν τας ί$ίας ζυμφορας οια τε φερειν, εΐς Si έκαστος τας εκείνης aSυvaτoς } πως ον χρη πάντας αμυνειν αυτρ ; και μη (ο νυν υμείς SpaTe, ταις κατ οίκον κακοπραγίαις εκπεπΧηγμενοι) τοι κοινού της σωτήριας αφίεσθε, fyc. for άφίεσθαι , as a continuation of the ques¬ tion. In the same manner τε is sometimes not followed by καί. Thuc. VI, 48. n τοιώμεθα τον πΧουν, ΐνα ΤΙεΧοποννη- σίων τε στορεσωμεν το φρόνημα , ει $ο£ομεν νπερι$οντες και ονκ άγαπησαντες την εν τφ παροντι ησυχίαν και ειτι ΈιΐκεΧιαν πΧευσαι. και άμα η της Έλλαδο? των εκεΊ προσγενομενων πάσης τφ εικότι άρζομεν , 8$C. for αρζωμεν; dependent upon iva. Comp. Herod, vm, 87. Cic. Fin. i, 12, 40. Xen. Hell. II, 3, 19. *0 S' αύ θηραμενης και προς ταυτα εΧεγεν, οτι άτοπον $οκοίη εαυτω είναι το πρώτον μεν βονΧομενονς τους βεΧτίστονς των ποΧιτων κοινωνονς ποιησασθαι τρισχιΧιους , (see §.611. II.) —επειτα S' 3 εφη, όρώ εγωγε Svo υμάς τά εναν¬ τιότατα πράττοντας, for το πρώτον μεν ποιησασθαι , επειτα Si πράττειν, where Wyttenbach ctd Eel. Hist. p. 400. suspects, without good reason, a corruption of the text. 2. Interruptions of the construction. Xen. Cyr. iv, 6 , 3. 05 γάρ ην μοι μόνος και καΧος, ώ όεσποτα , και αγαθός, και εμε φιΧών καί τιμών,—τούτον ο νυνι βασιΧευς οντος , καΧεσαντος του τότε βασιΧεως, πατρος Sε του νυν, ως Sω- σοντος την θυγατέρα τφ εμφ ί raiSi, εγω μεν απεπεμφαμην, —ο Si νυν βασίΧεύς επι Θήραν αυτόν παρακαΧεσας, και cti/eis αότφ θηρψν ανά κράτος, ως ποΧυ κρεισσων αυτόν ιππενς οίόμένος είναι , ο μεν ως φιΧφ σννεθηρα, φανεισης S άρκτου, όιώκοντες αμφοτεροι, ο μεν νυν αρχών οντος ακοντισας 946 Syntax. Peculiar Modes of Construction . ήμαρτεν, 6 o εμός παίς βαλών, ούόεν όεον, καταβάλλω την άρκτον, where the construction passes twice from the proper subject ό νυν βασιλεύς to another έγω μεν, ο μεν εμός νως. A similar passage is in Lucian D. D. 14, 2. - Isocr. Panath. p. 257 · P. a\ μεν ούν αίτίαι, δία μακρο - τερών μεν αύτάς όιηλθον, αύται δ* ούν ησαν. Thus Isocr . ib. ρ. 25 1. D. a transition is made from the third person to the first : α τοίνυν περί nXarcueas επραζαν, άτοπος αν ε'ίην, ει ταυτ είρηκώς εκείνων μη μνησθείην 3 ών εν τη χωρά στρατοπεόευσάμενοι μεθ' ημών και των άλλων συμμάχων — — ού μόνον ηλευθερώσαμεν των Ελλ^ωμ τοι)? μεθ * ημών όν¬ τας, 8$c. fill. 3. These changes of construction are particularly caused by parenthesis. In this case the proposition which, after an interruption, is to be continued, com¬ monly begins with ούν , δε', yap, as in Latin with igitur, Sed , fyc. Herod. VI, 137· Πελασγό/, επεί τε εκτός Αττικής υπό Αθηναίων εξελάθησαν, ε'ίτε ών όικαίως, είτε άόίκως — then follows a parenthesis, τούτο yap ούκ εχω φράσαι , 8$C. containing the different causes assigned of that ex¬ pulsion, to the end of the chapter, ταύτα δε Αθηναίοι λ^ουσι, and then c. 138. the continuation of the inter¬ rupted proposition : ot δε Πελασγοί ούτοι, &;c. Thuc. vi, 64, a yιyvώσκovτες ot στρατη^/οι των Αθηναίων και βουλόμε- ι >οι — είδδτε? (τοι /s ydp άν φίλους — οί ζυνείποντο ) τοιόνόε τι ούν προς ά εβούλοντο ο'ί TTpa^yoi μηχανώνται. Comp. Xen. Hell, π, 3, 157—18. (See Misc. Phil, n, 2, p. 90.) VI, 4, 2. K λεόμβροτον δε, εχοντα τό εν Φωκευσι στράτευμα , και επερωτώντα τα οίκοι τέλη , τί χρη ποιειν , (Π ροθόου—τό όαιμόνιον rjy εν ') επεστειλαν δε' τφ Κ λεομβρότω, 8ξ0. where the proper construction would be Κ λεόμβροτον εκελευσαν. Plat. Alcib. I, p. 7. *]yrj, εάν θάττον εις τον Αθηναίων όημον παρελθρς [τούτο δε εσεσθαι μάλα ημερών όλ^ων) παρελθών δε ενόείξα- ) I Syntax. Peculiar' Modes of Construction. 94? σθαι Άθηναίοις, where 7 ναρβλθων be repeats the words. kdv θάττον — παρελθρς. Thus, it seems, is to be under¬ stood Xtn. Anab. V, 5 , 22 sq. av be court ημιν και τον Πα- ν άν η φυλό όκάστη όπιύνυμος > 7 , θύοντας τούτων εκαστοις έμμηνα ιερά, χορούς τε και ayω^ ναζ μουσικούς, viz. a my όντας. Eurip. Ion. 1082. η θηκτον ξίφος η \αιμων όξόφβι βρόχου άμφί ύβρην, where in θηκτον ξίφος, perhaps, ύιώσβι must be understood . <1 Wyttenb. ad Eccl. Hist. p. 400. Miscell. Philol. Ii, 2. p. 92 sq. e Dorv. ad Char. p. 440. Weasel, ad Diod. S. i, p. 170· p. 389,70. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. T, 271. El. 435. Wyttenb. Bibl. Crit. hi, 3. p. 109 sq. 948 Syntax· Peculiar Modes of Construction . After ούόεν άλλο, TL άλλο, followed by η, ποιώ, yiyvercu, fyc. is usually left out. Soph . Antig. 646. τί tovS' άν είποις άλλο πλην αντίο πόνους φυσαι ; ThllC. VII, 75. ουόε ν yap άλλο ή πόλει εκπεπολωρκημενρ εωκεσαν υπoφευyoυ- σγ. Plat. Euthyd. ρ. 17 . και νυν τουτω ούόεν άλλο η y^opcvsTov περί σε. Comp. Isoct. ρ. 166 - Ε. Hence αλλό τι η or αλλοτι in interrogation. §. 487. 8 f . / These omissions of single words are called Ellipses, and are very usual in Greek, although a wider field is commonly allowed them than appears strictly to belong to them. Most of the cases in which an ellipsis is assumed, because in Latin, or in one of the modern languages, one or several words more are generally employed, have been mentioned and explained in this Second Part. In other cases words of all kinds are actually omitted, because they are easily to be supplied from the context; oftentimes entire propositions, the first word only of which is put, as είπερ §. 608. 4. b. Thus Plato uses νυν Si, followed by yap, an antithesis after εί, §. 608. 3. Substantives also are often omitted with adjectives, when the idea which they mark is, in some measure, contained in the verb which is adjoined, e. g. Plat. Lack. p. 172. την εναντίαν yap Λάχης Νι/αιι εθετο, SC. φηφον, because θεσθαι φηφον IS used. Thus ως βαθυν εκοιμηθης, SC. ύπνον, which IS Contained in εκοι - μηθης. i # Γ i · i * . K ^‘ 613. IV. The contrary to the Ellipse is the Pleonasm, (r) which likewise is very frequent in Greek, e. g. εφη λε- yiov Herod, v, 36. Soph. Aj. 757. μεyάθeί μ^ας Herod, l, 51. ως o\ παρά όόξην εσγε τά πράματα η ως αυτός κα- f Duker. ad Thuc. m, S5. Hoogev. ad Viger. p. 475. i J 1 • ■ > . . I Syntax. Peculiar Modes oj Construction. 949 τεδόκεβ. Id. I , 79· VIII, 4. — τρόπφ όποιφ άν δύνων- ται ισχνροτάτψ κατά το δυνατόν. Thuc. V, 47· Plat . Tjp.fr. XI, ρ. 136. τοι)? επιτηδεύματα επιτηδευ όντας, α προ¬ τροπήν εχει τινα ισχυρόν προς το προτρεπειν κακούς yiyvecrOat. Thus the passage is correct Thuc. ii, 48. (see Misc. Phil, ii, p. 102 sq.) Here two kinds of construction are united, which is still more evident in the following pas¬ sages : Herod. V, 38. εδεε yap δη συμμαχιης τίνος οι με- yάλης εξειφεθηναι, from εδεε οι συμμαχώ μey, and e^ee οι συμμαχίην με Ύ άλην ύξευρεθηναι. Thuc. Υ, 15. 67 τιθνμίοι των άντρων των όκ της vrjaov κομίσασθαι. Plat . Symp. ρ . 238. eUep τού ά Ύ αθού όαυτφ el ναι άει 0ρως όστίν , from είπερ^ ίρως εστι τού ά Ί αθού and εϊπερ ερως όστι το dyaOov εαυτφ elvai. Rep. V, p. 23. ως αρα σφοδρά ημιν δε! άκρων eivai των αρχόντων. Hence όσον από βοής ενεκεν Thuc. VIII, 92. Xen. Hell . π, 4, 3ΐ & . It is a pleonasm likewise, when the premises of a proposition are expressed twice. Plat. Apol. S. p. 47. OV yap δηπου, σού ye ούδεν των άλλων περιττοτε- ρον πpayμaτeυoμεvoυ 3 επειτα τοσαύτη φημη τε και λο- y 0 ς yeyovev, ει μη τι έπραττες άλλο!ον η οι πολλοί. Leg. X, ρ· 81. el δε φανησεται ψυχή πρώτον, ού πυρ ούδε άηρ , ψυχή $ ev πρωτοις yεyεvημεvη 3 σχεδόν ορ¬ θότατα TiiyotT αν είναι διαφερόντως , οτι φύσει ταύτ εσθ όντως εχοντα, άν ψυχήν τις όπίδειξγ πρεσβυτέραν ουσαν σώματος, άλλως δε ονδαμως. Comp. Euthy- dem. ρ. 32. Xen. Ages. 2, 7 .el yap ταύτα λεγοιμι , ^ησίλαόν τ άν μοι δοκω άφρονα άποφαίνειν και εμαυτον μω¬ ρόν , εΐ ετ ταινοίην τόν περί των με Ί ίστων είκη κιν- λ / b όννευοντα . 6 Wyttenb. ad Eccl. Hist. ρ. 414. Comp. Misc. Phil. II, 2, p. 101 sqq. h Misc. Philol. n, c ^· p· 135. 950 Syntax. Peculiar Modes of Construction. V. Some propositions are intimated in Greek only by the principal word, as in τεκμήριο v <5e, σημεων Se 9 $rj- Xcv Se, which is thus followed by a proposition with yap. Herod. VIII, 120. με^α ίε και τόόε μαρτύρων Φαίνεται yap α,ερξης, fyc. hoc etiam magnum ejus rei documentum est, quod Xerxes videtur. Thuc. 1 , 8 . Κάρες καί Φοίνι¬ κες τάς πΧείστας των νήσων φκησαν. μαρτύρων $ε* ΑηΧου yap καθαιρομενης , 8ξβ. Comp, ib . ll. Xen. Hellen. νι, 4 , 13. Also the proposition begins with the relative Isocr. TrapeZ. p. 364. E. ό ΐ)ε πάντων μ^ιστον τεκμηριον , ως ούκ άφειμενος ην Ώασίων - ότε yap Μ ενεζενος, 8$C. Comp. in. Ruth. p. 402. A'. VI. Some phrases are inserted in propositions as if they were only single words, and indeed adverbs. These are chiefly όηΧον ότι , εύ οϊ& ότι , oiS ότι, this latter in negative propositions : Isocr. Trapez. p. 365. D. περί μεν ovv τούτων ονκ οίό ότι πΧείω $ει Xeyeiv, for ου πΧείω $ει λε 7 eiv k . To these may be added εστιν όί , ‘"some'; ουρείς όστις οί, c every one*. Thus όνοΊν θάτερον is used without any connection with the rest of the subject. Plat. Phce- don. p. 172 . ώστε, όπερ λε^ω, όνοιν θάτερον , ήτοι επιστά- μενοί ye αύτά yεyόvaμεv και επιστάμεθα όιά βίου παντες, fj, ύστερον , ούς φαμεν μανθάνειν, ουόεν αΧΧ η αναμιμνησκονται ουτοι , ζ one of the two’, and Svoiv το ετερον Plat. ib. p. 232. VII. In causal propositions, which begin with 7 dp, it is to be observed, that they often stand before the proposition, whose cause they contain, especially in Ho¬ mer and Herodotus, e. g. I, 30. ξεΊνε ΆθηναΊε (παρ’ ημεας yap περί σεο Xόyoς άπΊκται ποΧΧός και σοφίης είνεκεν της σης 1 ' Misc. Phil. 11 , 1, ρ. 14 sqq. k Wolf, rul Demostb. Lept. p. 388, Syntax, Peculiar Modes of Construction . 951 KCU 7r\(XVT]^j <νς ος εστε') θαρσειτε, ThllC. VII, 4. ο Γι/λΐ7Γ7Γ09 (ην yap τι τοις Αθηναίοις του τείχους ασθενες ) νυκτος αναΑα - βων την στρατιάν, επρει προς αυτό’ οι $ε Αθηναίοι (ετυχον yap εζω αυΑιζόμενοι ) ω? ρσθοντο, αντεπρεσαν. Comp. ib. 48. Herodotus sometimes unites the causal with the principal proposition : Γ, 24. και τοΊσι yap εσελθειν ηάονην ei μελλοιεν άκουσεσθαι του άρίστου ανθρώπων άοι$ου, άναχω- ρησαι εκ της πρύμνης es μεσην νεα , for και τους (εσελθειν yap αΰτοίς η^ονην — άοιΰον) άναχωρησαι, fyc. as Virgil. jPjU. X, 874. Whence arises an anacoluthia ib. 85. άλισκομέ- νου Se του τείχεος — ηϊε yap των τις ΥΙερσεων άλ\oyvωσaς Κ ροισον ως άποκτενεων. Κ ροισος μεν νυν ο ρεών επ ιόντα υπο της παρεουσης συμφορης παρημεληεε, ου$ε τι οι ύιεφερε πλη- y εντι αποθανεειν * ο $ε παις ουτος ο άφωνος, where the con¬ struction would properly have proceeded thus : άλισκομε- νου του τείχεος 6 παΊς ουτος ο άφωνος 1 . 1 Misc. Phil, ιι, 1, ρ. 13 sq. Comp. Valck. ad Herod, p. 685, 97 - f APPENDIX, Of Quantity and Accents. The pronunciation of Greek words is regulated by two considerations, the quantity of the syllables, and the accent. The former is founded upon the length or shortness of the syllables, or according to the time which is employed in the pronunciation of a syllable; (according to this, in a long syllable two seconds, morae, are employed; in a short syllable one, and two short syllables are thus far equal to one long one), the accent marks the rising and sinking of the voice, i. e. deter¬ mines which syllable is to be uttered with a higher, and which with a lower tone. The higher tone is marked by the acute ', a stroke from the right to the left. All the remaining syllables, besides that with the acute, have the lower tone, although the grave ' is not placed over them. These two considerations must be combined in the pronunciation, and it is equally incorrect to pronounce merely according to accent, e. g. άνθρωπος , * Όμηρος , as anthropos, Homeros, or merely according to quantity. In German the pronunciation is nearly the same as in Greek, with accent and quantity both. If the long syllable be denoted sounds may be thus expressed: (r) , the i 953 Appendix . Of Quantity. αν-θρω-πος ί-τυ-ι rre e-Xe- 7 € σώ - μα —p— 9 - =f=\ 9 — ■ 1» f- l _ * L· t — l _ EilEfe κα-λό? e - i/os λα -Xos τυ-τττό-με-νος — m- m .. B- » — 1 - @- ©— β — fey — -εξ£ — - | ΤΌ-7ΓΤΟ -pe- νη mu m /-τάρ-κης -C 3 αν - ταρ - zees' IE ί I. Ο /’ Quantity. The quantity of Greek words is more determinate than that of the Latin, since it is for the most part regu¬ lated by the nature of the vowel. Thus n and ω are long, and give the same quantity to the syllable in which they stand, 6 and o short. Again, all diphthongs, as well proper as improper (§. 14.) l A syllable short by the nature of the vowel, is made long by position, as in Latin, i. e. when two con¬ sonants, or a double letter, follow a vowel, whether m the same word, or at the beginning of another. There is an exception to this rule, however, in Attic prospdy, when the second of two consonants is a liquid λμν p (mute cum liquida). Yet a distinction is observed: the rule is, that p after another consonant, leaves the preceding short syllable still short; on the contrary, βχ, β„ β, *X, 7„ 7- V. fc “* ’"Οξ long. Such cases as the following are rare, hi,pa Soph. (Ed T.2. ττάρεόροί Eurip.Hell. 888. KlnrpoyiveLaArist.Lys. 551. ε βλαστέ Soph. El. 440. Comp. Phil. 1311. Κάπνα, Aristoph. Nub. 320. Thus μίκρή in Aristophanes, has / 954 Appendix. Of Quantity. commonly the first syllable long, (r) See Brunck. ad Arist. Plut. I47 a . In the Homeric hexameter, on the other hand, two consonants, even with the second is a liquid, make regularly a true position; but in this also there are instances of the contrary, as προτράπηται Od. λ, 18. θι jyarpl ib. κ , 106. Αμφητρΰωνος λ', 265. 269. Hes. Sc. Here. 2. avayi ΌΐΎ) Od. λ', 143. Even before three consonants, the latter of which is a p. H λεκτρυων Hes. Sc. Here. 3. 16. 35. (r) Sometimes also in Homer a short syllable remains short before ζ in another word, e. g. kcll νληεσσα Ζ.ακι>νθος, εις πεόιον προ^εοντό Ίϊκαμάνόριον^ . Yet this, perhaps, is allowed in proper names, which could not otherwise have been admitted into the hexa¬ meter. 2. In the Homeric hexameter a short syllable is often used long, even when followed only by one con¬ sonant, if the consonant be of such a kind as easily to be doubled in the pronunciation, as chiefly λ, μ, V) p, e. g. ίί. μ , 283. και πεόια λωτενντα. lb. 459. 7 recre $e λίθος είσω. χ, 225. στη ό αρ επί μελίης. π', 774. πόλλ.ά $6 -χερμάόια με<γ(χ\α. 11 . λ, 476. ίω από νευρης. Also before 7r,_e. g. επειόη νηας τε και Ελλήσποντον 'ίκοντο, and εκηβολον Απόλλωνός , μάγης εζ άπονεεσθαι. Yet this takes place only when the short syllable to be lengthened is the first of a metrical foot (in the caesura). It is customary in many words, to double the consonant in writing likewise, as ελλαβε , ε$$ε/σε, ενμμελίηΒ^ νπεμμημυκε 0 . * This rule was first laid down by Dawes, Miscell. Cr. p. 156 S q. 204sq. Comp. Porson. ad Toup. Emend, in Suid. T. iv, p. 475. Brunck. ad Arist. Lys. 384. ad Soph. Aj. 1077. 132p. b Dawes. Misc. Crit. p. 92 sqq. c Brunck. ad Gnomic, p. 314. ad riEscb. S. C. Theb. 490. 955 Appendix. Of Quantity . / - In Attic prosody this power of lengthening the pre¬ ceding syllable remained only with respect to p at the beginning of a word, e. g. Eurip. Ion. 522. παύε, μη ψαυσας τα τον θεού στέμματα ρηξγς Χ € Ρ 1 · H ence the re ~ duplication of p with the augment, ερρηξ e, ^•C. d (k) - ft ' Obsi Other peculiarities of the Homeric or old Ionic pro¬ sody are : when a short syllable, independently of the caesura, is used long before a vowel, in a following word, e. g. II. λ , 36. τη S* * επί μεν Yopyw βλοσνρωπΊς εστεφάνώτο. Od. θ, 215. εν μεν τόξον olSa εύξοον αμφαφαασθαι . 2. When a short^syl- lable over which the acute stands, is used long, as Ιλιον . Likewise the Ionic Poets sometimes use the same syllable long and short, even when the same word stands twice near together, as’Apee ’Άρε? βροτολοιγε in Homer, τα μη καλά καλά πεφανται in Theocritus. In the prosody of this latter word the Ionic hexa¬ meter is distinguished from the Attic senarius, the foi mer using the first syllable regularly long, καλός, the latter using it short, καλός. 3 . Long vowels and diphthongs are only used short when another vowel follows, and this occurs legu- larly : a . at the end of a word, when the following word begins with a vowel, e. g. άξω ελών , o Se κεν κεχολωσεταϊ, ον κεν 'ίκωμαι. Except when a syllable of this kind stands in the caesura, e. g. η ου μεμνρ, ότε τ εκρεμω υφοθεν. The cases are more rare in which such a syllable remains long before a vowel, independently of the caesura, e. g. Od. v\ 109. a\ μεν ap άλλαι ευόον , especially καί II. y, 392. e', 706. ζ, 478. ί, 393. Yet others explain this by means of the digamma κάλλέ'ΐ τε στίλβων καί Ρείμασιν, 8$c, d Dawes, p. l60 sqq. Brunck. ad Eur. Hipp. 462. Msch. Prom. 1031. Arist. Plut. 51. 1065. * Herm. de Metris, p. 70 sqq. *’ Herm. de Metr. p. 81 sqq. ί. 956 Appendix. Of Quantity. b. In Homer it is less frequent in the middle of a word than it is in Attic. The following instances in Homer are : βεβΧηαι II. λ', 380. otos II. v, 275. σ', 105. Srj'ioio II. β', 415. ζ, 331, 8gC. νιος Od. λ', 269- yepdio υς in Tyr- taeus. In Attic it is more frequent, e. g. SeiXdios Eurip. Hec. 1302. Arist. Pac. 233. ί τοιεΊν Arist. ib. 362. ohv id. ib. mi. / In the Ionic and Attic Poets, two* * syllables, the former of which ends with a vowel, and the latter begins with one, are often pronounced as one syllable ; Synizesis. In Homer this takes place only in the same word, especially in the genitive of the first declension in βω, regularly,, e. g. ΤΙηΧηϊάδεο) ΆχΐΧηος, as well as in the genitive plur. of the first declension θετις S' ού Χηθετ εφετμεων. TllUS also θεός , e. g. νμιν μεν θεδι όοιεν, χρη- σειρ άνά σκηπτρω II. a , 14. χρνσεον σκηπτρον εχοντα Od. X', 568. νείκεα και Srjpiv οφεΧΧοις Hesiod. β py . 33. Thus also, 7τεΧεκεας II. φ', 114. βασιΧηες Hesiod, epy. 263. τοκηες Horn. Η. in Cer. 137. Here the syllable which is contracted from two syllables, is long, as Τίη- Χηίαδεώ ΑχιΧηος , νείκεα και Srjpiv οφεΧΧοις , 7 τεΧεκεας εν χερσιν εχοντες. Likewise the following after εως, εως ό ταυθ* ωρμαινε II. a, 193, SgC. εως επηΧθον Od. η , 280. εως eya> περί κείνα Od. S', 90. In Attic writers this takes place sometimes in certain words, e. g. in θεός, which is always * a monosyllable ( Porson . ad Eurip . Or. 393.) in εωρακα , which is commonly a trisyllable ~~ | w , sometimes, however, two words are thus contracted, e. g. ε*/ω ου, ‘ two syllables' ( Brunch. ad Arist. Equ. 340.) μη άλλα, f two syllables' (Id. ad Arist. Ach. 458.) β7τβ! ov, ‘ two syllables’ (Id. Arist. Lys . 273.) μη ov, e monosyllable'. * (Porson says non raro.) * 957 Appendix. Of Quantity. After these observations bat few cases remain in which the quantity of a syllable is to be determined from the authority of a decisive position {ex auctoritate). This takes place only in the vowels a i v, which in some words are long, in others short ( ancipites ). An accurate observation of the places in which words with these vowels occur, is here the chief expedient; besides this, the Ionic dialect is some direction for the a, which in that dialect has often η for the long a, e. g. διηκονος, Ληρισσα , θωρηκος, whence it may be concluded, that the a in διάκονος, Αάρισσα , θωρακος is also long. The accent likewise may frequently be of service, in determining the quantity of a syllable ; of which hereafter. But par¬ ticular works, viz. Morelli Thesaurus Grceece. Poeseos. Eton. 1762. 4.* or Kirehneri Prosodia Grceca. Basil. 1644 . 4. are of great assistance; much knowledge also may be derived from the remarks which Valckenaer, Toup, Brunck, Musgrave, Porson, Hermann, &c. have made upon the Greek Poets, in correcting the defects of these works. Much also has been already observed in the first portion of this Grammar, e. g, that an; in the aor. i. act. of verbs λ μ v p are long, thus the partici¬ ples and other words in as, which have the genitive in αι /ros, are long in the last syllable; again, that in the termination ασι the penultima is long, &c. M % ■ ■ ' 5-^ . f f .'ft.· ,' II. Of the Accents. The acute ( ; ), and the circumflex ( ) only, ^e here considered; since the grave ( ) is not expressed in * [Of which an enlarged editiori, almost deserving to be considered a new work, replete with valuable information on metrical subjects, has been published by an eminent English scholar, Edward Maltby, D. D. Cambridge, 1815.] 958 Appendix· Of the Accents. writing; for the stroke similar to it on the last syllable of words in a continued discourse, is properly the acute, which also enters again when one of these words is at the end of a proposition, or of a sentence before a period or a colon (according to Reiz, before a comma also*), e. g. εστι θεός, but θεός yap ημΊν προυσημηνε. But the circumflex also is properly founded on the acute, since it consists of the union of the acute and the grave, on a syllable composed of two vowels. In accentuation the words are called in Greek : Oxytona , which have the acute, 0^9 τόνος , on the last syllable, e. g. θεός, τετυφώς · ; Paroxytona , which have it on the penultima, as τετυμμενος. Proparoxytona , which have it on the antepenul- tima, άνθρωπος , ayy έλος. Perispomena, περισπώμενα, which have the circum¬ flex on the last syllable, as φιλώ , τιμώ , πους. Properispomena, which have the circumflex on the penultima, πρ^μα. Barytona , are all words which have no accent on the last syllable; because, according to the custom of the grammarians, the syllable which is marked neither with the acute, nor the circumflex, has the grave, /3a- pvv τόνον ; thus the Paroxytona τύπτω , τετυμμενος , Pro - paroxytona άνθρωπος , ayy έλος, and the Properispomena πρ^μα, φιλουμαι , are Barytons . The following are words, or rather monosyllables without any tone : OX) (ου /e, ονχ, but ουχί) ώς, εί, (but ώσεί) εν, (but ενί) εις ( ες ), εκ (εξ) and the nominative of the article ο, η, o\, cu. Ου , however, at the conclusion of * Reiz. de Inclin. Acc. p. 46 . 959 Appendix. Of the Accents . a proposition, receives the acute, ov , and similarly the other words, which have been adduced, when they stand after the word which depends upon them, 0eos &, κακών ίξ. The article is made acute by many, when it stands as a pronoun, or 6 for on, 6 yap ήλθε θοάς en νηας Αχαιών h . Obs. ώς in the sense of ‘ thus’, receives the acute, e. g. ως ς’πτών. In ούκουν , according to its two senses, that syllable which has the predominant sense, receives the accent, ονκουν , ‘ thus then’, ούν, ονκουν , ' not then’, ovk. (r) 2. With respect to the place of the accent, it is to be observed generally: a. The acute can stand only over the last, the penultima, or antepenultima; if the last syllable is long by nature, the acute must be put over the penultima. For a long syllable is equal to two short ones (has two morce); when, therefore, it is expressed by two short vowels, the penultima may be considered as the ante¬ penultima, beyond which the accent cannot be thrown back, e. g. Θήρα , Oeepa. b. The circumflex unites the acute and grave in one syllable (''not'') which is then formed by contraction, or is considered as a contraction, e. g. φιλώ from φιλβω, θαύμα from θάϋμα Ion. θώνμα. μάλλον , 7 rpaypa, as μάάλλον, 7 rpaaypa. Hence arise the following rules: a. The circumflex stands only over a syllable long by nature, not by position, which may be considered as formed by the confluence of two consonants, e. g. in ττραγμα the a is long of itself, not through Ί μ, as in 7 Γ€ 7 τράχα, Treirpdya. On the other hand ταγμα, has the acute, and not the circumflex, from τεταχα. Thus like¬ wise άρχβ, but ήρχον (ζαρχον.) h Reiz. de Inclin. Acc. p. 5. p p 2 960 Appendix. Of the Accents. β. The circumflex can only stand over a syllable made long by contraction, where, in the resolution of it into two syllables, the former would have the acute: thus φϊΧβω, φιΧώ. φιΧεουσι, φϊΧουσι , but φιΧεε. φιΧει. Only in words compounded with nouns in — oos contr. _ ov?, the contracted syllable receives no circumflex, when the first of the resolved syllables has the acute, as άνοος, άνόου, COTltr. ανους, ανου, άγχίνον for α^χινοου. Also the accusative of the feminine in — ω, in the third declension retains the acute, as ηχόα , ηχω, not ηχω. On the contrary, the adjectives in —eos contr. ους receive the circumflex on the final syllable, as χρνσβος, χρυσους. • * * * j ^ , ·>Η « ) . j t . * * i ' y. Since the acute must stand over the penultima, when the last syllable is long, e. g. ήμερα, Θήρα (except in words in which the last has the tone,) it follows from β, that the long penultima can never receive the circumflex, when the last is long; for otherwise it would be formed of the grave and acute, 6eepa. On the contrary, the circumflex must stand over the long penultima, when the last syllable is short, or long only by position ; for in this case, in the resolution, the acute stands over the antepenultima, and the circumflex is formed from the union of the acute of the antepenul- tima, with the grave of the penultima, e. g. μάάΧΧον μάΧΧον. Thus likewise, αυΧαξ, αυΧάκος . Blit κηρνξ, κηρΰκος (not κηρυζ). The circumflex can stand only over the penultima, and last syllable, but never over the antepenultima; for in the resolution of the antepenultima into two syllables, the first of which has the acute, the acute would fall upon the fourth syllable from the end, which is contrary 961 Appendix. Of the Accents. to 2. a.; thus π pay μα (? rpάayμa) πράγματος, not πράγμα¬ τος, ( πράα*γματος .) Obs. Exceptions are, 1. to 2. fl. and b. y. the terminations at and ot, which in accentuation are considered as short, and therefore, in these, the acute may fall on the antepenultima, and the circumflex on the penultima, e. g. άνθρωποι, βχιΰναι πώλοι , προφηται, ποιησαι Inf. Yet the optative terminations at and ot always have the acute on the penultima, e. g. ποιησαι, αμννοι, as well as the adverb οίκοι , to distinguish it from oi οϊκοι. 2 . to 2. b. y. the Attic terminations a>s, ων in the second and third declensions, Mei/eXews·, πόλεων, άν^εων, and the Ionic genitive in εω, in the first declension, νεηνίεω, δεσττότεω, because here εως, etas by Synizesis make but one syllable. 3. The proper place of the accent, according to which the words are oxytona, par oxytona, proparoxy- tona, or perispomena, properispomena is best learnt by careful observation, or from a good Lexicon. But the alteration of a word by the declension, conjugation, or composition, causes an alteration also, or transposition of the accent, according to the following rules: a The principal alterations arise from the nature of the accent as explained under 2. e. g. Μονσα, Movers, ί χι § ν α, όχίόνην, άνθρωποί, άνθρωπον, fyc. σώμα, σώματος, and 2. a, and 2. b. y. b In words of the first and second declension, which are oxytona, the circumflex takes place of the acute in the genitive and dative singular, dual, and plural, τιμή, τιμής, τιμή, τιμάν, τιμαΐί. ποιητή, ποιητον, ποιντν, ποιητών, ποιηταϊν. καλά, κ«λο5, καλώ, καλών, κα- λοΤν. The Attic forms in — ως, in the second declension are excepted, λέων, λεω. νεακ, νεω. c. The genitive plural of the first declension has always the circumflex on the last syllable, in whatever 962 Appendix. Of the Accents. place the accent may stand in the rest of the cases, e, g. Μ ουσαι, Μουσών (from Μουσεων.) οι αρόται, των άροτών. ίχιδναι, εχι^νών. Except only the feminine proparoxytona of adjectives in 09 , e. g. ay ία, ay ίων , ζενη, ζενων, and the Words χρηστης, χρηστών, χλουνη 9 , χλουνων, ετησίαι , ετήσιων. d. In the third declension, disyllable, and polysylla¬ ble nouns retain'the accent throughout, upon the sylla¬ ble, on which it is in the nominative, except when the nature of the accent requires a transposition, e. g. κόραξ, κόρακες, κόραζι, but κοράκων. ε\7τις 3 ε\7Γΐ$ος. Hence OXy~ tone, adjectives and participles in the feminine, leave the circumflex on the penultima, e. g. ηδυς, ηδεϊα. τε Ζ τυφώς , τετυφνια. ]VIonosyllables, on the contraiy, in the genitive and dative of all the numbers have it on the termination of the case, e. g. μην , μηυός, μψί , μηνοιν , μηνών , μησί. πυρ, 7 τυρός, ττυρί. But the nominative, accu¬ sative, and vocative, retain it on the same syllable, μήνα , μήνες, χειρ, χειρός, χειρ'ι, χειρα, χειρες. The same takes place in words which suffer syncope, as τ τατηρ. ττατερος 3 but πατρός , άνηρ , άνερος , άνδρός ; likewise in yvvr], yvvaiKo 9 , yvvaiKi , yvvcuKa. Ovya^p has the accent on the nom. sing, on the penultima throughout, 6vya- τόρος, Ovya τερι, Qvy ατερα } but by syncope on the last syllable, θυyaτpός y Ovy ατρί, only in the genitive and dative, except Θυγατράσ*, but in the rest of the cases on the antepenultima, OvyaTpa, &υyaτpες 3 except in the gen. plur. Ovy ατρώυ. See 77· See p. 90. Participles are excepted, as θείς , θεντος. ών 3 όντος. δου 9 , $όντος. Again, 7ταΊς, παιδός, 8$c. but genit. plur. τταίδων. όμως, δμωος 3 but δμώων. ους, ωτός 3 has ωτων from ουάτων. €. Nouns in ηρ 3 which have ep in the vocative, are then paroxytona 3 or proparox. when they were previously 963 Appendix. Of the Accents . oxytona or paroxytona, as ανηρ , avep . πατήρ , π arep . θνγάτηρ, θό 7 ατερ. In ευδαίμων neuter and VOCat. ευδαι- μου. αυτάρκης, αίταρκες. Σωκράτης, άκρατες the accent stood on the nominative masc. and fern, on the penul- tima, on account of the long syllable, f. When a word receives a prefix, as in composi¬ tion, or with the augment, the accent is commonly thrown back upon the antepenultima, if the nature of the final syllable admits of it, as o'So's, σύνοδος, πρόσοδος. \ό 7 ος, &λο 7 ος. σοφός, φιλόσοφος. Thus also τύπτω, €τνπτον, τ€τυφα. ,,· On the contrary, the rule is, that verbals in τος and η, adjectives in ης, in the third declension, the compounds of ποιεω, αγω, φέρω, ούρος, ’ερ 7 ον, adjec tives in «os, and diminutives, patronymics, and other derivative substantives in is have the accent on the last syllable, as πολτός, επιμονή, 7 ραφη, επιγραφή. άληθης, ασφαλής. ά 7 αλματοποιός, λοχα Ί ός, κυναγός, παιδαγωγός, έπιφορά, διαφορά, πυλουρός, ΟΓ πυλωρός. όβριμοερ 7 ος (but πάρερ 7 ος, περίερ 7 ος.) η Ί εμονικός, νομοθετικός, κεραμίς, νησίς, Αητωίς, βασιλίς. Thus likewise substantives in μός, which come from the perf. pass, σπασμός. Verbal adjectives in τόος are always paroxytona, as εύρετεος, πρακτέος, from evprpraiy πβπρακται. h. In verbs this rule obtains chiefly, that in disylla¬ bles, the accent is regularly on the penultima, in trisyl¬ lable and polysyllable verbs or forms, on the antepenul¬ tima, when the nature of the final syllable does not prevent this · thus τΰπτομεν, τ ύπτουσι, τύπτοιμι, τυπτοιτον (but τυπτοίτην) r ότυφα, τετύφαμεν. In compounds of mono¬ syllable or disyllable verbs or forms, with prepositions, the accent is usually thrown back upon the preposition, 964 Appendix . Of the Accents. \ e. g. avaye {aye), πρόσφερε. εΊσφρες, επίσης. The prin¬ cipal exceptions are as follows : а. The temporal augment retains the accent, as άνάπτω, άνηπτον. προσέχω, προσειχον· β. The circumflexed futures §. 17B. 179- 188. i » i ' \ ft jI] f j y. The aorist. 2. in the infin. and participle act. and in the sing, imperat. middle has the tone on the last syllable, ε’ιπειν, εύρειν, ειπων , ευρών, yεvoυ J \αθου (but προσ - yevov, επιΧάθου ). Thus also the imperatives είπε, εΧθε , ενρε, and in Attic Χάβε, The infinitive aor. 2. mid. has the accent on the penultima, Χαθεσθαι, Χαβεσθαι. ' _ ; ' ; ' . *· * f , s , Λ[;- t ι ξ 1 5. The conjunctive aor. l. and 2. pass, have the circumflex on the termination, τυφθώ. б. All infinitives in ναι have the accent on the penul¬ tima, 7 *ετι ιφεναι, τυφθηναι, eay η ναι, τιθεναι, ισταναι , Si$o- ναι , but not the old, or Ionic infinitive, in — εμεναι, εΧθεμεναι , πινεμεναι. ζ. The infinitive and participle of the perf. pass, have the accent always on the penultima, τετυφθαι, re- τυμμενος. Only when in the participle an abbreviation precedes, or a letter is left out, the accent is drawn back, as εΧηΧάμενος, δεμένος, φθίμενος , for εΧηΧασμενος, Se^ypevos, εφθιμενος. ΎΊΐΟΟΙ. Μ. ρ. 294 * η. Participles in ως and els have the accent always • it . . on the last syllable. i * - r f , f 4. Besides the case mentioned 3. f the accent is also thrown back, when an oxytone loses the last accented vowel by apostrophus, in which case the last syllable which is left, receives the acute, except in pre¬ positions, and the conjunction αλλά. Thus rd $είν επη Appendix. Of the Accents. * OD for τα όεινά ετη. των τόνων τωλοΖσιν ήμ'ιν πάντα τα-γαθ οι θεοί, ίθΤτά Ύ αθά. V των ίμών ««V τϊν ίμερον τόκνων—Ζσχε 5 Soph. Aj. 542. φήμ’ β 7 ω· ™>Φ“ «** ταλα'ι’ ετη Soph. ltd. Τ. 298. Only in the case adduced §. 38. Obs. l. §. 44. Obs. 2. the accent of the preposition is thrown back, 7 rap Ζηνί. icay yovv. κάτ φάλαρα, άμ φόνον, αν νεκνας . In prepositions also, on account of an abbreviation, the acute is thrown back from the last syllable to the penultima, when they are put instead of verbs com¬ pounded of them, and the verb είμΐ, e. g. ου τοι ετι oeo?, for ετεστι. τ τάρ 0μοι Ύ ε και άλλοι, ίνθ’ ίνι μέν φιλότψ, for τάρεισιν, ενεστι. άνα, for άναστηθι*· On the contrary, when a verb loses its first syllable, the acute is removed from the syllable dropt, to the next following, εφασαν, εφαν, φαν. εβαν, βαν. If the syllable remaining is long by nature, then it receives the cir¬ cumflex, εβη, όφη, βη, φη· Enclitics. 5. The following words : the pron. indefinit. τ«, τι, ‘ any one, any thing’, through all its cases, as well as ToG, TW, for τινός, τιν'ι ; the oblique cases of the personal pronouns μοΖ, μοί, με, σου, σοί, σε, ου, οί, ε, μιν, ν'ιν, σφεων, σφ'ισι, σφεας, σφό ; the pres, indie, of ειμί and φημ'ι, ex¬ cept in the second person sing.; the indefinite adverb τως, πη , τοι, του, τοθί, τοθεν, τοτί (to distinguish them from the interrogative adverbs τω%, ‘ how’ ? τη, τοί, τον, τοθι, ■πόθεν, τότε) and finally the particles τω, τε, τοι, θην, ye, κε (κεν) νν or νυν (for ουν) τερ, pa, are commonly consi- 1 Reiz. de Incl. Acc. p. 40. k Reiz. p. 38. 126 . 966 Appendix. Of the Accents. dered, when they have no emphasis upon them, nor are separated by the sense from the preceding’ word, in the same light as if they were united with the preceding word, and formed a part of it, and thus they lose their own proper accent. If now this word preceding be an oxy- tone, or paroxytonum , or perispomenon , its accent serves for that of these words ; only the acute on the last syllable does not take the form of the grave, e. g. άνηρ τις, φιλώ σε, avSpa μου. The disyllables only of these words, as σφίσι , 7 rore', ποθεν , εστί, retain their accent after a paroxytonum. If, however, the prece¬ ding word be a proparoxytonum or properispomenon , these words throw back their accent as an acute on the last syllable of that word, except when the last syllable of such a proparoxyt. or properisp. is long by position, e. g. άνθρωπος τε, έσωσα σε , σωμά μου ; but κατηΧιφ μου, όμηλιξ εστί. Thus unaccented words also receive an accent before these words εκ τίνος, εϊ τις ; but not ού and ει before είμί , εστί. This is called inclinatio tofii , ε^κλισις, and hence these words are called Encliticce. Yet the personal pronouns when they are governed of a preposition, are not f inclined’, e. g. παρά σφίσιν , περί σου. Hence when several enclitics succeed each other, the preceding always takes the accent of the following, e. g. 6i7 τερ τις σε με φησί ποτέ , όΐκός τις εστί μοί που. Thus many enclitics occur also in composition with other words before them, ούτε , μήτε, ουτις , τοίνυν ; §ε and θε only in composition, ο&·, τοΊόσδε, είθε 1 . . t . . ; t. . , . Obs. It is evident that these enclitics retain their accent, when they do not stand after a word, but at the beginning, after a period, colon, comma, which takes place when there is an emphasis on them, e. g. σου yap κράτος εστι μ^ιστον. 1 Herm.de Emend. Rat. Gr. Gr. p. 67 sqq. Appendix· Of the Accents. 967 6. The third person ίστι is accented accoiding to its different senses, as it constitutes either the copula, and a part of the predicate, or has an independent significa¬ tion in the sense of ‘ to exist’. In the first case it is an enclitic, and is written according to the rules above- mentioned, e. g. θεοί έστιν ό πάντ a κυβερνώ v, άνθρωποί ίστι ζώοκ οίπουν. But in the other case, it receives the accent on the first syllable ίστι, e.'g. ίστι θεοί, ‘there exists a God’. This is always the case where ίστι begins the proposition, or when it is immediately after dXXd, ei, καί, μ ίν, m4, oCk, «, το-ντο, or., «5. In questions both cases may happen, e. g. τί S' ίστιν ; ‘ but what is it . and m rt? ovtos εστιν ; 4nastrophe. 7. When a preposition is placed after a word, which it governs, and ought therefore to stand before it, the acute of the preposition is removed from the last syllable to the penultima, e. g. eXos κότα βοσκομενάων. τηε ίμίβ ■φνγηί πίρι. Tod θεοί πάρα, μάχη ίνι κνοιανείρρ. ύφθαλμών άπο. τω ίπι ™λλ’ ίμό Ί ησα. The grammarians except άνά and διά, although the reason which they assign, viz. that otherwise ava would be confounded wit t e v0l - iL live of άναξ, or with &«, ‘ arise’, and δία with Δ«α the accusative of Ζεύε does not seem to have much weig . There is no better foundation for the rule, that the ana- strophe does not take place when another word conies between the case of the preposition and the preposition itself e «■ δβ, τΑ δ· ίπί Ύνοείοηε άρτο. If the preposition stands between a substantive and the adjective belong¬ ing to it, the anastrophe only takes place when Herrn. de Emend. Gr. Gr, p. 84 *qq- m I 968 Appendix . Anastrophe. substantive stands before the preposition, e. g. νηός em r * γλαφυρής, but not when the adjective precedes ; e. g. εμοίς €7rt γουνασι , γλαφυρής eirl νηός. For properly speak¬ ing, the substantive only is governed by the preposition; the adjective agrees with the substantive 0 . n Reiz. de Inclin. Acc. p. 122 sq. Herm. de Em.Gr. Gr. p. 101 sqq. iK;r: WQQ i) • ·· · ;·»'»/£ I 1 ) > Η Ιθ<ί ’·'!(: f αί/Γ.Ιϋ» I. INDEX OF GREEK WORDS AND PHRASES. r " et — - u ω — v ■ A. a and e interchanged §.21. §. 27. ■ §. 22. §. 22 . §. 23. a for at iEol. Att. §. 26 . a in declens. after a vowel or p. §. 67 . Obs. 1. a Dor. termin. of genit. sing. 1. decl. §. 67 . Obs. 4. a for —— ης 1. decl. §. 67· Obs. 5. ά acc. 3. decl. for ea §. 81. Note. a for Bt’ a §. 477· d. άγάγωμι §· 207· 10. άγαζομαι §. 221. άγα'ιομαι §. 221. άγαμα 1 defect, v. §. 221. άγανακτεΤν τινι §. 403. c. άγαομαι §. 221. αγαπάν with dativ. §. 403. c. _ accus. §· 403. Obs. 1. _partic. §. 549· P· 833. άγασθαί τινά τίνος, ‘ for the sake of §. 345. a. - -· ■ - Tti/o? §. 373. Obs. Tivi §« 403. c. άγηγερατο §. l68. Obs. 2. άγη°χ α §· 183. 3. 221. αγω· άγκρισις for ανάκρισή §. 38. Obs. 1. άγω, άγνυμι defect. V. §. 22Ε άγω, ‘I bring’, def. v. §. 221. άγων Ιππέας ‘with §. 557» άίελφός τινι and τίνος §. 386. άδικεΐν with part. §. 554. att\v adv.in §. 255. hi άΰην ελάν Τίνος §. 330. ά'&ητεις §. 223. αν^αύιάι άδωρος χρημάτων §. 317·' άείρω §. 222. άερσνι §. 222. αειρω. άηΰω, — ous for — ων, §; 83. 4. άθάρη §. 67· Obs. 1. Not. Άθόώ §.- 70. Obs. 1. at pronunciation §. l6. at elided in καί §. 53. Obs. at and et interch* §. 27. η - §. 25. ονος ai ιγατός §. 215. 1. Ιγγελεω §. 178. ρ· 21ο. αιδεΤσ-θαι with accus. §. 408. αΐΰεσομαι §. 173. αϊδο?, ά\όι §· 92 · 2. αϊδόσδε §. 259- Obs. 2. 379- α’ίθρη §· 67 . Obs. 1. Not. ^ αινεΤν τινά τίνος, 1 for the sake of, §, 345. a. 970 INDEX. αίρβω, def. v. §. 221. αίρέΐν τινά τίνος §. 346. a IpeTv with genit. for accus. §. 366. Obs. f t ft , αίρω §. 222. - αις /Έοΐ. termin. of particip. aor. 1. §. 39· §· 19^· αισθάνεσθαι with genit. §. 327· Obs. 1. αισθάνεσθαι with partic. §. 548. 4. p. 830. αισθάνομαι def. V. §. 222. άίσσειν with accus. §. 417. αίσχύνεσθαι' τινα §. 408. -- τινι §. 403. c. αίτειν τινά τι §. 411. 4. άιτιάσθαί τινά τίνος ‘ on account of’ §. 345. a. άιτιάσθαί with double accus. §. 413. αίτιον ην οί Α ακεόαιμ. §. 307. αϊώ for αιώνα §. 73· 2. Obs, άκα-χημενος §. 222. άκάχμενος §. 222. άκηκοα §. l68. Obs. 2. άκη-χεύαται §. 198. 5. άκουειν * to hear’, with genit. §. 327· Obs. 2. άκοΰειν 1 to obey’, with genit. and dat. §. 340. Comp. ib. Obs. άκούειν τίνος for εκ τ. §. 374. ακούω for ηκουσα or άκηκοα §. 504. 2 . ακούω with partic. §. 549- 1· άκρατης with genit. §. 339· 1. άλάλκειν τινός and τινί §. 331. c, Obs. αλγβΐι/ τίνος ‘for the sake of’ §. 345. - τι §. 408. [tf. άλΰησκω def. v. §. 222. άλεγΐζε tv with genit. §. 326. άλείς, άληναι §. 232. Obs. αλειτειν , αλίτβΓι/ τινα §. 419· 6'. άλεξω def. ν. §. 222. άλεύασθαι §. 182. Obs. 1. άληλεσμενος §. 168 . Obs. 2. άληλιμμαι §. 168 . Obs. 2. αλι ς with genit. §. 333. d. άλίσκομαι §. 222. ΆλκειΒης §. 99· 1· Obs. άλκί §. 92. 2. άλλα for η after μάλλον §. 455. Obs. 1. b. άλλάττειν τί τίνος §. 342. or αντί τίνος , οι* ύττερ τίνος , or τ τρός τι §. 343. άλλάττειν τί τινι §, 343. Obs. 2. άλλοθι γης §. 357. άλλοι and οί άλλοι §. 268 . άλλοΐος with genit. §. 344. άλλος δε after ο μεν , for ο δε §. 288. f. άλλος άλλοθεν with verbs in the plur. §. 301. b. άλλος with genit. §. 344. . άντί τίνος §. 344. Obs. 1. -in the neuter, when it refers to a masc. or fem. in interrog. §. 439· Obs. 2. άλλότι §. 487· 8. i άλλότριος with genit. §. 344. άλλύειν for άναλύειν §. 38. Obs. 1. άλύσκειν τινός §. 331. b. άλύσκω fut. άλύζω §. 171· Obs. άλώναί τίνος , ‘ on account of ’, §.346. άμα with particip. §. 556. 6. άμαρτάνειν τίνος §. 368. άμαρτάνω def. v. §. 222. άμβαίνειν for άναβαίνειν §. 38. Obs. 1. άμβλίσκω §. 222. ; * άμε , άμε , άμμε §. 145. Obs. 8. άμείβειν τί τίνος §. 342. άμείβεσθαι with accus. §. 4θ6. 5. άμείνων §. 135. άμελεΤν with genit. §. 326. INDEX. άμες, άμες, άμμε* §· 145. Obs. 5. άμίν, άμιν, άμιν, άμμι §. 145. Obs. 7. άμμένειν for άναμένειν §. 38. Obs. 1. άμνημονεΤν with accusat. §. 325. Obs. άμός §. 149. άμύνειν τίνος and άπό τίνος §. 331. c. Obs. άμύνειν τινός and περί τίνος §. 331. c. Obs. άμύνειν τί τινι §. 387· άμφί constr. §. 583. -— οι άμφί §. 271· .— άμφ\ τάρβει §. 402. Obs. άμφιαξω §. 232. ρ. 336. άμφιβαλλειν τί τινι and τινα §. 425. άμφιέννυμι §. 232. ενννμι. άμφιεννύναι with double acc. §· 412. 7. άμφισβητεΐν τινί τίνος, ‘ on account of' §. 345. a.' άμφκα §. 232. ρ. 336. άμ φονον §. 38. Obs. 1. άμφω indecl. §. 138. Obs. άν for άνά §. 44. Obs. 2. _ άν genit. plur. 1. decl. §. 67 . Obs. 3. — άν genit. plur. 3. decl. §. 74. 5. _ av 3. p. perf. pi. for — ασι §. 194. 3. Obs. — for — ησαν 3. p. pi· §· 207· 7· av with the indie, imperf. perf. plusq. aor. §. 509. av with the infin. §. 597- «· -- part. §. 597· b. - indie, ‘to be wont' §. 598. a . i to be able’ §. 598 b. — with the indie, pres, impel*. §. 598. c. 971 άν with the indie, fut. §. 598. d. doubled §. 599* _omitted with the imperf. after εΐ §. 508. Obs. 1. av omitted with the indieat. §. 509. Obs. av omitted with the optat. §. 514. Obs. av omitted with the conjunct. §. 516. 1. av omitted in questions §. 517* p. 764. -conj. after rela- tiv. §. 527· Obs. 2. av omitted with the optativ. mod. potetitialis §. 528. av abundant after Yva , οφρα , όπως §. 520. Obs. 3. άν after εί with opt. §. 525. 7. a· -relat. with opt. §. 527. Obs. 2 . ava voc. v. άναξ §. 732. Obs. - for άνάστηθι §. 205. Obs. 5. άνά prep, constr. §. 579· άναβεβαμένος §. 225. άναβλεπειν τινί §. 393. άναηκάζειν with a double acc. §.413. Obs. 4. άνακαλεΐν τον ευεργέτην §. 266. άνακως ’έ-χειν τινός §. 326. άνάλίσκω def. V. §. 222. άνάλωσα , not άνηλωσα §. l66. 1. Obs. 2. §. 222. άναμιμνησκειν with double acc. §. 325. Obs. άναμναν with double acc. §. 413. άνάριθμος with genit. §. 317- άνάσσειν . .— §· 337· with dativ. §. 338. a. άναστηναί τινι §. 393. Άνάχαρσις , gen. — ιος and — ιίος §. 72. Obs. 1. άνΰάνειν τινι §· 383. Obs. J 972 INDEX. άνΖάνων def. v. §. 223. άνΰραητόΰεσσι §. 92. 3. άνεσην §. 285. b. άνεΐμεν, άνεΐσαν §. 206 . II. 3. άνέχεσθαι with partic. §. 549. ρ. 832. ■ ■ ·- ■ with genit. ρ. 480. άνέωγα, άνεωγμαι, άνεωξα augment §. 168 . Obs. 1. άνεωγα intransit. §. 494. άνεωγον imperf. §. 494. άνηκουστεΐν τίνος §. 340. τινί ib. Obs. ανηρ declin. §. 77· Ρ· 94. ανηρ for ωνηρ, ο ανηρ §. 55. Obs. ανηρ * άντρες * Αθηναίοι, ανηρ στρα¬ τιώτης §. 430. 7· άνθεων, not ανθών §. 79· Obs. 4. ανθρωττος ύητογραμματευς §. 430. 7· ανθ ’ ων §. 480. c . άνοΐσαι §. 253. φέρω, ανταν with genit. ‘ to meet with §. 363. άνταν with acc. ‘ to meet’ §. 382. Obs. αντάξιος with genit. §. 341. άντε’χεσθαί τίνος §. 365. — αντί Dor. for — ασι §. 191 · Obs. §. 194. 3. αντ /prep. constr. §. 57 2 . -with verbs 4 to exchange’ §. 343. after άλλος §. 344. Obs. 1. -after a compar. §. 450. Obs. 1. άντιάξειν τινός ( to meet with §.363. ■■■ ■ Til'd, ‘to meet’ §. 382. Not. άντιλαμβάνεσθαι with genit. §. 365. άνΰσας §. 557· άνωγω §. 223. άνωϊστος §. 253. φέρω, άνω'χθι §. 219· IV. 3. a. άξιος with genit. §. 341. — αο contr. in a Dor. §. 47. - genit. sing. 1 . decl, §. 67 · Obs. 4. — αος Dor. —§. 25. 47· άηταις άρσενος γόνου §. 317» άτταλλάσσειν τινά τίνος §. 331. b. άπειθεΐν τίνος §. 340. άττειληθεις §. 232. Obs. άπεΐναί τινι §. 377. Obs. 1. άττεκτόνηκα §. 189. Obs. 4, άητεσσοΰα §. 26 . άττέ'νειν τινός §. 331. c. Obs. άττε-χθάνομαι §. 223. άητηλαυε §. 170. Obs. άπίκαται, άττίκατο §. 198. 5. αητό prep, constr. §. 573. αητό γλωσσης , -χειρός, for γλωσ- σ» 7 , \€ιρί §. 401. Obs. 2. with pass, for υητό §. 490. for εν §. 596. an τογράφειν and — εσθαι differ. §. 492. C. άητο’όε^εσθαι with genit. §· 374. Obs. άητοΖέω τοσοΰτον §. 332. an ΓοΰίΒοσθαί τι τίνος §. 342. αητοί ώράσκειν τινά §. 407* Obs. άητοκρίνεσθαί τι for ητρος τι §. 413. Obs. 4. άητολαυειν with genit. and accus. §. 361. ρ. 507. άητολειητεσθαι τίνος §. 336. Άπολλω §. 73. 2. Obs. άητολαυειν with a double acc. §. 413. an τομά'χεσθαι τινα and τινι §. 407· Obs. άητορεΐν τίνος §. 330. άητοστερεΐν τίνος §. 331. α. — - τινά τι §. 412. άητοστρεφεσθαί τινα §. 377· Obs. 1. άητουρας §. 223. άητόχρη formed. §. 254. χρη. άηττεσθαί τίνος §. 365. άρα at the beginning of a sentence §. 605. INDEX. 973 apa, ap ου’ §. 609 · άραιρηκα §. l68. Obs. 2. cip — apa §.224. άρ^εΐν τίνος §. 330. άρεσκειν Tivt and τινα §. 383. άρεσκεσθαί τινι §. 383. 403. άρεσκω def. V. §. 223. άρηρα §. 168 . Obs. 2. §. 224. άρηράμενος §. 224. " Αρης declin. ρ. 103. αριστενειν with genit. §. 370. β· άρκεΤσθαί τινι §. 403. άρμόζειν and — όττειν §. 29* άρμόττειν τινι and ττρος τι §. 386. 4. Obs. αρπάζω form. §. 174. 5. άρσαι , άρσω §. 173. ρ. 2θ6. αρχειν τη/ο'ς ‘to rule’ §. 337· — - τινι §. 338. ο. αρχειν , ά,ρχεσθαι τίνος , ‘ to begin §. 351. από τίνος ib. ^χ € σ0α/, ‘ to begin’, with partic. §. 549. 8. p. 834. αρχόμενος, ‘ firstly’; §. 557. a pus def. v. §. 224. — ας, ατος Ion. — εος §. 84. 1· — ας for —εας ν .—εΰς §. 82. 5. *Ασαναία §. 29· άσεβειν with accus. §. 419- 6. _ ασι 3 ρ. plur. pres, of ν. in — μι §. 205. Obs. 2. άσσα §. 151. Obs. 2. άσσα, αττα for ατ/να §· 153. Obs. 2. άσσον §. 132. άσσοτερω §. 1ο6. αστ εος andαστeως §. 72. 1.3. §. 85. Obs. 2. _ασω contr. —ώ fut. §.178. Obs. 2. a. —αται 3. ρ. plur. perf. for — νται §. 198. 5. §. 210. 1. ; •VOL. II. are with partic. §. 568. ατερος §. 56. Obs. 2. άτιμάζειν τινά τίνος §. 331. Λ. — ατο 3 . ρ. plur. plusq. for— ντο §. 198. 5. §. 210. 1. αττα §. 151. Obs. 2. §. 487· 5. αν pronunciation of §. 17* αυ and ω interch. §. 27· Αυγ^Υαόι/ς §* 100. Obs. 1. αυξάνω def. ν. §. 224. αυτίκα with partic. §. 5ο6. 6. αυτός decl. §. 146. 6 αυτός §. 268. ο αυτός with dativ. §. 386. αυτόν? ι'τπτοισι §. 400. f. αυτός in genit. with pron.poss. §. 466. 1. αυτός usage of §. 467* — is ipse §.472. 10. αυτός with relative following §. 472. 11. δεύτερος αυτός §. 472. 12. αύτοτερος — οτατος §. .133- Obs. 3. άφαιρεΤν τινι τι §. 412. Obs. άφαιρέΐσθαί τινά τι §. 412. άφάρτεροι ρ. 163. άφεΐσαν §. 206. II. 3. άφηλικεστερος §. 129* 6. άφικνεΐσθαί τι for είς τι, ιερός τι §. 418, 3. α. άφίεσθαι τίνος §. 367· άφίοιντο §. 208. Obs. 2. άφνειός with genit. §. 329* — αω contr. in α Dor. §. 47* — α'ων genit. pi. 1. decl. §. 67 . Obs. άωρτο §. 185. 1. ί 3 · B. β pronunciation of §.18. 1. β and η exchanged §. 28. β - δ -§* 28. Q Q 974 INDEX. β and φ exchanged §. 32. β before μ changed into μ §. 37. 4. β inserted §. 40. βη for βασιλεύ §. 33. — βα for — βηθι from βαίνω §. 225. βαΐμεν §. 225. Obs. [Obs. βαίνειν with part. §. 55g. — - with accus. §. 417. βαίνω def. v. §. 225. βαλεω §. 173. p. 215. βαλλησω from βάλλω §. 178. Obs. βάλλω def. v. §. 226'. [2. βαρύνω def. v. §. 226. βασιλης §. 48. Obs. βασιλεύειν with genit. §. 337· βαστάζω, aor. 1. εβαστάχθην §. 182. Obs. 3. βάτην §. 225. βεβάσθαι §. 225. βαίνω . βεβαυΐα §. 183. 7· Obs. βεβηκει §. 164. Obs. 1. βεβληκα §. 183. 4. βεβληκει §. 164. Obs. 1. βεβοληατο, βεβολημενος §. 226. βεβρωτες §. 226. βιβρωσκω. βείομαι , βεομαι §. 225. ρ. 319· βελτερος, βελτίων §. 135. βεντιστος §. 29· βεσμαι, βερ §. 225. ρ. 319- Β ερενίκη §.32. /3/α circumlocution §. 430. 6. βιβρωσκω §. 226. βιηθε'ις, βιησατο, βιησεται §. 174. Β/λιππος §. 32. £5. /3ίο« §. 225. βιυμεσθα, §. 225. ρ. 320. βλακοίτερο<: §. 129· 6. βλατττειν τινά μεγάλα §. 406. Obs. 1. βλαστάνω §. 226. βλείαην, βλεΤο §. 226. βάλλω, βλεττειν φόβον §. 417. Obs. 2. βλημενος, βλησθαι §. 164. ρ. 202. βούλομαι def. ν. §. 226. βους decl. §. 78. Obs. 2. βρίθειν with genit. §. 330. βρε τα?, βρόταϊ. βρέτη, βρετεων §. 84. Obs. 1. Β^ι/γβς §. 32. βυσσός Ιοη. §. 29. Γ. 7 for the digamma, ρ. 19. 7 and β exchanged §. 28. 7 — δ -- §. 28. 7 — κ - ρ. 31. 77» 7 Κ > 7χ> pronunciation, §. IS. 2. γάλα, γάλακτος §. 72, 12. Obs. 1. γάλως, gen. — ωος and — ω §. 70· Obs. 3. 7α/Λ6ω def. ν. §. 227. Comp. §.173. ρ. 215. γάρ after το μεγίστου §. 283 . position §. 605. γεγαα* γεγαμεν, γεγαως, — ω ' ? §. 227- γεγάκω §. 227· γεγενητο §. l64. Obs. 1. γεγόνει §. 164. Obs. 1. γεγράφηκα ρ. 229. 4 . (vid. errata.) γεγωνω §. 223. 7 είνομαι §. 227* γελος and γελως §. 88. γελων for γέλωτα §. 70. Obs. 3. γεμειν with genit. §. 330. γευτο §. 227· 7eVio obsolete verb §. 227. γεραίτερος §. 127. Obs. 1. 717 omitted §. 281 . 2. γηράσκω §. 227. γίγνεσθαι ΰι εγθρας §. 580 . e. -— with genit. §. 355. ---- 1 to belong*, §. 371. 1. γίγνεσθαι with genit. ‘ not um esse*, §. 375 . INDEX. 975 γίγνεσθαι with dative part, γέγονέ μοι ηΖομένω §. 301. e. [l. γιγνωσκειν with genit. §. 327* Obs. -with partic. §. 548. 3. p. 829. yiy νωσκω def. V. §. 227. 7 λίχομαι with genit. §. 328. γνώμη omitted §. 281. 2. 701/1/ decl. §. 76 . Ion. decl. §. 84. Obs. 3. Τοργω — οΰ$ §. 83. 4. [2. 7 ραυς, y ραός §. 72. 4. §. 78. Obs. γράφεσθαί τινα §. 492. C. — - τινά τίνος §. 346. γυμνός τίνος §. 329· γυνή, γυναικός §. 72. 12. Obs. 1. acc. γυνην plur. γυναί , γυνάς §. 90 . Obs. Δ. δ pronunciation §. 18. 3. δ and β exch. §. 28. δ — ζ - §. 28. δ — σ - §. 30. δ — τ - §. 28. δ before μ changed into σ §. 37· 4. δ inserted §. 40. δδ for ζ. §. 28. δαεί?, δαείω, ΰαηναι, δαώ §. 228. δαίω §. 228. δακι/ω §. 228. δάκτυλά §. 98. ΰαρθάνω §. 228. δαω §. 228. δ« doubled §. 6θβ. 3. — δε adv. in §. 259· b. δε7 μένος §. ΐ64. ρ. 202. δεδαασ0αι §. 228. δεδαευ §. 228. δεδοί^κα §. 183, 4. §. 228. δεδεΤ-ομαι §. l65. Obs. 4. δεδι/ει §. 228. δεδια §. 229 . δεδιακόυ^κα §. 170 . ρ. 210. δεδίει §. 1.64. Obs. 1. δεδί»;τ» 7 κ« §. 170. ρ. 210. δεδίωσι §. 229 ·~ δεδμ^κα §. 183, 4., δεδμακει §. 164. Obs. I.. ΰεΰράμηκα §. 183, 4. §.251. τρέχω* όεΰραμηκεσαν §. 16*4. Obs. 1. δεδμομα §. 251. τρέχω, ΰεησομαι §. 178. Obs. 3. δει with genit. §. 332. ‘ wants’, §. 332. δε? with acc. and dat. §. 385, 9· with acc. §. 419 , 4. δειδεκτο §. 165. Obs. 3. §. 228. Obs. p. 325. δειδέχαται §. l65. Obs. 3. §. 228. Obs. p. 325. δε/δια, δείδοικ« §. l65. Obs. 3. δε/διΑι §. 219- IV. 3. a. §. 229» δειδυΓαυ §. 229 · δε/δω §. 229· δείω. δείκι/υμι def. ν. §. 228. - with partic. §. 548, 5. ρ. 830. δείκι/υμαι, ΰεικανάομαι §. 228. Obs. δε?ν for δεου §. 49· Obs. δεΓυα, ο, η, το §. 151, 1. δε?σ$αί τίνος , ‘ to need’, §. 330. - 4 to ask’, §. 332. δε/ω §. 229· δεκτό §. 164. ρ. 202. δε’κω §. 228. Obs. Ιέμας. circumlocution §. 450. Ιένΰρος, — εο$ and δένδρου, — ον, §. 88 . ϊέξο §. 164. ρ. 202. δεπα? οίι/ου §. 333. C. δεσμόν plur. δεσμοί §. 98. δεσπόζειυ τιυό? §. 337* 976 INDEX. δεσπόζει v τινά §. 338. b. δεσπότεα , δεσπότεας §.67· Obs. 6. §. 91, ι. δεύτερος §. 134. --— with genit. §. 334. δέχεσθαί τι τίνος, ‘for something’, §. 342. [395, 2. δέχεσθαί τι τινι ‘of somebody’, §. δέω, δησω, δέδεκα §. 183, 5. when it is contracted §. 49· Obs. — δεΤν εν δεσμοΐς §. 401. Obs. 2 . Sew* eVd? δέοντες ε’ίκοσι, undeviginti §. 141. Obs. 1 . — πολλου, SfC. δεω ποιεΐν τι §. 2 96 . ρ. 430. δηεις §. 228. δηλον δε §. 613. V. δηλον οτι §. 613. VI. δηλός είμι §. 296. [831. - with part. §. 548, 5. ρ. δηλόω with part. §. 548, 5. ρ. 830. Αημητηρ decl. §. 77· — δην adverbs in §. 255. 5. Αί §. 73, 1 . διά with genit. and acc. §. 580. διά with gen. differs from a bare da¬ tive §.401. Obs. 1 . §. 402. διαγίγνομαι with partic. §. 552, 1. διάγω with part. §. 552, 1. διαδέχεσθαί τινι §. 398. Obs. διάδοχος τίνος and τινι §. 398. διαιρεΤν τι εξ μοίρας §. 413. Obs. 4. διαλιπων χρόνον §. 557· διανέμειν τι εξ μοίρας §. 413. Obs. 4. διαπρεπειν with genit. §. 370. a. διαπρεπής - ‘ amongst’, §. 370; b. διατελέω with partic. §. 552. 1 . διαφέρειν τινός §. 336. διαφθαρεεται §. 173. ρ. 215. διαφθέρσει §. 173. ρ. 214. διάφορος with genit. §. 344. διαφρεΐν §. 253. φέρω. ρ. 367* διδάκκη Lacon. §. 30. διδασκησαι §. 178 . Obs. 3. διδάσκειν with double acc. §. 412. 6. - τινά σοφόν §. 414. 3. διδάσκειν and — εσθαι differ. §. 492. c . διδάσκω Jut. διδάξω §. 171· Obs. διδράσκω def. V. §. 229· δίδωθι §.210. 3. διδιόν for διδόναι §. 196 . §. 207 . 11. διδωσω §. 210. 3. διέτμάγον —ην §. 251. διέχειν τινός §. 331. c. Obs. δικάζειν τινός §. 346. δίκαιός είμι §. 296. διπλάσιος with genit. §. 334. δίφρος plur. δίφρα §. 98 . διψρι/ §. 22. §. 46. Obs. 1. §. 194. ‘§.22 9· [I- δίωκειν τινά τίνος §. 346. δοιοί, δνοί §. 138. δοκέω def. ν. §. 229 * δόρυ Ion. decl. §. 84. 3. δορυφορεΤν τινα §. 407· 2. Sou from δίδωμι §. 208. Obs. 1 . δραμέονται , δραμουμαι §. 251. τρέ- δράττεσθαι τίνος §. 365. [χ ω * δρομευς , δρομέος §. 82. Obs. I, 4. δρυμό §. 98. BueiV §. 138. δύναμαι §. 229 · δυ'νρ §. 229· Obs. δυνω, δυω , §. 229 · SJo §. 138. θάτερον §. 427· c. §. 613. VI. δι/σί §. 138. δνσκλβα §. 113. Obs. 1. δυσχεραίνειν τινι §. 403. C. ■ — τι §. 408. δυ\]/ας §. 229· δι/ω. δυω not Attic §. 138. INDEX. 977 δώ for δώμα §. 33» δω» 7 , Βωρσι §. 207· 9· δώμα omitted §. 379· Βώσφ §. 203. 5. δώσι §. 207· 9· Ε. e inserted by the Ionics §. 52. 2. e and a exch. §.21. 1. c for et §. 26 . € and η exch. §. 23. e for η in conj. §. 195. p· 256. e and i exch. §. 24. e — o — §. 24. ea, eas imperf. from είμί §. 211. Obs. 4. — ea for —tjv §. 91· 1* — ea contr. in a §.113. Obs. 1. — ea Ion. acc. of adj. in —vs §. 119* Obs. 1. _ ea old termination of the plusq. act. §. 184. a. Obs. §. 193- Obs. 4. _ ea termination of the imperf. §. 207. 6. eaya §.221. intrans. §. 494. eaycts §· 221. Obs. 1. έαδα, eaBov §. l6l. 223. άνΒάνω. ea\t]v §. 232. Obs. εα'λωκα, eaKwv §. l6l. 222. άΧίσκο- μαι. Obs. eav with conj. when used §. 523. .__ when the optat. fol¬ lows in the conclusion §. 524. 5» eavBave §. l6l. ea£a §. l6l. §. 221. εάξας part. §. 221. Obs. 1. _ea? acc. pi. from —eve §. 82. 5. -for -—a? §. 91· 1* £ασι §. 212 . Ιασσα §. 212. — εαται, — βατό 3. p. plural, perf. and plusquamp. p. for — ηνται^ — ηντο §. 198. 5. cai /τοΰ, — ης, — ου §. 148. -- for εμαυτου, σεαυτοΰ §. 489· II. 4άφθη §. ΐ6ΐ. £άων §. 118. Obs. 2. έβαστάχθην §. 182. Obs. 3. ΖβΧάστηκ a §. 164. e βουλόμην αν §. 509· α · eyy ^υημένος §. 170 . eyevTo for iyevero §. 227* Obs. eyqyeppevos §. 168 . Obs. 2. eyxaXeTv τινί τι and τίνος §. 347» Obs. 2. eyKaXe ΐν τινι §. 383. 6. eynaai §. 92. 3. εγκρατής τίνος §. 339· #· Εγκράτεια τίνος §. 339* 5» eyXvTTTai §. 164. eyptiyopa §. l68. Obs. 2» eyprjyopovv §. 189* Obs. 4. εγχεΧυς plur. —et? §. 9 1 · P· ey(i>vti §· 145. Obs. 1. βδαοι/, €όάην §. 228. eBei for Be? §. 505. II. Obs. — oportebat ‘it should’ §. 510. cBckto §. l64. p. 202. ΖΒηΙα §. 233. ea -θίω. eBr /Βοκα §. 183. 3. εΒιγκησα §. 170. p. 210. εΒόκησα for εΒοξα §. 229* eBopat fut. §. 180. §· 233. cadit® εΒραθον §. 188. Obs. 4. εΒρακον §. 188. Obs. 4. eBvayepava p. 225» £Βω §. 233. εσθίω. te §. 147. Obs. 2. eeio §. 147· Obs. 2. eepypai §. 248. 978 INDEX. εερμενον §. 173. p. 215. — εεσσι dativ. pi. 3. decl. §. 75. εζεσθαι def. v. §. 230. -with accus. §. 418. 2. ϊζη §. 235. ’ΐζων §. 235. [Obs. — €tj when not contracted §. 49 . — εη Ion. femin. of adj. in — νς §. 2 19· Obs. 1 . εην §. 212. εηος from εύς §. 124. εης for ής §. 1 53. εθεν §. 147. Obs. 1 . a pronunciation §. 16 . a and at exch. §. 27 · €1 — e — §. 26 . €1 — e, η, y exch. §. 27 . et — η exch. §. 23. 25. ci for redupl. Xe, με §. 165. Obs. 2 . — 61 2 . pi. for rj §. 197 . Obs. 1 . — εί adv. in §. 256. d. ci conj. with indie. §. 508. -with indie, pres, or fut. if in the conclusion there follows a pres, or fut. §. 523. Obs. ci conj. with indie, if in the conclu¬ sion an optat. follows. §. 524. 1 . 2. ci conj. utinam §.513. 1 . -with opt. for the imperf. §. 514. 2. 4. ■- as a particle of time, with opt. §. 521. p. 775. §. 525. 6 . ci conj. with opt. §. 523. 2 . --- if the indie, fol¬ lows in conclusion §. 524. 3 . ci conj. with optat. if a conj. follows in conclusion §. 524. 4. ci conj. with optat. and av §. 525. 7 . a. et conj. with conj. §. 525. 7 . b, -—- * although' §.524. 1 . ci conj. « whether’ ellipt. §. 52 6. - after θαυμάζω , &C. §. 60S. e'i τις άλλο?, el που άλλοθι §. 6 θ 8 . 4 . — 6 ΐα, — 6 ΐα?, —616 opt. for —αι- μι §. 193. Obs. 6. εαται, ε'ιαται, ε'ι'ατο §. 235. ημαι. εϊατο from είμί §.211. ρ. 291 · 6?δα §. 230. ρ. 330. εϊΖεναι, eld ως with genit. §. 322. 324. - with partic. §. 549. 2. 6Ϊδω (only in the aor. 2. 6?δοι/) ‘ I see* §. 230. 6?δω ‘ I know’, def. v. §. 230. 2. ε'ίησαν §. 211. Obs. 3. εΊθε, utinam , with opt. §.513. 1. -indie. §. 511. Obs. 2. ei#’ ωφελον §. 511. Obs. 3. — ειθηυ — εΥμην from ιημι §. 209 . 1. εΊκα §. 231. είκειν τόπου and εκ τ. §.331. c. Obs. εικότως with dativ. §. 386. 4. εικω, ■— ονς §. 83. 4. ε’ίκω §.231* ειλάμην §. 188. Obs. 7· ειληλουθμεν §. 195. 5. ε’ίληφα §. l65. Obs. 2. ε’ίλη-χα §. ]65. Obs. 2. ε’ίλο-χα §. 183. 3. ε’ιμαρμαι §. l65. Obs. 2. — εΤμεν, — e?re, — εΐεν for — 6117- μεν §. 198. 7· είμί with part. §. 559- c. - conj. §. 211. εΐμεν, eJev opt. from είμί §. 211. Obs. 3. εΐμεν §. 212. εΐμεν §. 212. είμί omitted §. 305. είμι conj. §. 213. -as futur. §. 504. 3. — etv 3. p. plusq. §. 193. Obs, 4, INDEX. 979 είναι abundant §. 282. p. 409. — τινι Bi ε-χθρας §. 580. e. — with genit. §. 355. - 4 to belong’ §.371· 1. ■- natum esse §. 375. — ετών τριάκοντα. §. 372. Obs. 2. — with dativ. partic. εστι μοι βου - λ ομενω §. 391· 0 . [h· — with dativ. for 4 to have’ §. 392. — abund. with αίρέΐν , καλεΐν , ττοιεΐν , SfC. §. 414. 1. a. — absol. εκων είναι §. 548. είναι from ίημι p. 283. είζα for εοικα §. 189. Obs. 5. §. 231. Obs. είοικυΐαι §. l6l. Obs. εΐπα §. 188. Obs. 7· είττεΐν §. 231. ειπεΤν τινά for τινί §. 410. 2. a. Obs. ε’ίττερ τ is άλλος §. 608. 4. — ellipt. §. 608. 4. b. είρ^εσθα! τίνος §.331. b. ειρεθη §. 231. p. 333. ε'ίρηκα §. 219· IV". 3. b. §. 231. ρ. 333. είρωτα §. ΐ67· 4. “ ε'ίρια §. 231. ρ· 333. εΊς — ο δε §. 288./. ρ. 419· εις with dativ. §. 386. 1. - superl. §. 461. εις prep, constr. §. 578. εις τετρακισ'χιλίους εστασαν §. 297· — for εν §. 596. — εις τούτο άνοίας §. 353. είσα, είσάμην, είσάμενος §. 234. εω. εϊσάμην from εϊμι §. 213. ρ. 297· — _ e’ /δω §. 230. 1. είσβα §. 225. Obs. εισερ'χεσθαί τινι §. 394. C. εισθα from ειμι §.214. Obs. 1. εισιεναι τινί and τινά §. 394. C, §. 425. εΊσομαι from εΊμι §. 213. ρ. 297* -τ- ο/δα §. 213. Not. §. 230. 2. είσομαι §. 234. εω. είσφρεΐν , εισφρες §. 253. ρ. 367· φερια. εΐτα after partic. §. 566. 3. είτε — είτε, είτε — fj, fyc. §. 6θ8. 5. §. 609- ε’ίωθα §. 189· Obs. 3. εκ constr. §. 574. for εν §. 596. έκάην §. 239· εκάθευΒον and καθηνΒον §. 170. εκαθημην and καθημην §. 170 . έκαστος with plur. of verb §. 301. ρ. 419. - as an apposition §. 301. Obs. §. 358. εκβαίνειν τι §. 377· Obs. 1. εκγεγα’οι/ται §. 227· εκηί^νεσθαί τινι §. 377· Obs. 1. ε’κδυσαζ τινα τι §.412. 7· εκείνο announces a whole proposition §. 467 . cl. Obs. εκηα §. 239· εκλαγον §. 174. C. Ικοίλαναν §. 182. εκΊτλεΐν τι §. 377· Obs. 1. εκττοΒων with genit. and dative §.382. εκστηναί τινα §. 382. έκτα, εκταν §. 240. κτείνω . εκτημαι and κεκτημαί §. 163. 3. εκφευγειν with genit. §. 331. b. εκφρεΐν §. 253. φέρω ρ. 367· εκων είναι §. 548. ελάσσων §. 131. Obs. Έλατζοι/ίδ^ς §. 100 . Obs. 2 . ελαύνω §. 232. ελε^'χειν τινά τι §.413. Obs. 2. ελεεΐν τινα §. 408. ελειπτο §. 164. ρ. 202. 980 INDEX- ευθερός τίνος §. 329· ελευθερουν τινά τίνος §. 331. b. - €K, aVo τίνος §. 331. b. ελειίθω §. 233. έρχομαι. [Obs. εληλάΰατο §. 198. 5. εληκακα §. l68. Obs. 2. εληλυθα §. 1(?8. Obs. 2. ελθων §. 557· Obs. ελίσσω, ελελιττω §. 29· βλ λείπεσθαι with partic. §. 554. ελόευν, ελουεον §. 241. ελπίζειν τινί §. 403. c. ελσας §. 173. ρ. 215. §. 232. Obs. ελω obsol. V. §. 221. αίρεω. ελω, ελλω §. 232. Obs. εμακον §. 242. μηκαομαι. εμάρανε. ρ. 225. εμαυτου, — ης, — ου §. 148. εμβραμενη §. 40. IV. e/x6 αυτόν §. 148. Obs. 1. εμεθεν §. 145. Obs. 2. εμεν for εσμεν §. 212. εμεναι, εμμεναι §. 212. — εμεναι, — βμβν for — ειν §. 192. C. §. 196. b. εμεο, e^e?o ejueu §. 145. Obs. 2· εμεωϋτου §. 148. Obs. 2. εμίν §. 145. Obs. 3. εμίνη §. 145. Obs. 1. εμμορε §. l65. Obs. 3. εμπετες §. 245. πετώ. εμπο^ί^ειν τινι and τινά §. 382. Obs. — εν inf. for —ειν §. 27· §· 196. 8. — εν for ησαν §. 199· 5. — €ΐ/ for €σαι/ ρ. ρΐ. §. 207· 7· eV prep, constr. §. 577· ei/ τοΓ? μάλιστα §. 289· — abund. with δίδοναι §. 382. 4. •- «V όφθαλμοΐς opy. ν §. 401. Obs. 2. εν ‘in respect of’ §. 404. εν τταντ \ κακού §. 442. 3. ενάντιος with genit. §. 344. Obs. 2. ενασσάμην §. 242. ναίω. ενΰοΐ §. 258. ρ. 36ο. ενεγκεΐν §. 253. φέρω. ενεκα with genit. §. 576. - omitted §. 539* Obs. 1. ενηνειγμαι §. 253. φέρω, ενηνοθα §. 168. Obs. 2. §. 232. ενηνοχα §. 171· Obs. §. 183. 3. ενθαυτα Ιοη. §. 36. Obs. 3. ενθυμείσθαι τίνος and τι §. 327· e νίπτειν §. 231. Obs. ρ. 334. ενίσπω , ενισπέίν, ενισπησω, ενί'ψω §.231. Obs. εννάσσονται §. 342. ναίω. εννυμι §. 232. ενοχλεΐν τινί and τινα §. 382. Obs. ένοχός τινι and τίνος §. 347* Obs. 4. ενταύθα γης §. 357· εντες, εντεσσι for όντες, ουσι §. 212. εντί §.212. | — εντι Dor. for — είσι §. 191· Obs. §. 194. 3. εντυγχάνειν τινί §. 363. Obs. . .. and τινός §. 382. Obs. εξαμαρτάνειν with part* §. 554. εξεκλησίασαν §. 170· εξεπλωμεν §. 247* εξερχεσθαί τι §. 377· Obs. 1. εξεύχω Dor. §. 29· εξεχα Dor. §. 29· εξηγείσθαι with acc. §. 338. b. έξης with dat. §. 398. εξι'στασθαι οδού §. 331. Obs. εξοΐ §. 258. ρ. 375. εξοχα with genit. §. 370. c. -- super!. §. 461. — eo — € ου contr . in ευ Ion. Dor. §. 49- ' j — εο — εου when not contracted §. 49. Obs. INDEX. 981 to for ού §. 147. Obs. 1. c'm §. 147. Obs. 2. εοιγμε v §. 195. 5. eoiKct with dot. part. §. 550. Obs* 4. εοικαίς and είκως §. 231. εοιμι for είην §. 212. εοΊσα §. 212 . εόλημαι §. 232. Obs. — εομαι Ion. for — άομαι §. 21. 1. €θ v p. 294. εόρ<γεε §. l6l. •cos for εμάς, σάς §. 489- 1» εους for ον §. 147· Obs. 1. £TTCLlV6lV τινι §· 386. Obs. 67 ταιρεσθαι τινι and επί νινί §. 403. 4παρωνησεν §. 170. επαΰρεσθαι τίνος §. 361. 67 Γ 6 ί with indie, and opt. §. 521. with conj. §. 521. Obs. 1. επείγεσθαι τίνος §. 316. §. 328. επειΰάν with conj. §. 521. with opt. §. 521. Obs. 1. fTrcihf] with indie, and opt. §. 521. with conj. §. 521. Obs. 1. επεξιέναι τινι τίνος §. 346. επεπιθμεν §. 195· 5. επεπλωμεν §. 247· Ιπερχεσθαί τινι and τινα §. 394. α. and Obs. 67 τεσα §. 188. Obs. 7· [398. επεσθαί τινι, συν τινι , μετά τίνος §. επηΐσαν, €7 τηισε from €7rcu7 φα §. 53. κηω §. 239· 988 INDEX. κιθών §. 33. §. 36. Obs. ο. κίρνη §. 239· ρ· 34>6. κιχάνω §. 239· κίχρημι §. 239· κλαδί §. 92 - 2. κλά'ζω §. 239· κλαιησω §. 178. Obs. 2. κλαυσονμαι §. 180. — κλίητ, — κλί?·? declin. §. 79· Obs. κληρονομείν τίνος §. 364. [6. — κλος nouns in, gen. — κλου and — κληος §. 92 . 1 . κνησθαι §. 194. 1. κνισθηναί τίνος §. 328. κ οίνος επί §. 385. 10. κοινωνεΐν τίνος §.359. 1. - ε’ίς τι §. 359- Obs. 2. κοΐος §. 30. κοιρανεΤν τίνος §. 337· κολακεΰειν τινά §. 407· 3. κόπτεσθαί τινα §. 419» 5. κορεννυμι def. V. §. 239* κορεσασθαί τίνος §. 330. κόρη §. 67. Obs. 1. Not. κότε §. 30. κράζω §. 239· κρατεΊν τινι §. 338. α. - τινα §. 338. b. κρείσσων §. 131, Obs. κρεμαμαι §. 240. κρεμάννυμι §. 240. κρημνη §. 240. [2· Κρονίωνος and — ίονος §. 71· Obs. κρύπτειν τινά τι §. 412. 8. κτάμεναι , κτάμεν 1 κταμενος , κτας §. 240. κτείνω §. 240. κτείνωμι §. 207. 10. κτήμα in the predicate §. 437· 4. κνκεω §. 73. 2. Obs. κύκλος plur. κνκλα §. 98. κυλίνδω §. 240. κνναγός §. 22. κυνεω §. 240. Κύπριος §. 72· Obs. 1. κνρω with part. §. 553. 4. - gen. §. 363. - dat. and acc. §. 363. Obs. κνριεύειν with genit. §. 337· κύρσω §. 173. p. 215. χωλι/ειν τινά τι §. 413. κως §. 30. A. λάας §. 84. Obs. 4. λαβεΐν τινα κόμης §. 366. λαβών §. 557- Obs. λαγός, λαγαίς, λαγωός §. 88. λαγχάνειν τινός and τι §. 363. and Obs. λαγ·χάνω def. ν. §. 241. λαγχω §. 217· 1» Χαμβάνειν Ζι οίκτον §. 580. C. λαμβάνεσθαί τίνος §. 365. λαμβάνω del. ν. §. 241. λάμβω §. 217· 1 * λάμπειν with acc. §. 417» λανθάνειν with accus. §.418. 1. _--- partic. §. 552. 2. λανθάνεσθαι with genit. §. 325. -part. §. 548. 6. p. 831. λανθάνω def. v. §. 241.. λάρνγος p. 81. [3· λατρεύειν τινί and τινα §. 381. Obs. λέγω with double acc. §. 410. 2. b . eu, κακώς τινα §. 409· §.410.2. omitted §.427· a - λεγουσ/, ‘ people say* §. 293. ό λεγόμενος §. 556. 3. λειτονργεΐν for λρτ. §. 15, 27· λελαβεσθαι §, l65. Obs. 4. INDEX. λελάβηκα §. 241. λελάθω §. 241. λελαμμαι §. 241. λελασθαι §. 241. λελάχω §. l65. Obs. 4. §. 241. λελο^χα §. 183. 3. ρ. 228. §. 241. λεω$ §.21. 1. λη<γειν τινός §. 331. d. λίσσομαι fut. λίσομαι §. 175. b. --- with genit. §. 350. λιταί τίνος, per §. 350. λιτί. λΐτα §. 92 . 2. λίτρου §. 29 . λοιίορε'ΐν τινα and λοιΰορεΐσθαί τινι §. 383. 6'. Obs. 2. λούω def. V. §. 241. λυειν τινά τίνος, and εκ, από τίνος §. 331. b. and Obs. - τι αποίνων, ί for money §. 342. _ with acc. * to be profitable' §. 406. 4. λυμαίνεσθαί τινι and τινα §. 384. §. 409· 1· α · λύχνος plur. λυχνα §. 98. λωβάσθαί τινι §. 384. λωίων, λιαστός §. 134. Μ. μ inserted §. 40. μα for μάτερ §. 33. ' μά τόν §. 281. 2. μακών §. 242. μάλλον —- ή. μ. — άλλα §. 455. Obs. 1. b. .. —— η ον §. 455. Obs. 1. d. μάλλον with positive for comp. §. 458. μανθάνειν i to understand , with part. §. 548. 3. p. 829- μανθάνω def. v. §. 242. μάσσων §. 131. Obs. μάχομαι def. v. §. 242. μεγαθος §.21. 1. Μεγα^οΓ §, 258. ρ. 375. μεγας decl. §. 123. μ eya with super!. §. 46*1. μέζων, μείζων, μεσιτών §. 131. Obs. μεθίεσθαί τίνος §. 367· μειότερος ρ. 169. μειων, μεΐστος §.135. μελει With. genit. and περί §.326. Obs. 2. μελησει §. 178· Obs. 3. μέλλω with infin. §. 502. μελλησω §. 178. Obs. 3. μελομαι, μελω §. 242. μεμακυΤα §. 242. μεμανΤα §. 1 S3- 7· Obs. μεμβλεται §. 242. μελω. μεμβλωκε §.183. 6. μεμενηκα §. 183. 4. μεμετιμενος §· 170. §. 209· 3. μεμίζεται §. l65. Obs. 4. μεμνέωτο, μεμνωτο §. 198· μέμνημαι with part. §. 548. 6. ρ. 831. __— has οτε after it §. 548. Obs. 831. μεμφεσθαί τινα §. 383. Obs. 1. ___—. τινί τι §. 383. 6, μεν —— δε usage §. 6θ6. μεν ΰη, μεν νυν, μεν ουν §. 288. Obs. 3. §. 6θ6. 4. ρ. 936. μεν — τε §. 6θ7· μένος in circumlocutions §. 430. 6. μεσαίτατος §. 127· Obs. 2. μέσος , μέσου ν with genit. §. 331. c. Obs. μεσσατος §. 134. Obs. μεστός with genit. §. 329· «· μετά constr. §. 587· -with acc. part, for gen. con - sequ. §. 565. Obs. s s VOL. II. 990 INDEX. μεταύώόναι τινός and τι §. 360. 2. and Obs; μεταιτεΐν τίνος §. 360. μεταξύ with part. §. 556. 6. μετεστι with genit. §, 359· μετεγειν τινός and τι §. 359· and Obs. 2. - μέρος §. 359· Obs. 1. μεχρις ού §. 480. -- with opt. and conj. §. 522. μη with imper. pres, but conj. aor, §. 511. 3. §. 516. 2. — ‘that' with conjunctive, after the verbs ‘to fear’ §. 519. Obs. 1. p. 772. §. 533. Obs. 2. — with the indicat. §. 520. Obs. 5. — with future §. 520. Obs. 4. — with infin. after negative verbs §. 533. Obs. 3. — ‘ whether’ §. 517. μη and ου interch. §. 6*00. 1. μη ού with conj. §. 516. Obs. 2. §. 601. μη σύ ye §. 465. 2. μηΰε eh §. 137* μηΰε — μήτε §. 6θ2. μηίεν in the predic. with subst. masc. and fem. gen. §. 437. Obs. 1. μηθείς §. 137. μηκάομαι §. 242. μηνιος §. 72. Obs. 1. μήτε — μηΖέ §. 6θ2. μητι §. 73. 1. μίγνυμι §. 242. μιγνυσθαι φιλότητί τίνος §. 399· C. μιμνησκω §. 242. μιυ §. 146. with the word itself to which it refers §. 472. 13. Μ/νω gen. and acc. §. 70. Obs. 3. §. 91· pp. 108. 79. μισθού ‘for hire’ §. 342. μνάσθαί τίνος and περί τίνος §. 325. with accus. §. 325. Obs. μνημονεύειν with accus. §. 325. Obs. μονούσθαι εκ §. 331. b. Obs. μονωτατος §. 133. Obs. 3. Μ ουνυγία'ζε §. 259· b* Μουνυχΐασι §.257. «- μουσίΰύε v §. 29 · μυκάομαι §. 242. μύ-χατος §. 134. Obs. μωα §. 30. N. v changed before the labials, guttur. Src. §. 37. v εφελκυστ. §. 42. νάς §. 78. Obs. ναίω §. 242. ναύς dec!'. §. 78. νεμησω p. 221. νενεμηκα §. 183. 4. νευσούμαι §. 180. νεφεληγερετα §. 113. Obs. 4. νεω flit . νεύσω §. 176. C. νησάων §. 69. Obs. 4. νηύν §. 78. Obs. 1. νίζω §. 242. νικάν μάγην , ’Ολύμπι α, πάλην §. 417. Obs. 2. νιν §. 146. νοσφίζειν τινός §.331. a . νους, νού and νοός §.91- 2· ρους adj. compounded with §. 108. Obs. 1. [1. — νους adject, compar. §. 128. Obs. — ντι Dor. for — σι §. 507. 5. §. 191. Obs. §. 194. 3. vvv te §. 608. p. 940. ξ and σσ interch. §.31. f for σσ in the fut. §. 178. Obs. 1. INDEX. ξηράν)ι p. 225. ξνμβαθρ, ξυμβεβάσθαι §. 225. ξυμβλητην §. 226. ξυνιον §. 207· 6. —-£ω Dor. term, of the fut. §. 178. Obs. 1. O. o and a interch. §. 22. o — e - §. 24. o for ο», ου §. 26. o and υ interch. §. 25. o — vi §. 25. o for ω in the conj. §. 195. p. 258. d, tj, to with partic. in an indefinite signification §. 2 65. p. 389· 6 βουλόμενος §. 2 6 $. Obs. d τυχών §. 269· Obs. o /xev — d $€ §. 288. --— with the noun in the same case, instead of in the gen. §. 288. Obs. 2. o, quare §.477· .- attinet ad id, quod §. 478. 'L οντε — μήτε k 9t J οντε — τε ου'το9 decl. §. 150. 2. - with και, et is, 4 and indeed’, §. 471. 7. ου’τοσί §. 150. 2. Obs. 2. 994 INDEX. ουτω in wishes, protestations §.513. Obs. 4. ουτω ΰη in the conclusion §. 565. 1. οΰφαρ §. 29 . [2. ουχ ήκιστα §. 463. όφρα with opt, and conj. §.518. 1. οχα with superl. §. 46l. οχος dat. υ-χω and όχει §. 91 * 2. o\jse τής ημέρας §. 357. όφ-ομαι §. 244. όράω. Π. π and κ exch. §. 30. ττ for φ §. 32. •π- before μ changed into μ §.37. 4. 7ταα §. 30. τταΉες in circumloc. §. 430. παιΰεύειν τινα σοφόν §. 414. 3. τταίδδωαι/ §. 30. παιήσω §. 178. Obs. 2. τταΐν ρ. 87. Ίτάίς §.27· παίσω §. 174. 5. παλαίτερος §. 127. Obs. 1. 7 τάντες and ο/ πάντες §. 268 . πάρ §. 44. Obs. 2. παρά constr. §. 588. with accus. after compar. §. 455. Obs. I. a. παραβαθή, παραβεβάσθσι §. 225. παρεΐσαν §. 206 . II. 3. παρηνόμησαν §. 170» Obs. Παρζο9 §.72. Obs. 1. 7τα9* πάντα ήν §. 438. πάς in the neuter, when it refers to a masc. or femin. 439. Obs. 2. πασασθαι τίνος §. 330. πάσχω def. v. §. 245. πατήρ declin. §. 77. p. 94 , 3. πανειν , παΰεσθαί τίνος §. 331. d. with partic. §. 549. 8. p. 834. πέΐα §. 30. πείθεσθαί τίνος §. 340. π είθε iv with accus. §. 406. 1. with double acc. §. 413. πεινήν §. 22. §. 46. Obs. 1. §. 194 . Πειραιά, — αιώς §.81. Not . πείρας in circumloc. §. 430. πειρηθήναί τινι §. 399· d. πείσομαι §. 174. §. 245. Πελοπηϊάΰης §. 100. Obs. 1. πενεσθαί τίνος §. 330. πένησσα §. 1 12. 3. Not . πεπαθυίτ] §. 245. πεπιθεΐν, πεπιθων §. 165. Obs. 4. πεπόμφει §. 164. Obs. 1. πεπόνθεσαν §. 164. Obs. 1. πεπόσθαι §. 247· 7πι/ω. πεποσθε §. 245. πάσχω, πεποσχε §. 183. 3. ρ. 228. §. 245. πέπραηα and πεπραχα §. 190 . Obs. §. 494. πεπταμαι §. 245. πεταννυμι. πεπτηως §. 245. πέτω §. 247· πτήσσω. 7 τεπτωκα §. 245. πέτω . π'επωκα §. 247. 7τ/ι/ω. πέπων, πεπαίτερος §. 129 . 5. ττε^ζ· οί περί §. 271. 7rep/ constr. §. 589- τγ< 7 ?ι 0ο/3ω * from fear’ §. 402. Obs. περιβάλλειν τινί §. 394. d. περί'/ί'γνεσθαί τίνος §. 336. -- τινι §. 394. d. περικείμενος κυνήν §. 421. περιορόίν with partic. §. 549. ρ. 832. περιπίπτειν τινί §. 394. d. περιστήναί τινι §. 394. d. περιττός with genit. §. 334. περιφρονεΐν τίνος §. 376. Obs. 3. περρεθήκατο, περρέχειν ρ. 208. πεσεομαι , πεσονμαι §. 180. πεσσυρες §. 22. INDEX. 995 πεσσω §. 30. def. v. §. 245. πετάννυμι §. 245. Πετεωο §. 70. Obs. 1. πετώ §. 245. πέφανται §. 252. φάω. πεφνω §. 252. φάω . πεφυη μένος with genit. §.322. ρ. 460. 7 τεφυυΐα §. 183. 7. Obs. πή·γνυμι §. 246. π η νίκα τής ημέρας §. 357. πήσας §. 245. 7ΓΙ£, 7Γ ΐθΐ §. 247· 7 Γίνω, πίειρα §. 124. πίλνημι §. 246. πιμπλάναι τινός §. 330. πίμπλημι §. 246. πίμπλφσι §. 207. 9· πίμπρημι §. 246. 7τά/ω def. v. §.247. πίομαι §. 1 80. and 247. 7Π7Γ ισκω def. V. §. 247. πιπράσκω def. V. §. 247. πίπτω def. ν. §.245. πίσσω §. 30. πίσυρες §. 22. §. 139· Obs. πίτνα, πιτνάς , 7πτι/αω §. 245. ρ. 357. πίτνω §. 217. 3. Obs. πίων, πιότερος §. 129* 5. πλάζω def. ν. §. 247. Πλαταίασί §. 257. β. ττλεα §. 117. 10. Obs. πλεΐν for πλέον §. 135. ρ. 168. 7τλε<ους and οί τ Γλείους §. 268. πλείων, πλεΐστος §. 135. πλέον εστί, τί πλέον εστ\ν εμοί §. 384. ττ\ε<κ with genit. §. 329. «· πλεύμων §. 29· πλεΰν §. 135. πλευσούμαι §. 180. ττλεω def. ν. §. 247. πλήθειν with genit. §. 329. -- with dative ρ. 471. πλείμην, πλήμην §. 246. πίμπλημι. πλήντο §. 246. πίλνημι and πίμ- πλημι. πλήρης with genit. and dative §. 329. πληρούν τίνος §. 330. [α. πλησιαίτατος §. 127· Obs. 2 . πλούσιος with genit. §. 329. a. πνεΐν τίνος §. 362. πνέω fut* πνεύσω §. Ι76. C. πόθεν δε ου ; §. 6'θ9· ρ. 9^3. ποθεσω §. 176. 5. ποιεΐν εύ ποιεΐν with part. §. 554. καλώς ποιων §. 554. 7 Γ. τί τη /05 ‘ for something' §. 342. with double aecus. §. 409· 1. b. 7Γ. τινα ευ, κακώς §. 409* 7Γ. τί τινι §. 409· Obs. π. τι χαλκού ί of brass' §. 373. 2. ποιεΤσθαι circumloc. ποιείσθαι θαυμά •ft §. 413. Obs. 4. 7 τοΐρ for παΐς §. 22 . πολεμεΐν τινα and πρός τινα §. 399· Obs. 1 . 2 . 7 τολυ 9 , πολλός decl. §. 123. πολύν είναι with partic. §. 554. πολλοί and ο! π. §. 268. π » τ^ς: την πολλήν §. 353. §. 442. 2. 7τολλα κα\ καλά §. 444. 4. πόρρω with genit. §. 331. c. Obs. τΓ . e/Xa^VetJ/ τινός §. 318. Ποσειδω §. 73. 2 . Obs. πότερον — ή §. 6θ9· 996 INDEX. 7Γ ΟΤί §.31. πότνια with genit. §. 339· 7TOV γίί? §. 357· — 7 τους in compounds gen. — που acc. — πουν §. 72. 10. Obs. §. 73. 2. §. 91. 2. §. 118. Obs. 1. πράττεσθαί τινά τι §. 411. 4. πρεπειν with dative and genit. §. 386. 4. Obs. πρέσβα §. 119· Obs. 5. πρεσβεΐαι for πρεσβεία §. 429· πρεσβειρα §. 119· Obs. 5. πρεσβευτής plnr. πρέσβεις §. 88. p. 111. πρίασθαί τι τίνος §. 342. πρίν with indie, optat. and conj. §. 522. πρό blended into one with ε or o fol¬ lowing §. 43. p. 49. πρό constr. §. 573. after compar. §. 450. Obs. 1. πρόβα §. 225. Obs. πρόβασι §. 92. 3. πρόβλημα κακών §. 331. C. Obs. προεχειν τινί and κατα τι §. 404. πρόηται §. 208. Obs. 3. προθέίναί τι τίνος §. 377· πρόθωμαι §. 208. Obs. 3. προίεσθαί τίνος §. 368. προκαλεΐσθαί τινά τι forek, επί, προς τι §. 413. Obs. 4. προνοείν τί τίνος §. 377· πρόοιντο §. 208. Obs. 2. προοραν τί τίνος §. 377· πρός with an accus. with verbs of ‘ exchanging’ §. 343. π ρός with gen. ουκ εστι π ρός σου §. 372. Obs. 1. η πρός after compar. §. 449. π ρός with accus. after compar. §. 455. Obs. 1. a. πρός θεών position of the pron. pers 9 §. 465. 3. πρός constr. §. 590. προσβάλλειν τινί and τινά §. 394. b. §. 425. μόρου §. 362. προσεΰχεσθαί τινι §. 393. προσε-χειν τινί and τινά §. 394. b. προσηϊξαι §. 185. Obs. προσηκει μοί τίνος §. 36θ. προσηκεν for προσηκει §. 505. II. Obs. - opartebat ; ‘ it ought’ §. 510. προσκυνεΐν τινα §. 407· προσοικεΐν τινι and τινα §. 425. πρόστατεΰειν τινός §. 377· πρόσω άνηκειν with genit. §. 318. προσωπατα §. 92. 3. προτεραίτερος §. 136. προτί §. 31. προτίθωμαι §. 208. Obs. 3. προύς §. 22. προφυλάττειν τι τίνος §. 377· πρώτος δ. 134. Obs. τα πρώτα ην §. 438. πτάσθαι, πτάμενος, πτεσθαι, πτο- μενος §. 245. πετομαι. πτησσω def. ν. §. 247. Πυ0ο? §. 258. ρ. 3 75. πυνθάνομαι def. V. §. 247. πυνθάνεσθαι with partic. §. 548. 4. ρ. 830» - with genit. §. 327· Obs. 1. πωλεΐν τί τίνος §. 342. πως άν with opt. utinam §. 513. 1. πως <γάρ ; 7τως ου §. 609· ρ· 943. Ρ. ρ for σ §.31. ραίτερος , ρηίτερος §. 135. ράων §. 135. όεζω def. ν. $. 248. INDEX. 997 Τρυπωμένα. §. l63. 2. ρέω def. v. §. 248. with accus. §. 417. ρηγνυμι def. V. §. 248. ριγών §. 51. Obs. 2. §. 195. ρυπα §.98. ρώννυμι def. v. §. 248. Σ. σ and ? different usage of §. 11. σ and δ exch. §. 30. σ and τ -§. 31. σά μάν for τί μην §. 151. Obs. 2. σαόω, σαόί , σάου ρ. 36ΐ. σάτες §.31. σάω ρρ. 281. 36ΐ. σβέννυμι §. 249. σεαυτου, — ης, —ου §. 148. σέβας circumloe. §. 430. 6. σέθεν §. 145. Obs. 2. σέο, σείο, σευ §. 145. Obs. 2. σεύω def. V. §. 249. σημαίνειν τινός §. 337» - τινι §. 338. α. σημείου δβ §. 6l3. V. σης plui'. σέων, σέας §. S9· σθένος circumloc. §. 430. 6. σί Dor. §.31, — σι added §. 195. 7. - adv. in §. 257. a. Έ,ικελιώτης and Έικελός §. 103. IV. Έ,ικυών , ο and η ρ. 118. σίος §. 29· σΊτος plur. σΐτα §. 98. σκάλλω §. 249- ρ. 363. σκεέάννυμι def. ν. §. 249· σκελέω §. 249. σκέλλω §. 249. ρ. 363. — σκον—σκόμην imperf. §. 172- Obs. 1. §. 207. 1. aorist. 1. §. 182. Obs. 2. VOL. 11. σκώρ, σκα το? §. 72. 12. Obs. 1. σμησαι §. 249· σμηχω §. 249. σόν έργου §. 264. 3. σοννται, σουντο , σοΰσθε , σοΰται §. 249. σόω ρ. 362. σπάέιον §. 32. σταλείς §. 32. σπαν της κόμης §. 366. σπείους §. 79* Obs. 5. σπένέω σττείσω §. 174. σπέο, σποΤμι, σπώ, σπεΐν §. 233. έπομαι. σπεΰέειυ with accusat. §. 417. σπήεσσι, σπηί §. 79. Obs. 5. σπολάς §. 32. σσ and ζ exch. §. 29 . σσ and ξ -§. 31. — σσων compar. for — ίων §. 131. Obs. σταθμός plur. σταθμά §. 98. στελέω §. 173. ρ. 215. στενάχω §. 174. JVof. στέργειν τινί §. 403. C. -- τι §. 403. Obs. 1. στέφανος ποιας §. 375. 2. — στί adv. in §. 256. e. στορένννμι §. 249. στόρνυμι §. 249· στρατηγεΐν τίνος §. 337· . τινι §. 380. στρώννυμι §. 249· συγγνώμών τινός §. 317· συγχωρεΊν τινί τίνος §.331. C. Obs. συλλαβεΤν, συλλαβεσθαι πόνου §. 359. συμφέρων τίνος §. 385. συν constr. §. 577. — omitted §. 400. συνάρασθαι κινέύνου §. 359. Τ Τ 998 INDEX. «τι/νδνο, SyC. §· 141. Obs. if. σννειΒεναι ί'αι/τω §. 54.9. συνεστεον §. 215. 3. συνοκωχοτε §. 183. 3. p. 228. συντριβηναι της κεφαλής §. 316. ρ. 454. συντυγχάνειν τινί and τίνος §. 382; Obs. συρίσσειν , συρίττειν §. 29* σνρισω for συρίζω §. 174. 5. σφ and -φ exch. §.31. σφάλλεσθαί τίνος §. 3ΐ6< ρ. 453. σφε §. 147. Obs. 4. σφί for ol §. 147- Obs. 4. σχ pronunciation §. 18. 7· σ Χ 69 > σ χ ΟΙΪ 1 ν > σχε?ν, σχών, §· 234. σχολαίτερος §. 127· Obs. 1. — σω (— £ω, — \^ώ) Dor. fut. §. 180. σώζω ρ. 362. σώς decl. §. 125. Τ. τ and κ exch. §. 32. τ for σ §.31. τ αγαθού, SfC. §. 56. Obs. τα Ελληνικά §. 26*7· 1. b: τάζω §. 250 . τάω. Ύαλα,ϊονίόης §. 100. Obs. 2. ταλάω §. 250. τα μεν— τα δε §. 288; 5. τάμνειν §. 21. 1. τάνΒρί , τάνΒρός §. 56. Obs. ταννν τάδε, nunc, ipsurn §. 471. 9· ταο'ς ταως and ταών §. 88. Τ άρταρος plur. —ρα §. 98. τα τ^ς οργής §. 285. ταυτα for δια' ταυτα §. 471. 8. ταιίτο, ταύτόν §. 146. τα' φίλτατα §. 292. τα' φίλων §. 284. τάφον , ταφών §. 236. θηττω. τάω §. 250. τε —— τε, τε —* κα/, τέ — μ^δε, τε — η%.6ογ. τεθναθι , τεθναίην , ^C. §. 219 · IV. 3. β. τεθνηζω, τεθνηζομαι §. 236. θνήσκω. τεϊν, τεο , τεοΓο, τεοΰς, SyC. §. 145. Obs. 2. τεκμαίρεσθαί τινι §. 401. τ εκμήριον Βε §. 6l3. V. τελευτών ‘ lastly’ §. 557. τέλος in circumloc. §. 430. τεο, τεοις, for τίνος, τισί §. 151. Obs. 1. τεο, τεοις, τε'ων, for τίνος §. 152. Obs. τεός for σός §. 149. τ ερττεσθαι τίνος §. 330. τ εσσερες §. 21. 1. §. 139· Obs. τετάγω §. 250. τάω. τετελευτηκει §. 164. Obs. 1. τετενζεται §. 165. Obs. 4. τέτευχα §. 251. ρ. 365. τ ετευ-χησθαι §. 251. ρ. 366. τετλαθι , τετλαίην, SyC. §. 219· IV. 3. β. §. 250. τετ ληυΤα §. 183. 7· Obs. τέτμηκα §. 183. 4. τετομα §. 250. τ ετραίνω §. 250. τετρασι §. 139· Obs. τετροφα from τρεττω §. 183. 3. intransit. §. 494. τεττορες §. 22. §. 139· Obs. τετυκομαι §. 251. τετΰ·χηκα §. 251. τεν, τεΰ? §. 145. Obs. 2. for τίνος §. 151. Obs. 1. for τίνος §.152. Obs. INDEX. 999 τη §. 250. τάω. Trj ‘ here, there, that way' §. 290. b. την ταχίστην §. 281. 2. — τι imperat. for — θι §. 36. Obs. — τί adv. §. 256. d. [2. Tt for δια τί; §. 488. 4. τί άλλο η §. 612. III. τι δε; with a second interrogation. §· 609. P- 942. τι 6— exchange of §. 59^· 5. Present for aorist §. 504. I. Comp. §. 507. Pronouns in the neuter put in the accusative with all verbs §. 413. Obs. 3. -forsake their substantives in gender §. 434. 1. b. -in the plur. with a collec¬ tive noun in the sing. §. 434. 2. b. - referred to several subst. §. 441. - interchanged with one another §. 489. Pronoun demonstr. decl. §. 150. -usage §. 46’7. -in the neutr. with the sub¬ stantive in the genit. §. 353. - governed by the sense §. 435. -in the neuter plural with a masc. or femin. sing. §. 439· Comp, also Obs. §. 467· 2. d. -as subject §. 440. 8. -abundant §. 467. 2. §. 468. -instead of a repetition of the relative §. 468. 3. Comp, p. 677- -with the relative contracts two propositions into one §. 469 . ---for adverb ‘ here, there’ §· 470. --— for pronoun pers. §. 471. Pronoun indefin. decl. §. 151. --usage §.·487· -interrog. decl. §. 152. 1012 INDEX II. Pronoun interrog. usage §. 488. - person decl. §. 145. -in the dative, abund. §. 392. -in the dative with the da- ti-ve of a subst. §. 392. h. -in the accus. with the ac- cus. of a subst. §. 413. Obs. 6. -without a verb, in answers §. 465. 2. -position, in the formula 7 rpoc θεών. -doubled §. 465. 4. Pronouns possessive, declin. §. 149· -usage §. 466. • -take the apposition in the genitive §. 466. 1. - put objectively §. 466. 2. -in the neuter for pron. person. §. 466. 3. -- reciprocal declin. §. 154. - reflexive declin. §. 147- -in the gen. after a com par. §. 452. -after a superl. §. 460. Pronoun relative decl. §. 153. * --usage §. 473. - changes the case of the subst. to which it belongs §. 426. Obs. 2. §. 474. c. — -- in the plural after a subst. sing. §. 434. 2. b. -in the neuter after a masc. or femin. §. 439 . p. 637 . Comp. Obs. 1. -in the gender and number of the following subst. §. 440. 7- — -- in the subject §. 440. 8. --takes the adjective §. 443. Pronouns relative with the demonst. contracts two propositions into one §. 469 . -in the case of the forego¬ ing noun §. 473. -takes the noun §. 474. §. 476. - relative determines the case of the foregoing subst. §, 474. c. -to be supplied in another case §. 428. §. 474. Note. -in the singul. after a plural §. 475. -explained by an infinitive, or an entire proposition §. 476 . - for the demonstr. §. 477. - with the imperative §. 477- b. -stands at the beginning of it’s proposition §. 478. --for ώστε and other parti¬ cles §. 479—482. -without a word, to which it is referred §. 482. Q. Quantity p. 952. R. Reduplication §. 163 . -- in the aorist §. 160 . Obs. 4. - with verbs beginning with a vowel §. 168 . Obs. 2. Relatives (adv. adj. pron.) take the whole in the genitive §. 354. 5. ---with the infinitive §. 537. S. Singular for plural § 292. -of the verb after a neuter plur. §. 299. 2 . V '* . Μή'·. *··:;>. BOSTON COLLEGE 01391211 8 η O C ji. Cr i-.. date due ίϊΒΗί; 'vV- ■ 1 'id n \ vcf Ά J MaTTH /AL, AUGUSTUS author CzREEJ^. (kEJmMJ^ E , VoL -^+IL '3_'rsj £ P>' T ' 0/ Y f -ψ* 132995 ^ ■&(St''U --O'* BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY UNIVERSITY HEIGHTS CHESTNUT HILL, MASS. Books may be kept for two weeks and may be renewed for the same period, unless reserved. Two cents a day is charged for each book kept overtime. If you cannot find what you want, ask the Librarian who will be glad to help you. The borrower is responsible for books drawn on his card and for all fines accruing on the same. /